# Create agents
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/ai-studio-agents/create-agents



Box AI Studio is available only for Enterprise Advanced accounts.

The `POST /2.0/ai_agents` endpoint allows you to create a new, custom <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/index">AI agent</Link>.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the `POST /2.0/ai_agents` endpoint.

Make sure you have generated the developer token
to authorize your app. See <Link href="/guides/ai-studio/getting-started-ai-studio">getting started with Box AI</Link>
for details.

<CodeGroup>
  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.aiStudio.createAiAgent({
    name: agentName,
    accessState: 'enabled',
    ask: new AiStudioAgentAsk({ accessState: 'enabled', description: 'desc1' }),
  } satisfies CreateAiAgentInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai_studio.create_ai_agent(
      agent_name,
      "enabled",
      ask=AiStudioAgentAsk(access_state="enabled", description="desc1"),
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.AiStudio.CreateAiAgentAsync(requestBody: new CreateAiAgent(name: agentName, accessState: "enabled") { Ask = new AiStudioAgentAsk(accessState: "enabled", description: "desc1") });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.aiStudio.createAiAgent(requestBody: CreateAiAgent(name: agentName, accessState: "enabled", ask: AiStudioAgentAsk(accessState: "enabled", description: "desc1")))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAiStudio().createAiAgent(new CreateAiAgent.Builder(agentName, "enabled").ask(new AiStudioAgentAsk("enabled", "desc1")).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | Example                                                                   |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **`type`**         | The type of agent used to handle queries.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | `ai_agent`                                                                |
| **`name`**         | The name of the AI Agent.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | `My AI Agent`                                                             |
| **`access_state`** | The state of the AI Agent. Value is one of `enabled` `disabled`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | `enabled`                                                                 |
| `icon_reference`   | The icon reference of the AI Agent. It should have format of the URL `https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/app-assets/aistudio/avatars/<file_name>` , where the possible values of `file_name` are: `logo_boxAi.png`,`logo_stamp.png`, `logo_legal.png`,`logo_finance.png`,`logo_config.png`,`logo_handshake.png` `logo_analytics.png`,`logo_classification.png`. | `https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/app-assets/aistudio/avatars/logo_analytics.svg` |
| `allowed_entities` | List of allowed users or groups.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |                                                                           |
| `ask`              | The AI Agent to be used for ask.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | `ask`                                                                     |
| `extract`          | The AI Agent to be used for extraction.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |                                                                           |
| `text_gen`         | The AI agent used for generating text.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |                                                                           |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete AI agent
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/ai-studio-agents/delete-agents



The `DELETE /2.0/ai_agents/{id}` endpoint allows you to delete a custom AI agent based on its ID.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the `DELETE /2.0/ai_agents/{id}` endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai_agents/12345" \
        -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.aiStudio.deleteAiAgentById(createdAgent.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai_studio.delete_ai_agent_by_id(created_agent.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.AiStudio.DeleteAiAgentByIdAsync(agentId: createdAgent.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.aiStudio.deleteAiAgentById(agentId: createdAgent.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAiStudio().deleteAiAgentById(createdAgent.getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter      | Description                    | Example |
| -------------- | ------------------------------ | ------- |
| **`agent_id`** | The ID of the agent to delete. | `1234`  |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get AI agent by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/ai-studio-agents/get-agent-id



The `GET /2.0/ai_agents/{id}` endpoint allows you to list a specific AI
agent by the `agent_id` parameter.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the `GET /2.0/ai_agents/{id}` endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai_agents/1234567890" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.aiStudio.getAiAgentById(createdAgent.id, {
    queryParams: { fields: ['ask'] } satisfies GetAiAgentByIdQueryParams,
  } satisfies GetAiAgentByIdOptionalsInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai_studio.get_ai_agent_by_id(created_agent.id, fields=["ask"])
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.AiStudio.GetAiAgentByIdAsync(agentId: createdAgent.Id, queryParams: new GetAiAgentByIdQueryParams() { Fields = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {"ask"}) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.aiStudio.getAiAgentById(agentId: createdAgent.id, queryParams: GetAiAgentByIdQueryParams(fields: ["ask"]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAiStudio().getAiAgentById(createdAgent.getId(), new GetAiAgentByIdQueryParams.Builder().fields(Arrays.asList("ask")).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter      | Description                           | Example |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------- | ------- |
| **`agent_id`** | The agent id to get.                  | `1234`  |
| `fields`       | The fields to return in the response. | `ask`   |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get agents
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/ai-studio-agents/get-agents



<Warning>
  Box AI Studio is available only for Enterprise Advanced accounts.
</Warning>

## List all AI agents

The `GET /2.0/ai_agents` endpoint allows you to list all AI agents based on the provided parameters.

### Send a request

To send a request, use the `GET /2.0/ai_agents` endpoint.

Make sure you have generated the developer token
to authorize your app. See <Link href="/guides/ai-studio/getting-started-ai-studio">getting started with Box AI Studio</Link>
for details.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai_agents" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.aiStudio.getAiAgents();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai_studio.get_ai_agents()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.AiStudio.GetAiAgentsAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.aiStudio.getAiAgents()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAiStudio().getAiAgents()
  ```
</CodeGroup>

#### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter             | Description                                                                                                  | Example                                             |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------- |
| `mode`                | The mode to filter the agent configuration to return. Possible values are: `ask`, `text_gen`, and `extract`. | `ask`                                               |
| `fields`              | The fields to return in the response.                                                                        | `ask`                                               |
| `agent_state`         | The state of the agent to return. Value is one of `enabled`,`disabled`.                                      | `enabled`                                           |
| `fields`              | The fields to return in the response. Value is one of `ask`, `text_gen`, `extract`.                          | `ask`                                               |
| `include_box_default` | Whether to include the Box default agents in the response.                                                   | `true`                                              |
| `limit`               | The maximum number of items to return per page.                                                              | `1000`                                              |
| `marker`              | Defines the position marker at which to begin returning results.                                             | `JV9IRGZmieiBasejOG9yDCRNgd2ymoZIbjsxbJMjIs3kioVii` |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AI studio agents
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/ai-studio-agents/index



Box AI Studio is available only for Enterprise Advanced accounts.

Create, list, update, and delete custom AI agents.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Update AI agent
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/ai-studio-agents/update-agents



The `PUT /2.0/ai_agents/{id}` endpoint allows you to update a custom AI agent based on its ID.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the `PUT /2.0/ai_agents/{id}` endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai_agents/1234567890" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.aiStudio.updateAiAgentById(createdAgent.id, {
    name: agentName,
    accessState: 'enabled',
    ask: new AiStudioAgentAsk({ accessState: 'disabled', description: 'desc2' }),
  } satisfies CreateAiAgentInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai_studio.update_ai_agent_by_id(
      created_agent.id,
      agent_name,
      "enabled",
      ask=AiStudioAgentAsk(access_state="disabled", description="desc2"),
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.AiStudio.UpdateAiAgentByIdAsync(agentId: createdAgent.Id, requestBody: new CreateAiAgent(name: agentName, accessState: "enabled") { Ask = new AiStudioAgentAsk(accessState: "disabled", description: "desc2") });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.aiStudio.updateAiAgentById(agentId: createdAgent.id, requestBody: CreateAiAgent(name: agentName, accessState: "enabled", ask: AiStudioAgentAsk(accessState: "disabled", description: "desc2")))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAiStudio().updateAiAgentById(createdAgent.getId(), new CreateAiAgent.Builder(agentName, "enabled").ask(new AiStudioAgentAsk("disabled", "desc2")).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | Example                                                                   |
| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **`type`**         | The type of agent used to handle queries.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | \`\`\`\`                                                                  |
| **`name`**         | The name of the AI Agent.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | My AI Agent                                                               |
| **`access_state`** | The state of the AI Agent. Value is one of `enabled` `disabled`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               | `enabled`                                                                 |
| `icon_reference`   | The icon reference of the AI Agent. It should have format of the URL `https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/app-assets/aistudio/avatars/<file_name>`, where possible values of `file_name` are: `logo_boxAi.png`,`logo_stamp.png`,`logo_legal.png`,`logo_finance.png`,`logo_config.png`,`logo_handshake.png`,`logo_analytics.png`,`logo_classification.png` | `https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/app-assets/aistudio/avatars/logo_analytics.svg` |
| `allowed_entities` | List of allowed users or groups.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |                                                                           |
| `ask`              | The AI Agent to be used for ask.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               | `ask`                                                                     |
| `extract`          | The AI Agent to be used for extraction.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |                                                                           |
| `text_gen`         | The AI agent used for generating text.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |                                                                           |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get started with AI studio
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/getting-started-ai-studio



<Warning>
  Box AI Studio is available only for Enterprise Advanced accounts.
</Warning>

To start creating custom AI agents with AI studio you need a platform
application with enabled Box AI scope and a developer token to
authenticate your calls.

## Create a platform application

First you need to create a platform application you will use to make calls. To
create an application, follow the guide on <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">creating platform apps</Link>.

## Enable Box AI studio

To use Box AI studio, make sure it is enabled by a Box admin in the Admin
Console.
If you are a Box Admin, you will find the necessary information in
[Enabling Box AI Studio and Managing Agents][enable].

To interact with Box AI API, you need the `ai.readwrite` <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scope</Link>
added for your application. Before you add the scope, make sure that the Box
Admin has granted you the access to Box AI API. If you can't see the
**Manage AI** option in your app configuration settings, contact your admin.

To add a scope:

1. Open your application in Developer Console.

2. Go to **Configuration** > **Required Access Scopes** > **Content Actions**

3. Select the **Manage AI** scope. Box Platform will automatically include the scope when making the call. If you are added as an collaborator for a given app, but do not have Box AI API access, you will see the **Manage AI** scope checked and grayed out. This means the app owner has the AI scope enabled but you cannot change this setting.

   <Frame>
     <img alt="box ai scopes" />
   </Frame>

4. Submit your app for <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization or enablement</Link>. If you want to enable Box AI API for an existing application, you must <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval#re-authorization-on-changes">re-authorize</Link> it.

## Generate a developer token

You need a developer token
to authenticate your app when sending requests.

To generate a token:

1. Go to **Developer Console** > **My Platform Apps**.
2. Click the **Options menu** button (…) on the right.
3. Select **Generate Developer Token**. The token will be automatically generated and saved to clipboard.

You can also open your app, go to
**Configuration** > **Developer Token**
and generate the token.

<Note>
  A developer token is only valid for one hour.
</Note>

For additional details, see <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">developer token</Link>.
After you generate the token, you can use it in cURL
or other clients, such as <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman">Postman</Link>, to make
calls.

[enable]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/37228079461267-Enabling-Box-AI-Studio-and-Managing-Agents/#h_01JH9HAMP43YYN6VWM51QCK413

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box AI Studio
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/index



<Warning>
  Box AI Studio is available only for Enterprise Advanced accounts.
</Warning>

[Box AI Studio][ai-studio] allows you to build and manage custom AI agents to
best suit your business needs. For example, you can create an AI agent
that acts as a compliance consultant, answering questions regarding customer
documentation with the FedRAMP Moderate compliance in mind.

## Box AI Studio capabilities

Currently, you can configure Box AI agent to answer user questions or generate
text you can use in your documents.

<Frame>
  <img alt="ai agent capabilities" />
</Frame>

## Supported languages

Box AI studio works in a number of languages including
English, Japanese, French, Spanish, and many more.
However, the underlying models are primarily
trained on English language documents. This means
that prompts in other languages may return answers
of lower quality than in English. Tests have shown
satisfactory results for summarizing, checking grammar
and spelling, and answering questions, but bear in mind
that the results may be different than in English.

<Tip>
  Switch the language to Japanese to get
  better results for this language.
</Tip>

[ai-studio]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/37228079461267-Enabling-Box-AI-Studio-and-Managing-Agents

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Applications
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/index



Box Developer Console allows you to create applications
you can then use to integrate with Box.
**My Platform Apps** view displays a list of already created applications
and gives you quick access to their configuration details.
This way, you don't need to open
the app each time you want to generate
a Developer Token, copy the Client ID, or generate a report.

## Features

**My Platform Apps** page allows you to:

* Search through the list of already created apps.
* Filter the apps by **Enablement Status** and **Authentication Type**.
* Create <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/select">a new app</Link>.
* Copy the app's <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client ID</Link>.
* Rename the app and access its details with one click.
* Check application <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval#user-authentication-apps">enablement</Link> and <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization</Link> status. Apps published to Integrations display status from Integrations.

The **Options menu** available for every entry allows you to:

* Access the configuration details of your application.
* Generate a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">Developer Token</Link>.
* Add collaborators to your application.
* Run the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/app-diagnostics-report">Platform App Diagnostics Report</Link>.

## Platform App Insights

Admins and co-admins can access the Platform Insights
dashboard that provides a comprehensive
view of the organization’s platform usage.
This includes app-related data, such as:

* The total number of API calls per application.
* A list of top applications within the enterprise.
* A list of pending application approvals.
* A list of applications awaiting enablement.

See [Platform Insights][insights] for details.

<Note>
  You need the following permissions to access
  and view Platform Insights:

  * View settings and apps for your company
  * Edit settings and apps for your company
  * Run new reports and access existing reports
</Note>

[insights]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles20738406915219-Platform-Insights


# Integrations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/integrations/index



[Box Integrations][app-center] is the first place for Box users to find out
about applications they can use in combination with Box. If your
application can be used by other enterprises, listing your service in
under **Integrations** can be a great way to find new users.
Integrations group apps into sections so that you can
quickly find featured, most popular, or recently added apps.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Integrations" />
</Frame>

## Developing a platform app or becoming a Box Partner

If you need more information on developing a platform app for the Box Integrations or becoming a Box Partner, visit our [Box Partner Resources][bp] guides on our community site.

## Publishing a platform app

Use the following steps to publish a platform app in Box Integrations.

### Prerequisites

Your application must meet the following requirements:

* The platform app is in a finished state and ready for production usage.
* The platform app leverages OAuth 2.0 authentication, as Integrations do not support any other authentication methods.
* You are a developer with access to the platform app in the **Developer Console**.

### Steps

1. Navigate to the Developer Console > **My Platform Apps** and select the app you want to publish.

2. Select the **Publishing** tab from the top menu.

   <Frame>
     <img alt="Publishing tab for an application" />
   </Frame>

3. Read through the submission checklist and check the confirmation checkbox if your app meets all the requirements.

4. Fill in the form by providing:

   * the categories your app falls under
   * a short and a long description
   * screenshots and an app icon
   * supplementary information that will be used to support the users

5. Use the **Preview** button in the top right corner to see how your application will look when listed.

6. Finally, submit the application for approval by clicking the **Submit for Approval** button. Once a request for approval is received, the Box Partner team will be notified and review your request as soon as possible. For any questions, email [`integrate@box.com`][email].

## Unpublishing a platform app

Once approved and published, a platform app can be unpublished from the same
control panel:

1. Navigate to the **Developer Console** and select your platform app.
2. Select the **Publishing** tab.
3. You can now unpublish the app.

[app-center]: https://app.box.com/services

[email]: mailto:integrate@box.com

[bp]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/21356597387539-Box-Partner-Programs

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create a Platform App
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/platform-apps/create



A Platform App allows for interaction with our 150+ endpoints.
For example, downloading/uploading, searching, applying metadata and more.

## Prerequisites

Access to the [Developer Console][dev-console].

## Create a Platform App

1. Navigate to the [Developer Console][dev-console].
2. Select **Create Platform App**.
3. Provide a name for your app.
4. Select the authentication method you want to use.
5. Click **Create App**.

## Configure application settings

After you create a Platform App, the settings screen is displayed.

### General settings

* **App Name** - the name you set up during the app creation, you can change it here if needed.
* **App Description** - provide a description for your app (optional).
* **Contact Email** - this is set to the developer of the application by default.
  Keep in mind that once you publish your app, this email is publicly visible to Box users
  who view your app in the <Link href="/guides/applications/integrations">Integrations</Link>. We recommend to change it to a
  support email address, so that users can reach out to support in case of any issues with
  the integration.

### Configuration

* **Purpose** - select the purpose of your app from the drop-down list.
  Depending on the option you choose, you might need to specify further details.

| Purpose                           | Details                                                                                                                                  |
| --------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Automation**, **Custom Portal** | Specify if the app is built by a customer or partner.                                                                                    |
| **Integration**                   | Specify the integration category, external system name if you're integrating with one, and if the app is built by a customer or partner. |
| *Other*                           | Specify the app purpose and if it is built by a customer or partner.                                                                     |

* **Authentication Method** - choose how your app will authenticate to the Box APIs.

Depending on the authentication method you choose, you need to specify further details.

| Authentication Method        | Details                                                                              |
| ---------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **OAuth 2.0**                | Specify the client ID and client secret.                                             |
| **JWT**                      | Add a public key or generate a public/private key pair. Choose the app access level. |
| **Client Credentials Grant** | Specify the client ID and client secret. Choose the app access level.                |

* **Developer Token** - a developer token is created automatically when you create a Platform App.
* **Application Scopes** - choose the scopes you want to grant to your app. See the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes guide</Link> for detailed information on each option.
* **Advanced Features** - enable the advanced features your application requires.
* **CORS Domains** - add the domains you want to allow requests from.

[dev-console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Platform App
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/platform-apps/index



Platform App typically presents Box functionality to a user through a
custom interface. Box offers pre-built, customizable user interface components,
known as <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements">UI Elements</Link>, for functionalities like browsing, searching, and
previewing content.

## Authentication methods

Platform Apps support <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link>, <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link>, and
<Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link> authentication methods.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn more about authentication methods" />

## When to use

Use a Platform App when you want to:

* Use <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link>, <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link> or <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link> for authentication.
* Upload and download files
* Access both your own files and files owned by <Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users/">managed or external users</Link>.
* List the application in the Box Integrations
* Provide integration into the Box Web App

## Use cases

Example use cases include:

* A file vault in an application that allows an end user to access files that have been shared with them, while also providing access for employees to the same files through the Box Web app.

  An example of this is financial advisor sharing statements and investment
  prospectuses with investors that can be viewed and commented on within a
  platform application.

* A file upload feature in an application that allows an end user to submit and upload files from within a custom-built application to Box. These uploads then initiate a business process with the Box Web app.

  An example of this is a candidate submitting a PDF of a resume to a
  recruiting portal then can then be routed to an appropriate employee for
  review.

## Approval

Platform Apps may require approval before use.

<Card href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval" title="Learn how to approve Platform Apps" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Web App Integration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/web-app-integrations/configure



This guide explains how to set up a Web App Integration with a Platform App.

<Warning>
  Server-side integration is no longer supported.
  This means the applications using server-side actions will still be working,
  but you won't be able to modify the server-side configuration options such as
  Preliminary Callback URL or Basic Authentication.
  You will be able to deactivate them and change the implementation to a new one.
</Warning>

## Create an OAuth 2.0 Application

Navigate to the [Developer Console][devconsole] and create a <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">Platform App</Link>
that leverages <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup">OAuth 2.0 authentication</Link>.

## Create a New Integration

Then, navigate to the **Integrations** tab and click
**Create a Web App Integration**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Integration Tab" />
</Frame>

## Configure Integration

To configure the integration, follow the guidance below for each value.

### App Info

| Field                                                                                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Integration name                                                                        | The name of your integration, which users see in the Box Web App when they select the **More Options** > **Integrations** menu on a file or folder.                                                                                                                |
| Description                                                                             | The description of the integration displayed in the Box Integrations.                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Supported file extensions                                                               | The integration will only appear as an option in the **More Options** > **Integrations** menu for the selected file extensions.                                                                                                                                    |
| Permissions requirement                                                                 | Determines what permissions level users need to see the integration. **Download permissions are required** allows users to download the file - they will not be able to update it. **Full permissions are required** allows users to download and update the file. |
| Integration scopes                                                                      | Specifies the scope of your integration - either the file/folder from which integration is invoked, or its parent folder.                                                                                                                                          |
| Display on shared pages toggle                                                          | Determines if an integration can be shown to external users on a shared page. If enabled, users who are not collaborating on the content will see the integration in the context-menu when accessing the items through a shared link.                              |
| Lock to only allow the current user to overwrite the file using your integration toggle | Determines if different web app integrations can edit the file at the same time.                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Integration type                                                                        | Select desired integration type. Available options are: **Files**, **Folders**, **Both**.                                                                                                                                                                          |

### Callback Configuration

| Field               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Client Callback URL | Handles additional callback requests from Box after the primary request with <Link href="/guides/applications/web-app-integrations/types">Popup Integrations</Link>. If the application specifies a file parameter in the REST method, the preliminary callback URL cannot originate from the client. As a result, a second request must be made from the client to your server so the server can send the necessary interface to the user. |
| Prompt Message      | Specifies the message that users see when they initiate the integration. Use this field to provide context about what happens next. The message is limited to 500 characters.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| User Experience     | Informs that the integration will open in a new window.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| New Window Settings | Determines if the application opens in a new tab.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |

### Callback Parameters

The **Callback Parameters** section configures the parameters that Box sends to
the callback URL when a user accepts a confirmation prompt. If this setting is
not configured, Box does not send any parameters to the callback URL.
To add a parameter, select the **Method** (GET or POST),
specify the **Parameter name** and add a **Parameter value**.

<Warning>
  The **File** method is no longer supported. If you already used this method,
  you cannot edit its values. You can change the **File** method to **GET**
  or **POST**, but you can't undo this action.
</Warning>

For example: **GET - `userid` - `#user_id#`**.

The following parameter values are available.

| Parameter             | Method    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| --------------------- | --------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `user_id`             | GET, POST | The Box <Link href="/platform/appendix/locating-values/#user-ids">user ID</Link>. This information is used in Popup Integrations in which user authentication is required to complete an action. You can store the Box ID in your application to enable subsequent authentication requests from the integration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `user_name`           | POST      | The full name or email address of the Box user. Not all Box users specify their names at all times.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `file_id`             | GET, POST | The Box <Link href="/platform/appendix/locating-values/#content-ids">file ID</Link>. You can use this ID to make Box API calls that affect the file.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `file_name`           | POST      | The name of the file.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `file_extension`      | GET, POST | The extension of the file.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `auth_code`           | GET, POST | The OAuth 2.0 <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk/#3-user-grants-application-access">authorization code</Link>, which is generated by Box upon successful authentication. Your application must then supply this authorization code to Box in exchange for an OAuth 2.0 Access Token. An authorization header containing a valid Access Token must be included in every Box API request.                                                                                                                                                                |
| `redirect_to_box_url` | GET, POST | In Popup Integrations, the URL to which requests are sent by the confirmation prompt. Use this URL to redirect users to the All Files page. This parameter closes the popup panel and refreshes the All Files page to reflect any changes performed by the integration. If you do not want to add this parameter to your application, you can specify the entire URL. **Success**: `#redirect_to_box_url#&status=success&message=Your%20action%20was%20successful%2E`.  **Failure**: `#redirect_to_box_url#&status=failure&message=Your%20action%20was%20unsuccessful%2E` |

### Integration Status

* **Development**: The integration is visible and available only to application collaborators listed under the **General Settings** tab. This option is best used when the application is still in development and undergoing testing.
* **Online**: The integration is visible and available to all Box users. This option is best used when development is complete and the application is ready to publish in the Integrations.
* **Maintenance**: The integration is visible and available only to application collaborators listed under the **General Settings** tab. This option is best used after the integration is published in the Integrations, but needs to perform maintenance updates or troubleshoot issues. Use this option to temporarily take the integration offline for everyone except the application's collaborators.

## Example Use Cases of Box Integrations

When a user chooses a Popup Integration, Box sends a callback request to the
primary callback URL. It sends the callback parameters have been configured to
the server. In some cases, Box may make a second request if the
client cannot get all the data it needs from the first request.

The following example does not require a client callback URL:

* The Popup Integration performs a REST call using a `download_file_url` callback parameter.
* The user clicks **OK** in the confirmation prompt to accept the popup.
* Box sends a request to the following URL (the primary callback URL plus the callback parameter): `http://www.doceditor.com/service?apikey=abc&file=&redirect=`.
* The response from the callback URL displays a user interface to the user who made the request. The popup has all the information needed to continue the action and an additional client callback is not needed.

The following example requires a client callback URL:

* The Popup Integration performs a REST call using a file-callback parameter.
* The user clicks **OK** in the confirmation prompt to accept the popup.
* The popup displays a page where Box sends a POST request with the contents of a file, along with the callback parameters to the remote server.
* Box receives the response from the remote server and directs the client to POST the response to the client callback URL. The server identified by the URL interprets the response and redirects the user with the correct session ID.

## Client-callback URL Request Format

The POST request that Box sends to the client callback URL takes the response
from the primary callback URL and forwards it to the same URL along with the
same data as the original callback.

| Client Callback URL                                                                                                   | Example                                                  |
| --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| Two GET parameters and one POST parameter: `http://your-client-callback-url.com/?get_param1=value1&get_param2=value2` | `POST data: post_param1=value1initial_callback_response` |

The response to the client-callback request is an HTTP status 302, redirecting
the user to the correct URL or to the HTML for a UI.

Most often the URL points to a separate API or custom script developed for Web
App Integrations, which parses the result of the primary callback URL. Also,
note that the URL must be publicly accessible on the internet.

## Making Integration Publicly Available

To make a Box integration publicly available it needs to be listed in the App
Center. Follow the <Link href="/guides/applications/integrations">Integrations</Link> guide for more details.

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[devaccount]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Web App Integration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/web-app-integrations/index



Web App Integrations allow third-party applications to
become part of the Box user experience by
allowing users to use such third-party applications
when editing or sharing files.

## Features

* **File interaction**. Users can modify, share, or edit content stored in Box using a third-party application.
* **Recommended Apps support**. Integrations can appear in the Box Preview interface under **Recommended Apps**. For details, see [Recommended Web Integrations][recommended-web-integrations].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Integration example" />
</Frame>

* **Scoped availability**. Integrations can be restricted to certain content types and file extensions.

## Visibility in Recommended Apps

Your web application integration appears in **Recommended Apps** only if it is published in Integrations.

<Card href="/guides/applications/web-app-integrations/configure" title="Learn how to create a Web App Integration" />

[integrations]: /guides/applications/integrations

[custom-app]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup

[oauth2]: /guides/authentication/oauth2

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[recommended-web-integrations]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044195533-Installing-Recommended-Apps-in-your-Enterprise


# Integrations Types
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/web-app-integrations/types



Currently, Box provides the Popup integration type.

## Popup Integrations

In a popup integration, Box opens a panel and loads the application's callback
URL configured for the integration. The application can display its own user
interface for the integration in the popup.

The integration receives a short-lived authorization code with this request,
which can be used to connect to the Box APIs, exchange the code for an Access
Token, and then use that to make API calls to Box.

<Warning>
  Popup panels use HTML `<iframe>` tags to display the embedded content. To
  protect the security of Box's content, callback URLs should use SSL, and the
  response from the callback URL should include an `X-Frame-Options` header set
  to a random string value.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# User Experience
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/applications/web-app-integrations/user-experience



The following explains what a Web App Integration looks like from a user's point
of view.

1. Box users can discover applications in the Box Integrations. They can visit the Integrations directly, or select the **Integrations** menu from the Box Web App UI.
2. In the Integrations they select the application they would like to add. Every published Box application has a public profile page, which provides details including the integrations it provides.
3. They user adds the application to their account by clicking the **Add** button in the Integrations listing. Once an application is added to an account, all its integrations become available to the user.
4. Select an integration from the **More Actions** menu on a file or folder.
5. Box will ask the user for permission to share the file or folder with the application. The confirmation prompt must accepted before the integration can be successfully used.
6. Upon granting access, Box passes the data to the application. Depending on the type of integration, the application will then display a popup panel or run a server-based process.


# Add content to Box Archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/archives/add-content



To add content to an archive, you need to create it first. If you
have not done this yet, use the <Link href="/reference/v2025.0/post-archives/">Create Archive</Link> endpoint.

## Add file or folder to archive

Use the <Link href="/reference/put-files-id">`PUT /files/:id`</Link> API endpoint to add a file to an archive, or the <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id">`PUT /folders/:id`</Link> endpoint to add a folder.
The `id` parameter is the ID of the file/folder you want to add to the archive.
To specify the destination, use the `parent.id` <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id/#param-parent-id">parameter</Link> in the request body.
This can be either an ID of an archive or the ID of a folder that is inside an archive.

[Update parent id of file]: /reference/put-files-id/#param-parent-id

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Box Archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/archives/index



<Note>
  Box Archive is available only for Enterprise Advanced accounts.
</Note>

Box Archive allows you to create and manage archives. An archive is a folder dedicated to
storing content that is redundant, outdated, or trivial. Content in an archive is owned by the enterprise,
and it is not accessible to previous owner and collaborators.

## Archives are folders

Archives are a special type of folders. Box Archive APIs allow you to create, list, update and delete archives.
However, there are other APIs that also work with archives or with content within archives.
For a full list of supported APIs, see the <Link href="/guides/archives/supported-apis">Supported APIs</Link> guide.

## Required scopes

Before using any of the Box Archive APIs, make sure you can access [Box Archive in Admin Console][Box Archive in Admin Console].
Your Box Platform app must have the `GCM` and `Read and write all files and folders` <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/">scopes</Link> enabled.
If you plan to only view archives and not modify them, use the `Read all files and folders` instead of the `Read and write all files and folders` scope.
Additionally, to be able to assign <Link href="/reference/resources/storage-policy/">storage policy</Link> to an archive during its creation, your enterprise must have access to the Box Zones feature and your app must have the `Manage users` scope.

<Note>
  The `GCM` scope is not available in the Developer Console and needs to be enabled by contacting customer support.
</Note>

[Box Archive in Admin Console]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/p/Product_Page_2023?section-id=40168863437843

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Restore content from Box Archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/archives/restore-content



This guide describes how to restore content that you archived by mistake.

## Restore file or folder from archive

Use the <Link href="/reference/put-files-id">`PUT /files/:id`</Link> API endpoint to restore a file from an archive, or the <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id">`PUT /folders/:id`</Link> endpoint to restore a folder from an archive.
The `id` parameter is the ID of the file/folder you want to restore from an archive.
To specify the destination, use the `parent.id` <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id/#param-parent-id">parameter</Link> in the request body.
This is the ID of a folder (can be owned by any user) where you want to restore the file/folder.

To restore a file/folder to user's root folder, use `0` as the `parent.id` value. Additionally, pass the ID of the user in the
`parent.user_id` <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id/#param-parent-user_id">parameter</Link> in the request body.

[Update parent id of file]: /reference/put-files-id/#param-parent-id

[Update parent user id of file]: /reference/put-files-id/#param-parent-user_id

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Supported APIs for Box Archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/archives/supported-apis



The basic Box Archive APIs allow you to create, list, update and delete archives, but you can use other APIs to interact with an archive or its content.
See the table below for the full list of those APIs.

<Note>
  Those APIs require the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#global-content-manager-gcm">`GCM` scope</Link> to be enabled in your application.
  This scope is not available in the Developer Console and needs to be enabled by contacting customer support.

  Additionally, some of the below APIs need to be enabled by contacting customer support to properly work with Box Archive.
  When contacting customer support, specify the user ID you plan to use those APIs with.
</Note>

| API Endpoint                                                                                                                          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/reference/v2025.0/post-archives/">`POST /archives`</Link>                                                                | Create an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| <Link href="/reference/v2025.0/get-archives/">`GET /archives`</Link>                                                                  | List all archives.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| <Link href="/reference/v2025.0/put-archives-id/">`PUT /archives/:id`</Link>                                                           | Update an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| <Link href="/reference/v2025.0/delete-archives-id/">`DELETE /archives/:id`</Link>                                                     | Delete an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| <Link href="/reference/put-files-id">`PUT /files/:id`</Link>                                                                          | Add a file to an archive, restore a file from an archive, or move a file within/between archives. Other updates to the file are not allowed. Requires contacting customer support to enable.                                                                      |
| <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id">`PUT /folders/:id`</Link>                                                                      | Add a folder to an archive, restore a folder from an archive, move a folder within/between archives, or rename and change the description of a folder in an archive. Other updates to the folder are not allowed. Requires contacting customer support to enable. |
| <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">`POST /files/content`</Link>                                                               | Upload a file to an archive or to a folder within an archive. Requires contacting customer support to enable.                                                                                                                                                     |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-content">`GET /files/:id/content`</Link>                                                          | Download a file from an archive or from a folder within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| <Link href="/reference/post-zip-downloads">`POST /zip_downloads`</Link>                                                               | Download a zip file of an archive or of a folder within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| <Link href="/reference/post-folders">`POST /folders`</Link>                                                                           | Create a folder within an archive. Requires contacting customer support to enable.                                                                                                                                                                                |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link>                                                                          | Get details of a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id">`GET /folders/:id`</Link>                                                                      | Get details of an archive or of a folder within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-items">`GET /folders/:id/items`</Link>                                                          | List items within an archive or items in a folder within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-copy">`POST /files/:id/copy`</Link>                                                              | Copy a file to an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| <Link href="/reference/post-folders-id-copy">`POST /folders/:id/copy`</Link>                                                          | Copy a folder to an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-id-id">`POST /files/:id/metadata/:scope/:template_key`</Link>                           | Create a metadata instance attached to a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata-id-id">`GET /files/:id/metadata/:scope/:template_key`</Link>                             | View a metadata instance attached to a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata">`GET /files/:id/metadata`</Link>                                                        | List all metadata instances attached to a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| <Link href="/reference/put-files-id-metadata-id-id">`PUT /files/:id/metadata/:scope/:template_key`</Link>                             | Update a metadata instance attached to a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| <Link href="/reference/delete-files-id-metadata-id-id">`DELETE /files/:id/metadata/:scope/:template_key`</Link>                       | Delete a metadata instance attached to a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo">`POST securityClassification`</Link>     | Create a classification label for a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo">`GET securityClassification`</Link>       | View a classification label of a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| <Link href="/reference/put-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo">`PUT securityClassification`</Link>       | Update a classification label for a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| <Link href="/reference/delete-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo">`DELETE securityClassification`</Link> | Delete a classification label from a file within an archive.                                                                                                                                                                                                      |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Best Practices
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/best-practices



## Client secret security

Your client secret is confidential and needs to be protected. Because this is
how we securely identify an application's identity when obtaining an
Access Token, you do not want to freely distribute a client secret. This
includes via email, public forums and code repositories, distributed native
applications, or client-side code.

## Cache tokens

Because fetching new tokens is expensive, we recommend using a token cache
to prevent unnecessary requests.

After retrieving a token, store it in an in-memory cache, like Memcached, or a
built-in ASP.NET cache service. By default, Access Tokens are valid for 60
minutes, but we recommend setting the expiration time to around 50 minutes to
allow for a buffer.

When you need a token, first check the cache for a valid token. If the token
expired, get a new one and store it in the cache for 50 minutes.

```ruby theme={null}
def self.user_client(user_id)
    access_token=Rails.cache.fetch("box_tokens/user/#{user_id}", :expires_in => 50.minutes) do
        puts "getting new user token"
        response= Boxr::get_user_token(user_id, private_key: PRIVATE_KEY, private_key_password: ENV['JWT_PRIVATE_KEY_PASSWORD'])
        response.access_token
    end

    Boxr::Client.new(access_token)
end
```

<Tip>
  Official Box SDKs use token caching.
</Tip>

## Expired tokens

Expired tokens return a 401: Unauthorized error. This error should be handled
to refresh the token.

## Downscope tokens

It is important to follow the principle of least privilege when thinking about
Access Tokens. This can be accomplished through <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscoping</Link>, where
a fully scoped Access Token is exchanged for a more restricted Access Token that
can then be deployed to client-side code, mobile environments, or UI tools.

```java theme={null}
//Define resource/scopes that downscoped token has access to
String resource = "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/RESOURCE_ID";
List<String> scopes = new ArrayList<String>();
scopes.add("base_preview");
scopes.add("item_download");

//Preform token exchange
ScopedToken downscopedToken =
    client.getLowerScopedToken(scopes,resource);

//Downscoped token available in downscopedToken.getAccessToken()
```

## Revoke tokens

Both fully scoped Access Tokens and Downscoped Tokens can be <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/revoke">revoked</Link>.
This allows you to manage the lifespan of a token to reduce exposure when a user
logs out , there is suspicious activity, or when you need to push new security
enhancements.

## Developer Tokens

Developer Tokens should only be used for development or testing purposes and
never in production.


# Authentication
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/index



Authentication with the Box API uses an Access Token to identify a user. The
way in which an Access Token is acquired depends on the method used to authorize
a user. The type of authorization available to an application depends on the
use-case as well as the type of application that has been created in the developer
console.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Authentication methods" />
</Frame>

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn how to select an authorization type" />

## Access Tokens for Authentication

Every API endpoint requires a valid and active **Access Token** to make API
calls. An Access Token is a unique string that identifies an authenticated Box
user to the API endpoints.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/users/me \
    -H "authorization: Bearer EGmDmRVfhfHsqesn5yVYHAqUkD0dyDfk"
```

<Card href="/guides/authentication/tokens" title="Learn more about Access Tokens" />

[oauth2]: /guides/authentication/oauth2

[jwt]: /guides/authentication/jwt

[apptoken]: /guides/authentication/app-token

[devtoken]: /guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens

[custom-app]: /guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps

[custom-skill]: /guides/applications/app-types/custom-skills

[la]: /guides/applications/app-types/select/#limited-access-app

[ccg]: /guides/authentication/client-credentials


# OAuth 2.0 Auth
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/oauth2/index



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Client-side OAuth 2.0 is one of the easiest ways to authenticate a user for the
Box API. It is an [open standard](https://oauth.net/2/) designed to allow users
to provide applications access to their data in other applications.

If you've ever logged in to a website with Twitter, Facebook, or Google you've
most likely used OAuth 2.0.

<Frame>
  <img alt="the OAuth 2.0 flow" />
</Frame>

Client-side authentication on Box has a similar flow where a user is redirected
from an application to the Box web app, required to log in, and grant the
application access to the user's data.

## When to use OAuth 2.0

Client-side authentication is the ideal authentication method for apps that:

* Work with users that already have existing Box accounts
* Want or require users to know that they are using Box
* Want to store data within the user's Box account and not within the the application's Box account

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Setup with OAuth 2.0
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A Platform App can be set up to use client-side <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> authentication.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/oauth2" title="Learn how OAuth 2.0 authentication works" />

## Prerequisites

To set up a Platform App using OAuth 2.0 authentication, you will need to ensure
you have access the [Developer Console][devconsole] from your Box enterprise
account. Alternatively, you may sign up for a [developer account][devaccount].

## App creation steps

### Navigate to the Developer Console

Log into Box and go to the
[Developer Console][devconsole]. Select **Create Platform App**.

### Select application type

Select **Platform App** from the list of application types. A modal will appear to
prompt a selection for the next step.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Application selection screen" />
</Frame>

### Provide basic application information

To describe your app, provide an app name and description.
Use the drop-down list to select the app's purpose. Depending on the option chosen, you might need to specify further details.

| Purpose                   | Details                                                                                              |
| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Automation, Custom Portal | Specify if the app is built by a customer or partner.                                                |
| Integration               | Specify the integration category, external system name if the app is built by a customer or partner. |
| Other                     | Specify the app purpose and if it is built by a customer or partner.                                 |

<Frame>
  <img alt="Auth selection screen" />
</Frame>

### Select application authentication

Select **User Authentication (OAuth 2.0)** and confirm with **Create App**.

<Warning>
  Once you make a selection, you will not be able to change to a different
  authentication method without creating a new application.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Auth selection screen" />
</Frame>

## Basic configuration

Before the application can be used, some additional configuration is
required.

### Redirect URI

During the OAuth 2.0 flow, users are redirected to their browser to
authenticate and then authorize the application to take actions on their behalf.

Prior to redirecting the user, Box verifies that the `redirect_uri` parameter
passed into the <Link href="/reference/get-authorize/#param-redirect_uri">authorization URL</Link> matches one of the redirect
URIs configured for the application. This will be an exact match check, meaning
the URIs must be exactly the same. Localhost and loopback address redirect URIs
will be permitted redirect to any port, but the scheme, domain, path and query
parameters must match one of the configured URIs.

You can configure these under the OAuth 2.0 Redirect URI section on the
Configuration page in the developer console. These must be valid URIs that are
HTTPS, or a less secure HTTP for localhost or loopback address. We do not
permit duplicate URIs to be saved.

<Warning>
  Starting November 29, 2021, new applications using OAuth 2.0 will
  require the URIs set in the configuration tab of the Developer Console to
  strictly match the one used during redirect. In addition, both new and
  existing applications, will gain the ability to add multiple redirect URIs.

  If you configured multiple redirect URIs for the application,
  the authorization URL must include the `redirect_uri` parameter matching one
  of the URIs configured in the developer console.
  If the parameter is not specified, the user will see a `redirect_uri_missing`
  error and will not be redirected back to the app after granting application
  access.

  For existing applications, the deadline to make changes to this URL to avoid
  service disruption is May 13, 2022.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <img alt="App name form" />
</Frame>

### Application Scopes

Scopes define what permissions your application has in order to access data. See
the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes guide</Link> for detailed information on each option.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App name form" />
</Frame>

### CORS Domains

If your application makes API calls from front-end browser code in
Javascript, the domain that these calls are made from will need to be
added to an allow-list due to [Cross Origin Resource Sharing][cors],
also known as CORS. If all requests will be made from server-side code,
you may skip this section.

To add the full URI(s) to the allow-list, navigate to the **CORS Domain**
section at the bottom of the **Configuration** tab in the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="App name form" />
</Frame>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[devaccount]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer

[devtoken]: /guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens

[cors]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-origin_resource_sharing

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box API & SSO
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/sso



Many Box Enterprises use **Single Sign On** (SSO) to authenticate
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">Managed Users</Link> logging in to Box. The way an application built on
Box Platform interact with an SSO provider depends on the type of application
being built.

## Platform Apps with Client-side Authentication

When users authenticate with a <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">Platform App</Link> configured to use
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> Box will detect if the enterprise is configured to use SSO.
If it is, Box will redirect the user to their browser and display the
enterprise's configured SSO log-in screen.

### SSO Enabled vs Required

Enterprises can configure their SSO in one of two ways: **SSO Required**
or **SSO Enabled**.

When SSO is enabled but not required, managed users will have the option to
either:

* log in with a Box username and password
* log in with their SSO provider

When SSO is enabled and required, Box will force all managed users to log in
with their enterprise's configured SSO provider. In this case, any
user that tries to log in must be configured on the SSO side, in addition to
having a Box account matching the email address passed via SAML.

<Warning>
  It is not possible to exempt a user from SSO in an enterprise with SSO
  set to required, even if it is only used for platform use cases.
</Warning>

## Platform Apps with Server-side Authentication

For <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">Platform Apps</Link> that use <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup">JWT</Link> or
<Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link> and
<Link href="/guides/applications/web-app-integrations">Limited Access Apps</Link> that use <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App Token</Link> authentication,
SSO is not used to authenticate with Box.

Platform Apps using server-side authentication only use server-to-server API
calls to communicate with Box. In this scenario, the way in which an end user
is authenticated is determined by the application and not by Box.

In other words, end user authentication with the application is determined by
the application, while application's authorization to Box is a different
matter completely.

In these use cases the application authenticates not as a regular Managed User
but as a Service Account or App User. These user types do not have access to any
Managed User's data by default. For these applications to have access to other
Managed User's data they will need explicit <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">admin approval</Link>.

## Custom Skills

<Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/custom-skills">Custom Skills</Link> are authenticated in a unique way where the
application is provided with a unique set of access tokens for every skill
event.

In this case, the application does not directly interact with the users and
therefore SSO is not involved.

<Info>
  Even when using Skills, a user uploading a file to a folder that might trigger
  a Skill event would still need to log in to the web or mobile app. This log in
  would require them to use SSO where needed.
</Info>

[jwt]: /guides/authentication/jwt

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Access Tokens
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/access-tokens



Instead of a user name and password, Access Tokens are the credentials used to
represent the authenticated user to the Box servers.

## Token Object

### OAuth 2.0 authentication

When an Access Token is requested using OAuth 2.0, an Access Token and Refresh
Token pair are returned.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/oauth2/token \
    -H "content-type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded" \
    -d '...'
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "access_token": "c3FIOG9vSGV4VHo4QzAyg5T1JvNnJoZ3ExaVNyQWw6WjRsanRKZG5lQk9qUE1BVQ",
  "expires_in": 3600,
  "token_type": "bearer",
  "refresh_token": "c3FIOG9vSGV4VHo4QzAyg5T1JvNnJoZ3ExaVNyQWw6WjRsanRKZG5lQk9qUE1BVQ",
  "issued_token_type": "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token"
}
```

Within this object we can see the token string (`access_token`), as well
as the Refresh Token (`refresh_token`) that can be used to request a new Access
Token when the current one expires (`expires_in`).

### Server authentication

When an Access Token is requested using JWT or Client Credentials Grant, only an
Access Token is returned:

```sh theme={null}
curl --location --request POST 'https://api.box.com/oauth2/token' \
    --header 'Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded' \
    --data-urlencode '...'
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "access_token": "DkXZmsjUKizvL2z0WiaLvMBeQ756XCGGf",
  "expires_in": 4123,
  "restricted_to": [],
  "issued_token_type": "bearer"
}
```

Within this object we can see the token string (`access_token`).
Because a Refresh Token is not returned, you must request a new token when the
Access Token expires (`expires_in`) using the <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">token endpoint</Link>.


# Annotator Tokens
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/annotator-tokens



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Annotations is one of the key features supported by new Box View, that allows
developers to provide collaboration capabilities right from within the embedded
Box preview in their application.

Box View supports three annotation types: highlight only, highlight
annotation, and point annotation. Annotations are only supported on document
and image previews.

<Frame>
  <img alt="How annotator tokens work" />
</Frame>

## What is an Annotator Token

An Annotator Token is an Access Token that allows an application to create a
Preview Embed Link for a file that a user can make annotations on. As an
application might not create a new App User for every one of the application's
users, the Annotator token allows the application to track which of their
own users made the annotations.

The Annotator Token is used instead of a regular Access Token, App Token, or File
Token to generate a preview session (an expiring embed link) that is linked to a
unique user ID and display name.

<Warning>
  Since a preview session generated using an annotator token is tied to a
  specific external user, it is strongly recommended that an application
  generates different preview sessions using different annotator tokens for
  different end users of an application.
</Warning>

## External user info

The external display name associated with an annotation is essentially a
stateless "label" appended to the annotation. This means that once an annotation
has been added, the display name is permanently associated with the annotation
and cannot be updated unless the annotation is deleted and added again with the
updated display name.

## Create without SDKs

To create an annotator token, follow the instructions for [manually
authenticating through JWT](/guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk) but replace the
JWT claim with the following data.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var claims = new List<Claim>{
      new Claim("sub", '[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]'),
      new Claim("name", '[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME]'),
      new Claim("box_sub_type", "external"),
      new Claim("jti", jti),
  };
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  JwtClaims claims = new JwtClaims();
  claims.setIssuer(config.boxAppSettings.clientID);
  claims.setAudience(authenticationUrl);
  claims.setSubject("[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]");
  claims.setName("[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME]");
  claims.setClaim("box_sub_type", "external");
  claims.setGeneratedJwtId(64);
  claims.setExpirationTimeMinutesInTheFuture(0.75f);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  claims = {
      'iss': config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
      'sub': '[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]',
      'name': '[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME]',
      'box_sub_type': 'external',
      'aud': authentication_url,
      'jti': secrets.token_hex(64),
      'exp': round(time.time()) + 45
  }
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  let claims = {
      iss: config.boxAppSettings.clientID,
      sub: "[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]",
      name: "[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME]",
      box_sub_type: "external",
      aud: authenticationUrl,
      jti: crypto.randomBytes(64).toString("hex"),
      exp: Math.floor(Date.now() / 1000) + 45
  };
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  claims = {
    iss: config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
    sub: "[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]",
    name: "[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME]",
    box_sub_type: 'external',
    aud: authentication_url,
    jti: SecureRandom.hex(64),
    exp: Time.now.to_i + 45
  }
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  $claims = [
    'iss' => $config->boxAppSettings->clientID,
    'sub' => '[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]',
    'name' => '[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME]',
    'box_sub_type' => 'external',
    'aud' => $authenticationUrl,
    'jti' => base64_encode(random_bytes(64)),
    'exp' => time() + 45,
    'kid' => $config->boxAppSettings->appAuth->publicKeyID
  ];
  ```
</CodeGroup>

| Parameter      | Type   | Description                                                                                             |
| -------------- | ------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `sub`          | String | The external user ID to tie this annotation to. This can be any arbitrary ID tracked by the application |
| `box_sub_type` | String | `external` to signify an external user ID                                                               |
| `box_sub_type` | String | The external user name to tie this annotation to. This will be displayed in the Box UI                  |

Then, convert this claim to an assertion according to the guide and pass this
assertion to the <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">`POST /oauth2/token`</Link>
endpoint together with an existing valid Access Token, App Token, or File Token,
as well as a set of scopes, and the resource for which to create the token.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var content = new FormUrlEncodedContent(new[]
  {
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "grant_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "resource", "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "subject_token", "[ACCESS_TOKEN]"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "subject_token_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "scope", "item_preview"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "actor_token", "[JWT_ASSERTION_FOR_ANNOTATOR_TOKEN]"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "actor_token_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token"),
  });
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  List<NameValuePair> params = new ArrayList<NameValuePair>();

  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "grant_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "resource", "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "subject_token", "[ACCESS_TOKEN]"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "subject_token_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "scope", "item_preview"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "actor_token", "[JWT_ASSERTION_FOR_ANNOTATOR_TOKEN]"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "actor_token_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token"));
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  params = urlencode({
      'grant_type': 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange',
      'resource': 'https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456',
      'subject_token': '[ACCESS_TOKEN]',
      'subject_token_type': 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token',
      'scope': 'item_preview',
      'actor_token': '[JWT_ASSERTION_FOR_ANNOTATOR_TOKEN]',
      'actor_token_type': 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token'
  }).encode()
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  let accessToken = await axios
      .post(
          authenticationUrl,
          querystring.stringify({
              grant_type: "urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange",
              resource: "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456",
              subject_token: "[ACCESS_TOKEN]",
              subject_token_type: "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token",
              scope: "item_preview",
              actor_token: "[JWT_ASSERTION_FOR_ANNOTATOR_TOKEN]",
              actor_token_type: "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token"
          })
      )
      .then(response => response.data.access_token);
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  params = URI.encode_www_form({
    grant_type: 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange',
    resource: 'https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456',
    subject_token: '[ACCESS_TOKEN]',
    subject_token_type: 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token',
    scope: 'item_preview',
    actor_token: '[JWT_ASSERTION_FOR_ANNOTATOR_TOKEN]',
    actor_token_type: 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token'
  })
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  $params = [
    'grant_type' => 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange',
    'resource' => 'https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456',
    'subject_token' => '[ACCESS_TOKEN]',
    'subject_token_type' => 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token',
    'scope' => 'item_preview',
    'actor_token' => '[JWT_ASSERTION_FOR_ANNOTATOR_TOKEN]',
    'actor_token_type' => 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token'
  ];
  ```
</CodeGroup>

| Parameter          | Description                                                              |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `resource`         | An optional full URL path to the file the token should be restricted to. |
| `actor_token`      | The JWT assertion created earlier                                        |
| `actor_token_type` | Always set to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`                |

## Create with SDKs

To create a JWT annotator token with an SDK an application can exchange any
active token for another token.

<CodeGroup>
  ```js Node theme={null}
  var options = {
      actor: {
          id: "[EXTERNAL_USER_ID]",
          name: "[EXTERNAL_USER_DISPLAY_NAME"
      }
  };

  client
      .exchangeToken(
          "item_preview",
          "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456",
          options
      )
      .then(tokenInfo => {
          //=> tokenInfo.accessToken
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Use a Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/api-calls



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Every authenticated API call requires an Access Token to be passed in the
`Authorization` header as a `Bearer Token` or it will return a `401 Unauthorized`
HTTP status.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/users/me \
    -H "authorization: Bearer EGmDmRVfhfHsqesn5yVYHAqUkD0dyDfk"
```

<Info>
  Use the <Link href="/reference/get-users-id">`GET /users/me`</Link> endpoint to inspect what
  user an Access Token is authenticated for.
</Info>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Developer Tokens
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A Developer Token is an Access Token available to developers during development
and testing. These tokens are short lived, as they expire after 60 minutes, and
cannot be refreshed programmatically.

## Create Developer Token

To create a Developer Token for an application:

* Navigate to the Box [Developer Console][devconsole] and select the application to create a Developer Token for.
* Select the **Configuration** tab.
* Under Developer Token, select **Generate Developer Token**.

<Info>
  You can also generate a Developer Token directly from <Link href="/guides/applications">My Platform Apps</Link>
  view, using the menu available for each app.
</Info>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Generating a Developer Token" />
</Frame>

## Using Developer Token

A Developer Token can be used like any Access Token in the `Authorization`
header of an API call.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/users/me \
    -H "authorization: Bearer [DEVELOPER_TOKEN]"
```

<Warning>
  A Developer Token is associated with the the user that is logged in to the
  Developer Console when the token is generated.
</Warning>

Our SDKs can be initialized with a Developer Token to create a basic API client.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/users/me \
    -H "authorization: Bearer [DEVELOPER_TOKEN]"
```

<Danger>
  **Developer tokens should not be used in production environments**

  Developer Tokens should only be used for development or testing purposes.
</Danger>

<Warning>
  When you explicitly revoke a developer token for a given app via the
  Developer console, all webhooks created by that application get deleted.
</Warning>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

## Using SDKs and Developer Tokens

To learn more about Developer Tokens for each SDK head over to:

* [.Net][.Net]

* [Java][Java]

* [Python][Python]

* [Node][Node]

* [IOS][IOS]

[.Net]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#developer-token

[Java]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/authentication.md#developer-token

[Python]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/usage/authentication.md#developer-token

[Node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#developer-token

[IOS]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/legacy/BoxSDK/docs/usage/authentication.md#developer-token

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Downscope a Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Downscoping is a way to exchange an existing Access Token for a new one that is
more restricted.

## Reasons to downscope

An application might need to share the Access Token with an
environment that it does not fully control. A common example of this would be
when using Box UI Elements in a web browser.

When an application needs to pass an Access Token to the browser there is a
potential security risk that needs to be resolved. In order to limit this risk the
Access Token can be exchanged for a new token with much stricter permissions.

## High-level overview

A downscoped token is a token that has fewer permissions (scopes) than the
original token, as well as the optional additional restriction to only allow
access to a specific file.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Downscoping overview" />
</Frame>

The new token takes the permissions of the original token and restricts them
to the tokens passed in, as well as the resource provided.

## Downscoping in practice

To downscope a token, pass the `POST /oauth2/token` endpoint an existing Access
Token, a list of scopes, as well as an optional file URL to restrict the token to.

| Parameter            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| -------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `subject_token`      | The original token to downscope. This can be a token that was acquired through OAuth 2.0, JWT token exchange, or as an App Token.                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `scope`              | A space-delimited list of <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link> to limit the new token to. Any valid scope for the application can be used, though a special set of <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#scopes-for-downscoping">scopes for Box UI elements</Link> is available |
| `resource`           | An optional full URL path to the file the token should be restricted to.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `box_shared_link`    | An optional <Link href="/guides/shared-links">shared link</Link> URL for a file or folder on Box. Password protected links are not supported. This option cannot be used in addition to the `resource` option nor can it be a shared link created on a weblink.                                                                              |
| `subject_token_type` | Always set to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `grant_type`         | Always set to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |

## Downscoped Access Token Object

A downscoped Access Token returned by the `POST /oauth2/token` endpoint contains
extra information on the specific restrictions.

```json theme={null}
{
  "access_token": "1!DgsZ6V9kMWZu2StrxwQDF5BudQNen-xUmU2cfcVKArE....",
  "expires_in": 4175,
  "token_type": "bearer",
  "restricted_to": [
    {
      "scope": "item_preview",
      "object": {
        "type": "folder",
        "id": "1234567890",
        "sequence_id": "0",
        "etag": "0",
        "name": "Test"
      }
    }
  ],
  "issued_token_type": "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token"
}
```

Most importantly here is the list of `restricted_to` entries that will contain
each combination of `object` and `scope` that the new token has the permissions for.

<Warning>
  A downscoped token does not include a refresh token. To get a new downscoped
  token, refresh the original refresh token and use that new token to get a
  downscoped token.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Tokens
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/index



At the core of every Box API call is an Access Token.
Similar to using the Box Web App, you will only be able to successfully interact
with content the user associated with the Access Token either a collaborator on
or owns. This can be further restricted by <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscoping</Link> a token.

<Warning>
  Required access scopes, application access, enabled advanced settings, user
  permissions, and endpoint-specific restrictions all work together to determine
  which API calls will be successful. For example, even if a user has
  collaborator access to a folder, a call to get information about the folder
  will not be successful if the read scope is not granted to the application.
</Warning>

## Types of tokens

| Type                                                                               | Duration           |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------ |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/access-tokens">Access Token</Link>       | 60 minutes         |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/refresh">Refresh Token</Link>            | 60 days or one use |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">Developer Token</Link> | 60 minutes         |

## Application Types & Access Tokens

The following shows how each application type is expected to create an Access
Token.

| Box Application Type                    | How to get Access Token                                                                       |
| --------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Platform App + OAuth 2.0                | <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk">Explicit user grant</Link>             |
| Platform App + JWT                      | <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk">Exchange a JWT assertion</Link>        |
| Platform App + Client Credentials Grant | <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Use client ID and client secret</Link> |
| Limited Access App + App Token          | Configure token in [Developer Console][devcon]                                                |
| Custom Skill                            | Access Token in event payload                                                                 |

[devcon]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# Refresh a Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/refresh



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

An Access Token can be refreshed by using the Refresh Token that came with the
Access Token. This can be done before or after the Access Token expires.

To do this, the application passes the `refresh_token` to the [`POST
/oauth2/token`](/reference/post-oauth2-token) endpoint as follows.

<Info>
  **Usage in SDKs**

  All of the Box SDKs support automatic Access Token renewal for JWT and OAuth 2.0
  applications.
</Info>

<Danger>
  **Refresh token expiration**

  A Refresh Token is valid for 60 days and can be used to obtain a new Access
  Token and Refresh Token only once. If the Access Token and Refresh Token are
  not refreshed within 60 days, the user will need to be re-authorized.

  Every time an application uses the Refresh Token to get a new Access Token the
  Refresh Token is invalidated and a new Refresh Token is returned with the
  new Access Token.

  This new Refresh Token is then again only valid for 1 use within 60 days.
</Danger>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Revoke a Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/revoke



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

An Access Token can be revoked at any time by either sending the Access Token or
Refresh Token the <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-revoke">`POST /oauth2/revoke`</Link> endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/oauth2/revoke" \
       -H "content-type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded" \
       -d "client_id=[CLIENT_ID]" \
       -d "client_secret=[CLIENT_SECRET]" \
       -d "token=[ACCESS_TOKEN]"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await auth.revokeTokens();
  // client's tokens have been revoked
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.auth.revoke_token()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await auth.RevokeTokenAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await auth.revokeToken()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  auth.revokeToken();
  // client's tokens have been revoked
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  oauth.revoke()
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.revokeTokens("<TOKEN>")
  	.then(() => {
  		// the client's access token have been revoked
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  **Usage in SDKs**

  All of the Box SDKs support manually revoking the current Access Token
  associated with the client. To revoke a specific token, first initialize a new
  SDK with that token and then call the relevant revoke method.
</Info>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Using in SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/tokens/sdks



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The SDKs have direct support for JWT and OAuth 2.0 authentication, yet in some
cases your application might need to provide an Access Token to the SDK directly.

## Developer Token

Similarly, developer tokens can be used directly in SDKs without needing any
further SDK configuration.

## App Token

When using App Token authentication it is possible to directly pass the App
Token to the SDKs.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Override AI model configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides



The `ai_agent` configuration allows you to override the default AI model configuration. It is available for the following endpoints:

* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-ask#param-ai-agent">`POST ai/ask`</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-text-gen#param-ai-agent">`POST ai/text_gen`</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract#param-ai-agent">`POST ai/extract`</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract-structured#param-ai-agent">`POST ai/extract_structured`</Link>

<Tip>
  Use the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default">`GET ai_agent_default`</Link> endpoint to fetch the default configuration.
</Tip>

The override examples include:

* Replacing the default AI model with a custom one based on your organization's needs.
* Tweaking the base `prompt` to allow a more customized user experience.
* Changing a parameter, such as `temperature`, to make the results more or less creative.

## Sample configuration

A complete configuration for `ai/ask` is as follows:

```sh theme={null}
{
  "type": "ai_agent_ask",
  "basic_text": {
    "llm_endpoint_params": {
      "type": "openai_params",
      "frequency_penalty": 1.5,
      "presence_penalty": 1.5,
      "stop": "<|im_end|>",
      "temperature": 0,
      "top_p": 1
    },
    "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
    "num_tokens_for_completion": 8400,
    "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, consider these travel options `{content}` and answer the `{user_question}`.",
    "system_message": "You are a helpful travel assistant specialized in budget travel"
  },
  "basic_text_multi": {
    "llm_endpoint_params": {
      "type": "openai_params",
      "frequency_penalty": 1.5,
      "presence_penalty": 1.5,
      "stop": "<|im_end|>",
      "temperature": 0,
      "top_p": 1
    },
    "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
    "num_tokens_for_completion": 8400,
    "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, consider these travel options `{content}` and answer the `{user_question}`.",
    "system_message": "You are a helpful travel assistant specialized in budget travel"
  },
  "long_text": {
    "embeddings": {
      "model": "openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
      "strategy": {
        "id": "basic",
        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
      }
    },
    "llm_endpoint_params": {
      "type": "openai_params",
      "frequency_penalty": 1.5,
      "presence_penalty": 1.5,
      "stop": "<|im_end|>",
      "temperature": 0,
      "top_p": 1
    },
    "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
    "num_tokens_for_completion": 8400,
    "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, consider these travel options `{content}` and answer the `{user_question}`.",
    "system_message": "You are a helpful travel assistant specialized in budget travel"
  },
  "long_text_multi": {
    "embeddings": {
      "model": "openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
      "strategy": {
        "id": "basic",
        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
      }
    },
    "llm_endpoint_params": {
      "type": "openai_params",
      "frequency_penalty": 1.5,
      "presence_penalty": 1.5,
      "stop": "<|im_end|>",
      "temperature": 0,
      "top_p": 1
    },
    "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
    "num_tokens_for_completion": 8400,
    "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, consider these travel options `{content}` and answer the `{user_question}`.",
    "system_message": "You are a helpful travel assistant specialized in budget travel"
  }
}
```

### Differences in parameter sets

The set of parameters available for `ask`, `text_gen`, `extract`, `extract_structured` differs slightly, depending on the API call.

* The agent configuration for the `ask` endpoint includes `basic_text`,   `basic_text_multi`, `long_text` and `long_text_multi` parameters. This is because of the `mode` parameter you use to specify if the request is for a single item or multiple items. If you selected `multiple_item_qa` as the `mode`, you can also use `multi` parameters for overrides.

* The agent configuration for `text_gen` includes the `basic_gen` parameter
  that is used to generate text.

### LLM endpoint params

The `llm_endpoint_params` configuration options differ depending on the overall AI model being <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-llm-endpoint-params-google">Google</Link>, <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-llm-endpoint-params-openai">OpenAI</Link> or <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-llm-endpoint-params-aws">AWS</Link> based.

For example, both `llm_endpoint_params` objects accept a `temperature` parameter, but the outcome differs depending on the model.

For Google and AWS models, the [`temperature`][google-temp] is used for sampling during response generation, which occurs when `top-P` and `top-K` are applied. Temperature controls the degree of randomness in the token selection.

For OpenAI models, [`temperature`][openai-temp] is the sampling temperature with values between 0 and 2. Higher values like 0.8 make the output more random, while lower values like 0.2 make it more focused and deterministic. When introducing your own configuration, use `temperature` or or `top_p` but not both.

### System message

The `system_message` parameter's aim is to help the LLM understand its role and what it’s supposed to do.
For example, if your solution is processing travel itineraries, you can add a system message saying:

```sh theme={null}
You are a travel agent aid. You are going to help support staff process large amounts of schedules, tickets, etc.
```

This message is separate from the content you send in, but it can improve the results.

### Number of tokens for completion

The `num_tokens_for_completion` parameter represents the number of [tokens][openai-tokens] Box AI can return. This number can vary based on the model used.

[openai-tokens]: https://help.openai.com/en/articles/4936856-what-are-tokens-and-how-to-count-them

[google-temp]: https://ai.google.dev/gemini-api/docs/models/generative-models#model-parameters

[openai-temp]: https://community.openai.com/t/temperature-top-p-and-top-k-for-chatbot-responses/295542

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AI agent configuration versioning
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-versioning



<Note>
  Box updates the default models across the endpoints on a regular basis in order to stay up to date with the most advanced options. If a default model is updated, it will be posted in the developer changelog.
</Note>

AI agent configuration versioning gives the developers more control over AI agent versioning and ensures consistent responses.

AI agent configuration versioning adopts the following principles:

* Each AI agent snapshot is supported for at least 12 months, unless there are factors outside of Box's control. For example, a Large Language Model (LLM) may get deprecated.
* An AI agent snapshot is available unless a new, stable agent version is released
* A 6-month window is provided to test and transition to the new snapshot.

## Historical AI agent configuration

The values in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/get-agent-default-config">default agent configuration</Link> used by the LLM gateway often change to achieve the best possible answer quality.

To make sure your configurations are not affected in a negative way, you can use the historical AI agent configuration provided below to <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">override the default one</Link>.

``````json theme={null}
{
    "ask": {
        "type": "ai_agent_ask",
        "longText": {
            "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
            "systemMessage": "",
            "promptTemplate": "Reply as if it's {current_date}.\nI will ask you for help and provide subsections of one document delimited by five backticks (`````) at the beginning and at the end.\nIf I make a reference to \"this\", I am referring to the document I provided between the five backticks. I may ask you a question where the answer is contained within the document.  In that case, do your best to answer using only the document, but if you cannot, feel free to mention that you couldn't find an answer in the document, but you have some answer from your general knowledge.\nI may ask you to perform some kind of computation or symbol manipulation such as filtering a list, counting something, summing, averaging, and other aggregation/grouping functions or some combination of them.  In these cases, first list the plan of how you plan to perform such a computation, then follow that plan step by step, keeping track of intermediate results, and at the end tell me the final answer.\nI may ask you to enumerate or somehow list people, places, characters, or other important things from the document, if I do so, please only use the document provided to list them.\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENT STARTS\n`````\n{content}\n`````\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENT ENDS\nNever mention five backticks in your response. Unless you are told otherwise, a one paragraph response is sufficient for any requested summarization tasks.\nHere is how I need help from you: {user_question}",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 6000,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "openai_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 1.5,
                "stop": "<|im_end|>"
            },
            "embeddings": {
                "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                "strategy": {
                    "id": "basic",
                    "numTokensPerChunk": 64
                }
            }
        },
        "basicText": {
            "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
            "systemMessage": "",
            "promptTemplate": "Reply as if it's {current_date}.\nI will ask you for help and provide the entire text of one document delimited by five backticks (`````) at the beginning and at the end.\nIf I make a reference to \"this\", I am referring to the document I provided between the five backticks. I may ask you a question where the answer is contained within the document.  In that case, do your best to answer using only the document, but if you cannot, feel free to mention that you couldn't find an answer in the document, but you have some answer from your general knowledge.\nI may ask you to perform some kind of computation or symbol manipulation such as filtering a list, counting something, summing, averaging, and other aggregation/grouping functions or some combination of them.  In these cases, first list the plan of how you plan to perform such a computation, then follow that plan step by step, keeping track of intermediate results, and at the end tell me the final answer.\nI may ask you to enumerate or somehow list people, places, characters, or other important things from the document, if I do so, please only use the document provided to list them.\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENT STARTS\n`````\n{content}\n`````\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENT ENDS\nNever mention five backticks in your response. Unless you are told otherwise, a one paragraph response is sufficient for any requested summarization tasks.\nHere is how I need help from you: {user_question}",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 6000,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "openai_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 1.5,
                "stop": "<|im_end|>"
            }
        },
        "longTextMulti": {
            "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
            "systemMessage": "Role and Goal: You are an assistant designed to analyze and answer a question based on provided snippets from multiple documents, which can include business-oriented documents like docs, presentations, PDFs, etc. The assistant will respond concisely, using only the information from the provided documents.\n\nConstraints: The assistant should avoid engaging in chatty or extensive conversational interactions and focus on providing direct answers. It should also avoid making assumptions or inferences not supported by the provided document snippets.\n\nGuidelines: When answering, the assistant should consider the file's name and path to assess relevance to the question. In cases of conflicting information from multiple documents, it should list the different answers with citations. For summarization or comparison tasks, it should concisely answer with the key points. It should also consider the current date to be the date given.\n\nPersonalization: The assistant's tone should be formal and to-the-point, suitable for handling business-related documents and queries.\n",
            "promptTemplate": "Current date: {current_date}\n\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS STARTS\n{content}\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS ENDS\n\nHere is how I need help from you: {user_question}\n.",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 6000,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "openai_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 1.5,
                "stop": "<|im_end|>"
            },
            "embeddings": {
                "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                "strategy": {
                    "id": "basic",
                    "numTokensPerChunk": 64
                }
            }
        },
        "basicTextMulti": {
            "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
            "systemMessage": "",
            "promptTemplate": "Current date: {current_date}\n\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS STARTS\n{content}\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS ENDS\n\nHere is how I need help from you: {user_question}\n.",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 6000,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "openai_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 1.5,
                "stop": "<|im_end|>"
            }
        },
    },
    "extract": {
        "type": "ai_agent_extract",
        "longText": {
            "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
            "systemMessage": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"displayName\": \"key display name\", \"type\": \"string\", \"description\": \"key description\"}]}. Leverage key description and key display name to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, key description can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
            "promptTemplate": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 4096,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "google_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 0.0
            },
            "embeddings": {
                "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                "strategy": {
                    "id": "basic",
                    "numTokensPerChunk": 64
                }
            }
        },
        "basicText": {
            "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
            "systemMessage": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"displayName\": \"key display name\", \"type\": \"string\", \"description\": \"key description\"}]}. Leverage key description and key display name to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, key description can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
            "promptTemplate": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 4096,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "google_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 0.0
            }
        }
    },
    "textGen": {
        "type": "ai_agent_text_gen",
        "basicGen": {
            "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
            "systemMessage": "\nIf you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}.\nThe user is working in a collaborative document creation editor called Box Notes.\nAssume that you are helping a business user create documents or to help the user revise existing text.\nYou can help the user in creating templates to be reused or update existing documents, you can respond with text that the user can use to place in the document that the user is editing.\nIf the user simply asks to \"improve\" the text, then simplify the language and remove jargon, unless the user specifies otherwise.\nDo not open with a preamble to the response, just respond.\n",
            "promptTemplate": "{user_question}",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 12000,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "openai_params",
                "temperature": 0.1,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.75,
                "presencePenalty": 0.75,
                "stop": "<|im_end|>"
            },
            "embeddings": {
                "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                "strategy": {
                    "id": "basic",
                    "numTokensPerChunk": 64
                }
            },
            "contentTemplate": "`````{content}`````"
        }
    },
    "extractStructured": {
        "type": "ai_agent_extract_structured",
        "longText": {
            "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
            "systemMessage": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"prompt\": \"prompt to extract the value\", \"type\": \"date\"}]}. Leverage prompt for each key to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, prompt can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
            "promptTemplate": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 4096,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "google_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 0.0
            },
            "embeddings": {
                "model": "google__textembedding_gecko_003",
                "strategy": {
                    "id": "basic",
                    "numTokensPerChunk": 64
                }
            }
        },
        "basicText": {
            "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
            "systemMessage": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"prompt\": \"prompt to extract the value\", \"type\": \"date\"}]}. Leverage prompt for each key to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, prompt can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
            "promptTemplate": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
            "numTokensForCompletion": 4096,
            "llmEndpointParams": {
                "type": "google_params",
                "temperature": 0.0,
                "topP": 1.0,
                "frequencyPenalty": 0.0,
                "presencePenalty": 0.0
            }
        }
    }
}
``````

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get default AI agent configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/get-agent-default-config



The `GET /2.0/ai_agent_default` endpoint allows you to fetch the default configuration for AI services.
Once you get the configuration details you can override them using the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">`ai_agent`</Link> parameter.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the
`GET /2.0/ai_agent_default` endpoint.

Make sure you have generated the developer token
to authorize your app. See <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites">getting started with Box AI</Link>
for details.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai_agent_default?mode=text_gen" \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.ai.getAiAgentDefaultConfig({
    mode: 'ask' as GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParamsModeField,
    language: 'en-US',
  } satisfies GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai.get_ai_agent_default_config(GetAiAgentDefaultConfigMode.ASK, language="en-US")
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Ai.GetAiAgentDefaultConfigAsync(queryParams: new GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParams(mode: GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParamsModeField.Ask) { Language = "en-US" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.ai.getAiAgentDefaultConfig(queryParams: GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParams(mode: GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParamsModeField.ask, language: "en-US"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAi().getAiAgentDefaultConfig(new GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParams.Builder(GetAiAgentDefaultConfigQueryParamsModeField.ASK).language("en-US").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxAIAgentConfig config = BoxAI.getAiAgentDefaultConfig(
      api,
      BoxAIAgent.Mode.ASK,
      "en",
      "openai__gpt_3_5_turbo"
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  config = client.get_ai_agent_default_config(
      mode='text_gen',
      language='en',
      model='openai__gpt_3_5_turbo'
  )
  print(config)
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.ai.getAiAgentDefaultConfig({
      mode: 'ask',
      language: 'en',
      model:'openai__gpt_3_5_turbo'
  }).then(response => {
      /* response -> {
          "type": "ai_agent_ask",
          "basic_text": {
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
              "type": "openai_params",
              "frequency_penalty": 1.5,
              "presence_penalty": 1.5,
              "stop": "<|im_end|>",
              "temperature": 0,
              "top_p": 1
              },
              "model": "openai__gpt_3_5_turbo",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 8400,
              "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, and I have $8000 and want to spend a week in the Azores. What should I see?",
              "system_message": "You are a helpful travel assistant specialized in budget travel"
          },
          ...
      } */
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter  | Description                                                                                                                                                          | Example                      |
| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------- |
| `language` | The language code the agent configuration is returned for. If the language is not supported, the default configuration is returned.                                  | `ja-JP`                      |
| **`mode`** | The mode used to filter the agent configuration. The value can be `ask`, `text_gen`, `extract`, or `extract_structured` depending on the result you want to achieve. | `ask`                        |
| `model`    | The model you want to get the configuration for. To make sure your chosen model is supported, see the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models">list of models</Link>.   | `azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini` |

## Responses

The responses to the call may vary depending on the `mode` parameter value you choose.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Ask">
    When you set the `mode` parameter to `ask` the response will be as follows:

    ```sh theme={null}
    {
         "type": "ai_agent_ask",
         "basic_text": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
              "system_message": "",
              "prompt_template": "prompt_template": "{user_question}Write it in an informal way.{content}"
            },
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 6000,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "frequency_penalty": 0,
                   "presence_penalty": 1.5,
                   "stop": "<|im_end|>",
                   "type": "openai_params"
              }
         },
         "long_text": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
              "system_message": "",
              "prompt_template": "prompt_template": "{user_question}Write it in an informal way.{content}"
            },
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 6000,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "frequency_penalty": 0,
                   "presence_penalty": 1.5,
                   "stop": "<|im_end|>",
                   "type": "openai_params"
              },
              "embeddings": {
                   "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                   "strategy": {
                        "id": "basic",
                        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
                   }
              }
         },
         "basic_text_multi": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
              "system_message": "",
              "prompt_template": "Current date: {current_date}\n\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS STARTS\n{content}\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS ENDS\n\nHere is how I need help from you: {user_question}\n.",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 6000,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "frequency_penalty": 0,
                   "presence_penalty": 1.5,
                   "stop": "<|im_end|>",
                   "type": "openai_params"
              }
         },
         "long_text_multi": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
              "system_message": "Role and Goal: You are an assistant designed to analyze and answer a question based on provided snippets from multiple documents, which can include business-oriented documents like docs, presentations, PDFs, etc. The assistant will respond concisely, using only the information from the provided documents.\n\nConstraints: The assistant should avoid engaging in chatty or extensive conversational interactions and focus on providing direct answers. It should also avoid making assumptions or inferences not supported by the provided document snippets.\n\nGuidelines: When answering, the assistant should consider the file's name and path to assess relevance to the question. In cases of conflicting information from multiple documents, it should list the different answers with citations. For summarization or comparison tasks, it should concisely answer with the key points. It should also consider the current date to be the date given.\n\nPersonalization: The assistant's tone should be formal and to-the-point, suitable for handling business-related documents and queries.\n",
              "prompt_template": "Current date: {current_date}\n\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS STARTS\n{content}\nTEXT FROM DOCUMENTS ENDS\n\nHere is how I need help from you: {user_question}\n.",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 6000,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "frequency_penalty": 0,
                   "presence_penalty": 1.5,
                   "stop": "<|im_end|>",
                   "type": "openai_params"
              },
              "embeddings": {
                   "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                   "strategy": {
                        "id": "basic",
                        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
                   }
              }
         }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Text gen">
    When you set the `mode` parameter to `text_gen` the response will be as follows:

    ``````sh theme={null}
    {
         "type": "ai_agent_text_gen",
         "basic_gen": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
              "system_message": "\nIf you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}.\nThe user is working in a collaborative document creation editor called Box Notes.\nAssume that you are helping a business user create documents or to help the user revise existing text.\nYou can help the user in creating templates to be reused or update existing documents, you can respond with text that the user can use to place in the document that the user is editing.\nIf the user simply asks to \"improve\" the text, then simplify the language and remove jargon, unless the user specifies otherwise.\nDo not open with a preamble to the response, just respond.\n",
              "prompt_template": "{user_question}",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 12000,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0.1,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "frequency_penalty": 0.75,
                   "presence_penalty": 0.75,
                   "stop": "<|im_end|>",
                   "type": "openai_params"
              },
              "embeddings": {
                   "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                   "strategy": {
                        "id": "basic",
                        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
                   }
              },
              "content_template": "`````{content}`````"
         }
    }
    ``````
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Extract">
    When you set the `mode` parameter to `extract` the response will be as follows:

    `````sh theme={null}
    {
         "type": "ai_agent_extract",
         "basic_text": {
              "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
              "system_message": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"displayName\": \"key display name\", \"type\": \"string\", \"description\": \"key description\"}]}. Leverage key description and key display name to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, key description can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
              "prompt_template": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 4096,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "top_k": null,
                   "type": "google_params"
              }
         },
         "long_text": {
              "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
              "system_message": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"displayName\": \"key display name\", \"type\": \"string\", \"description\": \"key description\"}]}. Leverage key description and key display name to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, key description can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
              "prompt_template": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 4096,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "top_k": null,
                   "type": "google_params"
              },
              "embeddings": {
                   "model": "azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002",
                   "strategy": {
                        "id": "basic",
                        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
                   }
              }
         }
    }
    `````
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Extract structured">
    When you set the `mode` parameter to `extract_structured` the response will be as follows:

    `````sh theme={null}
    {
         "type": "ai_agent_extract_structured",
         "basic_text": {
              "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
              "system_message": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"prompt\": \"prompt to extract the value\", \"type\": \"date\"}]}. Leverage prompt for each key to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, prompt can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
              "prompt_template": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 4096,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "top_k": null,
                   "type": "google_params"
              }
           },
         "long_text": {
              "model": "google__gemini_1_5_flash_001",
              "system_message": "Respond only in valid json. You are extracting metadata that is name, value pairs from a document. Only output the metadata in valid json form, as {\"name1\":\"value1\",\"name2\":\"value2\"} and nothing else. You will be given the document data and the schema for the metadata, that defines the name, description and type of each of the fields you will be extracting. Schema is of the form {\"fields\": [{\"key\": \"key_name\", \"prompt\": \"prompt to extract the value\", \"type\": \"date\"}]}. Leverage prompt for each key to identify where the key and value pairs are in the document. In certain cases, prompt can also indicate the instructions to perform on the document to obtain the value. Prompt will be in the form of Schema is ``schema`` \n document is ````document````",
              "prompt_template": "If you need to know today's date to respond, it is {current_date}. Schema is ``{user_question}`` \n document is ````{content}````",
              "num_tokens_for_completion": 4096,
              "llm_endpoint_params": {
                   "temperature": 0,
                   "top_p": 1,
                   "top_k": null,
                   "type": "google_params"
                 },
              "embeddings": {
                   "model": "google__textembedding_gecko_003",
                   "strategy": {
                        "id": "basic",
                        "num_tokens_per_chunk": 64
                   }
              }
         }
    }
    `````
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

[override-tutorials]: /guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AI model overrides
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/index



Box updates the default models across the endpoints on a regular basis to stay up to date with the most advanced options.

If your implementation is based on Box AI, a new default model might alter the results in a way that could break or change a downstream process. Switching to a specific version may prevent encountering any issues.

Selecting a specific model may also bring better results to your use case. This is why, you can switch to any model included in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models">supported models</Link> list.

Apart from switching models, you can pass options to further customize the agents used in Box AI implementation and get the responses that suit your use case.

To see specific use cases, check the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">overrides tutorial</Link>.

[ask]: /reference/post-ai-ask#param-ai-agent

[text-gen]: /reference/post-ai-text-gen#param-ai-agent

[agent-default]: /guides/box-ai/ai-agents/get-agent-default-config

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude 3.5 Sonnet
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-5-sonnet-model-card



## Overview

The **AWS Claude 3.5 Sonnet** model is designed to enhance language understanding and generation tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude 3.5 Sonnet**     | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium                       | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_3_5_sonnet`      | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **June 20th, 2024**           | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **April 2024**                | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **8k tokens**                 | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude 3.5 Sonnet documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude 3.7 Sonnet
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-7-sonnet-model-card



## Overview

The **AWS Claude 3.7 Sonnet** model is designed to enhance language understanding and generation tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude 3.7 Sonnet**     | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium                       | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_3_7_sonnet`      | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **February 24, 2025**         | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **October 2024**              | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **8k tokens**                 | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **42**                        | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude 3 Haiku
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-haiku-model-card



## Overview

The **AWS Claude 3 Haiku** model is tailored for various language tasks, including creative writing and conversational AI.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude 3 Haiku**        | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                      | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_3_haiku`         | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **March 13th, 2024**          | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **August 2023**               | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **4k tokens**                 | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **117**                       | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude 3 Haiku documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude 3 Sonnet
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-sonnet-model-card



The **AWS Claude 3 Sonnet** model is designed for advanced language tasks, focusing on comprehension and context handling.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude 3 Sonnet**       | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium                       | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_3_sonnet`        | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **March 4th 2024**            | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **August 2023**               | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **4k tokens**                 | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **49.8**                      | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude 3 Sonnet documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude Haiku 4.5
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-haiku-model-card



The **AWS Claude Haiku 4.5** model is optimized for high-volume, low-latency applications. It provides strong coding performance with improved speed and cost efficiency compared to larger models.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude Haiku 4.5**      | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Standard**                  | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_4_5_haiku`       | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **October 15th, 2025**        | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **February 2025**             | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **64k tokens**                | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude Haiku 4.5 documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/anthropic/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude Opus 4.5
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-opus-model-card



The **AWS Claude Opus 4.5** model is designed for developers building sophisticated AI agents that can reason, plan, and perform complex tasks with minimal oversight.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude Opus 4.5**       | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**                   | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_4_5_opus`        | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **November 24th, 2025**       | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **March 2025**                | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **64k tokens**                | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude Opus 4.5 documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/anthropic/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude Sonnet 4.5
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-sonnet-model-card



The **AWS Claude Sonnet 4.5** model is a high-performance model designed for building complex agents, delivering leading coding capabilities, and executing across development tasks. It excels at autonomously planning and executing complex, multi-step workflows and is particularly effective in areas like finance, research, and cybersecurity.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude Sonnet 4.5**     | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**                   | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_4_5_sonnet`      | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **September 29th, 2025**      | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **January 2025**              | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **64k tokens**                | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude Sonnet 4.5 documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/anthropic/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude 4 Opus
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-opus-model-card



The **AWS Claude 4 Opus** model excels at coding and complex problem-solving, powering frontier agent products. It's possible to run Claude Code in the background, enabling developers to assign long-running coding tasks for Opus to handle independently.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude 4 Opus**         | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium                       | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_4_opus`          | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **March 4th 2024**            | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **August 2023**               | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **32k tokens**                | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude 4 Opus documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Claude 4 Sonnet
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-sonnet-model-card



The **AWS Claude 4 Sonnet** model delivers superior coding and reasoning while responding more precisely to your instructions, and brings frontier performance to everyday use cases.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Claude 4 Sonnet**       | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**                   | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `aws__claude_4_sonnet`        | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **May 22nd 2025**             | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **November 2024**             | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **64k tokens**                | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Claude 4 Sonnet documentation][aws-claude].

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# AWS Titan Text Lite
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-titan-text-lite-model-card



The **AWS Titan Text Lite** model is designed for advanced language processing, capable of handling extensive contexts, making it suitable for complex tasks,
although the model itself is lightweight.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **AWS Titan Text Lite**       | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                      | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `aws__titan_text_lite`        | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Amazon Web Services (AWS)** | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Anthropic**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **September 2024**            | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **Not provided**              | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **128k tokens**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **4k tokens**                 | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**             | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official AWS Titan documentation][aws-titan].

[aws-titan]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/titan/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Azure OpenAI GPT-4.1 mini
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4-1-mini-model-card



**Azure OpenAI GPT-4.1 mini** is a multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-4.1 mini**              | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                      | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `azure__openai__gpt_4.1_mini` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Microsoft Azure**           | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Microsoft Azure**           | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **April 14th, 2025**          | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **May 2024**                  | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**                 | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **32k tokens**                | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **87.5**                      | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                        | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Azure OpenAI GPT-4o documentation][azure-ai-mini-4o-model].

[azure-ai-mini-4o-model]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models?tabs=python-secure#gpt-4o-and-gpt-4-turbo

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Azure OpenAI GPT-4.1
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4-1-model-card



**Azure OpenAI GPT-4.1** is a multimodal model, highly efficient in handling complex, multi-step tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-4.1**              | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium                  | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `azure__openai__gpt_4_1` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Microsoft Azure**      | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Microsoft Azure**      | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **April 14th, 2025**     | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **May 2024**             | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**            | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **32k tokens**           | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **87.5**                 | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                   | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Azure OpenAI GPT-4o documentation][azure-ai-mini-4o-model].

[azure-ai-mini-4o-model]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models?tabs=python-secure#gpt-4o-and-gpt-4-turbo

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Azure OpenAI GPT-4o Mini
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4o-mini-model-card



**Azure OpenAI GPT-4o Mini** is a multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                        | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ---------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-4o mini**              | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                     | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Microsoft Azure**          | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Microsoft Azure**          | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **July 18th, 2024**          | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **October 2023**             | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **128k tokens**              | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **16k tokens**               | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **85.4**                     | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                       | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Usage

Box Webapp uses this model to cover the following use cases:

* Creating content
* Editing content
* Creating summaries
* Single doc Q\&A on text

Box AI API uses this model to cover the following use cases:

* Creating content
* Editing content
* Creating summaries
* Single doc Q\&A on text
* Extracting metadata

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Azure OpenAI GPT-4o Mini documentation][azure-ai-mini-4o-model].

[azure-ai-mini-4o-model]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models?tabs=python-secure#gpt-4o-and-gpt-4-turbo

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Azure OpenAI GPT-4o
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4o-model-card



**Azure OpenAI GPT-4o** is a multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-4o**              | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium                 | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `azure__openai__gpt_4o` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Microsoft Azure**     | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Microsoft Azure**     | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **May 13th, 2024**      | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **September 2023**      | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **128k tokens**         | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **2k tokens**           | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **87.5**                | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                  | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Azure OpenAI GPT-4o documentation][azure-ai-mini-4o-model].

[azure-ai-mini-4o-model]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models?tabs=python-secure#gpt-4o-and-gpt-4-turbo

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Azure text-embedding-ada-002
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-text-embedding-ada-002-model-card



**Azure text-embedding-ada-002** is a multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | --------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **text-embedding-ada-002**              | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                                | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Microsoft Azure**                     | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Microsoft Azure**                     | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **December 2022**                       | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **September 2021**                      | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **8k tokens**                           | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **Not applicable**                      | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **1000**                                | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                                  | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Azure Embeddings models documentation][azure-ai-embeddings].

[azure-ai-embeddings]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models#embeddings

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Google Gemini 2.0 Flash
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-0-flash-001-model-card



**Google Gemini 2.0 Flash** is a multimodal model designed for optimal for high-volume, high-frequency tasks at scale. It capable of multimodal reasoning and has a context window of 1 million tokens.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 2.0 Flash**    | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 2.0 Flash**    | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                       | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `google__gemini_2_0_flash_001` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Google**                     | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Google**                     | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **February 5th 2025**          | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **June 2024**                  | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**                  | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **8k tokens**                  | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **168**                        | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                         | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Google Gemini 2.0 Flash documentation][vertex-ai-gemini-models].

[vertex-ai-gemini-models]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/models#gemini-models

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Google Gemini 2.0 Flash Lite
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-0-flash-lite-preview-02-05



**Google Gemini 2.0 Flash Lite** is a multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks. It is designed for high-volume, low-latency tasks, making it highly efficient for large-scale use cases like summarization, multimodal processing, and categorization but with higher quality than Gemini 1.5 Flash.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | --------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 2.0 Flash Lite**        | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                                | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `google__gemini_2_0_flash_lite_preview` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Google**                              | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Google**                              | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **February 5th 2025**                   | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **June 2024**                           | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**                           | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **8k tokens**                           | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **168**                                 | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                                  | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Google Gemini 2.0 Flash Lite documentation][vertex-ai-gemini-models].

[vertex-ai-gemini-models]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/models#gemini-models

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Google Gemini 2.5 Flash
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-5-flash-model-card



**Google Gemini 2.5 Flash** is a multimodal model, offering well-rounded capabilities. It features thinking capabilities, which lets you see the thinking process the model goes through when generating its response.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 2.5 Flash**     | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Standard                        | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `google__gemini_2_5_flash`      | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Google**                      | The trusted organization that securely hosts the LLM.                                                                                                                                                |
| Model provider        | **Google**                      | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **June 17th 2025**              | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **January 2025**                | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**                   | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **64k tokens**                  | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Estimated between 163 - 300** | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                          | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Google Gemini 2.5 Flash documentation][vertex-ai-gemini-models].

[vertex-ai-gemini-models]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/models#gemini-models


# Google Gemini 2.5 Pro
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-5-pro-model-card



**Google Gemini 2.5 Pro** is a multimodal model capable of solving complex problems. It can comprehend vast datasets and challenging problems from different information sources, including text, audio, images, video, and even entire code repositories.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 2.5 Pro** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**               | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `google__gemini_2_5_pro`  | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Google**                | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Google**                | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **June 17th 2025**        | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **January 2025**          | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**             | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **65k tokens**            | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**         | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                    | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Google Gemini 2.5 Pro documentation][vertex-ai-gemini-2-5-pro].

[vertex-ai-gemini-2-5-pro]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/models/gemini/2-5-pro

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Google Gemini 3 Flash
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-3-flash-model-card



**Google Gemini 3 Flash** is a natively multimodal model designed for speed and efficiency across a wide range of tasks. Delivers strong performance across text, image, and code generation while maintaining cost-effectiveness.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 3 Flash** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**               | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `google__gemini_3_flash`  | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Google**                | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Google**                | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **December 17th, 2025**   | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **January 2025**          | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**             | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **65k tokens**            | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**         | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                    | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Google Gemini 3 Pro documentation][vertex-ai-gemini-3-flash].

[vertex-ai-gemini-3-flash]: https://docs.cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/models/gemini/3-flash


# Google Gemini 3 Pro
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-3-pro-model-card



**Google Gemini 3 Pro** is a natively multimodal model for complex tasks, which can comprehend vast datasets and solve challenging problems by processing different information sources, including text, audio, images, video, and entire code repositories.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **Google Gemini 3 Pro** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**             | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `google__gemini_3_pro`  | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **Google**              | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **Google**              | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **November 18th, 2025** | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **January 2025**        | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**           | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **65k tokens**          | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**       | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                  | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Google Gemini 3 Pro documentation][vertex-ai-gemini-3-pro].

[vertex-ai-gemini-3-pro]: https://docs.cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/models/gemini/3-pro


# IBM Llama 3.2 Vision Instruct
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-3-2-90b-vision-instruct-model-card



**IBM Llama 3.2 Vision Instruct** is a model built for image-in, text-out use cases such as document-level understanding, interpretation of charts and graphs, and captioning of images.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value                                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **IBM Llama 3.2 Vision Instruct**     | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category             | Standard                              | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name             | `ibm__llama__3_2_90b_vision_instruct` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer              | **IBM**                               | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider             | **Meta**                              | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date               | **September 25th 2024**               | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **December 2023**                     | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window       | **128k**                              | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens      | **Not specified**                     | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput       | **Not specified**                     | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source                | **Yes**                               | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |
| IP infringement protection | **No**                                | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs.   |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official IBM Llama 3.2 Vision Instruct documentation][IBM].

[IBM]: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/watsonx/w-and-w/2.1.0?topic=models-third-party-foundation#llama-3-2-vision


# IBM Llama 4 Maverick
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-4-maverick-model-card



**IBM Llama 4 Maverick** is a natively multimodal AI model using a mixture-of-experts architecture, designed for high-performance text and image understanding with support for 12 languages.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **IBM Llama 4 Maverick** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Model category             | **Standard**             | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                    |
| API model name             | `ibm__llama_4_maverick`  | The name of the model that is used in the [Box AI API for model overrides]. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work.                                                             |
| Hosting layer              | **IBM**                  | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                  |
| Model provider             | **Meta**                 | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                         |
| Release date               | **April 5th, 2025**      | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **August 2024**          | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                               |
| Input context window       | **1m**                   | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                        |
| Maximum output tokens      | **Not specified**        | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                       |
| Empirical throughput       | **Not specified**        | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                            |
| Open source                | **Yes**                  | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                         |
| IP infringement protection | **No**                   | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs. |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official IBM Llama 4 Scout documentation][IBM].

[Box AI API for model overrides]: /guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides

[IBM]: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/watsonx/w-and-w/2.2.0?topic=models-third-party-foundation#llama-4


# IBM Llama 4 Scout
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-4-scout-model-card



**IBM Llama 4 Scout** is an auto-regressive language model that uses a mixture-of-experts (MoE) architecture and incorporates early fusion for native multimodality.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **IBM Llama 4 Scout** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category             | Standard              | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name             | `ibm__llama_4_scout`  | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer              | **IBM**               | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider             | **Meta**              | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date               | **April 5th 2025**    | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **August 2024**       | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window       | **10m**               | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens      | **Not specified**     | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput       | **Not specified**     | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source                | **Yes**               | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |
| IP infringement protection | **No**                | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs.   |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official IBM Llama 4 Scout documentation][IBM].

[IBM]: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/watsonx/w-and-w/2.1.0?topic=models-third-party-foundation


# IBM Mistral Medium 3
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-mistral-medium-3-model-card



The **IBM Mistral Medium 3** model is a high-performance enterprise-grade model that delivers frontier-level capabilities, excelling in coding, STEM reasoning, and multimodal understanding.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value                      | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **IBM Mistral Medium 3**   | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category             | **Standard**               | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name             | `ibm__mistral_medium_2505` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer              | **IBM**                    | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider             | **Mistral AI**             | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date               | **May 2025**               | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **Not specified**          | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window       | **128k tokens**            | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens      | **Not specified**          | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput       | **Not specified**          | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source                | **No**                     | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |
| IP infringement protection | **No**                     | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs.   |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Mistral AI documentation][mistral-ai].

[mistral-ai]: https://docs.mistral.ai/getting-started/models/models_overview/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# IBM Mistral Small 3.1
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-mistral-small-3-1-model-card



The **IBM Mistral Small 3.1** model is a fast, efficient open-source model with multimodal capabilities and extended context window. It delivers strong performance across text and vision tasks while maintaining low latency, making it suitable for a wide range of applications from conversational AI to document processing.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value                                      | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **IBM Mistral Small 3.1**                  | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category             | **Standard**                               | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name             | `ibm__mistral_small_3_1_24b_instruct_2503` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer              | **IBM**                                    | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider             | **Mistral AI**                             | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date               | **March 2025**                             | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **Not specified**                          | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window       | **128k tokens**                            | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens      | **Not specified**                          | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput       | **150**                                    | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source                | **Yes**                                    | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |
| IP infringement protection | **No**                                     | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs.   |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official Mistral AI documentation][mistral-ai].

[mistral-ai]: https://docs.mistral.ai/getting-started/models/models_overview/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Supported AI models
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/index



Box supports a variety of AI models, categorized along two dimensions: access level and capability tier.

## Access levels

### Core models

These models are built into Box AI and available by default for all customers. No configuration is required.

### Customer-enabled models

These models require activation by Box admins in the Admin Console or a request to Box to enable them. Some models may be subject to additional terms or pricing.

## Capability tiers

### Standard models

Designed for high-speed, cost-efficient tasks like basic summarization, Q\&A, and structured data extraction from shorter or simpler documents. Ideal for high-volume, low-complexity use cases.

### Premium models

Offer more advanced reasoning, larger context windows, and better performance on long-form, complex, or domain-specific content. Suitable for sophisticated tasks like multi-step reasoning, understanding large taxonomies, and analyzing lengthy or unstructured documents.

<Note>
  A model can be both customer-enabled and premium, or core and standard. In other words, access level and capability tiers are independent categorizations (for example, models can be either capability tier regardless of access level). The two categorizations are complementary.
</Note>

## Using models

How to use the supported AI models:

* get the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default">default AI agent configuration</Link>,
* override the AI agent configuration used in <Link href="/reference/post-ai-ask">`POST 2.0/ai/ask`</Link>, <Link href="/reference/post-ai-text-gen">`POST 2.0/ai/text_gen`</Link>, <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract">`POST 2.0/ai/extract`</Link>, <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract-structured">`POST 2.0/ai/extract_structured`</Link> endpoints.

When using the `model` parameter your API calls, use the **API Name** visible on each CustomCard and model card.

For example, to get the AI agent configuration for a specific model, use the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default#param-model">model</Link> parameter and provide the `azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini` API name. Make sure you use **two underscores** after the provider name.

<Note>
  The list may change depending on the model availability.

  Models offered in **Beta** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.
</Note>

## Core Box AI models

Box AI is powered by the following AI models. These models are integrated with Box AI to facilitate various use cases while adhering to enterprise grade standards. Below, you’ll find information about each model, including its capabilities, intended applications, and applicable usage guidelines.

<Columns>
  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="openai__gpt_5_2" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-2-model-card">
    業界を越えたコーディングやエージェント型タスク向けのマルチモーダルモデル。
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="openai__gpt_5_1" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-1-model-card">
    A multimodal model with enterprise-grade performance and adaptive reasoning.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="openai__gpt_5" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-model-card">
    A multimodal model with advanced reasoning and long-context understanding.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="openai__gpt_5_mini" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-mini-model-card">
    A model designed for well-defined tasks and precise prompts.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="azure__openai__gpt_4_1" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4-1-model-card">
    A multimodal model, highly efficient in handling complex, multi-step tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="azure__openai__gpt_4_1_mini" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4-1-mini-model-card">
    A multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="azure__openai__gpt_4o" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4o-model-card">
    A multimodal model, highly efficient in handling complex, multi-step tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-openai-gpt-4o-mini-model-card">
    A multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="azure__openai__text_embedding_ada_002" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/azure-text-embedding-ada-002-model-card">
    A most capable 2nd generation text embedding model. Skilled in text search, code search, and sentence similarity.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gemini.svg" title="google__gemini_2_5_pro" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-5-pro-model-card">
    Gemini multimodal model with a 1 million token context window and advanced reasoning capabilities.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gemini.svg" title="google__gemini_2_5_flash" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-5-flash-model-card">
    Gemini multimodal model offering well-round capabilites, including thinking capabilities.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gemini.svg" title="google__gemini_2_0_flash_001" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-0-flash-001-model-card">
    Gemini multimodal model designed for optimal high-volume, high-frequency tasks at scale.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gemini.svg" title="google__gemini_2_0_flash_lite_preview" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-0-flash-lite-preview-02-05">
    Gemini multimodal model designed to handle lightweight tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_4_5_sonnet" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-sonnet-model-card">
    A model that excels at complex agents, coding, and autonomous multi-step workflows.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_4_5_haiku" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-haiku-model-card">
    A fast model with near-frontier intelligence.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_4_sonnet" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-sonnet-model-card">
    A model that brings frontier performance to everyday use cases.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_4_opus" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-opus-model-card">
    A model that excels at coding and complex problem-solving, powering frontier agent products.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_3_7_sonnet" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-7-sonnet-model-card">
    A model designed to enhance language understanding and generation tasks
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_3_5_sonnet" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-5-sonnet-model-card">
    A model designed to enhance language understanding and generation tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_3_sonnet" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-sonnet-model-card">
    A model designed for advanced language tasks, focusing on comprehension and context handling.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_3_haiku" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-3-haiku-model-card">
    A model tailored for various language tasks, including creative writing and conversational AI.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__titan_text_lite" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-titan-text-lite-model-card">
    A model capable of advanced language processing, handling extensive contexts, making it suitable for complex tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="ibm__llama_4_maverick" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-4-maverick-model-card">
    A natively multimodal model that utilizes a mixture-of-experts architecture for optimized resource use.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="ibm__llama_4_scout" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-4-scout-model-card">
    A natively multimodal AI model that enables text and multimodal experiences.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="ibm__llama_3_2_90b_vision_instruct" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-3-2-90b-vision-instruct-model-card">
    A model built for document-level understanding, interpretation of charts and graphs, and captioning of images.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="ibm__mistral_medium_2505" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-mistral-medium-3-model-card">
    High-performance enterprise model for coding and advanced reasoning.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="ibm__mistral_small_3_1_24b_instruct_2503" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-mistral-small-3-1-model-card">
    Fast open-source multimodal model with low latency.
  </CustomCard>
</Columns>

## Customer-enabled models

Certain Box AI customers may enable additional AI models upon their request and/or otherwise made available to them through their admin console. Use of these models may be subject to additional terms. By selecting a customer-enabled model, customer acknowledges that their data may be processed by additional [subprocessors][subprocessors] of their choice.

<Columns>
  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gemini.svg" title="google__gemini_3_pro" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-3-pro-model-card">
    A natively multimodal model for complex tasks with a 1 million token context window.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gemini.svg" title="google__gemini_3_flash" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-3-flash-model-card">
    A natively multimodal model designed for speed and efficiency across a wide range of tasks.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="xai__grok_3_beta" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/xai-grok-3-beta-model-card">
    A model that excels at enterprise use cases like data extraction, coding, and text summarization.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="xai__grok_3_mini_reasoning_beta" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/xai-grok-3-mini-beta-model-card">
    A lightweight model that is great for logic-based tasks that do not require deep domain knowledge.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/aws.svg" title="aws__claude_4_5_opus" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-opus-model-card">
    A premium model combining maximum intelligence with practical performance.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/guides-box-ai-ai-models/gpt.svg" title="openai__gpt_o3" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-o3-model-card">
    A multimodal model, highly efficient in handling complex, multi-step tasks.
  </CustomCard>
</Columns>

[azure-ai-mini-4o-model]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models?tabs=python-secure#gpt-4o-and-gpt-4-turbo

[vertex-ai-model]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/models#models

[vertex-ai-gemini-models]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/models#gemini-models

[vertex-text-models]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/text

[azure-ai-embeddings]: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/ai-services/openai/concepts/models#embeddings

[aws-claude]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/claude/

[aws-titan]: https://aws.amazon.com/bedrock/titan/

[subprocessors]: https://www.box.com/legal/subprocessors


# OpenAI GPT-5.1
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-1-model-card



**OpenAI GPT-5.1** is a multimodal model designed for coding and agentic tasks with configurable reasoning effort.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-5.1**              | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**              | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `openai__gpt_5_1`        | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **OpenAI**               | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **OpenAI**               | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **November 13th, 2025**  | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **September 30th, 2024** | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **400k tokens**          | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **128k tokens**          | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**        | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                   | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official OpenAI GPT-5 documentation][openai-gpt-5-model].

[openai-gpt-5-model]: https://platform.openai.com/docs/models/gpt-5.1


# OpenAI GPT-5.2
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-2-model-card



**OpenAI GPT-5.2** is a multimodal model designed for complex tasks that require broad world knowledge.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | ----------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-5.2**             | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**             | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `openai__gpt_5_2`       | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **OpenAI**              | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **OpenAI**              | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **December 11th, 2025** | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **August 31st, 2025**   | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **400k tokens**         | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **128k tokens**         | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**       | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**                  | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official OpenAI GPT-5.2 documentation][openai-gpt-5-model].

[openai-gpt-5-model]: https://platform.openai.com/docs/models/gpt-5.2


# OpenAI GPT-5 mini
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-mini-model-card



**OpenAI GPT-5 mini** is a faster, more cost-efficient version of GPT-5 ideal for well-defined tasks and precise prompts.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-5 mini**       | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Standard**         | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `openai__gpt_5_mini` | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **OpenAI**           | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **OpenAI**           | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **August 7th, 2025** | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **May 31st, 2024**   | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **400k tokens**      | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **128k tokens**      | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**    | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**               | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official OpenAI GPT-5 mini documentation][openai-gpt-5-mini-model].

[openai-gpt-5-mini-model]: https://platform.openai.com/docs/models/gpt-5-mini


# OpenAI GPT-5
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-model-card



**OpenAI GPT-5** is a multimodal model with advanced reasoning and long-context understanding.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT-5**            | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | **Premium**          | The category of the model: Standard or Premium.                                                                                                                                                      |
| API model name        | `openai__gpt_5`      | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **OpenAI**           | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **OpenAI**           | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **August 7th, 2025** | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **October 2024**     | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **1m tokens**        | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **100k tokens**      | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**    | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**               | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official OpenAI GPT-5 documentation][openai-gpt-5-model].

[openai-gpt-5-model]: https://openai.com/index/introducing-gpt-5/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# OpenAI GPT o3
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-o3-model-card



**OpenAI GPT o3** is specifically designed to tackle reasoning and problem-solving tasks with increased focus and capability. It spends more time processing and understanding the user's request, making it exceptionally strong in areas like science, coding, and math compared to previous iterations.

## Model details

| Item                  | Value                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------------- | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name            | **GPT o3**           | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category        | Premium              | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name        | `openai__gpt_o3`     | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer         | **OpenAI**           | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider        | **OpenAI**           | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date          | **April 16th, 2025** | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date | **May 2024**         | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window  | **200k tokens**      | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens | **100k tokens**      | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput  | **Not specified**    | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source           | **No**               | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official OpenAI GPT o3 documentation][openai-o3-model].

[openai-o3-model]: https://openai.com/index/introducing-o3-and-o4-mini/


# xAI Grok 3 Beta
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/xai-grok-3-beta-model-card



**xAI Grok 3 Beta** is a model that excels at enterprise use cases like data extraction, coding, and text summarization. Possesses deep domain knowledge in finance, healthcare, law, and science.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **xAI Grok 3 Beta** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category             | Premium             | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name             | `xai__grok_3_beta`  | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer              | **xAI**             | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider             | **xAI**             | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date               | **April 17th 2025** | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **January 2025**    | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window       | **1m tokens**       | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens      | **131k tokens**     | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput       | **Not specified**   | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source                | **No**              | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |
| IP infringement protection | **No**              | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs.   |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official xAI Grok 3 Mini Beta documentation][xai-grok-models].

[xai-grok-models]: https://docs.x.ai/docs/models

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# xAI Grok 3 Mini Reasoning Beta
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/xai-grok-3-mini-beta-model-card



**xAI Grok 3 Mini Reasoning Beta** is a lightweight model that thinks before responding. Fast, smart, and great for logic-based tasks that do not require deep domain knowledge. The raw thinking traces are accessible.

## Model details

| Item                       | Value                              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Model name                 | **xAI Grok 3 Mini Reasoning Beta** | The name of the model.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Model category             | Standard                           | The category of the model - standard or premium.                                                                                                                                                     |
| API model name             | `xai__grok_3_mini_reasoning_beta`  | The name of the model that is used in the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">Box AI API for model overrides</Link>. The user must provide this exact name for the API to work. |
| Hosting layer              | **xAI**                            | The trusted organization that securely hosts LLM.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Model provider             | **xAI**                            | The organization that provides this model.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Release date               | **April 9th 2025**                 | The release date for the model.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Knowledge cutoff date      | **unknown**                        | The date after which the model does not get any information updates.                                                                                                                                 |
| Input context window       | **131k tokens**                    | The number of tokens supported by the input context window.                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum output tokens      | **131k tokens**                    | The number of tokens that can be generated by the model in a single request.                                                                                                                         |
| Empirical throughput       | **Not specified**                  | The number of tokens the model can generate per second.                                                                                                                                              |
| Open source                | **No**                             | Specifies if the model's code is available for public use.                                                                                                                                           |
| IP infringement protection | **No**                             | Use of this model does not come with any intellectual property rights assurances or protections from Box. Please consider any potential IP issues that might arise from using the model’s outputs.   |

## Additional documentation

For additional information, see [official xAI Grok 3 Mini Beta documentation][xai-grok-models].

[xai-grok-models]: https://docs.x.ai/docs/models

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Ask questions to Box AI
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/ask-questions



<Note>
  Box AI API is available to all customers Business and above.
</Note>

Box AI API allows you to
ask a question about a supplied file or
a set of files, and get a response based on
the content.
For example, while viewing a document in Box,
you can ask Box AI to summarize the content.

## Before you start

Make sure you followed the steps listed in <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites">getting started with Box AI</Link> to create a platform app and authenticate.

## Send a request

To send a request containing your question,
use the `POST /2.0/ai/ask` endpoint and
provide the mandatory parameters.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/ask" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
           "mode": "single_item_qa",
           "prompt": "What is the value provided by public APIs based on this document?",
           "items": [
              {
              "type": "file",
              "id": "9842787262"
              }
           ],
           "dialogue_history": [
                {
                "prompt": "Make my email about public APIs sound more professional",
                "answer": "Here is the first draft of your professional email about public APIs",
                "created_at": "2013-12-12T10:53:43-08:00"
                }
            ],
            "include_citations": true,
            "ai_agent": {
              "type": "ai_agent_ask",
              "long_text": {
                "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
                "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, and I have $8000 and want to spend a week in the Azores. What should I see?",
              },
              "basic_text": {
                "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
             }
           }
        }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.ai.createAiAsk({
    mode: 'single_item_qa' as AiAskModeField,
    prompt: 'which direction sun rises',
    items: [
      {
        id: fileToAsk.id,
        type: 'file' as AiItemAskTypeField,
        content: 'Sun rises in the East',
      } satisfies AiItemAsk,
    ],
    aiAgent: aiAskAgentConfig,
  } satisfies AiAsk);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai.create_ai_ask(
      CreateAiAskMode.SINGLE_ITEM_QA,
      "which direction sun rises",
      [
          AiItemAsk(
              id=file_to_ask.id,
              type=AiItemAskTypeField.FILE,
              content="Sun rises in the East",
          )
      ],
      ai_agent=ai_ask_agent_config,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Ai.CreateAiAskAsync(requestBody: new AiAsk(mode: AiAskModeField.SingleItemQa, prompt: "which direction sun rises", items: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiItemAsk(id: fileToAsk.Id, type: AiItemAskTypeField.File) { Content = "Sun rises in the East" }})));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.ai.createAiAsk(requestBody: AiAsk(mode: AiAskModeField.singleItemQa, prompt: "which direction sun rises", items: [AiItemAsk(id: fileToAsk.id, type: AiItemAskTypeField.file, content: "Sun rises in the East")]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAi().createAiAsk(new AiAsk.Builder(AiAskModeField.SINGLE_ITEM_QA, "which direction sun rises", Arrays.asList(new AiItemAsk.Builder(fileToAsk.getId(), AiItemAskTypeField.FILE).content("Sun rises in the East").build())).aiAgent(aiAskAgentConfig).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxAIResponse response = BoxAI.sendAIRequest(
      api,
      "What is the content of the file?",
      Collections.singletonList("123456", BoxAIItem.Type.FILE),
      BoxAI.Mode.SINGLE_ITEM_QA
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  items = [{
      "id": "1582915952443",
      "type": "file",
      "content": "More information about public APIs"
  }]
  ai_agent = {
      'type': 'ai_agent_ask',
      'basic_text_multi': {
          'model': 'openai__gpt_3_5_turbo'
      }
  }
  answer = client.send_ai_question(
      items=items, 
      prompt="What is this file?",
      mode="single_item_qa",
      ai_agent=ai_agent
  )
  print(answer)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxAIResponse response = await client.BoxAIManager.SendAIQuestionAsync(
      new BoxAIAskRequest
      {
          Prompt = "What is the name of the file?",
          Items = new List<BoxAIAskItem>() { new BoxAIAskItem() { Id = "12345" } },
          Mode = AiAskMode.single_item_qa
      };
  );
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.ai.ask(
      {
          prompt: 'What is the capital of France?',
          items: [
              {
                  type: 'file',
                  id: '12345'
              }
          ],
          mode: 'single_item_qa'
      })
      .then(response => {
          /* response -> {
              "answer": "Paris",
              "created_at": "2021-10-01T00:00:00Z",
              "completion_reason": "done"
          } */
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you need to pass the following parameters.
Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 | Available values                                                | Example                                                                                                                                                                     |
| ----------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **`mode`**                    | The type of request. It can be a question about a single file or a set of files. For a single text files, Box AI API supports up to 1MB of text representation. If the file size exceeds 1MB, the first 1MB of text representation will be processed. If you want to list multiple files, the limit is 25 files. Box AI handles image documents with a resolution of 1024 x 1024 pixels, with a maximum of 5 images or 5 pages for multi-page images. If the number of image or image pages exceeds 5, the first 5 images or pages will be processed. If you set mode to `single_item_qa`, the items array can list only one element. Currently Box AI does not support multi-modal requests. If both images and text are sent Box AI will only process the text.                                                                           | `single_item_qa`, `multiple_item_qa`                            | `single_item_qa`                                                                                                                                                            |
| **`prompt`**                  | The question about your document or content. The prompt's length cannot exceed 10000 characters.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |                                                                 | `What is this document about?`                                                                                                                                              |
| `dialogue_history.prompt`     | The prompt previously provided by the client and answered by the Large Language Model (LLM).                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                | `Make my email about public APIs sound more professional`       |                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `dialogue_history.answer`     | The answer previously provided by the LLM.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  | `Here is a draft of your professional email about public APIs.` |                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `dialogue_history.created_at` | The ISO date formatted timestamp of when the previous answer to the prompt was created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     | `2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00`                                     |                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `include_citations`           | Specifies if the citations should be returned in the answer.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                | `true`, `false`                                                 | `true`                                                                                                                                                                      |
| **`items.id`**                | The Box file ID you want to provide as input.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |                                                                 | `112233445566`                                                                                                                                                              |
| **`items.type`**              | The type of the provided input. Currently, it can be a single file or multiple files.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | `file`                                                          | `file`                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `items.content`               | The content of the item. Usually it is the text representation.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |                                                                 | `An application programming interface (API) is a way for two or more computer programs or components to communicate with each other. It is a type of software interface...` |
| `ai_agent`                    | The AI agent used to override the default agent configuration. You can use this parameter replace the default LLM with a custom one using the <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_ask#param_basic_text_model">`model`</Link> parameter for shorter and longer texts, tweak the base <Link href="/reference/ai_agent_ask#param_basic_text_prompt_template">`prompt`</Link> to allow for a more customized user experience, or change an LLM parameter, such as `temperature`, to make the results more or less creative. Before you use the `ai_agent` parameter, you can get the default configuration using the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default">`GET 2.0/ai_agent_default`</Link> request. For specific use cases, see the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">AI model overrides tutorial</Link>. |                                                                 |                                                                                                                                                                             |

## Use cases

## Ask questions about an item

This example shows how to ask a question about one or more items using the `POST ask/ai` API. When using this endpoint, remember to specify the `mode` parameter depending on the number of items you want to supply.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/ask" \
     -H "content-type: application/json" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
     -d '{
    "mode": "single_item_qa",
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "12345678",
            "type": "file"
        }
    ],
    "prompt": "List the guidelines on creating questions in Box AI for Documents"
}'
```

The response will be as follows:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "The guidelines for working with questions in Box AI for Documents are as follows:\n\n1. Box AI pulls information only from the document loaded in preview.\n2. If questions fall outside the scope of the document, Box AI will inform you that it cannot answer.\n3. Be specific when asking questions; use parameters like numbered lists, brevity, tables, and central themes or key points.\n4. Aim to stay within the scope of the document.\n5. Focus on text-based responses only.",
    "created_at": "2024-11-04T02:30:09.557-08:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

## Ask questions with `content` parameter

If you use the `content` parameter as the source of input for Box AI, it will use it as the primary source.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/ask" \
     -H "content-type: application/json" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
     -d '{
    "mode": "single_item_qa",
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "12345678",
            "type": "file",
            "content": "This is a document about Box AI For documents. It consists of the functionality summary and guidelines on how to work with Box AI. Additionally, it provides a set of best practices for creating questions."
        }
    ],
    "prompt": "List the guidelines on creating questions in Box AI for Documents"
}'
```

The response to this request is based on the `content` parameter instead of the file's content:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "The document does not provide specific guidelines on working with questions in Box AI for Documents. It only mentions that it includes a set of best practices for creating questions, but the details of those guidelines are not included in the text provided. If you have more information or another document, I can help further!",
    "created_at": "2024-11-04T02:31:51.125-08:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

## Ask questions with `citations` parameter

Setting the `citations` parameter to `true` causes the response to include excerpts from source file or files Box AI used to compile the answer.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/ask" \
     -H "content-type: application/json" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
     -d '{
    "mode": "multiple_item_qa",
    "include_citations": true,
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "12345678",
            "type": "file"
        }
    ],
    "prompt": "List the guidelines on working with responses in Box AI for Documents"
}'
```

The resulting answer includes the source file and direct content citations.

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "The guidelines for working with questions in Box AI for Documents are as follows:\n\n1. Box AI pulls information only from the document loaded in preview, and cannot answer questions outside its scope.\n2. Be specific when asking questions; use parameters like numbered lists, brevity, tables, and central themes or key points.\n3. Examples of better phrasing include asking for a numbered list of key points instead of just \"list key points,\" and requesting a succinct outline of important points rather than a general inquiry about the document's purpose.\n4. Stay within the scope of the document and focus on text-based responses only.",
    "created_at": "2024-11-04T02:35:00.578-08:00",
    "completion_reason": "done",
    "citations": [
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "12345678",
            "name": "Box AI for Documents.docx",
            "content": "Guidelines for Box AI questions\nBox AI pulls information only from the document you loaded in preview."
        },
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "12345678",
            "name": "Box AI for Documents.docx",
            "content": "If you ask any questions outside of the scope of the document, Box AI informs you that it cannot answer the question with the information provided."
        },
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "12345678",
            "name": "Box AI for Documents.docx",
            "content": "As you ask Box AI to analyze your document, consider these suggestions:\n· Be as specific as possible."
        },
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "12345678",
            "name": "Box AI for Documents.docx",
            "content": "Box AI for Documents\n\nWhen viewing a document in Box, you can ask Box AI to summarize document content, search key points, and write outline drafts based on your document files."
        }
    ]
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Override AI model configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/default-agent-overrides



## Before you start

Make sure you followed the steps listed in <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites">getting started with Box AI</Link> to create a platform app and authenticate.
To get more context, read about <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">agent overrides</Link>.

## Override prompt

This example shows how to use the `prompt_template` parameter to change the
query result.
The first step is to ask Box AI to summarize a document about Box AI for Documents.
The `mode` parameter is set to `single_item_qa` because only one document is supplied.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/ask" \
-H "content-type: application/json" \
-H "authorization: <Bearer TOKEN>" \
-d '{
     "mode": "single_item_qa",
     "prompt": "Summarize this article about Box AI for Documents",
     "items": [
          {
               "type": "file",
               "id": "123467890"
          }
       ]
     }'
```

You will get a response similar to the following:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "Box AI for Documents is a tool that enhances document analysis by allowing users to summarize content, identify key points, and draft outlines directly from files in Box. It supports various file types, including text documents, spreadsheets, and presentation slides. Users can initiate interactions with Box AI through the web app, where they can select suggestions or type specific questions. Responses are generated in real time, and users have options to save or clear chat history. The document also provides guidelines for effective inquiries and troubleshooting tips for potential issues with using Box AI.",
    "created_at": "2024-10-08T00:29:07.283-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

To further improve the result, you can use the `prompt_template` parameter to add some more instructions for Box AI. In this example, let's change the tone of the response.

```sh theme={null}
{
    "prompt": "Summarize this article about Box AI for Documents",
    "mode": "single_item_qa",
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "123467890",
            "type": "file"
        }
    ],
    "ai_agent": {
        "type": "ai_agent_ask",
        "basic_text": {
            "prompt_template": "prompt_template": "{user_question} Write the summary in an informal way.{content}"
        },
      }
    }
}
```

The response would be slightly less formal:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "Box AI for Documents is a tool that helps you analyze and gain insights from your documents in Box. You can use it to summarize content, identify key points, and draft outlines, making it easier to handle meeting notes, reports, and marketing materials. To get started, just open a file in the Box web app and click the Box AI button. It offers quick suggestions like summarizing the document or checking for next steps. Responses are generated in real time, and you can save them or clear chat history as needed. Just remember, Box AI only pulls info from the document you're viewing, so be specific with your questions!",
    "created_at": "2024-10-08T00:38:01.767-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

## Override AI model (text generation)

This example shows you how changing the AI model in the `ai_agent` options can influence the way the text is generated.

First let's generate some text using the `POST ai/text_gen` endpoint. This endpoint is using the OpenAI 3.5 turbo model by default.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/text_gen" \
     -H "content-type: application/json" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer TOKEN" \
     -d '{
          "prompt": "Write a short post about Box AI for documents.Make it highlight the benefits of the solution. You can add some emoticons.",
          "items": [
               {
                    "id": "123467890",
                    "type": "file"
               }
          ]
     }
```

The response is as follows:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "🌟 Exciting News! 🌟\n\nIntroducing Box AI for documents - your new best friend in creating smarter, more efficient content! 🤖💡\n\n🔹 Say goodbye to manual searching and organizing - Box AI does it all for you!\n🔹 Enjoy lightning-fast document analysis and categorization.\n🔹 Boost productivity with automated suggestions and smart recommendations.\n🔹 Collaborate seamlessly with real-time insights and intelligent tagging.\n\nExperience the future of document creation with Box AI - making work easier, faster, and more fun! 🚀💻 #BoxAI #SmartDocuments",
    "created_at": "2024-10-08T01:19:06.22-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

Let's change the model using the `ai_agent` configuration:

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/text_gen" \
     -H "content-type: application/json" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer TOKEN" \
     -d '{
          "prompt": "Write a short post about Box AI for documents.Make it highlight the benefits of the solution. You can add some emoticons.",
          "items": [
               {
                    "id": "123467890",
                    "type": "file"
               }
          ],
          "ai_agent": {
               "type": "ai_agent_text_gen",
               "basic_gen": {
                 "model": "openai__gpt_4o_2024_05_13"
          }
       }
     }

```

After the model switch, the response is slightly different:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "🚀 **Boost Your Productivity with Box AI for Documents!** 📄✨\n\nSay goodbye to tedious document creation and editing! With Box AI, you can streamline your workflow and focus on what truly matters. Here’s why you’ll love it:\n\n1. **Smart Suggestions** 🤖: Get real-time recommendations to enhance your content.\n2. **Automated Formatting** 📝: Ensure consistency across all your documents effortlessly.\n3. **Collaboration Made Easy** 👥: Work seamlessly with your team, no matter where they are.\n4. **Time-Saving Templates** ⏳: Use pre-built templates to speed up document creation.\n5. **Enhanced Accuracy** ✅: Reduce errors with intelligent proofreading.\n\nTransform the way you work with documents and experience a new level of efficiency with Box AI! 🌟",
    "created_at": "2024-10-08T01:28:36.777-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

As you can see the responses differ to some extent. Thanks to the model switch, you can optimize your interaction with Box AI and choose the most suitable model for your needs.

## Override AI model (metadata extraction)

Switching models can also give us different results for metadata extraction.
Let's use a sample contract to extract the metadata. In this example, the model used is Google Gemini.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract' \
     -H 'content-type: application/json' \
     -H 'authorization: Bearer TOKEN' \
     -d '{
        "prompt": "Extract any data that would be good metadata to save for future contracts.",
        "items": [
          {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "123456789"
          }
        ]
      }'
```

The response is a set of metadata:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "{\"Buyer Legal Entity Name\": \"Acme Retail Corp.\", \"Supplier Legal Entity Name\": \"Acme Manufacturing Inc.\", \"Buyer Contact Person\": \"Jane Doe\", \"Supplier Contact Person\": \"Eva Smith\", \"Payment Term\": \"payment in full before pickup of goods\", \"Invoice Currency\": \"Euro\", \"Incoterm\": \"FCA Amsterdam\", \"Governing Law\": \"laws state jurisdiction in which supplier is located\", \"Effective Date\": \"March 27, 2024\", \"Buyer Signature Date\": \"March 28th, 2024\", \"Supplier Signature Date\": \"March 28th, 2024\"}",
    "created_at": "2024-10-08T01:53:14.993-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

Let's change the model to the most recent OpenAI option:

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract' \
     -H 'content-type: application/json' \
     -H 'authorization: Bearer TOKEN' \
     -d '{
        "prompt": "Extract any data that would be good metadata to save for future contracts.",
        "items": [
          {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "123456789"
          }
        ],
          "ai_agent": {
            "type": "ai_agent_extract",
            "basic_text": {
                "model": "openai__gpt_4o_2024_05_13"
            }
         }
      }'
```

Using this model results in a response listing more metadata entries:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "{\"Effective Date\": \"March 27, 2024\", \"Supplier Legal Entity Name\": \"Acme Manufacturing Inc.\", \"Supplier Registered Office Address\": \"123 Main Street\", \"Supplier Contact Person(s)\": \"Eva Smith\", \"Buyer Legal Entity Name\": \"Acme Retail Corp.\", \"Buyer Registered Office Address\": \"456 Market Avenue\", \"Buyer Contact Person(s)\": \"Jane Doe\", \"Incoterm\": \"FCA Amsterdam\", \"Payment Term\": \"payment in full before pickup of goods\", \"Invoice Currency\": \"Euro\", \"Buyer Printed Name\": \"Jane Doe\", \"Buyer Date\": \"March 28th, 2024\", \"Buyer Title / Position\": \"CEO\", \"Seller Printed Name\": \"Eve Smith\", \"Seller Date\": \"March 28th, 2024\", \"Seller Title / Position\": \"Sales Manager\"}",
    "created_at": "2024-10-08T01:54:28.099-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Extract metadata from file (freeform)
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-metadata



Box AI API allows you to query a document and extract metadata based on a provided prompt.
**Freeform** means that the prompt can include a stringified version of formats such as JSON or XML, or even plain text.

<Note>
  The **Extract metadata (freeform)** endpoint doesn't support OCR. To extract metadata from image files (TIFF, PNG, JPEG) or documents in languages other than English, use the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-metadata-structured">Extract metadata (structured)</Link> endpoint.
</Note>

## Before you start

Make sure you followed the steps listed in <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites">getting started with Box AI</Link> to create a platform app and authenticate.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the
`POST /2.0/ai/extract` endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract' \
       -H 'content-type: application/json' \
       -H 'authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
       -d '{
          "prompt": "Extract data related to contract conditions",
          "items": [
                {
                    "type": "file",
                    "id": "1497741268097"
                }
          ],
          "ai_agent": {
            "type": "ai_agent_extract",
            "long_text": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
              "prompt_template": "It is `{current_date}`, and I have $8000 and want to spend a week in the Azores. What should I see?",
            },
            "basic_text": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini",
            }
          }
        }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.ai.createAiExtract({
    prompt: 'firstName, lastName, location, yearOfBirth, company',
    items: [new AiItemBase({ id: file.id })],
    aiAgent: agentIgnoringOverridingEmbeddingsModel,
  } satisfies AiExtract);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai.create_ai_extract(
      "firstName, lastName, location, yearOfBirth, company",
      [AiItemBase(id=file.id)],
      ai_agent=agent_ignoring_overriding_embeddings_model,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Ai.CreateAiExtractAsync(requestBody: new AiExtract(prompt: "firstName, lastName, location, yearOfBirth, company", items: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiItemBase(id: file.Id)})));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.ai.createAiExtract(requestBody: AiExtract(prompt: "firstName, lastName, location, yearOfBirth, company", items: [AiItemBase(id: file.id)]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAi().createAiExtract(new AiExtract.Builder("firstName, lastName, location, yearOfBirth, company", Arrays.asList(new AiItemBase(file.getId()))).aiAgent(agentIgnoringOverridingEmbeddingsModel).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxAIResponse response = BoxAI.extractMetadataFreeform(
      api,
      "firstName, lastName, location, yearOfBirth, company",
      Collections.singletonList(new BoxAIItem("123456", BoxAIItem.Type.FILE))
  );
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

<Note>
  The `items` array can have exactly one element.
</Note>

| Parameter        | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Example                                             |
| ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------- |
| **`prompt`**     | The request for Box AI to generate or refine the text. The prompt's length cannot exceed 10000 characters.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Create a meeting agenda for a weekly sales meeting. |
| **`items.id`**   | Box file ID of the document. The ID must reference an actual file with an extension.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | `1233039227512`                                     |
| **`items.type`** | The type of the supplied input.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  | `file`                                              |
| `items.content`  | The content of the item, often the text representation.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          | `This article is about Box AI`.                     |
| `ai_agent`       | The AI agent used to override the default agent configuration. This parameter allows you to, for example, replace the default LLM with a custom one using the <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_text_gen#param_basic_gen_model">`model`</Link> parameter, tweak the base <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_text_gen#param_basic_gen_prompt_template">`prompt`</Link> to allow for a more customized user experience, or change an LLM parameter, such as `temperature`, to make the results more or less creative. Before you use the `ai_agent` parameter, you can get the default configuration using the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default">`GET 2.0/ai_agent_default`</Link> request. For specific use cases, see the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">AI model overrides tutorial</Link>. |                                                     |

## Use cases

This example shows you how to extract metadata from a sample invoice.

### Create the request

To get the response from Box AI, call `POST /2.0/ai/extract` endpoint with the following parameters:

* `prompt` that can be a query, or a structured or unstructured list of fields to extract.
* `type` and `id` of the file to extract the data from.

### Create the prompt

Depending on the use case and the level of detail, you can construct various prompts.

#### Use plain text

Because this endpoint allows freeform prompts, you can use plain text to get the information.

```bash theme={null}
curl --location 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract' \
--header 'Content-Type: application/json' \
--header 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
--data '{
    "prompt": "find the document type (invoice or po), vendor, total, and po number",
    "items": [
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "1443721424754"
        }
    ]
}'
```

In such a case, the response will be based on the keywords included in the text:

```bash theme={null}
{
    "answer": "{\"Document Type\": \"Invoice\", \"Vendor\": \"Quasar Innovations\", \"Total\": \"$1,050\", \"PO Number\": \"003\"}",
    "created_at": "2024-05-31T10:30:51.223-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

#### Use specific terms

If you don't want to write the entire sentence, the prompt can consist of terms that you expect to find in an invoice:

```bash theme={null}
curl --location 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract' \
--header 'Content-Type: application/json' \
--header 'Authorization: <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
--data '{
    "prompt": "{\"vendor\",\"total\",\"doctype\",\"date\",\"PO\"}",
    "items": [
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "1443721424754"
        }
    ]
}'
```

Using this approach results in a list of terms provided in the request and their values:

```bash theme={null}
{
    "answer": "{\"vendor\": \"Quasar Innovations\", \"total\": \"$1,050\", \"doctype\": \"Invoice\", \"PO\": \"003\"}",
    "created_at": "2024-05-31T10:28:51.906-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

#### Use key-value pairs

The prompt can also be a list of key-value pairs that helps Box AI to come up with the metadata structure. This approach requires listing the key-value pairs within a  `fields` array.

```bash theme={null}
curl --location 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract' \
--header 'Content-Type: application/json' \
--header 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
--data '{
          "prompt": "{\"fields\":   [{\"key\":\"vendor\",\"displayName\":\"Vendor\",\"type\":\"string\",\"description\":\ "Vendorname\"},{\"key\":\"documentType\",\"displayName\":\"Type\",\"type\":\"string\",\"description\":\"\"}]}",
    "items": [
        {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "1443721424754"
        }
    ]
}'
```

The response includes the `fields` present in the file, along with their values:

```bash theme={null}
{
    "answer": "{\"vendor\": \"Quasar Innovations\", \"documentType\": \"Invoice\"}",
    "created_at": "2024-05-31T10:15:38.17-07:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Extract metadata from file (structured)
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-metadata-structured



With Box AI API, you can extract metadata from the provided file
and get the result in the form of key-value pairs.
As input, you can either create a structure using the `fields` parameter, or use an already defined metadata template.
To learn more about creating templates, see [Creating metadata templates in the Admin Console][templates-console] or use the <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">metadata template API</Link>. You can also [autofill metadata in templates][autofill-metadata] using our Standard or Enhanced Extraction Agent.

## Supported file formats

The endpoint supports the following file formats:

* PDF
* TIFF
* PNG
* JPEG

Box AI automatically applies optical character recognition (OCR) when processing image files (TIFF, PNG, JPEG) and scanned documents. This eliminates the need to convert images to PDF before extraction, saving time and simplifying your integration.

## Supported languages

Box AI can extract metadata from documents in the following languages:

* English
* Japanese
* Chinese
* Korean

- Cyrillic-based languages (such as Russian, Ukrainian, Bulgarian, and Serbian)

No additional configuration is required to use different languages or image formats. Box AI automatically detects the language and applies OCR when needed.

## Before you start

Make sure you followed the steps listed in <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites">getting started with Box AI</Link> to create a platform app and authenticate.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the
`POST /2.0/ai/extract_structured` endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract_structured' \
       -H 'content-type: application/json' \
       -H 'authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
       -d '{
          "items": [
            {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "file",
              "content": "This is file content."
            }
          ],
          "metadata_template": {
              "template_key": "",
              "type": "metadata_template",
              "scope": ""
          },
          "fields": [
              {
                "key": "name",
                "description": "The name of the person.",
                "displayName": "Name",
                "prompt": "The name is the first and last name from the email address.",
                "type": "string",
                "options": [
                  {
                    "key": "First Name"
                  },
                  {
                    "key": "Last Name"
                  }
                ]
              }
          ],
          "ai_agent": {
            "type": "ai_agent_extract_structured",
            "long_text": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini"
              },
            "basic_text": {
              "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini"
           }
        }
     }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.ai.createAiExtractStructured({
    fields: [
      {
        key: 'firstName',
        displayName: 'First name',
        description: 'Person first name',
        prompt: 'What is the your first name?',
        type: 'string',
      } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsField,
      {
        key: 'lastName',
        displayName: 'Last name',
        description: 'Person last name',
        prompt: 'What is the your last name?',
        type: 'string',
      } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsField,
      {
        key: 'dateOfBirth',
        displayName: 'Birth date',
        description: 'Person date of birth',
        prompt: 'What is the date of your birth?',
        type: 'date',
      } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsField,
      {
        key: 'age',
        displayName: 'Age',
        description: 'Person age',
        prompt: 'How old are you?',
        type: 'float',
      } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsField,
      {
        key: 'hobby',
        displayName: 'Hobby',
        description: 'Person hobby',
        prompt: 'What is your hobby?',
        type: 'multiSelect',
        options: [
          { key: 'guitar' } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField,
          { key: 'books' } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField,
        ],
      } satisfies AiExtractStructuredFieldsField,
    ],
    items: [new AiItemBase({ id: file.id })],
    aiAgent: agentIgnoringOverridingEmbeddingsModel,
  } satisfies AiExtractStructured);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai.create_ai_extract_structured(
      [AiItemBase(id=file.id)],
      fields=[
          CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
              key="firstName",
              display_name="First name",
              description="Person first name",
              prompt="What is the your first name?",
              type="string",
          ),
          CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
              key="lastName",
              display_name="Last name",
              description="Person last name",
              prompt="What is the your last name?",
              type="string",
          ),
          CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
              key="dateOfBirth",
              display_name="Birth date",
              description="Person date of birth",
              prompt="What is the date of your birth?",
              type="date",
          ),
          CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
              key="age",
              display_name="Age",
              description="Person age",
              prompt="How old are you?",
              type="float",
          ),
          CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
              key="hobby",
              display_name="Hobby",
              description="Person hobby",
              prompt="What is your hobby?",
              type="multiSelect",
              options=[
                  CreateAiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key="guitar"),
                  CreateAiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key="books"),
              ],
          ),
      ],
      ai_agent=agent_ignoring_overriding_embeddings_model,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Ai.CreateAiExtractStructuredAsync(requestBody: new AiExtractStructured(items: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiItemBase(id: file.Id)})) { Fields = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "firstName") { DisplayName = "First name", Description = "Person first name", Prompt = "What is the your first name?", Type = "string" },new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "lastName") { DisplayName = "Last name", Description = "Person last name", Prompt = "What is the your last name?", Type = "string" },new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "dateOfBirth") { DisplayName = "Birth date", Description = "Person date of birth", Prompt = "What is the date of your birth?", Type = "date" },new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "age") { DisplayName = "Age", Description = "Person age", Prompt = "How old are you?", Type = "float" },new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "hobby") { DisplayName = "Hobby", Description = "Person hobby", Prompt = "What is your hobby?", Type = "multiSelect", Options = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key: "guitar"),new AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key: "books")}) }}) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.ai.createAiExtractStructured(requestBody: AiExtractStructured(fields: [AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "firstName", displayName: "First name", description: "Person first name", prompt: "What is the your first name?", type: "string"), AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "lastName", displayName: "Last name", description: "Person last name", prompt: "What is the your last name?", type: "string"), AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "dateOfBirth", displayName: "Birth date", description: "Person date of birth", prompt: "What is the date of your birth?", type: "date"), AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "age", displayName: "Age", description: "Person age", prompt: "How old are you?", type: "float"), AiExtractStructuredFieldsField(key: "hobby", displayName: "Hobby", description: "Person hobby", prompt: "What is your hobby?", type: "multiSelect", options: [AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key: "guitar"), AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key: "books")])], items: [AiItemBase(id: file.id)]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAi().createAiExtractStructured(new AiExtractStructured.Builder(Arrays.asList(new AiItemBase(file.getId()))).fields(Arrays.asList(new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField.Builder("firstName").description("Person first name").displayName("First name").prompt("What is the your first name?").type("string").build(), new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField.Builder("lastName").description("Person last name").displayName("Last name").prompt("What is the your last name?").type("string").build(), new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField.Builder("dateOfBirth").description("Person date of birth").displayName("Birth date").prompt("What is the date of your birth?").type("date").build(), new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField.Builder("age").description("Person age").displayName("Age").prompt("How old are you?").type("float").build(), new AiExtractStructuredFieldsField.Builder("hobby").description("Person hobby").displayName("Hobby").prompt("What is your hobby?").type("multiSelect").options(Arrays.asList(new AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField("guitar"), new AiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField("books"))).build())).aiAgent(agentIgnoringOverridingEmbeddingsModel).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxAIExtractMetadataTemplate template = new BoxAIExtractMetadataTemplate("templateKey", "enterprise");
  BoxAIExtractStructuredResponse result = BoxAI.extractMetadataStructured(
      api,
      Collections.singletonList(new BoxAIItem("123456", BoxAIItem.Type.FILE)),
      template
  );
  JsonObject sourceJson = result.getSourceJson();
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

<Note>
  The `items` array can have exactly one element.
</Note>

| Parameter                            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Example                                                  |
| ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| **`metadata_template`**              | The metadata template containing the fields to extract. For your request to work, you must provide either `metadata_template` or `fields`, but not both.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |                                                          |
| **`metadata_template.type`**         | The type of metadata template.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | `metadata_template`                                      |
| **`metadata_template.scope`**        | The scope of the metadata template that can either be `global` or `enterprise`. Global templates are those available to any Box enterprise, whereas `enterprise` templates are bound to a specific enterprise.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | `metadata_template`                                      |
| **`metadata_template.template_key`** | The name of your metadata template.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              | `invoice`                                                |
| **`items.id`**                       | Box file ID of the document. The ID must reference an actual file with an extension.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | `1233039227512`                                          |
| **`items.type`**                     | The type of the supplied input.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  | `file`                                                   |
| `items.content`                      | The content of the item, often the text representation.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          | `This article is about Box AI`.                          |
| `fields.type`                        | The type of the field. It include but is not limited to `string`, `float`, `date`, `enum`, and `multiSelect`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | `string`                                                 |
| `fields.description`                 | A description of the field.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | `The person's name.`                                     |
| `fields.displayName`                 | The display name of the field.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | `Name`                                                   |
| `fields.key`                         | A unique identifier for the field.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               | `name`                                                   |
| `fields.options`                     | A list of options for this field. This is most often used in combination with the `enum` and `multiSelect` field types.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          | `[{"key":"First Name"},{"key":"Last Name"}]`             |
| `fields.options.key`                 | A unique identifier for the field.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               | `First Name`                                             |
| `fields.prompt`                      | Additional context about the key (identifier) that may include how to find and format it.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | `Name is the first and last name from the email address` |
| `ai_agent`                           | The AI agent used to override the default agent configuration. This parameter allows you to, for example, replace the default LLM with a custom one using the <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_text_gen#param_basic_gen_model">`model`</Link> parameter, tweak the base <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_text_gen#param_basic_gen_prompt_template">`prompt`</Link> to allow for a more customized user experience, or change an LLM parameter, such as `temperature`, to make the results more or less creative. Before you use the `ai_agent` parameter, you can get the default configuration using the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default">`GET 2.0/ai_agent_default`</Link> request. For specific use cases, see the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">AI model overrides tutorial</Link>. |                                                          |

## Use cases

This example shows you how to extract metadata from a sample invoice in a structured way.
Let's assume you want to extract the vendor name, invoice number, and a few more details.

<Frame>
  <img alt="sample invoice" />
</Frame>

### Create the request

To get the response from Box AI, call `POST /2.0/ai/extract_structured` endpoint with the following parameters:

* `items.type` and `items.id` to specify the file to extract the data from.
* `fields` to specify the data that you want to extract from the given file.
* `metadata_template` to supply an already existing metadata template.

<Note>
  You can use either `fields` or `metadata_template` to specify your structure, but not both.
</Note>

### Use `fields` parameter

The `fields` parameter allows you to specify the data you want to extract. Each `fields` object has a subset of parameters you can use to add more information about the searched data.
For example, you can add the field type, description, or even a prompt with some additional context.

```bash theme={null}
curl --location 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract_structured' \
--header 'Content-Type: application/json' \
--header 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'' \
--data '{
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "1517628697289",
            "type": "file"
        }
    ],
    "fields": [
        {
            "key": "document_type",
            "type": "enum",
            "prompt": "what type of document is this?",
            "options": [
                {
                    "key": "Invoice"
                },
                {
                    "key": "Purchase Order"
                },
                {
                    "key": "Unknown"
                }
            ]
        },
        {
            "key": "document_date",
            "type": "date"
        },
        {
            "key": "vendor",
            "description": "The name of the entity.",
            "prompt": "Which vendor is sending this document.",
            "type": "string"
        },
        {
            "key": "document_total",
            "type": "float"
        }
    ]
  }'
```

The response lists the specified fields and their values:

```bash theme={null}
{
    "document_date": "2024-02-13",
    "vendor": "Quasar Innovations",
    "document_total": $1050,
    "document_type": "Purchase Order"
}
```

### Use metadata template

If you prefer to use a metadata template, you can provide its `template_key`, `type`, and `scope`.

```bash theme={null}
curl --location 'https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/extract_structured' \
--header 'Content-Type: application/json' \
--header 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
--data '{
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "1517628697289",
            "type": "file"
        }
    ],
    "metadata_template": {
        "template_key": "rbInvoicePO",
        "type": "metadata_template",
        "scope": "enterprise_1134207681"
    }
}'
```

The response lists the fields included in the metadata template and their values:

```bash theme={null}
{
  "documentDate": "February 13, 2024",
  "total": "$1050",
  "documentType": "Purchase Order",
  "vendor": "Quasar Innovations",
  "purchaseOrderNumber": "003"
}
```

### Enhanced Extract Agent

To use the Enhanced Extract Agent, specify the `ai_agent` object as follows:

```bash theme={null}
{
  "ai_agent": {
    "type": "ai_agent_id", 
    "id": "enhanced_extract_agent"
  }
}
```

To extract data using the Enhanced Extract Agent you need one of the following:

* [Inline field definitions][inline-field] (best when fields change frequently)
* [Metadata template][metadata-template] (best when fields stay consistent)

See the sample code snippet using Box Python SDK:

```Python theme={null}
from box_sdk_gen import (
    AiAgentReference,
    AiAgentReferenceTypeField,
    AiItemBase,
    AiItemBaseTypeField,
    BoxClient,
    BoxCCGAuth,
    CCGConfig,
    CreateAiExtractStructuredMetadataTemplate
)

# Create your client credentials grant config from the developer console
ccg_config = CCGConfig(
    client_id="my_box_client_id", # replace with your client id
    client_secret="my_box_client_secret", # replace with your client secret
    user_id="my_box_user_id", # replace with the box user id that has access
                              # to the file you are referencing
)
auth = BoxCCGAuth(config=ccg_config)
client = BoxClient(auth=auth)
# Create the agent config referencing the enhanced extract agent
enhanced_extract_agent_config = AiAgentReference(
    id="enhanced_extract_agent",
    type=AiAgentReferenceTypeField.AI_AGENT_ID
)
# Use the Box SDK to call the extract_structured endpoint
box_ai_response = client.ai.create_ai_extract_structured(
    # Create the items array containing the file information to extract from
    items=[
        AiItemBase(
            id="my_box_file_id", # replace with the file id
            type=AiItemBaseTypeField.FILE
        )
    ],
    # Reference the Box Metadata template 
    metadata_template=CreateAiExtractStructuredMetadataTemplate(
        template_key="InvoicePO",
        scope="enterprise"
    ),
    # Attach the agent config you created earlier
    ai_agent=enhanced_extract_agent_config,
)
print(f"box_ai_response: {box_ai_response.answer}")
```

[templates-console]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates

[changelog]: https://developer.box.com/changelog

[blog]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog

[inline-field]: #use-fields-parameter

[metadata-template]: #use-metadata-template

[autofill-metadata]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196173-Using-Metadata#h_01JJSRYKDKXHGJT9ZHCW1E9RX5

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Extract APIs overview and use cases
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-use-cases



Data extraction can be challenging because source content varies widely with different layouts, templates, and file types. The Box Extract API provides two AI-powered endpoints: structured extraction and freeform extraction that standardize how you extract metadata from files in Box. With these endpoints, you can:

* Extract specific fields into a consistent schema or Box metadata template (structured extraction).
* Use enhanced extraction for more complex use cases and improved accuracy powered by advanced AI models (structured extraction).
* Extract content when the target fields are not known ahead of time (freeform extraction).
* Run extractions without building your own orchestration, permission checks, or throttling logic around the extraction workflow.
* Extract data from documents in various languages, file formats, scanned documents, or photos.

To explore the possibilities of these endpoints, discover the following use cases in various industries:

<AccordionGroup>
  <Accordion title="Sales and finance operations">
    **Recommended endpoint:** structured metadata extraction (`POST /2.0/ai/extract_structured`)

    Ideal for high-volume, standardized documents where you need predictable data types:

    * **Automated data entry:** Structured metadata extraction ensures consistent JSON response every time thanks to a preconfigured metadata template.
    * **Invoices and purchase orders:** Extract line items, totals, and dates.
    * **Client contracts:** Parse standardized fields like "Effective Date" or "Total Contract Value" to update CRM records.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Legal and HR">
    **Recommended endpoint:** freeform metadata extraction (`POST /2.0/ai/extract`)

    Ideal for queries where document structure is not known ahead of time or varies:

    * **HR onboarding:** Extract key personal details from diverse offer letters or candidate resumes.
    * **NDA clauses:** Extract specific NDA clauses from legal documents.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Industry-specific solutions">
    Use advanced features like Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and enhanced extraction agent for regulated sectors:

    <AccordionGroup>
      <Accordion title="Financial services">
        * **Know Your Customer (KYC) documents:** Verify user’s identity by extracting text from scanned passports or driver's licenses.
        * **Loan origination:** Automate income verification by pulling data from scanned utility bills or pay stubs.
      </Accordion>

      <Accordion title="Life Sciences">
        * **Clinical Trial Enrollment:** Extract patient criteria from medical forms to match candidates with trials.
        * **Regulatory submissions:** Organize and validate the data required for submissions such as FDA or EMA.
      </Accordion>

      <Accordion title="Public Sector">
        * **Permit applications:** Accelerate zoning approvals by validating required documentation.
        * **Public records requests:** Automatically classify and prioritize documents for public requests such as Freedom of Information Act (FOIA).
      </Accordion>
    </AccordionGroup>
  </Accordion>
</AccordionGroup>

## Core benefits of using the Box Extract API

* **Managed scaling:** The Box Extract API is designed to handle queues and rate limits, so you can run high-volume processing.
* **No defensive code:** The Box Extract API is model-agnostic, which enables switching between supported LLMs with minimal code changes and minimizing vendor lock-in.
* **Security and compliance:** All extracted data inherits the enterprise-grade security and governance policies of the Box platform.

## Next steps

Get started with the Box Extract API with practical example-led quick starts guides, API reference pages, and extensive developer guides:

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Generate text with Box AI
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/generate-text



<Note>
  Box AI API is available to all customers Business and above.
</Note>

You can use Box AI to generate text
based on provided content.
For example, you can ask Box AI to
generate a template based
on the content you read or create in Box Notes.
Then you can embed the generated text
directly into your document.

## Before you start

Make sure you followed the steps listed in <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites">getting started with Box AI</Link> to create a platform app and authenticate.

## Send a request

To send a request, use the
`POST /2.0/ai/text_gen` endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/text_gen" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
            "prompt": "Write a social media post about protein powder.",
            "items": [
           {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "file",
              "content": "More information about protein powders"
          },
          ],
            "dialogue_history": [
              {
                  "prompt": "Can you add some more information?",
                  "answer": "Public API schemas provide necessary information to integrate with APIs...",
                  "created_at": "2013-12-12T11:20:43-08:00"
              }
          ],
            "ai_agent": {
              "type": "ai_agent_text_gen",
              "basic_gen": {
                "model": "azure__openai__gpt_4o_mini"
              }
           }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.ai.createAiTextGen({
    prompt: 'Parapharse the document.s',
    items: [
      new AiTextGenItemsField({
        id: fileToAsk.id,
        type: 'file' as AiTextGenItemsTypeField,
        content:
          'The Earth goes around the sun. Sun rises in the East in the morning.',
      }),
    ],
    dialogueHistory: [
      {
        prompt: 'What does the earth go around?',
        answer: 'The sun',
        createdAt: dateTimeFromString('2021-01-01T00:00:00Z'),
      } satisfies AiDialogueHistory,
      {
        prompt: 'On Earth, where does the sun rise?',
        answer: 'East',
        createdAt: dateTimeFromString('2021-01-01T00:00:00Z'),
      } satisfies AiDialogueHistory,
    ],
    aiAgent: aiTextGenAgentConfig,
  } satisfies AiTextGen);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.ai.create_ai_text_gen(
      "Parapharse the document.s",
      [
          CreateAiTextGenItems(
              id=file_to_ask.id,
              type=CreateAiTextGenItemsTypeField.FILE,
              content="The Earth goes around the sun. Sun rises in the East in the morning.",
          )
      ],
      dialogue_history=[
          AiDialogueHistory(
              prompt="What does the earth go around?",
              answer="The sun",
              created_at=date_time_from_string("2021-01-01T00:00:00Z"),
          ),
          AiDialogueHistory(
              prompt="On Earth, where does the sun rise?",
              answer="East",
              created_at=date_time_from_string("2021-01-01T00:00:00Z"),
          ),
      ],
      ai_agent=ai_text_gen_agent_config,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Ai.CreateAiTextGenAsync(requestBody: new AiTextGen(prompt: "Parapharse the document.s", items: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiTextGenItemsField(id: fileToAsk.Id, type: AiTextGenItemsTypeField.File) { Content = "The Earth goes around the sun. Sun rises in the East in the morning." }})) { DialogueHistory = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new AiDialogueHistory() { Prompt = "What does the earth go around?", Answer = "The sun", CreatedAt = Utils.DateTimeFromString(dateTime: "2021-01-01T00:00:00Z") },new AiDialogueHistory() { Prompt = "On Earth, where does the sun rise?", Answer = "East", CreatedAt = Utils.DateTimeFromString(dateTime: "2021-01-01T00:00:00Z") }}) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.ai.createAiTextGen(requestBody: AiTextGen(prompt: "Parapharse the document.s", items: [AiTextGenItemsField(id: fileToAsk.id, type: AiTextGenItemsTypeField.file, content: "The Earth goes around the sun. Sun rises in the East in the morning.")], dialogueHistory: [AiDialogueHistory(prompt: "What does the earth go around?", answer: "The sun", createdAt: try Utils.Dates.dateTimeFromString(dateTime: "2021-01-01T00:00:00Z")), AiDialogueHistory(prompt: "On Earth, where does the sun rise?", answer: "East", createdAt: try Utils.Dates.dateTimeFromString(dateTime: "2021-01-01T00:00:00Z"))]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getAi().createAiTextGen(new AiTextGen.Builder("Parapharse the document.s", Arrays.asList(new AiTextGenItemsField.Builder(fileToAsk.getId()).type(AiTextGenItemsTypeField.FILE).content("The Earth goes around the sun. Sun rises in the East in the morning.").build())).dialogueHistory(Arrays.asList(new AiDialogueHistory.Builder().prompt("What does the earth go around?").answer("The sun").createdAt(dateTimeFromString("2021-01-01T00:00:00Z")).build(), new AiDialogueHistory.Builder().prompt("On Earth, where does the sun rise?").answer("East").createdAt(dateTimeFromString("2021-01-01T00:00:00Z")).build())).aiAgent(aiTextGenAgentConfig).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  List<BoxAIDialogueEntry> dialogueHistory = new ArrayList<>();
  dialogueHistory.add(
          new BoxAIDialogueEntry(
              "Make my email about public APIs sound more professional",
              "Here is the first draft of your professional email about public APIs.",
              BoxDateFormat.parse("2013-05-16T15:26:57-07:00")
          )
      );
  BoxAIResponse response = BoxAI.sendAITextGenRequest(
      api,
      "Write an email to a client about the importance of public APIs.",
      Collections.singletonList(new BoxAIItem("123456", BoxAIItem.Type.FILE)),
      dialogueHistory
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  items = [{
      "id": "1582915952443",
      "type": "file",
      "content": "More information about public APIs"
  }]
  dialogue_history = [{
          "prompt": "Make my email about public APIs sound more professional",
          "answer": "Here is the first draft of your professional email about public APIs",
          "created_at": "2013-12-12T10:53:43-08:00"
      },
      {
          "prompt": "Can you add some more information?",
          "answer": "Public API schemas provide necessary information to integrate with APIs...",
          "created_at": "2013-12-12T11:20:43-08:00"
  }]
  ai_agent = {
      'type': 'ai_agent_text_gen',
      'basic_gen': {
          'model': 'openai__gpt_3_5_turbo_16k'
      }
  }
  answer = client.send_ai_text_gen(
      dialogue_history=dialogue_history,
      items=items,
      prompt="Write an email to a client about the importance of public APIs.",
      ai_agent=ai_agent
  )
  print(answer)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxAIResponse response = await client.BoxAIManager.SendAITextGenRequestAsync(
      new BoxAITextGenRequest
      {
          Prompt = "What is the name of the file?",
          Items = new List<BoxAITextGenItem>() { new BoxAITextGenItem() { Id = "12345" } },
          DialogueHistory = new List<BoxAIDialogueHistory>()
          {
              new BoxAIDialogueHistory() { Prompt = "What is the name of the file?", Answer = "MyFile", CreatedAt = DateTimeOffset.Parse("2024-05-16T15:26:57-07:00") }
              new BoxAIDialogueHistory() { Prompt = "What is the size of the file?", Answer = "10kb", CreatedAt =  DateTimeOffset.Parse("2024-05-16T15:26:57-07:00") }
          }
      };
  );
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.ai.textGen(
      {
          prompt: 'What is the capital of France?',
          items: [
              {
                  type: 'file',
                  id: '12345'
              }
          ],
          dialogue_history: [
              {
                  prompt: 'What is the capital of France?',
                  answer: 'Paris',
                  created_at: '2021-10-01T00:00:00Z'
              },
              {
                  prompt: 'What is the capital of Germany?',
                  answer: 'Berlin',
                  created_at: '2021-10-01T00:00:00Z'
              }
          ]
      })
      .then(response => {
          /* response -> {
              "answer": "The capital of France is Paris.",
              "created_at": "2021-10-01T00:00:00Z",
              "completion_reason": "done"
          } */
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Parameters

To make a call, you must pass the following parameters. Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

**Note**: The `items` array can have exactly one element.

| Parameter                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     | Example                                                         |
| ----------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **`prompt`**                  | The request for Box AI to generate or refine the text. The prompt's length cannot exceed 10000 characters.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Create a meeting agenda for a weekly sales meeting.             |
| **`items.id`**                | Box file ID of the document.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | `1233039227512`                                                 |
| **`items.type`**              | The type of the supplied input.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 | `file`                                                          |
| `items.content`               | The content of the item, often the text representation.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         | `This article is about Box AI`.                                 |
| `dialogue_history.prompt`     | The prompt previously provided by the client and answered by the Large Language Model (LLM).                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | `Make my email about public APIs sound more professional`       |
| `dialogue_history.answer`     | The answer previously provided by the LLM.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | `Here is a draft of your professional email about public APIs.` |
| `dialogue_history.created_at` | The ISO date formatted timestamp of when the previous answer to the prompt was created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         | `2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00`                                     |
| `ai_agent`                    | The AI agent used to override the default agent configuration. This parameter allows you to, for example, replace the default LLM with a custom one using the <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_text_gen#param_basic_gen_model">`model`</Link> parameter, tweak the base <Link href="/reference/resources/ai_agent_text_gen#param_basic_gen_prompt_template">`prompt`</Link> to allow for a more customized user experience, or change an LLM parameter, such as `temperature`, to make the results more or less creative. Before you use the `ai_agent` parameter, you can get the default configuration using the <Link href="/reference/get-ai-agent-default">`GET 2.0/ai_agent_default`</Link> request. For specific use cases, see the <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides">AI model overrides tutorial</Link> |                                                                 |

## Use cases

Generate text based on the provided file content and a prompt.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/ai/text_gen" \
     -H "content-type: application/json" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
     -d '{
    "items": [
        {
            "id": "12345678",
            "type": "file"
        }
    ],
    "prompt": "Create a short blog post that provides information on Box AI for Documents and focuses on best practices for asking questions. You can add emoticons, but not too many."
}'
```

The result will be as follows:

```sh theme={null}
{
    "answer": "📝 **Box AI for Documents: Best Practices for Asking Questions** 🤔\n\n---\n\nWelcome to our blog post on Box AI for Documents! 🎉 Today, we're going to dive into some best practices when it comes to asking questions within this innovative platform.\n\n1. **Be Clear and Concise**: When formulating a question in Box Notes, make sure your query is clear and to the point. This helps Box AI understand exactly what you're looking for.\n\n2. **Provide Context**: Giving context around your question can significantly improve the accuracy of the response generated by Box AI. Include relevant details or background information.\n\n3. **Use Keywords**: Utilize keywords related to your query within the question itself. This can help Box AI better identify the main topic of your inquiry.\n\n4. **Avoid Ambiguity**: Try to avoid vague or ambiguous questions that could lead to misunderstandings. The more precise you are, the better Box AI can assist you.\n\n5. **Review Suggestions Carefully**: After receiving suggestions from Box AI, take the time to review them carefully before incorporating them into your document. Ensure they align with your intended message.\n\nBy following these best practices, you can maximize the effectiveness of Box AI for Documents and streamline your workflow like never before! 💼✨\n\nStay tuned for more tips and tricks on leveraging technology for enhanced productivity! 👩‍💻🚀",
    "created_at": "2024-11-04T02:46:23.459-08:00",
    "completion_reason": "done"
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box AI tutorials
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/index



The listed tutorials provide you with an overview and use cases for Q\&A and text generation, metadata extraction, and AI model configuration overrides.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get started with Box AI
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/prerequisites



To implement Box AI API in your solutions, you need
to make sure you have access to the functionality.
You will also need a platform application with
enabled Box AI scope, and a developer token to
authenticate your calls.

<Note>
  To use Box AI API, make sure it is enabled by an
  admin in the Admin Console. If you want to use
  the Box AI APIs in your sandbox, request access
  from the Box AI team using [this form][form].
</Note>

## Create a platform application

First you need to create a platform application
you will use to make calls. To create
an application, follow the guide
on <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">creating platform apps</Link>.

## Enable Box AI API access

To interact with Box AI API,
you need the `ai.readwrite` <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scope</Link>
added for your application.
Before you add the scope,
make sure that the Box Admin has granted you
the access to Box AI API. If you can't see the
**Manage AI** option in your app configuration
settings, contact your admin.

To add a scope:

1. Open your application in Developer Console.

2. Go to **Configuration** > **Required Access Scopes** > **Content Actions**

3. Select the **Manage AI** scope. Box Platform will automatically include the scope when making the call. If you are added as an collaborator for a given app, but do not have Box AI API access, you will see the **Manage AI** scope checked and grayed out. This means the app owner has the AI scope enabled but you cannot change this setting.

   <Frame>
     <img alt="box ai scopes" />
   </Frame>

4. Submit your app for <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization or enablement</Link>. If you want to enable Box AI API for an existing application, you must <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval#re-authorization-on-changes">re-authorize</Link> it.

## Generate a developer token

You need a developer token
to authenticate your app when sending requests.

To generate a token:

1. Go to **Developer Console** > **My Platform Apps**.
2. Click the **Options menu** button (…) on the right.
3. Select **Generate Developer Token**. The token will be automatically generated and saved to clipboard.

<Frame>
  <img alt="generate token" />
</Frame>

You can also open your app, go to
**Configuration** > **Developer Token**
and generate the token.

<Note>
  A developer token is only valid for one hour.
</Note>

For additional details, see <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">developer token</Link>.
After you generate the token, you can use it in cURL
or other clients, such as <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman">Postman</Link>, to make
calls.

[oauthscopes]: /guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes#scopes-oauth-2-authorization

[form]: https://forms.gle/Nsh3TwM3W8qg4U35A

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box AI
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/index



Box AI API allows you to use Box AI
functionality
in your platform applications. For example, you can
implement Box AI question and answer
functionality in your third party application,
or generate content right in
your product’s content editor.

## Box AI API capabilities

Box AI API provides a number of capabilities
designed to help you leverage Large Language Models (LLMs)
in your application workflows.

You can ask Box AI to answer
user questions, summarize the document content,
or generate text you can use in your documents.
You can also use Box AI to extract metadata from the
provided input, such as a schema or metadata template.

The <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview#box-ai-ui-element">Box AI for UI Elements</Link> functionality
allows embedding Box AI in your apps.

### Ask questions to Box AI

You can use Box AI API to ask questions about
the content, for example, while working
on documents you store in Box.

Box AI can answer your questions about the
content or generate a summary based on the
file you supply.

<Frame>
  <img alt="box ai in documents" />
</Frame>

Have a look at [Box AI for Documents][boxaidocs]
to see an example of how users can interact
with Box AI while
working with their documents.

### Generate text with Box AI

You can use Box AI API to generate text
from scratch, from existing text within a Box Note, or
based on a given document in Preview.
For example, you can ask Box AI to create a template
or meeting agenda based on an article you are viewing in
Preview.

Another example is Box Notes that uses Box AI
to generate text
and refine the already existing note content.
For details, see [Box AI for Notes][boxainotes].

<Frame>
  <img alt="box ai in notes" />
</Frame>

### Metadata extraction

The <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract">`POST /2.0/ai/extract`</Link> and <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract-structured">`POST /2.0/ai/extract_structured`</Link> endpoints allow you to extract data from the provided input and return them in a form of key-value pairs.

* Use the `extract_structured` endpoint to extract data according to a pre-defined structure obtained from the metadata template, or a set of fields. Use it for shorter documents
* Use the Enhanced Extract Agent for long, complex documents
* Use the `extract` endpoint to extract data from a file using a prompt that can include a stringified version of formats such as JSON or XML, or even plain text.

#### Enhanced Extract Agent

The Enhanced Extract Agent is designed to extract key-value pairs from complex documents. It converts the unstructured content into metadata for easier discovery and search.

You can <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-metadata-structured#">use the agent</Link> through the Box AI API and turn unstructured data into structured output to use in production databases, third party systems, or analytics.

The Enhanced Extract Agent uses Gemini 2.5 Pro to provide a chain-of-thought reasoning and returns both the extracted values and a reasoning behind
its answer.

### Configuration overrides

You can use the `ai_agent` parameter available in the Box AI API requests to override the default agent configuration and introduce your own custom settings.

For details, see <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/get-agent-default-config">AI agent default configuration</Link>.

### Box AI for UI Elements

Box AI for UI Elements is available in Content Preview
allows asking questions about documents directly
within platform applications.
Check out how to use the <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview#box-ai-ui-element">Box AI for UI Elements</Link>
to embed Box AI functionality in your projects.

## Supported languages

Box AI works in a number of languages including
English, Japanese, French, Spanish, and many more.
However, the underlying models are primarily
trained on English language documents. This means
that prompts in other languages may return answers
of lower quality than in English. Tests have shown
satisfactory results for summarizing, checking grammar
and spelling, and answering questions, but bear in mind
that the results may be different than in English.

<Tip>
  Switch the language to Japanese to get
  better results for this language.
</Tip>

## Box AI API in User Activity Report (UAR)

[User Activity Reports][uar] provide an overview of the actions the users are taking in Box. Box Admins use this report to view the actions taken by their users within a given time period, and this includes interactions with Box AI. The report contains the following action types that Box admins can select to get details for Box AI:

* **AI query**: The user queried Box AI and received a response.
* **Failed AI query**: The user queried Box AI but did not receive a response.

[boxainotes]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/22198577315347-Box-AI-for-Notes

[boxaidocs]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/22158484213267-Box-AI-for-Documents

[uar]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415012490387-User-Activity-Report

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Extract structured data with Box AI in Python
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract

Learn how to use Box AI to automatically extract structured data from documents and store it as searchable metadata using the Box Python SDK.

<Link href="/ai-dev-zone">Box AI</Link> exposes intelligent extraction capabilities that enable developers to automatically extract structured
key-value pairs from documents through a single API call. This powerful feature transforms unstructured
document content into actionable metadata without manual data entry, streamlining document processing
workflows for invoices, forms, contracts, and other business documents.

This quick start demonstrates how to configure the Box Python SDK, create a metadata template,
and use Box AI to extract invoice data and store it as searchable metadata in Box.

<Steps>
  <Step title="Create and configure a Box application">
    The first step for any Box Platform integration is to create and configure a Box
    application.

    1. Go to <Link href="https://app.box.com/developers/console">Box Developer Console</Link>.
    2. For this quick start, create an App with the `Client Credentials Grant`
       application type.
    3. Once the app is created, enable the following scopes:
       * `Read all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Write all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Manage AI`

    For more information about creating a new Box application, see <Link href="/guides/getting-started/first-application#create-your-first-application">Create your first application</Link>.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Create a Box metadata template">
    <Tip>
      This step requires Admin access to your Box Enterprise. If you do not have access
      in your current environment, contact your Box administrator.
    </Tip>

    Box AI enables you to extract data from documents in several ways:

    | Type                                | Description                                      | Use case                                                                                    |
    | ----------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
    | Freeform extraction                 | Accepts a string prompt.                         | Provide a natural language prompt.                                                          |
    | Structured extraction with template | Accepts a Box Metadata template key.             | Define fields and data types once; simplifies pushing back to Box as metadata.              |
    | Structured extraction with fields   | Accepts a JSON array of fields.                  | Run one-off extractions without creating a template.                                        |
    | Enhanced Extract Agent              | Uses a specialized agent with a reasoning model. | Use for complex documents or nuanced extraction; works with structured templates or fields. |

    For this quick start, create a Box metadata template to define the fields you want
    to extract from your documents. See <Link href="https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates">Customizing Metadata Templates</Link>
    for a detailed walkthrough of the steps to create a Box metadata template in the Box Admin
    Console.

    1. Give your template a name, for example, `Box AI extract quick start`.

    2. Create the following fields:

       | Field name     | Type   | Description                                                                              |
       | -------------- | ------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
       | Client Name    | Text   | The name of the client receiving the invoice                                             |
       | Invoice Amount | Number | The total amount of the invoice after taxes and fees                                     |
       | Products       | Text   | The names of the products delivered in the invoice, returned as a comma-delimited string |

       <Tip>
         The field description is used by Box AI to supplement the prompt to the LLM to ensure the
         right data is extracted.
       </Tip>

    3. Click **Save** to create your template. Make note of the template key to use
       in a later step.

    When you save the template, a list of templates appears. To find the template key,
    open the template you just created and inspect the URL. The last part of the path is
    your template key. For example, the URL might look like this:
    `https://app.box.com/master/metadata/templates/boxAiExtractquick start`.

    In this case, the template key is `boxAiExtractquick start`.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Upload a test file">
    After preparing the template, select a file to test. For this quick start, use this
    <Link href="/static/quickstarts/extract/files/demo-invoice-20tax-2.pdf">sample invoice document</Link>.

    1. Download the test document, and then drag and drop it into your Box account.
    2. Get the file ID by opening the file in Box and inspecting the URL.
       The last part of the path is your file ID. For example, the URL might look like this:
       `https://app.box.com/file/2064123286902`

       In this case, the file ID is `2064123286902`.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Configure the environment">
    Now set up your development environment to run the extraction. For this quick start, use Python and the
    Box Python SDK version 10. Make sure you have Python 3.11 or higher installed on your machine.

    1. Create a new directory for your project and navigate into it.
    2. Create a virtual environment:
       ```bash theme={null}
       python3 -m venv .venv
       source .venv/bin/activate
       ```
    3. Install the Box Python SDK:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install "boxsdk~=10"
       ```
    4. Install the `python-dotenv` package to load environment variables from the `.env` file:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install python-dotenv
       ```
    5. Create an `.env` file in the root of your project directory and add the following
       environment variables, replacing the placeholder values with your actual Box app credentials
       and the IDs from the previous steps:
       ```bash theme={null}
        BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN=your_box_developer_token

        BOX_METADATA_TEMPLATE_KEY=your_metadata_template_key
        BOX_FILE_ID=your_box_file_id
       ```

    To get your developer token, go to the Box Developer Console, open your app, and navigate to
    the **Configuration** tab.

    6. Click **Generate Developer Token** to create a new token.

    <Tip>
      For simplicity, this quick start uses a short-lived developer token. In production, you
      should authenticate using your app’s configured method (for example, Client Credentials Grant)
      instead of a developer token.
    </Tip>
  </Step>

  <Step title="Create the extract.py file">
    Your development environment is now ready to create the Python script to extract data from the document using Box AI.

    1. Create a new file named `extract.py` in the root of your project directory and add the following code:

       ```python theme={null}
       import os

       from dotenv import load_dotenv

       from box_sdk_gen import (
           AiItemBase,
           BoxClient,
           BoxDeveloperTokenAuth,
           CreateAiExtractStructuredMetadataTemplate,
           CreateAiExtractStructuredMetadataTemplateTypeField,
           CreateFileMetadataByIdScope
       )

       load_dotenv()

       developer_token = os.getenv("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN")
       file_id = os.getenv("BOX_FILE_ID")
       template_key = os.getenv("BOX_METADATA_TEMPLATE_KEY")

       def get_box_client(token: str) -> BoxClient:
           
           if not developer_token:
               raise ValueError("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN is not set in environment variables.")
           
           auth = BoxDeveloperTokenAuth(token=token)
           client = BoxClient(auth=auth)

           return client

       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")


       if __name__ == "__main__":
           main()
       ```

       This code loads the environment variables from the `.env` file, initializes the Box SDK client,
       and prints the current user's ID to validate that the client is working correctly.

    2. Run the script using the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python extract.py
       ```

       If the Box SDK client is set up correctly, the console displays your user ID. For example:

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789
       ```
  </Step>

  <Step title="Extract data">
    With a working Box SDK client, you can add the code to extract data from the document using Box AI.

    1. Between the `get_box_client` function and the `main` function, add the following function:

       ```python theme={null}
       def extract_metadata(client: BoxClient, file_id: str, template_key: str) -> dict:
           metadata = client.ai.create_ai_extract_structured(
               [AiItemBase(id=file_id)],
               metadata_template=CreateAiExtractStructuredMetadataTemplate(
                   template_key=template_key,
                   type=CreateAiExtractStructuredMetadataTemplateTypeField.METADATA_TEMPLATE,
                   scope="enterprise",
               ),
           )
           
           return metadata.to_dict()['answer']
       ```

       This function uses the Box AI `create_ai_extract_structured` method to extract metadata from the specified file.
       Your BoxClient, the file ID, and the metadata template key created earlier are sent to the function, which
       returns the extracted metadata as a dictionary.

    2. Add the function call to extract the metadata in the `main` function. Ensure that the new `main` function contains the following logic:

       ```python theme={null}
       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

           metadata = extract_metadata(client=client, file_id=file_id, template_key=template_key)

           print(f"Extracted Metadata: {metadata}")
       ```

       The SDK handles the API call to Box AI and returns the extracted metadata as an
       <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-extract-structured-response">`AiExtractStructuredResponse`</Link> object. In this quick start,
       the code converts this object to a dictionary and returns the `answer` field that contains the extracted
       key/value pairs.

    3. Print out the extracted metadata to the console to verify that the extraction was successful by running the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python extract.py
       ```

       If the extraction was successful, the console displays your user ID followed by the extracted metadata from the invoice document.

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789

       Extracted Metadata: {'clientName': 'ACME Inc', 'invoiceAmount': 1106.06, 'products': 'Polyol, Diisocyanate, 
       Carbon Dioxide, Laser, Lens, Oleic Acid, Glycerine, Sodium Tallowate, Paint Base, Polypropylene, Rubber, 
       Additive, Pigment, Aluminum Silicate, Magnesium Silicate, Zinc Oxide, Distilled Solvent, Petroleum Distillate, 
       Sulfur Dioxide, Sodium Benzoate, Dust cap, Ferrite cap, Cone and coil assembly, Cleaner, Polypropylene pellets, 
       Polypropylene chips, Polypropylene blocks, Polypropylene slag, Parts Wash Solvent, Jar, 
       Plastic Bottle - 15.2 FL Oz (450 ml), Polymer'}
       ```
  </Step>

  <Step title="Add Box metadata to the file">
    Now that you have extracted metadata from the document, you can use these key/value pairs in your
    application: push to databases, integrate with CRMs, feed to agents for processing, or trigger automated workflows.

    This quick start demonstrates pushing the extracted data back to Box as file metadata. Box metadata management
    enables powerful filtering and search capabilities across your content. For example, you can query
    all invoices over \$500 from the last 30 days, create dashboards in Box Apps, or surface key document
    insights directly in the Box web application.

    1. Push the extracted metadata back to Box by adding the following function between the `extract_metadata` function
       and the `main` function:

       ```python theme={null}
       def push_metadata(client: BoxClient, file_id: str, metadata: dict, template_key: str) -> dict:
           attached_metadata = client.file_metadata.create_file_metadata_by_id(
               file_id,
               CreateFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE,
               template_key,
               metadata,
           )
           return attached_metadata.to_dict()
       ```

       This function uses the `create_file_metadata_by_id` method to attach metadata to the specified file, processing
       the BoxClient, file ID, metadata dictionary, and template key. The API itself returns a
       <Link href="/reference/resources/metadata--full">`MetadataFull`</Link> object. The function converts this object to a
       dictionary and returns it.

    2. Add the function call to push the metadata in the `main` function. Ensure that the updated `main` function
       contains the following logic:

       ```python theme={null}
       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

           metadata = extract_metadata(client=client, file_id=file_id, template_key=template_key)

           print(f"Extracted Metadata: {metadata}")

           attached_metadata = push_metadata(client=client, file_id=file_id, metadata=metadata, template_key=template_key)

           print(f"Attached Metadata: {attached_metadata}")
       ```

    3. Run the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python extract.py
       ```

       If the script is successful, the console displays your user ID, the extracted metadata, and the attached metadata response from Box. For example:

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789

       Extracted Metadata: {'clientName': 'ACME Inc', 'invoiceAmount': 1106.06, 'products': 'Polyol, Diisocyanate,
       Carbon Dioxide, Laser, Lens, Oleic Acid, Glycerine, Sodium Tallowate, Paint Base, Polypropylene, Rubber,
       Additive, Pigment, Aluminum Silicate, Magnesium Silicate, Zinc Oxide, Distilled Solvent, Petroleum Distillate,
       Sulfur Dioxide, Sodium Benzoate, Dust cap, Ferrite cap, Cone and coil assembly, Cleaner, Polypropylene pellets,
       Polypropylene chips, Polypropylene blocks, Polypropylene slag, Parts Wash Solvent, Jar,
       Plastic Bottle - 15.2 FL Oz (450 ml), Polymer'}

       Attached Metadata: {'invoiceAmount': 1106.06, 'products': 'Polyol, Diisocyanate, Carbon Dioxide, Laser, Lens, 
       Oleic Acid, Glycerine, Sodium Tallowate, Paint Base, Polypropylene, Rubber, Additive, Pigment, Aluminum Silicate, 
       Magnesium Silicate, Zinc Oxide, Distilled Solvent, Petroleum Distillate, Sulfur Dioxide, Sodium Benzoate, Dust cap, 
       Ferrite cap, Cone and coil assembly, Cleaner, Polypropylene pellets, Polypropylene chips, Polypropylene blocks, 
       Polypropylene slag, Parts Wash Solvent, Jar, Plastic Bottle - 15.2 FL Oz (450 ml), Polymer', 
       'clientName': 'ACME Inc', '$parent': 'file_1956534287859', '$template': 'boxAiExtractquick start', 
       '$scope': 'enterprise_899905961', '$version': 0, '$canEdit': True, '$id': '4d4f0b55-d45a-4ba4-9ff6-1241182cb76a', 
       '$type': 'boxAiExtractquick start-c4024235-2384-49f4-9286-ada6d68fd6a9', '$typeVersion': 0, 'extra_data': 
       {'invoiceAmount': 1106.06, 'products': 'Polyol, Diisocyanate, Carbon Dioxide, Laser, Lens, Oleic Acid, Glycerine, 
       Sodium Tallowate, Paint Base, Polypropylene, Rubber, Additive, Pigment, Aluminum Silicate, Magnesium Silicate, 
       Zinc Oxide, Distilled Solvent, Petroleum Distillate, Sulfur Dioxide, Sodium Benzoate, Dust cap, Ferrite cap, 
       Cone and coil assembly, Cleaner, Polypropylene pellets, Polypropylene chips, Polypropylene blocks, Polypropylene slag, 
       Parts Wash Solvent, Jar, Plastic Bottle - 15.2 FL Oz (450 ml), Polymer', 'clientName': 'ACME Inc'}}
       ```
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Resources

* <Link href="https://github.com/box-community/box-quickstarts/tree/main/box-ai-extract-quickstart">Final code</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract-structured">Extract Structured Metadata API Reference</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-id-id">Create metadata instance on file</Link>
* <Link href="https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/main">Box Python SDK</Link>


# Structured extraction with the Box AI Enhanced Extract Agent in Python
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract-enhanced

Learn how to use the Box AI Enhanced Extract Agent to automatically extract data from large, complex documents using the Box Python SDK.

<Link href="/ai-dev-zone">Box AI</Link> exposes intelligent extraction capabilities that enable developers to automatically extract
key-value pairs from documents through a single API call. The Enhanced Extract Agent uses advanced reasoning models
to transform complex unstructured document content into actionable metadata without manual data entry, streamlining
document processing workflows for invoices, forms, contracts, and other business documents.

This quick start demonstrates how to configure the Box Python SDK and use Box AI to extract data from a stock purchase
agreement stored in Box.

<Steps>
  <Step title="Create and configure a Box application">
    The first step for any Box Platform integration is to create and configure a Box
    application.

    1. Go to <Link href="https://app.box.com/developers/console">Box Developer Console</Link>.
    2. For this quick start, create an App with the `Client Credentials Grant`
       application type.
    3. Once the app is created, enable the following scopes:
       * `Read all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Write all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Manage AI`

    For more information about creating a new Box application, see <Link href="/guides/getting-started/first-application#create-your-first-application">Create your first application</Link>.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Upload a test file">
    After preparing the template, select a file to test. For this quick start, use this
    <Link href="/static/quickstarts/extract/files/enhanced-extract-file.pdf">sample stock purchase agreement</Link>.

    1. Download the test document, and then drag and drop it into your Box account.
    2. Get the file ID by opening the file in Box and inspecting the URL.
       The last part of the path is your file ID. For example, the URL might look like this:
       `https://app.box.com/file/2064123286902`

       In this case, the file ID is `2064123286902`.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Configure the environment">
    Now set up your development environment to run the extraction. For this quick start, use Python and the
    Box Python SDK version 10. Make sure you have Python 3.11 or higher installed on your machine.

    1. Create a new directory for your project and navigate into it.
    2. Create a virtual environment:
       ```bash theme={null}
       python3 -m venv .venv
       source .venv/bin/activate
       ```
    3. Install the Box Python SDK:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install "boxsdk~=10"
       ```
    4. Install the `python-dotenv` package to load environment variables from the `.env` file:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install python-dotenv
       ```
    5. Create an `.env` file in the root of your project directory and add the following
       environment variables, replacing the placeholder values with your actual Box app credentials
       and the IDs from the previous steps:
       ```bash theme={null}
        BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN=your_box_developer_token

        BOX_METADATA_TEMPLATE_KEY=your_metadata_template_key
        BOX_FILE_ID=your_box_file_id
       ```

    To get your developer token, go to the Box Developer Console, open your app, and navigate to
    the **Configuration** tab.

    6. Click **Generate Developer Token** to create a new token.

    <Tip>
      For simplicity, this quick start uses a short-lived developer token. In production, you
      should authenticate using your app’s configured method (for example, Client Credentials Grant)
      instead of a developer token.
    </Tip>
  </Step>

  <Step title="Create the enhanced-extract.py file">
    Your development environment is now ready to create the Python script to extract data from the document using Box AI.

    1. Create a new file named `enhanced-extract.py` in the root of your project directory and add the following code:

       ```python theme={null}
       import os

       from dotenv import load_dotenv

       from box_sdk_gen import (
           AiAgentReference,
           AiAgentReferenceTypeField,
           AiItemBase,
           BoxClient,
           BoxDeveloperTokenAuth,
           CreateAiExtractStructuredFields,
           CreateAiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField
       )

       load_dotenv()

       developer_token = os.getenv("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN")
       file_id = os.getenv("BOX_FILE_ID")

       def get_box_client(token: str) -> BoxClient:
           
           if not developer_token:
               raise ValueError("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN is not set in environment variables.")
           
           auth = BoxDeveloperTokenAuth(token=token)
           client = BoxClient(auth=auth)

           return client

       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

       if __name__ == "__main__":
           main()
       ```

       This code loads the environment variables from the `.env` file, initializes the Box SDK client,
       and prints the current user's ID to validate that the client is working correctly.

    2. Run the script using the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python enhanced-extract.py
       ```

       If the Box SDK client is set up correctly, the console displays your user ID. For example:

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789
       ```
  </Step>

  <Step title="Extract data">
    With a working Box SDK client, you can add the code to extract data from the document using Box AI.

    1. Between the `get_box_client` function and the `main` function, add the following function:

       ```python theme={null}
       def extract_metadata(client: BoxClient, file_id: str) -> dict:

           enhanced_extract_config = AiAgentReference(
               id="enhanced_extract_agent",
               type=AiAgentReferenceTypeField.AI_AGENT_ID
           )

           fields=[
               CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
                   key="parties",
                   display_name="Parties",
                   description="The named parties involved",
                   prompt="A comma separated list of the named parties involved",
                   type="string",
               ),
               CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
                   key="effectiveDate",
                   display_name="Effective date",
                   description="The effective date of the contract",
                   prompt="The effective date of the contract",
                   type="date",
               ),
               CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
                   key="purchasePrice",
                   display_name="Purchase price",
                   description="The purchase price stated in the contract",
                   prompt="The purchase price stated in the contract",
                   type="float",
               ),
               CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
                   key="summary",
                   display_name="Summary",
                   description="A summary of the contract in 50 words or less",
                   prompt="A summary of the contract in 50 words or less including key obligations",
                   type="string",
               ),
               CreateAiExtractStructuredFields(
                   key="recommendation",
                   display_name="Recommendation",
                   description="Should we make this purchase?",
                   prompt="Given the financial details, would you recommend proceeding with the purchase? Answer Yes or No.",
                   type="enum",
                   options=[
                       CreateAiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key="Yes"),
                       CreateAiExtractStructuredFieldsOptionsField(key="No"),
                   ],
               ),
           ]

           metadata = client.ai.create_ai_extract_structured(
               [ AiItemBase(id=file_id) ],
               fields=fields,
               ai_agent=enhanced_extract_config,
           )
           
           return metadata.to_dict()['answer']

       ```

       This function uses the Box AI `create_ai_extract_structured` method to extract metadata from the specified file.
       Your BoxClient and the file ID are sent to the function, which returns the extracted metadata as a dictionary.

       <Tip>
         The `fields` parameter defines the specific data points to extract from the document. You can also reference
         a metadata template key instead to extract fields defined in a Box metadata template.
       </Tip>

    2. Add the function call to extract the metadata in the `main` function. Ensure that the new `main` function contains the following logic:

       ```python theme={null}
       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

           metadata = extract_metadata(client=client, file_id=file_id)

           print(f"\n\nExtracted Metadata: {metadata}")
       ```

       The SDK handles the API call to Box AI and returns the extracted metadata as an
       <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-extract-structured-response">`AiExtractStructuredResponse`</Link> object. In this quick start,
       the code converts this object to a dictionary and returns the `answer` field that contains the extracted
       key/value pairs.

    3. Print out the extracted metadata to the console to verify that the extraction was successful by running the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python enhanced-extract.py
       ```

       If the extraction was successful, the console displays your user ID followed by the extracted metadata from the stock purchase agreement.

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789

       Extracted Metadata: {'parties': 'Argyle LLP, Suregood Family Trust', 'effectiveDate': '2023-03-31', 'purchasePrice': 231000000, 'summary': 'Argyle LLP agrees to purchase 51% of Erebor Life, Inc. from Suregood Family Trust for $231,000,000. The Seller must operate the business normally until closing, and the Buyer must pay the purchase price. The agreement is effective March 31, 2023.', 'recommendation': 'Yes'}
       ```
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Resources

* <Link href="https://github.com/box-community/box-quickstarts/tree/main/box-ai-enhanced-extract-quickstart">Final code</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract-structured">Extract Structured Metadata API Reference</Link>
* <Link href="https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/main">Box Python SDK</Link>


# Natural language extraction with Box AI in Python
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract-freeform

Learn how to use Box AI to automatically extract data from documents with natural language prompts using the Box Python SDK.

<Link href="/ai-dev-zone">Box AI</Link> exposes intelligent extraction capabilities that enable developers to automatically extract
key-value pairs from documents through a single API call. This powerful feature transforms unstructured
document content into actionable metadata without manual data entry, streamlining document processing
workflows for invoices, forms, contracts, and other business documents.

This quick start demonstrates how to configure the Box Python SDK and use Box AI to extract data from a W-2 stored in Box.

<Steps>
  <Step title="Create and configure a Box application">
    The first step for any Box Platform integration is to create and configure a Box
    application.

    1. Go to <Link href="https://app.box.com/developers/console">Box Developer Console</Link>.
    2. For this quick start, create an App with the `Client Credentials Grant`
       application type.
    3. Once the app is created, enable the following scopes:
       * `Read all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Write all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Manage AI`

    For more information about creating a new Box application, see <Link href="/guides/getting-started/first-application#create-your-first-application">Create your first application</Link>.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Upload a test file">
    After preparing the template, select a file to test. For this quick start, use this
    <Link href="/static/quickstarts/extract/files/freeform-extract-file.pdf">sample W-2</Link>.

    1. Download the test document, and then drag and drop it into your Box account.
    2. Get the file ID by opening the file in Box and inspecting the URL.
       The last part of the path is your file ID. For example, the URL might look like this:
       `https://app.box.com/file/2064123286902`

       In this case, the file ID is `2064123286902`.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Configure the environment">
    Now set up your development environment to run the extraction. For this quick start, use Python and the
    Box Python SDK version 10. Make sure you have Python 3.11 or higher installed on your machine.

    1. Create a new directory for your project and navigate into it.
    2. Create a virtual environment:
       ```bash theme={null}
       python3 -m venv .venv
       source .venv/bin/activate
       ```
    3. Install the Box Python SDK:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install "boxsdk~=10"
       ```
    4. Install the `python-dotenv` package to load environment variables from the `.env` file:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install python-dotenv
       ```
    5. Create an `.env` file in the root of your project directory and add the following
       environment variables, replacing the placeholder values with your actual Box app credentials
       and the IDs from the previous steps:
       ```bash theme={null}
        BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN=your_box_developer_token

        BOX_METADATA_TEMPLATE_KEY=your_metadata_template_key
        BOX_FILE_ID=your_box_file_id
       ```

    To get your developer token, go to the Box Developer Console, open your app, and navigate to
    the **Configuration** tab.

    6. Click **Generate Developer Token** to create a new token.

    <Tip>
      For simplicity, this quick start uses a short-lived developer token. In production, you
      should authenticate using your app’s configured method (for example, Client Credentials Grant)
      instead of a developer token.
    </Tip>
  </Step>

  <Step title="Create the freeform-extract.py file">
    Your development environment is now ready to create the Python script to extract data from the document using Box AI.

    1. Create a new file named `freeform-extract.py` in the root of your project directory and add the following code:

       ```python theme={null}
       import os

       from dotenv import load_dotenv

       from box_sdk_gen import (
           AiItemBase,
           BoxClient,
           BoxDeveloperTokenAuth
       )

       # Set up environment variables
       load_dotenv()

       developer_token = os.getenv("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN")
       file_id = os.getenv("BOX_FILE_ID")

       def get_box_client(token: str) -> BoxClient:
           
           if not developer_token:
               raise ValueError("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN is not set in environment variables.")
           
           auth = BoxDeveloperTokenAuth(token=token)
           client = BoxClient(auth=auth)

           return client

       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           # Get the current user and print the ID to validate the client is working
           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

       if __name__ == "__main__":
           main()
       ```

       This code loads the environment variables from the `.env` file, initializes the Box SDK client,
       and prints the current user's ID to validate that the client is working correctly.

    2. Run the script using the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python freeform-extract.py
       ```

       If the Box SDK client is set up correctly, the console displays your user ID. For example:

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789
       ```
  </Step>

  <Step title="Extract data">
    With a working Box SDK client, you can add the code to extract data from the document using Box AI.

    1. Between the `get_box_client` function and the `main` function, add the following function:

       ```python theme={null}
       def extract_metadata(client: BoxClient, file_id: str) -> str:

           prompt = """
           firstName, lastName, wages, federalTaxWithheld, 
           socialSecurityWages, socialSecurityTaxWithheld, 
           medicareWagesAndTips, medicareTaxWithheld, 
           stateWages, stateTaxWithheld, 
           localWagesAndTips, localTaxWithheld
           """

           metadata = client.ai.create_ai_extract(
               prompt,
               [AiItemBase(id=file_id)]
           )
           
           return metadata.to_dict()['answer']
       ```

       This function uses the Box AI `create_ai_extract` method to extract metadata from the specified file.
       Your BoxClient and the file ID are sent to the function, which returns the extracted metadata as a dictionary.

    2. Add the function call to extract the metadata in the `main` function. Ensure that the new `main` function contains the following logic:

       ```python theme={null}
       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

           metadata = extract_metadata(client=client, file_id=file_id)

           print(f"\n\nExtracted Metadata: {metadata}")
       ```

       The SDK handles the API call to Box AI and returns the extracted metadata as an
       <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-extract-response">`AiExtractResponse`</Link> object. In this quick start,
       the code converts this object to a dictionary and returns the `answer` field that contains the extracted
       key/value pairs.

    3. Print out the extracted metadata to the console to verify that the extraction was successful by running the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python freeform-extract.py
       ```

       If the extraction was successful, the console displays your user ID followed by the extracted metadata from the W-2.

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789

       Extracted Metadata: {"firstName": "Wayne", "lastName": "Gatsby", "wages": "355000", "federalTaxWithheld": "125600", "socialSecurityWages": "355000", "socialSecurityTaxWithheld": "12300", "medicareWagesAndTips": "355000", "medicareTaxWithheld": "13200", "stateWages": "355,000", "stateTaxWithheld": "15000", "localWagesAndTips": "355000", "localTaxWithheld": "8000"}
       ```
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Resources

* <Link href="https://github.com/box-community/box-quickstarts/tree/main/box-ai-freeform-extract-quickstart">Final code</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-extract">Extract Freeform Metadata API Reference</Link>
* <Link href="https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/main">Box Python SDK</Link>


# Summarize files with Box AI in Python
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-summarize

Learn how to use Box AI to automatically extract structured data from documents and store it as searchable metadata using the Box Python SDK.

<Link href="/ai-dev-zone">Box AI</Link> exposes AI capabilities that enable developers to interrogate documents through a single API call. This powerful feature transforms unstructured
document content into instant insights without the need to build and maintain complex Retrieval Augmented Generation (RAG) pipelines.

This quick start demonstrates how to configure the Box Python SDK and use Box AI to summarize files in Box.

<Steps>
  <Step title="Create and configure a Box application">
    The first step for any Box Platform integration is to create and configure a Box
    application.

    1. Go to <Link href="https://app.box.com/developers/console">Box Developer Console</Link>.
    2. For this quick start, create an App with the `Client Credentials Grant`
       application type.
    3. Once the app is created, enable the following scopes:
       * `Read all files and folders stored in Box`
       * `Manage AI`

    For more information about creating a new Box application, see <Link href="/guides/getting-started/first-application#create-your-first-application">Create your first application</Link>.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Upload a test file">
    To use Box AI to get insights from documents, you need a file in Box. For this quick start, use this document containing
    <Link href="/static/quickstarts/summarize/files/ai-summary-document.pdf">federal code</Link>.

    1. Download the test document, and then drag and drop it into your Box account.
    2. Get the file ID by opening the file in Box and inspecting the URL.
       The last part of the path is your file ID. For example, the URL might look like this:
       `https://app.box.com/file/2064123286902`

    In this case, the file ID is `2064123286902`.
  </Step>

  <Step title="Configure the environment">
    Now set up your development environment to run this quickstart. This tutorial uses Python and the
    latest Box Python SDK to run the code. Make sure you have Python 3.11 or higher installed on your machine.

    1. Create a new directory for your project and navigate into it.
    2. Create a virtual environment:
       ```bash theme={null}
       python3 -m venv .venv
       source .venv/bin/activate
       ```
    3. Install the Box Python SDK:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install "boxsdk~=10"
       ```
    4. Install the `python-dotenv` package to load environment variables from the `.env` file:
       ```bash theme={null}
       pip install python-dotenv
       ```
    5. Create an `.env` file in the root of your project directory and add the following
       environment variables, replacing the placeholder values with your actual Box app credentials
       and the IDs from the previous steps:
       ```bash theme={null}
        BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN=your_box_developer_token

        BOX_FILE_ID=your_box_file_id
       ```

    To get your developer token, go to the <Link href="https://app.box.com/developers/console">Box Developer Console</Link>,
    open your app, and navigate to the **Configuration** tab.

    6. Click **Generate Developer Token** to create a new token.

    <Tip>
      For simplicity, this quick start uses a short-lived developer token. In production, you
      should authenticate using your app’s configured method (for example, Client Credentials Grant)
      instead of a developer token.
    </Tip>
  </Step>

  <Step title="Create the summarize.py file">
    Your development environment is now ready to create the Python script to summarize the document using Box AI.

    1. Create a new file named `summarize.py` in the root of your project directory and add the following code:

       ```python theme={null}
       import os

       from dotenv import load_dotenv

       from box_sdk_gen import (
           AiItemAsk,
           AiItemAskTypeField,
           BoxClient,
           BoxDeveloperTokenAuth,
           CreateAiAskMode
       )

       load_dotenv()

       developer_token = os.getenv("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN")
       file_id = os.getenv("BOX_FILE_ID")

       def get_box_client(token: str) -> BoxClient:
           
           if not developer_token:
               raise ValueError("BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN is not set in environment variables.")
           
           auth = BoxDeveloperTokenAuth(token=token)
           client = BoxClient(auth=auth)

           return client

       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")


       if __name__ == "__main__":
           main()
       ```

    This code loads the environment variables from the `.env` file, initializes the Box SDK client,
    and prints the current user's ID to validate that the client is working correctly.

    2. Run the script using the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python summarize.py
       ```

       If the Box SDK client is set up correctly, the console displays your user ID. For example:

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789
       ```
  </Step>

  <Step title="Summarize the file">
    With a working Box SDK client, you can add the code to summarize the document using Box AI.

    1. Between the `get_box_client` function and the `main` function, add the following function:

       ```python theme={null}
       def summarize_file(client: BoxClient, file_id: str) -> str:
           prompt = """
           Summarize the content of the following file in a few sentences.
           """

           summary = client.ai.create_ai_ask(
               CreateAiAskMode.SINGLE_ITEM_QA,
               prompt,
               [
                   AiItemAsk(
                       id=file_id,
                       type=AiItemAskTypeField.FILE
                   )
               ]
           )
           
           return summary.to_dict()['answer']
       ```

       This function uses the Box AI `create_ai_ask` method to interrogate the specified file.
       Your BoxClient and file ID created earlier are sent to the function, which
       returns the summary of the file as a string.

    2. Add the function call to summarize the file in the `main` function. Ensure that the new `main` function contains the following logic:

       ```python theme={null}
       def main():
           client = get_box_client(token=developer_token)

           # Get the current user and print the ID to validate the client is working
           me = client.users.get_user_me()
           print(f"My user ID is {me.id}")

           summary = summarize_file(client=client, file_id=file_id)

           # Print the extracted metadata
           print(f"\n\nSummary: {summary}")
       ```

       The SDK handles the API call to Box AI and returns the summary as an
       <Link href="/reference/resources/ai-response--full">`AiResponseFull`</Link> object. In this quick start,
       the code converts this object to a dictionary and returns the `answer` field that contains the summary.

    3. Print out the summary to the console to verify that the operation was successful by running the following command in your terminal:

       ```bash theme={null}
       python summarize.py
       ```

       If the summarization was successful, the console displays your user ID followed by the summary from the test document.

       ```bash theme={null}
       My user ID is 123456789

       Summary: **Summary of 28 CFR § 2.20 (Paroling Policy Guidelines)**

       - The document sets forth the U.S. Parole Commission’s purpose and framework for national parole policy, emphasizing guidelines to promote consistent, equitable parole decisions while preserving individualized review.
       - It provides a matrix of customary total time-to-release ranges by offense severity categories (1–8) and offender parole prognosis (salient factor scores), noting guidelines apply to inmates with good institutional adjustment and are discretionary.
       - A comprehensive Offense Behavior Severity Index (Chapters 1–12) assigns categories to specific crimes (homicide, assault, theft, drugs, firearms, national defense, etc.) with detailed rules, exceptions, and examples for grading offenses (including monetary thresholds and drug-quantity bands).
       - Chapter Thirteen contains general notes, multiple-offense scoring guidance, definitions of key terms, and the Salient Factor Scoring Manual explaining how to compute parole prognosis points (prior convictions, commitments, age, recent commitment-free period, probation/parole status, and older-offender adjustment).
       - The document also references reparole guidelines and authority to revise guidelines; aggravated crimes and Category Eight cases receive special treatment.
       ```
  </Step>
</Steps>

## Resources

* <Link href="https://github.com/box-community/box-quickstarts/tree/main/box-ai-summarize-quickstart">Final code</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/post-ai-ask">Box AI Ask API Reference</Link>
* <Link href="https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/main">Box Python SDK</Link>


# Box MCP server
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-mcp/index



Model Context Protocol ([MCP](https://modelcontextprotocol.io/introduction)) is an open protocol that standardizes how applications provide context to LLMs. MCP servers make building advanced integrations simpler and less time consuming.

Box MCP server allows third party AI agents from platforms like Anthropic's Claude, Microsoft Copilot Studio, and Mistral Le Chat to access Box content seamlessly. It extends the agent’s capabilities by allowing it to perform actions related to content stored in Box.

<Frame>
  <img alt="MCP" />
</Frame>

There are two types of Box MCP servers:

* remote Box MCP server which you can create or enable in the Box Admin Console. It is hosted directly in Box.

- self-hosted Box MCP server which you can clone and host on your local machine, as this version in an open source Box Developer community project.

Check the detailed guides on both types of Box MCP servers, as the level of the implemented tools differs. Learn how to enable Box MCP server:

<Columns>
  <CustomCard icon="/static/ai-dev-zone/mcp.svg" title="Remote Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/remote">
    Enable the remote Box MCP server in the Admin Console. It is hosted directly in Box.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/ai-dev-zone/mcp.svg" title="Self-hosted Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/self-hosted">
    An open source Box Developer community project. You can clone this Box MCP Sever and host it on your local machine.
  </CustomCard>
</Columns>

Watch an interview with Box CTO, Ben Kus, and learn how MCP empowers AI agents to work dynamically across platforms, reducing the development effort.

<iframe title="MCP: The API standard that makes AI actionable for enterprises | Box AI Explainer Series EP4 with Ben Kus, Box CTO" />


# Remote Box MCP server
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-mcp/remote/index



[Remote Box MCP server](https://modelcontextprotocol.io/introduction) is a standardized way for AI Agents to connect and interact with third-party applications like Box, enabling seamless access to content and AI capabilities across platforms. The Box MCP server acts as a bridge that allows leading AI Agent platforms — such as Copilot Studio, Claude Enterprise, Mistral Le Chat — to securely query and utilize Box data and AI-powered tools without exposing raw file content. Through OAuth authorization, users can grant AI Agents controlled access to their Box accounts, enabling intelligent document handling, advanced search, and multi-file AI queries directly within these external AI environments.

## Access and manage predefined Box MCP servers

1. Click **Integrations** in the sidebar of Box Admin Console.
2. Use *Categories* filter and choose MCP or search for a predefined Box MCP server in the search field search at the top of the window.
3. Beside the selected MCP server, click the state, then select the state you want to enable.

<Frame>
  <img alt="MCP" />
</Frame>

## Create an unlisted Box MCP server

1. Click **Integrations** in the sidebar of Box Admin Console.
2. Search for **Box MCP server** in the search field search at the top of the window.
3. Hover on the **Box MCP server** application, then click **Configure**.
4. In the **Additional Configuration** section, click on **+ Add Integration Credentials**.
5. Enter integration name and click **Save**.
6. Expand details of the newly created entry.
7. Copy the generated **Client ID** and **Client Secret**.
8. Enter the **Redirect URI** provided by the external MCP client.
9. Under **Access Scopes**, enable **Content Actions**.

## Add Box MCP server on the Client Side

Exact steps for adding Box MCP server may vary depending on the AI platform. Refer to your platform’s documentation for client-side setup instructions. Check this sample code for reference:

To connect to Box from the AI Agent platform, you need to:

* Add endpoint URL: `https://mcp.box.com`
* Pass client ID and client secret. Box generates these in the Integration Credentials section of your Admin Console when configuring the Box MCP server, above.
* Pass an MCP name: `box-remote-mcp`
* Provide an `authorization_token`

```python theme={null}
  response = await client.beta.messages.create(
      model="claude-3-opus-20240229",  # Or your preferred model
      max_tokens=4096,
      messages=conversation_history,
      mcp_servers=[
          {
              "type": "url",
              "url": "https://mcp.box.com",
              "name": "box-remote-mcp",
              "authorization_token": BEARER_TOKEN,
          }
      ],
      betas=["mcp-client-2025-04-04"]
  )
```

### ChatGPT

To add the remote Box MCP server in ChatGPT, follow these steps:

1. Go to **Box** > **Admin Console** > **Integrations** and find **Box MCP Server** - either by using the MCP Category filter, or by using the search bar at the top of the page.
2. Go to **Configuration**.
3. Click the **Add Integration Credentials** button to generate new credentials.
4. In **Redirect URIs**, change the Box redirect URIs to: [https://chatgpt.com/connector\_platform\_oauth\_redirect](https://chatgpt.com/connector_platform_oauth_redirect)

The **Client ID** and **Client Secret** are displayed. These will be required later for ChatGPT to make the authorization connection.

5. Check the **Access** scopes:
   * Read all files and folders stored in Box.
   * Read and write all files and folders stored in Box.
   * Manage AI Requests.
6. Click **Save**.
7. On the ChatGPT side, as a ChatGPT Workspace admin, click the profile in the bottom-left corner.
8. Click **Settings** > **Apps & Connectors** > **Advanced Settings**.
9. Toggle the **Developer mode** on.
   This enables you to add custom connectors.
10. Go back to **Apps & Connectors**.
11. Click **Create** at the top-right corner of the modal.
12. Fill in the data:
    * **Name**: For example, `Box MCP Server Connector`.
    * **MCP Server URL**: [https://mcp.box.com](https://mcp.box.com)
    * **OAuth Client ID**: Found in Box **Admin Console** > **Integrations** > **Box MCP Server** > **Configuration**.
    * **OAuth Client Secret**: Found in Box **Admin Console** > **Integrations** > **Box MCP Server** > **Configuration**.
13. Select the `I understand and want to continue` checkbox and click **Create**.
14. Authorize the Box user.

<Note>
  If an error displays, such as `Something went wrong with setting up the connection`, you can continue to click through. The setup should work even if this displays.
</Note>

15. Test the setup by going to the chat, clicking the **+** icon, then hovering over **More** and selecting the newly added connector. Make sure that the other, built by OpenAI Box connector, is turned off or disconnected, so the answer is provided by the custom connector.
16. If you want to add this connector for the whole workspace, you can publish it within [ChatGPT Workspace](https://help.openai.com/en/articles/12584461-developer-mode-and-full-mcp-connectors-in-chatgpt-beta#:~:text=Publish%20connector,settings%20in%20ChatGPT).

### Claude

To start using the remote Box MCP server in [Claude](https://claude.ai/directory), go to Claude app settings and click *Connectors*. Within this view click *Browse connectors* and choose Box. Ensure to grant Claude access to Box.

See a demo video that showcases how to connect Box MCP with the Claude desktop app.

<iframe title="YouTube video player" />

### Copilot Studio

To add the remote Box MCP server, follow the instructions provided by the Copilot Studio side. Detailed steps and guidance are available in the official Microsoft documentation: [Add an MCP Server in Copilot Studio](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-copilot-studio/agent-extend-action-mcp#add-tools-from-an-existing-mcp-connector-to-an-agent).

### Azure API Center

To add the remote Box MCP server in Azure API Center's Enterprise Registry, follow the instructions provided by Azure. Detailed steps and guidance are available in the official Microsoft documentation: [Add an MCP Server in Azure API Center's Enterprise Registry](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/api-center/register-discover-mcp-server).

### Amazon Quick Suite

To add the remote Box MCP server in Amazon Quick Suite, follow these steps:

1. In the Amazon Quick Suite console, choose **Integrations** and create new integration by choosing **Model Content Protocol**.
2. Enter a name and a description in the **Create integration** page.
3. Set the MCP server endpoint to `https://mcp.box.com`.
4. Choose Auto-publishing to make the integration immediately available for personal use.
5. Click **Next**, select the authentication method, and provide the required configuration.

* For OAuth, use the client credentials you created in the Box Developer Console when configuring the Box MCP server.
* Add token URL: `https://api.box.com/oauth2/token`.
* Add authorization URL: `https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize`.
* Ensure the Amazon Quick Suite redirect URI is allow‑listed in Box Platform App settings.

6. Grant access to Box.
7. Select **Create and continue**, review the integration, then **Next**. Optionally share the integration with other users.

For details, see Amazon Quick Suite documentation: [Model Context Protocol (MCP) integration](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/quicksuite/latest/userguide/mcp-integration.html).

<iframe title="Box remote MCP with Amazon Quick Suite" />

### Anthropic's Messages API

Connect the remote Box MCP server with [Anthropic's Messages API](https://docs.anthropic.com/en/api/messages). Clone [this sample chat bot project](https://github.com/box-community/mcp-client-remote-mcp-react) to get started quickly. It allows you to have a conversation with an Anthropic model, which has access to tools provided by the Box remote MCP server.

Watch a video that features a demo project, a React based chat bot that leverages remote Box MCP.

<iframe title="Box remote MCP" />

### Mistral AI’s Le Chat

To enable Box MCP for [Mistral AI’s Le Chat](https://chat.mistral.ai/chat), visit [connectors page](https://chat.mistral.ai/connections), click *Connect* and grant access to Box. Alternatively, directly form the chat view, click *Tools* and choose Box.

<Frame>
  <img alt="MCP" />
</Frame>

### GitHub Copilot

To set up the Box MCP server with GitHub Copilot, go to the [overview page](https://github.com/mcp/box/mcp-server-box-remote) and click *Install MCP server*. You'll be redirected to the VS Code editor. Click *Install* and complete OAuth to grant access to Box.

You may need to manually enter your Client ID and Client Secret. When registering your OAuth application, make sure to include following redirect URIs:

```sh theme={null}
http://127.0.0.1:33418
https://vscode.dev/redirect
```

<iframe title="Box remote MCP with Github Copilot" />

### Using Box AI Features with the MCP Server

When you use Box AI in third-party applications, you can achieve the best experience and highest quality results by accessing the applications through the Box MCP server. This ensures full functionality, improved performance, and a seamless user experience.

## Available tools

The remote Box MCP server provides access to a comprehensive set of tools that enable AI agents to interact with Box content and features. These tools are organized by functional category to help you quickly identify the right capabilities for your use case.

### User and authentication

Manage user authentication and retrieve information about the authenticated user.

| Tool       | Description                                                              |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `who_am_i` | Returns detailed information about the currently authenticated Box user. |

### Content management

Manage files and folders, perform searches, and handle content operations across your Box environment.

#### File operations

| Tool                     | Description                                                                                         |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `get_file_content`       | Returns the content of a file stored in Box.                                                        |
| `get_file_details`       | Gets comprehensive file information from Box including metadata, permissions, and version details.  |
| `update_file_properties` | Updates file properties, including name, description, tags, and collections.                        |
| `upload_file`            | Uploads a new file to Box.                                                                          |
| `upload_file_version`    | Uploads a new file version by providing the entire file contents to update an existing file in Box. |

#### Folder operations

| Tool                               | Description                                                                                             |
| ---------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `create_folder`                    | Creates a new folder in Box.                                                                            |
| `get_folder_details`               | Retrieves comprehensive folder information including metadata, permissions, and collaboration settings. |
| `list_folder_content_by_folder_id` | Lists files, folders, and web links in a folder.                                                        |
| `update_folder_properties`         | Updates folder properties, including name, description, tags, and collections.                          |

#### Search

| Tool                     | Description                                                                                                  |
| ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `search_files_keyword`   | Searches for files using keywords. Supports metadata filters, file extension filtering, and field selection. |
| `search_folders_by_name` | Searches for folders within Box by name using keyword matching.                                              |

### Box AI

Use AI-powered tools to ask questions, extract insights, and analyze content across files and hubs.

| Tool                    | Description                                                                                                                     |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `ai_qa_hub`             | Asks a question to a Box Hub using Box AI.                                                                                      |
| `ai_qa_single_file`     | Asks a question to a single file using Box AI.                                                                                  |
| `ai_qa_multi_file`      | Asks a question to multiple files using Box AI.                                                                                 |
| `ai_extract_freeform`   | Extracts metadata from files using Box AI in freeform format without requiring predefined template structures.                  |
| `ai_extract_structured` | Extracts structured metadata from files using Box AI based on either custom fields definition or an existing metadata template. |

### Collaboration

Enable team collaboration through comments, shared links, and collaboration management tools.

| Tool                  | Description                                                                                |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `create_file_comment` | Creates a new comment on a specific file.                                                  |
| `list_file_comments`  | Lists all comments on a specific file.                                                     |
| `list_tasks`          | Lists all tasks associated with a specific file, including status, message, and due dates. |

### Hubs

Create and manage Box Hubs for organizing collaborative content and resources around specific topics or projects.

| Tool               | Description                                                    |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `add_items_to_hub` | Adds files, folders, or web links to a specific hub.           |
| `create_hub`       | Creates a new hub.                                             |
| `get_hub_details`  | Retrieves detailed information about a specific hub.           |
| `get_hub_items`    | Gets items (files and folders) associated with a specific hub. |
| `list_hubs`        | Lists all hubs accessible to the authenticated user.           |
| `update_hub`       | Updates the title and description of a specific hub.           |


# Self-hosted Box MCP server
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-mcp/self-hosted/index



The [Self-hosted Box MCP server](https://github.com/box-community/mcp-server-box.git) is a Python project that integrates with the Box API to perform various operations such as file search, text extraction, AI-based querying, and data extraction. It leverages the Box Python Next Gen SDK library and provides a set of tools to interact with Box files and folders.

## Installation

### Prerequisites

* Python `3.13` or higher
* Box Platform app credentials (Client ID, Client Secret)

Follow the steps from this section to set up the self-hosted Box MCP server.

1. Clone the repository:

```sh theme={null}
git clone https://github.com/box-community/mcp-server-box.git
cd mcp-server-box
```

2. Install `uv` if it's not installed on your machine:

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh MacOS/Linux theme={null}
    curl -LsSf https://astral.sh/uv/install.sh | sh
  ```

  ```powershell Windows theme={null}
    powershell -ExecutionPolicy ByPass -c "irm https://astral.sh/uv/install.ps1 | iex"
  ```
</CodeGroup>

Restart your terminal afterwards to ensure that the `uv` command gets picked up.

3. Create and set up our project:

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh MacOS/Linux theme={null}
    # Create virtual environment and activate it
    uv venv
    source .venv/bin/activate

    # Lock the dependencies
    uv lock
  ```

  ```sh Windows theme={null}
    # Create virtual environment and activate it
    uv venv
    .venv\Scripts\activate

    # Lock the dependencies
    uv lock
  ```
</CodeGroup>

4. Create a `.env` file in the root directory and fill your Box Platform app credentials:

```.env theme={null}
BOX_CLIENT_ID=your_client_id
BOX_CLIENT_SECRET=your_client_secret
```

You can also watch a video tutorial and see example usage of Box MCP tools.

<iframe title="Box self-hosted MCP Server" />

## Running Box MCP server locally

To start the Box MCP server, run the following command:

```sh theme={null}
uv --directory /Users/USER_NAME/PATH_TO_PROJECT/mcp-server-box run src/mcp_server_box.py
```

Update the path so it reflects your local setup.

### Use Cursor as the Box MCP client

Prerequisites:

* Download [Cursor desktop app](https://www.cursor.com/)

Follow these instructions to start using Box MCP Sever with Cursor:

1. Open the Cursor app.
2. Click the cog icon to open settings.
3. Select `MCP` within the Cursor Settings tab.
4. Click the `Add new global MCP server` button. This opens the `mcp.json` file.
5. Update the values with your local setup and paste the following JSON:

```json theme={null}
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "box": {
      "command": "uv",
      "args": [
        "--directory",
        "/Users/USER_NAME/PATH_TO_PROJECT/mcp-server-box",
        "run",
        "src/mcp_server_box.py"
      ]
    }
  }
}
```

6. Save and close the `mcp.json` file.
7. Restart Cursor if necessary.
8. Use the `box_authorize_app_tool` tool to start using Box MCP.

### Use Claude as the Box MCP client

Prerequisites:

* Download [Claude for Desktop](https://claude.ai/download) client
* Optionally, set up [`code`](https://code.visualstudio.com/docs/setup/mac#_configure-the-path-with-vs-code) command for VS Code

Follow these steps to set up Box MCP in Claude for Desktop:

1. Edit your `claude_desktop_config.json`.

You can run this command in your terminal:

```sh theme={null}
code ~/Library/Application\ Support/Claude/claude_desktop_config.json
```

Alternatively, in the main Claude navigation choose `Settings`. Select the Developers tab and click `Edit Config`. This opens a folder window containing `claude_desktop_config.json`.

2. Add the configuration:

```json theme={null}
{
  "mcpServers": {
      "mcp-server-box": {
          "command": "uv",
          "args": [
              "--directory",
              "/Users/Users/USER_NAME/PATH_TO_PROJECT/mcp-server-box",
              "run",
              "src/mcp_server_box.py"
          ]
      }
  }
}
```

3. Restart Claude desktop app.
4. Authenticate the Box MCP server using `box_authorize_app_tool` tool.

## Available tools

### Authentication and Authorization

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`get_box_client`</td>
      <td>Helper function to get Box client from context</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.
      </td>

      <td>Box client instance</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_who_am_i`</td>
      <td>Get the current user's information</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.
      </td>

      <td>User information string</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_authorize_app_tool`</td>
      <td>Authorize the Box application</td>
      <td>None</td>
      <td>Authorization status message</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Search and Navigation

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_search_tool`</td>
      <td>Search for files in Box</td>

      <td>
        * `query (str)`: Search query.
        * `file_extensions (List[str], optional)`: Filter by extensions.
        * `where_to_look_for_query (List[str], optional)`: Locations to search.
        * `ancestor_folder_ids (List[str], optional)`: Folder IDs to limit the search.
      </td>

      <td>Newline-separated list of file names and IDs</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td><code>`box_search_folder_by_name`</code></td>
      <td>Locate a folder by name</td>
      <td>`folder_name (str)`: Name of the folder</td>
      <td>Folder ID and information</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_list_folder_content_by_folder_id`</td>
      <td>List folder contents</td>

      <td>
        <ul>
          <li>`folder_id (str)`: ID of the folder.</li>
          <li>`is_recursive (bool)`: Whether to list recursively.</li>
        </ul>
      </td>

      <td>Folder content in JSON format</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### File Operations

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_read_tool`</td>
      <td>Read the text content of a Box file</td>

      <td>
        * `file_id (str)`: ID of the file to read.
      </td>

      <td>File content</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_upload_file_from_path_tool`</td>
      <td>Upload a file from local path</td>

      <td>
        * `file_path (str)`: Local file path.<br />
        * `folder_id (str, optional)`: Destination folder ID.<br />
        * `new_file_name (str, optional)`: New file name.
      </td>

      <td>File details or error message</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_upload_file_from_content_tool`</td>
      <td>Upload content as a file</td>

      <td>
        * `content (str|bytes)`: Content to upload.<br />
        * `file_name (str)`: File name.<br />
        * `folder_id (str, optional)`: Destination folder ID.<br />
        * `is_base64 (bool, optional)`: If content is base64 encoded.
      </td>

      <td>Upload success message</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_download_file_tool`</td>
      <td>Download a file from Box</td>

      <td>
        * `file_id (str)`: File ID.<br />
        * `save_file (bool, optional)`: Whether to save locally.<br />
        * `save_path (str, optional)`: Local save path.
      </td>

      <td>File content or save confirmation</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`get_file_content`</td>
      <td>Extract text content from a file</td>

      <td>
        * `file_id (str)`: File ID.<br />
      </td>

      <td>Text file content</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Folder Management

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr><th>Tool</th><th>Description</th><th>Parameters</th><th>Returns</th></tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_manage_folder_tool`</td>
      <td>Create, update, or delete folders</td>

      <td>
        * `action (str)`: `create`, `delete`, or `update`.
        * `folder_id (str, optional)`: Folder ID.
        * `name (str, optional)`: Folder name.
        * `parent_id (str, optional)`: Parent folder ID.
        * `description (str, optional)`: Folder description.
        * `recursive (bool, optional)`: For recursive delete.
      </td>

      <td>Status message with folder details</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Box AI

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_ask_ai_tool`</td>
      <td>Ask Box AI about a file</td>

      <td>
        * `file_id (str)`: File ID.<br />
        * `prompt (str)`: Question for the AI.
      </td>

      <td>AI response</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_ask_ai_tool_multi_file`</td>
      <td>Query Box AI using multiple files</td>

      <td>
        * `file_ids (List[str])`: List of file IDs.<br />
        * `prompt (str)`: Instruction for AI.
      </td>

      <td>AI-generated answer</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_hubs_ask_ai_tool`</td>
      <td>Ask Box AI about a hub</td>

      <td>
        * `hubs_id (str)`: ID of the hub.<br />
        * `prompt (str)`: Question for the AI.
      </td>

      <td>AI response</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_ai_extract_data`</td>
      <td>Extract data from a file using AI</td>

      <td>
        * `file_id (str)`: File ID.<br />
        * `fields (str)`: Fields to extract.
      </td>

      <td>Extracted data in JSON format</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Collaborations

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_collaboration_list_by_file_tool`</td>
      <td>List all collaborations on a specific file</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `file_id (str)`: ID of the Box file.
      </td>

      <td>List of collaborations in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_collaboration_list_by_folder_tool`</td>
      <td>List all collaborations on a specific folder</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `folder_id (str)`: ID of the Box folder.
      </td>

      <td>List of collaborations in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_collaboration_delete_tool`</td>
      <td>Delete a specific collaboration</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `collaboration_id (str)`: ID of the collaboration.
      </td>

      <td>Deletion confirmation</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_collaboration_file_group_by_group_id_tool`</td>
      <td>Add a group as a collaborator to a file</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `file_id (str)`: ID of the Box file.<br />
        * `group_id (str)`: ID of the group.<br />
        * `role (str, optional)`: Collaboration role (default: "editor").
      </td>

      <td>Created collaboration details</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Groups

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_groups_search_tool`</td>
      <td>Search for groups by name (partial match)</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `query (str)`: Search query.
      </td>

      <td>List of matching groups in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_groups_list_members_tool`</td>
      <td>List all members of a specific group</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `group_id (str)`: ID of the group.
      </td>

      <td>List of group members in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_groups_list_by_user_tool`</td>
      <td>List all groups that a specific user belongs to</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `user_id (str)`: ID of the user.
      </td>

      <td>List of groups in JSON format</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Users

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_users_list_tool`</td>
      <td>List all users in the Box account</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.
      </td>

      <td>List of users in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_users_locate_by_name_tool`</td>
      <td>Locate a user by their name (exact match)</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `name (str)`: Name of the user.
      </td>

      <td>User details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_users_locate_by_email_tool`</td>
      <td>Locate a user by their email address (exact match)</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `email (str)`: Email address.
      </td>

      <td>User details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_users_search_by_name_or_email_tool`</td>
      <td>Search for users by name or email (partial match)</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `query (str)`: Search query.
      </td>

      <td>List of matching users in JSON format</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Box Shared Links

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_shared_link_file_get_tool`</td>
      <td>Get a shared link for a file</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `file_id (str)`: ID of the file.
      </td>

      <td>Shared link details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_shared_link_file_create_or_update_tool`</td>
      <td>Create or update a shared link for a file</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `file_id (str)`: ID of the file.<br />
        * `access (str, optional)`: Access level.<br />
        * `can_download (bool, optional)`: Can download.<br />
        * `can_preview (bool, optional)`: Can preview.<br />
        * `can_edit (bool, optional)`: Can edit.<br />
        * `password (str, optional)`: Password.<br />
        * `vanity_name (str, optional)`: Vanity name.<br />
        * `unshared_at (str, optional)`: Expiration date.
      </td>

      <td>Created/updated shared link details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Box Tools Web Link

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_web_link_create_tool`</td>
      <td>Create a Box web link</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `url (str)`: URL of the web link.<br />
        * `parent_folder_id (str)`: Parent folder ID.<br />
        * `name (str, optional)`: Name of the web link.<br />
        * `description (str, optional)`: Description.
      </td>

      <td>Created web link details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_web_link_get_by_id_tool`</td>
      <td>Get a Box web link by its ID</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `web_link_id (str)`: ID of the web link.
      </td>

      <td>Web link details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_web_link_update_by_id_tool`</td>
      <td>Update a Box web link by its ID</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: Request context.<br />
        * `web_link_id (str)`: ID of the web link.<br />
        * `url (str)`: New URL.
      </td>

      <td>Updated web link details in JSON format</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Box Doc Gen

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_create_batch_tool`</td>
      <td>Generate documents using a template</td>

      <td>
        * `file_id (str)`: Template file ID.
        * `destination_folder_id (str)`: Output folder ID.
        * `user_input_file_path (str)`: JSON input data path.
        * `output_type (str, optional)`: Output format.
      </td>

      <td>Batch generation result</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_get_job_tool`</td>
      <td>Fetch a Doc Gen job by ID</td>
      <td>`job_id (str)`: Job identifier</td>
      <td>Job details in JSON</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_list_jobs_tool`</td>
      <td>List all Doc Gen jobs</td>

      <td>
        * `marker (str, optional)`: Pagination marker.
        * `limit (int, optional)`: Max jobs to return.
      </td>

      <td>List of jobs in JSON</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_list_jobs_by_batch_tool`</td>
      <td>List jobs in a specific batch</td>

      <td>
        * `batch_id (str)`: Batch identifier.
        * `marker (str, optional)`: Pagination marker.
        * `limit (int, optional)`: Max jobs to return.
      </td>

      <td>Batch jobs details</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_template_create_tool`</td>
      <td>Mark a file as a template</td>
      <td>`file_id (str)`: File ID to mark</td>
      <td>Template details</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_template_list_tool`</td>
      <td>List all available templates</td>

      <td>
        * `marker (str, optional)`: Pagination marker.
        * `limit (int, optional)`: Max templates to list.
      </td>

      <td>List of templates</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_template_delete_tool`</td>
      <td>Remove template marking</td>
      <td>`template_id (str)`: Template identifier</td>
      <td>Deletion confirmation</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_template_get_by_id_tool`</td>
      <td>Get template details</td>
      <td>`template_id (str)`: Template identifier</td>
      <td>Template details</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_template_list_tags_tool`</td>
      <td>List template tags</td>

      <td>
        * `template_id (str)`: Template ID.
        * `template_version_id (str, optional)`: Version ID.
        * `marker (str, optional)`: Pagination marker.
        * `limit (int, optional)`: Max tags to return.
      </td>

      <td>List of tags</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_docgen_template_list_jobs_tool`</td>
      <td>List jobs using a template</td>

      <td>
        * `template_id (str)`: Template identifier.
        * `marker (str, optional)`: Pagination marker.
        * `limit (int, optional)`: Max jobs to list.
      </td>

      <td>Job details</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

### Box Metadata

<table>
  <thead>
    <tr>
      <th>Tool</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>Parameters</th>
      <th>Returns</th>
    </tr>
  </thead>

  <tbody>
    <tr>
      <td>`box_metadata_template_get_by_key_tool`</td>
      <td>Retrieves a metadata template by its key.</td>

      <td>
        `template_name (str)`: The key of the metadata template to retrieve.
      </td>

      <td>The metadata template associated with the provided key.</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_metadata_template_get_by_name_tool`</td>
      <td>Retrieve a metadata template by its name.</td>
      <td>`template_name (str)`: The name of the metadata template to retrieve.</td>
      <td>The metadata template associated with the provided name.</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_metadata_template_create_tool`</td>
      <td>Create a metadata template.</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: The context object
        * `display_name (str)`: The display name of the metadata template
        * `fields (List[Dict[str, Any]])`: A list of field definitions with type, key, displayName, description, hidden, and options (for enum/multiSelect)
        * `template_key (Optional[str])`: An optional key for the metadata template
      </td>

      <td>The created metadata template.</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_metadata_set_instance_on_file_tool`</td>
      <td>Set a metadata instance on a file.</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: The context object
        * `template_key (str)`: The key of the metadata template
        * `file_id (str)`: The ID of the file to set metadata on
        * `metadata (dict)`: The metadata values to set
      </td>

      <td>The metadata instance associated with the file.</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_metadata_update_instance_on_file_tool`</td>
      <td>Update a metadata instance on a file.</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: The context object
        * `file_id (str)`: The ID of the file to update metadata on
        * `template_key (str)`: The key of the metadata template
        * `metadata (dict)`: The metadata values to update
        * `remove_non_included_data (bool)`: If True, removes fields not included in metadata
      </td>

      <td>The response from the Box API after updating the metadata.</td>
    </tr>

    <tr>
      <td>`box_metadata_delete_instance_on_file_tool`</td>
      <td>Delete a metadata instance on a file.</td>

      <td>
        * `ctx (Context)`: The context object
        * `file_id (str)`: The ID of the file to delete metadata from
        * `template_key (str)`: The key of the metadata template
      </td>

      <td>The response from the Box API after deleting the metadata.</td>
    </tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

## Troubleshooting

In case of an `Error: spawn uv ENOENT` on MacOS when running the MCP server with Claude Desktop, you can:

* Remove `uv` and reinstall it with Homebrew: `brew install uv`.
* Provide the full path to the `uv` executable in your configuration:

```sh theme={null}
/Users/USER_NAME/.local/bin/uv --directory /Users/USER_NAME/local/mcp-server-box run src/mcp_server_box.py
```

In case of additional issues related to setup, post your question on our [Developer Community forum](https://community.box.com/ai-developers-23).


# Get started with Box Doc Gen
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen/docgen-getting-started



To start generating documents with Box Doc Gen API you will need a platform application and a developer token to
authenticate your calls. You also need a Doc Gen template that will serve as an input source for your document.

## Enable Box Doc Gen

To use Box Doc Gen, make sure it is enabled by an
admin in the Admin Console.
If you are a Box Admin, you will find the necessary information in
[Enterprise Settings: Content & Sharing Tab][settings] documentation.

## Create and upload a Box Doc Gen template

To use Box Doc Gen API to generate documents, a Box Doc Gen template must already exist in Box. You have the following options to create a template:

* Install the [Box Doc Gen Template Creator add-in for Microsoft Word][template-addin].
* Create a Box Doc Gen template [using a JSON file][json-template] or manually create [template tags][template-tags].

## Create a platform application

First you need to create a platform application
you will use to make calls. To create
an application, follow the guide
on <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">creating platform apps</Link>.

## Generate a developer token

You need a developer token
to authenticate your app when sending requests.

To generate a token:

1. Go to **Developer Console** > **My Platform Apps**.
2. Click the **Options menu** button (…) on the right.
3. Select **Generate Developer Token**. The token will be automatically generated and saved to clipboard.

<Frame>
  <img alt="generate token" />
</Frame>

You can also open your app, go to
**Configuration** > **Developer Token**
and generate the token.

<Note>
  A developer token is only valid for one hour.
</Note>

For additional details, see <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">developer token</Link>.
After you generate the token, you can use it in cURL
or other clients, such as <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman">Postman</Link>, to make
calls.

## Use webhooks

You can create webhooks to monitor Doc Gen events and automate your business process or workflow.

Follow the instructions for <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/create-v2/">adding webhooks</Link>. Your content type is your Doc Gen template file or folder.

The supported <Link href="/guides/webhooks/triggers">events</Link> are:

* `DOCGEN_DOCUMENT_GENERATION_STARTED`
* `DOCGEN_DOCUMENT_GENERATION_SUCCEEDED`
* `DOCGEN_DOCUMENT_GENERATION_FAILED`

<Frame>
  <img alt="Doc Gen event triggers" />
</Frame>

Information that is posted in a notification:

* Trigger name.
* Webhook trigger timestamp.
* Template file ID.
* Template file version ID.
* Template file name.
* Destination folder.
* Generated file ID (if the document generation process succeeds).
* Output type (DOCX or PDF).
* Reason (if the document generation process fails).

[settings]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404822772755-Enterprise-Settings-Content-Sharing-Tab#h_01FYQGK5RW42T07GV985MQ9E9A

[template-addin]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36587535449747-Installing-Box-Doc-Gen-Add-in

[template-tags]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36151895655059-Creating-A-Box-Doc-Gen-Template-Manually

[json-template]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36148012877843-Creating-a-Box-Doc-Gen-Template-using-JSON-data

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box Doc Gen jobs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen/docgen-jobs



A Box Doc Gen job runs when you make a request to generate a document.
The `document_generation_data` parameter in the `POST` request is an array of entries that represent Box Doc Gen jobs run to generate a document.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_batches' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
       -D '{
          "file": {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "file"
          },
          "input_source": "api",
          "destination_folder": {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "folder"
          },
          "output_type": "docx",
          "document_generation_data": [
              {
                  "generated_file_name": "Image test",
                  "user_input": {
                      "order": {
                          "id": "12305",
                          "date": "18-08-2023",
                          "country": "US",
                          "expiryDate": "18-08-2024",
                          "currency": "$",
                          "amount": 5060.5,
                          "taxRate": 10,
                          "requester": "John",
                          "approver": "Smith",
                          "department": "Procurement",
                          "paymentTerms": "30 days",
                          "deliveryTerms": "30 days",
                          "deliveryDate": "18-09-2023",
                          "vendor": {
                              "company": "Example company",
                              "address": {
                                  "street": "Example street",
                                  "city": "Example city",
                                  "zip": "EX-456"
                              }
                          },
                          "products": [
                              {
                                  "id": 1,
                                  "name": "A4 Papers",
                                  "type": "non-fragile",
                                  "quantity": 100,
                                  "price": 29,
                                  "amount": 2900
                              },
                              {
                                  "id": 2,
                                  "name": "Ink  Cartridge",
                                  "type": "non-fragile",
                                  "quantity": 40,
                                  "price": 39,
                                  "amount": 1560
                              },
                              {
                                  "id": 3,
                                  "name": "Adhesive tape",
                                  "type": "non-fragile",
                                  "quantity": 20,
                                  "price": 30,
                                  "amount": 600.5
                              }
                          ]
                      }
                  }
              }
          ]`
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgen.createDocgenBatchV2025R0({
    file: new FileReferenceV2025R0({ id: uploadedFile.id }),
    inputSource: 'api',
    destinationFolder: new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField({
      id: folder.id,
    }),
    outputType: 'pdf',
    documentGenerationData: [
      {
        generatedFileName: 'test',
        userInput: { ['abc']: 'xyz' },
      } satisfies DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0,
    ],
  } satisfies DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen.create_docgen_batch_v2025_r0(
      FileReferenceV2025R0(id=uploaded_file.id),
      "api",
      CreateDocgenBatchV2025R0DestinationFolder(id=folder.id),
      "pdf",
      [
          DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0(
              generated_file_name="test", user_input={"abc": "xyz"}
          )
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Docgen.CreateDocgenBatchV2025R0Async(requestBody: new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0(file: new FileReferenceV2025R0(id: uploadedFile.Id), inputSource: "api", destinationFolder: new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField(id: folder.Id), outputType: "pdf", documentGenerationData: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0(generatedFileName: "test", userInput: new Dictionary<string, object>() { { "abc", "xyz" } })})));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgen.createDocgenBatchV2025R0(requestBody: DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0(file: FileReferenceV2025R0(id: uploadedFile.id), inputSource: "api", destinationFolder: DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField(id: folder.id), outputType: "pdf", documentGenerationData: [DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0(generatedFileName: "test", userInput: ["abc": "xyz"])]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgen().createDocgenBatchV2025R0(new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0(new FileReferenceV2025R0(uploadedFile.getId()), "api", new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField(folder.getId()), "pdf", Arrays.asList(new DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0("test", mapOf(entryOf("abc", "xyz"))))))
  ```
</CodeGroup>

Box Doc Gen API allows you to get information about the Box Doc Gen jobs.

## Prerequisites

Before you start using Box Doc Gen API, follow the steps listed in the <Link href="/guides/docgen/docgen-getting-started">get started with Box Doc Gen</Link> guide to create a platform app and a Box Doc Gen template.

## List all Box Doc Gen jobs

To get a list of all Box Doc Gen jobs that were run,
use the `GET /2.0/docgen_jobs` endpoint. You don't have to provide any additional parameters.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_jobs" \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgen.getDocgenJobsV2025R0({
    limit: 10000,
  } satisfies GetDocgenJobsV2025R0QueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen.get_docgen_jobs_v2025_r0(limit=10000)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Docgen.GetDocgenJobsV2025R0Async(queryParams: new GetDocgenJobsV2025R0QueryParams() { Limit = 10000 });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgen.getDocgenJobsV2025R0(queryParams: GetDocgenJobsV2025R0QueryParams(limit: Int64(10000)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgen().getDocgenJobsV2025R0(new GetDocgenJobsV2025R0QueryParams.Builder().limit(10000L).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Get a Box Doc Gen job by ID

To get a specific Box Doc Gen job,
use the `GET /2.0/docgen_jobs_id` endpoint and provide the `job_id`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_jobs/12345" \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgen.getDocgenJobByIdV2025R0(docgenJobItemFromList.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen.get_docgen_job_by_id_v2025_r0(docgen_job_item_from_list.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Docgen.GetDocgenJobByIdV2025R0Async(jobId: docgenJobItemFromList.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgen.getDocgenJobByIdV2025R0(jobId: docgenJobItemFromList.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgen().getDocgenJobByIdV2025R0(docgenJobItemFromList.getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Get Box Doc Gen jobs in batch with a specific ID

A single request can generate several documents. In such a case, a separate generation job is run for each document and all these jobs are included in one "batch" meaning a request.
To get all jobs performed within one request, use the `GET /2.0/docgen_batch_jobs_id` endpoint and provide the `batch_id`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_jobs/12345" \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgen.getDocgenJobByIdV2025R0(docgenJobItemFromList.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen.get_docgen_job_by_id_v2025_r0(docgen_job_item_from_list.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Docgen.GetDocgenJobByIdV2025R0Async(jobId: docgenJobItemFromList.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgen.getDocgenJobByIdV2025R0(jobId: docgenJobItemFromList.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgen().getDocgenJobByIdV2025R0(docgenJobItemFromList.getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box Doc Gen templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen/docgen-templates



Box Doc Gen API allows you to retrieve information related to Box Doc Gen templates.

## Prerequisites

Before you start using Box Doc Gen API, follow the steps listed in the <Link href="/guides/docgen/docgen-getting-started">get started with Box Doc Gen</Link> guide to create a platform app and a Box Doc Gen template.

## List Box Doc Gen templates

To get a list of all created Box Doc Gen templates,
use the `GET /2.0/docgen_templates` endpoint. You don't have to provide any additional parameters.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_templates' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgenTemplate.getDocgenTemplatesV2025R0();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen_template.get_docgen_templates_v2025_r0()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.DocgenTemplate.GetDocgenTemplatesV2025R0Async();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgenTemplate.getDocgenTemplatesV2025R0()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgenTemplate().getDocgenTemplatesV2025R0()
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The response will contain an `entries` array listing the already created Box Doc Gen templates.

## Get a  Box Doc Gen template by ID

To get a specific Box Doc Gen template,
use the `GET /2.0/docgen_templates_id` endpoint and provide the `template_id`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_templates/12345678' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgenTemplate.getDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0(
    createdDocgenTemplate.file!.id,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen_template.get_docgen_template_by_id_v2025_r0(
      created_docgen_template.file.id
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.DocgenTemplate.GetDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0Async(templateId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(createdDocgenTemplate.File).Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgenTemplate.getDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0(templateId: createdDocgenTemplate.file!.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgenTemplate().getDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0(createdDocgenTemplate.getFile().getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The response will contain details of a file that was used as a Box Doc Gen template.

## List all document generation jobs for a template

To get a list of all created Box Doc Gen templates,
use the `GET /2.0/docgen_template_jobs_id` endpoint and provide the `template_id`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_template_jobs/12345678' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgenTemplate.getDocgenTemplateJobByIdV2025R0(
    fetchedDocgenTemplate.file!.id,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen_template.get_docgen_template_job_by_id_v2025_r0(
      fetched_docgen_template.file.id
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.DocgenTemplate.GetDocgenTemplateJobByIdV2025R0Async(templateId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(fetchedDocgenTemplate.File).Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgenTemplate.getDocgenTemplateJobByIdV2025R0(templateId: fetchedDocgenTemplate.file!.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgenTemplate().getDocgenTemplateJobByIdV2025R0(fetchedDocgenTemplate.getFile().getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The response will contain a list of Box Doc Gen jobs that were run to generate
documents.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Generate documents
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen/generate-document



The `POST /2.0/docgen_batches` endpoint allows you to generate a document using Box Doc Gen template as input.

## Prerequisites

Before you start using Box Doc Gen API, follow the steps listed in the <Link href="/guides/docgen/docgen-getting-started">get started with Box Doc Gen</Link> guide to create a platform app and a Box Doc Gen template.

## Send a request

To generate a document or a set of documents,
use the `POST /2.0/docgen_batches` endpoint.

### Parameters

To make a call, you need to pass the following parameters.
Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter                                          | Description                                                                                                            | Example                                                      |
| -------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **`file.id`**                                      | ID of the file to be marked as Box Doc Gen template.                                                                   | `12345678`                                                   |
| **`file.type`**                                    | The type of provided input. The value is always **`file`**.                                                            | `file`                                                       |
| `file_version`                                     | The file version of a template.                                                                                        | `12345`                                                      |
| **`input_source`**                                 | The input source for generated document. The value has to be `api` for all the API-based document generation requests. | `api`                                                        |
| **`output_type`**                                  | The output file type.                                                                                                  | `docx`, `pdf`                                                |
| **`destination_folder.id`**                        | The ID of the folder where the generated document will be stored.                                                      | `12345678`                                                   |
| **`destination_folder.type`**                      | The type of the destination item. Since the generated files are stored in folders, the value is always **`folder`**.   | `file`                                                       |
| **`document_generation_data.generated_file_name`** | The name of the generated file.                                                                                        | `New_Template`                                               |
| **`document_generation_data.user_input`**          | The JSON data to be used to generate document.                                                                         | `{"id": 2, "name": "Ink  Cartridge", "type": "non-fragile"}` |

## Use case

When your Box Doc Gen template and JSON data is ready, you can make a request to Box Doc Gen API to generate documents.

A sample call looks as follows:

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_batches' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
       -D '{
          "file": {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "file"
          },
          "input_source": "api",
          "destination_folder": {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "folder"
          },
          "output_type": "docx",
          "document_generation_data": [
              {
                  "generated_file_name": "Image test",
                  "user_input": {
                      "order": {
                          "id": "12305",
                          "date": "18-08-2023",
                          "country": "US",
                          "expiryDate": "18-08-2024",
                          "currency": "$",
                          "amount": 5060.5,
                          "taxRate": 10,
                          "requester": "John",
                          "approver": "Smith",
                          "department": "Procurement",
                          "paymentTerms": "30 days",
                          "deliveryTerms": "30 days",
                          "deliveryDate": "18-09-2023",
                          "vendor": {
                              "company": "Example company",
                              "address": {
                                  "street": "Example street",
                                  "city": "Example city",
                                  "zip": "EX-456"
                              }
                          },
                          "products": [
                              {
                                  "id": 1,
                                  "name": "A4 Papers",
                                  "type": "non-fragile",
                                  "quantity": 100,
                                  "price": 29,
                                  "amount": 2900
                              },
                              {
                                  "id": 2,
                                  "name": "Ink  Cartridge",
                                  "type": "non-fragile",
                                  "quantity": 40,
                                  "price": 39,
                                  "amount": 1560
                              },
                              {
                                  "id": 3,
                                  "name": "Adhesive tape",
                                  "type": "non-fragile",
                                  "quantity": 20,
                                  "price": 30,
                                  "amount": 600.5
                              }
                          ]
                      }
                  }
              }
          ]`
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgen.createDocgenBatchV2025R0({
    file: new FileReferenceV2025R0({ id: uploadedFile.id }),
    inputSource: 'api',
    destinationFolder: new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField({
      id: folder.id,
    }),
    outputType: 'pdf',
    documentGenerationData: [
      {
        generatedFileName: 'test',
        userInput: { ['abc']: 'xyz' },
      } satisfies DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0,
    ],
  } satisfies DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen.create_docgen_batch_v2025_r0(
      FileReferenceV2025R0(id=uploaded_file.id),
      "api",
      CreateDocgenBatchV2025R0DestinationFolder(id=folder.id),
      "pdf",
      [
          DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0(
              generated_file_name="test", user_input={"abc": "xyz"}
          )
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Docgen.CreateDocgenBatchV2025R0Async(requestBody: new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0(file: new FileReferenceV2025R0(id: uploadedFile.Id), inputSource: "api", destinationFolder: new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField(id: folder.Id), outputType: "pdf", documentGenerationData: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0(generatedFileName: "test", userInput: new Dictionary<string, object>() { { "abc", "xyz" } })})));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgen.createDocgenBatchV2025R0(requestBody: DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0(file: FileReferenceV2025R0(id: uploadedFile.id), inputSource: "api", destinationFolder: DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField(id: folder.id), outputType: "pdf", documentGenerationData: [DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0(generatedFileName: "test", userInput: ["abc": "xyz"])]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgen().createDocgenBatchV2025R0(new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0(new FileReferenceV2025R0(uploadedFile.getId()), "api", new DocGenBatchCreateRequestV2025R0DestinationFolderField(folder.getId()), "pdf", Arrays.asList(new DocGenDocumentGenerationDataV2025R0("test", mapOf(entryOf("abc", "xyz"))))))
  ```
</CodeGroup>

When the request is being processed, each entry in the `document_generation_data` array is treated as a separate document generation job that Box Doc Gen adds to the document generation queue.

Generated documents will be saved in the designated folder.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box Doc Gen
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen/index



Box Doc Gen allows you to generate business documents such as offer letters, sales contracts, invoices or agreements.
You can generate documents based on Box Doc Gen templates uploaded to Box, with data fields that can be dynamically filled using Box Doc Gen API.

<Note>
  Box Doc Gen only supports the ability to leverage English template tags when
  using Box Doc Gen templates. We recommend that customers test and review that Box Doc Gen supports their desired language requirements.
</Note>

## Prerequisites

* access to Microsoft Word

To use Box Doc Gen, you must have access to Microsoft Word, as it is required
for creating and authoring your document templates. You can utilize the Box Doc
Gen Add-in for a code-free experience or apply tagging scripts within Word to
prepare your documents.

<Note>
  Box Doc Gen is designed to facilitate the dynamic generation of business
  documents, but it is important to note that Box does not have control over
  users’ access to Microsoft Word. Users must ensure they have the necessary
  permissions and access to Microsoft Word to create and author document
  templates effectively.
</Note>

## Box Doc Gen API capabilities

Box Doc Gen API allows you to:

* mark documents as Box Doc Gen templates,
* generate documents based on Box Doc Gen templates you store in Box,
* examine the details of Box Doc Gen templates and document generation jobs.

## Box Doc Gen API version

Box Doc Gen API was released in Box API version `2025.0`. All API requests to Box Doc Gen API endpoints must specify a valid API version by setting the `box-version` header to `2025.0`.

For more details, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy">Box API versioning</Link>.

## Box Doc Gen workflow

<Frame>
  <img alt="A flow diagram representing Box Doc Gen workflow" />
</Frame>

1. Author your Doc Gen Template
   * Use [Doc Gen Add-in for Microsoft Word][template-addin] to create a template without any code.
   * You can also leverage [Doc Gen's tagging script][tagging-script] to author the template.

2. [Add the template to Box][upload-template] using the Box Doc Gen UI. At this point, you can:
   * Mark an existing file In Box as Doc Gen template.
   * Create or Upload a document and mark it as a Box Doc Gen template.

3. <Link href="/guides/docgen/generate-document">Generate the document</Link> using Box Doc Gen API.

[template-addin]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36587535449747-Installing-Box-Doc-Gen-Add-in

[template-tags]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36151895655059-Creating-A-Box-Doc-Gen-Template-Manually

[json-template]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36148012877843-Creating-a-Box-Doc-Gen-Template-using-JSON-data

[tagging-script]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36149723736723-Template-tags-reference

[upload-template]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/36587432368275-Managing-Box-Doc-Gen-Templates-in-Relay

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Mark file as Box Doc Gen template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen/mark-template



You can mark an existing document as a Box Doc Gen template and use it to generate documents.

## Before you start

Before you start using Box Doc Gen API, follow the steps listed in the <Link href="/guides/docgen/docgen-getting-started">get started with Box Doc Gen</Link> guide to create a platform app and a Box Doc Gen template.

## Send a request

To send a request containing your question,
use the `POST /2.0/docgen_templates` endpoint and
provide the mandatory parameters.

### Parameters

To make a call you need to pass the following parameters.
Mandatory parameters are in **bold**.

| Parameter       | Description                                                 | Example    |
| --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | ---------- |
| **`file.id`**   | ID of the file to be marked as the Box Doc Gen template.    | `12345678` |
| **`file.type`** | The type of provided input. The value is always **`file`**. | `file`     |

## Use cases

### Mark a file as Box Doc Gen template

The following sample show you how to mark a file to ensure it is recognized as a Box Doc Gen template.

<Note>
  The file must be in `.docx` format.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_templates' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
       -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
       -D '{
          "file": {
              "id": "12345678",
              "type": "file"
          }
  }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgenTemplate.createDocgenTemplateV2025R0({
    file: new FileReferenceV2025R0({ id: file.id }),
  } satisfies DocGenTemplateCreateRequestV2025R0);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen_template.create_docgen_template_v2025_r0(FileReferenceV2025R0(id=file.id))
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.DocgenTemplate.CreateDocgenTemplateV2025R0Async(requestBody: new DocGenTemplateCreateRequestV2025R0(file: new FileReferenceV2025R0(id: file.Id)));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgenTemplate.createDocgenTemplateV2025R0(requestBody: DocGenTemplateCreateRequestV2025R0(file: FileReferenceV2025R0(id: file.id)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgenTemplate().createDocgenTemplateV2025R0(new DocGenTemplateCreateRequestV2025R0(new FileReferenceV2025R0(file.getId())))
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Remove Box Doc Gen template marking from a file

To make sure a file is no longer marked as a Box Doc Gen template,
use the `DELETE 2.0/docgen_templates/:template_id` request.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L -X DELETE 'https://api.box.com/2.0/docgen_templates/12345678' \
       -H 'box-version: 2025.0' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.docgenTemplate.deleteDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0(
    createdDocgenTemplate.file!.id,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.docgen_template.delete_docgen_template_by_id_v2025_r0(
      created_docgen_template.file.id
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.DocgenTemplate.DeleteDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0Async(templateId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(createdDocgenTemplate.File).Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.docgenTemplate.deleteDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0(templateId: createdDocgenTemplate.file!.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDocgenTemplate().deleteDocgenTemplateByIdV2025R0(createdDocgenTemplate.getFile().getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create your first application
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/getting-started/first-application



Once you have your Developer Enterprise set up, you can start creating applications.

Click the [Dev Console][console] button once you're logged in to
your Developer Enterprise.
If this is your first application, you will be prompted to get started.

## Choose application type

The first step is to select the application type you want to create.
In this guide we use the **Platform App** option, as most of our partners
use this type for their integrations.

## Choose the authentication method

After you choose the **Platform App**, you need to <Link href="/guides/authentication/select">select an authentication
method</Link> that your app will use. In this guide we use the
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">**User Authentication (OAuth 2.0)**</Link> option, as most of our partners
use this type for their integrations.

## Name the app

Choose an app name. It can be changed later on and it is not publicly
visible until you publish your app. We recommend choosing a name that
is recognizable, as the admins and customers will see the name of
the app when it's published.

Click the **Create App** button to finish creating your app.
Next, configure the application settings.

## General settings

Begin with the most basic settings. Open the **General Settings** tab
and check or fill in below fields:

* **App Name** - the name you set up during the app creation, you can change it here if needed;
* **Contact Email** - this is set to the developer of the application by default. Keep in mind that once you publish your app, this email is publicly visible to Box users who view your app in the <Link href="/guides/applications/integrations">Integrations</Link>. We recommend to change it to a support email address, so that users can reach out to support in case of any issues with the integration;
* **Collaborators** - add other developers that can work on this integration, so that they can access the developer interface in case they need to adjust any settings.

<Note>
  The developers you add here need to be Box users already. If they don't
  have Box account, you can [create them][add-users] in your Developer Enterprise.
</Note>

## Advanced settings

Go to the **Configuration** tab. Here you can specify the app details,
generate a developer token, check your OAuth 2.0 credentials, add and
edit OAuth 2.0 redirect URI, choose the application scopes, set app advanced
features, and add CORS domains.

In the next tabs you can create webhooks, web app integrations,
submit app for enablement for access to the Enterprise, submit your app
to the <Link href="/guides/applications/integrations">Box Integrations</Link>, and generate a report to view this application’s
activity.

## Test your app

You can now make some API calls to test your app and get to know the
response format in Box.

Use the <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens/#create-developer-token">developer token</Link> authenticated to your current developer account.

<Warning>
  This token is valid for an hour from being generated.
</Warning>

Start with the <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman">Postman collection</Link> to check
specific calls and see what responses they return.
To see example API calls, browse our <Link href="/reference">API reference documentation</Link>.
You can also use [Box CLI tool][box-cli] if you prefer to use the terminal.

[console]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console

[add-users]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043694594-Add-Users

[integrations]: https://cloud.app.box.com/integrations

[box-cli]: https://github.com/box/boxcli


# Start Here
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/getting-started/index



Our documentation is divided into five main sections:

* **Learn Box Platform**: A getting started walk through of all things Platform.
* **Developer Guides**: In-depth documentation on developer portal, API working, usage of Box functionalities.
* **API Reference**: A list of API endpoints and resources, with request and response examples.
* **SDK and Tools**: A list of official Box SDKs and tools.
* **Sample Code Catalog**: Consolidated list of several code repositories.

If you are new to development with the Box API, first familiarize
yourself with the content in the <Link href="/platform">Learn Box Platform</Link> section.

In this section, you will:

* learn the <Link href="/platform/box-platform-101">Box Platform concepts</Link>,
* evaluate if your <Link href="/platform/use-cases">use case</Link> is a good fit for Box,
* understand the different <Link href="/platform/user-types">types of Box users</Link>,
* select the applicable <Link href="/platform/application-types">application type</Link>,
* check the available <Link href="/platform/authentication-methods">authentication methods</Link> and choose the best one for your use case,
* find out where you can get <Link href="/platform/support">support</Link>,
* check the <Link href="/platform/tools">tools</Link> needed for developing applications in Box.

After learning the basics, we recommend you to follow the steps
below.

1. Create your first <Link href="/guides/getting-started/first-application">Box application</Link>.
2. Configure your application.
3. Explore <Link href="/reference">endpoints</Link> and make API calls using <Link href="/platform/appendix/locating-values">common values</Link>.
4. <Link href="/guides/getting-started/publish-app">Publish</Link> your application.

If you have any questions, checkout our [forum][forum-link].

[forum-link]: https://forum.box.com


# Publish your app
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/getting-started/publish-app



When you finish the platform app configuration and testing, you can publish
it in the [Box Integrations][integrations]. It allows customers to find
your app and add it to their Box accounts.

<Warning>
  Only apps that use the OAuth 2.0 authentication have a built-in publication option. In case you use a different auth type for your integration, you can still create and publish an OAuth 2.0 platform app that will serve as a marketing listing in the **Integrations** and redirect customers to your website.
</Warning>

To publish your platform app:

1. Open the **Dev Console**.

2. Select the platform app you want to publish.

3. Go to the **Publishing** tab.

4. Read through the submission checklist and check the confirmation checkbox if your app meets all the requirements.

5. The next step is the marketing section of the app, where you need to add the following app information:

   * **General Info** - choose correct categories and platforms for your app to make it easier to find in the Integrations,
   * **Description** - make sure it contains all information about your app that the customers may find useful,
     * **Short Description** appears next to your app logo, together with your app name;
     * **Long Description** is what the users see after they select your app to view its details. You can add clickable links to the long description.
   * **Screenshots** and **Icon** - provide the screenshots to allow the users see how the app looks like and how it integrates with Box. The icon is needed to represent your app in the list of Integrations.
   * **Support Resources** - A list of links and supplementary information that will help the users to work with your app.

6. Before submitting your app, preview it to see if you included all the necessary information.

7. Submit your app for approval. Box will review your app and publish it under **Integrations**.

If you have any questions or issues, contact the **Partners** team:
[`integrate@box.com`][email].

[integrations]: https://cloud.app.box.com/integrations

[email]: mailto:integrate@box.com


# Sandboxes in Box Platform
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/getting-started/sandbox



Developer sandboxes in Box provide a secure, controlled environment where developers can build, test, and collaborate on applications without affecting the actual data of your enterprise. They offer a safe space to experiment with Box APIs, test settings, try new integrations, and work alongside external partners.

## What is a developer sandbox

A developer sandbox is an environment isolated from your production (live) enterprise setup that keeps development activities separate from real business data.

## Why use a sandbox

Using a sandbox allows you to:

* Safely build apps within an enterprise-linked environment instead of a free standalone account.
* Collaborate securely with both internal teams and external collaborators. Contractors, partners, and other external users can join the sandbox without accessing live systems and compromising security.
* Test apps under realistic testing conditions, as sandboxes inherit your enterprise's plan and add-ons at creation time. If there are any changes to the plan or add-ons, they can be [manually synced][4] by an enterprise admin.

## Accessing your sandbox

Sandboxes in Box are created by enterprise admins. See [this document][1] to learn how to create a sandbox.
When you are assigned as a primary admin of a sandbox, you receive a log-in email from Box with your sandbox user ID.

To access the [Dev Console][2] inside the sandbox environment and set up a password, click the link in the email. You can also access your sandbox by logging in with your sandbox credentials on [developer.box.com][3].

The sandbox's primary admin can create individual sandbox accounts, giving developers access to a new Box environment that matches the plan of their parent Box enterprise.

### Accessing multiple sandboxes

As a primary admin, you can log into multiple sandboxes. If you want to use this functionality for existing sandboxes, you can remove the unique email address and get a system generated email.

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697274-Managing-developer-sandboxes-for-Box-admins

[2]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console

[3]: https://developer.box.com

[4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697274-Managing-developer-sandboxes-for-Box-admins#:~:text=in%20a%20sandbox.-,Synchronizing,-sandbox%20with%20production


# Developer Guides Overview
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/guides-list



<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Start Here" href="/guides/getting-started/index" icon="rocket">
    Get started with Box API basics and create your first application
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Archive" href="/guides/archives/index" icon="archive">
    Learn about Box Archive capabilities
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box AI" href="/guides/box-ai/index" icon="sparkles">
    Explore AI-powered features in Box
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box AI Studio" href="/guides/ai-studio/index" icon="star">
    Build and manage AI agents with Box AI Studio
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box MCP Server" href="/guides/box-mcp/index" icon="server">
    Integrate Box with Model Context Protocol
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Doc Gen" href="/guides/docgen/index" icon="file-lines">
    Generate documents programmatically
  </Card>

  <Card title="Applications" href="/guides/applications/index" icon="puzzle">
    Build and manage Box applications
  </Card>

  <Card title="Authentication" href="/guides/authentication/index" icon="fingerprint">
    Secure your applications with Box authentication
  </Card>

  <Card title="Authorization" href="/guides/authorization/index" icon="shield-check">
    Control access and permissions
  </Card>

  <Card title="API Calls" href="/guides/api-calls/index" icon="network-wired">
    Master API fundamentals and best practices
  </Card>

  <Card title="CLI" href="/guides/cli/index" icon="terminal">
    Use Box command line interface
  </Card>

  <Card title="Embed Box" href="/guides/embed/index" icon="square-arrow-up-right">
    Embed Box experiences in your applications
  </Card>

  <Card title="Tooling" href="/guides/tooling/index" icon="wrench">
    Explore tools and SDKs for Box development
  </Card>

  <Card title="Security" href="/guides/security/index" icon="camera-cctv">
    Implement security best practices
  </Card>

  <Card title="SSO & App Users" href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/index" icon="users">
    Set up single sign-on and app users
  </Card>

  <Card title="Collaborations" href="/guides/collaborations/index" icon="handshake">
    Enable team collaboration features
  </Card>

  <Card title="Collections" href="/guides/collections/index" icon="folder-open">
    Organize content with collections
  </Card>

  <Card title="Comments" href="/guides/comments/index" icon="message">
    Add commenting features to your app
  </Card>

  <Card title="Downloads" href="/guides/downloads/index" icon="download">
    Implement file download functionality
  </Card>

  <Card title="Events" href="/guides/events/index" icon="bell">
    Monitor and react to Box events
  </Card>

  <Card title="Files" href="/guides/files/index" icon="file">
    Work with files in Box
  </Card>

  <Card title="File Requests" href="/guides/file-requests/index" icon="inbox">
    Create and manage file requests
  </Card>

  <Card title="Folders" href="/guides/folders/index" icon="folder">
    Manage folder operations
  </Card>

  <Card title="Integration Mappings" href="/guides/integration-mappings/index" icon="link">
    Map users across integrations
  </Card>

  <Card title="Legal Holds" href="/guides/legal-holds/index" icon="scale-balanced">
    Manage legal hold requirements
  </Card>

  <Card title="Metadata" href="/guides/metadata/index" icon="tag">
    Add custom metadata to content
  </Card>

  <Card title="Mobile" href="/guides/mobile/index" icon="mobile">
    Build mobile Box applications
  </Card>

  <Card title="Representations" href="/guides/representations/index" icon="image">
    Work with file representations
  </Card>

  <Card title="Retention Policies" href="/guides/retention-policies/index" icon="hourglass-end">
    Set up content retention policies
  </Card>

  <Card title="Search" href="/guides/search/index" icon="magnifying-glass">
    Implement powerful search functionality
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shared Links" href="/guides/shared-links/index" icon="share-nodes">
    Create and manage shared links
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Relay" href="/guides/box-relay/index" icon="zap">
    Automate workflows with Box Relay
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Sign" href="/guides/box-sign/index" icon="pen-fancy">
    Add e-signature capabilities
  </Card>

  <Card title="Tasks" href="/guides/tasks/index" icon="list-check">
    Create and manage tasks
  </Card>

  <Card title="Trash" href="/guides/trash/index" icon="trash">
    Handle deleted content
  </Card>

  <Card title="Uploads" href="/guides/uploads/index" icon="cloud-arrow-up">
    Implement file upload functionality
  </Card>

  <Card title="Users" href="/guides/users/index" icon="person">
    Manage Box users
  </Card>

  <Card title="Webhooks" href="/guides/webhooks/index" icon="webhook">
    Handle real-time events with webhooks
  </Card>

  <Card title="Web Links" href="/guides/web-links/index" icon="globe">
    Create and manage web links
  </Card>
</CardGroup>


# Build with Box Platform
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/index



<HideElements />

<div>
  <h1>Build with Box Platform</h1>
  <p>All the developer resources to help you get the most from Box products</p>

  <Columns>
    <Card title="Get started" href="/guides/getting-started">
      Onboard to Box Platform in minutes.
    </Card>

    <Card title="Developer guides" href="/guides/guides-list">
      Dive deeper with technical guides.
    </Card>

    <Card title="AI Developer Zone" href="/ai-dev-zone">
      Learn about AI tools and agentic AI with Box.
    </Card>

    <Card title="API reference" href="/reference">
      Check endpoint details and try API calls.
    </Card>

    <Card title="Changelog" href="/changelog/">
      Stay up to date with all latest releases.
    </Card>

    <Card title="Developer Console" href="https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console">
      Create and manage Box Platform Apps.
    </Card>
  </Columns>

  <h2>Get started</h2>

  <CardGroup>
    <Card title="Explore user types" href="/platform/user-types/" icon="users" />

    <Card title="Understand application types" href="/guides/applications/app-types/select/" icon="puzzle" />

    <Card title="Learn about authentication methods" href="/guides/authentication/select/" icon="fingerprint" />

    <Card title="Authorize an application" href="/guides/authorization/" icon="shield-check" />

    <Card title="Upload files to Box" href="/guides/uploads/" icon="cloud-arrow-up" />

    <Card title="Download files from Box" href="/guides/downloads/" icon="download" />
  </CardGroup>

  <h2>Explore tools</h2>

  <CardGroup>
    <Card title="Box SDKs and tools" href="/sdks-and-tools" icon="rocket">
      Speed up development with Box SDKs and developer tools.
    </Card>

    <Card title="Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/index" icon="server">
      Perform actions on Box content seamlessly.
    </Card>

    <Card title="Box UI Elements" href="/box-ui-elements" icon="sparkles">
      Embed Box UI Elements to custom apps.
    </Card>
  </CardGroup>
</div>


# Allow domain access
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/allowing-domain-access



To use the Box APIs it is important that your application and users have access
to the following domains, where needed.

## File preview

To enable file preview, your application might need to load javascript file from
the Box content delivery network (CDN). This file is loaded from the following
domains.

* `api.box.com`
* `boxcdn.net`
* `boxcloud.com`
* `dl2.boxcloud.com` to `dl20.boxcloud.com`

## File downloads

The following API domains are used to download files via the Box API.

* `api.box.com` to initially request a file to download
* `dl.boxcloud.com` to actually download files for authenticated users
* `public.boxcloud.com` to actually download files for unauthenticated users

<Warning>
  Ensuring access to these domains is only a first step to downloading a file.
  To download a file the users need to have proper access permissions and need
  to be fully authenticated where needed.
</Warning>

## File uploads

The following API domains are used to upload files via the Box API.

* `api.box.com` to start a file upload
* `upload.app.box.com` and `upload.box.com` to upload the file to Box

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# API versioning strategy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy



Box provides versioning capabilities for selected API endpoints. The version control system guarantees seamless functioning of existing endpoint versions, even if Box introduces new ones.

API versioning empowers Box to continually enhance its platform, while also offering third-party developers a reliable avenue for feature updates and deprecations.

<Tip>
  To stay informed about the forthcoming API modifications, monitor the <Link href="/changelog">Changelog</Link> and maintain a current email address in the Developer Console's App Info section.
</Tip>

<Note>
  In 2024, Box introduced year-based API versioning.

  All endpoints available at the end of 2024 were assigned the version `2024.0`.

  **No action is required for API users to continue using Box APIs.**

  To make version-aware API calls, include the `box-version` header with the value `2024.0` in your requests.
</Note>

## How Box API versioning works

<Note>
  Box API supports versioning in `header`. To determine which version to use, look at the API reference and included sample requests.
</Note>

### Versioning in `header`

Box API processes the `box-version` header which should contain a valid version name. For example, when a client wants
to get a list of all sign requests using version `2025.0`, the request should look like this:

```sh theme={null}
curl --location 'https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests' \
     --header 'box-version: 2025.0' \
     --header 'Authorization: Bearer …
```

If the provided version is correct and supported by the endpoint, a response is sent to the client.
If the endpoint is available in multiple versions, the response will include the `box-version` header,
which indicates the version used to handle the request.
Endpoints introduced after 2024 may return a `400` error code if the version is incorrect.
More information about versioning errors can be found <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/versioning-errors">here</Link>.

If your request doesn't include a version, the API defaults to the initial Box API version - `2024.0` - the version of endpoints available before
year-based versioning was introduced. However, relying on this behavior is not recommended when adopting deprecated
changes. To ensure consistency, always specify the API version, with each request. By making your application
version-aware, you anchor it to a specific set of features, ensuring consistent behavior throughout the supported
timeframe.

## Release schedule and naming convention

Box can introduce a new breaking change to certain endpoints **once per year**, which results in a new API version.
Introducing a new version of the Sign Request endpoint means that **all paths and HTTP methods** of an endpoint will support it.

For example, if Sign Request endpoints receive a new version it will apply to all endpoints listed in the table:

| Method | Request URL                                        | Description                              |
| ------ | -------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------- |
| GET    | `https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/:id`        | Retrieves specific sign request details. |
| GET    | `https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/`           | Retrieves all sign requests.             |
| POST   | `https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/`           | Creates new sign requests.               |
| POST   | `https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/:id/resend` | Sends a specific sign request again.     |
| POST   | `https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/:id/cancel` | Cancels a specific sign request.         |

### Naming convention

New API versions are labeled according to the calendar year of their release.

**Example**: If a new version of the Sign Requests endpoint is released in 2025, it will be named `2025.0`.

Box can issue a new breaking change to API endpoints **once** per year, reserving the right to release an additional breaking change to address security or privacy concerns. In such cases, the new version will be incremented by one in the suffix.

**Example**: If security issues need addressing in the previously released version `2025.0` of Sign Requests, the new version will be labeled `2025.1`.

Each stable version is supported for a minimum of 12 months. This means that when a new version is released, the previous version becomes deprecated and will be available for use, but no new features will be added.
It also means, that a new version cannot be released sooner than every 12 months.

We strongly recommend updating your apps to make requests to the latest stable API version. However, if your app uses a stable version that is no longer supported, then you will get a response with an HTTP error code `400 - Bad Request`. For details, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/versioning-errors">Versioning Errors</Link>.

### Endpoint versioning indication

To keep you informed about the current API state, and improve the readability of the versioned API reference, the affected endpoints are marked with a pill based on the `x-stability-level` tag or `deprecated` attribute.

<Frame>
  <img alt="An example of a beta pill used for API reference endpoints" />
</Frame>

| Schema element                                            | Pill name      | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| --------------------------------------------------------- | -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `x-stability-level: beta`                                 | Beta           | Endpoints marked with **beta**, are offered subject to Box’s Main Beta Agreement, meaning the available capabilities may change at any time. When the beta endpoint becomes stable, the **beta** indication is removed. |
| `x-stability-level: stable` or no `x-stability-level` tag | Latest version | **Latest version** marks the most recent stable API version of an endpoint.                                                                                                                                             |
| `deprecated: true`                                        | Deprecated     | An endpoint is deprecated, which means it is still available for use, but no new features are added. Such an endpoint is annotated with the `deprecated` attribute set to `true`.                                       |

## Versioning errors

When using versioned API actions such as calling an incorrect API version in header or a deprecated version can lead to errors.

For details on possible errors, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/versioning-errors">versioning errors</Link>.

## How Box SDK versioning works

The versioning strategy applies only to [generated SDKs](https://developer.box.com/sdks-and-tools/#next-generation-sdks).

Box SDKs support the **All Versions In** SDK approach.
This means that every release of SDK provides access to all endpoints in any version which is currently live. All generated SDKs use manager's approach - they group all endpoints with the same domain in one manager.

For example `FolderManager` contains methods to: `create_folder`, `get_folder_by_id`, `update_folder_by_id`, `delete_folder_by_id`, `get_folder_items` and `copy_folder`. This division is done based on the value of `x-box-tag` field, which is assigned to each method in Public API Service specification. It mostly corresponds to the root of the endpoint URL, but not necessarily. For example: `FolderManager` contains methods with `https://api.box.com/2.0/folders` root URL, but the same base URL is also used in some methods of `SharedLinkFoldersManager`.
References to all managers are stored under one Box Client object.

See an example of the endpoint's lifecycle:

1. Initial state (only one version is available).

   ```js theme={null}
   class FilesManager {
       async updateFileById(
           fileId: string,
           requestBody: UpdateFileByIdRequestBody,
           queryParams: UpdateFileByIdQueryParams,
           headers: UpdateFileByIdHeaders
       ): Promise < FileFull > {}
   }
   ```

2. A new `v2025_0` version of the endpoint is introduced (previous version is deprecated).

   The SDK introduces a new method for each new version of an endpoint. These methods are stored in the same manager as the old ones, but their names and corresponding classes are suffixed with the version number. The old method is deprecated with a notice indicating the minimal maintenance date – this will be the date when the endpoint will be considered for end-of-life status.

   ```js theme={null}
   class FilesManager {
       /**
        * @deprecated This endpoint will be EOL'ed after 05-2026.
           */
       async updateFileById(
           fileId: string,
           requestBody: UpdateFileByIdRequestBody,
           queryParams: UpdateFileByIdQueryParams,
           headers: UpdateFileByIdHeaders
       ): Promise<FileFull> {}

       async updateFileById_2025_0(
           fileId: string,
           requestBody: UpdateFileByIdRequestBody_2025_0,
           queryParams: UpdateFileByIdQueryParams_2025_0,
           headers: UpdateFileByIdHeaders_2025_0
       ): Promise<FileFull_2025_0> {}
   }
   ```

3. The API endpoint is marked as End-of-Life (EOL)

   The SDK releases a breaking change release with removed end-of-life (EOL) endpoints. Ideally, we should group the end-of-life dates for all endpoints into one date per quarter to avoid releasing numerous new major versions of SDKs.

   ```js theme={null}
   class FilesManager {
       async updateFileById_2025_0(
           fileId: string,
           requestBody: UpdateFileByIdRequestBody_2025_0,
           queryParams: UpdateFileByIdQueryParams_2025_0,
           headers: UpdateFileByIdHeaders_2025_0
       ): Promise < FileFull_2025_0 > {}
   }
   ```

## Breaking vs non-breaking changes

Breaking changes in the Box API occur within versioned releases, typically accompanied by a new major API version. Minor adjustments, which do not disrupt existing functionality, can be integrated into an existing API version. The following table lists both breaking and non-breaking changes.

| API Change                                                                                                   | Breaking change |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------- |
| New endpoints                                                                                                | No              |
| New [read-only](https://swagger.io/docs/specification/data-models/data-types/) or optional fields in request | No              |
| New required fields in request                                                                               | Yes             |
| New string constant in request                                                                               | Yes             |
| Deprecation                                                                                                  | No              |
| Retired / End-of-Life endpoints                                                                              | Yes             |
| Rename/reshape of a field, data type, or string constant                                                     | Yes             |
| More restrictive change to field validations                                                                 | Yes             |
| Less restrictive change to field validations                                                                 | No              |
| Changing HTTP status code returned by an operation                                                           | Yes             |
| Removing a declared property                                                                                 | Yes             |
| Removing or renaming APIs or API parameters                                                                  | Yes             |
| Adding a required request header                                                                             | Yes             |
| Adding more error codes                                                                                      | No              |
| Removing or modifying error codes                                                                            | Yes             |
| Adding a member to an enumeration                                                                            | Yes             |

<Tip>
  The [oasdiff](https://github.com/Tufin/oasdiff/blob/main/BREAKING-CHANGES-EXAMPLES.md) tool allows detecting most of the possible breaking changes.
</Tip>

## AI agent configuration versioning

<Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents">AI agent</Link> versioning gives the developers more control over model version management and ensures consistent responses. For details, see <Link href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-versioning">AI agent configuration versioning guide</Link>.

## Support policy and deprecation information

When new versions of the Box APIs and Box SDKs are released, earlier versions will be retired. Box marks a version as `deprecated` at least 24 months before retiring it. In other words, a deprecated version cannot become end-of-life
sooner than after 24 months.
Similarly, for individual APIs that are generally available (GA), Box declares an API as `deprecated` at least 24 months in advance of removing it from the GA version.

When we increment the major version of the API (for example, from `2025.0` to `2026.0`), we're announcing that the current version (in this example, `2025.0`) is immediately deprecated and we'll no longer support it 24 months after the announcement. We might make exceptions to this policy for service security or health reliability issues.

When an API is marked as deprecated, we strongly recommend that you migrate to the latest version as soon as possible. In some cases, we'll announce that new applications will have to start using the new APIs a short time after the original APIs are deprecated.

When customer calls deprecated API endpoint, the response will contain a header:

```sh theme={null}
Deprecation: date="Fri, 11 Nov 2026 23:59:59 GMT"
Box-API-Deprecated-Reason: /reference/deprecated
```

The date tells clients when this version was marked as deprecated.

## Versioning considerations

When building your request, consider the following:

* Endpoints in version `2024.0` can be called without specifying the version in the `box-version` header. If no version is specified and the `2024.0` version of the called endpoint does not exist, the response will return an HTTP error code `400 - Bad Request`.
* If the `box-version` version header is specified but the requested version does not exist, the response will return an HTTP error code `400 - Bad Request`.

For details, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/versioning-errors">versioning errors</Link>.

When Box deprecates a resource or a property of a resource in the API, the change is communicated in one or more of the following ways:

* Calls that include the deprecated behavior return the response header `Box-API-Deprecated-Reason` and a link to get more information:

  ```sh theme={null}
  box-version: 2025.0
  Deprecation: version="version", date="date"
  Box-API-Deprecated-Reason: /reference/deprecated
  ```

* A deprecation announcement is posted in the developer changelog.

* The API reference is updated to identify the affected resource and any action you need to take. Affected endpoints are marked with **deprecated** pill.

* If there is an imminent backwards-incompatible change that affects your app, then the contact email for your app might be contacted about the deprecation.

## Additional resources

* <Link href="/reference">API reference</Link>


# Ensure consistency with headers
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/ensure-consistency



Some Box APIs support headers used to ensure consistency between your
application and Box.

## `etag`, `if-match`, and `if-none-match`

Many of the file system items (files or folders) that can be requested via the
API return an `etag` value for the item.

For example, a file resource returns an `etag` in the JSON response.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": 12345,
  "etag": 1,
  "type": "file",
  "sequence_id": 3,
  "name": "Contract.pdf",
  ...
}
```

This `etag` can be used as the value of a `if-match` or `if-none-match`
header to either ensure a resource hasn't changed since the `etag` value was
received, or to prevent unnecessary downloads for items that haven't changed.

For example, to fetch the same file only if it has changed, pass in the `etag`
value in a `if-none-match` header.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN" \
    -H "if-none-match: 1"
```

This API call would result in an empty response if the file had not changed.

## Ensure consistent changes

The `if-match` header allows your application to ensure that no changes are
made to items when another application or a user has made changes to the item
since your application last inspected it. This helps ensure that
changes aren't lost when two applications or users are changing items at the
same time.

The following endpoints support this header.

| `if-match` capable endpoints                                                   |                                 |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-content">`POST /files/:id/content`</Link> | Upload a new file version       |
| <Link href="/reference/put-files-id">`PUT /files/:id`</Link>                   | Update a file's information     |
| <Link href="/reference/delete-files-id">`DELETE /files/:id`</Link>             | Delete a file                   |
| <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id">`PUT /folders/:id`</Link>               | Update a folder's information   |
| <Link href="/reference/delete-folders-id">`DELETE /folders/:id`</Link>         | Delete a folder                 |
| <Link href="/reference/put-web-links-id">`PUT /web_links/:id`</Link>           | Update a web link's information |
| <Link href="/reference/delete-web-links-id">`DELETE /web_links/:id`</Link>     | Delete a web link               |

The response of these APIs calls depends on the existence of the item,
and whether the `etag` value matches the most recent version.

| Item found? | Etag match? | HTTP status |
| ----------- | ----------- | ----------- |
| Yes         | Yes         | 200         |
| Yes         | No          | 412         |
| No          | Yes         | 412         |
| No          | No          | 404         |

<Warning>
  **Moving items**

  The `if-match` header can not be used to prevent moving of files, folders,
  or web links. Instead, Box will always ensure that the latest item is moved to
  the new location.
</Warning>

## Prevent unnecessary request downloads

The `if-none-match` header allows your application to ensure that no information
is downloaded for items that have not changed since your application last
inspected it. This helps ensure no unnecessary information is downloaded,
speeding up your application and saving on bandwidth.

| `if-none-match` capable endpoints                                    |                                 |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link>         | Get a file's information        |
| <Link href="/reference/get-folder-id">`GET /folders/:id`</Link>      | Get a folder's information      |
| <Link href="/reference/get-web-links-id">`GET /web_links/:id`</Link> | Get a web link's information    |
| <Link href="/reference/get-shared-items">`GET /shared_items`</Link>  | Get a shared item's information |

The response of these APIs calls depends on the existence of the item,
and whether the `etag` value matches the most recent version.

| Item found? | Etag match? | HTTP Status |
| ----------- | ----------- | ----------- |
| Yes         | Yes         | 304         |
| Yes         | No          | 200         |
| No          | Yes         | 404         |
| No          | No          | 404         |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# API Calls
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/index



The Box API is a restful API that follow common HTTP standards
where possible. The following guides take a look at some of the useful
features and common mistakes that a developer can encounter when working with
these APIs.

## API calls insights

Admins and co-admins can access the Platform Insights
dashboard that provides information on the total number
of API calls per application.

See [Platform Insights][insights] and <Link href="/guides/applications">applications</Link> for details.

[insights]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/20738406915219-Platform-Insights


# Language codes
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/language-codes



The Box API uses a modified version of the **ISO 639-1 Language Code** to specify a user's language.

The following is a list of language codes used when <Link href="/reference/post-users#param-language">creating</Link> or <Link href="/reference/put-users-id#param-language">updating</Link>.

| Language                | Code |
| ----------------------- | ---- |
| Bengali                 | `bn` |
| Danish                  | `da` |
| German                  | `de` |
| English (US)            | `en` |
| English (UK)            | `gb` |
| English (Canada)        | `e2` |
| English (Australia)     | `e3` |
| Spanish (Latin America) | `s2` |
| Spanish                 | `es` |
| Finnish                 | `fi` |
| French                  | `fr` |
| French (Canada)         | `f2` |
| Hindi                   | `hi` |
| Italian                 | `it` |
| Japanese                | `ja` |
| Korean                  | `ko` |
| Norwegian (Bokmal)      | `nb` |
| Dutch                   | `nl` |
| Polish                  | `pl` |
| Portuguese              | `pt` |
| Russian                 | `ru` |
| Swedish                 | `sv` |
| Turkish                 | `tr` |
| Chinese (Simplified)    | `zh` |
| Chinese (Traditional)   | `zt` |


# Pagination
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/pagination/index



The Box API supports two ways to paginate collections. The most common way to
paginate is through offset-based pagination which is often used where the list
of items is of a fixed, predetermined length.

In some cases an API endpoint supports marker-based pagination, either as an
alternative to offset-based pagination or as a full replacement. Marker-based
pagination is often used in cases where the length of the total set of items is
either changing frequently, or where the total length might not be known
upfront.


# Marker-based Pagination
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/pagination/marker-based



APIs that use marker-based paging use the `marker` and `limit` query parameters
to paginate through items in a collection.

Marker-based pagination is often used in cases where the length of the total set
of items is either changing frequently, or where the total length might not be
known upfront.

## Paging

To fetch the first page of entries in a collection the API needs to be called
either without the `marker` parameter, or with the `marker` set to `0`. The
`limit` parameter is optional.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0/items?limit=100&usemarker=true&marker= \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

<Note>
  APIs that support both offset-based pagination and marker-based pagination
  require the `usemarker` query parameter to be set to `true` to ensure
  marker-based pagination is used.
</Note>

To fetch the next page of entries the API needs to be called with
an `marker` parameter that equals value of the `next_marker` value that was
received in the API response.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0/items?marker=34332423&limit=100&usemarker=true \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

The final page of items has been requested when the next `next_marker` value is
`null` in the response object. At this point there are no more items to fetch.

<Note>
  With marker-based paging there is no way to determine the total number of
  entries in a collection except by fetching them all. Applications should not
  retain the `next_marker` value long-term as the internal implementation of the
  markers may change over time.
</Note>

## Marker & Limit

The following query parameters are used to paginate a collection.

| Query parameter | Type    | Default        |                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| --------------- | ------- | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `marker`        | String  |                | The first position in the collection to return results from. This should be a value that was returned in a previous request.                                                       |
| `limit`         | Integer | Depends on API | The maximum number of entries to return. If the value exceeds the maximum, then the maximum value will be used.                                                                    |
| `usemarker`     | Boolean |                | An optional query parameter that can be used with API endpoints that support both types of pagination to select pagination type. Set to `true` to enforce marker-based pagination. |

## Collections

When paginating collections, the API returns an object that contains the set of
results as an array, as well as some information about the current page of results.

| Field         | Type    |                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ------------- | ------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `entries`     | Array   | The page of items for this page. This will be an empty array if there are no results.                                                                              |
| `next_marker` | String  | The value that can be used as the `marker` value to fetch the next page of results. If this value is `null` or an empty string there are no more results to fetch. |
| `limit`       | Integer | The limit used for this page of results. This will be the same as the `limit` query parameter unless it exceeded the maximum value allowed for this API endpoint.  |

## Example endpoints

Some endpoints that support marker-based pagination are:

* <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-items">List items for a folder</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-collaborations">List a file's collaborations</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/get-webhooks">List all webhooks for a user</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/get-users">List all users in an enterprise</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/get-folders-trash-items">List all items in the trash</Link>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Offset-based Pagination
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/pagination/offset-based



APIs that use offset-based paging use the `offset` and `limit` query parameters
to paginate through items in a collection.

Offset-based pagination is often used where the list of items is of a fixed and
predetermined length.

## Paging

To fetch the first page of entries in a collection the API needs to be called
either without the `offset` parameter, or with the `offset` set to `0`. The
`limit` field is optional.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0/items?offset=0&limit=100 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

To fetch the next page of entries the API needs to be called with
an `offset` parameter that equals the sum of the previous `offset` value and
limit returned in the previous result, `previous_offset + previous_limit`.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0/items?offset=100&limit=100 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

<Note>
  Note that the `offset` should be increased by the previous `limit` and not by
  the size of the entries in the response array, as this may be less than the
  limit. Generally we advise using the value of the `limit` in the response
  object to increase the `offset` value.
</Note>

The final page of items has been requested when the next `offset` value exceeds
the `total_count` value in the response object. At this point there are no more
items to fetch.

## Offset & Limit

The following query parameters are used to paginate a collection.

| Query parameter | Type    | Default        |                                                                                                                      |
| --------------- | ------- | -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `offset`        | Integer | `0`            | The (zero-based) offset of the first item returned in the collection. In a zero-based offset `0` is a correct value. |
| `limit`         | Integer | Depends on API | The maximum number of entries to return. If the value exceeds the maximum, then the maximum value will be used.      |

<Note>
  The maximum `offset` for offset-based pagination is `9999`. Marker-based
  pagination is recommended when a higher offset is needed.
</Note>

## Collections

When paginating collections, the API returns an object that contains the set of
results as an array, as well as some information about the current page of results.

| Field         | Type    |                                                                                                                                                                   |
| ------------- | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `entries`     | Array   | The page of items for this page. This will be an empty array if there are no results.                                                                             |
| `offset`      | Integer | The offset used for this page of results                                                                                                                          |
| `limit`       | Integer | The limit used for this page of results. This will be the same as the `limit` query parameter unless it exceeded the maximum value allowed for this API endpoint. |
| `total_count` | Integer | One greater than the offset of the last item in the entire collection. The total number of items in the collection may be less than `total_count`.                |

## Example endpoints

Some endpoints that support offset-based pagination are:

* <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-items">List items for a folder</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-comments">List a file's comments</Link>
* <Link href="/reference/get-folders-trash-items">List all items in the trash</Link>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# App Diagnostics Report
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/app-diagnostics-report



The App Diagnostics Report provides a spreadsheet detailing each API call made
by a given application during a specified timeframe. The report gives you
access to the `API Request ID`, which can be given to Box Support for
troubleshooting purposes.

<Warning>
  This report will not include:

  * API calls made within the last 48 hours
  * Authorization and Token API calls

  We are working on including the above and thereby making the report suitable
  for real-time troubleshooting in the future.
</Warning>

## 1. Click on the **App Diagnostics** Tab

To run the App Diagnostics Report, click the **App Diagnostics** option located
along the top of your application's configuration section in
the [Developer Console][console].

<Frame>
  <img alt="New Menu Option" />
</Frame>

## 2. Click **Run App Diagnostics Report** to configure your report

Clicking **Run App Diagnostics Report** will display a popup to select report
filters and parameters.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App Diagnostic Menu" />
</Frame>

## 3. Select Report Parameters and Click **Run**

You can select a date in the last two weeks, starting 48 hours prior to today.
A report can be run for up to a total of 24 hours. Click **Run** to
generate a report.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Report Options" />
</Frame>

## 4. Access the Box Reports Folder

Navigate to [All Files][allfiles] and locate the Box Reports folder. If this is
your first time running a report, this folder is automatically generated. If
you are an Admin, this is the same folder you access
[Admin Console Reports][reports]. Open the folder.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Report Folder" />
</Frame>

## 5. Find and Open the latest Platform App Diagnostics Report Folder

You will see any reports you have run in the Box Reports folder.
Locate and open the most recent Platform App Diagnostics run folder.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Report Folder Contents" />
</Frame>

## 6. Check the Status

The report will take time to complete. You can see the status in the box at the
top of the folder.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Status Screen" />
</Frame>

## 7. Report Completed

Upon completion, the status will change, and the `.csv` file will appear in the
folder.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Diagnostics Report" />
</Frame>

## 8. Open the Report

You can open the file in your web browser or download it to view locally. If
you need help from [Box Support][support], you can send in the report with your
ticket by attaching a downloaded copy or via shared link.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Report Details" />
</Frame>

The report has nine columns.

| Column                    | Description                                          |   |
| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- | - |
| App Name                  | The name of the application                          |   |
| Client ID                 | The Client ID of the application                     |   |
| HTTP Status Code          | The response code returned from Box                  |   |
| API Request Duration (ms) | The amount of time from API call to response         |   |
| API Request ID            | An unique identifier that can be used by Box Support |   |
| Resource                  | The primary resource accessed in the API call        |   |
| Sub Resource              | The secondary resource accessed in the API call      |   |
| HTTP Method               | The type of HTTP method used in the API call         |   |
| API Request Timestamp     | The timestamp of the API call                        |   |

[support]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/requests/new

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[allfiles]: https://app.box.com/folder/0

[reports]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043696534-Running-Reports


# Errors
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors



The Box APIs uses [HTTP status codes][status-codes] to communicate if a request
has been successfully processed or not.

## Client error

Most client errors in the HTTP 4XX, and some server errors in the HTTP 5XX range
returns a standard client error JSON object.

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "error",
  "status": 400,
  "code": "bad_digest",
  "help_url": "https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors/",
  "message": "The specified content-md5 did not match what we received",
  "request_id": "abcdef123456"
}
```

See the <Link href="/reference/resources/client-error">Client Error resource</Link> for more details.

## Common error codes

Check our [Developer Troubleshooting Articles][articles]
for solution to common errors encountered when working with the Box APIs.

### 400 Bad Request

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `bad_digest`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| **Message**  | The specified `content-md5` did not match what we received.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | While uploading a file, a `content-md5` header with the SHA-1 hash of the file can be supplied to ensure that the file is not corrupted in transit. The SHA-1 hash that was supplied in the request did not match what was received in the upload. Supply a valid SHA-1 hash of the uploaded file. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                        |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `bad_request`                                                                                                                                          |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | Required parameters supplied in the API request are either missing or invalid. Check the extended error message in the response body for more details. |

|              |                                                                                                                         |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `cannot_make_collaborated_subfolder_private`                                                                            |
| **Message**  | Cannot move a collaborated subfolder to a private folder unless the new owner is explicitly specified.                  |
| **Solution** | Specify the ID of the user that the content should be transferred to by setting the `owned_by.id` field in the request. |

|              |                                                                                                                     |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `collaborations_not_available_on_root_folder`                                                                       |
| **Message**  | Root folder cannot be collaborated                                                                                  |
| **Solution** | You cannot set collaborators on a user's root folder (folder ID 0). Use a different folder ID than the root folder. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `cyclical_folder_structure`                                                                                                                                                                       |
| **Message**  | Folder move creates cyclical folder structure                                                                                                                                                     |
| **Solution** | The folder ID specified in the folder move would create a cyclical folder structure (for example moving a folder to a subfolder within itself). Change the folder ID for the folder move request. |

|              |                                                                    |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `folder_not_empty`                                                 |
| **Message**  | Cannot delete – folder not empty                                   |
| **Solution** | Delete all content from the folder before attempting to delete it. |

|              |                                                                          |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `invalid_collaboration_item`                                             |
| **Message**  | Item type must be specified and set to 'folder'                          |
| **Solution** | The `item.type` field of the collaboration item should be set to folder. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `invalid_grant`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| **Message**  | Verify the authorization code is set correctly in your request, or your application likely needs to get a new authorization code.                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | The authorization code supplied in the API request is missing or no longer valid. Possible solutions are to verify that the access token is added correctly in the request. If correctly set, the access token may have expired. Attempt to refresh the access token or fetch a new one. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `invalid_grant`                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| **Message**  | Current date time must be before the expiration date time listed in the 'exp' claim.                                                                                                                                    |
| **Solution** | This error occurs when the Unix time on your local machine and the Box server are out of sync. To fix this error, update the Unix time on your machine to match a synchronized time server, then try the request again. |

|              |                                                         |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `invalid_limit`                                         |
| **Message**  | Limit is not a valid number                             |
| **Solution** | Add a valid numeric value for the supplied limit value. |

|              |                                                          |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `invalid_offset`                                         |
| **Message**  | Offset is not a valid number                             |
| **Solution** | Add a valid numeric value for the supplied offset value. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `invalid_request_parameters`                                                                                                                                             |
| **Message**  | Invalid input parameters in request                                                                                                                                      |
| **Solution** | Invalid parameters were sent in the API request. Check the API reference documentation for the correct request parameters that should be supplied for the API operation. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `invalid_status`                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Message**  | You can change the status only if the collaboration is pending                                                                                                          |
| **Solution** | The status of a collaboration can only be updated to accepted or rejected by the user specified in the `accessible_by` field when the current status is set to pending. |

|              |                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `invalid_upload_session_id`                                                                                                              |
| **Message**  | The upload session ID provided in the URL is not of a valid format.                                                                      |
| **Solution** | The session ID supplied when making a chunked upload API request was invalid. Use the same session ID from the session that was created. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |                                                                                                                     |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `item_name_invalid`                                                                                                                                                                                                       |                                                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | Item name invalid                                                                                                                                                                                                         |                                                                                                                     |
| **Solution** | Verify that the file's name is valid. Box only supports file or folder names that are 255 characters or less. File names containing non-printable characters, names containing the characters `/`, `\`, `<`, `>`, `:`, \` | `, `?`, `\*`, `-\`, names with leading or trailing spaces, and the special names “.” and “..” are also unsupported. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                   |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `item_name_too_long`                                                                                                                              |
| **Message**  | Item name too long                                                                                                                                |
| **Solution** | Shorten the length of the name that is being supplied for the item. The maximum length of a file or folder name in Box is 255 characters or less. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                   |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `metadata_after_file_contents`                                                                                                                    |
| **Message**  | Metadata is included after file contents in a file upload request.                                                                                |
| **Solution** | Include the file metadata before the file's contents.                                                                                             |
| **Error**    | `password_reset_required`                                                                                                                         |
| **Message**  | User needs to reset password                                                                                                                      |
| **Solution** | The user has not yet completed account [setup steps](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043691614).                                     |
| ---          | --                                                                                                                                                |
| **Error**    | `requested_page_out_of_range`                                                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | Requested representation page out of range                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | The range header supplied does not fit within the size of the specified item. Adjust the bounds to fit within the size of the item and try again. |

|              |                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `requested_preview_unavailable`                                                                                                  |
| **Message**  | Requested preview unavailable                                                                                                    |
| **Solution** | The thumbnail size requested for the file is not valid. See the reference docs for the API operation for available format sizes. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                       |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `sync_item_move_failure`                                                                                                                              |
| **Message**  | Cannot move a synced item                                                                                                                             |
| **Solution** | The item is set to be synced by the Box sync clients and cannot be moved. A possible solution is to set the `sync_state` of the item to `not_synced`. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `task_assignee_not_allowed`                                                                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | Assigner does not have sufficient privileges to assign task to assignee                                                                                         |
| **Solution** | The user who is attempting to assign the task does not have the appropriate permissions to do so. Adjust the user permissions to allow the assignment of tasks. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `terms_of_service_required`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| **Message**  | User must accept custom terms of service before action can be taken                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| **Solution** | The admin of your Box account has set custom terms of service and the user has not logged in to accept the terms yet. The user will need to accept the terms of service, or the admin will have to disable them, in order to proceed. More information is available [here](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044192733-Using-Custom-Terms-Of-Service). |

|              |                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `user_already_collaborator`                                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | User is already a collaborator                                                                                                  |
| **Solution** | The user that you are attempting to collaborate in on an item is already collaborated on that item. This request is not needed. |

### 401 Unauthorized

|              |                                                                                               |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `unauthorized`                                                                                |
| **Message**  | Unauthorized                                                                                  |
| **Solution** | Authorization token is not authorized, check extended error message in body for more details. |

### 403 Forbidden

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `access_denied_insufficient_permissions`                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| **Message**  | Access denied – insufficient permission                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| **Solution** | The Access Token does not have the appropriate user permissions or scopes. See [here](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043693434-API-Content-API-403-access-denied-insufficient-permissions-Errors) for solution information. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `insufficient_scope`                                                                                                                                                                          |
| **Message**  | The request requires higher privileges than provided by the access token.                                                                                                                     |
| **Solution** | This error is typically produced when scopes that are needed for the API operation are not enabled. Check your configured application scopes and reauthorize your application, if applicable. |

|              |                                                                                                                                              |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `access_denied_item_locked`                                                                                                                  |
| **Message**  | Access denied – item locked                                                                                                                  |
| **Solution** | You are attempting to access a locked item without appropriate permissions to access it. Unlock the item first, then try to access it again. |

|              |                                                                                                                                        |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `access_from_location_blocked`                                                                                                         |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | You’re attempting to log in to Box from a location that has not been approved by your admin. Talk to your admin to resolve this issue. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                               |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `file_size_limit_exceeded`                                                                                                                                                    |
| **Message**  | File size exceeds the folder owner’s file size limit                                                                                                                          |
| **Solution** | See [here](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697314-Understand-the-Maximum-File-Size-You-Can-Upload-to-Box) for maximum file size limits based on account type. |

|              |                                                                                                                             |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `forbidden`                                                                                                                 |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                                             |
| **Solution** | Client does not have permission to upload to this session. Only the user who initiated the upload session may upload to it. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `forbidden_by_policy`                                                                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | Access denied – Blocked by Shield Access Policy                                                                                                           |
| **Solution** | Shield access policies applied on your enterprise have prevented this action. Contact your enterprise admin to adjust the applied Shield access policies. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `forbidden_by_policy`                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| **Message**  | Access denied – Blocked by Shield Malware Detection Rule                                                                                                                                                                           |
| **Solution** | An active Shield malware detection rule prevents download or local editing of potentially malicious content, but preview and online editing remain available. Contact your enterprise admin to adjust the applied Shield policies. |

|              |                                                                                          |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `incorrect_shared_item_password`                                                         |
| **Message**  |                                                                                          |
| **Solution** | A password is required for the shared item, but it was either incorrect or not supplied. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `storage_limit_exceeded`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| **Message**  | Account storage limit reached                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | The storage limit of the account has been reached. Either [upgrade](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043692774-Upgrading-your-Box-Account) your account or permanently delete content to continue. Content that is simply moved to the trash will still count towards the account total until it is permanently deleted. |

|              |                                                                                                                        |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `user_email_confirmation_required`                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | User needs to complete email confirmation                                                                              |
| **Solution** | The user has not yet completed [steps](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043691614) for email confirmation. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `cors_origin_not_whitelisted`                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Message**  | Access denied - Did you forget to safelist your origin in the CORS configuration of your app?                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | Your application tried to access the Box API from a website. The application needs to <Link href="/guides/security/cors/#enabling-cors-for-your-domain">explicitly allow Cross Origin Resource Sharing</Link> for the domain your site is hosted on. |

### 404 Not Found

|              |                                                                                                          |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `not_found`                                                                                              |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                          |
| **Solution** | The resource could not be found. Check the extended error message in the response body for more details. |

|              |                                                                                                   |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `not_trashed`                                                                                     |
| **Message**  | Item is not trashed                                                                               |
| **Solution** | The item that is to be permanently deleted is not in the trash. Send the item to the trash first. |

|              |                                                                          |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `preview_cannot_be_generated`                                            |
| **Message**  | Preview cannot be generated                                              |
| **Solution** | You are not able to generate a preview thumbnail for the specified file. |

|              |                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `trashed`                                                                                                                       |
| **Message**  | Item is trashed                                                                                                                 |
| **Solution** | The item that is to be accessed is in the trash and unavailable for modification. Move the item out of the trash and try again. |

### 405 Method Not Allowed

|              |                                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `method_not_allowed`                                                                                                                             |
| **Message**  | Method Not Allowed                                                                                                                               |
| **Solution** | The HTTP method used for the API operation is not allowed. Check the API reference documentation for the HTTP verb needed for the API operation. |

### 409 Conflict

|              |                                                                                                                                                    |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `conflict`                                                                                                                                         |
| **Message**  | A resource with this value already exists                                                                                                          |
| **Solution** | This error may be produced when the resource to be created already exists. Check the extended error message in the response body for more details. |

|              |                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `item_name_in_use`                                                                                                                        |
| **Message**  | Item with the same name already exists                                                                                                    |
| **Solution** | This error is produced when a resource with the same name already exists. Ensure that the resource name being added / modified is unique. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `name_temporarily_reserved`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| **Message**  | The item name is reserved by another processing item. Wait and then retry the request, or wait and check the parent folder to see if the name is in use.                                                                                                     |
| **Solution** | Two duplicate requests have been submitted at the same time. Box acknowledges the first and reserves the name, but a second duplicate request arrives before the first request has completed. Allow the first request to complete before sending the second. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `operation_blocked_temporary`                                                                                                                             |
| **Message**  | The operation is blocked by another ongoing operation                                                                                                     |
| **Solution** | This error is returned when trying to access a folder that is blocked by another folder operation, such as a move or copy. Try again at a later interval. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `recent_similar_comment`                                                                                                                                                        |
| **Message**  | A similar comment has been made recently                                                                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | A similar comment was recently made, and the API has flagged it as a potential duplicate. Verify that the comment was indeed made, or modify the comment content and try again. |

|              |                                                                                                            |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `user_login_already_used`                                                                                  |
| **Message**  | User with the specified login already exists                                                               |
| **Solution** | A user with the same email already exists. Either refer to the existing user or specify a different email. |

### 410 Gone

|              |                                                                                                           |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `session_expired`                                                                                         |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                           |
| **Solution** | The upload session associated with the given upload session ID has expired and can no longer be accessed. |

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `upload_failed`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| **Solution** | The upload session is in an unrecoverable state and cannot continue. This or other requests have resulted in the upload session reaching a bad state (for example parts overlapping). Possible situations where this may arise include when the maximum number of parts has been exceeded or when overlapping parts have been uploaded. |

### 411 Length Required

|              |                                                         |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `length_required`                                       |
| **Message**  | content-length header was required, but not provided.   |
| **Solution** | Supply a content-length header within your API request. |

### 412 Precondition Failed

|              |                                                                         |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `precondition_failed`                                                   |
| **Message**  | The resource has been modified. Retrieve the resource again and retry   |
| **Solution** | Check the extended error message in the response body for more details. |

|              |                                                                         |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `sync_state_precondition_failed`                                        |
| **Message**  | The resource has been modified. Retrieve the resource again and retry   |
| **Solution** | Check the extended error message in the response body for more details. |

### 413 Request Entity Too Large

|              |                                                                                                                                            |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `request_entity_too_large`                                                                                                                 |
| **Message**  | Request Entity too Large                                                                                                                   |
| **Solution** | This error is produced when the size of the upload is more than the allowed maximum. Check the extended error message in the response body |

### 415 Unsupported Media Type

|              |                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `unsupported_media_type`                                                                                                         |
| **Message**  | Previews for `boxnote` files are not yet supported.                                                                              |
| **Solution** | This error is produced when requested an embed preview of a Box Note. Embedded previews are currently unsupported for Box Notes. |

### 429 Too Many requests

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `rate_limit_exceeded`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| **Message**  | Request rate limit exceeded, try again later.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| **Solution** | The client is performing operations too quickly and has been rate limited. Client is advised to retry their request after the amount of time specified by the `retry-after` header. There are <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/rate-limits">four rate limits</Link> to be aware of. |

### 500 Internal Service Error

|              |                                                                                                              |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `internal_server_error`                                                                                      |
| **Message**  | Internal Server Error                                                                                        |
| **Solution** | Client should retry using [exponential back-off strategy](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Exponential_backoff) |

### 502 Bad Gateway

|              |                                                                                                              |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Error**    | `bad_gateway`                                                                                                |
| **Message**  |                                                                                                              |
| **Solution** | Client should retry using [exponential back-off strategy](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Exponential_backoff) |

### 503 Unavailable

|              |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Error**    | `unavailable`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| **Message**  | Unavailable                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| **Solution** | If a Retry-After header is provided in the response, the client should retry the request according to the header value. In rare situations, a write operation may eventually persist its changes after the 503 response is received by the client, so the client should handle this case upon retry. If the issue persists, check our [Status Site](https://status.box.com/) for any known outage information. |

[status-codes]: http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec10.html

[articles]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360007552913-Troubleshooting-Box-Platform


# Token & URL Expiration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/expiration



Across the Box API there are a few tokens, codes, and URLs that automatically
expire. The following is a quick overview of their respective expiration times.

|                       |                                |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------ |
| [Authorization Codes] | Expires after 30 seconds       |
| [Access Tokens]       | expires after 60 minutes       |
| [Refresh Tokens]      | Expires after 60 days or 1 use |
| [Download URLs]       | Expires after 15 minutes       |

See each respective guide for more details.

[Authorization Codes]: /guides/authentication/oauth2

[Access Tokens]: /guides/authentication/tokens

[Refresh Tokens]: /guides/authentication/tokens/refresh

[Download URLs]: /guides/downloads


# Permissions and errors
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/index



The following guides provide information on the permissions or errors related to
the Box API. It includes pages on <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors">Common Errors</Link>, <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/rate-limits">Rate Limits</Link>,
<Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Scopes</Link>, <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/expiration">Token/URL Expiration</Link>, and the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/app-diagnostics-report">App Diagnostic Report</Link>.


# Rate Limits
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/rate-limits



There are three common types of API call rate limitations that Box may use at
its discretion to best protect network resources and preserve the quality of our
customer experience.

## User based

These rate limits protect our service from issues that may arise when a single
user generates too much traffic. The number of API calls that a user can make in
a minute is limited as described below. These limits apply to all Box user
accounts and are the most common. Generally, they are initiated when a
user exceeds approximately 1000 API calls/minute, but certain API endpoints may
have different rate limits.

## Quality of service

These rate limits are designed to protect the quality of service of our
infrastructure. If there is resource contention in the infrastructure, we
introduce automatic rate limits to prevent system degradation and outages.
For instance, if an application happens to be accessing the same physical
database server, such as the use of a file migration tool accessing related
resources that access the same underlying physical resources, Box may impose
temporary rate-limits when load spikes and adjust them as the system recovers.

## Licensing based

All Box Business Plans come with a licensed number of permitted API calls per
enterprise per month. These license based rate limits are designed to prevent
excessive overages and misuse of network resources. If Box's infrastructure
detects that a tool used by or on behalf of a customer has exceeded that
customer's API license allocation or is intending to circumvent network
controls, additional selective rate-limiting may be imposed. You can see the
default API allocations licensed with a particular account level at our
[pricing page][pricing], but note that some customers purchase Platform API
Pricing plans that increase their allocation. 

## Per API rate limits

There are currently a few distinct rate limits in place within the Box API.

* General API calls
  * 1000 API requests per minute, per user
* Uploads
  * 240 file upload requests per minute, per user
* Search
  * 6 searches per second, per user, to the <Link href="/reference/get-search">search endpoint</Link>
  * Two additional limits are applied on top of the basic rate limit
    * 60 searches per minute, per user
    * 12 searches per second, per enterprise
* Box Sign
  * Create and resend sign request: 100 requests per minute, per user
  * Get sign request: 1000 requests per minute, per user

## Rate limit error

When an application hits a rate limit, the API will return an API response with
a HTTP status code of `429 Too Many Requests`.

The response will include the following headers and JSON body.

```yaml theme={null}
retry-after: 100
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "error",
  "status": 429,
  "code": "rate_limit_exceeded",
  "help_url": "https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors/",
  "message": "Request rate limit exceeded, please try again later",
  "request_id": "abcdef123456"
}
```

Please see the <Link href="/reference/resources/client-error">Client Error resource</Link> for more details.

<Note>
  The `retry-after` header provides guidance on the number of seconds to wait
  before the next API call can be retried. In general, we advise using an
  exponential back-off strategy for retrying API calls.
</Note>

[pricing]: https://www.box.com/pricing

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Scopes
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes



When an application is created in the Developer Console, the user must configure
application scopes. Similar to how users have permissions to access files and
folders within Box, applications have their own set of permissions to
perform certain actions on behalf of a Box user or a Box enterprise. The name
for a set of permissions for an application is a "scope". In short, an
application's scopes determine which <Link href="/reference">endpoints</Link> an application can
successfully call and are reflected in the access provided by
<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens">Access Tokens</Link> of the application.

## User permissions and scopes

It is important to understand that even if an application has the right scopes
to perform an action, the user associated with the Access Token making the call
needs to have permission to perform the action as well and vice versa.

For example, if your application is set up to read files, the
authenticated user does need to have permission to read the file you are
trying to access.

To learn more about how scopes, token permissions, and user permissions work
together, see our <Link href="/guides/security">security guide</Link>.

## Scopes & OAuth 2 authorization

When sending a user through a client-side OAuth 2 flow to authorize your
application it is possible to append a set of scopes to the authorization URL to
further restrict the user's access token.

For example, if you application has the `root_readonly` and `root_readwrite`
scopes enabled, it is possible to restrict a user's access token to
`root_readonly` by specifying this scope when redirecting the user.

```js theme={null}
GET https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize?scope=root_readonly&client_id=....
```

When the scope parameter is omitted the application will use the scopes that
were set when the application was created.

## Self-service scopes

These scopes are available through the Developer Console when configuring an
application. Navigate to the **Application Scopes** section of the
**Configuration** tab and select one or more of the following scope.

### Read all files and folders

|                       |                                          |
| --------------------- | ---------------------------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `root_readonly`                          |
| **Application Scope** | Read all files and folders stored in Box |

Gives an application the ability to read all the files/folders for the
authenticated user.

Although this gives an application the permission to read files and folders, the
user making the API call does need to have access to the items being accessed.

In the case of a <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link> application accessing a <Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">Managed User's</Link>
items, the Service Account's Token will need to either use the `as-user`
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/as-user">header</Link> or create a <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens">User Access Token</Link> to directly authenticate as
the user who has access to the content.

### Read and write all files and folders

|                       |                                                    |
| --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `root_readwrite`                                   |
| **Application Scope** | Read and write all files and folders stored in Box |

Gives an application write access for the authenticated user. This allows the
application to upload files or new file versions, download content, create new
folders, update or delete collaborations, create comments or tasks, and more.

Although this gives an application read/write access to items, the
user making the API call needs to have access to the content.

### Manage users

The manage users scope in the Developer Console maps to two OAuth scopes.

|                       |                        |
| --------------------- | ---------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_managed_users` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage users           |

Gives an application permission to manage <Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">Managed Users</Link>. It
allows the app to change the user's primary login, reset their password, and
change roles for managed users.

<Note>
  Although this allows an application manage users, for client-side applications,
  the Access Token used must be associated with an Admin or Co-Admin with the
  correct permissions.

  Additionally, for JWT applications, the application must be configured with
  **App Access + Enterprise Access** <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup/#application-access">application access</Link>.
</Note>

|                       |                    |
| --------------------- | ------------------ |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_app_users` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage users       |

Gives an application permission to manage <Link href="/platform/user-types/#app-user">App Users</Link>, which means this
scope only applies to server-side authenticated (JWT) applications.

### Manage groups

|                       |                 |
| --------------------- | --------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_groups` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage groups   |

Gives an application permission to manage an enterprise's groups. It
allows the app to create, update, and delete groups, as well as manage group
membership.

<Note>
  Although this allows an application manage groups, for client-side applications,
  the Access Token used must be associated with an Admin Co-Admin with the
  correct permissions.

  Additionally, for JWT applications, the application must be configured with
  **App Access + Enterprise Access** <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup/#application-access">application access</Link>.
</Note>

### Manage webhooks

|                       |                  |
| --------------------- | ---------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_webhook` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage webhooks  |

Gives an application permission to create webhooks for a user.
Please review webhook <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/limitations-v2">limitations</Link>. Most
notably, there is a limit of 1000 webhooks per application, per user.

### Manage enterprise properties

|                       |                                |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------ |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_enterprise_properties` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage enterprise properties   |

Gives an application permission to view the enterprise event stream, as well as
view and edit the enterprise's attributes and reports. It also allows the
application to edit and delete device pins.

<Note>
  Although this allows an application to enterprise properties, for client-side
  applications, the Access Token used must must be associated with an
  Admin Co-Admin with the correct permissions.
</Note>

### Manage retention policies

|                       |                            |
| --------------------- | -------------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_data_retention`    |
| **Application Scope** | Manage retention policies  |
| **Depends on**        | `enterprise_content`-scope |

Gives an application permission to view and create retention policies
with Box Governance. This requires the enterprise to have purchased
[Box Governance][governance].

<Warning>
  This scope also requires the `enterprise_content` scope to function properly.
  These scopes can be requested by opening a ticket via our support channels.
</Warning>

### Manage signature requests

|                       |                           |
| --------------------- | ------------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `sign_requests.readwrite` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage signature requests |

Gives an application permission to get, create, cancel, and resend sign
requests.

This scope requires the application to also have read/write scopes, which are
automatically selected when enabled. In addition, an enterprise must have Sign
enabled.

### Manage Box AI API

|                       |                |
| --------------------- | -------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `ai.readwrite` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage AI      |

Gives an application permission to send requests to
Box AI API.

### Manage Box Relay

|                       |                   |
| --------------------- | ----------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `manage_triggers` |
| **Application Scope** | Manage Box Relay  |

Gives an application permission to get workflows and start flows of type `WORKFLOW_MANUAL_START`

This scope requires the application to also have read/write scopes.

## Available on request

There are some additional scopes that are only available upon request. To do so,
please submit a ticket to our [support team](https://developer.box.com/support). They will review
these requests on an individual basis and only provide approval if the use case
requires the scope.

<Note>
  It is not possible to request extra scopes if your account is a free trial
  account. Before filing a support request for activation of the following
  scopes, log in to your paid enterprise account or
  [upgrade your free developer account][pricing] to an enterprise account tier.
</Note>

### Manage Legal Holds

|                 |                            |
| --------------- | -------------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope** | `manage_legal_holds`       |
| **Depends on**  | `enterprise_content`-scope |

Gives an application permission to view and create retention policies
with Box Governance. This requires the enterprise to have purchased Box
Governance.

<Note>
  This scope depends on the `enterprise_content` scope to function properly.
  This scope can be requested by opening a ticket via our support channels.
</Note>

### Suppress email notifications

|                       |                                                 |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- |
| **Application Scope** | Can suppress email notifications from API calls |

Allows some types of <Link href="/guides/api-calls/suppress-notifications">email notifications</Link> to be suppressed when API
calls are made.

### Global Content Manager (GCM)

|                       |                        |
| --------------------- | ---------------------- |
| **OAuth Scope**       | `enterprise_content`   |
| **Application Scope** | Global Content Manager |

Allows Admins, [Co-Admins][ca], and <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Accounts</Link> to retrieve any content
they do not own or are not collaborators on within their enterprise, based on
their enterprise settings.

This scope is required to manage the retention policies and legal holds.

<Danger>
  **Side effects**

  Enabling this scope on an application changes the behavior of some API calls,
  and most notably, makes it impossible to write content without explicitly
  authenticating as a user using the `as-user` header. Additionally, enabling this
  scope disables accessing content that is owned by users in another enterprise.

  For this reason, this scope will not be provisioned unless absolutely necessary.
</Danger>

## Scopes for downscoping

In some cases an Access Token needs to be <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscoped</Link> to a more strict
permission level, especially when a token needs to be exposed to a client-side,
public environment like a browser. The primary example for this is when using
[Box UI Elements][ui-elements], which require an Access Token in the user's
browser.

The following is a list of **additional** scopes that can be used with the
<Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">`POST /oauth2/token`</Link> endpoint to downscope an
existing access token.

| OAuth Scope            | UI Element affected | Description                                                                         |
| ---------------------- | ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `annotation_edit`      | Preview             | Allow user to edit & delete annotations                                             |
| `annotation_view_all`  | Preview             | Allows user to view annotations by all users                                        |
| `annotation_view_self` | Preview             | Allows user to view their own annotations only                                      |
| `base_explorer`        | Explorer            | Allows access to content in the folder tree based on user/file/token permissions    |
| `base_picker`          | Picker              | Allows access to content in the folder tree based on user/file/token permissions    |
| `base_preview`         | Preview             | Allows the user to preview the file, nothing else                                   |
| `base_sidebar`         | Sidebar             | Allows the user to get basic file info needed for the sidebar UI element            |
| `base_upload`          | Uploader            | Allows upload into the folder specified under `resource` when downscoping the token |
| `item_delete`          | Explorer            | Allows files and folders to be deleted                                              |
| `item_download`        | Explorer, Preview   | Allows files or a folder's content to be downloaded                                 |
| `item_preview`         | Explorer            | Enables preview of a file                                                           |
| `item_rename`          | Explorer            | Allows files and folders to be renamed                                              |
| `item_share`           | Explorer, Picker    | Allows the item specified under `resource` of the token exchange to be shared       |
| `item_upload`          | Picker              | Allows upload in the content picker                                                 |

The standard OAuth scopes are also supported when downscoping.

| OAuth Scope                    | Description                  |
| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------- |
| `ai.readwrite`                 | Manage AI API                |
| `manage_managed_users`         | Manage managed users         |
| `manage_app_users`             | Manage app users             |
| `manage_data_retention`        | Manage retention policies    |
| `manage_enterprise_properties` | Manage enterprise properties |
| `manage_groups`                | Manage groups                |
| `manage_webhook`               | Manage webhooks              |
| `sign_requests.readwrite`      | Manage sign requests         |

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[ui-elements]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements

[pricing]: https://www.box.com/pricing/platform

[governance]: https://www.box.com/security/governance-and-compliance

[ca]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/1500005433721-Users-Groups-Settings#h_01GSE1DYJKTY9EXEWJEDKFHCNV


# Versioning errors
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/versioning-errors



Box provides versioning capabilities for selected API endpoints. The version control system guarantees seamless functioning of existing endpoint versions, even if Box introduces new ones.

API versioning empowers Box to continually enhance its platform, while also offering third-party developers a reliable avenue for feature updates and deprecations.

To stay informed about the API modifications, monitor the [Changelog](https://developer.box.com/changelog) and maintain a current email address in the **App Info** section of the Developer Console.

## Error examples

When using versioned API calls, you can encounter versioning-related errors. This reference lists the most common cases when errors appear and provides you with examples of such errors.

## Calling with incorrect `box-version` header

If you call an API using an incorrect `box-version` header, the API will respond with an `HTTP error code 400 - Bad Request` error and provide the supported versions in the response message.

The response will include one of the following status messages in `message` field:

| Details                                                                                           | Message                                                                                  |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `box-version` value is an unsupported API version or was sent malformed.                          | `Invalid API version specified in 'box-version' header.`                                 |
| The request headers did not include `box-version` header when versioned only endpoint was called. | `Missing required box-version header.`                                                   |
| `box-version` is empty.                                                                           | `Invalid (empty) API version specified in 'box-version' header.`                         |
| `box-version` contained multiple version. It requires **only one** version per request.           | `The 'box-version' header supports only one header value per request, do not use comas.` |
| An unsupported API version is used for an existing endpoint.                                      | `Unsupported API version specified in 'box-version' header.`                             |

An example of a response with an incorrect `box-version` header:

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "error",
  "status": 400,
  "code": "invalid_api_version",
  "help_url": "/reference/error-codes/invalid-api-version",
  "message": "Invalid API version specified in 'box-version' header. Supported API versions: [2024.0].",
  "request_id": "abcdef123456"
}
```

## Calling an incorrect API version in the URL

Box documentation specifies API URLs. For instance, the Sign Requests endpoints are accessed via: `https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/`. If you mistakenly make a call to an incorrect version, such as `https://api.box.com/3.0/sign_requests/`, the response returns an `HTTP error code 404 - Not Found` error.

## Calling a deprecated API

When you use an API version that Box has marked as deprecated, the API will respond as usual. Additionally, it will append a `Deprecation` header, stating the deprecation date. For example:

```sh theme={null}
Deprecation: date="Fri, 11 Nov 2026 23:59:59 GMT"
Box-API-Deprecated-Reason: /reference/deprecated
```

You should monitor API responses to verify if the `Deprecation` header is present to accordingly plan the transition to a new API version.

## Calling a non-existent version

If you attempt to use an outdated API version, such as `2025.0` which has reached its end-of-life, the response will return an `HTTP error code 404 - Not Found`. See [Calling an incorrect API version in the URL](#calling-an-incorrect-api-version-in-the-url) for more information.


# Request extra fields
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/request-extra-fields



The number of fields returned for a resource depends on the API endpoint used
to request the resource.

## Use the `fields` query parameter

To request a specific field for a resource that is not returned by default in
the standard response, append the `fields` query parameter to your request. The
value of this parameter is a comma separated list of field names.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345?fields=is_package,lock \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "etag": "1",
  "id": "12345",
  "is_package": false,
  "lock": null,
  "type": "file"
}
```

<Note>
  It is important to note that when a specific field is requested no other
  fields are returned except for those requested and the **base** set of fields.
  For a file, this base set is comprised of the `etag`, `id`, and `type` values.
</Note>

## Resource variants

The following resource variants are available in the Box API.

### Standard

The default set of fields returned in an API response.
The standard variant is returned when requesting a resource
through the main APIs available for that resource. For example, when requesting
the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link> endpoint the API will return
the standard variation of a file.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
    "content_created_at": "2019-06-20T06:04:41-07:00",
    "content_modified_at": "2019-06-20T06:04:41-07:00",
    "created_at": "2019-06-20T07:28:42-07:00",
    "created_by": {
        "id": "191919191",
        "login": "joe@example.com",
        "name": "Joe Box",
        "type": "user"
    },
    "description": "",
    "etag": "1",
    "file_version": {
        "id": "56663434454334",
        "sha1": "585afa5209bbd586c79499b7336601341ad06cce",
        "type": "file_version"
    },
    "id": "12345",
    ...
    "size": 65000647,
    "trashed_at": null,
    "type": "file"
}
```

### Mini

Where a resource is returned as a nested part of another response it is often
reduced in size, only returning some of the more essential fields. This variant
is commonly known as the mini resource variant.

For example, when requesting the
<Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-items">`GET /folders/:id/items`</Link> endpoint the API
will return a mini variation of files and folders nested within the `item_collection`.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "0",
  "type": "folder",
  "item_collection": {
    "entries": [
      {
        "etag": "1",
        "file_version": {
          "id": "56663434454334",
          "sha1": "585afa5209bbd586c79499b7336601341ad06cce",
          "type": "file_version"
        },
        "id": "12345",
        "name": "Video.mp4",
        "sequence_id": "1",
        "sha1": "585afa5209bbd586c79499b7336601341ad06cce",
        "type": "file"
      }
      ...
    ]
    ...
  }
  ...
}
```

<Note>
  To request more information for a nested resource we recommend calling the
  API for that resource to request it by ID, and optionally pass along the
  `field` query parameter.

  For example, to get the owner of a file returned when listing the items in a
  folder, request that file by ID with the query parameter `field=owned_by`.
</Note>

### Full

The total set of fields that can be returned in an API response. The full variant is returned when requesting a resource
through the main APIs available for that resource and by appending the `fields`
query parameter.

For example, when requesting the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link>
endpoint with the `fields=is_package,lock` parameter the API will return the fields specified plus the basic fields for the file.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345?fields=is_package,lock \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "etag": "1",
  "id": "12345",
  "is_package": false,
  "lock": null,
  "type": "file"
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Sorting responses
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/sorting



Where an API returns a collection of items it often supports sorting of API
responses.

Use the `sort` and `direction` query parameters to sort the collection either in
ascending or descending order.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0/items?sort=size&direction=DESC \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

<Warning>
  Not all API endpoints that return collections have support for sorting.
  Especially endpoints that use marker-based pagination often lack support for
  sorting the results.
</Warning>

## Sorting criteria

The field to sort on is defined by the `sort` query parameter. Check the API
endpoint's documentation for the possible options for this value.

<Note>
  In some APIs the `sort` field is the second criteria by which the items are
  sorted. For example for the <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-items">`GET /folders/:id/items`</Link>
  endpoint the results are always sorted by their type first before any other
  criteria.
</Note>

## Sorting direction

The sorting direction supports two values, either `ASC` for ascending order, or
`DESC` for the reverse.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Status codes
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/status-codes



The following rules can be applied to interpret the HTTP status
codes received when using the Box API.

| HTTP Status |                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| ----------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `200-299`   | Box received, understood, and accepted the API request. The request has either completed or is in the process of being completed.                                                                                             |
| `300-399`   | Box received, understood, and accepted the API request, yet the client must take further action in order to complete the request. Often this includes redirect to other URLs.                                                 |
| `400-499`   | An client error occurred when handling the request, often because the client either did not provide the right parameters, did not have access to the resources, or tried to perform an action that is otherwise not possible. |
| `500-599`   | Box received and accepted the request, but an error occurred within Box while handling it. These errors signify a problem with Box, not a problem with the client's request                                                   |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Suppress notifications
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/suppress-notifications



For some API calls, you can block email and webhook notifications by
including a `box-notifications: off` header with the API call.

```sh cURL theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/folders \
    -H "box-notifications: off" \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN" \
    -d '{
      "name": "New Folder",
      "parent": {
        "id": "0"
      }
    }'
```

As an example, this can be used for a virus-scanning tool to download copies
every user's files in an enterprise without every collaborator on the file
receiving an email informing them of the download.

All actions will still appear in users updates feed and the audit-logs.

<Warning>
  **Scope requirement**

  Notification suppression is available for approved applications only. Contact
  support to request the required scopes to be enabled for your application.

  The following settings need to be configured for your application for this feature
  to properly work.

  * **Can suppress email notifications from API calls** - available on request via support
  * **Manage Enterprise Properties** - available via the developer console
  * Co-admin permissions of **Edit settings for your company**.
</Warning>

<Note>
  Some notifications can not be suppressed, most notable the creation is users,
  comments, collaborations, task assignments, and when changing a user's login.
</Note>


# Types and formats
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/types-and-formats



The following sections explain some basic concepts about the types and formats
that can be encountered within the Box APIs.

## Requests

The Box APIs use JSON in the requests bodies. There are a few notable exceptions
to this rule:

* The <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">`POST /oauth2/token`</Link> is used to request access tokens and as per the OAuth 2.0 specification it accepts the body to be sent with a content type of `application/x-www-form-urlencoded`.
* Most of the APIs that are used to upload binary data, like the <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">`POST /files/content`</Link> endpoint, expect data to be sent as form data with a content type of `multipart/form-data`.

<Note>
  Although not required, we highly recommend passing a header with each API
  request to define the content type of the data sent, for example
  `content-type: application/json`.
</Note>

### Headers

As per the HTTP specification, all request header names in the Box API are
case-insensitive and can be provided in lowercase, uppercase, or any mixed case
form. In other words, the content type header can be set as
`CONTENT-TYPE: application/json`, `content-type: application/json`,
`content-type: application/json` or even the slightly absurd
`cOnTeNt-TyPe: application/json`.

Header values **are** mostly case sensitive unless stated otherwise.

### GZip compression

By default data sent from Box is not compressed. To improve bandwidth and
response times it's possible to compress the API responses by including
a `Accept-Encoding: gzip, deflate` request header.

### Date and times

The Box APIs support [RFC 3339][rfc3339] timestamps. The preferred way to format
a date in a request is to convert the time to UTC, for example `2013-04-17T09:12:36-00:00`.

In those cases where timestamps are rounded to a given day, the time component
can be omitted. In this case, `2013-04-17T13:35:01+00:00` would become
`2013-04-17`. In those cases where timestamps support millisecond precision the expected
request format should be as followed `2013-04-17T09:12:36.123-00:00`.

The timezone can differ between different files and folders because an
enterprise's timezone can change over time. A common example is daylight saving
time. Items created during standard time would have a different timezone than
items created during daylight saving time. For this reason it's important to use
a `RFC3339`-compliant date-time parser to handle dates returned by the API.

Timestamps are restricted to dates after the start of the Unix epoch, `00:00:00
UTC` on January 1, 1970.

## Responses

The Box APIs generally returns JSON in the response body. There are a few notable
exceptions to this rule as well.

* APIs that delete items return an empty body with a `204 No Content` HTTP status code.
* APIs used to request binary data either return a `200 OK` status code with the binary data attached, or a `202 Accepted`, or `302 Found` status code with no body and a `location` header pointing to the actual binary file.

<Note>
  The `content-type` response header can be used to understand the type of
  content returned in the API. Additionally, every API endpoint has it's
  response type documented in our API reference documentation.
</Note>

### Headers

As per the HTTP specification, all response header names in the Box API are
case-insensitive and could change over time.

This means that the API might return responses with a content type header of
`CONTENT-TYPE: application/json`, `content-type: application/json` or
`content-type: application/json`. Ideally your application should convert header
names to a standard case upon request and then use that standardized set of
headers to look up values of the headers.

Header values **are** always case sensitive unless stated otherwise.

### Resources

Most standard API responses where only one resource is returned follow the
following format.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "12345",
  "type": "folder",
  ...
}
```

Every one of these resources will always return an ID and the type of the resource.

### Collections

Where an API response returns multiple items a collection is returned. Although
the exact format of these collections can change from endpoint to endpoint they
generally are formatted as follows.

```json theme={null}
{
  "total_count": 5000,
  "limit": 1000,
  "offset": 2000,
  "order": [
    {
      "by": "type",
      "direction": "ASC"
    }
  ],
  "entries": [
    {
      "id": 12345,
      "etag": 1,
      "type": "file",
      "sequence_id": 3,
      "name": "Contract.pdf"
    }
  ]
}
```

| Field         | Always present? |                                                                                                                          |
| ------------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `entries`     | Yes             | A list of entries in the collection                                                                                      |
| `total_count` | No              | The total numbers in the collection that can be requested. This can be larger than this page of results                  |
| `limit`       | No              | For endpoints that support offset-based pagination, this specifies the limit to the number of results returned           |
| `offset`      | No              | For endpoints that support offset-based pagination, this specifies the offset of results returned                        |
| `order`       | No              | For endpoints that support sorting, this specifies the order the results are returned in                                 |
| `next_marker` | No              | For endpoints that support marker-based pagination, this specifies the marker for the next page that can be returned     |
| `prev_marker` | No              | For endpoints that support marker-based pagination, this specifies the marker for the previous page that can be returned |

### Request IDs

When your API call returns in an error, our API will return an error
object with a `request_id` field.

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "error",
  "status": 400,
  "code": "item_name_invalid",
  "help_url": "https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors/",
  "message": "Method Not Allowed",
  "request_id": "abcdef123456"
}
```

When reaching out to support about specific error, please provide the full API
response including the `request_id` to help our support team to quickly find your
request.

<Note>
  Most API calls also return a `box-request-id` response header. The value of
  this header should not be confused with the `request_id` value in the body of
  an error response.
</Note>

### Large numbers

In some cases the API can return extremely large numbers for a field. For
example, a folder's size might have grown to many terabytes of data and
as a result the `size` field of the folder might have grown to a very large
number.

In these cases these numbers are returned in [IEEE754][numbers] format for
example `1.2318237429383e+31`.

[numbers]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_754

[rfc3339]: https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3339.txt


# Setup with App Token Auth
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/app-token/app-token-setup



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A Limited Access App can be set up to use server-side <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App Tokens</Link>
for authentication.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/app-token" title="Learn how App Token authentication works" />

## Prerequisites

To set up a Platform App using server-side authentication, you will need to ensure
you have access the [Developer Console][devconsole] from your Box enterprise
account. Alternatively, you may sign up for a [developer account][devaccount].

## App creation steps

### 1. Log in to the Developer Console

Log into Box and navigate to the [Developer Console][devconsole].
Select **Create Platform App**.

### 2. Create a Platform App

Select **Limited Access App** from the list of application types.
A modal will appear to prompt the next step.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Application selection screen" />
</Frame>

### 3. Select an app name

Finally, select a unique name for your application and click **Create App**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App name form" />
</Frame>

## App Authorization

Once a keypair is successfully added to your application your Box enterprise
Admin needs to authorize the application within the Box Admin Console.

Navigate to the **General Settings** tab for your application within the
[Developer Console][devconsole] and scroll down to the **App Authorization**
section.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Add and Manage keys" />
</Frame>

Click **Submit and Review** to send an email to your Box enterprise Admin for
approval. More information on this process is available in our
<Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization guide</Link>.

## Basic configuration

Before the application can be used, some basic additional configuration might be
required.

### Primary and Secondary App Tokens

Authentication with Limited Access Apps is done through preconfigured <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App
Tokens</Link>. To configure an app token, navigate to the **Configuration**
tab for your application within the [Developer Console][devconsole].

Scroll down to the **Primary Access Token** section and click the
**Generate Key** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Create an app token" />
</Frame>

App tokens can be configured to automatically expire or be valid indefinitely.
After creation, the key can be used to make <Link href="/guides/api-calls">API calls</Link>.

<Warning>
  **App authorization**

  App Tokens can not be generated until the application is successfully
  authorized within the Box Admin Console.
</Warning>

### CORS Domains

If your application makes API calls from front-end browser code in
Javascript, the domain that these calls are made from will need to be
added to an allow-list due to [Cross Origin Resource Sharing][cors],
also known as CORS. If all requests will be made from server-side code,
you may skip this section.

To add the full URI(s) to the allow-list, navigate to the **CORS Domain**
section at the bottom of the **Configuration** tab in the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="App name form" />
</Frame>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[devaccount]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer

[devtoken]: /guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens

[scopes]: /guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes

[cors]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-origin_resource_sharing

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Supported Endpoints
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/app-token/endpoints



App Token authentication currently only supports a handful of the BOX API.

| Endpoint                                                            | Path                     |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------ |
| <Link href="/reference/post-folders">Create a folder</Link>         | `POST /folders`          |
| <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">Upload a file</Link>     | `POST /files/content`    |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-content">Download a file</Link> | `GET /files/:id/content` |
| <Link href="/reference/delete-files-id">Delete a file</Link>        | `DELETE /files/:id`      |
| <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">Get embed link</Link>          | `GET /files/:id`         |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# App Token Auth
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/app-token/index



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Server-side authentication using App Tokens is an alternative way to
authenticate to the Box API with fixed, long-lived Access Tokens that are
restricted to the application's <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>. App Token Auth is
intended to be used by applications leveraging <Link href="/guides/embed/box-view">Box View</Link>.

## App Token Restrictions

A server-side App Token is an authentication method where the application only
has access to read and write data to its own account. By using this
authentication method there is no need to authorize a user as the application is
automatically authenticated as the Service Account that belongs to that
application.

## When to use App Tokens

Server-side authentication with App Tokens is the ideal authentication method
for apps that:

* Want to leverage Box's preview services via <Link href="/guides/embed/box-view">Box View</Link>
* Work in an environment that either has no user model, or has users that don't have Box accounts
* Want to use their own identity system
* Don't want users to have to know that they are using Box
* Want to store data in the application's Service Account and not a user's account

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Rotating App Tokens
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/app-token/rollover



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

By updating one of the application's App Tokens at a time the application can
rotate the tokens without running into any conflicts.

## Why rotate tokens

There are a few reasons to rotate App Tokens on a fixed interval.

1. To replace tokens that have been configured to auto-expire
2. To limit the effects of any compromised tokens

In either case, Box supports having two active App Tokens at any time, allowing
for a seamless rotation from the old to the new tokens.

## Rotation steps

These instructions assume that you have already created a primary and secondary
App Token before and are ready to replace either of them.

By following these steps you can configure your application with two new tokens
without any issues.

1. Assuming your application is using the Primary App Token, go to [developer console][console] application. Head to the "Configuration" section of your application "Generate Key" button for the Secondary App Token.
2. Update your application with the Secondary Token. Ensure your application is configured with this new token completely before moving on to the next step.
3. Once you are confident that the Primary App token is no longer in use, head over to the  [developer console][console] and click the "Revoke" button for the Primary App Token.

<Info>
  Repeat the same process with the tokens switched to roll back from the
  Secondary App Token to the Primary App Token.
</Info>

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# App Tokens with SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/app-token/with-sdk



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The official Box SDKs have built-in support for App Token authentication.

App Token authentication is designed for working directly with the
Box API without requiring a user to redirect through Box to authorize your
application, yet is restricted to the application's own data.

<Note>
  The method of authentication through JWT is inherently tied to the Service
  Account for the application. Any API call made with this token will seem to
  come from this application and will not have access to files and folders from
  other users without explicitly getting access them.
</Note>

## Prerequisites

Before we can get started, you will need to have completed the following steps.

* Create a Box Application within the developer console
* Ensure the application is configured to use App Token authentication
* Generate a primary and secondary App Token for the application and store the tokens somewhere in your code.

## Initializing an SDK client

To initialize an SDK client for app token auth, ensure the SDK is installed and
then configure the SDK as follows.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var config = new BoxConfig("[CLIENT_ID]", "", new Uri("http://localhost"));
  var session = new OAuthSession("[APP_TOKEN]", "N/A", 3600, "bearer");
  var client = new BoxClient(config, session);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  BoxTransactionalAPIConnection api = new BoxTransactionalAPIConnection("[APP_TOKEN]");
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  from boxsdk import Client, OAuth2

  auth = OAuth2(access_token='[APP_TOKEN]')
  client = Client(auth)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var BoxSDK = require('box-node-sdk');
  var sdk = new BoxSDK({
      clientID: '[CLIENT_ID]',
      clientSecret: ''
  });

  var client = sdk.getBasicClient('[APP_TOKEN]');
  ```
</CodeGroup>

With this the application should be able to make API calls to any of the
<Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token/endpoints">endpoints</Link> enabled for App Token auth.

## Using SDKs and Application Tokens

To learn more about Application Tokens for each SDK head over to:

* [.Net][.Net]

* [Java][Java]

* [Python][Python]

* [Node][Node]

[.Net]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#box-view-authentication-with-app-tokens

[Java]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/authentication.md#box-view-authentication-with-app-token

[Python]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/usage/authentication.md#box-view-authentication-with-app-tokens

[Node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#box-view-authentication-with-app-tokens

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# App Tokens without SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/app-token/without-sdk



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

If you are not ready to use any of the official Box SDKs, or an SDK is not
available in your language of choice, it is totally possible to use the Box APIs
without them.

App Token authentication is designed for working directly with the
Box API without requiring a user to redirect through Box to authorize your
application, yet is restricted to the application's own data.

<Note>
  The method of authentication through JWT is inherently tied to the Service
  Account for the application. Any API call made with this token will seem to
  come from this application and will not have access to files and folders from
  other users without explicitly getting access them.
</Note>

## Prerequisites

Before we can get started, you will need to have completed the following steps.

* Create a Box Application within the developer console
* Ensure the application is configured to use App Token authentication
* Generate a primary and secondary App Token for the application and store the tokens somewhere in your code.

## Making API calls

To use an App Token directly the application can use the App Token the same way
it would use any Access Token.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/users/me \
    -H "authorization: Bearer EGmDmRVfhfHsqesn5yVYHAqUkD0dyDfk"
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Setup with Client Credentials Grant
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/client-credentials/client-credentials-setup



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

## Prerequisites

To set up a Platform App using server-side authentication, you will need to ensure
you have access to the [Developer Console][devconsole] from your Box enterprise
account. Alternatively, you may sign up for a [developer account][devaccount].

## App creation steps

### Navigate to the Developer Console

Log into Box and go to the [Developer Console][devconsole].
Select **Create Platform App**.

### Select application type

Select **Platform App** from the list of application types. A modal will appear to
prompt a selection for the next step.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Application selection screen" />
</Frame>

### Provide basic application information

To describe your app, provide an app name and description.
Use the drop-down list to select the app's purpose.
Depending on the option chosen, you might
need to specify further details.

| Purpose                   | Details                                                                                              |
| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Automation, Custom Portal | Specify if the app is built by a customer or partner.                                                |
| Integration               | Specify the integration category, external system name if the app is built by a customer or partner. |
| Other                     | Specify the app purpose and if it is built by a customer or partner.                                 |

<Frame>
  <img alt="Auth selection screen" />
</Frame>

### Select application authentication

Select **Server Authentication (with Client Credentials Grant)**
if you would like to verify
application identity with a client
ID and client secret, and confirm with **Create App**.

<Warning>
  Once you make a selection, you will not be able to change to a different
  authentication method without creating a new application.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Auth selection screen" />
</Frame>

## App Authorization

Before the application can be used, a Box Admin needs to authorize the
application within the Box Admin Console.

Navigate to the **Authorization** tab for your application within the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Add and Manage keys" />
</Frame>

Click **Review and Submit** to send an email to your Box enterprise Admin for
approval. More information on this process is available in our
<Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization guide</Link>.

<Card href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval" title="Learn how to authorize a Platform Application" />

## Basic configuration

### Application Access

An application's access level determines which users and content your app may
access. By default, an application can only successfully interact with the
content of its <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> and any <Link href="/platform/user-types">App Users</Link>. To also
access existing Managed Users of an enterprise, navigate to the
**Application Access** settings accessible via the **Configuration** tab of the
[Developer console][devconsole] and set to **App + Enterprise Access**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App access level" />
</Frame>

### Application Scopes

An application's scopes determine which endpoints and resources an application
can successfully call. See the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes guide</Link> for detailed information
on each option.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App scopes" />
</Frame>

### CORS Domains

If your application makes API calls from front-end browser code in
Javascript, the domain that these calls are made from will need to be
added to an allow-list due to [Cross Origin Resource Sharing][cors],
also known as CORS. If all requests will be made from server-side code,
you may skip this section.

To add the full URI(s) to the allow-list, navigate to the **CORS Domain**
section at the bottom of the **Configuration** tab in the
[Developer console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="App CORS config" />
</Frame>

## Using SDKs and Client Credentials Grant

To learn more about Client Credentials Grant for each SDK head over to:

* [.Net][.Net]

* [Java][Java]

* [Python][Python]

* [Node][Node]

* [IOS][IOS]

[.Net]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#server-auth-with-ccg

[Java]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/authentication.md#client-credentials-grant

[Python]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/usage/authentication.md#client-credentials-grant

[Node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#client-credentials-grant-authentication

[IOS]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/legacy/BoxSDK/docs/usage/authentication.md#client-credentials-grant

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[devaccount]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer

[cors]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-origin_resource_sharing

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Client Credentials Grant
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/client-credentials/index



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Follow the steps below if you would like to leverage server authentication and
verify your application's identity using a client ID and client secret.

## Prerequisites

* A Platform Application using Server Authentication (with Client Credentials Grant) authentication in the Box [Developer Console][devconsole]
* [2FA][2fa] enabled on your Box account for viewing and copying the application's client secret from the configuration tab
* The application is <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorized</Link> in the Box Admin Console

<Danger>
  Your client secret is confidential and needs to be protected. Because this is
  how we securely identify an application's identity when obtaining an
  Access Token, you do not want to freely distribute a client secret. This
  includes via email, public forums and code repositories, distributed native
  applications, or client-side code. If you would like to add more security
  mechanisms, we recommend using our standard JWT application type.
</Danger>

## How to use

When making your API call to obtain an <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">Access Token</Link>, your
request body needs to contain your client ID and client Secret. Set the
`grant_type` to `client_credentials`.

If you would like to authenticate as the application's <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>:

* set `box_subject_type` to `enterprise`
* set `box_subject_id` to the enterprise ID

If you would like to authenticate as an admin or a managed user:

* set `box_subject_type` to `user`
* set `box_subject_id` to the user ID
* enable **App + Enterprise Access** and **Generate User Access Tokens** Box [Developer Console][devconsole]

If you would like to authenticate as any application user:

* set `box_subject_type` to `user`
* set `box_subject_id` to the user ID
* enable **Generate User Access Tokens** in the Box [Developer Console][devconsole]

## Common Errors

### Grant credentials are invalid

During authentication, you can encounter the following error:

```sh theme={null}
Grant credentials are invalid [400 Bad Request] invalid_grant - Grant credentials are invalid
```

This error indicates either:

* the client ID and client secret passed are incorrect or are not for the same application,

* the `box_subject_id` cannot be used based on the selected <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials/client-credentials-setup/#application-access">application access</Link>.

<Warning>
  A CCG app with App Access Only can send in the `box_subject_type` of `enterprise` to authenticate as its service account, but it can't authenticate as a managed user or an admin.
</Warning>

* to use a `box_subject_type` of `user`, your application should be configured to generate user access tokens in the **Advanced Features** section of the **Configuration tab**.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Generate access tokens check" />
  </Frame>

<Warning>
  Once you make changes to the app settings, don't forget to <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval#re-authorization-on-changes">reauthorize</Link> the application in the Admin Console.
</Warning>

* your application has not been authorized in the Box Admin Console

[2fa]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697154-Two-Factor-Authentication-Set-Up-for-Your-Account

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# as-user Header
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/jwt/as-user



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

It is possible to for a JWT application to act on behalf of another user
by leveraging the `as-user` header.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0 \
    -H "as-user: [USER_ID]"
    -H "authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]"
```

<Info>
  In this situation the user ID is the Box identifier for a user. User IDs can
  found for any user via the `GET /users` endpoint, which is only available to
  admins, or by calling the `GET /users/me` endpoint with an authenticated user
  session.
</Info>

## Preconditions

The application must be configured to perform actions as users in the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Advanced Features" />
</Frame>

Additionally, the authenticated user needs to be a user with Admin permissions,
meaning either an Admin or Co-Admin. See our guide on
<Link href="/platform/user-types">User Types</Link> for more details.

<Info>
  You cannot use the `user_id` of
  <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Accounts</Link>
  in the as-user header.
</Info>

## as-user using SDKs

All of the <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks">official Box SDKs</Link> support acting on behalf of a user using the
`as-user` header.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var user_client = new BoxClient(config, session, asUser: '[USER_ID]');
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  client.asUser([USER_ID]");
  // client.asSelf();
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  user_to_impersonate = client.user(user_id='[USER_ID]')
  user_client = client.as_user(user_to_impersonate)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.asUser('[USER_ID]');
  // client.asSelf();
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  Please note that some of our SDKs create new clients for the other user, while
  others modify the existing client and provide a way to return to a state where
  the client authenticates for the original user itself.
</Warning>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# JWT Auth
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/jwt/index



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Server-side authentication using JSON Web Tokens (JWT) is the most common way to
authenticate to the Box API. JWT is an [open standard](https://jwt.io/)
designed to allow powerful server-to-server authentication.

<Frame>
  <img alt="The JWT flow" />
</Frame>

Server-side authentication using JWT is only available to the Platform Application
<Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/select">app type</Link>. This authentication method does not require end-user
interaction and, if granted the proper privileges, can be used
to act on behalf of any user in an enterprise.

There are two ways you can verify an application's permissions:

* using a public and private key pair
* using a client id and client secret (<Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link>)

To learn more about these options visit our guide on using
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk">JWT without SDKs</Link>.

Upon authorizing a JWT application in the Box Admin Console, a
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> is automatically generated and is the default
Access Token used when authenticating. This is an admin-like user and why
applications leveraging JWT require explicit Box Admin approval before use.

## When to use JWT

Server-side authentication with JWT is the ideal authentication method for apps
that:

* Work with users that don't have a Box account
* Want to use their own identity system
* Don't want users to have to know that they are using Box
* Want to store data within the application's Box account and not within the the user's Box account

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Setup with JWT
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A Platform App can be set up to use server-side authentication with
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link>.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/jwt" title="Learn how JWT authentication works" />

## Prerequisites

To set up a Platform App using server-side authentication, you will need to ensure
you have access the [Developer Console][devconsole] from your Box enterprise
account. Alternatively, you may sign up for a [developer account][devaccount].

## App creation steps

### Navigate to the Developer Console

Log into Box and go to the [Developer Console][devconsole].
Select **Create Platform App**.

### Select application type

Select **Platform App** from the list of application types. A modal will appear to
prompt a selection for the next step.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Application selection screen" />
</Frame>

### Provide basic application information

To describe your app, provide an app name and description.
Use the drop-down list to select the app's purpose. Depending on the option chosen, you might need to specify further details.

| Purpose                   | Details                                                                                              |
| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Automation, Custom Portal | Specify if the app is built by a customer or partner.                                                |
| Integration               | Specify the integration category, external system name if the app is built by a customer or partner. |
| Other                     | Specify the app purpose and if it is built by a customer or partner.                                 |

<Frame>
  <img alt="Auth selection screen" />
</Frame>

### Select application authentication

Select **Server Authentication (with JWT)** if you would like to verify
application identity <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk/#public-and-private-key-pair">with a key pair</Link> and confirm with **Create Platform App**.

<Warning>
  Once you make a selection, you will not be able to change to a different
  authentication method without creating a new application.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <img alt="App name form" />
</Frame>

## Public and private key pair

<Info>
  This section can be skipped if you selected Server Authentication
  (Client Credentials Grant) as your authentication method.
</Info>

Once a Platform App is created leveraging Server Authentication with JWT, a key
pair can be generated via the configuration tab within the
[Developer Console][devconsole]. Alternatively, you can generate your
own and supply Box with the public key. Regardless of the method you select,
your Box account will need to have [2FA][2fa] enabled for security purposes.

### Generate a keypair (Recommended)

If you would like to use a Box generated keypair, navigate to the
[Developer Console][devconsole] where you can generate a configuration file.
This file includes a public/private keypair and a number of other application
details that are necessary for authentication.

To generate this file, navigate to the **Configuration** tab of the
[Developer Console][devconsole] and scroll down to the
**Add and Manage Public Keys** section.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Add and Manage keys" />
</Frame>

Click the **Generate a Public/Private Keypair** button to have Box generate a
keypair you. This will trigger the download of a JSON configuration file that
you can move to your application code.

<Danger>
  For security reasons, Box will not store your private key. If you lose your
  private key, you will need to reset the entire keypair.
</Danger>

### Manually add keypair

Alternatively, you may generate your own keypair and upload the public key to
the [Developer Console][devconsole].

To create a keypair using OpenSSL, open a terminal window and run the
following commands.

```shell theme={null}
openssl genrsa -des3 -out private.pem 2048
openssl rsa -in private.pem -outform PEM -pubout -out public.pem
```

<Info>
  **For Windows Systems**

  Windows users can install and use the [Cygwin][cygwin] package to run OpenSSL.
</Info>

Then, navigate to the configuration tab for your application within the
[Developer console][devconsole] and scroll down to the
**Add and Manage Public Keys** section.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Add and Manage keys" />
</Frame>

Click the **Add a Public Key** button, enter the public key generated using the
steps above and click **Verify and Save**.

## App Authorization

Before the application can be used, a Box Admin needs to authorize the
application within the Box Admin Console.

Navigate to the **Authorization** tab for your application within the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="App authorization" />
</Frame>

Click **Review and Submit** to send an email to your Box enterprise Admin for
approval. More information on this process is available in our
[support article for app authorization][app-auth].

<Card href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval" title="Learn how to authorize a Platform Application" />

## Basic configuration

### Application Access

An application's access level determines which users and content your app may
access. By default, an application can only successfully interact with the
content of its <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> and any <Link href="/platform/user-types">App Users</Link>.
To access existing Managed Users of an
enterprise and groups that were not created by
the app itself, navigate to the **Application Access**
settings accessible in the **Configuration** tab of the
[Developer console][devconsole] and set
to **App + Enterprise Access**. Otherwise access to such
Managed Users and groups will be blocked.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App access level" />
</Frame>

### Application Scopes

An application's scopes determine which endpoints and resources an application
can successfully call. See the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes guide</Link> for detailed information
on each option.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App scopes" />
</Frame>

### CORS Domains

If your application makes API calls from front-end browser code in
Javascript, the domain that these calls are made from will need to be
added to an allow-list due to [Cross Origin Resource Sharing][cors],
also known as CORS. If all requests will be made from server-side code,
you may skip this section.

To add the full URI(s) to the allow-list, navigate to the **CORS Domain**
section at the bottom of the **Configuration** tab in the
[Developer console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="App CORS config" />
</Frame>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[devaccount]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer

[devtoken]: /guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens

[cors]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-origin_resource_sharing

[cygwin]: http://www.cygwin.com/

[app-auth]: https://community.box.com/t5/Managing-Developer-Sandboxes/Authorizing-Apps-in-the-Box-App-Approval-Process/ta-p/77293

[2fa]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697154-Two-Factor-Authentication-Set-Up-for-Your-Account

[ccg]: /guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk/#client-credentials-grant

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# User Access Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

It is possible for a JWT application to create an Access Token for a specific
user instead of for the <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>.

## Preconditions

The application must be configured to allow the creation of user Access Tokens.
This setting can be found in the **Configuration** tab of the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Advanced Features" />
</Frame>

Additionally, the authenticated user needs to be a user with Admin permissions,
meaning either an Admin, Co-Admin, or Service Account. See our guide on
<Link href="/platform/user-types">User Types</Link> for more details.

## User Access Tokens with SDKs

To create a Box SDK client that authenticates as a specific user, follow the
steps described in the <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/with-sdk">JWT with SDK guide</Link>,
but create a user client instead of an "Enterprise" client.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var userId = "12345";
  var sdk = new BoxJWTAuth(config);
  var token = sdk.UserToken(appUserID);
  BoxClient client = sdk.UserClient(userToken, userId);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String userId = "12345";
  BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection api = new BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppUserConnection(userId, config)
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  user = client.user(user_id='12345')

  auth = JWTAuth(
      client_id='[CLIENT_ID]',
      client_secret='[CLIENT_SECRET]',
      user=app_user,
      jwt_key_id='[JWT_KEY_ID]',
      rsa_private_key_file_sys_path='[CERT.PEM]',
      rsa_private_key_passphrase='[PASSPHRASE]'
  )
  auth.authenticate_user()
  user_client = Client(auth)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var sdk = BoxSDK.getPreconfiguredInstance(config);
  var client = sdk.getAppAuthClient('user', '12345');
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Card href="/guides/authentication/jwt/with-sdk" title="Learn more about using the Box SDKs with JWT" />

## User Access Tokens without SDKs

To create a user Access Token that authenticates as a specific user, follow the
steps as described in the
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk">JWT without SDK guide</Link> but instead of creating
a claim for the enterprise, create one for a specific user ID.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var userId = "12345";

  var claims = new List<Claim>{
      new Claim("sub", userid),
      new Claim("box_sub_type", "user"),
      new Claim("jti", jti),
  };
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String userId = "12345";

  JwtClaims claims = new JwtClaims();
  claims.setIssuer(config.boxAppSettings.clientID);
  claims.setAudience(authenticationUrl);
  claims.setSubject(userId);
  claims.setClaim("box_sub_type", "user");
  claims.setGeneratedJwtId(64);
  claims.setExpirationTimeMinutesInTheFuture(0.75f);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  user_id = '12345'

  claims = {
      'iss': config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
      'sub': user_id,
      'box_sub_type': 'user',
      'aud': authentication_url,
      'jti': secrets.token_hex(64),
      'exp': round(time.time()) + 45
  }
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  let user_id = '12345';

  let claims = {
      iss: config.boxAppSettings.clientID,
      sub: user_id,
      box_sub_type: "user",
      aud: authenticationUrl,
      jti: crypto.randomBytes(64).toString("hex"),
      exp: Math.floor(Date.now() / 1000) + 45
  };
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  user_id = '12345'

  claims = {
    iss: config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
    sub: user_id,
    box_sub_type: 'user',
    aud: authentication_url,
    jti: SecureRandom.hex(64),
    exp: Time.now.to_i + 45
  }
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  $userId = '12345';

  $claims = [
    'iss' => $config->boxAppSettings->clientID,
    'sub' => $userId,
    'box_sub_type' => 'user',
    'aud' => $authenticationUrl,
    'jti' => base64_encode(random_bytes(64)),
    'exp' => time() + 45,
    'kid' => $config->boxAppSettings->appAuth->publicKeyID
  ];
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Card href="/guides/authentication/jwt/with-sdk" title="Learn more about manually using JWT authentication" />

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# JWT with SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/jwt/with-sdk



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The official Box SDKs have built-in support for JWT authentication.

This guide will take you through user authentication using JWT with the use
of the Box SDKs. JWT authentication is designed for working directly with the
Box API without requiring a user to redirect through Box to authorize your
application.

## Overview

To complete a JWT authorization the following steps need to be completed.

1. Read the configuration file
2. Initialize an SDK client

At the end of this flow, the application has a Box SDK client that can be used to
make API calls on behalf of the application.

<Note>
  The default method of authentication through JWT is inherently tied to the Service
  Account for the application. Any API call made with this token will seem to
  come from this application and will not have access to files and folders from
  other users without explicitly getting access them.
</Note>

## Prerequisites

Before we can get started, you will need to have completed the following steps.

* Create a Box Application within the developer console
* Create and download the private key configuration file for your application and save it as `config.json`
* Ensure your Box Application is approved for usage within your enterprise

## 1. Read JSON configuration

After creating a Box Application there should be a `config.json` file containing
the application's private key and other details. The following is an example.

```json config.json theme={null}
{
  "boxAppSettings": {
    "clientID": "abc...123",
    "clientSecret": "def...234",
    "appAuth": {
      "publicKeyID": "abcd1234",
      "privateKey": "-----BEGIN ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY-----\n....\n-----END ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY-----\n",
      "passphrase": "ghi...345"
    }
  },
  "enterpriseID": "1234567"
}
```

To use this object in the application it needs to be read from file.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var reader = new StreamReader("path/to/config.json");
  var json = reader.ReadToEnd();
  var config = BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonString(json);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  Reader reader = new FileReader("path/to/config.json");
  BoxConfig config = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  from boxsdk import JWTAuth

  config = JWTAuth.from_settings_file('path/to/config.json')
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var config = require("path/to/config.json");
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  **Parsing JSON**

  In some programming languages there is more than one way to read and parse
  JSON from a file. Refer to guides on your preferred programming language for
  more complete guides, including error handling.
</Info>

## 2. Initialize SDK client

The next step is to configure the Box SDK with the configuration and then
initialize the client to connect as the application.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var sdk = new BoxJWTAuth(config);
  var token = sdk.AdminToken();
  BoxClient client = sdk.AdminClient(token);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection api = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppEnterpriseConnection(config);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client = Client(config)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var sdk = BoxSDK.getPreconfiguredInstance(config);
  var client = sdk.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  **Service Accounts**

  At this point the application is authenticated as an application user, not as
  a managed or app user. Head over to our guide on <Link href="/platform/user-types">User
  Types</Link> to learn more about the different types
  of users.

  **Summary**

  By now the application should be able to authorize an application using JWT
  with any of our official SDKs, by using the following steps.

  1. Read the configuration file
  2. Initialize an SDK client

  To learn how to use this client head over to the guide on <Link href="/guides/api-calls">Making API
  calls</Link>.

  **Using SDKs and JSON Web Tokens**

  To learn more about JWT for each SDK head over to:

  * [.Net][.Net]

  * [Java][Java]

  * [Python][Python]

  * [Node][Node]

  * [IOS][IOS]
</Warning>

[.Net]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#server-auth-with-jwt

[Java]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/authentication.md#server-authentication-with-jwt

[Python]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/usage/authentication.md#server-auth-with-jwt

[Node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#server-auth-with-jwt

[IOS]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/legacy/BoxSDK/docs/usage/authentication.md#server-auth-with-jwt

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# JWT without SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This guide takes you through JWT authentication without using a Box SDK.
JWT does not require end-user interaction and is designed to authenticate
directly with the Box API.

To learn how to use this token visit our guide on <Link href="/guides/api-calls">making API
calls</Link>.

<Note>
  By default, the Access Token acquired with JWT is tied to the Service
  Account for the application. Any API call made with this token will come
  from the application. This account does not have access to any existing files
  or folders until the application's Service Account is added as a collaborator.

  It is possible to <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/as-user">act as another user</Link>
  using the `as-user` header or by requesting a
  <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens">User Access Token</Link>.
</Note>

## Using a key pair

Follow the steps below if you would like to verify your application's identity
using a public and private key pair.

### Prerequisites

* A Platform Application using JWT authentication within the [Developer Console][devconsole]
* A private key configuration file named `config.json`, which can be downloaded from the configuration tab of the [Developer Console][devconsole]
* Ensure your application is <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorized</Link> within the Box Admin Console

### 1. Read JSON configuration

Your `config.json` file contains the application's private key and other
details necessary to authenticate. The following is an example of this file.

```json config.json theme={null}
{
  "boxAppSettings": {
    "clientID": "abc...123",
    "clientSecret": "def...234",
    "appAuth": {
      "publicKeyID": "abcd1234",
      "privateKey": "-----BEGIN ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY-----\n....\n-----END ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY-----\n",
      "passphrase": "ghi...345"
    }
  },
  "enterpriseID": "1234567"
}
```

To use this object in the application it needs to be read from file.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  using System;
  using System.IO;
  using Newtonsoft.Json;

  class Config
  {
      public class BoxAppSettings {
          public class AppAuth {
              public string privateKey { get; set; }
              public string passphrase { get; set; }
              public string publicKeyID { get; set; }
          }
          public string clientID { get; set; }
          public string clientSecret { get; set; }
          public AppAuth appAuth { get; set; }

      }
      public string enterpriseID { get; set; }
      public BoxAppSettings boxAppSettings { get; set; }
  }

  var reader = new StreamReader("config.json");
  var json = reader.ReadToEnd();

  var config = JsonConvert.DeserializeObject<Config>(json);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  import java.io.FileReader;

  import com.google.gson.Gson;
  import com.google.gson.GsonBuilder;

  class Config {
      class BoxAppSettings {
          class AppAuth {
              String privateKey;
              String passphrase;
              String publicKeyID;
          }

          String clientID;
          String clientSecret;
          AppAuth appAuth;
      }

      BoxAppSettings boxAppSettings;
      String enterpriseID;
  }

  FileReader reader = new FileReader("config.json");

  Gson gson = new GsonBuilder().create();
  Config config = (Config) gson.fromJson(reader, Config.class);
  ```

  ```python Python 3 theme={null}
  import json
  import os

  config = json.load(open('config.json'))
  ```

  ```js Node  theme={null}
  const fs = require("fs");

  const config = JSON.parse(fs.readFileSync("config.json"));
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  require 'json'

  config = JSON.parse(
    File.read('config.json')
  )
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  $json = file_get_contents('config.json');
  $config = json_decode($json);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  **Parsing JSON**

  In some programming languages there is more than one way to read and parse
  JSON from a file. Refer to guides on your preferred programming language for
  more complete guides, including error handling.
</Info>

### 2. Decrypt private key

To create the JWT assertion the application needs the private key from the
configuration object. This private key is encrypted and requires a passcode to
unlock. Both the encrypted key and passcode are provided in the configuration
object.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  using System.Security.Cryptography;
  using Org.BouncyCastle.OpenSsl;
  using Org.BouncyCastle.Crypto.Parameters;
  using Org.BouncyCastle.Math;

  // https://www.bouncycastle.org/csharp/index.html
  class PasswordFinder : IPasswordFinder
  {
      private string password;
      public PasswordFinder(string _password) { password = _password; }
      public char[] GetPassword() { return password.ToCharArray(); }
  }

  var appAuth = config.boxAppSettings.appAuth;
  var stringReader = new StringReader(appAuth.privateKey);
  var passwordFinder = new PasswordFinder(appAuth.passphrase);
  var pemReader = new PemReader(stringReader, passwordFinder);
  var keyParams = (RsaPrivateCrtKeyParameters) pemReader.ReadObject();

  public RSA CreateRSAProvider(RSAParameters rp)
  {
      var rsaCsp = RSA.Create();
      rsaCsp.ImportParameters(rp);
      return rsaCsp;
  }

  public RSAParameters ToRSAParameters(RsaPrivateCrtKeyParameters privKey)
  {
      RSAParameters rp = new RSAParameters();
      rp.Modulus = privKey.Modulus.ToByteArrayUnsigned();
      rp.Exponent = privKey.PublicExponent.ToByteArrayUnsigned();
      rp.P = privKey.P.ToByteArrayUnsigned();
      rp.Q = privKey.Q.ToByteArrayUnsigned();
      rp.D = ConvertRSAParametersField(privKey.Exponent, rp.Modulus.Length);
      rp.DP = ConvertRSAParametersField(privKey.DP, rp.P.Length);
      rp.DQ = ConvertRSAParametersField(privKey.DQ, rp.Q.Length);
      rp.InverseQ = ConvertRSAParametersField(privKey.QInv, rp.Q.Length);
      return rp;
  }

  public byte[] ConvertRSAParametersField(BigInteger n, int size)
  {
      byte[] bs = n.ToByteArrayUnsigned();
      if (bs.Length == size)
          return bs;
      if (bs.Length > size)
          throw new ArgumentException("Specified size too small", "size");
      byte[] padded = new byte[size];
      Array.Copy(bs, 0, padded, size - bs.Length, bs.Length);
      return padded;
  }

  var key = CreateRSAProvider(ToRSAParameters(keyParams));
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  import java.io.StringReader;
  import java.security.PrivateKey;
  import java.security.Security;

  import org.bouncycastle.asn1.pkcs.PrivateKeyInfo;
  import org.bouncycastle.jce.provider.BouncyCastleProvider;
  import org.bouncycastle.openssl.PEMParser;
  import org.bouncycastle.openssl.jcajce.JcaPEMKeyConverter;
  import org.bouncycastle.openssl.jcajce.JceOpenSSLPKCS8DecryptorProviderBuilder;
  import org.bouncycastle.operator.InputDecryptorProvider;
  import org.bouncycastle.pkcs.PKCS8EncryptedPrivateKeyInfo;

  // https://www.bouncycastle.org/java.html
  Security.addProvider(new BouncyCastleProvider());

  PEMParser pemParser = new PEMParser(
      new StringReader(config.boxAppSettings.appAuth.privateKey)
  );
  Object keyPair = pemParser.readObject();
  pemParser.close();

  char[] passphrase = config.boxAppSettings.appAuth.passphrase.toCharArray();
  JceOpenSSLPKCS8DecryptorProviderBuilder decryptBuilder =
      new JceOpenSSLPKCS8DecryptorProviderBuilder().setProvider("BC");
  InputDecryptorProvider decryptProvider
      = decryptBuilder.build(passphrase);
  PrivateKeyInfo keyInfo
      = ((PKCS8EncryptedPrivateKeyInfo) keyPair).decryptPrivateKeyInfo(decryptProvider);

  PrivateKey key = (new JcaPEMKeyConverter()).getPrivateKey(keyInfo);
  ```

  ```python Python 3 theme={null}
  from cryptography.hazmat.backends import default_backend
  from cryptography.hazmat.primitives.serialization import load_pem_private_key

  appAuth = config["boxAppSettings"]["appAuth"]
  privateKey = appAuth["privateKey"]
  passphrase = appAuth["passphrase"]

  # https://cryptography.io/en/latest/
  key = load_pem_private_key(
      data=privateKey.encode('utf8'),
      password=passphrase.encode('utf8'),
      backend=default_backend(),
  )
  ```

  ```js Node  theme={null}
  let key = {
      key: config.boxAppSettings.appAuth.privateKey,
      passphrase: config.boxAppSettings.appAuth.passphrase,
  };
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  require "openssl"

  appAuth = config['boxAppSettings']['appAuth']
  key = OpenSSL::PKey::RSA.new(
    appAuth['privateKey'],
    appAuth['passphrase']
  )
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  $private_key = $config->boxAppSettings->appAuth->privateKey;
  $passphrase = $config->boxAppSettings->appAuth->passphrase;
  $key = openssl_pkey_get_private($private_key, $passphrase);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  **An alternative to loading private key from file**

  the application might not want to keep both the private key and password
  stored on disk. An alternative option would be to pass in the password as an
  environment variable, separating the private key from the token used to unlock
  the key.
</Info>

### 3. Create JWT assertion

To authenticate to the Box API the application needs to create a signed JWT
assertion that can be exchanged for an Access Token.

A JWT assertion is an encrypted JSON object, consisting of a
`header`, `claims`, and `signature`. Let's start by creating the `claims`,
sometimes also referred to as the `payload`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  using System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt;
  using System.Security.Claims;
  using System.Collections.Generic;

  byte[] randomNumber = new byte[64];
  RandomNumberGenerator.Create().GetBytes(randomNumber);
  var jti = Convert.ToBase64String(randomNumber);

  DateTime expirationTime = DateTime.UtcNow.AddSeconds(45);

  var claims = new List<Claim>{
      new Claim("sub", config.enterpriseID),
      new Claim("box_sub_type", "enterprise"),
      new Claim("jti", jti),
  };
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  import org.jose4j.jwt.JwtClaims;

  String authenticationUrl = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";

  JwtClaims claims = new JwtClaims();
  claims.setIssuer(config.boxAppSettings.clientID);
  claims.setAudience(authenticationUrl);
  claims.setSubject(config.enterpriseID);
  claims.setClaim("box_sub_type", "enterprise");
  claims.setGeneratedJwtId(64);
  claims.setExpirationTimeMinutesInTheFuture(0.75f);
  ```

  ```python Python 3 theme={null}
  import time
  import secrets

  authentication_url = 'https://api.box.com/oauth2/token'

  claims = {
      'iss': config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
      'sub': config['enterpriseID'],
      'box_sub_type': 'enterprise',
      'aud': authentication_url,
      'jti': secrets.token_hex(64),
      'exp': round(time.time()) + 45
  }
  ```

  ```js Node  theme={null}
  const crypto = require("crypto");

  const authenticationUrl = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";

  let claims = {
      iss: config.boxAppSettings.clientID,
      sub: config.enterpriseID,
      box_sub_type: "enterprise",
      aud: authenticationUrl,
      jti: crypto.randomBytes(64).toString("hex"),
      exp: Math.floor(Date.now() / 1000) + 45,
  };
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  require 'securerandom'

  authentication_url = 'https://api.box.com/oauth2/token'

  claims = {
    iss: config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
    sub: config['enterpriseID'],
    box_sub_type: 'enterprise',
    aud: authentication_url,
    jti: SecureRandom.hex(64),
    exp: Time.now.to_i + 45
  }
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  $authenticationUrl = 'https://api.box.com/oauth2/token';

  $claims = [
    'iss' => $config->boxAppSettings->clientID,
    'sub' => $config->enterpriseID,
    'box_sub_type' => 'enterprise',
    'aud' => $authenticationUrl,
    'jti' => base64_encode(random_bytes(64)),
    'exp' => time() + 45,
    'kid' => $config->boxAppSettings->appAuth->publicKeyID
  ];
  ```
</CodeGroup>

| Parameter                | Type    | Description                                                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------------------ | ------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `iss`, required          | String  | The Box Application's OAuth client ID                                                                                                                                        |
| `sub`, required          | String  | The Box Enterprise ID if this app is to act on behalf of the Service Account of that application, or the User ID if this app wants to act on behalf of another user.         |
| `box_sub_type`, required | String  | `enterprise` or `user` depending on the type of token being requested in the `sub` claim                                                                                     |
| `aud`, required          | String  | Always `https://api.box.com/oauth2/token`                                                                                                                                    |
| `jti`, required          | String  | A universally unique identifier specified by the application for this JWT. A unique string of at least 16 characters and at most 128 characters.                             |
| `exp`, required          | Integer | The Unix time when this JWT is to expire. Can be set to a maximum value of 60 seconds beyond the issue time. It is recommended to set this to less than the maximum allowed. |
| `iat`, optional          | Integer | Issued at time. The token cannot be used before this time.                                                                                                                   |
| `nbf`, optional          | Integer | Not before. Not Specifies when the token will start being valid.                                                                                                             |

Next, these claims need to be signed using the private key. Depending on the
language and library used, the `header` of the JWT is configured by defining the
encryption algorithm and the ID of the public key used to sign the claims.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  using Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens;

  String authenticationUrl = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";

  var payload = new JwtPayload(
      config.boxAppSettings.clientID,
      authenticationUrl,
      claims,
      null,
      expirationTime
  );

  var credentials = new SigningCredentials(
      new RsaSecurityKey(key),
      SecurityAlgorithms.RsaSha512
  );
  var header = new JwtHeader(signingCredentials: credentials);

  var jst = new JwtSecurityToken(header, payload);
  var tokenHandler = new JwtSecurityTokenHandler();
  string assertion = tokenHandler.WriteToken(jst);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  import org.jose4j.jws.AlgorithmIdentifiers;
  import org.jose4j.jws.JsonWebSignature;

  JsonWebSignature jws = new JsonWebSignature();
  jws.setPayload(claims.toJson());
  jws.setKey(key);

  jws.setAlgorithmHeaderValue(AlgorithmIdentifiers.RSA_USING_SHA512);
  jws.setHeader("typ", "JWT");
  jws.setHeader("kid", config.boxAppSettings.appAuth.publicKeyID);
  String assertion = jws.getCompactSerialization();
  ```

  ```python Python 3 theme={null}
  import jwt

  keyId = config['boxAppSettings']['appAuth']['publicKeyID']

  assertion = jwt.encode(
      claims,
      key,
      algorithm='RS512',
      headers={
          'kid': keyId
      }
  )
  ```

  ```js Node  theme={null}
  const jwt = require("jsonwebtoken");

  let keyId = config.boxAppSettings.appAuth.publicKeyID;

  let headers = {
      algorithm: "RS512",
      keyid: keyId,
  };

  let assertion = jwt.sign(claims, key, headers);
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  require 'jwt'
  keyId = appAuth['publicKeyID']
  assertion = JWT.encode(claims, key, 'RS512', { kid: keyId })
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  use \Firebase\JWT\JWT;
  $assertion = JWT::encode($claims, $key, 'RS512');
  ```
</CodeGroup>

For the header the following parameters are supported.

| Parameter             | Type   | Description                                                                                                                           |
| --------------------- | ------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `algorithm`, required | String | The encryption algorithm used to sign the JWT claim. This can be one of RS256, RS384, or RS512.                                       |
| `keyid`, required     | String | The ID of the public key used to sign the JWT. Not required, though essential when multiple key pairs are defined for an application. |

<Info>
  Using JWT libraries

  Signing your own JWT can be a complicated and painful process. Luckily, the
  hard work has already been done for you and libraries exist in pretty much
  every language. Head over to <Link href="https://jwt.io/">JWT.io</Link> for an overview.
</Info>

### 4. Request Access Token

The final step is to exchange the short lived JWT assertion for a more long
lived Access Token by calling the token endpoint with the
assertion as a parameter.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  using System.Net;
  using System.Net.Http;

  var content = new FormUrlEncodedContent(new[]
  {
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "grant_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "assertion", assertion),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "client_id", config.boxAppSettings.clientID),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>(
          "client_secret", config.boxAppSettings.clientSecret)
  });

  var client = new HttpClient();
  var response = client.PostAsync(authenticationUrl, content).Result;

  class Token
  {
      public string access_token { get; set; }
  }

  var data = response.Content.ReadAsStringAsync().Result;
  var token = JsonConvert.DeserializeObject<Token>(data);
  var accessToken = token.access_token;
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  import java.util.ArrayList;
  import java.util.List;

  import org.apache.http.HttpEntity;
  import org.apache.http.NameValuePair;
  import org.apache.http.client.entity.UrlEncodedFormEntity;
  import org.apache.http.client.methods.CloseableHttpResponse;
  import org.apache.http.client.methods.HttpPost;
  import org.apache.http.impl.client.CloseableHttpClient;
  import org.apache.http.impl.client.HttpClientBuilder;
  import org.apache.http.message.BasicNameValuePair;
  import org.apache.http.util.EntityUtils;

  List<NameValuePair> params = new ArrayList<NameValuePair>();

  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "grant_type", "urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "assertion", assertion));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "client_id", config.boxAppSettings.clientID));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair(
      "client_secret", config.boxAppSettings.clientSecret));

  CloseableHttpClient httpClient =
      HttpClientBuilder.create().disableCookieManagement().build();
  HttpPost request = new HttpPost(authenticationUrl);
  request.setEntity(new UrlEncodedFormEntity(params));
  CloseableHttpResponse httpResponse = httpClient.execute(request);
  HttpEntity entity = httpResponse.getEntity();
  String response = EntityUtils.toString(entity);
  httpClient.close();

  class Token {
      String access_token;
  }

  Token token = (Token) gson.fromJson(response, Token.class);
  String accessToken = token.access_token;
  ```

  ```python Python 3 theme={null}
  import json
  import requests

  params = {
      'grant_type': 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer',
      'assertion': assertion,
      'client_id': config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
      'client_secret': config['boxAppSettings']['clientSecret']
  }
  response = requests.post(authentication_url, params)
  access_token = response.json()['access_token']
  ```

  ```js Node  theme={null}
  const axios = require("axios");
  const querystring = require("querystring");

  let accessToken = await axios
      .post(
          authenticationUrl,
          querystring.stringify({
              grant_type: "urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer",
              assertion: assertion,
              client_id: config.boxAppSettings.clientID,
              client_secret: config.boxAppSettings.clientSecret,
          })
      )
      .then((response) => response.data.access_token);
  ```

  ```ruby Ruby theme={null}
  require 'json'
  require 'uri'
  require 'net/https'

  params = URI.encode_www_form({
    grant_type: 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer',
    assertion: assertion,
    client_id: config['boxAppSettings']['clientID'],
    client_secret: config['boxAppSettings']['clientSecret']
  })

  uri = URI.parse(authentication_url)
  http = Net::HTTP.start(uri.host, uri.port, use_ssl: true)
  request = Net::HTTP::Post.new(uri.request_uri)
  request.body = params
  response = http.request(request)

  access_token = JSON.parse(response.body)['access_token']
  ```

  ```php PHP theme={null}
  use GuzzleHttp\Client;

  $params = [
    'grant_type' => 'urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer',
    'assertion' => $assertion,
    'client_id' => $config->boxAppSettings->clientID,
    'client_secret' => $config->boxAppSettings->clientSecret
  ];

  $client = new Client();
  $response = $client->request('POST', $authenticationUrl, [
    'form_params' => $params
  ]);

  $data = $response->getBody()->getContents();
  $access_token = json_decode($data)->access_token;
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Code Samples

The code in this guide is available on [GitHub][samples].

[samples]: https://github.com/box-community/samples-docs-authenticate-with-jwt-api

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[configfile]: /guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup/#jwt-keypair

[ccg]: /guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk/#client-credentials-grant

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# As-User Header
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/oauth2/as-user



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

It is possible to for an OAuth 2.0 application to act on behalf of another user
through the `as-user` header.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/0 \
    -H "as-user: [USER_ID]"
    -H "authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]"
```

<Info>
  In this situation the user ID is the Box identifier for a user. User IDs can be
  found for any user via the `GET /users` endpoint, which is only available to
  admins, or by calling the `GET /users/me` endpoint with an authenticated user session.
</Info>

## Preconditions

Using the `as-user` header has a few requirements. Firstly, the application
needs to be configured to perform actions as users in the [Developer
Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Advanced Features" />
</Frame>

Additionally, the authenticated user needs to be a user with admin permissions,
meaning either an admin, co-admin, or service account. Co-admin users will also
need the 'Manage Users' permission scope. See our guide on [User
Types](/platform/user-types) for more details.

## as-user using SDKs

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var user_client = new BoxClient(config, session, asUser: '[USER_ID]');
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  client.asUser([USER_ID]");
  // client.asSelf();
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  user_to_impersonate = client.user(user_id='[USER_ID]')
  user_client = client.as_user(user_to_impersonate)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.asUser('[USER_ID]');
  // client.asSelf();
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  Please note that some of our SDKs create new clients for the other user, while
  others modify the existing client and provide a way to return to a state where
  the client authenticates for the original user itself.
</Warning>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# OAuth 2.0 with SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/oauth2/with-sdk



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box SDKs have built-in support for client-side OAuth 2.0.

In the process a user is redirected to the Box web app in a browser where they
log in and authorize the application access to their data before they are
redirected back to the applications `redirect_url`. This last step requires the
application to be running on a web server somewhere accessible to the user.

## Overview

To complete an OAuth 2.0 flow the following steps need to be completed.

1. Configure the Box SDK
2. Redirect the user to the Box website
3. The user grants the application access
4. Exchange the authorization code for an access token

At the end of this flow, the application has an Access Token that can be used to
make API calls on behalf of this user.

<Note>
  The access token acquired through OAuth 2.0 is inherently tied to the user who
  authorized the application. Any API call made with this token will seem to
  come from this application, and the user needs to have access to any file or
  folder the application tries to access with this token.
</Note>

## Parameters

| Parameter       | Description                                                                                                                                                   |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `CLIENT_ID`     | The client ID or API key for the application                                                                                                                  |
| `CLIENT_SECRET` | The client secret or API secret for the application                                                                                                           |
| `REDIRECT_URI`  | The redirect URL for your application that a user will be sent to after they have authorized the application. This can be configured in the developer console |

## 1. Configure SDK

The first step is to make sure your environment has been prepared with the SDK of
your choice.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var redirectUrl = "[REDIRECT_URI]";
  var config = new BoxConfig("[CLIENT_ID]", "[CLIENT_SECRET]", new Uri(redirectUrl));
  var sdk = new BoxClient(config);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIConnection;

  String authorizationUrl = "https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize?client_id=[CLIENT_ID]&response_type=code";
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  from boxsdk import OAuth2, Client

  auth = OAuth2(
      client_id='[CLIENT_ID]',
      client_secret='[CLIENT_SECRET]'
  )
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var BoxSDK = require("box-node-sdk");

  var sdk = new BoxSDK({
      clientID: "[CLIENT_ID]",
      clientSecret: "[CLIENT_SECRET]",
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Card href="/guides/tooling/sdks" title="Learn more about installing an SDK for your environment" />

## 2. Redirect user

Next, redirect the user to the authorization URL. Most of the SDKs support a
way to get the authorization URL for an SDK client.

<Warning>
  If you configured multiple redirect URIs for the application, the authorization
  URL must include the `redirect_uri` parameter matching one of the URIs
  configured in the developer console. If the parameter is not specified, the
  user will see a `redirect_uri_missing` error and will not be redirected back to
  the app after granting application access.
</Warning>

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var authorizationUrl = "https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize?client_id=[CLIENT_ID]&response_type=code";
  // redirectTo(authorizationUrl);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String authorizationUrl = "https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize?client_id=[CLIENT_ID]&response_type=code";

  // response.redirect(authorizationUrl);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  auth_url, csrf_token = auth.get_authorization_url('[REDIRECT_URL]')

  // redirect(auth_url, code=302)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var authorize_url = sdk.getAuthorizeURL({
      response_type: "code",
  });

  // res.redirect(authorize_url)
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  The way in which a user is redirected to a URL depends on the application
  framework used. Most framework documentation provides extensive guidance on
  this topic.
</Info>

The <Link href="/reference/get-authorize">authorization URL</Link> can also be created manually
as follows.

```sh theme={null}
https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize?client_id=[CLIENT_ID]&redirect_uri=[REDIRECT_URI]&response_type=code
```

<Info>
  Additional query parameters can be passed along when redirecting the user to
  limit down the scope, or pass along some extra state. See the [reference
  documentation](/reference/get-authorize) for more information.
</Info>

<Tip>
  If you have [Box Verified Enterprise][1] for your Box
  instance turned on, you
  may encounter an issue using the standard
  `account.box.com` base URL.
  Instead, use `ent.box.com` in place of `account.box.com`.
</Tip>

## 3. User grants application access

Once the user is redirected to the Box web app they will have to log in. After
they logged in they are presented with a screen to approve your application.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Example OAuth 2.0 approval screen" />
</Frame>

When the user accepts this requests and clicks the button, the browser will
redirect to your application's redirect URL as configured in the developer console.

## 4. Exchange code

The user is redirected to your application's redirect URL with a query parameter
containing a short-lived authorization code.

```sh theme={null}
https://your.domain.com/path?code=1234567
```

This code is not an <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/access-tokens">Access Token</Link> and is only valid for a few seconds.
The SDKs can be used to exchange the code for an actual Access Token.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var session = await sdk.Auth.AuthenticateAsync("[CODE]");
  var client = new BoxClient(config, session);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  BoxAPIConnection client = new BoxAPIConnection(
      "[CLIENT_ID]",
      "[CLIENT_SECRET]",
      "[CODE]"
  );
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  auth.authenticate('[CODE]')
  client = Client(auth)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var code = "...";

  sdk.getTokensAuthorizationCodeGrant("[CODE]", null, function (err, tokenInfo) {
      var client = sdk.getPersistentClient(tokenInfo);
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

At the end of this flow, the application has an Access Token that can be used to
make API calls on behalf of this user.

## Using SDKs and OAuth 2.0

To learn more about OAuth 2.0 authentication for each SDK head over to:

* [.Net][.Net]
* [Java][Java]
* [Python][Python]
* [Node][Node]
* [IOS][IOS]

[.Net]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#traditional-3-legged-oauth2

[Java]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/authentication.md#standard-3-legged-oauth-20

[Python]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/usage/authentication.md#traditional-3-legged-oauth2

[Node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/authentication.md#traditional-3-legged-oauth2

[IOS]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/legacy/BoxSDK/docs/usage/authentication.md#traditional-3-legged-oauth2

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043693554-Box-Verified-Enterprise-Supported-Apps

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# OAuth 2.0 without SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

## Overview

While leveraging an official Box SDK removes common hurdles of authentication,
it is possible to use the Box APIs without one. This guide reviews the steps to
manually complete the OAuth 2.0 flow.

1. Build the authorization URL
2. Redirect the user to the authorization URL
3. The user grants the application access to take actions on their behalf, which, if successful, provides an authorization code
4. Redirect the user back to the application
5. Exchange the authorization code for an Access Token

At the end of this flow, the application has an <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/access-tokens">Access Token</Link>, which
can be used to make API calls on behalf of the user.

<Note>
  The Access Token acquired through the OAuth 2.0 flow is inherently tied to the
  user who authorized the application.

  It is possible to <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/as-user">act as another user</Link>
  using the `as-user` header.
</Note>

## Prerequisites

Before continuing you will need to complete the following steps:

* Create a Platform App within the Box Developer Console, which leverages the OAuth 2.0 authentication method.
* Navigate to the configuration tab for the application to copy the `client_id` and `client_secret` values.
* Ensure at least one redirect URI is configured in the configuration tab for the application.

## 1. Build authorization URL

An <Link href="/reference/get-authorize">authorization URL</Link> is comprised of the following parameters:

| Parameter                                                                         | Status      | Description                                                                                            |
| --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| <Link href="/reference/get-authorize/#param-client_id">`CLIENT_ID`</Link>         | Required    | Obtained from the configuration tab of the Developer Console                                           |
| <Link href="/reference/get-authorize/#param-redirect_uri">`REDIRECT_URI`</Link>   | Optional    | Configured in the Developer Console and where the user is sent once granting access to the application |
| <Link href="/reference/get-authorize/#param-response_type">`RESPONSE_TYPE`</Link> | Required    | Always set to `code`                                                                                   |
| <Link href="/reference/get-authorize/#param-state">`STATE`</Link>                 | Recommended | Protects against cross-site request forgery                                                            |

<Warning>
  If you configured multiple redirect URIs for the application, the authorization
  URL must include the `redirect_uri` parameter matching one of the URIs
  configured in the developer console. If the parameter is not specified, the
  user will see a `redirect_uri_missing` error and will not be redirected back to
  the app.
</Warning>

At the minimum this URL will always use the format:

`https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize`?`client_id=CLIENTIDHERE`&`response_type=code`

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var baseUrl = "https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize";
  var clientId = "[CLIENT_ID]";
  var authorizationUrl = $"{baseUrl}?client_id={clientId}&response_type=code";
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String baseUrl = "https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize";
  String clientId = "[CLIENT_ID]";
  String authorizationUrl = String.format("%s?client_id=%s&response_type=code", baseUrl, clientId);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  base_url = 'https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize'
  client_id = '[CLIENT_ID]'
  authorizationUrl = f'{base_url}?client_id=${client_id}&response_type=code'
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var baseUrl = "https://account.box.com/api/oauth2/authorize";
  var clientId = "[CLIENT_ID]";
  var authorizationUrl = `${baseUrl}?client_id=${clientId}&response_type=code`;
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Card href="/reference/get-authorize" title="Learn more about the authorization URL" />

<Tip>
  If you have [Box Verified Enterprise][1] for your Box
  instance turned on, you
  may encounter an issue using the standard
  `account.box.com` base URL.
  Instead, use `ent.box.com` in place of `account.box.com`.
</Tip>

## 2. Redirect the user

Next, redirect the user to the authorization URL. The way this is done depends
on the application framework. Most framework documentation provides extensive
guidance on this topic.

If the authorization URL is not valid for the app specified, the user will see
an error page rather than a grant access screen. For example, if the
`redirect_uri` parameter in the authorization URL does not match one of the URIs
configured for your app, the user will see a `redirect_uri_mismatch` error.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  var authorizationUrl = $"{baseUrl}?client_id={clientId}&response_type=code";
  // redirectTo(authorizationUrl);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String authorizationUrl = String.format("%s?client_id=%s&response_type=code", baseUrl, clientId);

  // response.redirect(authorizationUrl);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  auth_url = f'{base_url}?client_id=${client_id}&response_type=code'
  // redirect(auth_url, code=302)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var authorizationUrl = `${baseUrl}?client_id=${clientId}&response_type=code`;
  // res.redirect(authorize_url)
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  Additional query parameters can be passed along when redirecting the user to
  limit down the scope, or pass along some extra state. See the authorization
  reference documentation for more information.
</Info>

## 3. User grants application access

The user is redirected to their browser to log in to their account using the Box
UI. They are then presented with the list of requested scopes and the option to
approve the application to take actions on their behalf.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Example OAuth 2.0 approval screen" />
</Frame>

When the user accepts this request by clicking **Grant access to Box**, the
browser will redirect to the configured redirect URL with a query parameter
containing a short-lived authorization code.

<Warning>
  If you configured multiple redirect URIs for the application, the authorization
  URL must include the `redirect_uri` parameter matching one of the URIs
  configured in the developer console. If the parameter is not specified, the
  user will see a `redirect_uri_missing` error and will not be redirected back to
  the app.
</Warning>

```sh theme={null}
https://your.domain.com/path?code=1234567
```

## 4. Exchange code

The provided authorization code is <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/expiration">valid for 30 seconds</Link> and must be
exchanged for an <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">Access Token</Link> before expiration.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .Net theme={null}
  using System.Net;
  using System.Net.Http;
  using Newtonsoft.Json;

  String authenticationUrl = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";
  var client = new HttpClient();

  var content = new FormUrlEncodedContent(new[]
  {
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>("grant_type", "authorization_code"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>("code", "[CODE]"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>("client_id", "[CLIENT_ID]"),
      new KeyValuePair<string, string>("client_secret", "[CLIENT_SECRET]")
  });

  var response = client.PostAsync(authenticationUrl, content).Result;

  class Token
  {
      public string access_token { get; set; }
  }

  var data = response.Content.ReadAsStringAsync().Result;
  var token = JsonConvert.DeserializeObject<Token>(data);
  var accessToken = token.access_token;
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String authenticationUrl = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";

  List<NameValuePair> params = new ArrayList<NameValuePair>();

  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair("grant_type", "authorization_code"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair("code", "[CODE]"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair("client_id", "[CLIENT_ID]"));
  params.add(new BasicNameValuePair("client_secret", "[CLIENT_SECRET]"));

  CloseableHttpClient httpClient = HttpClientBuilder.create().disableCookieManagement().build();

  HttpPost request = new HttpPost(authenticationUrl);
  request.setEntity(new UrlEncodedFormEntity(params));

  CloseableHttpResponse httpResponse = httpClient.execute(request);
  HttpEntity entity = httpResponse.getEntity();

  String response = EntityUtils.toString(entity);
  httpClient.close();

  class Token {
      String access_token;
  }

  Token token = (Token) gson.fromJson(response, Token.class);
  String accessToken = token.access_token;
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  authentication_url = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";

  params = urlencode({
      'grant_type': 'authorization_code',
      'code': '[CODE]',
      'client_id': '[CLIENT_ID]',
      'client_secret': '[CLIENT_SECRET]'
  }).encode()

  request = Request(authentication_url, params)
  response = urlopen(request).read()
  access_token = json.loads(response)['access_token']
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  const authenticationUrl = "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token";

  let accessToken = await axios
      .post(
          authenticationUrl,
          querystring.stringify({
              grant_type: "authorization_code",
              code: "[CODE]",
              client_id: "[CLIENT_ID]",
              client_secret: "[CLIENT_SECRET]",
          })
      )
      .then((response) => response.data.access_token);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

To learn how to use an Access Token visit our guide on <Link href="/guides/api-calls">Making API calls</Link>.

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043693554-Box-Verified-Enterprise-Supported-Apps

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Common Errors
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authorization/common-errors



## Unable to retrieve service of enterprise app authorization

<Frame>
  <img alt="Unable to retreive error" />
</Frame>

This error indicates that the entered client ID entered is invalid.
To resolve this issue, please re-copy the Client ID from the Developer Console
and ensure you are not including any trailing characters.

## Something went wrong with adding the app authorization

This error indicates you are a Box co-admin granted privileges to view, but not
edit enterprise settings. You will need to have your Box Admin grant edit
privileges in order to successfully authorize an application.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Something went wrong error" />
</Frame>

## Disabled by Administrator

This error indicates that not all authorization requirements are satisfied.
Please review our <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization guide</Link> to confirm the necessary steps for
a given application.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Admin error" />
</Frame>


# Authorization
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authorization/index



Some applications require explicit Admin authorization before use with an
enterprise. The steps an Admin needs to take are dependent on the
developer-selected authentication method and enabled enterprise settings.

## Authentication methods

The following <Link href="/guides/authentication/select">authentication methods</Link> always require explicit Admin
authorization:

* <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">Server Authentication (with JWT)</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Server Authentication (with Client Credentials Grant)</Link>

These authentication methods automatically generate a <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>.
With the right <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link> enabled, a Service Account can perform many
Admin actions, thus requiring Admin authorization before use.

<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> and <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App Token</Link> apps may also require explicit
Admin authorization based on enabled enterprise settings.

## Enterprise settings

Subsequent steps are required if any of the following enterprise settings are
enabled:

* Disable published third party apps by default
* Disable unpublished apps by default
* Require manual Admin authorization for Limited Access Apps

These [settings][setting] can be found by navigating to:

**Admin Console** > **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Platform Apps Settings** button.

<Tip>
  Published Platform Apps are any applications that can be found under Integrations.
</Tip>

## Required actions

To see what steps an Admin must complete for a given app, review the following
scenarios.

**Disable published third party apps by default**:

| Authentication Method                                                                                    | Enabled                                     | Disabled      |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- | ------------- |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link>                                              | Set to available in individual app controls | Ready for use |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">Server Authentication (with JWT)</Link>                          | N/A                                         | N/A           |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Server Authentication (client credentials)</Link> | N/A                                         | N/A           |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App Token Authentication</Link>                            | N/A                                         | N/A           |

**Disable unpublished apps by default**:

| Authentication Method                                                                                    | Enabled                                                                                                                                                                                             | Disabled                                                                                                                                                   |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link>                                              | Enable in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **User Authentication Apps** > Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to enable the app.                                                  | Ready for use                                                                                                                                              |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">Server Authentication (with JWT)</Link>                          | Authorize and enable in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Server Authentication Apps** Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to authorize the app.                                 | Authorize in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Server Authentication Apps** > Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to authorize the app. |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Server Authentication (client credentials)</Link> | Authorize and enable in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Server Authentication Apps** > Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to authorize the app.                               | Authorize in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Server Authentication Apps** > Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to enable the app.    |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App Token Authentication</Link>                            | Authorize and enable in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Server Authentication Apps** > **Server Authentication Apps** > Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to enable the app. | Ready for use                                                                                                                                              |

**Require manual Admin authorization for Limited Access Apps**:

| Authentication Method                                                                                    | Enabled                                                                                                                                                  | Disabled                                           |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link>                                              | N/A                                                                                                                                                      | N/A                                                |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">Server Authentication (with JWT)</Link>                          | N/A                                                                                                                                                      | N/A                                                |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Server Authentication (client credentials)</Link> | N/A                                                                                                                                                      | N/A                                                |
| <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token">App Token Authentication</Link>                            | Authorize in **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Server Authentication Apps** Select Platform App > Use **More** menu to authorize the app. | Automatically authorized and enabled upon creation |

[setting]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196653-Managing-custom-apps

[ag]: /guides/applications/integrations


# Limited Access App Approval
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authorization/limited-access-approval



Limited Access Integrations are automatically authorized for use in an enterprise upon
creation.

However, if the enterprise setting to
**Require manual Admin authorization for Limited Access Apps** is enabled,
an Admin must preform additional steps.

## Approval Notifications

A semi-automated process to submit an app approval is available in the Developer
Console.

Navigate to the **Authorization** tab for your application in the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Add and Manage keys" />
</Frame>

Submitting the application for approval will send an email to your
enterprise's Primary Admin to approve the application. More information on this
process is available in our [support article on app authorization][app-auth].

## Manual Approval

The following steps provide instructions on how to manually approve the
application.

### As a developer

1. Navigate to the **Configuration** tab for your application in the [Developer Console][devconsole].
2. Scroll down to the OAuth 2.0 Credentials section and copy the **Client ID** value to provide to a Box Admin.

Alternatively, hover over the application in the
<Link href="/guides/applications">My Platform Apps</Link> view to look up the **ClientID** and then
copy it using the `copy` button.

<Info>
  **Finding a Box Admin**

  If you don't know your enterprise Admin, go to your Box [Account
  Settings][settings] page and scroll to the bottom. If an admin contact is set
  you should see their contact  information under **Admin Contact**.
</Info>

### As an Admin

As a Box Admin, navigate to the [Admin Console][adminconsole] and
select the **Integrations** > **Platform Apps Manager** > **Add Platform App**

<Frame>
  <img alt="Apps tab" />
</Frame>

In the popup that appears, enter the Client ID for the application that the
developer collected from the **Configuration** tab of the Developer Console.

## Re-authorization on changes

When the application's scopes or access level change the application needs to be
re-authorized. Repeat the process above and request a new Access Token for the
new changes to take effect.

In the same section where the application was initially authorized, an Admin
can re-authorize the application by clicking on the ellipses to the right
of the application name to **Reauthorize App**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Re-authorize app" />
</Frame>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[ccg]: /guides/authentication/client-credentials

[settings]: https://app.box.com/account

[adminconsole]: https://app.box.com/master/settings/custom

[jwt]: /guides/authentication/jwt

[app-token]: /guides/authentication/app-token

[app-auth]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697014-Authorizing-Apps-in-the-Box-App-Approval-Process


# Platform App Approval
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval



Server authentication applications using <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link> or
<Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link> must be authorized by a Box Admin before use.

Unpublished applications using <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> authentication may
require enablement by a Box Admin if they are <Link href="/guides/security/#enterprise-settings-and-authorization">inactive by default</Link>.

A Box Admin needs an application's Client ID in order to properly
authorize or enable it in the Admin Console.

<Info>
  You can use <Link href="/guides/applications">My Platform Apps</Link> view to quickly look up
  the authorization and enablement status of your application.
</Info>

## Approval Notifications

A semi-automated process to submit an app approval is available in the Developer
Console for all platform application types.

### Server authentication apps

Navigate to the **Authorization** tab for your application in the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Authorization tab" />
</Frame>

### User authentication apps

Navigate to the **Enablement** tab for your application in the [Developer Console][devconsole].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enablement tab" />
</Frame>

Submitting the application for approval will send an email to your
enterprise's Primary Admin to approve the application.
When a Box Admin approves or declines your request,
you will get an email with the decision.
More information on this process is available in our [support article on app authorization][app-auth].

## Manual Approval

The following steps provide instructions on how to manually approve the
application.

### As a developer

1. Navigate to the **Configuration** tab for your application in the [Developer Console][devconsole].
2. Scroll down to the OAuth 2.0 Credentials section and copy the **Client ID** value to provide to a Box Admin.

Alternatively, hover over the application in the
<Link href="/guides/applications">My Platform Apps</Link> view to look up the **ClientID** and then
copy it using the `copy` button.

<Info>
  **Finding a Box Admin**

  If you don't know your enterprise Admin, go to your Box [Account
  Settings][settings] page and scroll to the bottom. If an admin contact is set
  you should see their contact information under "Admin Contact".
</Info>

### As an Admin

1. Navigate to the [Admin Console][adminconsole] and select the **Apps** tab (1) from the left navigation panel.
2. Click the **Platform Apps Manager** tab (2) at the top of your screen.
3. For both Server and User Authentication Apps screens, click the **Add App** (3) button in the top right corner to add a new app.
4. Alternatively, you can use the Platform Apps Manager table menu (4) to authorize and enable apps.

#### Server Authentication Apps

<Frame>
  <img alt="Server Apps tab" />
</Frame>

#### User Authentication Apps

<Frame>
  <img alt="User Apps tab" />
</Frame>

In the popup that appears, enter the client ID for the application that the
developer collected from the **Configuration** tab of the
[Developer Console][devconsole].

## Re-authorization on changes

When the application's scopes or access level change the application needs to be
re-authorized. Repeat the process above and request a new Access Token for the
new changes to take effect.

In the same section where the application was initially authorized, an Admin
can re-authorize the application by clicking on the ellipses to the right
of the application name to **Reauthorize App**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Re-authorize app" />
</Frame>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[settings]: https://app.box.com/account

[adminconsole]: https://app.box.com/master/settings/custom

[app-token]: /guides/authentication/app-token

[app-auth]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697014-Authorizing-Apps-in-the-Box-App-Approval-Process


# CLI bulk commands
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/cli-docs/bulk-commands



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box CLI bulk commands help you to automate repetitive tasks. By adding a `--bulk-file-path` flag to your command, you are able to perform actions for many items at once.

For example, this command creates several folders using a CSV file specifying folder `Name`, `Description`, and the `ParentId` of the parent folder:

```bash theme={null}
box folders:create --bulk-file-path <PATH_TO_CSV>/folders-create.csv
```

## CSV templates

Predefined CSV templates help you to structure the data you want to manage in bulk. Templates reside in the [`Bulk actions`][bulkactions] directory, grouped into folders. The table below lists the currently available templates.

| Templates              | Description                                                         |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| box collaborations     | Create, delete, and update collaborations.                          |
| box files              | Download, update, and upload files.                                 |
| box folders            | Create and update folders, add metadata to folders.                 |
| box groups             | Create groups and add memberships.                                  |
| box metadata-templates | Create metadata templates and metadata cascade policies on folders. |
| box shared-links       | Delete shared links.                                                |
| box users              | Create and update users, move one user's content to another user.   |
| box webhooks           | Delete webhooks.                                                    |

## Prerequisites

To use bulk commands, you will need a Box application
with OAuth 2.0 authentication. If you don't have one,
go to your [Developer Console][console], and follow the guide
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup">Setup with OAuth 2.0</Link>.

## Set up and use bulk commands

1. Clone the `boxcli` GitHub repository or download the files from [`Bulk actions`][bulkactions] directory.

   ```bash theme={null}
   git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git
   ```

2. Adjust the `.csv` template to your needs. For example, if you want to create several folders, you can use the [`folders-create.csv`][folderstemplate] template as your starting point.

3. Run the command.

   ```bash theme={null}
   box users:create --bulk-file-path <PATH_TO_CSV>/folders-create.csv
   ```

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[bulkactions]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/docs/Bulk%20actions

[folderstemplate]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/Bulk%20actions/folders/folders-create.csv

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# CLI guides
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/cli-docs/index



Here you can find guides on how
to use Box CLI features and capabilities.

* Set up and test <Link href="/guides/cli/cli-docs/jwt-cli">Box CLI with JWT authentication</Link>.
* Set up and use <Link href="/guides/cli/cli-docs/bulk-commands">Box CLI bulk commands</Link>.


# Box CLI with JWT Authentication
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/cli-docs/jwt-cli



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Previously, our <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start">Box CLI Quick Start Guide</Link>, followed the JWT or server
authentication application setup flow. Since we released a new OAuth 2.0
version of the Box CLI, we updated it to use the new feature. We migrated
the original JWT setup instructions here, in case you would still like
to use the server authentication application type.

## Setup a JWT application

The first step to using the CLI with server authentication is creating a Box
application in the
[Developer Console][dc], which the CLI can use behind the scenes to make API
calls. If you would like to associate your CLI with an existing JWT application
you can skip this step. However, you will want to ensure that, at a minimum, the
following scopes are set in the **Configuration** tab of your application:

* Read all files and folders stored in Box
* Write all files and folders stored in Box

1. From the left-hand navigation panel on your All Files page, open the [Developer Console][dc]. If this is your first time using the Box API and this option is not already available, you can add it to your account by clicking [here][dc].

2. Click **Create Platform App** > **Platform App** > **Server Authentication (with JWT)** > name the application > **Create App**

<Warning>
  Server Authentication (with JWT) always requires Admin authorization before use.
</Warning>

## Configure the application

This will bring you to the application’s configuration page where you need to
choose its access and permissions. Again, keep in mind that because of the
application’s authentication type, it will require Admin approval.

At a minimum, you will need the following <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link>:

* Read all files and folders stored in Box
* Write all files and folders stored in Box

You can choose either App Access Only or App + Enterprise Access as the
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup/#application-access">application access</Link>.

## Authorize the application

All applications leveraging Server Authentication must be authorized in the
Admin Console before making successful API calls. This is because all JWT
applications have a <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>, which, based on the applications
<Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link>, may be able to perform Admin actions.

Steps for developers and Admins can be found in our <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">authorization guide</Link>.

If you would like more information on how scopes, application access, tokens,
and permissions work together, please see our article on understanding
[Box's security mechanisms][blogpost].

<Warning>
  If configuration changes are made to this application, it will need to be
  reauthorized in order for the changes to take effect.
</Warning>

You will know when an application is ready for use by visiting its Authorization
tab in the [Developer Console][dc]. The state and status must be enabled and
authorized.

<Frame>
  <img alt="App Authorized" />
</Frame>

## Download Required Data

The CLI needs a configuration file stored locally in order to make API calls.

To download the configuration file, visit the **Configuration** tab in the
[Developer Console][dc]. Click **Generate a Public/Private Keypair**, which will
send you through 2FA verification before automatically downloading the
configuration file for your application. For more information see
our <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup/#public-and-private-key-pair">guide</Link>.

<Warning>
  For security reasons 2FA must be enabled on your Box account to successfully
  generate a public/private keypair.
</Warning>

Locate the downloaded file on your machine which has a default name in the
format: `EnterpriseID_publicKeyID_config.json`. You may leave this name or
choose to rename it. This guide assumes the file is renamed to `config.json`.

<Warning>
  It is critical you place the file in a location where it will not be
  inadvertently deleted or moved. If this occurs you will need to repeat the
  step 2 to reconfigure the CLI.
</Warning>

## CLI Installation and Configuration

Installers are available for Windows and macOS. However, the raw source-code is
available if you would like to build the CLI in other environments.

## Windows & macOS Installers

To install the latest CLI on your machine, download the latest
`.exe` for Windows or `.pkg` for macOS for the latest release.

<Card href="https://github.com/box/boxcli/releases" title="Download the latest CLI installer" />

## Linux & Node install

Additionally, the CLI can be installed as a Node package on any platform,
including Linux. For this to work you will need to have
[Node JS](https://nodejs.org/) installed on your machine.

```bash theme={null}
npm install --global @box/cli
```

## Source Code

The source code for the CLI is available via [GitHub][cli].

## Run configuration command

You will now need to configure the CLI to point to to the configuration file
downloaded in step 1.

<Frame>
  <div>
    <img alt="CLI Configuration Diagram" />
  </div>
</Frame>

Open your terminal or command line and execute the
command: `box configure:environments:add PathToConfigFileHere`, replacing
`PathToConfigHere` with the path to your `config.json` file.

For example:
`box configure:environments:add /Users/ExampleUser/Documents/CLI/config.json`

<Tip>
  You can drag the csv file from the Finder/File Explorer to the
  terminal/command line window to auto-populate the path.
</Tip>

## Confirm configuration

To confirm successful configuration, use the command `box users:get`.

A successful response will provide details about the <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> user
associated with your <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens">Access Token</Link>:

```json theme={null}
Type: user
ID: ''0123456789''
Name: Box CLI - Quickstart Example
Login: AutomationUser_123456_8jSo6Lqvko@boxdevedition.com
Created At: '2020-01-01T09:45:01-07:00'
Modified At: '2021-03-01T09:30:05-07:00'
Language: en
Timezone: America/Los_Angeles
Space Amount: 999999999999999
Space Used: 6291500
Max Upload Size: 16106127360
Status: active
Job Title: ''
Phone: ''
Address: example+user@box.com
Avatar URL: ''
Notification Email: []
```

<Tip>
  By default, JWT applications automatically obtain an Access Token for the
  Service Account. It is possible to change the default user, but this guide
  assumes you do not do this.
</Tip>

## Next Steps

* You can checkout the [commands][commands] page on GitHub for example code.
* You can also go to the second part of the <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/build-commands-help">OAuth 2.0 Quick Start</Link> for a tutorial on how to use the commands.

[cli]: https://github.com/box/boxcli

[auth]: /guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk

[dc]: https://account.box.com/developers/console

[blogpost]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/box-api-understanding-security-9fcad7b1d72e

[four]: /guides/cli/quick-start/options-and-bulk-commands

[cache]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/docs/configure.md#box-configureenvironmentsupdate-name

[ac]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/docs/autocomplete.md

[commands]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#command-topics

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# CLI
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/index



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box Command Line Interface (CLI) is a tool for making requests to
Box APIs from your terminal window or command prompt.

## Quick start

<Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start">Get started using the Box CLI with OAuth 2.0</Link>.

## CLI setup and use

* To use <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">server authentication</Link> method, check out <Link href="/guides/cli/cli-docs/jwt-cli">this</Link> guide.
* To use <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">CCG authentication</Link> method, check out [this][ccg-page] guide.
* To perform bulk actions using CLI commands, check out [this][bulk] guide.

## Sample scripts

Using the Box CLI is great by itself, but it becomes even more powerful when
combined with a Powershell script. We've created a [library][scripts]
of script templates for you to get started automating repetitive tasks.

* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/index">Explore sample scripts</Link>

## Advanced

The GitHub page also has some additional guides that might be of interest to an
advanced CLI user.

* [Setup autocomplete][cli-autocomplete]
* [Configure another app][cli-add-config]
* [Switch accounts][cli-switch]
* [Token cache][cache]

[cli]: https://github.com/box/boxcli

[cli-autocomplete]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/autocomplete.md

[cli-switch]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/configure.md#box-configureenvironmentsswitch-user-userid

[cli-add-config]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/configure.md#box-configureenvironmentsadd-path

[cache]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/configure.md#box-configureenvironmentsupdate-name

[scripts]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[ccg-page]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/docs/configure.md#box-configureenvironmentsadd-path

[bulk]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/Bulk%20actions/README.md

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Building Commands and Help Feature
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/build-commands-help



<ProgressBar />

A full list of CLI commands and usage information can be found in the
[GitHub repository][github].

<Warning>
  Only Service Accounts and Admins are able to use some commands.
  If your user is not authorized with the necessary scopes or you
  configured your CLI to obtain a default token for another user, calls may
  fail. Add `-v` or `--verbose` to your command for verbose error logging.
</Warning>

If you do not see a command for an endpoint you need, you can build a
[custom request][custom].

<Tip>
  Use repository documentation in conjunction with reference documentation to
  see information the help command does not provide. This includes
  restrictions, token permission requirements, fields, etc.
</Tip>

<YouTube />

## First: Reset browser storage

Now that you've imported the Box API credentials into the CLI you should take a
moment to remove these credentials from your browser's storage.

<ResetButton>
  Clear credentials
</ResetButton>

<Warning>
  Removing your API credentials from the browser storage ensures that no other
  script can read your **Client ID** or **Client Secret**
</Warning>

## Creating a folder with help

Every CLI command begins with `box`. Add the option `--help` to any
command for help building it. For example, executing `box --help` will bring you
to a list of all possible object commands. Options are discussed more in
<Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/options-and-bulk-commands/#options">step 4</Link>.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Help" />
</Frame>

Then, for example, use the folder object and execute the command
`box folders --help`. This provides a list of all eligible actions for this
object.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Help" />
</Frame>

Discover the required arguments for creating a folder: `box folders:create --help`

<Frame>
  <img alt="Help" />
</Frame>

Execute the command `box folders:create 0 "My CLI Folder"` and note the folder
ID returned in the response.

<Tip>
  The root level of the folder tree, the All Files page, is always represented
  by folder ID 0.
</Tip>

Log into **your** Box account. Can you see this folder in your folder tree?

<Warning>
  If you set up the Box CLI using JWT authentication, you will not see the
  folder in your Box account. The folder will live in the service account
  of the application that was created after application approval.
</Warning>

## Summary

* You used the **help** feature to create a folder

[github]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#command-topics-1

[custom]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/docs/request.md

[sa]: /platform/user-types/#service-account


# Configure a Box App
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app



<ProgressBar />

To use the **Box CLI** you will need to create a **Box App**. A Box App is
an application that can be used for making API calls. When
using the Box CLI you can choose to either set up your own Box App or use
our preconfigured one. The key benefit of setting up your own Box App
is that you won't need to go through login every hour, but it does require a few
extra steps to set up.

## Select a Box App to use

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Create new Box App

    We can set up a Box App for you right here from the documentation. With a
    few clicks you will be ready to go!
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Use existing Box App

    If you've already created a Box App before that you want to use, then we
    can use the credentials for that application.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  # Create a Box App

  To use your own **Box App** you will need to create a
  new Box App in the **Box Developer Console**. Click the button below and we
  will set it up for you. At the end you will have a **Client ID** and
  **Client Secret**.

  <Trigger>
    <AppButton name="Box CLI">
      Create an app
    </AppButton>
  </Trigger>

  <Observe>
    We will use these credentials to authenticate the Box CLI in the next
    step.
  </Observe>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Use existing Box App

  If you have already created a Box App before you can use that as well. We
  require a few settings to be set for this to work.

  1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole]
  2. Select your application
  3. Go to the application’s **Configuration** section
  4. Make sure your application uses **Standard OAuth 2.0** as the authentication method
  5. Scroll down to the **OAuth 2.0 redirect URI** configuration and set the **Redirect URI** to the value `http://localhost:3000/callback`.
  6. Scroll down to the **Application Scopes** section to select your desired <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">permissions</Link>. **Your application must have at least one or more** **of the following scopes:** read all files and folders stored in Box, read and write all files and folders in Box.
  7. At the top of the page click the button to **Save Changes**

  Next, copy the values for the Client ID and Client Secret into these 2 fields.

  <Store placeholder="zECq2EkYBjZ...">
    Client ID
  </Store>

  <Store placeholder="913td9hr6jo...">
    Client Secret
  </Store>

  We will use these credentials to authenticate the Box CLI in the next
  step.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Security notice**

    Your API credentials are now stored in the browser cache. We highly
    recommend clearing out this storage by clicking the **Reset** button later in
    this guide.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  ## Summary

  * You either selected to create a new **Box App**
    * Signed up for a developer account (Optional)
    * Had us create a **Platform App** for you that uses **OAuth 2.0** authentication
    * Had us set up the **redirect URL** for the application
  * Or you selected to use an **existing Box App**
</Choice>

<Observe>
  <Next>I have configured a Box app</Next>
</Observe>

[devconsole]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console

[signup]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer


# Use Box CLI with OAuth 2.0
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/index



The Box CLI is a user-friendly command line tool that allows both technical and
non-technical users to leverage the Box API to perform routine or bulk actions.
There is no need to write any code, as these actions are executed through a set
of [commands][commands].

<YouTube />

## Overview

This guide will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">Create and configure</Link> a Box application
2. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/install-and-configure">Install and configure</Link> the CLI
3. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/build-commands-help">Run commands</Link> with the CLI
4. Use <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/options-and-bulk-commands">options and bulk commands</Link>
5. Explore automation using <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/powershell-script-templates">Powershell scripts with the CLI</Link>
6. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/next-steps">Next steps</Link>

[commands]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#command-topics


# CLI Installation and Configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/install-and-configure



<ProgressBar />

<Choice>
  Installers are available for Windows and macOS. However, the raw source-code is
  available if you would like to build the CLI in other environments.

  ## Windows & macOS Installers

  To install the latest CLI on your machine, download the latest
  `.exe` for Windows or `.pkg` for macOS for the latest release.

  <Card href="https://github.com/box/boxcli/releases" title="Download the latest CLI installer" />

  ## Linux & Node install

  Additionally, the CLI can be installed as a Node package on any platform,
  including Linux. For this to work you will need to have
  [Node JS](https://nodejs.org/) installed on your machine.

  ```bash theme={null}
  npm install --global @box/cli
  ```

  ## Source Code

  The source code for the CLI is available via [GitHub][cli].

  ## Run configuration command

  You will now need to configure the CLI by logging in to your Box App.

  In this step, we will use the **Client ID** and **Client Secret** from the
  previous step to log you in and create an **Access Token** for your user.

  ## The reason to log in

  Currently you have provided us with the following information.

  <Store>
    Client ID
  </Store>

  <Store>
    Client Secret
  </Store>

  Open your terminal or command line and execute the command: `box login -n example_name`.

  <br />

  Copy the Client ID and Client Secret into the terminal window when prompted.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="CLI Login" />
  </Frame>

  Click the **Grant access to Box** button that appears in the browser window.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Grant CLI Access" />
  </Frame>

  If successful, you will see the following success message.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="CLI Env Setup" />
  </Frame>

  ## Confirm configuration

  To confirm successful configuration, make your first Box API call with the Box
  CLI by entering the command `box users:get me`.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="CLI Users Call" />
  </Frame>

  A successful response will provide details about your user account.

  ```json theme={null}
  Type: user
  ID: ''0123456789''
  Name: Aaron Levie
  Login: example@box.com
  Created At: '2020-01-01T09:45:01-07:00'
  Modified At: '2021-03-01T09:30:05-07:00'
  Language: en
  Timezone: America/Los_Angeles
  Space Amount: 999999999999999
  Space Used: 6291500
  Max Upload Size: 16106127360
  Status: active
  Job Title: ''
  Phone: ''
  Address: example+user@box.com
  Avatar URL: ''
  Notification Email: []
  ```

  ## Summary

  * You installed the CLI
  * You configured the CLI to use the OAuth 2.0 Application created earlier
  * You **made your first Box CLI Box API call** confirmed the user associated with your Access Token

  <Next>I installed and configured the CLI</Next>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**

    Please complete the previous step to set up the **Box App** you want
    to use.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

[cli]: https://github.com/box/boxcli

[auth]: /guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk

[sa]: /platform/user-types/#service-account

[at]: /guides/authentication/tokens

[dc]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# Next steps
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/next-steps



<ProgressBar />

You've reached the end of this Quick Start guide. By now you should have taken
the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">Created and configured</Link>  an OAuth 2.0 application.
2. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/install-and-configure">Installed and configured</Link> the CLI
3. <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/build-commands-help">Built and executed CLI commands</Link>
4. Learned about <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/options-and-bulk-commands">options and bulk commands</Link>
5. Explored using the CLI to <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/powershell-script-templates">run a Powershell script</Link>

To take the next step, the following resources are recommended:

1. Review all [commands][commands].
2. Review [token cache][cache] settings.
3. Review [autocomplete][ac] settings.
4. Review all of the <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts">CLI sample scripts</Link>.

[cache]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/docs/configure.md#box-configureenvironmentsupdate-name

[ac]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/docs/autocomplete.md

[commands]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#command-topics


# Using Options and Bulk Commands
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/options-and-bulk-commands



<ProgressBar />

<YouTube />

## Options

Options provide additional, optional functionality to use with a CLI command.
You may also hear these referred to as flags or arguments. As mentioned in the
previous step, `--help` is an example of an option.

To see all valid options for a command, visit the [GitHub repository][github].

For example, look at the command documentation for [deleting folders][df]. You
will see a list of options to use with this command, such as `--recursive` or
`--force`.

## As-User Header

To use the <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/as-user">as-user header</Link>, add the `--as-user=USERID` option to the
end of the command.

For example, the following command will create a folder called `Example_Folder`
at the root level in user ID 123456’s account.

```bash theme={null}
box folders:create 0 Example_Folder --as-user=123456
```

<Warning>
  Only Service Accounts and Admins are able to use the as-user header.
  If your application was not authorized with the necessary scopes or you
  configured your CLI to obtain a default token for another user, this call may
  fail. Add `-v` or `--verbose` to your command for verbose error logging.
</Warning>

## Bulk Commands

You can use a CSV file to execute commands in bulk. Each row of the
spreadsheet is treated as an individual API call.

To execute a bulk command, use the option `--bulk-file-path=<PATH_TO_CSV>`, where
`<PATH_TO_CSV>` is the local path of a CSV file containing the
necessary information.

As an example, let's create folders using the command `box folders:create --bulk-file-path=pathtoacsv`

<Tip>
  Drag the CSV file from your finder window/file explorer to the
  terminal/command line window to auto-populate the path.
</Tip>

To specify the column names for your CSV file, go to the [GitHub repository][github]
documentation and look at the argument names or use the `--help` option. In this
case, these are `PARENTID` and `NAME` and are case insensitive.
You can also use a CSV
[template][csv] for this example bulk create folders command.

Executing the command below creates three folders at the root level, 0, of the
Service Account's folder tree.

```bash theme={null}
box folders:create --bulk-file-path=/Users/ExampleUser/Desktop/bulkcreatefolders.csv
```

## Bulk Commands with Options

Passing an option in a command will automatically apply to it to each row in
the CSV file. For example,
`box folders:collaborations:create --bulk-file-path=pathtocsv --role=editor`
will create collaborations for each user in the csv as an editor.

However, you can also use options in the CSV file. Building on the last example,
instead of using the `--role=editor` option in the command itself, it can be a
column called `role`. The command itself becomes:
`box folders:collaborations:create --bulk-file-path=pathtocsv`

For more details on bulk commands read <Link href="/guides/cli/cli-docs/bulk-commands">this document</Link>.

## Summary

* You used an option with a command and/or a bulk command.

<Next>I know how to use options and bulk commands</Next>

[github]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#command-topics

[df]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/docs/folders.md#box-foldersdelete-id

[csv]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/docs/Bulk%20actions/folders/folders-create.csv


# Using PowerShell Scripts with the Box CLI
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/quick-start/powershell-script-templates



<ProgressBar />

By itself, the CLI is already powerful, but using it alongside a PowerShell
script lets you complete repetitive tasks even quicker. We created an example
[scripts][scripts] folder within our CLI GitHub repository to help
jump start your development.

To show you how CLI scripts work, we are going to use the
provision and create users [script][script-1]
template.

This script uses the Box CLI to build and create a
personal folder structure, create managed users in bulk,
and provision such new users by adding them to the newly created
folder structure as collaborators with viewer or uploader roles.

<Warning>
  This part of the quick start is for service accounts
  and users with administrative privileges only.
  Skip this step if you are not a Box administrator
  or you do not use a service account.
</Warning>

<YouTube />

## Use case

To automatically create users and folder structure, the script
performs the following steps:

1. Uses a `.csv` file to load employee data in bulk.
2. Defines folder structure using a JSON file or uploads the structure from the user's local directory.
3. Creates each new managed user a predetermined personal folder structure

## Prerequisites

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]

<message>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh]
</message>

### Box CLI

To use the script, you will need the Box CLI
installed and configured. If you haven't done so yet, see <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">step 1</Link> of
this quick start guide.
Alternatively, go to your [developer console][console], and follow the guide
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup">Setup with OAuth 2.0</Link>.

### Create a personal folder parent folder

This script works by creating a folder structure for each user that is
created. In order to do this, you should go ahead and create a parent
folder for all of the personal folders to live in. Otherwise, every folder
will live in the root of the user that the CLI is setup with. You may name
and place the folder wherever you wish, but the user you setup the CLI with
must have access to the folder.

Here is an example of what the structure will look like after
running the script.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Finished Folder Structure" />
</Frame>

## Download the script

Clone the script to a directory of your choice
and navigate to that directory.

```bash theme={null}
git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git box-cli
cd box-cli/examples/User\ Creation\ \&\ Provisioning/
```

## Configure the script settings

Adapt the script to run in your own environment.
In this example, you will use the sample data provided
with the script.

### Provide the parameters

There are a few parameters you need to supply before running the script:

* `EmployeeList`: Path to `Employee List` CSV.
* `PersonalFolderParentID`: Destination folder ID for all personal folders to be created in, either when using JSON file as input to create folder structure, or uploading local structure. This folder should be made prior to running the script the first time. It is not advised to make this value `0`, as this will create individual Personal folders in root of the account you set up the CLI with.
* `FolderStructureJSONPath`: Your own folder structure JSON path.
* `PersonalFolderSlug`: Ending name of the folder that will be created as parent for personal folders. It's set to `Personal Folder` by default, but feel free to set it to your needs. The username is concatenated with this value to create each user's personal folder name. ex - `rsmith2's Personal Folder`.
* `LocalUploadPath`: Local directory to upload folder structure directly.

<Info>
  Specify either a local upload path or a JSON file with the folder
  structure, not both.
</Info>

### Update the user list

You can use the following sample files to load users:
`Employees_1.csv`, `Employees_5.csv`, and `Employees_10.csv`.
Each will load 1, 5 or 10 new users.

Customize these files for a test run. For example, update the
`Employees_1.csv` with the following data:

```bash theme={null}
firstName,lastName,email,username
Isaac,Newton,abc@abc.local,INewton23
```

With the `EmployeeList` parameter, specify which `.csv` file you would like
to load data from.

<Warning>
  Emails must be unique across all of Box, and usernames must be unique across
  your specific Box instance. Otherwise, an error will be thrown when running
  the script.
</Warning>

### Create folder structure

You can either create a folder structure from a JSON
file or upload it from your local drive.

#### Use a JSON file

The `Folder_Structure.json` file contains the folder structure you want to create.
As an example, you will create a `Market Research` and a `Sales Plays`
folder, each with a subfolder `Statistics` and `Big Pharma` respectively.
The script will place this folder structure
under the `Personal Folder` folder for that user inside the parent folder
you designate.

With the `FolderStructureJSONPath` parameter, provide the location of the
`Folder_Structure.json` file.

#### Upload file from local drive

You can also upload a folder structure directly
from the local file system. With the `LocalUploadPath` parameter, provide the
path to your local folder you want to upload. The folder is still named and
uploaded identically to the JSON file method.

### Update the parameters

You have 3 ways to pass parameters before running the script:

* Use static values in the script

  <Info>
    Remember to update all required parameters in the script before running.
  </Info>

  ```bash theme={null}
  # Set Employee List CSV Path
  # firstname, lastname, email, username
  $EmployeeList = ""

  # Personal Folder Structure: Set either path build off JSON or directly upload
  # a local folder
  $FolderStructureJSONPath = ""
  $LocalUploadPath = ""

  # Ending slug of folder that will be used in creating personal folders for new
  # users. Value will get concatenated with username
  # If username is RSMITH, the personal folder name would be
  # RSMITH's Personal Folder
  $PersonalFolderSlug = ""

  # ID of parent folder for created personal folders to be created in
  # This folder should be created before running the script the first time.
  # It is not advised to make this value 0, as this will create individual
  # Personal folders in root of the account you set up the cli with
  $PersonalFolderParentID = ""
  ```

* Run the script with parameters

  You can specify parameters while running the script, for example:

  ```bash theme={null}
  PS > ./Users_Create_Provision.ps1 -EmployeeList ./Employees_1.csv `
      -LocalUploadPath ./PersonalLocalUpload `
      -PersonalFolderSlug "Personal Folder" `
      -PersonalFolderParentID 123456789

  Starting User Creation & Provisioning script...
  ```

* Provide the parameters when prompted

  If some parameters are still missing at runtime, the script will prompt you to provide them:

  ```bash theme={null}
  PS > ./Users_Create_Provision.ps1
  Please enter the path to the employee list CSV file:
  ./Employees_1.csv
  Please enter the path to the folder structure JSON file or the local upload path:
  Folder_Structure.json
  Folder structure JSON path set to: Folder_Structure.json
  Please enter the ID of the folder where you would like to create the personal folders:
  0
  Starting User Creation & Provisioning script...
  ```

## Run the script

1. Change the directory to the folder containing the script. In this example, it is the `User Creation & Provisioning` folder.

   ```bash theme={null}
   pwsh
   ```

2. Run the script:

   ```bash theme={null}
   PS /home/rvb/box-cli/examples/User Creation & Provisioning> ./Users_Create_Provision.ps1
   ```

   The response will be similar to the following:

   ```bash theme={null}
   Starting User Creation & Provisioning script...

   firstName lastName email
   --------- -------- -----
   Isaac     Newton   abc@abc.local
   Extracting folder structure
   Found current User ID: 18622116055

   Created a user owned Onboarding folder with id: 164734146745

   Created subfolder Market Research under Onboarding folder with id: 164735375585

   Created subfolder under Statistics folder with id: 164734956242

   Created subfolder Sales Plays under Onboarding folder with id: 164735683001

   Created subfolder under Big Pharma folder with id: 164736160637
   Creating employee Managed User account with first name:
   Isaac, last name: Newton, email: abc@abc.local, and

   Created Managed user with id: 19605663027

   Type: collaboration
       ID: '37250833128'
   Created By:
       Type: user
       ID: '18622116055'
   Name: Rui Barbosa
   Login: barduinor@gmail.com
   Created At: '2022-06-07T13:58:05-07:00'
   Modified At: '2022-06-07T13:58:05-07:00'
   Expires At: null
   Status: accepted
   Accessible By:
       Type: user
       ID: '19605663027'
       Name: Isaac Newton
       Login: abc@abc.local
   Invite Email: null
   Role: viewer uploader
   Acknowledged At: '2022-06-07T13:58:05-07:00'
   Item:
       Type: folder
       ID: '164734146745'
       Sequence ID: '0'
       ETag: '0'
   Name: Onboarding
   Collaborated Managed User Isaac Newton to current users
   Onboarding folder for provisioning
   ```

## Running the script again for new users

It is common to run this script regularly as your company hires new employees.
You can simply edit the `.csv` file, removing the previous rows of users and
adding the information for the new users. Then, the script may be ran again.

## Summary

You explored automation using a PowerShell script with the
Box CLI to provision users
and create an initial folder structure.

Make sure to explore our other <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts">sample scripts</Link> for more use cases.

<Next>I know how to use the sample scripts to automate repetitive tasks</Next>

[scripts]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[script-1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/User%20Creation%20&%20Provisioning

[jwt-cli]: /guides/cli/cli-docs/jwt-cli

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# Deprovision users and archive folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/deprovision-users



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This script allows you to deprovision and delete a list of users.
It performs the following steps:

1. Transfers the user content to the another user's root folder under specified in `EmployeeArchiveFolderName` parameter.
2. Deletes the user.

## Prerequisites

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]. Run the `pwsh` command to test the installation.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Depending on the directory you are
running the command in, the output may differ.
For example:

```bash theme={null}
PowerShell 7.2.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /Users/user/repos/boxcli/examples>
```

<message>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh].
</message>

### Box CLI

To use the script, you will need the Box CLI
installed and configured. You can get this done by going through
our <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">quick start guide</Link>. The user you use to login with should
be the main Box admin or co-admin.

## Configure the script

1. Clone the `boxcli` GitHub repository and cd into this example's folder or download the files from [`examples`][examples] directory.

   ```bash theme={null}
   git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git boxcli
   cd boxcli/examples/User\ Deprovisioning/
   ```

2. Create the list of employees for deletion in `.csv`.

   The header row should look like as follows:

   ```bash theme={null}
   name, email
   ```

   where:

   * `name` is the name of the user in Box.
   * `email` is the primary email address of the user in Box.

   For example:

   | `name`         | `email`                 |
   | -------------- | ----------------------- |
   | Managed User 1 | `ManagedUser1@test.com` |
   | Managed User 2 | `ManagedUser2@test.com` |
   | Managed User 3 | `ManagedUser3@test.com` |

### List of parameters

| `Parameter`                 | `Description`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         | `Required` | `Default Value`                                                                                                      |
| --------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `EmployeeList`              | Path to Employee List CSV with employees to be deleted.                                                                                                                                                                                               | Yes        | -                                                                                                                    |
| `SkipTransferContent`       | Set this flag to skip transfer of user content before deletion when running the script. Otherwise user's content will be transferred.                                                                                                                 | No         | `False`                                                                                                              |
| `NewFilesOwnerID`           | The ID of the user to transfer files to before deleting the user. If not specified, the script will prompt to input in the interactive mode, or use the current authenticated user ID to receive the content.                                         | No         | If not specified, the script will prompt to input in the interactive mode, or use the current authenticated user ID. |
| `EmployeeArchiveFolderName` | The name of a folder, where users' content will be moved to if `SkipTransferContent` is set to `False`. If a folder with this name already exists in the user's `NewFilesOwnerID` root folder, it will be used. Otherwise, a new one will be created. | Yes        | `Employee Archive`                                                                                                   |
| `DryRun`                    | A flag that determines the script should be run in a mode, where no delete/create/update calls will be made, only read ones.                                                                                                                          | No         | `False`                                                                                                              |

### Define script parameters

You can the following options to pass parameters.

* Use hardcoded value in script.

  To use this option, update all required parameters listed in the [script parameters section][parameters] before running.

* Run script with parameters.

  You can specify parameters while providing the command. For example:

  ```bash theme={null}
  PS > ./Users_Deprovision.ps1 -EmployeeList ./Employees_to_delete.csv `
  -NewFilesOwnerID  123456789
  -EmployeeArchiveFolderName "Employee Archive"
  ```

  or

  ```bash theme={null}
  PS > ./Users_Deprovision.ps1 -EmployeeList ./Employees_to_delete.csv `
  -SkipTransferContent
  ```

  If you don't specify parameters, the script will prompt you to enter it.

  ```bash theme={null}
  PS > ./Users_Deprovision.ps1
  Please enter the path to the employee list CSV file:
  ./Employees_to_delete.csv
  Please specify the user ID of the user who will own the files of the users being deprovisioned.
  Press Enter if you want to use the current user as the new owner.
  User ID: 1234567689
  Starting User Deprovisioning script...
  ```

## Run the script

Now all you need to do is run the script.

1. Run the Powershell command.

   ```bash theme={null}
   pwsh
   ```

2. Run the script:

   ```bash theme={null}
   ./Users_Deprovision.ps1
   ```

   When all parameters are defined, you will see following output to confirm the script started:

   ```bash theme={null}
   PS /home/rvb/box-cli/examples/User Deprovisioning> ./Users_Deprovision.ps1
   Starting User Deprovisioning script...
   ```

## Logging

Logs are stored in a `logs` folder located in the main folder.
You have access to these log files:

* `Users_Deprovision_all.txt` that contains all log entries
* `Users_Deprovision_errors.txt` that contains only errors.

[scripts]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[auth]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup

[examples]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/User%20Deprovisioning

[parameters]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/User%20Deprovisioning/Users_Deprovision.ps1#L17-L36

[employeelist]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/examples/User%20Deprovisioning/Users_Deprovision.ps1#L12

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# CLI sample scripts
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/index



Box CLI scripts are designed to help you
automate your tasks. Currently,
the sample scripts library
provides several PowerShell scripts you can use
and customize. In order to run them, you will need to have the Box CLI
installed and configured. You can follow the <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">quick start guide</Link> to
get that done.

<Warning>
  Most of the below scripts require the user you run commands with to
  have Box [administrative privileges][7].
</Warning>

## PowerShell scripts

* <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/powershell-script-templates">Provision users and folders</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/deprovision-users">Deprovision users and archive folders</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/manage-groups-collaborations">Manage groups and collaborations</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/report-inactive-users">Report inactive users</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/metadata-extraction">Extract metadata</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/user-zones-mass-update">Update user zones</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/slack-integration-mappings">Manage Slack integration folder mappings</Link>

[7]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043694174-Understanding-Administrator-and-Co-Administrator-Permissions


# Manage groups and collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/manage-groups-collaborations



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

## Script structure

This script uses Box CLI to create or update groups, add users to them, and finally to create collaborations between groups and folders.
The script consists of two parts described in detail in the sections below. You can run them both or use the optional flags to decide which part to run.

### Create or update groups

1. The script uses the `.csv` file you specify for the `UserGroupAdditionPath` parameter. The file lists group names and user emails. When creating the file, you can use the same group name for several users, and assign one user to several groups. For example:

   | `GroupName` | `UserEmail`             |
   | ----------- | ----------------------- |
   | Group1      | `ManagedUser1@test.com` |
   | Group1      | `ManagedUser2@test.com` |
   | Group2      | `ManagedUser3@test.com` |
   | Group3      | `ManagedUser1@test.com` |

2. If the group doesn't exist, the script creates it. If it does exist, the script can update the entries based on the provided data.

### Create or update collaborations

1. The script uses the `.csv` file you specify for the `CollaborationsCreationPath` parameter. The file lists group names, folder IDs, and collaboration roles.

2. For each row, the script checks if a group exists and if it's not already added as a collaborator to the corresponding folder. For example:

   | `GroupName` | `FolderId` | `CollaborationRole` |
   | ----------- | ---------- | ------------------- |
   | Group1      | 1111111    | editor              |
   | Group2      | 1111111    | viewer\_uploader    |
   | Group2      | 2222222    | viewer              |
   | Group3      | 1111111    | viewer\_uploader    |

3. If both of these conditions are met, the script assigns the group to a folder using the role defined in the `CollaborationRole` column. Also, if a group already exists, but the `CollaborationRole` changed, the script will update it if you pass the `-UpdateExistingCollabs` flag when running the script.

## Prerequisites

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]. Run the `pwsh` command to test the installation.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Depending on the directory you are
running the command in, the output may differ.
For example:

```bash theme={null}
PowerShell 7.2.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /Users/user/repos/boxcli/examples>
```

<message>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh].
</message>

### Box CLI

To use the script, you will need the Box CLI
installed and configured. You can get this done by going through
our <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">quick start guide</Link>. The user you use to login with should
be the main Box admin or co-admin.

## Configure the script

1. Clone the `boxcli` GitHub repository and cd into this example's folder or download the files from [`examples`][examples] directory.

   ```bash theme={null}
   git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git boxcli
   cd boxcli/examples/Mass\ Groups\ \&\ Collaborations\ Update/
   ```

2. Set the path to the `.csv` file with the list of groups and user emails.

   ```bash theme={null}
   $UserGroupAdditionPath = "./User_Group_Addition.csv"
   ```

   * `UserEmail` is the primary email address for the user in Box.
   * `GroupName` is the name of the group.

3. Set your own path to the `.csv` file with the list groups and user emails.

   ```bash theme={null}
   $CollaborationsCreationPath = "./Collaborations_Creation.csv"
   ```

   * `GroupName` is name of the group the script will add as a collaborator to the folder.
   * `FolderId` is the folder ID the collaborator will be added to.
   * `CollaborationRole` is the name of the role used when creating a collaboration.

   You can configure the available roles by setting the `AvailableCollaborationRoles` parameter:

   ```bash theme={null}
   $AvailableCollaborationRoles = @("editor", "viewer", "previewer", "uploader", "previewer_uploader", "viewer_uploader", "co-owner")
   ```

## Run the script

1. Run the Powershell command.

   ```bash theme={null}
   pwsh
   ```

2. Run the script.

   ```bash theme={null}
   ./Mass_Groups_Collabs_Update.ps1
   ```

### Optional flags

You can use flags to run run or skip specific parts of the script.

* If a group already is set as a collaborator for a specific folder but with a role other than defined in the .`csv` file, the script will inform you about it. It will not make any changes to an existing collaboration. If you want to update an existing collaboration with role defined in `.csv` file, set an additional `-UpdateExistingCollabs` flag when running the script.

  ```bash theme={null}
  Mass_Groups_Collabs_Update.ps1 -UpdateExistingCollabs
  ```

* To update groups without creating collaborations, add the `-SkipCollabsCreation` boolean flag when running the script:

  ```bash theme={null}
  Mass_Groups_Collabs_Update.ps1 -SkipCollabsCreation
  ```

* To create collaborations without any group updates, add the `-SkipGroupsUpdate` boolean flag when running the script:

  ```bash theme={null}
  Mass_Groups_Collabs_Update.ps1 -SkipGroupsUpdate
  ```

## Logging

Logs are stored in the `logs` folder located in the main folder.
You have access to these log files:

* `Mass_Groups_Collabs_Update_all.txt` that contains all log entries
* `Mass_Groups_Collabs_Update_errors.txt` that contains only errors.

[examples]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[auth]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Extract metadata
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/metadata-extraction



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This script extracts metadata details for all the
files and folders in any Box folder and
saves the result in a CSV spreadsheet for
each metadata template.

## Prerequisites

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]. Run the `pwsh` command to test the installation.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Depending on the directory you are
running the command in, the output may differ.
For example:

```bash theme={null}
PowerShell 7.2.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /Users/user/repos/boxcli/examples>
```

<Info>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh].
</Info>

### Box CLI

To use the script, you will need the Box CLI
installed and configured. You can get this done by going through
our <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">quick start guide</Link>.

## Configure the script

1. Clone the `boxcli` GitHub repository and cd into this example's folder or download the files from [`examples`][examples] directory.

   ```bash theme={null}
   git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git
   cd boxcli/examples/Metadata\ Extraction/
   ```

2. Specify the `folderID` and `userID` parameters to tell the script which folder to scan, and who is the user running the script.

   ```bash theme={null}
   [string]$FolderID = "",
   [string]$UserID = "",
   ```

   If you don't want to specify the parameters directly in the script,
   you can either pass them as flags or allow the script
   to prompt you to enter them. A sample command with flags looks as follows:

   ```bash theme={null}
   ./Metadata-extraction.ps1 -folderId 123456789 -userId 123456789
   ```

## Run the script

1. Run the Powershell command.

   ```bash theme={null}
   pwsh
   ```

2. Run the script.

   ```bash theme={null}
   ./Metadata-extraction.ps1 -folderId 123456789 -userId 123456789
   ```

   When the script finishes, you will see the following
   output or a similar one.

   ```bash theme={null}
   Pulling data from Folder ID: 173961139760
   metadata as user ID: 20718545815
   Reading Item ID: 1016853559790
   Metadata saved to: MetadataTemplate_properties.csv
   ```

## Logging

Logs are stored in a `logs` folder located in the main folder.
You have access to these log files:

* `Metadata-extraction_all.txt` that contains all log entries.
* `Metadata-extraction_errors.txt` that contains only errors.

[scripts]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[auth]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup

[examples]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/Metadata%20Extraction

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Provision users and folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/provision-users-folders



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This script uses the Box CLI to build and create a
personal folder structure, create managed users in bulk,
and provision such new users by adding them to the newly created
folder structure as collaborators with viewer or uploader role.

For details, see the quick start guide on
<Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/powershell-script-templates">using Box CLI and sample scripts</Link>.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Report inactive users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/report-inactive-users



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This script generates a CSV file with a list of users who have been inactive for a number of days. It performs the following steps:

1. Looks for the users who have the role `user`.

   <message>
     The script does not consider other roles, such as `AppUser`.
   </message>

2. Uses <Link href="/reference/resources/event">Box Events</Link> to check if the user performed any actions for a specified number of days. The default list of event types includes: `LOGIN`,`UPLOAD`,`COPY`,`MOVE`,`PREVIEW`,`DOWNLOAD`,`EDIT`,`DELETE`,`UNDELETE`,`LOCK`,`UNLOCK`, `NEW_USER`. You can modify this list in the script settings.

3. Adds users who didn't perform any actions to a `.csv` file with inactive users. You can use this file as input for other scripts, for example to <Link href="/guides/cli/scripts/deprovision-users">deprovision users</Link>.

## Prerequisites

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]. Run the `pwsh` command to test the installation.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Depending on the directory you are
running the command in, the output may differ.
For example:

```bash theme={null}
PowerShell 7.2.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /Users/user/repos/boxcli/examples>
```

<message>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh].
</message>

### Box CLI

To use the script, you will need the Box CLI
installed and configured. You can get this done by going through
our <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start/create-oauth-app">quick start guide</Link>. The user you use to login with should
be the main Box admin or co-admin.

## Configure the script

1. Clone the `boxcli` GitHub repository and cd into this example's folder or download the files from [`examples`][examples] directory.

   ```bash theme={null}
   git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git
   cd boxcli/examples/Inactive\ Users\ Report/
   ```

2. Set the number of days you want the script to scan for user events. If you   don't specify this value or leave the default, the script will prompt you to enter it.

   ```bash theme={null}
   $daysInactive = "10"
   ```

3. (Optional) To change the report output file name, define the `ReportOutputFile` parameter.

   ```bash theme={null}
   $ReportOutputFile = $ReportName + ".csv"
   ```

4. (Optional) To change event types, define the list for `eventType` parameter.

   ```bash theme={null}
   $eventType = "LOGIN,UPLOAD,COPY,MOVE"
   ```

## Run the script

Run the Powershell command.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Run the script.

```bash theme={null}
./Inactive_Users_Report.ps1
```

When the script run is completed, you will see the following
output or a similar one.

```bash theme={null}
Looking for users inactive for more than 3 days.
Found 6 users.
Found 7 events in last 3 days
Enterprise has: 0 App user, 6 regular users. With 1 admin role, 5 user roles.
Need to check 5 users (regular user, with user role) for inactive.
Found 5 users inactive for more than 3 days.
Report is available at InactiveUsers.csv
```

## Logging

Logs are stored in the `logs` folder located in the main folder.
You have access to these log files:

* `Inactive_Users_Report_all.txt` that contains all log entries
* `Inactive_Users_Report_errors.txt` that contains only errors.

[scripts]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[auth]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup

[examples]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/Inactive%20Users%20Report

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Manage Slack integration folder mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/slack-integration-mappings



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This script helps manage the folder mappings between Slack and Box if using Box
as the content store for Slack. It creates a list of current Slack channel and
Box folder mappings and can create or update mappings based on input csv. This
script will maintain all permissions.

For more details, you can checkout the [Github repo][1].

## Prerequisites

### Clone script

Clone this GitHub repo or download files from the `/examples` directory

```bash theme={null}
git clone https://github.com/box/boxcli.git
```

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]. Run the `pwsh` command to test the installation.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Depending on the directory you are
running the command in, the output may differ.
For example:

```bash theme={null}
PowerShell 7.2.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /Users/user/repos/boxcli/examples>
```

<message>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh].
</message>

### Box CLI Install

Configure and install the Box CLI using the OAuth <Link href="/guides/cli/quick-start">CLI Setup Quick Start</Link>. Make sure the user you use is an admin or co-admin.

### Enterprise configuration

* Configure and [install Box for Slack][install-slack] in the relevant Slack work spaces and organizations
* Box as the [content layer for Slack][content-layer] in enabled

## Run the script

Change the directory to the folder containing the script. In this example, it is the `Integration Mappings` folder.

```pwsh theme={null}
rvb@lab:~/box-cli/examples/Integration Mappings$ pwsh
PowerShell 7.2.4
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /home/rvb/box-cli/examples/Integration Mappings>
```

Run the script with EXTRACT to extract current mappings:

```pwsh theme={null}
./integration-mappings.ps1 -Action EXTRACT
```

or

Run the script with UPDATE to update current mappings:

```pwsh theme={null}
./integration-mappings.ps1 -Action UPDATE
```

or

Run the script with CREATE to create new mappings:

```pwsh theme={null}
./integration-mappings.ps1 -Action CREATE -MappingPath ./mapping_create_example.csv
```

By default, the csv file will save to and load from ./mappings.csv. If you wish to change this location, you can pass in a new path like so:

```pwsh theme={null}
./integration-mappings.ps1 -Action EXTRACT -MappingPath ./mappings_new_location.csv
```

If you don't specify parameters, the script will prompt you to enter them.

When the script run is completed, you will see the following
output or a similar one.

When creating a mapping on a new channel, you must input a Box folder id, Slack channel id and Slack org id. You may use a Slack workspace ID in lieu of the org id. In that case, you would replace the csv column header `SlackOrgId` with `SlackWorkspaceId`.

```pwsh theme={null}
Starting Process
Applying new mappings
Output [...]
All bulk input entries processed successfully.
```

## Logging

Logs are stored in a `logs` folder located in the main folder. You have access to these log files:

* `Integration-mappings_all.txt` that contains all log entries.
* `Integration-mappings_errors.txt` that contains only errors.

## Disclaimer

This project is a collection of open source examples and should not be treated as an officially supported product. Use at your own risk and as a source of example how to use Box CLI.

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[install-slack]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044195313-Installing-and-Using-the-Box-for-Slack-Integration

[content-layer]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack

[1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/Integration%20Mappings

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Update user zones
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/cli/scripts/user-zones-mass-update



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This [script][script] provisions users to a specific
data residency zone within a Multizone Box tenant.
It performs the following steps:

1. It uses admin or co-admin login email address to find the associated enterprise and the zone policy assigned to this enterprise. An assigned zone policy is inherited by all users unless specified otherwise. It is sometimes called the **default zone**.
2. It performs zone assignment based on an input `.csv` file containing user email addresses and zone mappings.

<message>
  Usually, you use the script once to do the initial provisioning of user zones, but you can also use it for subsequent runs to make zone assignment updates.
</message>

If you would like to use Admin Console for zone assignment, see [this guide][zonesguide].
For more information about Box Zones, see the [official website][zonespage].

## Prerequisites

### Windows

Install the latest version of [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download).

### MacOS & Linux

Install [PowerShell][pwsh]. Run the `pwsh` command to test the installation.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Depending on the directory you are
running the command in, the output may differ.
For example:

```bash theme={null}
PowerShell 7.2.5
Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation.

https://aka.ms/powershell
Type 'help' to get help.

PS /Users/user/repos/boxcli/examples>
```

<message>
  If you encounter issues make sure you installed both
  [dotnet core](https://dotnet.microsoft.com/download) and
  [PowerShell][pwsh].
</message>

### Set up application with JWT authentication

To use the script, you will need the <Link href="/guides/cli/cli-docs/jwt-cli">Box CLI with JWT authentication</Link>
installed and configured.

When creating the app, use the **Configuration** tab
to configure the following settings:

* In **App Access Level**, select `App + Enterprise Access`.
* In **Application Scopes** > **Administrative Actions**, select `Manage Enterprise Properties`, `Manage Users`.
* In **Advanced Features**, select `Generate user access tokens`.

### Adjust admin settings

Make sure Box Admin or Co-Admin has at least `Manage Users` privileges.
To check this setting:

1. Go **Users & Groups** section in the Admin Console.
2. Click the user account you want to verify.
3. Go to **Edit User Access permissions** section to grant the administrative privileges for users and groups.

## Prepare the `.csv` file

The `.csv` file must have two columns with the following headers: **Email** and **Region**.

* **Email** contains the primary email address of a Box user.
* **Region**  contains the user-friendly name for the zone to which the script will assign the user. This name is provided by the [ZonesTable][zonestable] that is a hash table used to define zones. The keys are the zone's user-friendly names, and the corresponding value is the global ID of the zone.

  ```bash theme={null}
  $ZonesTable = @{
      US = "100001"             #US
      GermanyIreland = "100002" #Germany/Ireland with in region uploads/downloads/previews
      Australia = "100003"      #Australia
      Japan = "100004"          #Japan with in region uploads/downloads/previews
      Canada = "100005"         #Canada
      JapanSingapore = "100007" #Japan/Singapore with in region uploads/downloads/previews
      UKGermany = "100008"      #UK/Germany
      UK = "100009"             #UK with in region uploads/downloads/previews
      France = "100012"         #France
  }
  ```

<message>
  Consult the Box Consulting or Customer Success manager to get the IDs corresponding to the zones enabled in a specific enterprise.
</message>

A sample input `.csv` file containing emails and zone names is provided with this script. Its content looks as follows:

| Email               | Region         |
| ------------------- | -------------- |
| `betty@company.com` | US             |
| `roger@company.com` | France         |
| `sally@company.com` | JapanSingapore |

## Configure the script

Set the `UserZonesUpdatePath` to point to your `.csv` file.

```bash theme={null}
$UserZonesUpdatePath = "./your_file_name.csv"
```

Update the `adminEmail` to the admin or `co-admin` login email address of the account the script will use to make zone assignments.
If you don't specify this value, the script will prompt you for it.

```bash theme={null}
$adminEmail = "john@box.com"
```

## Run the script

Run the Powershell command.

```bash theme={null}
pwsh
```

Run the script.

```bash theme={null}
./Mass_Update_User_Zones.ps1
```

### Optional flags

To run the script in a simulation mode,
add the `DryRun` boolean flag.
Dry run doesn't mean that API calls won't be made, but that any create/update/delete calls will be skipped.

```bash theme={null}
./Mass_Update_User_Zones.ps1 -DryRun
```

## Logging

Logs are stored in a `logs` folder located in the main folder.
You have access to these log files:

* `Mass_Update_User_Zones_all.txt` that contains all log entries.
* `Mass_Update_User_Zones_errors.txt` that contains only errors.

[zonesguide]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044193533-Assigning-Zones-through-the-Admin-Console

[script]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/Mass%20Update%20User%20Zones

[zonespage]: https://www.box.com/zones

[zonestable]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/main/examples/Mass%20Update%20User%20Zones/Mass_Update_User_Zones.ps1#L23

[scripts]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples

[pwsh]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/install/installing-powershell?view=powershell-7.2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box Embed
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-embed



Box Embed is a HTML-based framework that allows embedding the entire
Box Web App experience in a custom-made application. Box Embed provides the ability to upload, search, comment, share, tag, and edit files using Box Edit. You can also embed Box Hubs AI Chat for a focused chatbot experience.

## Before you start

To create a widget, you need to:

* Set an embeddable element, such as a folder, file, hub, note, or app for sharing.
* Have at least **Viewer** [permissions][5].

## Using web app

To fetch the Box Embed widget code from the Box web app, perform the following steps.

### Files and folders

1. Navigate to the chosen file or folder.
2. Click on the ellipsis next to the folder.
3. Go to  **More Actions** >  **Embed Widget**.

### Hubs

1. Navigate to the chosen hub.
2. Click on the ellipsis menu in the upper-right corner.
3. Click **Embed Hub**.

<Note>
  You can also embed only the AI chat interface from a hub. Users can ask questions and get AI-powered answers based on the hub's files, without accessing navigation or file browsing features. For more information, see the <Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed/#box-hubs-ai-chat-embedding">Box Hubs AI Chat embedding</Link> section.
</Note>

### Notes

1. Navigate to the chosen note.
2. Click on the ellipsis menu.
3. Click **Embed Box Note**.

### Apps

1. Navigate to the chosen app or Box App View.
2. Click on the ellipsis menu.
3. Click **Embed**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Embed" />
</Frame>

In the next step, configure the parameters of an embeddable element.

| Element Type | Configuration Options                                                                                       |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Files        | Size of the widget.                                                                                         |
| Folders      | Size of the widget, sorting of the files in a folder, hiding the navigation path and sidebar.               |
| Hubs         | Size of the widget, hiding the parent navigation path and sidebar.                                          |
| Hubs AI Chat | Chat mode: button or widget.                                                                                |
| Notes        | Size of the widget, skipping cloud game (results in note being in read only mode), hiding notes navigation. |
| Apps         | Size of the widget.                                                                                         |

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Embed Configuration" />
</Frame>

When you are done customizing the embed widget, copy
and paste the embed code into your site or web application.

## Programmatically

If you want to customize Box Embed even further, you can do it programmatically. The format for an embed snippet is as follows:

```html theme={null}
<iframe
  src="https://{custom_domain}.app.box.com/embed/s/{shared link value}?view={list or icon}&sortColumn={name, date, or size}&sortDirection=ASC"
  width="{pixels}"
  height="{pixels}"
  frameborder="0"
  <!-- Optionally replace * with your enterprise-specific domain (for example, mycompanydomain.app.box.com) -->
  allow="local-network-access *; clipboard-read *; clipboard-write *" 
  allowfullscreen
  webkitallowfullscreen
  msallowfullscreen>
</iframe>
```

### Browser permissions

The `allow` attribute enables clipboard operations and local network access for Google Chrome 142 and above and Microsoft Edge 143 and above. While designed for these browser versions, this attribute can be safely included for all browsers. Other browsers will ignore it.

Without this attribute, embedded Box content might not work correctly with Box Tools, Device Trust, or the clipboard copy button.

<Note>
  The Embed Widget Link Generation modal automatically includes this parameter in the generated code.
</Note>

### Finding your shared link value

The first step to building an embed `iframe` programmatically is to generate
or find the value for the shared link. One way to find this value is by
using the Box web app.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Share" />
</Frame>

Another way is to create a shared link with API using the
<Link href="/reference/put-files-id--add-shared-link">`PUT /files/:file_id`</Link> or <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id--add-shared-link">`PUT /files/:file_id`</Link>.

Then you can find this shared link value using the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link> or <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id">`GET /folders/:id`</Link> endpoint and passing in the
query parameter `fields=shared_link`.

```curl theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/12345?fields=shared_link \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
"shared_link": {
  "url": "https://app.box.com/s/dsbJFzdO7qZxdfOHFzdO7qZxdfOH",
  "download_url": null,
  "vanity_url": null,
  ...
}
```

You can also set the page to Root Folder/All Files page. Set the URL to
`/folder/0` instead of the share link:
`<iframe src=“https://app.box.com/embed/folder/0”….></iframe>`

### Parameters

Next, you will want to choose your view customization options. The following is
a list of optional parameters you can configure.

|                          |                                                                                                                                                       |
| ------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `hideHubsGallery`        | Hide or show navigation chevron button to go back to Hubs gallery. Can be `true` or `false` (default).                                                |
| `hideNavigationControls` | Hide or show navigation controls in Box Notes.                                                                                                        |
| `showItemFeedActions`    | Hide or show file comments or tasks. Can be `true` (default) or `false`.                                                                              |
| `showParentPath`         | Hide or show the folder path in the header of the frame. Can be `true` or `false` (default).                                                          |
| `sortColumn`             | The order the files or folders are sorted in. Can be `name`, `date` (default), or `size`.                                                             |
| `sortDirection`          | The sort direction of files or folders. Can be `ASC` (default) or `DESC`.                                                                             |
| `view`                   | The view type for your files or folders. Can be `list` (default) or `icon`. For logged-in users the view type from user preferences takes precedence. |
| `uxLite`                 | Show the limited content preview (Preview Light), with no cloud game. Works only for shared files and Box Notes.                                      |

<Note>
  When you use `uxLite` with Box Notes, navigation controls are not displayed, regardless of the `hideNavigationControls` setting.
</Note>

All custom search parameters from the first-party app URL are passed to the embed widget modal and Content Preview.

### Full screen capabilities

To enable full screen capabilities for the Box Embed snippet, include one or more
of the following parameters if you want the object to be viewable in full screen
within an `<iframe>`:

* `allowfullscreen`
* `webkitallowfullscreen`
* `mozallowfullscreen`
* `oallowfullscreen`
* `msallowfullscreen`

## Box Hubs AI Chat embedding

In addition to embedding the complete Box Hub experience, you can embed only the AI-powered chat interface. This mode provides a focused chatbot experience powered by the files within a specific hub, without navigation or content browsing options.

### Prerequisites

To access a hub embedded in AI Chat mode:

* The enterprise that owns the hub must have Box AI for Hubs enabled.
* The user must be authenticated and have Box AI for Hubs enabled at their enterprise.
* The user needs at least Viewer [permissions][5] on the hub.

### Creating an AI Chat embed

1. Navigate to the hub that will serve as the knowledge source for the AI Chat.

2. Click the ellipsis menu in the upper-right corner.

3. Click **Embed Hub**.

4. Select the **Hub AI Chat** tab.

5. Select chat mode:

   * <Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed/#chat-button">Chat button</Link>
   * <Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed/#chat-widget">Chat widget</Link>

6. Copy the embed code.

<Note>
  If you experience issues with the Box Hubs AI Chat embedding, regenerate the embed code to get the latest version of the script by repeating steps 1-6 above.
</Note>

### Chat button

In **Chat button** mode, the AI chat widget opens after the user clicks the button. It is generated as a Box-hosted `script` and displays a floating chat button on your page.

<img alt="Chat button mode" />

#### Chat button parameters

The **Chat button** mode supports the following parameters:

| Parameter                | Required | Description                                                                                                                          |
| ------------------------ | -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `data-hub-id`            | Yes      | The ID of the hub that powers the chatbot.                                                                                           |
| `data-custom-box-domain` | No       | For Box instances with custom domains. Default: `app.box.com`. Example: `mycompanydomain.app.box.com`.                               |
| `data-button-text`       | No       | Custom text to display on the chat button. Default: `Box AI`. This value is also used for the button's area label for accessibility. |
| `data-shared-link`       | No       | Optional shared link for hub access. If not provided, the chat loads only for users who are collaborators on the hub.                |

The following example shows a fully configured chat button with all available parameters:

```html theme={null}
<script 
  src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/embeddable-ai-chat-script/2.8.0/box_integrations_ai_chat_button.js" 
  data-hub-id="123456789" 
  data-custom-box-domain="mycompanydomain.app.box.com" 
  data-shared-link="abcdefghijklmnopqrst123" 
  data-button-text="Ask our HR chatbot">
</script>
```

### Chat widget

In **Chat widget** mode, the AI chat widget is embedded directly on page load. It is generated as an `iframe` and displays the full chat interface immediately.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Chat widget mode" />
</Frame>

#### Chat widget parameters

In **Chat widget** mode, the AI chat widget is embedded directly on the page using an `iframe`. You can customize the behavior by adding URL parameters to the iframe's `src` attribute:

| Parameter         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `hubId`           | The ID of the hub that powers the chatbot.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `sharedLink`      | The shared link hash for hub access. If not provided, the chat loads only for users who are collaborators on the hub.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `showCloseButton` | Whether to show the <Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed/#using-the-close-button">X (close) button</Link> in the chat interface. When set to `true`, the close button is displayed. When a user clicks this button, Box generates an event that is sent to the parent web application, enabling you to implement custom closing logic based on the user interaction. |

The following example shows a fully configured chat widget with all available parameters:

```html theme={null}
<iframe 
  src="https://yourcompanydomain.app.box.com/ai-chat?hubId=123456789&sharedLink=abcdefghijklmnop123&showCloseButton=false" 
  width="800" 
  height="550" 
  frameBorder="0" 
  <!-- Optionally replace * with your enterprise-specific domain (for example, mycompanydomain.app.box.com) -->  
  allow="local-network-access *; clipboard-read *; clipboard-write *"  
  allowfullscreen 
  webkitallowfullscreen 
  msallowfullscreen>
</iframe>
```

#### Using the close button

When embedding the Box AI chat directly with `iframe` (without using the provided script), you can enable a close button within the chat interface that communicates with your parent application through `postMessage`.

##### Enabling the close button

To display a close button (✕) in the corner of the iframe, add the `showCloseButton=true` query parameter to your `iframe` URL as follows:
`https://app.box.com/ai-chat?hubId=YOUR_HUB_ID&showCloseButton=true`

##### How it works

1. When `showCloseButton=true` is set, an X button appears in the corner of the chat iframe.
2. When a user clicks this button, the iframe sends a `postMessage` event to the parent window.
3. The event contains `event.data.type` set to `"BOX_AI_CHAT_CLOSE"`.
4. Your hosting application listens for this event and handles the closing logic.

##### Implementation example

```javascript theme={null}
window.addEventListener('message', (event) => {
    // Optional: validate origin is from Box for additional security
    // if (event.origin !== 'https://app.box.com') return;

    if (event.data && event.data.type === 'BOX_AI_CHAT_CLOSE') {
        closeChat();
    }
});
```

##### Event reference

| Property          | Value                 | Description                                                     |
| ----------------- | --------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `event.data.type` | `"BOX_AI_CHAT_CLOSE"` | Indicates the user clicked the close button in the chat iframe. |

## Expiring embed links

For files, another option is to call the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link>
and request an `expiring_embed_link` using the `fields` query parameter.

```curl theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345?fields=expiring_embed_link \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "etag": "1",
  "expiring_embed_link": {
    "token": {
      "access_token": "1!rFppcinUwwwDmB4G60nah7z...",
      "expires_in": 3646,
      "restricted_to": [
        {
          "object": {
            "etag": "1",
            "file_version": {
              "id": "34567",
              "sha1": "1b8cda4e52cb7b58b354d8da0068908ecfa4bd00",
              "type": "file_version"
            },
            "id": "12345",
            "name": "Image.png",
            "sequence_id": "1",
            "sha1": "1b8cda4e52cb7b58b354d8da0068908ecfa4bd00",
            "type": "file"
          },
          "scope": "base_preview"
        },
        ...
      ],
      "token_type": "bearer"
    },
    "url": "https://cloud.app.box.com/preview/expiring_embed/...."
  },
  "id": "12345",
  "type": "file"
}
```

The `url` attribute can be used in an `<iframe>` to embed an auto expiring Box
Embed interface.

```html theme={null}
<iframe
  src="YOUR-GENERATED-BOX-EMBED-LINK"
  width="{pixels}"
  height="{pixels}"
  frameborder="0"
  allowfullscreen
  webkitallowfullscreen
  msallowfullscreen
/>
```

### Parameters

Extra parameters can be added to this URL as well to customize the UI. To do so,
add the following parameters to the `url` as query parameters. The eventual URL
would look something like this.

```sh theme={null}
https://app.box.com/preview/expiring_embed/[HASH]?[parameterName]=true
```

|                   |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `showDownload`    | Shows the download button in the embedded header bar if the viewer has permissions to download the file. Document file types will also show a print button since print and download are governed by the same permissions. Defaults to `false`.                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `showAnnotations` | Enables users with permission Preview and above to annotate document and image previews. Also shows annotations that are already on the document. To learn more about the file types that annotations is available on as well as the types of annotations, you can refer to our Annotations page. Annotations are available today on web browsers only. On mobile browsers, users will be able to view annotations but not create new ones. |

## Cloud game

The cloud game is a widget created to prevent [clickjacking][cloud-game].
It's shown for embedded sites that aren’t partner integrations.
In cloud game, user must drag a cloud to the correct location before an
interaction is allowed. It makes clickjacking difficult, as the
position of the cloud and its destination are randomly generated.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Embed" />
</Frame>

`postMessage()` is used on the iframe to retrieve both the embed and the
`showCloudGame` status. If embedded, `document.hasStorageAccess()` shows
if Box has access to cookies. If yes and the user is logged in, the cloud
game is displayed.
If the `showCloudGame` status is `false`, user is navigated to the login
page.

## Custom logo

Paid Box customers have the option to remove the Box logo in the file Preview.
To do so, visit the **Admin Console**, **Enterprise Settings**, **Custom
Setup** and toggle the **Embed widget customization** off to hide the Box
logo.

## Limitations

Box Embed is not optimized for mobile browsers and should not be used in web
experiences designed for mobile devices. Many UI elements, like the **download**
and **print** options might not show in mobile browsers.

[logo]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044193633-Customize-Your-Account-s-Branding

[5]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels

[cloud-game]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043691034-How-Does-Box-Prevent-Clickjacking


# Best Practices
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-view/best-practices



## Rotate App Tokens

See our guide on <Link href="/guides/authentication/app-token/rollover">rotating App Tokens</Link>.

## Use Downscope Tokens

App Tokens are a set of two tokens (Primary and Secondary) that hold elevated
privileges over the content managed by your application. App Tokens can be used
by your application to upload, download, preview and modify any Box content.

We strongly recommend that you use a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscoped</Link> version of the
original App Token if you need to make the token available on the client side
for any reason. This is because of the elevated privileges granted to these
tokens, if you need. An example of when this would be needed is if you are using
the Box Preview UI Element.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create File Preview
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-view/create-preview



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Once a file is uploaded to an App Token application, it can be previewed
using two different methods:

* Direct embed: A standard HTML `<iframe>` component with a custom embed link.
* Customized previewer: A fully customized preview widget using Box <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements">UI Elements</Link>.

## Direct Embed (`iframe`)

The direct embed link provides limited options to customize the preview
experience in your application. Due to the light-weight nature of the method,
the API doesn't give you options to respond to client-side actions such as
scrolling in the case of documents, play/pause interactivity for videos,
rotating an image, etc.

There are two steps to create a direct `<iframe>` embed for Box View:

1. Generate an embed URL for the file
2. Add the embed URL to an `<iframe>`

### Generate an embed URL for the file

To create a public file preview URL for a file that was uploaded to the App
Token application, you may either use a direct SDK method or make the request
directly to the APIs.

<Note>
  When generating the embed URL directly from the APIs, use the
  <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">Get File Information endpoint</Link> and request
  `expiring_embed_link` via the `fields` parameter.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/FILE_ID?fields=expiring_embed_link \
      -H "authorization: Bearer [APP_TOKEN]"
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  String fileId = "12345678";
  Uri embedUri = await client.FilesManager.GetPreviewLinkAsync(id: fileId);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String fileID = "12345678";
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, fileID);
  URL embedLink = file.getPreviewLink();
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  file_id = '12345678'
  embed_url = client.file(file_id).get_embed_url()
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  const fileId = '12345678';
  client.files.getEmbedLink(fileId).then(embedURL => {
      // ...
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

Within the response object will be a public embed URL like the following:

```shell theme={null}
https://app.box.com/preview/expiring_embed/gvoct6FE!YT_X1LauQ8ulDTad96hTl9xLCRYJ
5iU6O61KxiduxFIgX9HSWMcCWf7zju1XkEsf6-Ul2qtKXeaFeKPT4SysQJQdxrc144KgTIBuoI3bWMf4
cfhp3jdLYrK5hnr6KMq5H6r-AW31AcFtDJi1lnT0M4b3bvvZUaE2RRJGGINMauvS6MAT2luae5PvbFSx
Ctqqx6XlN6QrqbhfJc0UeJF9qwMv3-O8q5fWn0qr8OTY4lkeYidtTs3Ux...
```

<Warning>
  For security reasons, the generated embed link will expire after 1 minute and
  should be immediately embedded in the app once generated.
</Warning>

### Add the embed URL to an `<iframe>`

Within the HTML of your application, create an `iframe` elements with the `src`
attribute set to generated embed URL.

```html theme={null}
<iframe src="https://app.box.com/preview/expiring_embed/gvoct6FE!ixgtCKQAziW
  9tHPm-jueq4cmS4GnL9RTJRcVEsK_3W8xcxtVo_v6gKpoXY45odgG1QrcjBVYZMrriUyGvcoSM
  SX8s-smpaFFYQik0R-PCKFtwvbv0lonid6ZfYNbuNFl2j9hOIqBccvHrdVor7i6WvOm6zELzTY
  4EWshcyYYBhDbJmYMrq61RtU_kvBe5P..."></iframe>
```

## Customized Previewer (UI Elements)

To leverage advanced preview customization and event handling capabilities, use
the Box <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">UI Preview Element</Link>.

To set up the Preview Element, start by installing the required components.

<Card href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation" title="Install Box Elements and Preview" />

The basic code will resemble the below when adding the JavaScript code to
display a new previewer.

```js theme={null}
var preview = new Box.Preview();
preview.show("FILE_ID", "ACCESS_TOKEN", {
    container: ".preview-container",
    showDownload: true
});
```

Replace the placeholders in the code sample with the following:

* `FILE_ID`: The ID of the file uploaded to the App Token application, which can be obtained from the object returned when uploading the file.
* `ACCESS_TOKEN`: The primary Access Token set up when configuring the application or a downscoped version of the token.

<Warning>
  Due to the elevated privileges of the primary access token it's highly
  recommended that you use a downscoped version of the token in the Javascript
  code. See
  <Link href="/guides/embed/box-view/best-practices#use-downscoped-tokens">best practices for downscoping</Link>.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# FAQ
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-view/faq



<AccordionGroup>
  <Accordion title="How does Box View work?">
    To get started with the New Box View, follow our guide
    <Link href="/guides/embed/box-view/setup">here</Link>.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Which Preview method, Embed Link or UI Element, is right for me?">
    Please follow our guide <Link href="/guides/embed/box-view/create-preview">here</Link> to choose
    the best method for your use case.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="What file types are supported by Box View?">
    Supported [file types][file_types] can be found in our support article.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Which file types are not supported on mobile with Box View?">
    * All documents supported on web preview are supported on mobile browsers (Safari for iOS and Chrome).
    * Full annotations support is available for mobile via the <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">Content Preview UI Element</Link>, which leverages Box Annotations.
    * Mobile SDKs (for iOS and Android) do not support 360 Videos/Images, and 3D.
    * Mobile SDKs (for iOS and Android) do not support annotations (both read and write).
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="What are annotations?">
    <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/annotations">Annotations</Link> are markup notes on a file rendering and allow
    developers to provide collaboration capabilities right from within the
    embedded Box preview in their application.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="After uploading a file, how can my application get file representations?">
    <Link href="/guides/representations">Box Representations</Link> let you get the digital assets
    created for files stored in Box. You can use these endpoints to get PDF, text,
    image, and thumbnail representations for a file.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="Can I use Box View with storage providers other than Box?">
    Currently, Box View is only compatible with files that are stored in Box. You
    can delete the files from Box once you no longer need to display them. However,
    you would need to re-upload them again in order to generate the preview.
    For this reason, we recommend keeping the files stored in Box for at least as
    long as you want to be able to display them.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="How do I fix the CORS error Box gives me when I embed a Box UI Element?">
    To fix the <Link href="/guides/security/cors">CORS</Link> error, add each domain you wish to allow to make CORS
    requests via the application's configuration page. Wildcards are supported for
    the subdomain (`https://*.domain.com`). See the
    <Link href="/guides/security/cors">CORS guide</Link> for more information.
  </Accordion>

  <Accordion title="How can I replace the Box logo that shows up on preview?">
    See this guide for information on customizing the logo within a
    <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/logo">Preview UI Element</Link>.
  </Accordion>
</AccordionGroup>

[file_types]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043695794-Viewing-Different-File-Types-Supported-in-Box-Content-Preview

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box View
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-view/index



Box View is an embeddable service that allows developers to upload, convert,
and display files in their web and mobile apps via a high-fidelity,
interactive file viewer.

## Features

### View any file

Embed documents, images, videos, 360-degree videos and images, 3D models, and
dozens of other files in any web or mobile app using a standard `<iframe>`.

### Ease of use

Upload files to Box via a secure API and receive an embeddable HTML5
snippet to place into your application's UI.

### Collaboration in context

Allow end users to collaborate and mark up documents, presentations, and images
with annotations. Users can highlight text or comment on specific areas of a
file rendering.

## How does Box View work

1. Upload files into Box using our <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">secure upload API</Link>. All content is stored in Box's secure cloud storage infrastructure with virus scanning and 256 bit encryption.
2. Upon upload, files are converted into HTML5 compatible assets, which are designed to render crisply and responsively.
3. An embeddable URL is requested to access the file rendering. Previews can be embedded directly in your application using an `<iframe>` URL.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box View flow" />
</Frame>

## Customize your experience with Box Content Preview

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">Box Content Preview</Link> may be used to create
customized client-side experiences with the converted files.

## Use cases

* Convert and display PDF resumes in a recruiter application
* Convert and display course materials, including documents, videos, and PDFs in a student portal
* Convert and display HD video in a media room
* Convert and display sales collateral, including documents, videos, PDFs, and 3D models in a field sales enablement application

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Setup
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-view/setup



Before uploading files to Box and previewing them using Box View, a Box
application must be created and an access token be generated for that
application.

## Create App Token App

Box View uses an authentication mechanism called **App Token Auth** to store
files directly within the account of the application as opposed to a specific
Box user. This permits the previewing of files without having to associate the
content with a user.

The first step is to create the application and authorize it through your admin
to begin making API requests to Box.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/app-token/app-token-setup" title="Setup and authorize App Token app" />

<Warning>
  App Token apps need to be authorized by the Box admin, otherwise you will
  receive permission errors when making API requests. To go through app
  authorization, follow <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">this guide</Link>.
</Warning>

## Generate Access Token

With your application loaded, click on the **Configuration** option in the left
navigation menu. The configuration page for your application should look like
the following.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

Click on the **Generate Key** button within the **Primary Access Token**
section.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  If you don't have 2FA setup for your developer account, you will be prompted
  to set up 2FA before you can successfully generate App Tokens. Follow the
  prompt to set up 2FA.
</Note>

Choose the expiration time for your token, either 30 days, 60 days, or set the
token to never expire.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Image" />
</Frame>

Once the app token is generated, copy and store it securely. It won’t be
displayed once the page is reloaded since Box stores a one-way hash of the
tokens instead of the actual token and cannot retrieve the original token again.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Upload Files
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/box-view/upload-file



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To generate a preview embed link for a file, the file must be uploaded to
Box. For most file types, conversion is triggered automatically upon upload.
However, for video and 3D files, it is triggered upon first preview. No explicit
action is required by the user to begin conversion. In either case, conversion
is triggered only once per file, and the generated assets are available for as
long as the original file is stored in Box.

## Uploading a File

To upload a file using the <Link href="/sdks-and-tools">Box SDKs</Link> or directly with
the APIs, you need to use the client ID and App Token that are generated
during <Link href="/guides/embed/box-view/setup">application setup</Link> to authenticate your
application.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/app-token" title="Authenticate your application" />

Once an authenticated client has been created, it may be used to upload files
directly to the App Token application for conversion.

<Card href="/guides/uploads/direct/file" title="Upload files to Box" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Embed Box
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/index



Box supports a few different ways to embed files and folders straight into your
front-end application.


# Customize Access
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/access



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

## Motivation

Box UI Elements are initialized on the client and make API calls directly to
Box. Thus, a valid access token must live on the client because all Box API
requests need to be authenticated.

<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Token Exchange</Link> is a mechanism to
exchange a "parent token" (a token for your managed or app user, service
account, or application) to a "child token" which is scoped down to the minimum
set of required permissions so it can be securely sent down to the client
without elevating client privileges.

The Box UI Elements are designed to adapt to the permissions on the token, so an
additional advantage of using Token Exchange with them is that front-end
developers won't have to manually toggle UI controls on/off as long as the
correct set of permissions are present on the client token. This behavior mimics
the experience in the Box application as well. For example, if a user with
"Preview only" permissions to a folder does not see the "Download" button
present in the UI.

This blueprint covers how to use Token Exchange with UI Elements in your
application and example use cases.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Downscope overview" />
</Frame>

* **Making API calls from client more secure:** As a general security practice, we recommend generating and sending downscoped tokens per every action performed by the user to limit exposure on the client. For example, even if a user should have preview and share access to a file, instead of sending the user token to the client which would give them complete user-level access, we suggest downscoping the token using Token Exchange and sending them a "preview only" token when they wish to preview a file and a "share" token when they want to share a file.
* **Creating a custom permissions model:** If you are building an application using UI Elements and the default Box access levels don't fit your permission model, you can start out with a fully scoped token for all your users and trim them down using Token Exchange on the fly to map to your custom permissions model.
* **Using Box services transactionally (no Box user accounts):** If you are not creating users in Box and are using Box services transactionally, you won't have access to user level tokens. In such cases, you can use Token Exchange to scope down the Service Account token to an appropriately scoped token.
* **Creating a user only to give them access to another user's content:** If you need to provide an end user "one time" access to another app/managed user's content, Token Exchange can be used to downscope the app/managed user token to the specific permissions and file/folders you want to give the end user access to, and pass it down to UI Elements to give them access to that content. For example, using Token Exchange, you can downscope a user token to have read-only access to content and pass it down to another user.

## Implementation

The solution for all of the above is using Token Exchange to exchange a parent
token for a downscoped token and initializing the UI Element using that token.

Token Exchange takes in the "parent token", "list of scopes" and optionally a
file/folder ID as the input arguments, and returns a token that is scoped down
to those exact set of scopes and the respective file/folder ID, if present in
the input arguments.

<Info>
  **Dedicated scopes designed for UI Elements**

  We have designed a set of scopes that work seamlessly with the UI Elements.
  While token exchange works with all Box scopes, we recommend using these
  scopes along with UI Elements since they include the exact set of permissions
  required for base functionality as well as incremental permissions for added
  functionality.
</Info>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Downscope overview" />
</Frame>

## Developer Flow

Now that you understand the different scopes, let's walk through a
scenario for using Token Exchange with a UI Element.

**Scenario:** Provide a user with the ability to browse a folder tree using the
Box Content Explorer UI Element and allow them to preview and download files.
Sharing should be turned off.

**Steps:**

* Create a Managed User, App User or Service Account depending on your use case. You will use this user or application's token as the parent token for Token Exchange. To generate the user token follow:
  * Authentication with OAuth guide if you would like to create a Managed User
  * Authentication with JWT guide if you would like to create an App User or Service Account
* Add the user you created above as a Collaborator to the content using the Create Collaborator API as shown below. This step gives the user access to the content if not already under the user's account. If the file/folder was created under this user's account, then the user by default has "Owner" access to the folder so you can skip the collaboration step.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations \
    -H "authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]" \
    -d '{"item": { "id": "123456", "type": "folder"}, "accessible_by": { "id": "USER_ID", "type": "user" }, "role": "editor"}' \
    -X POST
```

<Info>
  **Access Levels in Box**

  There are [7 different access levels][accesslevels] that a Box user can be
  collaborated as on a file/folder in Box. If the file/folder was created under
  this user's account, then the user has "Owner" access to the folder by
  default so you can skip the collaboration step.
</Info>

* Use the Token Exchange API to exchange the parent token for a child token that contains the base scope for Content Explorer (`base_explorer`), `item_download` and `item_preview` scopes enabled for the specific `folder_id` `123456`.  We strongly recommend performing this step on the application server.

### Request

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/oauth2/token \
  -d 'subject_token=ACCESS_TOKEN' \
  -d 'subject_token_type=urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token' \
  -d 'scope=item_upload item_preview base_explorer' \
  -d 'resource=https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/123456' \
  -d 'grant_type=urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange' \
  -X POST
```

### Response

```json theme={null}
{
  "access_token": "CHILD_TOKEN",
  "expires_in": 4247,
  "token_type": "bearer",
  "restricted_to": [
    {
      "scope": "base_explorer",
      "object": {
        "type": "folder",
        "id": "123456",
        "sequence_id": "0",
        "etag": "0",
        "name": "FOLDER_NAME"
      }
    },
    {
      "scope": "item_download",
      "object": {
        "type": "folder",
        "id": "123456",
        "sequence_id": "0",
        "etag": "0",
        "name": "FOLDER_NAME"
      }
    },
    {
      "scope": "item_preview",
      "object": {
        "type": "folder",
        "id": "123456",
        "sequence_id": "0",
        "etag": "0",
        "name": "FOLDER_NAME"
      }
    }
  ],
  "issued_token_type": "urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token"
}
```

The `CHILD_TOKEN` obtained above is scoped down to only include download and
preview permissions for folder id `123456` and its children.

Use this `CHILD_TOKEN` in your Content Explorer UI Element. To see a quick demo,
you can use our [Content Explorer UI Element CodePen
Sample](https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/wdWWdN) and replace the access token
and folder id values in the JS Tab.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Downscope overview" />
</Frame>

Click "Run". You should see the Content Explorer initialized at the folder you
specified. Also, notice that your Content Explorer no longer shows the "Share"
button as it would have with the parent (user) token.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Downscope overview" />
</Frame>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Downscope overview" />
</Frame>

## When NOT to use Token Exchange

* **Does not replace Users or Groups in Box:** We recommend not using Token Exchange as a replacement to creating users in Box. One way to determine whether you should create Box users, is by doing an assessment to determine if it makes logical sense for every end user of your application to have a copy of their own content. Here are some benefits of maintaining user level accounts in Box, which you wouldn't get by using Token Exchange alone.
  * **Content isolation/security:** It's better to have user level accounts since in the case of the parent token accidentally leaking, you would only be compromising the content of a single user vs. all users of your enterprise.
  * **Performance:** Creating users/groups in Box is also useful as your application does not have to determine the appropriate permissions at the time of accessing content since that is likely to affect the performance of your application.
  * **User level tracking/auditing:** Several Box features such as auditing, access stats, retention, etc. leverage Box's user model. If it is essential for you to use those features for you then you would have to create user-level accounts.
* **Does not replace Collaborations in Box:** Collaborations is a more standard and easier to scale way to provide Box users with access to content. Also, managing content access through collaborations in Box requires your application to manage lesser code/data on which user should have access to what content. If you are using Token Exchange as a replacement to Collaborations, you will need to keep a mapping of every user -> every file and folder that they should have access to and that could get out of control pretty quickly.
* **Caching the downscoped tokens:** If performance is critical to your application, you should pre-cache downscoped tokens on the server side. If you are pre-caching tokens, we recommend implementing retries as the tokens expire within 1 hour.

<Info>
  **Token Lifespan**

  The lifespan of parent and child tokens are not mutually dependent, for
  example when generating a child token doesn't render the parent token
  inactive. Similarly, generating more child tokens doesn't impact the previous
  child tokens in any way.
</Info>

## Example Scenarios

### Scenario #1: More secure client API calls

An equity-investment firm is building out a partner/investor portal to broadcast
information (view-only access) to investors published by the employees.

They create app users for each of their external customers and employees have
provisioned Box accounts which they used to publish content. All app users are
collaborated on published content as Viewer Uploader, so they can both preview
as well as upload content in their account as needed. Once an investor/partner
signs in they are taken to a portal where they can view as well as upload
information.

Since both preview and upload require the API calls to be made via the client,
instead of passing down a “Viewer Uploader” token, the application uses Token
Exchange to downscope the token appropriately based on the action that the user
is trying to perform. This ensures that if the token is compromised, data
leakage is minimized thereby improving the overall security posture of the
application.

### Scenario #2: A custom permissions model

A large fin-tech company is building a secure client vault to manage investments
for their clients. They are also using Box UI Elements to build out the content
management front end of their application.

They create app users as usual for each one of their clients and app advisors.
When they wanted to share content across app users, they collaborate the app
user(s) as "Editor" role (Box's role). This guarantees that every app user had
full access to every other user’s content.

To enable a user to access content via the UI Elements, the application does not
provide the app user token to the client directly as the app user may be
collaborated as an "Editor" into other user's content (highly privileged).
Instead, it uses Token Exchange using the app user token to generate a
downscoped token that limits:

* the scope of what the token can be used for (view, upload, download, browse, share, etc.) and/or
* the specific files that the user should have access to

### Scenario #3: Process Flows

A not-for-profit union bank is developing a loan processing application using
Box's secure content layer to facilitate the sharing of documents between loan
applicants and internal users (loan processors and underwriters). The basic
process is as follows:

* When customers apply for a loan they must submit documents through a custom-built web portal as a part of the process (proof of income, identity etc.)
* Box is used as the intermediary for sending/receiving docs
* Internal employees need to upload files for customers
* Internal employees can access documents through a custom web portal as well as Box Web app

The application developers used Token Exchange along with UI Elements to build
out a loan process management solution, where the application server downscopes
the loan application's app user token based on which operations the client needs
to perform, and passes it down to the clients (customers and loan officers).
Using these downscoped tokens, the UI Elements are able to show the right
controls/buttons to indicate to the user which actions they can perform
(example: upload button is grayed out from the content explorer UI Elements if
the downscoped token passed doesn't contain upload permissions).

### Scenario #4: Transactional Flows

A Learning Management System provider is using Box Platform to power preview in
their application. All users and associated permissions are managed by the
application outside Box. From Box's perspective, all API calls made by the
application are on its own behalf (any not any individual user), and all content
stored and previewed belongs to the application and not to a single user. In
this case, the application developer is using a sliver of Box's overall
capabilities (for example Preview) transactionally and none of the other secure
content sharing and collaboration capabilities. In fact, this is a key use case
for many customers.

Consider a straightforward use case of the application - the end user needs to
upload a file and then preview it in the application itself. To do this the
application is using the Content Uploader and Content Preview UI Elements,
respectively. Since both preview + upload are bandwidth heavy operations, the
application should not proxy the traffic and instead allow the client to perform
these operations directly against Box. To make calls against Box, all UI
Elements require a valid access token to be available on the client. But the
application should never pass down the privileged "service account" token to the
client which would give the client access to all content ever uploaded through
the application. Instead, the application uses Token Exchange to down-scope it's
service account token to an upload-only token to allow the client to upload
files via the Upload UI Element, and a separate preview-only token to let the
client preview via the Preview UI Element.

## Anti-patterns

These anti-patterns have been included here to help you identify patterns that
we do not recommend as they will either make your app development more
challenging, your application less secure or performing or both. If you find
yourself implementing any of these patterns on your app, please reach out to us
via Box support so we can help you out.

### Passing privileged tokens to client

Please NEVER DO THIS. This can potentially compromise the security of content in
your Box enterprise. Always use token exchange to provide end users with the
exact set of permissions.

### Proxying/filtering API responses

If you are proxying/filtering API responses from Box only to limit data/content
exposure to the client, you should try to see if using Token Exchange allows you
to limit the exposure. This is especially true for high-bandwidth operations
such as preview, download, and upload which are bandwidth intensive and so we
recommend that the client performs those operations directly with Box.

[accesslevels]: https://community.box.com/t5/How-To-Guides-for-Sharing/What-Are-The-Different-Access-Levels-For-Collaborators/ta-p/144

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Annotations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/annotations



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Box Annotations allow developers to provide collaboration capabilities right
from within the embedded Box preview in their application. Box Annotations fit a
wide range of use cases and can be used to draw the previewer's attention and/or
provide feedback on specific parts of a document or images.

<Card href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview" title="Learn more about Content Preview" />

Box Content Preview currently supports four annotation types - highlight
comment, highlight only, draw, and point annotation. Box Annotations are today
supported on documents and image previews only. You can find the full list of
supported file types for Box Content Preview [here][filetypes].

## Browser support

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/browser">Learn more about browser support</Link> for Box UI
element.

## Usage

Box Annotations can be used by pulling from our [NPM
package](https://www.npmjs.com/package/box-annotations).

## Initialization

```js theme={null}
/* global BoxAnnotations */
const boxAnnotations = new BoxAnnotations();
const annotatorConf = boxAnnotations.determineAnnotator(
    options,
    disabledAnnotationTypes
);

// Construct and init annotator
const annotator = new annotatorConf.CONSTRUCTOR(options);

annotator.init(scale);
```

Where `disabledAnnotationTypes` is a string of valid annotation types to
disable. See below for
more details on viewer specific annotation configurations.

## Authentication

The UI Elements are designed in an authentication agnostic way so whether
you are using UI Elements for users who have Box accounts (Managed Users) or
non-Box accounts (App Users), UI Elements should work out of the box. The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a "token" to be passed in for
authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth
and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

If your application requires the end user to only be able to access a subset of
the Annotations functionality, you can use
<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link> to appropriately
downscope your Access Token to a resulting token that has the desired set of
permissions, and can thus, be securely passed to the end user client
initializing Annotations.

Below are a set of new Annotation-specific scopes to go alongside Downscoping.
These allow developers to enable/disable functionality on Box
Annotations by configuring the appropriate scopes on the downscoped token. To
learn more, see <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/scopes">Dedicated scopes for the Box UI
Elements</Link>.

## Parameters & Options

```js theme={null}
const annotator = new annotatorConf.CONSTRUCTOR({
    annotator,
    apiHost,
    token,
    container,
    file: {
        id,
        file_version: {
            id
        },
        permissions
    },
    isMobile,
    hasTouch,
    locale,
    modeButtons: {
        // Annotation mode buttons, i.e. point, draw, etc
        point: {
          // Accessibilty message for the point annotation mode button
          title: "Point annotation mode",
          // CSS selector for the point annotation mode button
          selector: ".bp-btn-annotate-point"
        }
    }
});
```

| Parameter              | Default | Description                                                                                            |
| ---------------------- | ------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `annotator`            |         | Viewer-specific annotator configurations object                                                        |
| `apiHost`              |         | Host for Box API calls for example `https://app.box.com/api`                                           |
| `fileId`               |         | Box file ID                                                                                            |
| `token`                |         | A string auth token, see below for details on how to generate annotator tokens with appropriate scopes |
| `container`            |         | DOM node or selector where Preview should be placed                                                    |
| `file`                 |         | File metadata object                                                                                   |
| `file.id`              |         | String `Box_File` id                                                                                   |
| `file.file_version.id` |         | String `Box_File_Version` id                                                                           |
| `file.permissions`     |         | File permissions object, see below on how to scope permissions                                         |

| Option        | Default | Description                                                                                                                         |
| ------------- | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `modeButtons` |         | Object containing a CSS selector and accessibility message for the annotation mode button, see parameters and options example above |
| `isMobile`    | `false` | Whether the user's browser is on a mobile device                                                                                    |
| `hasTouch`    | `false` | Whether the mobile browser has touch enabled                                                                                        |
| `locale`      | `en-US` | Shared link URL                                                                                                                     |

### Base Scope

| Scope Name     | What permissions does it grant?                                                           |
| -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `base_preview` | Allows preview access to a file or files in a folder based on user/file/token permissions |

### Feature Scopes

| Scope Name             | What permissions does it grant?                                             |
| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `item_download`        | Allows files/folders contents to be downloaded                              |
| `annotation_view_self` | Allows user to view their own annotations                                   |
| `annotation_view_all`  | Allows user to view all annotations on the file                             |
| `annotation_edit`      | Allows user to edit their own annotations (includes `annotation_view_self`) |

### Sample Scenarios

| Scenario                                                                                                       | Scope Combinations                                         |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| User wants basic preview functionality + ability to edit own annotations                                       | `base_preview` + `annotation_edit`                         |
| User wants basic preview functionality + ability to edit own annotations + ability to select text on documents | `base_preview` + `annotation_edit` + `item_download`       |
| User wants basic preview functionality + ability to view all annotations + ability to edit own annotations     | `base_preview` + `annotation_view_all` + `annotation_edit` |
| User wants basic preview functionality + ability to view only their own annotations                            | `base_preview` + `annotation_view_self`                    |

## Enabling/Disabling Annotations and Annotation Types

Annotation types can be selectively turned off through preview options. Viewer
options override global `showAnnotations` value, for that viewer. See <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">Box
Content Preview</Link> for more details on how to
set up the Preview instances that are used with Box Annotations here.

```js theme={null}
preview.show(..., {
    showAnnotations: Boolean
});
```

Combined with the following:

```js theme={null}
preview.show(..., {
    viewers: {
        VIEWER_NAME: {
            annotations: {
                enabled: Boolean,
                enabledTypes: String[] | null
            }
        }
    }
});
```

This turns the annotations on if `enabled` is set to `true`. This respects the
`showAnnotations` value if empty. The `enabledTypes` value is a list of
annotation types to enable for this viewer. If empty, will respect default types
for that annotator.

### Example

Enable all annotations, turn off for Image Viewers, and enable only point
annotations on Document viewer:

```js theme={null}
preview.show(fileId, token, {
    showAnnotations: true,
    viewers: {
        Image: {
            annotations: {
                enabled: false
            }
        },
        Document: {
            annotations: {
                enabled: true,
                enabledTypes: ["point"]
            }
        }
    }
});
```

## Annotators

The name of an annotator can be one of the following `DocAnnotator` or
`ImageAnnotator`. Call `boxAnnotations.getAnnotators()` to get the list of
possible annotators.

## Additional Methods

* `annotator.init()` initializes the annotator.
* `annotator.isModeAnnotatable(/* String */ type)` returns whether or not the current annotation mode is enabled for the current viewer/annotator.
* `annotator.showModeAnnotateButton(/* String */ currentMode)` shows the annotate button for the specified annotation mode.
* `annotator.getAnnotateButton(/* String */ annotatorSelector)` gets the annotation button element.
* `annotator.showAnnotations()` fetches and shows saved annotations.
* `annotator.hideAnnotations()` hides annotations.
* `annotator.hideAnnotationsOnPage(/* number */ pageNum)` hides annotations on a specified page.
* `annotator.setScale()` sets the zoom scale.
* `annotator.toggleAnnotationHandler()` toggles annotation modes on and off. When an annotation mode is on, annotation threads will be created at that location.
* `annotator.disableAnnotationMode(/* String */ mode, /* HTMLElement */ buttonEl)` disables the specified annotation mode.
* `annotator.enableAnnotationMode(/* String */ mode, /* HTMLElement */ buttonEl)` enables the specified annotation mode.
* `annotator.getAnnotatedEl(/* HTMLElement */ containerEl)` determines the annotated element in the viewer.
* `annotator.createAnnotationThread(/* Annotation[] */ annotations, /* Object */ location, /* String */ [annotation type])` creates the proper type of annotation thread, adds it to the in-memory map, and returns it.

## Events

Events can be bound to the annotator object with `addListener` and removed with
`removeListener`. Event listeners should be bound before `showAnnotations()` is
called, otherwise events can be missed.

```js theme={null}
/* global BoxAnnotations */
const boxAnnotations = new BoxAnnotations();
const annotatorConf = boxAnnotations.determineAnnotator(
    options,
    disabledAnnotationTypes
);

// Construct and init annotator
const annotator = new annotatorConf.CONSTRUCTOR(options);
var listener = value => {
    // Do something with value
};

// Attach listener before calling show otherwise events can be missed
annotator.addListener(EVENTNAME, listener);

// Initialize a annotator
annotator.showAnnotations();

// Remove listener when appropriate
annotator.removeListener(EVENTNAME, listener);
```

`EVENTNAME` can be one of the following

* `annotator` event will be triggered when we have the annotator instance first available. Box Annotations trigger this event before `load` so that clients can attach their listeners before the `load` event is triggered from Box Content Preview.
* `annotationsfetched` event will be triggered when annotations have been fetched from the Box API.
* `annotationmodeenter` event will be triggered on when an annotation mode is entered. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  // Annotation mode that was entered
  mode: 'point',
  // Optional CSS selector for the container's header
  headerSelector: '.bp-preview-header',
}
```

`annotationmodeexit` event will be triggered on when an annotation mode is exited.
The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  // Annotation mode that was exited
  mode: 'point',
  // Optional CSS selector for the container's header
  headerSelector: '.bp-preview-header',
}
```

`annotationerror` event will be triggered when an annotation error has occurred.
The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  message: 'message', // Error message to show
}
```

`annotationpending` event will be triggered when an annotation thread was created
but has not yet been saved on the server. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationthreadsaved` event will be triggered when an annotation thread was saved
on the server. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationthreaddeleted` event will be triggered when an annotation thread was
deleted on the server. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationsaved` event will be triggered when an annotation is added and saved to
an existing annotation thread on the server. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationdeleted` event will be triggered when an annotation is deleted from an
existing thread on the server. The entire annotation thread is not deleted. The
event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationcanceled` event will be triggered when an annotation is canceled from
posting on either a new or existing thread. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationdeleteerror` event will be triggered when an error occurs while deleting
an annotation on either a new or existing thread. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotationcreateerror` event will be triggered when an error occurs while posting
an annotation on either a new or existing thread. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

`annotatorevent` Each annotator will trigger its own sets of events. For example,
the Image Annotator will trigger `rotate` or `resize`, etc. while other annotator
may trigger another set of events. The Annotator wrapper will also re-emit events
at the Preview level in Box Content Preview, with event data containing:

```js theme={null}
{
  event: EVENTNAME,             // Event name
  data: DATA,                   // Event data object
  annotatorName: ANNOTATORNAME, // Name of the annotator
  fileVersionId: fileVersionId  // The file version id
  fileId: fileId                // The file id
}
```

### Example event usage

```js theme={null}
preview.addListener("annotator", viewer => {
    annotator.addListener("annotationsfetched", () => {
        // Do something when annotations are fetched on a preview
    });
});

// Event listeners can be attached to viewers
preview.addListener("load", data => {
    var viewer = data.viewer;
    viewer.addListener("annotationsfetched", () => {
        // Do something when annotations are fetched on a preview
    });
});

// Event listeners can be attached to annotators
preview.addListener("load", data => {
    var annotator = data.viewer.annotator;
    annotator.addListener("annotationsfetched", () => {
        // Do something when annotations are fetched on a preview
    });
});

preview.addListener("annotatorevent", data => {
    if (data.event === "annotationsfetched") {
        // Do something when annotations are fetched on a preview
    } else if (data.event === "annotationerror") {
        // Do something different when an annotation error has occurred
    } else {
    }
});

preview.addListener("annotatorevent", data => {
    if (data.viewerName === "Image") {
        if (data.event === "annotationsfetched") {
            // Do something when annotations are fetched on an image preview
        }
    } else if (data.viewerName === "MultiImage") {
        if (data.event === "annotationsfetched") {
            // Do something different when annotations are fetched on a multi-page image
        }
    } else {
    }
});

preview.addListener("annotationsfetched", data => {
    if (data.viewerName === "Image") {
        // Do something when annotations are fetched on an image preview
    } else if (data.viewerName === "MultiImage") {
        // Do something different when annotations are fetched on a multi-page image
    } else {
    }
});
```

## Annotation Thread

### Thread Methods

The following methods are available for the annotation threads.

| Method Name        | Explanation                                     | Method Parameters                                                 |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `createDialog`     | Creates the dialog for the thread               |                                                                   |
| `show`             | Shows the annotation indicator                  |                                                                   |
| `hide`             | Hides the annotation indicator                  |                                                                   |
| `reset`            | Resets thread state to 'inactive'               |                                                                   |
| `showDialog`       | Shows the appropriate dialog for this thread    |                                                                   |
| `hideDialog`       | Hides the appropriate indicator for this thread |                                                                   |
| `saveAnnotation`   | Saves an annotation locally and on the server   |  annotation type,  text of annotation to save                     |
| `deleteAnnotation` | Deletes an annotation                           |  annotation ID,  whether or not to delete on server, default true |

### Thread Events

All annotation threads trigger the following events. The event data will contain:

```js theme={null}
{
  data: {
    type: 'point', // Annotation type
    threadID: '123abc',
    userId: '456def',
    threadNumber: '1' // Thread number from Annotations API
  }
}
```

| Event Name                | Explanation                                                                                                          |
| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `annotationpending`       | An annotation thread was created but has not yet been saved on the server.                                           |
| `annotationthreadsaved`   | An annotation thread was saved on the server.                                                                        |
| `annotationthreaddeleted` | An annotation thread was deleted on the server.                                                                      |
| `annotationsaved`         | An annotation thread was added and saved to an existing annotation thread on the server                              |
| `annotationdeleted`       | An annotation thread was deleted from an existing thread on the server. The entire annotation thread is not deleted. |
| `annotationcanceled`      | An annotation thread was canceled from posting on either a new or existing thread.                                   |
| `annotationdeleteerror`   | An error occurs while deleting an annotation on either a new or existing thread.                                     |
| `annotationcreateerror`   | An error occurs while posting an annotation on either a new or existing thread.                                      |

See the **Events** section above for example event usage.

## Annotation Dialog

### Dialog Methods

The following methods are available for the annotation dialog.

| Method Name        | Explanation                               | Method Parameters        |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------- | ------------------------ |
| `show`             | Positions and shows the dialog            |                          |
| `hide`             | Hides the dialog                          |                          |
| `hideMobileDialog` | Hides and resets the shared mobile dialog |                          |
| `addAnnotation`    | Adds an annotation to the dialog          |  annotation to add       |
| `removeAnnotation` | Removes an annotation from the dialog     |  annotation ID           |
| `postAnnotation`   | Posts an annotation in the dialog         |  annotation text to post |
| `position`         | Positions the dialog                      |                          |

## Supported Annotation Types

Point annotations are supported on both document and image formats. Highlight
comment, highlight only, and draw annotations are only supported on document
formats.

Supported document file extensions: `pdf`, `doc`, `docx`, `ppt`, `pptx`, `xlsx`,
`xls`, `xlsm`.

Supported image file extensions: `ai`, `bmp`, `dcm`, `eps`, `gif`, `idml`,
`indd`, `indt`, `inx``png`, `ps`, `psd`, `svs`, `tga`, `tif`, `tiff`.

[filetypes]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043695794-Viewing-Different-File-Types-Supported-in-Box-Content-Preview

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Browser Support
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/browser



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Box UI elements are supported in the following browsers.

* Chrome, Firefox, Safari, and Edge (latest 2 versions)
* Mobile Chrome and Safari

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box Edit Custom Domains
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/custom-domains



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

In order to integrate a third party web application with Box Tools, you will
need to explicitly add your application's URL. On Windows, this is achieved by
adding a registry key. On MacOS, you will need to run few terminal commands to
add and remove domains.

<Info>
  Adding domains to a safelist was added in **Box Tools version 4.5.0**.
</Info>

## Safelisting on Windows

Before starting the domain safelisting installation, please download the
required scripts from the provided `.rar`
[here](https://cloud.box.com/s/kvc9cysgq1y2yldpvciwlpt7093ho78l).

### Per User Installation

Open `Add_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg` in a text editor.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

<Info>
  Additional entries can be added on a new line.
</Info>

Close the file (save changes), open a command prompt with admin privileges, and
navigate to the .reg file and type the following command.

```sh theme={null}
reg import "Add_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg"
```

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

### Per Machine Installation

Open the following file in a text editor:

* `x64`: `Per Machine\64 bit\Add_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg`
* `x86`: `Per Machine\32 bit\Add_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg`

Replace the placeholder domain with the domain you would like allow.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

<Info>
  Additional entries may be added on a new line.
</Info>

Close the file (save changes), open a  command prompt with admin privileges, and
navigate the .reg file and type the following command:

```sh theme={null}
reg import "Add_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg"
```

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

Restart the Windows service: **Box Local Com Service** (`Box Edit.exe`) using
one of the following methods.

#### Via the command prompt

In a command prompt, enter:

* `net stop "Box Local Com Service"`
* `net start "Box Local Com Service"`

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

#### Via the UI

Press `Windows + R` and type `services.msc`.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

Restart `Box Edit.exe` by finding `Box Edit` in the system tray.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

Right click and select **Quit**.

Open `%programfiles%\Box\Box Edit` and run `Box Edit.exe`.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tools" />
</Frame>

### Removing

* Run `Remove_ALL_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg` to remove all domains at once
* Run `Remove_OpenWith_WhiteListed_Domain.reg` to remove specific domains. Use the instructions above to add domains to this .reg, which will remove domains.

## Safelisting on MacOS

### Steps

Download the bash script
[here](https://cloud.box.com/s/z5qhc7rts6mzrhzfx6cpxeb5ed4ve5u6).

Open the Terminal, go to the folder where the bash script was downloaded, and
add the right permissions by running this command:

```sh theme={null}
chmod u+rx OpenWith.sh
```

To **add** domains, run the following command in a terminal:

```sh theme={null}
./OpenWith.sh -a domain1 domain2 ...
```

To **remove** domains, run the following command in a terminal:

```sh theme={null}
./OpenWith.sh -r domain1 domain2 ...
```

To **clear all** domains, run the following command in a
terminal:

```sh theme={null}
./OpenWith.sh -c
```

To **list** all domains, run the following command in a terminal:

```sh theme={null}
./OpenWith.sh -l
```

### Notes

* When safelisting domains ensure you are entering the domains without the HTTP protocol (for example without `https://`) or any trailing path like `yourdomain.com/page/3`.
* All requests most come from a secure origin via HTTPS.
* Safelisting subdomains and ports is possible as the wildcard `*` is supported. For example, all subdomains could be safelisted by adding `*.yourdomain.com` to your list.

## Uninstalling

When Box Tools is uninstalled, all domains will be removed.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Explorer
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box Content Explorer UI Element allows developers to embed a folder view of
content stored on Box in their desktop or mobile web application. The library
fetches information about a specified folder through the Box API and then
renders the content in a folder view, similar to the main Box web application.
Users can then navigate through the folder hierarchy and perform file operations
like rename, delete, and share.

Content Explorer comes with a <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer-metadata-v2">metadata view</Link> that uses
metadata query to find files and folders based
on their metadata. The data is then displayed in the embedded view.

## Installation

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Learn how to install</Link> Box UI elements
either through NPM or the Box CDN.

## Authentication

The UI Elements are designed in an authentication agnostic way so whether
you are using UI Elements for users who have Box accounts (Managed Users) or
non-Box accounts (App Users), UI Elements should work out of the box. The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a "token" to be passed in for
authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth
and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

## Sample HTML

```html theme={null}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
    <head>
        <meta charset="utf-8" />
        <title>Box Content Explorer Demo</title>

        <!-- Latest version of the explorer css for your locale -->
        <link
            rel="stylesheet"
            href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/explorer.css" />
    </head>
    <body>
        <div class="container" style="height:600px"></div>
        <!-- Latest version of the explorer js for your locale -->
        <script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/explorer.js"></script>
        <script>
            var folderId = "123";
            var accessToken = "abc";
            var contentExplorer = new Box.ContentExplorer();
            contentExplorer.show(folderId, accessToken, {
                container: ".container",
            });
        </script>
    </body>
</html>
```

## Demo

<iframe title="Box Content Explorer" />

## API

```js theme={null}
const { ContentExplorer } = Box;
const contentExplorer = new ContentExplorer();

/**
 * Shows the content explorer.
 *
 * @param {string} folderId - The root folder id
 * @param {string} accessToken - Box API access token
 * @param {Object} [options] - Options
 * @return {void}
 */
contentExplorer.show(folderId, accessToken, options);

/**
 * Hides the content explorer, removes all event listeners, and clears out the
 * HTML.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
contentExplorer.hide();

/**
 * Clears out the internal in-memory
 * cache for the content explorer forcing
 * re-load of items via the API.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
contentExplorer.clearCache();

/**
 * Adds an event listener to the content explorer. Listeners should be added
 * before calling show() so no events are missed.
 *
 * @param {string} eventName - Name of the event
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function
 * @return {void}
 */
contentExplorer.addListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes an event listener from the content explorer.
 *
 * @param {string} eventName - Name of the event
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function
 * @return {void}
 */
contentExplorer.removeListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes all event listeners from the content explorer.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
contentExplorer.removeAllListeners();
```

### Parameters

| Parameter     | Type   | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------- | ------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`    | String | Box Folder ID. This will be the ID of the folder you want to navigate. If you want to use the Box All Files folder, then use `0` as the `folderId`.                              |
| `accessToken` | String | Box API access token to use. This should have read/write access to the folder above. The value passed in for the token is assumed to never expire while the explorer is visible. |
| `options`     | Object | Optional options. See below for details. For example: `contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, TOKEN, {canDelete: false})` would be used to hide the delete option.                      |

### Options

| Parameter              | Type     | Default                                                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ---------------------- | -------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `container`            | String   | `document.body`                                            | CSS selector of the container in which the content explorer should be placed. Calling hide() will clear out this container.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `sortBy`               | String   | `name`                                                     | The initial sort by option for the content list. Value can be either `id`, `name`, `date` or `size`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `sortDirection`        | String   | `ASC`                                                      | The initial sort direction option for the content list. Value should be either `ASC` or `DESC`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `logoUrl`              | String   |                                                            | URL of custom logo to show in header. If this value is the string box then the box logo will show.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `canPreview`           | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | If this option is set to `true` AND `can_preview` permission on the file is `true`, files on the content explorer will be clickable. Clicking on a file will launch preview of that file. This option has no effect when the file permission `can_preview` is set to `false`. This is only applicable to files that can be previewed.               |
| `canDownload`          | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the download option if this is set to `false`. Hiding the option alone will not prevent downloading unless the file permissions also set `can_download` to `false`. This option has no effect when the file permission `can_download` is set to `false`. This is only applicable to files.                                           |
| `canDelete`            | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the delete option if this is set to `false`. Hiding the option alone will not prevent deleting unless the item permissions also set `can_delete` to `false`. This option has no effect when the item permission `can_delete` is set to `false`.                                                                                      |
| `canRename`            | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the rename option if this is set to `false`. Hiding the option alone will not prevent renaming unless the item permissions also set `can_rename` to `false`.                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `canUpload`            | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the upload option if this is set to `false`. Hiding the option alone will not prevent uploading unless the current folder permissions also set `can_upload` to `false`. This option has no effect when the folder permission `can_upload` is set to `false`.                                                                         |
| `canCreateNewFolder`   | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the create new folder option. Hiding the option alone will not prevent creating a new folder unless the folder item permissions also set `can_upload` to `false`. This option has no effect when the folder item permission `can_upload` is set to `false`.                                                                          |
| `canShare`             | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the share button if set to `false`. Hiding the button alone will not prevent sharing unless the item `permissions` also set `can_share` to false. This option has no effect when the item permission `can_share` is set to `false`.                                                                                                  |
| `canSetShareAccess`    | Boolean  | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the sharing drop down select that allows changing share access, if set to `false`. Hiding the select drop down alone will not prevent changing the share access unless the item permissions also set `can_set_share_access` to `false`. This option has no effect when the item permission `can_set_share_access` is set to `false`. |
| `sharedLink`           | String   |                                                            | Shared link URL, required if folder is shared and the access token doesn't belong to an owner or collaborator of the file.                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `sharedLinkPassword`   | String   |                                                            | Shared link password, required if shared link has a password.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `size`                 | String   | `undefined`                                                | Indicates to the content explorer to fit within a small or large width container. Value can be absent or one of `small` or `large`. If absent the UI Element will adapt to its container and automatically switch between `small` width or `large` width mode.                                                                                      |
| `isTouch`              | Boolean  | Defaults to the browser and device's default touch support | Indicates to the Content Explorer that it's is being rendered on a touch enabled device.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `autoFocus`            | Boolean  | `false`                                                    | When set to `true`, the item grid will get focus on initial load.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `defaultView`          | String   | `files`                                                    | Value can be either be `files`, `recents` or `metadata`. When set to `recents`, by default you will see recent items instead of the regular file/folder structure. `metadata` is required to display the metadata view in Content Explorer. If not provided, you'll get a regular folder view.                                                      |
| `requestInterceptor`   | Function |                                                            | Function to intercept requests. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.                                                         |
| `responseInterceptor`  | Function |                                                            | Function to intercept responses. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.                                                        |
| `ContentOpenWithProps` | Object   | `{ show: false }`                                          | Allows you to show the Open With Element when previewing via the explorer.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `token`                | String   |                                                            | Developer token generated in the Developer Console.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `metadataQuery`        | Object   |                                                            | Metadata query used to get the information for the metadata view.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `rootFolderID`         | String   |                                                            | Folder ID with a metadata template applied. `metadataQuery` will apply to this folder.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `fieldsToShow`         | Object   |                                                            | The metadata fields/columns to view - must be valid field names from the metadata template.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |

### Events

| Event Name | Event Data                          | Description                                 |
| ---------- | ----------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- |
| `select`   | `Array<File \| Web Link \| Folder>` | Will be fired when item rows are selected.  |
| `rename`   | `File \| Web Link \| Folder`        | Will be fired when an item is renamed.      |
| `preview`  | `File`                              | Will be fired when a file is previewed.     |
| `download` | `Array<File>`                       | Will be fired when items are downloaded.    |
| `delete`   | `Array<File>`                       | Will be fired when items are deleted.       |
| `upload`   | `Array<File>`                       | Will be fired when items are uploaded.      |
| `navigate` | `Folder`                            | Will be fired when navigating into folders. |
| `create`   | `Folder`                            | Will be fired when a new folder is created  |

## Keyboard Shortcuts

When the item grid has focus, either manually by clicking on it or
programmatically via javascript or via the above mentioned `autoFocus` prop, the
following keyboard shortcuts will work if their corresponding operations are
applicable and allowed.

| Key                     | Action                             |
| ----------------------- | ---------------------------------- |
| `Arrow Up`              | Previous item row                  |
| `Arrow Down`            | Next item row                      |
| `Ctrl/Cmd + Arrow Up`   | First item row                     |
| `Ctrl/Cmd + Arrow Down` | Last item row                      |
| `/`                     | Search                             |
| `Shift + X`             | Select an item row                 |
| `Delete`                | Delete the selected item           |
| `Enter`                 | Open the selected item             |
| `Shift + R`             | Rename the selected item           |
| `Shift + S`             | Share the selected item            |
| `Shift + D`             | Download the selected item         |
| `g then f`              | Navigates to the root folder       |
| `g then u`              | Upload to the current folder       |
| `g then b`              | Focuses the root folder breadcrumb |
| `g then r`              | Recent items                       |

## Scopes

If your application requires the end user to only be able to access a subset of
the Content Explorer functionality, you can use <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link> to
appropriately downscope the Access Token to a resulting token that has the
desired set of permissions, and can thus, be securely passed to the end user
client initializing the Content Explorer.

Below are a set of UI Element-specific scopes to go alongside Downscoping. These
allow developers to enable/disable UI controls on the Content Explorer by
configuring the appropriate scopes on the downscoped token. To learn
more, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Dedicated Scopes for Box UI Elements</Link>.

### Base Scope

| Scope Name      | Permissions granted                                                               |
| --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `base_explorer` | Allows access to content in the folder tree based on user/file/token permissions. |

### Feature Scopes

| Scope Name      | Permissions granted                                                                                       |
| --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `item_preview`  | Automatically enables preview of the file, upon user click (requires Preview UI Element to be referenced) |
| `item_download` | Allows files/folders contents to be downloaded                                                            |
| `item_rename`   | Allows files/folders to be renamed                                                                        |
| `item_share`    | Allows sharing of resource specified under "resource" of the downscope request.                           |
| `item_delete`   | Allows file/folders to be deleted                                                                         |

### Sample Scenarios

| Scenario                                                                                  | Scopes                                                                                                            |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| User want to navigate folder structure (basic functionality)                              | `base_explorer`                                                                                                   |
| User want basic functionality + preview                                                   | `base_explorer` + `item_preview`                                                                                  |
| User want basic functionality + preview + download                                        | `base_explorer` + `item_preview` + `item_download`                                                                |
| User want basic functionality + preview + download + rename file/folder names             | `base_explorer` + `item_preview` + `item_download` + `item_rename`                                                |
| User wants all functionality (basic, preview, download, rename, share, upload and delete) | `base_explorer` + `item_preview` + `item_download` + `item_rename` + `item_delete` + `item_share` + `item_upload` |

## Custom actions

You can expand the actions in the **More Options** menu for files and folders in Content Explorer and Content Picker. Your custom options show when user clicks the ellipsis button.

To customize the **More Options** menu, pass an array of custom actions to `itemActions`.

```js theme={null}
contentExplorer.show(configData.FOLDER_ID, configData.ACCESS_TOKEN, {
    container: ".container",
    itemActions: customActions,
});
```

The array can include multiple actions. The action object should include the `label` and `onAction` callback functions. You can filter the custom actions to appear only on a specific item `type`, by passing the `file` or `folder` value. The `filter` value is used for advanced filtering, for example by a specific file extension:

```js theme={null}
const customActions = [
    {
        label: "Preview in New Window",
        onAction: (item) => alert('action ' + item),
        type: 'file',
    },
    {
        label: "Open in Box.com",
        onAction: (item) => window.open("https://app.box.com"),
    },
    {
        label: "Export",
        onAction: (item) => console.log('action ' + item),
        filter: (item) => item.extension?.toLowerCase() === 'pdf',
    }
];
```

See the implemented examples in CodePen:

<iframe title="Box custom icons" />

[box-app]: /guides/applications/app-types

[token]: /guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens

[templates]: /guides/metadata/templates

[metadata-project]: https://github.com/box-community/content-explorer-metadata/tree/main

[apply-templates]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196173-Using-Metadata

[metadata-query]: /guides/metadata/queries

[get-template]: /guides/metadata/templates/get/#get-a-metadata-template-by-name

[creating-templates-api]: /guides/metadata/templates/create

[appjs]: https://github.com/box-community/content-explorer-metadata/blob/main/src/App.js

[blogpost]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/metadata-view-in-box-content-explorer-4978e47e97e9

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Explorer - metadata view v1
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer-metadata-v1



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

<Note>
  The `v1` of the metadata view Content Explorer has reached end of support. While `v1` remains available in the `24.0.0` package, it will no longer receive bug fixes or new features. Follow the migration guide and switch to the `v2` metadata view of Content Explorer in order to receive the newest features.
</Note>

With Content Explorer you can display files and folders based on their metadata.
The metadata view uses <Link href="/reference/resources/get-metadata-templates-id">metadata template</Link> and <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">metadata query</Link> to find the data you want to display.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Metadata view" />
</Frame>

## Prerequisites

* Read the <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer">Content Explorer</Link> guide.
* Check the <Link href="/guides/metadata/#metadata-terminology">metadata terminology</Link>.
* Check the information on <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">metadata queries</Link>.

## Create and configure an app

1. <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types">Create a Box app</Link>.
2. Add the local development address in the CORS Domains: <img alt="CORS Domains" />
3. Generate a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">developer token</Link>.

## Create a metadata template

The next step is to create a metadata template.

1. Use <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">Metadata API</Link> or [Admin Console][creating-templates-ui] to create the template.
2. Apply an already created template to a Box folder. Make sure you enable the
   cascade policy. For detailed instructions, see
   [instructions on customizing and applying templates][apply-templates].

<Note>
  You can also apply a metadata template to a file.
</Note>

### Display name and key parameters

* The `displayName` parameter is the display name of the template visible
  in the Admin Console.
* The `templateKey` parameter is a unique identifier of the template. It needs
  to be unique across the enterprise for which you create the metadata template.
  If you don't provide the `templateKey` parameter, API creates a unique one
  based on the value in `displayName`.
* The `[fields].displayName` parameter is the display name of the field as it
  is shown to the user in the web and mobile apps.
* The `[fields].key` parameter is a unique identifier for a specific field in
  the template. The identifier must be unique within the template to which it
  belongs.

## Display metadata view

Proceed to fill in the necessary properties passed to the Content Explorer.
To make things easier, you can use a [sample project][metadata-project] based on a basic React app to launch metadata view.

1. Clone the metadata sample project.

2. Update the placeholders in [`App.js`][appjs] with actual values:

   | Parameter                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
   | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
   | `DEVELOPER_TOKEN`        | <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">Developer token</Link> generated in the the Developer Console.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
   | `ENTERPRISE_ID`          | Enterprise ID copied from the **General Settings** tab of your Box application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
   | `METADATA_TEMPLATE_NAME` | `templateKey` of your already created metadata template. **Note**: To make sure you provided the proper name, use the <Link href="/reference/metadata/templates/get/#get-a-metadata-template-by-name">metadata API</Link> to retrieve the name, or copy it from the URL in the Admin Console. <img alt="Metadata name in Admin Console" /> If you decide to change the template name in the UI, you change the display name only. The name to use in the component is always the one you provided at the beginning. |
   | `METADATA_SOURCE`        | Source of your <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">metadata</Link>. It's a string that combines the scope, enterprise ID, and metadata key.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
   | `ROOTFOLDER_ID`          | ID of a Box folder to which you want to apply the metadata query and display filtered files.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |

   The `defaultView`, `fieldsToShow`, and `metadataQuery` parameters are already
   defined in the sample project. Examples of these parameters are available in the sample project.

   | Parameter       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
   | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
   | `defaultView`   | A required prop to paint the metadata view. If it's not provided, you get the regular file view.                                                                                                      |
   | `fieldsToShow`  | Add or hide specific metadata columns to display in the Content Explorer.                                                                                                                             |
   | `metadataQuery` | Provides a way to find files and folders by searching for the metadata attached to them. For additional information on metadata queries, see <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">this guide</Link>. |

3. Pass the required parameters to the Content Explorer component.

A sample code for a React component including the Content Explorer metadata view would look as follows:

```js theme={null}
function App() {
    const token = "<DEVELOPER_TOKEN>";
    const rootFolderID = "<ROOTFOLDER_ID>";
    const EID = "<ENTERPRISE_ID>";
    const templateName = "<METADATA_TEMPLATE_NAME>";
    const metadataSource = `enterprise_${EID}.${templateName}`;
    const metadataSourceFieldName = `metadata.${metadataSource}`;
    const metadataQuery = {
    	from: metadataSource,
    	query: "key = :arg1",
    	query_params: { arg1: "value" },
    	ancestor_folder_id: 0,
    	fields: [
        `${metadataSourceFieldName}.name`,
        `${metadataSourceFieldName}.last_contacted_at`,
        `${metadataSourceFieldName}.industry`,
        `${metadataSourceFieldName}.role`,
        ],
    };

    const fieldsToShow = [
    // canEdit propetry determines if the user can edit the metadata directly from Content Explorer component
    { key: `${metadataSourceFieldName}.name`, canEdit: false },
    // displayName alows to change the label on metadata column
    { key: `${metadataSourceFieldName}.industry`, canEdit: false, displayName: "alias" },
    { key: `${metadataSourceFieldName}.last_contacted_at`, canEdit: true },
    { key: `${metadataSourceFieldName}.role`, canEdit: true },
    ];

const defaultView = "metadata";
return (
    <IntlProvider locale="en">
        <div className="App">
            <header className="App-header">
                <h2>Metadata view in Content Explorer</h2>
            </header>
            <section>
                <div className="metadata-based-view">
                    <ContentExplorer
                        rootFolderId={rootFolderID}
                        token={token}
                        metadataQuery={metadataQuery}
                        fieldsToShow={fieldsToShow}
                        defaultView={defaultView}
                    />
                </div>
            </section>
        </div>
    </IntlProvider>
);
}

export default App;
```

## Metadata keys

To decide which fields to show, the Content Explorer uses metadata
<Link href="/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema/#param-fields-key">field keys</Link>, not the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema/#param-fields-displayName">display names</Link>. You can see the
display names in the Admin Console and user view, but you can obtain the field
keys through the API.

The field keys are not changing, even if you change the metadata display name.
This ensures that the functionality works properly, despite any changes to the
metadata in UI view.

### Metadata keys sanitization

<Link href="/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema/#param-fields-key">Keys</Link> are restricted to alphanumeric characters only:

* No hyphens `-` or underscores `_` are permitted.
* Only letters (`a-z, A-Z`) and numbers (`0-9`) are allowed.

**Non-Latin characters:**

If keys contain characters from non-Latin alphabets (such as Cyrillic, Arabic,
Chinese, etc.) they are automatically renamed to generic identifiers:

* `field` for the first occurrence
* `field1`, `field2`, and so on for subsequent occurrences

Keys are based on the display names.

<Note>
  **TIP**: For a detailed flow, see [Metadata view blog post][blogpost].
</Note>

[blogpost]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/metadata-view-in-box-content-explorer-4978e47e97e9

[creating-templates-ui]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates

[appjs]: https://github.com/box-community/content-explorer-metadata/blob/main/src/App.js

[apply-templates]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196173-Using-Metadata

[metadata-project]: https://github.com/box-community/content-explorer-metadata/tree/main

[get-id]: /reference/get-metadata-templates-id-id-schema/

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Explorer – metadata view v2
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer-metadata-v2



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The metadata view of <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer/">Content Explorer</Link> allows you to display files and folders based on their metadata.

## Overview

The metadata view `v2` is a ground-up redesign of the original metadata view of the Box Content Explorer UI element. It introduces a streamlined interface tailored for metadata-driven workflows. Key features include filtering and editing interfaces with dedicated UI for each metadata field type, flexible display options with list and grid views, pagination support, and more.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Metadata view" />
</Frame>

## Prerequisites

Before implementing the metadata view `v2` of Content Explorer, ensure you have:

* The `box-ui-elements` package `v24.0.0`+, React `v18.0.0`, and `Node.js` `v18.0.0`+
* The Box Platform app with proper CORS settings
* A valid <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens/">developer token</Link>
* A configured metadata template applied to target folder or files. See <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">creating templates with API</Link> or [with the Admin Console][creating-templates-ui].

<Tip>
  Make sure you enable the cascade policy. For detailed instructions, see
  [instructions on customizing and applying templates][apply-templates].
</Tip>

## Interface areas

The metadata view interface consists of the following areas:

* **Header** – Displays the current view title, navigation, and context-sensitive information like selection counts. The header value can be specified with a `title` prop. If it’s not defined, it defaults to the folder name specified in the `ancestor_folder_id`.
* **Action bar** – Contains filter chips for each metadata field, sort options, and the view mode toggle button (list or grid).
* **Pagination footer** – Provides the **Previous** and **Next** navigation buttons and page indicators.

## Display metadata view

To display the metadata view of Content Explorer, you need the following properties:

| Property                                  | Description                                                                                                                            |
| ----------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `token`                                   | Developer token generated in the Developer Console.                                                                                    |
| `title`                                   | The title of the whole component, if not defined, defaults to the folder name specified in the `ancestor_folder_id`.                   |
| `defaultView`                             | Must be set to `metadata`.                                                                                                             |
| `features.contentExplorer.metadataViewV2` | Must be set to true to enable the metadata view (v2).                                                                                  |
| `metadataQuery`                           | Metadata query request body matching the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read/">Metadata Query API</Link> schema. |
| `metadataViewProps`                       | Component configuration. For configuration details, see `metadataViewProps` object.                                                    |
| `columns`                                 | Defines the structure and behavior of your metadata table columns. See Columns for details.                                            |

Depending on your needs and setup, Box UI Elements can be used with Vanilla JavaScript or React. You can learn more about installation from the <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Installation</Link> guide.

<Note>
  **Capitalized strings need to be replaced with your custom values.**
</Note>

### Vanilla JavaScript code snippet

```js theme={null}
const contentExplorer = new Box.ContentExplorer();

contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, ACCESS_TOKEN, {
  container: ".container",
  defaultView: "metadata",
  // metadataQuery must match the query files/folders by metadata API body request:
  // </reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read/>
  metadataQuery: {
    from: "METADATA_SCOPE.TEMPLATE_KEY", // For example from: "enterprise_123456789.templatename" where the number is the enterprise_123456789 is metadata template scope)
    ancestor_folder_id: "FOLDER_ID"
    // Metadata fields and values pulled to the component
    fields: [
        "metadata.TEMPLATE_SCOPE.TEMPLATE_KEY.FIELD_KEY1",
        "metadata.TEMPLATE_SCOPE.TEMPLATE_KEY.FIELD_KEY2",
        "metadata.TEMPLATE_SCOPE.TEMPLATE_KEY.FIELD_KEY3",  // For example "metadata.enterprise_123456789.templatename.date"
        ...
    ]
    // Optional for filtering data with specific metadata value
    query: "METADATA_FIELD_KEY = :arg1",
    query_params: { arg1: "METADATA_FIELD_VALUE" },
  },
  features: {
    contentExplorer: {
      metadataViewV2: true, // Required for enabling V2
    },
  },
 // NEW dynamic column configuration
  metadataViewProps: {
    columns // Required - for details see section below
    ...
  }
});
```

### React code snippet

```js theme={null}
import React from 'react';
import { IntlProvider } from 'react-intl';
import ContentExplorer from "box-ui-elements/es/elements/content-explorer"

// Fill with custom values of your metadata template
// You can use this endpoint to get all needed values: /reference/get-metadata-templates-id-id-schema/
const metadataScopeAndKey = `${METADATA_TEMPLATE_SCOPE}.${METADATA_TEMPLATE_KEY}`;
const metadataFieldNamePrefix = `metadata.${metadataScopeAndKey}`;
const folderID = "FOLDER_ID"

const metadataQuery = {
   // Check this endpoint for more details on query structure:
   // /reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read/
   from: metadataScopeAndKey,
   ancestor_folder_id: folderID,
   fields: [
      "metadata.METADATA_SCOPE.TEMPLATE_KEY.METADATA_FIELD_KEY1",
      "metadata.METADATA_SCOPE.TEMPLATE_KEY.METADATA_FIELD_KEY2",  // For example "metadata.enterprise_123456789.templatename.date"
      ...
   ]
};

// Required - for details see section below
const columns = [
   {
      textValue: "METADATA_FIELD_DISPLAY_NAME1", // or our your custom value
      id: `${metadataFieldNamePrefix}.${METADATA_FIELD_KEY1}`,
      type: field.type,
      allowsSorting: true,
      minWidth: 150,
      maxWidth: 150,
   },
   {
      textValue: "METADATA_FIELD_DISPLAY_NAME2", // or our your custom value
      id: `${metadataFieldNamePrefix}.${METADATA_FIELD_KEY2}`,
      type: field.type,
      allowsSorting: true,
      minWidth: 150,
      maxWidth: 150,
   },
   ...
];

const componentProps = {
 features: {
   contentExplorer: {
       metadataViewV2: true,
   },
 },
 metadataQuery,
 metadataViewProps: {
   columns
 },
};

const ContentExplorerContainer = () => {
 const { features, metadataQuery, metadataViewProps } = componentProps;
 // Store token in a secure way
 return (
   <IntlProvider locale="en">
     <ContentExplorer
       token={TOKEN}
       defaultView="metadata"
       features={features}
       metadataQuery={metadataQuery}
       metadataViewProps={metadataViewProps}
     />
   </IntlProvider>
 );
};

export default ContentExplorerContainer;
```

## Columns

The columns prop defines the structure and behavior of your metadata table columns.

| Property        | Type    | Required | Description                                                                                 |
| --------------- | ------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `id`            | string  | Yes      | Metadata field identifier in the following format: `metadata.<scope>.<templateKey>.<field>` |
| `textValue`     | string  | Yes      | Column header display name.                                                                 |
| `type`          | string  | Yes      | Box metadata field type (`string`, `number`, `date`, `singleSelect`, `multiSelect`).        |
| `allowsSorting` | boolean | No       | Enables column header sorting.                                                              |
| `minWidth`      | number  | No       | Minimum column width in pixels.                                                             |
| `maxWidth`      | number  | No       | Maximum column width in pixels.                                                             |

## Features

### Enabling row selection

You can enable selecting individual rows. When one or more rows are selected, the header updates to show a selection descriptor and a metadata edit button. This allows users to perform single or bulk actions. Row selection is scoped to the paginated content.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Row selection" />
</Frame>

To enable the selection feature, set the `isSelectionEnabled` property to `true` within the `metadataViewProps` object:

```js theme={null}
const contentExplorer = new Box.ContentExplorer();

contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, ACCESS_TOKEN, {
 ...
 metadataViewProps: {
   columns,
   isSelectionEnabled: true
 },
});
```

### Editing metadata values

When one or more items are selected, the component header displays the selected count and the **Metadata** button becomes active. Clicking the **Metadata** button opens a sidebar that lets users view and edit metadata for the selected items.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Editing metadata" />
</Frame>

This behavior is enabled by default; no additional properties are required to activate it.

### Filtering metadata

Filter items by the file type, filter folders, or filter by metadata field values specified in the Box <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/">metadata templates</Link>.

Filter chips are enabled by default. To disable the **All Filters** chip, set the `isAllFiltersDisabled` to `true` in the `actionBarProps` object:

```js theme={null}
const contentExplorer = new Box.ContentExplorer();

contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, ACCESS_TOKEN, {
 ...
metadataViewProps: {
    columns,
    isSelectionEnabled: true,
    actionBarProps: { 
        isAllFiltersDisabled: true,
    }
  },
});
```

### Toggling list and grid view

Grid view is available by default through the view mode toggle button in the action bar. When the grid view is active, a zoom control becomes available. Other functionalities like selecting, filtering, and editing are also available within this view.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Grid view" />
</Frame>

To disable grid view, set `actionBarProps.isViewModeButtonDisabled` to `true` within the `metadataViewProps` object:

```js theme={null}
const contentExplorer = new Box.ContentExplorer();

contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, ACCESS_TOKEN, {
 ...
 metadataViewProps: {
   columns,
   actionBarProps: {
     isViewModeButtonDisabled: true,
   }
 },
});
```

### Pagination

The UI Element uses marker-based pagination only, with the footer always visible. You cannot set an offset or page number. Users can navigate using only **Previous** and **Next**. Infinite scrolling is not supported.

## Migrating from v1 to v2

### Npm package

<Note>
  The `v1` of the metadata view Content Explorer has reached end of support. While `v1` remains available in the `24.0.0` package, it will no longer receive bug fixes or new features. Follow the migration guide and switch to the `v2` metadata view of Content Explorer in order to receive the newest features.
</Note>

To migrate from `v1` to v2 in projects using `box-ui-elements` package:

1. Upgrade the `box-ui-elements` package version to version `24.0.0` or higher.
2. Ensure `box-ui-elements` peer dependencies are added as dependencies in your `package.json` file. Install them with your package manager.
3. Add the `features` flag to enable the enhanced metadata view.

```js theme={null}
features: {
   contentExplorer: {
       metadataViewV2: true
   }
}
```

4. Convert your metadata `fieldToShow` configuration to the new column object. Add field types that correspond with the values in the Box metadata template. Pass the columns array to the new `metadataViewProps` object.

```js theme={null}
const columns = [
    {
       textValue: "METADATA_FIELD_DISPLAY_NAME", // Altenratively pass a custom value
       id: `${metadataFieldNamePrefix}.${METADATA_FIELD_KEY}`,
       type: field.type,
       allowsSorting: true, // Optional
       minWidth: 150, // Optional; the default value is 220
       maxWidth: 150, // Optional; the default value is 220
    },
    ...
];
```

5. Optionally, configure additional features described in this guide.

### CDN

To migrate from `v1` to v2 in projects using CDN imports:

1. Ensure that CDN link includes package version with version `24.0.0` or higher.
2. Add the `features` flag to enable the enhanced metadata view.

```js theme={null}
features: {
   contentExplorer: {
       metadataViewV2: true
   }
}
```

3. Convert your metadata `fieldToShow` configuration to the new column object. Add field types that correspond with the values in the Box metadata template. Pass the columns array to the new `metadataViewProps` object.

```js theme={null}
const columns = [
    {
       textValue: "METADATA_FIELD_DISPLAY_NAME", // Altenratively pass a custom value
       id: `${metadataFieldNamePrefix}.${METADATA_FIELD_KEY}`,
       type: field.type,
       allowsSorting: true, // Optional
       minWidth: 150, // Optional; the default value is 220
       maxWidth: 150, // Optional; the default value is 220
    },
    ...
];
```

4. Optionally, configure additional features described in this guide.

[terminology]: /guides/metadata/#metadata-terminology

[creating-templates-ui]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates

[apply-templates]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196173-Using-Metadata

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# UI Elements
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/index



Box UI Elements are pre-built UI components that allow developers to add
elements of the main Box web application into their own applications. They can
be used to navigate through, upload, preview, and select content stored on Box
and are available both as React components and framework-agnostic JavaScript
libraries.

## Available Elements

Box offers several UI Elements to create common user experiences with files and
folders in an application.

The available UI Elements are:

* <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer">Content Explorer</Link>- Allow users to search and browse through files and folders. It also has a metadata query based view <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer-metadata-v2">variant</Link> that supports items sorting, filtering, custom columns, and more.
* <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/open-with">Content Open With</Link> - Allow users to open content stored in box with a partner application using an embedded dropdown.

<Warning>
  We no longer support the `OpenWith` UI element for any new customers as of December 21, 2021.
</Warning>

* <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/picker">Content Picker</Link> - Allow users to select files or folders from their Box account.
* <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">Content Preview</Link> - Display interactive viewers for documents, images, audio, video, and more.
* <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/sidebar">Content Sidebar</Link> - Display a sidebar for file metadata and activity feed information.
* <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader">Content Uploader</Link> - Allow users to upload files by selecting or using drag-and-drop.

UI Elements can be used in isolation or joined together to construct common user
flows with content, such as uploading and then viewing a file.


# Installation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation



UI Elements can be used either by downloading the Javascript libraries
directly from the Box CDN or by installing our [NPM package][npm]. All UI
Elements require their corresponding CSS stylesheet to render properly.

## Prerequisites

To use Box UI Elements, you need the following Node and React versions:

* Node version: `>=18.18.2 <20.11.0`
* React version `>=18.0.0`

The available versions of UI elements are listed in the [manual installation][manual-installation] section.

### Migration to React 18

For existing projects based on React 17 or below, check the [React 18 migration guide][react-migration].

Once you upgrade React in your project, update the `box-ui-elements` package with `npm` or `yarn`:

```shell theme={null}
npm install box-ui-elements --legacy-peer-deps

yarn add box-ui-elements
```

This should result in updated version in the `package.json` file:

```json theme={null}
"box-ui-elements": "^23.0.0"
```

No additional changes related to Box UI elements are required in your code.

For more information, check the blog post about React 18 upgrade for UI elements.

## NPM installation

Use this when you are building a React based app and would like to import the
components directly into your app at build time.

> **Note** The `--legacy-peer-deps` flag is necessary when installing UI elements with `npm` due to library dependencies.

```sh theme={null}
npm install box-ui-elements --legacy-peer-deps
yarn add box-ui-elements
```

<Card href="https://www.npmjs.com/package/box-ui-elements" title="Learn more on the NPM website" />

<Warning>
  ## Content Preview

  Use the Content Preview SDK if you need a specific
  version of the preview library. Otherwise,
  use Content Preview UI Element wrapper.
</Warning>

## Manual installation

All the UI elements are also available directly from the Box CDN.

| Element                                                                                   | Version   | File                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer">Content Explorer</Link>                   | `23.0.0`  | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/explorer.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/explorer.css`</Link>                              |
|                                                                                           |           | JS with React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/explorer.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/explorer.js`</Link>                      |
|                                                                                           |           | JS without React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/explorer.no.react.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/explorer.no.react.js`</Link> |
| <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/open-with">Content Open With</Link>                 | `23.0.0`  | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/openwith.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/openwith.css`</Link>                              |
|                                                                                           |           | JS with React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/openwith.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/openwith.js`</Link>                      |
|                                                                                           |           | JS without React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/openwith.no.react.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/openwith.no.react.js`</Link> |
| <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/picker">Content Picker</Link>                       | `23.0.0`  | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/picker.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/picker.css`</Link>                                  |
|                                                                                           |           | JS with React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/picker.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/picker.js`</Link>                          |
|                                                                                           |           | JS without React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/picker.no.react.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/picker.no.react.js`</Link>     |
| <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/sidebar">Content Sidebar</Link>                     | `23.0.0`  | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/sidebar.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/sidebar.css`</Link>                                |
|                                                                                           |           | JS with React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/sidebar.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/sidebar.js`</Link>                        |
|                                                                                           |           | JS without React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/sidebar.no.react.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/sidebar.no.react.js`</Link>   |
| <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader">Content Uploader</Link>                   | `23.0.0`  | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/uploader.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/uploader.css`</Link>                              |
|                                                                                           |           | JS with React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/uploader.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/uploader.js`</Link>                      |
|                                                                                           |           | JS without React <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/uploader.no.react.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/uploader.no.react.js`</Link> |
| <Link href="https://github.com/box/box-content-preview">Content Preview UI Element</Link> | `23.0.0`  | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/preview.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/preview.css`</Link>                                |
|                                                                                           | `23.0.0`  | JS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/preview.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/23.0.0/en-US/preview.js`</Link>                                   |
| <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">Content Preview SDK</Link>                 | `2.106.0` | CSS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/preview/2.106.0/en-US/preview.css">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/preview/2.106.0/en-US/preview.css`</Link>                                |
|                                                                                           |           | JS <Link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/preview/2.106.0/en-US/preview.js">`https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/preview/2.106.0/en-US/preview.js`</Link>                                   |

Use these links to either download the elements code to your application's
code, or embed them straight into your page from the CDN.

```html theme={null}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
  <head>
    <!-- Latest version of the explorer css for your locale -->
    <link
      rel="stylesheet"
      href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/explorer.css"
    />
  </head>
  <body>
    <!-- Latest version of the explorer js for your locale -->
    <script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/explorer.js"></script>
    ...
  </body>
</html>
```

For Box Preview, the sample would look slightly different.

```html theme={null}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
  <head>
    <meta charset="utf-8" />
    <title>Box Content Preview Demo</title>

    <!-- Latest version of Box Content Preview for en-US locale -->
    <script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/preview/{VERSION}/en-US/preview.js"></script>
    <link
      rel="stylesheet"
      href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/preview/{VERSION}/en-US/preview.css"
    />
  </head>
  <body>
    <div class="preview-container" style="height:400px; width:100%;"></div>
    <script>
      var preview = new Box.Preview();
      preview.show("93392244621", "EqFyi1Yq1tD9mxY8F38sxDfp73pFd7FP", {
        container: ".preview-container",
        showDownload: true,
      });
    </script>
  </body>
</html>
```

### Versions

Most of the UI elements have 2 distinct versions.

* A standard `*.js` file (e.g. `explore.js`) that includes React and ReactDOM in the bundle.
  * Use this when you are not building a React based app or you don't want to include the components as part of your app's build process.
  * It includes React and ReactDOM libraries.
  * The file size of this asset will be larger than the one below.
* A smaller `*.no.react.js` file (e.g. `explore.no.react.js`) that does not get bundled with React and ReactDOM.
  * Use this when both React and ReactDOM libraries are already loaded on the application.
  * These libraries expect a React and ReactDOM `>= 16.6` and `< 18`.

<message>
  Only one of the two `js` files and the additional `css` file need to be added
  to a project.
</message>

### Supported Locales

The above asset URLs use `en-US`. If you want to use another locale, then
replace `en-US` in the URLs above with any of the following:

`en-AU`, `en-CA`, `en-GB`, `da-DK`, `de-DE`, `es-ES`, `fi-FI`, `fr-CA`, `fr-FR`,
`it-IT`, `ja-JP,`, `ko-KR`, `nb-NO`, `nl-NL`, `pl-PL`, `pt-BR`, `ru-RU`,
`sv-SE`, `tr-TR`, `zh-CN`, `zh-TW`

## Self-hosting Content Preview

To serve the Box Content Preview library from your own server, follow these
steps.

### 1. Download release

Either fork the repository and check out the version you want to serve or
download the specific version as a zip.

* Check out a specific version with `git checkout v2.106.0`.
* Download a specific version as a zip from the [releases][preview-releases] page.

### 2. Install dependencies

Install the dependencies and build the library with the following command.

```sh theme={null}
yarn install && yarn build:i18n && yarn build:prod
```

### 3. Serve files

Self-serve everything except for the `dev` folder from the `/dist` folder. You
must not alter the folder structure and `third-party` needs to be in the same
folder as `2.106.0`.

For example, if you self-host using a `box-assets` directory, these URLs must
be accessible:

* `https://cdn.YOUR_SITE.com/box-assets/2.106.0/en-US/preview.js`
* `https://cdn.YOUR_SITE.com/box-assets/third-party/text/2.65.0/papaparse.min.js`
* `https://cdn.YOUR_SITE.com/box-assets/third-party/model3d/1.12.0/three.min.js`

## Authentication

In order to initialize any of the UI Elements, an application will need to
provide a valid Access Token.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn how to authenticate an application" />

It is also recommended to <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscope</Link> an Access Token before passing
it into an insecure environment (the user's web browser).

UI Elements only expect any Access Token to be passed in for authentication, and
can therefore be used for any type of authentication available from Box
Platform.

For testing purposes, a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">Developer Token</Link> can be used.

## CORS

To use UI Elements, an application needs to allow the domain the widget is
used on for Cross Origin Resource sharing. See the <Link href="/guides/security/cors">CORS guide</Link> for more
details.

## Source Code & Releases

Source code for Box UI Elements is [hosted on GitHub][gh]. The repository
contains detailed documentation for usage and development. Please file any bugs
you encounter under the "Issues" tab with clear steps to reproduce. This
repository also holds a list of [releases][releases].

[npm]: https://www.npmjs.com/package/box-ui-elements

[gh]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements

[releases]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases

[scopes]: /guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes

[preview-releases]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/releases

[manual-installation]: #manual-installation

[react-migration]: https://react.dev/blog/2022/03/08/react-18-upgrade-guide

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Customize Logo
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/logo



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Each of the Box UI Elements allow for specifying a custom logo to place in the
top-left corner of the embedded container.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Custom logo" />
</Frame>

By default, each of the UI Elements uses a generic placeholder as a logo. This
is meant to be replaced by either a Box logo or a custom logo, such as a
company's logo.

To add a logo to a UI Element, supply a URL for a logo as an option in in the
Javascript setup code. The following is an example of how to do this with the
Content Preview UI Element.

```js theme={null}
var preview = new Box.Preview();
preview.show(fileId, accessToken, {
    container: '.preview-container',
    sharedLink: 'https://app.box.com/v/foo',
    sharedLinkPassword: 'bar',
    collection: [FILE_ID, '123', '234', ...],
    header: 'light',
    logoUrl: 'http://i.imgur.com/xh8j3E2.png',
    showAnnotations: true,
    showDownload: true
});
```

<Info>
  **Box Logo**

  To present the Box logo in a UI Element, specify the string `box` as the
  `logoURL` option.
</Info>

## Image size

Images files will be fitted to a maximum height of 32 pixels and a maximum width
of 80 pixels. Larger images will be shrunk to fit these dimensions.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Open With
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/open-with



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

<Warning>
  We no longer support the `OpenWith` UI element for any new customers
  as of December 21, 2021.
</Warning>

The Box Content Open With UI Element allows developers to embed a dropdown to
open content stored in box with a partner application, or locally on the
desktop.

The Element fetches information about enabled integrations using the
Box API, and calls out to partner services. Users can then take action in these
services, and the edited content will be automatically saved back to Box.

The integrations included in the Open With Element are Google Suite,
and Box Edit. Additional information on the Google Suite integration can be
found on the [Box Community site][community].

Currently, the element only supports <Link href="/platform/user-types">App Users</Link>
for authentication.

## Installation

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Learn how to install</Link> Box UI elements
either through NPM or the Box CDN.

## Box Edit

Box Edit requires additional setup in order to be integrated into a platform
application. Box Edit uses the desktop application [Box Tools][tools] in order
to open content locally.

* Requests must use a secure connection (from an `https` domain)
* The application's domain must be allowed by Box Tools. Instructions can be found <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/custom-domains">here</Link>. The ideal workflow is to bundle these steps within an installer that also installs Box Tools.
* Safari requires a browser extension to connect to box tools. More details can be found [here][safari].

## G Suite

A valid G Suite account is required in order to use the Box for G Suite
integration. To connect a user's G Suite and Box account, the
`external_app_user_id` of the app user must be updated to be the email address
associated with the user's G Suite account.

The `external_app_user_id` of an app user can be updated via the
<Link href="/reference/put-users-id">`PUT /users/:id`</Link> endpoint.

## Setup

The Open With UI Element is intended to be used after allowing your
application and enabling integrations for app users using Box API endpoints.

### Activate application

The 'Open With' UI Element is available to any developer building with the Box
Platform. To activate it for your instance, add the "Enable integrations" scope
to your application in the developer console.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enable Integrations" />
</Frame>

Once your application has been activated for API calls it will need to be
reauthorized in your enterprise. The steps for performing these actions are
available <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">here</Link>.

## List available integrations

The first step to assigning an app integration to a user is to get the list of
integrations that are available. This `GET` request can be made with the following
`cURL` request.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X GET https://api.box.com/2.0/app_integrations \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]'
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "next_marker": null,
  "entries": [
    { "type": "app_integration", "id": "10897" },
    { "type": "app_integration", "id": "1338" },
    { "type": "app_integration", "id": "13418" },
    { "type": "app_integration", "id": "3282" }
  ],
  "limit": 100
}
```

The app integration IDs are used to assign an integration to a given user.

## Get a specific integration

To obtain additional information about a specific integration, based on ID, the
following GET request may be made.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X GET \
    https://api.box.com/2.0/app_integrations/[APP_INTEGRATION_ID] \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]'
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "app_integration",
  "id": "10897",
  "app": {
    "type": "app",
    "id": "336417"
  },
  "name": "Edit with G Suite",
  "description": "Securely manage your Google Docs, Sheets and Slides in Box",
  "executable_item_types": [
    "file"
  ],
  "restricted_extensions": [
    "docx",
    "gdoc",
    "xlsx",
    "gsheet",
    "pptx",
    "gslides",
    "gslide"
  ],
  "scoped_to": "parent"
}
```

## Add integration to user

To add an app integration to a valid app user, three pieces of information are
required:

* A valid <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> Access Token.
* The ID of the app user to be assigned the integration
* The ID of the app integration to assign to the user

<Warning>
  While the two previous requests to get app integration information can be done
  with any valid token including a valid developer token, adding and removing
  app integrations requires a valid service account's access token. Using a
  developer token will produce a `404 Not Found` error.
</Warning>

The following `POST` request can be made to assign an app integration to an app
user:

```sh theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/app_integration_assignments \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer [SERVICE_ACCOUNT_TOKEN]' \
    -d '{
      "assignee": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": "[APP_USER_ID]"
      },
      "app_integration": {
        "type": "app_integration",
        "id": "[APP_INTEGRATION_ID]"
      }
    }'
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "app_integration_assignment",
  "id": "72048301",
  "assignee": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "6084519920"
  },
  "app_integration": {
    "type": "app_integration",
    "id": "3282"
  }
}
```

The ID in the JSON response can be used to manage app integrations after
assignment, and should be stored by the application.

## Remove integration from user

To remove an app integration from an app user, the following request may be made
with a valid service access token and the app integration assignment ID from the
previous step.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X DELETE https://api.box.com/2.0/app_integration_assignments/[APP_INTEGRATION_ASSIGNMENT_ID] \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer [SERVICE_ACCOUNT_TOKEN]'
```

```sh theme={null}
204 No Content
```

## Sample HTML

```html theme={null}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
  <head>
    <meta charset="utf-8" />
    <title>Box Content Open With Demo</title>

    <!-- Latest version of the open with css for your locale -->
    <link
      rel="stylesheet"
      href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/openwith.css"
    />
  </head>
  <body>
    <div class="container" style="height:600px"></div>
    <!-- Latest version of the open with js for your locale -->
    <script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/openwith.js"></script>
    <script>
      var fileId = "123";
      var accessToken = "abc";
      var contentOpenWith = new Box.ContentOpenWith();
      contentOpenWith.show(fileId, accessToken, {
        container: ".container"
      });
    </script>
  </body>
</html>
```

## Demo

### Open With Example

<iframe title="Box Open With Example" />

### Content Explorer + Open With Example

<iframe title="Box Content Explorer Example + Open With" />

<Info>
  **Access Token**

  These demos may not fully function until you provide a valid access token under
  the JS tab of the demo. For the Open With element, you must provide a valid
  <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> Access Token.
</Info>

## Authentication

The UI Elements are designed in an authentication agnostic way so whether
you are using UI Elements for users who have Box accounts (Managed Users) or
non-Box accounts (App Users), UI Elements should work out of the box. The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a "token" to be passed in for
authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth
and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

## Scopes

To run integrations with downscoped tokens, you must include the
`item_execute_integration` scope as well as the scope required by the specific
integration you would like to use.

* **Google**: `item_readwrite` on the parent folder
* **Adobe**: `root_readwrite`
* **Box Edit**: `item_readwrite` on the parent folder.
* **Box Edit Single File Collaboration**: `item_readwrite` on the file.

More information on scopes can be found <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">here</Link>.

## API

```js theme={null}
const { ContentOpenWith } = Box;
const contentOpenWith = new ContentOpenWith();

/**
 * Shows the content open with element.
 *
 * @param {string} fileId - The root file id
 * @param {string} accessToken - Box API access token
 * @param {Object} [options] - Options
 * @return {void}
 */
contentOpenWith.show(fileId, accessToken, options);

/**
 * Hides the content open with element, removes all event listeners,
 * and clears out the
 * HTML.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
openWith.hide();

/**
 * Adds an event listener to the content open with element. Listeners should be added
 * before calling show() so no events are missed.
 *
 * @param {string} eventName - Name of the event
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function
 * @return {void}
 */
contentOpenWith.addListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes an event listener from the content open with element.
 *
 * @param {string} eventName - Name of the event
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function
 * @return {void}
 */
contentOpenWith.removeListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes all event listeners from the content open with element.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
contentOpenWith.removeAllListeners();
```

### Parameters

| Parameter     | Type   | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------- | ------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `fileId`      | String | Box File ID. This will be the ID of the file for which you would like to execute integrations.                                                                                   |
| `accessToken` | String | Box API access token to use. This should have read/write access to the folder above. The value passed in for the token is assumed to never expire while the explorer is visible. |
| `options`     | Object | Optional options. See below for details. For example: `contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, TOKEN, {canDelete: false})` would be used to hide the delete option.                      |

### Options

| Parameter             | Type       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |                                                                                      |
| --------------------- | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `dropdownAlignment`   | \`left     | right\`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Determines the dropdown's alignment to the open with button. The default is `right`. |
| `boxToolsName`        | `String`   | This string will replace the name of Box Tools in the "Install Box Tools to open this file on your desktop" message.                                                                                                                                                                         |                                                                                      |
| `boxToolsInstallUrl`  | `String`   | This URL will be used instead of the default Box installation instructions which are linked in the "Install Box Tools to open this file on your desktop" message.                                                                                                                            |                                                                                      |
| `onExecute`           | `Function` | A callback that executes when an integration invocation is attempted.                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |                                                                                      |
| `onError`             | `Function` | A callback that executes when an error occurs.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |                                                                                      |
| `requestInterceptor`  | `Function` | Function to intercept requests. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.  |                                                                                      |
| `responseInterceptor` | `Function` | Function to intercept responses. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>. |                                                                                      |

<Warning>
  Currently the `onError` and `onExecute` events are subject to a known bug. We recommend
  using `openWith.addListener('execute', callback)` and
  `openWith.addListener('error', callback)` as a temporary workaround.
</Warning>

### Events

| Event Name | Event Data     | Description                                               |
| ---------- | -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- |
| `execute`  | Integration ID | Will be fired when an integration invocation is executed. |
| `error`    | Error          | Will be fired when an error occurs.                       |

[community]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043696994-Introducing-Box-for-G-Suite

[tools]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/categories/360003188014-Box-Tools

[safari]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697334-Installing-Box-Tools

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Picker
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/picker



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box Content Picker UI Element allows developers to add support for selecting
files and folders from Box in their desktop or mobile web application. The
library fetches information about a specified folder through the Box API and
renders the content in a folder view. Users can select files or folders and this
content information is then passed to another part of the application.

## Installation

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Learn how to install</Link> Box UI elements
either through NPM or the Box CDN.

## Authentication

The UI Elements are designed in an authentication agnostic way so whether
you are using UI Elements for users who have Box accounts (Managed Users) or
non-Box accounts (App Users), UI Elements should work out of the box. The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a "token" to be passed in for
authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth
and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

## Sample HTML

```html theme={null}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
  <head>
    <meta charset="utf-8" />
    <title>Box File Selection</title>

    <!-- Latest version of the picker css for your locale -->
    <link
      rel="stylesheet"
      href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/picker.css"
    />
  </head>
  <body>
    <div class="container" style="height:600px"></div>
    <!-- Latest version of the picker js for your locale -->
    <script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/picker.js"></script>
    <script>
      var folderId = "123";
      var accessToken = "abc";
      var filePicker = new Box.FilePicker();
      filePicker.show(folderId, accessToken, {
        container: ".container"
      });
    </script>
  </body>
</html>
```

## Demo

### File Selection Demo

<iframe title="Box File Picker" />

### Folder Selection Demo

<iframe title="Box Folder Picker" />

### File Selection + Preview Demo

<iframe title="Box File Picker + Box Preview" />

### File Selection as a popup

<iframe title="Box File Picker and Uploader as popups" />

<Info>
  **Access Token**

  These demos may not fully function until you provide a valid access token. For
  testing purposes, you can use your temporary developer token. This will need
  to be updated under the JS tab in the demo.
</Info>

## API

```js theme={null}
const { FilePicker } = Box;
const filePicker = new FilePicker();

/**
 * Shows the file selection.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} folderId - The root folder id.
 * @param {String} accessToken - The API access token.
 * @param {Object|void} [options] - Optional options.
 * @return {void}
 */
filePicker.show(folderId, accessToken, options);

/**
 * Hides the file picker, removes all event listeners, and clears out the HTML.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
filePicker.hide();

/**
 * Clears out the internal in-memory cache for the file picker. This forces
 * items to be reloaded from the API.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
filePicker.clearCache();

/**
 * Adds an event listener to the file picker. Listeners should be added before
 * calling show() so no events are missed.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} eventName - Name of the event.
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function.
 * @return {void}
 */
filePicker.addListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes an event listener from the file picker.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} eventName - Name of the event.
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function.
 * @return {void}
 */
filePicker.removeListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes all event listeners from the file picker.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
filePicker.removeAllListeners();
```

### Parameters

| Parameter     | Type   | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------- | ------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`    | String | Box Folder ID. This will be the ID of the folder from which you want the content to be picked. If you want to use the Box All Files folder, then use `0` as the `folderId`.      |
| `accessToken` | String | Box API access token to use. This should have read/write access to the folder above. The value passed in for the token is assumed to never expire while the explorer is visible. |
| `options`     | Object | Optional options. See below for details. For example: `contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, TOKEN, {canDelete: false})` would be used to hide the delete option.                      |

### Options

| Parameter             | Type            | Default                                                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |   |
| --------------------- | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | - |
| `container`           | `String`        | `document.body`                                            | CSS selector of the container in which the content picker should be placed. Calling hide() will clear out this container.                                                                                                                                                                                                      |   |
| `sortBy`              | `String`        | `name`                                                     | The initial sort by option for the content list. Value should be either name or `date`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |   |
| `sortDirection`       | `String`        | `ASC`                                                      | The initial sort direction option for the content list. Value should be either `ASC` or `DESC`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |   |
| `logoUrl`             | `String`        |                                                            | URL of custom logo to show in header. If this value is the string box then the box logo will show.                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |   |
| `extensions`          | `Array<string>` | `[]`                                                       | Array of file extensions to be allowed for selection. for example `['doc', 'ppt']`. Applicable only to the File Picker and not the Folder Picker. If any extensions are provided, only those will have the ability to be selected. An empty array signifies all the file extensions are allowed for selection.                 |   |
| `maxSelectable`       | `Number`        | `Infinity`                                                 | Number of files or folders that can be selected. Specify 1 if you want only 1 file or folder selected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |   |
| `canUpload`           | `Boolean`       | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the upload option if this is set to `false`. Hiding the option alone will not prevent uploading unless the current folder permissions also set `can_upload` to `false`. This option has no effect when the folder permission `can_upload` is set to `false`.                                                    |   |
| `canSetShareAccess`   | `Boolean`       | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the sharing drop down select if set to `false`. Hiding the select drop down alone will not prevent changing the share access unless the folder item permissions also set `can_set_share_access` to `false`. This option has no effect when the folder item permission `can_set_share_access` is set to `false`. |   |
| `canCreateNewFolder`  | `Boolean`       | `true`                                                     | Visually hides the create new folder option. Hiding the option alone will not prevent creating a new folder unless the folder item permissions also set `can_upload` to `false`. This option has no effect when the folder item permission `can_upload` is set to false.                                                       |   |
| `sharedLink`          | `String`        |                                                            | Shared link URL, required if folder is shared and the access token doesn't belong to an owner or collaborator of the file.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |   |
| `sharedLinkPassword`  | `String`        |                                                            | Shared link password, required if shared link has a password.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |   |
| `modal`               | `Object`        |                                                            | When the modal attribute is specified, then the content pickers will not be created in-place. Instead a button will be created in the container and clicking this button will launch the content picker in a modal popup.                                                                                                      |   |
| `size`                | `String`        | `undefined`                                                | Indicates to the content picker to fit within a `small` or `large` width container. Value can be absent or one of `small` or `large`. If absent the UI Element will adapt to its container and automatically switch between small width or large width mode.                                                                   |   |
| `isTouch`             | Boolean         | Defaults to the browser and device's default touch support | Indicates to the content explorer that it's is being rendered on a touch enabled device.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |   |
| `autoFocus`           | `Boolean`       | `false`                                                    | When set to `true`, the item grid will get focus on initial load.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |   |
| `defaultView`         | String          | `files`                                                    | Value should either be `files` or `recents`. When set to `recents`, by default you will see recent items instead of the regular file/folder structure.                                                                                                                                                                         |   |
| `chooseButtonLabel`   | `String`        |                                                            | String to re-label the Choose button                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |   |
| `cancelButtonLabel`   | `String`        |                                                            | String to re-label the Cancel button                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |   |
| `requestInterceptor`  | `Function`      |                                                            | Function to intercept requests. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.                                    |   |
| `responseInterceptor` | `Function`      |                                                            | Function to intercept responses. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.                                   |   |

### Modal Options

| Parameter          | Type     | Default         | Description                                   |
| ------------------ | -------- | --------------- | --------------------------------------------- |
| `buttonLabel`      | `String` |                 | Label for the button                          |
| `buttonClassName`  | `String` | Box Blue Button | CSS class to decorate the button              |
| `modalClassName`   | `String` |                 | CSS class to decorate the modal popup content |
| `overlayClassName` | `String` |                 | CSS class to decorate the modal popup overlay |

### Events

| Event Name | Event Data                          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ---------- | ----------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `choose`   | `Array<File \| Web Link \| Folder>` | Will be fired when the Choose button is pressed. Event data will be an array of Folder Object or File Object or Web Link object depending upon whether it was a file selection or folder selection. |
| `cancel`   |                                     | Will be fired when the Cancel button is pressed                                                                                                                                                     |

## Keyboard Shortcuts

When the item grid has focus, either manually by clicking on it or
programmatically via javascript or via the above mentioned `autoFocus` prop, the
following keyboard shortcuts will work if their corresponding operations are
applicable and allowed.

| Key                     | Action                             |
| ----------------------- | ---------------------------------- |
| `Arrow Up`              | Previous item row                  |
| `Arrow Down`            | Next item row                      |
| `Ctrl/Cmd + Arrow Up`   | First item row                     |
| `Ctrl/Cmd + Arrow Down` | Last item row                      |
| `/`                     | Search                             |
| `Shift + X`             | Select an item row                 |
| `Enter`                 | Open the selected item             |
| `g then f`              | Navigates to the root folder       |
| `g then u`              | Upload to the current folder       |
| `g then b`              | Focuses the root folder breadcrumb |
| `g then s`              | Shows the selected items           |
| `g then x`              | Cancel                             |
| `g then c`              | Choose                             |
| `g then r`              | Recent items                       |

## Scopes

If your application requires the end user to only be able to access a subset of
the Content Picker functionality, you can use <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link> to
appropriately downscope the Access Token to a resulting token that has the
desired set of permissions, and can thus, be securely passed to the end user
client initializing the Content Picker.

Below are a set of UI Element-specific scopes to go alongside Downscoping. These
allow developers to enable/disable UI controls on the Content Picker by
configuring the appropriate scopes on the downscoped token. To learn
more, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Dedicated Scopes for Box UI Elements</Link>.

| Scope Name    | Permissions granted                                                              |
| ------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `base_picker` | Allows access to content in the folder tree based on user/file/token permissions |

### Feature Scopes

| Scope Name    | Permissions granted                                                                  |
| ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `item_share`  | Allows sharing of resource specified under "resource" of the Token Exchange request. |
| `item_upload` | Allows upload in the content picker                                                  |

### Sample Scenarios

| Scenario                                                                                                                                         | Scopes                                       |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------- |
| User wants to only navigate a folder structure and pick a file / folder                                                                          | `base_picker`                                |
| User wants to navigate a folder structure, pick a file / folder and also set access level                                                        | `base_picker` + `item_share`                 |
| User wants to navigate a folder structure, pick a file / folder and also upload a file / folder                                                  | `base_picker` + `item_upload`                |
| User should be able to navigate a folder structure and pick a file / folder, upload a file / folder, and also set access level for a file/folder | `base_picker` + `item_share` + `item_upload` |

## Custom actions

You can expand the actions in the **More Options** menu for files and folders in Content Explorer and Content Picker. Your custom options show when user clicks the ellipsis button.

To customize the **More Options** menu, pass an array of custom actions to `itemActions`.

```js theme={null}
contentExplorer.show(configData.FOLDER_ID, configData.ACCESS_TOKEN, {
    container: ".container",
    itemActions: customActions,
});
```

The array can include multiple actions. The action object should include the `label`, and the `onAction` callback function. You can filter the custom actions to appear only on a specific item `type`, by passing the `file` or `folder` value. The `filter` value is used for advanced filtering, for example by a specific file extension:

```js theme={null}
const customActions = [
    {
        label: "Preview in New Window",
        onAction: (item) => alert('action ' + item),
        type: 'file',
    },
    {
        label: "Open in Box.com",
        onAction: (item) => window.open("https://app.box.com"),
    },
    {
        label: "Export",
        onAction: (item) => console.log('action ' + item),
        filter: (item) => item.extension?.toLowerCase() === 'pdf',
    },
];
```

See the implemented examples in CodePen:

<iframe title="Box custom icons" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Preview
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box Content Preview UI Element allows developers to embed high
quality and interactive previews of Box files in their desktop or mobile web
application.

## Content Preview Element vs Content Preview Library

The Content Preview UI Element works differently from the other UI Elements, as the React component is a wrapper for the [Box Content Preview library][previewlib]. It also requires passing a language (defaults to `en-US`) since the preview library bundles are localized.

```js theme={null}
var ContentPreview = require("./ContentPreview").default;

<IntlProvider locale="en">
  <ContentPreview
    contentSidebarProps={{
      detailsSidebarProps: {
        hasAccessStats: true,
        hasClassification: true,
        hasNotices: true,
        hasProperties: true,
        hasRetentionPolicy: true,
        hasVersions: true,
      },
      features: FEATURES,
      hasActivityFeed: true,
      hasMetadata: true,
      hasSkills: true,
      hasVersions: true,
    }}
    hasHeader={true}
    features={FEATURES}
    fileId={FILE_ID}
    token={TOKEN}
    {...PROPS}
  />
</IntlProvider>;
```

The Content Preview Library fetches information
about the file and its converted representations
through the Box API, chooses the appropriate
viewer for the file type, dynamically loads
the necessary static assets and file representations,
and finally renders the file.

This UI Element also allows loading previews of
multiple files in the same container and exposes
arrows to navigate between those files.
It powers Preview in the main Box web application
as well as the <Link href="/reference/resources/file--full/#param-expiring_embed_link">expiring embed link object</Link>.

## Installation

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Learn how to install</Link> Box UI elements
either through NPM or the Box CDN.

## Authentication

UI Elements are designed in an authentication-agnostic way so whether
they will work for Managed Box Users and non-Box users (App Users). The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">token</Link> for authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

## Supported File Types

Box Content Preview supports 120+ file types, including most document and image
formats, HD video, 3D models, 360-degree images, and 360-degree videos. You can
find the full list of supported file types [here][filetypes].

<Warning>
  Note that where supported file types contain references to other
  objects, for example `DWG` files, those references are not supported in the
  Box preview. A notice will be displayed to all end users viewing a DWG file
  that contains unsupported references letting them know to take alternate steps
  to complete their workflow.
</Warning>

## Demo

Use the navigation arrows to preview different file types.

<iframe title="Box Content Preview Demo" />

## API

```js theme={null}
const { Preview } = Box;
const preview = new Preview();

/**
 * Shows a preview.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {string} fileId - File ID to preview
 * @param {string} accessToken - Box API access token
 * @param {Object} [options] - Options
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.show(fileId, accessToken, options);

/**
 * Hides the preview.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.hide();

/**
 * Prints the current file, if printable.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.print();

/**
 * Downloads the current file.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.download();

/**
 * Resizes the current preview, if applicable. This function only needs to
 * be called when preview's viewport has changed while the window has not.
 * If the window is resizing, then preview will automatically resize itself.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.resize();

/**
 * Adds an event listener to the preview. Listeners should be added
 * before calling show() so no events are missed.
 *
 * @param {string} eventName - Name of the event
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.addListener();

/**
 * Removes an event listener from the preview.
 *
 * @param {string} eventName - Name of the event
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.removeListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes all event listeners from the preview.
 *
 * @return {void}
 */
preview.removeAllListeners();
```

### Parameters

| Parameter     | Type   | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------- | ------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `fileId`      | String | Box File ID.                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `accessToken` | String | Box API access token to use. This should have read/write access to the folder above. The value passed in for the token is assumed to never expire while the explorer is visible. |
| `options`     | Object | Optional options. See below for details. For example: `contentExplorer.show(FOLDER_ID, TOKEN, {canDelete: false})` would be used to hide the delete option.                      |

### Options

| Parameter            | Type    | Default         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| -------------------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `container`          | String  | `document.body` | CSS selector of the container in which Preview should be placed                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `sharedLink`         | String  |                 | Shared link URL, required if file is shared and the access token doesn't belong to an owner or collaborator of the file                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `sharedLinkPassword` | String  |                 | Shared link password, required if shared link has a password                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `collection`         | Array   |                 | List of file IDs to preview over. When used, this will show previews of multiple files within the same container and expose arrows to navigate between those files. Note that `FILE_ID` needs to be included in this list and that the SDK doesn't support collections with files that require a shared link or password. |
| `header`             | String  | `light`         | Values that control header visibility and background color. Use `none` for no header, `light` for a light header and background, and `dark` for a dark header and background                                                                                                                                              |
| `logoUrl`            | String  |                 | URL of custom logo to show in header. If this value is the string box then the box logo will show                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `showAnnotations`    | Boolean | `false`         | Whether annotation button in header and annotations on content are shown                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `showDownload`       | Boolean | `false`         | Whether download button is shown in header. Will also control print button visibility in viewers that support print. Note that this option will not override download permissions on the access token.                                                                                                                    |

## Token Generator Function

The Preview library optionally takes a token generator function instead of a
string token. Using a token generator function allows you to dynamically
determine what tokens Preview should use. For example, you can pass in different
access tokens for each file or make sure your token is refreshed and valid
before showing a preview. The token generator function should return a promise
that resolves in either a single string token that applies to all of the files
being previewed or a map of typed file IDs to access token for those files.

```js theme={null}
// Example token generator function that resolves to a single access token
var singleTokenGenerator = function () {
  return someApi.getToken().then(function (data) {
    return data.token;
  });
};

// Example token generator function that resolves to a map of tokens
var mapTokenGenerator = function () {
  return Promise.resolve({
    file_1234: "some_token_abcd",
    file_2345: "some_token_bcde",
  });
};
```

## Events

The preview object exposes `addListener` and `removeListener` for binding to
events. Event listeners should be bound before `show()` is called, otherwise
events can be missed.

```js theme={null}
const listener = (value) => {
    // Do something with value
};

// Attach listener before calling show otherwise events can be missed
var preview = new Box.Preview();
preview.addListener(EVENTNAME, listener);

// Show a preview
preview.show(...);

// Remove listener when needed
preview.removeListener(EVENTNAME, listener);
```

`EVENTNAME` can be one of the following:

* `viewer` event will be triggered when we have the viewer instance first available. This will be the same object that is also a property included in the `load` event. Preview triggers this event before `load` so that clients can attach their listeners before the `load` event is triggered.

* `load` event will be triggered on every preview load when `show()` is called or if inter-preview navigation occurs. The event data will contain:

  ```js theme={null}
  error: 'message', // Error message if any error occurred while loading
  viewer: {...},    // Instance of the current viewer object if no error occurred
  metrics: {...},   // Performance metrics
  file: {...}       // Box file object with properties defined in file.js
  ```

* `navigate` event will be triggered when navigation happens. The event includes the file ID of the file being navigated to, and this event will trigger before `load`.

* `notification` event will be triggered when either the preview wrapper or one of the viewers wants to notify something like a warning or non-fatal error. The event data will contain:

  ```js theme={null}
  message: 'message', // Message to show
  type: 'warning'    // 'warning', 'notice', or 'error'
  ```

* `viewerevent` Each viewer will trigger its own sets of events. For example, the Image viewer will trigger `rotate` or `resize`, etc. while other viewers may trigger another set of events. The preview wrapper will also re-emit events at the preview level, with event data containing:

  ```js theme={null}
  event: EVENTNAME,         // Event name
  data: DATA,               // Event data object
  viewerName: VIEWERNAME,   // Name of the viewer. See VIEWERNAME above
  fileId: fileId            // The file ID
  ```

### Example event usage

```js theme={null}
var preview = new Box.Preview();
preview.addListener("viewer", (viewer) => {
  viewer.addListener("rotate", () => {
    // Do something when a viewer rotates a preview
  });
});

preview.addListener("load", (data) => {
  const viewer = data.viewer;
  viewer.addListener("rotate", () => {
    // Do something when a viewer rotates a preview
  });
});

preview.addListener("viewerevent", (data) => {
  if (data.viewerName === "Image") {
    if (data.event === "rotate") {
      // Do something when an image preview is rotated
    }
  } else if (data.viewerName === "Image360") {
    if (data.event === "rotate") {
      // Do something different when a 360-degree image is rotated
    }
  } else {
  }
});

preview.addListener("rotate", (data) => {
  if (data.viewerName === "Image") {
    // Do something when an image preview is rotated
  } else if (data.viewerName === "Image360") {
    // Do something different when a 360-degree image is rotated
  } else {
  }
});
```

## Annotations

You can enable V4 <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/annotations.md">annotations</Link> in content preview. New
annotations will sync in real time.

To add V4 annotations to preview:

1. Run `npm i box-annotations@latest`to install [box annotations][annotations].

<Warning>
  Box annotations version should be at least major version 4 and up.
</Warning>

2. Run `npm i box-ui-elements@16.0.0` to install [BUIE][buie] version with annotation related change.

<Warning>
  Box UI elements should be the lowest working version that contains
  fully working V4 annotations.
</Warning>

3. Import content preview and box annotations into your application:

   ```js theme={null}
   import boxAnnotations from "https://cdn.skypack.dev/box-annotations@latest";

   var file_id = "YOUR FILE ID";
   var accessToken = "YOUR ACCESS TOKEN";

   /* Enable annotations in sidebar */
   var contentSidebarProps = {
     hasActivityFeed: true,
     features: {
       activityFeed: {
         annotations: {
           enabled: true,
         },
       },
     },
   };

   var options = {
     container: ".previewer",
     contentSidebarProps: contentSidebarProps,

     /* Enable annotations in preview */
     enableAnnotationsDiscoverability: true,
     enableAnnotationsImageDiscoverability: true,
     showAnnotations: true,
     showAnnotationsControls: true,
     showAnnotationsDrawingCreate: true,
   };

   /* BoxAnnotations */
   var annotations = new BoxAnnotations();

   /* Box Preview */
   var contentPreviewer = new Box.ContentPreview();

   /* Set annotation into previewer */
   options["boxAnnotations"] = annotations;

   /* Show previewer */
   contentPreviewer.show(file_id, accessToken, options);
   ```

<Warning>
  The property `features: { activityFeed: { annotations: { enabled: true  } } } }
    ` is subject to change in the future.
</Warning>

```html theme={null}
<link href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/16.0.0/en-US/preview.css" rel="stylesheet" type="text/css"></link>
<script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/16.0.0/en-US/preview.js"></script>

<style>
  .previewer {
    border: 1px solid #eee;
    height: 500px;
    width: 100%;
  }
</style>

<div class="previewer"></div>

<script type="module" src="./script.js"></script>
```

## Box AI for UI Elements

Box AI for UI Elements enhances the Content Preview UI Element
with additional features, allowing the developers
to add the Box Q\&A AI functionality to their platform app.
Enriched with Box AI features, the Preview UI element brings the following functionality:

* Q\&A and document summaries.
* A **clear conversation** button that resets the conversation with Box AI.
* Citations that appear below the answer if included in the answer.
* Formatting support that allows requesting Markdown-formatted response, including bullet points or tables.
* Question history that allows referencing previous context to achieve the best response possible. The question history is kept only during the current session.
* Suggested questions that appear at the top of the chat by default to assist with the conversation.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box UI Element with Box AI options enabled" />
</Frame>

### Enable Box AI for UI Elements

To enable the Box AI modal in content preview header, follow these steps:

1. Make sure your Node and React versions are `18.x` or higher.
2. Download the [npm package that contains Box AI for UI Elements][aipackage] or directly from <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Box CDN</Link>.
3. Install the peer dependencies:

   * [`box-ai-content-answers`][box-ai-content-answers]
   * [`blueprint-web`][blueprint-web]
   * [`blueprint-web-assets`][blueprint-web-assets]

   To do so, run the following command:

   ```sh theme={null}
   npx install-peerdeps box-ui-elements@^22.0.0
   ```

### Using JavaScript

To enable Box AI features, pass the following:

* `hasHeader` prop set to `true`,
* `contentAnswersProps` prop. The fields `show`, `isCitationsEnabled`, `isMarkdownEnabled`, `isResetChatEnabled` and `suggestedQuestions` are included by default.

```js theme={null}
const preview = new Box.Preview();
const suggestedQuestions = [
 {
   label: 'What are the key takeaways?',
   prompt: 'What are the key takeaways?',
   id: '1234',
 },
 {
   label: 'Summarize this document',
   prompt: 'Summarize this document',
   id: '5678',
 },
];

preview.show(<FILE_ID>, <TOKEN>, {
    container: '.preview-container',
    contentAnswersProps={
      show: true,
      isCitationsEnabled: true,
      isMarkdownEnabled: true,
      isResetChatEnabled: true,
      suggestedQuestions
    }
    hasHeader: true,
});
```

### Using React component

You can also add Box AI element to a header in a React component.
To do so, add:

* `hasHeader` prop set to `true`,
* `contentAnswersProps` prop. The fields `show`, `isCitationsEnabled`, `isMarkdownEnabled`, `isResetChatEnabled` and `suggestedQuestions` are included by default.

<Note>
  To localize the `suggestedQuestions` properly, make sure that the prompts are translated. The optional `label` property is for screen readers, while the `prompt` property is the text displayed to the user in the AI modal.
</Note>

```js theme={null}
import ContentPreview from 'box-ui-elements/es/elements/content-preview';
import { IntlProvider } from "react-intl";

const suggestedQuestions = [
  {
    label: 'Key takeaways',
    prompt: 'What are the key takeaways from this document?',
    id: '1234',
  },
  {
    label: 'Summarize',
    prompt: 'Summarize this document',
    id: '5678',
  },
];

export default () => {
    // Storing variables in the front end is not secure.
    // You will want to grab this value from a database for production
    const TOKEN = process.env.REACT_APP_BOX_DEVELOPER_TOKEN
    const FILE_ID = process.env.REACT_APP_BOX_PREVIEW_FILE_ID
    return (
      <IntlProvider locale="en">
         <ContentPreview 
            contentAnswersProps={{
              show: true,
              isCitationsEnabled: true,
              isMarkdownEnabled: true,
              isResetChatEnabled: true,
              suggestedQuestions
            }}
            fileId={FILE_ID}
            token={TOKEN}
            hasHeader=true
         />
      </IntlProvider>
  );
};
```

You can further customize your apps using the following event listeners for Content Preview available with this release: `onAsk`, `onClearConversations`, and `onRequestClose`.

## Scopes

If your application requires the end user to only be able to access a subset of
the Content Preview functionality, you can use <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link> to
appropriately downscope the Access Token to a resulting token that has the
desired set of permissions, and can thus, be securely passed to the end user
client initializing the Content Preview.

Below is a set of UI Element-specific scopes to go alongside Downscoping. These
allow developers to enable/disable UI controls on the Content Preview by
configuring the appropriate scopes on the downscoped token. To learn
more, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Dedicated Scopes for Box UI Elements</Link>.

### Base Scope

| Scope Name     | Permissions granted                               |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------- |
| `base_preview` | Allows the user to preview the file, nothing else |

### Feature Scopes

| Scope Name             | Permissions granted                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `item_download`        | Allows downloading/printing the content from the generated preview                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `annotation_edit`      | Allows users to edit annotations (delete). Note: For highlight annotations to work, the text layer on the document needs to be enabled for the user. Text layer is disabled for all users that don't have download permissions on the file. To enable highlight annotations for a user, please ensure they have download permissions on the file. |
| `annotation_view_all`  | Allows users to view all users' annotations.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `annotation_view_self` | Allows users to view their own annotations only.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |

<Info>
  **Enable highlight annotations with scopes The highlight scope is not included**
  with `annotation_edit` and `annotation_view_all` scopes. The downscoped access
  token will need to include the `item_download` scope to enable highlighting.
</Info>

### Sample Scenarios

| Scenario                                                                                                                                                                       | Scopes                                                      |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------- |
| User should only be able to preview (not download/print, annotate)                                                                                                             | `base_preview`                                              |
| User should be able to preview, download and print                                                                                                                             | `base_preview` + `item_download`                            |
| User should be able to preview and view all annotations (not download, print or create annotations)                                                                            | `base_preview` + `annotation_view_all`                      |
| User should be able to preview, and create annotations but only view their own.                                                                                                | `base_preview` + `annotation_view_self` + `annotation_edit` |
| User should be able to preview, edit annotations and view all annotations                                                                                                      | `base_preview` + `annotation_view_all` + `annotation_edit`  |
| User should be able to preview and only view their own annotations but not add/delete (ex: after review period has expired, all documents need to be stored in read only mode) | `base_preview` + `annotation_view_self`                     |

[filetypes]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043695794-Viewing-Different-File-Types-Supported-in-Box-Content-Preview

[annotations]: https://github.com/box/box-annotations

[buie]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases/tag/v16.0.0

[previewlib]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview

[aipackage]: https://www.npmjs.com/package/box-ui-elements/v/22.0.0

[blueprint-web]: https://www.npmjs.com/package/@box/blueprint-web

[box-ai-content-answers]: https://www.npmjs.com/package/@box/box-ai-content-answers

[blueprint-web-assets]: https://www.npmjs.com/package/@box/blueprint-web-assets

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Dedicated Scopes
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/scopes



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

When working with Box UI Elements many developers have shown interest in being
able to implement their own permission model, different from [Access
Levels][acl] defined by Box.

<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link>, also known as Token Exchange, is our mechanism by
which developers can restrict the permissions on the Access Token to a more
granular level, allowing them to build out their own permissions model on Box
Platform.

## Scopes & UI Elements

To facilitate this process we've created a new set of API scopes that allow
developers to control which UI controls are available to end
users in applications leveraging UI Element.

The Box UI Element has been designed to respect the permission enforced via
these scopes, so UI controls are turned on or off automatically depending on
whether or not the token allows the corresponding functionality or not.

Another advantage of these new scopes is that since the tokens are scoped to the
precise set of operations that the application wants the end user to have access
to, a savvy end user won't have any more access directly through the API using
the token. This allows you to make your application more secure.

## Scope principles

The new scopes have been designed keeping the following fundamentals in mind:

* **All scopes should be modular and strictly additive:** So a developer can combine multiple scopes in a token exchange request to generate a token with the desired set of functionality. Also to avoid confusion, two scopes should never have the same permission.
* **Scopes should directly map to a specific action in the UI Element:** So adding this scope to the token enables the specific action. Since some actions can only be performed by specific UI Elements, some scopes may only be meaningfully applicable to those UI Elements.
* **Scope should contain the minimum set of permissions required to perform the corresponding action:** So even if some end-user of your application uses the token directly against the API, they can't gain access beyond what you intended them to provide through the UI Element.
* **Every UI Element should have a "base scope" that encapsulates all required permissions for the UI Element to functionally work:** Any fewer permissions on the token and the basic set of operations on the UI Element won't work. This scope should always be included in the Token Exchange request.

With that said, for every UI Element, we are adding two types of scopes:

### Base Scope

Every UI Element has a "base scope", which provides the least
set of permissions that are necessary for the UI Element to functionally work.
For this reason, this "base scope" must always be present in the token exchange
request. Since the base set of permissions for every UI Element to functionally
work may not be the same (Content Uploader UI Element doesn't require preview
permissions, for example), UI Elements may have their own respective base
scopes.

### Feature Scopes

In addition to the base scope, we also introduced
feature-level scopes. Upon pairing with base scopes, feature scopes enable
additional capabilities within your UI Element, and provide the user with
permissions to perform the actions prescribed by the feature scope(s) added to
their down-scoped token. As with base scopes, feature scopes too are mostly
different for every UI Element. Since feature scopes are strictly additive, you
can assume (unless noted otherwise in the documentation) that providing a user
with access to a scope only gives them permission to perform the corresponding
action and nothing else.

Now that you understand what Base Scopes and Feature Scopes are, refer to the
documentation for each of the UI Elements to learn more about their dedicated
scopes.

[acl]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Sidebar
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/sidebar



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box Content Sidebar UI Element allows developers to add support for viewing
file related metadata and Activity Feed (incl. versions,
comments and tasks) in their desktop or mobile web application.

## Installation

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Learn how to install</Link> Box UI elements
either through NPM or the Box CDN.

## Authentication

The UI Elements are designed in an authentication agnostic way so whether
you are using UI Elements for users who have Box accounts (Managed Users) or
non-Box accounts (App Users), UI Elements should work out of the box. The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a "token" to be passed in for
authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth
and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

## Sample HTML

```html theme={null}
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang="en-US">
  <head>
    <meta charset="utf-8" />
    <title>Box Content Sidebar</title>

    <!-- Latest version of the sidebar css for your locale -->
    <link
      rel="stylesheet"
      href="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/sidebar.css"
    />
  </head>
  <body>
    <div class="container" style="height:600px"></div>
    <!-- Latest version of the sidebar js for your locale -->
    <script src="https://cdn01.boxcdn.net/platform/elements/{VERSION}/en-US/sidebar.js"></script>
    <script>
      var fileId = "123";
      var accessToken = "abc";

      // At least one of the sub-sidebars (details, activity feed, skills, metadata) need to be turned on for something to render. Details is iteself further divided into notices, properties, access stats and versions, one of which need to be enabled for the details sidebar to render.
      var sidebar = new Box.ContentSidebar();
      sidebar.show(fileId, accessToken, {
        container: ".container",
        detailsSidebarProps: {
          hasNotices: true,
          hasProperties: true,
          hasAccessStats: true,
          hasVersions: true
        },
        hasActivityFeed: true,
        hasSkills: true,
        hasMetadata: true
      });
    </script>
  </body>
</html>
```

## Demo

### Stand-alone Sidebar

<iframe title="Box Content Sidebar" />

### Sidebar with Content Preview

<iframe title="Box Content Preview with Sidebar" />

### Sidebar with Content Explorer

<iframe title="Box Content Explorer with Sidebar" />

## API

```js theme={null}
const { ContentSidebar } = Box;
const sidebar = new ContentSidebar();

/**
 * Shows the file selection.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} fileId - The file id.
 * @param {String} token - The API access token.
 * @param {Object|void} [options] - Optional options.
 * @return {void}
 */
sidebar.show(fileId, token, options);

/**
 * Hides the sidebar, removes all event listeners, and clears out the HTML.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
sidebar.hide();

/**
 * Clears out the internal in-memory cache for the sidebar. This forces
 * items to be reloaded from the API.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
sidebar.clearCache();

/**
 * Adds an event listener to the sidebar. Listeners should be added before
 * calling show() so no events are missed.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} eventName - Name of the event.
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function.
 * @return {void}
 */
sidebar.addListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes an event listener from the sidebar.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} eventName - Name of the event.
 * @param {Function} listener - Callback function.
 * @return {void}
 */
sidebar.removeListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes all event listeners from the sidebar.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
sidebar.removeAllListeners();
```

### Parameters

| Parameter | Type   | Description                                                                                                                                                              |
| --------- | ------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `fileId`  | String | Box File ID. This will be the ID of the file for which you want the sidebar.                                                                                             |
| `token`   | String | Box API access token to use. It can have read/write access to the file above. The value passed in for the token is assumed to never expire while the sidebar is visible. |
| `options` | Object | Additional options. For example, `sidebar.show(FILE_ID, TOKEN, {hasProperties: true})` would be used to show file properties in the sidebar.                             |

### Options

| Parameter             | Type     | Default         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| --------------------- | -------- | --------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `container`           | String   | `document.body` | CSS selector of the container in which the content sidebar should be placed. Calling `hide()` will clear out this container.                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `hasActivityFeed`     | Boolean  | `false`         | Set to true to show the activity feed that includes versions, comments and tasks.                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `hasMetadata`         | Boolean  | `false`         | Set to true to show box metadata for the file.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `hasSkills`           | Boolean  | `false`         | Set to true to show the file skills data.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `detailsSidebarProps` | Object   | `{}`            | See section below.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `requestInterceptor`  | Function |                 | Function to intercept requests. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.  |
| `responseInterceptor` | Function |                 | Function to intercept responses. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>. |

### `detailsSidebarProps`

| Parameter        | Type    | Default | Description                                                      |
| ---------------- | ------- | ------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `hasProperties`  | Boolean | `false` | Set to true to show file properties in the details sidebar.      |
| `hasAccessStats` | Boolean | `false` | Set to true to show file access stats in the details sidebar.    |
| `hasVersions`    | Boolean | `false` | Set to true to show file versions in the details sidebar.        |
| `hasNotices`     | Boolean | `false` | Set to true to show file related notices in the details sidebar. |

## Scopes

If your application requires the end user to only be able to access a subset of
the Content Sidebar's functionality, you can use <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link> to
appropriately downscope the Access Token to a resulting token that has the
desired set of permissions, and can thus, be securely passed to the end user
client initializing the Content Sidebar.

Below are a set of UI Element-specific scopes to go alongside Downscoping. These
allow developers to enable/disable UI controls on the Content Sidebar by
configuring the appropriate scopes on the downscoped token. To learn
more, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Dedicated Scopes for Box UI Elements</Link>.

### Base Scope

| Scope Name     | Permissions granted                                            |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `base_sidebar` | Allows the user to get basic file info needed for the sidebar. |

### Feature Scopes

| Scope Name     | Permissions granted                     |
| -------------- | --------------------------------------- |
| `item_comment` | Allows adding and editing comments.     |
| `item_rename`  | Allows editing of file description.     |
| `item_upload`  | Allows editing of file metadata.        |
| `item_task`    | Allows creating and resolving of tasks. |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Theming & styling for Box UI Elements
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/theming-styling



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

With theming & styling for Box UI Elements you can customize the look
of the embedded Box component to your enterprise's requirements.

<Note>
  As of now, [theming & styling][blog] is available for Content
  Explorer and Content Uploader.
</Note>

## How to start

Add the selected Box component to your application. The default Box theme is applied.

## Customization

Box uses <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/ui-elements-design-tokens">design tokens</Link> for the customization purposes.

<Note>
  Design tokens are named entities that store specific visual attributes, such
  as colors, spacing, typography, scale, and many more.
  They are used instead of hard-coded values to simplify sharing design
  properties across platforms, tools, and components.
</Note>

You can change the following elements in your embedded Box component.

### Colors

Customize:

* global color palette - select the primary, secondary, and accent colors
* state colors - select color for states such as hover, focus, active, disabled
* component-specific colors - for example, you can select different colors for your buttons depending on their type

- gradients - choose and adjust a gradient as your background or other components
- opacity - adjust the opacity of the overlay effects for Box Modals and side panels

### Typography

Customize:

* text decoration - underline, strikethrough, letter spacing
* line heights and paragraph spacing

### Border, radius

Choose:

* border styling - width, styles, and colors
* border radius

### Spacing

Choose:

* global spacing
* component-specific spacing
* component-specific alignment and distribution, for example justify-content

### Shadows and elevation

Define:

* shadow presets
* custom shadows

### Interactive states

Customize:

* hover, active, focus, disabled, and error states - visual effect such as changed background color
* transitions and animations

### Component-level overrides

Customize text input, drop down, and checkboxes with individual color

### Icons

Style interactive icons such as buttons or drop downs.

<Note>
  To replace non-interactive icons such as file or folder icons with your custom ones, use inline SVGs in CSS.
  To change non-interactive icons color, height, and width, use CSS.
</Note>

See the implemented examples of custom icons in CodePen:

<iframe title="Box custom icons" />

### Miscellaneous

Style:

* help text and labels
* tool tips

## Demo

<iframe title="Box theming branding" />

[explorer]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer

[uploader]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader

[blog]: https://medium.com/@stefaniuk.olga/b4a86518d5ca

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# UI Elements design tokens
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/ui-elements-design-tokens



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This table shows all the design tokens you can use for <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/theming-styling">theming and styling</Link> purposes. Provided default values and descriptions give clarity and guidance for implementation.

## Token structure

There are two ways to provide tokens to the theme object in Content Explorer:
flatten structure using full token names and nested structure using shortened
names.
The latter allows you to group tokens, which might improve the readability of your customization, but both produce the same results.

### Example

Flatten structure:

```js theme={null}
const theme = {
    tokens: {
        "body-default-font-size": "14px",
        "body-default-font-weight": "400"
        "body-default-text-decoration": "none",
        "body-default-bold-line-height": "20px",
    }
};
```

Nested structure:

```js theme={null}
const theme = {
    tokens: {
        Body: {
            Default: {
                "font-size": "14px",
                "font-weight": "400",
                "text-decoration": "none",
            }
            "Default Bold": {
                "line-height": "20px",
            }
        }
    }
};
```

## Border colors

<Note>
  You can pass any CSS color value, like hexadecimal colors, RGB, cross-browser color names, and so on.
</Note>

| Token                                   | Default value | Description                                               |
| --------------------------------------- | ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- |
| `border-checkbox-border`                | `#6f6f6f`     | Default border color for checkboxes.                      |
| `border-checkbox-border-hover`          | `#4e4e4e`     | Border color when hovering over checkboxes.               |
| `border-checkbox-border-selected`       | `#0061d5`     | Border color for selected checkboxes.                     |
| `border-checkbox-border-selected-hover` | `#2079e3`     | Border color when hovering over selected checkboxes.      |
| `border-cta-border-outline`             | `#000000`     | Border for secondary buttons with transparent background. |
| `border-cta-border-outline-disabled`    | `#646464`     | Border for disabled outline buttons.                      |
| `border-cta-border-outline-hover`       | `#000000`     | Border for outline buttons on hover.                      |
| `border-cta-border-outline-pressed`     | `#000000`     | Border for outline buttons when pressed.                  |
| `border-cta-border-secondary`           | `#bcbcbc`     | Border for secondary buttons.                             |
| `border-cta-border-secondary-disabled`  | `#e8e8e8`     | Border for disabled secondary buttons.                    |
| `border-cta-border-secondary-hover`     | `#bcbcbc`     | Border for secondary buttons on hover.                    |
| `border-cta-border-secondary-pressed`   | `#bcbcbc`     | Border for secondary buttons when pressed.                |
| `border-divider-border`                 | `#e8e8e8`     | Horizontal line separators.                               |
| `border-dropdown-border`                | `#bcbcbc`     | Border for dropdown menus.                                |
| `border-gridthumbnail-border`           | `#e8e8e8`     | Border for item (file/folder) thumbnails in grid view.    |
| `border-input-border`                   | `#909090`     | Border for text inputs.                                   |
| `border-input-border-error`             | `#ed3757`     | Border for text inputs with errors.                       |
| `border-input-border-focus`             | `#2486fc`     | Border for focused text inputs.                           |
| `border-input-border-hover`             | `#6f6f6f`     | Border for text inputs on hover.                          |
| `border-search-border`                  | `#f4f4f4`     | Border for search inputs.                                 |
| `border-search-border-hover`            | `#6f6f6f`     | Border for search inputs on hover.                        |
| `border-switch-border`                  | `#bcbcbc`     | Border for toggle switches.                               |
| `border-switch-border-hover`            | `#bcbcbc`     | Border for toggle switches on hover.                      |
| `border-tooltip-border-error`           | `#f69bab`     | Border for error tool tips.                               |

## Icon colors

<Note>
  You can only style interactive icons such as buttons or drop down.
</Note>

| Token                   | Default value | Description                              |
| ----------------------- | ------------- | ---------------------------------------- |
| `icon-cta-icon`         | `#6f6f6f`     | Default color for icons in buttons.      |
| `icon-cta-icon-hover`   | `#222222`     | Color for icons in buttons on hover.     |
| `icon-cta-icon-pressed` | `#222222`     | Color for icons in buttons when pressed. |

## Outline colors

| Token                    | Default value | Description                               |
| ------------------------ | ------------- | ----------------------------------------- |
| `outline-focus-on-dark`  | `#ffffff`     | Focus outline color on dark backgrounds.  |
| `outline-focus-on-light` | `#2486fc`     | Focus outline color on light backgrounds. |

## Surface colors

| Token                                      | Default value         | Description                                                   |
| ------------------------------------------ | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `surface-checkbox-surface`                 | `#ffffff`             | Background color for checkboxes.                              |
| `surface-checkbox-surface-hover`           | `#ffffff`             | Background color for checkboxes on hover.                     |
| `surface-checkbox-surface-selected`        | `#0061d5`             | Background color for selected checkboxes.                     |
| `surface-checkbox-surface-selected-hover`  | `#2079e3`             | Background color for selected checkboxes on hover.            |
| `surface-cta-surface-icon`                 | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0)`    | Background for icon buttons.                                  |
| `surface-cta-surface-icon-disabled`        | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0)`    | Background for disabled icon buttons.                         |
| `surface-cta-surface-icon-hover`           | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.04)` | Background for icon buttons on hover.                         |
| `surface-cta-surface-icon-pressed`         | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.08)` | Background for icon buttons when pressed.                     |
| `surface-cta-surface-outline`              | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0)`    | Background for secondary buttons with transparent background. |
| `surface-cta-surface-outline-hover`        | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.04)` | Background for outline buttons on hover.                      |
| `surface-cta-surface-outline-pressed`      | `rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.08)` | Background for outline buttons when pressed.                  |
| `surface-cta-surface-secondary`            | `#ffffff`             | Background for secondary buttons.                             |
| `surface-cta-surface-secondary-hover`      | `#f4f4f4`             | Background for secondary buttons on hover.                    |
| `surface-cta-surface-secondary-pressed`    | `#e8e8e8`             | Background for secondary buttons when pressed.                |
| `surface-cta-surface-tertiary`             | `#ffffff`             | Background for link styled buttons.                           |
| `surface-cta-surface-tertiary-hover`       | `#f4f4f4`             | Background for link styled buttons on hover.                  |
| `surface-cta-surface-tertiary-pressed`     | `#e8e8e8`             | Background for link styled buttons when pressed.              |
| `surface-dropdown-surface`                 | `#ffffff`             | Background for dropdown menus.                                |
| `surface-dropdown-surface-error`           | `#ffffff`             | Background for dropdown menus with errors.                    |
| `surface-dropdown-surface-focus`           | `#ffffff`             | Background for focused dropdown menus.                        |
| `surface-dropdown-surface-hover`           | `#ffffff`             | Background for dropdown menus on hover.                       |
| `surface-illustration-surface-box-neutral` | `#0061d5`             | Color for illustrations (detailed icons).                     |
| `surface-input-surface`                    | `#ffffff`             | Background for text inputs.                                   |
| `surface-input-surface-error`              | `#ffffff`             | Background for text inputs with errors.                       |
| `surface-input-surface-focus`              | `#ffffff`             | Background for focused text inputs.                           |
| `surface-input-surface-hover`              | `#ffffff`             | Background for text inputs on hover.                          |
| `surface-menu-surface`                     | `#ffffff`             | Background for dropdown menu options.                         |
| `surface-menu-surface-focus`               | `#f4f4f4`             | Background for focused menu items.                            |
| `surface-menu-surface-hover`               | `#f4f4f4`             | Background for menu items on hover.                           |
| `surface-search-surface`                   | `#f4f4f4`             | Background for search inputs.                                 |
| `surface-search-surface-focused`           | `#ffffff`             | Background for focused search inputs.                         |
| `surface-search-surface-hover`             | `#fbfbfb`             | Background for search inputs on hover.                        |
| `surface-sliderthumb-surface`              | `#0061d5`             | Color for range slider thumbs.                                |
| `surface-sliderthumb-surface-hover`        | `#2486fc`             | Color for range slider thumbs on hover.                       |
| `slidertrack-surface`                      | `#6f6f6f`             | Color for range slider tracks.                                |
| `surface-surface`                          | `#ffffff`             | General background color.                                     |
| `surface-surface-brand`                    | `#0061d5`             | Background for primary buttons.                               |
| `surface-surface-brand-disabled`           | `#0061d5`             | Background for disabled primary buttons.                      |
| `surface-surface-brand-hover`              | `#006ae9`             | Background for primary buttons on hover.                      |
| `surface-surface-brand-pressed`            | `#004eac`             | Background for primary buttons when pressed.                  |
| `surface-switch-surface`                   | `#ffffff`             | Background for toggle switches.                               |
| `surface-switch-surface-off`               | `#d3d3d3`             | Background for toggle switches in off state.                  |
| `surface-switch-surface-on`                | `#0061d5`             | Background for toggle switches in on state.                   |
| `surface-tooltip-surface`                  | `#4e4e4e`             | Background for tool tips.                                     |
| `surface-tooltip-surface-error`            | `#fdebee`             | Background for error tool tips.                               |

## Text colors

| Token                                | Default value | Description                                |
| ------------------------------------ | ------------- | ------------------------------------------ |
| `text-cta-link`                      | `#0061d5`     | Color for hyperlinks.                      |
| `text-cta-link-disabled`             | `#b2cff2`     | Color for disabled hyperlinks.             |
| `text-cta-link-hover`                | `#1d6bca`     | Color for hyperlinks on hover.             |
| `text-cta-link-pressed`              | `#2486fc`     | Color for hyperlinks when pressed.         |
| `text-text-error-on-light`           | `#d5324e`     | Error text color on light backgrounds.     |
| `text-text-on-dark`                  | `#ffffff`     | Text color on dark backgrounds.            |
| `text-text-on-light`                 | `#222222`     | Primary text color on light backgrounds.   |
| `text-text-on-light-secondary`       | `#6f6f6f`     | Secondary text color on light backgrounds. |
| `text-text-on-light-secondary-hover` | `#4e4e4e`     | Secondary text color on hover.             |

## Typography tokens

<Note>
  The comment in the table refers to pixels in calculation based on a root font-size of 16 px.
</Note>

| Token                                   | Default value                        | Description                               |
| --------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------- |
| `body-default-font-family`              | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for body text.                |
| `body-default-font-size`                | `0.875rem`                           | Font size for body text.                  |
| `body-default-font-weight`              | `400`                                | Font weight for body text.                |
| `body-default-letter-spacing`           | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for body text.             |
| `body-default-line-height`              | `1.25rem`                            | Line height for body text.                |
| `body-default-text-decoration`          | `none`                               | Text decoration for body text.            |
| `body-default-bold-font-family`         | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for bold body text.           |
| `body-default-bold-font-size`           | `0.875rem`                           | Font size for bold body text.             |
| `body-default-bold-font-weight`         | `700`                                | Font weight for bold body text.           |
| `body-default-bold-letter-spacing`      | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for bold body text.        |
| `body-default-bold-line-height`         | `1.25rem`                            | Line height for bold body text.           |
| `body-default-bold-text-decoration`     | `none`                               | Text decoration for bold body text.       |
| `body-default-semibold-font-family`     | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for semi-bold body text.      |
| `body-default-semibold-font-size`       | `0.875rem`                           | Font size for semi-bold body text.        |
| `body-default-semibold-font-weight`     | `600`                                | Font weight for semi-bold body text.      |
| `body-default-semibold-letter-spacing`  | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for semi-bold body text.   |
| `body-default-semibold-line-height`     | `1.25rem`                            | Line height for semi-bold body text.      |
| `body-default-semibold-text-decoration` | `none`                               | Text decoration for semi-bold body text.  |
| `body-large-font-family`                | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for large body text.          |
| `body-large-font-size`                  | `1rem`                               | Font size for large body text.            |
| `body-large-font-weight`                | `400`                                | Font weight for large body text.          |
| `body-large-letter-spacing`             | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for large body text.       |
| `body-large-line-height`                | `1.5rem`                             | Line height for large body text.          |
| `body-large-text-decoration`            | `none`                               | Text decoration for large body text.      |
| `body-large-bold-font-family`           | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for large bold body text.     |
| `body-large-bold-font-size`             | `1rem`                               | Font size for large bold body text.       |
| `body-large-bold-font-weight`           | `700`                                | Font weight for large bold body text.     |
| `body-large-bold-letter-spacing`        | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for large bold body text.  |
| `body-large-bold-line-height`           | `1.5rem`                             | Line height for large bold body text.     |
| `body-large-bold-text-decoration`       | `none`                               | Text decoration for large bold body text. |
| `caption-bold-font-family`              | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for bold captions.            |
| `caption-bold-font-size`                | `0.75rem`                            | Font size for bold captions.              |
| `caption-bold-font-weight`              | `700`                                | Font weight for bold captions.            |
| `caption-bold-letter-spacing`           | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for bold captions.         |
| `caption-bold-line-height`              | `0.875rem`                           | Line height for bold captions.            |
| `caption-bold-text-decoration`          | `none`                               | Text decoration for bold captions.        |
| `caption-default-font-family`           | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for captions.                 |
| `caption-default-font-size`             | `0.75rem`                            | Font size for captions.                   |
| `caption-default-font-weight`           | `400`                                | Font weight for captions.                 |
| `caption-default-letter-spacing`        | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for captions.              |
| `caption-default-line-height`           | `0.875rem`                           | Line height for captions.                 |
| `caption-default-text-decoration`       | `none`                               | Text decoration for captions.             |
| `label-bold-font-family`                | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for bold labels.              |
| `label-bold-font-size`                  | `0.625rem`                           | Font size for bold labels.                |
| `label-bold-font-weight`                | `700`                                | Font weight for bold labels.              |
| `label-bold-letter-spacing`             | `0.0375rem`                          | Letter spacing for bold labels.           |
| `label-bold-line-height`                | `1rem`                               | Line height for bold labels.              |
| `label-bold-text-decoration`            | `none`                               | Text decoration for bold labels.          |
| `label-default-font-family`             | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for labels.                   |
| `label-default-font-size`               | `0.625rem`                           | Font size for labels.                     |
| `label-default-font-weight`             | `400`                                | Font weight for labels.                   |
| `label-default-letter-spacing`          | `0.0375rem`                          | Letter spacing for labels.                |
| `label-default-line-height`             | `1rem`                               | Line height for labels.                   |
| `label-default-text-decoration`         | `none`                               | Text decoration for labels.               |
| `link-default-font-family`              | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for hyperlinks.               |
| `link-default-font-size`                | `0.875rem`                           | Font size for hyperlinks.                 |
| `link-default-font-weight`              | `400`                                | Font weight for hyperlinks.               |
| `link-default-letter-spacing`           | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for hyperlinks.            |
| `link-default-line-height`              | `1.25rem`                            | Line height for hyperlinks.               |
| `link-default-text-decoration`          | `underline`                          | Text decoration for hyperlinks.           |
| `notification-default-font-family`      | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for notifications.            |
| `notification-default-font-size`        | `0.5625rem`                          | Font size for notifications.              |
| `notification-default-font-weight`      | `700`                                | Font weight for notifications.            |
| `notification-default-letter-spacing`   | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for notifications.         |
| `notification-default-line-height`      | `0.75rem`                            | Line height for notifications.            |
| `notification-default-text-decoration`  | `none`                               | Text decoration for notifications.        |
| `title-large-font-family`               | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for large titles.             |
| `title-large-font-size`                 | `1.125rem`                           | Font size for large titles.               |
| `title-large-font-weight`               | `700`                                | Font weight for large titles.             |
| `title-large-letter-spacing`            | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for large titles.          |
| `title-large-line-height`               | `1.5rem`                             | Line height for large titles.             |
| `title-large-text-decoration`           | `none`                               | Text decoration for large titles.         |
| `title-medium-font-family`              | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for medium titles.            |
| `title-medium-font-size`                | `1rem`                               | Font size for medium titles.              |
| `title-medium-font-weight`              | `700`                                | Font weight for medium titles.            |
| `title-medium-letter-spacing`           | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for medium titles.         |
| `title-medium-line-height`              | `1.5rem`                             | Line height for medium titles.            |
| `title-medium-text-decoration`          | `none`                               | Text decoration for medium titles.        |
| `title-small-font-family`               | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for small titles.             |
| `title-small-font-size`                 | `0.9375rem`                          | Font size for small titles.               |
| `title-small-font-weight`               | `700`                                | Font weight for small titles.             |
| `title-small-letter-spacing`            | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for small titles.          |
| `title-small-line-height`               | `1.25rem`                            | Line height for small titles.             |
| `title-small-text-decoration`           | `none`                               | Text decoration for small titles.         |
| `title-subtitle-font-family`            | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for subtitles.                |
| `title-subtitle-font-size`              | `0.875rem`                           | Font size for subtitles.                  |
| `title-subtitle-font-weight`            | `700`                                | Font weight for subtitles.                |
| `title-subtitle-letter-spacing`         | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for subtitles.             |
| `title-subtitle-line-height`            | `1.25rem`                            | Line height for subtitles.                |
| `title-subtitle-text-decoration`        | `none`                               | Text decoration for subtitles.            |
| `title-x-large-font-family`             | `Lato, "Helvetica Neue", sans-serif` | Font family for extra-large titles.       |
| `title-x-large-font-size`               | `1.3125rem`                          | Font size for extra-large titles.         |
| `title-x-large-font-weight`             | `700`                                | Font weight for extra-large titles.       |
| `title-x-large-letter-spacing`          | `0.01875rem`                         | Letter spacing for extra-large titles.    |
| `title-x-large-line-height`             | `2rem`                               | Line height for extra-large titles.       |
| `title-x-large-text-decoration`         | `none`                               | Text decoration for extra-large titles.   |

## Spacing, sizing, and shape tokens

<Note>
  The comment in the table refers to pixels in calculation based on a root font-size of 16 px.
</Note>

| Token          | Default value                              | Description                             |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------- |
| `border-1`     | `0.0625rem`                                | Border width (1 px equivalent).         |
| `border-2`     | `0.125rem`                                 | Border width (2 px equivalent).         |
| `border-3`     | `0.1875rem`                                | Border width (3 px equivalent).         |
| `border-4`     | `0.25rem`                                  | Border width (4 px equivalent).         |
| `border-6`     | `0.375rem`                                 | Border width (6 px equivalent).         |
| `border-8`     | `0.5rem`                                   | Border width (8 px equivalent).         |
| `dropshadow-1` | `0 0 0.5rem 0 rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.05)`         | Subtle shadow effect.                   |
| `dropshadow-2` | `0 0.0625rem 0.25rem 0 rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1)` | Medium shadow effect.                   |
| `dropshadow-3` | `0 0.25rem 0.75rem 0 rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1)`   | Pronounced shadow effect.               |
| `radius-05`    | `0.125rem`                                 | Border radius (2 px equivalent).        |
| `radius-1`     | `0.25rem`                                  | Border radius (4 px equivalent).        |
| `radius-2`     | `0.375rem`                                 | Border radius (6 px equivalent).        |
| `radius-3`     | `0.5rem`                                   | Border radius (8 px equivalent).        |
| `radius-4`     | `0.75rem`                                  | Border radius (12 px equivalent).       |
| `radius-5`     | `1rem`                                     | Border radius (16 px equivalent).       |
| `radius-6`     | `1.25rem`                                  | Border radius (20 px equivalent).       |
| `radius-7`     | `1.5rem`                                   | Border radius (24 px equivalent).       |
| `radius-8`     | `1.75rem`                                  | Border radius (28 px equivalent).       |
| `radius-half`  | `2rem`                                     | Border radius (32 px equivalent).       |
| `size-05`      | `0.125rem`                                 | Size measurement (2 px equivalent).     |
| `size-1`       | `0.25rem`                                  | Size measurement (4 px equivalent).     |
| `size-2`       | `0.5rem`                                   | Size measurement (8 px equivalent).     |
| `size-3`       | `0.75rem`                                  | Size measurement (12 px equivalent).    |
| `size-4`       | `1rem`                                     | Size measurement (16 px equivalent).    |
| `size-5`       | `1.25rem`                                  | Size measurement (20 px equivalent).    |
| `size-6`       | `1.5rem`                                   | Size measurement (24 px equivalent).    |
| `size-7`       | `1.75rem`                                  | Size measurement (28 px equivalent).    |
| `size-8`       | `2rem`                                     | Size measurement (32 px equivalent).    |
| `size-9`       | `2.25rem`                                  | Size measurement (36 px equivalent).    |
| `size-10`      | `2.5rem`                                   | Size measurement (40 px equivalent).    |
| `size-11`      | `2.75rem`                                  | Size measurement (44 px equivalent).    |
| `size-12`      | `3rem`                                     | Size measurement (48 px equivalent).    |
| `size-14`      | `3.5rem`                                   | Size measurement (56 px equivalent).    |
| `size-15`      | `3.75rem`                                  | Size measurement (60 px equivalent).    |
| `size-16`      | `4rem`                                     | Size measurement (64 px equivalent).    |
| `size-18`      | `4.5rem`                                   | Size measurement (72 px equivalent).    |
| `size-20`      | `5rem`                                     | Size measurement (80 px equivalent).    |
| `space-05`     | `0.125rem`                                 | Spacing measurement (2 px equivalent).  |
| `space-1`      | `0.25rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (4 px equivalent).  |
| `space-2`      | `0.5rem`                                   | Spacing measurement (8 px equivalent).  |
| `space-3`      | `0.75rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (12 px equivalent). |
| `space-4`      | `1rem`                                     | Spacing measurement (16 px equivalent). |
| `space-5`      | `1.25rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (20 px equivalent). |
| `space-6`      | `1.5rem`                                   | Spacing measurement (24 px equivalent). |
| `space-7`      | `1.75rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (28 px equivalent). |
| `space-8`      | `2rem`                                     | Spacing measurement (32 px equivalent). |
| `space-9`      | `2.25rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (36 px equivalent). |
| `space-10`     | `2.5rem`                                   | Spacing measurement (40 px equivalent). |
| `space-11`     | `2.75rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (44 px equivalent). |
| `space-12`     | `3rem`                                     | Spacing measurement (48 px equivalent). |
| `space-14`     | `3.5rem`                                   | Spacing measurement (56 px equivalent). |
| `space-15`     | `3.75rem`                                  | Spacing measurement (60 px equivalent). |
| `space-16`     | `4rem`                                     | Spacing measurement (64 px equivalent). |
| `space-18`     | `4.5rem`                                   | Spacing measurement (72 px equivalent). |
| `space-20`     | `5rem`                                     | Spacing measurement (80 px equivalent). |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Content Uploader
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The Box Content Uploader UI Element allows developers to embed an upload widget
in their desktop or mobile web application. Users can select files or use drag
and drop to upload. Large files will be uploaded with the <Link href="/reference/post-files-upload-sessions">Chunked
Upload</Link> API.

## Installation

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/installation">Learn how to install</Link> Box UI elements
either through NPM or the Box CDN.

## Authentication

The UI Elements are designed in an authentication agnostic way so whether
you are using UI Elements for users who have Box accounts (Managed Users) or
non-Box accounts (App Users), UI Elements should work out of the box. The
reason for this is that UI Elements only expect a "token" to be passed in for
authentication, and Box provides two different ways to generate tokens - OAuth
and JWT.

<Card href="/guides/authentication/select" title="Learn about selecting an authentication method" />

## Demo

### Uploader

<iframe title="Box Content Uploader" />

### Uploader as popup

<iframe title="Box File Picker and Uploader as popups" />

<Info>
  **Access Token**

  These demos may not fully function until you provide a valid access token. For
  testing purposes, you can use your temporary developer token. This will need
  to be updated under the JS tab in the demo.
</Info>

## API

```js theme={null}
const { ContentUploader } = Box;
const uploader = new ContentUploader();

/**
 * Shows the content uploader.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} folderId - Folder ID to upload to.
 * @param {String} accessToken - Box API access token.
 * @param {Object|void} [options] - Optional options.
 * @return {void}
 */
uploader.show(folderId, accessToken, options);

/**
 * Hides and clears HTML for the uploader.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
uploader.hide();

/**
 * Adds an event listener to the content uploader.
 * Listeners should be added before calling show()
 * so no events are missed.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} eventName Name of the event.
 * @param {Function} listener Callback function.
 * @return {void}
 */
uploader.addListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes an event listener from the content uploader.
 *
 * @public
 * @param {String} eventName Name of the event.
 * @param {Function} listener Callback function.
 * @return {void}
 */
uploader.removeListener(eventName, listener);

/**
 * Removes all event listeners from the content uploader.
 *
 * @public
 * @return {void}
 */
uploader.removeAllListeners();
```

### Parameters

| Parameter     | Type   | Description                                                                                                                                                                |
| ------------- | ------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`    | String | Box Folder ID. This will be the ID of the folder from which you want files to be uploaded to. If you want to use the Box All Files folder, then use `0` as the `folderId`. |
| `accessToken` | String | Box API access token to use. This should have upload access to the folder above.                                                                                           |
| `options`     | Object | Optional options. See below for details.                                                                                                                                   |

### Options

| Parameter             | Type     | Default                                                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| --------------------- | -------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `container`           | String   | `document.body`                                            | CSS selector of the container in which the content uploader should be placed. Calling `hide()` will clear out this container.                                                                                                                                                                |
| `sharedLink`          | String   |                                                            | Shared link URL, required if folder is shared and the access token doesn't belong to an owner or collaborator of the file.                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `sharedLinkPassword`  | String   |                                                            | Shared link password, required if shared link has a password.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `onClose`             | Function |                                                            | Callback function for 'Close' button, which will appear when there are no files to upload or when all uploads are complete. If this option is set to `null` the button will not appear.                                                                                                      |
| `modal`               | Object   |                                                            | When the modal attribute is specified, then the content uploader will not be created in-place. Instead a button will be created in the container and clicking this button will launch the content uploader in a modal popup. See below for the modal options.                                |
| `size`                | String   | `undefined`                                                | Indicates to the content uploader to fit within a small or large width container. Value can be absent or one of `small` or `large`. If absent the UI Element will adapt to its container and automatically switch between small width or large width mode.                                   |
| `isTouch`             | Boolean  | Defaults to the browser and device's default touch support | Indicates to the content explorer that it's is being rendered on a touch enabled device.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `fileLimit`           | Number   | 100                                                        | The maximum number of files that can be uploaded at once. If more than `fileLimit` files are selected for upload, any beyond the first `fileLimit` files will not be included for uploaded. A warning message will be shown in the footer when this happens.                                 |
| `requestInterceptor`  | Function |                                                            | Function to intercept requests. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>.  |
| `responseInterceptor` | Function |                                                            | Function to intercept responses. For an example see <Link href="https://codepen.io/box-platform/pen/jLdxEv">this CodePen</Link>. Our underlying XHR library is `axios.js` and we follow a <Link href="https://github.com/axios/axios#interceptors">similar approach for interceptors</Link>. |

### Modal Options

| Parameter          | Type     | Default         | Description                                   |
| ------------------ | -------- | --------------- | --------------------------------------------- |
| `buttonLabel`      | `String` |                 | Label for the button                          |
| `buttonClassName`  | `String` | Box Blue Button | CSS class to decorate the button              |
| `modalClassName`   | `String` |                 | CSS class to decorate the modal popup content |
| `overlayClassName` | `String` |                 | CSS class to decorate the modal popup overlay |

### Events

| Event Name | Event Data    | Description                                                                                                                                       |
| ---------- | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `close`    |               | Will be fired when 'Close' button is clicked.                                                                                                     |
| `complete` | `Array<File>` | Will be fired when all uploads in the current view are complete. Event data will be an array of File Object.                                      |
| `upload`   | File          | Fired when a single file is successfully uploaded. Event data will be a File Object.                                                              |
| `error`    | Object        | Fired when a single file has an upload error. Event data will be an object with properties file from the File Web API and the error object error. |

## Scopes

If your application requires the end user to only be able to access a subset of
the Content Uploader functionality, you can use <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Downscoping</Link> to
appropriately downscope the Access Token to a resulting token that has the
desired set of permissions, and can thus, be securely passed to the end user
client initializing the Content Uploader.

Below are a set of UI Element-specific scopes to go alongside Downscoping. These
allow developers to enable/disable UI controls on the Content Uploader by
configuring the appropriate scopes on the downscoped token. To learn
more, see <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Dedicated Scopes for Box UI Elements</Link>.

### Base Scope

| Scope Name    | Permissions granted                                                                    |
| ------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `base_upload` | Allows upload into the folder specific under "resource" of the Token Exchange request. |

### Sample Scenarios

| Scenario                                   | Scopes        |
| ------------------------------------------ | ------------- |
| User wants to upload files to a Box folder | `base_upload` |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Preview - Viewers & Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/embed/ui-elements/viewers-and-events



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

This page describes the preview experience for each file type. It also lists the
events you can listen for by viewer type.

## Text Viewer

The text viewer renders previews of text files. For code files like `py` or
`rb`, it uses [`highlight.js`](https://github.com/isagalaev/highlight.js) to add
syntax highlighting.

### Behavior

The text viewer displays the first 192 KB of text in the file. Additional text is
truncated and a notification and download button are appended to the bottom of
the preview.

Re-sizing the viewer window will reflow the text to fit the available space and
the zoom in and out buttons will increase and decrease font size respectively.

This viewer supports printing and will attempt to print with appropriate syntax
highlighting when either `print()` is invoked or the print button is pressed.
Note that printing large files may cause some browsers to freeze for a few
seconds.

### Controls

* Zoom In
* Zoom Out
* Fullscreen: can be exited with the escape key

### Supported File Extensions

`as`, `as3as`, `asmas`, `batas`, `cas`, `ccas`, `cmakeas`, `cppas`, `csas`,
`cssas`, `cxxas`, `diffas`, `erbas`, `groovyas`, `has`, `hamlas`, `hhas`,
`htmas`, `htmlas`, `javaas`, `jsas`, `lessas`, `mas`, `makeas`, `mdas`, `mlas`,
`mmas`, `phpas`, `plas`, `plistas`, `propertiesas`, `pyas`, `rbas`, `rstas`,
`sassas`, `scalaas`, `scriptas`, `scmas`, `smlas`, `sqlas`, `shas`, `vias`,
`vimas`, `webdocas`, `xhtmlas`, `yaml`,

### Events

The text viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                                | Event Data                                                            |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed     |                                                                       |
| `load`         | The preview loads                          | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message                   |
|                |                                            | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                                |
|                |                                            | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger              |
|                |                                            | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer                            |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed                |                                                                       |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index     | `{object}` file                                                       |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                        |                                                                       |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                        | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                             |
|                |                                            | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                               |
| `zoom`         | The preview zooms in or out                | 1. `{number}` **`zoom`**: new zoom value                              |
|                |                                            | 2. `{boolean}` **`canZoomIn`**: true if the viewer can zoom in more   |
|                |                                            | 3. `{boolean}` **`canZoomOut`**: true if the viewer can zoom out more |
| `printsuccess` | An attempt to print triggered successfully |                                                                       |

## 360 Video Viewer

The 360 video viewer renders a preview of a video stored as an equirectangular
projection (often recorded with a 360 camera).

### Behavior

This viewer gives you an interactive view of the 360 degree video.

### Controls

* Change the view direction with the left mouse button (single touch on touch-enabled device).

### VR button

When using a browser that supports WebVR and a suitable VR device is attached to
your computer, a VR button will be available to allow toggling in and out of VR
mode.

### Limitations

Currently, this previewer requires that the file be named with a `.360`
preceding the file extension. This is so that Preview SDK knows to run this
viewer rather than the standard video preview.

### Supported File Extensions

`360.3g2`, `360.3gp`, `360.avi`, `360.m2v`, `360.m2ts`, `360.m4v`, `360.mkv`,
`360.mov`, `360.mp4`, `360.mpeg`, `360.mpg`, `360.mts`, `360.qt`, `360.wmv`

### Events

The 360 video viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |

## SWF Viewer

The SWF viewer uses [`SWFObject`](https://github.com/swfobject/swfobject) to embed
SWF files.

### Behavior

If the user has the Adobe Flash Player plugin, `SWFObject` will embed the SWF file
and allow the plugin to render relevant content.

Note that all network requests made by the flash content will be blocked due to
security constraints, so any content that requires network connectivity will not
be rendered.

### Supported File Extensions

* `swf`

### Events

The SWF viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |

## Presentation viewer

The presentation viewer renders previews of PowerPoint files.

### Behavior

The presentation viewer remembers which slide you were viewing upon closing the
preview. The next time that file is opened, you will immediately be brought to
that slide. Scrolling the mouse up and down, or swiping up and down on mobile
will transition between slides. Zooming in or out will increase or decrease the
size of the slide respectively. If the zoom level causes the content to
overflow, scrolling the mouse will allow you to scroll around the slide. To
return to normal scrolling behavior, the user must zoom out until the overflow
is removed.

### Controls

* Zoom In
* Zoom Out
* Set Page: either with the up and down arrows, or by clicking the page number and entering text
* Fullscreen: can be exited with the escape key

### Supported File Extensions

`ppt`, `pptx`, `odp`

### Options

| Option        | Type    | Description                                                             |
| ------------- | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `annotations` | boolean | Optional. Whether annotations on content are shown. Defaults to `false` |

### Events

The presentation viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                                                    |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                                               |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `string` **`error`** (optional): error message                             |
|                |                                        | 2. `object` **`file`**: current file                                          |
|                |                                        | 3. `object` **`metrics`**: information from the logger                        |
|                |                                        | 4. `object` **`viewer`**: current viewer                                      |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                                               |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `object` file                                                                 |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                                               |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `number` **`height`**: window height                                       |
|                |                                        | 2. `number` **`width`**: window width                                         |
| `zoom`         | The preview zooms in or out            | 1. `number` **`zoom`**: new zoom value                                        |
|                |                                        | 2. `boolean` **`canZoomIn`**: true if the viewer can zoom in more             |
|                |                                        | 3. `boolean` **`canZoomOut`**: true if the viewer can zoom out more           |
| `pagerender`   | A page renders                         | `number` page number of rendered page                                         |
| `pagefocus`    | A page is visible                      | `number` page number of focused page                                          |
| `scrollstart`  | The viewer starts to scroll            | 1. `number` **`scrollTop`**: number of pixels scrolled from top of viewport   |
|                |                                        | 2. `number` **`scrollLeft`**: number of pixels scrolled from left of viewport |
| `scrollend`    | The viewer stops scrolling             | 1. `number` **`scrollTop`**: number of pixels scrolled from top of viewport   |
|                |                                        | 2. `number` **`scrollLeft`**: number of pixels scrolled from left of viewport |

## MP4 Viewer

The MP4 viewer renders previews for video files.

### Behavior

The MP4 viewer uses a black background to create a better viewing experience.
Volume can be muted or unmuted by clicking the volume icon, or changed by
dragging the volume scrubber. The position of the video can be changed by
clicking or dragging the playback scrubber.

### Controls

* Play/Pause
* Volume
* Settings
* Fullscreen (can be exited with the escape key)

### Settings

Settings are available through the cog icon in the preview toolbar.

* Video speed values: `0.25`, `0.5`, normal (`1`), `1.25`, `1.5`, `2.0`

### Supported File Extensions

`3g2`, `3gp`, `avi`, `m2v`, `m2ts`, `m4v`, `mkv`, `mov`, `mp4`, `mpeg`, `mpg`,
`ogg`, `mts`, `qt`, `wmv`

### Events

The MP4 viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                             |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                        |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `string` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `object` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `object` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `object` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                        |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `object` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                        |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `number` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `number` **`width`**: window width                  |
| `speedchange`  | Media speed changes                    | `string` playback speed                                |
| `play`         | The video plays                        |                                                        |
| `pause`        | The video pauses                       |                                                        |
| `seek`         | The video skips to a time              | `number` time                                          |

## MP3 Viewer

The MP3 viewer displays previews for audio files.

### Behavior

Volume can be muted or unmuted by clicking the volume icon, or changed by
dragging the volume scrubber. The position of the audio can be changed by
clicking or dragging the playback scrubber.

### Controls

* Play/Pause
* Volume
* Settings

### Settings

Settings are available through the cog icon in the preview toolbar.

* Audio Speed: `0.25`, `0.5`, normal (`1`), `1.25`, `1.5`, `2.0`

### Supported File Extensions

`aac`, `aif`, `aifc`, `aiff`, `amr`, `au`, `flac`, `m4a`, `mp3`, `ra`, `wav`, `wma`

### Events

The MP3 viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                             |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                        |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `string` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `object` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `object` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `object` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                        |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `object` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                        |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `number` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `number` **`width`**: window width                  |
| `speedchange`  | Media speed changes                    | `string` playback speed                                |
| `play`         | The video plays                        |                                                        |
| `pause`        | The video pauses                       |                                                        |
| `seek`         | The video skips to a time              | `number` time                                          |

## Office Viewer

The Office viewer renders previews of Microsoft Office documents by embedding an
`<iframe>` of Microsoft's Office Online viewer.

### Behavior

The Office viewer currently supports previews of Excel files using Microsoft
Office Online from within the Box Web Application. Support for platform use
cases and other Office file formats is in progress.

There are several limitations at the moment:

* File must be downloadable
* File size cannot be greater than 5MB
* File cannot be shared via a Box shared link with a password (shared links without passwords are okay)

### Supported File Extensions

`xlsx`

### Events

The Office viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |

## Markdown Viewer

The Markdown viewer uses
[`Remarkable`](https://github.com/jonschlinkert/remarkable) to parse markdown
files and [`highlight.js`](https://github.com/isagalaev/highlight.js) to add
syntax highlighting to code blocks contained within.

### Behavior

The Markdown viewer parses the first 192KB of raw markdown in the file and
renders it using GitHub's Markdown style. Additional content is truncated and a
notification along with a download button are appended to the bottom of the
preview.

The viewer supports
[GitHub Flavored
Markdown](https://guides.github.com/features/mastering-markdown/) including
tables, syntax highlighting, and automatic URL linking.

Re-sizing the viewer window will reflow the markdown to fit the available space.
Also, this viewer supports printing and will attempt to print the parsed
markdown and with syntax highlighting on code when either `print()` is invoked
or the print button is pressed. Note that printing large files may cause some
browsers to freeze for a few seconds.

### Controls

* Fullscreen (can be exited with the escape key)

### Supported File Extensions

`md`

### Events

The Markdown viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                                | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed     |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                          | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                            | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                            | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                            | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed                |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index     | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                        |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                        | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                            | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |
| `printsuccess` | An attempt to print triggered successfully |                                                          |

## `Model3D` viewer

The `Model3D` viewer renders previews of 3D model files and allows you to enable
different rendering modes to inspect various aspects of the model. for example
wireframe, texture coordinates, and more. Animation data is also supported for
files that contain it (for example `box3d`, `fbx`, `dae`).

### Behavior

The `Model3D` viewer gives you an interactive view of the model. The left mouse
button allows you to orbit about the model (single touch on touch-enabled
device). Double-clicking somewhere on the model allows you to change orbit
focus.

### Controls

* Zoom (change distance to the model) with the mouse wheel (or two-finger scroll on a touch-enabled device).
* Pan (lateral movement) with the right mouse button (or three-finger swipe on a touch-enabled device).
* Animation Selection: If the model that is being viewed contains animations, two animation buttons will be visible in the toolbar. The first allows you to play and pause the animation and the second allows the selection of the current animation.
* VR button: If using a browser that supports WebVR and a suitable VR device is attached to your computer, the VR button will allow toggling in and out of VR mode.

### Settings

Settings are available through the cog icon in the preview toolbar.

* Render Mode: Lit, Unlit, Normal, Shape, UV Overlay
* Toggle Wireframe
* Toggle Skeleton
* Camera Projection: Perspective, Orthographic
* Render Quality: Auto, Full
* Rotate Model: X, Y, Z

## `Box3D` Packages

Preview gives users the ability to view a single file within Box so, by default,
you can't view textures on your model. However, the Box web application gives
users the ability to create a Box3D package that combines all dependent files
into a single file that can be shared and previewed. To do this, right-click the
model file within Box and choose "Create 3D Package". All referenced files found
within Box will be included in the resulting package.

### Supported File Extensions

`box3d`, `fbx`, `dae`, `3ds`, `obj`, `stl`, `ply`

### Events

The `Model3D` viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |

## 360 Image viewer

The 360 image viewer renders a preview of an image stored as an equirectangular
projection (often taken with a 360 camera).

### Behavior

This viewer gives you an interactive view of a 360 degree image. First, a low
resolution version of the image is loaded to give a quick view before the full
resolution image is finished loading. Clicking and dragging with the left mouse
button will change the view direction (single touch and drag on touch-enabled
device).

### Controls

* Fullscreen (can be exited with the escape key)
* VR Button: When using a browser that supports WebVR and a suitable VR device is attached to your computer, a VR button will be available to allow toggling in and out of VR mode.

### Limitations

Currently, this previewer requires that the file be named with a '.360'
preceding the file extension. This is so that Preview SDK knows to run this
viewer rather than the standard image viewer.

### Supported File Extensions

`360.jpg`, `360.jpeg`, `360.png`, `360.ai`, `360.bmp`, `360.dcm`, `360.eps`,
`360.gif`, `360.ps`, `360.psd`, `360.svg`, `360.svs`, `360.tga`, `360.tif`,
`360.tiff`

### Events

The 360 image viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |

## Image viewer

The image viewer renders previews of image files.

### Behavior

Rotating the viewer will rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise. At the default
zoom level, clicking on the image will zoom in once. When zoomed in, clicking on
the document will return to the default zoom level. When zoomed out, clicking on
the document will zoom in until the original zoom level is reached.

### Controls

* Zoom In
* Zoom Out
* Rotate
* Fullscreen: can be exited with the escape key

### Supported File Extensions

`ai`, `bmp`, `dcm`, `eps`, `idml`, `indt`, `indd`, `inx`, `gif`, `png`, `ps`,
`psd`, `svs`, `tga`

### Options

| Option        | Type    | Description                                                             |
| ------------- | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `annotations` | boolean | Optional. Whether annotations on content are shown. Defaults to `false` |

### Events

The image viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                                | Event Data                                                            |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed     |                                                                       |
| `load`         | The preview loads                          | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message                   |
|                |                                            | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                                |
|                |                                            | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger              |
|                |                                            | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer                            |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed                |                                                                       |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index     | `{object}` file                                                       |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                        |                                                                       |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                        | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                             |
|                |                                            | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                               |
| `zoom`         | The preview zooms in or out                | 1. `{number}` **`zoom`**: new zoom value                              |
|                |                                            | 2. `{boolean}` **`canZoomIn`**: true if the viewer can zoom in more   |
|                |                                            | 3. `{boolean}` **`canZoomOut`**: true if the viewer can zoom out more |
| `pan`          | The preview is panning                     |                                                                       |
| `panstart`     | Panning starts                             |                                                                       |
| `panend`       | Panning ends                               |                                                                       |
| `rotate`       | The image rotates                          |                                                                       |
| `printsuccess` | An attempt to print triggered successfully |                                                                       |

## Multi-image viewer

The multi-image viewer renders previews of multi-image files (`tiff`, `tif`).

### Behavior

At the default zoom level, clicking on the image will zoom in once. When zoomed
in, clicking on the document will return to the default zoom level. When zoomed
out, clicking on the document will zoom in until the original zoom level is
reached.

### Controls

* Zoom In
* Zoom Out
* Fullscreen: can be exited with the escape key
* Set Page: either with the up and down arrows, or by clicking the page number and entering text

### Supported File Extensions

`tif`, `tiff`

### Options

| Option        | Type    | Description                                                             |
| ------------- | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `annotations` | boolean | Optional. Whether annotations on content are shown. Defaults to `false` |

### Events

The image viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                                            |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                                       |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message                   |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                                |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger              |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer                            |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                                       |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                                       |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                                       |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                             |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                               |
| `zoom`         | The preview zooms in or out            | 1. `{number}` **`zoom`**: new zoom value                              |
|                |                                        | 2. `{boolean}` **`canZoomIn`**: true if the viewer can zoom in more   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{boolean}` **`canZoomOut`**: true if the viewer can zoom out more |
| `pagefocus`    | A page is visible                      | `{number}` page number of focused page                                |
| `pan`          | The preview is panning                 |                                                                       |
| `panstart`     | Panning starts                         |                                                                       |
| `panend`       | Panning ends                           |                                                                       |

### Methods

The following methods are available for the multi-page image viewer.

| Method Name        | Explanation                    | Method Parameters                  |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------- |
| `zoom`             | Zooms the image                | `{string}` 'in', 'out', or 'reset' |
| `previousPage`     | Navigates to the previous page |                                    |
| `nextPage`         | Navigates to the next page     |                                    |
| `setPage`          | Navigates to a given page      | `{number}` page number             |
| `toggleFullscreen` | Toggles full screen mode       |                                    |

## Document viewer

The document viewer renders previews for a variety of document types.

### Behavior

The document viewer remembers which page you were viewing upon closing the
preview. The next time that file is opened, you will immediately be brought to
that page. Resizing the viewer window will cause the document to resize.

### Controls

* Zoom In
* Zoom Out
* Set Page: either with the up and down arrows, or by clicking the page number and entering text
* Fullscreen (can be exited with the escape key)

### Supported File Extensions

`as`, `as3`, `asm`, `bat`, `c`, `cc`, `cmake`, `cpp`, `cs`, `css`, `csv`, `cxx`,
`diff`, `doc`, `docx`, `erb`, `gdoc`, `groovy`, `gsheet`, `h`, `haml`, `hh`,
`htm`, `html`, `java`, `js`, `less`, `log`, `m`, `make`, `md`, `ml`, `mm`,
`msg`, `odp`, `ods`, `odt`, `pdf`, `php`, `pl`, `plist`, `ppt`, `pptx`,
`properties`, `py`, `rb`, `rst`, `rtf`, `sass`, `scala`, `scm`, `script`, `sh`,
`sml`, `sql`, `tsv`, `txt`, `vi`, `vim`, `webdoc`, `wpd`, `xhtml`, `xls`,
`xlsm`, `xlsx`, `xml`, `xsd`, `xsl`, `yaml`

### Options

| Option        | Type    | Description                                                             |
| ------------- | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `annotations` | boolean | Optional. Whether annotations on content are shown. Defaults to `false` |

### Events

The document viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                                | Event Data                                                                      |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed     |                                                                                 |
| `load`         | The preview loads                          | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message                             |
|                |                                            | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                                          |
|                |                                            | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger                        |
|                |                                            | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer                                      |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed                |                                                                                 |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index     | `{object}` file                                                                 |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                        |                                                                                 |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                        | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                                       |
|                |                                            | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                                         |
| `zoom`         | The preview zooms in or out                | 1. `{number}` **`newScale`**: new zoom value                                    |
|                |                                            | 2. `{boolean}` **`canZoomIn`**: true if the viewer can zoom in more             |
|                |                                            | 3. `{boolean}` **`canZoomOut`**: true if the viewer can zoom out more           |
| `pagerender`   | A page is rendered                         | `{number}` page number of rendered page                                         |
| `pagefocus`    | A page is visible                          | `{number}` page number of focused page                                          |
| `scrollstart`  | The viewer starts to scroll                | 1. `{number}` **`scrollTop`**: number of pixels scrolled from top of viewport   |
|                |                                            | 2. `{number}` **`scrollLeft`**: number of pixels scrolled from left of viewport |
| `scrollend`    | The viewer stops scrolling                 | 1. `{number}` **`scrollTop`**: number of pixels scrolled from top of viewport   |
|                |                                            | 2. `{number}` **`scrollLeft`**: number of pixels scrolled from left of viewport |
| `printsuccess` | An attempt to print triggered successfully |                                                                                 |
| `printsuccess` | An attempt to print failed                 |                                                                                 |

### Annotations

| Event Name                 | Explanation                                                                                                                                | Event Data |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------- |
| `annotationdraw`           | Text is highlighted                                                                                                                        |            |
| `annotationcommentpending` | User hovers back into a dialog that has a pending comment                                                                                  |            |
| `annotationcreate`         | Annotation is created                                                                                                                      |            |
| `annotationcancel`         | An annotation was started but then abandoned before it was created                                                                         |            |
| `annotationdelete`         | Annotation with provided `AnnotationID` is deleted. If no ID is provided, deletes the first (and only remaining) annotation in the thread. |            |

## `<iframe>` viewer

The `<iframe>` viewer embeds an frame to show content rendered from an external
source.

### Behavior

The `<iframe>` viewer is used for previews of Box Notes.

Box Notes has full-featured viewers within the main Box Web
Application, but these full viewers are not initialized when users navigate from
previews of other files that may be in the same directory as the Notes
files. In this situation, the `<iframe>` viewer embeds an view-only render of
the Box Note file.

### Supported File Extensions

`boxnote`

### Events

The `<iframe>` viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                               |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                          |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                          |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                          |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |

## DASH viewer

The DASH viewer renders previews for video files using [`Shaka Player`][shaka].

### Behavior

The DASH viewer uses a black background to create a more native viewing
experience. Video is streamed in chunks of bytes at an initial quality
determined automatically. Volume can be muted or unmuted by clicking the volume
icon, or changed by dragging the volume scrubber. The position of the video can
be changed by clicking or dragging the playback scrubber.

### Controls

* Play/Pause
* Volume
* Settings
* Fullscreen (can be exited with the escape key)

### Settings

Settings are available through the cog icon in the preview toolbar.

* Video Speed: `0.25`, `0.5`, normal (`1`), `1.25`, `1.5`, `2.0`
* Video Quality: `480p`, `1080p`, `auto`

### Supported File Extensions

`3g2`, `3gp`, `avi`, `m2v`, `m2ts`, `m4v`, `mkv`, `mov`, `mp4`, `mpeg`, `mpg`,
`ogg`, `mts`, `qt`, `wmv`

### Events

The DASH viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name         | Explanation                                                   | Event Data                                               |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`          | The preview is intentionally destroyed                        |                                                          |
| `load`             | The preview loads                                             | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message      |
|                    |                                                               | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                   |
|                    |                                                               | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger |
|                    |                                                               | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer               |
| `notification`     | A notification is displayed                                   |                                                          |
| `navigate`         | The preview is shown for a given index                        | `{object}` file                                          |
| `reload`           | The preview reloads                                           |                                                          |
| `resize`           | The preview resizes                                           | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                |
|                    |                                                               | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                  |
| `speedchange`      | The media speed changes                                       | `{string}` playback speed                                |
| `qualitychange`    | The video quality changes                                     | `{string}` media quality                                 |
| `bandwidthhistory` | Gives bandwidth history when the preview is destroyed         | `{array}` bandwidth information                          |
| `switchhistory`    | Gives quality switching history when the preview is destroyed | `{array}` quality switch objects                         |
| `adaptation`       | Quality adapts to a change in bandwidth                       | `{number}` bandwidth                                     |
| `play`             | The video plays                                               |                                                          |
| `pause`            | The video pauses                                              |                                                          |
| `seek`             | The video skips to a time                                     | `{number}` time                                          |

## CSV viewer

The CSV viewer uses [`PapaParse`](https://github.com/mholt/PapaParse) to parse
CSV and TSV files and [`React Virtualized`][reactv] to display the parsed data
in a table.

### Behavior

Resizing the viewer window will cause the table to resize, and the zoom in and
out buttons will increase and decrease font size respectively. Currently, column
and row sizes are fixed and overflowing text will be truncated.

This viewer does not support printing.

### Controls

* Zoom In
* Zoom Out
* Fullscreen (can be exited with the escape key)

### Supported File Extensions

`csv`, `tsv`

### Events

The CSV viewer triggers the following events.

| Event Name     | Explanation                            | Event Data                                                            |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `destroy`      | The preview is intentionally destroyed |                                                                       |
| `load`         | The preview loads                      | 1. `{string}` **`error`** (optional): error message                   |
|                |                                        | 2. `{object}` **`file`**: current file                                |
|                |                                        | 3. `{object}` **`metrics`**: information from the logger              |
|                |                                        | 4. `{object}` **`viewer`**: current viewer                            |
| `notification` | A notification is displayed            |                                                                       |
| `navigate`     | The preview is shown for a given index | `{object}` file                                                       |
| `reload`       | The preview reloads                    |                                                                       |
| `resize`       | The preview resizes                    | 1. `{number}` **`height`**: window height                             |
|                |                                        | 2. `{number}` **`width`**: window width                               |
| `zoom`         | The preview zooms in or out            | 1. `{number}` **`zoom`**: new zoom value                              |
|                |                                        | 2. `{boolean}` **`canZoomIn`**: true if the viewer can zoom in more   |
|                |                                        | 3. `{boolean}` **`canZoomOut`**: true if the viewer can zoom out more |

[reactv]: https://github.com/bvaughn/react-virtualized

[shaka]: https://github.com/google/shaka-player

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Tooling
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/index



Box offers several options for using our APIs, including the <Link href="/guides/cli">Box CLI</Link>,
<Link href="/guides/tooling/postman">Postman</Link>, <Link href="/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit">Salesforce Developer Toolkit</Link>, and <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks">various SDKs</Link>.


# Retrieve an Access Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/access-token



Every API call requires an **Access Token** to identify the authenticated user.
For security purposes, Access Tokens expire after 60 minutes. If you are using
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link>, use the provided <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/refresh/">Refresh Token</Link> to obtain a new Access
Token. If you are using server authentication, <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link> or
<Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link>, make an API call to the <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">token endpoint</Link>
to request a new Access Token.

## OAuth 2.0

If your application leverages <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> for authentication, you can
follow the steps below to obtain a token pair via <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/install">Postman</Link>.

<Frame>
  <img alt="OAuth2.0 token request" />
</Frame>

* The `grant_type` will always be `authorization_code`.
* The `client_id` and `client_secret` values can be obtained from the **Configuration** tab for your application in the [Developer Console][dc].

To obtain the value for `code`, build and visit your
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk">authorization URL</Link> in your browser. Complete the OAuth 2.0 flow and,
upon redirecting to your configured redirect URL, the authorization code will be
at the end of the URL. As a reminder, this authorization code is only valid for
30 seconds. This means you must enter it to the designated field in Postman and
click **Send** before it expires. Therefore, we recommend entering the other
values so the API call is ready to send as soon as you get the code.

<Frame>
  <img alt="OAuth2.0 token request" />
</Frame>

[dc]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# Postman Collection
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/index



[Postman][postman] is a tool that lets you build and test HTTP requests in an
easy-to-use interface without configuring a full development environment. The
**Box Postman Collection** is a set of preconfigured requests that make it
possible to get started with the Box API without having to manually configure
the requests.

The simplest way to get started with Postman is with our Postman Quick Start guide.

<Card href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start" title="Get Started with the Box Postman Collection" />

## Latest Collection

Clicking the following button will fork our latest Postman
collection. It is a complete Postman collection that covers every API endpoint
and is auto-generated from our [OpenAPI specification][openapi]. It is expected
to get many more updates including some to make authentication a lot easier.

<Postman />

[postman]: https://postman.com

[openapi]: https://github.com/box/box-openapi

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Install Postman & Collection
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/install



To use the **Box Postman Collection** you will need to have
[Postman][postman] installed on your device.
Postman is available for Windows, Mac, and Linux environments.

<Trigger>
  [Download the appropriate version for your operating system][downloads]
</Trigger>

Next, install Postman on your machine, [create an account, and sign in][register].

<Frame>
  <img alt="The Postman application" />
</Frame>

## Loading a collection and environment

With the Postman App installed the **Box Postman Collection** can be loaded into
it. Clicking the button below you will load the **Box Postman
Collection** into Postman.

<Postman />

[register]: https://identity.getpostman.com/signup

[postman]: https://getpostman.com

[downloads]: https://www.postman.com/downloads/


# Make an API call
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/make-api-call



With the **Box Postman Collection** loaded into the **Postman App** it is
possible to make API calls to the **Box API** on behalf of the user logged
in as.

<Warning>
  The Box Postman Collection will require a valid `access_token` environment
  variable to make API calls. To get your Postman App set up with a valid Access
  Token we recommend following our [Quick
  Start](/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start) guide.
</Warning>

## Make an API request

To make an API request, select a **Request** from the Box Postman Collection. In
this example, we will use the **List items in folder** API which can be found
in the **Folders** folder.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Selecting an API request" />
</Frame>

By default the `folder_id` for this API endpoint is set to `0` which represents
every user's root folder. You can leave this value as is or set it to the folder
ID of a folder you want to inspect.

Next, click the **Send** button in the top right to make the API request.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman Send button" />
</Frame>

The API call should return quickly and show you a list of items
in your folder in the response **Body** tab in the bottom half of the screen.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman response body" />
</Frame>

<Warning>
  **Authentication error**

  At this point Postman might return an error instead of a list. Often,
  this means your **Access Token** has expired. Check our guide on [refreshing
  an access token in Postman](/guides/tooling/postman/refresh) for more details.
</Warning>


# Configure a Box App
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/configure-box-app



<ProgressBar />

To use the **Postman Collection**, the Postman application needs to authenticate
to the Box API using an **Access Token**. The simplest way to get an Access
Token is by logging into Box using a **Box App**.

A **Box App** is an application that can be used for making API calls. When
using the **Postman Collection** you can choose to either set up your own Box
App or use our preconfigured one. The key benefit of setting up your own Box App
is that you won't need to go through login every hour, but it does require a few
extra steps to set up.

## Select a Box App to use

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Create new Box App

    Follow this process if you haven't already created a Box App, or want to create an additional one.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Use existing Box app

    If you've already created a Box App that you want to use, you can use the credentials for that application.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  # Create a Box app

  To use your own Box App you need to create a new Box App in the **Box Developer Console**.
  The following example uses OAuth2.0 but other authentication methods are available.

  1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole].
  2. Select **Create Platform App**.
  3. Enter an **App Name** and select **OAuth 2.0** as the **App Type**.
  4. In the **Configuration** tab, scroll down to the **OAuth 2.0 Redirect URIs** section and set the **Redirect URI** to the value `https://developer.box.com/auth/callback`. It is important to note, if you visited this tutorial at `box.dev` your **Redirect URI** should be `https://box.dev/auth/callback`.
  5. Scroll down to the **Application Scopes** section to select your desired <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link>. **Your application must have at least one or more** **of the following scopes:** manage users, read all files and folders stored in Box, read and write all files and folders in Box.
  6. At the top of the page click the button to **Save Changes**.
  7. From the **OAuth 2.0 Credentials** section, copy the values for the **Client ID** and **Client Secret**. These credentials are used to authenticate your application in the next step.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Use existing Box app

  If you have already created a Box App, you can also use that. There are a few settings which need to be set for this to work.
  The following example uses OAuth2.0 but other authentication methods are available.

  1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole].
  2. Select your application.
  3. Go to the app's **Configuration** tab.
  4. Make sure your application is using **Standard OAuth 2.0** as the authentication method.
  5. Scroll down to the **OAuth 2.0 Redirect URI** section and set the **Redirect URI** to the value `https://developer.box.com/auth/callback`. It is important to note, if you visited this tutorial at `box.dev` your **Redirect URI** should be `https://box.dev/auth/callback`.
  6. Scroll down to the **Application Scopes** section to select your desired <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">permissions</Link>. **Your application must have at least one or more** **of the following scopes:** manage users, read all files and folders stored in Box, read and write all files and folders in Box.
  7. At the top of the page click the button to **Save Changes**.
  8. From the **OAuth 2.0 Credentials** section, copy the values for the **Client ID** and **Client Secret**.  These credentials are used to authenticate your application in the next step.
</Choice>

## Summary

* You either selected to create a new **Box App** and followed the steps to get the **Client ID** and **Client Secret**
* Or you selected to use an **existing Box App** and followed the steps to get the **Client ID** and **Client Secret**

<Observe>
  <Next>I have configured a Box app</Next>
</Observe>

[devconsole]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console

[signup]: https://account.box.com/signup/n/developer

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Use Postman to make API calls
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/index



<Link href="https://getpostman.com">Postman</Link> is a tool that lets you build and test HTTP
requests in an easy-to-use
interface without configuring a full development environment. The Box Postman
Collection is a set of preconfigured requests that make it possible to get
started with the Box API from Postman without having to manually configure the
requests.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman" />
</Frame>

## Overview

This guide will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/install-postman">Install Postman</Link> on your device.
2. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/configure-box-app">Configure a Box App</Link> so that Postman can access the Box API.
3. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/log-in-to-box">Log in</Link> to the Box App to get the right API credentials.
4. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/load-postman-collection">Fork Box's Postman collection</Link> into Postman.
5. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/make-api-call">Make a first API call</Link> to the Box API with Postman.


# Install Postman
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/install-postman



<ProgressBar />

To use the **Box Postman Collection** you will need to have the
[Postman][postman] app installed on your device.
Postman is available for Windows, Mac, and Linux environments.

<Trigger>
  [Download the appropriate version for your operating system][downloads]
</Trigger>

Next, install Postman on your machine and (optionally)
[register for a Postman account and log in][register].

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman" />
</Frame>

## Summary

* You installed Postman
* You created a Postman account (optional)
* You logged into the Postman application with your Postman account

<Observe>
  <Next>
    I have installed Postman
  </Next>
</Observe>

[register]: https://identity.getpostman.com/signup

[postman]: https://getpostman.com

[downloads]: https://www.postman.com/downloads/


# Fork a collection
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/load-postman-collection



<ProgressBar />

Now that you are logged in you can fork the **Box Postman Collection** into the
**Postman App** that was installed previously. When you fork the Postman
Collection you will need to load your API credentials in the Postman
environment. More details are available in [Postman Authorization guides][authorization].

## Forking a collection and environment

By clicking the button below you will fork the **Box Postman
Collection** into your Postman application. Load in the **Access Token**, **Refresh Token**, **Client ID** and **Client
Secret** into your Postman environment via the [environment selector][environment].

<Trigger>
  <Postman />
</Trigger>

It is recommended to fork the Box Postman Collection - you will be asked if you
want to update the collection any time Box makes changes to it. You can also
copy the collection, but you might miss important updates.

<Choice>
  ## Exploring the collection

  When you clicked the button above it would have asked you to fork the
  collection into the Postman application. Once imported, the collection should
  appear within the app in the left-hand sidebar.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Box collection in Postman" />
  </Frame>

  You can click on the collection to open it and explore our over 170 API
  endpoints.

  ## Summary

  * You forked the Postman collection into Postman
  * You additionally loaded your Box Postman environment into Postman
</Choice>

[authorization]: https://learning.postman.com/docs/sending-requests/authorization/specifying-authorization-details/

[environment]: https://learning.postman.com/docs/sending-requests/variables/managing-environments/


# Log in to Box
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/log-in-to-box



<ProgressBar />

<Choice>
  In this step, you use the **Client ID** and **Client Secret** from the
  previous step to log in and create an **Access Token** for your user.

  Before logging in, you should [create a new request][new_request] in Postman, select the GET method, and enter a Box API endpoint.

  ## How to log in

  The **Client ID** and **Client Secret** credentials allow any program or piece of code to authenticate
  itself to the **Box API**.

  The next step in the process is to authenticate with [OAuth2.0 in Postman][Postman]:

  1. Open Postman and go to the **Authorization** tab.
  2. Set the **Type** to **OAuth 2.0**.
  3. Complete the fields, including the **Client ID** and **Client Secret**.
  4. Click **Get New Access Token**.

  A browser window appears where you can log in to your Box account.

  Once the process is complete and approved, Postman will receive your [access token][access_token].

  ## Summary

  * You completed the necessary steps in Postman using your **Client Secret** and **Client ID**
  * You granted the **Box App** access to your account
  * You are able to see your account's **Access Token**
</Choice>

<Observe>
  <Next>I have logged in to Box</Next>
</Observe>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

[Postman]: https://learning.postman.com/docs/sending-requests/authorization/oauth-20/

[access_token]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/access-token

[refresh_token]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/refresh

[new_request]: https://learning.postman.com/docs/sending-requests/create-requests/request-basics/


# Make an API call
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/make-api-call



<ProgressBar />

With the **Box Postman Collection** forked into the **Postman App**, it is now
possible to make API calls to the **Box API** on behalf of the user you logged
in as.

## Select an environment

Before an API call can be made it is important to select the right **Postman
environment** to use when making API calls.

When you imported the **Box Postman collection** it automatically imported a
`Box` Postman environment for you to use. The collection will automatically
recognize and use the variables in this environment for making API calls.

To select the Box Postman environment, select **Box** from the dropdown in the
top-right of Postman.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Select Postman environment" />
</Frame>

You can inspect the environment by clicking the **eye** icon to the right of the
dropdown.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Inspect Postman environment" />
</Frame>

## Make an API request

To make an API request, select a **Request** from the Box Postman Collection. In
this example, we will use the **List items in folder** API which can be found
in the **Folders** folder.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Selecting an API request" />
</Frame>

By default the `folder_id` for this API endpoint is set to `0` which represents
every user's root folder. You can leave this value as is or set it to the folder
ID of a folder you want to inspect.

Next, click the **Send** button in the top right to make the API request.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman Send button" />
</Frame>

The API call should return quickly and show you a list of items
in your folder in the response **Body** tab in the bottom half of the screen.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman response body" />
</Frame>

<Warning>
  **Authentication error**

  At this point Postman might return an error instead of a list. Often,
  this means your **Access Token** has expired. Check our guide on <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/refresh">refreshing
  an access token in Postman</Link> for more details.
</Warning>

## Summary

* You selected the Postman environment to use for making API calls to Box
* You made your first API call to Box, requesting the folder items for your user's root folder.

<Next>I made an API call</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Next steps
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/next-steps



<ProgressBar />

You've reached the end of this Quick Start guide. By now you should have taken
the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/install-postman">Installed Postman</Link> on your device.
2. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/configure-box-app">Configured a Box App</Link> in order to be able to authenticate a Postman App for accessing Box.
3. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/log-in-to-box">Logged in</Link> to the Box App to get the right API credentials.
4. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/load-postman-collection">Loaded Box's Postman collection</Link> into Postman, and with it all the credentials needed to make API calls.
5. <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/make-api-call">Made your first API call</Link> to the Box API with Postman.

## Next things to do

We recommend the following resource for anyone who wants to learn more about
using Postman with the Box API.

* [The official Postman Get Started guide](https://learning.getpostman.com/getting-started/) from the Postman team.
* <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/refresh">Learn how to refresh your access token</Link> within Postman.


# Refresh an Access Token
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/postman/refresh



To authenticate to the Box API the Postman collection will use an **Access
Token** to identify you, the **User** to the API. Access tokens expire after 1
hour and therefore need to be refreshed every hour.

## Using a Refresh Token

If you set up your own **Box App** in [step
2](/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start/configure-box-app) of the **Postman Quick
Start** guide then your Box environment in Postman should include a valid
`client_id` and `client_secret`. These client credentials and the
`refresh_token` can be used to create a new value for the `access_token`.

<Frame>
  <img alt="A valid client ID and secret in the Postman environment" />
</Frame>

To refresh the access token, select the **Refresh access token** API call within
the **Authorization** folder of the Postman collection.

<Frame>
  <img alt="The refresh access token API call in Postmam" />
</Frame>

Next, click the **Send** button to request a new `access_token`.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Postman Send button" />
</Frame>

At the end of this API call, your environment should have a new `access_token`
and `refresh_token` value, and you should be able to make any of the other API
calls.

<Warning>
  Refresh tokens are only valid once and need to be used within 60 days. If used
  within 60 days, a new one is created together with a new access token and the
  60 day period starts again.

  A refresh token expires if not used within 60 days, after which a new refresh token
  and access token need to be requested by going through the [Quick
  Start](/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start) guide again.
</Warning>

## Automatically refreshing an access token

The Postman collection can automatically detect an expired `access_token` value
and request a new one by using the `refresh_token`. By default this feature is
enabled but it can be turned off by setting the `enable_auto_refresh_access_token`
Postman environment variable to `false`.

To set this value, click the edit button in the top right of your Box Postman
environment variables.

<Frame>
  <img alt="A valid client ID and secret in the Postman environment" />
</Frame>

Find the row in the table for the `enable_auto_refresh_access_token` variable
and set the **Current Value** to `true`. Next, click **Update** to save your
changes.

From now on, any time you make any API call the **Postman collection** will
check if your `access_token` has expired and try to refresh it automatically
before making your desired API call.

## Re-authenticating your Postman collection

In some cases you might need to re-authenticate your Postman collection by going
through the <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start">Quick Start</Link> guide again. A common
reason for this is because you haven't used the Postman collection in over 60
days and your `refresh_token` has expired.

To re-authenticate, first remove your old **Box Postman environment**. To do so,
click the little **gear** icon in the top right and select your environment from
the list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Delete the Box Postman environment" />
</Frame>

Select **Delete** to delete the environment. Then, restart the Postman [Quick
Start](/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start) guide again from the start.

<Warning>
  When re-importing the **Box Postman Collection** for a second time the Postman
  app might ask you to import the new collection as a copy or replace the old
  one. We recommend importing it as a copy in order to preserve any custom
  configuration you might have made to any of the APIs.
</Warning>


# Allow a domain for collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/allowed-domains/create



An enterprise that normally restricts creating collaborations can
add domains, such as `example.com`, to a list for which collaborations may be
created within the enterprise.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaboration_whitelist_entries" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "domain": "example.com",
         "direction": "inboud"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.createCollaborationWhitelistEntry({
    direction:
      'inbound' as CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField,
    domain: domain,
  } satisfies CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.collaboration_allowlist_entries.create_collaboration_whitelist_entry(
      domain, CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryDirection.INBOUND
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.CollaborationAllowlistEntries.CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryAsync(requestBody: new CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody(direction: CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField.Inbound, domain: domain));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.createCollaborationWhitelistEntry(requestBody: CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody(direction: CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField.inbound, domain: domain))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getCollaborationAllowlistEntries().createCollaborationWhitelistEntry(new CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody(domain, CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField.INBOUND))
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollaborationWhitelistEntry entry = await client.CollaborationWhitelistManager.AddCollaborationWhitelistEntryAsync(
      "example.com",
      "both"
  );
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collaborationAllowlist.addDomain('test.com', client.collaborationAllowlist.directions.INBOUND, callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The
<Link href="/reference/post-collaboration-whitelist-entries">endpoint</Link>
will require the `domain` to allow the collaborations between, and a
`direction`, which may be set to:

* `inbound`: Whether external users may be collaborated in on content in your enterprise.
* `outbound`: Whether your enterprise managed users may be collaborated in on content owned within an external enterprise.
* `both`: Both of the above.

Supply both parameter to set up the new allowed domain.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaboration_whitelist_entries" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "domain": "example.com",
         "direction": "inboud"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.createCollaborationWhitelistEntry({
    direction:
      'inbound' as CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField,
    domain: domain,
  } satisfies CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.collaboration_allowlist_entries.create_collaboration_whitelist_entry(
      domain, CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryDirection.INBOUND
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.CollaborationAllowlistEntries.CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryAsync(requestBody: new CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody(direction: CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField.Inbound, domain: domain));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.createCollaborationWhitelistEntry(requestBody: CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody(direction: CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField.inbound, domain: domain))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getCollaborationAllowlistEntries().createCollaborationWhitelistEntry(new CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBody(domain, CreateCollaborationWhitelistEntryRequestBodyDirectionField.INBOUND))
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollaborationWhitelistEntry entry = await client.CollaborationWhitelistManager.AddCollaborationWhitelistEntryAsync(
      "example.com",
      "both"
  );
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collaborationAllowlist.addDomain('test.com', client.collaborationAllowlist.directions.INBOUND, callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Remove a previously allowed domain for collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/allowed-domains/delete



Deleting a domain from the list of allowed collaboration domains will remove the
ability for collaborations to be created between your enterprise and users in
that domain.

To remove a domain from the allowed list, supply the ID of the list entry to
the delete request. This ID is returned when <Link href="/guides/collaborations/allowed-domains/create">allowing a new domain</Link>
or <Link href="/guides/collaborations/allowed-domains/list">listing the allowed domains in the enterprise</Link>;

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaboration_whitelist_entries/213123" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.deleteCollaborationWhitelistEntryById(
    entry.id!,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.collaboration_allowlist_entries.delete_collaboration_whitelist_entry_by_id(
      entry.id
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.CollaborationAllowlistEntries.DeleteCollaborationWhitelistEntryByIdAsync(collaborationWhitelistEntryId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(entry.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.deleteCollaborationWhitelistEntryById(collaborationWhitelistEntryId: entry.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getCollaborationAllowlistEntries().deleteCollaborationWhitelistEntryById(entry.getId())
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  string entryID = "11111";
  await client.CollaborationWhitelistManager.DeleteCollaborationWhitelistEntryAsync(entryID);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collaborationAllowlist.removeDomain('12345', callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Allowed collaboration domains
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/allowed-domains/index



Within the content and sharing settings for an enterprise, an admin can specify
[collaboration restrictions][collab-restrictions] for the enterprise. These
settings include the ability to limit collaborations to only a series of
allowed domains.

The allowed domain APIs are available to allow applications with
appropriate permissions to add, fetch, and delete these allowed domains
programmatically for the enterprise.

[collab-restrictions]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404822772755-Enterprise-Settings-Content-Sharing-Tab


# List allowed domains for collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/allowed-domains/list



Listing the domains that are allowed for collaboration will return all domains
that permit collaborations to be created with the current enterprise.

There are no required parameters for the request, but `limit` and `market`
parameters may optionally be set to limit and page through the full result set.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaboration_whitelist_entries" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.getCollaborationWhitelistEntries();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.collaboration_allowlist_entries.get_collaboration_whitelist_entries()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.CollaborationAllowlistEntries.GetCollaborationWhitelistEntriesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.collaborationAllowlistEntries.getCollaborationWhitelistEntries()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getCollaborationAllowlistEntries().getCollaborationWhitelistEntries()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollectionMarkerBased<BoxCollaborationWhitelistEntry> whitelistedDomains = await client.CollaborationWhitelistManager
      .GetAllCollaborationWhitelistEntriesAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collaborationAllowlist.getAllAllowlistedDomains(callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Configure Box
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-box



<ProgressBar />

We will need to set up a Box application to manage Box groups and add
collaborators to files and folders in Box.

## Set up a Box app

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Create a new Box app

    Create and configure a new Box JWT application to use for this integration.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Use an existing approved app

    Use one of your existing admin-approved Box JWT applications from the Box
    developer console.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  # Create a new Box app

  To create a new Box application that can be used to call the Box APIs, use
  the following steps.

  1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole]
  2. Select **Create New App**
  3. Select **Platform App** as the type of application to create, and click **Next**
  4. Select **OAuth 2.0 with JWT** as the authentication method, and click **Next**
  5. Give your Box app a unique name and click **Create App**
  6. Go to the app's configuration by clicking **View Your App**.
  7. Scroll down to **Application Access** and ensure that **Enterprise** is selected.
  8. Scroll to the **Application Scopes** section of the same screen and ensure that at least the following scopes are enabled: **Read and write all files and folders stored in Box**, **Manage users**, and **Manage groups**.
  9. Under **Advanced Features** ensure that **Perform Actions as Users** is enabled to perform actions on behalf of Box users.
  10. At the top of the page click the button to **Save Changes**

  <Warning>
    **App approval**

    Once the application is created it will still need to be approved by an
    enterprise admin before you will be able to make calls to the Box APIs.

    Follow <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">this guide</Link> to have the
    application approved in your enterprise.
  </Warning>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Use an Existing JWT Box application

  If you have an existing JWT based Box application in your
  [developer console][devconsole] that you would like to use, ensure that the
  following options are set in the **Configuration** section of your
  application.

  * Authentication Method: Should be set to OAuth 2.0 with JWT (Server Authentication).
  * Application Scopes: Set at least the following scopes.
    * Read and write all files and folders stored in Box
    * Manage users
    * Manage groups
  * Advanced Features: Both options should be enabled to perform actions as users and generate user access tokens.

    <Warning>
      **App approval**

      Once the application is updated it will need to be re-approved by an
      enterprise admin before you will be able to make calls to any of the Box
      APIs that need any of the new permissions.

      Follow <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">this guide</Link> to have the
      application approved in your enterprise.
    </Warning>
</Choice>

## Download app configuration

To begin working with the Box SDKs used in this tutorial, you will need the
application configuration file from the **Configuration** page of your
application. This will include all information needed to verify your
application to start making API requests with the Box SDKs.

Within the **Add and Manage Public Keys** section of the **Configuration**
page, click to **Generate a Public/Private Keypair**. This will send you
through 2FA verification before downloading the configuration file for your
application.

Store that file as `boxConfig.json` in a location accessible by your
application.

## Summary

* You created a new, or are using an existing, Box app which is approved by an enterprise admin.
* You downloaded your application configuration file and stored it in a location accessible by your application.

<Observe>
  <Next>I downloaded my application configuration file</Next>
</Observe>

[devconsole]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console


# Configure Slack
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-slack



<ProgressBar />

The first step in this guide is to create and configure a Slack application.
This Slack application will act as a bot that listens for user events in Slack
channels, and responds to **slash commands** by users in those channels -
allowing them to share Box files and folders with the group.

This section will take you through the following steps.

* Create a minimal Slack application within the Slack API dashboard
* Configure the Slack application to send notifications to our application whenever a user joins or leaves the channel - allowing our code to update the Box Box group.
* Configure a `/boxadd` **slash command** that will allow users to share a Box file or folder with all the users in the channel.

## Create a minimal Slack app

Go to the **[Slack apps page][slack-apps]** and click **Create an App**. Add
an **App Name**, select your **Development Slack Workspace** from the dropdown
list where the bot will be deployed to, then click **Create App**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Create a Slack App" />
</Frame>

Once created, you will be redirected to the basic information section of the
application. You may adjust the icon and description of your app within the
**Display Information** section at the bottom to customize the application
in your workspace.

## Configure the Slack app's event listener

Setting up an event listener for our Slack app will allow us to monitor for
events within the channel. For this bot, we want to monitor three
[Slack events][slack-events] in order to perform actions within Box.

* [`bot_added`][slack-event-bot-added]: When the bot is first added to a channel, it will get a list of all users in the channel, then create a Box group for those users. We can then use this group later on to add that group to any content that is shared with the **slash command**.
* [`member_joined_channel`][slack-event-member-joined]: When a new user joins a Slack channel they will be added to the Box group.
* [`member_left_channel`][slack-event-member-left]: When a user leaves a Slack channel, or the user is removed, they will be removed from the Box group.

To set up a notification URL to which these Slack event payloads will
be sent, Slack requires a verification step. When you set an event listener URL
for your bot application code, Slack will immediately send a challenge to that
URL to verify that it's valid. This will be an HTTP POST with a payload that
looks something like the following:

```json theme={null}
{
  "token": "Jhj5dZrVaK7ZwHHjRyZWjbDl",
  "challenge": "3eZbrw1aBm2rZgRNFdxV2595E9CY3gmdALWMmHkvFXO7tYXAYM8P",
  "type": "url_verification"
}
```

To set up the URL for the event listener, that URL that is set needs
to respond with a verification payload containing the challenge value back to
Slack during this step. The payload will look similar to the following.

```js theme={null}
HTTP 200 OK Content-type: application/json {"challenge":"3eZbrw1aBm2rZgRNFdxV2595E9CY3gmdALWMmHkvFXO7tYXAYM8P"}
```

To do this we will deploy a small bit of code to respond to the challenge
event. Choose your preferred language / framework below to get started.

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Node (Express Framework)
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Java (Spring Boot Framework)
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  Within the project directory, run `npm install express --save` to install the
  Express dependency, then deploy the following code to your public endpoint
  along with the appropriate Node modules.

  ```js theme={null}
  const express = require('express');
  const app = express();
  const port = process.env.PORT || 3000;

  app.use(express.urlencoded({ extended: true }));
  app.use(express.json());

  app.post('/event', (req, res) => {
      if (
          req.body &&
          req.body.challenge &&
          req.body.type === 'url_verification'
      ) {
          res.send({
              challenge: req.body.challenge
          });
      } else {
          res.status(400).send({
              error: "Unrecognized request"
          });
      }
  });

  app.listen(port, function(err) {
      console.log("Server listening on PORT", port);
  });
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Tip>
    [`Spring Initializr`][spring-initializr] is a useful service for
    auto-generating a new Spring boot application with all dependencies defined.
    This may be used instead of creating a blank Java application.
  </Tip>

  * From Eclipse, create a new project. When prompted, select a Gradle project.
  * Enter a unique name for the project, we used `slack.box` for this guide.
  * Open your `build.gradle` file and add the following. Ensure that the group matches the group that you used for the application. Once saved, refresh the Gradle project.

  ```java theme={null}
  plugins {
      id 'org.springframework.boot' version '2.3.1.RELEASE'
      id 'io.spring.dependency-management' version '1.0.9.RELEASE'
      id 'java'
  }

  group = 'com.box'
  version = '0.0.1-SNAPSHOT'
  sourceCompatibility = '1.8'

  repositories {
      mavenCentral()
  }

  dependencies {
      implementation 'org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-web'
      testImplementation('org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-test') {
          exclude group: 'org.junit.vintage', module: 'junit-vintage-engine'
      }
      compile 'com.box:box-java-sdk:2.44.1'
  }

  test {
      useJUnitPlatform()
  }
  ```

  * Within your `src/main/java` path, create a new Java class file named `Application.java`.
  * Open the file, add the following code, and save.

  ```java theme={null}
  package com.box.slack.box;

  import org.jose4j.json.internal.json_simple.JSONObject;
  import org.jose4j.json.internal.json_simple.parser.JSONParser;
  import org.springframework.boot.SpringApplication;
  import org.springframework.boot.autoconfigure.EnableAutoConfiguration;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.PostMapping;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RequestBody;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RestController;

  @RestController
  @EnableAutoConfiguration
  public class Application {
      @PostMapping("/event")
      public JSONObject challenge(@RequestBody String data) throws Exception {
          JSONObject returnJSON = new JSONObject();

          Object dataObj = new JSONParser().parse(data);
          JSONObject inputJSON = (JSONObject) dataObj;
          String challenge = (String) inputJSON.get("challenge");
          String type = (String) inputJSON.get("type");

          if (type.equals("url_verification")) {
              returnJSON.put("challenge", challenge);
          } else {
              System.err.println("Invalid input");
          }

          return returnJSON;
      }

      public static void main(String[] args) {
          SpringApplication.run(Application.class, args);
      }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework above to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

Now that we have the code to respond to the Slack challenge when adding an
event URL, we can configure that within the Slack application.

From your Slack application **Basic Information** tab, under
**Add features and functionality**, click on the button titled
**Event Subscriptions** and do the following.

* Toggle **Enable Events** to **On**.
* Under **Request URL** add in the public URL that you deployed the above code to, and be aware that we are listening at `{YOUR_APP_DOMAIN}/event` (such as `https://myapp.com/event`). Once you add the URL and click outside the field, Slack will immediately send the challenge to the URL that you were hosting the code at above. If the code responds correctly, you will see a green verified note beside the **Request URL** header.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enable Slack Event Subscriptions" />
</Frame>

* Expand the **Subscribe to bot events** section and click on the **Add Bot User Event** button.
* Add `member_joined_channel` and `member_left_channel` to the events the bot is subscribed to. These will send events when anyone new is added to the channel.
* Click the **Save Changes** button at the bottom of the page.

## Configure the Slack app slash command

To provide every user in a Slack channel access to a file or folder in Box, we
can use a Slack **"slash commands"**. A slash command will allow any person in
the channel to share content they own in Box with the rest of the channel.

Through this command, a channel member will be able to type
`/boxadd [file / folder] [id]`, for example `boxadd file 1459732312`, into the
channel to share the file / folder with every user in the channel. To do this,
the file is automatically collaborated with the Box group of users that are in
that channel.

From the **Basic Information** tab of your application, under **Add features and
functionality**, click on the button titled **Slash Commands**.

In the page that comes up, click **Create New Command** and input the following:

* **Command**: This is the command that a channel user will use to share a Box file / folder ID with the channel. Use `/boxadd` for this quick start.
* **Request URL**: The URL that is listening for and responding to slash commands in our Slack bot. In this quick start we use the same event URL that was used for the app event listener section above.
* **Short Description**: A description of what the Slash command will do.
* **Usage Hint**: Additional parameters that may be passed to the command. In our case, that's the Box file / folder ID and type of content.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Create Slack Slash Command" />
</Frame>

Click **Save** to add the command to our Slack app.

## Add Additional Scopes

When slash commands or notifications are sent to our application from
Slack they will contain a Slack user ID, which relates to the person that took
or was affected by the action. To translate that ID to a Box user we need to
get the Slack user's email, which we can then use to associate that Slack user
to a corresponding Box user. This action requires two extra scopes in the Slack
application configuration.

From your Slack application configuration, click on **OAuth & Permissions** in
the left menu, then do the following.

* Scroll down to the **Scopes** section.
* Click on the **Add an OAuth Scope** button under **Bot Token Scopes**..
* Search for and add `users:read` and `users:read.email`.

## Deploy Bot to Slack Workspace

The last step is to install the application into your Slack workspace. From the
**Basic Information** page of the app, expand the
**Install your app to your workspace** section.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enable Slack Event Subscriptions" />
</Frame>

Click the button to **Install App to Workspace**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Enable Slack Event Subscriptions" />
</Frame>

Once the **Allow** button is clicked you should see a success message. Your bot
is now installed within the workplace.

## Summary

* You've created your Slack application.
* You've configured user event notifications, slash commands, and additional scoping.
* You've deployed your Slack bot to your workspace.

<Observe>
  <Next>I have my local application set up</Next>
</Observe>

[slack-apps]: https://api.slack.com/apps

[slack-events]: https://api.slack.com/events

[slack-event-bot-added]: https://api.slack.com/events/bot_added

[slack-event-member-joined]: https://api.slack.com/events/member_joined_channel

[slack-event-member-left]: https://api.slack.com/events/member_left_channel

[step3]: /guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/scaffold-application-code

[spring-initializr]: https://start.spring.io/


# Connect Bot to Box
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/connect-box-functions



<ProgressBar />

We're now handling and processing events coming from Slack, then obtaining all
information needed to connect with Box users and groups. We now need to
connect that functionality to Box functions.

In this step we'll expand several functions from the last step to incorporate
new Box features.

* Instantiate a Box client.
* Add a Box user to a Box group.
* Remove a Box user from a Box group.
* Fetch a Box group ID from a group name.
* Add content that is shared to a group.

## Instantiate a Box Client

To make calls to the Box APIs, you'll first need to set up a Box client.

<Choice>
  Within `process.js`, replace the `// INSTANTIATE BOX CLIENT` comment at the top
  with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  const boxConfig = require("./boxConfig.json");
  const sdk = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(boxConfig);
  const client = sdk.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");
  ```

  The `boxConfig` assignment line will use the `boxConfig.json` file you
  downloaded from your Box app at the end of <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-box">step 2</Link>. The sample above is
  assuming that you have it stored in the same folder as `process.js`. If that's
  not the case, change the path to point to where your `boxConfig.json` file is,
  and what it may be named.

  The last `client` assignment line is creating a Box client object which may be
  used to make API calls. At this point it is scoped to the
  <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account/">service account</Link> of the application, and not a specific user.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Within `Application.java`, replace the `// INSTANTIATE BOX CLIENT` comment
  within the `processEvent` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  this.fileReader = new FileReader("boxConfig.json");
  this.boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(fileReader);
  this.boxAPI = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);
  ```

  The `boxConfig` assignment line will use the `boxConfig.json` file you
  downloaded from your Box app at the end of <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-box">step 2</Link>. The sample above is
  assuming that you have it stored at the root of the Java project. If that's
  not the case, change the path in the `fileReader` assignment to point to where
  your `boxConfig.json` file is, and what it may be named.

  The last `boxAPI` assignment line is creating a Box client object which may be
  used to make API calls. At this point it is scoped to the
  <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account/">service account</Link> of the application, and not a specific user.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Add a Box user to a group

Let's add a function that adds a Box user to a group. When a bot is added to a
channel and needs to create a Box group with all users of the channel, or when
a single user joins the channel after that action, this function will perform
that task.

<Choice>
  Replace the `addGroupUser` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function addGroupUser(groupId, email) {
      client.enterprise.getUsers({ filter_term: email }).then((users) => {
          if (users.entries.length > 0) {
              const userId = users.entries[0].id;
              const groupRole = client.groups.userRoles.MEMBER;

              client.groups
                  .addUser(groupId, userId, { role: groupRole })
                  .then((membership) => {
                      if (membership.id) {
                          console.log(`Member added with membership ID: ${membership.id}`);
                      } else {
                          console.log(`Member not added`);
                      }
                  })
                  .catch(function (err) {
                      console.log(err.response.body);
                  });
          } else {
              console.log("No Box user found to add to group");
          }
      });
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `addGroupUser` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public void addGroupUser(String groupId, String userEmail) {
      Iterable<BoxUser.Info> users = BoxUser.getAllEnterpriseUsers(this.boxAPI, userEmail);

      for (BoxUser.Info user : users) {
          if (user.getLogin().toUpperCase().equals(userEmail.toUpperCase())) {
              try {
                  BoxGroup group = new BoxGroup(boxAPI, groupId);
                  BoxUser boxUser = new BoxUser(this.boxAPI, user.getID());
                  BoxGroupMembership.Info groupMembershipInfo = group.addMembership(boxUser);
              } catch (Exception ex) {
                  System.err.println("User already present");
              }
          }
      }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

Since we're matching a Slack user to a Box user via their email address, we
first find a matching Box user using the Slack profile email. If found, a call
is made to add that user to the channel group. The group was created when the
bot was first added.

<Tip>
  The Box <Link href="/reference/get-users-id">Get User</Link> endpoint only permits user lookup
  by user ID. To lookup a user by email address, use the
  <Link href="/reference/get-users">List Enterprise Users</Link> endpoint and set the
  `filter_term` option to the email address you're searching for.
</Tip>

## Remove a Box user to a group

When a user leaves or is removed from a Slack channel, we also want to remove
them from the Box group so that they can no longer access the shared group
content.

<Choice>
  Replace the `removeGroupUser` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function removeGroupUser(groupId, email) {
      client.groups.getMemberships(groupId).then(memberships => {
          for (let i = 0; i < memberships.entries.length; i++) {
              if (memberships.entries[i].user.login === email) {
                  client.groups
                  .removeMembership(memberships.entries[i].id)
                  .then(() => {
                      console.log('Group user removed')
                  });
                  break;
              }
          }
      });
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `removeGroupUser` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public void removeGroupUser(String groupId, String userEmail) {
    BoxGroup boxGroup = new BoxGroup(this.boxAPI, groupId);
    Iterable<BoxGroupMembership.Info> memberships = boxGroup.getAllMemberships();
    for (BoxGroupMembership.Info membershipInfo : memberships) {
      if (membershipInfo.getUser().getLogin().toUpperCase().equals(userEmail.toUpperCase())) {
        BoxGroupMembership membership = new BoxGroupMembership(this.boxAPI, membershipInfo.getID());
        membership.delete();
      }
    }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

This code will take the group ID, which will be the Slack channel ID, and get
all members of the group. If a matching member is found for the person that
left the Slack channel, based on email address, that person is removed from the
group using their membership ID.

<Tip>
  **Improving performance with a data store**

  While looking up group memberships to obtain a membership ID negates the need
  to store membership IDs in a local data store (like a database), this code
  can be made more efficient by having a data store that saves the Box
  membership ID with the user record.

  By using a local data store, the membership ID can be retrieved from the data
  store rather than having to call the Box API repeatedly to search for the
  membership ID.
</Tip>

## Fetch a Box group ID for a group name

The next Box function we need has two main purposes.

* Return the Box group ID of an existing group.
* If a group doesn't exist, create the Box group and return the ID.

<Choice>
  Replace the `getGroupId` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function getGroupId(groupName, callback) {
      client.groups.getAll().then((groups) => {
          const group = groups.entries.filter((g) => g.name === groupName)[0];

          if (!group) {
              client.groups
                .create(groupName, {
                    description: "Slack channel collaboration group",
                    invitability_level: "all_managed_users",
                })
                .then((group) => {
                    callback(group.id);
                });
          } else {
              callback(group.id);
          }
      });
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `getGroupId` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public String getGroupId(String groupName) {
      String groupId = new String();

      Iterable<BoxGroup.Info> groups = BoxGroup.getAllGroups(this.boxAPI);
      for (BoxGroup.Info groupInfo : groups) {
          if (groupInfo.getName().toUpperCase().equals(groupName)) {
              groupId = groupInfo.getID();
          }
      }

      if (groupId.isEmpty()) {
          BoxGroup.Info groupInfo = BoxGroup.createGroup(boxAPI, groupName);
          groupId = groupInfo.getID();
      }

      return groupId;
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

The code fetches all the groups in the enterprise, and then tries to match the
Slack channel ID to the group name. If any of the groups matches, the group ID
is returned.

If there are no matches, a new Box group is created and the ID of the group is
returned for use. The group will be named after the Slack channel ID since that
is a constant that is returned with both slash commands and user events, making
it easier to lookup without additional functions.

## Add shared content to a group

Finally, the main purpose of our whole application is to allow users to share
files and folders from their own Box accounts with everyone else in the group.

Building upon all previous functionality, the following function performs that
task.

<Choice>
  Replace the `processContent` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function processContent(user, channel, itemType, itemId) {
      getGroupId(channel, function (groupId) {
          const email = user.profile.email;

          client.enterprise.getUsers({ filter_term: email }).then((users) => {
              if (users.entries.length > 0) {
                  client.asUser(users.entries[0].id);
                  const collabRole = client.collaborationRoles.VIEWER;
                  const collabOptions = { type: itemType };

                  client.collaborations
                      .createWithGroupID(groupId, itemId, collabRole, collabOptions)
                      .then((collaboration) => {
                          console.log(
                              `Content added with collaboration ID ${collaboration.id}`
                          );
                      })
                      .catch(function (err) {
                          console.log(
                            util.inspect(err.response.body, {
                                showHidden: false,
                                depth: null,
                            })
                          );
                      });
              }
          });
      });
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `processContent` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public void processContent(JSONObject userResponse, String channel, String fType, String fId) {
      String groupId = getGroupId(channel);

      JSONObject userObj = (JSONObject) userResponse.get("user");
      JSONObject userProfile = (JSONObject) userObj.get("profile");
      String userEmail = (String) userProfile.get("email");

      Iterable<BoxUser.Info> users = BoxUser.getAllEnterpriseUsers(this.boxAPI, userEmail);

      for (BoxUser.Info user : users) {
          if (user.getLogin().toUpperCase().equals(userEmail.toUpperCase())) {
              String uid = user.getID();
              boxAPI.asUser(uid);

              BoxCollaborator collabGroup = new BoxGroup(boxAPI, groupId);

              try {
                  if (fType.equals("file")) {
                      BoxFile file = new BoxFile(boxAPI, fId);
                      file.collaborate(collabGroup, BoxCollaboration.Role.VIEWER, false, false);
                  } else if (fType.equals("folder")) {
                      BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(boxAPI, fId);
                      folder.collaborate(collabGroup, BoxCollaboration.Role.VIEWER);
                  }
              } catch (Exception ex) {
                  System.err.println("Collaboration failed");
              }

              boxAPI.asSelf();
          }
      }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

The code starts by capturing the Box group ID for the Slack channel, which
is where content will be shared to.

Since we want to share files and folders from the Box account of the person who
sent the slash command, we next capture their Box user profile based on their
email address.

Lastly, we make a call to collaborate content with the group via the group ID.

## Summary

* You've instantiated a Box client
* You've created Box group user add and remove functions.
* You've created a function to share content with the group.

<Observe>
  <Next>I've set up my Box functions</Next>
</Observe>


# Handle Slack Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/handle-slack-events



<ProgressBar />

With the application scaffold in place, the next step is to build the handling
and processing functionality for user events, as well as the handling of slash
commands coming from Slack. Each one of these will eventually be passed to a
Box API endpoint to perform group and content collaboration tasks.

In this step we'll expand the empty functions we wrote in the last step. These
functions will perform the following tasks.

* Listen for new events and slash commands from Slack.
* Process those events and commands to route to the appropriate function.
* Process all Slack users in a channel to be added to a Box group when the bot is first added to a channel.
* Fetch profile information for a Slack user to get their email.

## Listen for Slack events

When the Slack application was configured, it was instructed to send events to
our application code for three events.

* When a user joins a channel.
* When a user leaves a channel.
* When a user enters a `/boxadd` Slash command.

Our application needs to have a public route that listens for those messages
from Slack. The payloads of these messages will like something like this.

<CodeGroup>
  ```json "/boxadd"-command theme={null}
  {
    "token": "cF1PwB1eIMcRHZWwFHJR1tgs",
    "team_id": "T932DQSV12P",
    "team_domain": "slacktest",
    "channel_id": "C078N43MFHU",
    "channel_name": "bottest",
    "user_id": "U016JCDPN56",
    "user_name": "testuser",
    "command": "/boxadd",
    "text": "file 123456",
    "response_url": "https://hooks.slack.com/commands/T541DQSV12P/3977594927231/ankvsRb42WKnKPRp002FeyTx",
    "trigger_id": "1189442196855.1183332180295.cca20c3ca1ea193dab432ad8e9e95431"
  }
  ```

  ```json "member_joined_channel"-event theme={null}
  {
    "token": "cF1PwB1eIMcRHZWwFHJR1tgs",
    "team_id": "T932DQSV12P",
    "api_app_id": "A321V573PQT",
    "event": {
      "type": "member_joined_channel",
      "user": "U0431JM4RLZ",
      "channel": "C078N43MFHU",
      "channel_type": "C",
      "team": "T932DQSV12P",
      "inviter": "U016JCDPN56",
      "event_ts": "1592858788.000700"
    },
    "type": "event_callback",
    "event_id": "Ev032NRJYASJ",
    "event_time": 1592858788,
    "authed_users": [ "U0431JM4RLZ" ]
  }
  ```

  ```json "member_left_channel"-event theme={null}
  {
    "token": "cF1PwB1eIMcRHZWwFHJR1tgs",
    "team_id": "T932DQSV12P",
    "api_app_id": "A321V573PQT",
    "event": {
      "type": "member_left_channel",
      "user": "U0431JM4RLZ",
      "channel": "C078N43MFHU",
      "channel_type": "C",
      "team": "T932DQSV12P",
      "event_ts": "1593033236.000600"
    },
    "type": "event_callback",
    "event_id": "Ev032NRJYASJ",
    "event_time": 1593033236,
    "authed_users": [ "U0431JM4RLZ" ]
  }
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Choice>
  To start processing these events, load `process.js` in your preferred editor
  and replace the `app.post("/event" ...` listener with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  app.post("/event", (req, res) => {
      if (req.body.token !== slackConfig.verificationToken) {
          res.send("Slack Verification Failed");
      }

      handler.process(res, req.body);
  });
  ```

  When an event comes through, the listener verifies that the message came from
  Slack, using the verification token from our Slack application. If it's a valid
  request, the event payload is sent to our event process function.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Load `Application.java` in your preferred editor, then replace the
  `@PostMapping("/event")` block with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  @PostMapping("/event")
  @ResponseBody
  public void handleEvent(@RequestBody String data, @RequestHeader("Content-Type") String contentType, HttpServletResponse response) throws Exception {
      int code = HttpServletResponse.SC_OK;
      java.io.PrintWriter wr = response.getWriter();
      response.setStatus(code);

      if (contentType.startsWith(MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON_VALUE)) {
          wr.write("Adding content to group");
      } else {
          wr.print(response);
      }

      wr.flush();
      wr.close();

      if (! contentType.startsWith(MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON_VALUE)) {
          JSONObject returnJSON = new JSONObject();
          String[] inputParts = data.split("&");

          for (String part: inputParts) {
              String[] keyval = part.split("=");

              try {
                  keyval[1] = java.net.URLDecoder.decode(keyval[1], StandardCharsets.UTF_8.name());
              } catch (UnsupportedEncodingException e) {
                  System.err.println(e);
              }

              returnJSON.put(keyval[0], keyval[1]);
          }

          data = returnJSON.toString();
      }

      processEvent(data);
  }
  ```

  When an event comes through, the handler will send an immediate 200 response
  back before code processing. Slash commands will be sent as URL encoded
  strings, while member join / leave events will be sent as JSON. If a slash
  command is encountered we respond with a processing message, otherwise we send
  the `HttpServletResponse` response.

  <Note>
    In this example we send a `HTTP 200` response before the event is fully
    processed. This is done because Slack requires a response to an event within
    3 seconds from dispatch. When the code execution takes longer than 3 seconds
    then duplicate event will be dispatched by Slack.
  </Note>

  To make event processing easier, we want to standardize all event objects as
  JSON. If a content type isn't JSON it'll be the URL encoded string. If that's
  encountered the string is converted into a JSON object before being sent to
  `processEvent`.

  Replace `processEvent` with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  @Async
  public void processEvent(String data) throws Exception {
      Object dataObj = new JSONParser().parse(data);
      JSONObject inputJSON = (JSONObject) dataObj;
      String token = (String) inputJSON.get("token");

      if (token.equals(slackConfig.verificationToken)) {
          // INSTANTIATE BOX CLIENT

          process(inputJSON);
      } else {
          System.err.println("Invalid event source");
      }
  }
  ```

  This method will convert the JSON event string to a JSON object, then verify
  that the event came from Slack by comparing the verification token. If valid,
  the event is routed to `process`.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Process Slack events

Next, we will want to determine what event was received and pass this on to the
right part of our application.

<Choice>
  Replace the `process` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function process(res, data) {
      if (data.type && data.type === "event_callback") {
          const eventType = data.event.type;
          const channel = data.event.channel;
          const userId = data.event.user;

          getSlackUser(userId, function (user) {
              processUser(user, eventType, channel);
          });

          res.send();
      } else if (data.command && data.command === "/boxadd") {
          const [itemType, itemId] = data.text.split(" ");
          if (["file", "folder"].includes(itemType) && !isNaN(itemId)) {
              const userId = data.user_id;

              getSlackUser(userId, function (user) {
                  processContent(user, data.channel_id, itemType, itemId);
              });
              res.send("Adding content");
          } else {
              res.send("Invalid input. Example usage: /boxadd file 123456");
          }
      } else {
          res.send("Invalid action");
      }
  }
  ```

  The purpose of this function is to figure out if the payload from Slack is a
  user event or a Slash command, fetch any needed information, then route to the
  appropriate function to process the results.

  If the payload is a user event, denoted by `data.type` being set to
  `event_callback`, we extract a few pieces of information.

  * `eventType`: The type of event to determine if a user is leaving (`member_left_channel`) or joining (`member_joined_channel`) the channel.
  * `channel`: The channel ID, which will be used as the Box group name.
  * `userId`: The ID of the user, to look up their profile email which will bind to a user profile in Box that uses the same email.

  The process function then fetches the profile of the user by calling
  `getSlackUser`, and once obtained that user profile is sent to the
  `processUser` function to add or remove them from the Box group.

  If the payload is a slash command, denoted by `data.command` being set to
  `/boxadd`, the content of the command that represents the Box ID and whether
  it's a file or folder, such as `file 1234`, is extracted and split to get the
  individual values. Those values are validated for proper content.

  Once validated, the profile of the Slack user is obtained to get the email,
  then the user profile is sent to `processContent` to collaborate the Box
  content in with the Box group so that everyone has access.

  <Note>
    The reason for fetching the Slack user's email in this step is because the
    file or folder is owned by the user, not by the application's service
    account. When we share content (by creating a collaboration) the action will
    need to be performed by a user who has sharing permissions on that file or
    folder. For this reason, we need to match the Slack user's email address
    against a Box user's email address so that we can create the collaboration on
    their behalf.
  </Note>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `process` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public void process(JSONObject inputJSON) throws Exception {
      if (inputJSON.containsKey("event")) {
          JSONObject event = (JSONObject) inputJSON.get("event");
          String eventType = (String) event.get("type");
          String eventUserId = (String) event.get("user");
          String eventChannel = (String) event.get("channel");

          processUser(getSlackUser(eventUserId), eventType, eventChannel);
      } else if (inputJSON.containsKey("command")) {
          String eventCommand = (String) inputJSON.get("command");
          if (eventCommand.equals("/boxadd")) {
              String eventChannelId = (String) inputJSON.get("channel_id");
              String eventUserId = (String) inputJSON.get("user_id");
              String cInput = (String) inputJSON.get("text");
              String[] cInputParts = cInput.split(" ");

              if (cInputParts[0].matches("file|folder")) {
                  processContent(getSlackUser(eventUserId), eventChannelId, cInputParts[0], cInputParts[1]);
              }
          }
      } else {
          System.err.println("Invalid event action");
      }
  }
  ```

  The purpose of this method is to figure out if the payload from Slack is a
  user event or a Slash command, fetch any needed information, then route to the
  appropriate method to process the results.

  If the payload is a user event, denoted by the event node being present in the
  JSON payload, we extract a few pieces of information.

  * `eventType`: The type of event to determine if a user is leaving (`member_left_channel`) or joining (`member_joined_channel`) the channel.
  * `eventUserId`: The ID of the user, to look up their profile email which will bind to a user profile in Box that uses the same email.
  * `eventChannel`: The channel ID, which will be used as the Box group name.

  We then route to `processUser`, passing in the return value
  from the `getSlackUser` method (a user object), the type of event, and the
  channel.

  If the payload is a slash command, denoted by the `command` node being present
  in the JSON payload, we extract a few pieces of information.

  * `eventChannelId`: The Slack channel ID, to be used as the Box group name.
  * `eventUserId`: The ID of the user who issued the command.
  * `cInputParts`: The type and ID of the command input, from a string such as `file 1234`.

  We then route to `processContent`, passing in the return value
  from the `getSlackUser` method (a user object), the channel ID, the content
  type (file or folder), and the content ID for the file or folder stored in Box.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Process Slack user

Next, we need to define how user events should be processed. There are three
events that we need to account for:

* The bot was added to the channel.
* A regular user joined the channel.
* A regular user left the channel.

<Choice>
  Replace the `processUser` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function processUser(user, event, channel) {
      getGroupId(channel, function (groupId) {
          // if bot was added, add all channel users
          if (user.is_bot) {
              processSlackChannel(channel, groupId);
          } else if (
              user.profile &&
              user.profile.email &&
              event === "member_joined_channel"
          ) {
              addGroupUser(groupId, user.profile.email);
          } else if (
              user.profile &&
              user.profile.email &&
              event === "member_left_channel"
          ) {
              removeGroupUser(groupId, user.profile.email);
          }
      });
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `processUser` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public void processUser(JSONObject userResponse, String event, String channel) throws Exception {
      String groupId = getGroupId(channel);

      JSONObject userObj = (JSONObject) userResponse.get("user");

      Boolean isBot = (Boolean) userObj.get("is_bot");
      JSONObject userProfile = (JSONObject) userObj.get("profile");
      String userEmail = (String) userProfile.get("email");

      if (isBot) {
          processSlackChannel(channel, groupId);
      } else if (event.equals("member_joined_channel")) {
          addGroupUser(groupId, userEmail);
      } else if (event.equals("member_left_channel")) {
          removeGroupUser(groupId, userEmail);
      }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

The code starts by fetching the Box group ID for the channel, which will be
defining in the next step. Once obtained, it processes users as follows.

* If the user is a bot, it needs to initialize the Box group and add all current users of the channel as Box users in the group. This is to account for the bot being added to existing channels, and this is ignored if the bot is being re-added to a channel that they were already present in previously.
* If the user joined the channel it needs to add them to the group.
* If the user left the channel it needs to remove them from the group.

## Process Slack channel users

When a bot is first added to a channel, it needs to list all users
currently in the channel and create a Box group with those people in order to
create a baseline for the channel.

<Choice>
  Replace the `processSlackChannel` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function processSlackChannel(channel, groupId) {
      const limit = 100;
      const channelUsersPath = `https://slack.com/api/conversations.members?token=${slackConfig.botToken}&channel=${channel}&limit=${limit}`;

      axios.get(channelUsersPath).then((response) => {
          response.data.members.forEach((uid) => {
              getSlackUser(uid, function (user) {
                  if (user.profile.email && !user.is_bot) {
                      addGroupUser(groupId, user.profile.email);
                  }
              });
          });
      });
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `processSlackChannel` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public void processSlackChannel(String channel, String groupId) throws Exception {
      String limit = "100";
      String channelUsersPath = String.format("%s/conversations.members?token=%s&channel=%s&limit=%s", slackConfig.slackApiUrl, slackConfig.botToken, channel, limit);

      JSONObject channelUserList = sendGETRequest(channelUsersPath);
      JSONArray channelUserIds = (JSONArray) channelUserList.get("members");

      @SuppressWarnings("rawtypes")
      Iterator i = channelUserIds.iterator();
      while(i.hasNext()) {
          String uid = (String)i.next();

          JSONObject userResponse = (JSONObject) getSlackUser(uid.toString());
          JSONObject userObj = (JSONObject) userResponse.get("user");
          JSONObject userProfile = (JSONObject) userObj.get("profile");
          Boolean isBot = (Boolean) userObj.get("is_bot");

          String userEmail = new String();
          if (!isBot) {
              userEmail = (String) userProfile.get("email");
          }

          if (!userEmail.isEmpty() && !isBot) {
              addGroupUser(groupId, userEmail);
          }
      }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

This code runs a number of actions in sequence.

* First, it calls the Slack APIs to fetch all members of the channel. The
* `limit` can be adjusted to collect more users in the channel.
* For every user that is found, it calls `getSlackUser` to get their profile, allow it to map their email address to a Box user's email address.
* Each user is then sent to `addGroupUser` to add them into the group.

## Fetch Slack user profile

The last Slack related function is a utility mechanism used by the other
functions. It calls the Slack API to fetch the user profile
given the user ID provided by either Slack event / command or when fetching
a list of channel users. Since we're matching Slack users to Box users via
their email address, that is the field that we care about from the user profile
lookup.

<Note>
  Email addresses in Box are unique and cannot be used for multiple accounts,
  meaning that they can be used effectively for user account lookup.
</Note>

<Choice>
  Replace the `getSlackUser` function with the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  function getSlackUser(userId, callback) {
      const userPath = `https://slack.com/api/users.info?token=${slackConfig.botToken}&user=${userId}`;

      axios.get(userPath).then((response) => {
          if (response.data.user && response.data.user.profile) {
              callback(response.data.user);
          } else {
              console.log("No user data found");
          }
      });
  }
  ```

  This function makes a call to the Slack user profile endpoint, then sends the
  user profile information (if valid) to the specified callback.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `getSlackUser` method with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  public JSONObject getSlackUser(String userId) throws Exception {
      String usersPath = String.format("%s/users.info?token=%s&user=%s", slackConfig.slackApiUrl, slackConfig.botToken, userId);
      return sendGETRequest(usersPath);
  }
  ```

  This method sends a request to Slack to capture the user profile, then returns
  the response from that request, which should be a user profile JSON object.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Summary

* You've verified incoming events and forwarded them to be processed.
* You've processed events and routed to the appropriate function.
* You've implemented functions for processing all users in a channel and for fetching the Slack profile of a single user.

<Observe>
  <Next>I've set up my Slack functions</Next>
</Observe>


# Connect Slack to Box Group Collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/index



Slack is a popular communication and productivity tool, allowing for real-time
coordination when working with individuals or groups in and outside of the
company.

When connected to a custom Box application, the Slack channel structure, along
with the [slash command][slack-slash-commands] and [event API][slack-event-api]
systems, can be used to provide a logical grouping and collaboration system for
Box files and folders.

## Overview

This quick start guide will walk you through all the steps needed to group Box
users based on the channels they are in within a Slack workspace, and then
permit individuals within those Slack channels to share Box files and folders
with that group using a Slack slash command.

At the end of this tutorial you will have a Slack bot that will be deployed to a
channel in your workspace. This bot will create a Box group containing all the
people present in the channel, and then listen for a `/boxadd` command in the
channel. It will then parse that command and automatically collaborate the Box
fie or folder with the entire group of users in the channel.

<Frame>
  <img alt="/boxadd command in Slack" />
</Frame>

This guide will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-slack">Setup and configure your Slack app</Link> to handle the event notification and Slash command structures.
2. <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-box">Setup and configure your Box application</Link> to connect the web application to Box.
3. <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/scaffold-application-code">Listen for Slack events and commands</Link> when users join and leave channels, or share a Box file or folder with the group.
4. <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/handle-slack-events">Structure Box groups and file / folder collaborations</Link> based on the Slack events or slash commands.
5. <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/connect-box-functions">And finally, deploy the application to your workspace</Link> and invite the Slack app bot to your channels to begin listening for events.

## Requirements

This quick start guide has two requirements that are worth noting before we proceed.

1. **User emails need to match between Box and Slack**: We are connecting a Slack user account to a Box user account by comparing the Slack user email address. Therefore, a matching Box user account using the same email address must be present in your Box enterprise.
2. **You must have a publicly accessible server**: Slack will need to send event and command notification data to a public URL for your application. This guide assumes that you have a public location where your application code will be hosted, such as `https://mysite.com/`. If you don't have access to any public hosting then application platforms like [Heroku][heroku], serverless options like [AWS lambda][aws-lambda], or exposing localhost with services like [ngrok][ngrok] are all options that you might want to consider.

<Next>
  I am ready to get started
</Next>

[slack-slash-commands]: https://api.slack.com/apps/A0155185TT3/slash-commands

[slack-event-api]: https://api.slack.com/events-api

[step6]: /guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/test-bot

[heroku]: https://heroku.com/

[aws-lambda]: https://aws.amazon.com/lambda/

[ngrok]: https://ngrok.com/


# Scaffold application code
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/scaffold-application-code



<ProgressBar />

With our Slack and Box applications configured, we're ready to write the code
for our application which will listen for incoming slash commands and events
from Slack.

This application will be split up into three parts:

* Set up the initial application skeleton and configuration information.
* Set up the handlers for Slack events and slash commands.
* Connect those handlers to the required functions in Box.

## Add dependencies and scaffold code

Let's start by scaffolding the files and minimal code needed to
run the application.

<Choice>
  * Either create a new local directory for your application or load the existing code created for the Slack event URL challenge from <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-slack">step 1</Link>.
  * Create a new `package.json` file, or update the existing one, inside the local directory, open it in your preferred editor, copy / paste the following into it, and save / exit the file.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "name": "box-slack",
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "description": "Box Slack integration",
    "main": "process.js",
    "scripts": {
      "test": "echo \"Error: no test specified\" && exit 1",
      "start": "node process.js"
    },
    "author": "Box",
    "license": "ISC",
    "dependencies": {
      "axios": "^0.19.2",
      "body-parser": "^1.19.0",
      "box-node-sdk": "^1.33.0",
      "express": "^4.17.1"
    }
  }
  ```

  * Run `npm install` from the terminal / console to install the dependencies.
  * Create two files, `process.js` and `slackConfig.json` in the local directory.
  * Open `slackConfig.json` and save the following default configuration.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "verificationToken": "TOKEN",
    "botToken": "TOKEN"
  }
  ```

  * There are two values above that will need to be replaced with details from your Slack application. Replace the `TOKEN` strings with the appropriate values.
    * `verificationToken`: Load up your Slack application configuration page. Within the **Basic Information** page, scroll down to the **App Credentials** section. The **Verification Token** string will be available there.
    * `botToken`: Within your Slack application, go to the **OAuth & Permissions** page. The **Bot User OAuth Access Token** string is available at the top and was auto-populated once the bot was added to your Slack workspace.
  * Open up the blank `process.js` file, copy and paste the following code, and save the file.

  ```js theme={null}
  const box = require("box-node-sdk");

  const slackConfig = require("./slackConfig.json");
  const boxConfig = require("./boxConfig.json");

  const express = require("express");
  const app = express();
  const axios = require("axios");
  const util = require("util");

  app.use(express.urlencoded({ extended: true }));
  app.use(express.json());

  // INSTANTIATE BOX CLIENT

  app.post('/event', (req, res) => {
      //HANDLE INCOMING EVENTS
  });

  const handler = (() => {
      function process(res, data) {
          // PROCESS EVENTS
      }

      function processUser(user, event, channel) {
          // PROCESS USER ADD / REMOVE REQUEST
      }

      function addGroupUser(groupId, email) {
          // ADD USER TO BOX GROUP
      }

      function removeGroupUser(groupId, email) {
          // REMOVE USER FROM BOX GROUP
      }

      function processContent(user, channel, type, fid) {
          // COLLABORATE CONTENT WITH GROUP
      }

      function processSlackChannel(channel, gid) {
          // ADD ALL SLACK CHANNEL USERS TO GROUP
      }

      function getSlackUser(userId, _callback) {
          // GET SLACK USER PROFILE
      }

      function getGroupId(groupName, _callback) {
          // GET AND CREATE BOX GROUP
      }

      return {
          process
      };
  })();

  const port = process.env.PORT || 3000;
  app.listen(port, function(err) {
    console.log("Server listening on PORT", port);
  });
  ```

  This code contains all of the main functions that will be needed to handle and
  process the communication between Slack and Box. From top to bottom, the
  functions are:

  * `/event` handler: Captures all incoming Slack traffic, verifies the content, and routes them to the `process` function.
  * `process`: Parses the Slack event and routes the event to either Box group processing (user channel events) or to add Box content to the group (slash commands).
  * `processUser`: Handles user events, either adding or removing a user from a Box group by routing to the appropriate functions.
  * `addGroupUser`: Adds a user to a Box group.
  * `removeGroupUser`: Removes a user from a Box group.
  * `processContent`: Collaborates Box content with the Box group.
  * `processSlackChannel`: Adds all Slack channel users to a Box group.
  * `getSlackUser`: Utility function to fetch a Slack user's profile from their Slack user ID.
  * `getGroupId`: Utility function to fetch a Box group ID from a Box group name.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  A configuration file needs to be created to house our Slack credentials and
  URLs.

  * Within your `src/main/java` path, where your `Application.java` file is located, create a new Java class file named `slackConfig.java`.
  * Open the file and save the following into it.

  ```java theme={null}
  package com.box.slack.box;

  public class slackConfig {
      public static String verificationToken = "TOKEN";
      public static String botToken = "TOKEN";
      public static String slackApiUrl = "https://slack.com/api";
  }
  ```

  * There are two values above that will need to be replaced with details from your Slack application. Replace the `TOKEN` strings with the appropriate values.
    * `verificationToken`: Load up your Slack application configuration page. Within the **Basic Information** page, scroll down to the **App Credentials** section. The **Verification Token** string will be available there.
    * `botToken`: Within your Slack application, go to the **OAuth & Permissions** page. The **Bot User OAuth Access Token** string is available at the top and was auto-populated once the bot was added to your Slack workspace.
  * Open up the `Application.java` file that was created for the previous Slack event challenge setup and replace the content of the file with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  package com.box.slack.box;

  import java.io.BufferedReader;
  import java.io.FileReader;
  import java.io.InputStreamReader;
  import java.io.Reader;
  import java.io.UnsupportedEncodingException;
  import java.net.HttpURLConnection;
  import java.net.URL;
  import java.nio.charset.StandardCharsets;
  import java.util.Iterator;

  import javax.servlet.http.HttpServletResponse;

  import org.jose4j.json.internal.json_simple.JSONArray;
  import org.jose4j.json.internal.json_simple.JSONObject;
  import org.jose4j.json.internal.json_simple.parser.JSONParser;
  import org.springframework.boot.SpringApplication;
  import org.springframework.boot.autoconfigure.EnableAutoConfiguration;
  import org.springframework.http.MediaType;
  import org.springframework.scheduling.annotation.Async;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.PostMapping;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RequestBody;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RequestHeader;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.ResponseBody;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RestController;

  import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIConnection;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxCollaborator;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxCollaboration;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxFile;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxFolder;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxGroup;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxGroupMembership;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxUser;

  @RestController
  @EnableAutoConfiguration
  public class Application extends slackConfig {
      private Reader fileReader;
      private BoxConfig boxConfig;
      private BoxAPIConnection boxAPI;

      @PostMapping("/event")
      @ResponseBody
      public void handleEvent(@RequestBody String data, @RequestHeader("Content-Type") String contentType, HttpServletResponse response) throws Exception {
          // HANDLE EVENTS
      }

      @Async
      public void processEvent(String data) throws Exception {
          // VERIFY EVENTS
      }

      public void process(JSONObject inputJSON) throws Exception {
          // PROCESS EVENTS
      }

      public void processUser(JSONObject userResponse, String event, String channel) throws Exception {
          // PROCESS USER ADD / REMOVE REQUEST
      }

      public void addGroupUser(String groupId, String userEmail) {
          // ADD USER TO BOX GROUP
      }

      public void removeGroupUser(String groupId, String userEmail) {
          // REMOVE USER FROM BOX GROUP
      }

      public void processContent(JSONObject userResponse, String channel, String fType, String fId) {
          // COLLABORATE CONTENT WITH GROUP
      }

      public void processSlackChannel(String channel, String groupId) throws Exception {
          // ADD ALL SLACK CHANNEL USERS TO GROUP
      }

      public JSONObject getSlackUser(String userId) throws Exception {
          // GET SLACK USER PROFILE
      }

      public String getGroupId(String groupName) {
          // GET AND CREATE BOX GROUP
      }

      public JSONObject sendGETRequest(String reqURL) throws Exception {
          StringBuffer response = new StringBuffer();

          URL obj = new URL(reqURL);
          HttpURLConnection httpURLConnection = (HttpURLConnection) obj.openConnection();
          httpURLConnection.setRequestMethod("GET");

          int responseCode = httpURLConnection.getResponseCode();
          if (responseCode == HttpURLConnection.HTTP_OK) {
              BufferedReader in = new BufferedReader(new InputStreamReader(httpURLConnection.getInputStream()));
              String inputLine;

              while ((inputLine = in .readLine()) != null) {
                  response.append(inputLine);
              } in .close();
          } else {
              System.err.println("GET request failed");
          }

          Object dataObj = new JSONParser().parse(response.toString());
          JSONObject outputJSON = (JSONObject) dataObj;

          return outputJSON;
      }

      public static void main(String[] args) {
          SpringApplication.run(Application.class, args);
      }
  }
  ```

  This code contains all of the main functions that will be needed to handle and
  process the communication between Slack and Box. From top to bottom, the
  functions are:

  * `handleEvent`: Captures all incoming Slack traffic and responds with an HTTP 200 response to notify Slack that the event was received. Since slash commands will transmit their payload as `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` rather than `application/json`, we convert those payloads to JSON objects to standardize the input.
  * `processEvent`: Verifies that the event is from Slack, instantiates a Box client, and routes for processing.
  * `process`: Parses the Slack event and routes to either Box group processing (user channel events) or to add Box content to the group (slash commands).
  * `processUser`: Handles user event requirements to either add or remove a user to a Box group by routing to the appropriate functions.
  * `addGroupUser`: Adds a user to a Box group.
  * `removeGroupUser`: Removes a user from a Box group.
  * `processContent`: Collaborates Box content with the Box group.
  * `processSlackChannel`: Adds all Slack channel users to a Box group.
  * `getSlackUser`: Utility function to fetch a Slack user profile from a Slack user ID.
  * `getGroupId`: Utility function to fetch a Box group ID from a Box group name.
  * `sendGETRequest`: Utility function to send an HTTP GET request.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Summary

* You created a minimal application scaffold, and provided the basic configuration details.
* You installed all the project dependencies.

<Observe>
  <Next>I have my local application set up</Next>
</Observe>


# Test the bot
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/test-bot



<ProgressBar />

In this last section we'll test the full range of functionality of the Slack
bot.

* **Group creation**: When a bot is added to a channel, a new Box group should be created with all of the current channel participants. Only those people in the channel with matching Box accounts (based on email address matching) should be added.
* **User event functions**: When a user enters or leaves a channel, they should be added or removed from the channel group.
* **Content add functions**: When a user enters a valid `/boxadd` slash command, that content should be shared with the group through a new collaboration.

<Note>
  If you haven't done so already, ensure that all the code we've written so far
  is deployed as an application that is publicly accessible.
</Note>

## Testing group creation

When a bot is first added to a channel, there are a number of expectations.

* A new group is created with a name that matches the Slack channel ID.
* All people currently in the channel are added to the group, as long as their Slack email address matches an enterprise account with the same email.

When the Slack bot was configured in <Link href="/guides/collaborations/connect-slack-to-group-collabs/configure-slack">step 1</Link>, we installed it within
the Slack workspace. To test group creation we need to add it to a channel.

From any Slack channel, invite the Slack bot, either through the Slack UI or
using a `/invite @bot_app_name` command.

Once added, verify that the group is created in Box and members have been
added. From a Box enterprise admin account, go to the
**[Users and Groups][box-users-groups]** section of the admin console. If
successful, you will see a group with an random alpha-numeric string as the
group name. This is the Slack channel ID, which is mirrored in the group name.

<Frame>
  <img alt="View Box Groups" />
</Frame>

Under the **Members** column, you should also see a number indicating the
number of Box users with matching email addresses that were found in the
enterprise and added to the group during group creation.

If you see your group and members, this step is a success.

<Note>
  If you see no members added to the group, and no errors being returned from
  the bot application, the most likely cause is email mismatch. Ensure that the
  email addresses used by the accounts in Slack match the emails used by users
  in your Box enterprise.
</Note>

## Testing user event functions

Keep the **[Users and Groups][box-users-groups]** section of the Box admin
console open and take note of the number in the **Members** column beside your
Slack group.

From the Slack channel with the bot invited, add or remove someone other than
the bot from the channel.

Refresh the users and groups section of the Box admin console and you should
see the members number drop or increase depending on if you added or removed a
user.

If the number of members changes, this step is a success.

## Testing content add functions

To test the functionality of sharing content with the group, you will need
access to two users in the channel, one person to share the content from their
Box account, and another person in the group to view their list of files to
verify that the content was shared.

From the Slack channel with the bot invited, type in the slash command to share
files or folders with the group, in the format of
`/boxadd [file/folder] [ID of file/folder]`, such as
`/boxadd folder 324554221`.

<Note>
  The file or folder ID specified needs to be content within the Box account of
  the person sharing it.
</Note>

To find the ID of a file or folder in a Box account, load up the file or folder
within [the Box site][box], then look at the URL. The ID will be the
last string in the URL, often right after a section which includes either
`/file/` or `/folder/`.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Get File or Folder ID" />
</Frame>

Once the command is typed in, go to the [the Box site][box] account
of another person within the Slack channel and Box group. The content that was
shared should now be available to that account.

If the shared content is available to others in the group, this step is a
success.

## Next Steps

With our minima bot deployed we can now think about ways to improve the
experience on top of what we've created so far. Next steps in this
journey may include any number of different expansion areas.

* Add new slash commands for <Link href="/guides/shared-links/create-or-update">creating shared links</Link> for the files and folders shared with the group, allowing you to share the content with others who are not in the group and people outside your enterprise.
* <Link href="/reference/post-retention-policies">Creating retention policies</Link> and <Link href="/reference/post-retention-policy-assignments">assigning them</Link> to any content shared with the group, allowing you to control the lifespan and governance of shared content.
* Adding new slash commands for allowing people in the channel to <Link href="/reference/post-comments">comment on the files</Link> that are shared with the group.

[box-users-groups]: https://app.box.com/master/groups

[box]: https://box.com


# Sharing with Groups
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/groups



To share a file or folder with a group of users, create a collaboration using
the group ID, the ID of the file or folder, and the role or permissions level
the group should have when accessing the file or folder.

<Info>
  The collaboration roles are `editor`, `viewer`, `previewer`, `uploader`,
  `previewer uploader`, `viewer uploader`, `co-owner`, or `owner`. For a full
  description of each role, please refer to our [support documentation].
</Info>

## Nested objects

When creating a collaboration there are two nested objects within the request
body: `accessible_by` and `item`.

The `accessible_by` object specifies who the item should be shared with and
includes a group `id` and the `type`. The `type` field should always be set to
`group`.

The `item` object specifies what is being shared. It includes a `type` field
which should be set as `file` or `folder`, and an `id` for that file or folder.

[support documentation]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels


# Collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/index



Collaborations define access permissions for users and groups to files and
folders, similar to access control lists. A collaboration object grants a user
or group access to a file or folder with permissions defined by a specific
role.

The collaboration roles are `editor`, `viewer`, `previewer`, `uploader`,
`previewer uploader`, `viewer uploader`, `co-owner`, or `owner`. For a full
description of each role, please refer to our [support documentation].

[support documentation]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels


# Get Pending Collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/pending



To get the pending collaborations for a user, call the `GET /collaborations` API
with a `status` of `pending`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations?status=pending" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.listCollaborations.getCollaborations({
    status: 'pending' as GetCollaborationsQueryParamsStatusField,
  } satisfies GetCollaborationsQueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.list_collaborations.get_collaborations(GetCollaborationsStatus.PENDING)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.ListCollaborations.GetCollaborationsAsync(queryParams: new GetCollaborationsQueryParams(status: GetCollaborationsQueryParamsStatusField.Pending));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.listCollaborations.getCollaborations(queryParams: GetCollaborationsQueryParams(status: GetCollaborationsQueryParamsStatusField.pending))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getListCollaborations().getCollaborations(new GetCollaborationsQueryParams(GetCollaborationsQueryParamsStatusField.PENDING))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Collection<BoxCollaboration.Info> pendingCollaborations =
      BoxCollaboration.getPendingCollaborations(api);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  pending_collaborations = client.get_pending_collaborations()
  for pending_collaboration in pending_collaborations:
      print(f'Collaboration {pending_collaboration.id} is pending')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxCollaboration> pendingCollabs = await CollaborationsManager
      .GetPendingCollaborationAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collaborations.getPending()
  	.then(collaborations => {
  		/* collaborations -> {
  			total_count: 1,
  			entries: [
  				{
  					type: 'collaboration',
  					id: '11111',
  					created_by: {
  						type: 'user',
  						id: '22222',
  						name: 'Example User',
  						login: 'user@example.com'
  					},
  					created_at: '2011-11-29T12:56:35-08:00',
  					modified_at: '2012-09-11T15:12:32-07:00',
  					expires_at: null,
  					status: 'pending',
  					accessible_by: {
  						type: 'user',
  						id: '33333',
  						name: 'Collaborator User',
  						login: 'collaborator@example.com'
  					},
  					role: 'editor',
  					acknowledged_at: '2011-11-29T12:59:40-08:00',
  					item: null
  				}
  			]
  		}
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  This only returns the current list of pending collaborations for a user. This
  API does not allow for returning all collaborations for a user.
</Warning>


# Share Content with User
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collaborations/share-content



To share content with a user, create a collaboration using
the user ID or email
address, the ID of the content, and the role or
permissions level the user
should have when accessing the content.
The collaboration roles
are `editor`,`viewer`, `previewer`, `uploader`,
`previewer uploader`,
`viewer uploader`,`co-owner`,
or `owner`. For a full description of each role,
please refer to our [support documentation].

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "item": {
           "type": "file",
           "id": "11446498"
         },
         "accessible_by": {
           "type": "user",
           "login": "user@example.com"
         },
         "role": "editor"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.createCollaboration({
    item: {
      type: 'folder' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField,
      id: folder.id,
    } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField,
    accessibleBy: {
      type: 'user' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField,
      id: user.id,
    } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField,
    role: 'editor' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField,
  } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.user_collaborations.create_collaboration(
      CreateCollaborationItem(type=CreateCollaborationItemTypeField.FOLDER, id=folder.id),
      CreateCollaborationAccessibleBy(
          type=CreateCollaborationAccessibleByTypeField.USER, id=user.id
      ),
      CreateCollaborationRole.EDITOR,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.CreateCollaborationAsync(requestBody: new CreateCollaborationRequestBody(item: new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField() { Type = CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.Folder, Id = folder.Id }, accessibleBy: new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.User) { Id = user.Id }, role: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.Editor));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.userCollaborations.createCollaboration(requestBody: CreateCollaborationRequestBody(item: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.folder, id: folder.id), accessibleBy: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.user, id: user.id), role: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.editor))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUserCollaborations().createCollaboration(new CreateCollaborationRequestBody(new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField.Builder().type(CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.FOLDER).id(folder.getId()).build(), new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField.Builder(CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.USER).id(user.getId()).build(), CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.EDITOR))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxCollaborator user = new BoxUser(api, "user-id")
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "folder-id");
  folder.collaborate(user, BoxCollaboration.Role.EDITOR);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.collaboration import CollaborationRole

  user = client.user(user_id='11111')
  collaboration = client.folder(folder_id='22222').collaborate(user, CollaborationRole.VIEWER)

  collaborator = collaboration.accessible_by
  item = collaboration.item
  has_accepted = 'has' if collaboration.status == 'accepted' else 'has not'
  print(f'{collaborator.name} {has_accepted} accepted the collaboration to folder "{item.name}"')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  // collaborate folder 11111 with user 22222
  BoxCollaborationRequest requestParams = new BoxCollaborationRequest()
  {
      Item = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Type = BoxType.folder,
          Id = "11111"
      },
      Role = "editor",
      AccessibleBy = new BoxCollaborationUserRequest()
      {
          Type = BoxType.user,
          Id = "22222"
      }
  };
  BoxCollaboration collab = await client.CollaborationsManager.AddCollaborationAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Invite user 123456 to collaborate on folder 987654
  client.collaborations.createWithUserID('123456', '987654', client.collaborationRoles.EDITOR)
  	.then(collaboration => {
  		/* collaboration -> {
  			type: 'collaboration',
  			id: '11111',
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '22222',
  				name: 'Inviting User',
  				login: 'inviter@example.com' },
  			created_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			modified_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			expires_at: null,
  			status: 'accepted',
  			accessible_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '123456',
  				name: 'Collaborator User',
  				login: 'collaborator@example.com' },
  			role: 'editor',
  			acknowledged_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			item: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '987654',
  				sequence_id: '0',
  				etag: '0',
  				name: 'Collaborated Folder' } }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Nested objects

When creating a collaboration there are two nested objects within the request
body: `accessible_by` and `item`.

The `accessible_by` object specifies who the item should be shared with and
includes a group `id` and the `type`. The `type` field should always be set to
`user`.

The `item` object specifies what is being shared. It includes a `type` field
which should be set as `file` and an `id` for that file.

[support documentation]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels


# Add Item to Collection
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collections/add



To add an item to a collection, call the `PUT` endpoint for that specific type of
item and pass along a list of collection IDs.

<Warning>
  The only collection that is available via the API is the "Favorites"
  collection. The ID of this collection is [different for every
  user](/guides/collections/list).
</Warning>

## Add file to collection

To add a file to a collection, call the `PUT /files/:id` API and pass along a
list of collection IDs.

## Add folder to collection

To add a folder to a collection, call the `PUT /folders/:id` API and pass along
a list of collection IDs.

## Add web link to collection

To add a web link to a collection, call the `PUT /web_links/:id` API and pass
along a list of collection IDs.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Collections
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collections/index



Collections in Box are a way to group files, folders, and web links without
putting them all into a folder together.

<Warning>
  The only collection that is available via the API is the "Favorites"
  collection. The ID of this collection is [different for every
  user](/guides/collections/list).
</Warning>


# List User's Collections
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collections/list



To list all collections for a user, call the [`GET
/collections`](/reference/get-collections) API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/collections" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.collections.getCollections();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.collections.get_collections()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Collections.GetCollectionsAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.collections.getCollections()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<BoxCollection.Info> collections = BoxCollection.getAllCollections(api);
  for (BoxCollection.Info collectionInfo : collections) {
  	// Do something with the collection.
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  collections = client.collections()
  for collection in collections:
      print(f'Collection "{collection.name}" has ID {collection.id}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxCollectionItem> collections = await client.CollectionsManager.GetCollectionsAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collections.getAll()
  	.then(collections => {
  		/* collections -> { total_count: 1,
  			entries: 
  			[ { type: 'collection',
  				id: '11111',
  				name: 'Favorites',
  				collection_type: 'favorites' } ],
  			limit: 100,
  			offset: 0 }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  The only collection that is available via the API is the "Favorites"
  collection. The ID of this collection is different for every
  user.
</Warning>

## Favorites Collection

The only collection that can items can currently be added and removed to via the
API is the "Favorites" collection.

The ID of the favorites collection is different for every user. To find the
user's collection ID for their favorites, list all the user's collections and
then find the collection with a `collection_type` of `favorites`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "entries": [
    {
      "collection_type": "favorites",
      "id": "12345678",
      "name": "Favorites",
      "type": "collection"
    }
  ],
  "limit": 100,
  "offset": 0,
  "total_count": 1
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# List Items in Collections
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collections/list-items



To list all files, folders and web links in a folder call the [`GET
/collections/:id/items`](/reference/get-collections-id-items) API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/collections/926489/items" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.collections.getCollectionItems(favouriteCollection.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.collections.get_collection_items(favourite_collection.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Collections.GetCollectionItemsAsync(collectionId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(favouriteCollection.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.collections.getCollectionItems(collectionId: favouriteCollection.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  for (BoxItem.Info itemInfo : folder) {
      if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFile.Info) {
          BoxFile.Info fileInfo = (BoxFile.Info) itemInfo;
          // Do something with the file.
      } else if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFolder.Info) {
          BoxFolder.Info folderInfo = (BoxFolder.Info) itemInfo;
          // Do something with the folder.
      }
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  items = client.collection(collection_id='12345').get_items()
  for item in items:
      print(f'{item.type.capitalize()} "{item.name}" is in the collection')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> items = await client.CollectionsManager.GetCollectionItemsAsync(id: "11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.collections.getItems('81934', {fields: 'name', limit: 2})
  	.then(items => {
  		/* items -> { total_count: 24,
  			entries: 
  			[ { type: 'folder',
  				id: '192429928',
  				sequence_id: '1',
  				etag: '1',
  				name: 'Stephen Curry Three Pointers' },
  				{ type: 'file',
  				id: '818853862',
  				sequence_id: '0',
  				etag: '0',
  				name: 'Warriors.jpg' } ],
  			offset: 0,
  			limit: 2 }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  The only collection that is available via the API is the "Favorites"
  collection. The ID of this collection is [different for every
  user](/guides/collections/list).
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Remove Item from Collection
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/collections/remove



To remove an item from a collection, call the `PUT` endpoint for that specific
type of item and pass along a list of collection IDs that does not include the
ID of the collection that needs to be removed.

<Warning>
  The only collection that is available via the API is the "Favorites"
  collection and therefore to remove an item from this collection can be
  achieved by passing the API an empty array of collections.
</Warning>

## Remove file from collection

To remove a file from a collection, call the `PUT /files/:id` API and pass an empty
array of collection IDs.

## Remove folder from collection

To remove a folder from a collection, call the `PUT /folders/:id` API and pass an
empty array of collection IDs.

## Remove web link from collection

To remove a web link from a collection, call the `PUT /web_links/:id` API and
pass an empty array of collection IDs.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Create Comment
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/comments/create-comment



To create a comment, call the <Link href="/reference/post-comments">`POST /comments`</Link> API with the
message of the comment, as well as the ID of the file to leave the comment on.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/comments" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "message": "Review completed!",
         "item": {
           "type": "file",
           "id": 426436
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.comments.createComment({
    message: message,
    item: {
      id: fileId,
      type: 'file' as CreateCommentRequestBodyItemTypeField,
    } satisfies CreateCommentRequestBodyItemField,
  } satisfies CreateCommentRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.comments.create_comment(
      message, CreateCommentItem(id=file_id, type=CreateCommentItemTypeField.FILE)
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Comments.CreateCommentAsync(requestBody: new CreateCommentRequestBody(message: message, item: new CreateCommentRequestBodyItemField(id: fileId, type: CreateCommentRequestBodyItemTypeField.File)));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.comments.createComment(requestBody: CreateCommentRequestBody(message: message, item: CreateCommentRequestBodyItemField(id: fileId, type: CreateCommentRequestBodyItemTypeField.file)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getComments().createComment(new CreateCommentRequestBody(message, new CreateCommentRequestBodyItemField(fileId, CreateCommentRequestBodyItemTypeField.FILE)))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  file.addComment("This file is pretty cool.");
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  comment = client.file(file_id='11111').add_comment('When should I have this done by?')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var requestParams = new BoxCommentRequest()
  {
      Item = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Type = BoxType.File,
          Id = "12345"
      },
      Message = "Great work!"
  };
  BoxComment comment = await client.CommentsManager.AddCommentAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.comments.create('33333', 'Is this the latest version?')
      .then(comment => {
          /* comment -> {
              type: 'comment',
              id: '11111',
              is_reply_comment: false,
              message: 'Is this the latest version?',
              created_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              created_at: '2012-12-12T11:25:01-08:00',
              item: { id: '33333', type: 'file' },
              modified_at: '2012-12-12T11:25:01-08:00' }
          */
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

A comment's message can also mentions users using the `@` sign. To do so, add
the string `@[userid:name]` anywhere within the message. The `user_id` is the
target user's ID, where the `name` can be any custom phrase. In the Box UI this
name will link to the user's profile.

Then, pass this string as the `tagged_message` instead of the `message`.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Reply
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/comments/create-reply



To create a reply to a previous comment, call the <Link href="/reference/post-comments">`POST
/comments`</Link> API with the message of the new comment, as well as
the ID of the previous comment to leave the reply on.

A reply's message can also mentions users using the `@` sign. To do so, add
the string `@[userid:name]` anywhere within the message. The `user_id` is the
target user's ID, where the `name` can be any custom phrase. In the Box UI this
name will link to the user's profile.

Then, pass this string as the `tagged_message` instead of the `message`.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Comments
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/comments/index



Comments are messages generated by Box users on files, allowing users to
collaborate together on a file, discussing any feedback they might have on the
content.

Each comment is tied to a specific file and user, and comments can be created as
independent comments or as replies to previous comments.


# Download File
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/file



To download a file, pass the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-content">`GET /files/:id/content`</Link> the ID of the file
to get the content for.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -L -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/content" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  const fs = require('fs');

  const fileContent = await client.downloads.downloadFile('123456789');
  const fileWriteStream = fs.createWriteStream('file.pdf');
  fileContent.pipe(fileWriteStream);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.downloads.download_file(uploaded_file.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Downloads.DownloadFileAsync(fileId: uploadedFile.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  let downloadsDirectoryURL = FileManager.default.urls(for: .documentDirectory, in: .userDomainMask).first!
  let destinationURL = downloadsDirectoryURL.appendingPathComponent("file.txt")

  let url = try await client.downloads.downloadFile(fileId: file.id, downloadDestinationURL: destinationURL)

  if let fileContent = try? String(contentsOf: url, encoding: .utf8) {
      print("The content of the file: \(fileContent)")
  }
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getDownloads().downloadFile(uploadedFile.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  BoxFile.Info info = file.getInfo();

  FileOutputStream stream = new FileOutputStream(info.getName());
  file.download(stream);
  stream.close();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file_id = '11111'
  file_content = client.file(file_id).content()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  Stream fileContents = await client.FilesManager.DownloadStreamAsync(id: "11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  var fs = require('fs');
  client.files.getReadStream('12345', null, function(error, stream) {

  	if (error) {
  		// handle error
  	}

  	// write the file to disk
  	var output = fs.createWriteStream('/path/to/file');
  	stream.pipe(output);
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Download URL

When not using the SDKs, this API call will return a `HTTP 302 Found` status
code, with a `location` header containing a link to the download URL, which
looks something like this.

```sh theme={null}
https://dl.boxcloud.com/d/1/[long-random-string]/download
```

By using the `-L` flag in cURL we are able to automatically follow this
redirect.

<Info>
  In our SDKs this will result in the binary data to be downloaded. In the API
  this will result in a download URL being returned via the `location` header.

  It is possible to <Link href="/guides/downloads/get-url">get the download URL</Link> via the SDKs as well.
</Info>

## Download URL expiry

Although this download URL can be passed to a user's browser to allow them to
download the file, the URL does expire and should be requested again for any
further downloads.

## File not ready

If the file is not ready to be downloaded yet a `retry-after` header will be
returned indicating the time in seconds after which the file will be available
for the client to download.

This response can occur when the file was uploaded immediately before the
download request.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Download File Version
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/file-version



To download a specific file version, pass the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-content">`GET /files/:id/content`</Link>
the ID of the file to get the content for, as well as its version ID.

## Download URL

When not using the SDKs, this API call will return a `HTTP 302 Found` status
code, with a `location` header containing a link to the download URL, which
looks something like this.

```sh theme={null}
https://dl.boxcloud.com/d/1/[long-random-string]/download
```

By using the `-L` flag in cURL we are able to automatically follow this
redirect.

<Info>
  In our SDKs this will result in the binary data to be downloaded. In the API
  this will result in a download URL being returned via the `location` header.

  It is possible to <Link href="/guides/downloads/get-url">get the download URL</Link> via the SDKs as well.
</Info>

## Download URL expiry

Although this download URL can be passed to a user's browser to allow them to
download the file, the URL does expire and should be requested again for any
further downloads.

## File not ready

If the file is not ready to be downloaded yet a `retry-after` header will be
returned indicating the time in seconds after which the file will be available
for the client to download.

This response can occur when the file was uploaded immediately before the
download request.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Download All Files in Folder using SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/folder



Sometimes an application might want to download all files for a folder. To do so
with the SDKs and the CLI requires traversing the folder tree, finding every
file and downloading it accordingly.

<Note>
  To download a ZIP archive, follow <Link href="/guides/downloads/zip-archive">this</Link> guide.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  using System;
  using System.Collections.Generic;
  using System.IO;
  using System.Linq;
  using System.Threading.Tasks;
  using Box.V2.Config;
  using Box.V2.JWTAuth;

  namespace BoxDownloadAllFiles {
      class Program {
          static void Main (string[] args) {
              ExecuteMainAsync ().Wait ();
          }

          private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync () {
              using (FileStream fs = new FileStream ($"./config.json", FileMode.Open)) {
                  var session = new BoxJWTAuth (BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile (fs));
                  var client = session.AdminClient (session.AdminToken ());
                  var folderId = "987654321";
                  var folder = await client.FoldersManager.GetInformationAsync (folderId);
                  var folderName = folder.Name;
                  var localFolderPath = Path.Combine (Directory.GetCurrentDirectory (), folderName);
                  ResetLocalFolder (localFolderPath);

                  var items = await client.FoldersManager.GetFolderItemsAsync (folderId, 1000, autoPaginate : true);
                  var fileDownloadTasks = new List<Task> ();
                  var files = items.Entries.Where (i => i.Type == "file");
                  foreach (var file in files) {
                      fileDownloadTasks.Add (client.FilesManager.DownloadStreamAsync (file.Id).ContinueWith ((t) => {
                          var localFile = File.Create (Path.Combine (localFolderPath, file.Name));
                          return t.Result.CopyToAsync (localFile);
                      }));
                  }
                  await Task.WhenAll (fileDownloadTasks);
              }
          }

          private static void ResetLocalFolder (string localFolderPath) {
              if (!Directory.Exists (localFolderPath)) {
                  Directory.CreateDirectory (localFolderPath);
              } else {
                  foreach (var file in Directory.EnumerateFiles (localFolderPath)) {
                      File.Delete (Path.Combine (localFolderPath, file));
                  }
                  Directory.Delete (localFolderPath);
                  Directory.CreateDirectory (localFolderPath);
              }
          }
      }
  }
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  package com.box;

  import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxFile;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxFolder;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxItem;
  import java.io.BufferedReader;
  import java.io.FileOutputStream;
  import java.io.IOException;
  import java.nio.charset.Charset;
  import java.nio.file.Files;
  import java.nio.file.Path;
  import java.nio.file.Paths;

  public class Playground {

      public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
          Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
          Path currentDir = Paths.get("").toAbsolutePath();
          try (BufferedReader reader = Files.newBufferedReader(configPath, Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
              BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
              BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection client = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);
              String folderId = "987654321";
              BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(client, folderId);
              String folderName = folder.getInfo().getName();
              Path localFolderPath = currentDir.resolve(Paths.get(folderName));
              if (!Files.exists(localFolderPath)) {
                  localFolderPath = Files.createDirectory(localFolderPath);
              } else {
                  localFolderPath = resetLocalFolder(localFolderPath);
              }

              for (BoxItem.Info itemInfo: folder) {
                  if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFile.Info) {
                      BoxFile.Info fileInfo = (BoxFile.Info) itemInfo;
                      BoxFile file = new BoxFile(client, fileInfo.getID());
                      String localFilePath = localFolderPath.resolve(Paths.get(fileInfo.getName())).toAbsolutePath().toString();
                      FileOutputStream stream = new FileOutputStream(localFilePath);
                      file.download(stream);
                      stream.close();
                  }
              }

          }
      }

      static Path resetLocalFolder(Path localFolderPath) throws IOException {
          Files.list(localFolderPath).forEach(file -> {
              System.out.println(file.getFileName());
              try {
                  Files.delete(file.toAbsolutePath());
              } catch (IOException e) {}
          });
          Files.delete(localFolderPath);
          localFolderPath = Files.createDirectory(localFolderPath);
          return localFolderPath;
      }
  }
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  "use strict";
  const box = require("box-node-sdk");
  const fs = require("fs");
  const util = require("util");
  const path = require("path");
  let configFile = fs.readFileSync("config.json");
  configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

  let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
  let client = session.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");
  client._useIterators = true;

  let folderId = "987654321";
  let folderName;
  let localFolderPath;
  client.folders
      .get(folderId, null)
      .then(folderInfo => {
          folderName = folderInfo.name;

          return client.folders.getItems(folderId, { limit: 1000 });
      })
      .then(folderItemsIterator => {
          return autoPage(folderItemsIterator);
      })
      .then(folderItems => {
            console.log(folderName);
            console.log(folderItems.length);
            let files = folderItems.filter(item => {
                return item.type === "file";
            });
            console.log(files);
            localFolderPath = createLocalFolder(folderName);
            let downloadPromises = [];
            files.forEach(file => {
                downloadPromises.push(
                    client.files.getReadStream(file.id, null).then(stream => {
                        let output = fs.createWriteStream(
                          path.join(localFolderPath, file.name)
                        );
                        stream.pipe(output);
                    })
                );
            });
            return Promise.all(downloadPromises);
      })
      .then(() => {
          console.log("Downloaded all files...");
          console.log(fs.readdirSync(localFolderPath));
      });

  function createLocalFolder(folderName) {
      let localFolderName = path.join(__dirname, folderName);
      try {
          fs.mkdirSync(localFolderName);
      } catch (e) {
          if (e.code === "EEXIST") {
              resetLocalFolder(localFolderName);
              fs.mkdirSync(localFolderName);
          } else {
              throw e;
          }
      }
      return localFolderName;
  }

  function resetLocalFolder(localFolderName) {
      if (fs.existsSync(localFolderName)) {
          fs.readdirSync(localFolderName).forEach(localFileName => {
              console.log(localFileName);
              fs.unlinkSync(path.join(localFolderName, localFileName));
          });
          fs.rmdirSync(localFolderName);
      }
  }

  function autoPage(iterator) {
      let collection = [];
      let moveToNextItem = () => {
          return iterator.next().then(item => {
              if (item.value) {
                  collection.push(item.value);
              }
              if (item.done !== true) {
                  return moveToNextItem();
              } else {
                  return collection;
              }
          });
      };
      return moveToNextItem();
  }
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  It is important to remember that an application needs to have the
  permissions to access and download the files and folders in question. When the
  authenticated user does not have access to any of the files or folders, a
  `HTTP 404 Not Found` error will occur.

  Lear more about <Link href="/platform/user-types">User Types</Link> in our guides on
  authentication.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get Download URL
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/get-url



The official Box SDKs return the binary data when downloading a file. To get the
download URL for the data instead, use the following SDK methods.

<Warning>
  **Redirects**

  If you are not using one of our SDKs its important to make sure your HTTP
  client does not automatically follow HTTP redirects. When redirects are
  automatically followed, your code will detect the `location` header returned
  by the API and follow it to get the binary data.
</Warning>

## Download URL expiry

Although this download URL can be passed to a user's browser to allow them to
download the file, the URL does expire and should be requested again for any
further downloads. In most cases the download URL is valid for 15 minutes, after
which a new URL needs to be requested. This expiration time may be subject to
change without any prior notification.

[api]: /reference/get-files-id-content

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Download in Browser
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/in-browser



Sometimes an application wants to embed a file into a page as a HTML element. An
example would be when working with an audio player.

```html theme={null}
<audio controls>
  <source src="..." type="audio/mp3">
</audio>
```

In this case, using the regular <Link href="/guides/downloads/get-url">download URL</Link> does not work because the
`dl.boxcloud.com` domain does not support <Link href="/guides/security/cors">Cross Origin Resource Sharing</Link>.

Instead an application can use the following format.

```sh theme={null}
https://api.box.com/2.0/files/[FILE_ID]/content?access_token=[ACCESS_TOKEN]
```

<Warning>
  **CORS**

  For this to work the application needs to have the domain of the web site
  hosting this file added to the list of allowed domains in the <Link href="/guides/security/cors">CORS
  settings</Link>.
</Warning>

<Warning>
  **Downscope Token**

  Using this method would expose the Access Token to the end user, allowing them
  to potentially use this token to do more than intended. For this reason we
  recommend <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscoping</Link> this token accordingly.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Downloads
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/index



The Box API allows for downloading files to the application's server, or directly
by the end user in a browser.

## When not to download

Downloading a file is not always the desired solution, especially if the file is
only being downloaded for the user to preview, comment, or annotate. In those
cases we recommend using one of the ways to embed the Box experience straight
into your application.

<Card href="/guides/embed/" title="Learn more about embedding Box" />

## Access Errors

It is important to realize that the application needs to have access to the
file that is to be downloaded. When the application is a authenticated through
JWT or App Tokens, the user is authenticated as a Service Account. This service
account does not have access to files besides their own.

If this user does not have access to the file the application will receive a
`404 Not Found` error.

<Card href="/platform/user-types/" title="Learn more about different User Types" />


# Download Shared Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/shared-link



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To download the file for a <Link href="/guides/shared-links">Shared Link</Link>, first <Link href="/guides/shared-links/find-for-item">determine the
file</Link> for the link.

<Note>
  You cannot use the shared link to download folders. <Link href="/guides/downloads/zip-archive">Create and download
  the ZIP archive</Link> instead.
</Note>

Once the file ID has been determined, the file can be downloaded by passing the
`BoxAPI` header to the API.

<Warning>
  To get the Shared Link for an item the user must have at least viewer-level
  access to the item.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Download ZIP Archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/downloads/zip-archive



To download all files in a folder or an entire folder structure, you have to create and download a ZIP archive.

## Create a ZIP Archive

First, you need to create a ZIP archive containing the files or the folder structure. You can include up to 10,000 file and folder IDs unless you reach the account’s upload limit.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/zip_downloads" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "download_file_name": "January Financials",
         "items": [
           {
             "type": "file",
             "id": "12345"
           },
           {
             "type": "file",
             "id": "34325"
           },
           {
             "type": "folder",
             "id": "45678"
           }
         ]
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.zipDownloads.createZipDownload({
    items: [
      {
        id: file1.id,
        type: 'file' as ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField,
      } satisfies ZipDownloadRequestItemsField,
      {
        id: file2.id,
        type: 'file' as ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField,
      } satisfies ZipDownloadRequestItemsField,
      {
        id: folder1.id,
        type: 'folder' as ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField,
      } satisfies ZipDownloadRequestItemsField,
    ],
    downloadFileName: 'zip',
  } satisfies ZipDownloadRequest);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.zip_downloads.create_zip_download(
      [
          CreateZipDownloadItems(id=file_1.id, type=DownloadZipItemsTypeField.FILE),
          CreateZipDownloadItems(id=file_2.id, type=DownloadZipItemsTypeField.FILE),
          CreateZipDownloadItems(id=folder_1.id, type=DownloadZipItemsTypeField.FOLDER),
      ],
      download_file_name="zip",
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.ZipDownloads.CreateZipDownloadAsync(requestBody: new ZipDownloadRequest(items: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(id: file1.Id, type: ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.File),new ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(id: file2.Id, type: ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.File),new ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(id: folder1.Id, type: ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.Folder)})) { DownloadFileName = "zip" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.zipDownloads.createZipDownload(requestBody: ZipDownloadRequest(items: [ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(id: file1.id, type: ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.file), ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(id: file2.id, type: ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.file), ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(id: folder1.id, type: ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.folder)], downloadFileName: "zip"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getZipDownloads().createZipDownload(new ZipDownloadRequest.Builder(Arrays.asList(new ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.FILE, file1.getId()), new ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.FILE, file2.getId()), new ZipDownloadRequestItemsField(ZipDownloadRequestItemsTypeField.FOLDER, folder1.getId()))).downloadFileName("zip").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  ArrayList<BoxZipItem> items = new ArrayList<BoxZipItem>();
  BoxZipItem file = new BoxZipItem("file", "12345");
  BoxZipItem folder = new BoxZipItem("folder", "156472");
  items.add(file);
  items.add(folder);
  BoxZip zip = new BoxZip(api);
  BoxZipInfo zipInfo = zip.create("Awesome Zip File", items);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var name = 'test',
  items = [
   {
    type: 'file',
    id: '466239504569'
   },
   {
    type: 'folder',
    id: '466239504580'
   }
  ];
  client.files.createZip(name, items)
   .then(zip => {
    /* zip -> {
      "download_url": "https://api.box.com/2.0/zip_downloads/124hfiowk3fa8kmrwh/content",
      "status_url": "https://api.box.com/2.0/zip_downloads/124hfiowk3fa8kmrwh/status",
      "expires_at": "2018-04-25T11:00:18-07:00",
      "name_conflicts": [
       [
        {
         "id": "100",
         "type": "file",
         "original_name": "salary.pdf",
         "download_name": "aqc823.pdf"
        },
        {
         "id": "200",
         "type": "file",
         "original_name": "salary.pdf",
         "download_name": "aci23s.pdf"
        }
       ],
       [
        {
         "id": "1000",
         "type": "folder",
         "original_name": "employees",
         "download_name": "3d366a_employees"
        },
        {
         "id": "2000",
         "type": "folder",
         "original_name": "employees",
         "download_name": "3aa6a7_employees"
        }
       ]
      ]
     }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The response will look similar to the following:

```json theme={null}
{
  "download_url": "https://dl.boxcloud.com/2.0/zip_downloads/25gvaXcIE4QJlinNiw2oHAQ==ZFs3Q2Xpd7pKBz7OyzXNrUaoW3aJxQRN5znAvyM-KpdEEPdWcQDKU-Dl85Ew/content",
  "status_url": "https://api.box.com/2.0/zip_downloads/25gvaXcIE4QJlinNiw2oHAQ==ZFs3Q2Xpd7pKBz7OyzXNrUaoW3aJxQRN5znAvyM-KpdEEPdWcQDKU-Dl85Ew/status",
  "expires_at": "2023-02-28T10:23:54Z",
  "name_conflicts": []
}
```

## Extract the ZIP download ID

To download the ZIP archive, you need the ZIP download ID.
You can find it in the response you got when you created the archive.

Go to `status_url` and copy the ID located between`zip_downloads` and `content`:

```json theme={null}
25gvaXcIE4QJlinNiw2oHAQ==ZFs3Q2Xpd7pKBz7OyzXNrUaoW3aJxQRN5znAvyM-KpdEEPdWcQDKU-Dl85Ew
```

<Note>
  Download URL is valid only for a the time specified in `expires_at` parameter.
</Note>

## Download files

Place the download ID in the file location URL as in the sample below
to point to the right files.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -L GET "https://dl.boxcloud.com/2.0/zip_downloads/29l00nfxDyHOt7RphI9zT_w==nDnZEDjY2S8iEWWCHEEiptFxwoWojjlibZjJ6geuE5xnXENDTPxzgbks_yY=/content" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -o sample_curl.zip
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.zipDownloads.getZipDownloadContent(zipDownload.downloadUrl!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.zip_downloads.get_zip_download_content(zip_download.download_url)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.ZipDownloads.GetZipDownloadContentAsync(downloadUrl: NullableUtils.Unwrap(zipDownload.DownloadUrl));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.zipDownloads.getZipDownloadContent(downloadUrl: zipDownload.downloadUrl!, downloadDestinationUrl: URL(path: destinationPathString))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getZipDownloads().getZipDownloadContent(zipDownload.getDownloadUrl())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  ArrayList<BoxZipItem> items = new ArrayList<BoxZipItem>();
  BoxZipItem file = new BoxZipItem("file", "12345");
  BoxZipItem folder = new BoxZipItem("folder", "156472");
  items.add(file);
  items.add(folder);
  BoxZip zip = new BoxZip(api);
  FileOutputStream stream = new FileOutputStream();
  BoxZipDownloadStatus zipDownloadStatus = zip.download("Another Awesome Zip File", items, stream);
  stream.close();
  if (zipDownloadStatus.getState() == BoxZipDownloadStatus.State.SUCCEEDED) {
      System.out.println("Zip downloaded successfully");
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  name = 'test'
  file = mock_client.file('466239504569')
  folder = mock_client.folder('466239504580')
  items = [file, folder]
  output_file = open('test.zip', 'wb')
  status = client.download_zip(name, items, output_file)
  print(f'The status of the zip download is {status["state"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxZipRequest request = new BoxZipRequest();
  request.Name = "test";
  request.Items = new List<BoxZipItemRequest>();

  var file = new BoxZipRequestItem()
  {
      Id = "466239504569",
      Type = BoxZipItemType.file
  };
  var folder = new BoxZipRequestItem()
  {
      Id = "466239504580",
      Type = BoxZipItemType.folder
  };
  request.Items.Add(file);
  request.Items.Add(folder);
  Stream fs = new FileStream(@"c:\temp\MyTest.zip");

  BoxZipDownloadStatus status = await _filesManager.DownloadZip(request, fs);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var name = 'test',
  items = [
   {
    type: 'file',
    id: '466239504569'
   },
   {
    type: 'folder',
    id: '466239504580'
   }
  ],
  stream = new Readable();
  client.files.downloadZip(name, items, stream)
   .then(status => {
    /* status -> {
      "total_file_count": 20,
      "downloaded_file_count": 10,
      "skipped_file_count": 10,
      "skipped_folder_count": 10,
      "state": "succeeded"
     }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

For downloads that take longer, you can monitor the
download status using the
<Link href="/reference/get-zip-downloads-id-status">status endpoint</Link>.
This allows you to inspect the progress of the
download as well as the number of items that might have been skipped.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/zip_downloads/29l00nfxDyHOt7RphI9zT_w==nDnZEDjY2S8iEWWCHEEiptFxwoWojjlibZjJ6geuE5xnXENDTPxzgbks_yY=/status" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.zipDownloads.getZipDownloadStatus(zipDownload.statusUrl!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.zip_downloads.get_zip_download_status(zip_download.status_url)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.ZipDownloads.GetZipDownloadStatusAsync(statusUrl: NullableUtils.Unwrap(zipDownload.StatusUrl));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.zipDownloads.getZipDownloadStatus(statusUrl: zipDownload.statusUrl!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getZipDownloads().getZipDownloadStatus(zipDownload.getStatusUrl())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  If you want to use SDKs to download the contents
  of the folder, follow <Link href="/guides/downloads/folder">this</Link> guide.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Get Enterprise Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise



To get a enterprise's events, make
a call to the <Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link> API with the `stream_type` set to
`admin_logs` or `admin_logs_streaming`.

<Info>
  This API requires the user to be an enterprise admin or co-admin with the
  permission to **Run new reports and access existing reports**.
</Info>

## Stream Types

| Stream Type            |                                                      |
| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- |
| `admin_logs`           | Enables querying historical events up to one year    |
| `admin_logs_streaming` | Enables subscribing to live events in near real time |

## Live Monitoring

To monitor recent events that have been generated within Box across the
enterprise, set the `stream_type` to `admin_logs_streaming`. This is also known
as the Enterprise Event Stream API.

The emphasis for this feed is on low latency rather than chronological
accuracy, which means that Box may return events more than once and out of
chronological order. Events are returned via the API in near real time after
they are processed by Box. A small delay/buffer ensures that new events are not
written after your cursor position. Only two weeks of events are available via
this `stream_type`.

## Historical Querying

To query historical events across the enterprise up to one year old, set the
`stream_type` to `admin_logs`. This is also known as the Enterprise Event
History API.

The emphasis for this feed is on completeness over latency, which means that
Box will deliver admin events in chronological order and without duplicates,
but with higher latency than the user or `admin_logs_streaming` feed. Consuming
events in near real time may lead to missed events as events can arrive later
than your filtering window.

## Anonymous Users

In some cases, the event feed might list a user with an ID of `2`. This is Box's
internal identifier for anonymous users.

An anonymous user is a user that is not logged in. This can happen any time a
user interacts with content and they aren't asked to log in first. An example
would be when a user downloads a file through an open shared link.

## Limitations

The enterprise event feed does not support long polling.

Box does not store events indefinitely. Two weeks of enterprise events are
available when `stream_type` is set to `admin_logs_streaming`. One year of
enterprise events are available when `stream_type` is set to `admin_logs`.
Seven years of enterprise events are available via the Box Admin Console’s
[exported reports][reports].

The emphasis of the `admin_logs_streaming` feed is to return the complete
results quickly, which means that Box may return events more than once and out
of order. Duplicate events can be identified by their event IDs.

## Filter by Event Type

The enterprise event feed supports filtering by event type.

A full list of event types can be found below.

## Event Types

The following events can be triggered for an enterprise. This list is not
exhaustive, so it is possible events appear that are not listed.

| Event name                                                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `ACCESS_GRANTED`                                              | A user has granted Box support access to their account                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `ACCESS_REVOKED`                                              | A user has revoked Box support access to their account                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `ADD_DEVICE_ASSOCIATION`                                      | Added device association                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `ADD_LOGIN_ACTIVITY_DEVICE`                                   | A user is logging in from a device we have not seen before                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `ADMIN_LOGIN`                                                 | Admin console used to log in to a managed user's account                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `ANNOTATIONV2_CREATE`                                         | An annotation is created                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `ANNOTATIONV2_DELETE`                                         | An annotation is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `ANNOTATIONV2_EDIT`                                           | An annotation is edited                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `APPLICATION_CREATED`                                         | A new application is created in the Box Developer Console                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `APPLICATION_PUBLIC_KEY_ADDED`                                | An application public key is added.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `APPLICATION_PUBLIC_KEY_DELETED`                              | An application public key is deleted.                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `BOX_AI_USER_REQUEST`                                         | User asks Box AI a question or makes a request                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `BOX_AI_USER_FAILED_REQUEST`                                  | The question or request returns an error                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `CHANGE_ADMIN_ROLE`                                           | When an admin role changes for a user                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `CHANGE_FOLDER_PERMISSION`                                    | Edit the permissions on a folder                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `COLLABORATION_ACCEPT`                                        | Accepted invites                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `COLLABORATION_EXPIRATION`                                    | Set collaborator expiration                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `COLLABORATION_INVITE`                                        | Invited                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `COLLABORATION_REMOVE`                                        | Removed collaborators                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `COLLABORATION_ROLE_CHANGE`                                   | Changed user roles                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `COLLECTION_CREATE`                                           | A collection is created                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `COLLECTION_DELETE`                                           | A collection is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `COLLECTION_UPDATE`                                           | A collection is updated                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `COLLECTION_ITEM_CREATE`                                      | An item is added to a collection                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `COLLECTION_ITEM_DELETE`                                      | An item is removed from a collection                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `COLLECTION_ITEM_UPDATE`                                      | An item in a collection is updated                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `COMMENT_CREATE`                                              | A comment is created on a file                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `COMMENT_DELETE`                                              | A comment is deleted on a file                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `CONTENT_ACCESS`                                              | A file is accessed by an authorized end user or programmatically by a Box application                                                                                                                                                 |
| `CONTENT_RECOVERY_REPORT_CREATE`                              | A Content Recovery report is created                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `CONTENT_RECOVERY_REPORT_DELETE`                              | A Content Recovery report is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `CONTENT_RECOVERY_REPORT_INITIATE`                            | A Content Recovery report is initiated                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `CONTENT_WORKFLOW_ABNORMAL_DOWNLOAD_ACTIVITY`                 | A policy set in the Admin console is triggered                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `CONTENT_WORKFLOW_AUTOMATION_ADD`                             | An automation is added                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `CONTENT_WORKFLOW_AUTOMATION_DELETE`                          | An automation is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `CONTENT_WORKFLOW_POLICY_ADD`                                 | A content policy is added                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `CONTENT_WORKFLOW_SHARING_POLICY_VIOLATION`                   | There is a sharing policy violation.                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `CONTENT_WORKFLOW_UPLOAD_POLICY_VIOLATION`                    | A collaborator violated an admin-set upload policy                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `COPY`                                                        | Copied                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `DATA_RETENTION_CREATE_RETENTION`                             | Retention is created                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `DATA_RETENTION_REMOVE_RETENTION`                             | Retention is removed                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `DELETE`                                                      | Deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `DELETE_USER`                                                 | Deleted user                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `DEVICE_TRUST_CHECK_FAILED`                                   | Device Trust check failed                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `DISABLE_MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH`                                   | When multifactor authentication has been disabled                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `DOWNLOAD`                                                    | Downloaded                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `EDIT`                                                        | Edited                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `EDIT_USER`                                                   | Edited user                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_DEVICE_DETECTED`                             | Device detected by the CrowdStrike Falcon platform                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_NO_BOX_TOOLS`                                | Box Tools package not detected on device with CrowdStrike Falcon platform support                                                                                                                                                     |
| `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_BOX_TOOLS_OUTDATED`                          | Box Tools package outdated on device with CrowdStrike Falcon platform support                                                                                                                                                         |
| `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_DRIVE_OUTDATED`                              | Box Drive application outdated on device with CrowdStrike Falcon platform support                                                                                                                                                     |
| `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_ACCESS_ALLOWED_NO_CROWDSTRIKE_DEVICE`        | Access allowed to a device not identified by the CrowdStrike Falcon platform                                                                                                                                                          |
| `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_ACCESS_REVOKED`                              | Access revoked to a device identified by the CrowdStrike Falcon platform                                                                                                                                                              |
| `EMAIL_ALIAS_CONFIRM`                                         | A user email alias is confirmed                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `EMAIL_ALIAS_REMOVE`                                          | A user email alias is removed                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `ENABLE_MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH`                                    | When multifactor authentication has been enabled                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `ENTERPRISE_APP_AUTHORIZATION_UPDATE`                         | When a JWT application has been authorized or reauthorized                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `EXTERNAL_COLLAB_SECURITY_SETTINGS`                           | Changes in external collaboration security settings                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `FAILED_LOGIN`                                                | Failed login                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `FILE_MARKED_MALICIOUS`                                       | Virus found on a file. Event is only received by enterprises that have opted in to be notified.                                                                                                                                       |
| `FILE_WATERMARKED_DOWNLOAD`                                   | A watermarked file is downloaded                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `GROUP_ADD_ITEM`                                              | An item is added to a group                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `GROUP_ADD_USER`                                              | Added user to group                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `GROUP_ADMIN_CREATED`                                         | Group admin is created                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `GROUP_ADMIN_DELETED`                                         | Group admin is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `GROUP_ADMIN_PERMISSIONS_UPDATED`                             | Group admin permissions are updated                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `GROUP_CREATION`                                              | Created new group                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `GROUP_DELETION`                                              | Deleted group                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `GROUP_EDITED`                                                | Edited group                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `GROUP_REMOVE_ITEM`                                           | Folders were removed from a group in the Admin console                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `GROUP_REMOVE_USER`                                           | Removed user from group                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `ITEM_EMAIL_SEND`                                             | An email is sent to a collaborator on an item                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `ITEM_MODIFY`                                                 | Item is modified                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `ITEM_OPEN`                                                   | Item is opened                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `ITEM_SHARED_UPDATE`                                          | Share links settings updated                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `ITEM_SYNC`                                                   | Synced folder                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `ITEM_UNSYNC`                                                 | Unmarked folder for synced                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `LEGAL_HOLD_ASSIGNMENT_CREATE`                                | A legal hold assignment is created                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `LEGAL_HOLD_ASSIGNMENT_DELETE`                                | A legal hold assignment is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `LEGAL_HOLD_POLICY_CREATE`                                    | A legal hold policy is created                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `LEGAL_HOLD_POLICY_DELETE`                                    | A legal hold policy is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `LEGAL_HOLD_POLICY_UPDATE`                                    | A legal hold policy is updated                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `LOCK`                                                        | Locked                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `LOGIN`                                                       | Login                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `METADATA_INSTANCE_CREATE`                                    | Creation of metadata instance                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `METADATA_INSTANCE_DELETE`                                    | Deletion of metadata instance                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `METADATA_INSTANCE_UPDATE`                                    | Update of metadata instance                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `METADATA_TEMPLATE_CREATE`                                    | Creation of metadata template                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `METADATA_TEMPLATE_UPDATE`                                    | Update of metadata template                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `METADATA_TEMPLATE_DELETE`                                    | Deletion of metadata template                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `MOVE`                                                        | Moved                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `NEW_USER`                                                    | Created user                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `OAUTH2_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVOKE`                                  | An OAuth 2.0 access token has been revoked                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `PREVIEW`                                                     | Previewed                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `REMOVE_DEVICE_ASSOCIATION`                                   | Removed device association                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `REMOVE_LOGIN_ACTIVITY_DEVICE`                                | We invalidated a user session associated with an app                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `RENAME`                                                      | A file or folder name or description is changed                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `RETENTION_POLICY_ASSIGNMENT_ADD`                             | A retention policy assignment is added                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| `SHARE`                                                       | Enabled shared links                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `SHARE_EXPIRATION`                                            | Set shared link expiration                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `SHARED_LINK_SEND`                                            | An email is sent with a shared link and an optional message                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `SHARED_LINK_REDIRECT_OUT_OF_SHARED_CONTEXT`                  | Shared link causes a redirect                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `SHIELD_ALERT`                                                | Shield detected an anomalous  download, session, location, or malicious content based on enterprise Shield rules. See <Link href="/guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events">shield alert events</Link> for more information. |
| `SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED`                                     | End user blocked from downloading a file based on a shield access policy                                                                                                                                                              |
| `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED`                       | Access to an external collaboration is  blocked                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION` | Access to an external collaboration is  blocked due to missing a justification                                                                                                                                                        |
| `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED`                       | An invite to externally collaborate is blocked                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION` | An invite to externally collaborate is blocked due to missing a justification                                                                                                                                                         |
| `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_JUSTIFIED`                     | An invite to externally collaborate is justified                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `SHIELD_JUSTIFICATION_APPROVAL`                               | A Shield justification is approved                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `SHIELD_SHARED_LINK_ACCESS_BLOCKED`                           | Access to a shared link is blocked                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `SHIELD_SHARED_LINK_STATUS_RESTRICTED_ON_CREATE`              | A shared link is created and access to the content is restricted                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `SHIELD_SHARED_LINK_STATUS_RESTRICTED_ON_UPDATE`              | A shared link is updated and access to the content is restricted                                                                                                                                                                      |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ENABLED`                          | A Shield information barrier is enabled                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_DISABLED`                         | A Shield information barrier is deactivated                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_PENDING`                          | A Shield information barrier is not yet active                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_GROUP_ADD_USER_BLOCKED`           | Adding user blocked due to information barrier restrictions                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_COLLAB_BLOCKED`                   | Creating collaborations for users blocked due to information barrier restrictions                                                                                                                                                     |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_SHARED_ITEM_ACCESS_BLOCKED`       | Access to shared items blocked for users due to information barrier restrictions                                                                                                                                                      |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_MOVE_BLOCKED`                | Moving items blocked due to information barrier restrictions                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_COPY_BLOCKED`                | Copying items blocked due to information barrier restrictions                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_OWNER_TRANSFER_BLOCKED`      | Transferring items blocked due to information barrier restrictions                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_ASSIGNED`                                      | A sign request was sent to a signer                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CANCELLED`                                     | A sign request was cancelled via API or UI                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_COMPLETED`                                     | A sign request was signed by all signers                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CONVERTED`                                     | A sign request was converted to a `.pdf` for signing                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CREATED`                                       | A sign request was created via API or UI. The document is not yet sent to signers                                                                                                                                                     |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_DECLINED`                                      | A sign request was declined by a signer                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_EXPIRED`                                       | A sign request expired with incomplete signatures                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_SIGNED`                                        | A sign request was signed by a signer                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `SIGN_DOCUMENT_VIEWED_BY_SIGNER`                              | A signer clicked on **Review Document** in the signer email or visited the signing URL                                                                                                                                                |
| `SIGNER_DOWNLOADED`                                           | A signer downloaded the signing document                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `SIGNER_FORWARDED`                                            | A signer forwarded the signing document                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| `STORAGE_EXPIRATION`                                          | Set file auto-delete                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_UPDATE`                                      | Update of a task assignment                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_CREATE`                                      | A task assignment is created                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_DELETE`                                      | A task assignment is deleted                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `TASK_CREATE`                                                 | A task is created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| `TASK_UPDATE`                                                 | A task's comment is  edited                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `TERMS_OF_SERVICE_ACCEPT`                                     | Accepted terms                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `TERMS_OF_SERVICE_REJECT`                                     | Rejected terms                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `UNDELETE`                                                    | Restored                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `UNLOCK`                                                      | Unlocked                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `UNSHARE`                                                     | Shared link removed                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `UPDATE_COLLABORATION_EXPIRATION`                             | Extend collaborator expiration                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `UPDATE_SHARE_EXPIRATION`                                     | Extend shared link expiration                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `UPLOAD`                                                      | Uploaded                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `USER_AUTHENTICATE_OAUTH2_ACCESS_TOKEN_CREATE`                | An OAuth 2.0 access token has been created                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `WATERMARK_LABEL_CREATE`                                      | A watermark is added to a file                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `WATERMARK_LABEL_DELETE`                                      | A watermark is removed from a file                                                                                                                                                                                                    |

[reports]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043696534-Running-Reports

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Enterprise Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/enterprise-events/index



Enterprise events provide an event feed for all users and content in an
enterprise Box instance. Depending upon the `stream_type` your application can
either subscribe to live events or query historical events. Access to these
stream types is limited to users with admin permissions
to **Run new reports and access existing reports**.


# Migrating From History To Stream
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/enterprise-events/migrate-to-stream



Box recommends that applications subscribing to live events through
`admin_logs` migrate to `admin_logs_streaming`. `admin_logs_streaming` provides
lower and more consistent latency, as well as ensures that late arriving
events will not be missed. Events can be deduplicated between `admin_logs` and
`admin_logs_streaming` by their event IDs.

## Enterprise `stream_type` comparison

### Benefits of `admin_logs_streaming`

* Ensures late arriving events are not missed by your subscribing application
* Provides 80% lower latency (during normal operations)
* Has much more consistent latency (during normal operations)
* Recovers much more gracefully from a fault, because your service no longer has to manage backfilling late events

### Differences between `admin_logs` and `admin_logs_streaming`

* Provides two weeks of event history (i.e. retention)
* Does not support the `created_after` and `created_before` filter parameters
* May contain duplicates (provides an 'at least once' guarantee)
* No longer returns events in chronological order (events are returned in roughly the order they are processed)

### Similarities between `admin_logs` and `admin_logs_streaming`

* Shares the same <Link href="/reference/events">`GET /events`</Link> API endpoint
* Returns the same events payload (events can be deduplicated across the two stream types by event ID)
* Enables filtering by `event_type`
* Allows paginating through events via a `stream_position`

## How to migrate from `admin_logs` to `admin_logs_streaming`

### 1. Existing requests will look something like the below

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events?stream_type=admin_logs&stream_position=1632893855 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
```

### 2. Begin overlapping existing requests with `admin_logs_streaming`

* Start two weeks ago and backfill:

  ```sh theme={null}
  curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events?stream_type=admin_logs_streaming&stream_position=0 \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

or

* Start now and run in parallel:

  ```sh theme={null}
  curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events?stream_type=admin_logs_streaming&stream_position=now \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

### 3. Paginate through results until now and deduplicate with `admin_logs` events

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events?stream_type=admin_logs_streaming&stream_position=1632893855 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
```

### 4. Continue to overlap until confident

### 5. Turn off old `admin_logs` requests

<Frame>
  <img alt="Stream Migration Flow" />
</Frame>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Event Source
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/event-triggers/event-source



If a user or item triggers an event, The response of the
<Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link> endpoint contains an event source object.

## User Source Object

If a user triggers an event, the source object will be the standard
representation of the <Link href="/reference/resources/user">user resource</Link>.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "id": 11446498,
    "type": "user",
    "address": "900 Jefferson Ave, Redwood City, CA 94063",
    "avatar_url": "https://www.box.com/api/avatar/large/181216415",
    "created_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
    "job_title": "CEO",
    "language": "en",
    "login": "ceo@example.com",
    "max_upload_size": 2147483648,
    "modified_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
    "name": "Aaron Levie",
    "notification_email": {
      "email": "notifications@example.com",
      "is_confirmed": true
    },
    "phone": 6509241374,
    "space_amount": 11345156112,
    "space_used": 1237009912,
    "status": "active",
    "timezone": "Africa/Bujumbura"
  }
}
```

## Item Source Object

If an item triggers an event, the source object will be the
<Link href="/reference/resources/event-source">event source resource</Link>.

<Note>
  The below example contains a `classification` object. This does not appear if
  the item does not have a classification set. Also, it does not appear for
  every event type.
</Note>

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "item_type": "file",
    "item_id": "8903212345",
    "item_name": "example.docx",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "All Files",
      "id": "0"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "11446498",
      "name": "Aaron Levie",
      "login": "notifications@example.com"
    },
    "classification": {
      "name": "Top Secret"
    }
  }
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Event Triggers
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/event-triggers/index



Events appear in the event stream based on upon actions committed by users,
items, or other resources. The response of the <Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link>
endpoint changes based upon the event that triggered the event.

## User Source Object

If a user triggers an event, the source object will be the standard
representation of the <Link href="/reference/resources/user">user resource</Link>.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "id": 11446498,
    "type": "user",
    "address": "900 Jefferson Ave, Redwood City, CA 94063",
    "avatar_url": "https://www.box.com/api/avatar/large/181216415",
    "created_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
    "job_title": "CEO",
    "language": "en",
    "login": "ceo@example.com",
    "max_upload_size": 2147483648,
    "modified_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
    "name": "Aaron Levie",
    "notification_email": {
      "email": "notifications@example.com",
      "is_confirmed": true
    },
    "phone": 6509241374,
    "space_amount": 11345156112,
    "space_used": 1237009912,
    "status": "active",
    "timezone": "Africa/Bujumbura"
  }
}
```

## Item Source Object

If an item triggers an event, the source object will be the
<Link href="/reference/resources/event-source">event source resource</Link>.

<Note>
  The below example contains a `classification` object. This does not appear if
  the item does not have a classification set. Also, it does not appear for
  every event type.
</Note>

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "item_type": "file",
    "item_id": "8903212345",
    "item_name": "example.docx",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "All Files",
      "id": "0"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "11446498",
      "name": "Aaron Levie",
      "login": "notifications@example.com"
    },
    "classification": {
      "name": "Top Secret"
    }
  }
}
```


# Shield Alert Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events



[Box Shield][box-shield] must be purchased and enabled on a
Box enterprise to take advantage of the advanced security
offerings outlined below.

## Threat detection alerts

Shield [threat detection][threatdetect] delivers context-rich alerts on
potential threats, such as compromised accounts and data theft, based on
anomalous user behavior.

The possible alerts produced by Shield are for:

1. Suspicious locations
2. Suspicious sessions
3. Anomalous downloads
4. Malicious content
5. Ransomware activity (part of Shield Pro)

All Shield threat detection alert events are produced within the
<Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise">enterprise event</Link> stream. These events follow the
standard event object schema and the `event_type` value is set to
`SHIELD_ALERT`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": null,
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "2",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": ""
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2019-12-20T11:38:56-08:00",
  "event_id": "97f1b31f-f143-4777-81f8-1b557b39ca33",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_ALERT",
  "ip_address": "10.1.2.3",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "..."
  }
}
```

The `additional_details` object provides information
about the specific type of shield alert that triggered the event.

### Suspicious locations alert

A suspicious locations alert is produced when Shield detects a user
accessing content from an unusual, excluded geographic location, or 'host' IP
address. It can be identified by the `Suspicious Locations` value
within `additional_details.shield_alert.rule_category`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_alert": {
    "rule_category": "Suspicious Locations",
    "rule_id": 123,
    "rule_name": "Suspicious Location",
    "rule_response_action": {
      "restrict_user": true
        },
    "risk_score": 60,
    "alert_summary": {
      "alert_activities": [
        {
          "occurred_at": "2019-12-20T11:37:05-08:00",
          "event_type": "Download",
          "item_name": "xyz.txt",
          "item_type": "file",
          "item_id": "127",
          "item_path": "ABC/DEF",
          "ip_info": {
            "ip": "1.2.3.4",
            "latitude": "37.5555",
            "longitude": "-120.6789",
            "registrant": "Microsoft Corporation",
            "country_code": "US",
            "city_name": "San Jose",
            "region_name": "California"
          },
          "service_name": "Box Excel Online Previewer"
        }
      ]
    },
    "alert_id": 2398,
    "priority": "medium",
    "user": {
      "id": 2320,
      "name": "Some name",
      "email": "some@email.com"
    },
    "link": "https://app.box.com/master/shield/alerts/2398",
    "created_at": "2019-12-20T11:37:15-08:00"
  }
}
```

### Suspicious sessions alert

A suspicious sessions alert is produced when Shield detects a user accessing
content in a session characterized by unusual user-agent strings, unusual IDs,
uncommon types of applications, new IP addresses, and an improbably rapid change
in the person's log-in location. It can be identified by the `Suspicious
Sessions` value within `additional_details.shield_alert.rule_category`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_alert": {
    "rule_category": "Suspicious Sessions",
    "rule_id": 123,
    "rule_name": "Suspicious Session",
    "rule_response_action": null,
    "risk_score": 77,
    "alert_summary": {
      "description": "First time in prior month user connected from ip 2.3.4.5 First time user agent Some User Agent (Some UA 4.5.6) appeared for user within prior month Apparent distance 9580.0 km between events 59 seconds apart is faster than possible",
      "sessions": [
        {
          "session_type": "suspicious",
          "activities": [
            {
              "occurred_at": "2019-12-19T11:37:00-08:00",
              "event_type": "Set shared link expiration",
              "item_name": "xyz.txt",
              "item_type": "file",
              "item_id": "123456",
              "item_path": "ABC/DEF",
              "ip_info": {
                "ip": "2.3.4.5",
                "latitude": "37.5555",
                "longitude": "-120.6789",
                "registrant": "Microsoft Corporation",
                "country_code": "US",
                "city_name": "San Jose",
                "region_name": "California"
              },
              "service_name": "ServiceName"
            }
          ]
        },
        {
          "session_type": "typical",
          "activities": [
            {
              "occurred_at": "2019-12-19T11:37:59-08:00",
              "event_type": "Item Modified",
              "item_name": "abc.boxnote",
              "item_type": "file",
              "item_id": "123123",
              "item_path": "folder/sub folder",
              "ip_info": {
                "ip": "4.5.6.7",
                "latitude": "37.5555",
                "longitude": "-20.6789",
                "country_code": "US",
                "city_name": "Some City",
                "region_name": "XYZ"
              },
              "service_name": "Box Notes"
            }
          ]
        }
      ]
    },
    "alert_id": 500,
    "priority": "medium",
    "user": {
      "id": 50500,
      "name": "A b c",
      "email": "a@b.c"
    },
    "link": "https://cloud.app.box.com/master/shield/alerts/500",
    "created_at": "2019-12-20T11:38:16-08:00"
  }
}
```

### Anomalous download alert

An anomalous download alert is produced when Shield detects an account holder
who may be stealing sensitive content. It can be identified by the
`Anomalous Download` value within
`additional_details.shield_alert.rule_category`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_alert": {
    "rule_category": "Anomalous Download",
    "rule_id": 123,
    "rule_name": "Anomalous Download Rule",
    "rule_response_action": null,
    "risk_score": 77,
    "alert_summary": {
      "description": "Significant increase in download content week over week, 9200% (25.04 MB) more than last week 12 additional files downloaded week over week)",
      "download_delta_size": "25 Mb",
      "download_delta_percent": 9200,
      "historical_period": {
        "date_range": {
          "start_date": "2019-12-01T01:01:00-08:00",
          "end_date": "2019-12-08T01:01:00-08:00"
        },
        "download_size": "0 Mb",
        "downloaded_files_count": 1
      },
      "anomaly_period": {
        "date_range": {
          "start_date": "2019-12-08T01:01:00-08:00",
          "end_date": "2019-12-15T01:01:00-08:00"
        },
        "download_size": "25 Mb",
        "downloaded_files_count": 13
      },
      "download_ips": [
        {
          "ip": "1.2.3.4"
        }
      ]
    },
    "alert_id": 444,
    "priority": "medium",
    "user": {
      "id": 567,
      "name": "Some user",
      "email": "some@user.com"
    },
    "link": "https://cloud.app.box.com/master/shield/alerts/444",
    "created_at": "2019-12-20T11:38:16-08:00"
  }
}
```

### Malicious content alert

A malicious content alert is produced when Shield detects potential malware
in content uploading to an account. It can be identified by the
`Malicious Content` value within
`additional_details.shield_alert.rule_category`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_alert": {
    "rule_category": "Malicious Content",
    "rule_id": 123,
    "rule_name": "Viruses and stuff",
    "rule_response_action": null,
    "risk_score": 100,
    "alert_summary": {
      "upload_activity": {
        "occurred_at": "2019-12-20T11:37:05-08:00",
        "event_type": "Upload",
        "item_name": "virus.exe",
        "item_type": "file",
        "item_id": "127",
        "item_path": "ABC/DEF",
        "sha1_hash": "",
        "ip_info": {
          "ip": "1.2.3.4",
          "latitude": "37.5555",
          "longitude": "-120.6789",
          "registrant": "Microsoft Corporation",
          "country_code": "US",
          "city_name": "San Jose",
          "region_name": "California"
        },
        "service_name": "Service name"
      }
    },
    "malware_info": {
       "file_id": 127,
       "file_name": "malware.exe",
       "file_version": 4239023,
       "file_created": "2019-12-20T11:37:05-08:00",
       "file_created_by": {
         "id": 1010,
         "name": "Bob",
         "email": "bob@enterprise.com"
      },
      "file_hash": "d869db7fe62fb07c25a0403ecaea55031744b5fb",
      "file_hash_type": "SHA-1",
      "file_size_bytes": 51345,
      "file_version_uploaded": "2019-12-20T11:37:05-08:00",
      "file_version_uploaded_by": {
        "id": 1011,
        "name": "Jane",
        "email": "jane@enterprise.com"
      },
      "status": "Malicious",
      "categories": [
        "Adware",
        "SpyWare"
      ],
      "tags": [
        "FILE_MALICIOUS_EXECUTION",
        "FILE_OTHER_TAG"
      ],
      "description": "This is a really bad file",
      "detail_link": "https://some.link/xyz",
      "malware_name": "BadMalware",
      "first_seen": "2019-12-19T11:37:05-08:00",
      "last_seen": "2019-12-20T11:37:05-08:00",
      "family": "MalwareBot4000"
    },
    "alert_id": 2398,
    "priority": "medium",
    "user": {
      "id": 2320,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "email": "some@email.com"
    },
    "link": "https://app.box.com/master/shield/alerts/2398",
    "created_at": "2019-12-20T11:37:15-08:00"
  }
}
```

### Ransomware activity alert

A ransomware activity alert is produced when Box Shield identifies suspicious file extensions that may be indicative of a ransomware attack. It can be identified by the Ransomware Activity value within `additional_details.shield_alert.rule_category`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": null,
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "2",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": ""
    },
    "action_by": null,
    "created_at": "2025-08-19T10:44:26-07:00",
    "event_id": "5b508973-0e48-4bc1-80b2-a05b5382eb37",
    "event_type": "SHIELD_ALERT",
    "ip_address": "1.2.3.4",
    "type": "event",
    "session_id": null,
    "additional_details": {
      "shield_alert": {
        "rule_category": "Ransomware Activity",
        "rule_id": "1234",
        "rule_name": "Ransomware Detection",
        "rule_response_action": null,
          "risk_score": 100,
          "alert_summary": {
          "total_files_affected": 42,
          "ip_details": [
            {
             "ip": "1.2.3.4",
             "registrant": "Microsoft Corporation",
             "latitude": "37.5555",
             "longitude": "-120.6789",
             "city_name": "San Jose",
             "region_name": "California",
             "country_code": "US"
            }
           ],
           "suspicious_file_extensions": [
            "lockbit"
           ],
           "anomaly_period": {
            "date_range": {
             "start_date": "2009-02-13T23:31:30Z",
             "end_date": "2009-02-13T23:31:30Z"
            }
          }
        },
        "alert_id": 1234,
        "priority": "medium",
        "user": {
         "id": 8167630149,
         "name": "Some user",
         "email": "Some@user.com"
        },
        "link": "https://app.box.com/master/shield/alerts/1234",
        "created_at": "2025-08-19T10:44:26-07:00"
     }
   }
}
```

[box-shield]: https://www.box.com/shield

[threatdetect]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196113-Using-Threat-Detection

[smartaccess]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196353-Using-Smart-Access

[monitoringmode]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196353

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Shield Information Barrier Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/event-triggers/shield-information-barrier-events



Information barrier prevents exchanges or
communication that could lead to conflicts of interest
or potential legal issues.
For example, admins can use information barrier
to separate teams based on projects to prevent collaboration on
content restricted to specific groups.

## Events triggered when information barrier is configured

Configuring information barrier produces
events in the <Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/">enterprise event</Link> stream. For example,
activating or deactivating the barrier triggers an event.

These events follow
the standard event object schema with the `event_type` value
set to one of the following:

* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ENABLED`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_PENDING`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_DISABLED`

### Shield information barrier enabled

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ENABLED` event is triggered when
the information barrier is enabled for a file or folder.
For example:

```json theme={null}
{
  "chunk_size": 1,
  "next_stream_position": "1152923169537420243",
  "entries": [
    {
      "source": {
        "barrier_id": 123456,
        "barrier_status": "ENABLED",
        "barrier_segments": [
          {
            "name": "8",
            "member_count": 1
          },
          {
            "name": "9",
            "member_count": 1
          }
      ]
      },
      "created_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": "12345667",
        "name": "Unknown User",
        "login": "user@email.com"
      },
      "action_by": null,
      "created_at": "2022-10-04T17:42:53-07:00",
      "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
      "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ENABLED",
      "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
      "type": "event",
      "session_id": null,
      "additional_details": null
    }
  ]
}
```

### Shield information barrier pending

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_PENDING` event is triggered
when the information barrier is not yet enabled
for a particular file or folder. The activation process
was triggered, but the information barrier is not yet
in place.
For example:

```json theme={null}
{
  "chunk_size": 1,
  "next_stream_position": "1152923169531664551",
  "entries": [
    {
      "source": {
        "barrier_id": 123456,
        "barrier_status": "PENDING",
        "barrier_segments": [
          {
            "name": "8",
            "member_count": 1
          },
          {
            "name": "9",
            "member_count": 1
          }
        ]
      },
      "created_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": "12345667",
        "name": "Unknown User",
        "login": "user@email.com"
      },
      "action_by": null,
      "created_at": "2022-10-04T16:06:57-07:00",
      "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
      "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_PENDING",
      "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
      "type": "event",
      "session_id": null,
      "additional_details": null
    }
  ]
}
```

### Shield information barrier deactivated

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_DISABLED` event is triggered when
the information barrier is deactivated
for a particular file or folder.
For example:

```json theme={null}
{
  "chunk_size": 1,
  "next_stream_position": "1152923169767928414",
  "entries": [
    {
      "source": {
        "barrier_id": 1234567,
        "barrier_status": "DISABLED",
        "barrier_segments": [
          {
            "name": "8",
            "member_count": 1
          },
          {
            "name": "9",
            "member_count": 1
          }
        ]
      },
      "created_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": "123435567",
        "name": "Unknown User",
        "login": "user@email.com"
      },
      "action_by": null,
      "created_at": "2022-10-07T09:44:41-07:00",
      "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
      "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_DISABLED",
      "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
      "type": "event",
      "session_id": null,
      "additional_details": null
    }
  ]
}
```

## Events triggered by restricted actions

When the information barrier is set up,
each user attempt to perform restricted actions
or access restricted data
also results in events. These events follow
the standard event object schema with the `event_type` value
set to one of the following:

* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_GROUP_ADD_USER_BLOCKED`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_COLLAB_BLOCKED`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_OWNER_TRANSFER_BLOCKED`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_SHARED_ITEM_ACCESS_BLOCKED`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_MOVE_BLOCKED`
* `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_COPY_BLOCKED`

### Adding user blocked

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_GROUP_ADD_USER_BLOCKED` event is
triggered when the information barrier prohibits
adding a user to a specific group.

The `additional_details` payload provides details of the
restricted groups.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "123456677",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "12345666",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2022-10-07T09:26:50-07:00",
  "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_GROUP_ADD_USER_BLOCKED",
  "ip_address": "10.1.2.3",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "group_id": "12345678",
    "group_name": "Support"
  }
}
```

### Collaboration blocked

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_COLLAB_BLOCKED` event is triggered
when the information barrier prohibits adding
collaborations for users that have restricted access
to a file or folder.

The `additional_details` payload provides details of the restricted
collaboration.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "folder_id": "12334556",
    "folder_name": "Contracts",
    "user_id": "1234567",
    "user_name": "Unknown User",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "All Files",
      "id": "0"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "12345678",
      "name": "Unknown User",
      "login": "user@email.com"
    }
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "16335351460",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2022-10-05T14:15:14-07:00",
  "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_COLLAB_BLOCKED",
  "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "type": "box://event/additional_details/collaboration",
    "collab_id": "0",
    "is_performed_by_admin": false
  }
}
```

### Shared item access blocked

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_SHARED_ITEM_ACCESS_BLOCKED` event is triggered when the information barrier prohibits accessing a file or folder using the shared link.

The `additional_details` payload provides details of the shared link and additional security information.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "item_type": "folder",
    "item_id": "123456789",
    "item_name": "Contracts",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "All Files",
      "id": "0"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "123456789",
      "name": "Unknown User",
      "login": "user@email.com"
    }
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "123456789",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2022-10-06T13:27:58-07:00",
  "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_SHARED_ITEM_ACCESS_BLOCKED",
  "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "shared_link_id": "abcdefghijklm",
    "security_information": {
      "accessFromSharedObject": {
        "sharedId": 123456789,
        "sharedName": "abcdefghijklmnop",
        "passwordSet": false,
        "accessLevel": "open",
        "createdAt": "2022-10-06T13:27:21-07:00"
      }
    }
  }
}
```

### Moving item blocked

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_MOVE_BLOCKED` event is triggered when the
information barrier prohibits moving an item (a file or a folder) to a
a folder the user has no access to.

The `additional_details` payload provides details of the folder.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "item_type": "folder",
    "item_id": "123456789",
    "item_name": "Contracts",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "All Files",
      "id": "0"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "123456789",
      "name": "Unknown User",
      "login": "user@email.com"
    }
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "123456789",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2022-10-06T13:26:58-07:00",
  "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_MOVE_BLOCKED",
  "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "destination_folder": {
      "item_type": "folder",
      "item_id": "123456789",
      "item_name": "Contracts Signed"
    }
  }
}
```

### Copying item blocked

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_COPY_BLOCKED` event is triggered when the
information barrier prohibits copying an item (a file or a folder) to a
a folder the user has no access to.

The `additional_details` payload provides details of the destination
folder.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "item_type": "folder",
    "item_id": "123456789",
    "item_name": "Contracts",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "All Files",
      "id": "0"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "123456789",
      "name": "Unknown User",
      "login": "user@email.com"
    }
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "123456789",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2022-10-05T14:25:15-07:00",
  "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_COPY_BLOCKED",
  "ip_address": "Unknown IP",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "destination_folder": {
      "item_type": "folder",
      "item_id": "123456789",
      "item_name": "Contracts Signed"
    }
  }
}
```

### Item transfer ownership blocked

A `SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_OWNER_TRANSFER_BLOCKED` event is triggered
when the information barrier prohibits transferring the item ownership to a
user that is subject to restrictions.

The `additional_details` payload provides details of the user that cannot
be set as the new owner.

```json theme={null}
{
  "source": {
    "item_type": "folder",
    "item_id": "",
    "item_name": "All Files",
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "name": "",
      "id": ""
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "123456789",
      "name": "Unknown User",
      "login": "user@email.com"
    }
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "123456789",
    "name": "Unknown User",
    "login": "user@email.com"
  },
  "action_by": null,
  "created_at": "2022-10-07T09:29:20-07:00",
  "event_id": "f82c3ba03e41f7e8a7608363cc6c0390183c3f83",
  "event_type": "SHIELD_INFORMATION_BARRIER_ITEM_OWNER_TRANSFER_BLOCKED",
  "ip_address": "10.1.2.3",
  "type": "event",
  "session_id": null,
  "additional_details": {
    "restricted_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "123456789",
      "name": "Unknown User",
      "login": "user@email.com"
    },
    "service_id": "123456789",
    "service_name": "App"
  }
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Shield Smart Access Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/event-triggers/shield-smart-access-events



[Smart Access][smartaccess] enables Box Admins to define and enforce
classification-based access policies to control access and prevent the
unintentional leakage of sensitive content.

Smart Access policies can be configured in
[enforced or monitoring mode][monitoringmode]. In all event types,
a field named `controlMode` appears to say whether the policy is in `enforced`
or `monitoring` mode.

## Download and Print Restriction

If an admin creates a Shield access policy that enforces download or print
restriction and an end user is blocked from downloading or printing a file, an
event is
produced within the <Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise">enterprise event</Link> stream. If the access policy is
set to monitor potential download and print violations,
events will also be generated
when a user is viewing a folder with a file restricted from download or print,
viewing a file in preview that is restricted from download or print, and when a
user requests to download a file through the API that is restricted from
download or print. These events follow the standard event object schema and the
`event_type` value set to `SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED`.

If downloading is blocked, the `additional-details` payload of the
`SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED` event will provide the below details.

For the Box Web App, the `additional_details` payload will
provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_download_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 987654321,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 38495726173,
      "size": 370,
      "sha1": "db0a61e73b5e6985d190134e0a4b9982c716afeb"
    },
    "access_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "service": null,
    "additional_info": "",
    "created_at": "2022-02-22T10:35:08-08:00",
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  }
}
```

For the Box Desktop App, the `additional_details` payload will
provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_download_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 987654321,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "access_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "service": {
      "service": 254429,
      "name": "Box Drive"
    },
    "additional_info": "",
    "created_at": "2022-02-22T10:38:58-08:00",
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  },
  "service_id": "254429",
  "service_name": "Box Drive"
}
```

For Box Mobile apps, the `additional_details` payload will
provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_download_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 987654321,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 38495726173,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "access_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "service": {
      "service": 4715,
      "name": "Box for Android"
    },
    "additional_info": "",
    "created_at": "2022-01-18T14:51:37-08:00",
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "monitoring"
  },
  "service_id": "4715",
  "service_name": "Box for Android"
}
```

## External collaboration restriction

If an external collaboration invitation is restricted, an event is produced
within the <Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise">enterprise event</Link> stream. These events follow
the standard event object schema, with the `event_type` value set
to: `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION`,
`SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_JUSTIFIED`,
`SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED`
`SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION`, or
`SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED`.

If an external collaboration invitation is blocked, the `additional-details`
payload of the `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED` or
`SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION` event will provide
the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_external_collab_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 987654321,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 987654321,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "inviter": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "invitee": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "accessUser": null,
    "service": null,
    "additionalInfo": "",
    "createdAt": null,
    "justification": null,
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  }
}
```

If an external collaboration invitation is justified, the `additional_details`
payload of the `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_JUSTIFIED` event will provide the
following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_external_collab_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 123456789,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "inviter": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "invitee": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "accessUser": null,
    "service": null,
    "additionalInfo": "",
    "createdAt": null,
    "justification": {
      "justification_id": "17786127",
      "request_at": 1644874023,
      "requested_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": 123456789,
        "name": "Some Name",
        "login": "somename@box.com"
      },
      "request_type": "EXTERNAL_COLLAB",
      "item": {
        "type": "file",
        "id": 987654321,
        "name": "testFile.docx",
        "file_version_id": 941051265322,
        "size": 11640,
        "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
      },
      "user": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": 123456789,
        "name": "Some Name",
        "login": "somename@box.com"
      },
      "title": "Approved",
      "description": "",
      "additional_info": null,
      "approved_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": 123456789,
        "name": "Some Name",
        "login": "somename@box.com"
      },
      "action": "APPROVED",
      "action_at": 1644874023,
      "details": null
    },
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  }
}
```

If external collaboration access is blocked, the `additional_details`
payload of the `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED` or
`SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION` event will provide
the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_external_collab_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 987654321,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 987654321,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "inviter": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "invitee": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "accessUser": null,
    "service": null,
    "additionalInfo": "",
    "createdAt": null,
    "justification": null,
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  }
}
```

If a Shield justification is approved, an event is produced within the
<Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise">enterprise event</Link> stream. These events follow the
standard event object schema and the `event_type` value set
to `SHIELD_JUSTIFICATION_APPROVAL`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_justification": {
    "justification_id": "18428718",
    "request_at": 1645556286,
    "requested_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "request_type": "EXTERNAL_COLLAB",
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 987654321,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 987654321,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "title": "Partner Project",
    "description": "",
    "additional_info": null,
    "approved_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "action": "APPROVED",
    "action_at": 1645556286,
    "details": null
  }
}
```

<Info>
  Admins, please note that you may see two enterprise events instead of one when
  a justification is chosen from the share modal. For example, one
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION` event and one
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_JUSTIFIED` event.
</Info>

## Integration Restriction

If a 3rd-party application, including published platform applications with which
your organization is integrated, is restricted from downloading a file or a
folder, an event is produced within the <Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise">enterprise event</Link> stream.
These events follow the standard event object schema, with the `event_type`
value set to `SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED`.

For 3rd-party applications, the `additional_details` payload will provide the
following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_download_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 875644956551,
      "name": "blaha.docx",
      "file_version_id": 941051265322,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "access_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 11754686560,
      "name": "Ming Feng",
      "login": "mfeng+demo@boxdemo.com"
    },
  "service": "docusign",
  "additional_info": "",
  "created_at": "2022-01-18T14:53:53-08:00",
  "classification": "Confidential",
  "controlMode": "enforced"
}
```

For platform applications, the `additional_details` payload will provide the
following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_download_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "testFile.docx",
      "file_version_id": 987654321,
      "size": 11640,
      "sha1": "368acd076a89ce82e62cac004fa27ea9ce3019d7"
    },
    "access_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "service": {
      "service": 123456,
      "name": "CustomApp"
    },
    "additional_info": "",
    "created_at": "2022-01-18T13:31:25-08:00",
    "classification": "Confidential",
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  },
  "service_id": "123456",
  "service_name": "CustomApp"
}
```

## FTP Restriction

If download of a file or folder is restricted via the FTP protocol, an event is
produced within the <Link href="/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise">enterprise event</Link> stream. These events follow the
standard event object schema, with the `event_type` value
set to `SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED`.

The `additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "shield_download_enforcement": {
    "item": {
      "type": "file",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "textFile.txt",
      "file_version_id": 987654321,
      "size": 3606,
      "sha1": "ab7a79ff8e2a6b576e1c62d850290a09312fb387"
    },
    "access_user": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": 123456789,
      "name": "Some Name",
      "login": "somename@box.com"
    },
    "service": {
      "service": 4082,
      "name": "Box FTP Server"
    },
    "additional_info": "",
    "created_at": "2022-01-18T14:19:51-08:00",
    "classification": null,
    "controlMode": "enforced"
  },
  "service_id": "4082",
  "service_name": "Box FTP Server"
}
```

[smartaccess]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/7711416297747-About-Smart-Access

[monitoringmode]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/14596333776403-Shield-Access-Policy-Settings

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Sign Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events



Audit Box Sign events using the enterprise events stream. To learn more about
Box Sign, visit our <Link href="/guides/box-sign">guide</Link>.

<Warning>
  The status provided below in each `additional_details` payload may differ
  from the example based on the specific sign request details. For example,
  if the requester is the only signer, the status of the `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CREATED`
  event will immediately be `viewed`.
</Warning>

## Document Events

### Created

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CREATED` `event_type` is produced when a sign request is
created via API or UI. At this stage the sign request is not sent to signers
yet.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "sent",
    "signer_ip_address": null,
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": null,
    "template": {
      "id": "987abC5423",
      "template_type": "Signing",
      "name": "Work Contact"
    },
    "batch_send": {
      "id": "W23YVL46"
    },
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "Can you please sign this document?",
      "message": "This document shows the terms agreed to on the phone."
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Converted

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CONVERTED` `event_type` is produced when a sign request is
converted to a `.pdf` for signing.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "created",
    "signer_ip_address": null,
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": null,
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Completed

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_COMPLETED` `event_type` is produced when all signers have
successfully signed the document.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "signed",
    "signer_ip_address": null,
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": null,
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Cancelled

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_CANCELLED` `event_type` is produced when a sign request is
cancelled by the requester via API or UI.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "cancelled",
    "signer_ip_address": null,
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": null,
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Expired

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_EXPIRED` `event_type` is produced when a sign request expired
with incomplete signatures.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "expired",
    "signer_ip_address": null,
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": null,
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

## Signer Events

### Assigned

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_ASSIGNED` `event_type` is produced when a sign request is
successfully sent to a signer.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "sent",
    "signer_ip_address": "",
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": {
      "id": "246813579",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "Jane Doe",
      "login": "janedoe@example.com"
    },
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "ready_sign_link": {
      "id": "aaae45bb-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Viewed by Signer

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_VIEWED_BY_SIGNER` `event_type` is produced when a sign request
signer clicks on **Review Document** in the signing email or visits the signing
URL.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "viewed",
    "signer_ip_address": "",
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": {
      "id": "246813579",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "Jane Doe",
      "login": "janedoe@example.com"
    },
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "ready_sign_link": {
      "id": "aaae45bb-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Downloaded

A `SIGNER_DOWNLOADED` `event_type` is produced when a signer downloads the
signing document.

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "viewed",
    "signer_ip_address": "",
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": {
      "id": "246813579",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "Jane Doe",
      "login": "janedoe@example.com"
    },
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "ready_sign_link": {
      "id": "aaae45bb-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": {
      "forwarded_to_email": "janedoe@box.com",
      "forwarded_reason": "Please sign",
      "forwarded_at": "2022-03-03T12:04:20-10:00"
    }
  }
}
```

### Forwarded

A `SIGNER_FORWARDED` `event_type` is produced when a signer downloads the
signing document.

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "viewed",
    "signer_ip_address": "",
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": {
      "id": "246813579",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "Jane Doe",
      "login": "janedoe@example.com"
    },
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "ready_sign_link": {
      "id": "aaae45bb-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "Can you please sign this document?",
      "message": "This document shows the terms agreed to on the phone."
    },
    "forward": {
      "forwarded_to_email": "somename@box.com",
      "forwarded_reason": "I need to forward to my business partner.",
      "forwarded_at": "2022-02-03T10:04:52-08:00",
    },
  }
}
```

### Signed

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_SIGNED` `event_type` is produced when a signer completes the
sign request.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "signed",
    "signer_ip_address": "",
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": {
      "id": "246813579",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "Jane Doe",
      "login": "janedoe@example.com"
    },
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "ready_sign_link": {
      "id": "aaae45bb-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "Can you please sign this document?",
      "message": "This document shows the terms agreed to on the phone."
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

### Declined

A `SIGN_DOCUMENT_DECLINED` `event_type` is produced when a sign request signer
declines the request.

The`additional_details` payload will provide the following details:

```json theme={null}
"additional_details": {
  "sign_request": {
    "sign_request_id": "123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000",
    "sign_request_short_id": "426614174000",
    "status": "declined",
    "signer_ip_address": "",
    "requestor_ip_address": "",
    "files": [
      {
        "id": "1234567890",
        "type": "file",
        "name": "example_doc.pdf",
        "parent": {
          "id": "987654321",
          "type": "folder"
        }
      }
    ],
    "expires": null,
    "requestor": {
      "id": "13579246",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "John Doe",
      "login": "johndoe@box.com"
    },
    "signer": {
      "id": "246813579",
      "type": "user",
      "name": "Jane Doe",
      "login": "janedoe@example.com"
    },
    "template": null,
    "batch_send": null,
    "redirection": {
      "redirect_url": "https://www.google.com",
      "declined_redirect_url": "https://www.googledecline.com"
    },
    "ready_sign_link": {
      "id": "aaae45bb-e89b-12d3-a456-426614174000"
    },
    "sender_message": {
      "subject": "",
      "message": ""
    },
    "forward": null
  }
}
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/index



The event feed provides a way for an application to subscribe to any actions
performed by any user, users, or service in an enterprise.

## User vs Enterprise events

Depending upon the `stream_type`, the <Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link> API
enables subscribing to live events across the enterprise or for a particular
user, or querying historical events across the enterprise.

### User events

User events provides a low latency stream of events relevant to the currently
authenticated user. This event stream is how Box keeps [Box Drive][drive] up to
date, but is also made available for developer use.

The emphasis of this feed is to return the complete results quickly, which means
that Box may return events more than once or out of chronological order.
Duplicate events can be identified by their event IDs.

Unlike the enterprise events streams, the user events stream does not support
filtering for specific events. The three user events stream\_types return
slightly different subsets of the user events dataset for different purposes.

| Stream Type |                                                                                        |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `all`       | Returns everything for a user (default)                                                |
| `changes`   | Returns events that may cause file tree changes such as file updates or collaborations |
| `sync`      | Is similar to changes but only applies to synced folders                               |

### Enterprise events

Enterprise events provide an event feed for all users and content in an
enterprise Box instance. Depending upon the `stream_type` your application can
either subscribe to live events or query historical events. Access to these
stream types is limited to users with admin permissions to
**Run new reports and access existing reports**.

Unlike the user events stream, the enterprise events stream supports filtering
based on event type but does not support long polling. Across the two
stream types the dataset is exactly the same. Events can be deduplicated across
the two stream types using their event IDs.

| Stream Type            |                                                      |
| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- |
| `admin_logs`           | Enables querying historical events up to one year    |
| `admin_logs_streaming` | Enables subscribing to live events in near real time |

#### Live Monitoring

To monitor recent events that have been generated within Box across the
enterprise, set the `stream_type` to `admin_logs_streaming`. This is also known
as the Enterprise Event Stream API.

The emphasis for this feed is on low latency rather than chronological
accuracy, which means that Box may return events more than once and out of
chronological order. Events are returned via the API in near real time after
they are processed by Box. A small delay/buffer ensures that new events are not
written after your cursor position. Only two weeks of events are available via
this `stream_type`.

#### Historical Querying

To query historical events across the enterprise up to one year old, set the
`stream_type` to `admin_logs`. This is also known as the Enterprise Event
History API.

The emphasis for this feed is on completeness over latency, which means that
Box will deliver admin events in chronological order and without duplicates,
but with higher latency than the user or `admin_logs_streaming` feed. Consuming
events in near real time may lead to missed events as events can arrive later
than your filtering window.

[drive]: https://www.box.com/drive


# Event Stream Parameters
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/parameters/index



The <Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link> endpoint can take in several
parameters. `stream_type` and `stream_position` are described in more detail
in this section's guides.


# Stream Position Pagination
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/parameters/pagination



Paginating the event stream works through the use of the `stream_position`
parameter.

First, send a request to the <Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link> API without a
`stream_position` query parameter.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

The API will return all available events beginning with the oldest. The response
will also include a `next_stream_position` value that can be used to make the
next API call for the next place in the stream.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events?stream_position=388720462721 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

The `stream_position` can also be set to `now` to return the most recent stream
position.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/events?stream_position=now \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

In this case, the API returns an empty list and a `next_stream_position` that
can be used for the next call.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Stream Types
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/parameters/stream-types



| Stream Types           | Scope                                       | Purpose                      | Description                                                                            | Retention | Access Pattern                                                                |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `admin_logs`           | A single enterprise (for authorized admins) | Historical Queries           | Enables querying historical events up to one year                                      | 365 Days  | Filter by time frame, then paginate through the response by `stream_position` |
| `admin_logs_streaming` | A single enterprise (for authorized admins) | Near real time subscriptions | Enables subscribing to live events in near real time                                   | 14 Days   | Poll using the `stream_position`                                              |
| `all` (default)        | A single user (for any user)                | Near real time subscriptions | Returns everything for a user                                                          | 21 Days   | Poll or long-poll using the `stream_position`                                 |
| `changes`              | A single user (for any user)                | Near real time subscriptions | Returns events that may cause file tree changes such as file updates or collaborations | 21 Days   | Poll or long-poll using the `stream_position`                                 |
| `sync`                 | A single user (for any user)                | Near real time subscriptions | Is similar to `changes` but only applies to synced folders                             | 31 Days   | Poll or long-poll using the `stream_position`                                 |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get User Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/user-events/for-user



To get a user's events, authenticate as any user and make a call to the
<Link href="/reference/get-events">`GET /events`</Link> API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/events" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.events.getEvents();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.events.get_events()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Events.GetEventsAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.events.getEvents()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getEvents().getEvents()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  EventStream stream = new EventStream(api);
  stream.addListener(new EventListener() {
    public void onEvent(BoxEvent event) {
        // Handle the event.
      }
  });
  stream.start();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  stream_position = 0
  events = client.events().get_events(stream_position=stream_position)
  stream_position = events['next_stream_position']
  for event in events['entries']:
      print(f'Got {event.event_type} event that occurred at {event.created_at}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxEventCollection<BoxEnterpriseEvent> events = await client.EventsManager.UserEventsAsync();
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.events.get({stream_position: '1408838928446360'}, callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  The events returned will only be for the user who's access token the API was
  made with. To get the event feed for a different user either use the `as-user`
  header or an actual access token for that user.
</Info>

## Stream Types

The user event stream support 3 types of stream.

| Stream Type |                                                                                         |
| ----------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `all`       | Returns everything for a user (default)                                                 |
| `changes`   | Returns events that may cause file tree changes such as file updates or collaborations. |
| `sync`      | Is similar to changes but only applies to synced folders                                |

## Anonymous Users

In some cases, the event feed might list a user with an ID of `2`. This is Box's
internal identifier for anonymous users.

An anonymous user is a user that is not logged in. This can happen any time a
user interacts with content and they aren't asked to log in first. An example
would be when a user downloads a file through an open shared link.

## Limitations

Box does not store events indefinitely.

User events are stored for between two weeks and two months, after which the
user events are removed. Enterprise events are accessible for one year via the
API and seven years via exported reports in the Box Admin Console.

The emphasis of this feed is to return the complete results quickly, which means
that Box may return events more than once or out of order. Duplicate events can
be identified by their event IDs.

## Long Polling

The user event stream supports long-polling
<Link href="/guides/events/user-events/polling">through the `OPTIONS /events` API</Link>.

## Event Types

The following events can be triggered for a user. This list is not exhaustive,
so it is possible events appear that are not listed.

The following events are available in all feeds.

| Event name                   | Description                                                                     |
| ---------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `ITEM_CREATE`                | A folder or File was created                                                    |
| `ITEM_UPLOAD`                | A folder or File was uploaded                                                   |
| `ITEM_MOVE`                  | A file or folder was moved                                                      |
| `ITEM_COPY`                  | A file or folder was copied                                                     |
| `LOCK_CREATE`                | A file was locked                                                               |
| `LOCK_DESTROY`               | A file was unlocked. If a locked file is deleted, the source file will be null. |
| `ITEM_TRASH`                 | A file or folder was marked as deleted                                          |
| `ITEM_UNDELETE_VIA_TRASH`    | A file or folder was recovered out of the trash                                 |
| `COLLAB_ADD_COLLABORATOR`    | A collaborator was added to a folder                                            |
| `COLLAB_ROLE_CHANGE`         | A collaborator had their role changed                                           |
| `COLLAB_INVITE_COLLABORATOR` | A collaborator was invited on a folder                                          |
| `COLLAB_REMOVE_COLLABORATOR` | A collaborator was removed from a folder                                        |
| `ITEM_SYNC`                  | A folder was marked for sync                                                    |
| `ITEM_UNSYNC`                | A folder was unmarked for sync                                                  |
| `ITEM_RENAME`                | A file or folder was renamed                                                    |
| `ITEM_MAKE_CURRENT_VERSION`  | A previous version of a file was promoted to the current version                |
| `GROUP_ADD_USER`             | Added user to group                                                             |
| `GROUP_REMOVE_USER`          | Removed user from group                                                         |

The following events are only available in the `all` feed.

| Event name               | Description                                               |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------- |
| `COMMENT_CREATE`         | A comment was created on a folder, file, or other comment |
| `COMMENT_DELETE`         | A comment was deleted on folder, file, or other comment   |
| `ITEM_DOWNLOAD`          | A file or folder was downloaded                           |
| `ITEM_PREVIEW`           | A file was previewed                                      |
| `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_CREATE` | A task was assigned                                       |
| `TASK_CREATE`            | A task was created                                        |
| `ITEM_SHARED_CREATE`     | A file or folder was enabled for sharing                  |
| `ITEM_SHARED_UNSHARE`    | A file or folder was disabled for sharing                 |
| `ITEM_SHARED`            | A folder was shared                                       |
| `TAG_ITEM_CREATE`        | A Tag was added to a file or folder                       |
| `ENABLE_TWO_FACTOR_AUTH` | 2 factor authentication enabled by user                   |
| `MASTER_INVITE_ACCEPT`   | Free user accepts invitation to become a managed user     |
| `MASTER_INVITE_REJECT`   | Free user rejects invitation to become a managed user     |
| `ACCESS_GRANTED`         | Granted Box access to account                             |
| `ACCESS_REVOKED`         | Revoke Box access to account                              |

## Event notifications

To reduce the noise of the event stream and optimize event consumption, the event types listed in the table trigger a limited number of notifications.

| Event type                                                                                                  | Notification behavior                                                                                                                                                            |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `COLLAB_ADD_COLLABORATOR`, `COLLAB_REMOVE_COLLABORATOR`, `COLLAB_INVITE_COLLABORATOR`, `COLLAB_ROLE_CHANGE` | When these events take place, the content owner on the `changes` event stream is notified. Collaborators see an additional event that matches what they see on the `all` stream. |
| `ITEM_DOWNLOAD`                                                                                             | When an item is downloaded, only the content owner gets the notification. Collaborators are not notified.                                                                        |
| `ITEM_PREVIEW`                                                                                              | When an item is previewed, only the content owner gets the notification. Collaborators are not notified.                                                                         |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# User Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/user-events/index



User Events provides a low latency stream of events relevant to the currently
authenticated user. This event stream is how Box keeps Box Drive up to date,
but is also made available for developer use.


# Long-Poll Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/user-events/polling



To get real-time notification of activity in a Box account you can use the long
poll feature of the <Link href="/reference/options-events">`OPTIONS /events`</Link> API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X OPTIONS "https://api.box.com/2.0/events" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.events.getEventsWithLongPolling();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.events.get_events_with_long_polling()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Events.GetEventsWithLongPollingAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.events.getEventsWithLongPolling()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getEvents().getEventsWithLongPolling()
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  events = client.events().generate_events_with_long_polling()
  for event in events:
      print(f'Got {event.event_type} event')
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.events.getEventStream(function(err, stream) {
    if (err) {
      // handle error
    }
    stream.on('data', function(event) {
      // handle the event
    });
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  Long polling is only available for user events. Enterprise events do not
  support long polling.
</Warning>

## Long Polling

Long polling involves opening an HTTP request and keeping it open until the
server sends a response, then repeating the process over and over to receive
updated responses.

<Info>
  The SDKs have built-in support for turning the event feeds into an event
  stream by long polling for new events.
</Info>

### Long Poll URL

To use long polling, first send an request to the
<Link href="/reference/options-events">`OPTIONS /events`</Link> API to retrieve the long poll URL.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X OPTIONS https://api.box.com/2.0/events \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

```json theme={null}
{
  "chunk_size": 1,
  "entries": [
    {
      "type": "realtime_server",
      "url": "http://2.realtime.services.box.net/subscribe?channel=cc807c9c4869ffb1c81a&stream_type=all",
      "ttl": 10,
      "max_retries": 10,
      "retry_timeout": 610
    }
  ]
}
```

### Real-Time Servers

Next, make a `GET` request to the provided URL to begin listening for events. If
an event occurs in an account that is being monitored the application will
receive a response with the value `new_change`. The response contains no other
details.

This single response serves as a prompt to take further action such as
sending a request to the `GET /events` endpoint with the last known
`stream_position`.

### Disconnect & Reconnect

After the server sends this response it closes the connection. The application
must now repeat the long poll process to begin listening for events again.

If no events occur for a while after the application connects to the real-time
server the connection will close with a `reconnect` value. When this happens the
application should make a new call to `OPTIONS /events` to restart the process.

### Timeouts & Retries

If the application receive no events in `retry_timeout` seconds then the
application can reconnect to the real-time server. This might be necessary in
due to network errors.

If the application receive a `max_retries` error when making a `GET` request to
the real-time server then it must restart the process by making an `OPTIONS` call
to the `/events` API.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Copy a File Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/file-requests/copy



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To create a copy of an existing <Link href="/guides/file-requests/template">template</Link> file
request, all you need is its unique ID, and the ID of the folder to apply the
new file request to.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/file_requests/42037322/copy" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "title": "Please upload required documents",
         "description": "Please upload required documents",
         "status": "active",
         "is_email_required": true,
         "is_description_required": false,
         "folder": {
           "id": "2233212",
           "type": "folder"
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileRequests.createFileRequestCopy(fileRequestId, {
    folder: {
      id: fileRequest.folder.id,
      type: 'folder' as FileRequestCopyRequestFolderTypeField,
    } satisfies FileRequestCopyRequestFolderField,
  } satisfies FileRequestCopyRequest);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_requests.create_file_request_copy(
      file_request_id,
      CreateFileRequestCopyFolder(
          id=file_request.folder.id, type=CreateFileRequestCopyFolderTypeField.FOLDER
      ),
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileRequests.CreateFileRequestCopyAsync(fileRequestId: fileRequestId, requestBody: new FileRequestCopyRequest(folder: new FileRequestCopyRequestFolderField(id: fileRequest.Folder.Id) { Type = FileRequestCopyRequestFolderTypeField.Folder }));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileRequests.createFileRequestCopy(fileRequestId: fileRequestId, requestBody: FileRequestCopyRequest(folder: FileRequestCopyRequestFolderField(id: fileRequest.folder.id, type: FileRequestCopyRequestFolderTypeField.folder)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileRequests().createFileRequestCopy(fileRequestId, new FileRequestCopyRequest(new FileRequestCopyRequestFolderField.Builder(fileRequest.getFolder().getId()).type(FileRequestCopyRequestFolderTypeField.FOLDER).build()))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFileRequest fileRequest = new BoxFileRequest(api, "id");
  BoxFileRequest.Info fileRequestInfo = fileRequest.new Info();
  fileRequestInfo.setDescription("Following documents are requested for your process");
  fileRequestInfo.setIsDescriptionRequired(true);
  fileRequestInfo.setStatus(BoxFileRequest.Status.ACTIVE);
  fileRequestInfo = fileRequest.copyInfo(fileRequestInfo, "folderId");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  file_request = client.file_request(file_request_id='123456')
  folder = client.folder(folder_id='123456789')
  new_file_request = file_request.copy(folder=folder, title="Copied file request")
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var destinationFolder = new BoxRequestEntity
  {
      Id = "123456",
      Type = BoxType.folder
  };

  var copyRequest = new BoxFileRequestCopyRequest
  {
      Description = "New file request description",
      Folder = destinationFolder
  };

  BoxFileRequestObject fileRequest = await client.FileRequestsManager.CopyFileRequestAsync("12345", copyRequest);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.fileRequests.copy(fileRequestId, {
    folder: {
      id: '157979815648',
      type: 'folder'
    }
  }).then((r: FileRequest) => {
    // do something with the copied file request 
    console.log(r)
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  The ID of a folder and file request can be determined by visiting the Box web
  app and inspecting the URL.

  The folder ID is the number at the end of the URL when visiting a folder, for
  example `app.box.com/folder/123` is the URL for the folder with ID `123`.

  For a file request, please <Link href="/guides/file-requests/template">check our guide</Link>
  on setting up a file request template to learn how to determine a file request
  ID.
</Note>

## Updating a file request on copy

It is possible to make some basic changes to a file request when copying from
a template. The file request's title, description, status and a few more other
settings can be updated when the file request is copied from the template.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/file_requests/2342235/copy" \
    -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
    -d '{
      "title": "Please upload required documents",
      "description": "Please upload required documents",
      "status": "active",
      "is_email_required": true,
      "is_description_required": false,
      "folder": {
        "id": "342323423"
      }
    }'
```

<Note>
  For more details on the different fields that can be updated when creating
  a template, please see the reference documentation for the
  <Link href="/reference/post-file-requests-id-copy">`POST /file-requests/:id/copy`</Link> API.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Delete a File Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/file-requests/delete



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To delete a file request, all you need is its unique ID.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/file_requests/42037322" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileRequests.deleteFileRequestById(updatedFileRequest.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_requests.delete_file_request_by_id(updated_file_request.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileRequests.DeleteFileRequestByIdAsync(fileRequestId: updatedFileRequest.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileRequests.deleteFileRequestById(fileRequestId: updatedFileRequest.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileRequests().deleteFileRequestById(updatedFileRequest.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFileRequest fileRequest = new BoxFileRequest(api, "id");
  fileRequest.delete();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  file_request = client.file_request(file_request_id='123456')
  file_request.delete()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  bool isSuccess = await client.FileRequestsManager.DeleteFileRequestAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.fileRequests.delete('2484517969').then(() => console.log('Removed file request'));
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  The ID of a file request can be determined by visiting the Box web
  app and inspecting the URL. Please
  <Link href="/guides/file-requests/template">check our guide</Link> on setting up a file
  request template to learn how to determine a file request ID.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Get information for a File Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/file-requests/get



To get details about an existing <Link href="/guides/file-requests/template">file request</Link>,
all you need is its unique ID.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/file_requests/42037322" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileRequests.getFileRequestById(fileRequestId);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_requests.get_file_request_by_id(file_request_id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileRequests.GetFileRequestByIdAsync(fileRequestId: fileRequestId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileRequests.getFileRequestById(fileRequestId: fileRequestId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileRequests().getFileRequestById(fileRequestId)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFileRequest fileRequest = new BoxFileRequest(api, "id");
  BoxFileRequest.Info fileRequestInfo = fileRequest.getInfo();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  file_request = client.file_request(file_request_id='123456').get()
  print(f'File request {file_request.id} on folder {file_request.folder.name}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxFileRequestObject fileRequest = await client.FileRequestsManager.GetFileRequestByIdAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.fileRequests.getById(fileRequestId)
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  The ID of a file request can be determined by visiting the Box web
  app and inspecting the URL. Please
  <Link href="/guides/file-requests/template">check our guide</Link> on setting up a file
  request template to learn how to determine a file request ID.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# File Requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/file-requests/index



Box File Request gives you a fast and secure way to request files and
associated metadata from anyone.  Using a drag-and-drop graphic
interface, you can create a web form that enables you to:

* Securely request files from anyone, no matter whether they have a Box account, without adding collaborators on a folder.
* Solicit additional information with metadata form fields, which you can set as required/optional.
* Enable extra security and tracking with link settings.
* Kick off automated workflows using Box Relay.

The **File Request API** gives you the power to create new file requests
based on an existing file request, update file request settings, activate
and deactivate, and delete file requests programmatically.

## Use Cases

The File Request API is especially useful in situations where folders are
automatically created when a new case, project, or customer is created in an
external system. For each of these folders a file request can be automatically
generated, allowing customers and other users to upload documents to the
project.

For example.

* **Case management** - In this situation each customer support case has its own associated folder and a new file request can be sent out to a customer, requesting them to submit case related documents to the folder.
* **Project management** - In this situation each project has its own associated folder for each project defined in an external system. The API can be used to automatically create a **"Client Documents"** folder within this folder, and a link can be sent to the client to allow them to upload documents on demand.
* **Employee "drop" folder** - In this situation every new loan advisor in a bank has a personal folder in Box. To help them work with their clients a "drop" subfolder is automatically generated for them with an associated file request, allowing their clients to automatically upload documents to their advisor's personal folder.

## Limitations

Currently, the API only allows the creation of new file requests by copying
an existing file request associated to another folder. Please check our guide
to create a template folder with a template file request.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Create a template File Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/file-requests/template



Currently, the API only allows the creation of new file requests by copying an
existing file request associated to another folder. Please check our below
guide on creating a template folder with a template file request.

## 1. Template folder

First off, create a template folder that you can associate the template file
request to. This can be any folder really, but we recommend using a
folder that is only used for this purpose.

A folder can be created through the Box web or mobile interface, or through the
<Link href="/reference/post-folders">`POST /folders`</Link> API.

<Note>
  When using server-side JWT authentication, we recommend creating folder that
  is owned by the application's
  <Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>. This way,
  the folder can't be accidentally deleted by a regular Box user.
</Note>

## 2. Template file request

To create a file request, navigate to the template folder in the web app an
d click the 3 dots at the top of the page. Then, select **File Request** from
the menu.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Create a file request" />
</Frame>

In the next configuration panel, click the **Edit** button to visit the file
request configuration page.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Edit a file request" />
</Frame>

On the configuration page, you can set configure the title and description,
before saving the page.

This page will also have the ID of the file request in the URL. Make a note of
the URL as the number at the end is the file request's ID, which you will need
when working with the API.

```sh theme={null}
https://*.app.box.com/filerequest/2338423584
```

<Warning>
  If your template folder belongs to a JWT user, you will need to
  <Link href="/reference/post-collaborations">invite</Link> a managed Box user to the folder before
  it can be seen in the web app. Invite yourself to the folder to allow yourself
  to add a file request to the folder via the app.
</Warning>

## 3. Using a template

A template file request can be used to create new copies using the
<Link href="/reference/post-file-requests-id-copy">`POST /file-requests/:id/copy`</Link>
API. With the ID of a new folder in hand, you can copy the existing
request, including its title, description and form-configuration
to a new folder <Link href="/guides/file-requests/copy">with one API call</Link>.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Update a File Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/file-requests/update



To update some of the basic details for an existing
file request, all you need is its unique ID.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/file_requests/42037322" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "title": "Please upload required documents",
         "description": "Please upload required documents",
         "status": "active",
         "is_email_required": true,
         "is_description_required": false
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileRequests.updateFileRequestById(copiedFileRequest.id, {
    title: 'updated title',
    description: 'updated description',
  } satisfies FileRequestUpdateRequest);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_requests.update_file_request_by_id(
      copied_file_request.id, title="updated title", description="updated description"
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileRequests.UpdateFileRequestByIdAsync(fileRequestId: copiedFileRequest.Id, requestBody: new FileRequestUpdateRequest() { Title = "updated title", Description = "updated description" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileRequests.updateFileRequestById(fileRequestId: copiedFileRequest.id, requestBody: FileRequestUpdateRequest(title: "updated title", description: "updated description"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileRequests().updateFileRequestById(copiedFileRequest.getId(), new FileRequestUpdateRequest.Builder().title("updated title").description("updated description").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFileRequest fileRequest = new BoxFileRequest(api, "id");
  BoxFileRequest.Info fileRequestInfo = fileRequest.new Info();
  fileRequestInfo.setDescription("Following documents are requested for your process");
  fileRequestInfo.setIsDescriptionRequired(true);
  fileRequestInfo.setStatus(BoxFileRequest.Status.ACTIVE);
  fileRequestInfo = fileRequest.updateInfo(fileRequestInfo);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.file_request import StatusState
  update_data = {
      "description": 'Updated description', 
      "is_email_required": True,
      "status": StatusState.ACTIVE
  }
  file_request.update_info(data=update_data)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var updateRequest = new BoxFileRequestUpdateRequest
  {
      Description = "New file request description",
      Status = BoxFileRequestStatus.inactive
  };

  BoxFileRequestObject fileRequest = await client.FileRequestsManager.UpdateFileRequestAsync("12345", updateRequest);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.fileRequests.update(fileRequestId, {
    title: 'Updated title'
  }).then((r: FileRequest) => {
    // do something with the updated file request 
    console.log(r)
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

For more details on the different fields that can be updated when creating
a template, please see the reference documentation for the
<Link href="/reference/put-file-requests-id">`POST /file-requests/:id/update`</Link> API.

<Note>
  The ID of a file request can be determined by visiting the Box web
  app and inspecting the URL. Please
  <Link href="/guides/file-requests/template">check our guide</Link> on setting up a file
  request template to learn how to determine a file request ID.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get File Information
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/files/get



To get a file's information, not it's content, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link> API with the `id` of the file.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.files.getFileById(uploadedFile.id, {
    queryParams: {
      fields: ['is_externally_owned', 'has_collaborations'],
    } satisfies GetFileByIdQueryParams,
  } satisfies GetFileByIdOptionalsInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.files.get_file_by_id(
      uploaded_file.id, fields=["is_externally_owned", "has_collaborations"]
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Files.GetFileByIdAsync(fileId: uploadedFile.Id, queryParams: new GetFileByIdQueryParams() { Fields = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {"is_externally_owned","has_collaborations"}) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.files.getFileById(fileId: uploadedFile.id, queryParams: GetFileByIdQueryParams(fields: ["is_externally_owned", "has_collaborations"]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFiles().getFileById(uploadedFile.getId(), new GetFileByIdQueryParams.Builder().fields(Arrays.asList("is_externally_owned", "has_collaborations")).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  BoxFile.Info info = file.getInfo();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file_id = '11111'
  file_info = client.file(file_id).get()
  print(f'File "{file_info.name}" has a size of {file_info.size} bytes')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = await client.FilesManager.GetInformationAsync(id: "11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.get('11111')
  	.then(file => {
  		/* file -> {
  			type: 'file',
  			id: '11111',
  			file_version: 
  			{ type: 'file_version',
  				id: '22222',
  				sha1: '97b3dbba6eab7ad0f058240744c8636b7c7bea93' },
  			sequence_id: '1',
  			etag: '1',
  			sha1: '97b3dbba6eab7ad0f058240744c8636b7c7bea93',
  			name: 'Puppy.png',
  			description: '',
  			size: 106833,
  			path_collection: 
  			{ total_count: 2,
  				entries: 
  				[ { type: 'folder',
  					id: '0',
  					sequence_id: null,
  					etag: null,
  					name: 'All Files' },
  					{ type: 'folder',
  					id: '33333',
  					sequence_id: '0',
  					etag: '0',
  					name: 'Collaborated Folder' } ] },
  			created_at: '2016-11-16T22:01:44-08:00',
  			modified_at: '2016-11-16T22:01:51-08:00',
  			trashed_at: null,
  			purged_at: null,
  			content_created_at: '2016-10-29T18:33:50-07:00',
  			content_modified_at: '2016-10-29T18:33:50-07:00',
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '44444',
  				name: 'Owner',
  				login: 'owner@example.com' },
  			modified_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '44444',
  				name: 'Owner',
  				login: 'owner@example.com' },
  			owned_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '44444',
  				name: 'Owner',
  				login: 'owner@example.com' },
  			shared_link: null,
  			parent: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '33333',
  				sequence_id: '0',
  				etag: '0',
  				name: 'Collaborated Folder' },
  			item_status: 'active' }

  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## File ID

The `id` for any file can be determined by visiting a file in the web
application and copying the `id` from the URL. For example, for the URL
`https://*.app.box.com/file/123` the `file_id` is `123`.

## Additional fields

To get more of the fields for a file, make sure to pass along the `fields`
query parameter.

<Card href="/guides/api-calls/request-extra-fields" title="Learn about requesting extra fields" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Files
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/files/index



Files, together with <Link href="/guides/folders">Folders</Link>, are at the core of the Box API. Files
can be <Link href="/guides/uploads">uploaded</Link> and <Link href="/guides/downloads">downloaded</Link>, as well as hold
important metadata information about the content.


# Limitations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/files/limitations



A few limitations exists when working with files.

## Name restrictions

There are some restrictions to a file's name. Names containing non-printable
ASCII characters, forward and backward slashes (`/`, `\`), and protected names like
`.` and `..` are automatically sanitized by removing the non-allowed characters.


# Folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/index



Folders, together with <Link href="/guides/files">Files</Link>, are at the core of the Box API. Folders
can be uploaded and downloaded, as well as hold important metadata information
about the content.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Copy Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/copy



Creates a copy of a folder within a destination folder.

The original folder will not be changed.

To copy a folder in Box you will need to provide our API with the `id` of the
`parent` folder that you would like to copy the folder into.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/copy" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "parent": {
           "id": "345345"
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folders.copyFolder(folderOrigin.id, {
    parent: { id: '0' } satisfies CopyFolderRequestBodyParentField,
    name: copiedFolderName,
  } satisfies CopyFolderRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folders.copy_folder(
      folder_origin.id, CopyFolderParent(id="0"), name=copied_folder_name
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Folders.CopyFolderAsync(folderId: folderOrigin.Id, requestBody: new CopyFolderRequestBody(parent: new CopyFolderRequestBodyParentField(id: "0")) { Name = copiedFolderName });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folders.copyFolder(folderId: folderOrigin.id, requestBody: CopyFolderRequestBody(parent: CopyFolderRequestBodyParentField(id: "0"), name: copiedFolderName))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolders().copyFolder(folderOrigin.getId(), new CopyFolderRequestBody.Builder(new CopyFolderRequestBodyParentField("0")).name(copiedFolderName).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id1");
  BoxFolder destination = new BoxFolder(api, "id2");
  folder.copy(destination);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  folder_id = '22222'
  destination_folder_id = '44444'

  folder_to_copy = client.folder(folder_id)
  destination_folder = client.folder(destination_folder_id)

  folder_copy = folder_to_copy.copy(parent_folder=destination_folder)
  print(f'Folder "{folder_copy.name}" has been copied into folder "{folder_copy.parent.name}"')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  // Copy folder 11111 into folder 22222
  var requestParams = new BoxFolderRequest()
  {
      Id = "11111",
      Parent = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Id = "22222"
      }
  };
  BoxFolder folderCopy = await client.FoldersManager.CopyAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.copy('11111', '22222')
      .then(folderCopy => {
         /* folderCopy -> {
              type: 'folder',
              id: '1234567',
              sequence_id: '0',
              etag: '0',
              name: 'Pictures from 2017',
              created_at: '2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00',
              modified_at: '2012-12-12T11:15:04-08:00',
              description: 'Some pictures I took',
              size: 629644,
              path_collection: 
              { total_count: 1,
                  entries: 
                  [ { type: 'folder',
                      id: '0',
                      sequence_id: null,
                      etag: null,
                      name: 'All Files' },
                    { type: 'folder',
                      id: '22222',
                      sequence_id: '3',
                      etag: '3',
                      name: 'Archives' } ] },
              created_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User'
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              modified_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              owned_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              shared_link: null,
              parent: 
              { type: 'folder',
                  id: '22222',
                  sequence_id: '3',
                  etag: '3',
                  name: 'Archives' },
              item_status: 'active',
              item_collection: 
              { total_count: 1,
                  entries: 
                  [ { type: 'file',
                      id: '44444',
                      sequence_id: '0',
                      etag: '0',
                      sha1: '134b65991ed521fcfe4724b7d814ab8ded5185dc',
                      name: 'tigers.jpeg' } ],
                  offset: 0,
                  limit: 100 } }
          */
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

Optionally, you can provide a different name for the new folder.

<Note>
  **Name restrictions**

  There are some restrictions to the folder name. Names containing non-printable
  ASCII characters, forward and backward slashes (`/`, `\`), as well as names
  with trailing spaces are prohibited.

  Additionally, the names `.` and `..` are reserved names and therefore
  also prohibited.
</Note>

## Asynchronous copying

If the folder being copied contains up to 500 items the copy will happen
synchronously with the API call. The call will not return until the copy
operation has completed.

If the folder contains more than 500 items the copy operation will be run
asynchronously and the API call will return directly yet before the copy
operation has completed. We currently have no API to check when a copy operation
has finished.

## Folder locking

During this operation, part of the file tree will be locked, mainly the source
folder and all of its descendants, as well as the destination folder.

For the duration of the operation, no other move, copy, delete, or restore
operation can performed on any of the locked folders. Most importantly, this
means that the same folder can not be copied to two different parts of the
folder tree at the same time.

## Metadata

If the destination folder has a metadata cascade policy attached to any of the
parent folders a metadata cascade operation will be kicked off asynchronously.

We currently have no API to check when this operation has finished.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/create



To create a folder in Box you will need to provide our API with a `name` for the
new folder, as well as the `id` of the `parent` folder that you would like to
create the new folder within.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "name": "New Folder",
         "parent": {
           "id": "0"
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folders.createFolder({
    name: newFolderName,
    parent: { id: '0' } satisfies CreateFolderRequestBodyParentField,
  } satisfies CreateFolderRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folders.create_folder(new_folder_name, CreateFolderParent(id="0"))
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Folders.CreateFolderAsync(requestBody: new CreateFolderRequestBody(name: newFolderName, parent: new CreateFolderRequestBodyParentField(id: "0")));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folders.createFolder(requestBody: CreateFolderRequestBody(name: newFolderName, parent: CreateFolderRequestBodyParentField(id: "0")))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolders().createFolder(new CreateFolderRequestBody(newFolderName, new CreateFolderRequestBodyParentField("0")))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder parentFolder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  BoxFolder.Info childFolderInfo = parentFolder.createFolder("Child Folder Name");
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  subfolder = client.folder('0').create_subfolder('My Stuff')
  print(f'Created subfolder with ID {subfolder.id}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  // Create a new folder in the user's root folder
  var folderParams = new BoxFolderRequest()
  {
      Name = "New folder",
      Parent = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Id = "0"
      }
  };
  BoxFolder folder = await client.FoldersManager.CreateAsync(folderParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.create('0', 'New Folder')
      .then(folder => {
          /* folder -> {
              type: 'folder',
              id: '123456',
              sequence_id: '0',
              etag: '0',
              name: 'New Folder',
              created_at: '2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00',
              modified_at: '2012-12-12T11:15:04-08:00',
              description: '',
              size: 0,
              path_collection: 
              { total_count: 1,
                  entries: 
                  [ { type: 'folder',
                      id: '0',
                      sequence_id: null,
                      etag: null,
                      name: 'All Files' } ] },
              created_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User'
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              modified_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              owned_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              shared_link: null,
              parent: 
              { type: 'folder',
                  id: '0',
                  sequence_id: null,
                  etag: null,
                  name: 'All Files' },
              item_status: 'active',
              item_collection: 
              { total_count: 0,
                  entries: [],
                  offset: 0,
                  limit: 100 } }
          */
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  **Name restrictions**

  There are some restrictions to the folder name. Names containing non-printable
  ASCII characters, forward and backward slashes (`/`, `\`), as well as names
  with trailing spaces are prohibited.

  Additionally, the names `.` and `..` are reserved names and therefore
  also prohibited.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Single Folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/index



The following pages discuss how to do various single folder methods.


# Move Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/move



To move a folder, update the ID of its parent folder.

## Operation details

This call will return synchronously. This holds true even
for folder moves when the folder contains a large number
of items in all of its descendants. For very large
folders, this means the call could take
minutes or hours to complete and
some parts of the tree are locked during moves.

When moving a folder, part of the file tree will
be locked, mainly the source folder and all of its descendants,
as well as the destination folder.

For the duration of the move you cannot perform
other move, copy, delete, or restore operation
on any of the locked folders.

## Moving a subfolder to a private folder

When you attempt to move a collaborated subfolder
to a private one, you will get the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors#400-bad-request">`cannot_make_collaborated_subfolder_private`</Link> error.
In such a case, specify the ID of the user that folder
belongs to setting the `owned_by.id` parameter in the request:

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Rename Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/rename



To rename a folder in Box you will need to provide our API with a new `name` for
the folder.

<Note>
  **Name restrictions**

  There are some restrictions to the folder name. Names containing non-printable
  ASCII characters, forward and backward slashes (`/`, `\`), as well as names
  with trailing spaces are prohibited.

  Additionally, the names `.` and `..` are reserved names and therefore
  also prohibited.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Update Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/update



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To update a folder in Box you will need to call the following API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "name": "New folder name"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folders.updateFolderById(folderToUpdate.id, {
    requestBody: {
      name: updatedName,
      description: 'Updated description',
    } satisfies UpdateFolderByIdRequestBody,
  } satisfies UpdateFolderByIdOptionalsInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folders.update_folder_by_id(
      folder_to_update.id, name=updated_name, description="Updated description"
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Folders.UpdateFolderByIdAsync(folderId: folderToUpdate.Id, requestBody: new UpdateFolderByIdRequestBody() { Name = updatedName, Description = "Updated description" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folders.updateFolderById(folderId: folderToUpdate.id, requestBody: UpdateFolderByIdRequestBody(name: updatedName, description: "Updated description"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolders().updateFolderById(folderToUpdate.getId(), new UpdateFolderByIdRequestBody.Builder().name(updatedName).description("Updated description").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  BoxFolder.Info info = folder.new Info();
  info.setName("New Name");
  folder.updateInfo(info);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  updated_folder = client.folder(folder_id='22222').update_info(data={
      'name': '[ARCHIVED] Planning documents',
      'description': 'Old planning documents',
  })
  print('Folder updated!')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var requestParams = new BoxFolderRequest()
  {
      Id = "11111",
      Name = "My Documents (2017)"
  };
  BoxFolder updatedFolder = await client.FoldersManager.UpdateInformationAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.update('11111', {name: 'Pictures from 2017'})
      .then(updatedFolder => {
          /* updatedFolder -> {
              type: 'folder',
              id: '11111',
              sequence_id: '1',
              etag: '1',
              name: 'Pictures from 2017',
              created_at: '2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00',
              modified_at: '2012-12-12T11:15:04-08:00',
              description: 'Some pictures I took',
              size: 629644,
              path_collection: 
              { total_count: 1,
                  entries: 
                  [ { type: 'folder',
                      id: '0',
                      sequence_id: null,
                      etag: null,
                      name: 'All Files' } ] },
              created_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User'
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              modified_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              owned_by: 
              { type: 'user',
                  id: '22222',
                  name: 'Example User',
                  login: 'user@example.com' },
              shared_link: null,
              parent: 
              { type: 'folder',
                  id: '0',
                  sequence_id: null,
                  etag: null,
                  name: 'All Files' },
              item_status: 'active',
              item_collection: 
              { total_count: 1,
                  entries: 
                  [ { type: 'file',
                      id: '33333',
                      sequence_id: '3',
                      etag: '3',
                      sha1: '134b65991ed521fcfe4724b7d814ab8ded5185dc',
                      name: 'tigers.jpeg' } ],
                  offset: 0,
                  limit: 100 } }
          */
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Name restrictions

There are some restrictions to the folder name. Names containing non-printable
ASCII characters, forward and backward slashes (`/`, `\`), as well as names
with trailing spaces are prohibited.

Additionally, the names `.` and `..` are reserved names and therefore
also prohibited.

## Timeout

Timeout for this operation is 600 seconds. The operation will complete
after a `HTTP 503` has been returned.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/cors



[Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)][mdn_cors] is a security mechanism used
by web browsers to prevent malicious websites from accessing data on other
sites (like the Box API) without explicit permission.

<Warning>
  CORS only applies to Box API requests made by a web page using a
  web browser, and it relies on the `HTTP Origin` header being passed along
  by the browser. It does not come in to play in a server-side environment.
</Warning>

<Card href="https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS" title="Visit the MDN Web Docs for more generic information about CORS." />

## How CORS works

When a browser on one domain (for example `company.com`) tries to fetch
images, files, or even API resources from another domain (`box.com`),
the web browser will prevent access to any of those assets unless the right
CORS headers are present.

When the browser makes a cross-origin request, an `Origin` request header is
passed along with it that contains the domain of the site making that
request. This header can not be changed and is part of your web browser's
essential security.

By default, a browser will not accept any asset loaded from another domain
if there is no `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` response header present.
Servers like Box can explicitly list the domains allowed to access resources
on this server, or they can return a `*` value to allow any domain to access
the API.

## How Box uses CORS

Box uses the `Origin` request header and `Access-Control-Allow-Origin`
response header to enforce CORS rules defined by the developer.

### `Origin`-header validation

The Box API validates the `Origin` request header against the list of allowed
domains set by the application developer. Multiple allowed origins can be set
and any origin not on the list will return in a `HTTP 403` error.

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "error",
  "status": 403,
  "code": "cors_origin_not_whitelisted",
  "context_info": {
    "origin": "https://company.com"
  },
  "help_url": "https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors/",
  "message": "Access denied - Did you forget to safelist your origin in the CORS config of your app?",
  "request_id": "4dsdfsa832213"
}
```

If no origin is set, all requests to the Box API for this application return
an error.

### `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` response header

After the Box API has validated the `Origin` header, it will return the data
requested as well as a `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` response header with
the value `*`.

```yaml theme={null}
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Date: Wed, 23 Sep 2020 14:07:29 GMT
Content-Type: application/json
Transfer-Encoding: chunked
Connection: keep-alive
Strict-Transport-Security: max-age=31536000
Cache-Control: no-cache, no-store
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Vary: Origin
BOX-REQUEST-ID: 032cfb446dae4fd0b4c2bff80a1a97ba7
```

By returning this header, the Box API informs the web browser that the
response can be used in the site that requested the data.

## Enabling CORS for your domain

To enable CORS for the domain your application runs on, head over to the
developer console, select your application, and scroll down to the bottom of the
**Configuration** panel to find the **CORS Domains** setting.

Add a comma separated list of all the origins that you expect your application
to be making Box API requests from. Domains require the schema (`http` or
`https`) and can include wildcards for subdomains, for example `*.example.com`.

If your site runs on a non-standard port, it will also need to include that.
This is especially relevant for a site running on `localhost` or `127.0.0.1`.

An example list of origins would be as follows.

```sh theme={null}
https://company.com,https://*.internal.company.com,http://localhost:3000
```

## Debugging CORS

There are a few different kind of CORS errors that might occur when making
API calls to the Box API.

### `HTTP 403` - No allowed origins defined

You might get this error even after you provided a list of origins. Often,
this is because of a typo in the provided origins.

1. **Check your origins** - Head back to the developer console and make sure your origins map the site your are making the API call from. Keep in mind that an origin includes the scheme (`http(s)`) but no path or trailing `/`. We recommend inspecting the page using your browser's debug console and checking the `Origin` request header value. This value should match one of the provided values in the developer console.
2. **Check your credentials** - Another reason for this error might be that you are authenticating as a different application than the one you have set the origin up for. Check that the credentials match the ones of the application you are intending to use. We recommend trying to make a call from a server-side script to validate that the API call works.

### `Cross-Origin Request Blocked`

In some cases, you might get a Javascript error that mentions CORS.

```sh theme={null}
Cross-Origin Request Blocked: The Same Origin Policy disallows reading
the remote resource at https://api.box.com/2.0/users/me. (Reason: CORS
request did not succeed).
```

In many cases this has little to do with CORS. Instead we recommend checking the
following.

1. **Check your authentication headers** - If the authorization header is not provided or malformed, then the API will return a generic error without the necessary `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` header. This in turn will cause the previously mentioned error to be raised by your browser. Make sure to pass in an access token using the `Authorization: Bearer ...` header.
2. **Check for requests blocked by VPN, Proxies, etc** - In some cases, the Box API might be blocked by your VPN, corporate proxy, a browser extension, your DNS provider, or any other service that can intercept network traffic. Any of these can intercept the request and return a whole new request that does not include the necessary `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` header. To test for this case, try to make the same API call from a non-browser environment, from an incognito window, or from a whole other (not company owned) device.

[mdn_cors]: https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS

### `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` header issues

If you encounter issues with the `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` header, do the following:

1. **Check if your domain is on the list of allowed origins** - Go to the developer console and open your application. Click on the **Configuration** tab and scroll down. You can add your domain to the list in section **CORS domains**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="CORS allowlist" />
</Frame>

2. **Check if your server is set up correctly** - Configure your server to handle cross-domain requests or use non-cross-domain requests if you receive a warning **No 'access-control-allow-origin' header is present on the requested resource**.


# Device Pinners
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/device-pinners



Building on the login tracking feature – which allows admins to set limits on
the number of devices a user can access Box from and sends alerts to them and
the user whenever a new device is used to access that Box account – Box has
additional device management functionality to increase security when accessing
Box on mobile or desktop devices: device pinning.

To learn more about device pinning, please see our [community
documentation][community].

## APIs

The Box API allows for device pins to be inspected and removed.

* <Link href="/reference/get-enterprises-id-device-pinners">`GET /enterprise/:id/device_pinners`</Link>: Retrieves all the device pins within an enterprise.
* <Link href="/reference/get-device-pinners-id">`GET /device_pinners/:id`</Link>: Retrieves information about an individual device pin.
* <Link href="/reference/delete-device-pinners-id">`DELETE /device_pinners/:id`</Link>: Deletes an individual device pin.

[community]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043693814-Device-Pinning-Settings


# FedRAMP
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/fedramp



## Overview

FedRAMP is a certification program that allows federal agencies to use cloud
providers for increasingly secure/sensitive government or government-adjacent
data.

FedRAMP defines three categories regarding levels of security, Low, Moderate,
and High.

The higher the security level the more restrictions are in place.

Box is currently certified as [FedRAMP High][FedRAMPCert].

## Considerations

In order to be FedRAMP compliant, your administrator must setup Box in
very a very specific way. It is possible that the administrator has further
restricted access to Box functionalities.

Consult with your administrator to identify security restrictions in place that
might affect the usage of the API.

## API usage in FedRAMP

For FedRAMP compliance, you may use the below URLs for API entry points.

| FedRAMP                   |
| ------------------------- |
| account.box.com           |
| api.box.com               |
| upload.box.com            |
| dl.boxcloud.com           |
| realtime.services.box.net |

[FedRAMPCert]: https://marketplace.fedramp.gov/products/F1212191840A


# Security
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/index



Whether your are a developer getting started with the Box API or a Box Admin
tasked with <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorizing</Link> applications, it is critical you understand the
security mechanisms in place to protect content stored in Box.

The Box API follows the same security principals and restrictions as the Box web
app. This means that you will not be able to bypass content [permissions][perm],
the [waterfall folder structure][waterfall], or Admin-only requirements by
leveraging the Box API.

## Access Tokens

At the core of every Box API call is an <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens">Access Token</Link>. Because a username
and password cannot be used, the Box servers need a way of validating user
identity. The full capability of an Access Token encompasses user permissions,
token permissions, and application settings.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Access Token Components" />
</Frame>

Access Tokens represent the authenticated user and determine what content a
user can successfully call. Similar to using the Box Web App, you will only be
able to successfully interact with content the user, associated with the Access
Token, either owns or is a collaborator on. This can be further restricted by
<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">downscoping</Link> a token.

<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens">Access Tokens</Link> are only valid for 60 minutes, but can be <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-revoke">revoked</Link>
earlier if needed. Once an Access Token expires, when using an OAuth 2.0
application, a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/refresh">Refresh Token</Link> can be <Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token--refresh">exchanged</Link> for another
Access Token. Refresh tokens are valid for 60 days or one use. Alternatively,
when using a server authentication application, the
<Link href="/reference/post-oauth2-token">request Access Token endpoint</Link> must be called for a new Access Token.
For security reasons we do not allow long-lived access tokens.

<Tip>
  Unsure why you are receiving a 404 error? A great place to start is checking
  to see what user is associated with your Access Token by using the get
  current user endpoint.
</Tip>

## Scopes

<Frame>
  <img alt="Scopes" />
</Frame>

<Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Scopes</Link> are configured in the [Developer Console][dc] upon application
creation. They determine which of the 150+ endpoints Access Tokens of an
application can successfully call.

Because scopes work in conjunction with user permissions, granting the write
scope does not automatically provide a user with API access to all content in a
Box enterprise. Instead, it means that the authenticated user can receive
successful API responses when making write calls to content they have access to.

For example, take an application with only the manage users and manage groups
scopes enabled. If an Access Token of this application tried to make an API call
to get information about a folder, even if the associated user owned it, it
would receive a 403 error. This is because the read scope is required to
preform this action. Access Tokens of this application could only receive
successful responses on API calls related to users and groups.

## Restricted endpoints

There are some API endpoints that only Admins or Co-Admins, granted the
appropriate [permissions][coadminperm], can successfully use. As a general rule
of thumb, if only an Admin or Co-Admin can perform an action via the Box Admin
Console, an Access Token associated with one of these users is required to
complete an API call for the same action. This is called out in our API
<Link href="/reference">reference</Link> documentation for a given endpoint if it is required.

Some Admin-restricted endpoints include:

* Creating, deleting, or getting information about <Link href="/reference/resources/user">users</Link>
* Creating, deleting, or modifying <Link href="/reference/resources/group">groups</Link>
* Viewing user or enterprise <Link href="/reference/resources/event">events</Link>

Other endpoints can only be used by an Admin user's Access Token if the
enterprise has purchased add-on products such as Box Governance or Box Shield.
Some of these endpoints include:

* Interacting with <Link href="/reference/resources/classification">security classifications</Link>
* Interacting with <Link href="/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy">legal hold policies</Link> and <Link href="/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy-assignment">assignments</Link>
* Interacting with <Link href="/reference/resources/retention-policies">retention policies</Link> and <Link href="/reference/resources/retention-policy-assignment">assignments</Link>

## Application Access

<Frame>
  <img alt="Application Access Settings" />
</Frame>

Application access is only configured in the [Developer Console][dc] for
applications leveraging Server Authentication with <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT)</Link> or
<Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link>. This setting determines the
<Link href="/platform/user-types">types of users</Link> that can be used with the application. The two
options are **app access only** or **app + enterprise access**.

Upon <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorizing</Link> one of these applications in the Box Admin Console, a
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> (`AutomationUser_xxxx_@boxdevedition.com`)
representing the application is automatically generated. This account is an
Admin-like user that can only be accessed via the API and can then be used to
create user’s of the application called <Link href="/platform/user-types/#app-user">App Users</Link>. If an application
only needs to interact with the Service Account and App Users,
**app only access** must be selected. If an application needs to interact with
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">managed users</Link> and their existing Box content, app + enterprise access must
be selected.

As an example, take a JWT application that has the read/write scopes,
app only access, and is properly <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorized</Link> in the Admin console. If a
managed user obtains an Access Token and makes an API call to a folder they own,
that call would receive a 400 error with the message “Cannot obtain token based
on the enterprise configuration for your app”. Even though the user has access
to the content, the correct scopes are enabled and the app is authorized,
the selected application access only allows the application to interact with the
Service Account and App Users.

## Enterprise settings and authorization

There are a few enterprise settings to be aware of when it comes to the Box API.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Global Integration Settings" />
</Frame>

Platform applications fall into two categories: published and unpublished.
Published applications are found in the [Box Integrations][appcenter]. Box
Admins decide whether published and unpublished application are enabled by
default and therefore can be used without approval. The status of these settings
determines what actions are necessary to successfully <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorize</Link> an
application for use.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Admin Console Apps Tab" />
</Frame>

Regardless of the settings above, in order for an application leveraging
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link> or <Link href="/guides/authentication/client-credentials">Client Credentials Grant</Link> to be used by an enterprise, an
Admin must explicitly <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorize</Link> it via the Box Admin console. The
authorization is a snapshot in time.  This means that if a developer revisits
the Developer Console and changes the configuration, the Admin must re-authorize
the application in order for generated Access Tokens to reflect the changes.

If the setting **Disable unpublished apps by default** is turned on, an Admin
must also explicitly <Link href="/guides/authorization">enable</Link> any application leveraging
<Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> as the authentication method.

Additionally, if this setting is turned on, Server Authenticated apps will also
require enablement.

[perm]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels

[waterfall]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697254-Understanding-Folder-Permissions

[coadminperm]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194393-Granting-And-Modifying-Co-Admin-Permissions

[dc]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

/platform-app-approval

[appcenter]: https://app.box.com/services


# Application Flow
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/terms-of-service/flow



In general, applications use Terms of Services as follows.

When an application, authenticated as a user, tries to access an item in Box that
requires the user to have accepted the relevant Terms of Service it receives a
`TERMS_OF_SERVICE_REQUIRED`  error.

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "error",
  "status": 400,
  "code": "terms_of_service_required",
  "context_info": {
    "tos_id": 261346614,
    "tos_user_status_id": 4562456
  },
  "help_url": "https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors/",
  "message": "User must accept custom terms of service before action can be taken",
  "request_id": "ADF7722DD"
}
```

The application requests the Terms of Service's information by calling
<Link href="/reference/get-terms-of-services-id">`GET /terms_of_services/:id`</Link>.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": 261346614,
  "type": "terms_of_service",
  "status": "enabled",
  "enterprise": {
    "id": 11446498,
    "type": "enterprise",
    "name": "Acme Inc."
  },
  "tos_type": "managed",
  "text": "By using this service, you agree to ...",
  "created_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
  "modified_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00"
}
```

The application can then show the text from the Terms of Service to the user.

When the user accepts or rejects the terms, it makes a call to either
<Link href="/reference/put-terms-of-service-user-statuses-id">`PUT /terms_of_service_user_statuses/:id`</Link> or
<Link href="/reference/post-terms-of-service-user-statuses">`POST /terms_of_service_user_statuses`</Link> depending on if the initial
error returned a `tos_user_status_id` in the response.


# Find Terms for Collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/terms-of-service/for-colaboration



Information about the Terms of Service that is in effect for any
<Link href="/reference/resources/collaboration">Collaboration</Link> can be inspected by calling the
<Link href="/reference/get-collaborations-id">`GET /collaborations/:id`</Link> API and passing the query
parameter `fields=acceptance_requirements_status`.

```sh cURL theme={null}
curl -X GET https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations/2342342?fields=acceptance_requirements_status \
    -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
```

The resulting response will include a new `acceptance_requirements` object that
includes a mini `terms_of_service` object.

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "collaboration",
  "id": 2342342>,
  "acceptance_requirements": {
    "terms_of_service": {
      "type": "terms_of_service",
      "id": 6766677
    }
  }
}
```

<Info>
  This information is only returned if the Terms of Service for external users is
  enabled for the enterprise, and the user making the request has the
  <Link href="/guides/security/terms-of-service/permissions">permission</Link> to see the Terms of Service. This holds true for
  both admin and end users, even though admins can generally view Terms of User
  information via the API even if the specific Terms of Service type is
  turned off.
</Info>

If the Terms of Service type is not enabled, the API will return an empty
result.

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "collaboration",
  "id": 2342342>,
  "acceptance_requirements": {
    "terms_of_service": null
  }
}
```

<Info>
  The `terms_of_service` information is returned within the
  `acceptance_requirements` even if they have already been accepted by the user.
</Info>


# Terms of Service
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/terms-of-service/index



The Box API allows administrators to configure Terms of Services for working on
Box, and for users to accept & re-accept Terms of Services for custom
applications.

## Terminology

### Terms of Services

A Terms of Service is a enterprise-level record that represent the conditions
within which all users are allowed to work with an enterprise's data in Box.

There are currently two types of Terms of Service for any enterprise that can be
enabled independently. The **Managed Terms of Service** can be
enabled for the enterprise's own users, where the \**External Terms of Service*
can be enabled for users from other enterprises that collaborated in on the
primary enterprise's data.

## Terms of Service User Statuses

A Terms of Service User Status represents the status of the Terms of Service
acceptance for a specific user. There is exactly one Terms of Service User
Status for any given combination of Terms of Service and a user.

There are multiple Terms of Service User Statuses for any Terms of Service,
specifically one for each each user.

There could be multiple Terms of Service User Statuses for a given user. The
user could accept or reject multiple External Terms of Services for different
enterprises they have been collaborated into, in addition to accepting or
rejecting their own enterprise’s Managed Terms of Service.

## APIs

Applications that are authenticated as a Box Admin that has the **Edit settings
for your company** permissions can view, create, and edit Terms of Services for
their enterprise via the API.

* <Link href="/reference/get-terms-of-services-id">`GET /terms_of_services/:id`</Link>: To get the information for a specific Terms of Service
* <Link href="/reference/get-terms-of-services">`GET /terms_of_services`</Link>: To get a list of all the Terms of Services used within an enterprise, either for managed or external users.
* <Link href="/reference/post-terms-of-services">`POST /terms_of_services`</Link>: To create Terms of Service settings for either an external or managed user.
* <Link href="/reference/put-terms-of-services-id">`PUT /terms_of_services/:id`</Link>:
  To update a specific Terms of Service setting

Additionally, application can view and accept Terms of Services for a regular
user via the API.

* <Link href="/reference/get-terms-of-service-user-statuses">`GET /terms_of_service_user_statuses`</Link>: To get a list of all the Terms of Services for a user
* <Link href="/reference/post-terms-of-service-user-statuses">`POST /terms_of_service_user_statuses`</Link>: To accept or reject a specific Terms of Service for the first time
* <Link href="/reference/put-terms-of-service-user-statuses-id">`PUT /terms_of_service_user_statuses/:id`</Link>: To accept or reject a specific Terms of Service that had been previously accepted or rejected.

## Scopes

The following scopes should be granted to the application in order to take the
outlined actions.

* **Manage Enterprise Properties**: Required to enable or edit the enterprise's settings for Terms of Services as well as to view them for external users.
* **Manage Users**: Required to accept Terms of Services for other users.


# Permissions
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/security/terms-of-service/permissions



The following is a list of permissions users, admins, and co-admins need to have
when working with Terms of Services and Terms of Service Statuses.

## Terms of Service

An end user is considered subject to Terms of Service when:

* User belongs to or is collaborated into an enterprise that has a Terms of Service enabled
* The type of Terms of Service reflects the user's relationship to the Enterprise
  * A managed Terms of Service for a user that is part of the same enterprise
  * An external Terms of Service for users collaborating into the enterprise

Terms of Service settings can be viewed by an end user if:

* The user is subject to a  Terms of Service; and
* The Terms of Service Type is enabled on the enterprise

A Terms of Service's settings can be viewed by an enterprise admin or co-admin
if:

* They have **View settings for your company** permissions
* The application has the **Manage enterprise properties** scope enabled
* The Terms of Service belongs to their enterprise

Terms of Service settings can be edited by an enterprise admin or co-admin if:

* They have **'Edit settings for your company** permissions
* The application has the **Manage enterprise properties** scope enabled
* The Terms of Service belongs to their enterprise

Enterprise admins and co-admins can view, create, and edit Terms of Service
settings for both external and managed Terms of Service without having accepted
managed the managed Terms of Service for their own enterprise.

## Terms of Service User Status

Terms of Service User Status can be viewed and edited by an end user if:

* The User Status belongs to the end user
* The Terms of Service type is enabled on the enterprise
* The end user is subject to the Terms of Service

Terms of Service User Statuses belonging to other users can be viewed by
enterprise admins and co-admins if:

* They have **Manager users** permissions
* The application has the **Manage users** scope enabled
* The Terms of Service belongs to their enterprise
* They have accepted the managed Terms of Service for their own enterprise, if applicable

Terms of Service User Status belonging to other users can be edited by
enterprise admins and co-admins if:

* They have **Manager users** permissions
* The application has the **Manage users** scope enabled
* The end user is subject to the Terms of Service
* The end user is not an admin or co-admin
* The Terms of Service belongs to their enterprise
* They have accepted the managed Terms of Service for their own enterprise, if applicable

An end user cannot accept, reject, view external Terms of Service settings for
an enterprise they are collaborating into until the end user accepts the managed
Terms of service for their own enterprise, where applicable. Trying to do so
will result in a `TERMS_OF_SERVICE_REQUIRED` error.


# Connect SSO identities to app users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-identities



Your SSO service will have a unique user record for each person using it within
your company. When accessing a Box application through this SSO service, if
we're creating a Box user for each SSO user, then we need to create an
association between the SSO user and Box user records.

When a user logs in to Box through the SSO service we will first search for the
user by the association. If a Box user record is found we can begin making
calls as that user to Box APIs. If there is no Box user found will then create
a new Box user with the association to the unique SSO user account.

Exploring the top level of a Box <Link href="/reference/resources/user">user object</Link> we can see
the available options for adding the unique identifier from the SSO service
user object into the Box user object to bind the two together.

```json theme={null}
{
  "address": "900 Jefferson Ave, Redwood City, CA 94063",
  "avatar_url": "https://www.box.com/api/avatar/large/181216415",
  "can_see_managed_users": true,
  "created_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
  "enterprise": { .. },
  "external_app_user_id": "my-user-1234",
  "hostname": "https://example.app.box.com/",
  "id": 11446498,
  "is_exempt_from_device_limits": true,
  "is_exempt_from_login_verification": true,
  "is_external_collab_restricted": true,
  "is_platform_access_only": true,
  "is_sync_enabled": true,
  "job_title": "CEO",
  "language": "en",
  "login": "ceo@example.com",
  "max_upload_size": 2147483648,
  "modified_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
  "my_tags": [ .. ],
  "name": "Aaron Levie",
  "notification_email": { ... },
  "phone": 6509241374,
  "role": "admin",
  "space_amount": 11345156112,
  "space_used": 1237009912,
  "status": "active",
  "timezone": "Africa/Bujumbura",
  "tracking_codes": [{ .. }],
  "type": "user"
}
```

There are two recommended methods for creating a binding between a unique user
within the SSO service and a Box user, placing the unique SSO user ID within
the Box user `external_app_user_id` field, or using the unique SSO email address
as the login email for the new user.

## Using `external_app_user_id` (recommended method)

The `external_app_user_id` field was designed to hold a string identifier to
associate a Box user record with an external service, such as an SSO provider
user record.

<Warning>
  You can retrieve app users for a specific application only if such app
  users were created by this application.
  If you use one application to search for users
  created by a different one, no data will be returned.
</Warning>

Using the `external_app_user_id` field for associating the unique SSO user
account with a Box user account is the preferred method of connecting the two
accounts over email, for a number of reasons:

* Email association is only viable for <Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">managed users</Link>. <Link href="/platform/user-types/#app-user">App users</Link> are automatically assigned an email address by Box, meaning that you cannot assign the `login` to be the email from the SSO service.
* Emails have to be unique in Box. This means that if your SSO service user signed up for Box using the same email address, which is not within your Box enterprise, then you will not be able to create a user with that email and won't be able to connect to that existing user.
* The `external_app_user_id` field was designed for this purpose.

## Using `login` (alternative method)

Using the `login` field of a user object to create an account association is
viable under a few conditions:

* Only the <Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">managed users</Link> type is being used, not <Link href="/platform/user-types/#app-user">app users</Link>.
* All email addresses and Box account creation requests are managed by your enterprise, meaning that users cannot independently create Box accounts with those email addresses.

<Warning>
  Email addresses used for users in Box, under the `login` field, must be
  unique. Making a request to create a user with an email that already exists
  for another account will result in a `409 Conflict` error, stating that
  `user_login_already_used`
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Configure Box
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-box



<ProgressBar />

Once we have created a login experience with Okta we need to have a Box
application available that will permit us to use the Box APIs to search for and
create users that are associated with the Okta user account.

## Set up a Box app

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Create a new Box app

    Create and configure a new Box JWT application to start with a clean user list.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Use an existing approved app

    Use one of your existing admin approved Box JWT applications from the Box developer
    console.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  # Create a new Box app

  To create a new Box application that may be used to call the Box APIs, use
  the following steps.

  1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole]
  2. Select **Create Platform App**
  3. Select **Platform App** as the type of application to create, and click **Next**
  4. Select **OAuth 2.0 with JWT** as the authentication method, and click **Next**
  5. Give your Box app a unique name and click **Create App**
  6. Go to the app's configuration by clicking **View Your App**.
  7. Scroll to the **Required Access Scopes** section of the same screen and ensure that at least the following scopes are enabled:
     * Read and write all files and folders stored in Box
     * Manage Users
  8. Under **Advanced Features** ensure that both options are enabled to perform actions as users and generate user access tokens.
  9. At the top of the page click the button to **Save Changes**

  <Warning>
    Once the application is created it will still need to be approved by an
    enterprise admin before you will be able to make calls to the Box APIs.
  </Warning>

  Follow <Link href="/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval">this guide</Link> to have the
  application approved in your enterprise.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Use an Existing JWT Box application

  If you have an existing JWT based Box application in your
  [developer console][devconsole] that you would like to use, ensure that the
  following options are set in the **Configuration** section of your
  application.

  * Authentication Method: Should be set to OAuth 2.0 with JWT (Server Authentication).
  * Application Scopes: Set at least the following scopes.
    * Read and write all files and folders stored in Box
    * Manage Users
  * Advanced Features: Both options should be enabled to perform actions as users and generate user access tokens.
</Choice>

## Download Required Data

To begin working with the Box SDKs used in this tutorial, you will need the
application configuration file from the **Configuration** page of your
application. This will include all information needed to verify your
application to start making API requests with the Box SDKs.

Within the **Add and Manage Public Keys** section of the **Configuration**
page, click to **Generate a Public/Private Keypair**. This will send you
through 2FA verification before downloading the configuration file for your
application.

Store that file as `config.json` in a location accessible by your application.

## Summary

* You created a new, or are using an existing, Box app which is approved by an enterprise admin.
* You downloaded your application configuration file and stored it in a location accessible by your application.

<Observe>
  <Next>I downloaded my application configuration file</Next>
</Observe>

[devconsole]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console


# Configure Okta
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta



<ProgressBar />

Our next step in the Okta / Box integration is to create and configure the Okta
application and users, then extract a few pieces of information that we will
need to connect to Okta in our application.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Okta Application Dashboard" />
</Frame>

For this tutorial we will be starting with a blank Okta application and user
dashboard to avoid any negative effects on existing installations that may be
in place, and to ensure that we have admin rights to the instance.

## Create an Okta Application

Starting from the [Okta developer site][okta-dev], sign up for a new developer
account, or log in under your personal account if you already have one.

If you're logging in with an existing account, you should see the Okta
dashboard. Click on the **Admin** button at the top right.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Okta Application Dashboard" />
</Frame>

If you've created a new developer account rather than logging into an existing
account, you will have already be redirected to the admin dashboard.

You should now see the admin panel. Click on the **Applications** option at the
top.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Okta Admin Dashboard" />
</Frame>

On the application page, click the **Add Application** button. Select **Web**
as the application type and click the **Next** button.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Okta App Types" />
</Frame>

Okta employs both [OAuth 2][oauth2] and [OpenID Connect][openid-connect] (OIDC)
for application authorization and user authentication, respectively. The OpenID
Connect integration allows us to use baked in OIDC connectors within a number
of popular language frameworks to simplify application and user management by
handling the callback routes and providing methods for logging in,
logging out, and protecting routes into your application.

To simplify this first integration, we're going to use the default callback
routes and settings for the language and framework OIDC connector. Depending on
your preferred integration type, the configuration settings will slightly
change.

Fill out the application details with the following configuration settings:

<Choice>
  * Name: Any
  * Base URIs: `http://localhost:3000/`
  * Login redirect URIs: `http://localhost:3000/authorization-code/callback`
  * Logout redirect URIs: `http://localhost:3000/logout`
  * Grant type allowed: Only **Authorization Code** selected

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta App Configuration" />
  </Frame>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Name: Any
  * Base URIs: `http://localhost:8080/`
  * Login redirect URIs: `http://localhost:8080/authorization-code/callback`
  * Logout redirect URIs: `http://localhost:8080/logout`
  * Grant type allowed: Only **Authorization Code** selected

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta App Configuration" />
  </Frame>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Name: Any
  * Base URIs: `http://127.0.0.1:5000/`
  * Login redirect URIs: `http://127.0.0.1:5000/oidc/callback`
  * Logout redirect URIs: `http://127.0.0.1:5000/logout`
  * Grant type allowed: Only **Authorization Code** selected

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta App Configuration" />
  </Frame>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Name: Any
  * Base URIs: `https://localhost:5001/`
  * Login redirect URIs: `https://localhost:5001/authorization-code/callback`
  * Logout redirect URIs: `https://localhost:5001/logout`
  * Grant type allowed: Only **Authorization Code** selected

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta App Configuration" />
  </Frame>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

Click the **Done** button to create the application and be dropped on to the
general settings of the application.

## Copy Application Credentials

Using the configuration files set up in the last step, we next have to add in
the Okta application org and app details within the files.

Most Okta application information can be found on the general settings page,
with the exception of the `Org URL` that is used in the configuration URIs to
reference back to your Okta organization. To obtain the `Org URL`, go to the
dashboard of your Okta admin console. The `Org URL` will be in the top right
corner of the screen.

Depending on the language and framework previously chosen, we'll set up the
appropriate configuration files.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Okta Org URL" />
</Frame>

<Choice>
  * Open `config.json` within the local application directory in your preferred editor.
  * Update the following line items with the appropriate Okta configuration info:
    * `oktaClientId`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `oktaClientSecret`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `oktaOrgUrl`: Obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page.
  * Save the file.

  Your `config.json` file should look similar to the following.

  ```js theme={null}
  const oktaClientId = exports.oktaClientId = '0oa48567frkg5KW4x6';
  const oktaClientSecret = exports.oktaClientSecret = 'cugDJy2ERfIQHDXv-j2134DfTTes-Sa3';
  const oktaOrgUrl = exports.oktaOrgUrl = 'YOURDOMAIN.okta.com';
  const oktaBaseUrl = exports.oktaBaseUrl = 'http://localhost:3000';
  const oktaRedirect = exports.oktaRedirect = '/authorization-code/callback';
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Open the `/src/main/resources/application.properties` file and update the following lines:
    * `okta.oauth2.issuer`: Your Org URL, obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page, followed by `/oauth2/default`. For example, if your Org URL was `https://dev-123456.okta.com`, the issuer string should be `https://dev-123456.okta.com/oauth2/default`.
    * `okta.oauth2.clientId`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `okta.oauth2.clientSecret`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
  * Save the file

  Your `/src/main/resources/application.properties` file should look similar to
  the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  okta.oauth2.redirect-uri=/authorization-code/callback
  okta.oauth2.issuer=https://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com/oauth2/default
  okta.oauth2.clientId=0oa48567frkg5KW4x6
  okta.oauth2.clientSecret=cugDJy2ERfIQHDXv-j2134DfTTes-Sa3
  security.oauth2.sso.loginPath=/authorization-code/callback
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  In addition to the standard configuration information for the org and app, the
  Python / Flask integration requires an additional auth token.

  To create an auth token:

  * Go to the **API** -> **Token** section of the Okta admin dashboard.
  * Click the **Create Token** button.
  * Enter a name for the token and click **Create**.
  * Copy the token that is generated.

  Next, update the local application configuration file.

  * Open `config.py` within the local application directory in your preferred editor.
  * Update the following line items with the appropriate Okta configuration info:
    * `okta_client_secret`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `okta_org_url`: Obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page.
    * `okta_auth_token`: The token created above.
  * Save the file.

  Your `config.py` file should look similar to the following.

  ```python theme={null}
  okta_client_id = '0oa48567frkg5KW4x6'
  okta_client_secret = 'cugDJy2ERfIQHDXv-j2134DfTTes-Sa3'
  okta_org_url = 'http://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com'
  okta_auth_token = '01KkTQTRfs1yKLr4Ojy26iqoIjK_4fHyq132Dr5T'
  okta_callback_route = '/oidc/callback'
  ```

  Lastly, update the Flask configuration file

  * Open `client_secrets.json` within the local application directory in your preferred editor.
  * Update the following line items with the appropriate Okta configuration info:
    * `client_id`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `client_secret`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `auth_uri`: Your Org URL, obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page, followed by `/oauth2/default/v1/authorize`. For example, if your Org URL was `https://dev-123456.okta.com`, the issuer string should be `https://dev-123456.okta.com/oauth2/default/v1/authorize`.
    * `token_uri`: Your Org URL, obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page, followed by `/oauth2/default/v1/token`. For example, if your Org URL was `https://dev-123456.okta.com`, the issuer string should be `https://dev-123456.okta.com/oauth2/default/v1/token`.
    * `issuer`: Your Org URL, obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page, followed by `/oauth2/default`. For example, if your Org URL was `https://dev-123456.okta.com`, the issuer string should be `https://dev-123456.okta.com/oauth2/default`.
    * `userinfo_uri`: Your Org URL, obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page, followed by `/oauth2/default/userinfo`. For example, if your Org URL was `https://dev-123456.okta.com`, the issuer string should be `https://dev-123456.okta.com/oauth2/default/userinfo`.
  * Save the file.

  Your `client_secrets.json` file should look similar to the following.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "web": {
      "client_id": "0oa48567frkg5KW4x6",
      "client_secret": "cugDJy2ERfIQHDXv-j2134DfTTes-Sa3",
      "auth_uri": "https://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com/oauth2/default/v1/authorize",
      "token_uri": "https://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com/oauth2/default/v1/token",
      "issuer": "https://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com/oauth2/default",
      "userinfo_uri": "https://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com/oauth2/default/userinfo",
      "redirect_uris": [
        "http://127.0.0.1:5000/oidc/callback"
      ]
    }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Open `Startup.cs` within the local application directory in your preferred editor.
  * Update the following line items within the `ConfigureServices` method with the appropriate Okta configuration info:
    * `OktaDomain`: Obtained from the top right of the main admin dashboard page.
    * `ClientId`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
    * `ClientSecret`: Obtained from the **Client Credentials** section of the application general settings.
  * Save the file.

  Your `ConfigureServices` method should look similar to the following.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  services.AddControllersWithViews();
  services.AddAuthentication(options =>
  {
      options.DefaultAuthenticateScheme = CookieAuthenticationDefaults.AuthenticationScheme;
      options.DefaultSignInScheme = CookieAuthenticationDefaults.AuthenticationScheme;
      options.DefaultChallengeScheme = OktaDefaults.MvcAuthenticationScheme;
  })
  .AddCookie()
  .AddOktaMvc(new OktaMvcOptions
  {
      OktaDomain = "https://YOURDOMAIN.okta.com",
      ClientId = "0oa48567frkg5KW4x6",
      ClientSecret = "cugDJy2ERfIQHDXv-j2134DfTTes-Sa3"
  });
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Create a User

Our last step in the Okta setup is to create a test user that we will use to
log in to the application.

1. Go to the **Users** section of the Okta admin dashboard.
2. Click on the **Add Person** button.
3. Enter all appropriate user info. Under password, select **Set by admin** and input a password for the user. Also deselect the **User must change password on first login** option. You will use the username and password to log in. These settings will only be used for testing purposes and are not best practices for user creation and security.
4. Click the **Save** button to create the user.

## Summary

* You created an Okta application.
* You updated the Okta configuration information in the local application.
* You created a test Okta user.

<Observe>
  <Next>I've created my Okta app and set up user / local configuration</Next>
</Observe>

[okta-dev]: https://developer.okta.com/

[oauth2]: https://oauth.net/2/

[openid-connect]: https://openid.net/


# Find or create Box app users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/find-or-create-box-users



<ProgressBar />

At this point we have application code that will handle traffic from users
visiting, forward them to Okta to login, provide Okta user information, before
finally handing off to a yet to be created handler for Box.

This section will cover the final Box components:

* Validating if an Okta user has an associated Box app user account.
* Creating a new app user for the associated Okta record if they don't.
* Fetching tokens for the Box user to make user-specific API calls.

## Create Platform App Users

Before validating users we need a method for creating an associated Box user
account if one doesn't already exist for the Okta user.

<Choice>
  In your local application directory, load the `server.js` file created in
  step 1.

  Add the following `box` object into the file and save.

  ```js theme={null}
  const box = (() => {
      const configJSON = JSON.parse(fs.readFileSync(path.resolve(__dirname, './config.json')));
      const sdk = boxSDK.getPreconfiguredInstance(configJSON);
      const client = sdk.getAppAuthClient('enterprise');

      let oktaRecord = {};
      let userId = '';
      let userClient;

      function validateUser(userInfo, res) {
          // TODO: VALIDATE USER
      }

      function createUser(res) {
          // TODO: CREATE USER
      }

      return {
          validateUser,
          createUser
      };
  })();
  ```

  This object defines a number of items:

  * Configuration: A new instance of the Box Node SDK is instantiated and made available to the object functions, along with a number of variables.
  * `validateUser` function: Will house the code to validate whether a Box user exists for an associated Okta user.
  * `createUser` function: Creates a new Box user bound to the associated Okta user ID.

  With that structure defined, replace the `// TODO: CREATE USER` section with
  the following code.

  ```js theme={null}
  const spaceAmount = 1073741824;   // ~ 1gb

  client.enterprise.addAppUser(
      this.oktaRecord.name,
      {
        space_amount: spaceAmount,
        external_app_user_id: this.oktaRecord.sub
      }
  ).then(appUser => {
      res.send(`New user created: ${appUser.name}`);
  });
  ```

  This code will create a new Box app user and will set the
  `external_app_user_id` parameter of the user object to the unique Okta user ID,
  which will define the binding between the two user records.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  In your local application directory, load the
  `/src/main/java/com/box/sample/Application.java` file created in step 1, or
  similar directory if an alternate application name was used.

  Within the `public class Application` definition, add the following methods:

  ```java theme={null}
  static String validateUser(OidcUser user) throws IOException {
      // TODO: VALIDATE USER
  }

  static String createUser(OidcUser user) {
      // TODO: CREATE USER
  }
  ```

  These methods will handle the Box user validation and creation. Breaking them
  down:

  * `validateUser`: Will house the code to validate whether a Box user exists for an associated Okta user.
  * `createUser`: Creates a new Box user bound to the associated Okta user ID.

  With those methods defined, replace `# TODO: CREATE USER` with the following
  code:

  ```java theme={null}
  String oktaName = (String) user.getAttributes().get("name");
  Object oktaSub = user.getAttributes().get("sub");

  CreateUserParams params = new CreateUserParams();
  params.setExternalAppUserId((String) oktaSub);
  BoxUser.Info createdUserInfo = BoxUser.createAppUser(api, oktaName, params);

  return "New User Created: " + createdUserInfo.getName();
  ```

  This code will create a new Box app user and will set the
  `external_app_user_id` parameter of the user object to the unique Okta user ID,
  which will define the binding between the two user records.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  In your local application directory, load the `server.py` file created in step
  1\.

  Add the following `Box` class object to the existing code, below the route
  definitions.

  ```python theme={null}
  # Box user class
  class Box(object):
      def __init__(self):
          # Instantiate Box Client instance
          auth = JWTAuth.from_settings_file('../config.json')
          self.box_client = Client(auth)

      # Validate if Box user exists
      def validateUser(self, g):
          # TODO: VALIDATE USER

      # Create new Box user
      def createUser(self, ouser):
          # TODO: CREATE USER
  ```

  This class defines:

  * `init`: When initialized, a new instance of the Box Python SDK is instantiated and made available to the object methods.
  * `validateUser` method: Accepting a user object as input, this will house the code to validate whether a Box user exists for an associated Okta user.
  * `createUser` method: Accepting a user object as input, this creates a new Box user bound to the associated Okta user ID.

  With that class defined, replace the `# TODO: CREATE USER` section with
  the following code.

  ```python theme={null}
  user_name = f'{ouser.profile.firstName} {ouser.profile.lastName}'
  uid = ouser.id
  space = 1073741824

  user = self.box_client.create_user(user_name, None, space_amount=space, external_app_user_id=uid)
  return f'New user created: {user_name}'
  ```

  This code will create a new Box app user and will set the
  `external_app_user_id` parameter of the user object to the unique Okta user ID,
  which will define the binding between the two user records.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Within the `Controllers` > `AccountController.cs` file, inside the associated
  `AccountController` class, add the following method.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  static async Task validateUser(string name, string sub)
  {
      // Configure Box SDK instance
      var reader = new StreamReader("config.json");
      var json = reader.ReadToEnd();
      var config = BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonString(json);
      var sdk = new BoxJWTAuth(config);
      var token = sdk.AdminToken();
      BoxClient client = sdk.AdminClient(token);

      // Search for matching Box app user for Okta ID
      BoxCollection<BoxUser> users = await client.UsersManager.GetEnterpriseUsersAsync(externalAppUserId:sub);
      System.Diagnostics.Debug.WriteLine(users.TotalCount);

      if (users.TotalCount > 0)
      {
           // TODO: VALIDATE USER
      }
      else
      {
          // TODO: CREATE USER
      }
  }
  ```

  Within the code block a new Box .NET SDK client is created using the
  `config.json` file downloaded in step 2. In the case of this code sample, that
  `config.json` file is stored at the root of the local application directory.

  That client is then used to search all users in the Box enterprise, passing in
  the Okta `sub` unique ID as the `externalAppUserId` search parameter. The
  number of users returned is then checked to see if a valid user was found.

  With that structure defined, replace the // TODO: CREATE USER section with the
  following code.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  var userRequest = new BoxUserRequest()
  {
      Name = name,
      ExternalAppUserId = sub,
      IsPlatformAccessOnly = true
  };
  var user = await client.UsersManager.CreateEnterpriseUserAsync(userRequest);
  System.Diagnostics.Debug.WriteLine("New user created: " + user.Name);
  ```

  This code will create a new Box app user and will set the
  `external_app_user_id` parameter of the user object to the unique Okta user ID,
  which will define the binding between the two user records.

  A diagnostic message is then written back stating that the new user was created.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Validate Okta Users

With the create user functionality defined, let's turn our attention to
defining the code for validating whether an Okta user record has an associated
Box user record by searching all Box enterprise users for the associated
`external_app_user_id`.

<Choice>
  Replace the `// TODO: VALIDATE USER` comment with the following:

  ```js theme={null}
  this.oktaRecord = userInfo

  client.enterprise.getUsers({ "external_app_user_id": this.oktaRecord.sub })
      .then((result) => {
          if (result.total_count > 0) {
              // TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL
          } else {
              // User not found - create user
              this.createUser();
          }
      });
  ```

  Using the Box Node SDK, we call `enterprise.getUsers` to search all enterprise
  users, and pass in the unique Okta user ID as the `external_app_user_id` value
  to search specifically for that user.

  If found (number of records is greater than 0) we can make an
  authenticated call to the Box APIs using that user record, which will be
  defined in the next section.

  If not found, we call the `createUser` function we defined in the last section
  to create a new Box user with that `external_app_user_id` association.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `// TODO: VALIDATE USER` comment with the following:

  ```java theme={null}
  // Set up Box enterprise client
  Reader reader = new FileReader("config.json");
  BoxConfig config = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
  api = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppEnterpriseConnection(config);

  // Get Okta user sub for unique ID attachment to Box user
  Object oktaSub = user.getAttributes().get("sub");

  // Check enterprise users for matching external_app_user_id against Okta sub
  URL url = new URL("https://api.box.com/2.0/users?external_app_user_id=" + oktaSub);
  BoxAPIRequest request = new BoxAPIRequest(api, url, "GET");
  BoxJSONResponse jsonResponse = (BoxJSONResponse) request.send();
  JsonObject jsonObj = jsonResponse.getJsonObject();
  JsonValue totalCount = jsonObj.get("total_count");

  // Set return string
  String outputString = "";

  if (totalCount.asInt() > 0) {
      // TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL
  } else {
      outputString = createUser(user);
  }

  return outputString;
  ```

  Using the Box Java SDK generic request method, we make a call directly to the
  `https://api.box.com/2.0/users` endpoint to search enterprise users, passing in
  the unique Okta user ID as the `external_app_user_id` value to search
  specifically for that user.

  If found (number of records is greater than 0) we can make an
  authenticated call to the Box APIs using that user record, which will be
  defined in the next section.

  If not found, we call the `createUser` function we defined in the last section
  to create a new Box user with that `external_app_user_id` association.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `# TODO: VALIDATE USER` comment with the following:

  ```python theme={null}
  # Fetch Okta user ID
  uid = g.user.id

  # Validate is user exists
  url = f'https://api.box.com/2.0/users?external_app_user_id={uid}'
  response = self.box_client.make_request('GET', url)
  user_info = response.json()

  # If user not found, create user, otherwise fetch user token
  if (user_info['total_count'] == 0):
      self.createUser(g.user)
  else:
      # TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL
  ```

  Using the Box Python SDK generic request method, we make a call directly to the
  `https://api.box.com/2.0/users` endpoint to search enterprise users, passing in
  the unique Okta user ID as the `external_app_user_id` value to search
  specifically for that user.

  If found (number of records is greater than 0) we can make an
  authenticated call to the Box APIs using that user record, which will be
  defined in the next section.

  If not found, we call the `createUser` function we defined in the last section
  to create a new Box user with that `external_app_user_id` association.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace the `// TODO: VALIDATE USER` comment with the following:

  ```csharp theme={null}
  var userId = users.Entries[0].Id;
  var userToken = sdk.UserToken(userId);
  BoxClient userClient = sdk.UserClient(userToken, userId);

  // TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL
  ```

  If a valid user is found, the Box ID is extracted and used to generate a Box
  SDK client that is scoped specifically for that user, rather than the
  application.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Make Authenticated Box User Calls

Once an associated Box user is found for the Okta user we're going to generate
an access token specifically
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens">scoped for that user</Link> to make Box
API calls, then make a call to get the current user to ensure that everything
is working and that we have a valid user access token.

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL` from the previous section with
  the following:

  ```js theme={null}
  this.userId = result.entries[0].id;
  this.userClient = sdk.getAppAuthClient('user', this.userId);

  this.userClient.users.get(this.userClient.CURRENT_USER_ID)
      .then(currentUser => {
          res.send(`Hello ${currentUser.name}`);
      });
  ```

  With a user found we capture the Box user ID, then generate a user client
  object scoped for that user. We finish by making a call to fetch the current
  user with the user client object, which should return the user profile
  information for the Okta associated Box app user.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL` from the previous section with
  the following:

  ```java theme={null}
  // User found, authenticate as user
  // Fetch user ID
  JsonArray entries = (JsonArray) jsonObj.get("entries");
  JsonObject userRecord = (JsonObject) entries.get(0);
  JsonValue userId = userRecord.get("id");

  // Get user scoped access token and fetch current user with it
  BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection userApi = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppUserConnection(userId.asString(), config);
  BoxUser currentUser = BoxUser.getCurrentUser(userApi);
  BoxUser.Info currentUserInfo = currentUser.getInfo();

  outputString = "Hello " + currentUserInfo.getName();
  ```

  With a user found we capture the Box user ID, then generate a user client
  object scoped for that user. We finish by making a call to fetch the current
  user with the user client object, which should return the user profile
  information for the Okta associated Box app user.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace `# TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL` from the previous section with
  the following:

  ```python theme={null}
  # Create user client based on discovered user
  user = user_info['entries'][0]
  user_to_impersonate = self.box_client.user(user_id=user['id'])
  user_client = self.box_client.as_user(user_to_impersonate)

  # Get current user
  current_user = user_client.user().get()
  return f'Hello {current_user.name}'
  ```

  With a user found we capture the Box user ID, then generate a user client
  object scoped for that user. We finish by making a call to fetch the current
  user with the user client object, which should return the user profile
  information for the Okta associated Box app user.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: MAKE AUTHENTICATED USER CALL` from the previous section with
  the following:

  ```csharp theme={null}
  BoxUser currentUser = await userClient.UsersManager.GetCurrentUserInformationAsync();
  System.Diagnostics.Debug.WriteLine("Current user name: " + currentUser.Name);
  ```

  Using that user scoped client, the current user record is then extracted from
  Box, and a diagnostic message is written back stating the current user name.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Summary

* You've validated whether an Okta user exists as a Box user.
* You've creating a new app user if they don't exist.
* You're making a Box API call for an existing Box user.

<Observe>
  <Next>I have set up Box user validation and creation</Next>
</Observe>


# Connect Okta identities to Box App Users in a web app
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/index



[Okta][okta] is a popular access management and identity platform used by
companies to provide a unified method for managing and authenticating into
multiple applications with a single set of credentials and a single secure
dashboard.

When connected to a custom Box application, the [Okta APIs][okta-dev] may be
used to provide a single login mechanism to identify users within the Box
application, allowing you to have a unified experience between your unified
identity system (Okta) and the Box APIs.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Okta Dashboard" />
</Frame>

## Overview

This quick start guide will walk you through how to programmatically use Okta to
log in to a Box application, provision an app user in Box that is linked to
the Okta user, then make Box API calls on behalf of that user.

This will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/scaffold-application-code">Scaffold your application code</Link> so that we have a web application that we can log in to.
2. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta">Setup and configure your Okta application</Link> and create a first user that we can use to log into the web app with, and eventually create a Box account for.
3. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-box">Setup and configure your Box application</Link> so that we can connect your web application to Box.
4. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/logging-into-app">Create a log in flow for your application</Link>, allowing the Okta user to log in to your web application.
5. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/find-or-create-box-users">Find an existing Box user, and optionally create a Box user</Link> the first time that Okta user logs into your web application.
6. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/run-the-app">And finally, run the application</Link> and the see the complete flow in action.

At the end of the tutorial we will output a single message to the browser. If
this is the first time an Okta user logs in to Box via the application, an
associated Box user will be created and the message
`New user created: {{USERNAME}}` will be output to the browser.

When attempting to log in with this user in subsequent attempts, a message
stating `Hello {{USERNAME}}` will now be output to the browser.

<Warning>
  To simplify this guide we will not create any user interface for the web
  application. Instead we will provide some output via the application console /
  terminal and directly as text output in the browser.
</Warning>

[okta]: https://www.okta.com/

[okta-dev]: https://developer.okta.com/


# Logging into the app with Okta
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/logging-into-app



<ProgressBar />

With the Okta, Box, and basic application set up, we can turn our attention to
the first step in the application code flow, the Okta login.

During the Okta login we will employ the OpenID Connect (OIDC) frameworks of
the language used to redirect the user to Okta to log in and pass Okta user
information back to the application. Those Okta user details will in turn be
used to validate and create Box users in the next step.

This section will walk you through:

* Setting up the application configuration skeleton.
* Defining the routes for the chosen framework to handle user traffic.
* Passing Okta user information to the next Box user validation step.

## Set up the Skeleton

<Choice>
  In your local application directory, load the `server.js` file created in
  step 1.

  Start by copying the following package definitions and configuration
  information into the file.

  ```js theme={null}
  const session = require('express-session');
  const { ExpressOIDC } = require('@okta/oidc-middleware');
  const bodyParser = require('body-parser');
  const boxSDK = require('box-node-sdk');
  const config = require('./config.js');
  const express = require('express')();
  const http = require('http');
  const path = require('path');
  const fs = require('fs');

  express.use(session({
      secret: 'this should be secure',
      resave: true,
      saveUninitialized: false
  }));

  const oidc = new ExpressOIDC({
      issuer: `https://${config.oktaOrgUrl}/oauth2/default`,
      client_id: config.oktaClientId,
      client_secret: config.oktaClientSecret,
      appBaseUrl: config.oktaBaseUrl,
      loginRedirectUri: `${config.oktaBaseUrl}${config.oktaRedirect}`,
      scope: 'openid profile'
  });

  express.use(oidc.router);
  express.use(bodyParser.json());
  express.use(bodyParser.urlencoded({
      extended: true
  }));
  ```

  This sets up the Express configuration and Okta OIDC connector
  information. Express is set to use the OIDC connector and the Okta
  information that we saved in step 2 of this quick start is used to configure
  the connector for our Okta integration.

  Now add the routing details.

  ```js theme={null}
  // Redirect to Okta login
  express.get('/', (req, res) => {
      // TODO: HANDLE ROUTE
  });
  ```

  This defines the entry route for our application. When a user attempts to
  visit our application root (`/`) the code within this route will be run.

  Lastly, add the Express server initialization to listen for traffic.

  ```js theme={null}
  // Create server
  const port = process.env.PORT || 3000;
  http.createServer(express).listen(port, () => {
      console.log(`Server started: Listening on port ${port}`);
  });
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  In your local application directory, load the
  `/src/main/java/com/box/sample/Application.java` file created in step 1, or
  similar directory if an alternate application name was used.

  Copy the following basic application structure into the file.

  ```java theme={null}
  package com.box.okta.sample;

  import java.io.FileReader;
  import java.io.IOException;
  import java.io.Reader;
  import java.net.URL;

  import org.springframework.boot.SpringApplication;
  import org.springframework.boot.autoconfigure.EnableAutoConfiguration;
  import org.springframework.security.core.annotation.AuthenticationPrincipal;
  import org.springframework.security.oauth2.core.oidc.user.OidcUser;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RequestMapping;
  import org.springframework.web.bind.annotation.RestController;

  import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIRequest;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxJSONResponse;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxUser;
  import com.box.sdk.CreateUserParams;
  import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonArray;
  import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonObject;
  import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonValue;

  @RestController
  @EnableAutoConfiguration
  public class Application {
      static BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection api;

      // TODO: SET ROUTE

      // TODO: INITIALIZE SERVER
  }
  ```

  This sets up the needed imports, the `Application` class, and a standard shared
  Box API connection attribute, to be defined in the next step.

  Replace `// TODO: SET ROUTE` with the following.

  ```java theme={null}
  @RequestMapping("/")
  String home(@AuthenticationPrincipal OidcUser user) throws IOException {
    // TODO: HANDLE ROUTE
  }
  ```

  The route mapping defines the entry route for our application. When a user
  attempts to visit our application root (`/`) in a logged out state, the OIDC
  connector will automatically push them through the Okta login, so we don't need
  to setup a redirect. When the user is in a logged in state, the code within
  this route will be run.

  Replace `// TODO: INITIALIZE SERVER` with the following to initialize the
  Spring Boot server to listen for traffic.

  ```java theme={null}
  public static void main(String[] args) {
      SpringApplication.run(Application.class, args);
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  In your local application directory, load the `server.py` file created in step 1.

  Copy the following basic application structure into the file.

  ```python theme={null}
  from flask import Flask, redirect, g, url_for
  from flask_oidc import OpenIDConnect
  from okta import UsersClient
  from boxsdk import Client
  from boxsdk import JWTAuth
  import requests
  import config
  import json

  app = Flask(__name__)
  app.config.update({
      'SECRET_KEY': config.okta_client_secret,
      'OIDC_CLIENT_SECRETS': './client_secrets.json',
      'OIDC_DEBUG': True,
      'OIDC_ID_TOKEN_COOKIE_SECURE': False,
      'OIDC_SCOPES': ["openid", "profile"],
      'OIDC_CALLBACK_ROUTE': config.okta_callback_route
  })

  oidc = OpenIDConnect(app)
  okta_client = UsersClient(config.okta_org_url, config.okta_auth_token)
  ```

  This sets up the Flask configuration, Okta client, and Okta OIDC
  connector information. Flask is set to use the OIDC connector and the Okta
  information that we saved in step 2 of this quick start is used to configure
  the connector for our Okta integration.

  Next, add a `before_request` definition to be run before route handling is
  engaged. We'll be using this to capture our Okta user information, if available.

  ```python theme={null}
  # Fetch Okta user record if logged in
  @app.before_request
  def before_request():
    # TODO: HANDLE BEFORE REQUEST
  ```

  Lastly, define the entry route for our application, as well as a `box_auth`
  route.

  ```python theme={null}
  # Main application route
  @app.route('/')
  def start():
    # TODO: HANDLE MAIN ROUTE

  # Box user verification
  @app.route("/box_auth")
  @oidc.require_login
  def box_auth():
    # TODO: HANDLE BOX AUTH ROUTE

  return 'Complete'
  ```

  When a user attempts to visit our application root (`/`) the code
  within this route will be run. When we validate an Okta user, the code within
  the `box_auth` route will be run.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  In your local application, load `Views` > `Shared` > `Layout.cshtml`. Once the
  ASP.NET application loads this will be the visual component that is rendered.
  At the top of the page, insert the following.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  @using System.Security.Claims;

  @if (User.Identity.IsAuthenticated)
  {
      <p class="navbar-text">Hello, @User.Identity.Name</p>
  }
  else
  {
      <a asp-controller="Account" asp-action="SignIn">Sign In</a>
  }
  ```

  If a user who is logged in to Okta visits, they will see the hello message. If
  the user is not logged in a sign in link will be provided to them.

  Within the line `<a asp-controller="Account" asp-action="SignIn">Sign In</a>`,
  `asp-controller="Account"` means that the to be created Account controller will
  handle the request, and `asp-action="SignIn"` states that the `SignIn` method
  in that controller will be enacted. Save and close that file.

  Within the `Controllers` directory create a new file, `AccountController.cs`.
  This will be the controller that is enacted when that sign in link is clicked.

  Copy the following basic application structure into the file.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  using System.IO;
  using System.Linq;
  using System.Threading.Tasks;
  using Microsoft.AspNetCore.Mvc;
  using Microsoft.AspNetCore.Authorization;
  using Okta.AspNetCore;
  using Box.V2;
  using Box.V2.Config;
  using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
  using Box.V2.Models;

  public class AccountController : Controller
  {
      public IActionResult SignIn()
      {
          if (!HttpContext.User.Identity.IsAuthenticated)
          {
              return Challenge(OktaDefaults.MvcAuthenticationScheme);
          }

          return RedirectToAction("Profile", "Account");
      }

      [Authorize]
      [Route("~/profile")]
      public IActionResult Profile()
      {
          // TODO: HANDLE ROUTE
      }
  }
  ```

  When the user clicks on the sign in link the `SignIn` method in this controller
  will be run. If the user is not already authenticated they will be sent to
  `Challenge`, which will redirect the user to Okta to log in. This functionality
  is handled by the routing framework and does not require any additional code to
  enact. If the user is authenticated, they will be redirected to the `Profile`
  routing method.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Setup Application Route

We now need to define the code that will run when our main route (`/`) is
engaged.

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: HANDLE ROUTE` in the main route with the following code.

  ```js theme={null}
  if (req.userContext && req.userContext.userinfo) {
      const tokenSet = req.userContext.tokens;
      const userInfo = req.userContext.userinfo;

      // If Okta ID is present, pass to Box user validation
      if (userInfo.sub) {
          box.validateUser(userInfo, res);
      } else {
          console.log('No Okta ID identified');
      }
  } else {
      res.redirect('/login');
  }
  ```

  What we are doing in the above is first checking to see if there is any Okta
  user information available from the OIDC connector. When a user logs in the
  connector will make the Okta user and configuration information available to
  our route within `req.userContext`.

  If user information is present, meaning the user is logged in to Okta, we pass
  the user information to `box.validateUser` along with the Express response
  object to see if there is an associated Box user available, which we'll define
  in the next step.

  If no user information is present, we redirect the user to `/login`. The OIDC
  connector will automatically handle this route and force the user through to
  the Okta login.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: HANDLE MAIN ROUTE` in the main route with the following code.

  ```java theme={null}
  // Validate OIDC user against Box
  return validateUser(user);
  ```

  The Java OIDC connector handles most of the heavy lifting for us. When a logged
  out user accesses this route they will automatically be pushed to the Okta
  login. Once logged in, an OIDC user object will be made available to the route.
  We pass that user object to a `validateUser` function, which we'll define in
  the next step.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: HANDLE BEFORE REQUEST` in the main route with the following code.

  ```python theme={null}
  if oidc.user_loggedin:
      g.user = okta_client.get_user(oidc.user_getfield('sub'))
  else:
      g.user = None
  ```

  This will check if an OIDC user is available, meaning that the user has already
  logged in to Okta. If available we set a user object using the Okta client
  object, and if not we set the user object to `None`.

  Next, replace `// TODO: HANDLE ROUTE` in the main route with the following code.

  ```python theme={null}
      return redirect(url_for(".box_auth"))
  ```

  When this code is engaged, if the user is not logged in to Okta they will be
  redirected to Okta to log in by the OIDC connector. After login, or if the user
  is already logged in, they will then be forwarded to the `box_auth` route code.

  Finally, replace `// TODO: HANDLE BOX AUTH ROUTE` in the `box_auth` route with
  the following code.

  ```python theme={null}
      box = Box()
      return box.validateUser(g)
  ```

  This creates a new instance of the Box class and calls the `validateUser`
  method, passing in the Okta user object. We'll define this class and methods in
  the next step.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  Replace `// TODO: HANDLE ROUTE` in the main route with the following code.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  var subClaim = HttpContext.User.Claims.First(c => c.Type == "sub");
  var sub = subClaim.Value;

  var nameClaim = HttpContext.User.Claims.First(c => c.Type == "name");
  var name = nameClaim.Value;

  Task userSearch = validateUser(name, sub);

  Task.WaitAll(userSearch);

  return Content(name);
  ```

  This block will capture the Okta user account sub (unique ID) and name, then
  sends that data to the to be created `validateUser` method to find a matching
  Box user, which will be created in the next step.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Summary

* You set up the skeleton routes and configuration for Okta.
* You set up the main route handler to pass to Box user verification.

<Observe>
  <Next>I have set up the Okta login</Next>
</Observe>


# Run the application
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/run-the-app



<ProgressBar />

With all the components of the sample in place, it's time to run our program to
see if everything is working correctly.

<Choice>
  From the terminal / command prompt in the local application directory, type
  `node server.js` and click enter. The server will start up and output
  `Server started: Listening on port 3000`.

  From your browser, go to `http://localhost:3000/`. Since this is the first time
  we'll be testing out the user sign in flow, you'll see the Okta login.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta Login" />
  </Frame>

  Sign in with the credentials for the Okta user you created in the last section
  of <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta">step 2</Link>.

  <br />

  Once signed in, you will see a message stating
  `New user created: {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.

  <br />

  When attempting to log in with this user in subsequent attempts, you
  will now see `Hello {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  From Eclipse (or your preferred editor) click to run the application. You will
  see console output stating that the Spring boot application is now running on
  port 8080.

  From your browser, go to `http://localhost:8080/`. Since this is the first time
  we'll be testing out the user sign in flow, you'll see the Okta login.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta Login" />
  </Frame>

  Sign in with the credentials for the Okta user you created in the last section
  of <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta">step 2</Link>.

  <br />

  Once signed in, you will see a message stating `New User Created: {{USERNAME}}`
  output to the browser.

  <br />

  When attempting to log in with this user in subsequent attempts, you
  will now see `Hello {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  From the terminal / command prompt in the local application directory, type
  `env FLASK_APP=server.py flask run` and click enter. The server will start up
  and output `Running on http://127.0.0.1:5000/`.

  From your browser, go to `http://127.0.0.1:5000/`. Since this is the first time
  we'll be testing out the user sign in flow, you'll see the Okta login.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta Login" />
  </Frame>

  Sign in with the credentials for the Okta user you created in the last section
  of <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta">step 2</Link>.

  <br />

  Once signed in, you will see a message stating
  `New user created: {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.

  <br />

  When attempting to log in with this user in subsequent attempts, you
  will now see `Hello {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  From Visual Studio Code (or your preferred editor) click `Run` ->
  `Start Debugging` from the menu. You will see debug console output as the
  application loads, then a browser window will be loaded with the application at
  `https://localhost:5001/`.

  Since this is the first time testing the application, the sign in link will be
  displayed. Once clicked, the Okta login will be automatically loaded.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Okta Login" />
  </Frame>

  Sign in with the credentials for the Okta user you created in the last section
  of <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta">step 2</Link>.

  <br />

  Once signed in, you will see a message in the debug console stating
  `New user created: {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.

  <br />

  When attempting to log in with this user in subsequent attempts, you
  will now see `Current user name: {{USERNAME}}` output to the browser.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework in step 1 to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Summary

You've reached the end of this Quick Start guide. By now you should have taken
the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/scaffold-application-code">Created a web application scaffold</Link>.
2. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-okta">Setup and configured an Okta application</Link> and created a first user that could be used to log into the web app.
3. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/configure-box">Setup and configured a Box application</Link> so that the web app can connect to Box.
4. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/logging-into-app">Created a log in flow for the web application</Link>, allowing the Okta user to log in.
5. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/find-or-create-box-users">Added a check to find an existing Box user</Link>, and optionally create a Box user the first time that Okta user logs into the web application.
6. <Link href="/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/run-the-app">And finally, ran the application</Link> and saw the complete flow in action.

## Next Steps

We recommend the following resource for anyone who wants to learn more about
more advanced capabilities that may be attached into the user creation and
access process.

* <Link href="/guides/users/provision">User provisioning</Link> best practices for advanced user folder architecture setup.
* <Link href="/guides/users/deprovision">User deprovisioning</Link> best practices cleaning up inactive users and transferring user content to another account.
* <Link href="/guides/uploads">Uploading content</Link> into Box, including running preflight checks and large file (chunked) uploading.


# Scaffold application code
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/connect-okta-to-app-users/scaffold-application-code



<ProgressBar />

Our first step in this guide is to create a local application to house our code
and configuration data as we start to create the Okta and Box applications that
will be needed.

Depending on your language / framework preference, create a blank application,
install the required dependencies, as well as all configuration and program
files.

Choose your preferred language / framework below to get started.

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Node

    Using the Express.js framework.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Java

    Using the Spring Boot framework.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Python

    Using the Flask framework.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # .NET

    Using the ASP.NET Core framework.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  * Create a local directory for your application.
  * Create a `package.json` file inside the local directory, open it in your preferred editor, copy / paste the following into it, and save / exit the file.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "name": "okta-box",
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "description": "Box / Okta sample integration",
    "main": "server.js",
    "scripts": {
      "test": "echo \"Error: no test specified\" && exit 1",
      "start": "node server.js"
    },
    "author": "Box",
    "license": "ISC",
    "dependencies": {
      "@okta/oidc-middleware": "^4.0.0",
      "@okta/okta-sdk-nodejs": "^3.2.0",
      "box-node-sdk": "^1.31.0",
      "express-session": "^1.17.0"
    }
  }
  ```

  * Run `npm init` from the terminal / console to install dependencies.
  * Create two files, `server.js` and `config.js` in the local directory.
  * Open `config.js` and save the following default configuration.

  ```js theme={null}
  const oktaClientId = exports.oktaClientId = '';
  const oktaClientSecret = exports.oktaClientSecret = '';
  const oktaOrgUrl = exports.oktaOrgUrl = '';
  const oktaBaseUrl = exports.oktaBaseUrl = 'http://localhost:3000';
  const oktaRedirect = exports.oktaRedirect = '/authorization-code/callback';
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * From Eclipse, create a new project. When prompted, select a Gradle project.
  * Enter a unique name for the project, we used `okta.sample` for this guide.
  * Open your `build.gradle` file and add the following dependencies. Once saved, refresh the Gradle project.

  ```java theme={null}
  dependencies {
      implementation 'org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-security'
      implementation 'org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-web'
      implementation 'com.okta.spring:okta-spring-boot-starter:1.4.0'
      testImplementation('org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-test') {
        exclude group: 'org.junit.vintage', module: 'junit-vintage-engine'
      }
      testImplementation 'org.springframework.security:spring-security-test'
      compile 'com.box:box-java-sdk:2.44.1'
  }
  ```

  * Open your `/src/main/resources/application.properties` file and save the following defaults.

  ```java theme={null}
  okta.oauth2.redirect-uri=/authorization-code/callback
  okta.oauth2.issuer=
  okta.oauth2.clientId=
  okta.oauth2.clientSecret=

  security.oauth2.sso.loginPath=/authorization-code/callback
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Create a local directory for your application.
  * Install needed dependencies using the following `pip` command from your terminal / command prompt: `pip install flask flask_oidc okta boxsdk config`
  * Create three files in the local directory, `client_secrets.json`, `config.py`, and `server.py`.
  * Open `config.py` and save the following into it. This will be some of Okta app configuration information needed. We'll fill in the remaining information in the next step.

  ```python theme={null}
  okta_client_secret = 'YOUR OKTA CLIENT SECRET'
  okta_org_url = 'YOUR OKTA ORG URL'
  okta_auth_token = 'YOUR OKTA APP TOKEN'
  okta_callback_route = '/oidc/callback'
  ```

  * Open `client_secrets.json` and save the following into it. This will be a standard object that the Flask OpenID Connect integration will use during configuration. We'll fill in the remaining information in the next step.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "web": {
      "client_id": "OKTA CLIENT ID",
      "client_secret": "OKTA CLIENT SECRET",
      "auth_uri": "OKTA AUTHORIZE URI",
      "token_uri": "OKTA TOKEN URI",
      "issuer": "OKTA APP DEFAULT",
      "userinfo_uri": "OKTA APP USER INFO URI",
      "redirect_uris": [
        "http://127.0.0.1:5000/oidc/callbac"
      ]
    }
  }
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  * Create a local directory for your application.
  * Open a command prompt / terminal window and go to the local application directory. Using the [.NET Core CLI][dotnet-cli] type `dotnet new mvc` and hit enter. This will create the main scaffolding for a ASP.NET Core MVC (Model-View-Controller) web app. Alternately, create the application [directly from Visual Studio][vs-app-create].
  * From the command prompt / terminal window in the local application directory, add the Okta ASP.NET Core dependencies by typing `dotnet add package Okta.AspNetCore`and the Box dependencies by typing `dotnet add package Box.V2.Core`.
  * Load your new application into Visual Studio or your preferred editor.
  * Within the root of the project, open `Startup.cs`.
  * Add the following package declarations to the top of the file.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  using Microsoft.AspNetCore.Authentication.Cookies;
  using Okta.AspNetCore;
  ```

  * Replace the content of the `ConfigureServices` method with the following. We will fill in the specific Okta application values in the next step.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  services.AddControllersWithViews();
  services.AddAuthentication(options =>
  {
      options.DefaultAuthenticateScheme = CookieAuthenticationDefaults.AuthenticationScheme;
      options.DefaultSignInScheme = CookieAuthenticationDefaults.AuthenticationScheme;
      options.DefaultChallengeScheme = OktaDefaults.MvcAuthenticationScheme;
  })
  .AddCookie()
  .AddOktaMvc(new OktaMvcOptions
  {
      // Replace these values with your Okta configuration
      OktaDomain = "",
      ClientId = "",
      ClientSecret = ""
  });
  ```

  Add the following line to the **top** of the `Configure` method.

  ```csharp theme={null}
  app.UseAuthentication();
  ```
</Choice>

<Choice>
  <Danger>
    **Incomplete previous step**
    Please select a preferred language / framework to get started.
  </Danger>
</Choice>

## Summary

* You created a new local application, files, and basic configuration details.
* You installed all project dependencies.

<Observe>
  <Next>I have my local application set up</Next>
</Observe>

[dotnet-cli]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/core/tools/

[vs-app-create]: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/visualstudio/ide/quickstart-aspnet-core


# Create connection between SSO identity and app user
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/create-app-user



When a user signs in to a custom Box application for the first time using their
SSO provider credentials a new Box user will need to be created and associated
with their SSO user record using some piece of unique information from that SSO
user record. Typically the data that is used to make the association between
those two accounts is either a unique ID or an email address.

To make that association, a Box account may be created in a few ways:

* Using the `external_app_user_id` field of a Box user to store the unique ID from the SSO provider.
* Using the `login` field of a Box user to store the unique email from the SSO provider (managed users only).

## Create association with `external_app_user_id`

Using the `external_app_user_id` field of a Box user record is a viable option
for both app users and managed users, and is the recommended method when
associating a user record from an SSO provider with a Box user account.

### App user

To create a new Box app user with an `external_app_user_id` association to a
SSO user record you will need two pieces of information from the SSO provider:

* UID (required): The unique identifier from the SSO user record.
* Name (optional): To maintain uniformity between the records, the SSO user name may be extracted to associate with the Box user record.

Once available, make a request to create a new app user, supplying the optional
`external_app_user_id` definition in the user parameters.

<CodeGroup>
  ```js Node theme={null}
  const ssoName = 'SSO User Name';
  const ssoUID = 'SSO User Unique ID';
  const spaceAmount = 1073741824;

  // Create app user
  client.enterprise.addAppUser(
      ssoName,
      {
        space_amount: spaceAmount,
        external_app_user_id: ssoUID
      }
  ).then(appUser => {
      console.log(`New user created: ${appUser.name}`);
  });
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String ssoName = "SSO User Name";
  String ssoUID = "SSO User Unique ID";

  // Create app user
  CreateUserParams params = new CreateUserParams();
  params.setExternalAppUserId(ssoUID);
  BoxUser.Info createdUserInfo = BoxUser.createAppUser(client, ssoName, params);

  outputString = "New user created: " + createdUserInfo.getName();
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  sso_name = 'SSO User Name'
  sso_uid = 'SSO User Unique ID'
  space = 1073741824

  # Create app user
  user = box_client.create_user(sso_name, None, space_amount=space, external_app_user_id=sso_uid)
  print('New user created: {name}')
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Managed user

To create a new Box managed user with an `external_app_user_id` association to
a SSO user record you will need two pieces of information from the SSO
provider:

* Email (required): The unique email from the SSO user record.
* Name (optional): To maintain uniformity between the records, the SSO user may be extracted to associate with the Box user record.

Once available, make a request to create a new managed user, supplying the
SSO user record email address for the login.

<CodeGroup>
  ```js Node theme={null}
  const ssoName = 'SSO User Name';
  const ssoEmail = 'ssouser@email.com';
  const spaceAmount = 1073741824;

  // Create app user
  client.enterprise.addUser(
      ssoEmail,
      ssoName,
      {
          space_amount: spaceAmount
      }
  ).then(managedUser => {
      console.log(`New user created: ${managedUser.name}`);
  });
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String ssoName = "SSO User Name";
  String ssoEmail = "ssouser@email.com";

  // Create managed user
  BoxUser.Info createdUserInfo =
    BoxUser.createEnterpriseUser(client, ssoEmail, ssoName);

  outputString = "New user created: " + createdUserInfo.getName();
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  sso_name = 'SSO User Name'
  sso_email = 'ssouser@email.com'
  space = 1073741824

  # Create managed user
  user = box_client.create_user(sso_name, sso_email, space_amount=space)
  print('New user created: {name}')
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Create association by email

Creating a new <Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">managed user</Link>
that is associated by the SSO user email address is the same process as
creating a standard managed user.

After the user logs in via your SSO provider, if the user doesn't already exist
as a Box user, extract the email address from the SSO user record and make a
request to create a new Box managed user.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/users" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "login": "ceo@example.com",
         "name": "Aaron Levie"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.users.createUser({
    name: userName,
    login: userLogin,
    isPlatformAccessOnly: true,
  } satisfies CreateUserRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.users.create_user(user_name, login=user_login, is_platform_access_only=True)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Users.CreateUserAsync(requestBody: new CreateUserRequestBody(name: userName) { Login = userLogin, IsPlatformAccessOnly = true });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.users.createUser(requestBody: CreateUserRequestBody(name: userName, login: userLogin, isPlatformAccessOnly: true))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUsers().createUser(new CreateUserRequestBody.Builder(userName).login(userLogin).isPlatformAccessOnly(true).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxUser.Info createdUserInfo = BoxUser.createEnterpriseUser(api, "user@example.com", "A User");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  new_user = client.create_user('Temp User', 'user@example.com')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var userParams = new BoxUserRequest()
  {
      Name = "Example User",
      Login = "user@example.com"
  };
  BoxUser newUser = await client.UsersManager.CreateEnterpriseUserAsync(userParams);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.enterprise.addUser(
   'eddard@winterfell.example.com',
   'Ned Stark',
   {
    role: client.enterprise.userRoles.COADMIN,
    address: '555 Box Lane',
    status: client.enterprise.userStatuses.CANNOT_DELETE_OR_EDIT
   })
   .then(user => {
    /* user -> {
     type: 'user',
     id: '44444',
     name: 'Ned Stark',
     login: 'eddard@winterfell.example.com',
     created_at: '2012-11-15T16:34:28-08:00',
     modified_at: '2012-11-15T16:34:29-08:00',
     role: 'coadmin',
     language: 'en',
     timezone: 'America/Los_Angeles',
     space_amount: 5368709120,
     space_used: 0,
     max_upload_size: 2147483648,
     status: 'active',
     job_title: '',
     phone: '',
     address: '555 Box Lane',
     avatar_url: 'https://www.box.com/api/avatar/large/deprecated' }
          */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Find app user for SSO identity
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/find-app-user



When a user logs into a Box platform application with their SSO provider, the
first step that should be taken is to see if that user already exists from a
previous login attempt where a Box user record was already created.

If a Box user is found you should
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens">create a user access token</Link>,
or make <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/as-user">as user calls</Link>, to access Box
APIs as that user.

If a Box user is not found you should create a new user with an association to
the SSO user record.

To search for existing users the <Link href="/reference/get-users">List Enterprise Users</Link>
endpoint may be used. Depending on whether you're using the
`external_app_user_id` or `login` method your query will look slightly
different.

## Find user by `external_app_user_id`

To search for enterprise users by the stored `external_app_user_id` value you
will need one piece of information from the SSO provider:

* UID (required): The unique identifier from the SSO user record.

Once available, make a request to the list enterprise users endpoint, supplying
the `external_app_user_id` definition in the parameters.

<Warning>
  You can retrieve app users for a specific application only if
  such app users were created by this application.
  If you use one application to search for users
  created by a different one, no data will be returned.
</Warning>

<CodeGroup>
  ```js Node theme={null}
  const ssoUID = 'SSO User Unique ID';

  // Check enterprise users for matching external_app_user_id against SSO UID
  client.enterprise.getUsers({ "external_app_user_id": ssoUID })
  .then((users) => {
      if (users.total_count > 0) {
          // User found, fetch user ID
          const userId = users.entries[0].id;
      } else {
          // User not found - create new user record
      }
  });
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String ssoUID = "SSO User Unique ID";

  // Check enterprise users for matching external_app_user_id against SSO UID
  URL url = new URL("https://api.box.com/2.0/users?external_app_user_id=" + ssoUID);
  BoxAPIRequest request = new BoxAPIRequest(client, url, "GET");
  BoxJSONResponse jsonResponse = (BoxJSONResponse) request.send();
  JsonObject jsonObj = jsonResponse.getJsonObject();
  JsonValue totalCount = jsonObj.get("total_count");

  if (totalCount.asInt() > 0) {
      // User found, fetch
      // Fetch user ID
      JsonArray entries = (JsonArray) jsonObj.get("entries");
      JsonObject userRecord = (JsonObject) entries.get(0);
      JsonValue userId = userRecord.get("id");
  } else {
      // User not found - create new user record
  }
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  sso_uid = 'SSO User Unique ID'

  # Validate is user exists
  url = f'https://api.box.com/2.0/users?external_app_user_id={sso_uid}'
  headers = {'Authorization': 'Bearer ' + access_token}
  response = requests.get(url, headers=headers)
  user_info = response.json()

  if (user_info['total_count'] == 0):
      # User not found - create new user record
  else:
      # User found, fetch user ID
      user = user_info['entries'][0]
      user_id = user['id']
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Find user by email address

To search for enterprise users by their `login` email you
will need one piece of information from the SSO provider:

* Email (required): The unique email from the SSO user record.

Once available, make a request to the list enterprise users endpoint, supplying
the email address as the `filter_term`, which is made available to search by
email or name.

<CodeGroup>
  ```js Node theme={null}
  const ssoEmail = 'ssouser@email.com';

  client.enterprise.getUsers({filter_term: ssoEmail})
      .then(users => {
          if (users.total_count > 0) {
              // User found, fetch user ID
              const userId = users.entries[0].id;
          } else {
              // User not found - create new user record
          }
      });
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  String ssoEmail = "ssouser@email.com";

  Iterable<BoxUser.Info> users = BoxUser.getAllEnterpriseUsers(client, ssoEmail);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  sso_email = 'ssouser@email.com'

  users = client.users(user_type='all', filter_term=ssoEmail)
  if (users['total_count'] == 0):
      # User not found - create new user record
  else:
      # User found, fetch user ID
      user = users['entries'][0]
      user_id = user['id']
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# SSO & App users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/sso-identities-and-app-users/index



Single Sign-On (SSO) services are often used as part of a company's **Identity
and Access Management (IAM)** solution. When deployed, these services grant
users the ability to securely authenticate multiple applications by logging in
once, with only one set of credentials (username and password).

Box is one of the applications that can be connected to the SSO service of a
company. Integrating these applications into your platform apps will allow you to
provision Box users on the fly for any of your end users, without those users
knowing they have a Box account.

<Note>
  Popular SSO services include `Okta`, `Auth0`, `Microsoft Azure AD`,
  `OneLogin`, `G Suite`, and `Ping Identity`, but there are many others that may
  be deployed.
</Note>

## Connecting SSO to apps

When integrating SSO services into a Box application programmatically, we are
referring to the following flow.

1. A user accesses your web or mobile application in a logged out state.
2. The user is redirected to your SSO provider to log in, typically via `OAuth 2` and `OpenID Connect`.
3. After login, the user is redirected back to your application along with their SSO identity credentials.
4. Your application does a check to see if an associated Box account already exists for this user.
5. If an existing Box account already exists for this user, the application uses the SSO identity to make API calls on behalf of that user in Box.
6. If there is not already an associated Box account for this user, a new Box user account is created based on the SSO identity. The unique user ID from the SSO service is then linked to the new Box user, creating an association between the two accounts. This new Box user is then API calls on behalf of that user in Box.

<Note>
  **Box web app and SSO**

  If you wish to connect your SSO service to the Box website instead of a Box
  application, Box provides a number of [integration options][sso-support] for
  supporting SSO integrations of the [Box web application](https://www.box.com)
  via SAML 2.0.
</Note>

[sso-support]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043696514-Setting-Up-Single-Sign-On-SSO-for-your-Enterprise

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box for Agentforce Extension package
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/box-agentforce-package



The [Box for Agentforce Extension package][agentforce] is an extension of the Box for Salesforce managed
package. This extension provides reusable Agentforce <Link href="/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/flow-actions">actions</Link> that
help automate workflows and enhance intelligent agent—based processes within
Salesforce.
It builds on the core features of the Box for Salesforce package and uses
global, invocable Apex methods to improve functionality. The Box for Agentforce
Extension package  references the methods by using the Box name space in
Agentforce Actions.

## Methods in Agentforce Flows

The list below contains example <Link href="/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/methods">methods</Link> that can be invoked in
Agentforce.

### Folder & File Management

* Create Folder
* Create Folder Association
* Create Folder for Record ID
* Create Folder for Record ID from Template
* Get Folder Contents by Folder ID
* Get Folder ID by Record ID
* Get Folder URL
* Move Folder
* Get Object Folder by Record ID
* Get Record ID by Folder ID
* Get URL for Folder

### Metadata Management

* Create Box Metadata by File ID
* Create Box Metadata by Folder ID
* Delete Box Metadata by File ID
* Delete Box Metadata by Folder ID
* Update Box Metadata by Folder ID
* Get Box Metadata by File ID
* Get Box Metadata by Folder ID

### Collaboration

* Create Collaboration
* Create Collaboration on Record
* Edit Collaboration
* Delete Collaboration

### Box Hubs

* Get Hubs
* Get Hub Collaborations
* Copy Hub
* Create Hub
* Get Hub by ID

### Additional Actions

* Create File from Attachment
* Get DocGen Batch
* Get Folder Associations by Salesforce Record ID
* Get Metadata Cascade Policies by Folder ID
* Get Metadata Cascade Policy by ID
* Create Metadata Cascade Policy
* Delete Metadata Cascade Policy
* Create Slack Channel Mapping
* Set Slack Channel Access Management Disabled

[agentforce]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/40370228349331-Installing-Box-for-Agentforce

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Flow Actions
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/flow-actions



Salesforce toolkit includes wrappers that allow admins
to invoke the following [methods]. It allows Box for Salesforce
users to build automated solutions, such as folder structure,
using [Salesforce Flows].

## Methods in Salesforce Flows

The list below contains all methods that can be invoked in
[Salesforce Flows].

### Box Sign

* Send Box Sign Request (`sendSignRequests`)

### Box Hubs

* Add Hub Item (`tkAddHubItem`)
* Copy Hub (`tkCopyHub`)
* Create Hub (`tkCreateHub`)
* Create Hub Collaboration (`tkCreateHubCollaboration`)
* Get All Hubs (`tkGetAllHubs`)
* Get Enterprise Hubs (`tkGetEnterpriseHubs`)
* Get Hub by ID (`tkGetHubById`)
* Get Hub Collaborations (`tkGetHubCollaborations`)
* Update Hub (`tkUpdateHub`)
* Update Hub Collaboration (`tkUpdateHubCollaboration`)

### Box AI

* Box AI Ask by Item Id (`askBoxAI`)
* Box AI Extract by Fields (`extractBoxAI`)
* Box AI Extract by Metadata Template (`extractBoxAI`)
* Box AI Extract by SObject Type (`extractBoxAI`)
* Box AI Generate Text by Item Id (`generateBoxAI`)

### Doc Gen

* Create Doc Gen Template (`createDocGenTemplate`)
* Generate Doc Gen For Record (`generateDocGenForRecord`)
* Submit Doc Gen Batch (`submitDocgenBatch`)
* Get Doc Gen Batch Status (`getDocgenBatch`)

### File Box Metadata and actions

* Create Box Metadata by File Id (`tkCreateBoxMetadataByFileId`)
* Delete Box Metadata by File Id (`tkDeleteBoxMetadataByFileId`)
* Get Box Metadata by File Id (`tkGetBoxMetadataByFileId`)
* Update Box Metadata by File Id (`tkUpdateBoxMetadataByFileId`)
* Move File (`tkMoveFile`)
* Get Last Item (`getLastItem`)
* Get Recent Items (`GetRecentItems`)

### Folder Box Metadata and actions

* Create Box Metadata by Folder Id (`tkCreateBoxMetadataByFolderId`)
* Delete Box Metadata by Folder Id (`tkDeleteBoxMetadataByFolderId`)
* Get Box Metadata by Folder Id (`tkGetBoxMetadataByFolderId`)
* Update Box Metadata by Folder Id (`tkUpdateBoxMetadataByFolderId`)

### Folder management

* Create Folder (`tkCreateFolder`)
* Create Folder Association (`tkCreateFolderAssociation`)
* Create Folder For Record ID (`tkCreateFolderForRecordId`)
* Create Folder For Record ID From Template (`tkCreateFolderForRecordIdFromTemplate`)
* Create Object Folder For Record ID (`tkCreateObjectFolderForRecordId`)
* Get Folder Associations By Salesforce Record ID (`tkGetFolderAssociationsByRecordId`)
* Get Folder ID By Record ID (`tkGetFolderIdByRecordId`)
* Get Folder URL (`tkGetFolderUrl`)
* Get Object Folder By Record ID (`tkGetObjectFolderByRecordId`)
* Get Record ID By Folder ID (`tkGetRecordIdByFolderId`)
* Get Root Folder ID (`tkGetRootFolderId`)
* Get URL For Folder (`tkGetUrlForFolder`)
* Move Folder (`tkMoveFolder`)
* Update Folder (`tkUpdateFolder`)
* Get Box Folder Contents by Folder Id (`tkGetFolderContents`)

### Cascade policies

* Create Metadata Cascade Policy (`tkCreateMetadataCascadePolicy`)
* Delete Metadata Cascade Policy (`tkDeleteBoxMetadataByFolderId`)
* Get Metadata Cascade Policies by Folder Id (`tkGetMetadataCascadePoliciesByFolderId`)
* Get Metadata Cascade Policy by Id (`tkGetMetadataCascadePolicyById`)

### Collaboration

* Create Collaboration (`tkCreateCollaboration`)
* Create Collaboration On Record (`tkCreateCollaborationOnRecord`)
* Delete Collaboration (`tkDeleteCollaboration`)
* Edit Collaboration (`tkEditCollaboration`)

### Slack integration

* Create Slack Channel Mapping (`tkCreateSlackChannelMapping`)
* Set Slack Channel Access Management Disabled (`tkSetSlackChannelAccessManagementDisabled`)

### Other / utilities

* Create File From Attachment (`tkCreateFileFromAttachment`)
* Enable Integration Activity (`tkEnableAppActivity`)
* Search (`search`)

[methods]: /guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/methods

[Salesforce Flows]: https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.flow.htm&type=5

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Salesforce Developer Toolkit
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/index



The Box for Salesforce Developer Toolkit allows customers to programmatically
customize the behavior of the Box for Salesforce integration. The Toolkit
consists of several global APEX methods that can be used to trigger and extend
the default behavior. The global methods can update the internal Salesforce
record to Box folder mapping and handle permission management.

<Note>
  This functionality is part of the latest Box for
  [Salesforce package][sf-package].
</Note>

<Warning>
  **What the Toolkit does NOT provide**

  The Toolkit is not a full-featured APEX wrapper for the BOX Content API. If
  this is what you are looking for, have a look at the
  [Box SDK for Salesforce][sf-sdk].
</Warning>

## Authentication

A solution for authentication is to allow API calls to use the service
account credentials.

This means that Salesforce Admins need to restrict access to the Toolkit global
APEX class. As these methods allow direct modification of Box content and
collaborations, Salesforce administrators should take appropriate precautions
by restricting access to the global Toolkit APEX class.

Toolkit methods that take `accessToken` as a parameter can use the service
account credentials by sending `null` for the `accessToken` value.

If a value is passed in `accessToken`, the API call to Box is done with
the access token sent. It is up to the developer to ensure the token being
passed is valid and the user associated with the token has permissions to
perform the requested operation.

[sf-package]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044195713-Installing-and-Configuring-Box-For-Salesforce

[sf-sdk]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Methods and Operations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/methods



## Toolkit Details

Class Name: `box.Toolkit`

## Instance Variables

### `mostRecentError`

String to indicate the most recent error that occurred when calling instance
methods.

The presence of this string does not mean the operation did not succeed. It is
possible the error was recoverable; however, the lack of a value in this string
does indicate the operation was successful.

### `Enum CollaborationType`

Enum to indicate the [type of collaboration][collab-type].

Possible values: `EDITOR`, `VIEWER`, `PREVIEWER`, `UPLOADER`, `COOWNER`,
`OWNER`, `PREVIEWERUPLOADER`, or `VIEWERUPLOADER`

## Static Methods

### `deleteServiceUserAssociation`

Method to clear association between Service Account and Box for Salesforce
integration. This can be used to change the service account if an incorrect one
is being used.

Parameters:

* None

Returns:

* `true` if the user's account existed and was deleted.
* `false` if the user's account was not deleted for any reason (including because it didn't exist).

### `deleteUserAssociation`

| Parameter | Type | Description                                             |
| --------- | ---- | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| `userId`  | id   | The Id of the user whose credentials are to be cleared. |

Returns:

* `true` if the user's account existed and was deleted.
* `false` if the user's account was not deleted for any reason (including because it didn't exist).

## Instance Methods - Constructors, Destructors

### `box.Toolkit()`

Parameters:

* None

### `commitChanges`

Treat this method as a destructor for the `box.Toolkit()` method.

<Warning>
  This method is critical. It must be called after all folder / collaboration
  operations are complete. Every time. No Exceptions.
</Warning>

Since Salesforce doesn't allow callouts after database updates / inserts /
deletes have occurred, the Toolkit class maintains some collections of objects
to be inserted once all callout operations are complete. If this method is not
called, those objects won't be in the database, and the tables that keep track
of user / record / folder associations will be out of sync and will need some
advanced debugging to fix.

Parameters:

* None

Returns:

* `Void`

### `commitChanges` with platform event

Treat this method as a destructor for the `box.Toolkit()` method.

This method is very similar to the `commitChanges` above. However, it uses
a platform event to commit changes to the database to perform DML statements
in a different transaction and avoid governor limits in some scenarios.

| Parameter          | Type      | Description                                                                   |
| ------------------ | --------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `usePlatformEvent` | `boolean` | `true` if you're using a platform event. `false` to call the original method. |

Returns:

* `Void`

## Generic Methods

The Box for Salesforce Developer Toolkit provides a global method that accepts
an [HttpRequest][sf-httprequest] object as a parameter and returns an
[HttpResponse][sf-httpresponse] object. This method will utilize the
authentication details of the Service Account to make callouts to Box's APIs,
allowing you to focus on the business logic of your integration.

### `sendRequest`

| Parameter | Type                          | Description                                           |
| --------- | ----------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- |
| `request` | [HttpRequest][sf-httprequest] | An HttpRequest object with a set endpoint and method. |

Returns:

* An [HttpResponse][sf-httpresponse] object with the response details from calling Box's APIs.
* `Toolkit.BoxApiException` if there is any missing information from the HttpRequest input.
* `null` if there was an issue getting the authentication details for the Service Account. In this case, check `mostRecentError`.

## File Operations

### `createFileFromAttachment`

<Note>
  Available in version 3.46 and above.

  Salesforce has a String length limit of 6 million characters. Due to string
  bloat in the base64 encoding/decoding process, this results in an effective
  file size limit of 4.3 megabytes for synchronous Apex and 8.6 megabytes for
  asynchronous Apex.
</Note>

| Parameter          | Type         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------ | ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `att`              | `Attachment` | The attachment to be converted into a File in Box.                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `fileNameOverride` | `string`     | Optional - Name of the new file. If no value is passed in, the name of the attachment is used.                                                                                                                                                              |
| `folderIdOverride` | `string`     | Optional - Box folder id to place this attachment in. If no value is passed in, the file will be placed in the folder associated with the record that is the `parentId` of the attachment. If the record-specific folder doesn't exist, it will be created. |
| `accessToken`      | `string`     | Optional - if `accessToken` is sent, that value is used for the Box API call. Otherwise, the default account credentials are used.                                                                                                                          |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the id of the Box file that was created.
* `null` if there was an error. In this case, check `mostRecentError`.

### `getObjectFolderByRecordId`

| Parameter  | Type | Description                                                |
| ---------- | ---- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId` | `id` | Salesforce record id whose root folder id you want to get. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder id of the object root folder for the record id passed in.

## Folder Operations

### `getRootFolderId`

Parameters:

* None

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder id of the Salesforce root folder.

### `getObjectFolderByRecordId`

| Parameter  | Type | Description                                                |
| ---------- | ---- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId` | `id` | Salesforce record id whose root folder id you want to get. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder id of the object root folder for the record id passed in.

### `getFolderUrl`

* This method gets the embed widget URL for a particular record so customers can use their own embed logic if desired.
* This method respects seamless login settings so the URL will automatically log the user in if seamless login is enabled.

| Parameter         | Type      | Description                                                                 |
| ----------------- | --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId`        | `id`      | Salesforce record id whose root folder id you want to get.                  |
| `isMobileContext` | `boolean` | Boolean to indicate whether the URL should be mobile (true) or not (false). |

Returns:

* `string` returned is a URL that points to the folder associated with the Salesforce record Id passed. This URL is for the Box Embed Widget and can be embedded in any Visualforce page.

### `createObjectFolderForRecordId`

| Parameter  | Type | Description                                                |
| ---------- | ---- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId` | `id` | Salesforce record id whose root folder id you want to get. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder Id of the root folder that was created.
* If the root folder already existed, the value returned is the Box folder id of the root folder that already existed.

### `createFolder`

| Parameter        | Type     | Description                                                                                                                                             |
| ---------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderName`     | `string` | Name of the folder to be created. Folder names are subject to some restrictions. <Link href="/reference/post-folders">See here for more details.</Link> |
| `parentFolderId` | `string` | Parent Box folder this folder will be created in.                                                                                                       |
| `accessToken`    | `string` | Optional - If `accessToken` is sent, that value is used for the Box API call,; otherwise, the default service account credentials are used.             |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder id of the folder that was created.
* `null` is returned if a folder is not created. In this case, check `mostRecentError` for details.

### `createFolderForRecordId`

| Parameter             | Type      | Description                                                                                                                                                |
| --------------------- | --------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId`            | `id`      | Salesforce record id that a Box folder will be created for.                                                                                                |
| `folderNameOverride`  | `string`  | By default, the record's name will be the folder name. If you want to name it something else, send that value here.                                        |
| `optCreateRootFolder` | `boolean` | Boolean to indicate whether to create the object root folder if it doesn't exist. If false is sent and the root folder does not exist, the call will fail. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder id of the folder that was created.
* `null` is returned if a folder is not created. In this case, check `mostRecentError` for details.
* If the Salesforce record was already associated with a Box folder, the existing Box folder id is returned.

### `moveFolder`

| Parameter           | Type     | Description                                                                                                                                |
| ------------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `folderId`          | `string` | Box folder Id of the folder to be moved.                                                                                                   |
| `newParentFolderId` | `string` | Box folder Id of the folder that will be the new parent folder.                                                                            |
| `accessToken`       | `string` | Optional - If `accessToken` is sent, that value is used for the Box API call. Otherwise, the default service account credentials are used. |

Returns:

* `true` if the folder was moved successfully.
* `false` if the folder was not moved successfully. Check `mostRecentError` for details.

### `getUrlForFolder`

| Parameter  | Type | Description       |
| ---------- | ---- | ----------------- |
| `recordId` | `id` | ID of the record. |

Returns:

* `pageReference` object with provided URL.
* `null` if the parameters are incorrect.

### `createFolderForRecordIdFromTemplate`

| Parameter             | Type      | Description                                                           |
| --------------------- | --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId`            | `id`      | Salesforce record ID.                                                 |
| `templateFolderId`    | `string`  | Source folder which should be the template.                           |
| `folderNameOverride`  | `string`  | Name override of the new folder.                                      |
| `optCreateRootFolder` | `boolean` | Flag that determines if a root folder is created if it doesn't exist. |

Returns:

* Newly created `folder Id`.
* `null` if the parameters are incorrect.

## Folder Association Methods

### `getFolderAssociationsByRecordId`

| Parameter  | Type | Description                                                                   |
| ---------- | ---- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId` | `id` | Salesforce record id that the folder mapping entries returned are related to. |

Returns:

* List returned is a collection of all folder mapping entries associated with this record.
* Generally, it will be an empty list if no folder mapping entries exist, but under some circumstances, it could be `null`.

### `getFolderIdByRecordId`

| Parameter  | Type | Description                                           |
| ---------- | ---- | ----------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId` | `id` | Salesforce record id whose folder id you wish to get. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the Box folder id associated with the Salesforce record id passed in.

### `getRecordIdByFolderId`

| Parameter  | Type     | Description    |
| ---------- | -------- | -------------- |
| `folderId` | `string` | Box folder id. |

Returns:

* `id` returned is the Salesforce record id associated with the Box folder id passed in.

### `createFolderAssociation`

| Parameter  | Type     | Description                                                      |
| ---------- | -------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId` | `id`     | Salesforce record Id that is being associated with a box folder. |
| `folderId` | `string` | Box folder Id being associated with a Salesforce record.         |

Returns:

* `box__FRUP__c` object - The FRUP object returned will be `null` if there was an error (check `mostRecentError`). Upon calling the `commitChanges` method, this FRUP entry will be inserted into the database. This method ensures consistency with other folder associations by not allowing the same folder to be associated with multiple records or vice versa.

## Collaboration Methods

<Warning>
  Collaborations created by the Box for Salesforce Developer Toolkit will not
  send collaboration emails to collaborators. Only the service account used for
  the Box for Salesforce integration will receive a collaboration email.
</Warning>

### `createCollaboration`

| Parameter      | Type                            | Description                                                                                                                          |
| -------------- | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `folderId`     | `string`                        | Box folder id to create a collaboration on.                                                                                          |
| `boxUserId`    | `string`                        | Box user id to be collaborated (either `boxUserId` or `emailAddress` is required but not both).                                      |
| `emailAddress` | `box.Toolkit.CollaborationType` | Email address of the box user to be.                                                                                                 |
| `collabType`   | `string`                        | Type of collaboration (see the `CollaborationType` enum definition).                                                                 |
| `accessToken`  | `string`                        | Optional - If sent, this value is used for authentication for the box API call; if `null`, the service account credentials are used. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the id of the box collaboration that was created.
* `null` returned if there was an error. In this case, check `mostRecentError`.

### `createCollaborationOnRecord`

| Parameter         | Type                            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `userId`          | `id`                            | Salesforce user id to be collaborated.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `recordId`        | `id`                            | Salesforce record id of the record folder to be collaborated on.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `collabType`      | `box.Toolkit.CollaborationType` | Type of collaboration (see the `CollaborationType` enum definition).                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `optCreateFolder` | `boolean`                       | Boolean to indicate whether to create the Box folder associated for the Salesforce record id if it does not already exist. This also creates the root folder if it did not already exist. If set to `false` and the folder does not already exist, the call will fail. |

Returns:

* `string` returned is the id of the Box collaboration that was created.
* `null` returned if there was an error. In this case, check `mostRecentError`.

[collab-type]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels

[sf-httprequest]: https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_classes_restful_http_httprequest.htm

[sf-httpresponse]: https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_classes_restful_http_httpresponse.htm#apex_classes_restful_http_httpresponse

### `editCollaboration`

| Parameter     | Type     | Description                          |
| ------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------ |
| `collabId`    | `string` | Collaboration ID                     |
| `collabType`  | `enum`   | `Box.Toolkit.CollaborationType` enum |
| `accessToken` | `string` |                                      |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.
* `false` if the parameters are incorrect.

### `deleteCollaboration`

| Parameter     | Type     | Description      |
| ------------- | -------- | ---------------- |
| `collabId`    | `string` | Collaboration ID |
| `accessToken` | `string` |                  |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.
* `false` if the parameters are incorrect.

## Metadata

<Info>
  Check the `toolkit.mostRecentError` value for detailed error responses
  for all the methods.
</Info>

### `getBoxMetadataByFolderId`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-metadata-id-id">get metadata instance on folder endpoint</Link>.

| Parameter      | Type     | Description                                                                 |
| -------------- | -------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`     | `string` | The ID of the Box Folder for which you want to create metadata.             |
| `scope`        | `string` | The scope of the metadata template. Value is one of `[global, enterprise]`. |
| `template_key` | `string` | The name of the metadata template.                                          |

Returns:

* `FolderMetadata` record associated with this folder, scope, and template key. You can find the custom values in `keyValuePairs` variable of this object.
* `null`, if:
  * the parameters are incorrect,
  * access to the folder is missing,
  * metadata cascade policy is not found.

### `createBoxMetadataByFolderId`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-id-id">create metadata instance on folder</Link> endpoint.

| Parameter       | Type                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------- | -------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`      | `string`             | ID of the Box Folder for which you want to create metadata.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `scope`         | `string`             | Scope of the metadata template. Value is one of \[`global`, `enterprise`].                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| `template_key`  | `string`             | Name of the metadata template.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `keyValuePairs` | `List<KeyValuePair>` | This class work as a map. Provide key/value pairs as a list, for the attributes to send to Box Metadata. The key/value mappings follow the same pattern as the <Link href="/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-id-id">API</Link>. Number types `'3000'`and multi select values such as `'Customer;Order'`are represented as string inputs in the `value` field, as regular metadata values seen in the code samples. |

Returns:

* Newly created `FolderMetadata` object.
* `null`, if:
  * the parameters are incorrect,
  * access to the folder is missing,
  * metadata cascade policy is not found.

### `updateBoxMetadataByFolderId`

Calls the <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id-metadata-id-id">update metadata instance on folder</Link> endpoint.

| Parameter      | Type                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| -------------- | ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`     | `string`                     | ID of the Box folder for which you want to update metadata.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `scope`        | `string`                     | The scope of the metadata template. Value is one of \[`global`, `enterprise`]                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| `template_key` | `string`                     | The name of the metadata template.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| `mdUpdates`    | `List<FolderMetadataUpdate>` | Metadata updates. Provide the operation, path, and value. The metadata update records follow the same pattern as the <Link href="/reference/put-folders-id-metadata-id-id">API</Link>. Number types (`3000`) and multi select values such as `Customer;Order` are represented as string inputs in the `value` field, just as the regular metadata values in the code samples. |

Returns:

* Updated `FolderMetadata` object.
* `null`, if:
  * the parameters are incorrect,
  * access to the folder is missing,
  * metadata cascade policy is not found.

### `deleteBoxMetadataFolderId`

This method call the <Link href="/reference/delete-folders-id-metadata-id-id">delete metadata instance from folder</Link> endpoint.

| Parameter      | Type     | Description                                                                   |
| -------------- | -------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`     | `string` | ID of the Box folder for which you want to update metadata.                   |
| `scope`        | `string` | The scope of the metadata template. Value is one of \[`global`, `enterprise`] |
| `template_key` | `string` | The name of the metadata template.                                            |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.
* `false` can be returned if parameters are incorrect parameters or metadata is not found.

### `getMetadataCascadePolicyById`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-cascade-policies-id">get metadata cascade policy from folder</Link>
endpoint. As it requires an ID, you need to call the
`getMetadataCascadePoliciesByFolderId` method first.

| Parameter  | Type     | Description                                        |
| ---------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------------- |
| `policyId` | `string` | The ID of the cascade policy you want to retrieve. |

Returns:

* `MetadataCascadePolicy` object retrieved from Box.
* `null`, if:
  * the parameters are incorrect,
  * access to the folder is missing,
  * metadata cascade policy is not found.

### `getMetadataCascadePoliciesByFolderId`

This method retrieves the cascade policies by providing a folder ID and
calling the <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-cascade-policies">get metadata cascade policies</Link> endpoint.

| Parameter           | Type      | Description                                                                                                             | Required |
| ------------------- | --------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------- |
| `folderId`          | `string`  | Specifies for which folder to return the policies. This can't be used on the root folder with ID 0.                     | Yes      |
| `paginationMarker`  | `string`  | Defines the position marker at which to begin returning results. This is used for marker-based pagination.              | No       |
| `Offset`            | `integer` | The offset of the item at which to begin the response.                                                                  | No       |
| `ownerEnterpriseId` | `string`  | Enterprise ID for which to find the metadata cascade policies. If not specified, it defaults to the current enterprise. | No       |

Returns:

* List of `MetadataCascadePolicy` objects retrieved from Box.
* `null`, if:
  * the parameters are incorrect,
  * access to the folder is missing,
  * metadata cascade policy is not found.

### `createMetadataCascadePolicy`

This method creates cascade policies by providing a Box folder ID, scope,
template key, and by calling the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies">post metadata cascade policies</Link> endpoint.

| Parameter      | Type     | Description                                                                         |
| -------------- | -------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId`     | `string` | ID of the Box folder for which you want to create the metadata cascade policy.      |
| `scope`        | `string` | The scope of the metadata cascade policy. Value is one of \[`global`, `enterprise`] |
| `template_key` | `string` | The name of the template key.                                                       |

Returns:

* Newly generated `MetadataCascadePolicy`.
* `null`, if:
  * the parameters are incorrect,
  * access to the folder is missing,
  * metadata cascade policy details are not found.

### `deleteMetadataCascadePolicy`

This method deletes the cascade policies by providing a cascade policy
ID and calling the <Link href="/reference/delete-metadata-cascade-policies-id">delete metadata cascade policies ID</Link> endpoint.

| Parameter  | Type     | Description                                      |
| ---------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| `policyId` | `string` | The ID of the cascade policy you want to delete. |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.
* `false` is returned if parameters are incorrect, access to the folder is missing, or the metadata cascade policy is not found.

### `enableAppActivity`

This method enables the given folder for App Activities by applying
metadata on the folder and cascading it down.

| Parameter  | Type     | Description                                                     |
| ---------- | -------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `folderId` | `string` | The ID of the Box folder for which you want to delete metadata. |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.
* `false` in case of incorrect parameters.

## Salesforce and Slack

### `getIntegrationMappings`

This toolkit method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-integration-mappings-slack">get integration mappings</Link> endpoint to get the
existing mappings.

| Parameter       | Type   | Description                                                                          |
| --------------- | ------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `integration`   | String | `Slack` is currently the only supported value.                                       |
| `partnerItemId` | String | ID of the mapped item on the provided integration side. Example: a Slack channel ID. |

Returns:

* A list of `IntegrationMapping` objects,
* `null` is returned if there are incorrect parameters, the access is missing, or the integration mappings is not found.

### `createIntegrationMapping`

This toolkit method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-integration-mappings-slack">get integration mappings</Link> endpoint to create
the mappings.

<Note>
  When you map to a Slack channel,
  `access_management_disabled` is set to `FALSE` by default.
  This causes an automatic removal of collaborators that are not part
  of the Slack channel member list. Depending on how your organization
  sets up sharing in Box, we recommend to either enable
  `access_ management_disabled` to `TRUE` by using the
  `setSlackChannelAccessManagementDisabled` method, or use [groups][12].
  This ensures no users are removed, regardless of Slack settings.
  Collaborations are added or removed from Slack when a file is uploaded
  to a Slack channel.
</Note>

| Parameter     | Type                 | Description                                    |
| ------------- | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------- |
| `integration` | String               | `Slack` is currently the only supported value. |
| `mapping`     | `IntegrationMapping` | Apex defined type `IntegrationMapping`.        |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.

### `deleteIntegrationMapping`

This toolkit method calls the <Link href="/reference/delete-integration-mappings-slack-id">delete integration mappings</Link> endpoint to
delete a mapping.

| Parameter              | Type   | Description                                    |
| ---------------------- | ------ | ---------------------------------------------- |
| `integration`          | String | `Slack` is currently the only supported value. |
| `integrationMappingId` | String | Retrieved from `getIntegrationMappings`.       |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.

### `mapSfdcRecordToSlackChannel`

This toolkit method uses the above integration mapping methods and
provides a wrapper with four different use cases:

1. If a mapping does not exist in Salesforce or Slack, it creates a folder under the Box for Salesforce folder structure, and an integration mapping to link it with the Slack channel.
2. If a mapping only exists from Salesforce, it continues to use the folder and does not change the location. Creates an integration mapping to link it with the Slack Channel.
3. If a mapping only exists from Slack, it continues to use the folder and create an FRUP record for the Salesforce record to use the existing folder. This folder is likely to be outside of the Salesforce root folder.
4. If Salesforce and Slack have existing mappings but are not related to each other, it throws an error through `Toolkit.mostRecentError` or within a flow action, stating that the mappings already exist.

This method/invocable is used in a flow template provided in the Box
for Salesforce package `Create Box Folder/Slack Channel Mapping`.

<Note>
  When you map to a Slack channel,
  `access_management_disabled` is set to `FALSE` by default.
  This causes an automatic removal of collaborators that are not part
  of the Slack channel member list. Depending on how your organization
  sets up sharing in Box, we recommend to either enable
  `access_ management_disabled` to `TRUE` by using the
  `setSlackChannelAccessManagementDisabled` method, or use [groups][12].
  This ensures no users are removed, regardless of Slack settings.
  Collaborations are added or removed from Slack when a file is uploaded
  to a Slack channel.
</Note>

| Parameter               | Type   | Description                                                                                                             |
| ----------------------- | ------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `recordId`              | ID     | Salesforce record ID.                                                                                                   |
| `slackChanneld`         | String |                                                                                                                         |
| `slackWorkspaceOrOrgId` | String | If Box for Slack is installed org-wide, provide the Org ID (for example E1234567), or the Workspace ID (e.g. T5555555). |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.

### `setSlackChannelAccessManagementDisabled`

This toolkit method calls the <Link href="/reference/put-integration-mappings-slack-id">put integration mappings</Link> endpoint to update
the access management deactivated setting.

This method/invocable is used in a flow template provided in the Box
for Salesforce package `Create Box Folder/Slack Channel Mapping`.

| Parameter   | Type    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ----------- | ------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `channelId` | String  |                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| `disabled`  | Boolean | Indicates whether or not a channel member access to the underlying Box item should be automatically managed. Depending on the type of the channel, access is managed through creating collaborations or shared links. |

Returns:

* Boolean based on the transaction success.

## Box Sign

### `sendSignRequests`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests">create sign request</Link> endpoint to send documents for signature.

| **Parameter** | **Type**               | **Description**                                                                                          |
| ------------- | ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `requests`    | `List<BoxSignRequest>` | List of Box Sign Request objects containing signers, files, and configuration for the signature request. |

**Returns:**

List of `BoxSignResponse` objects, one for each request processed. Each response contains the sign request ID, status, and any error information.

`BoxSignResponse` returns error details, if:

* the parameters are incorrect,
* access to the files is missing,
* file upload fails,
* Box Sign API returns an error.

## Box Hubs

### Manage Box Hubs

#### `getHubById`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-hubs-id">get hub by ID</Link> endpoint to retrieve a specific hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type** | **Description**                |
| ------------- | -------- | ------------------------------ |
| `hubId`       | `string` | The ID of the hub to retrieve. |

**Returns:**

* Hub object containing the hub details and metadata.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the hub ID is blank or null,
  * access to the hub is missing,
  * the hub is not found.

#### `getAllHubs`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-hubs">get all hubs</Link> endpoint to retrieve a list of all hubs.

| **Parameter** | **Type**  | **Description**                                                 |
| ------------- | --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `limitCount`  | `integer` | Optional - maximum number of hubs to return.                    |
| `marker`      | `string`  | Optional - pagination marker for retrieving additional results. |

**Returns:**

* `HubsList` object containing the list of hubs and pagination information.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * access to hubs is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `getEnterpriseHubs`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-enterprise-hubs">get enterprise hubs</Link> endpoint to retrieve enterprise-level hubs.

| **Parameter** | **Type**  | **Description**                                                 |
| ------------- | --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `limitCount`  | `integer` | Optional - maximum number of hubs to return.                    |
| `marker`      | `string`  | Optional - pagination marker for retrieving additional results. |

**Returns:**

* `HubsList` object containing the list of enterprise hubs and pagination information.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * access to enterprise hubs is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `createHub`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-hubs">create hub endpoint</Link> to create a new hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type** | **Description**                                  |
| ------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| `title`       | `string` | Required - title of the hub (max 50 characters). |
| `description` | `string` | Optional - description of the hub.               |

**Returns:**

* Hub object containing the newly created hub details.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the title is blank or null,
  * the title exceeds 50 characters,
  * access to create hubs is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `updateHub`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/put-hubs-id">update hub endpoint</Link> to modify an existing hub.

| **Parameter**   | **Type**           | **Description**                                    |
| --------------- | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------- |
| `hubId`         | `string`           | Required - the ID of the hub to update.            |
| `updateRequest` | `HubUpdateRequest` | Required - object containing the fields to update. |

**Returns:**

* Hub object containing the updated hub details.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the hub ID is blank or null,
  * the update request is null,
  * the title exceeds 50 characters,
  * access to the hub is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `copyHub`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-hubs-id-copy">copy hub endpoint</Link> to create a copy of an existing hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type** | **Description**                                          |
| ------------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| `hubId`       | `string` | Required - the ID of the hub to copy.                    |
| `title`       | `string` | Optional - title for the copied hub (max 50 characters). |
| `description` | `string` | Optional - description for the copied hub.               |

**Returns:**

* Hub object containing the newly created copied hub details.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the hub ID is blank or null,
  * the title exceeds 50 characters,
  * access to the source hub is missing,
  * API request fails.

### Box Hub Collaborations

#### `createUserCollaboration`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-hub-collaborations">create hub collaboration</Link> endpoint to add a user to a hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type** | **Description**                              |
| ------------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------- |
| `hubId`       | `string` | Required - the ID of the hub.                |
| `userId`      | `string` | Required - the ID of the user to add.        |
| `role`        | `string` | Required - the role for the user in the hub. |

**Returns:**

* `HubCollaboration` object containing the collaboration details.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the hub ID is blank or null,
  * the user ID is blank or null,
  * the role is blank or null,
  * access to the hub is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `createHubCollaboration`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-hub-collaborations">create hub collaboration</Link> endpoint to add a collaboration to a hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type**                  | **Description**                                                                                               |
| ------------- | ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `request`     | `HubCollaborationRequest` | Required - object containing the collaboration details including hub reference and accessible by information. |

**Returns:**

* `HubCollaboration` object containing the collaboration details.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the collaboration request is null,
  * the hub reference with ID is missing,
  * access to the hub is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `getHubCollaborations`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/get-hub-collaborations">get hub collaborations</Link> endpoint to retrieve collaborations for a hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type**  | **Description**                                                 |
| ------------- | --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `hubId`       | `string`  | Required - the ID of the hub.                                   |
| `limitCount`  | `integer` | Optional - maximum number of collaborations to return.          |
| `marker`      | `string`  | Optional - pagination marker for retrieving additional results. |

**Returns:**

* `HubCollaborationsList` object containing the list of collaborations and pagination information.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the hub ID is blank or null,
  * access to the hub is missing,
  * API request fails.

#### `updateHubCollaboration`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/put-hub-collaborations-id">update hub collaboration</Link> endpoint to modify a collaboration.

| **Parameter**     | **Type** | **Description**                                   |
| ----------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------- |
| `collaborationId` | `string` | Required - the ID of the collaboration to update. |
| `role`            | `string` | Required - the new role for the collaboration.    |

**Returns:**

* `HubCollaboration` object containing the updated collaboration details.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the collaboration ID is blank or null,
  * the role is blank or null,
  * access to the collaboration is missing,
  * API request fails.

### Box Hub Items

#### `addHubItem`

This method calls the <Link href="/reference/post-hubs-id-manage-items">manage hub items</Link> endpoint to add an item to a hub.

| **Parameter** | **Type** | **Description**                                           |
| ------------- | -------- | --------------------------------------------------------- |
| `hubId`       | `string` | Required - the ID of the hub.                             |
| `itemId`      | `string` | Required - the ID of the item to add.                     |
| `itemType`    | `string` | Required - the type of the item (e.g., `file`, `folder`). |

**Returns:**

* `HubItemsManageResponse` object containing the result of the item management operation.
* `HubsToolkitException` if:
  * the hub ID is blank or null,
  * the item ID is blank or null,
  * the item type is blank or null,
  * access to the hub is missing,
  * API request fails.

[12]: https://support.box.com/hc/articles/360043694554-Creating-and-Managing-Groups

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Code Samples
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/samples



## Generic Method

The following code will create metadata on a Box folder in Salesforce using the
generic Toolkit method:

```java Apex theme={null}
// Instantiate the Toolkit object
box.Toolkit toolkit = new box.Toolkit();

// Get the Salesforce record id associated with a Box folder
String recordId = toolkit.getRecordIdByFolderId('{some folder id}');

// Construct an object containing all the metadata you want
Map<String, Object> metadata = new Map<String, Object>{
    'salesforce_id' => recordId,
    'salesforce_url' => System.URL.getSalesforceBaseUrl().toExternalForm() + '/' + recordId,
    'salesforce_user_name' => UserInfo.getName(),
    'salesforce_user_email' => UserInfo.getUserEmail()
};

// Specify the Box API endpoint to call
String endpoint = 'https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/' + '{some folder id}' + '/metadata/global/properties';

// Create a new HttpRequest object and set appropriate values
HttpRequest request = new HttpRequest();
request.setMethod('POST');
request.setEndpoint(endpoint);
request.setBody(JSON.serialize(metadata));
request.setHeader('content-type', 'application/json');

// Send the HttpRequest through the generic Toolkit method, which will handle the authentication details
HttpResponse response = toolkit.sendRequest(request);
```

## New Folder Association

The following code will create a folder for a specific Salesforce record Id:

```java Apex theme={null}
// Instantiate the Toolkit object
box.Toolkit boxToolkit = new box.Toolkit();
// Create a folder and associate it with an account
Id accountId = '001j000000FBozw';
String accountFolderId = boxToolkit.createFolderForRecordId(accountId, null, true);
system.debug('new item folder id: ' + accountFolderId);

// If there was an error, accountFolderId will be null. mostRecentError will contain the error message
if(accountFolderId == null) {
system.debug('most recent error: ' + boxToolkit.mostRecentError);
}

// ALWAYS call this method when finished.Since salesforce doesn't allow http callouts after dml operations, we need to commit the pending database inserts/updates or we will lose the associations created
boxToolkit.commitChanges();
```

## Folder Templates

The following code will create a folder for a record, create subfolders (folder
template), and collaborate the current user:

```java Apex theme={null}
// Instantiate the Toolkit object
box.Toolkit boxToolkit = new box.Toolkit();

// Create a folder and associate it with an account
Id accountId = '001j000000FBozz';
String accountFolderId = boxToolkit.createFolderForRecordId(accountId, null, true);
system.debug('new item folder id: ' + accountFolderId);

// Create two sub-folders in the newly created account folder
String legalFolderId = boxToolkit.createFolder('Legal Documents', accountFolderId, null);
system.debug('Legal Folder id: ' + legalFolderId);
String pictureFolderId = boxToolkit.createFolder('Pictures', accountFolderId, null);
system.debug('Picture Folder id: ' + pictureFolderId);

// Collaborate the current user on the account folder. Note that we're sending false for the optCreateFolder param that shouldn't actually matter since the folder(s) already exists
Id userId = UserInfo.getUserId();
box.Toolkit.CollaborationType collabType = box.Toolkit.CollaborationType.EDITOR;
String collabId = boxToolkit.createCollaborationOnRecord(userId, accountId, collabType, false);
system.debug('new collaboration id: ' + collabId);

// ALWAYS call this method when finished. Since salesforce doesn't allow http callouts after dml operations, we need to commit the pending database inserts/updates or we will lose the associations created
boxToolkit.commitChanges();
```

## Metadata

The following code will get, add, delete, and update Box folder metadata and
cascade policies.

```java Apex theme={null}
// Get metadata & attributes types
Box.toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.MetadataTemplate mdt = tk.getMetadataTemplateByName('enterprise',
'testtemplate');
System.debug(mdt);
System.debug(mdt.getAttributeTypes()); //get Map<String, String> of values and types.

// Get Metadata
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.FolderMetadata fmd = tk.getBoxMetadataByFolderId('193488737189', 'enterprise',
'testTemplate');
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);
System.debug(fmd);

// Create Metadata
Box.KeyValuePair kvp = new Box.KeyValuePair();
kvp.key = 'recordName';
kvp.value = 'Account Test Name';
Box.KeyValuePair kvp2 = new Box.KeyValuePair();
kvp2.key = 'recordUrl';
kvp2.value = 'https://speed-nosoftware-3605-dev-
ed.scratch.lightning.force.com/lightning/r/Account/001DR00001PsY7YYAV/view';
List<Box.KeyValuePair> kvps = new List<Box.KeyValuePair>();
kvps.add(kvp);
kvps.add(kvp2);
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.FolderMetadata newfmd = tk.createBoxMetadataByFolderId('193488737189', 'enterprise',
'testTemplate', kvps);
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);
System.debug(newfmd);

// Update Metadata
List<Box.FolderMetadataUpdate> updates = new List<Box.FolderMetadataUpdate>();
Box.FolderMetadataUpdate up1 = new Box.FolderMetadataUpdate();
Box.FolderMetadataUpdate up2 = new Box.FolderMetadataUpdate();
up1.op = 'replace';
up1.path = '/recordName';
up1.value = 'Account Name Test 2';
updates.add(up1);
up2.op = 'replace';
up2.path = '/recordUrl';
up2.value = 'https://speed-nosoftware-2356-dev-
ed.scratch.lightning.force.com/lightning/r/Account/001DR00001PsY7YYAV/view';
updates.add(up2);
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.FolderMetadata fmd = tk.UpdateBoxMetadataByFolderId('193488737189', 'global',
'lobSalesforceRecord', updates);
System.debug(fmd);

// Delete Metadata
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Boolean fmd = tk.deleteBoxMetadataByFolderId('193488737189', 'global',
'lobSalesforceRecord');
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);
System.debug(fmd);

// Get Cascade Policy List
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
List<Box.MetadataCascadePolicy> mcp =
tk.getMetadataCascadePoliciesByFolderId('193488737189', null, 0, null);
System.debug(mcp);
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);

// Get Cascade Policy
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.MetadataCascadePolicy mcp =
tk.getMetadataCascadePolicyById('MTkzNDg4NzM3MTg5I2cjbG9iU2FsZXNmb3JjZVJlY29yZC0wMTIwMTI0ZC03YWUxLTQzNjItYjdlMC05Y2RiYzhkMzIzZjM');
System.debug(mcp);
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);

// Create Cascade Policy
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.MetadataCascadePolicy mcp = tk.createMetadataCascadePolicy('193488737189', 'global',
'lobSalesforceRecord');
System.debug(mcp);
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);

// Delete Cascade Policy
Box.Toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Boolean mcp =
tk.deleteMetadataCascadePolicyById('MTkzNDg4NzM3MTg5I2cjbG9iU2FsZXNmb3JjZVJlY29yZC0wMTIwMTI0ZC03YWUxLTQzNjItYjdlMC05Y2RiYzhkMzIzZjM');
System.debug(mcp);
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);
```

More examples:

```java Apex theme={null}
// Get metadata example 1
Box.toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
Box.FolderMetadata fmt = tk.getBoxMetadataByFolderId('205776356105', 'enterprise',
'testTemplate');
for(KeyValuePair kvp : fmt.keyValuePairs){
System.debug(kvp);
}
// Get metadata example 2
Box.toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
System.debug(tk.getBoxMetadataByFolderId('205776356105', 'global',
'lobSalesforceRecord'));
```

```java Apex theme={null}
// Create metadata
Box.toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
List<Box.KeyValuePair> kvps = new List<Box.KeyValuePair>();
Box.KeyValuePair kvp1 = new Box.KeyValuePair();
kvp1.key = 'name';
kvp1.value = 'test';
kvps.add(kvp1);
Box.KeyValuePair kvp2 = new Box.KeyValuePair();
kvp2.key = 'revenue';
kvp2.value = '5000';
kvps.add(kvp2);
Box.KeyValuePair kvp3 = new Box.KeyValuePair();
kvp3.key = 'typeMulti';
kvp3.value = 'Customer;Other';
kvps.add(kvp3);
System.debug(tk.createBoxMetadataByFolderId('205776356105', 'enterprise',
'testtemplate', kvps));
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);
```

```java Apex theme={null}
// Update Metadata
Box.toolkit tk = new Box.Toolkit();
System.debug(tk.getBoxMetadataByFolderId('205776356105', 'enterprise',
'mitchtemplate'));
List<Box.FolderMetadataUpdate> fmus = new List<Box.FolderMetadataUpdate>();
Box.FolderMetadataUpdate fmu = new Box.FolderMetadataUpdate();
fmu.op = 'replace';
fmu.path = '/name';
fmu.value = 'Test 2';
fmus.add(fmu);
Box.FolderMetadataUpdate fmu2 = new Box.FolderMetadataUpdate();
fmu2.op = 'replace';
fmu2.path = '/revenue';
fmu2.value = '3000';
fmus.add(fmu2);
Box.FolderMetadataUpdate fmu3 = new Box.FolderMetadataUpdate();
fmu3.op = 'add';
fmu3.path = '/typeMulti';
fmu3.value = 'Customer';
fmus.add(fmu3);
System.debug(tk.updateBoxMetadataByFolderId('205776356105', 'enterprise',
'testTemplate', fmus));
System.debug(tk.mostRecentError);
```

## Create a sign request

The following code creates a Box Sign request in Salesforce.

```java Apex theme={null}
//Send Sign Request
Box.BoxSignRequest request = new Box.BoxSignRequest();
Box.Signer signer = new Box.Signer();
signer.role = 'signer';
signer.email = 'test@test.com';
request.signers = new List<Box.Signer>{ signer };
Box.File srcFile = new Box.File();
srcFile.id = '1947563411908';
request.source_files = new List<Box.File>{ srcFile };
request.recordId = '0017z00001IdXIHAA3';
request.subject = 'Test Subject';
request.message = 'Test Message';
request.send_reminders = false;
List<Box.BoxSignResponse> responses = Box.BoxSignService.sendSignRequests(new List<Box.BoxSignRequest>{ request });
System.debug(responses[0]);
```

## Get Box Hubs

The following code retrieves Box Hubs.

```java Apex theme={null}
//Get All Hubs
Box.HubsToolkit tk = new Box.HubsToolkit();
Box.HubsList hubsList = tk.getAllHubs();
for(Box.Hub hub : hubsList.entries){
//process hubs
}
//Get Hub by Id
Box.Hub hub = tk.getHubById('106600628');
//processing single Hub by using hub.title, hub.id, etc.
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# UI Elements in Salesforce
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/ui-elements



The Box for Salesforce managed package offers the following
<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements">UI Elements</Link> as Lightning Components: <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/picker">content picker</Link>,
<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer">explorer</Link>, <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview">preview</Link>, and <Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader">uploader</Link>. You can use them on
Lightning Pages, or in Flows.

## Content picker

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/picker/#options">Options</Link> available in picker with Box for Salesforce are:

* `folderId` - if the lightning component is on a record page, it defaults to the record folder
* `chooseButtonLabel`
* `cancelButtonLabel`
* `canSetShareAccess`
* `canCreateNewFolder`
* `canUpload`
* `maxSelectable`

## Content explorer

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer/#options">Options</Link> available in explorer with Box for Salesforce are:

* `folderId` - if the lightning component is on a record page, it defaults to the record folder
* `canSetShareAccess`
* `canCreateNewFolder`
* `canUpload`
* `canPreview`
* `canDownload`
* `canDelete`
* `canRename`
* `canShare`

## Content preview

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/preview/#options">Options</Link> available in preview with Box for Salesforce are:

* `fileId` (<Link href="/guides/files/get">find your file ID</Link>)
* **File Id API Field Name** - Salesforce specific; on a record page, you can use an API field name that holds the file ID to be displayed

## Content uploader

<Link href="/guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader/#options">Options</Link> available in uploader with Box for Salesforce are:

* `folderId` - if the lightning component is on a record page, it defaults to the record folder
* `fileLimit`

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Install .NET SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/dotnet



You can use Box .NET SDK to call Box APIs in a .NET
project.

Up to version `5.8.0` the SDK is available for both .NET Framework `4.5` and .NET Core `1.0` or above. Starting from version `10.0.0`, SDK is available for both .NET Framework `4.6.2` and .NET `8.0` or above. The installation of the SDK depends on the framework used.

<Card href="https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2" title="Learn more about .NET SDK on GitHub" />

## .NET Framework

To install the .NET SDK in the .NET framework, run the following command using
the [Nuget][nuget] package manager.

```shell theme={null}
PM> Install-Package Box.V2.Core
```

## .NET Core

To install the .NET SDK in the .NET Core framework, run the following command
using the [Nuget][nuget] package manager.

```shell theme={null}
PM> Install-Package Box.V2.Core
```

[nuget]: https://www.nuget.org/


# Deprecated Box Next Gen .NET SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/dotnet-gen



<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs, and it is currently available as a separate [branch][sdk-branch].
</Warning>

Check the [migration guide][migration] to learn how to switch from the Box Next Generation SDK to the Box core SDK `v10`.

For more details, see our <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning">SDK versioning strategy document</Link>.

[sdk-branch]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/tree/main

[migration]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/main/migration-guides/from-dotnet-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-windows-sdk.md


# Box SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/index



Box offers a set of SDKs
you can use to build your application.

<Note>
  The tables below list SDKs along with additional information
  telling you if the project is maintained and has API
  parity.

  **Maintained:** Fully maintained projects are actively developed by Box. They
  receive the latest security updates and new features. For support with these
  projects please visit GitHub or [our Platform support forum][forum].

  **API Parity**: Projects with full API parity are actively updated with all
  platform functionality as this becomes available on the Box Platform. Projects
  with partial API parity lack some functionality while we work on bringing
  these projects to full parity.
</Note>

The table lists Box SDKs that you can use when building your
applications. For latest API support and features, use the next
generation SDKs.

| Platform                          | Maintained? | API Parity |
| --------------------------------- | ----------- | ---------- |
| [Java SDK][javasdk]               | Yes         | Full       |
| [iOS Content SDK][iossdk]         | Yes         | Full       |
| [.NET SDK][dotnetsdk]             | Yes         | Full       |
| [Python SDK][pythonsdk]           | Yes         | Full       |
| [Node SDK][nodesdk]               | Yes         | Full       |
| [Android Content SDK][androidsdk] | No          | Full       |

<Warning>
  As of May 31, 2023 Android SDK is no
  longer supported. You can still
  use your existing Android SDK applications
  with no impact, but you won't receive new features,
  updates, or bug fixes.

  If you would like to continue getting the
  latest and greatest Android features, use Java SDK to
  build apps on Android.
  Refer to [this][android-docs] documentation for more details.
</Warning>

## Next Generation SDKs

<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don't worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  In keeping with industry best practices, we are consolidating the Box Next Generation SDKs and Box core SDKs into a single package for each programming language. This makes migration efforts much easier and allows seamless additions of new capabilities to existing applications still powered by Box core SDKs, which were maintained manually.

  **All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs.**

  For more details, see our <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning">SDK versioning strategy document</Link>.
</Warning>

`v10` of Python SDK, Box TypeScript
SDK, Box .NET SDK, Box Java SDK, and Box Swift SDK are designed
to elevate the developer
experience and streamline your integration
with Box Content Cloud.

Here's what you can expect from `v10`:

* **Full API support**: New Box SDKs empower developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box and build feature-rich applications.
* **Rapid API updates**: The new auto-generation development approach allows you to add Box APIs to SDKs at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
* **Embedded documentation**: All objects and parameters are documented directly in the source code of the SDK so all the necessary information is stored in one place.
* **Enhanced convenience methods**: The newly introduced convenience methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers that help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

[javasdk]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk

[dotnetsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2

[pythonsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk

[nodesdk]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk

[iossdk]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk

[androidsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-android-sdk

[android-docs]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/android.md

[forum]: https://community.box.com/sdks-and-tools-7


# Install Java SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/java



You can use Box Java SDK to call Box APIs in a Java
project.

To install Java SDK, add a Gradle dependency or Maven dependency, or
clone the source into a project. Additionally, you can download one of the precompiled JARs from the releases page on GitHub.

<Card href="https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk" title="Learn more about Java SDK on GitHub" />

## Gradle

Add the following dependency to the `build.gradle` file.

```shell theme={null}
compile 'com.box:box-java-sdk:2.32.0'
```

<Info>
  For the most up-to-date version number of the Java SDK, please refer to the
  [Java SDK Open Source page][java-os].
</Info>

## Maven

Add the following to Maven dependency.

```xml theme={null}
<dependency>
    <groupId>com.box</groupId>
    <artifactId>box-java-sdk</artifactId>
    <version>2.32.0</version>
</dependency>
```

<Info>
  For the most up-to-date version number of the Java SDK, please refer to the
  [Java SDK Open Source page][java-os].
</Info>

## Installation from source

Download the SDK source from the [Java SDK GitHub repository][java-sdk-src] and
add it to a project.

## Precompiled JAR

Download one of the precompiled JARs for the Java SDK from the GitHub [releases
page][java-sdk-releases].

When using one of the precompiled JARs, it is important to also add the
following additional dependencies to the project.

| Dependency                                               |
| -------------------------------------------------------- |
| [`minimal-json v0.9.1`][dependency-min-json]             |
| [`jose4j v0.4.4`][dependency-jose]                       |
| [`bouncycastle bcprov-jdk15on v1.52`][dependency-bcprov] |
| [`bouncycastle bcpkix-jdk15on v1.52`][dependency-bcpkix] |
| [`Java Cryptography Extension (JCE)`][dependency-crypto] |

[npm]: https://www.npmjs.com/

[java-os]: http://opensource.box.com/box-java-sdk/

[java-sdk-src]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/tree/master/src/main/java/com/box/sdk

[java-sdk-releases]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/releases

[dependency-min-json]: https://github.com/ralfstx/minimal-json

[dependency-jose]: https://bitbucket.org/b_c/jose4j/wiki/Home

[dependency-bcprov]: http://mvnrepository.com/artifact/org.bouncycastle/bcprov-jdk15on

[dependency-bcpkix]: http://mvnrepository.com/artifact/org.bouncycastle/bcpkix-jdk15on

[dependency-crypto]: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/jce-7-download-432124.html

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Deprecated Box Next Gen Java SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/java-gen



<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  **All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs, and it is currently available as a separate [branch][sdk-branch].**
</Warning>

Check the [migration guide][migration] to learn how to switch from the Box Next Generation SDK to the Box core SDK `v10`.

For more details, see our <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning">SDK versioning strategy document</Link>.

[sdk-branch]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/tree/main

[migration]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/main/migration-guides/from-box-java-sdk-gen-v0-to-box-java-sdk.md


# Install Node SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/node



You can use Box Node SDK to call Box APIs in a Node
project.

<Card href="https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk" title="Learn more about Node SDK on GitHub" />

## NPM installation

To install the Node SDK run the following command from your terminal
window or command prompt using the [Node Package Manager][npm].

```shell theme={null}
npm install box-node-sdk --save
```

## Yarn installation

Similarly, the SDK can be installed using the [Yarn package][yarn] manager.

```shell theme={null}
yarn add box-node-sdk
```

[npm]: https://www.npmjs.com/

[yarn]: https://yarnpkg.com/

[node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Install Python SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/python



You can use Box Python SDK to call Box APIs in a Python project.

<Card href="https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk" title="Learn more about Python SDK on GitHub" />

## Installation

To install the Python SDK run the following command from your terminal
window or command prompt using [pip][pip].

```shell theme={null}
pip install boxsdk
```

## JWT application

When working with a Box App that uses server-side <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT authentication</Link>, install the following additional module:

```shell theme={null}
pip install "boxsdk[jwt]"
```

[pip]: https://pypi.org/project/pip/

[versioning]: /guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Deprecated Box Next Gen Python SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/python-gen



<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  **All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs, and it is currently available as a separate [branch][sdk-branch].**
</Warning>

Check the [migration guide][migration] to learn how to switch from the Box Next Generation SDK to the Box core SDK `v10`.

For more details, see our <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning">SDK versioning strategy document</Link>.

[migration]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/main/migration-guides/from-box-python-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-python-sdk.md

[sdk-branch]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/main


# Install Salesforce SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/salesforce



The Salesforce SDK can be deployed directly to Sandbox or Developer
organizations by using the [Deploy to Salesforce][deploy_salesforce]
functionality.

<Note>
  "Deploy to Salesforce" functionality is not owned or maintained by Box.
</Note>

The SDK is also distributed as an unmanaged package:

* [Production/Developer Package][salesforce_pkg_prod]
* [Sandbox Package][salesforce_pkg_sandbox]

<Warning>
  Unmanaged packages can't be upgraded once installed in a Salesforce org so
  future upgrades will have to be applied by cloning the repositories locally
  and updating classes from your IDE.
</Warning>

[deploy_salesforce]: https://githubsfdeploy.herokuapp.com/?owner=box&repo=box-salesforce-sdk

[salesforce_pkg_prod]: https://cloud.box.com/Box-Apex-SDK

[salesforce_pkg_sandbox]: https://cloud.box.com/Box-Apex-SDK-Sandbox

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Box SDK versioning strategy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning



The Box core SDKs and the Box Next Generation SDKs were initially created as separate libraries. However, in keeping with industry best practices, **we are consolidating the Box Next Generation SDKs and the Box core SDKs into a single package for each programming language**. This makes migration efforts much easier and allows seamless addition of new capabilities to existing applications still powered by older versions of the Box core SDKs, which were maintained manually.

To facilitate this migration process, there are two actively maintained major Box core SDK versions:

* **A major version that follows sequential versioning for each SDK artifact and includes:** the manually maintained package and the generated one. This SDK version enables leveraging coexisting packages at the same time, and serves as a transition phase. Support for the consolidated version of each Box core SDKs will continue in 2027.
* `v10` that includes **only the generated package**.

Here's what you can expect from generated packages of the Box SDK:

* **Full API support**: New Box SDKs empower developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box and build feature-rich applications.
* **Rapid API updates**: The new auto-generation development approach allows you to add Box APIs to SDKs at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
* **Embedded documentation**: All objects and parameters are documented directly in the source code of the SDK so all the necessary information is stored in one place.
* **Enhanced convenience methods**: The newly introduced convenience methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers that help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

## What it means for your project

<Columns>
  <Card icon="cog" title="1. Existing App - the Box core SDK" href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/#migration-from-manually-maintained-sdk-version-to-the-consolidated-sdk-version">
    If you have an existing application that relies on the Box core SDK and you wish to further develop your project:

    **Action** Use the major version that includes consolidated packages. Start using convenience methods and new features from the generated package, and gradually migrate your codebase. Ultimately, migrate to the Box core SDK package (≥`v10.0.0`).
  </Card>

  <Card icon="code" title="2. Existing App - the Box Next Generation SDK" href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/#migration-from-the-box-next-generation-sdks-to-the-box-core-sdks">
    If you have an existing application that relies only on the Box Next Generation SDK and you wish to further develop your project:

    **Action** Replace the library name in your package manager with the Box core SDK package (≥`v10.0.0`). Check migration guides for detailed instructions.
  </Card>

  <Card icon="code-branch" title="3. Existing App - the Box core SDK and the Box Next Generation SDK" href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/#migration-from-manually-maintained-sdk-version-to-the-consolidated-sdk-version">
    If you have an existing application that relies both on the Box core SDK and the Next Generation SDK:

    **Action** Use the major version that includes consolidated packages. Ultimately, migrate to the Box core SDK package (≥`v10.0.0`).
  </Card>

  <Card icon="square-terminal" title="4. A New Application" href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/#box-core-sdk-versions-and-artifacts-overview">
    If you are creating a new application:

    **Action** Use ≥`v10.0.0` of the Box core SDK.
  </Card>

  <Card icon="circle-info" title="5. No Active Development" href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/#migration-from-manually-maintained-sdk-version-to-the-consolidated-sdk-version">
    If you have an existing application that you don't plan to change:

    **Action** Ensure your package manager includes the specific version to prevent accidental updates. We strongly recommend upgrading to the major version, which includes consolidated packages, to receive ongoing security patches and improvements.
  </Card>
</Columns>

## Versioning overview

### Box core SDK versions and artifacts overview

| Repository name                      | Artifact name           | Includes both packages       | Includes generated package only |
| ------------------------------------ | ----------------------- | ---------------------------- | ------------------------------- |
| [`box-python-sdk`][python-repo]      | `boxsdk`                | [`v4.X.Y`][python-combined]  | [`≥v10.0.0`][python-v10]        |
| [`box-node-sdk`][node-repo]          | `box-node-sdk`          | [`v4.X.Y`][node-combined]    | [`≥v10.0.0`][node-v10]          |
| [`box-java-sdk`][java-repo]          | `box-java-sdk`          | [`v5.X.Y`][java-combined]    | [`≥v10.0.0`][java-v10]          |
| [`box-windows-sdk-v2`][windows-repo] | `Box.V2`, `Box.V2.Core` | [`v6.X.Y`][windows-combined] | [`≥v10.0.0`][windows-v10]       |
| [`box-ios-sdk`][ios-repo]            | `BoxSDK`                | [`v6.X.Y`][ios-combined]     | [`≥v10.0.0`][ios-v10]           |

## Box Next Gen SDKs deprecation

As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts. Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

**All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs.**

| Repository name          | Artifact name            | Note                                                    |
| ------------------------ | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| `box-python-sdk-gen`     | `box-sdk-gen`            | Deprecated, use `boxsdk` [`≥v10.0.0`][python-v10]       |
| `box-typescript-sdk-gen` | `box-typescript-sdk-gen` | Deprecated, use `box-node-sdk` [`≥v10.0.0`][node-v10]   |
| `box-java-sdk-gen`       | `box-java-sdk-gen`       | Deprecated, use `box-java-sdk` [`≥v10.0.0`][java-v10]   |
| `box-dotnet-sdk-gen`     | `Box.Sdk.Gen`            | Deprecated, use `Box.V2.Core` [`≥v10.0.0`][windows-v10] |
| `box-swift-sdk-gen`      | `BoxSdkGen`              | Deprecated, use `BoxSDK` [`≥v10.0.0`][ios-v10]          |

## Migration

### Migration from manually maintained SDK version to the consolidated SDK version

Follow detailed migration guides to migrate from the manually maintained SDK version to the consolidated SDK version:

* [Python `v3` to `v4`][python-migration-v4]
* [Node `v3` to `v4`][node-migration-v4]
* [Java `v4` to `v5`][java-migration-v5]
* [.NET `v5` to `v6`][windows-migration-v6]
* [Swift `v5` to `v6`][ios-migration-v6]

Once your project is upgraded, follow the migration guides and migrate to the generated package.

### Migration to the generated package

Follow detailed migration guides to migrate to the generated package within the Box core SDKs.

* [Python: migrate from `boxsdk` to `box_sdk_gen` package][python-migration-gen]
* [Node: migrate from `box-node-sdk` to `sdk-gen`][node-migration-gen]
* [Java: migrate migrate from `com.box.sdk` to com.`box.sdkgen` package][java-migration-gen]
* [.NET: migrate from `Box.V2` module to `Box.Sdk.Gen` module][windows-migration-gen]
* [Swift: migrate from `BoxSDK` module to `BoxSdkGe`n module][swift-migration-gen]

### Migration from the Box Next Generation SDKs to the Box core SDKs

Follow detailed migration guides to migrate from the Box Next Generation SDKs to the Box core SDK ≥`v10`:

* [Python][python-migration-next-gen]
* [TypeScript/Node][ts-migration-next-gen]
* [Java][java-migration-next-gen]
* [.NET][dotnet-migration-next-gen]
* [Swift][swift-migration-next-gen]

[node-repo]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk

[windows-repo]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2

[java-repo]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk

[python-repo]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk

[ios-repo]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk

[java-v10]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/tree/main

[ios-v10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/main

[node-v10]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/tree/main

[python-v10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/main

[windows-v10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/tree/main

[python-combined]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/tree/combined-sdk

[java-combined]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/tree/combined-sdk

[node-combined]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/tree/combined-sdk

[ios-combined]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/combined-sdk

[windows-combined]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/tree/combined-sdk

[python-migration-v4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v3-to-v4.md

[node-migration-v4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v3-to-v4.md

[ios-migration-v6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v6.md

[windows-migration-v6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v6.md

[java-migration-v5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v4-to-v5.md

[java-migration-next-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-java-sdk-gen-v0-to-box-java-sdk.md

[python-migration-next-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-python-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-python-sdk.md

[swift-migration-next-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-swift-sdk-gen-v0-to-box-ios-sdk.md

[ts-migration-next-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-typescript-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-node-sdk.md

[dotnet-migration-next-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-dotnet-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-windows-sdk.md

[python-migration-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-boxsdk-to-box_sdk_gen.md

[windows-migration-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-v2-to-box-sdk-gen-namespace.md

[swift-migration-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-BoxSDK-to-BoxSdkGen.md

[java-migration-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-com-box-sdk-to-com-box-sdkgen.md

[node-migration-gen]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-node-sdk-to-sdk-gen.md

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Deprecated Box Next Gen Swift SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/swift-gen



<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  **All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs, and it is currently available as a separate [branch][sdk-branch].**
</Warning>

Check the [migration guide][migration] to learn how to switch from the Box Next Generation SDK to the Box core SDK `v10`.

For more details, see our <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning">SDK versioning strategy document</Link>.

[migration]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/main/migration-guides/from-box-swift-sdk-gen-v0-to-box-ios-sdk.md

[sdk-branch]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/main


# Deprecated Box Next Gen TypeScript SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/typescript-gen



<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  **All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs, and it is currently available as a separate [branch][sdk-branch].**
</Warning>

Check the [migration guide][migration] to learn how to switch from the Box Next Generation SDK to the Box core SDK `v10`.

For more details, see our <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning">SDK versioning strategy document</Link>.

[migration]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/main/docs/migration-guides/from-box-typescript-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-node-sdk.md

[sdk-branch]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/tree/main


# Build Folder Tree
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/bulk/build-folder-tree



The following examples provide an example on how to create a JSON representation
of a folder tree. A folder tree is the name of a folder, and every subfolder
within that folder.

The sample below allows for specifying the starting **root** folder and the
maximum depth the code should traverse. It also allows for configuring what user
is authenticated by allowing the passing in of an initialized SDK client.

<CodeGroup>
  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  using System;
  using System.Collections.Generic;
  using System.Diagnostics;
  using System.Dynamic;
  using System.IO;
  using System.Linq;
  using System.Net;
  using System.Net.Sockets;
  using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
  using System.Text;
  using System.Threading.Tasks;
  using Box.V2;
  using Box.V2.Auth;
  using Box.V2.Config;
  using Box.V2.Converter;
  using Box.V2.Exceptions;
  using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
  using Box.V2.Models;
  using Newtonsoft.Json;

  namespace BoxPlayground
  {
      public class Program4
      {
          static void Main(string[] args)
          {
              ExecuteMainAsync().Wait();
          }

          public class BoxFolderTreeBuilder
          {
              public BoxClient BoxClient { get; set; }
              public string RootFolderId { get; set; }
              public int MaxDepth { get; set; }

              public BoxFolderTreeBuilder(BoxClient boxClient, string rootFolderId = "0", int maxDepth = -1)
              {
                  this.BoxClient = boxClient;
                  this.RootFolderId = rootFolderId;
                  this.MaxDepth = maxDepth;
              }

              public async Task<BoxFolderTree> BuildFolderTreeWithFlatLists()
              {
                  var tree = new BoxFolderTree
                  {
                      RootId = this.RootFolderId,
                      Files = new List<BoxFolderTreeItem>(),
                      Folders = new List<BoxFolderTreeFolder>()
                  };
                  var rootFolderItems = await this.BoxClient.FoldersManager.GetFolderItemsAsync(this.RootFolderId, limit: 1000, autoPaginate: true);
                  var rootFolderChildren = new List<BoxFolderTreeFolder>();
                  foreach (var item in rootFolderItems.Entries)
                  {
                      var folderTreeItem = new BoxFolderTreeItem(item);
                      folderTreeItem.Path = $"{this.RootFolderId}";
                      if (item.Type == "file")
                      {
                          tree.Files.Add(folderTreeItem);
                      }
                      else if (item.Type == "folder")
                      {
                          var childFolder = new BoxFolderTreeFolder(folderTreeItem);
                          tree.Folders.Add(new BoxFolderTreeFolder(folderTreeItem));
                          rootFolderChildren.Add(childFolder);
                      }
                  }
                  tree = await Dive(tree, rootFolderChildren, 1);
                  return tree;
              }

              private async Task<BoxFolderTree> Dive(BoxFolderTree tree,
                  List<BoxFolderTreeFolder> children, int currentDepth)
              {
                  if (InTooDeep(currentDepth))
                  {
                      return tree;
                  }
                  else
                  {
                      currentDepth++;
                      var additionalChildren = new List<BoxFolderTreeFolder>();
                      foreach (var child in children)
                      {
                          var folderItems = await this.BoxClient.FoldersManager.GetFolderItemsAsync(child.Item.Id, limit: 1000, autoPaginate: true);
                          var foundFolder = tree.Folders.FindIndex((f) =>
                          {
                              return f.Item.Id == child.Item.Id;
                          });
                          foreach (var item in folderItems.Entries)
                          {
                              if (foundFolder >= 0)
                              {
                                  tree.Folders[foundFolder].Children.Add(item);
                              }
                              var folderTreeItem = new BoxFolderTreeItem(item);
                              folderTreeItem.Path = $"{child.Path}/{child.Item.Id}";
                              if (item.Type == "file")
                              {
                                  tree.Files.Add(folderTreeItem);
                              }
                              else if (item.Type == "folder")
                              {
                                  var childFolder = new BoxFolderTreeFolder(folderTreeItem);
                                  tree.Folders.Add(new BoxFolderTreeFolder(folderTreeItem));
                                  additionalChildren.Add(childFolder);
                              }
                          }
                      }
                      if (additionalChildren.Count == 0)
                      {
                          return tree;
                      }
                      else
                      {
                          return await Dive(tree, additionalChildren, currentDepth);
                      }
                  }
              }

              private bool InTooDeep(int depthCount)
              {
                  if (this.MaxDepth < 0)
                  {
                      return false;
                  }
                  else
                  {
                      return (depthCount >= this.MaxDepth);
                  }
              }
              public class BoxFolderTreeItem
              {
                  [JsonProperty(PropertyName = "item")]
                  public BoxItem Item { get; set; }

                  [JsonProperty(PropertyName = "path")]
                  public string Path { get; set; }
                  public BoxFolderTreeItem(BoxItem item)
                  {
                      Item = item;
                  }
              }
              public class BoxFolderTreeFolder : BoxFolderTreeItem
              {
                  public BoxFolderTreeFolder(BoxFolderTreeItem item) : base(item.Item)
                  {
                      this.Path = item.Path;
                  }

                  [JsonProperty(PropertyName = "children")]
                  public List<BoxItem> Children { get; set; } = new List<BoxItem>();
              }
              public class BoxFolderTree
              {
                  [JsonProperty(PropertyName = "rootId")]
                  public string RootId { get; set; }
                  [JsonProperty(PropertyName = "files")]
                  public List<BoxFolderTreeItem> Files { get; set; }

                  [JsonProperty(PropertyName = "folders")]
                  public List<BoxFolderTreeFolder> Folders { get; set; }

                  public string writeJSON()
                  {
                      var converter = new Box.V2.Converter.BoxJsonConverter();
                      return converter.Serialize<BoxFolderTreeBuilder.BoxFolderTree>(this);
                  }
              }
          }
          private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync()
          {
              using (FileStream fs = new FileStream($"./config.json", FileMode.Open))
              {
                  var session = new BoxJWTAuth(BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile(fs));
                  var serviceAccountClient = session.AdminClient(session.AdminToken());
                  var folderTreeBuilder = new BoxFolderTreeBuilder(serviceAccountClient, rootFolderId: "37477903736");
                  var tree = await folderTreeBuilder.BuildFolderTreeWithFlatLists();
                  System.Console.WriteLine(tree.writeJSON());
              }
          }
      }
  }
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  package com.box;

  import java.io.BufferedReader;
  import java.nio.charset.Charset;
  import java.nio.file.Files;
  import java.nio.file.Path;
  import java.nio.file.Paths;
  import java.util.ArrayList;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxFile;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxFolder;
  import com.box.sdk.BoxItem;
  import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonArray;
  import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonObject;

  public class BoxFolderTreeBuilder {
      private BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection _boxClient;
      private String _rootFolderId;
      private int _maxDepth;

      private static final String DEFAULT_ROOT_FOLDER_ID = "0";
      private static final int DEFAULT_MAX_DEPTH = -1;

      public BoxFolderTreeBuilder(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection boxClient) {
          this(boxClient, DEFAULT_ROOT_FOLDER_ID, DEFAULT_MAX_DEPTH);
      }

      public BoxFolderTreeBuilder(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection boxClient, String rootFolderId) {
          this(boxClient, rootFolderId, DEFAULT_MAX_DEPTH);
      }

      public BoxFolderTreeBuilder(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection boxClient, int maxDepth) {
          this(boxClient, DEFAULT_ROOT_FOLDER_ID, maxDepth);
      }

      public BoxFolderTreeBuilder(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection boxClient, String rootFolderId, int maxDepth) {
          this._boxClient = boxClient;
          this._rootFolderId = rootFolderId;
          this._maxDepth = maxDepth;
      }

      public BoxFolderTree buildFolderTreeWithFlatLists() {
          BoxFolderTree tree = new BoxFolderTree();
          tree.setRootId(this._rootFolderId);
          ArrayList<BoxFolderTreeFolder> rootFolderChildren = new ArrayList<>();
          BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(this._boxClient, this._rootFolderId);
          String path = this._rootFolderId;
          for (BoxItem.Info itemInfo : folder) {
              if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFile.Info) {
                  BoxFile.Info fileInfo = (BoxFile.Info) itemInfo;
                  BoxFolderTreeFile treeFile = new BoxFolderTreeFile(fileInfo, path);
                  tree.files.add(treeFile);
              } else if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFolder.Info) {
                  BoxFolder.Info folderInfo = (BoxFolder.Info) itemInfo;
                  BoxFolderTreeFolder treeFolder = new BoxFolderTreeFolder(folderInfo, path);
                  tree.folders.add(treeFolder);
                  rootFolderChildren.add(treeFolder);
              }
          }
          tree = Dive(tree, rootFolderChildren, 1);
          return tree;
      }

      private BoxFolderTree Dive(BoxFolderTree tree, ArrayList<BoxFolderTreeFolder> children, int currentDepth) {
          if (inTooDeep(currentDepth)) {
              return tree;
          } else {
              currentDepth++;
              ArrayList<BoxFolderTreeFolder> additionalChildren = new ArrayList<>();
              for (BoxFolderTreeFolder child : children) {
                  BoxFolder folderItems = new BoxFolder(this._boxClient, child.getItem().getID());
                  int foundFolder = -1;
                  for (int i = 0; i < tree.folders.size(); i++) {
                      if (child.getItem().getID() == tree.folders.get(i).getItem().getID()) {
                          foundFolder = i;
                      }
                  }
                  String path = String.format("%s/%s", child.getPath(), child.getItem().getID());
                  for (BoxItem.Info item : folderItems.getChildren()) {
                      if (foundFolder >= 0) {
                          tree.folders.get(foundFolder).children.add(new BoxFolderTreeItem(item));
                      }
                      if (item instanceof BoxFile.Info) {
                          BoxFile.Info fileInfo = (BoxFile.Info) item;
                          tree.files.add(new BoxFolderTreeFile(fileInfo, path));
                      } else if (item instanceof BoxFolder.Info) {
                          BoxFolder.Info folderInfo = (BoxFolder.Info) item;
                          BoxFolderTreeFolder nestedFolder = new BoxFolderTreeFolder(folderInfo, path);
                          tree.folders.add(nestedFolder);
                          additionalChildren.add(nestedFolder);
                      }
                  }
              }
              if (additionalChildren.size() == 0) {
                  return tree;
              } else {
                  return Dive(tree, additionalChildren, currentDepth);
              }
          }
      }

      private Boolean inTooDeep(int depthCount) {
          if (this._maxDepth < 0) {
              return false;
          } else {
              return (depthCount >= this._maxDepth);
          }
      }

      public class BoxFolderTree {
          private String rootId;
          private ArrayList<BoxFolderTreeFile> files = new ArrayList<>();
          private ArrayList<BoxFolderTreeFolder> folders = new ArrayList<>();

          public String getRootId() {
              return this.rootId;
          }

          public void setRootId(String id) {
              this.rootId = id;
          }

          public String writeJSON() {
              JsonObject requestJSON = new JsonObject();

              JsonArray filesJSON = new JsonArray();
              for (BoxFolderTreeFile file : files) {
                  filesJSON.add(file.convertToJSON());
              }

              JsonArray foldersJSON = new JsonArray();
              for (BoxFolderTreeFolder folder : folders) {
                  foldersJSON.add(folder.convertToJSON());
              }
              requestJSON.add("rootId", this.rootId);
              requestJSON.add("files", filesJSON);
              requestJSON.add("folders", foldersJSON);
              return requestJSON.toString();
          }
      }

      public class BoxFolderTreeItem {
          private BoxItem.Info item;

          public BoxFolderTreeItem(BoxItem.Info item) {
              this.item = item;
          }

          public JsonObject convertToJSON() {
              JsonObject itemJSON = new JsonObject();
              itemJSON.add("id", this.item.getID());
              itemJSON.add("name", this.item.getName());
              String type = (item instanceof BoxFile.Info == true) ? "file" : "folder";
              itemJSON.add("type", type);
              return itemJSON;
          }
      }

      public class BoxFolderTreeFile {
          private BoxFile.Info item;
          private String path;

          public BoxFolderTreeFile(BoxFile.Info item, String path) {
              this.item = item;
              this.path = path;
          }

          public BoxFile.Info getItem() {
              return this.item;
          }

          public void setItem(BoxFile.Info info) {
              this.item = info;
          }

          public String getPath() {
              return this.path;
          }

          public void setPath(String path) {
              this.path = path;
          }

          public JsonObject convertToJSON() {
              JsonObject itemJSON = new JsonObject();
              JsonObject fileJSON = new JsonObject();
              fileJSON.add("id", this.item.getID());
              fileJSON.add("type", "file");
              fileJSON.add("name", this.item.getName());

              itemJSON.add("path", this.path);
              itemJSON.add("item", fileJSON);
              return itemJSON;
          }
      }

      public class BoxFolderTreeFolder {
          private BoxFolder.Info item;
          private String path;
          private ArrayList<BoxFolderTreeItem> children;

          public BoxFolderTreeFolder(BoxFolder.Info item, String path) {
              this.item = item;
              this.path = path;
              this.children = new ArrayList<>();
          }

          public BoxFolder.Info getItem() {
              return this.item;
          }

          public void setItem(BoxFolder.Info info) {
              this.item = info;
          }

          public String getPath() {
              return this.path;
          }

          public void setPath(String path) {
              this.path = path;
          }

          public JsonObject convertFolderToJSON() {
              JsonObject itemJSON = new JsonObject();
              JsonObject folderJSON = new JsonObject();
              folderJSON.add("id", this.item.getID());
              folderJSON.add("type", "folder");
              folderJSON.add("name", this.item.getName());

              itemJSON.add("path", this.path);
              itemJSON.add("item", folderJSON);
              return itemJSON;
          }

          public JsonObject convertToJSON() {
              JsonObject folderJSON = this.convertFolderToJSON();
              JsonArray children = new JsonArray();
              for (BoxFolderTreeItem item : this.children) {
                  children.add(item.convertToJSON());
              }
              folderJSON.add("children", children);
              return folderJSON;
          }
      }

      public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
          Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
          try (BufferedReader reader = Files.newBufferedReader(configPath, Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
              BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
              BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection serviceAccountClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
                      .getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);

              BoxFolderTreeBuilder treeBuilder = new BoxFolderTreeBuilder(serviceAccountClient, "43491738095", 2);
              BoxFolderTree tree = treeBuilder.buildFolderTreeWithFlatLists();
              System.out.println(tree.writeJSON());
          }
      }
  }
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  class BoxFolderTreeBuilder {
      constructor(boxClient, options) {
          options = options || {};
          boxClient._useIterators = true;
          this.boxClient = boxClient;
          this.maxDepth = options.maxDepth || -1;
          this.rootFolderId = options.rootFolderId || "0";
      }

      async buildFolderTreeWithFlatLists() {
          let tree = {
              rootId: this.rootFolderId,
              folders: [],
              files: []
          }
          let folderItemsIterator = await this.boxClient.folders.getItems(this.rootFolderId);
          let collection = await BoxUtilities.autoPage(folderItemsIterator);
          let rootFolderChildren = [];

          const path = `${this.rootFolderId}`;
          collection.forEach((item) => {
              if (item.type === "file") {
                  tree.files.push({
                      item,
                      path
                  })
              } else if (item.type === "folder") {
                  let folderTreeFolder = {
                      item,
                      path,
                      children: []
                  }
                  tree.folders.push(folderTreeFolder);
                  rootFolderChildren.push(folderTreeFolder);
              }
          });
          tree = await this.dive(tree, rootFolderChildren, 1);
          return tree;
      }

      async dive(tree, children, currentDepth) {
          if (this.inTooDeep(currentDepth)) {
              return tree;
          } else {
              currentDepth++;
              let additionalChildren = [];
              let childrenPromises = [];
              children.forEach((child) => {
                  let foundFolder = -1;
                  childrenPromises.push(this.boxClient.folders.getItems(child.item.id)
                      .then((folderItemsIterator) => {
                          return BoxUtilities.autoPage(folderItemsIterator)
                              .then((collection) => {
                                  for (let i = 0; i < tree.folders.length; i++) {
                                      if (child.item.id === tree.folders[i].item.id) {
                                          foundFolder = i;
                                      }
                                  }

                                  const path = `${child.path}/${child.item.id}`;
                                  collection.forEach((item) => {
                                      if (foundFolder >= 0) {
                                          tree.folders[foundFolder].children.push(item);
                                      }

                                      if (item.type === "file") {
                                          tree.files.push({
                                              item,
                                              path
                                          })
                                      } else if (item.type === "folder") {
                                          let folderTreeFolder = {
                                              item,
                                              path,
                                              children: []
                                          }
                                          tree.folders.push(folderTreeFolder);
                                          additionalChildren.push(folderTreeFolder);
                                      }
                                  });
                                  return;
                              });
                      }));
              });
              await Promise.all(childrenPromises);
              if (additionalChildren.length === 0) {
                  return tree;
              } else {
                  return this.dive(tree, additionalChildren, currentDepth);
              }
          }
      }

      inTooDeep(depthCount) {
          if (this.maxDepth < 0) {
              return false;
          } else {
              return (depthCount >= this.maxDepth);
          }
      }
  }

  class BoxUtilities {
      static async autoPage(iterator, collection = []) {
          let moveToNextItem = async () => {
              let item = await iterator.next();
              if (item.value) {
                  collection.push(item.value);
              }

              if (item.done !== true) {
                  return moveToNextItem();
              } else {
                  return collection;
              }
          }
          return moveToNextItem();
      }
  }

  let folderTreeBuilder = new BoxFolderTreeBuilder(client);
  folderTreeBuilder.buildFolderTreeWithFlatLists()
      .then((tree) => {
          console.log(JSON.stringify(tree));
      })
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Bulk Manipulation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/bulk/index



The following pages discuss how to do various bulk methods to folders.


# Change Folder Owner
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/change-owner



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To change the owner of a folder, first invite the user you wish to
transfer the folder to as a collaborator on the folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "item": {
           "type": "file",
           "id": "11446498"
         },
         "accessible_by": {
           "type": "user",
           "login": "user@example.com"
         },
         "role": "editor"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.createCollaboration({
    item: {
      type: 'folder' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField,
      id: folder.id,
    } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField,
    accessibleBy: {
      type: 'user' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField,
      id: user.id,
    } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField,
    role: 'editor' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField,
  } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.user_collaborations.create_collaboration(
      CreateCollaborationItem(type=CreateCollaborationItemTypeField.FOLDER, id=folder.id),
      CreateCollaborationAccessibleBy(
          type=CreateCollaborationAccessibleByTypeField.USER, id=user.id
      ),
      CreateCollaborationRole.EDITOR,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.CreateCollaborationAsync(requestBody: new CreateCollaborationRequestBody(item: new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField() { Type = CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.Folder, Id = folder.Id }, accessibleBy: new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.User) { Id = user.Id }, role: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.Editor));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.userCollaborations.createCollaboration(requestBody: CreateCollaborationRequestBody(item: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.folder, id: folder.id), accessibleBy: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.user, id: user.id), role: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.editor))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUserCollaborations().createCollaboration(new CreateCollaborationRequestBody(new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField.Builder().type(CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.FOLDER).id(folder.getId()).build(), new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField.Builder(CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.USER).id(user.getId()).build(), CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.EDITOR))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxCollaborator user = new BoxUser(api, "user-id")
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "folder-id");
  folder.collaborate(user, BoxCollaboration.Role.EDITOR);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.collaboration import CollaborationRole

  user = client.user(user_id='11111')
  collaboration = client.folder(folder_id='22222').collaborate(user, CollaborationRole.VIEWER)

  collaborator = collaboration.accessible_by
  item = collaboration.item
  has_accepted = 'has' if collaboration.status == 'accepted' else 'has not'
  print(f'{collaborator.name} {has_accepted} accepted the collaboration to folder "{item.name}"')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  // collaborate folder 11111 with user 22222
  BoxCollaborationRequest requestParams = new BoxCollaborationRequest()
  {
      Item = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Type = BoxType.folder,
          Id = "11111"
      },
      Role = "editor",
      AccessibleBy = new BoxCollaborationUserRequest()
      {
          Type = BoxType.user,
          Id = "22222"
      }
  };
  BoxCollaboration collab = await client.CollaborationsManager.AddCollaborationAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Invite user 123456 to collaborate on folder 987654
  client.collaborations.createWithUserID('123456', '987654', client.collaborationRoles.EDITOR)
  	.then(collaboration => {
  		/* collaboration -> {
  			type: 'collaboration',
  			id: '11111',
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '22222',
  				name: 'Inviting User',
  				login: 'inviter@example.com' },
  			created_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			modified_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			expires_at: null,
  			status: 'accepted',
  			accessible_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '123456',
  				name: 'Collaborator User',
  				login: 'collaborator@example.com' },
  			role: 'editor',
  			acknowledged_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			item: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '987654',
  				sequence_id: '0',
  				etag: '0',
  				name: 'Collaborated Folder' } }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

Then, update the created collaboration by changing the role of
that invited user to `owner`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X PUT https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations/1234 \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
      -H "content-type: application/json" \
      -d '{
        "role": "owner"
      }'
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  BoxCollaborationRequest requestParams = new BoxCollaborationRequest()
  {
      Id = "12345",
      Role = "owner"
  };
  BoxCollaboration collab = await client.CollaborationsManager.EditCollaborationAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  Collection<BoxCollaboration.Info> pendingCollaborations = BoxCollaboration.getPendingCollaborations(api);
  for (BoxCollaboration.Info collabInfo : pendingCollaborations) {
      collabInfo.setRole(BoxCollaboration.Role.OWNER);
      collabInfo.getResource().updateInfo(collabInfo);
  }
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.collaboration import CollaborationRole, CollaborationStatus

  collaboration = client.collaboration(collab_id='12345')
  updated_collaboration = collaboration.update_info(CollaborationRole.OWNER)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.collaborations.update('12345', {role: client.collaborationRoles.OWNER})
      .then(collaboration => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  Depending on the settings, a user with access to a folder might be able to
  invite other users, yet in all cases only the current owner of a folder can
  transfer the ownership.
</Warning>


# Create Folder Lock
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/create-lock



To create a lock on a folder in Box you will need to provide our API with the
`id` of the folder for which the lock should be applied. Optionally you may
supply the specific `locked_operations` to be applied with the folder lock.

<Note>
  **Folder Locks**

  When using any folder lock API endpoints, you must be authenticated as the
  owner/co-owner of the folder you are trying to access.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folder_locks" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "folder": {
           "type": "folder",
           "id": "33552487093"
         },
         "locked_operations": {
           "move": true,
           "delete": true
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderLocks.createFolderLock({
    folder: {
      id: folder.id,
      type: 'folder',
    } satisfies CreateFolderLockRequestBodyFolderField,
    lockedOperations: {
      move: true,
      delete: true,
    } satisfies CreateFolderLockRequestBodyLockedOperationsField,
  } satisfies CreateFolderLockRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_locks.create_folder_lock(
      CreateFolderLockFolder(id=folder.id, type="folder"),
      locked_operations=CreateFolderLockLockedOperations(move=True, delete=True),
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderLocks.CreateFolderLockAsync(requestBody: new CreateFolderLockRequestBody(folder: new CreateFolderLockRequestBodyFolderField(id: folder.Id, type: "folder")) { LockedOperations = new CreateFolderLockRequestBodyLockedOperationsField(move: true, delete: true) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderLocks.createFolderLock(requestBody: CreateFolderLockRequestBody(folder: CreateFolderLockRequestBodyFolderField(id: folder.id, type: "folder"), lockedOperations: CreateFolderLockRequestBodyLockedOperationsField(move: true, delete: true)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderLocks().createFolderLock(new CreateFolderLockRequestBody.Builder(new CreateFolderLockRequestBodyFolderField("folder", folder.getId())).lockedOperations(new CreateFolderLockRequestBodyLockedOperationsField(true, true)).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  **Setting Locked Operations**

  If the `locked_operations` object is included with a folder lock request,
  both `move` and `delete` need to be set to `true`. Supplying only one lock
  operation in the object, or setting the values of both to something other
  than `true` will produce an error. These options are in place to allow
  for additional operations in the future.
</Warning>

## Lock Operations

There are two possible lock operations that may be applied to a folder, `move`
and `delete`.

The `move` lock will prevent the folder from being moved to a new location or
owner while the lock is still applied.

The `delete` lock will prevent the folder from being deleted while the lock is
still applied.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/delete



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To remove a folder in Box you will need to provide our API with the ID of the
folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folders.deleteFolderById(newFolder.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folders.delete_folder_by_id(new_folder.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Folders.DeleteFolderByIdAsync(folderId: newFolder.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folders.deleteFolderById(folderId: newFolder.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolders().deleteFolderById(newFolder.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  // Delete the folder and all its contents
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  folder.delete(true);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  client.folder(folder_id='22222').delete()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.FoldersManager.DeleteAsync("11111", recursive: true);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.delete('12345', {recursive: true})
      .then(() => {
          // deletion succeeded — no value returned
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Deleting non-empty folders

This API returns an error if the folder is not empty. When deleting a
folder, you can pass in the `recursive` parameter to force a
folder to be deleted even if it is not empty. This will delete all
items within this folder, including any of their descendants.

## Folder locking

The enterprise settings determine whether the folder will
be permanently deleted from Box or moved to the trash.

During this operation, part of the file tree will be locked, mainly
the source folder and all of its descendants.

For the duration of the operation, no other move, copy, delete, or restore
operation can performed on any of the locked folders.

## Timeout

Timeout for this operation is 600 seconds. The operation will complete
after a `HTTP 503` has been returned.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete Folder Lock
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/delete-lock



To remove a lock applied to a folder in Box, call the
`DELETE /folder_locks/:id` API with the id of the folder lock.

<Note>
  **Folder Locks**

  When using any folder lock API endpoints, you must be authenticated as the
  owner/co-owner of the folder you are trying to access.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/folder_locks/93134" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderLocks.deleteFolderLockById(folderLock.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_locks.delete_folder_lock_by_id(folder_lock.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderLocks.DeleteFolderLockByIdAsync(folderLockId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(folderLock.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderLocks.deleteFolderLockById(folderLockId: folderLock.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderLocks().deleteFolderLockById(folderLock.getId())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  **Locating the folder Lock ID**

  To delete a folder lock you must supply the folder lock ID to the API. A
  folder lock ID is supplied in the response when
  <Link href="/guides/folders/single/create-lock">creating a folder lock</Link>, or
  when <Link href="/guides/folders/single/get-locks">listing locks</Link> on a given folder.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get Folder Lock
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/folders/single/get-locks



To get a list of the current locks on a folder in Box, call the
`GET /folder_locks/` API with the id of the folder supplied as a `folder_id`
query string parameter.

<Note>
  **Folder Locks**

  When using any folder lock API endpoints, you must be authenticated as the
  owner/co-owner of the folder you are trying to access.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/folder_locks?folder_id=33552487093" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderLocks.getFolderLocks({
    folderId: folder.id,
  } satisfies GetFolderLocksQueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_locks.get_folder_locks(folder.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderLocks.GetFolderLocksAsync(queryParams: new GetFolderLocksQueryParams(folderId: folder.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderLocks.getFolderLocks(queryParams: GetFolderLocksQueryParams(folderId: folder.id))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderLocks().getFolderLocks(new GetFolderLocksQueryParams(folder.getId()))
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Folder ID

The `id` of any folder can be determined by visiting a folder in the web
application and copying the `id` from the URL. For example, for the URL
`https://*.app.box.com/folder/123` the `folder_id` is `123`.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Integration Mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/index



With <Link href="/reference/resources/integration-mappings">Integration Mappings</Link>, you can manage where content from partner apps
is stored in Box.

[2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack


# Create Slack Integration Mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/create-mapping



Use the `POST integration_mappings/slack/:integration_mapping_id`
call to create a mapping. To make it work,
you need `box_item` and `partner_item` parameters,
which refer to a Box folder and a Slack channel, respectively.

<Info>
  Remember that before the mapping can be created,
  this service account must be set as a co-owner
  role on the folder that is being mapped.
  If you encounter any errors, see the <Link href="/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/troubleshooting">troubleshooting guide</Link>.
</Info>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/slack" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H 'content-type: application/json' \
       -d '{
            "partner_item": {
                "id": "C987654321",
                "type": "channel",
                "slack_workspace_id": "T5555555"
            },
            "box_item": {
                "id": "123456789",
                "type": "folder"
            }
        }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.createSlackIntegrationMapping({
    partnerItem: new IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack({
      id: slackPartnerItemId,
      slackOrgId: slackOrgId,
    }),
    boxItem: new IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack({ id: folder.id }),
  } satisfies IntegrationMappingSlackCreateRequest);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.create_slack_integration_mapping(
      IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack(
          id=slack_partner_item_id, slack_org_id=slack_org_id
      ),
      IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(id=folder.id),
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.CreateSlackIntegrationMappingAsync(requestBody: new IntegrationMappingSlackCreateRequest(partnerItem: new IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack(id: slackPartnerItemId) { SlackOrgId = slackOrgId }, boxItem: new IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(id: folder.Id)));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.createSlackIntegrationMapping(requestBody: IntegrationMappingSlackCreateRequest(partnerItem: IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack(id: slackPartnerItemId, slackOrgId: slackOrgId), boxItem: IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(id: folder.id)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().createSlackIntegrationMapping(new IntegrationMappingSlackCreateRequest(new IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack.Builder(slackPartnerItemId).slackOrgId(slackOrgId).build(), new IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(folder.getId())))
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const mapping = await client.integrationMappings.createSlackIntegrationMapping({
  	partner_item: {
  		type: 'channel',
  		id: 'C12378991223',
  		slack_org_id: 'E1234567'
  	},
  	box_item: {
  		id: '12345',
  		type: 'folder',
  	}
  });
  console.log(
      `Slack integration mapping with id ${mapping.id} was created`
  );
  ```
</CodeGroup>

You can provide options that change the default settings for the
created mapping. For example setting `is_access_management_disabled` to
`true` will disable collaboration management. Slack channel members will
not become collaborators on the channel folder and no shared links will
be created for channels with 1000+ members.

## Create Slack Integration Mapping with Box SDK

Use Box SDK to automatically create the Integration Mapping,
including a co-owner collaboration of the
service account on the Slack channel - Box folder mapping.
To do so, use this script:

```js theme={null}
const BoxSDK = require('box-node-sdk');
const axios = require('axios');

const integrationMappingsApiUrl = 'https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/slack'
const boxFolderId = 'PASTE YOUR FOLDER ID HERE';
const slackChannelId = 'PASTE YOUR CHANNEL ID HERE';
const slackOrgId = 'PASTE YOUR SLACK ORG ID HERE (CHANGE TO WORKSPACE ID IF NECESSARY)';
const developerToken = 'PASTE YOUR DEVELOPER TOKEN HERE';

let serviceAccountId = '<PLACEHOLDER>';

const client = BoxSDK.getBasicClient(developerToken);

async function postIntegrationMappingSlack(){
    return axios.post(integrationMappingsApiUrl, {
        partner_item: {
            id: slackChannelId,
            slack_org_id: slackOrgId, // change slack_org_id to slack_workspace_id if Box for Slack is installed on the workspace level
            type: "channel"
        },
        box_item: {
            id: boxFolderId,
            type: "folder"
        }
    }, {
        headers: {
            'Authorization': `Bearer ${developerToken}`
        }
    });
}

function isPlaceholder(str){
    return str === '<PLACEHOLDER>';
}

async function addCoowner(serviceAccountId, folderId){
    try {
        await client.collaborations.createWithUserID(serviceAccountId, folderId, 'co-owner')
    } catch (error){
        if(error.response.body.code === 'user_already_collaborator'){
            console.log('Service account already collaborated in the co-owner role.')
        } else {
            throw error;
        }
    }
}

async function logServiceAccountId() {
    try {
        await postIntegrationMappingSlack();
    } catch (error) {
        console.log(`Replace the value of serviceAccountId with: ${error.response.data.context_info.service_account_id} and re-run the script.`)
    }
}

async function createSlackIntegrationMapping() {
    if(isPlaceholder(serviceAccountId)){
        await logServiceAccountId();
    } else {
        await addCoowner(serviceAccountId, boxFolderId);
        await postIntegrationMappingSlack();
    }
}

module.exports = { createSlackIntegrationMapping }
```

<Note>
  Make sure to replace `PLACEHOLDER` with the logged value of
  `serviceAccountId`.
</Note>


# Delete Slack Integration Mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/delete-mapping



The `DELETE integration_mappings/slack/:integration_mapping_id`
call removes the mapping between the channel and the folder.
A new mapping and a new folder in the default folder structure will
be created when the next file is uploaded to the channel.
Deleting the mapping does not delete the Box folder, or the Slack channel.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/slack/512521" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"  \
       -d ''
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.deleteSlackIntegrationMappingById(
    slackIntegrationMapping.id,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.delete_slack_integration_mapping_by_id(
      slack_integration_mapping.id
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.DeleteSlackIntegrationMappingByIdAsync(integrationMappingId: slackIntegrationMapping.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.deleteSlackIntegrationMappingById(integrationMappingId: slackIntegrationMapping.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().deleteSlackIntegrationMappingById(slackIntegrationMapping.getId())
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  await client.integrationMappings.deleteSlackIntegrationMappingById({
  	integration_mapping_id: 123456
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Slack Integration Mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/index



When [Box as the Content Layer][1] is enabled, Box folder is created for
each channel, and all files uploaded to this channel are stored in this folder.
The <Link href="/reference/resources/integration-mapping">Integration Mappings API</Link> allows the Box Enterprise Admin (EA) to
customize the upload folder of the Slack channel to any folder within
the enterprise instead of relying on the default one.

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack


# List Slack Integration Mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/list-mappings



Use the `GET /integration_mappings/slack` call to
fetch and filter the mappings,
both the ones created manually by the admin
those created
automatically by the integration.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/slack?partner_item_id=C987654321&box_item_id=123456789" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.getSlackIntegrationMapping();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.get_slack_integration_mapping()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.GetSlackIntegrationMappingAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.getSlackIntegrationMapping()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().getSlackIntegrationMapping()
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const integrationMappings = await client.integrationMappings.getSlackIntegrationMappings();
  console.log(`There are ${integrationMappings.entries.length} Slack integration mappings`);
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Slack Integration Mappings Setup
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/setup



Before starting work with Integration Mappings API, perform
the following steps.

## Roles

Make sure you have an Admin or a Co-admin role.

## Install and configure Box for Slack

1. Install [Box for Slack][1] in the relevant Slack workspace or organizations.
2. Enable the [Box as Content Layer for Slack][2].
3. Make sure the service account you are using is a collaborator on the folder that will be mapped. To do so, use the `Invite People` folder option to invite the service account as a collaborator.

If you encounter any errors, see the <Link href="/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/troubleshooting">troubleshooting guide</Link>.

## Create Box application

1. Create a <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup">platform app with OAuth authentication</Link> in the [Box developer console][5]
2. Open the application and enable the **Manage enterprise properties** application scope under **Configuration** > **Required Access Scopes**.

<Info>
  For Slack-side channel validation, the <Link href="/reference/get-integration-mappings-slack">Integration Mappings API</Link>
  is calling the Slack API.
</Info>

## Authorization

To authorize your Integration Mappings requests:

1. Navigate to the <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">platform app</Link> that you have created as one of the prerequisites.
2. Generate a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">developer token</Link> and add it to the HTTP header of each request:

```bash theme={null}
Authorization: Bearer {developer_token}
```

<Info>
  The developer token is valid for 60 minutes. After that time you need
  to generate it again.
</Info>

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044195313-Installing-and-Using-the-Box-for-Slack-Integration

[2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack

[5]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# Slack Integration Mappings Troubleshooting
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/troubleshooting



As the Integration Mappings API performs different types of
validation, some errors might occur. You can find descriptions
and solutions to these common errors below.

## Service account is not a co-owner of the folder

The [Box as Content Layer for Slack][1] service account must be added
as an owner or co-owner of the folder to manage collaborations and uploads.

```sh theme={null}
Box as File Storage for Slack (user id: 123, user email:
user@example.com) must be a collaborator in role co-owner or owner
of the folder example123, before it can be mapped to the channel
example123. Please create a collaboration or ensure the ownership for
Box as File Storage for Slack and retry.`
```

To resolve this error use the data in the response to make sure the
service account has the necessary role to perform the mapping.

```json theme={null}
"context_info": {
  "service_account_id": "12345678",
  "service_account_email": "AutomationUser_12345678_gdueygwe@boxdevedition.com",
}
```

Perform the following steps:

1. Copy the  `service_account_email` from `context_info`.
2. In the folder settings, use the `Invite People` option to invite the service account as a co-owner.

## Channel is already mapped to a folder in Box

API returns the following error when you attempt to create
a mapping for a channel that already has a Box folder mapped:

```sh theme={null}
Channel: example123 is already mapped to a folder in Box.
```

If you wanted to start using a new folder, use `GET` to retrieve
the `id` of the mapping and then the `UPDATE` method to update the
target Box folder.

## Channel was not found

API returns this error if the Slack bot associated with the integration
can not retrieve information about the channel.

```sh theme={null}
Channel: example123 was not found. If it is a private channel, ensure that Box has been added to the channel.
```

Ensure that the `partner_item` is correct - make sure you provide `slack_org_id`
for org installations and `slack_workspace_id` for workspace ones. If the
channel is private, ensure that the Slack bot has been added to the channel.

## Channel not suitable for Custom File Storage (CFS)

```sh theme={null}
Channel: example123 is not suitable for CFS. Slack Connect channels with
a pending Connect status can not be mapped to Box folders.
```

Slack Connect channels (cross enterprise channels) are currently not supported
as a part of Box as a Content Layer for Slack.

## Box folder externally owned

Box folder selected for mapping must be owned by the enterprise that the Admin
is part of.

```sh theme={null}
Box folder: example123 cannot be mapped, because it is externally owned. Mapped folder must belong to the enterprise: example_enterprise.
```

## Custom File Storage (CFS) turned off

API returns this error when you're trying to create the mapping for an
enterprise that has Box for Slack installed, but did not enable
[Box as a Content Layer for Slack][1].

## Box enterprise mismatch

API returns this error when there is a mismatch between the Admin’s enterprise
and Box for Slack configuration. See [Installing and using Box for Slack][2]
for information on how to enable Box for Slack.

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack

[2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044195313-Installing-and-Using-the-Box-for-Slack-Integration


# Update Slack Integration Mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/update-mapping



Use the `PUT integration_mappings/slack/:integration_mapping_id`
call to update the existing mapping or the target Box folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/slack/512521" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"  \
       -H 'content-type: application/json'  \
       -d'{
           "options": {
              "is_access_management_disabled": true
          }
      }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.updateSlackIntegrationMappingById(
    slackIntegrationMapping.id,
    {
      requestBody: {
        boxItem: new IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack({ id: folder.id }),
      } satisfies UpdateSlackIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody,
    } satisfies UpdateSlackIntegrationMappingByIdOptionalsInput,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.update_slack_integration_mapping_by_id(
      slack_integration_mapping.id, box_item=IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(id=folder.id)
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.UpdateSlackIntegrationMappingByIdAsync(integrationMappingId: slackIntegrationMapping.Id, requestBody: new UpdateSlackIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody() { BoxItem = new IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(id: folder.Id) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.updateSlackIntegrationMappingById(integrationMappingId: slackIntegrationMapping.id, requestBody: UpdateSlackIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody(boxItem: IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(id: folder.id)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().updateSlackIntegrationMappingById(slackIntegrationMapping.getId(), new UpdateSlackIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody.Builder().boxItem(new IntegrationMappingBoxItemSlack(folder.getId())).build())
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const mapping = await client.integrationMappings.updateSlackIntegrationMapping({
  	box_item: {
  		id: '12345',
  		type: 'folder'
  	},
  	options: {
  		is_access_management_disabled: true
  	}
  }, {
  	integration_mapping_id: integrationMappingId
  });

  console.log(
      `Slack integration mapping with id ${mapping.id} was updated`
  );
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Create Teams integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/teams-mappings/create-mappings



Use the `POST integration_mappings_teams` call to create a mapping.
To make it work, you need the `box_item` and the `partner_item` parameters,
which refer to a Box folder and a Teams channel, respectively.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/teams" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H 'content-type: application/json' \
       -d '{
            "partner_item": {
                "id": "19%3ABCD-Avgfggkggyftdtfgghjhkhkhh%40thread:tacv2",
                "type": "channel",
                "team_id": "hjgjgjg-bhhj-564a-b643-hghgj685u",
                "tenant_id": "E1234567"
            },
            "box_item": {
                "id": "42037322",
                "type": "folder"
            }
        }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.createTeamsIntegrationMapping({
    partnerItem: {
      type: 'channel' as IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequestTypeField,
      id: partnerItemId,
      tenantId: tenantId,
      teamId: teamId,
    } satisfies IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequest,
    boxItem: new FolderReference({ id: folder.id }),
  } satisfies IntegrationMappingTeamsCreateRequest);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.create_teams_integration_mapping(
      IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequest(
          type=IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequestTypeField.CHANNEL,
          id=partner_item_id,
          tenant_id=tenant_id,
          team_id=team_id,
      ),
      FolderReference(id=folder.id),
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.CreateTeamsIntegrationMappingAsync(requestBody: new IntegrationMappingTeamsCreateRequest(partnerItem: new IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequest(type: IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequestTypeField.Channel, id: partnerItemId, tenantId: tenantId, teamId: teamId), boxItem: new FolderReference(id: folder.Id)));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.createTeamsIntegrationMapping(requestBody: IntegrationMappingTeamsCreateRequest(partnerItem: IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequest(type: IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequestTypeField.channel, id: partnerItemId, tenantId: tenantId, teamId: teamId), boxItem: FolderReference(id: folder.id)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().createTeamsIntegrationMapping(new IntegrationMappingTeamsCreateRequest(new IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequest(IntegrationMappingPartnerItemTeamsCreateRequestTypeField.CHANNEL, partnerItemId, tenantId, teamId), new FolderReference(folder.getId())))
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Delete Teams integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/teams-mappings/delete-mappings



The `DELETE integration_mappings_teams_id` call removes the mapping between
the channel and the folder.
A new mapping and a new folder in the default folder structure will be created
when the next file is uploaded to the channel.
Deleting the mapping does not delete the Box folder or the Teams channel.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/teams/342423" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"  \
       -d ''
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.deleteTeamsIntegrationMappingById(
    integrationMappingId,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.delete_teams_integration_mapping_by_id(
      integration_mapping_id
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.DeleteTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdAsync(integrationMappingId: integrationMappingId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.deleteTeamsIntegrationMappingById(integrationMappingId: integrationMappingId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().deleteTeamsIntegrationMappingById(integrationMappingId)
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Teams integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/teams-mappings/index



Before you can start working with [Teams][2] integration mapping API,
perform the steps below.

## Prerequisites

* Admin or Co-Admin role
* [Box for Microsoft Teams][1] integration installed

## Create a Box application

1. Create a <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup">platform app with OAuth authentication</Link> in the [Box developer console][3].
2. Open the application and enable the **Manage enterprise properties** application scope under **Configuration** > **Required Access Scopes**.

## Authorize integration mappings requests

1. Navigate to the <Link href="/guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps">platform app</Link> that you have created as one of the prerequisites.
2. Generate a <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">developer token</Link> and add it to the HTTP header of each request:

```bash theme={null}
Authorization: Bearer {developer_token}
```

<Info>
  The developer token is valid for 60 minutes. After that time, you need
  to generate it again.
</Info>

[1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360050737154-Assigning-a-Default-Box-Folder-to-a-Teams-Channel-or-Chat

[2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044667034-Introducing-Box-for-Microsoft-Teams

[3]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# List Teams integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/teams-mappings/list-mappings



Use the `GET /integration_mappings/teams` call to fetch and filter the mappings,
both the ones created manually by the admin and those created automatically by the
integration.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/teams" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.getTeamsIntegrationMapping();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.get_teams_integration_mapping()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.GetTeamsIntegrationMappingAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.getTeamsIntegrationMapping()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().getTeamsIntegrationMapping()
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Update Teams integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/integration-mappings/teams-mappings/update-mappings



Use the `PUT integration_mappings_teams_id` call to update the
existing mapping of the target Box folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/integration_mappings/teams/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"  \
       -H 'content-type: application/json'  \
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.integrationMappings.updateTeamsIntegrationMappingById(
    integrationMappingId,
    {
      requestBody: {
        boxItem: new FolderReference({ id: '1234567' }),
      } satisfies UpdateTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody,
    } satisfies UpdateTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdOptionalsInput,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.integration_mappings.update_teams_integration_mapping_by_id(
      integration_mapping_id, box_item=FolderReference(id="1234567")
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.IntegrationMappings.UpdateTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdAsync(integrationMappingId: integrationMappingId, requestBody: new UpdateTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody() { BoxItem = new FolderReference(id: "1234567") });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.integrationMappings.updateTeamsIntegrationMappingById(integrationMappingId: integrationMappingId, requestBody: UpdateTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody(boxItem: FolderReference(id: "1234567")))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getIntegrationMappings().updateTeamsIntegrationMappingById(integrationMappingId, new UpdateTeamsIntegrationMappingByIdRequestBody.Builder().boxItem(new FolderReference("1234567")).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Get Legal Hold Policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/legal-holds/get



To get the information for a specific Legal Hold policy that has been created in
an enterprise, call the <Link href="/reference/get-legal-hold-policies-id">`GET /legal_hold_policies/:id`</Link> API
endpoint with the `id` of the policy.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/legal_hold_policies/324432" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.legalHoldPolicies.getLegalHoldPolicyById(legalHoldPolicyId);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.legal_hold_policies.get_legal_hold_policy_by_id(legal_hold_policy_id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.LegalHoldPolicies.GetLegalHoldPolicyByIdAsync(legalHoldPolicyId: legalHoldPolicyId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.legalHoldPolicies.getLegalHoldPolicyById(legalHoldPolicyId: legalHoldPolicyId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getLegalHoldPolicies().getLegalHoldPolicyById(legalHoldPolicyId)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxLegalHoldPolicy policy = new BoxLegalHoldPolicy(api, id);
  BoxLegalHoldPolicy.Info policyInfo = policy.getInfo();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  legal_hold_policy = client.legal_hold_policy(policy_id='12345').get()
  print(f'The "{legal_hold_policy.policy_name}" policy is {legal_hold_policy.status}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxLegalHoldPolicy policy = await client.LegalHoldPoliciesManager.GetLegalHoldPolicyAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.legalHoldPolicies.get('11111')
  	.then(policy => {
  		/* policy -> {
  			type: 'legal_hold_policy',
  			id: '11111',
  			policy_name: 'IRS Audit',
  			description: '',
  			status: 'active',
  			assignment_counts: { user: 1, folder: 0, file: 0, file_version: 0 },
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '22222',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			created_at: '2016-05-18T10:28:45-07:00',
  			modified_at: '2016-05-18T11:25:59-07:00',
  			deleted_at: null,
  			filter_started_at: '2016-05-17T01:00:00-07:00',
  			filter_ended_at: '2016-05-21T01:00:00-07:00' }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Required Scopes

Before using any of the Legal Hold APIs, an application must have the right
scopes enabled. See <Link href="/guides/legal-holds#required-scopes">Required Scopes</Link> for more details.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Legal Holds
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/legal-holds/index



A legal hold is a process that an enterprise can use to preserve all forms of
potentially relevant information when litigation is pending or reasonably
anticipated. Applying a hold to items prevents any user from deleting them from
Box.

Legal Holds can be managed and assigned to folders and files through the Box
APIs.

<Info>
  Legal Holds are a feature of the [Box Governance][governance] package, which
  can be added on to any Business Plus, Enterprise Advanced or Enterprise account.
</Info>

## Policies, Assignments, and Holds

Working with Legal Hold Policies requires a developer to work with three
distinct resources.

* **Policies:**  A <Link href="/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy">Legal Hold Policy</Link> describes the general behavior of the hold. It determines which files should be affected, based on the date and time the files were created or updated.
* **Assignments:** A <Link href="/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy-assignment">Legal Hold Policy Assignment</Link> is a relation between a policy and custodian. In this case, as custodian can be a user, folder, file, or file version. Creating an assignment puts a hold on all the file versions that belong to the custodian. For example, if an assignment is created on a folder the policy is applied to all file versions within that folder.
* **Holds**: A <Link href="/reference/resources/file-version-legal-hold">File Version Legal Hold</Link> represents all the policies that are assigned to a specific file version. Note that every file version can have a maximum of one file version legal hold and this hold contains a list of every assigned policy.

## Example Use Case

If an order of discovery is received or the customer is part of an ongoing
litigation, a legal hold policy can be created to keep track of everything that
needs to be held. The actual holding is done by assigning a policy to a specific
files or folder. When the holds are no longer needed, the policy can be released
by deleting the assignment.

## Required Scopes

Before using any of the Legal Hold APIs, an application must have the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">GCM and
Manage Legal Hold scopes</Link> enabled. These are not available in the
Developer Console and need to instead be enabled by contacting customer
support.

[governance]: https://www.box.com/security/governance-and-compliance


# List All Legal Hold Policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/legal-holds/list



To list all Legal Hold Policies that have been created in an enterprise, call
the <Link href="/reference/get-legal-hold-policies">`GET /legal_hold_policies`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/legal_hold_policies" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.legalHoldPolicies.getLegalHoldPolicies();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.legal_hold_policies.get_legal_hold_policies()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.LegalHoldPolicies.GetLegalHoldPoliciesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.legalHoldPolicies.getLegalHoldPolicies()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getLegalHoldPolicies().getLegalHoldPolicies()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<BoxLegalHoldPolicy.Info> policies = BoxLegalHoldPolicy.getAll(api);
  for (BoxLegalHoldPolicy.Info policyInfo : policies) {
      // Do something with the legal hold policy.
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  policies = client.get_legal_hold_policies()
  for policy in policies:
      print(f'Legal Hold Policy "{policy.name}" has ID {policy.id}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollectionMarkerBased<BoxLegalHoldPolicy> policies = await client.LegalHoldPoliciesManager
      .GetListLegalHoldPoliciesAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.legalHoldPolicies.getAll({policy_name: 'Important'})
  	.then(policies => {
  		/* policies -> {
  			entries: 
  			[ { type: 'legal_hold_policy',
  				id: '11111',
  				policy_name: 'Important Policy 1' },
  				{ type: 'legal_hold_policy',
  				id: '22222',
  				policy_name: 'Important Policy 2' } ],
  			limit: 100,
  			order: [ { by: 'policy_name', direction: 'ASC' } ] }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Required Scopes

Before using any of the Legal Hold APIs, an application must have the right
scopes enabled. See <Link href="/guides/legal-holds#required-scopes">Required Scopes</Link> for more details.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create a metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/cascades/create



When a metadata template has been applied to a folder, a metadata cascade policy
can be created by calling the  <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies">`POST /metadata_cascade_policies`</Link> API
endpoint with the `folder_id` of the folder to apply the policy to, and the
`scope` and `templateKey` of metadata template to.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_cascade_policies" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "folder_id": "12321",
         "scope": "enterprise_27335",
         "templateKey": "productInfo"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataCascadePolicies.createMetadataCascadePolicy({
    folderId: folder.id,
    scope: 'enterprise' as CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyScopeField,
    templateKey: templateKey,
  } satisfies CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_cascade_policies.create_metadata_cascade_policy(
      folder.id, CreateMetadataCascadePolicyScope.ENTERPRISE, template_key
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataCascadePolicies.CreateMetadataCascadePolicyAsync(requestBody: new CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody(folderId: folder.Id, scope: CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyScopeField.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataCascadePolicies.createMetadataCascadePolicy(requestBody: CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody(folderId: folder.id, scope: CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyScopeField.enterprise, templateKey: templateKey))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataCascadePolicies().createMetadataCascadePolicy(new CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody(folder.getId(), CreateMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyScopeField.ENTERPRISE, templateKey))
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  folder = client.folder(folder_id='22222')
  metadata_template = client.metadata_template('enterprise', 'securityClassiciation')

  cascade_policy = folder.cascade_metadata(metadata_template)
  print(f'Folder {cascade_policy.parent.id} has a metadata cascade policy for {cascade_policy.scope} template "{cascade_policy.templateKey}"')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy metadataCascadePolicy = await client.MetadataCascadePolicyManager
      .CreateCascadePolicyAsync("22222", "enterprise_11111", "templateKey");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var folderID = '22222';
  client.metadata.createCascadePolicy('enterprise', 'testTemplate', folderID)
   .then(cascadePolicy => {
    /* cascadePolicy -> {
     id: '84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434',
     type: 'metadata_cascade_policy',
     owner_enterprise: {
      type: 'enterprise',
      id: '11111'
     },
     parent: {
      type: 'folder',
      id: '22222'
     },
     scope: 'enterprise_11111',
     templateKey: 'testTemplate'
    }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an file</Link>.
</Info>

<Warning>
  A cascade policy can only be created if a metadata instance has already been
  applied to the folder with the given `scope` and `templateKey`.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete a metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/cascades/delete



A metadata cascade policy can be deleted by calling the
<Link href="/reference/delete-metadata-cascade-policies-id">`DELETE /metadata_cascade_policies/:id`</Link> API endpoint with the
`id` of the policy to remove.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_cascade_policies/324324" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataCascadePolicies.deleteMetadataCascadePolicyById(
    cascadePolicyId,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_cascade_policies.delete_metadata_cascade_policy_by_id(cascade_policy_id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataCascadePolicies.DeleteMetadataCascadePolicyByIdAsync(metadataCascadePolicyId: cascadePolicyId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataCascadePolicies.deleteMetadataCascadePolicyById(metadataCascadePolicyId: cascadePolicyId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataCascadePolicies().deleteMetadataCascadePolicyById(cascadePolicyId)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String cascadePolicyID = "e4392a41-7de5-4232-bdf7-15e0d6bba067";
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy policyToDelete = new BoxMetadataCascadePolicy(api, cascadePolicyID);
  policyToDelete.delete();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata_cascade_policy(policy_id='84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434').delete()
  print('Cascade policy successfully removed')
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var policyID = '84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434';
  client.metadata.deleteCascadePolicy(policyID)
   .then(() => {
    // deletion succeeded — no value returned
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `id` of the policy,
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/cascades/list">list all policies</Link> for the folder.
</Info>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Force-apply metadata to all items in a folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/cascades/force-apply



When a metadata cascade policy already exists on a folder, the metadata instance
can be force-applied to all items in a folder by calling the
<Link href="/reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies-id-apply">`POST /metadata_cascade_policies/:id/apply`</Link> API endpoint with the
`id` of the metadata cascade policy.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_cascade_policies/21312/apply" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "conflict_resolution": "overwrite"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataCascadePolicies.applyMetadataCascadePolicy(
    cascadePolicyId,
    {
      conflictResolution:
        'overwrite' as ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyConflictResolutionField,
    } satisfies ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_cascade_policies.apply_metadata_cascade_policy(
      cascade_policy_id, ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyConflictResolution.OVERWRITE
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataCascadePolicies.ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyAsync(metadataCascadePolicyId: cascadePolicyId, requestBody: new ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody(conflictResolution: ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyConflictResolutionField.Overwrite));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataCascadePolicies.applyMetadataCascadePolicy(metadataCascadePolicyId: cascadePolicyId, requestBody: ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody(conflictResolution: ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyConflictResolutionField.overwrite))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataCascadePolicies().applyMetadataCascadePolicy(cascadePolicyId, new ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBody(ApplyMetadataCascadePolicyRequestBodyConflictResolutionField.OVERWRITE))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String cascadePolicyID = "e4392a41-7de5-4232-bdf7-15e0d6bba067";
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy policy = new BoxMetadataCascadePolicy(api, cascadePolicyID);
  policy.forceApply("none");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.metadata_cascade_policy import CascadePolicyConflictResolution

  cascade_policy = client.metadata_cascade_policy(policy_id='84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434')
  cascade_policy.force_apply(CascadePolicyConflictResolution.PRESERVE_EXISTING)
  print('Cascade policy was force applied!')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  string policyId = "11111";
  string conflictResolution = Constants.ConflictResolution.Overwrite
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy newCascadePolicy = client.MetadataCascadePolicyManager
      .ForceApplyCascadePolicyAsync(policyId, conflictResolution);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var policyID = '84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434';
  client.metadata.forceApplyCascadePolicy(policyID, client.metadata.cascadeResolution.PRESERVE_EXISTING)
   .then(() => {
    // application started — no value returned
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `id` of the policy,
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/cascades/list">list all policies</Link> for the folder.
</Info>

<Warning>
  The metadata cascade operation will be started off asynchronously. The API
  call will return directly with the `202 Accepted` HTTP status code before
  the cascade operation is complete. There is currently no way to check for when
  this operation is finished.
</Warning>

## Conflict resolution

An additional `conflict_resolution` parameter can be passed to this API to
define how to deal with any existing instances of the template on any of the
items in the folder.

By default, without setting any value for `conflict_resolution` this API will
preserve the existing value on any items. When the value is set to `overwrite`,
it will force-apply the value of the template attached to the cascade policy
over any existing value.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get a metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/cascades/get



Information for a metadata cascade policy can be retrieved by calling the
<Link href="/reference/get-metadata-cascade-policies-id">`GET /metadata_cascade_policies/:id`</Link> API endpoint with the
`id` of the policy.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_cascade_policies/324324" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataCascadePolicies.getMetadataCascadePolicyById(
    cascadePolicyId,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_cascade_policies.get_metadata_cascade_policy_by_id(cascade_policy_id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataCascadePolicies.GetMetadataCascadePolicyByIdAsync(metadataCascadePolicyId: cascadePolicyId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataCascadePolicies.getMetadataCascadePolicyById(metadataCascadePolicyId: cascadePolicyId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataCascadePolicies().getMetadataCascadePolicyById(cascadePolicyId)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String cascadePolicyID = "1234";
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy metadataCascadePolicy = new BoxMetadataCascadePolicy(api, cascadePolicyID);
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy.Info metadataCascadePolicyInfo = metadataCascadePolicy.getInfo();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  cascade_policy = client.metadata_cascade_policy('84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434').get()
  print(f'Cascade policy applies to a template owned by enterprise {cascade_policy.owner_enterprise.id}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxMetadataCascadePolicy retrievedCascadePolicy = await client.MetadataCascadePolicyManager
      .GetCascadePolicyAsync("12345", IEnumerable<string> fields = null);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var policyID = '84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434';
  client.metadata.getCascadePolicy(policyID)
   .then(cascadePolicy => {
    /* cascadePolicy -> {
     id: '84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434',
     type: 'metadata_cascade_policy',
     owner_enterprise: {
      type: 'enterprise',
      id: '11111'
     },
     parent: {
      type: 'folder',
      id: '22222'
     },
     scope: 'enterprise_11111',
     templateKey: 'testTemplate'
    }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `id` of the policy,
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/cascades/list">list all policies</Link> for the folder.
</Info>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Metadata cascade policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/cascades/index



A metadata cascade policy describes how <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances">metadata
instances</Link> applied to a folder should be applied to any item
within that folder. For example, a user might assign the same `invoiceData`
metadata template to a project folder allowing it to automatically apply to all
the files and folders within that project folder.

Every policy specifies exactly one metadata template instance and one folder.

## Activation and permissions

To use metadata cascade policies, an enterprise admin needs to enable them for
the entire enterprise. In the **Admin Console**, select **Enterprise Settings**,
**Content & Sharing**, **Cascading Folder Level Metadata**. Click the **Edit
configuration** button and pick who can apply cascade policies to folders.

Any user with edit permissions on a folder and the ability to create cascade
policies can create metadata cascade policies for that given folder.

## Limitations

There is some delay from file upload to the metadata being applied. This very
much depends on the number of items in a folder. Metadata cascade operations
are performed asynchronously and there is currently no way to check when all
metadata has been cascaded to all files.


# List metadata cascade policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/cascades/list



Metadata cascade policies can be listed for a folder by calling the
<Link href="/reference/get-metadata-cascade-policies">`GET /metadata_cascade_policies`</Link> API endpoint with a `folder_id`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_cascade_policies?folder_id=31232" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataCascadePolicies.getMetadataCascadePolicies({
    folderId: folder.id,
  } satisfies GetMetadataCascadePoliciesQueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_cascade_policies.get_metadata_cascade_policies(folder.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataCascadePolicies.GetMetadataCascadePoliciesAsync(queryParams: new GetMetadataCascadePoliciesQueryParams(folderId: folder.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataCascadePolicies.getMetadataCascadePolicies(queryParams: GetMetadataCascadePoliciesQueryParams(folderId: folder.id))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataCascadePolicies().getMetadataCascadePolicies(new GetMetadataCascadePoliciesQueryParams(folder.getId()))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String folderID = "2222";
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, folderID);
  Iterable<BoxMetadataCascadePolicy.Info> metadataCascadePolicies = folder.getMetadataCascadePolicies();
  for (BoxMetadataCascadePolicy.Info policyInfo : metadataCascadePolicies) {
      // take action on policy here
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  cascade_policies = client.folder(folder_id='22222').get_metadata_cascade_policies()
  for policy in cascade_policies:
      print(f'Metadata template {policy.templateKey} is cascaded')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollectionMarkerBased<BoxMetadataCascadePolicy> metadataCascadePolicies = await client.MetadataCascadePolicyManager.GetAllMetadataCascadePoliciesAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var folderID = '22222';
  client.metadata.getCascadePolicies(folderID)
   .then(cascadePolicies => {
    /* cascadePolicies -> {
     limit: 100,
     entries: [
      {
       id: '84113349-794d-445c-b93c-d8481b223434',
       type: 'metadata_cascade_policy',
       owner_enterprise: {
        type: 'enterprise',
        id: '11111'
       },
       parent: {
        type: 'folder',
        id: '22222'
       },
       scope: 'enterprise_11111',
       templateKey: 'testTemplate'
      }
     ],
     next_marker: null,
     prev_marker: null
    }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Pagination

This API uses <Link href="/guides/api-calls/pagination/marker-based">marker-based pagination</Link> and can return a
`next_marker` value in the response body to indicate that more templates might
be available.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Classifications
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/classifications



Box enables users and applications to apply a security classification label
to files, and cascade a classification label to folders and their contents.
Classifications help protect shared sensitive content from negligent access
through Box's Governance and Shield products.

The Classification API can be used to create new classification labels
and to assign classifications to files and folders.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

Classifications use the <Link href="/guides/metadata">Metadata APIs</Link> to create classification
labels, and to assign classifications to files and folders. For more details on
metadata templates and instances, please explore our guides
on <Link href="/guides/metadata">Metadata</Link>.

## Classifications & Metadata

Working with classifications requires a developer to work with metadata
templates and instances.

* **The Classification Template:**  to work with classifications, an enterprise needs to have a classification metadata template with at least one classification. This template needs to have a `scope`/`templateKey` of `enterprise.securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`. This template will hold the possible classification levels, their label names, descriptions, and `colorID` values.
* **Template Instances**: to apply a classification to a file or folder, a developer applies an instance of the `enterprise.securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo` template to the item. When the template is applied, one of the classifications is selected from the list of classifications on the template.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Date metadata field
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/fields/date



A metadata field of type `date` is displayed to a user as a date picker.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  Although dates are presented to users in the Box Web app as date-pickers, the
  actual dates are actually stored as in `RFC3339` format, with up to
  millisecond precision. The time part of the date is always set to `T00:00:00.000Z`.
</Note>

## Create a date field

A `date` field can be added to a metadata template either when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">creating a
metadata template</Link>, or when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating a
template</Link> with the `addField` operation.

The required attributes for a `date` field are a `type`, a `displayName`, and a
`key`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Contract",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "date",
      "key": "effective_date",
      "displayName": "Effective Date",
      "description": "The effective date when the contract goes in effect",
      "hidden": false
    }
  ]
}
```

Optionally, a `description` can be provided that is shown to a user in the UI,
and the field can be set to `hidden` to hide it from users in the web and mobile
apps.

## Update a date field

A `date` template field can be updated by <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating the
template</Link> it belongs to. Updates to templates happen through
**operations** to ensure that any template that is already assigned to a file or
folder is updated as well.

When updating a `date` metadata field, the only relevant operation is the
`editField` operation, which can be used to change the field's `key`,
`displayName`, `description`, and `hidden` values.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editField",
    "fieldKey": "effective_date",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Effective Contract Date",
      "description": "The contract's effective date",
      "key": "effective_contract_date",
      "hidden": true
    }
  }
]
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Enum metadata field
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/fields/enum



A metadata field of type `enum` is displayed to a user as a dropdown list. The
user can select one item from the list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  An `enum` allows a user to select zero or a single value. To allow a user to select
  multiple values, use the <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select">`multiSelect`</Link> template field.
</Note>

## Create an `enum` field

An `enum` field can be added to a metadata template either when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">creating a
metadata template</Link>, or when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating a
template</Link> with the `addField` operation.

The required attributes for an `enum` field are a `type`, a `displayName`, a
`key`, and a list of options.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Contract",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "enum",
      "key": "customer_state",
      "displayName": "Customer State",
      "description": "The US state where the customer is located",
      "hidden": false,
      "options": [
        {"key": "N/A"},
        {"key": "AL"},
        {"key": "AK"}
      ]
    }
  ]
}
```

Optionally, a `description` can be provided that is shown to a user in the UI,
and the field can be set to `hidden` to hide it from users in the web and mobile
apps.

## Update an `enum` field

An `enum` template field can be updated by <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating the
template</Link> it belongs to. Updates to templates happen through
**operations** to ensure that any template that is already assigned to a file or
folder is updated as well.

### Change basic field values

When updating an `enum` metadata field, one of the possible operations is the
`editField` operation, which can be used to change the field's `key`,
`displayName`, `description`, and `hidden` values.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editField",
    "fieldKey": "customer_state",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Customer State (USA)",
      "key": "customer_state_usa"
    }
  }
]
```

<Info>
  The `fieldKey` here represents the original key of the field to change. The
  `data.key` field is the new key of the field.
</Info>

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Add an option

Adding an option to an `enum` field can be achieved through the
`addEnumOption` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be set to the
key of the `enum` field to change, and a `data` object with the `key` of the new
option to add.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "addEnumOption",
    "fieldKey": "customer_state",
    "data": {
      "key": "AR"
    }
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "N/A"},
  {"key": "AL"},
  {"key": "AK"},
  {"key": "AR"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Reorder options

Reordering the options in an `enum` field can be achieved through the
`reorderEnumOptions` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be set
to the key of the `enum` field to change, and an `enumOptionKeys` array with the
keys of the options in order.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "reorderEnumOptions",
    "fieldKey": "customer_state",
    "enumOptionKeys": [
      "AL",
      "AK",
      "AR",
      "N/A"
    ]
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "AL"},
  {"key": "AK"},
  {"key": "AR"},
  {"key": "N/A"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  New options can not be added with this operation. This will affect existing
  instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Edit an option

Editing an option of an `enum` field can be achieved through the
`editEnumOption` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be set
to the key of the `enum` field to change, and an `enumOptionKey` to be set to
the key of the field option. Finally, it expects a `data` object with the new
`key` of the field option.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editEnumOption",
    "fieldKey": "customer_state",
    "enumOptionKey": "N/A",
    "data": {
      "key": "Outside USA"
    }
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "AL"},
  {"key": "AK"},
  {"key": "AR"},
  {"key": "Outside USA"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Remove an option

Removing an option from an `enum` field can be achieved through the
`removeEnumOption` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be set to the
key of the `enum` field to change, and an `enumOptionKey` to be set to the key
of the field option to remove.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "removeEnumOption",
    "fieldKey": "customer_state",
    "enumOptionKey": "AL"
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "AK"},
  {"key": "AR"},
  {"key": "Outside USA"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template. Any fields that were set
  to this value will have the value reset to `null`.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Float metadata field
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/fields/float



A metadata field of type `float` is displayed to a user as a standard text-field
that only accepts numeric input.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

## Create a float field

A `float` field can be added to a metadata template either when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">creating a
metadata template</Link>, or when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating a
template</Link> with the `addField` operation.

The required attributes for a `float` field are a `type`, a `displayName`, and a
`key`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Contract",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "float",
      "key": "contract_value",
      "displayName": "Contract Value",
      "description": "The contract's total value",
      "hidden": false
    }
  ]
}
```

Optionally, a `description` can be provided that is shown to a user in the UI,
and the field can be set to `hidden` to hide it from users in the web and mobile
apps.

## Update a float field

A `float` template field can be updated by <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating the
template</Link> it belongs to. Updates to templates happen through
**operations** to ensure that any template that is already assigned to a file or
folder is updated as well.

When updating a `float` metadata field, the only relevant operation is the
`editField` operation, which can be used to change the field's `key`,
`displayName`, `description`, and `hidden` values.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editField",
    "fieldKey": "contract_value",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Total Annual Contract Value",
      "description": "The contract's total anual value",
      "key": "contract_tav",
      "hidden": true
    }
  }
]
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Metadata fields
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/fields/index



A <Link href="/reference/resources/metadata-template/#param-fields">metadata template field</Link> describes a specific
piece of data within a metadata template. For example, the ID of an invoice
might be represented as an `id` field on an `invoiceData` template.

Every metadata template contains a list of `field` objects, and each field is of
one of the following types:

|                                                                        |                                               |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/string">`string`</Link>            | A text field                                  |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/float">`float`</Link>              | A numeric input field                         |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/date">`date`</Link>                | A date picker field                           |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum">`enum`</Link>                | A dropdown list for selecting a single value  |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select">`multiSelect`</Link> | A dropdown list for selecting multiple values |

## Basic field types

The basic field types are a `string` for a text field, `float` for a numeric
field, and `date` for a date-time picker field.

## Lists field types

Additionally, metadata templates support two field types to represent dropdown
lists. An `enum` field represents a list of predefined items that a user can
select, while a `multiSelect` field represents a list of items where the user
can select more than one value.


# Multi Select metadata field
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select



A metadata field of type `multiSelect` is displayed to a user as a dropdown
list. The user can select multiple items from the list.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

<Note>
  A `multiSelect` field allows a user to select zero, one, or more values. To force
  a user to select only one value at most, use the <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum">`enum`</Link> template
  field.
</Note>

## Create a `multiSelect` field

A `multiSelect` field can be added to a metadata template either when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">creating
a metadata template</Link>, or when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating a
template</Link> with the `addField` operation.

The required attributes for a `multiSelect` field are a `type`, a `displayName`,
a `key`, and a list of options.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Contract",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "multiSelect",
      "key": "box_entity",
      "displayName": "Box Entity",
      "description": "The Box entity that this contract belongs to",
      "hidden": false,
      "options": [
        {"key": "Box, Inc"},
        {"key": "Box.com (UK) Ltd."},
        {"key": "KK Box Japan"}
      ]
    }
  ]
}
```

Optionally, a `description` can be provided that is shown to a user in the UI,
and the field can be set to `hidden` to hide it from users in the web and mobile
apps.

## Update a `multiSelect` field

A `multiSelect` template field can be updated by <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating the
template</Link> it belongs to. Updates to templates happen through
**operations** to ensure that any template that is already assigned to a file or
folder is updated as well.

### Change basic field values

When updating a `multiSelect` metadata field, one of the possible operations is
the `editField` operation, which can be used to change the field's `key`,
`displayName`, `description`, and `hidden` values.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editField",
    "fieldKey": "box_entity",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Box Entities",
      "key": "box_entities"
    }
  }
]
```

<Info>
  The `fieldKey` here represents the original key of the field to change. The
  `data.key` field is the new key of the field.
</Info>

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Add an option

Adding an option to a `multiSelect` field can be achieved through the
`addMultiSelectOption` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be set
to the key of the `multiSelect` field to change, and a `data` object with the
`key` of the new option to add.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "addMultiSelectOption",
    "fieldKey": "box_entity",
    "data": {
      "key": "Box (NL) BV"
    }
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "Box, Inc"},
  {"key": "Box.com (UK) Ltd."},
  {"key": "KK Box Japan"},
  {"key": "Box (NL) BV"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Reorder options

Reordering the options in a `multiSelect` field can be achieved through the
`reorderMultiSelectOptions` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to
be set to the key of the `multiSelect` field to change, and a
`multiSelectOptionKeys` array with the keys of the options in order.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "reorderMultiSelectOptions",
    "fieldKey": "box_entity",
    "multiSelectOptionKeys": [
      "Box, Inc",
      "Box.com (UK) Ltd.",
      "Box (NL) BV",
      "KK Box Japan"
    ]
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "Box, Inc"},
  {"key": "Box.com (UK) Ltd."},
  {"key": "Box (NL) BV"},
  {"key": "KK Box Japan"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  New options can not be added with this operation. This will affect existing
  instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Edit an option

Editing an option of a `multiSelect` field can be achieved through the
`editMultiSelectOption` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be
set  to the key of the `multiSelect` field to change, and a
`multiSelectOptionKey` to be set to the key of the field option. Finally, it
expects a `data` object with the new `key` of the field option.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editMultiSelectOption",
    "fieldKey": "box_entity",
    "multiSelectOptionKey": "Box (NL) BV",
    "data": {
      "key": "Box.nl BV"
    }
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "Box, Inc"},
  {"key": "Box.com (UK) Ltd."},
  {"key": "Box.nl BV"},
  {"key": "KK Box Japan"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Remove an option

Removing an option from a `multiSelect` field can be achieved through the
`removeMultiSelectOption` operation. The operation expects the `fieldKey` to be set
to the key of the `multiSelect` field to change, and a `multiSelectOptionKey`
to be set to the key of the field option to remove.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "removeMultiSelectOption",
    "fieldKey": "customer_state",
    "multiSelectOptionKey": "KK Box Japan"
  }
]
```

The list of options should now be as follows.

```json theme={null}
...
"options": [
  {"key": "Box, Inc"},
  {"key": "Box.com (UK) Ltd."},
  {"key": "Box.nl BV"}
]
...
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template. Any fields that were set
  to this value will have the value removed from its list of selected values.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# String metadata field
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/fields/string



A metadata field of type `string` is displayed to a user as a standard text-field.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

## Create a string field

A `string` field can be added to a metadata template either when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/create">creating a
metadata template</Link>, or when <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating a
template</Link> with the `addField` operation.

The required attributes for a `string` field are a `type`, a `displayName`, and a
`key`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Customer",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "string",
      "key": "name",
      "displayName": "Name",
      "description": "The customer's legal name",
      "hidden": false
    }
  ]
}
```

Optionally, a `description` can be provided that is shown to a user in the UI,
and the field can be set to `hidden` to hide it from users in the web and mobile
apps.

## Update a string field

A `string` template field can be updated by <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/update">updating the
template</Link> it belongs to. Updates to templates happen through
**operations** to ensure that any template that is already assigned to a file or
folder is updated as well.

When updating a `string` metadata field, the only relevant operation is the
`editField` operation, which can be used to change the field's `key`,
`displayName`, `description`, and `hidden` values.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editField",
    "fieldKey": "name",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Customer Name",
      "description": "The contact name at the customer",
      "key": "customer_name",
      "hidden": true
    }
  }
]
```

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Metadata
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/index



Metadata allows users and applications to define and store custom data
associated with files and folders.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

Metadata consists of key/value pairs that are assigned to a file or a folder.
For example, an important contract may have the key/value pairs of
`clientNumber: 820183` and `clientName: bioMedicalCorp`.

## Metadata terminology

Working with metadata requires a developer to work with a few
distinct types of resources.

* **Templates:**  A <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates">metadata template</Link> describes a re-usable set of key/value pairs that can be assigned to a file. For example, an `invoiceData` template might hold data about an invoice, having a field for the invoice ID as well as the customer ID.
* **Fields:**  A <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">metadata template field</Link> describes a specific piece of data within a metadata template. For example, the ID of an invoice might be represented as an `id` field on an `invoiceData` template.
* **Instances:** A <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances">metadata instance</Link> describes the relation between a template and a file or folder, including the values that are assigned for every field. For example, a user might have assigned an `invoiceData` metadata template to a file and provided 2 values, one for the invoice ID and one for the customer ID. You can assign up to 100 templates to specific file or folder.
* **Cascade Policies**: A <Link href="/guides/metadata/cascades">metadata cascade policy</Link> describes how metadata instances applied to a folder should be applied to any item within that folder. For example, a user might assign the same `invoiceData` metadata template to a project folder (including the 2 values), allowing them to automatically apply to all the files and folders within that project folder.
* **Queries:** A <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">metadata query</Link> provides a way to find files and folders by searching for the metadata attached to them. For example, to find all the files for an invoice with a certain ID, the query would look for all files and folders with the `invoiceData` template attached to it and a value of `id = :id`, where `:id` would be the value of the invoice.

## The purpose of metadata

Metadata can be used for many purposes. Enterprises may want to have a better
way to organize their digital assets for their marketing teams, or developers
may want to provide advanced content functionality such as facilitating
workflows or approvals.

For example, a `marketingCollateral` template may define where and when specific
marketing content should be used. Users can see a representation of the
template in the Box web application while navigating to a file preview.

To learn more, please visit [Box community articles][community].

[community]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196173-Using-Metadata


# Apply metadata to an item
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/instances/create



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A metadata template can be applied to a file or folder using the item's `id`,
the template's `templateKey` and `scope`, and a set of values for each field in
the template.

<Info>
  Metadata <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">scopes</Link> can be either `global` for templates available to
  all enterprises, `enterprise` for templates available to the current
  enterprise, or the `enterprise_:id` for templates belonging to an enterprise
  whose ID is the `:id` value in the scope name.
</Info>

<Warning>
  You can assign up to 100 templates to specific file or folder.
</Warning>

## Apply metadata to a file

To apply an instance of a metadata template to a file, call the
<Link href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-id-id">`POST /files/:file_id/metadata/:scope/:templateKey`</Link> API endpoint
with the file's `file_id`, the template's `scope` and `templateKey`,  and an
optional set of values for each <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">field</Link> in the template.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "audience": "internal",
         "documentType": "Q1 plans",
         "competitiveDocument": "no",
         "status": "active",
         "author": "Jones",
         "currentState": "proposal"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileMetadata.createFileMetadataById(
    file.id,
    'enterprise' as CreateFileMetadataByIdScope,
    templateKey,
    {
      ['name']: 'John',
      ['age']: 23,
      ['birthDate']: '2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z',
      ['countryCode']: 'US',
      ['sports']: ['basketball', 'tennis'],
    },
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_metadata.create_file_metadata_by_id(
      file.id,
      CreateFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE,
      template_key,
      {
          "name": "John",
          "age": 23,
          "birthDate": "2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z",
          "countryCode": "US",
          "sports": ["basketball", "tennis"],
      },
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileMetadata.CreateFileMetadataByIdAsync(fileId: file.Id, scope: CreateFileMetadataByIdScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey, requestBody: new Dictionary<string, object>() { { "name", "John" }, { "age", 23 }, { "birthDate", "2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z" }, { "countryCode", "US" }, { "sports", Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {"basketball","tennis"}) } });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileMetadata.createFileMetadataById(fileId: file.id, scope: CreateFileMetadataByIdScope.global, templateKey: "properties", requestBody: ["abc": "xyz"])
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileMetadata().createFileMetadataById(file.getId(), CreateFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey, mapOf(entryOf("name", "John"), entryOf("age", 23), entryOf("birthDate", "2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z"), entryOf("countryCode", "US"), entryOf("sports", Arrays.asList("basketball", "tennis"))))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  // Add property "foo" with value "bar" to the default metadata properties
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  file.createMetadata(new Metadata().add("/foo", "bar"));
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  metadata = {
      'foo': 'bar',
      'baz': 'quux',
  }

  applied_metadata = client.file(file_id='11111').metadata().create(metadata)
  print(f'Applied metadata in instance ID {applied_metadata["$id"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var metadataValues = new Dictionary<string, object>()
  {
      { "audience", "internal" },
      { "documentType", "Q1 plans" },
      { "competitiveDocument", "no" },
      { "status", "active" },
      { "author": "M. Jones" },
      { "currentState": "proposal" }
  };
  Dictionary<string, object> metadata = await client.MetadataManager
      .CreateFileMetadataAsync(fileId: "11111", metadataValues, "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var metadataValues = {
   audience: "internal",
   documentType: "Q1 plans",
   competitiveDocument: "no",
   status: "active",
   author: "Jones",
   currentState: "proposal"
  };
  client.files.addMetadata('11111', client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE, "marketingCollateral", metadataValues)
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     audience: 'internal',
     documentType: 'Q1 plans',
     competitiveDocument: 'no',
     status: 'active',
     author: 'Jones',
     currentState: 'proposal',
     '$type': 'marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe',
     '$parent': 'file_11111',
     '$id': '2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e',
     '$version': 0,
     '$typeVersion': 0,
     '$template': 'marketingCollateral',
     '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an file</Link>.
</Info>

<Warning>
  ## Tuple already exists error

  When there is already metadata applied to this file for the given metadata
  template, a error is returned with the error code `tuple_already_exists`. In
  this case, it this case the instance needs to be [updated
  instead](/guides/metadata/instances/update).
</Warning>

## Apply metadata to a folder

To apply an instance of a metadata template to a folder, call the
<Link href="/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-id-id">`POST /folders/:folder_id/metadata/:scope/:templateKey`</Link> API endpoint
with the folder's `folder_id`, the template's `scope` and `templateKey`,  and an
optional set of values for each <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">field</Link> in the template.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "audience": "internal",
         "documentType": "Q1 plans",
         "competitiveDocument": "no",
         "status": "active",
         "author": "Jones",
         "currentState": "proposal"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderMetadata.createFolderMetadataById(
    folder.id,
    'enterprise' as CreateFolderMetadataByIdScope,
    templateKey,
    {
      ['name']: 'John',
      ['age']: 23,
      ['birthDate']: '2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z',
      ['countryCode']: 'US',
      ['sports']: ['basketball', 'tennis'],
    },
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_metadata.create_folder_metadata_by_id(
      folder.id,
      CreateFolderMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE,
      template_key,
      {
          "name": "John",
          "age": 23,
          "birthDate": "2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z",
          "countryCode": "US",
          "sports": ["basketball", "tennis"],
      },
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderMetadata.CreateFolderMetadataByIdAsync(folderId: folder.Id, scope: CreateFolderMetadataByIdScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey, requestBody: new Dictionary<string, object>() { { "name", "John" }, { "age", 23 }, { "birthDate", "2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z" }, { "countryCode", "US" }, { "sports", Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {"basketball","tennis"}) } });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderMetadata.createFolderMetadataById(folderId: folder.id, scope: CreateFolderMetadataByIdScope.global, templateKey: "properties", requestBody: ["abc": "xyz"])
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderMetadata().createFolderMetadataById(folder.getId(), CreateFolderMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey, mapOf(entryOf("name", "John"), entryOf("age", 23), entryOf("birthDate", "2001-01-03T02:20:50.520Z"), entryOf("countryCode", "US"), entryOf("sports", Arrays.asList("basketball", "tennis"))))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  folder.createMetadata(new Metadata().add("/foo", "bar"));
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  metadata = {
      'foo': 'bar',
      'baz': 'quux',
  }

  applied_metadata = client.folder(folder_id='22222').metadata().create(metadata)
  print(f'Applied metadata in instance ID {applied_metadata["$id"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var metadataValues = new Dictionary<string, object>()
  {
      { "audience", "internal" },
      { "documentType", "Q1 plans" },
      { "competitiveDocument", "no" },
      { "status", "active" },
      { "author": "M. Jones" },
      { "currentState": "proposal" }
  };
  Dictionary<string, object> metadata = await client.MetadataManager
      .CreateFolderMetadataAsync(folderId: "11111", metadataValues, "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var metadataValues = {
   audience: "internal",
   documentType: "Q1 plans",
   competitiveDocument: "no",
   status: "active",
   author: "Jones",
   currentState: "proposal"
  };
  client.folders.addMetadata('11111', client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE, "marketingCollateral", metadataValues)
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     audience: 'internal',
     documentType: 'Q1 plans',
     competitiveDocument: 'no',
     status: 'active',
     author: 'Jones',
     currentState: 'proposal',
     '$type': 'marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe',
     '$parent': 'folder_11111',
     '$id': '2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e',
     '$version': 0,
     '$typeVersion': 0,
     '$template': 'marketingCollateral',
     '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an folder</Link>.
</Info>

<Warning>
  **Tuple already exists error**

  When there is already metadata applied to this folder for the given metadata
  template, a error is returned with the error code `tuple_already_exists`. In
  this case, it this case the instance needs to be [updated
  instead](/guides/metadata/instances/update).
</Warning>

## Request body

The body of the request can contain a value for each <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">field</Link> in the
template. To inspect what fields are present on a template, <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/get">inspect a
metadata metadata template</Link>.

For example, let's assume the following template.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "8120731a-41e4-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "type": "metadata_template",
  "templateKey": "productInfo",
  "scope": "enterprise_1234567",
  "displayName": "Product Info",
  "hidden": false,
  "copyInstanceOnItemCopy": true,
  "fields": [
    {
      "id": "feed71de-41e5-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
      "type": "string",
      "key": "name",
      "displayName": "Name",
      "hidden": false
    },
    {
      "id": "02b36bb6-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
      "type": "enum",
      "key": "category",
      "displayName": "Category",
      "hidden": false,
      "options": [
        {
          "id": "06a7bcc2-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
          "key": "SUVs"
        },
        {
          "id": "0a50df02-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
          "key": "Saloons"
        },
        {
          "id": "0e466be0-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
          "key": "Cabriolets"
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
```

This template has 2 <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">template fields</Link>, `name` and `category`. The `name`
field is a regular text field, and the `category` is an enum.

The request body to assign this template to a file or folder can include a value
for any of the fields on the template. It is possible for the body to have no
values for no fields.

In this case, a valid example would be the following request body.

```json theme={null}
{
  "name": "Model 3",
  "category": "SUVs"
}
```

<Note>
  One exception is a `global` scoped template with the key `properties` that can
  be used to assign any data to a template. Using this template, any set of
  key/value pairs can be assigned to a template.
</Note>

<Warning>
  The `category` field in this example is an `enum` field and needs to be one of
  the available options on the field.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Remove metadata from an item
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/instances/delete



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To remove an instance of a metadata template assigned to a file or
folder, use the item's `id`, and the template's `templateKey`
and `scope`.

<Info>
  Metadata <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">scopes</Link> can be either `global` for templates available to
  all enterprises, `enterprise` for templates available to the current
  enterprise, or the `enterprise_:id` for templates belonging to an enterprise
  whose ID is the `:id` value in the scope name.
</Info>

## Remove metadata from a file

To delete an instance of a metadata template from a file, call
the <Link href="/reference/delete-files-id-metadata-id-id">`DELETE /files/:file_id/metadata/:templateKey/schema`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileMetadata.deleteFileMetadataById(
    file.id,
    'enterprise' as DeleteFileMetadataByIdScope,
    templateKey,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_metadata.delete_file_metadata_by_id(
      file.id, DeleteFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, template_key
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileMetadata.DeleteFileMetadataByIdAsync(fileId: file.Id, scope: DeleteFileMetadataByIdScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileMetadata.deleteFileMetadataById(fileId: file.id, scope: DeleteFileMetadataByIdScope.global, templateKey: "properties")
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileMetadata().deleteFileMetadataById(file.getId(), DeleteFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  file.deleteMetadata("myMetadataTemplate");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.file(file_id='11111').metadata(scope='enterprise', template='myMetadata').delete()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataManager.DeleteFileMetadataAsync("11111", "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.deleteMetadata('67890', client.metadata.scopes.GLOBAL, client.metadata.templates.PROPERTIES)
   .then(() => {
    // removal succeeded — no value returned
   });;
  ```
</CodeGroup>

This API returns a `204 No Content` API response with no response body when
the instance has been successfully removed from the file.

## Remove metadata from a folder

To delete an instance of a metadata template, call
the <Link href="/reference/delete-folders-id-metadata-id-id">`DELETE /folders/:folder_id/metadata/:templateKey/schema`</Link>
API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderMetadata.deleteFolderMetadataById(
    folder.id,
    'enterprise' as DeleteFolderMetadataByIdScope,
    templateKey,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_metadata.delete_folder_metadata_by_id(
      folder.id, DeleteFolderMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, template_key
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderMetadata.DeleteFolderMetadataByIdAsync(folderId: folder.Id, scope: DeleteFolderMetadataByIdScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderMetadata.deleteFolderMetadataById(folderId: folder.id, scope: DeleteFolderMetadataByIdScope.global, templateKey: "properties")
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderMetadata().deleteFolderMetadataById(folder.getId(), DeleteFolderMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey)
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  folder.deleteMetadata("myMetadataTemplate");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.folder(folder_id='11111').metadata(scope='enterprise', template='myMetadata').delete()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataManager.DeleteFolderMetadataAsync("11111", "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.deleteMetadata('67890', client.metadata.scopes.GLOBAL, client.metadata.templates.PROPERTIES)
   .then(() => {
    // removal succeeded — no value returned
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

This API returns a `204 No Content` API response with no response body when
the instance has been successfully removed from the folder.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Get metadata on item
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/instances/get



Information about an instance of a metadata template assigned to a file or
folder can be retrieved using the item's `id`, and the template's `templateKey`
and `scope`.

<Info>
  Metadata <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">scopes</Link> can be either `global` for templates available to
  all enterprises, `enterprise` for templates available to the current
  enterprise, or the `enterprise_:id` for templates belonging to an enterprise
  whose ID is the `:id` value in the scope name.
</Info>

## Get metadata instance on file

To get an instance of a metadata template on a file, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata-id-id">`GET /files/:file_id/metadata/:scope/:templateKey`</Link> API endpoint
with the file's `file_id` and the template's `scope` and `templateKey`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileMetadata.getFileMetadataById(
    file.id,
    'global' as GetFileMetadataByIdScope,
    'properties',
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_metadata.get_file_metadata_by_id(
      file.id, GetFileMetadataByIdScope.GLOBAL, "properties"
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileMetadata.GetFileMetadataByIdAsync(fileId: file.Id, scope: GetFileMetadataByIdScope.Global, templateKey: "properties");
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileMetadata.getFileMetadataById(fileId: file.id, scope: GetFileMetadataByIdScope.global, templateKey: "properties")
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileMetadata().getFileMetadataById(file.getId(), GetFileMetadataByIdScope.GLOBAL, "properties")
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  // Get the default free-form metadata properties
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  Metadata metadata = file.getMetadata();

  // Unknown type metadata field, you can test for type or try to get as any type
  JsonValue unknownValue = metadata.getValue("/someField");

  // String or Enum metadata fields
  String stringValue = metadata.getString("/author");

  // Float metadata fields can be interpreted as any numeric type
  float floatValue = metadata.getFloat("/price");

  // Date metadata fields
  Date dateValue = metadata.getDate("/deadline");

  // Multiselect metadata fields
  List<String> multiSelectValues = metadata.getMultiSelect("/categories");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  metadata = client.file(file_id='11111').metadata(scope='enterprise', template='myMetadata').get()
  print(f'Got metadata instance {metadata["$id"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  Dictionary<string, object> metadata = await client.MetadataManager.
      .GetFileMetadataAsync(fileId: "11111", "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.getMetadata('11111', client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE, 'marketingCollateral')
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     audience: 'internal',
     documentType: 'Q1 plans',
     competitiveDocument: 'no',
     status: 'active',
     author: 'Jones',
     currentState: 'proposal',
     '$type': 'marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe',
     '$parent': 'file_11111',
     '$id': '2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e',
     '$version': 0,
     '$typeVersion': 0,
     '$template': 'marketingCollateral',
     '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an file</Link>.
</Info>

## Get metadata instance on folder

To get an instance of a metadata template on a folder, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata-id-id">`GET /folders/:folder_id/metadata/:scope/:templateKey`</Link> API endpoint
with the folder's `folder_id` and the template's `scope` and `templateKey`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderMetadata.getFolderMetadataById(
    folder.id,
    'global' as GetFolderMetadataByIdScope,
    'properties',
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_metadata.get_folder_metadata_by_id(
      folder.id, GetFolderMetadataByIdScope.GLOBAL, "properties"
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderMetadata.GetFolderMetadataByIdAsync(folderId: folder.Id, scope: GetFolderMetadataByIdScope.Global, templateKey: "properties");
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderMetadata.getFolderMetadataById(folderId: folder.id, scope: GetFolderMetadataByIdScope.global, templateKey: "properties")
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderMetadata().getFolderMetadataById(folder.getId(), GetFolderMetadataByIdScope.GLOBAL, "properties")
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  Metadata metadata = folder.getMetadata();

  // Unknown type metadata field, you can test for type or try to get as any type
  JsonValue unknownValue = metadata.getValue("/someField");

  // String or Enum metadata fields
  String stringValue = metadata.getString("/author");

  // Float metadata fields can be interpreted as any numeric type
  float floatValue = metadata.getFloat("/price");

  // Date metadata fields
  Date dateValue = metadata.getDate("/deadline");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  metadata = client.folder(folder_id='22222').metadata(scope='enterprise', template='myMetadata').get()
  print(f'Got metadata instance {metadata["$id"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  Dictionary<string, object> metadata = await client.MetadataManager.
      .GetFolderMetadataAsync(folderId: "11111", "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.getMetadata('11111', client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE, 'marketingCollateral')
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     audience: 'internal',
     documentType: 'Q1 plans',
     competitiveDocument: 'no',
     status: 'active',
     author: 'Jones',
     currentState: 'proposal',
     '$type': 'marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe',
     '$parent': 'folder_11111',
     '$id': '2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e',
     '$version': 0,
     '$typeVersion': 0,
     '$template': 'marketingCollateral',
     '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an folder</Link>.
</Info>

[e_on_folder]: /reference/get-folders-id-metadata-id-id

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Metadata instances
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/instances/index



A <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances">metadata instance</Link> describes the relation between
a <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates">metadata template</Link> and a file or folder. It includes the values
that are assigned for every field of the template.

For example, a user might have assigned an `invoiceData` metadata template to a
file and provided 2 values, one for the invoice ID and one for the customer ID.

You can assign up to 100 templates to specific file or folder.


# List all metadata on an item
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/instances/list



Metadata instances can be listed for either a file or a folder.

## List metadata on a file

To list all metadata instances on a file, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata">`GET /files/:file_id/metadata`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileMetadata.getFileMetadata(file.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_metadata.get_file_metadata(file.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileMetadata.GetFileMetadataAsync(fileId: file.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.fileMetadata.getFileMetadata(fileId: file.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileMetadata().getFileMetadata(file.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  Iterable<Metadata> metadataList = file.getAllMetadata();
  for (Metadata metadata : metadataList) {
      // Do something with the metadata.
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  file_metadata = client.file(file_id='11111').get_all_metadata()
  for instance in file_metadata:
      if 'foo' in instance:
          print(f'Metadata instance {instance["id"]} has value "{instance["foo"]}" for foo')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxMetadataTemplateCollection<Dictionary<string, object>> metadataInstances = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetAllFileMetadataTemplatesAsync(fileId: "11111");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.getAllMetadata('11111')
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     entries: 
     [ { currentDocumentStage: 'Init',
      '$type': 'documentFlow-452b4c9d-c3ad-4ac7-b1ad-9d5192f2fc5f',
      '$parent': 'file_11111',
      '$id': '50ba0dba-0f89-4395-b867-3e057c1f6ed9',
      '$version': 4,
      '$typeVersion': 2,
      needsApprovalFrom: 'Smith',
      '$template': 'documentFlow',
      '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' },
      { '$type': 'productInfo-9d7b6993-b09e-4e52-b197-e42f0ea995b9',
      '$parent': 'file_11111',
      '$id': '15d1014a-06c2-47ad-9916-014eab456194',
      '$version': 2,
      '$typeVersion': 1,
      skuNumber: 45334223,
      description: 'Watch',
      '$template': 'productInfo',
      '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' },
      { Popularity: '25',
      '$type': 'properties',
      '$parent': 'file_11111',
      '$id': 'b6f36cbc-fc7a-4eda-8889-130f350cc057',
      '$version': 0,
      '$typeVersion': 2,
      '$template': 'properties',
      '$scope': 'global' } ],
     limit: 100 }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  This API does not support paging and it will always return all of the metadata
  instances for this file.
</Warning>

## List metadata on a folder

To list all metadata instances on any folder (except for the root folder), call
the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-metadata">`GET /folders/:file_id/metadata`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/metadata" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderMetadata.getFolderMetadata(folder.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_metadata.get_folder_metadata(folder.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderMetadata.GetFolderMetadataAsync(folderId: folder.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.folderMetadata.getFolderMetadata(folderId: folder.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderMetadata().getFolderMetadata(folder.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder file = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  Iterable<Metadata> metadataList = folder.getAllMetadata();
  for (Metadata metadata : metadataList) {
      // Do something with the metadata.
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  folder_metadata = client.folder(folder_id='22222').get_all_metadata()
  for instance in folder_metadata:
      if 'foo' in instance:
          print(f'Metadata instance {instance["id"]} has value "{instance["foo"]}" for foo')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxMetadataTemplateCollection<Dictionary<string, object>> metadataInstances = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetAllFolderMetadataTemplatesAsync(folderId: "11111");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.getAllMetadata('11111')
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     entries: 
     [ { currentDocumentStage: 'Init',
      '$type': 'documentFlow-452b4c9d-c3ad-4ac7-b1ad-9d5192f2fc5f',
      '$parent': 'folder_11111',
      '$id': '50ba0dba-0f89-4395-b867-3e057c1f6ed9',
      '$version': 4,
      '$typeVersion': 2,
      needsApprovalFrom: 'Smith',
      '$template': 'documentFlow',
      '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' },
      { '$type': 'productInfo-9d7b6993-b09e-4e52-b197-e42f0ea995b9',
      '$parent': 'folder_11111',
      '$id': '15d1014a-06c2-47ad-9916-014eab456194',
      '$version': 2,
      '$typeVersion': 1,
      skuNumber: 45334223,
      description: 'Watch',
      '$template': 'productInfo',
      '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' },
      { Popularity: '25',
      '$type': 'properties',
      '$parent': 'folder_11111',
      '$id': 'b6f36cbc-fc7a-4eda-8889-130f350cc057',
      '$version': 0,
      '$typeVersion': 2,
      '$template': 'properties',
      '$scope': 'global' } ],
     limit: 100 }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  This API does not support paging and it will always return all of the metadata
  instances for this file. This API can not be used on the root folder with ID `0`.
</Warning>

[get_metadata_folder]: /reference/get-folders-id-metadata

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Update metadata on an item
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/instances/update



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Updating the metadata applied to a file or folder can be done by using the
item's `id`, the template's `templateKey` and `scope`, and a set of JSON
operations to manipulate the data on the template instance.

## Update metadata on a file

To update the metadata to a file, call the
<Link href="/reference/put-files-id-metadata-id-id">`PUT /files/:file_id/metadata/:scope/:templateKey`</Link> API endpoint
with the file's `file_id`, the template's `scope` and `templateKey`, set of JSON
operations to manipulate the data on the template instance.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json-patch+json" \
       -d '[
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/competitiveDocument",
            "value": "no"
          },
          {
            "op": "remove",
            "path": "/competitiveDocument"
          },
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/status",
            "value": "active"
          },
          {
            "op": "replace",
            "path": "/status",
            "value": "inactive"
          },
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/author",
            "value": "Jones"
          },
          {
            "op": "copy",
            "from": "/author",
            "path": "/editor"
          },
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/currentState",
            "value": "proposal"
          },
          {
            "op": "move",
            "from": "/currentState",
            "path": "/previousState"
          },
          {
            "op": "add",
            "path": "/currentState",
            "value": "reviewed"
          }
        ]'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.fileMetadata.updateFileMetadataById(
    file.id,
    'enterprise' as UpdateFileMetadataByIdScope,
    templateKey,
    [
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/name',
        value: 'Jack',
      } satisfies UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/age',
        value: 24,
      } satisfies UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/birthDate',
        value: '2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z',
      } satisfies UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/countryCode',
        value: 'CA',
      } satisfies UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/sports',
        value: ['football'],
      } satisfies UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody,
    ],
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.file_metadata.update_file_metadata_by_id(
      file.id,
      UpdateFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE,
      template_key,
      [
          UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/name",
              value="Jack",
          ),
          UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE, path="/age", value=24
          ),
          UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/birthDate",
              value="2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z",
          ),
          UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/countryCode",
              value="CA",
          ),
          UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/sports",
              value=["football"],
          ),
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FileMetadata.UpdateFileMetadataByIdAsync(fileId: file.Id, scope: UpdateFileMetadataByIdScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey, requestBody: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/name", Value = "Jack" },new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/age", Value = 24 },new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/birthDate", Value = "2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z" },new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/countryCode", Value = "CA" },new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/sports", Value = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {"football"}) }}));
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFileMetadata().updateFileMetadataById(file.getId(), UpdateFileMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey, Arrays.asList(new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/name").value("Jack").build(), new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/age").value(24L).build(), new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/birthDate").value("2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z").build(), new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/countryCode").value("CA").build(), new UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFileMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/sports").value(Arrays.asList("football")).build()))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  file.updateMetadata(new Metadata("templateScope", "templateKey").add("/foo", "bar"));
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  file_obj = client.file(file_id='11111')
  file_metadata = file_obj.metadata(scope='enterprise', template='myMetadata')

  updates = file_metadata.start_update()
  updates.add('/foo', 'bar')
  updates.update('/baz', 'murp', old_value='quux')  # Ensure the old value was "quux" before updating to "murp"

  updated_metadata = file_metadata.update(updates)
  print('Updated metadata on file!')
  print(f'foo is now {updated_metadata["foo"]} and baz is now {updated_metadata["baz"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var updates = new List<BoxMetadataUpdate>()
  {
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/competitiveDocument",
          Value = "no"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.remove,
          Path = "/competitiveDocument"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/status",
          Value = "active"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.replace,
          Path = "/competitiveDocument",
          Value = "inactive"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/author",
          Value = "Jones"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.copy,
          From="/author",
          Path = "/editor"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/currentState",
          Value = "proposal"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.move,
          From = "/currentState",
          Path = "/previousState"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.add,
          Path = "/currentState",
          Value = "reviewed"
      }
  };
  Dictionary<string, object> updatedMetadata = await client.MetadataManager
      .UpdateFileMetadataAsync("11111", updates, "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var updates = [
   { op: 'test', path: '/competitiveDocument', value: 'no' },
   { op: 'remove', path: '/competitiveDocument' },
   { op: 'test', path: '/status', value: 'active' },
   { op: 'replace', path: '/status', value: 'inactive' },
   { op: 'test', path: '/author', value: 'Jones' },
   { op: 'copy', from: '/author', path: '/editor' },
   { op: 'test', path: '/currentState', value: 'proposal' },
   { op: 'move', from: '/currentState', path: '/previousState' },
   { op: 'add', path: '/currentState', value: 'reviewed' }
  ];
  client.files.updateMetadata('11111', client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE, "marketingCollateral", updates)
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     audience: 'internal',
     documentType: 'Q1 plans',
     status: 'inactive',
     author: 'Jones',
     '$type': 'marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe',
     '$parent': 'file_11111',
     '$id': '2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e',
     '$version': 1,
     '$typeVersion': 0,
     editor: 'Jones',
     previousState: 'proposal',
     currentState: 'reviewed',
     '$template': 'marketingCollateral',
     '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  The authenticated user needs to have write access on the file to be able to
  write changes to the metadata on a file.
</Info>

## Update metadata on a folder

To update the metadata to a folder, call the
<Link href="/reference/put-folders-id-metadata-id-id">`PUT /folders/:folder_id/metadata/:scope/:templateKey`</Link> API
endpoint with the folder's `folder_id`, the template's `scope` and
`templateKey`, set of JSON operations to manipulate the data on the template instance.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/metadata/enterprise_27335/blueprintTemplate" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json-patch+json" \
       -d '[
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/competitiveDocument",
            "value": "no"
          },
          {
            "op": "remove",
            "path": "/competitiveDocument"
          },
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/status",
            "value": "active"
          },
          {
            "op": "replace",
            "path": "/status",
            "value": "inactive"
          },
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/author",
            "value": "Jones"
          },
          {
            "op": "copy",
            "from": "/author",
            "path": "/editor"
          },
          {
            "op": "test",
            "path": "/currentState",
            "value": "proposal"
          },
          {
            "op": "move",
            "from": "/currentState",
            "path": "/previousState"
          },
          {
            "op": "add",
            "path": "/currentState",
            "value": "reviewed"
          }
        ]'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.folderMetadata.updateFolderMetadataById(
    folder.id,
    'enterprise' as UpdateFolderMetadataByIdScope,
    templateKey,
    [
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/name',
        value: 'Jack',
      } satisfies UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/age',
        value: 24,
      } satisfies UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/birthDate',
        value: '2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z',
      } satisfies UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/countryCode',
        value: 'CA',
      } satisfies UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody,
      {
        op: 'replace' as UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField,
        path: '/sports',
        value: ['football'],
      } satisfies UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody,
    ],
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.folder_metadata.update_folder_metadata_by_id(
      folder.id,
      UpdateFolderMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE,
      template_key,
      [
          UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/name",
              value="Jack",
          ),
          UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE, path="/age", value=24
          ),
          UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/birthDate",
              value="2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z",
          ),
          UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/countryCode",
              value="CA",
          ),
          UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody(
              op=UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE,
              path="/sports",
              value=["football"],
          ),
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.FolderMetadata.UpdateFolderMetadataByIdAsync(folderId: folder.Id, scope: UpdateFolderMetadataByIdScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey, requestBody: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/name", Value = "Jack" },new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/age", Value = 24 },new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/birthDate", Value = "2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z" },new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/countryCode", Value = "CA" },new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody() { Op = UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.Replace, Path = "/sports", Value = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {"football"}) }}));
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFolderMetadata().updateFolderMetadataById(folder.getId(), UpdateFolderMetadataByIdScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey, Arrays.asList(new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/name").value("Jack").build(), new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/age").value(24L).build(), new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/birthDate").value("2000-01-03T02:20:50.520Z").build(), new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/countryCode").value("CA").build(), new UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBody.Builder().op(UpdateFolderMetadataByIdRequestBodyOpField.REPLACE).path("/sports").value(Arrays.asList("football")).build()))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "id");
  folder.updateMetadata(new Metadata().add("/foo", "bar"));
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  folder = client.folder(folder_id='22222')
  folder_metadata = folder.metadata(scope='enterprise', template='myMetadata')

  updates = folder_metadata.start_update()
  updates.add('/foo', 'bar')
  updates.update('/baz', 'murp', old_value='quux')  # Ensure the old value was "quux" before updating to "murp"

  updated_metadata = folder_metadata.update(updates)
  print('Updated metadata on folder!')
  print(f'foo is now {updated_metadata["foo"]} and baz is now {updated_metadata["baz"]}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var updates = new List<BoxMetadataUpdate>()
  {
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/competitiveDocument",
          Value = "no"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.remove,
          Path = "/competitiveDocument"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/status",
          Value = "active"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.replace,
          Path = "/competitiveDocument",
          Value = "inactive"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/author",
          Value = "Jones"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.copy,
          From="/author",
          Path = "/editor"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
          Path = "/currentState",
          Value = "proposal"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.move,
          From = "/currentState",
          Path = "/previousState"
      },
      new BoxMetadataUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataUpdateOp.add,
          Path = "/currentState",
          Value = "reviewed"
      }
  };
  Dictionary<string, object> updatedMetadata = await client.MetadataManager
      .UpdateFolderMetadataAsync("11111", updates, "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var updates = [
   { op: 'test', path: '/competitiveDocument', value: 'no' },
   { op: 'remove', path: '/competitiveDocument' },
   { op: 'test', path: '/status', value: 'active' },
   { op: 'replace', path: '/status', value: 'inactive' },
   { op: 'test', path: '/author', value: 'Jones' },
   { op: 'copy', from: '/author', path: '/editor' },
   { op: 'test', path: '/currentState', value: 'proposal' },
   { op: 'move', from: '/currentState', path: '/previousState' },
   { op: 'add', path: '/currentState', value: 'reviewed' }
  ];
  client.folders.updateMetadata('11111', client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE, "marketingCollateral", updates)
   .then(metadata => {
    /* metadata -> {
     audience: 'internal',
     documentType: 'Q1 plans',
     status: 'inactive',
     author: 'Jones',
     '$type': 'marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe',
     '$parent': 'folder_11111',
     '$id': '2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e',
     '$version': 1,
     '$typeVersion': 0,
     editor: 'Jones',
     previousState: 'proposal',
     currentState: 'reviewed',
     '$template': 'marketingCollateral',
     '$scope': 'enterprise_12345' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  The authenticated user needs to have write access on the file to be able to
  write changes to the metadata on a file.
</Info>

## JSON Operations

Updating an piece of metadata follow the [JSON-Patch specification][jsonpatch],
which is represented as a list of operation objects.

For metadata instances, these operations can be either `add`, `replace`,
`remove` , `test`, `move`, or `copy`. Every operation exists out of an `op`
name, the [JSON Pointer][pointer] `path` that points to the field to changes,
and an optional `value` or `from` value depending on the operation being made.

```json theme={null}
[
  { "op": "test", "path": "/competitiveDocument", "value": "no" },
  { "op": "remove", "path": "/competitiveDocument" },
  { "op": "test", "path": "/status", "value": "active" },
  { "op": "replace", "path": "/status", "value": "inactive" },
  { "op": "test", "path": "/author", "value": "Jones" },
  { "op": "copy", "from": "/author", "path": "/editor" },
  { "op": "move", "from": "/currentState", "path": "/previousState" },
  { "op": "add", "path": "/currentState", "value": "reviewed" }
]
```

<Warning>
  When editing metadata, only values that adhere to the metadata template schema
  will be accepted. The update is applied completely or not at all. If any
  errors occur during the application of the update operations, the metadata
  instance is not changed.

  The template instance can only be updated if the template has already been
  assigned to the file or folder.
</Warning>

### Add a new value

To add a new value on a template, use the `add` operation.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "add",
    "path": "/name",
    "value": "Model 3"
  }
]
```

This will add the `name` field with a value of `Model 3` . Before this
operation, the template did not have a value for the `name` field.

```json theme={null}
{
  // "name": null, // old value
  "name": "Model 3", // new value
  "category": "SUVs",
  "$type": "productInfo-8120731a-41e4-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$parent": "folder_3456",
  "$id": "22ba8c96-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$version": 3,
  "$typeVersion": 0,
  "$template": "productInfo",
  "$scope": "enterprise_1234567",
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Warning>
  For `enum` and `multiSelect` fields this new value needs to be one of the
  valid options for the field.
</Warning>

### Replace a value

To replace a value on a template, use the `replace` operation.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "replace",
    "path": "/name",
    "value": "Model 4"
  }
]
```

This will replace the `name` field value `Model 3` with a new value of `Model
4`.

```json theme={null}
{
  // "name": "Model 3", # Old value
  "name": "Model 3", // new value
  "category": "SUVs",
  "$type": "productInfo-8120731a-41e4-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$parent": "folder_3456",
  "$id": "22ba8c96-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$version": 3,
  "$typeVersion": 0,
  "$template": "productInfo",
  "$scope": "enterprise_1234567",
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Warning>
  For `enum` and `multiSelect` fields this new value needs to be one of the
  valid options for the field.
</Warning>

### Copy a value

To copy a value from one field to another, use the `copy` operation.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "copy",
    "from": "/name",
    "path": "/displayName"
  }
]
```

This will add the `displayName` field with a value that matches the value of the
`name` field. Before this operation, the template did not have a value for the
`displayName` field.

```json theme={null}
{
  "name": "Model 3",
  "displayName": "Model 3", // new value, copied from the name
  "category": "SUVs",
  "$type": "productInfo-8120731a-41e4-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$parent": "folder_3456",
  "$id": "22ba8c96-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$version": 3,
  "$typeVersion": 0,
  "$template": "productInfo",
  "$scope": "enterprise_1234567",
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Warning>
  For `enum` and `multiSelect` fields this new value needs to be one of the
  valid options for the field.
</Warning>

### Move a value

To move a value from one field to another, use the `move` operation.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "copy",
    "from": "/name",
    "path": "/displayName"
  }
]
```

This will add the `displayName` field with a value that matches the value of the
`name` field. Before this operation, the template did not have a value for the
`displayName` field. After this operation, the `name` field no longer exists.

```json theme={null}
{
  // "name": "Model 3", // old value, no longer present now
  "displayName": "Model 3", // new value, copied from the name
  "category": "SUVs",
  "$type": "productInfo-8120731a-41e4-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$parent": "folder_3456",
  "$id": "22ba8c96-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$version": 3,
  "$typeVersion": 0,
  "$template": "productInfo",
  "$scope": "enterprise_1234567",
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Warning>
  For `enum` and `multiSelect` fields this new value needs to be one of the
  valid options for the field.
</Warning>

### Remove a value

To remove a value from the metadata instance, use the `remove` operation.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "remove",
    "path": "/name"
  }
]
```

This will remove the `name` field completely from the metadata instance.

```json theme={null}
{
  // "name": "Model 3", // old value, no longer present now
  "category": "SUVs",
  "$type": "productInfo-8120731a-41e4-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$parent": "folder_3456",
  "$id": "22ba8c96-41e6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125",
  "$version": 3,
  "$typeVersion": 0,
  "$template": "productInfo",
  "$scope": "enterprise_1234567",
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Warning>
  For `enum` and `multiSelect` fields this new value needs to be one of the
  valid options for the field.
</Warning>

### Test a value

To test that a field has the value you expect, use the `test` operation.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "test",
    "path": "/name",
    "value": "Model 4"
  }
]
```

When a test fails the API will not perform any of the operations and return a
`409 Conflict` HTTP status with the following error.

```json theme={null}
{
  "message": "value differs from expectations",
  "code": "failed_json_patch_application",
  "request_id": "bzxgr1gbcq5h67pj"
}
```

The main purpose of this operation is to validate that the values on the
metadata instance are as expected before any operations are performed. The Box
API either performs all changes or none, and therefore a failing test is very
useful to ensure all values are expected before any transformation is applied.

[jsonpatch]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6902

[pointer]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6901

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Comparison to regular search
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/comparison



At the surface the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read">Metadata Query API</Link> seems very similar to the
<Link href="/reference/get-search">Search for content API</Link>, but there are several important
differences in how they operate. At a high level the Metadata Query API is
optimized for exactness and throughput, while regular search is optimized for
relevance to a human user.

## Deep comparison

|                   | <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read">Metadata Query API</Link>                                                                                                   | <Link href="/reference/get-search">Search API</Link>                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| What is indexed?  | This API only returns files/folders based on the values in the metadata templates that are searched.                                                                                   | This API returns files, folders and web links based on values in the item names, descriptions, contents (up to the first 10,000 bytes) as well as the associated metadata template instances.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Indexing time     | This API returns accurate results as soon as metadata has been added, removed, updated or deleted for a file or folder.                                                                | This API is subject to a search indexing delay, which is typically 10 minutes, yet may be longer in some cases. This means that items may not be returned for more than 10 minutes after metadata has been updated.                                                                                                                                     |
| Matching          | This API uses exact matching based on SQL conventions. Results are returned based on a specified sort order.                                                                           | This API uses fuzzy matching and may return results that vary based on string tokenization, removal of special characters, and other search concepts. Result order is based on either relevance or the updated date of the item.                                                                                                                        |
| Conditional logic | This API supports multi-part boolean expressions with comparison operators.                                                                                                            | This API has limited support for querying by metadata. It only supports querying 1 metadata template at a time and only allows simple query operations.                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Response type     | This API returns both the matched file/folder and the associated metadata matched by the query.                                                                                        | This API only returns the matched item. A subsequent API call is needed to return each item's metadata.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Throughput        | This API is currently subject to per-user rate limits and to a 10 requests per second per enterprise limit.                                                                            | This API supports 6 searches per second per user, up to 60 searches per minute and 12 searches per second per enterprise.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Scale             | This API has no limit on the number of items with the specified metadata template that can be returned. It is recommended to only send queries which match no more than 2,000 results. | This API has no limit on number of items with the specified metadata template that can be returned, yet the response time increases significantly as the number of items matching the search grows. This API does have a limit of up to 10 million results for a query. It is recommended to only send queries which match no more than 50,000 results. |
| Scope             | This API is always limited to the content to which the user has access                                                                                                                 | This API may be either limited to the content to which the user has access (`​user_content​`) or to all content in the enterprise (`​enterprise_content​`).                                                                                                                                                                                             |

<Warning>
  Search API calls that match more than 10,000 results may result in slight
  changes in relevance. This may result in duplicate results and results that
  are not returned. Search should not be considered an ​exact matching​ solution
  on large data sets.
</Warning>

## Scenarios

The following are some example scenarios that may help you decide what API to use.

### Searching an entire enterprise for a term

You want to find all content in an enterprise with content or metadata that
matches the keyword `Guarantee`.

In this case the <Link href="/reference/get-search">Search API</Link> is recommended. This API matches terms
in both content and metadata, and can be scoped to find all content in the
entire enterprise.

### Searching for multiple metadata values

You want to find all documents with the metadata template `​Contract​` having a
value greater than \$100,000, a renewal date in 2019, and which are ​not​ associated
with account number `​1234`.

In this case the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read">Metadata Query API</Link> is recommended. With a metadata
query you can write boolean expressions that evaluate multiple fields in
a metadata template, such as a number, a date, and a string.

### Mixing metadata and content search

You want to find all documents with the metadata template `​Contract​` having a
value greater than \$100,000, renewal date in 2019, which are ​not​ associated with
account number `​1234`, ​and which contain the term “Sale” in the title or document
body.

This scenarios is currently **not supported**. At the moment neither of the APIs
supports mixing both fuzzy search (searching for "Sale") and the boolean
expression matching metadata fields.


# Create a query
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/create



A metadata query is a `POST` request to the ​`/metadata_queries/execute_read`-
endpoint, in which the body contains all the parts of the metadata query. Most
important here are the `from` attribute that specifies the template to search
for, the `ancestor_folder_id` to specify the folder to search in, and the
`query` to determine any template fields to search by.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_queries/execute_read \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
    -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
    -d '{
      "from": "enterprise_123456.contractTemplate",
      "query": "amount >= :value",
      "query_params": {
        "value": 100
      },
      "fields": [
        "name",
        "metadata.enterprise_123456.contractTemplate.customerName",
        "metadata.enterprise_123456.contractTemplate.amount"
      ],
      "ancestor_folder_id": "5555",
      "order_by": [
        {
          "field_key": "amount",
          "direction": "asc"
        }
      ],
      "limit": 100
    }'
```

For more details about all the available parameters, check out any of our other
<Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">metadata query guides</Link>, or the associated <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read">endpoint
reference</Link>.

<Card href="/guides/metadata/queries/syntax" title="Learn more about the query syntax" />

## Response

Any files or folders that match the query are returned in the API response.
The body of the response is a JSON object with a list of `entries` for each file
or folder, and a `next_marker` value that you can use to find the next page of
results. Each of the entries will represent the file or
folder that matched the query, and only any fields explicitly requested in the
`field` parameter are returned.

```json theme={null}
{
  "entries": [
    {
      "type": "file",
      "id": "1617554169109",
      "name": "My Contract.docx",
      "metadata": {
        "enterprise_123456": {
          "contractTemplate": {
            "$parent": "file_161753469109",
            "$scope": "enterprise_123456",
            "$template": "contractTemplate",
            "$version": 0,
            "customerName": "Phoenix Corp",
            "amount": 100
          }
        }
      }
    }
  ],
  "limit": 20,
  "next_marker": "AAAAAmVYB1FWec8GH6yWu2nwmanfMh07IyYInaa7DZDYjgO1H4KoLW29vPlLY173OKsci6h6xGh61gG73gnaxoS+o0BbI1/h6le6cikjlupVhASwJ2Cj0tOD9wlnrUMHHw3/ISf+uuACzrOMhN6d5fYrbidPzS6MdhJOejuYlvsg4tcBYzjauP3+VU51p77HFAIuObnJT0ff"
}
```

By default this API returns `20` items per page, but more items can be requested
using marker-based pagination.

<Card href="/guides/metadata/queries/pagination" title="Learn more about paginating query results" />


# Common errors
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/errors



Metadata query API errors mostly are <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors">similar to errors returned by other
APIs</Link>, however at this time some incorrect client requests may result in
a server-side error with a HTTP status code in the `5XX` range rather than an
appropriate `400 Bad Request` error.

This is a known issue which will be addressed soon.

## Incorrect template key and scope

A common error is to use an incorrect value for the the `from` value in the
request, which can result in various errors in the `HTTP 4XX` range.

Without a correct `from` value the API does not know what template to search
for. The value in `from` must be formed as `scope.templateKey`.

In this case `scope` is your enterprise's template scope, which looks something
like `enterprise_123456`. The numeric value here is your enterprise's ID. Any
scope that does not match this format, including the `global` scope and the
`enterprise` shorthand scope, will return an error.

The `templateKey` is the unique key for the metadata template within your
enterprise. The API returns an error when a template with the given key does not
exist, or when the key is used within the wrong enterprise were the key does not
exist.

<Note>
  The <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-enterprise">List all metadata templates for enterprise endpoint</Link>
  can be used to list all templates available in your enterprise,
  including their `scope` and `templateKey`.
</Note>

## Missing value in `query_param`

A common error is to forget to include a query argument in the `query_params`
object, which results in a `HTTP 400` error with a code of
`unexpected_json_type`.

Without all arguments present in the `query_params` the API can not compile your
request into a full query.

For example, assume your search `query` is as follows
`amount >= :value AND status = :status`. All of the arguments that start with a
colon `:` will need to be present in the `query_params`. In this case your query
parameters would have to look something like this. Missing out on any of these
values will result in an error.

```json theme={null}
"query_params": {
  "value": 100,
  "status": "active"
}
```

<Note>
  The name of each argument can configured to your liking and does not need to
  match the field key. The only requirement is that it starts with a `:`.
</Note>

## Missing `ancestor_folder_id`

A common error is to forget the `ancestor_folder_id` in the request, which
results in a `HTTP 400` error with a code of `bad_request`.

Without the `ancestor_folder_id` value the API does not know what folder to
search for results in. When in doubt a value of `0` can be used for the user's
root folder.


# Metadata queries
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/index



A metadata query provides a way to find files and
folders by searching for the metadata attached to them.

For example, to find the all files for an invoice with a certain ID, the query
would look for all files and folders with the `invoiceData` template attached to
it and a value of `id = :id`, where `:id` would be the value of the invoice.

## Authentication

The metadata query API can be used by applications that have been authenticated
using traditional <Link href="/guides/authentication/oauth2">OAuth 2.0</Link> or <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt">JWT</Link>.


# Query item fields
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/item-fields



Item fields are searchable metadata fields that describe items (files and folders) in Box. These fields expose built-in item properties such as name, type, owner, and timestamps with defined data types so you can filter, sort, and search Box content.

## Supported item fields

The following table lists the item fields you can use in metadata queries.

| Field name                  | Description                                                                                      | Sorting |
| --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------- |
| `item.type`                 | Type of the item: `file` or `folder`                                                             | Yes     |
| `item.name`                 | Name of the item                                                                                 | Yes     |
| `item.description`          | Description of the item                                                                          | Yes     |
| `item.extension`            | File extension, such as `pdf`, `jpeg`, `xlsx`, `txt`, `xls`, `png`, `log`, or `csv`              | Yes     |
| `item.owned_by`             | Owner of the item, for example `user_123`                                                        | Yes     |
| `item.owner_enterprise_id`  | Enterprise ID of the item owner, for example `1234`                                              | Yes     |
| `item.created_at`           | Date and time when the item was created in Box                                                   | Yes     |
| `item.modified_at`          | Date and time when the item was last updated in Box                                              | Yes     |
| `item.content_created_at`   | Date and time when the item was originally created, which might be before it was uploaded to Box | Yes     |
| `item.content_modified_at`  | Date and time when the item was last updated, which might be before it was uploaded to Box       | Yes     |
| `item.quick_search_content` | Full-text search across item name, description, and metadata fields                              | No      |


# Limitations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/limitations



A few limits apply to the the metadata query APIs.

## Files and folders

​A metadata query will only return items (files or folders) to which the
requesting user has at least `previewer` access.

## Enterprise vs Global templates

A metadata query only works with metadata templates that have been created by
that enterprise. A query will not return results based on the content of free
form key-value pairs stored in the `​global.properties` template.

## Classification metadata templates

Box uses metadata templates to power its content classification. These metadata
templates can not be used in metadata queries, as they will most likely run
into issues regarding large results sets. More on this next.

There are no immediate plans to start supporting these queries in the future.

## Recommended result set size

Where possible, it is recommended to only send requests for which the result
set is less than 2,000 items.​ The ​result set​ is the entire collection of
files and folders that match the metadata query exclusively based on evaluating
the `​from​`, `​query​`, and `​query_params​` parameters — before the requesting
user’s permissions and the `​ancestor_folder​` scope are considered.

When sending a metadata query request for which the result set exceeds 2,000
items, the API can only guarantee that it returns all matching results if
both the following conditions are met:

1. The requesting user has at least **​Previewer** ​permission to all items in the result set
2. The ancestor folder contains all of the files in the result set

When sending a metadata query request for which the result set exceeds 2,000
items and for which these conditions are not true, the API might return an error
with a 4XX response code indicating that the query will need to be restricted to
return fewer results.

For example, consider the following simplified representation of a metadata
template called `catalogImages​` which has one string field called
`​photographer`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "templateKey": "catalogImages",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "string",
      "key": "photographer"
    }
  ]
}
```

In this example, assume that there are 10 photographers, each of which have
captured the same number of images that have the ​`catalogImages​` template
applied.

Now consider that there are 4,000 files in your Box enterprise
which have the `catalogImages` template ​applied and which are split evenly
between the two folders,​ `Parts​` and `Products`, ​which are children of the
parent folder `​Catalog​` as shown below.

```sh theme={null}
Catalog/
|
|- Parts/
   |
   |- file_0000.jpeg
   |- ...
   |- file_1999.jpeg
|- Products/
   |
   |- file_2000.jpeg
   |- ...
   |- file_3999.jpeg
```

The following table indicates the outcome of several possible queries. The query
is described in plain language for readability.

Remember that the ​result set ​is defined as a collection of items (files and
folders) which match the metadata query exclusively based on evaluating the `​from​`, `​query​`, and `​query_params` parameters — before the requesting user’s permissions and the `​ancestor_folder​` scope are considered.

| Query                                                                                                      | Result Set  | Outcome  | Notes                                                                                                                         |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | -------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Select items with the `catalogImages` ​template where the ​photographer​ is `Mike`                         | 200 items   | Success  | By only selecting items for `Mike` the result set is constrained to only 400 files                                            |
| Select items with the `catalogImages` ​template                                                            | 4,000 items | May fail | The result set exceeds 2,000 items. If the user does not have access to all of the files in the result set the query may fail |
| Select items with the `catalogImages` ​template in the `Products​` folder                                  | 4,000 items | May fail | The result set exceeds 2,000 items and not all results are contained within the ancestor folder.                              |
| Select items with the `catalogImages` ​template in the `Products` folder where the photographer​ is `Mike` | 200 items   | Success  | By only selecting items for `Mike` the result set is constrained to only 400 files                                            |


# Paginate and sort
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/pagination



By default only 20 query results are returned per page and the order of these
results is not guaranteed and may change. Pagination and sorting allow for
getting more results and defining the order of the results.

## Pagination

By default the API only returns the first page of 20 results. To request more
results per page the `limit` query parameter can be send with the request.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_queries/execute_read \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
    -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
    -d '{
      "from": "enterprise_123456.contractTemplate",
      "fields": ["name"],
      "ancestor_folder_id": "5555",
      "limit": 100
    }'
```

The maximum value for `limit` is 100. To return more pages of results each page
returns a `next_marker` value.

```json theme={null}
{
  "entries": [...],
  "next_marker": "AAAAAmVYB1FWec8GH6yWu2nwmanfMh07IyYInaa7DZDYjgO1H4KoLW29vPlLY173OKsci6h6xGh61gG73gnaxoS+o0BbI1/h6le6cikjlupVhASwJ2Cj0tOD9wlnrUMHHw3/ISf+uuACzrOMhN6d5fYrbidPzS6MdhJOejuYlvsg4tcBYzjauP3+VU51p77HFAIuObnJT0ff"
}
```

This `next_marker` can be used to form a new request for the next page of
results.

```sh theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_queries/execute_read \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
    -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
    -d '{
      "from": "enterprise_123456.contractTemplate",
      "fields": ["name"],
      "ancestor_folder_id": "5555",
      "limit": 100,
      "marker": "AAAAAmVYB1FWec8GH6yWu2nwmanfMh07IyYInaa7DZDYjgO1H4KoLW29vPlLY173OKsci6h6xGh61gG73gnaxoS+o0BbI1/h6le6cikjlupVhASwJ2Cj0tOD9wlnrUMHHw3/ISf+uuACzrOMhN6d5fYrbidPzS6MdhJOejuYlvsg4tcBYzjauP3+VU51p77HFAIuObnJT0ff"
    }'
```

<Note>
  When a response does not include a next marker it indicates that no more
  matching results exist.
</Note>

<Warning>
  To use the `next_marker` it is important to use the exact same query for the
  next page of results. The API will return an error if any of the parameters
  like the `query`, `query_params`, or others are changed.
</Warning>

## Sort

Results can be ordered by any of the supported metadata field types. These only
supported types currently are `float`, `date`, and `string`
<Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">fields</Link>. Ordering by `enum` or `multiSelect` value is
currently not supported.

To order result, provide one or more field keys to sort by, as well as a
direction.

```json theme={null}
"order_by": [
  {
    "field_key": "amount”,
    "direction": "desc"
  },
  {
    "field_key": "created_at"
    "direction": "desc"
  }
]
```

<Warning>
  The ordering direction must be the same for all ​​specified keys. In other
  words, for each `field_key` the `direction` must be the same.
</Warning>


# Query syntax
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/queries/syntax



The query syntax for the metadata query API is similar to that of a SQL
database. To query for all files and folders that match a contract metadata
template with a contract value of over \$100 the following metadata query could
be created.

```json theme={null}
{
  "from": "enterprise_123456.contractTemplate",
  "query": "amount >= :value",
  "query_params": {
    "value": 100
  },
  "fields": [
    "name",
    "metadata.enterprise_123456.contractTemplate.amount"
  ],
  "ancestor_folder_id": "5555"
}
```

In this case the `from` value represents the `scope` and `templateKey` of the
metadata template, and the `ancestor_folder_id` represents the folder ID to
search within, including its subfolders.

## The `fields` parameter

By default, this API will only return the base-representation of a file or
folder, which includes their `id`, `type`, and `etag` values. To request any
additional data the `fields` parameter can be used to query any additional
fields, as well as any metadata associated to the item.

For example:

* `created_by` will add the details of the user who created the item to the response.
* `metadata.<scope>.<templateKey>` will return the base-representation of the metadata instance identified by the `scope` and `templateKey`.
* `metadata.<scope>.<templateKey>.<field>` will return all fields in the base-representation of the metadata instance identified by the `scope` and `templateKey` plus the field specified by the `field` name. Multiple fields for the same `scope` and `templateKey` can be defined.

## The `query` parameter

The `query` parameter represents the SQL-like query to perform on the selected
metadata instance. This parameter is optional, and without this parameter the
API would return all files and folders for this template.

Every left hand field name, like `amount`, needs to match the `key` of a
field on the associated metadata template. In other words, you can only search
for fields that are actually present on the associated metadata instance. Any
other field name will result in the error returning an error.

### The `query_params` parameter

To make it less complicated to embed dynamic values into the query string, an
argument can be defined using a colon syntax, like `:value`. Each argument that
is specified like this needs a subsequent value with that key in the
`query_params` object, for example:

```json theme={null}
{
  ...,
  "query": "amount >= :amount AND country = :country",
  "query_params": {
    "amount": 100,
    "country": "United States"
  },
  ...
}
```

### Logical operators

A query supports the following logical operators.

| Operator      |                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `AND`         | Matches when all the conditions separated by `AND` are `TRUE`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| `OR`          | Matches when any of the conditions separated by `OR` is `TRUE`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `NOT`         | Matches when the preceding condition(s) is **not** `TRUE`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| `LIKE`        | Matches when the template field value matches a pattern. Only supported for string values. See [pattern matching](#pattern-matching) for more details. See additional limitations below.                                                                                                                |
| `NOT LIKE`    | Matches when the template field value does **not** match a pattern. Only supported for string values. See [pattern matching](#pattern-matching) for more details. See additional limitations below.                                                                                                     |
| `ILIKE`       | Identical to `LIKE` but case insensitive. See additional limitations below.                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| `NOT ILIKE`   | Identical to `NOT LIKE` but case insensitive. See additional limitations below.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| `IN`          | Matches when a template field value equals any value in a specified list. Use explicitly defined `query_params` arguments for each list item, such as `amount IN (:arg1, :arg2, :arg3)`. By design, the IN operator isn't supported for multiselect fields in metadata queries and returns a 400 error. |
| `NOT IN`      | Similar to `IN` but when the template field value matches none of the arguments provided in the list.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `IS NULL`     | Matches when the template field value is `null`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| `IS NOT NULL` | Matches when the template field value is not `null` .                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| `HASANY`      | Matches when the field value is equal to any of the arguments provided. The format requires each item in the list to be an explicitly defined `query_params` argument, for example, amount `HASANY (:arg1, :arg2, :arg3)`.                                                                              |
| `HASALL`      | Matches when the field value has a match for all the arguments provided. The format requires each item in the list to be an explicitly defined `query_params` argument, for example, amount `HASALL (:arg1, :arg2, :arg3)`.                                                                             |
| `HASANCESTOR` | Matches when the field value is a descendant of any argument provided. The format requires each item in the list to be an explicitly defined `query_params` argument, for example, amount `HASANCESTOR (:arg1, :arg2, :arg3)`. Supported only for the taxonomy MD field.                                |

<Note>
  Any match on a `string` or `enum` field is case sensitive except when using
  the `ILIKE` operator.
</Note>

### Comparison operators

A query supports the following comparison operators.

| Operator |                                                                                    |
| -------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `=`      | Ensures a template field value is **equal to** the specified value                 |
| `>`      | Ensures a template field value is **greater than** the specified value             |
| `<`      | Ensures a template field value is **less than** the specified value                |
| `>=`     | Ensures a template field value is **greater than or equal to** the specified value |
| `<=`     | Ensures a template field value is **less than or equal to** the a specified value  |
| `<>`     | Ensures a template field value is **not equal to** the a specified value           |

<Warning>
  Bit-wise and arithmetic operators are not supported by the Metadata Query API.
</Warning>

### Pattern matching

The `LIKE`, `NOT LIKE`, `ILIKE`, and `NOT ILIKE` operators match a string
to a pattern. The pattern supports the following reserved characters.

* `%` The percent sign represents zero, one, or multiple characters, for example `%Contract` matches `Contract`, `Sales Contract`, but not `Contract (Sales)`,
* `_` The underscore represents a single character, for example `Bo_` matches `Box`, `Bot`, but not `Bots`,

Both of these reserved characters can be used before, after, or in between other
characters. A pattern can include multiple reserved characters, for example
`Box% (____)` would match `Box Contract (2020)`.

An example query would looks something like this. Note that the `%`-wrapped
string is not in the `query` attribute but in the list of `query_params`.

```json theme={null}
{
  ...,
  "query": "country ILIKE :country",
  "query_params": {
    "country": "%United%"
  },
  ...
}
```

<Note>
  The backslash character `\` can be used to escape the `%` or
  `_` characters if those need to be matched literally, for example
  `20\%` would match the literal value of `20%`.
</Note>


# Apply metadata to a file
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-instance



<ProgressBar />

With your new `customerData` template in hand you can now apply this template to
a file or folder. To apply this template you will need the `scope` and
`templateKey` of the template, as well as the ID of the item to apply the
template to.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata/enterprise/customerInfo \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
      -H "content-type: application/json" \
      -d '{
        "name": "Box, Inc",
        "industry": "Technology",
        "tav": 1000000
      }'
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var metadataValues = new Dictionary<string, object>()
  {
      { "name", "Box, Inc" },
      { "industry", "Technology" },
      { "tav", 100000 }
  };

  Dictionary<string, object> metadata = await client.MetadataManager
      .CreateFileMetadataAsync(fileId: "12345", metadataValues, "enterprise", "customerInfo");
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "12345");

  file.createMetadata(
      "customerInfo",
      "enterprise",
      new Metadata()
          .add("name", "Box, Inc")
          .add("industry", "Technology")
          .add("tav", 100000)
  );
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  metadata = {
      'name': 'Box, Inc',
      'industry': 'Technology',
      'tav': 1000000
  }

  client.file(file_id='11111').metadata(scope='enterprise', template='customerInfo').set(metadata)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.files.addMetadata(
      '12345',
      client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE,
      "customerInfo",
      {
          name: "Box, Inc",
          industry: "Technology",
          tav: 1000000
      }
  ).then(metadata => {
      // ...
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  The `industry` field in this example is an `enum` field and therefore the
  value needs to be one of the available options on the field. Any other value
  will result in an error.
</Warning>

The API will return the newly created metadata instance.

```json theme={null}
{
  "name": "Box, Inc",
  "industry": "Technology",
  "tav": 1000000,
  "$id": "01234500-12f1-1234-aa12-b1d234cb567e",
  "$parent": "folder_12345,",
  "$scope": "enterprise_34567",
  "$template": "customerInfo",
  "$type": "customerInfo-6bcba49f-ca6d-4d2a-a758-57fe6edf44d0",
  "$typeVersion": 2,
  "$version": 1,
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Next>I've applied metadata to a file</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create a metadata query
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-query



<ProgressBar />

As a final step, let's look at how you can create a query to find specific files
and folders based on the metadata attached to those files/folders.

A <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">metadata query</Link> provides a way to find files and
folders by searching for the metadata attached to them. The search syntax
is similar to SQL and it supports boolean operations and comparative operators
to perform powerful searches.

In our case, let's create a query to find any files or folders that have an
instance of the `customerInfo` metadata template attached to them. We will
filter this list down to any files that belong to a customer who's total account
value is more than \$200,000.

```sh cURL theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_queries/execute_read \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" ' \
    -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
    -d '{
      "from": "enterprise_123456.customerInfo",
      "fields": [
        "name",
        "enterprise_123456.customerInfo.name"
        "enterprise_123456.customerInfo.tav"
      ],
      "query": "tav >= :value",
      "query_params": {
        "value": 200000
      },
      "ancestor_folder_id": "0"
    }'
```

This API will return a list of matched files and folders, as well as the
metadata that matched the query for that file.

```json theme={null}
{
  "entries": [
    {
      "type": "file",
      "id": "11111",
      "etag": "0",
      "metadata": {
        "enterprise_123456": {
          "customerInfo": {
            "name": "Box",
            "tav": 1000000,
            "$parent": "folder_12345,",
            "$scope": "enterprise_123456",
            "$template": "customerInfo",
            "$version": 1
          }
        }
      }
    }
  ],
  "limit": 20,
  "next_marker": "AAAAAmVYB1FWec8GH6yWu2nwmanfMh07IyYInaa7DZDYjgO1H4KoLW29vPlLY173OKsci6h6xGh61gG73gnaxoS+o0BbI1/h6le6cikjlupVhASwJ2Cj0tOD9wlnrUMHHw3/ISf+uuACzrOMhN6d5fYrbidPzS6MdhJOejuYlvsg4tcBYzjauP3+VU51p77HFAIuObnJT0ff"
}
```

By default this API returns `20` items per page, but more items can be requested
using marker-based pagination.

<Card href="/guides/metadata/queries" title="Learn more about metadata queries" />

<Next>I've queried a file using metadata</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create a custom metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-template



<ProgressBar />

To create a custom metadata template for your enterprise you can use
<Link href="/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema">our API directly</Link> or
one of our SDKs to create a new template.

For this `customerInfo` template, we're going to create a template with 3
fields. The first field is a text field to hold the customer's `name`, the
second is a dropdown list of the possible values for the `industry` the customer
operates in, and the final field represents the total annual contract value (`tav`).

<Card href="/guides/metadata/fields" title="Learn about the different field types" />

To create this template we need to pass in the configuration for the fields, as
well as a display name for the field.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/schema \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
      -H "content-type: application/json" \
      -d '{
        "scope": "enterprise",
        "displayName": "Customer Info",
        "fields": [
          {
            "type": "string",
            "displayName": "Name"
          },
          {
            "type": "enum",
            "displayName": "Industry",
            "options": [
              {"key": "Technology"},
              {"key": "Healthcare"},
              {"key": "Legal"}
            ]
          },
          {
            "type": "float",
            "displayName": "Total account value",
            "key": "tav"
          }
        ]
      }'
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var templateParams = new BoxMetadataTemplate()
  {
    DisplayName = "Customer Info",
    Scope = "enterprise",
    Fields = new List<BoxMetadataTemplateField>()
    {
      new BoxMetadataTemplateField()
      {
        Type = "string",
        DisplayName = "Name"
      },
      new BoxMetadataTemplateField()
      {
        Type = "enum",
        DisplayName = "Industry",
        Options = new List<BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption>()
        {
          new BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption() { Key = "Technology" },
          new BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption() { Key = "Healthcare" },
          new BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption() { Key = "Legal" }
        }
      },
      new BoxMetadataTemplateField()
      {
        Type = "float",
        DisplayName = "Total account value",
        Key="tav"
      },
    }
  };
  BoxMetadataTemplate template = await  client.MetadataManager.CreateMetadataTemplate(templateParams);
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  MetadataTemplate.Field name = new MetadataTemplate.Field();
  name.setType("string");
  name.setDisplayName("Name");

  MetadataTemplate.Field industry = new MetadataTemplate.Field();
  industry.setType("enum");
  industry.setDisplayName("Industry");

  MetadataTemplate.Option technology = new MetadataTemplate.Option();
  technology.setKey("Technology");

  MetadataTemplate.Option healthcare = new MetadataTemplate.Option();
  healthcare.setKey("Healthcare");

  MetadataTemplate.Option legal = new MetadataTemplate.Option();
  legal.setKey("Legal");

  List<MetadataTemplate.Option> options = new ArrayList<MetadataTemplate.Option>();
  options.add(technology);
  options.add(healthcare);
  options.add(legal);

  MetadataTemplate.Field tav = new MetadataTemplate.Field();
  tav.setType("float");
  tav.setDisplayName("Total account value");
  tav.setKey("tav");

  List<MetadataTemplate.Field> fields = new ArrayList<MetadataTemplate.Field>();
  fields.add(name);
  fields.add(industry);
  fields.add(tav);

  MetadataTemplate template = MetadataTemplate.createMetadataTemplate(api, "enterprise", "customerInfo", "Customer Info", false, fields);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.metadata_template import MetadataField, MetadataFieldType

  fields = [
      MetadataField(MetadataFieldType.STRING, 'Name')
      MetadataField(MetadataFieldType.ENUM, 'Industry', options=['Technology', 'Healthcare', 'Legal'])
  ]
  template = client.create_metadata_template('Customer Info', fields)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.metadata.createTemplate(
      'Customer Info',
      [
          {
              type: 'string',
              displayName: 'Name'
          },
          {
              type: 'enum',
              displayName: 'Industry',
              options: [
                  {key: 'Technology'},
                  {key: 'Healthcare'},
                  {key: 'Legal'}
              ]
          },
          {
              type: 'float',
              displayName: 'Total account value',
              key: 'tav'
          }
      ]
  ).then(template => {
      // ...
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  **Admin permissions required**

  Creating metadata templates is restricted to users with admin permission. This
  means that only admins, or co-admins who have been granted rights to **Create
  and edit metadata templates for your company** by the admin can use the web
  app or the API to manage templates.
</Warning>

The API will return the newly created metadata template.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "100ac693-a468-4b37-9535-05984b804dc2",
  "type": "metadata_template",
  "templateKey": "customerInfo",
  "scope": "enterprise_34567",
  "displayName": "Customer Info",
  "hidden": false,
  "copyInstanceOnItemCopy": false,
  "fields": [
    {
      "id": "5c6a5906-003b-4654-9deb-472583fc2930",
      "type": "string",
      "key": "name",
      "displayName": "Name",
      "hidden": false
    },
    {
      "id": "cf3eb5b8-52ef-456c-b175-44354a27e289",
      "type": "enum",
      "key": "industry",
      "displayName": "Industry",
      "options": [
        {"key": "Technology"},
        {"key": "Healthcare"},
        {"key": "Legal"}
      ],
      "hidden": false
    },
    {
      "id": "5c6a5906-4654-9deb-003b-472583fc2930",
      "type": "float",
      "key": "tav",
      "displayName": "Total account value",
      "hidden": false
    }
  ]
}
```

<Note>
  **Template key**

  Although you did not explicitly set the template key the key is automatically
  derived from the `displayName` value. In this case, the `templateKey` would be
  `customerInfo`.
</Note>

<Next>I've created a custom template</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Working with Metadata
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/index



The Metadata APIs are a great tool to allow applications to automatically add
additional information to files and folders.

<Frame>
  <img alt="An example of Metadata" />
</Frame>

## Overview

This guide will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/list-all">List all templates</Link> available to you.
2. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-template">Create a custom metadata template</Link> to hold data specific to your enterprise.
3. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-instance">Apply a custom metadata template</Link> to a file, allowing you to assign custom data to a file.
4. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/update-instance">Update metadata instance</Link> on a file, allowing you to change the data assigned to a file.
5. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/update-template">Update a metadata template</Link> and change the data applied to all instances of this template.
6. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-query">Create a query to find files by metadata</Link> and change the data applied to all instances of this template.

<Next>
  I am ready to get started
</Next>


# List all metadata templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/list-all



<ProgressBar />

It's likely your enterprise already has a list of metadata templates that you
can use right off-the-shelve without having to create your own.

In general, metadata templates are either available to only your enterprise or
to every enterprise using Box. The `scope` of a template defines if a template
is available to everyone (`global`) or only to your enterprise (`enterprise`).

<Card href="/guides/metadata/scopes" title="Learn more about metadata scopes" />

## Listing templates

A few <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-global">global templates</Link> are available to all
customers.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/global" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.getGlobalMetadataTemplates();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.get_global_metadata_templates()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.GetGlobalMetadataTemplatesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.getGlobalMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().getGlobalMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<MetadataTemplate> templates = MetadataTemplate.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates('global', api);
  for (MetadataTemplate templateInfo : templates) {
      // Do something with the metadata template.
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  templates = client.get_metadata_templates(scope='global)
  for template in templates:
      print(f'Metadata template {template.templateKey} is in global scope')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxEnterpriseMetadataTemplateCollection<BoxMetadataTemplate> templates = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetEnterpriseMetadataAsync("global");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.getTemplates('global')
   .then(templates => {
    // ...
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

Many of these templates are for Box's internal use, yet your application can use
and apply these. More useful are templates <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-enterprise">created by applications and admins
within your enterprise</Link> to hold data
specific to your enterprise's needs.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/enterprise" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.get_enterprise_metadata_templates()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.GetEnterpriseMetadataTemplatesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<MetadataTemplate> templates = MetadataTemplate.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates(api);
  for (MetadataTemplate templateInfo : templates) {
      // Do something with the metadata template.
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  templates = client.get_metadata_templates()
  for template in templates:
      print(f'Metadata template {template.templateKey} is in enterprise scope')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxEnterpriseMetadataTemplateCollection<BoxMetadataTemplate> templates = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetEnterpriseMetadataAsync();
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.getTemplates('enterprise')
   .then(templates => {
    /* templates -> {
     limit: 100,
     entries: 
     [ { templateKey: 'documentFlow',
      scope: 'enterprise_12345',
      displayName: 'Document Flow',
      hidden: false,
      fields: 
       [ { type: 'string',
        key: 'currentDocumentStage',
        displayName: 'Current Document Stage',
        hidden: false }
       { type: 'string',
        key: 'needsApprovalFrom',
        displayName: 'Needs Approval From',
        hidden: false },
       { type: 'string',
        key: 'nextDocumentStage',
        displayName: 'Next Document Stage',
        hidden: false }
       { type: 'float',
        key: 'maximumDaysAllowedInCurrentStage',
        displayName: 'Maximum Days Allowed In Current Stage',
        hidden: false }
      { templateKey: 'marketingCollateral',
      scope: 'enterprise_12345',
      displayName: 'Marketing Collateral',
      hidden: false,
      fields: 
       [ { type: 'string',
        key: 'audience1',
        displayName: 'Audience',
        hidden: false },
       { type: 'string',
        key: 'previousState',
        displayName: 'Previous State',
        hidden: false } ] },
      { templateKey: 'productInfo',
      scope: 'enterprise_12345',
      displayName: 'Product Info',
      hidden: false,
      fields: 
       [ { type: 'float',
        key: 'skuNumber',
        displayName: 'SKU Number',
        hidden: false },
       { type: 'enum',
        key: 'department',
        displayName: 'Department',
        hidden: false,
        options: 
        [ { key: 'Beauty' },
        { key: 'Shoes' },
        { key: 'Accessories' },
        { key: 'Clothing' },
        { key: 'Handbags' },
        { key: 'Bedding' },
        { key: 'Watches' } ] },
       { type: 'date',
        key: 'displayDate',
        displayName: 'Display Date',
        hidden: false } ] } ],
     next_marker: null,
     prev_marker: null }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## A metadata template

A <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates">metadata template</Link> describes a set of key/value
pairs that can be assigned to a file or folder.

For example, a `customerInfo` template might hold data about a customer,
having a field for the customer name as well as the customer's industry.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "100ac693-a468-4b37-9535-05984b804dc2",
  "type": "metadata_template",
  "templateKey": "customerInfo",
  "scope": "enterprise_12345",
  "displayName": "Customer Info",
  "hidden": false,
  "copyInstanceOnItemCopy": false,
  "fields": [
    {
      "id": "5c6a5906-003b-4654-9deb-472583fc2930",
      "type": "string",
      "key": "name",
      "displayName": "Name",
      "hidden": false
    },
    {
      "id": "cf3eb5b8-52ef-456c-b175-44354a27e289",
      "type": "enum",
      "key": "industry",
      "displayName": "Industry",
      "options": [
        {"key": "Technology"},
        {"key": "Healthcare"},
        {"key": "Legal"}
      ],
      "hidden": false
    }
  ]
}
```

<Next>I've listed the templates available to me</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Next steps
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/next-steps



<ProgressBar />

You've reached the end of this Quick Start guide. By now you should have taken
the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/list-all">Listed all templates</Link> available to you.
2. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-template">Created a custom metadata template</Link> to hold data specific to your enterprise.
3. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-instance">Applied a custom metadata template</Link> to a file, allowing you to assign custom data to a file.
4. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/update-instance">Updated a metadata instance</Link> on a file, allowing you to change the data assigned to a file.
5. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/update-template">Updated a metadata template</Link> and changed the data applied to all instances of this template.
6. <Link href="/guides/metadata/quick-start/create-query">Queried for files and folders</Link> by matching the values in the metadata instances attached to them.

## Next Steps

We recommend the following resources to learn more about using metadata with the
Box API.

* <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">Learn more about metadata scopes</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields">Learn more about the different field types</Link> that can be used on a template.


# Update metadata on a file
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/update-instance



<ProgressBar />

Once metadata has been applied to a file or folder there is often a need to
update the metadata at a later date.

Updating a metadata instance is done by applying a set of operations to the
original data. These operations are performed atomically, ensuring that the
changes are either all applied or not applied at all.

<Card href="/guides/metadata/instances/update" title="Learn more about updating instances" />

In this case, let's assume we want to change the `name` of the customer from
`Box, Inc` to `Box`. We can apply two operations, firstly, we ensure the
value of the name is still `Box, Inc` before we change it, and secondly we make
the change.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X PUT https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/metadata/enterprise/customerInfo \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
      -H "content-type: application/json-patch+json" \
      -d '[
        {
          "op": "test",
          "path": "/name",
          "value": "Box, Inc"
        },
        {
          "op": "replace",
          "path": "/name",
          "value": "Box"
        }
      ]'
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var updates = new List<BoxMetadataUpdate>()
  {
    new BoxMetadataUpdate()
    {
        Op = MetadataUpdateOp.test,
        Path = "/name",
        Value = "Box, Inc"
    },
    new BoxMetadataUpdate()
    {
        Op = MetadataUpdateOp.replace,
        Path = "/name",
        Value = "Box"
    }
  };
  Dictionary<string, object> updatedMetadata = await client.MetadataManager
      .UpdateFileMetadataAsync("12345", updates, "enterprise", "customerInfo");
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "12345");
  file.updateMetadata(
    file.createMetadata(
    "customerInfo",
    "enterprise",
    new Metadata().test("/name", "Box, Inc").replace("/name", "Box")
  );
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  file = client.file(file_id='12345')
  metadata = file.metadata(scope='enterprise', template='customerInfo')

  updates = metadata.start_update()
  updates.test('/name', 'Box, Inc')
  updates.replace('/name', 'Box')

  file.update(updates)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var updates = [
      { op: 'test', path: '/name', value: 'Box, Inc' },
      { op: 'replace', path: '/name', value: 'Box' }
  ];

  client.files.updateMetadata(
      '12345',
      client.metadata.scopes.ENTERPRISE,
      "customerInfo",
      updates
  ).then(metadata => {
      //...
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Card href="/guides/metadata/instances/update" title="Learn more about all operations" />

The API will return the updated metadata instance.

```json theme={null}
{
  "name": "Box",
  "industry": "Technology",
  "tav": 1000000,
  "$id": "01234500-12f1-1234-aa12-b1d234cb567e",
  "$parent": "folder_12345,",
  "$scope": "enterprise_34567",
  "$template": "customerInfo",
  "$type": "customerInfo-6bcba49f-ca6d-4d2a-a758-57fe6edf44d0",
  "$typeVersion": 2,
  "$version": 1,
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Next>I've updated metadata on a file</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Update a metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/quick-start/update-template



<ProgressBar />

Let's look at how we can update an existing metadata template.

Updates to metadata templates are performed through **operations** rather than
directly changing the template itself. This method allows you to update any
existing metadata instances that are already applied to files and folders.

<Card href="/guides/metadata/templates/update" title="Learn more about updating templates" />

In this case, let's assume that we realized that having a `Name` field is a bit
ambiguous, and therefore, we want to change the `Name` field of the `customerInfo` template
to `Company Name` instead. By using the `editField` operation we can change the
`displayName` and the `key` of the field on the template and on every instance
of the template that might be applied to a file or folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X PUT https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/enterprise/blueprintTemplate/schema \
      -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
      -H "content-type: application/json" \
      -d '[
        {
          "op": "editField",
          "fieldKey": "name",
          "data": {
            "key": "company_name",
            "displayName": "Company Name"
          }
        }
      ]'
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var updates = new List<BoxMetadataTemplateUpdate>()
  {
    new BoxMetadataTemplateUpdate()
    {
        Op = MetadataTemplateUpdateOp.editField,
        FieldKey = "name",
        Data = new {
            key = "company_name",
            displayName = "Company Name"
        }
    }
  };
  BoxMetadataTemplate updatedTemplate = await client.MetadataManager
      .UpdateMetadataTemplate(updates, "enterprise", "customerData");
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  List<MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation> updates = new ArrayList<MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation>();

  String editField = "{\"op\":\"editField\",\"fieldKey\":\"name\",\"data\":{\"key\":\"company_name\",\"displayName\":\"Company Name\"}}";
  updates.add(new MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation(editField));

  MetadataTemplate.updateMetadataTemplate(api, "enterprise", "customerData", updates);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  template = client.metadata_template('enterprise', 'customerData')
  updates = template.start_update()
  updates.edit_field('name', key='company_name', display_name="Company Name")
  template.update_info(updates)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  var operations = [
      {
          op: 'editField',
          fieldKey: 'name',
          data: {
              key: 'company_name',
              displayName: "Company Name"
          }
      }
  ];

  client.metadata.updateTemplate(
      'enterprise',
      'customerData',
      operations
  ).then(template => {
      //..
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The API will return the updated metadata template.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "100ac693-a468-4b37-9535-05984b804dc2",
  "type": "metadata_template",
  "templateKey": "customerInfo",
  "scope": "enterprise_34567",
  "displayName": "Customer Info",
  "hidden": false,
  "copyInstanceOnItemCopy": false,
  "fields": [
    {
      "id": "5c6a5906-003b-4654-9deb-472583fc2930",
      "type": "string",
      "key": "company_name",
      "displayName": "Company Name",
      "hidden": false
    },
    {
      "id": "cf3eb5b8-52ef-456c-b175-44354a27e289",
      "type": "enum",
      "key": "industry",
      "displayName": "Industry",
      "options": [
        {"key": "Technology"},
        {"key": "Healthcare"},
        {"key": "Legal"}
      ],
      "hidden": false
    },
    {
      "id": "5c6a5906-4654-9deb-003b-472583fc2930",
      "type": "float",
      "key": "tav",
      "displayName": "Total account value",
      "hidden": false
    }
  ]
}
```

Updating the template through operations has the benefit that any instance of
the template is automatically updated as well. In this case, the instance we
created in previous steps would now look something like this.

```json theme={null}
{
  "company_name": "Box",
  "industry": "Technology",
  "tav": 1000000,
  "$id": "01234500-12f1-1234-aa12-b1d234cb567e",
  "$parent": "folder_12345,",
  "$scope": "enterprise_34567",
  "$template": "customerInfo",
  "$type": "customerInfo-6bcba49f-ca6d-4d2a-a758-57fe6edf44d0",
  "$typeVersion": 2,
  "$version": 1,
  "$canEdit": true
}
```

<Next>I've updated metadata template</Next>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Metadata template scopes
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/scopes



Metadata templates are grouped into two distinct groups, or **scopes**.

* **`global`**: a group of templates that is available to everyone using Box, regardless of the enterprise they are in. An example is the `global.properties` template that serves as a place to put free-form key/value `string` pairs without any additional schema associated with it.
* **`enterprise`** or **`enterprise_*`**: a group of templates defined by a user within an enterprise. These templates are either created by admin's in the web application, or by applications using the API. When accessing or creating templates within the authenticated user's enterprise a short-hand of `enterprise` can be used. When accessing templates that belong to another enterprise - for example when accessing metadata on files belonging to other enterprises - the scope `enterprise_*` is used where `*` is the ID of the enterprise the template belongs to.

<Warning>
  **Permissions**

  It is important to note that no metadata templates can be created within the
  `global` scope, and that metadata templates made within the user's enterprise
  can only be accessed by users with access to that enterprise.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Create a metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/create



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To create a metadata template, pass a `scope`, `displayName` and an optional set
of `fields` to the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema">`POST /metadata_templates/schema`</Link> API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/schema" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
        "scope": "enterprise",
        "displayName": "Customer",
        "fields": [
          {
            "type": "string",
            "key": "name",
            "displayName": "Name",
            "description": "The customer name",
            "hidden": false
          },
          {
            "type": "date",
            "key": "last_contacted_at",
            "displayName": "Last Contacted At",
            "description": "When this customer was last contacted at",
            "hidden": false
          },
          {
            "type": "enum",
            "key": "industry",
            "displayName": "Industry",
            "options": [
              {"key": "Technology"},
              {"key": "Healthcare"},
              {"key": "Legal"}
            ]
          },
          {
            "type": "multiSelect",
            "key": "role",
            "displayName": "Contact Role",
            "options": [
              {"key": "Developer"},
              {"key": "Business Owner"},
              {"key": "Marketing"},
              {"key": "Legal"},
              {"key": "Sales"}
            ]
          }
        ]
      }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.createMetadataTemplate({
    scope: 'enterprise',
    displayName: templateKey,
    templateKey: templateKey,
    fields: [
      {
        type: 'string' as CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField,
        key: 'testName',
        displayName: 'testName',
      } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField,
      {
        type: 'float' as CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField,
        key: 'age',
        displayName: 'age',
      } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField,
      {
        type: 'date' as CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField,
        key: 'birthDate',
        displayName: 'birthDate',
      } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField,
      {
        type: 'enum' as CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField,
        key: 'countryCode',
        displayName: 'countryCode',
        options: [
          {
            key: 'US',
          } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField,
          {
            key: 'CA',
          } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField,
        ],
      } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField,
      {
        type: 'multiSelect' as CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField,
        key: 'sports',
        displayName: 'sports',
        options: [
          {
            key: 'basketball',
          } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField,
          {
            key: 'football',
          } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField,
          {
            key: 'tennis',
          } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField,
        ],
      } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField,
    ],
  } satisfies CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.create_metadata_template(
      "enterprise",
      template_key,
      template_key=template_key,
      fields=[
          CreateMetadataTemplateFields(
              type=CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsTypeField.STRING,
              key="testName",
              display_name="testName",
          ),
          CreateMetadataTemplateFields(
              type=CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsTypeField.FLOAT,
              key="age",
              display_name="age",
          ),
          CreateMetadataTemplateFields(
              type=CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsTypeField.DATE,
              key="birthDate",
              display_name="birthDate",
          ),
          CreateMetadataTemplateFields(
              type=CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsTypeField.ENUM,
              key="countryCode",
              display_name="countryCode",
              options=[
                  CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsOptionsField(key="US"),
                  CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsOptionsField(key="CA"),
              ],
          ),
          CreateMetadataTemplateFields(
              type=CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsTypeField.MULTISELECT,
              key="sports",
              display_name="sports",
              options=[
                  CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsOptionsField(key="basketball"),
                  CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsOptionsField(key="football"),
                  CreateMetadataTemplateFieldsOptionsField(key="tennis"),
              ],
          ),
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.CreateMetadataTemplateAsync(requestBody: new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBody(scope: "enterprise", displayName: templateKey) { TemplateKey = templateKey, Fields = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.String, key: "testName", displayName: "testName"),new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.Float, key: "age", displayName: "age"),new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.Date, key: "birthDate", displayName: "birthDate"),new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.Enum, key: "countryCode", displayName: "countryCode") { Options = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "US"),new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "CA")}) },new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.MultiSelect, key: "sports", displayName: "sports") { Options = Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "basketball"),new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "football"),new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "tennis")}) }}) });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.createMetadataTemplate(requestBody: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBody(scope: "enterprise", displayName: templateKey, templateKey: templateKey, fields: [CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.string, key: "testName", displayName: "testName"), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.float, key: "age", displayName: "age"), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.date, key: "birthDate", displayName: "birthDate"), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.enum_, key: "countryCode", displayName: "countryCode", options: [CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "US"), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "CA")]), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(type: CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.multiSelect, key: "sports", displayName: "sports", options: [CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "basketball"), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "football"), CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField(key: "tennis")])]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().createMetadataTemplate(new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBody.Builder("enterprise", templateKey).templateKey(templateKey).fields(Arrays.asList(new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.STRING, "testName", "testName"), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.FLOAT, "age", "age"), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField(CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.DATE, "birthDate", "birthDate"), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField.Builder(CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.ENUM, "countryCode", "countryCode").options(Arrays.asList(new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField("US"), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField("CA"))).build(), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsField.Builder(CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsTypeField.MULTISELECT, "sports", "sports").options(Arrays.asList(new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField("basketball"), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField("football"), new CreateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyFieldsOptionsField("tennis"))).build())).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  MetadataTemplate.Field metadataField = new MetadataTemplate.Field();
  metadataField.setType("string");
  metadataField.setKey("text");
  metadataField.setDisplayName("Text");

  List<MetadataTemplate.Field> fields = new ArrayList<MetadataTemplate.Field>();
  fields.add(metadataField);

  MetadataTemplate template = MetadataTemplate.createMetadataTemplate(api, "enterprise", "CustomField", "Custom Field", false, fields);

  final JsonObject jsonObject = new JsonObject();
  jsonObject.add("text", "This is a test text");

  Metadata metadata = new Metadata(jsonObject);
  boxFile.createMetadata("CustomField", metadata);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.metadata_template import MetadataField, MetadataFieldType

  fields = [
      MetadataField(MetadataFieldType.STRING, 'Name'),
      MetadataField(MetadataFieldType.DATE, 'Birthday', 'bday'),
      MetadataField(MetadataFieldType.ENUM, 'State', options=['CA', 'TX', 'NY'])
  ]
  template = client.create_metadata_template('Employee Record', fields, hidden=True)
  print(f'Metadata template ID {template.scope}/{template.templateKey} created!')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var templateParams = new BoxMetadataTemplate()
  {
      TemplateKey = "marketingCollateral",
      DisplayName = "Marketing Collateral",
      Scope = "enterprise",
      Fields = new List<BoxMetadataTemplateField>()
      {
          new BoxMetadataTemplateField()
          {
              Type = "enum",
              Key = "audience",
              DisplayName = "Audience",
              Options = new List<BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption>()
              {
                  new BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption() { Key = "internal" },
                  new BoxMetadataTemplateFieldOption() { Key = "external" }
              }
          },
          new BoxMetadataTemplateField()
          {
              Type = "string",
              Key = "author",
              DisplayName = "Author"
          }
      }
  };
  BoxMetadataTemplate template = await client.MetadataManager.CreateMetadataTemplate(templateParams);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  // Create a new template, but hide it for now until it's ready for use
  client.metadata.createTemplate(
    'Vendor Contract',
    [
     {
      type: 'date',
      key: 'signed',
      displayName: 'Date Signed'
     },
     {
      type: 'string',
      key: 'vendor',
      displayName: 'Vendor'
     },
     {
      type: 'enum',
      key: 'fy',
      displayName: 'Fiscal Year',
      options: [
       {key: 'FY17'},
       {key: 'FY18'},
       {key: 'FY19'}
      ]
     }
    ],
    {
     hidden: true,
     templateKey: 'vcontract',
     copyInstanceOnItemCopy: false
    }
   )
   .then(template => {
    /* template -> {
     id: '17f2d715-6acb-45f2-b96a-28b15efc9faa',
     templateKey: 'vcontract',
     scope: 'enterprise_12345',
     displayName: 'Vendor Contract',
     hidden: true,
     copyInstanceOnItemCopy: false,
     fields: 
     [ { type: 'date',
      key: 'signed',
      displayName: 'Date Signed',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'string',
      key: 'vendor',
      displayName: 'Vendor',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'enum',
      key: 'fy',
      displayName: 'Fiscal Year',
      options: 
       [ { key: 'FY17' },
       { key: 'FY18' },
       { key: 'FY19' } ],
      hidden: false } ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  Metadata templates can only be created for the `enterprise` scope. Templates
  can not be created for the `global` scope.
</Note>

<Warning>
  **Admin permissions required**

  Creating metadata templates is restricted to users with admin permission. This
  means that only admins, or co-admins who have been granted rights to **Create
  and edit metadata templates for your company** by the admin can use the web
  app or the API to manage templates.
</Warning>

## Template Fields

The `fields` attribute represents the set of individual fields that a user can
fill in on a template. For example, a `customer` template might have a `name`
field of type `string`.

Template fields can be of `string`, `enum`, `float`, `date`, `enum` or
`multiSelect` type. Each field requires at least a `type`, `displayName` and `key`.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Customer",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "string",
      "key": "name",
      "displayName": "Name"
    }
  ]
}
```

The `enum` and `multiSelect` field types represent a dropdown list where a user
can select respectively one or many options from a list of items.

```json theme={null}
{
  "scope": "enterprise",
  "displayName": "Customer",
  "fields": [
    {
      "type": "enum",
      "key": "industry",
      "displayName": "Industry",
      "options": [
        {"key": "Technology"},
        {"key": "Healthcare"},
        {"key": "Legal"}
      ]
    }
  ]
}
```

<Card href="/guides/metadata/fields" title="Learn more about Metadata Template Fields" />

## Template Keys

When a metadata template is created, a `templateKey` is automatically generated
from the `displayName` of the template unless a `templateKey` is explicitly
provided. When creating the template key, any spaces and irregular
characters in the name are removed, and the string is transformed to camel case.

For example, a metadata template that is named
`Test Name (with-special_) Characters` will have a `templateKey` of
`testNameWithspecialCharacters`.

This template key is then used when making any API requests to get the
template's information or assign it to an item.

[user-types]: /platform/user-types

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete a metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/delete



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Deleting a metadata template can be achieved by calling the <Link href="/reference/delete-metadata-templates-id-id-schema">`DELETE
/metadata_templates/enterprise/:templateKey/schema`</Link> API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/enterprise/blueprintTemplate/schema" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.deleteMetadataTemplate(
    'enterprise' as DeleteMetadataTemplateScope,
    template.templateKey!,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.delete_metadata_template(
      DeleteMetadataTemplateScope.ENTERPRISE, template.template_key
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.DeleteMetadataTemplateAsync(scope: DeleteMetadataTemplateScope.Enterprise, templateKey: NullableUtils.Unwrap(template.TemplateKey));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.deleteMetadataTemplate(scope: DeleteMetadataTemplateScope.enterprise, templateKey: template.templateKey!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().deleteMetadataTemplate(DeleteMetadataTemplateScope.ENTERPRISE, template.getTemplateKey())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  MetadataTemplate.deleteMetadataTemplate(api, "enterprise", "templateName");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata_template('enterprise', 'employeeRecord').delete()
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.deleteTemplate('enterprise', 'testtemplate', callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

This API returns a `204 No Content` API response with no response body when
the template has been successfully deleted. This API also removes all the
template instances from any files and folders.

Only templates created within the `enterprise` scope can be deleted.

<Warning>
  **Admin permissions required**

  Deleting metadata templates is restricted to users with admin permission. This
  means that only admins, or co-admins who have been granted rights to **Create
  and edit metadata templates for your company** by the admin can use the web
  app or the API to manage templates.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get a metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/get



Information for a metadata template can be retrieved using the template's name
and scope, or the template's identifier.

<Info>
  The authenticated user can only get Information about metadata templates
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">scoped</Link> within the `global` scope or the `enterprise_:id` scope where
  `:id` is  the ID of their enterprise.
</Info>

## Get a metadata template by name

To get a metadata template by name, call the <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-id-id-schema">`GET
/metadata_templates/:scope/:templateKey/schema`</Link> API endpoint with the
template's `scope` and `templateKey`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/enterprise/blueprintTemplate/schema" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.getMetadataTemplate(
    'enterprise' as GetMetadataTemplateScope,
    template.templateKey!,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.get_metadata_template(
      GetMetadataTemplateScope.ENTERPRISE, template.template_key
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.GetMetadataTemplateAsync(scope: GetMetadataTemplateScope.Enterprise, templateKey: NullableUtils.Unwrap(template.TemplateKey));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.getMetadataTemplate(scope: GetMetadataTemplateScope.enterprise, templateKey: template.templateKey!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().getMetadataTemplate(GetMetadataTemplateScope.ENTERPRISE, template.getTemplateKey())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  MetadataTemplate template = MetadataTemplate.getMetadataTemplate(api, "templateName");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  template = client.metadata_template('enterprise', 'employeeRecord').get()
  print(f'The {template.displayName} template has {len(template.fields)} fields')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxMetadataTemplate template = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetMetadataTemplate("enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.getTemplateSchema('enterprise', 'vcontract')
   .then(template => {
    /* template -> {
     id: '17f2d715-6acb-45f2-b96a-28b15efc9faa',
     templateKey: 'vcontract',
     scope: 'enterprise_12345',
     displayName: 'Vendor Contract',
     hidden: true,
     fields: 
     [ { type: 'date',
      key: 'signed',
      displayName: 'Date Signed',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'string',
      key: 'vendor',
      displayName: 'Vendor',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'enum',
      key: 'fy',
      displayName: 'Fiscal Year',
      options: 
       [ { key: 'FY17' },
       { key: 'FY18' },
       { key: 'FY19' } ],
      hidden: false } ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an item</Link>.
</Info>

## Get a metadata template by ID

To get a metadata template by ID, you will need to pass the template's
`id` to the <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-id">`GET
/metadata_templates/:id`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/d9671692-3df6-11ea-b77f-2e728ce88125" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.getMetadataTemplateById(template.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.get_metadata_template_by_id(template.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.GetMetadataTemplateByIdAsync(templateId: template.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.getMetadataTemplateById(templateId: template.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().getMetadataTemplateById(template.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  MetadataTemplate template = MetadataTemplate.getMetadataTemplateByID(api, "37c0204b-3fe1-4a32-b9da-f28e88f4c4c6");
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  template = client.metadata_template_by_id(template_id='abcdef-fba434-ace44').get()
  print(f'The {template.displayName} template has {len(template.fields)} fields')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxMetadataTemplate template = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetMetadataTemplateById("17f2d715-6acb-45f2-b96a-28b15efc9faa");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.getTemplateByID('17f2d715-6acb-45f2-b96a-28b15efc9faa')
   .then(template => {
    /* template -> {
     id: '17f2d715-6acb-45f2-b96a-28b15efc9faa',
     templateKey: 'vcontract',
     scope: 'enterprise_12345',
     displayName: 'Vendor Contract',
     hidden: true,
     fields: 
     [ { type: 'date',
      key: 'signed',
      displayName: 'Date Signed',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'string',
      key: 'vendor',
      displayName: 'Vendor',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'enum',
      key: 'fy',
      displayName: 'Fiscal Year',
      options: 
       [ { key: 'FY17' },
       { key: 'FY18' },
       { key: 'FY19' } ],
      hidden: false } ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  To get the `id` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link>, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all instances on an item</Link>.
</Info>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Metadata templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/index



A metadata template describes a set of key/value
pairs that can be assigned to a file or folder.

For example, an `invoiceData` template might hold data about an invoice, having
a field for the invoice ID as well as the customer ID.

A file or folder can have multiple distinct template <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances">instances</Link>
associated with it, such as a `marketingCollateral` instance and a
`retentionPolicy` instance.

## Metadata scopes

Metadata templates are grouped into two distinct groups, or **scopes**.

<Card href="/guides/metadata/scopes" title="Learn more about Metadata Scopes" />

## Permissions and restrictions

There is a limit of 500 templates per enterprise.

Creating metadata templates is restricted to users with admin permission. This
means that only admins, or co-admins who have been granted rights to **Create
and edit metadata templates for your company** by the admin can use the web
app or the API to manage templates.

[template]: /guides/metadata/templates


# List all metadata templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/list



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Metadata templates can be listed for either the <Link href="/guides/metadata/scopes">enterprise or the global
scope</Link>.

## List global templates

To list all global metadata templates, call the <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-global">`GET
/metadata_templates/global`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/global" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.getGlobalMetadataTemplates();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.get_global_metadata_templates()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.GetGlobalMetadataTemplatesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.getGlobalMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().getGlobalMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<MetadataTemplate> templates = MetadataTemplate.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates('global', api);
  for (MetadataTemplate templateInfo : templates) {
      // Do something with the metadata template.
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  templates = client.get_metadata_templates(scope='global)
  for template in templates:
      print(f'Metadata template {template.templateKey} is in global scope')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxEnterpriseMetadataTemplateCollection<BoxMetadataTemplate> templates = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetEnterpriseMetadataAsync("global");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.getTemplates('global')
   .then(templates => {
    // ...
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  This API returns a list of all the metadata templates created by Box and made
  available to all enterprises.
</Info>

## List current enterprise's templates

To list all metadata templates created for usage within the current
enterprise, call the <Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-enterprise">`GET  /metadata_templates/enterprise`</Link> API
endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/enterprise" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.get_enterprise_metadata_templates()
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.GetEnterpriseMetadataTemplatesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<MetadataTemplate> templates = MetadataTemplate.getEnterpriseMetadataTemplates(api);
  for (MetadataTemplate templateInfo : templates) {
      // Do something with the metadata template.
  }
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  templates = client.get_metadata_templates()
  for template in templates:
      print(f'Metadata template {template.templateKey} is in enterprise scope')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxEnterpriseMetadataTemplateCollection<BoxMetadataTemplate> templates = await client.MetadataManager
      .GetEnterpriseMetadataAsync();
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.metadata.getTemplates('enterprise')
   .then(templates => {
    /* templates -> {
     limit: 100,
     entries: 
     [ { templateKey: 'documentFlow',
      scope: 'enterprise_12345',
      displayName: 'Document Flow',
      hidden: false,
      fields: 
       [ { type: 'string',
        key: 'currentDocumentStage',
        displayName: 'Current Document Stage',
        hidden: false }
       { type: 'string',
        key: 'needsApprovalFrom',
        displayName: 'Needs Approval From',
        hidden: false },
       { type: 'string',
        key: 'nextDocumentStage',
        displayName: 'Next Document Stage',
        hidden: false }
       { type: 'float',
        key: 'maximumDaysAllowedInCurrentStage',
        displayName: 'Maximum Days Allowed In Current Stage',
        hidden: false }
      { templateKey: 'marketingCollateral',
      scope: 'enterprise_12345',
      displayName: 'Marketing Collateral',
      hidden: false,
      fields: 
       [ { type: 'string',
        key: 'audience1',
        displayName: 'Audience',
        hidden: false },
       { type: 'string',
        key: 'previousState',
        displayName: 'Previous State',
        hidden: false } ] },
      { templateKey: 'productInfo',
      scope: 'enterprise_12345',
      displayName: 'Product Info',
      hidden: false,
      fields: 
       [ { type: 'float',
        key: 'skuNumber',
        displayName: 'SKU Number',
        hidden: false },
       { type: 'enum',
        key: 'department',
        displayName: 'Department',
        hidden: false,
        options: 
        [ { key: 'Beauty' },
        { key: 'Shoes' },
        { key: 'Accessories' },
        { key: 'Clothing' },
        { key: 'Handbags' },
        { key: 'Bedding' },
        { key: 'Watches' } ] },
       { type: 'date',
        key: 'displayDate',
        displayName: 'Display Date',
        hidden: false } ] } ],
     next_marker: null,
     prev_marker: null }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  This API returns a list of all the metadata templates created by this
  enterprise, and these templates are only available to apply to files in this enterprise.
</Info>

## Pagination

This API uses <Link href="/guides/api-calls/pagination/marker-based">marker-based pagination</Link> and can return a
`next_marker` value in the response body to indicate that more templates might
be available.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Update a metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/update



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Updating a metadata template can be achieved by passing an array of operations
to the <Link href="/reference/put-metadata-templates-id-id-schema">`PUT /metadata_templates/:scope/:templateKey/schema`</Link> API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_templates/enterprise/blueprintTemplate/schema" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json-patch+json" \
       -d '[
         {
           "op": "editField",
           "fieldKey": "category",
           "data": {
             "displayName": "Customer Group"
           }
         }
       ]'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.metadataTemplates.updateMetadataTemplate(
    'enterprise' as UpdateMetadataTemplateScope,
    templateKey,
    [
      {
        op: 'addField' as UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyOpField,
        fieldKey: 'newfieldname',
        data: { ['type']: 'string', ['displayName']: 'newFieldName' },
      } satisfies UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBody,
    ],
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.metadata_templates.update_metadata_template(
      UpdateMetadataTemplateScope.ENTERPRISE,
      template_key,
      [
          UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBody(
              op=UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyOpField.ADDFIELD,
              field_key="newfieldname",
              data={"type": "string", "displayName": "newFieldName"},
          )
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.MetadataTemplates.UpdateMetadataTemplateAsync(scope: UpdateMetadataTemplateScope.Enterprise, templateKey: templateKey, requestBody: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBody(op: UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyOpField.AddField) { FieldKey = "newfieldname", Data = new Dictionary<string, object>() { { "type", "string" }, { "displayName", "newFieldName" } } }}));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.metadataTemplates.updateMetadataTemplate(scope: UpdateMetadataTemplateScope.enterprise, templateKey: templateKey, requestBody: [UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBody(op: UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyOpField.addField, fieldKey: "newfieldname", data: ["type": "string", "displayName": "newFieldName"])])
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getMetadataTemplates().updateMetadataTemplate(UpdateMetadataTemplateScope.ENTERPRISE, templateKey, Arrays.asList(new UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBody.Builder(UpdateMetadataTemplateRequestBodyOpField.ADDFIELD).data(mapOf(entryOf("type", "string"), entryOf("displayName", "newFieldName"))).fieldKey("newfieldname").build()))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  List<MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation> updates = new ArrayList<MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation>();

  String addCategoryFieldJSON = "{\"op\":\"addField\","\"data\":{"
      + "\"displayName\":\"Category\",\"key\":\"category\",\"hidden\":false,\"type\":\"string\"}}";
  updates.add(new MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation(addCategoryFieldJSON));

  String changeTemplateNameJSON = "{\"op\":\"editTemplate\",\"data\":{"
      + "\"displayName\":\"My Metadata\"}}";
  updates.add(new MetadataTemplate.FieldOperation(changeTemplateNameJSON));

  MetadataTemplate.updateMetadataTemplate(api, "enterprise", "myData", updates);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  template = client.metadata_template('enterprise', 'employeeRecord')
  updates = template.start_update()
  updates.add_enum_option('state', 'WI')
  updates.edit_template({'hidden': False})
  updates.edit_template({'copyInstanceOnItemCopy': False})
  updated_template = template.update_info(updates=updates)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var updates = new List<BoxMetadataTemplateUpdate>()
  {
      new BoxMetadataTemplateUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataTemplateUpdateOp.addEnumOption,
          FieldKey = "fy",
          Data = new {
              key = "FY20"
          }
      },
      new BoxMetadataTemplateUpdate()
      {
          Op = MetadataTemplateUpdateOp.editTemplate,
          Data = new {
              hidden = false
          }
      }
  };
  BoxMetadataTemplate updatedTemplate = await client.MetadataManager
      .UpdateMetadataTemplate(updates, "enterprise", "marketingCollateral");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  // Add a new option to the Fiscal Year field, and un-hide the template
  var operations = [
   {
    op: 'addEnumOption',
    fieldKey: 'fy',
    data: { key: 'FY20' }
   },
   {
    op: 'editTemplate',
    data: { hidden: false }
   }
  ];
  client.metadata.updateTemplate('enterprise', 'vcontract', operations)
   .then(template => {
    /* template -> {
     templateKey: 'vcontract',
     scope: 'enterprise_12345',
     displayName: 'Vendor Contract',
     hidden: false,
     fields: 
     [ { type: 'date',
      key: 'signed',
      displayName: 'Date Signed',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'string',
      key: 'vendor',
      displayName: 'Vendor',
      hidden: false },
      { type: 'enum',
      key: 'fy',
      displayName: 'Fiscal Year',
      options: 
       [ { key: 'FY17' },
       { key: 'FY18' },
       { key: 'FY19' },
       { key: 'FY20' } ],
      hidden: false } ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  **Admin permissions required**

  Updating metadata templates is restricted to users with admin permission. This
  means that only admins, or co-admins who have been granted rights to **Create
  and edit metadata templates for your company** by the admin can use the web
  app or the API to manage templates.
</Warning>

## Operations

Updates to metadata templates are performed through **operations** rather than
directly changing the template itself. This method allows us to update any
existing metadata instances that are already applied to files and folders.

## Template operations

Template operations update a template's details or fields. These operations are
generally safe as they are applied to any template instance without much impact.

### Edit a template

The operation `editTemplate` allows for editing any of the base properties of
the template, like the `displayName`, `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` and more.

| Parameter |                                                 |
| --------- | ----------------------------------------------- |
| `data`    | An object representing the properties to change |

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "editTemplate",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Client",
      "copyInstanceOnItemCopy": true
    }
  }
]
```

This will update the template to have a new display name of Client.

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Add a field to a template

The operation `addField` adds a field to a template.

| Parameter |                                     |
| --------- | ----------------------------------- |
| `data`    | An object representing field to add |

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "op": "addField",
    "data": {
      "displayName": "Category",
      "key": "category",
      "hidden": false,
      "type": "string"
    }
  }
]
```

This will add a new non-hidden string field with a `displayName` and `key` of
**category**.

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Reorder fields

The operation `reorderFields` reorders the list of fields in a template to match
the requested field list.

| Parameter   |                                                   |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------------------- |
| `fieldKeys` | The new list of field keys in the requested order |

```json theme={null}
{
  "op": "reorderFields",
  "fieldKeys": ["field2", "field1", "field3"]
}
```

This will reorder the fields for the template to have `field2` first, followed
by `field1`, then `field3`.

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template. It will reorder the
  fields, yet keep the values of the fields intact.
</Warning>

## Field operations

Field operations transform the schema of a template. The following is a list of
operations that can be used in this API and can potentially change the data of
any previously assigned templates.

These changes will be logged as template changes but not as file changes.

### Edit a field

The operation `editField` edits any number of the base properties of a
field like the `displayName`, `description`, `key`, and `hidden` state.

| Parameter  |                                                                |
| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `data`     | An object representing the new properties to set for the field |
| `fieldKey` | The key of the field to be edited                              |

```json theme={null}
{
  "op": "editField",
  "fieldKey": "category",
  "data": {
    "displayName": "Customer Group"
  }
}
```

This will update the field `category` to have a new display name of
**Customer Group**. If the key is changed, existing values of the specified
field are migrated to the new key. The search index will be updated, yet it may
take time depending on how many files are affected by the change.

<Warning>
  This may affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

### Remove a field

The operation `removeField` removes a field from a template.

| Parameter  |                                                  |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| `fieldKey` | The key of the field to remove from the template |

```json theme={null}
{
  "op": "removeField",
  "fieldKey": "brand"
}
```

This will remove the field `brand` from the template as well as all instances of
the template. The search index will be updated, yet it may take time depending on
how many files are affected by the change.

<Warning>
  This will affect existing instances of this template.
</Warning>

## Field Option Operations

Both the <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum">`enum`</Link> and
<Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select">`multiSelect`</Link> metadata field types support
some additional operations to change the options of the fields.

| Operation                                                                                            |                                                |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------- |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum#add-an-option">`addEnumOption`</Link>                       | Adds an option to an `enum` field              |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum#edit-an-option">`editEnumOption`</Link>                     | Edits an `enum` field option                   |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum#reorder-options">`reorderEnumOptions`</Link>                | Re-orders the options on an `enum` field       |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/enum#remove-an-option">`removeEnumOption`</Link>                 | Removes an `enum` field option                 |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select#add-an-option">`addMultiSelectOption`</Link>        | Adds an option to a `multiSelect` field        |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select#edit-an-option">`editMultiSelectOption`</Link>      | Edits a `multiSelect` field option             |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select#reorder-options">`reorderMultiSelectOptions`</Link> | Re-orders the options on a `multiSelect` field |
| <Link href="/guides/metadata/fields/multi-select#remove-an-option">`removeMultiSelectOption`</Link>  | Removes a `multiSelect` field option           |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Android
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/android/index



The [Box Android SDK][android-sdk] provides native access to the Box API from
within your Android project.

<Warning>
  As of May 31, 2023 Android SDK is no
  longer supported.
  You can still use your
  existing Android SDK applications with no impact,
  but you won't receive new features,
  updates, or bug fixes.

  If you would like to continue getting
  the latest and greatest Android features,
  we recommend using Java SDK to build apps on Android.
  Refer to [this][android-docs] documentation for more details.
</Warning>

[android-sdk]: https://github.com/box/box-android-sdk

[android-docs]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/android.md


# Android SDK Installation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/android/install



<Warning>
  As of May 31, 2023 Android SDK is
  no longer supported. You can still
  use your existing Android SDK applications
  with no impact, but you won't receive new features,
  updates, or bug fixes.

  If you would like to continue
  getting the latest and greatest Android
  features, we recommend using Java SDK to build apps
  on Android. Refer to [this][android-docs] documentation for more details.
</Warning>

The Android SDK may be obtained through several methods:

* Adding as a Maven or Gradle dependency
* Cloning the source into your project
* Downloading one of the precompiled JARs

## Add as a Maven dependency

Add the following to your Maven dependencies.

```xml theme={null}
<dependency>
    <groupId>com.box</groupId>
    <artifactId>box-android-sdk</artifactId>
</dependency>
```

## Add as a Gradle dependency

Add the following to your `build.gradle` file.

```js theme={null}
dependencies {
    implementation 'com.box:box-android-sdk:4.2.3'
}
```

## Clone the source

The Box Android SDK source code may be obtained by cloning or downloading the
[project from Github][android-sdk-github].

## Download precompiled JARs

Precompiled JARs for the Android SDK may be obtained from the Github project
[releases page][android-sdk-github-releases]

<Warning>
  If one of the precompiled JARs is being used, the Android SDK will also
  require the following dependency: `minimal-json v0.9.1` (for Maven:
  `com.eclipsesource.minimal-json:minimal-json:0.9.1`)
</Warning>

[android-sdk-github]: https://github.com/box/box-android-sdk/tree/master/box-content-sdk

[android-sdk-github-releases]: https://github.com/box/box-android-sdk/releases

[android-docs]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/android.md


# Mobile
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/index



The Box mobile SDKs provide native access to the Box API from within your iOS
and Android projects.


# iOS
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/index



The [Box iOS SDK][ios-sdk] provides native access to the Box API from
within your iOS project.

[ios-sdk]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk


# Configure a Box Platform App
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/configure-box-app



<ProgressBar />

To start making authenticated API calls to the Box API with the **Box iOS SDK**, an **Access Token** will be needed. The simplest way to generate a valid
token is to generate a new **Box Platform App** and manually generate a short lived developer token.

The developer token is generated through the developer console UI and will be
valid for one hour before having to be manually refreshed.

## Set up a Box app

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Create a new Box app

    Create and configure a new Box JWT application from which a developer
    token may be generated.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Use an existing app

    Use one of your existing Box JWT applications from the Box developer
    console.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  # Create a new Box app

  To create a new Box application that may be used to generate a developer
  token, use the following steps.

  1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole] > **My Platform Apps**.
  2. Select **Create Platform App**.
  3. Select **Platform App** as the type of application to create, and click **Next**.
  4. Enter the **App Name**, an optional **Description** and **Purpose** of the App. Confirm with **Next**.
  5. Select **User Authentication (OAuth 2.0)** as the authentication method, and click **Create App**
  6. Optionally, scroll to the **Application Scopes** section of the same screen and select any additional permissions you want to enable for this application.
  7. At the top of the page click the button to **Save Changes**.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Use an Existing JWT Box application

  If you have an existing JWT based Box application in your
  [developer console][devconsole] that you
  would like to use, skip to the next step.
</Choice>

## Generate a developer token

Now that an application is available, we need to create a developer token that
may be used to authenticate the Box iOS SDK to start making calls to the Box
APIs.

1. Go to the [Developer Console][devconsole]
2. Load the application that you would like to use
3. In the left navigation menu, click on **Configuration**
4. Under **Developer Token**, click the **Generate Developer Token** button
5. Copy the token for the next step to make an API call

## Summary

* You created a new, or are using an existing, Box app
* You have generated and copied the developer token

<Observe>
  <Next>I have a developer token</Next>
</Observe>

[devconsole]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console


# Create an iOS App
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/create-ios-app



<ProgressBar />

Before installing the Box iOS SDK you'll need to have an iOS application
available to add the dependencies into. We'll create a new blank application
now.

## Setup an iOS App

Xcode will be the tool that we use to create and edit our iOS application
during this quick-start guide. If you don't have Xcode, download it now from the
[Apple developer site](https://developer.apple.com/xcode/).

If this is the first application you're creating in Xcode or you already have
application development experience in it, we'll start our integration of the
Box iOS SDK with a new blank application.

1. Start Xcode
2. From the top menu, select **File** -> **New** -> **Project...**
3. Select the option for **Single View App**
   <Frame>
     <img alt="Select iOS application type" />
   </Frame>
4. Enter your application configuration information, including the `Product Name`, `Organization Identifier`, and `Organization Name`.
   <Frame>
     <img alt="Configure iOS application" />
   </Frame>
5. Select a local storage location for the application and click **Create**

## Summary

* You created a new blank iOS application in Xcode

<Next>I created a blank iOS application</Next>


# Learn to use the iOS SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/index



<Frame>
  <img alt="iOS emulator" />
</Frame>

The Box iOS SDK is a [Swift language](https://developer.apple.com/swift/)
wrapper for adding the Box API into your iOS project.

## Requirements

To begin working with the Box iOS SDK and this quick start, the following are
required:

* iOS 11.0+ / Mac OS X 10.13+
* Xcode 10.0+

## Overview

This guide will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/create-ios-app">Create a new iOS app</Link> in Xcode.
2. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/install-ios-sdk">Install the iOS SDK</Link> into your project.
3. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/configure-box-app">Configure a Box App</Link> so that the iOS SDK can access the Box API.
4. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/make-api-call">Make an API call</Link> to the Box API with the iOS SDK.


# Install the iOS SDK
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/install-ios-sdk



<ProgressBar />

With an iOS application in place, you will need to import the required **Box
iOS SDK** dependencies into your project using one of the available package
manager options.

## Select a package manager to use

<Grid>
  <Choose>
    # Carthage

    Carthage is a decentralized dependency manager for Swift
    and Objective-C Cocoa projects. It is open-source and built
    with Swift.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # CocoaPods

    CocoaPods is a centralized dependency manager for Swift and
    Objective-C Cocoa projects. It is open-source and was built
    with Ruby.
  </Choose>

  <Choose>
    # Swift Package Manager

    The Swift Package Manager is a tool for managing the distribution
    of source code, making it easy to share your code and reuse
    others’ code.
  </Choose>
</Grid>

<Choice>
  # Install the iOS SDK using Carthage

  1. From a terminal window, install Carthage: `brew install carthage`. Visit the [Carthage documentation][carthage-docs] for other installation methods.
  2. At the root of your iOS application folder, where the `{APPNAME}.xcodeproj` is located, create a new file named `Cartfile`, without an extension.
  3. Open the `Cartfile` and add the **Box iOS SDK** dependency with `git "https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk.git" ~> 3.0`, then save and close the file.
  4. From the terminal, in the folder where the `Cartfile` is present, update all dependencies: `carthage update --platform iOS`. A `Cartfile.resolved` file and a `Carthage` directory will be created in the directory.
  5. Within a Finder or File Explorer window load the **Carthage** -> **Build** -> **iOS** directory. This should have a framework file named `BoxSDK.framework`. Keep this window open as we'll use it to add the framework to our project in the next step.
  6. In your Xcode project, click on the name of your application at the top of the project navigator on the left. In the content that displays, click on the name of your project under the **TARGETS** option. Scroll down to **Frameworks, Libraries, and Embedded Content**.
  7. Drag `BoxSDK.framework` from our Finder window over to the frameworks section.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Add framework to project" />
  </Frame>
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Install the iOS SDK using CocoaPods

  1. From a terminal window, install CocoaPods: `sudo gem install cocoapods`.
  2. At the root of your iOS application folder, where the `APPNAME.xcodeproj` is located, run `pod init` to create a new `Podfile` with smart defaults.
  3. Load `Podfile`, add the **Box iOS SDK** dependency under `# Pods for {APPNAME}` with `pod 'BoxSDK', '~> 3.0'`, then save and close.
  4. From the terminal, in the folder where the `Podfile` is present, download all dependencies: `pod install`.
  5. Open `.xcworkspace` in Xcode: `open {APPNAME}.xcworkspace` and build the project.
</Choice>

<Choice>
  # Install the iOS SDK using the Swift Package Manager

  1. In your Xcode project, click on the name of your application at the top of the project navigator on the left. In the content that displays, click on the name of your project under the **PROJECT** option.
  2. Click on **Swift Packages** and click on the `+` to add a package.
  3. Enter the following repository URL `https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk.git` and click next.
  4. Leave the default settings and click next to finish importing.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Add framework to project" />
  </Frame>
</Choice>

## Summary

* You either selected to install the iOS dependencies using Carthage
  * You installed Carthage
  * You create a `Cartfile` with the Box iOS SDK dependency
  * You installed the iOS SDK dependencies
  * You manually imported the built dependencies into the Xcode project framework list.
* Or selected to use **CocoaPods** and
  * You installed CocoaPods
  * You created a new `Podfile` with the Box iOS SDK dependency
  * You installed the iOS SDK dependencies
  * You built the project in Xcode
* Or selected to use the **Swift Package Manager** and
  * You imported the iOS SDK `.git` repository into the Swift packages

<Observe>
  <Next>I've installed the Box iOS SDK dependencies</Next>
</Observe>

[carthage-docs]: https://github.com/Carthage/Carthage#installing-carthage


# Make an API call
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/make-api-call



<ProgressBar />

With our Box and iOS applications created and configured with the **Box iOS
SDK** we can now make our first call to Box APIs.

Using our blank iOS application, we will create a button to trigger
a request to Box to fetch the name of the currently authenticated user.

<Warning>
  Using a blocking actions as we use in these examples is slow. In a production
  app these blocking actions would need to be replaced with proper task
  delegation and non-blocking actions.
</Warning>

## Create a button

Within your Swift application in Xcode, load `ContentView.swift`. At the top of
the file you will see a `struct` for `ContentView`, within which is a basic
string that will be output to your iOS application if you run the app in an
emulator.

```swift theme={null}
import SwiftUI

struct ContentView: View {
  var body: some View {
    Text("Hello, World!")
  }
}
```

We'll first replace the `Text` output line with a button to be able to trigger
off the call to get the current user. Replace that line with the below button.

```swift theme={null}
Button(action: {
  // Perform some action
}) {
  Text("Click to get current user")
}
.padding(10)
.cornerRadius(20)
.foregroundColor(.white)
.background(Color.blue)
```

Our next step is to add an an action for the button which will fetch a user's
details from Box.

## Add an API call button action

When a user clicks the button, we want to fetch the user's details. To achieve
this we need to do two things, add the import for the **Box iOS SDK** and add
the button action to make the call.

At the top of the `ContentView.swift` file, add `import BoxSDK` with the other
import statement.

Next, within the button action, where we currently have a comment placeholder,
add a call to the iOS SDK to fetch the current user. When the API call
completes it will print an authentication message to the developer console. For
ease of implementation, we have a blocking `sleep(5)` call in place in order to
test that the iOS SDK can make calls from our iOS SDK by providing enough time
for the request to complete.

Replace `{{YOUR DEVELOPER TOKEN}}` with your developer token.

```swift theme={null}
let client = BoxSDK.getClient(token: "{{YOUR DEVELOPER TOKEN}}")

client.users.getCurrent(fields:["name", "login"]) { (result: Result<User,
  BoxSDKError>) in
  guard case let .success(user) = result else {
      print("Error getting user information")
      return
  }
  print("Authenticated as \(user.name)")
}

sleep(5)
```

Build and run your sample application in the iOS emulator.

<Warning>
  If you run this code an hour or more after you created the developer
  token in the last step, you will need to revoke and generate a new developer
  token using the same method in the
  <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/configure-box-app">previous step</Link> as the
  developer token will only persist for 60 minutes.
</Warning>

Once the application loads in the emulator you should see the button we
created. Click it to start the API request.

Within the Xcode developer console you should see the API request and response,
with the last line showing the user print statement that we specified.

```bash theme={null}
◁ Status code: 200: no error
◁ Headers:
    ◁ Cache-Control, Value: no-cache, no-store
    ◁ BOX-REQUEST-ID, Value: 1c55151238444132eca16b4c2346d005
    ◁ Transfer-Encoding, Value: Identity
    ◁ content-type, Value: application/json
    ◁ Connection, Value: keep-alive
    ◁ Strict-Transport-Security, Value: max-age=31536000
◁ Body: {"type":"user","id":"123456789","name":"Test
          User","login":"testuser@test.com"}

Authenticated as Optional("Test User")
```

<Note>
  If you don't see the Xcode developer console, from the menu click **View** ->
  **Debug Area** -> **Activate Console**
</Note>

Congratulations, you've now configured the **Box iOS SDK** and have made your
first call to the Box API.

## Summary

* You added a button to your blank iOS application
* You added a request to fetch the current user using the iOS SDK

<Next>I made an API call</Next>


# Next steps
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/next-steps



<ProgressBar />

You've reached the end of this Quick Start guide. By now you should have taken
the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/create-ios-app">Created a new iOS app</Link> in Xcode.
2. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/install-ios-sdk">Installed the iOS SDK</Link> into your project.
3. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/configure-box-app">Configured a Box App</Link> so that the iOS SDK can access the Box API.
4. <Link href="/guides/mobile/ios/quick-start/make-api-call">Made your first API call</Link> to the Box API with the iOS SDK.

## Next things to do

To take the next step with your application, the following resources are
recommended.

* <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/downscope">Token Downscoping</Link>: In this quick start guide you used a developer token to make your first call. To implement a scalable solution you should have a server-side solution to generate downscoped tokens to replace that implementation.
* [Official JWT sample application][sample-jwt]: Bundled with the iOS SDK, this sample application will get you started quickly with a properly structured Box JWT application, which doesn't require user login.
* [Official OAuth 2 sample application][sample-oauth]: Bundled with the iOS SDK, this sample application will get you started quickly with a properly structured Box OAuth 2 application, which requires user login.

[sample-jwt]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/master/SampleApps/JWTSampleApp

[sample-oauth]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/master/SampleApps/OAuth2SampleApp


# Deep Linking
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/mobile/mobile-deep-linking



Box’s mobile applications support deep linking into folder and file objects.
From a web page or native app it is possible to deep link to open an object
directly in Box.

The following URLs are supported in Box’s mobile applications:

| Application     | Object Type | Deep Link URL                          | iOS & Android |
| --------------- | ----------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------- |
| **Box**         | Folder      | `boxapp://folder?id=[folderid]`        | Version 3.7+  |
|                 | File        | `boxapp://file?id=[fileid]`            |               |
|                 | Shared Link | `boxapp://sharedlink?url=[sharedlink]` |               |
|                 |             |                                        |               |
| **Box for EMM** | Folder      | `boxemm://folder?id=[folderid]`        | Version 3.7+  |
|                 | File        | `boxemm://file?id=[fileid]`            |               |
|                 | Shared Link | `boxemm://sharedlink?url=[sharedlink]` |               |


# Download File Representation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/download-a-representation



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

Use the`url_template` that was received when
<Link href="/guides/representations/request-a-representation">selecting the representation</Link> to download
the representation. Replace the `{+asset_path}` depending on
the type of representation.

## Paginated representations

For paged representations like PDFs replace `{+asset_path}`
with the desired page number and the file extension, for example
`1.pdf`.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://dl.boxcloud.com/api/2.0/internal_files/123/versions/345/representations/pdf/content/3.pdf \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

## Non-paginated representations

For non-paged representations, replace the `{+asset_path}` with
an empty string.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://dl.boxcloud.com/api/2.0/internal_files/123/versions/345/representations/jpg_32x32/content/ \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

## Optional query parameters

When fetching the representation the following optional headers
are supported.

| Parameter                      | Options                 | Default |
| ------------------------------ | ----------------------- | ------- |
| `set_content_disposition_type` | `inline` / `attachment` | `null`  |

Sets the `content-disposition` header in the API response with the specified
value. A disposition type of `attachment` causes most web browsers to prompt
the user to save the response to their device, where the type `inline`
will open the file in the browser.

If not supplied, the `content-disposition` header is not included in the
response.

| Parameter                          | Options                    | Default |
| ---------------------------------- | -------------------------- | ------- |
| `set_content_disposition_filename` | Filename without extension | `null`  |

Allows the application to define the downloaded representation's file name.

If not defined, the file name is derived from the source file name in Box,
replacing the extension with the representation's file type.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Representations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/index



A representation is an alternative asset for a file stored in Box. These assets
can be PDFs, thumbnails, or text extractions.

Representations are automatically generated for the supported file types, either
when uploading to Box or when requesting the asset.

These representations are exposed through the `GET /files/:id` endpoint by using
the `fields=representations` query parameter and the `x-rep-hints` header.


# List All Representations for File
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/list-all-representations



To see what representations are available for a file you can call the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link> endpoint while requesting the
<Link href="/reference/resources/file#param-representations">`representations`</Link> field.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123?fields=representations \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

The response will include a list of representations in the following format

```json theme={null}
...
{
  "info": {
    "url": "https://api.box.com/2.0/internal_files/123/versions/345/representations/jpg_thumb_32x32"
  },
  "properties": {
      "dimensions": "32x32",
      "paged": "false",
      "thumb": "true"
  },
  "representation": "jpg"
}
...
```

## Response fields

Every representation will include a set of properties and the type of
representation.

* The optional `dimensions` field represents the file's dimensions in pixels as width by height.

* The optional `paged` field specifies if this representation is a paged document. Some images and PDFs will often be paged documents.

* The optional `thumb` field specifies if this representation is suitable as a file thumbnail.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get PDF Representation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/pdf



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A PDF representation provides a predictable way to embed documents
in mobile and web applications. PDF representations support watermarks
if the original file has been watermarked.

PDF representations are generated upon uploading the source file to Box, though
a watermarked PDF is generated upon fetching the watermarked file for
the first time.

## The process

To get a PDF representation follow the following steps

* <Link href="/guides/representations/list-all-representations">List all representations</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/representations/request-a-representation">Request a PDF</Link> by passing the `x-rep-hints`-header for the desired file type `[pdf]`.
* <Link href="/guides/representations/download-a-representation">Download the PDF</Link> by calling the `url_template`, replacing the `{+asset_path}` with an the page of the PDF to request, for example `1.pdf`.

## Watermarked PDFs

To retrieve a watermarked PDF the underlying file itself needs to be
watermarked in Box. You can watermark a file either via the Box web application
or using the <Link href="/reference/put-files-id-watermark">`PUT /files/:id/watermark/`</Link> API.

Once watermarked, a watermarked PDF representation of the file is generated.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Request Desired Representation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/request-a-representation



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To select a specific representation call the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">`GET /files/:id`</Link>
endpoint with a <Link href="/reference/get-files-id#param-x-rep-hints">`x-rep-hints`</Link>-header defining the
required representation format.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123?fields=representations \
    -H "x-rep-hints: [pdf]" \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

## Multiple dimensions

Some formats will require the `dimensions` to be passed in to select a
specific size. This can be achieved by appending the `dimensions` to the
header.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123?fields=representations \
    -H "x-rep-hints: [jpg?dimensions=94x94]" \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

## Multiple representations

Multiple representations can be fetched by chaining the different
types in the `x-rep-hints`-header.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123?fields=representations \
    -H "x-rep-hints: [pdf][jpg?dimensions=94x94]" \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

## API Response

This API call will result in one or more representations with a `url_template`
value that includes a `{+asset_path}` value.

```json theme={null}
{
  "etag": "1",
  "id": "123",
  "representations": {
    "entries": [
      {
        "content": {
          "url_template": "https://dl.boxcloud.com/api/2.0/internal_files/123/versions/345/representations/pdf/content/{+asset_path}"
        },
        "info": {
          "url": "https://api.box.com/2.0/internal_files/123/versions/345/representations/pdf"
        },
        "properties": {},
        "representation": "pdf",
        "status": {
          "state": "success"
        }
      }
    ]
  },
  "type": "file"
}
```

<Note>
  The `url_template` in this response is an **opaque** URL. This URL format
  might change over time and no assumptions should be made about its format
  except for the presence of the `{+asset_path}` variable.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Supported File Types
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/supported-file-types



The following file types are supported by the representation API.

## 3D Graphics and Modeling Files

| File Type | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| --------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.3ds`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.box3d`  | No           | No          | No    |
| `.dae`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.fbx`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.mtl`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.obj`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.ply`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.stl`    | No           | No          | No    |

## Audio

| File Type | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| --------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.aac`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.aif`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.aifc`   | No           | No          | No    |
| `.aiff`   | No           | No          | No    |
| `.amr`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.au`     | No           | No          | No    |
| `.flac`   | No           | No          | No    |
| `.m4a`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.mp3`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.ogg`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.ra`     | No           | No          | No    |
| `.wav`    | No           | No          | No    |
| `.wma`    | No           | No          | No    |

## CAD

| File Type | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| --------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.dwg`    | Yes          | Yes         | No    |

## Documents

| File Type  | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| ---------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.boxnote` | No           | No          | Yes   |
| `.doc`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.docx`    | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.gdoc`    | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.html`    | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.msg`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.odt`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.pages`   | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.pdf`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.rtf`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.wpd`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.xhtml`   | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.xml`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.xsd`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.xsl`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.xbd`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.xdw`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |

## Drawing

| File Type    | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| ------------ | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.ai`        | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.boxcanvas` | No           | No          | Yes   |
| `.indd`      | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.psd`       | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.svg`       | No           | Yes         | No    |

## Image

| File Type | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| --------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.bmp`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.cr2`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.crw`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.dcm`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.dicm`   | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.dicom`  | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.dng`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.eps`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.gif`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.heic`   | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.indd`   | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.idml`   | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.indt`   | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.inx`    | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.jpeg`   | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.jpg`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.nef`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.png`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.ps`     | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.psd`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.raf`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.raw`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.svg`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.svs`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.tif`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.tiff`   | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.tga`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.webp`   | No           | Yes         | No    |

## Presentation

| File Type  | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| ---------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.gslide`  | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.gslides` | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.key`     | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.odp`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.otp`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.ppt`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.pptx`    | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |

## Spreadsheet

| File Type  | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| ---------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.csv`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.gsheet`  | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.numbers` | Yes          | Yes         | No    |
| `.ods`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.tsv`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.xls`     | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.xlsm`    | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |
| `.xlsx`    | Yes          | Yes         | Yes   |

## Text-Based Files

| File Type     | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| ------------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.as`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.as3`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.asm`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.bat`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.c`          | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.cc`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.cmake`      | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.cpp`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.cs`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.css`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.cxx`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.diff`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.erb`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.fdx`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.groovy`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.h`          | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.haml`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.hh`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.java`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.js`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.json`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.less`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.log`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.m`          | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.make`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.md`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.ml`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.mm`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.php`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.pl`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.plist`      | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.properties` | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.py`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.rb`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.rst`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.sass`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.scala`      | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.scm`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.script`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.sh`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.sml`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.sql`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.txt`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.vi`         | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.vim`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.vtt`        | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.webdoc`     | Yes          | No          | Yes   |
| `.yaml`       | Yes          | No          | Yes   |

## Video

| File Type | PDF Support? | Thumbnails? | Text? |
| --------- | ------------ | ----------- | ----- |
| `.3g2`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.3gp`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.avi`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.flv`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.m2v`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.m2ts`   | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.m4v`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.mkv`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.mov`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.mp4`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.mpeg`   | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.mpg`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.mts`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.ogg`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.qt`     | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.ts`     | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.swf`    | No           | Yes         | No    |
| `.wmv`    | No           | Yes         | No    |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get Text Representation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/text



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A text representation provides a way to extract plain text
from a document.

Text is generated for all document file types including plain text and
code files supported by Box. This does not include image files as these
do not have a text layer.

Text representations are generated upon upload of the file, similarly to PDFs
and thumbnails. They are not generated for files larger than 500
megabytes.

## The process

To get a text representation follow the following steps

* <Link href="/guides/representations/list-all-representations">List all representations</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/representations/request-a-representation">Request a text representation</Link> by passing the `x-rep-hints`-header with the value `[extracted_text]`.
* <Link href="/guides/representations/download-a-representation">Download the text</Link> by calling the `url_template`, replacing the `{+asset_path}` with an empty string.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get Basic Thumbnail
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/thumbnail



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A thumbnail is a small image, either as `.png` or as `.jpg` that can be used in
an application as a representation of the file, for example as a placeholder for
a link that downloads or previews the file.

<Info>
  The preferred way to get a thumbnail for a file is using the
  <Link href="/guides/representations/thumbnail-representation">representations API</Link>.
</Info>

## Requesting

To request a file thumbnail use the <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-thumbnail-id">`GET
/files/:id/thumbnail.:extension`</Link>
endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/thumbnail.png" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.files.getFileThumbnailById(
    thumbnailFile.id,
    'png' as GetFileThumbnailByIdExtension,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.files.get_file_thumbnail_by_id(
      thumbnail_file.id, GetFileThumbnailByIdExtension.PNG
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Files.GetFileThumbnailByIdAsync(fileId: thumbnailFile.Id, extension: GetFileThumbnailByIdExtension.Png);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.files.getFileThumbnailById(fileId: thumbnailFile.id, extension_: GetFileThumbnailByIdExtension.png, downloadDestinationUrl: destinationPath)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getFiles().getFileThumbnailById(thumbnailFile.getId(), GetFileThumbnailByIdExtension.PNG)
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file_id = '11111'

  thumbnail = client.file(file_id).get_thumbnail_representation('92x92', extension='jpg')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  Stream thumbnailContents = await client.FilesManager.GetThumbnailAsync("11111", maxWidth: 160, maxHeight: 160);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

When a thumbnail was successfully created, this will return the thumbnail
in the body of the response as binary data.

## Asynchronous thumbnail creation

Sometimes the thumbnail can not be created directly. Instead, the API will
return a `HTTP 202` with a `location` response header. The location
is for a temporary image that can be used while the thumbnail is being
generated.

A `retry-after` response header is also provided to present you with
an estimated amount of seconds before retrying this endpoint.

## Supported file sizes

The following formats and sizes of thumbnails are available.

| File Type | Dimensions                                                         |
| --------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| JPG       | `32x32`, `94x94`, `160x160`, `320x320`, `1024x1024`, `2048x2048`\* |
| PNG       | `1024x1024`\*, `2048x2048`\*                                       |

Some restrictions apply to the sizes marked as `*`.

## File size restrictions

### Original file size

Thumbnails are not scaled up. If the original file size of the file uploaded to
Box is smaller than the representation dimensions, the resulting thumbnail is
capped at the size of the original file.

## Supported file types

At this time the following file types are supported.

| File Type | File Extensions                                                                                                                                                 |
| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Documents | `doc`, `docx`, `gdoc`, `gsheet`, `gslide`, `gslides`, `odp`, `ods`, `odt`, `pdf`, `ppt`, `pptx`, `rtf`, `wpd`, `xls`, `xlsm`, `xlsx`, `key`, `pages`, `numbers` |
| Images    | `ai`, `bmp`, `dcm`, `dicm`, `eps`, `gif`, `idml`, `indd`, `indt`, `inx`, `jpeg`, `jpg`, `png`, `ps`, `psd`, `svg`, `svs`, `tif`, `tiff`, `tga`                  |
| Audio     | `aac`, `aifc`, `aiff`, `amr`, `au`, `flac`, `m4a`, `mp3`, `ogg`, `ra`, `wav`, `wma`                                                                             |
| Video     | `3g2`, `3gp`, `avi`, `m2v`, `m2ts`, `m4v`, `mkv`, `mov`, `mp4`, `mpeg`, `mpg`, `mts`, `ogg`, `qt`, `wmv`                                                        |

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get Thumbnail Representation
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/representations/thumbnail-representation



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

A thumbnail is a small image, either as `.png` or as `.jpg` that can be used in
an application as a representation of the file, for example as a placeholder for
a link that downloads or previews the file.

All thumbnail representations except `1024x1024` and `2048x2048` PNGs are
generated upon uploading the source file to Box.

<Warning>
  An deprecated way to get a thumbnail for a file is using the
  <Link href="/guides/representations/thumbnail">thumbnail API</Link>.
</Warning>

## The process

To get a thumbnail representation follow the following steps

* <Link href="/guides/representations/list-all-representations">List all representations</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/representations/request-a-representation">Request a thumbnail</Link> by passing the `x-rep-hints`-header for the desired thumbnail format and size, for example `[jpg?dimensions=32x32]`.
* <Link href="/guides/representations/download-a-representation">Download the thumbnail</Link> by calling the `url_template`, replacing the `{+asset_path}` with an empty string.

<Warning>
  Sometimes the thumbnail can not be created directly. Instead,
  the API will return a `HTTP 202` with a `location` response header.
  The location is for a temporary image that can be used while the thumbnail
  is being generated.
</Warning>

A retry-after response header is also provided to present you with an
estimated amount of seconds before retrying this endpoint.

## Examples

The following a some example `x-rep-hints`-header values

| `x-rep-hints: [jpg?dimensions=32x32]` |
| ------------------------------------- |
| Returns a `32x32` JPEG thumbnail      |

| `x-rep-hints: [jpg?dimensions=32x32][jpg?dimensions=1024x1024]` |
| --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Returns `32x32` and `1024x1024` JPEG thumbnails                 |

| `x-rep-hints: [jpg?dimensions=32x32][png?dimensions=2048x2048]` |
| --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Returns a `32x32` JPEG and a `2048x2048` PNG thumbnail          |

| `x-rep-hints: [jpg?dimensions=2048x2048,png?dimensions=2048x2048]`                                                                                                     |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Returns a `2048x2048` JPEG or a `2048x2048` PNG thumbnail, returning the first representation that is available. If neither is available it returns no representations |

## Supported file sizes

The following formats and sizes of thumbnails are available.

| File Type | Dimensions                                                         |
| --------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| JPG       | `32x32`, `94x94`, `160x160`, `320x320`, `1024x1024`, `2048x2048`\* |
| PNG       | `1024x1024`\*, `2048x2048`\*                                       |

Some restrictions apply to the sizes marked as `*`.

## File size restrictions

### JPEG `2048x2048`

The JPEG `2048x2048` size is only available when the
original file is a JPEG. We recommend either requesting a PNG or both a PNG
and a JPEG for this dimension.

### Video files

JPEG `2048x2048`, PNG `2048x20148` and PNG `1024x1024` representations are not
available for video files.

### Original file size

Thumbnails are not scaled up. If the original file size of the file uploaded to
Box is smaller than the representation dimensions, the resulting thumbnail is
capped at the size of the original file.

## Supported file types

At this time the following file types are supported.

| File Type | File Extensions                                                                                                                                                 |
| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Documents | `doc`, `docx`, `gdoc`, `gsheet`, `gslide`, `gslides`, `odp`, `ods`, `odt`, `pdf`, `ppt`, `pptx`, `rtf`, `wpd`, `xls`, `xlsm`, `xlsx`, `key`, `pages`, `numbers` |
| Images    | `ai`, `bmp`, `dcm`, `dicm`, `eps`, `gif`, `idml`, `indd`, `indt`, `inx`, `jpeg`, `jpg`, `png`, `ps`, `psd`, `svg`, `svs`, `tif`, `tiff`, `tga`                  |
| Audio     | `aac`, `aifc`, `aiff`, `amr`, `au`, `flac`, `m4a`, `mp3`, `ogg`, `ra`, `wav`, `wma`                                                                             |
| Video     | `3g2`, `3gp`, `avi`, `m2v`, `m2ts`, `m4v`, `mkv`, `mov`, `mp4`, `mpeg`, `mpg`, `ogg`, `mts`, `qt`, `wmv`                                                        |

<Warning>
  For **document** file types the representation returned will be a placeholder
  icon and not an actual thumbnail.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get Retention Policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/retention-policies/get



To get the information for a specific Retention Policy that has been created in
an enterprise, call the <Link href="/reference/get-retention-policies-id">`GET /retention_policies/:id`</Link> API endpoint
with the `id` of the policy.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/retention_policies/982312" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.retentionPolicies.getRetentionPolicyById(retentionPolicy.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.retention_policies.get_retention_policy_by_id(retention_policy.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.RetentionPolicies.GetRetentionPolicyByIdAsync(retentionPolicyId: retentionPolicy.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.retentionPolicies.getRetentionPolicyById(retentionPolicyId: retentionPolicy.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getRetentionPolicies().getRetentionPolicyById(retentionPolicy.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  // Get the policy name and status for a given retention policy
  BoxRetentionPolicy policy = new BoxRetentionPolicy(api, id);
  policy.getInfo("policy_name", "status");
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  retention_policy = client.retention_policy(retention_id='12345').get()
  print(f'Retention Policy ID is {retention_policy.id} and the name is {retention_policy.policy_name}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxRetentionPolicy policy = await client.RetentionPoliciesManager.GetRetentionPolicyAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.retentionPolicies.get('123456789').then((policy) => {
  	/* policy -> {
  			type: 'retention_policy',
  			id: '123456789',
  			policy_name: 'Tax Documents',
  			policy_type: 'indefinite',
  			retention_length: 'indefinite',
  			retention_type: 'modifiable',
  			description: 'Policy to retain all reports',
  			disposition_action: 'remove_retention',
  			can_owner_extend_retention: false,
  			status: 'active',
  			are_owners_notified: true,
  			custom_notification_recipients: []
  			assignment_counts: { enterprise: 0, folder: 1, metadata_template: 0 },
  			created_by:
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '11111',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			created_at: '2015-05-01T11:12:54-07:00',
  			modified_at: '2015-06-08T11:11:50-07:00' }
  		*/
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Required Scopes

Before using any of the Retention Policy APIs, an application must have the
right scopes enabled. See <Link href="/guides/retention-policies#required-scopes">Required Scopes</Link> for more details.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Retention Policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/retention-policies/index



A retention policy blocks permanent deletion of content for a specified amount
of time. Admins can create retention policies and then assign them to
specific folders or their entire enterprise. Retention policies can be used to
keep data for as long as is needed, and then automatically delete the content
permanently when the data can no longer be legally held.

<Info>
  Retention Policies are a feature of the [Box Governance][governance] package,
  which can be added on to any Business Plus or Enterprise account.
</Info>

## Policies, Assignments, and Retentions

Working with Retention Policies requires a developer to work with three
distinct resources.

* **Policies:**  A <Link href="/reference/resources/retention-policy">Retention Policy</Link> describes the general behavior of the retention policy. It determines how long a retention should stay in place, if it can be extended, and what happens when the retention policy ends.
* **Assignments:** A <Link href="/reference/resources/retention-policy-assignment">Retention Policy Assignment</Link> is a relation between a policy and folder or enterprise. Creating an assignment puts a retention on all the file versions that belong to that folder or enterprise. For example, if an assignment is created on a folder the policy is applied to all file versions within that folder.
* **Retentions**: A <Link href="/reference/resources/file-version-retention">File Version Retention</Link> represents all the policies that are assigned to a specific file version. Note that every file version can have a maximum of one file version retention and that this resource contains a list of every assigned policy.

<Warning>
  The <Link href="/reference/resources/file-version-retention">file version retention</Link> section of the Box API
  is now deprecated. Instead, you can use <Link href="/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-files-under-retention">files under retention</Link> or
  <Link href="/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-file-versions-under-retention">file versions under retention</Link> endpoints.
</Warning>

## File Deletion with Retention Policies

Files under retention can be deleted from folders, but they will be retained in
the trash until the retention expires. When the retention expires,
you can choose to have the content automatically deleted or for the policy to be
removed.

## Extend Retention for a File

Files under retention can have their retention date extended by
<Link href="/reference/put-files-id/#param-disposition_at">updating</Link> the `disposition_at` field's value with a future
date. Once the date has been extended, it cannot be reverted or changed to be
prior to the new date.

## Required Scopes

Before using any of the Retention Policy APIs, an application must have the following <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link> enabled:

* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes#manage-retention-policies">Manage Retention Policies</Link>, available in the Developer Console under **Configuration** > **Application Scopes**
* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes#global-content-manager-gcm">Global Content Manager (GCM)</Link>, enabled by contacting customer support

[governance]: https://www.box.com/security/governance-and-compliance


# List All Retention Policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/retention-policies/list



To list all Retention Policies that have been created in an enterprise, call
the <Link href="/reference/get-retention-policies">`GET /retention_policies`</Link> API endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/retention_policies" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.retentionPolicies.getRetentionPolicies();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.retention_policies.get_retention_policies()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.RetentionPolicies.GetRetentionPoliciesAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.retentionPolicies.getRetentionPolicies()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getRetentionPolicies().getRetentionPolicies()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<BoxRetentionPolicy.Info> policies = BoxRetentionPolicy.getAll(api);
  for (BoxRetentionPolicy.Info policyInfo : policies) {
  	// Do something with the retention policy.
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  retention_policies = client.get_retention_policies()
  for policy in retention_policies:
      print(f'The policy ID is {policy.id} and the name is {policy.policy_name}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollectionMarkerBased<BoxRetentionPolicy> policies = await client.RetentionPoliciesManager
      .GetRetentionPoliciesAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.retentionPolicies.getAll({ policy_name: 'Tax' }).then((policies) => {
  	/* policies -> {
  			entries:
  			[ { type: 'retention_policy',
  				id: '123456789',
  				name: 'Tax Documents' } ],
  			limit: 100,
  			next_marker: 'someMarkerString' }
  		*/
  });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Required Scopes

Before using any of the Retention Policy APIs, an application must have the
right scopes enabled. See <Link href="/guides/retention-policies#required-scopes">Required Scopes</Link> for more details.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Filter search results
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/filtering



The <Link href="/reference/get-search">`GET /search`</Link> API supports a variety of
different ways to filter the results returned by the API.

## Filter by content type

By default, a search returns items for which either the name, description, file
content, tags, or comments match the query provided. By setting the
`content_types` parameter the search can be narrowed down to only the items that
match the query for the content type defined.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&content_types=name,tags" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  final List<String> contentTypes = new ArrayList<String>();
  contentTypes.add("name");
  contentTypes.add("tags");
  searchParams.setContentTypes(contentTypes)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var contentTypes = new List<string>();
  contentTypes.Add("name");
  contentTypes.Add("tags");

  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", contentTypes: contentTypes);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", content_types=["name", "tags"])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          content_types:  [
              "name",
              "tags"
          ]
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

| Content type   |                                                                       |
| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `name`         | The name of the item, as defined by its `name` field.                 |
| `description`  | The description of the item, as defined by its `description` field.   |
| `file_content` | The actual content of the file.                                       |
| `comments`     | The content of any of the comments on a file or folder.               |
| `tags`         | Any tags that are applied to an item, as defined by its `tags` field. |

## Filter by date

By default, search returns files created at any time, and updated at any time.
It is possible to filter results by both the date the file or folder was
last updated or when it was created.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&created_at_range=2014-05-15T13:35:01Z,2015-05-15T13:35:01&updated_at_range=2014-05-15T13:35:01," \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  String createdFromDateString = "2014-05-15T13:35:01Z";
  String createdToDateString = "2015-05-15T13:35:01Z";
  Date createdFromDate = sdf.parse(createdFromDateString);
  Date createdToDate = sdf.parse(createdToDateString);
  DateRange createdRange = new DateRange(createdFromDate, createdToDate);
  searchParams.setCreatedRange(createdRange)

  String updatedFromDateString = "2014-05-15T13:35:01Z";
  Date updatedFromDate = sdf.parse(updatedFromDateString);
  DateRange updatedRange = new DateRange(updatedFromDate, null);
  searchParams.setUpdatedRange(updatedRange)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var createdAtRangeFromDate = new DateTime(1988, 11, 18, 9, 30, 0, DateTimeKind.Utc);
  var createdAtRangeToDate = new DateTime(2018, 11, 18, 9, 30, 0, DateTimeKind.Utc);
  var updatedAtRangeFromDate = new DateTime(1988, 11, 18, 9, 30, 0, DateTimeKind.Utc);

  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", contentTypes: contentTypes, createdAtRangeFromDate: createdAtRangeFromDate, createdAtRangeToDate: createdAtRangeToDate, updatedAtRangeFromDate: updatedAtRangeFromDate);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", created_at_range=["2014-05-15T13:35:01Z", "2015-05-15T13:35:01Z"], updated_at_range=["2014-05-15T13:35:01Z", null])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          created_at_range: "2014-05-15T13:35:01Z,2015-05-15T13:35:01Z",
          updated_at_range: "2014-05-15T13:35:01Z,"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

| Query parameter    |                                                                                                                                              |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `created_at_range` | Defines a range of `created_at` dates for which to return results. The upper or lower bound can be left empty to create an open-ended range. |
| `updated_at_range` | Defines a range of `updated_at` dates for which to return results. The upper or lower bound can be left empty to create an open-ended range. |

## Filter by file extension

By default, a search returns items with any kind of file extension. It is
possible to filter search results to only files with one or more specific file
extensions using the `file_extensions` query parameter.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&file_extensions=pdf,txt" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  final List<String> fileExtensions = new ArrayList<String>();
  fileExtensions.add("pdf");
  fileExtensions.add("txt");
  searchParams.setFileExtensions(fileExtensions)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var fileExtensions = new List<string>();
  fileExtensions.Add("pdf");
  fileExtensions.Add("txt");

  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", fileExtensions: fileExtensions);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", file_extensions=["pdf", "txt"])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          file_extensions:  [
              "pdf",
              "txt"
          ]
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Filter by file size

By default, a search returns items of any file size. It is
possible to filter search results to only files within a specific file
size using the `size_range` query parameter.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&size_range=10000,20000" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  SizeRange sizeRange = new SizeRange(10000, 20000);
  searchParams.setSizeRange(sizeRange);

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", sizeRangeLowerBoundBytes: 10000, sizeRangeUpperBoundBytes: 20000);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", size_range=[10000,20000])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          size_range: '10000,20000'
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Filter by file type

By default, a search returns both files, folders, and web links. To narrow down
the results to only one of these, a `type` query parameter can be set to either
`file`, `folder` or `web_link`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&type=file" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");
  searchParams.setType("file");

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", type: "file");
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", type="file")
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          type: "file"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Filter by metadata

It is possible to filter search results by their associated metadata, or even
perform entire searches based on only the metadata, all using the `mdfilters`
query parameter.

<Card href="/guides/search/quick-start" title="Learn more about metadata filters" />

## Filter by owner

By default, a search returns all the items the authenticated user has access to,
regardless of who owns the items. To narrow down to only items owned by specific
users, use the `owner_user_ids` query parameter.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&owner_user_ids=34446362,462281242" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  final List<String> userIds = new ArrayList<String>();
  userIds.add("34446362");
  userIds.add("462281242");
  searchParams.setOwnerUserIds(userIds)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var userIds = new List<string>();
  userIds.Add("34446362");
  userIds.Add("462281242");

  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", ownerUserIds: userIds);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", owner_user_ids=["34446362", "462281242"])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          owner_user_ids: "34446362,462281242"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Filter by parent folder

By default, a search returns all the items in any folder the user has access
to. To narrow down the results to only items in specific folders, use the
`ancestor_folder_ids` query parameter.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&ancestor_folder_ids=45235463,73445321" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  final List<String> folderIds = new ArrayList<String>();
  folderIds.add("45235463");
  folderIds.add("73445321");
  searchParams.setAncestorFolderIds(folderIds)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var folderIds = new List<string>();
  folderIds.Add("45235463");
  folderIds.Add("73445321");

  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", ancestorFolderIds: folderIds);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", ancestor_folder_ids=["45235463", "73445321"])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          ancestor_folder_ids: "45235463,73445321"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Search
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/index



The Box API provides a way to find content in Box using
full-text search queries. Support for the Box search API is available
in all our supported SDKs and the CLI.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.search.searchForContent({
    ancestorFolderIds: ['0'],
    mdfilters: [
      {
        filters: searchFilters,
        scope: 'enterprise' as MetadataFilterScopeField,
        templateKey: templateKey,
      } satisfies MetadataFilter,
    ],
  } satisfies SearchForContentQueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.search.search_for_content(
      ancestor_folder_ids=["0"],
      mdfilters=[
          MetadataFilter(
              filters=search_filters,
              scope=MetadataFilterScopeField.ENTERPRISE,
              template_key=template_key,
          )
      ],
  )
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getSearch().searchForContent(new SearchForContentQueryParams.Builder().ancestorFolderIds(Arrays.asList("0")).mdfilters(Arrays.asList(new MetadataFilter.Builder().scope(MetadataFilterScopeField.ENTERPRISE).templateKey(templateKey).filters(searchFilters).build())).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  // Find the first 10 files matching "taxes"
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;
  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("taxes");
  searchParams.setType("file");
  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  items = client.search().query(query='TEST QUERY', limit=100, file_extensions=['pdf', 'doc'])
  for item in items:
      print(f'The item ID is {item.id} and the item name is {item.name}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  // Search for PDF or Word documents matching "Meeting Notes"
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("Meeting Notes", fileExtensions: new { "pdf", "docx" });
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Search for PDF or Word documents matching "Mobile"
  client.search.query(
  	'Mobile',
  	{
  		fields: 'name,modified_at,size,extension,permissions,sync_state',
  		file_extensions: 'pdf,doc',
  		limit: 200,
  		offset: 0
  	})
  	.then(results => {
  		/* results -> {
  			total_count: 1,
  			entries: 
  			[ { type: 'file',
  				id: '11111',
  				sequence_id: '1',
  				etag: '1',
  				sha1: 'f89d97c5eea0a68e2cec911s932eca34a52355d2',
  				name: 'Box for Sales - Empowering Your Mobile Worker White paper 2pg (External).pdf',
  				description: '',
  				size: 408979,
  				path_collection: 
  					{ total_count: 2,
  					entries: 
  					[ { type: 'folder',
  						id: '0',
  						sequence_id: null,
  						etag: null,
  						name: 'All Files' },
  						{ type: 'folder',
  						id: '22222',
  						sequence_id: '1',
  						etag: '1',
  						name: 'Marketing Active Work' } ] },
  				created_at: '2014-05-17T12:59:45-07:00',
  				modified_at: '2014-05-17T13:00:20-07:00',
  				trashed_at: null,
  				purged_at: null,
  				content_created_at: '2014-05-17T12:58:58-07:00',
  				content_modified_at: '2014-05-17T12:58:58-07:00',
  				created_by: 
  					{ type: 'user',
  					id: '33333',
  					name: 'Example User',
  					login: 'user@example.com' },
  				modified_by: 
  					{ type: 'user',
  					id: '33333',
  					name: 'Example User',
  					login: 'user@example.com' },
  				owned_by: 
  					{ type: 'user',
  					id: '33333',
  					name: 'Example User',
  					login: 'user@example.com' },
  				shared_link: null,
  				parent: 
  					{ type: 'folder',
  					id: '22222',
  					sequence_id: '1',
  					etag: '1',
  					name: 'Marketing Active Work' },
  				item_status: 'active' } ],
  			limit: 200,
  			offset: 0 }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  Explore the <Link href="/reference/get-search">reference documentation</Link> to learn more
  about all the different features available to the search API.
</Note>

## Query operators

The search API supports a few different
<Link href="/guides/search/query-operators">search operators</Link>, including
`AND`, `OR`, `NOT` and `""`. These operators can be used to refine the search
results to only return items that match a more complicated combination of
search terms.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=box%20AND%20sales" \
    -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
```

<Card href="/guides/search/query-operators" title="Learn more about using logical operators" />

## Search Indexing

Box keeps a search index for any files or folder stored in Box.
Every time a file or folder is changed, those words are added to
the index. When a search is performed, the API looks in the search
index for files and folders that match the query. When content is added,
updated, or deleted in Box, the search index is updated accordingly.

<Card href="/guides/search/indexing" title="Learn more about the Box search index" />

<Info>
  In some cases an index might not be updated even after 10 minutes.
  In those cases we recommend reaching out to [Box Support][support]
  to get the issue resolved.
</Info>

<Warning>
  If your enterprise has full text search turned off
  (e.g. [Keysafe][keysafe] customers), characters within a document
  cannot be searched. If you need to find out if full
  text search is turned off, reach out to your account team.
</Warning>

## Comparison to Metadata Queries

At the surface the search API seems very similar
to the <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">Metadata Query API</Link>, but there are several important differences
in how they operate. At a high level the Metadata Queries are
optimized for exactness and throughput, while regular search is optimized
for relevance to a human user.

|                   | <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute_read">Metadata Query API</Link>                                                                                                   | <Link href="/reference/get-search">Search API</Link>                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| What is indexed?  | This API only return files/folders based on the values in the metadata templates that are searched                                                                                     | This API returns files, folders and web links based on values in the item names, descriptions, contents (up to the first 10,000 bytes) as well as the associated metadata template instances                                                                                                                                                            |
| Indexing time     | This API will return accurate results as soon as metadata has been added, removed, updated or deleted for a file or folder                                                             | This API is subject to a search indexing delay, which is typically 10 minutes yet may be longer in some cases. This means that items may not be returned for more than 10 minutes after metadata has been updated                                                                                                                                       |
| Matching          | This API uses exact matching based on SQL conventions. Results are returned based on a specified sort order                                                                            | This API uses fuzzy matching and may return results that vary based on string tokenization, removal of special characters, and other search concepts. Result order is based on either relevance or the updated date of the item                                                                                                                         |
| Conditional logic | This API supports multi-part boolean expressions with comparison operators                                                                                                             | This API has limited support for querying by metadata. It only supports querying 1 metadata template at a time and only allows simple query operations.                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Response type     | This API returns both the matched file/folder and the associated metadata matched by the query                                                                                         | This API only returns the matched item. A subsequent API call is needed to return each item's metadata                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Throughput        | This API is currently subject to per-user rate limits and to a 10 requests per second per enterprise limit                                                                             | This API supports 6 searches per second per user, up to 60 searches per minute and 12 searches per second per enterprise                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Scale             | This API has no limit on the number of items with the specified metadata template that can be returned. It is recommended to only send queries which match no more than 2,000 results. | This API has no limit on number of items with the specified metadata template that can be returned, yet the response time increases significantly as the number of items matching the search grows. This API does have a limit of up to 10 million results for a query. It is recommended to only send queries which match no more than 50,000 results. |
| Scope             | This API is always limited to the content to which the user has access                                                                                                                 | This API may be either limited to the content to which the user has access (`​user_content​`) or to all content in the enterprise (`​enterprise_content​`).                                                                                                                                                                                             |

<Card href="/guides/metadata/queries/comparison" title="Learn more about the metadata query API" />

[support]: https://developer.box.com/support

[keysafe]: https://www.box.com/security/keysafe


# Search indexing
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/indexing



Box keeps a search index for any files or folders stored in Box.
Every time a file or folder is changed, those words are added to the index.
When a search is performed, the API looks in the search index for files and
folders that match the query. When content is added, updated, or deleted in
Box, the search index is updated accordingly.

## Search Availability

It can take time between uploading or modifying a
file for it to be fully indexed and ready to be searched. In most cases,
newly added or changed files can be expected to be available via Box search
in 10 minutes. The current service load determines the index time and it may
take more than 10 minutes in some cases.

<Info>
  In some cases an index might not be updated even after 10 minutes.
  In those cases we recommend reaching out to [Box Support][support]
  to get the issue resolved.
</Info>

## Search Access

Only content that the authenticated user has access to
(items they can preview and/or view) will be returned in the search results.

In other words, a user needs to either own an item or be a collaborated in on an
item for it to show up in the search results. If a user doesn't have access to
an item, or if they have been shared the item via a shared link, then the item
will also not appear in the search results.

One exception is that items that have been recently accessed via a shared link
can be requested in the search results by setting the
`include_recent_shared_links` query parameter to `true`.

## Prefix Matching and Wildcard Search

Trailing wildcards (also known as
prefix matching) are implicitly included in search results because of the way
text is indexed. Searching for `Bo` results in items with titles containing
`Box` or `Boat` or `Boxer`. It is the equivalent of searching for `Bo*` or
`Bo%` in traditional search engines. Traditional wildcard notation is not
supported by Box, such as `%ox%`. While we support prefix matching on titles,
we do not support prefix matching on body content, suffix matching in the
title or body content, or infix (middle of the word) matching in the title or
body content. For example, a search on `cal` would match results for a **file
named** `California` but not `decal` or `recall`. It would not match results
with **file body contents** of prefixes, infixes, or suffixes including
`California`, `recall`, or `decal`.

## Stemming

Box Search uses stemming to match terms from the query to terms
in the index. Because of this, words that include the same stem may be
included in the result set, even if the words do not contain the exact form
in the query. For example, `run` and `running` map to the same stem, so a
search on `running` may return a document containing `run` in the title.

## File Content Searching

The content within files is also stored
within the Box search index. The following file types allow searching for
their content:

|           |          |              |          |        |
| --------- | -------- | ------------ | -------- | ------ |
| `boxnote` | `csv`    | `doc`        | `docx`   | `gdoc` |
| `gsheet`  | `gslide` | `gslides`    | `htm`    | `html` |
| `msg`     | `odp`    | `odt`        | `ods`    | `pdf`  |
| `ppt`     | `pptx`   | `rtf`        | `tsv`    | `wpd`  |
| `xhtml`   | `xls`    | `xlsm`       | `xlsx`   | `xml`  |
| `xsd`     | `xsl`    | `as`         | `as3`    | `asm`  |
| `bat`     | `c`      | `cc`         | `cmake`  | `cpp`  |
| `cs`      | `css`    | `cxx`        | `diff`   | `erb`  |
| `groovy`  | `h`      | `haml`       | `hh`     | `java` |
| `js`      | `json`   | `less`       | `log`    | `m`    |
| `make`    | `md`     | `ml`         | `mm`     | `php`  |
| `pl`      | `plist`  | `properties` | `py`     | `rb`   |
| `rst`     | `sass`   | `scala`      | `script` | `scm`  |
| `sml`     | `sql`    | `sh`         | `txt`    | `vi`   |
| `vim`     | `webdoc` | `yaml`       |          |        |

## Indexed Text per Document

The Box search index stores up to 10,000 bytes
(\~10,000 characters in English) per document for accounts from Business level
and above. This amount can vary from document to document because of
language, Box’s indexing method, and document type.

<Warning>
  If your enterprise has full text search turned off
  (e.g. [Keysafe][keysafe] customers), characters within a document
  cannot be searched. If you need to find out if full
  text search is turned off, reach out to your account team.
</Warning>

## OCR Support

Box does not currently perform OCR on its documents.

## Document Versions

Search only indexes content from the current version
of a document, so that you do not have to sift through hundreds of irrelevant
search results of outdated documents. You cannot use search to query
non-current versions of a document.

## Language Support

Box search supports the following languages: Chinese,
English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish. Box does not support
indexing of multiple languages within a single document.

## Trash

Searching the trash is available via the API by using the
`trash_content` query parameter.

<Card href="https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043696314-Search-for-Files-Folders-and-Content" title="Check our community article with the latest details on Search in Box" />

[support]: https://developer.box.com/support

[keysafe]: https://www.box.com/security/keysafe


# Pagination
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/pagination



The search API supports offset-based pagination using the `offset` and `limit`
query parameters. Marker-based pagination is not supported.

## API Pagination

To fetch the first page of search results, the API needs to be called
either without the `offset` parameter, or with the `offset` set to `0`. The
`limit` field is optional.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&offset=0&limit=100 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

To fetch the next page of entries the API needs to be called with
an `offset` parameter that's equals the sum of the previous `offset` value and
limit returned in the previous result, `previous_offset + previous_limit`.

```sh theme={null}
curl https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&offset=100&limit=100 \
    -H "authorization: Bearer ACCESS_TOKEN"
```

<Note>
  Note that the `offset` should be increased by the previous `limit` and not by
  the size of the entries in the response array, as this may be less than the
  limit. Generally we advise using the value of the `limit` in the response
  object to increase the `offset` value.
</Note>

The final page of items has been requested when the next `offset` value exceeds
the `total_count` value in the response object. At this point there are no more
items to fetch.

<Card href="/guides/api-calls/pagination/offset-based" title="Learn more about offset-based pagination" />

## SDK Pagination

Each of our SDKs has built-in support for API pagination. The following code
samples show how to use pagination in the search API.

<CodeGroup>
  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 50;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> page1 = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);

  offsetValue += 50;
  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> page2 = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> page1 = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", limit: 50);
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> page2 = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", limit: 50, offset: 50);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  page1 = client.search().query(query='sales', limit=50)
  page2 = client.search().query(query='sales', limit=50, offset=50)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  const page1 = await client.search.query('sales', {
      limit: 50
  })
  const page2 = await client.search.query('sales'. {
      limit: 50,
      offset: 50
  })
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Query operators
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/query-operators



The <Link href="/reference/get-search">`GET /search`</Link> API supports a variety of
different query operators to help refining the results returned
by the API.

All of these operations are passed into the `query` parameter when
creating the search.

## Exact matches with `""`

By wrapping a query in double quotes (`""`) only exact matches are
returned by the API. Exact searches do not return search matches
based on specific character sequences. Instead, they return
matches based on phrases, that is, word sequences.

For example, a search for `"Blue-Box"` may return search results
including the sequence `"blue.box"`, `"Blue Box"`, and `"Blue-Box"`;
any item containing the words `Blue` and `Box` consecutively, in
the order specified.

## Matching multiple terms with `AND`

When the `AND` operator is used, the search returns items that
contain both the search terms on the left and right of the operator.

For example, a search for `marketing AND BoxWorks` returns items
that have both `marketing` and `BoxWorks` within its text in any order.
It does not return a result that only has `BoxWorks` in its text.

## Matching either search term with `OR`

When the `OR` operator is used, the search returns items that
contain either the search terms on the left or right of the operator.

For example, a search for `marketing OR BoxWorks` returns a result that
has either `marketing` or `BoxWorks` within its text. Using this
operator is not necessary as we implicitly interpret multi-word
queries as `OR` unless another supported boolean term is used.

## Excluding search terms with `NOT`

When the `NOT` operator is used, the search returns items that
do not contain the term that follows the operator.

For example, a search for `marketing AND NOT BoxWorks` returns a result
that has only `marketing` within its text. Results containing
`BoxWorks` are omitted.

<Warning>
  Please note that we do not support lower case (that is,
  `and`, `or`, and `not`) or mixed case (that is, `And`, `Or`, and `Not`)
  operators.
</Warning>

<Card href="https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043696314-Search-for-Files-Folders-and-Content" title="Check our community article with the latest details on Search in Box" />


# Add Metadata Template to a File
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/quick-start/apply-template-to-file



<ProgressBar />

Your metadata template needs to be applied to at least one file to ensure
a result in step 4. There are two ways to do add a metadata template to a file:
via the UI or via the API.

## UI

To apply metadata to a file using the UI, navigate to a file and open the
preview. Use the **Metadata** tab and click **Add**. Find the metadata template
created in step 1 and select a value. Ensure you click **Save**.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Select a Metadata Template" />

  <img alt="Select a Value" />
</Frame>

## API

To add a metadata template to a file you will need to use the
<Link href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-id-id/">create metadata instance on a file endpoint</Link>. You will also
need the `scope` and `templateKey` template values from the previous step.
Below is an example of what the API call looks like to apply the same metadata
shown in the UI above.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Select a Metadata Template" />
</Frame>

<Warning>
  Due to scale considerations a 403 error will returns when the metadata template
  is applied to more than 10,000 files or folders.
</Warning>

<Next>I applied my template to at least one file</Next>


# Create a Metadata Template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/quick-start/create-metadata-template



<ProgressBar />

There are two ways to create a new metadata template: via the Admin Console or
via the API using an Admin Access Token. If you already have a metadata template
created that you would like to use you can skip to the next step.

## Admin Console

To create a template via the Admin Console, navigate to:

**Admin Console** > **Content** Tab > **Metadata** > **Create New**

<Frame>
  <img alt="Create Metadata Template" />
</Frame>

<Warning>
  The metadata feature is reserved for Business Plus accounts and above. To
  upgrade your account, please contact your Box account team.
</Warning>

Once you select **Create New**, you are brought to a form used to create a new
template, which is shown below. Select a **Dropdown-Single Select** format.

<Warning>
  Selecting a Dropdown-Multi Select format will change the structure of you query
  later on in this quick-start.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <img alt="Metadata Template Form" />
</Frame>

## API

Creating a metadata template via the API requires an <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens">Access Token</Link>
associated with a Box Admin or Co-Admin with permission to
**create and edit metadata templates for your company**. If you are not sure
who your token is associated with, make an API call to the
<Link href="/reference/get-users-me">get current user endpoint</Link>. The easiest way to obtain a token
meeting these requirements is to log in as an Admin or Co-Admin, pull up the
application in the [Developer Console][dc], and click
**Generate Developer Token** under the **Configuration** tab.
<Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens">Developer tokens</Link> are always be associated with the user logged into the
Developer Console when the button is clicked.

Using [Postman][postman] and the <Link href="/guides/tooling/postman">Box Postman Collection</Link>, below is
an example of what an API call looks like to create the same metadata template
created above using the Admin Console.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Create Template API Call" />
</Frame>

<Tip>
  If you would like to use a different template format than a Dropdown-Single
  Select, you will need to consult our reference documentation, as the body of the
  API call will differ from the example above.
</Tip>

The response to this API call provides crucial information you will need later.
If you created your template via the UI, you will learn how to obtain this
information in the next step.

<Next>I created a metadata template</Next>

[dc]: https://account.box.com/developers/console

[postman]: https://postman.com/


# Search content using metadata
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/quick-start/index



The Box Metadata Query API enables programmatic search of Box content based
strictly on applied custom metadata values.

The structure of a metadata query is similar to that of a SQL query and allows
for Boolean operators, such as AND, OR, and NOT, as well as comparison or range
operators, such as equal to, greater-than, and less-than.

Some benefits of the Metadata Query API include:

* no indexing delay; query immediately after metadata creations, updates, and deletions
* ability to specify a sort order by one or more fields
* no limitation on the number of characters that are queryable
* queries return item properties and metadata instances

<Frame>
  <img alt="Metadata" />
</Frame>

## Overview

This guide will take you through the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/create-metadata-template">Create a metadata template</Link>
2. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/locate-template-info">Locate information about the metadata template</Link> via API
3. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/apply-template-to-file">Apply the metadata template</Link> to at least one file
4. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/metadata-query-api">Construct a metadata query API call</Link> to obtain the content from step 3


# Locate Information about a Metadata Template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/quick-start/locate-template-info



<ProgressBar />

<Warning>
  If you created your metadata template using the API and have the successful
  response on hand, you can skip this step.
</Warning>

If you created your metadata template via the Admin Console, you will need
obtain an <Link href="/guides/authentication/tokens">Access Token</Link> for an Admin or Co-Admin with permission to
**Create and edit metadata templates for your company**. As mentioned in
step 1, the easiest way to obtain a token meeting these requirements is to log
in as an Admin or Co-Admin, pull up the application in the
[Developer Console][dc], and click **Generate Developer Token** under the
**Configuration** tab.

Use this token to make an API call to the
<Link href="/reference/get-metadata-templates-enterprise/">list all metadata templates for enterprise endpoint</Link>, as shown
below. You should be able to find information about your template in the
response. Specifically, note the `scope` and `templateKey`.

<Frame>
  <img alt="List All Templates" />
</Frame>

<Next>I obtained the details about my template</Next>

[dc]: https://account.box.com/developers/console


# Use the Metadata Query API
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/quick-start/metadata-query-api



<ProgressBar />

Finally, build a <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read/">metadata query API call</Link>. Here is an example of what the
body of the API call looks like:

```json theme={null}
{
  "from": "enterprise_22201764.contact_role",
  "query": "departments = :departments",
  "query_params": {"departments": "legal"},
  "ancestor_folder_id": "0",
  "fields": ["id"]
}
```

This API call will return any file ID that meets the following criteria: 

* Has the Contact Role template applied
* Has a value of departments is legal
* Is located anywhere under the root folder, since "0" is the `ancestor_folder_id`

As you can see below, this results in a successful call showing information
about the file we added the template to in step 2.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Search Query Result" />
</Frame>

<Next>I found my content using a search query</Next>


# Next Steps
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/quick-start/next-steps



<ProgressBar />

You've reached the end of this Quick Start guide. By now you should have taken
the following steps.

1. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/create-metadata-template">Created a metadata template</Link>
2. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/locate-template-info">Located information about the metadata template</Link> from step 1 via API
3. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/apply-template-to-file">Added a metadata template</Link> to at least one file
4. <Link href="/guides/search/quick-start/metadata-query-api">Used the metadata query API</Link> to locate the file(s) from step 3

## Next Steps

We recommend the following resources to learn more:

* <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries">Metadata query guide</Link>
* Review <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries/errors">common errors</Link> and <Link href="/guides/metadata/queries/limitations">limitations</Link>
* Reference documentation for the <Link href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read">metadata query</Link> API

Our SDKs that support the metadata query API:

* [Python SDK][python]
* [.NET SDK][node]
* [iOS SDK][ios]
* [Java SDK][java]
* [Node][node]

[node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/3fcc0d8bbd1ca11f1a3a78d741e4572718af53f0/docs/metadata.md#query

[python]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/legacy/docs/usage/search.md#metadata-query

[ios]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/c5ff8396e28c31fcf3c433f1b9e8f2f0d7a0e0db/docs/usage/search.md#metadata-search

[java]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/5e3a96c903fffa198c97e981ce75765a69bd6cb6/doc/metadata_template.md#execute-metadata-query

[node]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/3fcc0d8bbd1ca11f1a3a78d741e4572718af53f0/docs/metadata.md


# Get Workflows
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-relay/get-workflows



The <Link href="/reference/get-workflows">get workflows</Link> endpoint can be used to grab all workflows on a
particular folder. It will return all workflows regardless of if there is a
flow of type `WORKFLOW_MANUAL_START`.

<Note>
  For more information on how to use these endpoints, refer to our [blog][blog]
  post.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/workflows?folder_id=324234" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await adminClient.workflows.getWorkflows({
    folderId: workflowFolderId,
  } satisfies GetWorkflowsQueryParams);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  admin_client.workflows.get_workflows(workflow_folder_id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await adminClient.Workflows.GetWorkflowsAsync(queryParams: new GetWorkflowsQueryParams(folderId: workflowFolderId));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await adminClient.workflows.getWorkflows(queryParams: GetWorkflowsQueryParams(folderId: workflowFolderId))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  adminClient.getWorkflows().getWorkflows(new GetWorkflowsQueryParams(workflowFolderId))
  ```
</CodeGroup>

[blog]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/manual-start-workflow-api-box-relay-4f8d0f51b7a4


# Box Relay
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-relay/index



[Box Relay][boxrelay] is a workflow automation application that enables Box
power users to automate and accelerate business processes centered
around content. Currently, there are two API <Link href="/reference/resources/workflow">endpoints</Link> developers
can use with more planned to be released in the future. Both were created to
work directly with [manual start flows][manualstart].

<Note>
  For more information on how to use these endpoints, refer to our [blog][blog]
  post.
</Note>

## Required Scopes

The following <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link> must be enabled for an application before use of
Box Relay's endpoints.

* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#read-all-files-and-folders">Read all files and folders stored in Box</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#read-and-write-all-files-and-folders">Write all files and folders stored in Box</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#manage-box-relay">Manage Box Relay</Link>

<Warning>
  Depending on the selected authentication method and enterprise's settings,
  your application may require Admin authorization or re-authorization before
  successful use of any newly selected scopes.
</Warning>

## Rate Limits

Please see our <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/rate-limits/#per-api-rate-limits">rate limit guide</Link> for more information.

## Testing

Due to the feature parity, it may be useful to familiarize yourself with
[Box Relay functionality using the Box web app][webapp] before leveraging the
API. As with all API endpoints, we recommend testing via
[developer sandbox environment][sandbox] to eliminate the risk of impacting
production content.

[webapp]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044628853-Creating-and-Running-a-Manual-Start-Workflow

[sandbox]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697274-Managing-developer-sandboxes-for-Box-admins

[boxrelay]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196213-Introducing-Box-Relay

[manualstart]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044628853-Creating-and-Running-a-Manual-Start-Workflow

[blog]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/manual-start-workflow-api-box-relay-4f8d0f51b7a4


# Start Workflow
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-relay/start-workflow



The <Link href="/reference/post-workflows-id-start">start workflow endpoint</Link> can be used to start a flow within a
workflow of type `WORKFLOW_MANUAL_START`. Other flow types cannot be started.
If you have the flow set up to accept configurations at runtime, you must send
in the optional `outcomes` array object.

<Note>
  For more information on how to use this endpoint, refer to our [blog][blog]
  post.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/workflows/42037322/start" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "type": "workflow_parameters",
         "flow": {
          "id": "8937625",
          "type": "flow"
         },
         "files": [{
            "type": "file",
            "id": "389047572"
          },
          {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "389047578"
          }],
         "folder": {
           "id": "2233212",
           "type": "folder"
         },
         "outcomes": [
            {
              "id": "34895783",
              "type": "outcome",
              "task_collaborators": {
                  "type": "variable",
                  "variable_type": "user_list",
                  "variable_value": [{ "type": "user", "id": "890273642" }]
              },
              "completion_rule": {
                  "type": "variable",
                  "variable_type": "task_completion_rule",
                  "variable_value": "all_assignees"
              },
              "file_collaborator_role": {
                  "type": "variable",
                  "variable_type": "collaborator_role",
                  "variable_value": "viewer"
              }
            }
          ]
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await adminClient.workflows.startWorkflow(workflowToRun.id!, {
    type: 'workflow_parameters' as StartWorkflowRequestBodyTypeField,
    flow: {
      type: 'flow',
      id: workflowToRun.flows![0].id!,
    } satisfies StartWorkflowRequestBodyFlowField,
    files: [
      {
        type: 'file' as StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesTypeField,
        id: workflowFileId,
      } satisfies StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesField,
    ],
    folder: {
      type: 'folder' as StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderTypeField,
      id: workflowFolderId,
    } satisfies StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderField,
  } satisfies StartWorkflowRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  admin_client.workflows.start_workflow(
      workflow_to_run.id,
      StartWorkflowFlow(type="flow", id=workflow_to_run.flows[0].id),
      [StartWorkflowFiles(type=StartWorkflowFilesTypeField.FILE, id=workflow_file_id)],
      StartWorkflowFolder(
          type=StartWorkflowFolderTypeField.FOLDER, id=workflow_folder_id
      ),
      type=StartWorkflowType.WORKFLOW_PARAMETERS,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await adminClient.Workflows.StartWorkflowAsync(workflowId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(workflowToRun.Id), requestBody: new StartWorkflowRequestBody(flow: new StartWorkflowRequestBodyFlowField() { Type = "flow", Id = NullableUtils.Unwrap(NullableUtils.Unwrap(workflowToRun.Flows)[0].Id) }, files: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesField() { Type = StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesTypeField.File, Id = workflowFileId }}), folder: new StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderField() { Type = StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderTypeField.Folder, Id = workflowFolderId }) { Type = StartWorkflowRequestBodyTypeField.WorkflowParameters });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await adminClient.workflows.startWorkflow(workflowId: workflowToRun.id!, requestBody: StartWorkflowRequestBody(type: StartWorkflowRequestBodyTypeField.workflowParameters, flow: StartWorkflowRequestBodyFlowField(type: "flow", id: workflowToRun.flows![0].id!), files: [StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesField(type: StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesTypeField.file, id: workflowFileId)], folder: StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderField(type: StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderTypeField.folder, id: workflowFolderId)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  adminClient.getWorkflows().startWorkflow(workflowToRun.getId(), new StartWorkflowRequestBody.Builder(new StartWorkflowRequestBodyFlowField.Builder().type("flow").id(workflowToRun.getFlows().get(0).getId()).build(), Arrays.asList(new StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesField.Builder().type(StartWorkflowRequestBodyFilesTypeField.FILE).id(workflowFileId).build()), new StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderField.Builder().type(StartWorkflowRequestBodyFolderTypeField.FOLDER).id(workflowFolderId).build()).type(StartWorkflowRequestBodyTypeField.WORKFLOW_PARAMETERS).build())
  ```
</CodeGroup>

[blog]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/manual-start-workflow-api-box-relay-4f8d0f51b7a4


# Cancel Box Sign Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/cancel-sign-request



A Box Sign request, that has not yet been signed or declined, can be cancelled
using the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests-id-cancel">cancel Box Sign request endpoint</Link>. Any outstanding signers
will no longer be able to sign the document.

Only the user who created the request, the requester, is able to cancel it. A
request cannot be cancelled if it was declined, fully signed, or the document
is still converting.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/<SIGN_REQUEST_ID>/cancel" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.signRequests.cancelSignRequest(createdSignRequest.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.sign_requests.cancel_sign_request(created_sign_request.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.SignRequests.CancelSignRequestAsync(signRequestId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(createdSignRequest.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.signRequests.cancelSignRequest(signRequestId: createdSignRequest.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getSignRequests().cancelSignRequest(createdSignRequest.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxSignRequest signRequest = new BoxSignRequest(api, id);
  BoxSignRequest.Info signRequestInfo = signRequest.getInfo();

  signRequestInfo.cancel();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  sign_request = client.sign_request(sign_request_id='12345')
  cancelled_sign_request = sign_request.cancel()
  print(f'Cancelled Sign Request status is {cancelled_sign_request.status}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxSignRequest cancelledSignRequest = await client.SignRequestsManager.CancelSignRequestAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const signRequest = await client.signRequests.cancelById({
  	sign_request_id: 12345,
  });
  console.log(`Sign request id ${sr.id} cancelled`);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Box Sign Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/create-sign-request



At minimum, to <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests">create Box Sign request</Link> you need
the a file you want to be signed, a destination folder for the signed
document/[signing log][log], and signers.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "signers": [
            {
              "role": "signer",
              "email": "example_email@box.com"
            }
          ],
         "source_files": [
            {
              "type": "file",
              "id": "123456789"
            }
         ],
         "parent_folder":
            {
              "type": "folder",
              "id": "0987654321"
            }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.signRequests.createSignRequest({
    signers: [
      {
        email: signerEmail,
        suppressNotifications: true,
        declinedRedirectUrl: 'https://www.box.com',
        embedUrlExternalUserId: '123',
        isInPerson: false,
        loginRequired: false,
        password: 'password',
        role: 'signer' as SignRequestCreateSignerRoleField,
      } satisfies SignRequestCreateSigner,
    ],
    areRemindersEnabled: true,
    areTextSignaturesEnabled: true,
    daysValid: 30,
    declinedRedirectUrl: 'https://www.box.com',
    emailMessage: 'Please sign this document',
    emailSubject: 'Sign this document',
    externalId: '123',
    externalSystemName: 'BoxSignIntegration',
    isDocumentPreparationNeeded: false,
    name: 'Sign Request',
    parentFolder: new FolderMini({ id: destinationFolder.id }),
    redirectUrl: 'https://www.box.com',
    prefillTags: [
      {
        dateValue: dateFromString('2035-01-01'),
        documentTagId: '0',
      } satisfies SignRequestPrefillTag,
    ],
    sourceFiles: [new FileBase({ id: fileToSign.id })],
  } satisfies SignRequestCreateRequest);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.sign_requests.create_sign_request(
      [
          SignRequestCreateSigner(
              email=signer_email,
              suppress_notifications=True,
              declined_redirect_url="https://www.box.com",
              embed_url_external_user_id="123",
              is_in_person=False,
              login_required=False,
              password="password",
              role=SignRequestCreateSignerRoleField.SIGNER,
          )
      ],
      source_files=[FileBase(id=file_to_sign.id)],
      parent_folder=FolderMini(id=destination_folder.id),
      is_document_preparation_needed=False,
      redirect_url="https://www.box.com",
      declined_redirect_url="https://www.box.com",
      are_text_signatures_enabled=True,
      email_subject="Sign this document",
      email_message="Please sign this document",
      are_reminders_enabled=True,
      name="Sign Request",
      prefill_tags=[
          SignRequestPrefillTag(
              date_value=date_from_string("2035-01-01"), document_tag_id="0"
          )
      ],
      days_valid=30,
      external_id="123",
      external_system_name="BoxSignIntegration",
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.SignRequests.CreateSignRequestAsync(requestBody: new SignRequestCreateRequest(signers: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new SignRequestCreateSigner() { Email = signerEmail, SuppressNotifications = true, DeclinedRedirectUrl = "https://www.box.com", EmbedUrlExternalUserId = "123", IsInPerson = false, LoginRequired = false, Password = "password", Role = SignRequestCreateSignerRoleField.Signer }}), areRemindersEnabled: true, areTextSignaturesEnabled: true, daysValid: 30, declinedRedirectUrl: "https://www.box.com", emailMessage: "Please sign this document", emailSubject: "Sign this document", externalId: "123", externalSystemName: "BoxSignIntegration", isDocumentPreparationNeeded: false, name: "Sign Request", parentFolder: new FolderMini(id: destinationFolder.Id), redirectUrl: "https://www.box.com", prefillTags: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new SignRequestPrefillTag() { DateValue = Utils.DateFromString(date: "2035-01-01"), DocumentTagId = "0" }}), sourceFiles: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new FileBase(id: fileToSign.Id)})));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.signRequests.createSignRequest(requestBody: SignRequestCreateRequest(signers: [SignRequestCreateSigner(email: signerEmail, suppressNotifications: true, declinedRedirectUrl: "https://www.box.com", embedUrlExternalUserId: "123", isInPerson: false, loginRequired: false, password: "password", role: SignRequestCreateSignerRoleField.signer)], areRemindersEnabled: true, areTextSignaturesEnabled: true, daysValid: Int64(30), declinedRedirectUrl: "https://www.box.com", emailMessage: "Please sign this document", emailSubject: "Sign this document", externalId: "123", externalSystemName: "BoxSignIntegration", isDocumentPreparationNeeded: false, name: "Sign Request", parentFolder: FolderMini(id: destinationFolder.id), redirectUrl: "https://www.box.com", prefillTags: [SignRequestPrefillTag(dateValue: try Utils.Dates.dateFromString(date: "2035-01-01"), documentTagId: "0")], sourceFiles: [FileBase(id: fileToSign.id)]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getSignRequests().createSignRequest(new SignRequestCreateRequest.Builder(Arrays.asList(new SignRequestCreateSigner.Builder().email(signerEmail).role(SignRequestCreateSignerRoleField.SIGNER).isInPerson(false).embedUrlExternalUserId("123").declinedRedirectUrl("https://www.box.com").loginRequired(false).password("password").suppressNotifications(true).build())).sourceFiles(Arrays.asList(new FileBase(fileToSign.getId()))).parentFolder(new FolderMini(destinationFolder.getId())).isDocumentPreparationNeeded(false).redirectUrl("https://www.box.com").declinedRedirectUrl("https://www.box.com").areTextSignaturesEnabled(true).emailSubject("Sign this document").emailMessage("Please sign this document").areRemindersEnabled(true).name("Sign Request").prefillTags(Arrays.asList(new SignRequestPrefillTag.Builder().documentTagId("0").dateValue(dateFromString("2035-01-01")).build())).daysValid(30L).externalId("123").externalSystemName("BoxSignIntegration").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  List<BoxSignRequestFile> files = new ArrayList<BoxSignRequestFile>();
  BoxSignRequestFile file = new BoxSignRequestFile("12345");
  files.add(file);
          
  // you can also use specific version of the file
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "12345");
  List<BoxFileVersion> versions = file.getVersions();
  BoxFileVersion firstVersion = versions.get(0);
  BoxSignRequestFile file = new BoxSignRequestFile(firstVersion.getFileID(), firstVersion.getVersionID());

  List<BoxSignRequestSigner> signers = new ArrayList<BoxSignRequestSigner>();
  BoxSignRequestSigner newSigner = new BoxSignRequestSigner("signer@mail.com");
  signers.add(newSigner);

  String destinationParentFolderId = "55555";

  BoxSignRequest.Info signRequestInfo = BoxSignRequest.createSignRequest(api, files,
          signers, destinationParentFolderId);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  source_file = {
      'id': '12345',
      'type': 'file'
  }
  files = [source_file]

  signer = {
      'name': 'John Doe',
      'email': 'signer@mail.com'
  }
  signers = [signer]
  parent_folder_id = '123456789'

  new_sign_request = client.create_sign_request_v2(signers, files=files, parent_folder_id=parent_folder_id)
  print(f'(Sign Request ID: {new_sign_request.id})')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var sourceFiles = new List<BoxSignRequestCreateSourceFile>
  {
      new BoxSignRequestCreateSourceFile()
      {
          Id = "12345"
      }
  };

  var signers = new List<BoxSignRequestSignerCreate>
  {
      new BoxSignRequestSignerCreate()
      {
          Email = "example@gmail.com"
      }
  };

  var parentFolder = new BoxRequestEntity()
  {
      Id = "12345",
      Type = BoxType.folder
  };

  var request = new BoxSignRequestCreateRequest
  {
      SourceFiles = sourceFiles,
      Signers = signers,
      ParentFolder = parentFolder
  };

  BoxSignRequest signRequest = await client.SignRequestsManager.CreateSignRequestAsync(request);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const signRequest = await client.signRequests.create({
  	signers: [
  		{
  			role: 'signer',
  			email: 'user@example.com',
  		},
  	],
  	source_files: [
  		{
  			type: 'file',
  			id: '12345',
  		},
  	],
  	parent_folder: {
  		type: 'folder',
  		id: '1234567',
  	},
  });
  console.log(`Created a new sign request id ${signRequest.id}`);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  Creation of the CFR Part 11 signature requests with public API
  is not supported. See [21 CFR Part 11 Compliance Support][CFR]
  for more information.
</Warning>

## Document preparation

Preparing a document prior to sending a Box Sign request allows developers to
add date, text, checkbox, and/or signature placeholders for signers. This can be
done with UI or [tags][tags] directly in the document. If this is not done,
signers receive an unprepared document and can place signatures and fields at
their own discretion. However, developers can leverage controls in the request
that allow them to turn features for the unprepared document on and off.

Setting `is_document_preparation_needed` to `true` provides a `prepare_url` in
the response. Visiting this link in your browser allows you to complete document
preparation and send the request in the UI.

To learn more about document tags, please see our [support article][tags].

<Warning>
  Prefill tags created in a template with the Box web app cannot be accessed from
  the API.
</Warning>

<Frame>
  <div>
    <img alt="Prepare options" />
  </div>
</Frame>

## Files

Each Box Sign request begins with a file that needs to be signed. If the file
does not already exist in Box, it must be <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">uploaded</Link>, in a separate
API call, prior to creating the request. Multiple files can be signed in one
request. File ID of the first file in a request is specified in the
`source_files` body parameter.

<Warning>
  The requester must have download privileges to the file in Box. Review
  our [collaboration levels][collab] to ensure this requirement is met.
</Warning>

Supported file types include:

* All <Link href="/guides/representations/supported-file-types/#documents">documents</Link>
* All <Link href="/guides/representations/supported-file-types/#presentations">presentations</Link>
* Images: `png`, `jpg`, `jpeg`, `tiff` only
* Text-based files: `.csv`, `.txt` only

All file types are converted to `.pdf` for the signature process. This converted
document can be found in the `parent_folder` upon successfully sending a
request. This means that the final, signed document is a `.pdf`, regardless of
the original file type. As each signer completes the request, Box Sign will
automatically add a new file version.

File size limits are determined by your account type. Please see our
<Link href="/guides/uploads/direct">uploads guide</Link> for more information.

## Parent folder

The folder ID specified in the `parent_folder` body parameter determines the
destination of the final signed document and [signing log][log]. This folder
cannot be the All Files or root level, which is represented by folder ID `0`.

## Signers

Each signer must be assigned a [role][role]:  `signer`, `approver`, or `final copy_reader`.

If the requester is not given a role, a signer with the role `final_copy_reader`
is automatically created. This means they only receive a copy of the final,
signed document and [signing log][log].

Signers do not need to have an existing Box account, nor create one, in order to
sign documents. Unlike other API endpoints, signers are invited by email address
and not Box `user_id`.

If necessary, signers can log in to Box before signing the request. In such
case set the parameter `login_required` to `true` for signers. If the signer
does not have an existing account, they will have an option to create a free
Box account.

<Warning>
  Box Sign will only attempt to send signing emails to the email addresses
  provided for signers in the request. For Box users, this does not include email
  aliases unless specified. Please double check to ensure all provided signer
  email addresses are valid.
</Warning>

### Inputs

The `inputs` parameter represents placeholders that the user can interact with.
The `document_tag_id` parameter can be populated with data you want to
pass when creating a sign request.

## Templates

You can create a sign request using a template.
To do so, you must provide the `template_id` parameter.
See <Link href="/guides/box-sign/sign-templates">this guide</Link> to learn more about using templates
when creating sign requests.

## Redirects

The URLs specified in the `redirect_url` and `declined_redirect_url`
allow you to redirect signers to a custom landing page
after signing or declining the sign request.
For example, if you integrate your application with Box Sign,
you can redirect signers back to your application
or to a custom landing page.
You can set redirect URLs globally for all signers
as well as for specific signers only.
This means that Box Sign will use specific URLs
for signers of your choice, and global
settings for the rest.
If you don't configure any redirect URLs
Box Sign will redirect signers to a default page.

<Warning>
  The default page includes the following note:
  "Once the document has been completed by all parties,
  a limited-time link to a finalized copy will be be emailed to you,
  and, if you have a Box account, a copy will be placed in your account."
  If you decide to redirect the signers to a different page, this information
  will not be available to signers.
</Warning>

## Multiple signers and signing order

Signing order is determined by ordering the provided `order` numbers from
smallest to largest. If two numbers are the same, signers will receive the
request at the same time.

Initially, only the signer(s) with the lowest assigned `order` number will
receive a Box Sign request email. Once they sign, the following user(s) will
an email and so on. Box Sign automatically adds a new version of the
document to the `parent_folder` as each user signs.

If any signer declines, any remaining signers will not receive a Box Sign
request email. The overall request is declined.

<Frame>
  <div>
    <img alt="Multiple signer flow" />
  </div>
</Frame>

## Request status

* `converting`: The file is converted to a `.pdf` for the signing process once the sign request is sent.
* `error_converting`: An issue was encountered while converting the file to a `.pdf`.
* `created`: If `document_preparation_is_needed` is set to `true`, but the `prepare_url` has not yet been visited.
* `sent`: The request was successfully sent, but no signer has interacted with it.
* `error_sending`: An issue was encountered while sending the request.
* `viewed`: Once the first, or only, signer clicks on **Review document** in the signing email or visits the signing URL.
* `downloaded`: The signing document was downloaded by signer.
* `signed`: All signers completed the request.
* `signed and downloaded`: The signing document was signed and downloaded by signer.
* `declined`: If any signer declines the request.
* `cancelled`: If the request is cancelled via UI or API.
* `expired`: The date of expiration has passed with outstanding, incomplete signatures.
* `finalizing`: If all signers have signed the request, but the final document with signatures and the signing log has not been generated yet.
* `error_finalizing`: If the `finalizing` phase did not complete successfully.

Encountering an error status requires creating a new sign request to retry.

<Frame>
  <div>
    <img alt="Status diagram" />
  </div>
</Frame>

[tags]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404085855251-Creating-templates-using-tags

[log]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404095202579-Viewing-the-signing-log

[role]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404105660947-Roles-for-signers

[collab]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196413-Understanding-Collaborator-Permission-Levels

[embed]: /guides/embed/box-embed

[embedguide]: /guides/embed/box-embed#programmatically

[signrequest]: /reference/post-sign-requests

[externalid]: /reference/post-sign-requests#param-signers-embed_url_external_user_id

[cloudgame]: /guides/embed/box-embed#cloud-game

[CFR]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/24169443030163

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Embedded Sign client
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/embedded-sign-client



<Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed">Box Embed</Link> allows you to embed Box Sign
features into your own website. This way, users
don't have to leave the website, go to Box Sign
to sign the document, and then come back to finish
the process.
Instead, Box Embed allows them
to complete the signing process
within the external website.

To integrate Box Sign experience within your
own website, you need the `iframable_embed_url`
parameter that is specifically designed to allow
signing documents within the HTML `iframe` tag.

A sample `iframable_embed_url` looks as follows:

```sh theme={null}
https://app.box.com/embed/sign/document/f14d7098-a331-494b-808b-79bc7f3992a3/f14d7098-a331-494b-808b-79bc7f3992a4
```

To get the `iframeable_embed_url` pass the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests#param-signers-embed_url_external_user_id">`embed_url_external_user_id`</Link> parameter for each signer when calling the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests">create sign request</Link> endpoint.
The returned response will contain a unique `iframeable_embed_url` for that signer.

To embed Sign features and make them
available to the users,
use the URL within the `iframe` tag:

```sh theme={null}
<iframe
  src="https://app.box.com/embed/sign/document/f14d7098-a331-494b-808b-79bc7f3992a3/f14d7098-a331-494b-808b-79bc7f3992a4"
  width="{pixels}"
  height="{pixels}"
  frameborder="0"
  allowfullscreen
  webkitallowfullscreen
  msallowfullscreen
></iframe>
```

<Info>
  For details on working with Box Embed, see <Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed#programmatically">this guide</Link>.
</Info>

Box Embed uses the <Link href="/guides/embed/box-embed#cloud-game">Cloud Game</Link> widget to
prevent clickjacking.
In this case, when the user wants to sign
a document, they will have to interact
with the widget and drag a cloud to the correct
location before proceeding to document signing.


# Box Sign
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/index



Programmatically harness the full functionality of the Box Sign web app
experience by leveraging Box Sign’s API endpoints to create, list, resend, and
cancel sign requests.

## Enablement

The following account types support requests through the Box Sign API:
Business, Business Plus, Enterprise, Enterprise Suites, Enterprise Plus, and
Enterprise Advanced.
To locate your account type, navigate to **Account Settings** and scroll down
to the **Account Details** section of the **Account** tab. For Admin details on
restricting access, please see our [support article][restrict].

## Required scopes

The following <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">scopes</Link> must be enabled for an application before use of
Box Sign's endpoints.

* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#read-all-files-and-folders">Read all files and folders stored in Box</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#read-and-write-all-files-and-folders">Write all files and folders stored in Box</Link>
* <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes/#manage-signature-requests">Manage signature requests</Link>

<Warning>
  Depending on the selected authentication method and enterprise's settings,
  your application may require Admin authorization or re-authorization before
  successful use of any newly selected scopes.
</Warning>

## Events

Please see our <Link href="/guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events">events guide</Link> for more information.

## Webhooks

Please see our <Link href="/guides/webhooks/triggers">webhooks guide</Link> for more information.

## Rate Limits

Please see our <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/rate-limits/#per-api-rate-limits">rate limit guide</Link> for more information.

## Testing

Due to the feature parity, it may be useful to familiarize yourself with
[Box Sign functionality using the Box web app][webapp] before leveraging the
API. As with all API endpoints, we recommend testing via
[developer sandbox environment][sandbox] to eliminate the risk of impacting
production content.

[restrict]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404076971155-Enabling-Box-Sign

[webapp]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404105810195-Sending-a-document-for-signature

[sandbox]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697274-Managing-developer-sandboxes-for-Box-admins


# List Box Sign Requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/list-sign-requests



## All

The <Link href="/reference/get-sign-requests">get sign requests endpoint</Link> can be used to view a list of all Box
Sign requests created by the user associated with the passed Access Token.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.signRequests.getSignRequests();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.sign_requests.get_sign_requests()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.SignRequests.GetSignRequestsAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.signRequests.getSignRequests()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getSignRequests().getSignRequests()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<BoxSignRequest.Info> signRequests = BoxSignRequest.getAll(api);
  for (BoxSignRequest.Info signRequestInfo : signRequests) {
  	// Do something with each `signRequestInfo`.
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  sign_requests = client.get_sign_requests()
  for sign_request in sign_requests:
      print(f'(Sign Request ID: {sign_request.id})')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollectionMarkerBased<BoxSignRequest> signRequests = await client.SignRequestsManager.GetSignRequestsAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const result = await client.signRequests.getAll();
  console.log(`There are ${result.count} sign requests`);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## By ID

The <Link href="/reference/get-sign-requests-id">get sign requests by ID endpoint</Link> can be used to view
information about a specific Box Sign request. This endpoint requires the sign
request's ID, which can be obtained by using the
<Link href="/reference/get-sign-requests">get all Box Sign requests endpoint</Link> or in the response when
<Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests">creating a Box Sign request</Link>.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/<SIGN_REQUEST_ID>" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.signRequests.getSignRequestById(createdSignRequest.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.sign_requests.get_sign_request_by_id(created_sign_request.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.SignRequests.GetSignRequestByIdAsync(signRequestId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(createdSignRequest.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.signRequests.getSignRequestById(signRequestId: createdSignRequest.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getSignRequests().getSignRequestById(createdSignRequest.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxSignRequest signRequest = new BoxSignRequest(api, id);
  BoxSignRequest.Info signRequestInfo = signRequest.getInfo();

  //using `fields` parameter
  BoxSignRequest.Info signRequestInfoWithFields = signRequest.getInfo("status")
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  sign_request = client.sign_request(sign_request_id='12345').get()
  print(f'Sign Request ID is {sign_request.id}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxSignRequest signRequest = await client.SignRequestsManager.GetSignRequestByIdAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const sr = await client.signRequests.getById({
  	sign_request_id: 12345,
  });
  console.log(
  	`Sign request id ${sr.id} contains ${sr.source_files.length} files`
  );
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Resend Box Sign Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/resend-sign-request



The <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests-id-resend">resend a Box sign request endpoint</Link> can be used to resend request
emails to any remaining signers.

A Box Sign request cannot be resent if the <Link href="/guides/box-sign/create-sign-request/#request-status">status</Link> is: `signed`,
`cancelled`, `declined`, `expired`, `error_sending`, or `error_converting`.

If a Box Sign request was recently sent, you will need to wait 10 minutes before
resending. If you try before this time has passed you will receive a 400 error.

<Tip>
  Reminder emails can be enabled when creating a Box Sign request to avoid the
  need to resend the request.
</Tip>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests/<SIGN_REQUEST_ID>/resend" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxSignRequest signRequest = new BoxSignRequest(api, id);
  BoxSignRequest.Info signRequestInfo = signRequest.getInfo();

  signRequestInfo.resend();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  sign_request = client.sign_request(sign_request_id='12345')
  sign_request.resend()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.SignRequestsManager.ResendSignRequestAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  const id = 12345;
  await client.signRequests.resendById({ sign_request_id: id });
  console.log(`Sign request id ${sr.id} resent`);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Sign Request with Sign Template
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/sign-templates



The Sign Request API allows you to use a predefined Box Sign
template when creating a sign request.
The template includes placeholders
that are automatically populated with data
when creating the request.

## Create Template

Start with creating a Box Sign template
that includes `text`, `date`,
and `signature` fields you will need for
you request.

See the [template guides][docuprep] guide
for detailed instructions.

## Get the Template ID

To send a sign request, you need to pass the ID
of the template you want to use.
List the templates to find the `template_id`.

```json theme={null}
"entries": [
  {
    "id": "6ae28666-03c4-4ac1-80db-06a90d3b1361",
    "name": "Contract.pdf",
    "parent_folder": {
      "id": "157064745449",
      "etag": "0",
      "type": "folder",
      "sequence_id": "0",
      "name": "My Sign Requests"
    },
    "source_files": [
      {
        "id": "1216382236853",
        "etag": "0",
        "type": "file",
        "sequence_id": "0",
        "sha1": "ca9c75cda0d5e3c3c9b0a1e6d42cb5e29a211ab6",
        "file_version": {
          "id": "1327286673653",
          "type": "file_version",
          "sha1": "ca9c75cda0d5e3c3c9b0a1e6d42cb5e29a211ab6"
        }
      }
    ],
    "signers": [
      {
        "email": "",
        "label": "reader",
        "public_id": "4Z8QZZV4",
        "role": "final_copy_reader",
        "is_in_person": false,
        "order": 1,
        "inputs": [...]
      },
      {
        "email": "",
        "label": "signer1",
        "public_id": "4Z8QZZV4",
        "role": "signer",
        "is_in_person": false,
        "order": 1,
        "inputs": [...]
      },
      {
        "email": "",
        "label": "signer2",
        "public_id": "13VK8794",
        "role": "signer",
        "is_in_person": false,
        "order": 1,
        "inputs": [
          {
            "document_tag_id": "signer2_full_name",
            "id": "da431975-55c5-4629-86ae-3fb12dda1386",
            "type": "text",
            "text_value": null,
            "is_required": true,
            "content_type": "full_name",
            ...
          },
          {
            "document_tag_id": null,
            "id": "b5a76a22-8d48-456e-a012-22a12fc91eb7",
            "type": "signature",
            ...
          },
          {
            "document_tag_id": null,
            "id": "7e0cc4ee-b878-4739-afde-acbf69b117b2",
            "type": "date",
            "date_value": null,
            ...
          }
        ],
      }
    ]
    ...
  }
]
```

The response is similar to the following one
(abbreviated for guide purposes).
For the full response example, see
<Link href="/reference/get-sign-templates#response-example">Box Sign template API</Link>.

You can also learn more about the specific
parameters in the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests">Create Sign Request</Link> guide.

```json theme={null}
"entries": [
  {
    "id": "6ae28666-03c4-4ac1-80db-06a90d3b1361",
    "name": "Contract.pdf",
    "parent_folder": {
      "id": "157064745449",
      "etag": "0",
      "type": "folder",
      "sequence_id": "0",
      "name": "My Sign Requests"
    },
    "source_files": [
      {
        "id": "1216382236853",
        "etag": "0",
        "type": "file",
        "sequence_id": "0",
        "sha1": "ca9c75cda0d5e3c3c9b0a1e6d42cb5e29a211ab6",
        "file_version": {
          "id": "1327286673653",
          "type": "file_version",
          "sha1": "ca9c75cda0d5e3c3c9b0a1e6d42cb5e29a211ab6"
        }
      }
    ],
    "signers": [
      {
        "email": "",
        "label": "reader",
        "public_id": "4Z8QZZV4",
        "role": "final_copy_reader",
        "is_in_person": false,
        "order": 1,
        "inputs": [...]
      },
      {
        "email": "",
        "label": "signer1",
        "public_id": "4Z8QZZV4",
        "role": "signer",
        "is_in_person": false,
        "order": 1,
        "inputs": [...]
      },
      {
        "email": "",
        "label": "signer2",
        "public_id": "13VK8794",
        "role": "signer",
        "is_in_person": false,
        "order": 1,
        "inputs": [
          {
            "document_tag_id": "signer2_full_name",
            "id": "da431975-55c5-4629-86ae-3fb12dda1386",
            "type": "text",
            "text_value": null,
            "is_required": true,
            "content_type": "full_name",
            ...
          },
          {
            "document_tag_id": null,
            "id": "b5a76a22-8d48-456e-a012-22a12fc91eb7",
            "type": "signature",
            ...
          },
          {
            "document_tag_id": null,
            "id": "7e0cc4ee-b878-4739-afde-acbf69b117b2",
            "type": "date",
            "date_value": null,
            ...
          }
        ],
      }
    ]
    ...
  }
]
```

## Create the sign request

Follow these steps to <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests">create sign request</Link> using a template:

1. In the request body, provide the `template_id`:

   ```json theme={null}
   {
     "template_id": "6ae28666-03c4-4ac1-80db-06a90d3b1361",
     "parent_folder": {
       "id": "123456789",
       "etag": "0",
       "type": "folder",
       "sequence_id": "0",
       "name": "My Sign Requests"
     },
     ...
   }
   ```

2. Add the signer email addresses and roles:

   ```json theme={null}
   {
     "template_id": "6ae28666-03c4-4ac1-80db-06a90d3b1361",
     "parent_folder": {
       "id": "157064745449",
       "etag": "0",
       "type": "folder",
       "sequence_id": "0",
       "name": "My Sign Requests"
     },
     "signers": [
       {
         "email": "signer1@sample.com",
         "role": "signer"
       },
       {
         "email": "signer2@sample.com",
         "role": "signer"
       }
     ]
   }
   ```

3. Add the `prefill_tags` to populate the fields.

   <Info>
     Make sure the signer order is the same as the one
     displayed on the template. If the template had `signer1`
     first and then `signer2`, the `POST` request must reflect
     the same order to assign the proper signers.
   </Info>

   ```json theme={null}
   {
     "template_id": "6ae28666-03c4-4ac1-80db-06a90d3b1361",
     "parent_folder": {
       "id": "123456789000",
       "etag": "0",
       "type": "folder",
       "sequence_id": "0",
       "name": "My Sign Requests"
     },
     "signers": [
       {
         "email": "signer1@sample.com",
         "role": "signer"
       },
       {
         "email": "signer2@sample.com",
         "role": "signer"
       }
     ],
     "prefill_tags": [
       {
         "document_tag_id": "signer1_full_name",
         "text_value": "Aaron Levie"
       },
       {
         "document_tag_id": "signer2_full_name",
         "text_value": "Albert Einstein"
       }
     ]
   }
   ```

4. Send the `POST` request. The response will be similar to the following:

   ```json theme={null}
   {
     "is_document_preparation_needed": false,
     ...
     "signers": [
       {
         "email": "reader@sample.com",
         "role": "final_copy_reader",
       },
       {
         "email": "signer1@sample.com",
         "role": "signer",
       },
       {
         "email": "signer2@sample.com",
         "role": "signer",
       }
     ],
     "id": "d02fefd2-15fa-431f-a127-2b4525616ae6",
     "prefill_tags": [
       {
         "document_tag_id": "signer1_full_name",
         "text_value": "Aaron Levie",
       },
       {
         "document_tag_id": "signer2_full_name",
         "text_value": "Albert Einstein",
       }
     ],
     "source_files": [],
     "parent_folder": {
       "id": "123456789000",
       "type": "folder",
       "name": "My Sign Requests"
     },
     "name": "Contract.pdf",
     "type": "sign-request",
     "status": "created",
     "sign_files": {
       "files": [
         {
           "id": "123456789",
           "type": "file",
           "name": "Contract.pdf",
         }
       ],
       "is_ready_for_download": true
     },
     "template_id": "6ae28666-03c4-4ac1-80db-06a90d3b1361"
   }
   ```

[docuprep]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404094944915-Creating-templates

[parentfolder]: /guides/box-sign/create-sign-request#parent-folder

[signers]: /guides/box-sign/create-sign-request#signers

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Suppress default Box Sign notifications
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/suppress-sign-notifications



Box Sign API allows you to suppress the default Box
email notifications sent during the Sign workflow.
​​This feature facilitates the ownership of Box Sign
notifications with the following options:

* You can use a fully-customized email notification
  template to send emails from your domain.
* Apart from emails, you can send push notifications
  or text messages.​

<Note>
  When you choose to suppress Box email notifications, your organization assumes responsibility for ensuring the delivery to Signers of all notifications at the appropriate time in the signing process and with the appropriate content, in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including with respect to obtaining Signer consent to the delivery methods used, if applicable.
</Note>

## Using Box Sign API to suppress default notifications

To suppress Box Sign email notifications, you must
set the following parameters:

1. Set the `suppress_notifications` parameter in
   the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests/#param-signers">`signers`</Link> object to `true` to turn
   the notifications off.
2. Set the <Link href="/reference/post-sign-requests/#param-signers-embed_url_external_user_id">`embed_url_external_user_id`</Link> parameter
   to specify the user who will not receive notifications.

This configuration turns off the
automatic Box Sign email notifications
for a given user. As a result, you can configure
and send your own notifications.

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests" \
     -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
     -d '{
       "signers": [
          {    
            "role": "signer",
            "email": "example_email@box.com"
            "suppress_notifications": true
            "embed_url_external_user_id": "1234"
          }
        ],
       "source_files": [
          {
            "type": "file",
            "id": "123456789"
          }
       ],
       "parent_folder": 
          {
            "type": "folder",
            "id": "0987654321"
          }
     }'
```

## Signing Log entries

When Box Sign default notifications are suppressed, the Signing Log will indicate that the sender has suppressed all Box Sign notifications. The log will also provide information on the system used for purposes of notification delivery and the user ID of the signer on your organization’s system, as provided to Box Sign through your API integration.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Enterprise-wide search
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/enterprise



By default, a search is only performed against the content that the
authenticated user has access to. In some cases, administrators might want to
search against all content owned by all users. For this use-case the `scope`
query parameter can be set to a value of `enterprise_content`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&scope=enterprise_content" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");
  searchParams.setScope("enterprise_content");

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", mdFilters: filters, scope: "enterprise_content");
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", metadata_filters=metadata_search_filters, scope="enterprise_content")
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          scope: "enterprise_content"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  The `enterprise_content` scope can be requested by an admin through our
  <Link href="/support">support channels</Link>. Once this scope has been enabled for a user, it
  will allow that user to query for content across the entire enterprise and not
  only the content that they have access to.
</Warning>


# Requesting extra fields
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/fields



By default, the search API returns the **standard** format of a
<Link href="/reference/resources/file">File</Link>, <Link href="/reference/resources/folder">Folder</Link>, or <Link href="/reference/resources/web-link">Web Link</Link>. Each of
these resources supports additional fields that can be requested through the
`fields` query parameter.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&fields=name,tags" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  final List<String> fields = new ArrayList<String>();
  fields.add("name");
  fields.add("tags");
  searchParams.setFields(fields)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  IEnumerable<string> fields = new List<string>() { "name", "tags"};
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", fields: fields);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", metadata_filters=metadata_search_filters, fields=["name", "tags"])
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          fields: "name,tags"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  For more details on these fields, please check out the
  <Link href="/reference/resources/file--full">full File</Link>, <Link href="/reference/resources/folder--full">full Folder</Link>,
  and <Link href="/reference/resources/web-link">full Web Link</Link> resources.
</Info>

<Warning>
  When the `fields` parameter is used to query additional information about the
  items, only those fields and a few **base** fields (`id`, `type`, `name`, etc)
  are returned. Any fields that were originally in the response would now have to
  be requested explicitly.
</Warning>


# Metadata Query Filters
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/metadata-filters



The <Link href="/reference/get-search">`GET /search`</Link> API allows for filtering search results by their
associated metadata. A `mdfilters` query parameter allows a developer to specify
a metadata template and the desired values to query.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&mdfilters=%5B%7B%22scope%22%3A%22enterprise%22%2C%22templateKey%22%3A%22contract%22%2C%22filters%22%3A%7B%22category%22%3A%22online%22%7D%7D%5D" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");

  BoxMetadataFilter bmf = new BoxMetadataFilter();
  bmf.setScope("enterprise");
  bmf.setTemplateKey("contract");
  bmf.setFilter("category", "online")
  searchParams.setMetadataFilter(bmf)

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  var filter = new
  {
      category = "online"
  };

  var filters = new List<BoxMetadataFilterRequest>()
  {
      new BoxMetadataFilterRequest()
      {
          Scope = "enterprise",
          TemplateKey = "contract",
          Filters: filter
      }
  };
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", mdFilters: filters);
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.search import MetadataSearchFilter, MetadataSearchFilters

  metadata_search_filter = MetadataSearchFilter(scope='enterprise', template_key='contract')
  metadata_search_filter.add_value_based_filter(field_key='category', value='online')
  metadata_search_filters = MetadataSearchFilters()
  metadata_search_filters.add_filter(metadata_search_filter)

  client.search().query("sales", metadata_filters=metadata_search_filters)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          mdfilters: [
              {
                  scope: 'enterprise',
                  templateKey: 'contract',
                  filters: {
                      category: 'online'
                  }
              }
          ]
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  This example filters a search for any content that matches the query `sales`
  by any item that has `enterprise.contract` metadata attached to it and where
  the `category` field is set to `online`.
</Info>

## Introduction to Metadata

Metadata allows users and applications to define and store custom data
associated with files and folders.

<Frame>
  <img alt="String field" />
</Frame>

Metadata consists of key/value pairs that are assigned to a file or a folder.
For example, an important contract may have the key/value pairs of
`clientNumber: 820183` and `category: online`.

The `mdfilters` query parameter allows developers to find files and folders that
have a specific piece of metadata attached to them.

<Card href="/guides/metadata" title="Learn more about metadata templates and instances" />

## Metadata Filter Syntax

The `mdfilters` parameter can currently only contain one filter, although this
may be expanded in the future.

Each filter defines the `scope` and `templateKey` of the metadata template to
filter on.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "scope": "enterprise",
    "templateKey": "contract",
    "filters": {}
  }
]
```

<Info>
  To get the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, either
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/templates/list">list all metadata templates</Link> for an enterprise, or
  <Link href="/guides/metadata/instances/list">list all metadata instances on an item</Link>.
</Info>

With the template defined, the `filters` field accepts a few different filter
formats. The format of the filter very much depends on the type of field being
filtered by.

### Filter by `string` field

To filter by a field of type `string` a filter will need to define the `key` of
the field and the desired value to find items for.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "scope": "enterprise",
    "templateKey": "contract",
    "filters": {
      "category": "online"
    }
  }
]
```

<Info>
  This example will find all files and folders that have an instance of the
  `enterprise.contract` template applied to it, and for which the field with the
  key `category` is set to the value `online`.
</Info>

### Filter by `float` field

To filter by a field of type `float`, you will need to define define a range by
specifying a `gt` (greater-than) and/or `lt` (lower-than) value. To find an
exact value, you can input the same value for both `gt` and `lt`.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "scope": "enterprise",
    "templateKey": "contract",
    "filters": {
      "amount": {
        "gt": 10000,
        "lt": 20000
      }
    }
  }
]
```

This example will find all files and folders that have an instance of the
`enterprise.contract` template applied to it, and for which the field with the
key `amount` is set to a value equal or higher than `10000` and equal or lower
than `2000`. Note that `gt` and `lt` are inclusive and do not need to
both be set.

<Info>
  If you create a query based on numbers, do not
  exceed the range of -16777215 and +16777215.
  For metadata search using number attributes
  the index value is stored as FLOAT32. As a result,
  integers between -16777215 and +16777215 can be precisely represented.
  Any operation with numbers beyond the range can lose its precision.
</Info>

### Filter by `date` field

To filter by a field of type `date` a filter will need to define the `key` of
the field and the desired range to find items by specifying a `gt`
(greater-than) and `lt` (lower-than) value. Please note that `gt` and `lt` are
inclusive.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "scope": "enterprise",
    "templateKey": "contract",
    "filters": {
      "expirationDate": {
        "gt": "2016-08-01T00:00:00Z",
        "lt": "2017-08-01T00:00:00Z"
      }
    }
  }
]
```

<Info>
  This example will find all files and folders that have an instance of the
  `enterprise.contract` template applied and have an `expirationDate` set to
  a date after or exactly `2016-08-01T00:00:00Z`
  and before or exactly `2017-08-01T00:00:00Z`.
</Info>

### Filter by `enum` field

To filter by a field of type `enum` a filter will need to define the `key` of
the field and the desired value to find items for.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "scope": "enterprise",
    "templateKey": "contract",
    "filters": {
      "category": "online"
    }
  }
]
```

<Info>
  This example will find all files and folders that have an instance of the
  `enterprise.contract` template applied to it, and for which the field with the
  key `category` is set to the value `online`.
</Info>

### Filter by `multiSelect` field

To filter by a field of type `multiSelect` a filter will need to define the
`key` of the field and any of the potential desired values to find items for.
When performing a search, the query will essentially perform an `OR` operation
to match any template where any of the provided values match this field.

```json theme={null}
[
  {
    "scope": "enterprise",
    "templateKey": "contract",
    "filters": {
      "category": [
        "online",
        "enterprise"
      ]
    }
  }
]
```

<Info>
  This example will find all files and folders that have an instance of the
  `enterprise.contract` template applied to it, and for which the field with the
  key `category` is set to the value `online` or `enterprise`.
</Info>


# Finding recent shared links
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/shared-links



By default, the search API only returns items that are either owned by the user
or items that the user has been explicitly collaborated on. These search results
do not include any items that a user might have accessed recently through a
shared link.

To enable shared links in the API, the `include_recent_shared_links` query
parameter can be set to `true`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&include_recent_shared_links=true" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", metadata_filters=metadata_search_filters, include_recent_shared_links=True)
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          include_recent_shared_links: true
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  Please be aware that this parameter is relatively new and therefore support for
  it in our Java and Windows SDKs is still a work in progress.
</Warning>

<Danger>
  Please be very aware that when this parameter has been set to true, the format
  of the response of this API changes to return a list of
  <Link href="/reference/resources/search-results-with-shared-links">Search Results with Shared Links</Link>
</Danger>


# Searching trash
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/search/trash



By default, any content in the user's trash is ignored in the search results.
To search the user's trash, the `trash_content` query parameter can be set to
`trashed_only`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&trash_content=trashed_only" \
      -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```java Java theme={null}
  long offsetValue = 0;
  long limitValue = 10;

  BoxSearch boxSearch = new BoxSearch(api);
  BoxSearchParameters searchParams = new BoxSearchParameters();
  searchParams.setQuery("sales");
  searchParams.setTrashContent("trashed_only");

  PartialCollection<BoxItem.Info> searchResults = boxSearch.searchRange(offsetValue, limitValue, searchParams);
  ```

  ```csharp .NET theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxItem> results = await client.SearchManager
      .QueryAsync("sales", mdFilters: filters, trashContent: "trashed_only");
  ```

  ```python Python theme={null}
  client.search().query("sales", metadata_filters=metadata_search_filters, trash_content="trashed_only")
  ```

  ```js Node theme={null}
  client.search.query(
      'sales',
      {
          trash_content: "trashed_only"
      })
      .then(results => {
          // ...
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  Currently the API only supports searching for content not in the trash
  (`non_trashed_only`, default) or in the user's trash (`trashed_only`). It is
  currently not possible to search for items in both locations at once.
</Info>


# Create or Update Shared Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/shared-links/create-or-update



Shared links may be created or directly for file, folder, or web link
resources to generate a read-only URL to permit users with the appropriate
access level to view the content.

<Note>
  You may only have one active shared link for a file, folder, or web link at
  any time.
</Note>

At minimum the information needed to create a shared link will be:

* The type of resource, either a file, folder, or web link.
* The ID of that resource.

Optionally when creating a shared link the following may be specified:

* The access level, which may be one of:
  * open: A public shared link. Anyone with the link may access the link.
  * company: Anyone within your enterprise may access the link.
  * collaborators: Anyone collaborated on the content may access the link.
* An expiration time when the shared link will automatically disable.
* A password required to access the resource.

<Note>
  If an access level is not specified when creating a shared link it will use
  the default access level specified by the enterprise admin.
</Note>

## Create or Update Shared Link for File

To create a shared link on a file, specify the ID of the file with any optional
shared link parameters.

## Create or Update Shared Link for Folder

To create a shared link on a folder, specify the ID of the folder with any
optional shared link parameters.

## Create or Update Shared Link for Web Link

To create a shared link on a web link, specify the ID of the web link with any
optional shared link parameters.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Find Item from Shared Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/shared-links/find-for-item



The <Link href="/reference/get-shared-items">find item for shared link</Link> API is designed to
accept a shared link as an input using a `BoxApi` header and return the file or
folder object that the shared link is set for.

To get the file or folder object associated with a shared link, supply
the full shared link URL in the request.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/shared_items" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "boxapi: shared_link=https://app.box.com/s/gjasdasjhasd&shared_link_password=letmein"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.sharedLinksFiles.findFileForSharedLink(
    {} satisfies FindFileForSharedLinkQueryParams,
    {
      boxapi: ''.concat(
        'shared_link=',
        fileFromApi.sharedLink!.url,
        '&shared_link_password=Secret123@',
      ) as string,
    } satisfies FindFileForSharedLinkHeadersInput,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  user_client.shared_links_files.find_file_for_shared_link(
      "".join(
          [
              "shared_link=",
              file_from_api.shared_link.url,
              "&shared_link_password=Secret123@",
          ]
      )
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await userClient.SharedLinksFiles.FindFileForSharedLinkAsync(queryParams: new FindFileForSharedLinkQueryParams(), headers: new FindFileForSharedLinkHeaders(boxapi: string.Concat("shared_link=", NullableUtils.Unwrap(fileFromApi.SharedLink).Url, "&shared_link_password=Secret123@")));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await userClient.sharedLinksFiles.findFileForSharedLink(queryParams: FindFileForSharedLinkQueryParams(), headers: FindFileForSharedLinkHeaders(boxapi: "\("shared_link=")\(fileFromApi.sharedLink!.url)\("&shared_link_password=Secret123@")"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  userClient.getSharedLinksFiles().findFileForSharedLink(new FindFileForSharedLinkQueryParams(), new FindFileForSharedLinkHeaders(String.join("", "shared_link=", fileFromApi.getSharedLink().getUrl(), "&shared_link_password=Secret123@")))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String sharedLink = "https://app.box.com/s/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz123456";
  String password = "foo";
  BoxItem.Info itemInfo = BoxItem.getSharedItem(api, sharedLink, password);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file = client.get_shared_item('https://app.box.com/s/gjasdasjhasd', password='letmein')
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.sharedItems.get(
      'https://app.box.com/s/1a2b3c4d5e',
      null,
      {fields: 'type,id,parent,extension,shared_link'},
      callback
  );
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  Please note that when the shared link is for a folder, the response of this
  API does not include the list of nested items within that folder.

  To further traverse the items in the folder, use the same `BoxApi` header to
  <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id">get a nested folder's information</Link>, <Link href="/reference/get-folders-id-items">list the items in
  those folders</Link>, <Link href="/reference/get-files-id">get a nested file's
  information</Link>, or <Link href="/reference/get-files-id-content">download a file</Link>
</Info>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Shared Links
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/shared-links/index



Shared links are URLs that are generated for files, folders, web links stored
in Box, which provide direct, read-only access to the resource.

Shared links which are set to an open access level allow anyone with the URL to
access the item, while shared links with company or collaborators access levels
may only be accessed by appropriate authenticated Box users. See
[here][community_create_shared_link] for all of the options and admin settings
related to shared links.

Users can access shared items by entering the shared link URL in a browser.
Applications can also access shared items using the
<Link href="/reference/get-shared-items">Shared Item API</Link>.

[community_create_shared_link]: https://community.box.com/t5/Using-Shared-Links/Creating-Shared-Links/ta-p/19523


# Shared Link Permissions
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/shared-links/permissions



The shared link resource has three permissions that can be updated using the
`permissions` field: `can_preview`, `can_download`, `can_edit`.

<Warning>
  The `can_edit` option can only be `true` for files. Also, if the admin has
  restricted shared links from having edit access in the admin console, you
  will not be able to set `can_edit` to `true`.
</Warning>

```sh theme={null}
curl -i -X PUT 'https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456789?fields=shared_link' \
    -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
    -H 'Authorization: Bearer [ACCESS TOKEN]' \
    -d '{
      "shared_link": {
        "permissions": {
          "can_preview": true,
          "can_download": true,
          "can_edit": true
        }
      }
    }'
```

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Remove Shared Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/shared-links/remove



A shared link may be removed from a resource by calling the
<Link href="/reference/put-files-id">update file</Link> or
<Link href="/reference/put-folders-id">update folder</Link> or
<Link href="/reference/put-web-links-id">update weblink</Link> endpoint and setting the
`shared_link` value to `null`.

<Warning>
  If you delete the shared link and create a new one, the new shared link will
  have a different URL and users with the old URL will not be able to access
  the resource.
</Warning>

## Remove Shared Link on File

To remove a shared link on a file, specify the ID of file to set the
`shared_link` field to `null`.

## Remove Shared Link on Folder

To remove a shared link on a folder, specify the ID of folder to set the
`shared_link` field to `null`.

## Remove Shared Link on Web Link

To remove a shared link on a web link, specify the ID of web link to set the
`shared_link` field to `null`.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Assign a task to a user
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/assign



To assign a task to a user you will need to provide the
<Link href="/reference/post-task-assignments">`POST /task_assignments`</Link> API with the `id` of the
task and the user's details. For the user an application can either use the user
`id` or the user's login email, which Box refers to as their `login`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/task_assignments" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "task": {
           "id": "11446498",
           "type": "task"
         },
         "assign_to": {
           "id": "4823213"
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.taskAssignments.createTaskAssignment({
    task: new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskField({
      type: 'task' as CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskTypeField,
      id: task.id!,
    }),
    assignTo: {
      id: currentUser.id,
    } satisfies CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyAssignToField,
  } satisfies CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.task_assignments.create_task_assignment(
      CreateTaskAssignmentTask(type=CreateTaskAssignmentTaskTypeField.TASK, id=task.id),
      CreateTaskAssignmentAssignTo(id=current_user.id),
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TaskAssignments.CreateTaskAssignmentAsync(requestBody: new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBody(task: new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskField(type: CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskTypeField.Task, id: NullableUtils.Unwrap(task.Id)), assignTo: new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyAssignToField() { Id = currentUser.Id }));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.taskAssignments.createTaskAssignment(requestBody: CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBody(task: CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskField(type: CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskTypeField.task, id: task.id!), assignTo: CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyAssignToField(id: currentUser.id)))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTaskAssignments().createTaskAssignment(new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBody(new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskField.Builder(task.getId()).type(CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyTaskTypeField.TASK).build(), new CreateTaskAssignmentRequestBodyAssignToField.Builder().id(currentUser.getId()).build()))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxUser user = new BoxUser(api, "user-id")
  BoxTask task = new BoxTask(api, "id");
  task.addAssignment(user);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  user = client.user(user_id='11111')
  assignment = client.task(task_id='12345').assign(user)
  print(f'Assignment ID is {assignment.id} and is assigned to user {assignment.assigned_to.name}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  // Assign task 11111 to user 22222
  var assignmentParams = new BoxTaskAssignmentRequest()
  {
      Task = new BoxTaskRequest()
      {
          Id = "11111"
      },
      AssignTo = new BoxAssignmentRequest()
      {
          Id = "22222"
      }
  };
  BoxTaskAssignment assignment = await client.TasksManager.CreateTaskAssignmentAsync(assignmentParams);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  // Assign task 11111 to user 22222
  var taskID = '11111';
  var userID = '22222';
  client.tasks.assignByUserID(taskID, userID)
   .then(assignment => {
    /* assignment -> {
     type: 'task_assignment',
     id: '12345',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '33333',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '7840095ee096ee8297676a138d4e316eabb3ec96',
      name: 'script.js' },
     assigned_to: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '22222',
      name: 'Sample Assignee',
      login: 'assignee@exmaple.com' },
     message: null,
     completed_at: null,
     assigned_at: '2013-05-10T11:43:41-07:00',
     reminded_at: null,
     resolution_state: 'incomplete',
     assigned_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' } }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  # Notifications

  When creating a task an email notification is sent to the user who the task is
  assigned to.
</Note>

<Warning>
  # Permissions

  Both the user assigning the task and the user the task is being assigned to
  needs to be a collaborator on the file.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Change task assignment state
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/change-state



To update a task assignment's state call the
<Link href="/reference/put-task-assignments-id">`PUT /tasks/:task_id/assignments`</Link> API and
include a `resolution_state`, such as `completed`, `incomplete`,
`approved`, or `rejected`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/task_assignments/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "message": "New message",
         "resolution_state": "completed"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.taskAssignments.updateTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.id!, {
    requestBody: {
      message: 'updated message',
      resolutionState:
        'approved' as UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBodyResolutionStateField,
    } satisfies UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBody,
  } satisfies UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdOptionalsInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.task_assignments.update_task_assignment_by_id(
      task_assignment.id,
      message="updated message",
      resolution_state=UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdResolutionState.APPROVED,
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TaskAssignments.UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdAsync(taskAssignmentId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(taskAssignment.Id), requestBody: new UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBody() { Message = "updated message", ResolutionState = UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBodyResolutionStateField.Approved });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.taskAssignments.updateTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignmentId: taskAssignment.id!, requestBody: UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBody(message: "updated message", resolutionState: UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBodyResolutionStateField.approved))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTaskAssignments().updateTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.getId(), new UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBody.Builder().message("updated message").resolutionState(UpdateTaskAssignmentByIdRequestBodyResolutionStateField.APPROVED).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String assignmentID = "12345";
  BoxTaskAssignment taskAssignment = new BoxTaskAssignment(api, assignmentID);
  BoxTaskAssignment.Info info = taskAssignment.getInfo();
  info.setResolutionState(BoxTaskAssignment.ResolutionState.APPROVED);
  taskAssignment.updateInfo(info);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.task_assignment import ResolutionState
  updated_task = {'resolution_state': ResolutionState.APPROVED}
  updated_assignment = client.task_assignment(assignment_id='12345').update_info(data=updated_task)
  print(f'Assignment ID is {updated_assignment.id} and resolution state is {updated_assignment.resolution_state}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var requestParams = new BoxTaskAssignmentUpdateRequest()
  {
      Id = "12345",
      ResolutionState = ResolutionStateType.approved
  };
  BoxTaskAssignment updatedAssignment = await client.TasksManager.UpdateTaskAssignmentAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  // Complete a task
  client.tasks.updateAssignment(
   '12345',
   {
    message: 'Done!',
    resolution_state: client.tasks.resolutionStates.COMPLETE
   })
   .then(assignment => {
    /* assignment -> {
     type: 'task_assignment',
     id: '12345',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '33333',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '7840095ee096ee8297676a138d4e316eabb3ec96',
      name: 'script.js' },
     assigned_to: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '22222',
      name: 'Sample Assignee',
      login: 'assignee@exmaple.com' },
     message: 'Done!',
     completed_at: null,
     assigned_at: '2013-05-10T11:43:41-07:00',
     reminded_at: null,
     resolution_state: 'complete',
     assigned_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' } }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Resolution states

Box currently supports two types of tasks defined by the `action` value:
`review` tasks and `complete` tasks.

The type of task determines the possible resolution states a task can be in and
the interface shown to a user in the web and mobile apps.

| Task action | Possible resolution states           |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------ |
| `review`    | `incomplete`, `approved`, `rejected` |
| `complete`  | `incomplete`, `complete`             |

A `review` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked as
`incomplete`, `approved`, or `rejected`. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an pair of buttons to approve or reject the task.

A `complete` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked
`incomplete` or `completed`. Once a this task is marked completed, no
further changes can be made to the task's state. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an button to mark the task as completed.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get task assignment information
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/get



To get information about an assigned task, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-task-assignments-id">`GET /tasks/:task_id/assignments`</Link> API with the
`id` of the task assignment.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/task_assignments/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.taskAssignments.getTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.task_assignments.get_task_assignment_by_id(task_assignment.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TaskAssignments.GetTaskAssignmentByIdAsync(taskAssignmentId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(taskAssignment.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.taskAssignments.getTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignmentId: taskAssignment.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTaskAssignments().getTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String assignmentID = "4256974";
  BoxTaskAssignment.Info assignmentInfo = new BoxTaskAssignment(api, assignmentID).getInfo();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  assignment= client.task_assignment('12345').get()
  print(f'Assignment ID is {assignment.id} and assignment type is {assignment.type}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxTaskAssignment assignment = await client.TasksManager.GetTaskAssignmentAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.tasks.getAssignment('12345')
   .then(assignment => {
    /* assignment -> {
     type: 'task_assignment',
     id: '12345',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '33333',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '7840095ee096ee8297676a138d4e316eabb3ec96',
      name: 'script.js' },
     assigned_to: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '22222',
      name: 'Sample Assignee',
      login: 'assignee@exmaple.com' },
     message: null,
     completed_at: null,
     assigned_at: '2013-05-10T11:43:41-07:00',
     reminded_at: null,
     resolution_state: 'incomplete',
     assigned_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' } }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Assigning tasks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/index



When a task is delegated to a user in Box it creates a task assignment. A task
assignment is a request for that user to complete the task.

The way a task is resolved depends on the `action` type of a task and the
`resolution_state` used to define how a task is resolved.

<Card href="/guides/tasks" title="Learn about types of tasks" />


# List a task's assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/list



To list all of the assignments for a specific tasks, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-task-assignments-id">`GET /tasks/:task_id/assignments`</Link> with the task
`id`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/task_assignments/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.taskAssignments.getTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.task_assignments.get_task_assignment_by_id(task_assignment.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TaskAssignments.GetTaskAssignmentByIdAsync(taskAssignmentId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(taskAssignment.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.taskAssignments.getTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignmentId: taskAssignment.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTaskAssignments().getTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String assignmentID = "4256974";
  BoxTaskAssignment.Info assignmentInfo = new BoxTaskAssignment(api, assignmentID).getInfo();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  assignment= client.task_assignment('12345').get()
  print(f'Assignment ID is {assignment.id} and assignment type is {assignment.type}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxTaskAssignment assignment = await client.TasksManager.GetTaskAssignmentAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.tasks.getAssignment('12345')
   .then(assignment => {
    /* assignment -> {
     type: 'task_assignment',
     id: '12345',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '33333',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '7840095ee096ee8297676a138d4e316eabb3ec96',
      name: 'script.js' },
     assigned_to: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '22222',
      name: 'Sample Assignee',
      login: 'assignee@exmaple.com' },
     message: null,
     completed_at: null,
     assigned_at: '2013-05-10T11:43:41-07:00',
     reminded_at: null,
     resolution_state: 'incomplete',
     assigned_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' } }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Unassign a task
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/unassign



To unassign a task, you will need to provide the
<Link href="/reference/delete-task-assignments-id">`DELETE /task_assignments`</Link> API with the `id`
of the task assignment.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/task_assignments/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.taskAssignments.deleteTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.task_assignments.delete_task_assignment_by_id(task_assignment.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TaskAssignments.DeleteTaskAssignmentByIdAsync(taskAssignmentId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(taskAssignment.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.taskAssignments.deleteTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignmentId: taskAssignment.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTaskAssignments().deleteTaskAssignmentById(taskAssignment.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxTaskAssignment taskAssignment = new BoxTaskAssignment(api, "id");
  taskAssignment.delete();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.task_assignment(assignment_id='12345').delete()
  print('The task assignment was successfully delete!')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.TasksManager.DeleteTaskAssignmentAsync("12345");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.tasks.deleteAssignment('12345')
   .then(() => {
    // deletion succeeded — no value returned
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  # Permissions

  The user deleting the assignment needs to be a collaborator on the file.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Change an assignment's message
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/assignments/update-message



To update a task assignment's message call the
<Link href="/reference/put-task-assignments-id">`PUT /tasks/:task_id/assignments`</Link> API, and
include the new `message` for the task assignment.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create a task
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/create



To create a task, you will need to provide the <Link href="/reference/post-tasks">`POST /tasks`</Link> API
with the `action` for the task, as well as an `item` to represent the file to
add the task to.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/tasks" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "item": {
           "id": "11446498",
           "type": "file"
         },
         "action": "review"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.tasks.createTask({
    item: {
      type: 'file' as CreateTaskRequestBodyItemTypeField,
      id: file.id,
    } satisfies CreateTaskRequestBodyItemField,
    message: 'test message',
    dueAt: dateTime,
    action: 'review' as CreateTaskRequestBodyActionField,
    completionRule: 'all_assignees' as CreateTaskRequestBodyCompletionRuleField,
  } satisfies CreateTaskRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.tasks.create_task(
      CreateTaskItem(type=CreateTaskItemTypeField.FILE, id=file.id),
      action=CreateTaskAction.REVIEW,
      message="test message",
      due_at=date_time,
      completion_rule=CreateTaskCompletionRule.ALL_ASSIGNEES,
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Tasks.CreateTaskAsync(requestBody: new CreateTaskRequestBody(item: new CreateTaskRequestBodyItemField() { Type = CreateTaskRequestBodyItemTypeField.File, Id = file.Id }) { Message = "test message", DueAt = dateTime, Action = CreateTaskRequestBodyActionField.Review, CompletionRule = CreateTaskRequestBodyCompletionRuleField.AllAssignees });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.tasks.createTask(requestBody: CreateTaskRequestBody(item: CreateTaskRequestBodyItemField(type: CreateTaskRequestBodyItemTypeField.file, id: file.id), message: "test message", dueAt: dateTime, action: CreateTaskRequestBodyActionField.review, completionRule: CreateTaskRequestBodyCompletionRuleField.allAssignees))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTasks().createTask(new CreateTaskRequestBody.Builder(new CreateTaskRequestBodyItemField.Builder().id(file.getId()).type(CreateTaskRequestBodyItemTypeField.FILE).build()).action(CreateTaskRequestBodyActionField.REVIEW).message("test message").dueAt(dateTime).completionRule(CreateTaskRequestBodyCompletionRuleField.ALL_ASSIGNEES).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  Date dueAt = new Date();
  file.addTask(BoxTask.Action.REVIEW, "Please review this file.", dueAt);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  message = 'Please review this'
  due_at = "2014-04-03T11:09:43-07:00"
  task = client.file(file_id='11111').create_task(message, due_at)
  print(f'Task message is {task.message} and it is due at {task.due_at}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var taskParams = new BoxTaskCreateRequest()
  {
      Item = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Type = BoxType.file,
          Id = "11111"
      },
      Message = "Please review!"
  };
  BoxTask task = await client.TasksManager.CreateTaskAsync(taskParams);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  var options = {
   message: 'Please review for publication!',
   due_at: '2014-04-03T11:09:43-07:00'
  };
  client.tasks.create('22222', options)
   .then(task => {
    /* task -> {
     type: 'task',
     id: '11111',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '22222',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '0bbd79a105c504f99573e3799756debba4c760cd',
      name: 'box-logo.png' },
     due_at: '2014-04-03T11:09:43-07:00',
     action: 'review',
     message: 'Please review for publication!',
     task_assignment_collection: { total_count: 0, entries: [] },
     is_completed: false,
     created_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' },
     created_at: '2013-04-03T11:12:54-07:00' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Task actions

Box currently supports two types of tasks defined by the `action` value:
`review` tasks and `complete` tasks.

The type of task determines the possible resolution states a task can be in and
the interface shown to a user in the web and mobile apps.

| Task action | Possible resolution states           |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------ |
| `review`    | `incomplete`, `approved`, `rejected` |
| `complete`  | `incomplete`, `complete`             |

A `review` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked as
`incomplete`, `approved`, or `rejected`. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an pair of buttons to approve or reject the task.

A `complete` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked
`incomplete` or `completed`. Once a this task is marked completed, no
further changes can be made to the task's state. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an button to mark the task as completed.

## Completion rules

A task on a file can be assigned to more than one collaborator on the file, and
a task has a `completion_rule` that can be used to define if all users who've
been assigned the task (`all_assignees`) or only one assignee (`any_assignee`)
need to complete the task.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete a task
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/delete



To remove a task, call the <Link href="/reference/delete-tasks-id">`DELETE /tasks/:task_id`</Link> API
with the `id` of the task.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/tasks/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.tasks.deleteTaskById(task.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.tasks.delete_task_by_id(task.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Tasks.DeleteTaskByIdAsync(taskId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(task.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.tasks.deleteTaskById(taskId: task.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTasks().deleteTaskById(task.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxTask task = new BoxTask(api, "id");
  task.delete();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.client.task('12345').delete()
  print('The task was successfully delete!')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.TasksManager.DeleteTaskAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.tasks.delete('11111')
   .then(() => {
    // deletion succeeded — no value returned
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Lists all tasks for a file
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/for-file



To list all of the tasks for a specific file, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-files-id-tasks">`GET /files/:id/tasks`</Link> with the `id` of the file.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/tasks" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.tasks.getFileTasks(file.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.tasks.get_file_tasks(file.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Tasks.GetFileTasksAsync(fileId: file.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.tasks.getFileTasks(fileId: file.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTasks().getFileTasks(file.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  List<BoxTask.Info> tasks = file.getTasks();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  tasks = client.file(file_id='11111').get_tasks()
  for task in tasks:
      print(f'Task ID is {task.id} and the type is {task.type}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollection<BoxTask> tasks = await client.FilesManager.FilesManager.GetFileTasks("11111");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.getTasks('11111')
   .then(tasks => {
    /* tasks -> {
     total_count: 1,
     entries: 
     [ { type: 'task',
      id: '22222',
      item: 
       { type: 'file',
       id: '11111',
       sequence_id: '6',
       etag: '6',
       sha1: '81cc829fb8366fcfc108aa6c5a9bde01a6a10c16',
       name: 'box-logo.png' },
      due_at: null } ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Get information about a task
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/get



To get information about an assigned task, call the
<Link href="/reference/get-tasks-id">`GET /tasks/:task_id`</Link> API with the
`id` of the task.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/tasks/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.tasks.getTaskById(task.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.tasks.get_task_by_id(task.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Tasks.GetTaskByIdAsync(taskId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(task.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.tasks.getTaskById(taskId: task.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTasks().getTaskById(task.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxTask task = new BoxTask(api, "id");
  BoxTask.Info info = task.getInfo();
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  task = client.task(task_id='12345').get()
  print(f'Task ID is {task.id} and the type is {task.type}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxTask task = await client.TasksManager.GetTaskAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.tasks.get('11111')
   .then(task => {
    /* task -> {
     type: 'task',
     id: '11111',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '22222',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '0bbd79a105c504f99573e3799756debba4c760cd',
      name: 'box-logo.png' },
     due_at: '2014-04-03T11:09:43-07:00',
     action: 'review',
     message: 'Please review for publication!',
     task_assignment_collection: { total_count: 0, entries: [] },
     is_completed: false,
     created_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' },
     created_at: '2013-04-03T11:12:54-07:00' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Tasks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/index



Tasks allow users to request collaborators on a file to review a file or
complete a piece of work. Tasks can be used by developers to create file-centric
workflows. Learn more about tasks from the [**Adding Comments and
Tasks**][community] article on our support site.

<Frame>
  <img alt="Box Tasks in UI" />
</Frame>

## Task actions

Box currently supports two types of tasks defined by the `action` value:
`review` tasks and `complete` tasks.

The type of task determines the possible resolution states a task can be in and
the interface shown to a user in the web and mobile apps.

| Task action | Possible resolution states           |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------ |
| `review`    | `incomplete`, `approved`, `rejected` |
| `complete`  | `incomplete`, `complete`             |

A `review` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked as
`incomplete`, `approved`, or `rejected`. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an pair of buttons to approve or reject the task.

A `complete` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked
`incomplete` or `completed`. Once a this task is marked completed, no
further changes can be made to the task's state. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an button to mark the task as completed.

## Completion rules

A task on a file can be assigned to more than one collaborator on the file, and
a task has a `completion_rule` that can be used to define if all users who've
been assigned the task (`all_assignees`) or only one assignee (`any_assignee`)
need to complete the task.

[community]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043695954-Adding-Comments-and-Tasks


# Make changes to an existing task
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/tasks/update



To update a task in Box you will need to call the
<Link href="/reference/put-tasks-id">`PUT /tasks/:task_id`</Link> API with the ID of the task. This API
can be used to change the `action` type of the task, add a `message`, or change
the due date.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/tasks/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "action": "review"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.tasks.updateTaskById(task.id!, {
    requestBody: {
      message: 'updated message',
    } satisfies UpdateTaskByIdRequestBody,
  } satisfies UpdateTaskByIdOptionalsInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.tasks.update_task_by_id(task.id, message="updated message")
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Tasks.UpdateTaskByIdAsync(taskId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(task.Id), requestBody: new UpdateTaskByIdRequestBody() { Message = "updated message" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.tasks.updateTaskById(taskId: task.id!, requestBody: UpdateTaskByIdRequestBody(message: "updated message"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTasks().updateTaskById(task.getId(), new UpdateTaskByIdRequestBody.Builder().message("updated message").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxTask task = new BoxTask(api, "id");
  BoxTask.Info info = task.new Info();
  info.setMessage("An edited message.");
  task.updateInfo(info);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  task_update = {'message': 'New Message', 'due_at': '2014-04-03T11:09:43-10:00'}
  updated_task = client.task(task_id='12345').update_info(data=task_update)
  print(f'New task message is {updated_task.message} and the new due time is {updated_task.due_at}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var updates = new BoxTaskUpdateRequest()
  {
      Id = "22222",
      Message = "Could you please review this?"
  };
  BoxTask updatedTask = await client.TasksManager.UpdateTaskAsync(updates);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.tasks.update('11111', { message: 'Could you please review?' })
   .then(task => {
    /* task -> {
     type: 'task',
     id: '11111',
     item: 
     { type: 'file',
      id: '22222',
      sequence_id: '0',
      etag: '0',
      sha1: '0bbd79a105c504f99573e3799756debba4c760cd',
      name: 'box-logo.png' },
     due_at: '2014-04-03T11:09:43-07:00',
     action: 'review',
     message: 'Could you please review?',
     task_assignment_collection: { total_count: 0, entries: [] },
     is_completed: false,
     created_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' },
     created_at: '2013-04-03T11:12:54-07:00' }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Task actions

Box currently supports two types of tasks defined by the `action` value:
`review` tasks and `complete` tasks.

The type of task determines the possible resolution states a task can be in and
the interface shown to a user in the web and mobile apps.

| Task action | Possible resolution states           |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------ |
| `review`    | `incomplete`, `approved`, `rejected` |
| `complete`  | `incomplete`, `complete`             |

A `review` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked as
`incomplete`, `approved`, or `rejected`. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an pair of buttons to approve or reject the task.

A `complete` task starts out in an `incomplete` state and can be marked
`incomplete` or `completed`. Once a this task is marked completed, no
further changes can be made to the task's state. In the user interface a user is
provided with a text box and an button to mark the task as completed.

## Completion rules

A task on a file can be assigned to more than one collaborator on the file, and
a task has a `completion_rule` that can be used to define if all users who've
been assigned the task (`all_assignees`) or only one assignee (`any_assignee`)
need to complete the task.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Trash
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/index



Before items are deleted they might end up in a user's trash. The trash can be
managed by a user through any of the Box apps, and by an application via the
API.

## Two-stage Deletion Process

Box uses a two-stage process to remove or **trash** [files], [folders], and
[web links] before permanently deleting them.

By default, items can be restored after they are **trashed** within a 30 day
time frame before they are **purged**. The purge window can be modified by
an enterprise administrator.

More details can be found in the Box community article on [Managing Trash]

[files]: /reference/delete-files-id

[folders]: /reference/delete-folders-id

[web links]: /reference/delete-web-links-id

[Managing Trash]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196093-Manage-Trash


# Permanently Delete File
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/permanently-delete-file



Once a file has been moved to the trash, it will stay in the trash for 30
days by default before being purged. Administrators of Business or
Enterprise accounts can alter the purge window. If you wish to permanently
delete the file from the trash before the purge window expires, make a `DELETE`
request to `/files/:file_id/trash` using the trashed file's `ID`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/trash" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.trashedFiles.deleteTrashedFileById(file.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.trashed_files.delete_trashed_file_by_id(file.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TrashedFiles.DeleteTrashedFileByIdAsync(fileId: file.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.trashedFiles.deleteTrashedFileById(fileId: file.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTrashedFiles().deleteTrashedFileById(file.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String fileID = "87398";
  BoxTrash trash = new BoxTrash(api);
  trash.deleteFile(fileID);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file_to_delete = client.file(file_id='11111')
  client.trash().permanently_delete_item(file_to_delete)
  print('The file was deleted from trash!')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.FilesManager.PurgeTrashedAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.deletePermanently('11111')
  	.then(() => {
  		// deletion succeeded — no value returned
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Permanently Delete Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/permanently-delete-folder



Once a folder has been moved to the trash, it will stay in the trash for 30
days by default before being purged. Administrators of Business or
Enterprise accounts can alter the purge window. If you wish to permanently
delete the folder from the trash before the purge window expires, make a
`DELETE` request to `/folders/:folder_id/trash` using the trashed folder's `ID`
.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455/trash" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.trashedFolders.deleteTrashedFolderById(folder.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.trashed_folders.delete_trashed_folder_by_id(folder.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TrashedFolders.DeleteTrashedFolderByIdAsync(folderId: folder.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.trashedFolders.deleteTrashedFolderById(folderId: folder.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTrashedFolders().deleteTrashedFolderById(folder.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String folder = "123456";
  BoxTrash trash = new BoxTrash(api);
  trash.deleteFolder(folderID);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  folder = client.folder(folder_id='22222')
  client.trash().permanently_delete_item(folder)
  print('The folder was deleted from trash!')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.FoldersManager.PurgeTrashedFolderAsync("22222");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.deletePermanently('22222')
  	.then(() => {
  		// deletion succeeded — no value returned
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Permanently Delete Web Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/permanently-delete-web-link



Once a web link has been moved to the trash, it will stay in the trash for 30
days by default before being purged. Administrators of Business or
Enterprise accounts can alter the purge window. If you wish to permanently
delete the web link from the trash before the purge window expires, make a
`DELETE` request to `/web_links/:web_link_id/trash` using the trashed web
link's `ID`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/web_links/12345/trash" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.trashedWebLinks.deleteTrashedWebLinkById(weblink.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.trashed_web_links.delete_trashed_web_link_by_id(weblink.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TrashedWebLinks.DeleteTrashedWebLinkByIdAsync(webLinkId: weblink.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.trashedWebLinks.deleteTrashedWebLinkById(webLinkId: weblink.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTrashedWebLinks().deleteTrashedWebLinkById(weblink.getId())
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  web_link = client.web_link(web_link_id='33333')
  client.trash().permanently_delete_item(web_link)
  print('The web link was deleted from trash!')
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Restore File
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/restore-file



To restore a file that has been moved to the trash, but has not yet been
purged, make a `POST` request to the `/files/:file_id` endpoint. This will
place the file in the original folder if it is still available, or you
optionally can specify a `parent` folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.trashedFiles.restoreFileFromTrash(file.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.trashed_files.restore_file_from_trash(file.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TrashedFiles.RestoreFileFromTrashAsync(fileId: file.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.trashedFiles.restoreFileFromTrash(fileId: file.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTrashedFiles().restoreFileFromTrash(file.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String fileID = "125367";
  String newName = "Presentation 2018 ORIGINAL.pptx";
  String newParentID = "98765";

  BoxTrash trash = new BoxTrash(api);
  // Avoid conflicts at the original location
  trash.restoreFile(fileID, newName, newParentID);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file_to_restore = client.file(file_id='11111')
  restored_file = client.trash().restore_item(file_to_restore)
  print(f'File ID is {restored_file.id} and name is {restored_file.name}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var requestParams = new BoxFileRequest()
  {
      Name = "Name in case of conflict",
      Parent = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          // File will be placed in this folder if original location no longer exists
          Id = "12345" 
      }
  };
  BoxFile restoredFile = await client.FilesManager.RestoreTrashedAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.files.restoreFromTrash(
  	'11111',
  	{
  		// New name in case of conflict
  		name: 'New Name',
  		// File will be placed in this folder if original location no longer exists
  		parent_id: '0'
  	})
  	.then(restoredFile => {
  		/* trashedFile -> {
  			type: 'file',
  			id: '11111',
  			sequence_id: '2',
  			etag: '2',
  			sha1: '4bd9e98652799fc57cf9423e13629c151152ce6c',
  			name: 'Screenshot_1_30_13_6_37_PM.png',
  			description: '',
  			size: 163265,
  			path_collection: 
  			{ total_count: 1,
  				entries: 
  				[ { type: 'folder',
  					id: '0',
  					sequence_id: null,
  					etag: null,
  					name: 'All Files' } ] },
  			created_at: '2013-01-30T18:43:56-08:00',
  			modified_at: '2013-01-30T18:44:00-08:00',
  			trashed_at: null,
  			purged_at: null,
  			content_created_at: '2013-01-30T18:43:56-08:00',
  			content_modified_at: '2013-01-30T18:44:00-08:00',
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			modified_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			owned_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			shared_link: null,
  			parent: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '0',
  				sequence_id: null,
  				etag: null,
  				name: 'All Files' },
  			item_status: 'active' }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Restore Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/restore-folder



To restore a folder that has been moved to the trash, but has not yet been
purged, make a `POST` request to the `/folders/:folder_id` endpoint. This will
place the folder in the original parent folder if it is still available, or you
optionally can specify a `parent` folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folders/4353455" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.trashedFolders.restoreFolderFromTrash(folder.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.trashed_folders.restore_folder_from_trash(folder.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TrashedFolders.RestoreFolderFromTrashAsync(folderId: folder.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.trashedFolders.restoreFolderFromTrash(folderId: folder.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTrashedFolders().restoreFolderFromTrash(folder.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String folderID = "125367";
  String newName = "My Documents ORIGINAL";
  String newParentID = "98765";

  BoxTrash trash = new BoxTrash(api);
  // Avoid conflicts at the original location
  trash.restoreFolder(folderID, newName, newParentID);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  folder_to_restore = client.folder(folder_id='22222')
  restored_folder = client.trash().restore_item(folder_to_restore)
  print(f'Folder ID is {restored_folder.id} and name is {restored_folder.name}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var requestParams = new BoxFolderRequest()
  {
      Name = "Name in case of conflict",
      Parent = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          // Folder will be placed in this parent folder if original location no longer exists
          Id = "12345" 
      }
  };
  BoxFolder restoredFolder = await client.FoldersManager.RestoreTrashedFolderAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.folders.restoreFromTrash(
  	'22222',
  	{
  		// New name in case of conflict
  		name: 'New Name',
  		// Folder will be placed in this parent folder if the original parent no longer exists
  		parent_id: '0'
  	})
  	.then(restoredFolder => {
  		/* trashedFolder -> {
  			type: 'folder',
  			id: '22222',
  			sequence_id: '1',
  			etag: '1',
  			name: 'Old Files',
  			created_at: '2013-05-06T22:37:30-07:00',
  			modified_at: '2013-05-06T22:39:08-07:00',
  			description: '',
  			size: 18482,
  			path_collection: 
  			{ total_count: 1,
  				entries: 
  				[ { type: 'folder',
  					id: '0',
  					sequence_id: null,
  					etag: null,
  					name: 'All Files' } ] },
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			modified_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			trashed_at: null,
  			purged_at: null,
  			content_created_at: '2013-05-06T22:37:30-07:00',
  			content_modified_at: '2013-05-06T22:39:08-07:00',
  			owned_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			shared_link: null,
  			folder_upload_email: null,
  			parent: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '0',
  				sequence_id: null,
  				etag: null,
  				name: 'All Files' },
  			item_status: 'active' }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  During a folder restoration operation, part of the file tree will be locked,
  such as the source folder for the request and all of its descendants, as
  well as the destination folder.

  During the restoration of the folder, no other move, copy, delete, or
  restore operation can be performed on the locked folders.
</Warning>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED RESOURCES" />


# Restore Web Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/trash/restore-web-link



To restore a web link that has been moved to the trash, but has not yet been
purged, make a `POST` request to the `/web_links/:web_link_id` endpoint. This
will place the web link in the original parent folder if it is still
available, you optionally can specify a `parent` folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/web_links/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.trashedWebLinks.restoreWeblinkFromTrash(weblink.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.trashed_web_links.restore_weblink_from_trash(weblink.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.TrashedWebLinks.RestoreWeblinkFromTrashAsync(webLinkId: weblink.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.trashedWebLinks.restoreWeblinkFromTrash(webLinkId: weblink.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTrashedWebLinks().restoreWeblinkFromTrash(weblink.getId())
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  web_link_to_restore = client.web_link(web_link_id='33333')
  restored_web_link = client.trash().restore_item(web_link_to_restore)
  print(f'Web link ID is {restored_web_link.id} and name is {restored_web_link.name}')
  ```
</CodeGroup>


# Preflight Check
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/check



The Pre-flight check API allows an application to verify that a file will be
accepted by Box before it uploads any bytes. It can both be used for new files,
as well as uploading new versions of existing files.

## Checklist

Preflight checks perform all the same checks as if the file was
actually uploaded including:

* The permission of the application and the user to upload to the folder
* Any file name collisions
* Any file size caps and limits
* Any folder and file name restrictions
* Any folder and account storage quotas

## Check for new file

To perform a check for a new file, call the
<Link href="/reference/options-files-content">`OPTIONS /files/content`</Link> API with the same
parameters (except for the binary content) as if uploading an actual file.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X OPTIONS "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/content" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{"name":"Contract.pdf", "parent":{"id":"11446498"}}'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.uploads.preflightFileUploadCheck({
    name: newFileName,
    size: 1024 * 1024,
    parent: { id: '0' } satisfies PreflightFileUploadCheckRequestBodyParentField,
  } satisfies PreflightFileUploadCheckRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.uploads.preflight_file_upload_check(
      name=new_file_name, size=1024 * 1024, parent=PreflightFileUploadCheckParent(id="0")
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Uploads.PreflightFileUploadCheckAsync(requestBody: new PreflightFileUploadCheckRequestBody() { Name = newFileName, Size = 1024 * 1024, Parent = new PreflightFileUploadCheckRequestBodyParentField() { Id = "0" } });
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUploads().preflightFileUploadCheck(new PreflightFileUploadCheckRequestBody.Builder().name(newFileName).size(1024 * 1024).parent(new PreflightFileUploadCheckRequestBodyParentField.Builder().id("0").build()).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String fileName = "My Doc.pdf";
  BoxFolder rootFolder = BoxFolder.getRootFolder(api);
  try {
      folder.canUpload(fileName, 98734576);

      // If the file upload would not have succeeded, it will not be attempted
      folder.uploadFile(fileContents, fileName);
  } catch (BoxAPIException ex) (

  )
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Verify that uploading a 200MB file named "Preso.ppt" to folder 12345 would succeed
  client.files.preflightUploadFile(
  		'12345',
  		{
  			name: 'Preso.ppt',
  			size: 200000000
  		},
  		null,
  		callback
  	);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Check for new file version

To perform a check for a new version of a file, call the
<Link href="/reference/options-files-content">`OPTIONS /files/:id/content`</Link> API with the same
parameters (except for the binary content) as if uploading an actual file.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X OPTIONS "https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345/content" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{"name":"Contract.pdf", "parent":{"id":"11446498"}}'
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Check if uploading a larger version of this file will succeed
  client.files.preflightUploadNewFileVersion('87646', {size: 300000000}, null, callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Checks & Chunk Uploads

When performing a <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked">chunked upload</Link>, performing a preflight check is not
required as <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/create-session">creating an Upload Session</Link> also performs a
preflight check.

## Response codes

When the API call detects any problems, a HTTP `409 Conflict` status code is
returned with a message to describe the possible conflict. If no problems were
discovered, it returns a HTTP `200 OK` status code and the upload can proceed.

A `200 OK` response does not guarantee that the upload call will actually
succeed. Pre-flight checks have show to reduce failed uploads by over 99%, yet
concurrency issues still come into play when uploading a file.

Highly active folders, common filenames, and accounts near their quota
limits may get a `200 OK` for the preflight check, and then have a real conflict
during the actual upload.

## Response body

In many cases, the preflight check will return valuable data in the API response
when a conflict has been detected. For example, when a name collision has been
detected, the application can use the `SHA-1` that is returned in the error
response to check if the existing file is identical to the one it is trying to
upload.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Commit Upload Session
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/chunked/commit-session



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

The final step in a chunked upload is to commit the session.

To commit a file upload session, call the
<Link href="/reference/post-files-upload-sessions-id-commit">`POST /files/upload_sessions/:id/commit`</Link> with a list of uploaded
parts to commit.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://upload.box.com/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/commit" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "digest: sha=fpRyg5eVQletdZqEKaFlqwBXJzM=" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "parts": [
           {
             "part_id": "BFDF5379",
             "offset": 0,
             "size": 8388608,
  	     "sha1": "134b65991ed521fcfe4724b7d814ab8ded5185dc"
           },
  		     {
             "part_id": "E8A3ED8E",
             "offset": 8388608,
             "size": 1611392,
  	     "sha1": "234b65934ed521fcfe3424b7d814ab8ded5185dc"
           }
         ],
         "attributes": {
           "content_modified_at": "2017-04-08T00:58:08Z"
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.chunkedUploads.createFileUploadSessionCommit(
    uploadSessionId,
    { parts: parts } satisfies CreateFileUploadSessionCommitRequestBody,
    { digest: digest } satisfies CreateFileUploadSessionCommitHeadersInput,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.chunked_uploads.create_file_upload_session_commit(
      upload_session_id, parts, digest
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.ChunkedUploads.CreateFileUploadSessionCommitAsync(uploadSessionId: uploadSessionId, requestBody: new CreateFileUploadSessionCommitRequestBody(parts: parts), headers: new CreateFileUploadSessionCommitHeaders(digest: digest));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.chunkedUploads.createFileUploadSessionCommit(uploadSessionId: uploadSessionId, requestBody: CreateFileUploadSessionCommitRequestBody(parts: parts), headers: CreateFileUploadSessionCommitHeaders(digest: digest))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getChunkedUploads().createFileUploadSessionCommit(uploadSessionId, new CreateFileUploadSessionCommitRequestBody(parts), new CreateFileUploadSessionCommitHeaders(digest))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  //Creates the file hash
  byte[] digestBytes = digest.digest();
  //Base64 encoding of the hash
  String digestStr = Base64.encode(digestBytes);

  //Commit the upload session. If there is a failure, abort the commit.
  BoxFile.Info fileInfo = session.commit(digestStr, parts, null, null, null);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  import hashlib

  sha1 = hashlib.sha1()
  # sha1 should have been updated with all the bytes of the file

  file_atributes = {
      'description': 'A file uploaded via Chunked Upload',
  }

  upload_session = client.upload_session('11493C07ED3EABB6E59874D3A1EF3581')
  uploaded_file = upload_session.commit(sha1.digest(), file_atributes=file_atributes)
  print(f'Successfully uploaded file {uploaded_file.id} with description {uploaded_file.description}')
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Finalize upload session 93D9A837B45F
  client.files.commitUploadSession(
  	'93D9A837B45F',
  	fileHash.digest('base64'),
  	{description: 'A file I uploaded in chunks!'},
  	callback
  );
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  Additionally, any file `attributes` can be passed along with the `parts` to
  further add information to the file. See the <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">`POST /files/content`</Link>
  API for more details.
</Info>

## Response

When successful, the API returns a HTTP `201 Created` status code with a
<Link href="/reference/resources/file">`File`</Link> object.

In some cases, creating the parts might not be ready yet and the API will return
a `202 Accepted` status code instead. In this case the application should check
the `retry-after` header and retry committing after the number of seconds
specified.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Create Upload Session
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/chunked/create-session



To create an upload session, call the
<Link href="/reference/post_files_upload_sessions">`POST /files/upload_sessions`</Link> API with the desired `file_name`
and `folder_id` to put the file in, as well as the `file_size` of the file to be
uploaded.

To create a session for a new version of an existing file, call the
<Link href="/reference/post_files_id_upload_sessions">`POST /files/:id/upload_sessions`</Link> API instead. In this
case, the `file_name` and `folder_id` are only required when renaming or moving
the file in the process.

## Pre-flight Check

Creating an upload session also performs a <Link href="/guides/uploads/check">preflight check</Link>, making it
unnecessary to do so separately when working with chunked uploads.

## Response

When a session is created successfully the response includes an <Link href="/reference/resources/upload_session">Upload
Session</Link> that includes a session ID, the number of parts, the
part sizes, as well as links to the relevant next API endpoints to use.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
  "type": "upload_session",
  "session_expires_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
  "part_size": 1024,
  "total_parts": 1000,
  "num_parts_processed": 455,
  "session_endpoints": {
    "upload_part": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
    "commit": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/commit",
    "abort": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
    "list_parts": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/parts",
    "status": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
    "log_event": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/log"
  }
}
```

The upload session defines the size of the parts to use when uploading the
individual parts.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Upload All Files in Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/chunked/folder



Sometimes an application might want to upload all files from a folder. To do so
with the SDKs and the CLI requires traversing the folder tree, finding every
file and uploading it accordingly.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title=".NET">
    ```csharp theme={null}
    using System;
    using System.Collections.Generic;
    using System.Diagnostics;
    using System.Dynamic;
    using System.IO;
    using System.Linq;
    using System.Net;
    using System.Net.Sockets;
    using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
    using System.Security.Cryptography;
    using System.Text;
    using System.Threading.Tasks;
    using Box.V2;
    using Box.V2.Auth;
    using Box.V2.Config;
    using Box.V2.Converter;
    using Box.V2.Exceptions;
    using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
    using Box.V2.Models;
    using Newtonsoft.Json;

    namespace BoxPlayground {
        public class Program {
            static void Main (string[] args) {
                ExecuteMainAsync ().Wait ();
            }
            const long CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM = 200000;
            private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync () {
                var directoryName = "dotnetUploadFolder";
                var parentFolderId = "0";
                var files = Directory.EnumerateFiles (directoryName);
                using (FileStream fs = new FileStream ("./config.json", FileMode.Open)) {
                    var session = new BoxJWTAuth (BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile (fs));
                    var client = session.AdminClient (session.AdminToken ());
                    var folderId = "";
                    try {
                        var createdFolder = await client.FoldersManager.CreateAsync (
                            new BoxFolderRequest {
                                Parent = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                        Id = parentFolderId
                                    },
                                    Name = directoryName
                            });
                        folderId = createdFolder.Id;
                    } catch (BoxConflictException<BoxFolder> e) {
                        folderId = e.ConflictingItems.FirstOrDefault ().Id;
                        System.Console.WriteLine ($"Found existing folder: {folderId}");
                    }
                    var fileUploadTasks = new List<Task<BoxFile>> ();
                    foreach (var file in files) {
                        fileUploadTasks.Add (Task.Run (
                            async () => {
                                System.Console.WriteLine (file);
                                var fileName = file.Split (Path.DirectorySeparatorChar)
                                    .Where ((item) => { return item != directoryName; }).FirstOrDefault ();
                                System.Console.WriteLine (fileName);
                                var fileInfo = new FileInfo (file);
                                var preflightRequest = new BoxPreflightCheckRequest {
                                    Name = fileName,
                                    Size = fileInfo.Length,
                                    Parent = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                    Id = folderId
                                    }
                                };
                                using (FileStream toUpload = new FileStream (file, FileMode.Open)) {
                                    try {
                                        var preflightCheck = await client.FilesManager.PreflightCheck (preflightRequest);
                                        if (toUpload.Length < CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM) {
                                            using (SHA1 sha1 = SHA1.Create ()) {
                                                var fileUploadRequest = new BoxFileRequest {
                                                Name = fileName,
                                                Parent = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                                Id = folderId
                                                }
                                                };
                                                var fileSHA = sha1.ComputeHash (toUpload);
                                                System.Console.WriteLine (fileSHA);
                                                return await client.FilesManager.UploadAsync (fileRequest: fileUploadRequest, stream: toUpload, contentMD5: fileSHA);
                                            }
                                        } else {
                                            return await client.FilesManager.UploadUsingSessionAsync (stream: toUpload, fileName: fileName, folderId: folderId);
                                        }
                                    } catch (BoxPreflightCheckConflictException<BoxFile> e) {
                                        if (toUpload.Length < CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM) {
                                            using (SHA1 sha1 = SHA1.Create ()) {
                                                var fileSHA = sha1.ComputeHash (toUpload);
                                                return await client.FilesManager.UploadNewVersionAsync (fileName: e.ConflictingItem.Name, fileId: e.ConflictingItem.Id, stream: toUpload, contentMD5: fileSHA);
                                            }
                                        } else {
                                            await client.FilesManager.UploadFileVersionUsingSessionAsync (fileId: e.ConflictingItem.Id, stream: toUpload);
                                            return await client.FilesManager.GetInformationAsync (e.ConflictingItem.Id);
                                        }
                                    }
                                }

                            }));
                    }

                    var uploaded = await Task.WhenAll (fileUploadTasks);
                    foreach (var file in uploaded) {
                        System.Console.WriteLine (file.Id);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Java">
    ```java theme={null}
    public class UploadAllFilesInFolder {

        public static final int CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM = 20000;

        public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
            String directoryName = "javaUploadFolder";
            Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
            Path uploadFolderPath = Paths.get(directoryName);
            try (BufferedReader reader = Files.newBufferedReader(configPath, Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
                BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
                BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection client = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);
                String parentFolderId = "0";
                String createdFolderId;
                BoxFolder createFolderInParentFolder = new BoxFolder(client, parentFolderId);
                try {
                    BoxFolder.Info createdFolder = createFolderInParentFolder.createFolder(directoryName);
                    System.out.println("Creating folder...");
                    System.out.println(createdFolder.getID());
                    createdFolderId = createdFolder.getID();
            } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    String existingFolderId = getIdFromConflict(e.getMessage());
                    System.out.println("Found existing folder...");
                    System.out.println(existingFolderId);
                    createdFolderId = existingFolderId;
            }
                ArrayList < BoxFile.Info > uploadedFiles = new ArrayList < > ();
                try (DirectoryStream < Path > directory = Files.newDirectoryStream(uploadFolderPath)) {

                    for (Path path: directory) {
                    String fileName = path.getFileName().toString();
                    System.out.println(path);
                    System.out.println(fileName);
                    byte[] fileBytes = Files.readAllBytes(path);
                    int fileSize = fileBytes.length;
                    boolean useChunkedUpload = (fileSize > CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM) ? true : false;
                    uploadedFiles.add(uploadEachFile(client, createdFolderId, fileName, fileSize, fileBytes, useChunkedUpload));
                    }
                }
                for (BoxFile.Info file: uploadedFiles) {
                    System.out.println(file.getID());
                }
            }
        }

        private static BoxFile.Info uploadEachFile(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection client, String folderId, String fileName, int fileSize, byte[] fileBytes, boolean useChunkedUpload)
        throws IOException, InterruptedException, NoSuchAlgorithmException {
            try {
                BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(client, folderId);
                folder.canUpload(fileName, fileSize);
                if (useChunkedUpload) {
                    System.out.println("Using chunked upload...");
                    return folder.uploadLargeFile(new ByteArrayInputStream(fileBytes), fileName, fileSize);
                } else {
                    System.out.println("Using normal upload...");
                    MessageDigest md = MessageDigest.getInstance("SHA-1");
                    try (Formatter formatter = new Formatter()) {
                        for (byte b: md.digest(fileBytes)) {
                            formatter.format("%02x", b);
                        }
                        String fileSHA = formatter.toString();
                        FileUploadParams fileUpload = new FileUploadParams();
                        fileUpload.setContent(new ByteArrayInputStream(fileBytes));
                        fileUpload.setSHA1(fileSHA);
                        fileUpload.setName(fileName);
                        return folder.uploadFile(fileUpload);
                    }
                }
            } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                if (e.getResponseCode() == 409) {
                    // You can use the ID returned from the conflict error to continue
                    String conflictId = getIdFromConflict(e.getResponse());
                    System.out.println("Found existing file: " + conflictId);
                    BoxFile uploadFileVersion = new BoxFile(client, conflictId);
                    if (useChunkedUpload) {
                        System.out.println("Using chunked upload...");
                        return uploadFileVersion.uploadLargeFile(new ByteArrayInputStream(fileBytes), fileSize);
                    } else {
                        System.out.println("Using normal upload...");
                        MessageDigest md = MessageDigest.getInstance("SHA-1");
                        try (Formatter formatter = new Formatter()) {
                        for (byte b: md.digest(fileBytes)) {
                            formatter.format("%02x", b);
                        }
                        String fileSHA = formatter.toString();
                        uploadFileVersion.uploadVersion(new ByteArrayInputStream(fileBytes), fileSHA);
                        return uploadFileVersion.getInfo();
                        }
                    }
                } else {
                    throw e;
                }
            }
        }

        private static String getIdFromConflict(String message) {
            String id = "";
            Pattern p = Pattern.compile("\"id\":\"[0-9]+\"");
            Pattern p2 = Pattern.compile("[0-9]+");
            Matcher m = p.matcher(message);
            if (m.find()) {
                String sub = m.group();
                Matcher m2 = p2.matcher(sub);
                if (m2.find()) {
                id = m2.group();
                }
            }
            return id;
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    "use strict";
    const fs = require("fs");
    const path = require("path");
    const box = require("box-node-sdk");
    const crypto = require("crypto");

    let configFile = fs.readFileSync("config.json");
    configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

    let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
    let client = session.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");

    const CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM = 200000;

    const parentFolderId = "0";
    const directoryName = "uploadFolder";
    let files = [];

    fs.readdirSync(directoryName).forEach(file => {
        files.push({
            fileName: file,
            content: fs.readFileSync(path.join(__dirname, directoryName, file))
        });
    });

    client.folders
        .create(parentFolderId, directoryName)
        .then(createdFolder => {
            console.log(createdFolder);
            return processFiles(client, files, createdFolder.id);
        })
        .catch(err => {
            let conflictId = handleFolderConflictError(err);
            if (conflictId) {
                console.log(`Found an existing folder: ${conflictId}`);
                return processFiles(client, files, conflictId);
            } else {
                throw err;
            }
        })
        .then(results => {
            console.log(results);
        })
        .catch(err => {
            console.log(err);
        });

    function processFiles(client, files, folderId) {
        let fileUploadPromises = [];
        files.forEach(file => {
            fileUploadPromises.push(
                uploadAFile(client, folderId, file.fileName, file.content)
            );
        });

        return Promise.all(fileUploadPromises);
    }

    function uploadAFile(client, folderId, fileName, toUploadFile) {
      return client.files
        .preflightUploadFile(folderId, {
            name: fileName,
            size: toUploadFile.length
        })
        .then(preflightResults => {
          console.log(preflightResults);
          if (toUploadFile.length < CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM) {
              console.log("Using normal upload...");
              let fileSha = crypto
                  .createHash("sha1")
                  .update(toUploadFile)
                  .digest("hex");
              client.setCustomHeader("content-md5", fileSha);
              return client.files.uploadFile(folderId, fileName, toUploadFile);
          } else {
            console.log("Using chunked upload...");
            client.setCustomHeader("content-md5", null);
            return client.files
                .getChunkedUploader(
                    folderId,
                    toUploadFile.length,
                    fileName,
                    toUploadFile
                )
                .then(uploader => {
                    return new Promise((resolve, reject) => {
                        uploader.on("error", err => {
                            reject(err);
                        });

                        uploader.on("chunkUploaded", part => {
                            console.log("Part uploaded...");
                            console.log(part);
                        });
                        uploader.on("uploadComplete", file => {
                            console.log("File upload complete!");
                            resolve(file);
                        });
                        console.log("Starting chunked uploader...");
                        uploader.start();
                    });
                });
          }
        })
        .catch(err => {
            let conflictId = handleFileConflictError(err);
            if (conflictId) {
                console.log(`Found existing file with that name: ${conflictId}`);
                return uploadANewFileVersion(client, conflictId, toUploadFile);
            } else {
                throw err;
            }
        });
    }

    function uploadANewFileVersion(client, conflictId, toUploadFile) {
        if (toUploadFile.length < CHUNKED_UPLOAD_MINIMUM) {
            console.log("Using normal upload...");
            let fileSha = crypto
                .createHash("sha1")
                .update(toUploadFile)
                .digest("hex");
            client.setCustomHeader("content-md5", fileSha);
            // You can optionally rename a folder while uploading a new version.
            // let newFileName = "ubuntu-no-gui.iso";
            // let options = {
            //     name: newFileName
            // }
            // return client.files.uploadNewFileVersion(conflictId, options, toUploadFile);
            return client.files.uploadNewFileVersion(conflictId, toUploadFile);
        } else {
            console.log("Using chunked upload...");
            // You can optionally rename a folder while uploading a new version.
            // let newFileName = "ubuntu-no-gui.iso";
            // let options = {
            //     name: newFileName
            // }
            // return client.files.getNewVersionChunkedUploader(conflictId, toUploadFile.length, toUploadFile, options)
            client.setCustomHeader("content-md5", null);
            return client.files
              .getNewVersionChunkedUploader(
                  conflictId,
                  toUploadFile.length,
                  toUploadFile,
                  null
              )
              .then(uploader => {
                  return new Promise((resolve, reject) => {
                      uploader.on("error", err => {
                          reject(err);
                      });

                      uploader.on("chunkUploaded", part => {
                          console.log("Part uploaded...");
                          console.log(part);
                      });
                      uploader.on("uploadComplete", file => {
                          console.log("File upload complete!");
                          resolve(file);
                      });
                      console.log("Starting chunked uploader...");
                      uploader.start();
                  });
              });
        }
    }

    function handleFileConflictError(e) {
        if (e && e.response && e.response.body) {
            let errorBody = e.response.body;
            if (errorBody.status === 409) {
                if (
                    errorBody.context_info &&
                    errorBody.context_info.conflicts &&
                    errorBody.context_info.conflicts
                ) {
                    let conflict = errorBody.context_info.conflicts;
                    if (conflict && conflict.id) {
                        return conflict.id;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }

    function handleFolderConflictError(e) {
        if (e && e.response && e.response.body) {
            let errorBody = e.response.body;
            if (errorBody.status === 409) {
                if (
                    errorBody.context_info &&
                    errorBody.context_info.conflicts &&
                    errorBody.context_info.conflicts.length > 0
                ) {
                    let conflict = errorBody.context_info.conflicts[0];
                    if (conflict && conflict.id) {
                        return conflict.id;
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="CLI">
    ```sh theme={null}
    box folders:upload ./folder_name_to_upload --parent-folder=$folder_id
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

## Breakdown

The scripts above use the Box SDKs and the CLI to upload an entire folder. For
the SDK scripts, they start by creating a directory in Box to match the local
folder.

After the new directory is created, it uploads all files within the directory
making sure to use all available Box features to make the uploads successful.

Using the <Link href="/guides/uploads/check">Preflight</Link> API the files are checked for conflicts and
size restrictions before they are uploaded. If a naming conflict is found, the
script instead uploads a new version of that file.

Using the the `SHA` hash of the file the scripts add a `content-md5` header on
upload to make sure the file is successfully uploaded to Box without any bytes
lost or tampered with.

Finally, if a file size exceeds 20MB\`, the script uses the <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked">Chunked
Upload</Link> feature to make sure uploads are more reliable for larger
files.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Chunked Uploads
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/chunked/index



The Chunked Upload API provides a way to reliably upload large files to Box by
chunking them into a sequence of parts that can be uploaded individually.

By using this API the application uploads a file in part, allowing it to recover
from a failed request more reliably. It means an application only needs to
retry the upload of a single part instead of the entire file.

An additional benefit of chunked uploads is that parts can be uploaded
in parallel, allowing for a potential performance improvement.

## Overview

Chunked uploads require a sequence of API calls to be made.

1. **<Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/create-session">Create an upload session</Link>**: The application creates an upload session for a new file or new version of a file. The session defines the (new) name  of the file, its size, and the parent folder.
2. **<Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/upload-part">Upload parts</Link>**: The application uploads the separate parts of the file as chunks.
3. **<Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/commit-session">Commit session</Link>**: The application commits the session, at which moment the integrity of the file is checked before it is placed in the location specified when the session was created.

<Info>
  Most of <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/with-sdks">the Box SDKs support chunked uploads</Link> out of the Box, removing
  the complexity from the application code.
</Info>

## Restrictions

The Chunked Upload API is intended for large files with a minimum size of 20MB.
The API does not support uploads of files with a size smaller than this.

This API does not support re-uploading or overwriting of parts in a session.
Once a part has been uploaded, it is immutable.

The lifetime of an upload session is 7 days. During this time, the client can
upload parts at their own pace.

To avoid wasting resources, and avoid potential data corruption, client should
make sure that the underlying file has not been changed on disk since beginning
the upload.


# Upload Part
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/chunked/upload-part



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

When you want to upload a large file,
you can split it into smaller parts and
upload them using the Upload Part API.

## Create Upload Session

First, <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/create-session">create an upload session</Link>. The resulting
object defines the size of each part and the number of parts to upload.

```json theme={null}
{
  "id": "F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
  "type": "upload_session",
  "session_expires_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00",
  "part_size": 1024,
  "total_parts": 1000,
  "num_parts_processed": 455,
  "session_endpoints": {
    "upload_part": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
    "commit": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/commit",
    "abort": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
    "list_parts": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/parts",
    "status": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD",
    "log_event": "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD/log"
  }
}
```

## Split File

Split the file into parts to be uploaded.
If you want to use the command line,
use the `split` command:

```bash theme={null}
split -b <PART_SIZE> <FILE_NAME> <YOUR_PART_NAME>
```

For example:

```bash theme={null}
split -b 8388608 video.mp3 videopart
```

This will result in your file divided into several files.

## Get SHA Digest

To get the value for the `SHA` digest,
use the following openSSL command
to encode the file part:

```bash theme={null}
openssl sha1 -binary <FILE_PART_NAME> | base64
```

For example:

```bash theme={null}
openssl sha1 -binary videoparta | base64
```

The result is a base-64 encoded message used to verify the upload.

## Upload Part

Upload the bytes for the part you want to upload, specifying the byte
range for the part and the `SHA` digest to ensure the content is
uploaded correctly.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://upload.box.com/2.0/files/upload_sessions/F971964745A5CD0C001BBE4E58196BFD" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "digest: sha=fpRyg5eVQletdZqEKaFlqwBXJzM=" \
       -H "content-range: bytes 8388608-16777215/445856194" \
       -H "content-type: application/octet-stream" \
       --data-binary @<FILE_NAME>
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.chunkedUploads.uploadFilePart(
    acc.uploadSessionId,
    generateByteStreamFromBuffer(chunkBuffer),
    {
      digest: digest,
      contentRange: contentRange,
    } satisfies UploadFilePartHeadersInput,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.chunked_uploads.upload_file_part(
      acc.upload_session_id,
      generate_byte_stream_from_buffer(chunk_buffer),
      digest,
      content_range,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.ChunkedUploads.UploadFilePartAsync(uploadSessionId: acc.UploadSessionId, requestBody: Utils.GenerateByteStreamFromBuffer(buffer: chunkBuffer), headers: new UploadFilePartHeaders(digest: digest, contentRange: contentRange));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.chunkedUploads.uploadFilePart(uploadSessionId: acc.uploadSessionId, requestBody: Utils.generateByteStreamFromBuffer(buffer: chunkBuffer), headers: UploadFilePartHeaders(digest: digest, contentRange: contentRange))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getChunkedUploads().uploadFilePart(acc.getUploadSessionId(), generateByteStreamFromBuffer(chunkBuffer), new UploadFilePartHeaders(digest, contentRange))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  //Reading a large file
  FileInputStream fis = new FileInputStream("My_Large_File.txt");
  //Create the digest input stream to calculate the digest for the whole file.
  DigestInputStream dis = new DigestInputStream(fis, digest);

  List<BoxFileUploadSessionPart> parts = new ArrayList<BoxFileUploadSessionPart>();

  //Get the part size. Each uploaded part should match the part size returned as part of the upload session.
  //The last part of the file can be less than part size if the remaining bytes of the last part is less than
  //the given part size
  long partSize = sessionInfo.getPartSize();
  //Start byte of the part
  long offset = 0;
  //Overall of bytes processed so far
  long processed = 0;
  while (processed < fileSize) {
      long diff = fileSize - processed;
      //The size last part of the file can be less than the part size.
      if (diff < partSize) {
          partSize = diff;
      }

      //Upload a part. It can be uploaded asynchorously
      BoxFileUploadSessionPart part = session.uploadPart(dis, offset, (int)partSize, fileSize);
      parts.add(part);

      //Increase the offset and proceesed bytes to calculate the Content-Range header.
      processed += partSize;
      offset += partSize;
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  upload_session = client.upload_session('11493C07ED3EABB6E59874D3A1EF3581')
  offset = upload_session.part_size * 3
  total_size = 26000000
  part_bytes = b'abcdefgh'
  part = upload_session.upload_part_bytes(part_bytes, offset, total_size)
  print(f'Successfully uploaded part ID {part["part_id"]}')
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Upload the part starting at byte offset 8388608 to upload session '93D9A837B45F' with part ID 'feedbeef'
  client.files.uploadPart('93D9A837B45F', part, 8388608, 2147483648, {part_id: 'feedbeef'}, callback);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Content Range

Each part’s size must be exactly equal in size to the part size
specified in the upload session that you created.
One exception is the last part of the file, as
this can be smaller. The `Content-Range` parameter
definition follows this pattern:

```yaml theme={null}
-H "Content-Range: bytes <LOWER_BOUND>-<HIGHER_BOUND>/<TOTAL_SIZE>"
```

When providing the value for `Content-Range`, remember that:

* The lower bound of each part's byte range must be a multiple of the part size.
* The higher bound must be a multiple of the part size - 1.

For example, if the part size is `8388608`,
the content range for the first two parts will be:

```yaml theme={null}
-H "Content-Range: bytes 0-8388607/32127641" \ ## first part
-H "Content-Range: bytes 8388608-16777215/32127641" \ ## second part
```

## Response

After each upload, the resulting response includes
the `ID` and `SHA` of the part uploaded.

```json theme={null}
{
  "part_id": "6F2D3486",
  "offset": 16777216,
  "size": 3222784,
  "sha1": "134b65991ed521fcfe4724b7d814ab8ded5185dc"
}
```

<Warning>
  Keep all the JSON responses from all part
  uploads as they are needed to <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked/commit-session">commit the session</Link>.
</Warning>

## Range Overlap

If a part upload request fails with any error code
`range_overlaps_existing_part` then the application
made a mistake in cutting up the file into parts
and tried to upload a part into a range that already had
content uploaded for it. The application should assume
that this last part was not persisted to the session.

## Parallel uploads

Although you can upload the parts in parallel, try to upload them in
order as much as is possible. Parts with a lower byte offset should be uploaded
before parts with a higher byte offset.

The recommended approach is to upload 3 to 5 parts in parallel from a queue
of parts, ordered by byte offset. If a part upload fails, retry it
before you upload further parts.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Chunked Upload with SDKs
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/chunked/with-sdks



The Box SDKs make it possible to perform a chunked upload with the built-in
SDK methods.

The SDKs also support uploading new versions of files through similar methods.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Upload New File
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/direct/file



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To upload a file to Box via direct upload, make an API call to the
<Link href="/reference/post-files-content">`POST /files/content`</Link> API with the content of the file, the desired
file name, and the folder ID.

<Tip>
  To upload files to the Archive folder, you need to first enable the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Global
  Content Manager</Link> (GCM) scope in the Developer Console.
</Tip>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/content" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: multipart/form-data" \
       -F attributes='{"name":"Contract.pdf", "parent":{"id":"11446498"}}' \
       -F file=@<FILE_NAME>
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  const fs = require('fs');

  const attrs = { name: 'filename.txt', parent: { id: '0' } };
  const body = {
    attributes: attrs,
    file: fs.createReadStream('filename.txt'),
  };
  const files = await client.uploads.uploadFile(body);
  const file = files.entries[0];
  console.log(`File uploaded with id ${file.id}, name ${file.name}`);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.uploads.upload_file(
      UploadFileAttributes(
          name=new_file_name, parent=UploadFileAttributesParentField(id="0")
      ),
      file_content_stream,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Uploads.UploadFileAsync(requestBody: new UploadFileRequestBody(attributes: new UploadFileRequestBodyAttributesField(name: newFileName, parent: new UploadFileRequestBodyAttributesParentField(id: "0")), file: fileContentStream));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  // Create InputStream for a file based on URL
  guard let fileStream = InputStream(url: URL(string: "<URL_TO_YOUR_FILE>")!) else {
      fatalError("Could not read a file")
  }

  // Create a request body with the required parameters
  let requestBody = UploadFileRequestBodyArg(
      attributes: UploadFileRequestBodyArgAttributesField(
          name: "filename.txt",
          parent: UploadFileRequestBodyArgAttributesFieldParentField(id: "0")
      ),
      file: fileStream
  )

  // Call uploadFile method
  let files = try await client.uploads.uploadFile(requestBody: requestBody)

  // Print some data from the reponse
  if let file = files.entries?[0] {
      print("File uploaded with id \(file.id), name \(file.name!)")
  }
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUploads().uploadFile(new UploadFileRequestBody(new UploadFileRequestBodyAttributesField(newFileName, new UploadFileRequestBodyAttributesParentField("0")), fileContentStream))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder rootFolder = BoxFolder.getRootFolder(api);
  FileInputStream stream = new FileInputStream("My File.txt");
  BoxFile.Info newFileInfo = rootFolder.uploadFile(stream, "My File.txt");
  stream.close();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  folder_id = '22222'
  new_file = client.folder(folder_id).upload('/home/me/document.pdf')
  print(f'File "{new_file.name}" uploaded to Box with file ID {new_file.id}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  using (FileStream fileStream = new FileStream(filePath, FileMode.Open))
  {
      BoxFileRequest requestParams = new BoxFileRequest()
      {
          Name = uploadFileName,
          Parent = new BoxRequestEntity() { Id = "0" }
      };

      BoxFile file = await client.FilesManager.UploadAsync(requestParams, fileStream);
  }
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  var fs = require('fs');
  var stream = fs.createReadStream('/path/to/My File.pdf');
  var folderID = '0'
  client.files.uploadFile(folderID, 'My File.pdf', stream)
  	.then(file => {
  		/* file -> {
  			total_count: 1,
  			entries: 
  			[ { type: 'file',
  				id: '11111',
  				file_version: 
  					{ type: 'file_version',
  					id: '22222',
  					sha1: '0beec7b5ea3f0fdbc95d0dd47f3c5bc275da8a33' },
  				sequence_id: '0',
  				etag: '0',
  				sha1: '0beec7b5ea3f0fdbc95d0dd47f3c5bc275da8a33',
  				name: 'My File.pdf',
  				description: '',
  				size: 68431,
  				path_collection: 
  					{ total_count: 1,
  					entries: 
  					[ { type: 'folder',
  						id: '0',
  						sequence_id: null,
  						etag: null,
  						name: 'All Files' } ] },
  				created_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
  				modified_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
  				trashed_at: null,
  				purged_at: null,
  				content_created_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
  				content_modified_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
  				created_by: 
  					{ type: 'user',
  					id: '33333',
  					name: 'Test User',
  					login: 'test@example.com' },
  				modified_by: 
  					{ type: 'user',
  					id: '33333',
  					name: 'Test User',
  					login: 'test@example.com' },
  				owned_by: 
  					{ type: 'user',
  					id: '33333',
  					name: 'Test User',
  					login: 'test@example.com' },
  				shared_link: null,
  				parent: 
  					{ type: 'folder',
  					id: '0',
  					sequence_id: null,
  					etag: null,
  					name: 'All Files' }
  				item_status: 'active' } ] }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  **Preflight check**

  To prevent wasting time and bandwidth uploading a file that is going to be
  rejected it is recommended to perform a <Link href="/guides/uploads/check">pre-flight check</Link> before
  uploading the file.
</Info>

## Request Format

The request body of this API uses a content type of  `multipart/form-data`. This
is used to transmit two parts, namely the file attributes and the file's actual
content.

The first part is called `attributes` and contains a JSON object with
information about the file, including the name of the file and the `id` of the
parent folder.

The following is an example a `test.txt` being uploaded to the root folder of
the user.

```sh theme={null}
POST /api/2.0/files/content HTTP/1.1
Host: upload.box.com
Authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]
content-length: 343
content-type: multipart/form-data; boundary=------------------------9fd09388d840fef1

--------------------------9fd09388d840fef1
content-disposition: form-data; name="attributes"

{"name":"test.txt", "parent":{"id":"0"}}
--------------------------9fd09388d840fef1
content-disposition: form-data; name="file"; filename="test.txt"
content-type: text/plain

Test file text.

--------------------------9fd09388d840fef1--
```

<Warning>
  The `attributes` JSON part of the multi-part body must come before the `file`
  part of the multipart form data. When out of order, the API will return a HTTP
  `400` status code with an error code of `metadata_after_file_contents`.
</Warning>

## Options

To learn more about all the parameters available when uploading files, head over
to the <Link href="/reference/post-files-content">reference documentation for this API call</Link>. These parameters
include a `content-md5` that can be set to ensure a file is not corrupted in
transit, and the ability to explicitly specify the file creation time at a
different time than the upload time.

## Restrictions

Direct uploads are limited to a maximum file size of 50MB. For larger files,
please use the <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked">chunked upload APIs</Link>.

Upload limits are dictated by the type of account of the authenticated user.
More information can be found [in our community article on this topic][fsizes].

[fsizes]: https://community.box.com/t5/Upload-and-Download-Files-and/Understand-the-Maximum-File-Size-You-Can-Upload-to-Box/ta-p/50590

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Upload File Version
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/direct/file-version



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To upload a new version of a file to Box via direct upload, make an API call to
the <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-content">`POST /files/:id/content`</Link> API with the content of the file, the
desired file name, and the folder ID.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://upload.box.com/api/2.0/files/12345/content" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: multipart/form-data" \
       -F attributes='{"name":"Contract.pdf", "parent":{"id":"11446498"}}' \
       -F file=@<FILE_NAME>
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.uploads.uploadFileVersion(file.id, {
    attributes: {
      name: file.name!,
    } satisfies UploadFileVersionRequestBodyAttributesField,
    file: generateByteStream(20),
  } satisfies UploadFileVersionRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.uploads.upload_file_version(
      uploaded_file.id,
      UploadFileVersionAttributes(name=new_file_version_name),
      new_file_content_stream,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Uploads.UploadFileVersionAsync(fileId: uploadedFile.Id, requestBody: new UploadFileVersionRequestBody(attributes: new UploadFileVersionRequestBodyAttributesField(name: newFileVersionName), file: newFileContentStream));
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUploads().uploadFileVersion(uploadedFile.getId(), new UploadFileVersionRequestBody(new UploadFileVersionRequestBodyAttributesField(newFileVersionName), newFileContentStream))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, "id");
  FileInputStream stream = new FileInputStream("My File.txt");
  file.uploadNewVersion(stream);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  file_id = '11111'
  file_path = '/path/to/file.pdf'

  updated_file = client.file(file_id).update_contents(file_path)
  print(f'File "{updated_file.name}" has been updated')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  using (FileStream fileStream = new FileStream(filePath, FileMode.Open))
  {
      BoxFile file = await client.FilesManager
          .UploadNewVersionAsync("File v2.pdf", "11111", fileStream);
  }
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  var fs = require('fs');
  var stream = fs.createReadStream('/path/to/file.pdf');
  client.files.uploadNewFileVersion('11111', stream)
  	.then(file => {
          /* file -> {
              total_count: 1,
              entries: 
              [ { type: 'file',
                  id: '11111',
                  file_version: 
                      { type: 'file_version',
                      id: '22222',
                      sha1: '0beec7b5ea3f0fdbc95d0dd47f3c5bc275da8a33' },
                  sequence_id: '0',
                  etag: '0',
                  sha1: '0beec7b5ea3f0fdbc95d0dd47f3c5bc275da8a33',
                  name: 'My File.pdf',
                  description: '',
                  size: 68431,
                  path_collection: 
                      { total_count: 1,
                      entries: 
                      [ { type: 'folder',
                          id: '0',
                          sequence_id: null,
                          etag: null,
                          name: 'All Files' } ] },
                  created_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
                  modified_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
                  trashed_at: null,
                  purged_at: null,
                  content_created_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
                  content_modified_at: '2017-05-16T15:18:02-07:00',
                  created_by: 
                      { type: 'user',
                      id: '33333',
                      name: 'Test User',
                      login: 'test@example.com' },
                  modified_by: 
                      { type: 'user',
                      id: '33333',
                      name: 'Test User',
                      login: 'test@example.com' },
                  owned_by: 
                      { type: 'user',
                      id: '33333',
                      name: 'Test User',
                      login: 'test@example.com' },
                  shared_link: null,
                  parent: 
                      { type: 'folder',
                      id: '0',
                      sequence_id: null,
                      etag: null,
                      name: 'All Files' }
                  item_status: 'active' } ] }
          */
      })
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Info>
  **Preflight check**

  To prevent wasting time and bandwidth uploading a file that is going to be
  rejected it is recommended to perform a <Link href="/guides/uploads/check">pre-flight check</Link> before
  uploading the file.
</Info>

## Request Format

The request body of this API uses a content type of `multipart/form-data`. This
is used to transmit two parts, namely the file attributes and the file's actual
content.

The first part is called `attributes` and contains a JSON object with
information about the file, including the name of the file and the `id` of the
parent folder.

The following is an example a `test.txt` being uploaded to the root folder of
the user.

```sh theme={null}
POST /api/2.0/files/123/content HTTP/1.1
Host: upload.box.com
Authorization: Bearer [ACCESS_TOKEN]
content-length: 343
content-type: multipart/form-data; boundary=------------------------9fd09388d840fef1

--------------------------9fd09388d840fef1
content-disposition: form-data; name="attributes"

{"name":"test.txt", "parent":{"id":"0"}}
--------------------------9fd09388d840fef1
content-disposition: form-data; name="file"; filename="test.txt"
content-type: text/plain

Test file text.

--------------------------9fd09388d840fef1--
```

<Warning>
  The `attributes` JSON part of the multi-part body must come before the `file`
  part of the multipart form data. When out of order, the API will return a HTTP
  `400` status code with an error code of `metadata_after_file_contents`.
</Warning>

## Options

To learn more about all the parameters available when uploading files, head over
to the <Link href="/reference/post-files-id-content">reference documentation for this API call</Link>. These parameters
include a `content-md5` that can be set to ensure a file is not corrupted in
transit, and the ability to explicitly specify the file creation time at a
different time than the upload time.

For file versions an additional <Link href="/guides/api-calls/ensure-consistency">`if-match` header</Link> can be passed
along to prevent overwriting a file that has already been updated since the
application last inspected the content.

## Restrictions

Direct uploads are limited to a maximum file size of 50MB. For larger files,
please use the <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked">chunked upload APIs</Link>.

Upload limits are dictated by the type of account of the authenticated user.
More information can be found [in our community article on this topic][fsizes].

[fsizes]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697314-Understand-the-Maximum-File-Size-You-Can-Upload-to-Box

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Direct Uploads
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/direct/index



The most straightforward way to upload a file to Box is using a direct upload.
Direct uploads allow an application to upload a file in one request. For file
sizes over 50MB we recommend using the <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked">chunked upload endpoint</Link>.

The maximum file size limit for uploads to Box varies depending on your account
type. For more details, please refer to our [pricing comparison page][pcp].

* Free personal: 250 MB
* Starter: 2 GB
* Business: 5 GB
* Business Plus: 15 GB
* Enterprise: 50 GB
* Digital Workplace Suite: 50 GB
* Digital Workplace Global Suite: 50 GB
* Digital Business Suite: 50 GB
* Digital Business Global Suite: 50 GB
* Enterprise Plus: 150 GB
* Enterprise Advanced: 500 GB

To confirm the file size limit for your account, log into Box. Click on the
circle in the top right corner and select **Account Settings** from the dropdown
menu. On the page that displays, scroll down to the **Account Details**
section. Your **Max File Size** is listed here.

## Upload domain

Uploads to Box happen via a different domain (`upload.box.com`) than regular API
calls. This is something to keep in mind when writing your own upload code. All
official Box SDKs will take care of choosing the right domain for each API call.

[pcp]: https://www.box.com/pricing


# Uploads
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/uploads/index



The Box API supports two distinct methods of file upload. The <Link href="/guides/uploads/direct">direct file
upload API</Link> supports files up to 50MB in size and sends all the binary
data to the Box API in 1 API request.

The <Link href="/guides/uploads/chunked">chunked upload APIs</Link> support files from 20MB in size and allow an
application to upload the file in parts, allowing for more control to catch any
errors and retry parts individually.

<Tip>
  To upload files to the Archive folder, you need to first enable the <Link href="/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes">Global
  Content Manager</Link> (GCM) scope in the Developer Console.
</Tip>

## Upload limits

Upload limits are dictated by the type of account of the authenticated user.
More information can be found [in our community article on this topic][fsizes].

## Preflight check

The Pre-flight check API allows an application to verify that a file will be
accepted by Box before it uploads any bytes. It can both be used for new files,
as well as uploading new versions of existing files.

<Card href="/guides/uploads/check" title="Learn more about pre-flight checks" />

## Upload domain

Uploads to Box happen via a different domain (`upload.box.com`) than regular API
calls. This is something to keep in mind when writing your own upload code. All
the Box SDKs will take care of choosing the right domain for the right API call.

[fsizes]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697314-Understand-the-Maximum-File-Size-You-Can-Upload-to-Box


# Bulk delete external users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/bulk-delete-external-users



You can remove up to 100 external users from your enterprise using API.
This API endpoint removes access to all types of content you invited the
listed external users to collaborate on.

To remove the external users, call the
\[`POST /external_users/post_external_users_submit_delete_job`].

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -X -L POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/external_users/external_users_submit_delete_job" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
        "external_users":
          "type": "array"
          "description": "List of external users to delete."
          "items":
            "$ref: #/components/schemas/UserReference"
        }'
  ```
</CodeGroup>

This job runs in the background, and sends a completion report listing deletion status for each user when it's finished.

<Note>
  When you delete external users, their pending collaboration invites are not deleted.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create App User
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/create-app-user



App Users are programmatic user accounts that may only be created by apps that
are using <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup">JWT authentication</Link>.
They are designed to allow for users, groups, or processes to be represented
behind the scenes in an application without the need for the user to have a Box
account to log in.

App users can only be accessed by the Box application through the APIs and do
not have credentials to log in to `box.com` directly.

## Common App User Patterns

Typically app users are created for a number of different patterns:

* To represent a single application user or group of users without a `box.com` account.
* To represent an application process, such as having the app user monitor all events within an enterprise.
* To provide the application with the ability to completely control the file and folder structure of a user account without the possibility of that content being modified through the `box.com` web app.

## Creating a New App User

To generate a new app user, the minimal information that will be required will
be a name for the app user.

<CodeGroup>
  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxUser.Info createdUserInfo = BoxUser.createAppUser(api, "A User");
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  new_app_user = client.create_user('App User 123', login=None)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var userParams = new BoxUserRequest()
  {
      Name = "App User 12",
      ExternalAppUserId = "external-id",
      IsPlatformAccessOnly = true
  };
  BoxUser newUser = await client.UsersManager.CreateEnterpriseUserAsync(userParams);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

To see all available optional parameters that may be set when creating an app
user, see the <Link href="/reference/post-users">create user endpoint</Link>.

<Note>
  Before you can make any changes to the newly created account, you need to
  click the link you receive in the confirmation email.
</Note>

Once the app user is created a user object will be returned. Within the user
object is an ID for the app user, which may be used to make API requests to
modify the user in the future.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Managed User
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/create-managed-user



To generate a new managed user, the minimal information that will be required
will be a name and an email address for the managed user.

<Note>
  The email address supplied when creating a managed user must be unique. It
  cannot already be associated with an existing Box user.
</Note>

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/users" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "login": "ceo@example.com",
         "name": "Aaron Levie"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.users.createUser({
    name: userName,
    login: userLogin,
    isPlatformAccessOnly: true,
  } satisfies CreateUserRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.users.create_user(user_name, login=user_login, is_platform_access_only=True)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Users.CreateUserAsync(requestBody: new CreateUserRequestBody(name: userName) { Login = userLogin, IsPlatformAccessOnly = true });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.users.createUser(requestBody: CreateUserRequestBody(name: userName, login: userLogin, isPlatformAccessOnly: true))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUsers().createUser(new CreateUserRequestBody.Builder(userName).login(userLogin).isPlatformAccessOnly(true).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxUser.Info createdUserInfo = BoxUser.createEnterpriseUser(api, "user@example.com", "A User");
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  new_user = client.create_user('Temp User', 'user@example.com')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var userParams = new BoxUserRequest()
  {
      Name = "Example User",
      Login = "user@example.com"
  };
  BoxUser newUser = await client.UsersManager.CreateEnterpriseUserAsync(userParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.enterprise.addUser(
  	'eddard@winterfell.example.com',
  	'Ned Stark',
  	{
  		role: client.enterprise.userRoles.COADMIN,
  		address: '555 Box Lane',
  		status: client.enterprise.userStatuses.CANNOT_DELETE_OR_EDIT
  	})
  	.then(user => {
  		/* user -> {
  			type: 'user',
  			id: '44444',
  			name: 'Ned Stark',
  			login: 'eddard@winterfell.example.com',
  			created_at: '2012-11-15T16:34:28-08:00',
  			modified_at: '2012-11-15T16:34:29-08:00',
  			role: 'coadmin',
  			language: 'en',
  			timezone: 'America/Los_Angeles',
  			space_amount: 5368709120,
  			space_used: 0,
  			max_upload_size: 2147483648,
  			status: 'active',
  			job_title: '',
  			phone: '',
  			address: '555 Box Lane',
  			avatar_url: 'https://www.box.com/api/avatar/large/deprecated' }
          */
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

To see all available optional parameters that may be set when creating an app
user, see the <Link href="/reference/post-users">create user endpoint</Link>.

<Note>
  Before you can make any changes to the newly created account, you need to
  click the link you receive in the confirmation email.
</Note>

A user object will be returned from the create user request. Within the user
object is an ID for the managed user, which may be used to make API requests to
modify the user in the future.

Once a new managed user is created the email address used will receive an email
from Box asking them to create a password for the account. The account will be
in a `pending` state until that action has taken place.

<Note>
  For security reasons passwords cannot be supplied when creating a new managed
  user
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete User
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/delete-user



The process for deleting both app and managed users is the same. To delete a
user account, supply the user ID for the account that should be
removed.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/users/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.users.deleteUserById(user.id);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.users.delete_user_by_id(user.id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Users.DeleteUserByIdAsync(userId: user.Id);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.users.deleteUserById(userId: user.id)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUsers().deleteUserById(user.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxUser user = new BoxUser(api, "0");
  user.delete(false, false);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  user_id = '33333'
  client.user(user_id).delete(force=True)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.UsersManager.DeleteEnterpriseUserAsync("44444", notify: false, force: true);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Delete the user even if they still have files in their account
  client.users.delete('123', {force: true})
      .then(() => {
          // deletion succeeded — no value returned
      });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

There are also two optional parameters that may be set when deleting a user
account:

* force: Whether the user should be deleted even if the account still has content in it.
* notify: Whether the user will receive a notification that the account was deleted.

<Note>
  The delete user request will fail if the user account still has content in
  it. To resolve this, either
  <Link href="/guides/users/deprovision/transfer-folders">transfer all files or folders</Link>
  to another account or use the optional `force` parameter.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Deprovision Users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/deprovision/index



Part of regular Box enterprise maintenance is removing accounts for users that
are no longer active in your enterprise. When removing a user from your
enterprise, you'll need to move all content owned by the user into another
account before deleting the user account.

<Note>
  The delete user request will fail if the user account still has content in
  it. An optional `force` parameter is available in the API call, which will
  force delete the user account along with all content in the account.
</Note>

The standard best practice when decommissioning a user account is to move all
content owned by that user into another admin level account or into the
application service account. Once moved, you can transfer ownership of the
content to a different user or collaborate a different user on the content if
needed.

## Deprovisioning Example

Use the following code samples to transfer a user's content and then delete the
user. When content is being transferred, a new folder is created in the
destination user's root folder following this pattern:
`employee_email@email.com - employee_name's Files and Folders`

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    'use strict'
    const box = require('box-node-sdk');
    const fs = require('fs');

    let configFile = fs.readFileSync('config.json');
    configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

    let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
    let serviceAccountClient = session.getAppAuthClient('enterprise');

    const transferUserID = '3278487052';
    (async () => {
        let serviceAccount = await serviceAccountClient.users.get('me');
        let transferredFolder = await serviceAccountClient.enterprise.transferUserContent(transferUserID,serviceAccount.id);
        console.log(transferredFolder);
        await serviceAccountClient.users.delete(transferUserID, null);
        console.log('Completed');
    })();
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Java">
    ```java theme={null}
    Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
    try (BufferedReader reader = Files.newBufferedReader(configPath,Charset.forName("UTF-8"))){
        String transferUserId = "3277722534";

        BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
        BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection serviceAccountClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
          .getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);

        BoxUser destinationUser = new BoxUser(serviceAccountClient,
            BoxUser.getCurrentUser(serviceAccountClient).getID());
        try {
            destinationUser.moveFolderToUser(transferUserId);
        } catch (BoxAPIException e) {}

        BoxUser removeUser = new BoxUser(serviceAccountClient, transferUserId);
        removeUser.delete(false, false);
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title=".NET">
    ```csharp theme={null}
    using(FileStream fs = new FileStream("./config.json", FileMode.Open)) {
        var config = BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile(fs);
        var session = new BoxJWTAuth(config);
        var serviceAccountClient = session.AdminClient(session.AdminToken());

        var transferUserId = "3276247601";

        var serviceAccount = await serviceAccountClient.UsersManager.GetCurrentUserInformationAsync();
        var moveAction = await serviceAccountClient.UsersManager.MoveUserFolderAsync(transferUserId,serviceAccount.Id);

        System.Console.WriteLine(moveAction.Name);
        await serviceAccountClient.UsersManager.DeleteEnterpriseUserAsync(transferUserId,false,false);
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="CLI">
    ```shell theme={null}
    box users:transfer-content $transfer_from_user_id $transfer_to_user_id
    box users:delete $transfer_from_user_id --yes
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Transfer Files & Folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/deprovision/transfer-folders



As part of user account deprovisioning, a common requirement is to transfer all
files and folders that are stored within the user account to another user
account or into a location for long term storage, such as into the service
account.

There are two general methods that are employed to accomplish this within Box:

* Using the direct <Link href="/reference/put-users-id-folders-0">transfer owned folders</Link> API, which will move all content from one user directly to another.
* Using the collaboration transfer method to change ownership of one file or folder at a time from one user to another.

<Note>
  Files owned by a user will be inaccessible while they are being transferred.
  This also means that any shared content owned by the user may be inaccessible
  during the move.

  Depending on the volume of content, this operation may take a significant
  amount of time.
</Note>

## Transfer Owned Folders API Method

The <Link href="/reference/put-users-id-folders-0">transfer owned folders endpoint</Link> is
designed to move the entirety of content owned by one user over to another user.

<Note>
  The transfer owned folders API is performed as a synchronous process, which
  might lead to a slow response when the source user has a large number of
  items in all of its folders.
</Note>

To call the transfer endpoint, you will supply the user ID to transfer from and
the user ID to transfer to.

<CodeGroup>
  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.transfer.transferOwnedFolder(
    sourceUser.id,
    {
      ownedBy: {
        id: targetUser.id,
      } satisfies TransferOwnedFolderRequestBodyOwnedByField,
    } satisfies TransferOwnedFolderRequestBody,
    {
      queryParams: { notify: false } satisfies TransferOwnedFolderQueryParams,
    } satisfies TransferOwnedFolderOptionalsInput,
  );
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.transfer.transfer_owned_folder(
      source_user.id, TransferOwnedFolderOwnedBy(id=target_user.id), notify=False
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Transfer.TransferOwnedFolderAsync(userId: sourceUser.Id, requestBody: new TransferOwnedFolderRequestBody(ownedBy: new TransferOwnedFolderRequestBodyOwnedByField(id: targetUser.Id)), queryParams: new TransferOwnedFolderQueryParams() { Notify = false });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.transfer.transferOwnedFolder(userId: sourceUser.id, requestBody: TransferOwnedFolderRequestBody(ownedBy: TransferOwnedFolderRequestBodyOwnedByField(id: targetUser.id)), queryParams: TransferOwnedFolderQueryParams(notify: false))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getTransfer().transferOwnedFolder(sourceUser.getId(), new TransferOwnedFolderRequestBody(new TransferOwnedFolderRequestBodyOwnedByField(targetUser.getId())), new TransferOwnedFolderQueryParams.Builder().notify(false).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  String sourceUserID = "11111";
  String destinationUserID = "22222";
  BoxUser sourceUser = new BoxUser(api, sourceUserID);
  BoxFolder.Info transferredFolderInfo = sourceUser.transferContent(destinationUserID);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  source_user_id = '33333'
  destination_user_id = '44444'

  user = client.user(source_user_id)
  destination_user = client.user(destination_user_id)

  folder = user.transfer_content(destination_user)
  print(f'Created new folder "{folder.name}" in the account of user {destination_user.id}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var sourceUserId = "33333";
  var destinationUserId = "44444";
  BoxFolder movedFolder = await client.MoveUserFolderAsync(sourceUserId, destinationUserId);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  var sourceUserID = '33333';
  var destinationUserID = '44444';
  client.enterprise.transferUserContent(sourceUserID, destinationUserID)
  	.then(movedFolder => {
  		/* movedFolder -> {
  			type: 'folder',
  			id: '123456789',
  			sequence_id: '1',
  			etag: '1',
  			name: 'Other User's Files and Folders',
  			created_at: '2018-04-23T11:00:07-07:00',
  			modified_at: '2018-04-23T11:00:07-07:00',
  			description: 'This folder contains files previously owned by Other User, and were transferred to you by your enterprise administrator. If you have any questions, please contact Enterprise Admin (admin@example.com).',
  			size: 0,
  			path_collection: 
  			{ total_count: 1,
  				entries: 
  				[ { type: 'folder',
  					id: '0',
  					sequence_id: null,
  					etag: null,
  					name: 'All Files' } ] },
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '99999',
  				name: 'Enterprise Admin',
  				login: 'admin@example.com' },
  			modified_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '99999',
  				name: 'Enterprise Admin',
  				login: 'admin@example.com' },
  			trashed_at: null,
  			purged_at: null,
  			content_created_at: '2018-04-23T11:00:07-07:00',
  			content_modified_at: '2018-04-23T11:00:07-07:00',
  			owned_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			shared_link: null,
  			folder_upload_email: null,
  			parent: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '0',
  				sequence_id: null,
  				etag: null,
  				name: 'All Files' },
  			item_status: 'active' }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Collaboration Transfer Method

The collaboration transfer method is a process that uses the
<Link href="/reference/post-collaborations">collaboration endpoint</Link> to change the
ownership of a single file or folder from one user to another instantaneously.

<Note>
  This method will perform an instantaneous transfer of ownership of a single
  file or folder, but **cannot** be used to transfer the root (all files and
  folders) from one user to another.
</Note>

The general process, between `transfer_from_user` to `transfer_to_user`, will
follow these steps:

### Add Transfer To User as Co-Owner

The first step is to add the `transfer_to_user` account as a collaborator with
`co-owner` access on the file or folder that should be transferred.

Making the call as the `transfer_from_user` account, add the `transfer_to_user`
as a co-owner using the
<Link href="/reference/post-collaborations">add collaboration endpoint</Link>.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "item": {
           "type": "file",
           "id": "11446498"
         },
         "accessible_by": {
           "type": "user",
           "login": "user@example.com"
         },
         "role": "editor"
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.createCollaboration({
    item: {
      type: 'folder' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField,
      id: folder.id,
    } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField,
    accessibleBy: {
      type: 'user' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField,
      id: user.id,
    } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField,
    role: 'editor' as CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField,
  } satisfies CreateCollaborationRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.user_collaborations.create_collaboration(
      CreateCollaborationItem(type=CreateCollaborationItemTypeField.FOLDER, id=folder.id),
      CreateCollaborationAccessibleBy(
          type=CreateCollaborationAccessibleByTypeField.USER, id=user.id
      ),
      CreateCollaborationRole.EDITOR,
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.CreateCollaborationAsync(requestBody: new CreateCollaborationRequestBody(item: new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField() { Type = CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.Folder, Id = folder.Id }, accessibleBy: new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.User) { Id = user.Id }, role: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.Editor));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.userCollaborations.createCollaboration(requestBody: CreateCollaborationRequestBody(item: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.folder, id: folder.id), accessibleBy: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField(type: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.user, id: user.id), role: CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.editor))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUserCollaborations().createCollaboration(new CreateCollaborationRequestBody(new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemField.Builder().type(CreateCollaborationRequestBodyItemTypeField.FOLDER).id(folder.getId()).build(), new CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByField.Builder(CreateCollaborationRequestBodyAccessibleByTypeField.USER).id(user.getId()).build(), CreateCollaborationRequestBodyRoleField.EDITOR))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxCollaborator user = new BoxUser(api, "user-id")
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, "folder-id");
  folder.collaborate(user, BoxCollaboration.Role.EDITOR);
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  from boxsdk.object.collaboration import CollaborationRole

  user = client.user(user_id='11111')
  collaboration = client.folder(folder_id='22222').collaborate(user, CollaborationRole.VIEWER)

  collaborator = collaboration.accessible_by
  item = collaboration.item
  has_accepted = 'has' if collaboration.status == 'accepted' else 'has not'
  print(f'{collaborator.name} {has_accepted} accepted the collaboration to folder "{item.name}"')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  // collaborate folder 11111 with user 22222
  BoxCollaborationRequest requestParams = new BoxCollaborationRequest()
  {
      Item = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Type = BoxType.folder,
          Id = "11111"
      },
      Role = "editor",
      AccessibleBy = new BoxCollaborationUserRequest()
      {
          Type = BoxType.user,
          Id = "22222"
      }
  };
  BoxCollaboration collab = await client.CollaborationsManager.AddCollaborationAsync(requestParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  // Invite user 123456 to collaborate on folder 987654
  client.collaborations.createWithUserID('123456', '987654', client.collaborationRoles.EDITOR)
  	.then(collaboration => {
  		/* collaboration -> {
  			type: 'collaboration',
  			id: '11111',
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '22222',
  				name: 'Inviting User',
  				login: 'inviter@example.com' },
  			created_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			modified_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			expires_at: null,
  			status: 'accepted',
  			accessible_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '123456',
  				name: 'Collaborator User',
  				login: 'collaborator@example.com' },
  			role: 'editor',
  			acknowledged_at: '2016-11-16T21:33:31-08:00',
  			item: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '987654',
  				sequence_id: '0',
  				etag: '0',
  				name: 'Collaborated Folder' } }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Fetch Collaboration ID as Transfer To User

The next step is make a request to get the collaboration information, making
the request as the `transfer_to_user` account. The collaboration object
returned will include a collaboration ID, which is used for the last step.

Making the call as the `transfer_to_user` account, get the collaboration on the
file or folder ID being transferred, using the
<Link href="/reference/get-collaborations-id">get collaboration endpoint</Link>. Capture the
collaboration ID.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations/1234" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.getCollaborationById(collaborationId);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.user_collaborations.get_collaboration_by_id(collaboration_id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.GetCollaborationByIdAsync(collaborationId: collaborationId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.userCollaborations.getCollaborationById(collaborationId: collaborationId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUserCollaborations().getCollaborationById(collaborationId)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.GetCollaborationByIdAsync(collaborationId: collaborationId);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.getCollaborationById(collaborationId);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

### Remove Transfer From User as Owner

The final step is to remove the `transfer_from_user` account as an owner of the
file or folder, which is accomplished using the
<Link href="/reference/delete-collaborations-id">delete collaboration endpoint</Link>.

Making call as the `transfer_to_user` account, remove the `transfer_from_user`
as a collaborator on the file or folder.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/collaborations/1234" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.deleteCollaborationById(collaborationId);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.user_collaborations.delete_collaboration_by_id(collaboration_id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.DeleteCollaborationByIdAsync(collaborationId: collaborationId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.userCollaborations.deleteCollaborationById(collaborationId: collaborationId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getUserCollaborations().deleteCollaborationById(collaborationId)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.UserCollaborations.DeleteCollaborationByIdAsync(collaborationId: collaborationId);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  await client.userCollaborations.getCollaborationById(collaborationId);
  ```
</CodeGroup>

The file or folder is now owned by the `transfer_to_user` account, and the
`transfer_from_user` account no longer has access.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/index



The Box API supports a variety of users, ranging from real employees logging in
with their Managed User account, to applications using App Users to drive
powerful automation workflows.

<Card href="/platform/user-types/" title="Learn more about user types" />

## (De-)Provision Users

Managing the onboarding and offboarding of employees, customers, and users is a
common requirement in the lifespan of a Box application.

During account provisioning the main tasks that will be needed will be:

* How to create new app and managed user accounts to represent the users.
* How to instantiate the new user account with common or repeatable folder and file architectures.

During account deprovisioning the main tasks that will be needed will be:

* How to transfer files and folders from one account to another for offboarding.
* How to delete user accounts.


# Create Architecture Skeleton
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/provision/architecture



Our first requirement is to copy general files and folders into each individual
user's root folder on account creation. This problem has been solved within
standard Linux distributions through a directory called `/etc/skel`,
which we'll emulate with a Box specific solution here. When adding a new user in
Linux, the files and folders within `/etc/skel` are copied to the new user's
home directory.

When creating a
<Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup">JWT-based Box application</Link>, a
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link> is created
within the Box Enterprise. A Service Account is similar in functionality to a
co-admin within a Box Enterprise, and most useful to this use case, can own,
copy, and collaborate other users on files and folders. More importantly, you
don't have to use a Service Account strictly for developing platform applications
for users, and instead, can use a Service Account in more of an automation
capacity.

<Info>
  **Box Platform Application Requirements**

  When creating your JWT-based custom Box application for this recipe, you'll
  need to enable the following scopes: **Manage users**, **Manage groups**,
  **Perform Actions as Users**, and **Generate User Access Tokens**.

  See <Link href="/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup">JWT Application Setup</Link> for
  more information on creating a JWT-based Box application and the scopes in a
  Box application.
</Info>

We'll start by creating the `etc` and `skel` folders and granting ownership of
the folders to the Service Account.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="etc_skel.json">
    ```json theme={null}
    {
      "name": "etc",
      "parent": {
        "id": "0"
      },
      "children": [
        {
          "name": "skel",
          "children": []
        }
      ]
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="skel_sub_directories.json">
    ```json theme={null}
    [
      {
        "name": "Market Research",
        "parent": {
          "id": "44884797174"
        },
        "children": [
          {
            "name": "Statistics",
            "children": [
              {
                "name": "Computed",
                "children": []
              }
            ]
          }
        ]
      },
      {
        "name": "Sales Plays",
        "parent": {
          "id": "44884797174"
        },
        "children": [
          {
            "name": "Big Pharma",
            "children": []
          }
        ]
      }
    ]
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

The code here can optionally be reused to build any folder structure formatted
as the JSON objects above demonstrate.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    "use strict";
    const fs = require("fs");
    const box = require("box-node-sdk");

    class BoxFolderTreeCreator {
        constructor(boxClient, options) {
            options = options || {};
            if (options.boxClient) {
                throw new Error("Must include a boxClient field.");
            }

            options.boxFolderTreeName = options.boxFolderTreeName || "tree.json";

            this.boxClient = boxClient;
            this.boxFolderTree = JSON.parse(fs.readFileSync(options.boxFolderTreeName));
            this.createdBoxFolders = [];
        }

        async createFolderTree(branch = null, parentFolderId = "0") {
            this.createdBoxFolders = [];
            if (Array.isArray(this.boxFolderTree)) {
                let folderTasks = [];
                this.boxFolderTree.forEach(folder => {
                    folderTasks.push(this._createFolder(folder, ""));
                });
                await Promise.all(folderTasks);
                return this.createdBoxFolders;
            } else if (typeof this.boxFolderTree === "object") {
                console.log("Is object");
                await this._createFolders(this.boxFolderTree, "");
                return this.createdBoxFolders;
            } else {
                throw new Error("Incorrectly formatted JSON folder tree.");
            }
        }

        async _createFolders(branch, parentFolderId = "0") {
            if (branch.parent != null && branch.parent.id != null) {
                parentFolderId = branch.parent.id;
            }
            let folder;
            try {
                folder = await this.boxClient.folders.create(parentFolderId, branch.name);
            } catch (e) {
                let existingFolderId = BoxFolderTreeCreator.handleFolderConflictError(e);
                folder = await this.boxClient.folders.get(existingFolderId);
            }
            this.createdBoxFolders.push(folder);
            if (branch.children.length <= 0) {
                console.log("No more folders to create...");
                return;
            } else {
                let createFolderTasks = [];
                branch.children.forEach(child => {
                    console.log("Creating folder...");
                    console.log(child.name);
                    createFolderTasks.push(this._createFolders(child, folder.id));
                });
                return await Promise.all(createFolderTasks);
            }
        }

        static handleFolderConflictError(e) {
            if (e && e.response && e.response.body) {
                let errorBody = e.response.body;
                if (errorBody.status === 409) {
                    if (
                        errorBody.context_info &&
                        errorBody.context_info.conflicts &&
                        errorBody.context_info.conflicts.length > 0
                    ) {
                        let conflict = errorBody.context_info.conflicts[0];
                        if (conflict && conflict.id) {
                            return conflict.id;
                        }
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }

    let configFile = fs.readFileSync("config.json");
    configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

    let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
    let serviceAccountClient = session.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");

    let treeCreator = new BoxFolderTreeCreator(serviceAccountClient);

    (async () => {
        let createdFolders = await treeCreator.createFolderTree();
        console.log(createdFolders);
    })();
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Java">
    ```java theme={null}
    package com.box;

    import java.io.BufferedReader;
    import java.io.IOException;
    import java.nio.charset.Charset;
    import java.nio.file.Files;
    import java.nio.file.Path;
    import java.nio.file.Paths;
    import java.util.ArrayList;
    import java.util.regex.Matcher;
    import java.util.regex.Pattern;

    import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIException;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxFolder;
    import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonObject;
    import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonValue;

    public class BoxFolderTreeCreator {
        private BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection _boxClient;
        private JsonValue _boxFolderTree;
        private ArrayList<BoxFolder.Info > _createdFolders;

        public BoxFolderTreeCreator(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
            boxClient) throws IOException {
            this(boxClient, "tree.json");
        }

        public BoxFolderTreeCreator(BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection boxClient,
            String folderTreeFileName)
        throws IOException {
            this._boxClient = boxClient;
            try (BufferedReader tree =
                Files.newBufferedReader(Paths.get(folderTreeFileName))) {
                this._boxFolderTree = JsonValue.readFrom(tree);
            }
            this._createdFolders = new ArrayList<>();
        }

        public ArrayList<BoxFolder.Info > createFolderTree() {
            if (this._boxFolderTree.isArray()) {
                for (JsonValue folder: this._boxFolderTree.asArray()) {
                    System.out.println("Processing this folder: " + folder);
                    _createFolders(folder.asObject(), null);
                }
                return this._createdFolders;
            } else {
                _createFolders(this._boxFolderTree.asObject(), null);
                return this._createdFolders;
            }
        }

        private void _createFolders(JsonObject branch, String parentFolderID) {
            if (parentFolderID == null && branch.get("parent") != null &&
                branch.get("parent").asObject().get("id") != null) {
                System.out.println("Looking for parent folder id...");
                System.out.println(branch.get("parent").asObject().get("id").asString());
                parentFolderID = branch.get("parent").asObject().get("id").asString();
            }
            System.out.println("Folder name:");
            System.out.println(branch.get("name"));
            System.out.println("Parent Folder ID:");
            System.out.println(parentFolderID);
            BoxFolder.Info createdFolder;
            try {
                BoxFolder parent = new BoxFolder(this._boxClient, parentFolderID);
                createdFolder = parent.createFolder(branch.get("name").asString());
            } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                if (e.getResponseCode() == 409) {
                    // Use the ID returned from the conflict error to continue
                    String conflictId = getIdFromConflict(e.getResponse());
                    createdFolder = new BoxFolder(this._boxClient, conflictId).getInfo();
                } else {
                    throw e;
                }
            }

            this._createdFolders.add(createdFolder);

            if (!branch.get("children").asArray().isEmpty()) {
                for (JsonValue child: branch.get("children").asArray()) {
                    _createFolders(child.asObject(), createdFolder.getID());
                }
            } else {
                return;
            }
        }

        private static String getIdFromConflict(String message) {
            String id = "";
            Pattern p = Pattern.compile("\"id\":\"[0-9]+\"");
            Pattern p2 = Pattern.compile("[0-9]+");
            Matcher m = p.matcher(message);
            if (m.find()) {
                String sub = m.group();
                Matcher m2 = p2.matcher(sub);
                if (m2.find()) {
                    id = m2.group();
                }
            }
            return id;
        }

        public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
            Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
            try (BufferedReader reader =
                Files.newBufferedReader(configPath, Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
                BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
                BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection serviceAccountClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
                    .getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);

                BoxFolderTreeCreator treeBuilder = new
                    BoxFolderTreeCreator(serviceAccountClient, "etc_skel.json");
                ArrayList<BoxFolder.Info > folders = treeBuilder.createFolderTree();
                for (BoxFolder.Info folder: folders) {
                    System.out.println(folder.getID());
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title=".NET">
    ```csharp theme={null}
    using System;
    using System.Collections;
    using System.Collections.Generic;
    using System.IO;
    using System.Linq;
    using System.Threading.Tasks;
    using Box.V2;
    using Box.V2.Config;
    using Box.V2.Exceptions;
    using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
    using Box.V2.Models;
    using Newtonsoft.Json.Linq;

    namespace BoxPlayground {
        public class Program {
            static void Main(string[] args) {
                ExecuteMainAsync().Wait();
            }

            private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync() {
                using(FileStream fs = new FileStream("./config.json",
                    FileMode.Open)) {
                    var session = new BoxJWTAuth(BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile(fs));
                    var client = session.AdminClient(session.AdminToken());
                    var treeCreator = new BoxFolderTreeCreator(client, "etc_skel.json");
                    var createdFolders = await treeCreator.CreateFolderTree();
                    foreach(var folder in createdFolders) {
                        System.Console.WriteLine(folder.Name);
                        System.Console.WriteLine(folder.Id);
                    }

                }
            }

            public class BoxFolderTreeCreator {
                public BoxClient BoxClient {
                    get;
                    set;
                }
                public JToken BoxFolderTree {
                    get;
                    set;
                }
                public List < BoxFolder > CreatedBoxFolders {
                    get;
                    set;
                }

                public BoxFolderTreeCreator(BoxClient boxClient,
                    string boxFolderTreeFileName = "tree.json") {
                    this.BoxClient = boxClient;
                    this.BoxFolderTree = JToken.Parse(File.ReadAllText(boxFolderTreeFileName));
                    this.CreatedBoxFolders = new List < BoxFolder > ();
                }
                public async Task < List < BoxFolder >>
                    CreateFolderTree(dynamic branch = null,
                    string parentFolderId = "0") {
                    this.CreatedBoxFolders = new List < BoxFolder > ();

                    if (this.BoxFolderTree is JArray) {
                        var folderTasks = new List < Task > ();
                        foreach(JObject folder in this.BoxFolderTree) {
                            folderTasks.Add(_createFolder(folder, String.Empty));
                        }
                        await Task.WhenAll(folderTasks);
                        return this.CreatedBoxFolders;
                    }
                    else if (this.BoxFolderTree is JObject) {
                        System.Console.WriteLine("Is object");
                        await _createFolder(this.BoxFolderTree as JObject, String.Empty);
                        return this.CreatedBoxFolders;
                    }
                    else {
                        throw new Exception("Incorrectly formatted JSON folder tree.");
                    }

                }

                private async Task _createFolder(dynamic branch,
                    string parentFolderId = "0") {

                    if (branch.parent != null && branch.parent.id != null) {
                        parentFolderId = branch.parent.id;
                    }

                    BoxFolder createdFolder;
                    try {
                        createdFolder = await this.BoxClient.FoldersManager.CreateAsync(
                            new BoxFolderRequest {
                                Parent = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                    Id = parentFolderId
                                },
                                Name = branch.name
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxConflictException < BoxFolder > e) {
                        createdFolder = await this.BoxClient.FoldersManager.GetInformationAsync(e.ConflictingItems.FirstOrDefault().Id);
                    }

                    this.CreatedBoxFolders.Add(createdFolder);

                    if (branch.children.Count <= 0) {
                        System.Console.WriteLine("No more folders to create...");
                        return;
                    }
                    else {
                        var createFolderTasks = new List < Task > ();
                        foreach(var child in branch.children) {
                            System.Console.WriteLine("Creating folder...");
                            System.Console.WriteLine(child.name);
                            createFolderTasks.Add(_createFolder(child as JObject,
                                createdFolder.Id));
                        }
                        await Task.WhenAll(createFolderTasks);
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Provision Users
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/provision/index



When setting up a brand new Box user account, a common need is to have that new
account be populated with standard folders, collaborations, and group
associations.

Typically there are some common questions that may be asked about the user
account to determine when standard setup may be needed for the account:

* Will the user need access to standard company files or folders immediately?
* Are collaborations associated individually or through groups? If through a group association, are there any standard groups that the user should be added to?
* Should the user be assigned any tasks to complete?
* Would any instructional comments on any files be helpful?

<Danger>
  **New User Password Resets and Email Confirmation**

  You may experience some errors when creating users and immediately trying to
  take actions with that user through the API. For example, a common error to
  receive is `user_email_confirmation_required` or `password_reset_required`.
  These kinds of errors may block some actions within the API, but you can
  still add the user as a collaborator on folders, add the user to groups, etc.
</Danger>

## Sample Overview

In this scenario we'll focus on provisioning a new
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#managed-users">Box Managed User</Link>, as there
are very different considerations when provisioning Box App User accounts.

We'll start with solving the most repeatable aspects of
provisioning a user's account, creating a general folder and file structure
that everyone will have on first login, using groups to control access to
shared files and folders for users.


# Populate Content
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/provision/populate-content



Once the architecture files have been defined through the `etc/skel`
structure in your service account, you can now use the following script to copy
anything under the `skel` directly to the new user's root directory.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    'use strict'
    const box = require('box-node-sdk');
    const fs = require('fs');
    const skelFolderId = "45117847998";
    const userID = "275111793";

    let configFile = fs.readFileSync('config.json');
    configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

    let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
    let serviceAccountClient = session.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");

    (async () => {
        // The userID can be obtained when creating the user via the
        // API or by using the search users feature.
        // The skel folder ID shouldn't ever change unless it's deleted and recreated.
        await copySkelDirectoryForUser(userID, skelFolderId, serviceAccountClient);
    })();

    async function copySkelDirectoryForUser(userID, skelFolderId, boxClient) {
        // Enable iterators in case there are more than the
        // default limit of items under the skel directory.
        boxClient._useIterators = true;

        // You collaborate the user temporarily on the skel directory
        // to copy all items into that user's root folder.
        let collabSkelFolder;
        try {
            collabSkelFolder = await boxClient.collaborations.createWithUserID(userID,
                skelFolderId, boxClient.collaborationRoles.EDITOR);
        } catch (e) {
            // Handle that the collaboration on the skel folder could already exist.
            if (e.response.body.code === 'user_already_collaborator') {
                let collaborationsIterator = await boxClient.folders.getCollaborations(skelFolderId);
                let collaborations = await autoPage(collaborationsIterator);
                let results = collaborations.filter((collaboration) => {
                    return collaboration.accessible_by.id === userID;
                });
                console.log(results);
                if (results.length > 0) {
                    collabSkelFolder = results[0];
                } else {
                    throw new Error("Couldn't create new collaboration
                        or located existing collaboration.");
                }
            } else {
                throw e;
            }
        }
        console.log(collabSkelFolder);

        // Switching context to make calls on behalf of the user.
        // To access this user's root folder, the boxClient needs
        // to be scoped to make API calls as the user.
        boxClient.asUser(userID);

        // Iterate over all the items under the skel directory.
        let skelFolderItemsIterator = await boxClient.folders.getItems(skelFolderId);
        let skelFolderCollection = await autoPage(skelFolderItemsIterator);
        console.log(skelFolderCollection);

        // Now, as the user, copy the folders and files into
        // the user's root folder -- folder ID '0'.
        let copyTasks = [];
        skelFolderCollection.forEach((item) => {
            if (item.type === 'folder') {
                copyTasks.push(boxClient.folders.copy(item.id, '0')
                    .catch((e) => {
                        let itemId = handleConflictError(e);
                        if (itemId) {
                            console.log(itemId);
                            return boxClient.folders.get(itemId);
                        } else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }));
            } else if (item.type === 'file') {
                copyTasks.push(boxClient.files.copy(item.id, '0')
                    .catch((e) => {
                        let itemId = handleConflictError(e);
                        if (itemId) {
                            console.log(itemId);
                            return boxClient.files.get(itemId);
                        } else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }));
            } else {
                console.log("Unable to resolve item type to known types...");
            }
        });

        let copiedItems = await Promise.all(copyTasks);
        console.log(copiedItems);

        // Switching the boxClient context back to that of the service account.
        boxClient.asSelf();

        /*
            Since the service account owns the skel directory,
            boxClient needs to make API calls as the service account
            to remove the temporary collaboration on the skel directory.
        */
        try {
            await boxClient.collaborations.delete(collabSkelFolder.id);
            console.log("Removed collaboration on skel...");
        } catch (e) {
            console.log("Couldn't remove skel collaboration...");
            console.log(e.respose.body);
        }

        function handleConflictError(e) {
            if (e && e.response && e.response.body) {
                let errorBody = e.response.body;
                if (errorBody.status === 409) {
                    if (errorBody.context_info
                        && errorBody.context_info.conflicts
                        && errorBody.context_info.conflicts) {
                        let conflict = errorBody.context_info.conflicts;
                        if (conflict && conflict.id) {
                            return conflict.id;
                        }
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        function autoPage(iterator, collection = []) {
            let moveToNextItem = async () => {
                let item = await iterator.next();
                if (item.value) {
                    collection.push(item.value);
                }

                if (item.done !== true) {
                    return moveToNextItem();
                } else {
                    return collection;
                }
            }
            return moveToNextItem();
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Java">
    ```java theme={null}
    package com.box;

    import java.io.BufferedReader;
    import java.nio.charset.Charset;
    import java.nio.file.Files;
    import java.nio.file.Path;
    import java.nio.file.Paths;
    import java.util.ArrayList;
    import java.util.Collection;
    import java.util.Optional;
    import java.util.regex.Matcher;
    import java.util.regex.Pattern;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIException;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxCollaboration;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxFile;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxFolder;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxItem;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxUser;
    import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonObject;

    public class BoxPlayground {

        public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
            Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
            try (BufferedReader reader = Files.newBufferedReader(configPath,
                Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
                String skelFolderId = "45117847998";
                String userId = "275111793";

                BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
                BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection serviceAccountClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
                    .getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);
                BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection userClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection.getAppUserConnection(userId,
                    boxConfig);

                BoxFolder skelFolder = new BoxFolder(serviceAccountClient, skelFolderId);
                BoxCollaboration.Info skelFolderCollaboration;
                try {
                    skelFolderCollaboration = skelFolder.collaborate(new
                        BoxUser(serviceAccountClient, userId),
                        BoxCollaboration.Role.EDITOR);
                } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    System.out.println("Searching for existing collaborator.");
                    JsonObject errorMessage = JsonObject.readFrom(e.getResponse());
                    String code = errorMessage.get("code").asString().intern();
                    if (code == "user_already_collaborator") {
                        System.out.println("Already collaborated...");
                        Collection<BoxCollaboration.Info > collaborations = skelFolder.getCollaborations();
                        System.out.println(collaborations.size());
                        Optional<BoxCollaboration.Info > results =
                            collaborations.stream().filter(c -> {
                            return c.getAccessibleBy().getID().intern() == userId;
                        }).findFirst();
                        if (results.isPresent()) {
                            skelFolderCollaboration = results.get();
                        } else {
                            throw new Exception("Couldn't create new collaboration
                                or find existing collaboration.");
                        }
                    } else {
                        throw e;
                    }
                }
                System.out.println(skelFolderCollaboration.getID());

                BoxFolder collabedSkelFolder = new BoxFolder(userClient, skelFolderId);
                ArrayList<BoxItem.Info > copiedItems = new ArrayList<>();
                for (BoxItem.Info itemInfo: collabedSkelFolder) {
                    if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFile.Info) {
                        BoxFile.Info fileInfo = (BoxFile.Info) itemInfo;
                        BoxFile copyFile = new BoxFile(userClient, fileInfo.getID());
                        BoxFile.Info copiedFile;
                        try {
                            copiedFile = copyFile.copy(BoxFolder.getRootFolder(userClient));
                        } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                            System.out.println(e.getMessage());
                            String conflictId = getIdFromConflict(e.getMessage());
                            System.out.println(conflictId);
                            copiedFile = new BoxFile(userClient, conflictId).getInfo();
                        }
                        copiedItems.add((BoxItem.Info) copiedFile);
                    } else if (itemInfo instanceof BoxFolder.Info) {
                        BoxFolder.Info folderInfo = (BoxFolder.Info) itemInfo;
                        BoxFolder copyFolder = new BoxFolder(userClient, folderInfo.getID());
                        BoxFolder.Info copiedFolder;
                        try {
                            copiedFolder = copyFolder.copy(BoxFolder.getRootFolder(userClient));
                        } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                            System.out.println(e.getMessage());
                            String conflictId = getIdFromConflict(e.getMessage());
                            System.out.println(conflictId);
                            copiedFolder = new BoxFolder(userClient, conflictId).getInfo();
                        }
                        copiedItems.add((BoxItem.Info) copiedFolder);
                    }
                }

                System.out.println("Copied " + copiedItems.size() +
                    " items from the skel directory.");

                BoxCollaboration tempSkelCollab = new BoxCollaboration(serviceAccountClient,
                    skelFolderCollaboration.getID());
                tempSkelCollab.delete();
                System.out.println("Removed temporary skel directory collaboration.");
            }
        }

        private static String getIdFromConflict(String message) {
            String id = "";
            Pattern p = Pattern.compile("\"id\":\"[0-9]+\"");
            Pattern p2 = Pattern.compile("[0-9]+");
            Matcher m = p.matcher(message);
            if (m.find()) {
                String sub = m.group();
                Matcher m2 = p2.matcher(sub);
                if (m2.find()) {
                    id = m2.group();
                }
            }
            return id;
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title=".NET">
    ```csharp theme={null}
    using System;
    using System.Collections;
    using System.Collections.Generic;
    using System.IO;
    using System.Linq;
    using System.Threading.Tasks;
    using Box.V2;
    using Box.V2.Config;
    using Box.V2.Exceptions;
    using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
    using Box.V2.Models;
    using Newtonsoft.Json.Linq;

    namespace BoxPlayground {
        public class Program {
            static void Main(string[] args) {
                ExecuteMainAsync().Wait();
            }

            private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync() {
                using(FileStream fs =
                    new FileStream("./config.json", FileMode.Open)) {
                    var skelFolderId = "45117847998";
                    var userId = "275111793";

                    var session = new BoxJWTAuth(BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile(fs));
                    var client = session.AdminClient(session.AdminToken());
                    var userClient = session.UserClient(session.UserToken(userId),
                        userId);
                    BoxCollaboration collabSkelFolder;
                    try {
                        collabSkelFolder = await client.CollaborationsManager.AddCollaborationAsync(
                        new BoxCollaborationRequest {
                            AccessibleBy = new BoxCollaborationUserRequest {
                                Id = userId
                            },
                            Item = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                Id = skelFolderId,
                                Type = BoxType.folder
                            },
                            Role = BoxCollaborationRole.Editor.ToString()
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxException e) {
                        var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.Message);
                        if (errorMessage.GetValue("code").ToString()
                            == "user_already_collaborator") {
                            System.Console.WriteLine("Already a collaborator");
                            var collaborations = await client.FoldersManager.GetCollaborationsAsync(skelFolderId);
                            var existingCollab = collaborations.Entries.Find((collaboration)
                                = >{
                                return collaboration.AccessibleBy.Id == userId;
                            });
                            if (existingCollab != null) {
                                collabSkelFolder = existingCollab;
                            }
                            else {
                                throw new Exception("Couldn't create new collaboration
                                    or find existing collaboration");
                            }
                        }
                        else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }

                    var items = await
                        userClient.FoldersManager.GetFolderItemsAsync(skelFolderId,
                        limit: 1000, autoPaginate: true);
                    var copyTasks = new List < Task < BoxItem >> ();
                    items.Entries.ForEach((item) = >{
                        if (item.Type == BoxType.folder.ToString()) {
                            copyTasks.Add(userClient.FoldersManager.CopyAsync(new
                                BoxFolderRequest {
                                Id = item.Id,
                                Parent = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                    Id = "0"
                                }
                            }).ContinueWith((folder) = >{
                                try {
                                    return (BoxItem) folder.Result;
                                }
                                catch(Exception e) {
                                    var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.InnerException.Message);
                                    if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject
                                        < int > () == 409) {
                                        System.Console.WriteLine("Conflict found");
                                        System.Console.WriteLine(errorMessage.SelectToken("context_info.conflicts.id"));
                                        return (BoxItem) userClient.FoldersManager.GetInformationAsync(errorMessage.SelectToken("context_info.conflicts.id").ToString()).Result;
                                    }
                                    else {
                                        throw e;
                                    }
                                }

                            }));
                        }
                        else if (item.Type == BoxType.file.ToString()) {
                            copyTasks.Add(userClient.FilesManager.CopyAsync(new
                                BoxFileRequest {
                                Id = item.Id,
                                Parent = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                    Id = "0"
                                }
                            }).ContinueWith((file) = >{
                                try {
                                    return (BoxItem) file.Result;
                                }
                                catch(Exception e) {
                                    var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.InnerException.Message);
                                    if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject
                                        < int > () == 409) {
                                        System.Console.WriteLine("Conflict found");
                                        System.Console.WriteLine(errorMessage.SelectToken("context_info.conflicts.id"));
                                        return (BoxItem) userClient.FilesManager.GetInformationAsync(errorMessage.SelectToken("context_info.conflicts.id").ToString()).Result;
                                    }
                                    else {
                                        throw e;
                                    }
                                }
                            }));
                        }
                        else {
                            System.Console.WriteLine("Couldn't process this item...");
                        }
                    });
                    var copiedItems = await Task.WhenAll(copyTasks);
                    System.Console.WriteLine($ "Copied {copiedItems.Count()}
                        items from the skel directory.");

                    if (await client.CollaborationsManager.RemoveCollaborationAsync(collabSkelFolder.Id)){
                        System.Console.WriteLine("Removed temporary skel
                            directory collaboration...");
                        System.Console.WriteLine("Complete!");
                    }
                    else {
                        System.Console.WriteLine("Something went wrong when
                            removing skel directory collaboration.");
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Setup Shared Folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/users/provision/shared-folders



As a final step to manage access to shared folders, we'll create the folder
structures needed within the service account. Then, groups will map to the
needed permissions based on user types and level of access needed to those
folders. We'll use a Market Department as an example.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="marketing_folders.json">
    ```json theme={null}
    {
      "name": "Marketing Department",
      "parent": {
        "id": "0"
      },
      "children": [
        {
          "name": "Projects",
          "children": []
        },
        {
          "name": "Newsletter",
          "children": [
            {
              "name": "Drafts",
              "children": []
            }
          ]
        }
      ]
    }
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

Working from this sample folder structure, we can use the folder tree creator
code we used earlier to create the `etc/skel` structure. That code may be
modified to make your own structure.

Once created, we'll need the IDs of the folders that each group will need to
access. For example, Marketing managers will likely have `editor` access to all
folders within the Marketing Department. On the other hand, Marketing project
managers will likely need `editor` access to only the `Projects` folder. We'll
create two groups and give them these permissions.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    "use strict";
    const fs = require("fs");
    const box = require("box-node-sdk");

    let configFile = fs.readFileSync("config.json");
    configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

    let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
    let serviceAccountClient = session.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");

    const marketingDeptFolderID = "45765309069";
    const marketingProjectsFolderID = "45765461670";
    const marketingManagersGroupName = "Marketing Managers";
    const marketingProjectManagersGroupName = "Marketing Project Managers";

    (async () => {
        let marketingManagerGroup;
        try {
            marketingManagerGroup = await serviceAccountClient.groups.create(
                marketingManagersGroupName,
                {
                    description: "For Marketing department leadership team.",
                    invitability_level: "admins_only",
                    member_viewability_level: "admins_only"
                }
            );
        } catch (e) {
          marketingManagerGroup = await handleGroupConflictError(
              e,
              marketingManagersGroupName,
              serviceAccountClient
          );
        }

        console.log(marketingManagerGroup);

        let marketingProjectManagerGroup;
        try {
            marketingProjectManagerGroup = await serviceAccountClient.groups.create(
                marketingProjectManagersGroupName,
                {
                    description: "All team members who manage Marketing projects.",
                    invitability_level: "admins_and_members",
                    member_viewability_level: "admins_and_members"
                }
            );
        } catch (e) {
            marketingProjectManagerGroup = await handleGroupConflictError(
                e,
                marketingProjectManagersGroupName,
                serviceAccountClient
            );
        }

        console.log(marketingProjectManagerGroup);

        let collabMarketingManagers;
        try {
            collabMarketingManagers = await serviceAccountClient.collaborations.createWithGroupID(
                marketingManagerGroup.id,
                marketingDeptFolderID,
                serviceAccountClient.collaborationRoles.EDITOR
            );
        } catch (e) {
            collabMarketingManagers = await handleFolderCollaborationConflictError(
                e,
                marketingDeptFolderID,
                marketingManagerGroup.id,
                serviceAccountClient
            );
        }
        console.log(collabMarketingManagers);

        let collabMarketingProjectManagers;
        try {
            collabMarketingProjectManagers = await serviceAccountClient.collaborations.createWithGroupID(
                marketingProjectManagerGroup.id,
                marketingProjectsFolderID,
                serviceAccountClient.collaborationRoles.EDITOR
            );
        } catch (e) {
            collabMarketingProjectManagers = await handleFolderCollaborationConflictError(
                e,
                marketingProjectsFolderID,
                marketingProjectManagerGroup.id,
                serviceAccountClient
            );
        }
        console.log(collabMarketingProjectManagers);
    })();

    async function autoPage(iterator, collection = []) {
        let moveToNextItem = async () => {
            let item = await iterator.next();
            if (item.value) {
                collection.push(item.value);
            }

            if (item.done !== true) {
                return moveToNextItem();
            } else {
                return collection;
            }
        };
        return moveToNextItem();
    }

    async function handleGroupConflictError(e, groupName, boxClient) {
        let storeIteratorSetting = boxClient._useIterators;
        if (e && e.response && e.response.body && e.response.body.status === 409) {
            boxClient._useIterators = true;
            let groupsIterator = await boxClient.groups.getAll({
                name: groupName
            });
            let groups = await autoPage(groupsIterator);
            let results = groups.filter(group => {
                return group.name === groupName;
            });
            if (results.length > 0) {
                boxClient._useIterators = storeIteratorSetting;
                return results[0];
            } else {
                throw new Error("Couldn't create group or find existing group.");
            }
        } else {
            throw e;
        }
    }

    async function handleFolderCollaborationConflictError(
        e,
        folderID,
        groupID,
        boxClient
    ) {
        let storeIteratorSetting = boxClient._useIterators;
        if (e && e.response && e.response.body && e.response.body.status === 409) {
            boxClient._useIterators = true;
            let collaborationsIterator = await boxClient.folders.getCollaborations(
                folderID
            );
            let collaborations = await autoPage(collaborationsIterator);
            let results = collaborations.filter(collaboration => {
                return collaboration.accessible_by.id === groupID;
            });
            console.log(results);
            if (results.length > 0) {
                boxClient._useIterators = storeIteratorSetting;
                return results[0];
            } else {
                throw new Error(
                    "Couldn't create new collaboration or located existing collaboration."
                );
            }
        } else {
            throw e;
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Java">
    ```java theme={null}
    package com.box;

    import java.io.BufferedReader;
    import java.nio.charset.Charset;
    import java.nio.file.Files;
    import java.nio.file.Path;
    import java.nio.file.Paths;
    import java.util.Collection;
    import java.util.Optional;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIException;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxCollaboration;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxFolder;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxGroup;
    import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonObject;

    public class BoxPlayground {

        public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
            Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
            try (BufferedReader reader =
                Files.newBufferedReader(configPath, Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
                String marketingDeptFolderID = "45765309069";
                String marketingProjectsFolderID = "45765461670";
                String marketingManagersGroupName = "Marketing Managers";
                String marketingProjectManagersGroupName = "Marketing Project Managers";

                BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
                BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection serviceAccountClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
                    .getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);

                BoxGroup.Info marketingManagerGroup;
                try {
                    marketingManagerGroup = BoxGroup.createGroup(serviceAccountClient,
                        marketingManagersGroupName, null,
                        null, "For Marketing department leadership team.",
                        "admins_only", "admins_only");
                } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    JsonObject errorMessage = JsonObject.readFrom(e.getResponse());
                    int status = errorMessage.get("status").asInt();
                    if (status == 409) {
                        marketingManagerGroup =
                            handleGroupConflictError(marketingManagersGroupName,
                            serviceAccountClient);
                    } else {
                        throw e;
                    }
                }
                System.out.println(marketingManagerGroup.getID());

                BoxGroup.Info marketingProjectManagerGroup;
                try {
                    marketingProjectManagerGroup = BoxGroup.createGroup(serviceAccountClient,
                        marketingProjectManagersGroupName, null, null,
                        "All team members who manage Marketing projects.",
                        "admins_and_members", "admins_and_members");
                } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    JsonObject errorMessage = JsonObject.readFrom(e.getResponse());
                    int status = errorMessage.get("status").asInt();
                    if (status == 409) {
                        marketingProjectManagerGroup = handleGroupConflictError(marketingProjectManagersGroupName,
                            serviceAccountClient);
                    } else {
                        throw e;
                    }
                }
                System.out.println(marketingProjectManagerGroup.getID());

                BoxFolder marketDeptFolder =
                    new BoxFolder(serviceAccountClient, marketingDeptFolderID);
                BoxCollaboration.Info marketingDeptFolderCollaboration;
                try {
                    marketingDeptFolderCollaboration = marketDeptFolder.collaborate(
                        new BoxGroup(serviceAccountClient, marketingManagerGroup.getID()),
                        BoxCollaboration.Role.EDITOR);
                } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    System.out.println("Searching for existing collaborator.");
                    JsonObject errorMessage = JsonObject.readFrom(e.getResponse());
                    int status = errorMessage.get("status").asInt();
                    if (status == 409) {
                        marketingDeptFolderCollaboration = handleFolderCollaborationConflict(marketDeptFolder,
                            marketingManagerGroup.getID());
                    } else {
                        throw e;
                    }
                }
                System.out.println(marketingDeptFolderCollaboration.getID());

                BoxFolder marketingProjectsFolder =
                    new BoxFolder(serviceAccountClient, marketingProjectsFolderID);
                BoxCollaboration.Info marketingProjectsFolderCollaboration;
                try {
                    marketingProjectsFolderCollaboration = marketingProjectsFolder.collaborate(
                        new BoxGroup(serviceAccountClient, marketingProjectManagerGroup.getID()),
                        BoxCollaboration.Role.EDITOR);
                } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    System.out.println("Searching for existing collaborator.");
                    JsonObject errorMessage = JsonObject.readFrom(e.getResponse());
                    int status = errorMessage.get("status").asInt();
                    if (status == 409) {
                        marketingProjectsFolderCollaboration = handleFolderCollaborationConflict(marketingProjectsFolder,
                            marketingProjectManagerGroup.getID());
                    } else {
                        throw e;
                    }
                }
                System.out.println(marketingProjectsFolderCollaboration.getID());

            }
        }

        private static BoxCollaboration.Info
            handleFolderCollaborationConflict(BoxFolder folder, String groupID)
        throws Exception {
            System.out.println("Already collaborated...");
            Collection<BoxCollaboration.Info > collaborations = folder.getCollaborations();
            Optional<BoxCollaboration.Info > results =
                collaborations.stream().filter(c -> {
                return c.getAccessibleBy().getID().intern() == groupID.intern();
            }).findFirst();
            if (results.isPresent()) {
                return results.get();
            } else {
                throw new Exception("Couldn't create new
                    collaboration or find existing collaboration.");
            }
        }

        private static BoxGroup.Info handleGroupConflictError(String groupName,
            BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection boxClient)
        throws Exception {
            Iterable<BoxGroup.Info > groups =
                BoxGroup.getAllGroupsByName(boxClient, groupName);
            BoxGroup.Info foundGroup = null;
            for (BoxGroup.Info group: groups) {
                if (group.getName().intern() == groupName) {
                    foundGroup = group;
                    break;
                }
            }
            if (foundGroup != null) {
                return foundGroup;
            } else {
                throw new Exception("Couldn't create group or find existing group.");
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title=".NET">
    ```csharp theme={null}
    using System;
    using System.Collections;
    using System.Collections.Generic;
    using System.IO;
    using System.Linq;
    using System.Threading.Tasks;
    using Box.V2;
    using Box.V2.Config;
    using Box.V2.Exceptions;
    using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
    using Box.V2.Models;
    using Box.V2.Models.Request;
    using Newtonsoft.Json.Linq;

    namespace BoxPlayground {
        public class Program {
            static void Main(string[] args) {
                ExecuteMainAsync().Wait();
            }

            private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync() {
                using(FileStream fs =
                    new FileStream("./config.json", FileMode.Open)) {
                    var marketingDeptFolderId = "45765309069";
                    var marketingProjectsFolderId = "45765461670";
                    var marketingManagersGroupName = "Marketing Managers";
                    var marketingProjectManagersGroupName = "Marketing Project Managers";

                    var session = new BoxJWTAuth(BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile(fs));
                    var serviceAccountClient = session.AdminClient(session.AdminToken());

                    BoxGroup marketingManagerGroup;
                    try {
                        marketingManagerGroup = await
                            serviceAccountClient.GroupsManager.CreateAsync(new
                                BoxGroupRequest {
                            Name = marketingManagersGroupName,
                            InvitabilityLevel = "admins_only",
                            MemberViewabilityLevel = "admins_only"
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxException e) {
                        var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.Message);
                        if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject < int >
                            () == 409) {
                            marketingManagerGroup = await
                                HandleGroupConflictError(marketingManagersGroupName,
                                serviceAccountClient);
                        }
                        else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }
                    System.Console.WriteLine(marketingManagerGroup.Id);

                    BoxGroup marketingProjectsManagerGroup;
                    try {
                        marketingProjectsManagerGroup = await
                            serviceAccountClient.GroupsManager.CreateAsync(new
                                BoxGroupRequest {
                            Name = marketingProjectManagersGroupName,
                            InvitabilityLevel = "admins_and_members",
                            MemberViewabilityLevel = "admins_and_members"
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxException e) {
                        var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.Message);
                        if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject < int >
                            () == 409) {
                            marketingProjectsManagerGroup = await
                                HandleGroupConflictError(marketingProjectManagersGroupName,
                                serviceAccountClient);
                        }
                        else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }
                    System.Console.WriteLine(marketingProjectsManagerGroup.Id);

                    BoxCollaboration marketingManagerCollab;
                    try {
                        marketingManagerCollab = await serviceAccountClient.CollaborationsManager.AddCollaborationAsync(
                        new BoxCollaborationRequest {
                            AccessibleBy = new BoxCollaborationUserRequest {
                                Id = marketingManagerGroup.Id,
                                Type = BoxType.group
                            },
                            Item = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                Id = marketingDeptFolderId,
                                Type = BoxType.folder
                            },
                            Role = BoxCollaborationRole.Editor.ToString()
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxException e) {
                        var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.Message);
                        if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject < int >
                            () == 409) {
                            marketingManagerCollab = await
                                HandleFolderCollaborationConflictError(marketingDeptFolderId,
                                marketingManagerGroup.Id, serviceAccountClient);
                        }
                        else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }
                    System.Console.WriteLine(marketingManagerCollab.Id);

                    BoxCollaboration marketingProjectsManagerCollab;
                    try {
                        marketingProjectsManagerCollab = await serviceAccountClient.CollaborationsManager.AddCollaborationAsync(
                        new BoxCollaborationRequest {
                            AccessibleBy = new BoxCollaborationUserRequest {
                                Id = marketingProjectsManagerGroup.Id,
                                Type = BoxType.group
                            },
                            Item = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                Id = marketingProjectsFolderId,
                                Type = BoxType.folder
                            },
                            Role = BoxCollaborationRole.Editor.ToString()
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxException e) {
                        var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.Message);
                        if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject < int >
                            () == 409) {
                            marketingProjectsManagerCollab = await
                                HandleFolderCollaborationConflictError(marketingProjectsFolderId,
                                    marketingProjectsManagerGroup.Id, serviceAccountClient);
                        }
                        else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }
                    System.Console.WriteLine(marketingProjectsManagerCollab.Id);
                }
            }

            public async static Task < BoxGroup >
                HandleGroupConflictError(string groupName, BoxClient boxClient) {
                System.Console.WriteLine("Found conflict.");
                var groups = await
                    boxClient.GroupsManager.GetAllGroupsAsync(autoPaginate: true);
                return groups.Entries.Find((group) = >{
                    return group.Name == groupName;
                });
            }
            public async static Task < BoxCollaboration >
                HandleFolderCollaborationConflictError(string folderId,
                string groupId, BoxClient boxClient) {
                System.Console.WriteLine("Already a collaborator");
                var collaborations = await boxClient.FoldersManager.GetCollaborationsAsync(folderId);
                var existingCollab =
                    collaborations.Entries.Find((collaboration) = >{
                    return collaboration.AccessibleBy.Id == groupId;
                });
                if (existingCollab != null) {
                    return existingCollab;
                }
                else {
                    throw new Exception("Couldn't create new collaboration or find existing collaboration");
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="CLI">
    ```shell theme={null}
    box groups:create "Marketing Managers" --invite=admins_only --view-members=admins_only
    box groups:create "Marketing Project Managers" --invite=admins_and_members --view-members=admins_and_members
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

Once the groups are created, add the user to that group and they will
have the prescribed access to the shared folders created within the service
account.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    'use strict'
    const fs = require('fs');
    const box = require('box-node-sdk');

    let configFile = fs.readFileSync('config.json');
    configFile = JSON.parse(configFile);

    let session = box.getPreconfiguredInstance(configFile);
    let serviceAccountClient = session.getAppAuthClient("enterprise");

    const marketingManagerGroupID = "839790214";
    const marketingManagerUserID = "275111793";

    (async () => {
        let addedUser;
        try {
            addedUser = await
                serviceAccountClient.groups.addUser(marketingManagerGroupID,
                marketingManagerUserID, {
                role: serviceAccountClient.groups.userRoles.ADMIN
            });
        } catch (e) {
            addedUser =
                await handleGroupMembershipConflictError(e,
                marketingManagerGroupID, marketingManagerUserID, serviceAccountClient);
        }
        console.log(addedUser);
    })();

    async function autoPage(iterator, collection = []) {
        let moveToNextItem = async () => {
            let item = await iterator.next();
            if (item.value) {
                collection.push(item.value);
            }

            if (item.done !== true) {
                return moveToNextItem();
            } else {
                return collection;
            }
        }
        return moveToNextItem();
    }

    async function handleGroupMembershipConflictError(e,
        groupID, userID, boxClient) {
        let storeIteratorSetting = boxClient._useIterators;
        if (e && e.response
            && e.response.body
            && e.response.body.status === 409) {
            boxClient._useIterators = true;
            let groupMembershipsIterator = await boxClient.groups.getMemberships(groupID);
            let groupMemberships = await autoPage(groupMembershipsIterator);
            let results = groupMemberships.filter((groupMembership) => {
                return groupMembership.user.id === userID;
            });
            if (results.length > 0) {
                boxClient._useIterators = storeIteratorSetting;
                return results[0];
            } else {
                throw new Error("Couldn't create group membership or find existing group membership.");
            }
        } else {
            throw e;
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Java">
    ```java theme={null}
    package com.box;

    import java.io.BufferedReader;
    import java.nio.charset.Charset;
    import java.nio.file.Files;
    import java.nio.file.Path;
    import java.nio.file.Paths;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxAPIException;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxConfig;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxGroup;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxGroupMembership;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxUser;
    import com.box.sdk.BoxGroupMembership.Role;
    import com.eclipsesource.json.JsonObject;

    public class BoxPlayground {

        public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
            Path configPath = Paths.get("config.json");
            try (BufferedReader reader =
                Files.newBufferedReader(configPath, Charset.forName("UTF-8"))) {
                String marketingManagerGroupID = "839982796";
                String marketingManagerUserID = "275111793";

                BoxConfig boxConfig = BoxConfig.readFrom(reader);
                BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection serviceAccountClient = BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection
                    .getAppEnterpriseConnection(boxConfig);

                BoxGroupMembership.Info marketingManagerMembership = null;
                BoxGroup marketingManagerGroup =
                    new BoxGroup(serviceAccountClient, marketingManagerGroupID);
                try {
                    marketingManagerMembership = marketingManagerGroup
                        .addMembership(new BoxUser(serviceAccountClient,
                        marketingManagerUserID), Role.ADMIN);
                } catch (BoxAPIException e) {
                    JsonObject errorMessage = JsonObject.readFrom(e.getResponse());
                    int status = errorMessage.get("status").asInt();
                    if (status == 409) {
                        System.out.println("Found existing membership");
                        Iterable<BoxGroupMembership.Info > memberships = marketingManagerGroup.getAllMemberships();
                        for (BoxGroupMembership.Info membership: memberships) {
                            if (membership.getUser().getID().intern()
                                == marketingManagerUserID) {
                                marketingManagerMembership = membership;
                                break;
                            }
                        }
                        if (marketingManagerMembership == null) {
                            throw new Exception("Couldn't add user to
                                group or find existing membership");
                        }
                    } else {
                        throw e;
                    }
                }
                System.out.println(marketingManagerMembership.getID());
                System.out.println(marketingManagerMembership.getRole());
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title=".NET">
    ```csharp theme={null}
    using System;
    using System.Collections;
    using System.Collections.Generic;
    using System.IO;
    using System.Linq;
    using System.Threading.Tasks;
    using Box.V2;
    using Box.V2.Config;
    using Box.V2.Exceptions;
    using Box.V2.JWTAuth;
    using Box.V2.Models;
    using Box.V2.Models.Request;
    using Newtonsoft.Json.Linq;

    namespace BoxPlayground {
        public class Program {
            static void Main(string[] args) {
                ExecuteMainAsync().Wait();
            }

            private static async Task ExecuteMainAsync() {
                using(FileStream fs =
                    new FileStream("./config.json", FileMode.Open)) {
                    var marketingManagerGroupId = "839982796";
                    var marketingManagerUserId = "275111793";

                    var session = new BoxJWTAuth(BoxConfig.CreateFromJsonFile(fs));
                    var serviceAccountClient = session.AdminClient(session.AdminToken());
                    BoxGroupMembership marketingManagerMembership;
                    try {
                        marketingManagerMembership = await
                            serviceAccountClient.GroupsManager.AddMemberToGroupAsync(new
                            BoxGroupMembershipRequest {
                            User = new BoxRequestEntity {
                                Id = marketingManagerUserId
                            },
                            Group = new BoxGroupRequest {
                                Id = marketingManagerGroupId
                            },
                            Role = "admin"
                        });
                    }
                    catch(BoxException e) {
                        var errorMessage = JObject.Parse(e.Message);
                        if (errorMessage.GetValue("status").ToObject
                            < int > () == 409) {
                            var groups = await
                                serviceAccountClient.GroupsManager.GetAllGroupMembershipsForGroupAsync(marketingManagerGroupId,
                                autoPaginate: true);
                            marketingManagerMembership =
                                groups.Entries.Find((group) = >{
                                return group.User.Id == marketingManagerUserId;
                            });

                            if (marketingManagerMembership == null) {
                                throw new Exception("Couldn't create new
                                    collaboration or find existing collaboration");
                            }
                        }
                        else {
                            throw e;
                        }
                    }
                    System.Console.WriteLine(marketingManagerMembership.Id);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="CLI">
    ```shell theme={null}
    box groups:membership:add $user_id $group_id --role=admin
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Create Web Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/web-links/create



To create a web link in Box, you will need to provide our API with a folder
`id` and the `url` you want the web link to be linked to. The `url` must start
with `http://` or `https://`.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/web_links" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "name": "Cloud Content Management",
         "url": "https://box.com",
         "parent": {
           "id": "0"
         }
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.webLinks.createWebLink({
    url: 'https://www.box.com',
    parent: { id: parent.id } satisfies CreateWebLinkRequestBodyParentField,
    name: getUuid(),
    description: 'Weblink description',
  } satisfies CreateWebLinkRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.web_links.create_web_link(
      "https://www.box.com",
      CreateWebLinkParent(id=parent.id),
      name=get_uuid(),
      description="Weblink description",
  )
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.WebLinks.CreateWebLinkAsync(requestBody: new CreateWebLinkRequestBody(url: "https://www.box.com", parent: new CreateWebLinkRequestBodyParentField(id: parent.Id)) { Name = Utils.GetUUID(), Description = "Weblink description" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.webLinks.createWebLink(requestBody: CreateWebLinkRequestBody(url: "https://www.box.com", parent: CreateWebLinkRequestBodyParentField(id: parent.id), name: Utils.getUUID(), description: "Weblink description"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getWebLinks().createWebLink(new CreateWebLinkRequestBody.Builder(url, new CreateWebLinkRequestBodyParentField(parent.getId())).name(name).description(description).build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxFolder folder = new BoxFolder(api, id);
  URL url = new URL("https://www.example.com");
  folder.createWebLink("Link to Example", url, "This goes to an example page");
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  web_link = client.folder(folder_id='12345').create_web_link('https://example.com', 'Example Link', 'This is the description')
  print(f'Web Link url is {web_link.url} and its description is {web_link.description}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  var weblinkParams = new BoxWebLinkRequest()
  {
      Url = new Uri("http://www.example.com"),
      Parent = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Id = "22222"
      }
  };
  BoxWebLink link = await client.WebLinksManager.CreateWebLinkAsync(weblinkParams);
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.weblinks.create(
  	'https://www.box.com',
  	'22222',
  	{
  		name: 'Box Website!',
  		description: 'Cloud Content Management'
  	})
  	.then(weblink => {
  		/* weblink -> {
  			type: 'web_link',
  			id: '11111',
  			sequence_id: '0',
  			etag: '0',
  			name: 'Box Website!',
  			url: 'https://www.box.com',
  			created_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			created_at: '2015-05-07T15:00:01-07:00',
  			modified_at: '2015-05-07T15:00:01-07:00',
  			parent: 
  			{ type: 'folder',
  				id: '22222',
  				sequence_id: '1',
  				etag: '1',
  				name: 'Bookmarks' },
  			description: 'Enterprise Cloud Content Management',
  			item_status: 'active',
  			trashed_at: null,
  			purged_at: null,
  			shared_link: null,
  			path_collection: 
  			{ total_count: 2,
  				entries: 
  				[ { type: 'folder',
  					id: '0',
  					sequence_id: null,
  					etag: null,
  					name: 'All Files' },
  					{ type: 'folder',
  					id: '22222',
  					sequence_id: '1',
  					etag: '1',
  					name: 'Bookmarks' } ] },
  			modified_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' },
  			owned_by: 
  			{ type: 'user',
  				id: '33333',
  				name: 'Example User',
  				login: 'user@example.com' } }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete Web Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/web-links/delete



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

To remove a web link in Box you will need to provide our API with the ID of
the web link.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/web_links/12345" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.webLinks.deleteWebLinkById(webLinkId);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.web_links.delete_web_link_by_id(web_link_id)
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.WebLinks.DeleteWebLinkByIdAsync(webLinkId: webLinkId);
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.webLinks.deleteWebLinkById(webLinkId: webLinkId)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getWebLinks().deleteWebLinkById(weblink.getId())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxWebLink webLink = new BoxWebLink(api, id);
  webLink.delete();
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  client.web_link('12345').delete()
  print('The web link was deleted!')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.WebLinksManager.DeleteWebLinkAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.weblinks.delete('11111')
  	.then(() => {
  		// deletion succeeded — no value returned
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Web Links
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/web-links/index



Web links are objects that point to URLs. These objects are also known as
bookmarks within the Box web application.

Web Links are treated similarly to file objects, which means that they have the
same support for creating shared links, allow for copying, permanent deletion,
and restoration.


# Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/index



Webhooks allow you to monitor Box content for events, and receive notifications
to a URL of your choice when they occur. For example, a workflow may include
waiting for a file to be downloaded to delete a shared link. A webhook can be
set on the file and upon notification of the download event, a script can launch
to make an API call to delete the shared link. 

<Frame>
  <img alt="Webhook developer console" />
</Frame>

## Versions

There are two types of webhooks: V1 and V2, which are compared below.

<Note>
  For the ease of use, better security, more event triggers to choose from,
  and automatic retries we recommend to use V2 webhooks.
</Note>

| V1                                                      | V2                                                               |
| ------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Created in the [Developer Console][console].            | Created in the [Developer Console][console] or with an API call. |
| Set at the root level.                                  | Set on specific files/folders, but cannot set at the root.       |
| Select from 14 event triggers.                          | Select from 30+ event triggers.                                  |
| Provides selected callback parameters.                  | Payload includes full object response & additional context info. |
| No retry mechanism after notification delivery failure. | Retries up to 10 times after notification delivery failure.      |
| Does not support payload verification.                  | Supports payload verification.                                   |
| Notification URL can be HTTP or HTTPS.                  | Notification URL must be HTTPS.                                  |
| Does not scale well.                                    | Scales well and has increased reliability.                       |

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Webhook Event Triggers
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/triggers



## V2

### Files and Folders

The following is a list of events that can be configured to trigger a V2
webhook. Some events are only available for files, while others are only
available for folders.

| Event                                  | Triggered                                                                                                            | File? | Folder? |
| -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----- | ------- |
| `COLLABORATION.CREATED`                | A collaboration is created.                                                                                          | No    | Yes     |
| `COLLABORATION.ACCEPTED`               | A collaboration is accepted.                                                                                         | No    | Yes     |
| `COLLABORATION.REJECTED`               | A collaboration is rejected.                                                                                         | No    | Yes     |
| `COLLABORATION.REMOVED`                | A collaboration is removed.                                                                                          | No    | Yes     |
| `COLLABORATION.UPDATED`                | A collaboration is updated.                                                                                          | No    | Yes     |
| `COMMENT.CREATED`                      | A comment object is created.                                                                                         | Yes   | Yes     |
| `COMMENT.UPDATED`                      | A comment object is edited.                                                                                          | Yes   | Yes     |
| `COMMENT.DELETED`                      | A comment object is removed.                                                                                         | Yes   | Yes     |
| `DOCGEN_DOCUMENT_GENERATION_FAILED`    | Doc Gen failed to generate a document.                                                                               | Yes   | No      |
| `DOCGEN_DOCUMENT_GENERATION_STARTED`   | Doc Gen started to create a document.                                                                                | Yes   | No      |
| `DOCGEN_DOCUMENT_GENERATION_SUCCEEDED` | Doc Gen succeeded to create a document.                                                                              | Yes   | No      |
| `FILE.UPLOADED`                        | A file is uploaded or moved to this folder.                                                                          | No    | Yes     |
| `FILE.PREVIEWED`                       | A file is previewed.                                                                                                 | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.DOWNLOADED`                      | A file is downloaded.                                                                                                | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.TRASHED`                         | A file is moved to trash.                                                                                            | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.DELETED`                         | A file is permanently deleted.                                                                                       | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.RESTORED`                        | A file is restored from trash.                                                                                       | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.COPIED`                          | A file is copied.                                                                                                    | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.MOVED`                           | A file is moved from one folder to another.                                                                          | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.LOCKED`                          | A file is locked.                                                                                                    | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.UNLOCKED`                        | A file is unlocked.                                                                                                  | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FILE.RENAMED`                         | A file is renamed.                                                                                                   | Yes   | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.CREATED`                       | A folder is created.                                                                                                 | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.RENAMED`                       | A folder is renamed.                                                                                                 | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.DOWNLOADED`                    | A folder is downloaded.                                                                                              | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.RESTORED`                      | A folder is restored from trash.                                                                                     | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.DELETED`                       | A folder is permanently removed.                                                                                     | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.COPIED`                        | A folder is copied.                                                                                                  | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.MOVED`                         | A folder is moved to a different folder.                                                                             | No    | Yes     |
| `FOLDER.TRASHED`                       | A folder is moved to trash.                                                                                          | No    | Yes     |
| `METADATA_INSTANCE.CREATED`            | A new metadata template instance is associated with a file or folder.                                                | Yes   | Yes     |
| `METADATA_INSTANCE.UPDATED`            | An attribute (value) is updated/deleted for an existing metadata template instance associated with a file or folder. | Yes   | Yes     |
| `METADATA_INSTANCE.DELETED`            | An existing metadata template instance associated with a file or folder is deleted.                                  | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SHARED_LINK.DELETED`                  | A shared link is deleted.                                                                                            | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SHARED_LINK.CREATED`                  | A shared link is created.                                                                                            | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SHARED_LINK.UPDATED`                  | A shared link is updated.                                                                                            | Yes   | Yes     |
| `TASK_ASSIGNMENT.CREATED`              | A task is created.                                                                                                   | Yes   | Yes     |
| `TASK_ASSIGNMENT.UPDATED`              | A task assignment is changed.                                                                                        | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.COMPLETED`               | A sign request is completed.                                                                                         | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.DECLINED`                | A sign request is declined.                                                                                          | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.EXPIRED`                 | A sign request is expired.                                                                                           | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.SIGNER_EMAIL_BOUNCED`    | A signer's email is bounced.                                                                                         | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.SIGNER_SIGNED`           | A sign request is signed by a particular signer.                                                                     | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.SIGNATURE_REQUESTED`     | A signature is requested from a signer.                                                                              | Yes   | Yes     |
| `SIGN_REQUEST.ERROR_FINALIZING`        | An error occurred while finalizing a sign request.                                                                   | Yes   | Yes     |
| `WEBHOOK.DELETED`                      | A webhook is deleted.                                                                                                | No    | No      |

## V1

Events that can be configured to trigger a v1 webhook:

* Sent,
* Created,
* Uploaded,
* Commented,
* Downloaded,
* Previewed,
* Moved,
* Copied,
* Task assigned,
* Responded to task,
* Locked,
* Unlocked,
* Deleted,
* Collaborator added.


# Create Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v1/create-v1



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

V1 webhooks are created in the [Developer Console][devconsole] by following
the steps below.

1. Navigate to your application in the [Developer Console][devconsole]
2. Select the **Webhooks** tab.
3. Click the **Create a new Webhook** button.
4. Fill in the form, including event triggers, an endpoint URL and one or more callback parameters.
5. Click **Save Webhook**.

<Warning>
  **Callback parameters**

  Unlike the V2 Webhooks, these manual webhooks need to be configured with the
  data you'd like. This data will be sent as a query string either in the body
  or as a query parameter, for example `name=Contract.pdf&type=file`.
</Warning>

## Developer Mode

By default V1 webhooks only work for users that are listed as application
collaborators in the **General Settings** tab in the Developer Console. To
enable a webhooks for all users, please [contact support][support].

## Enabling a webhook

After creating a webhook, the application must be added to the user's account
to begin use.

To obtain the URL to add the app, follow the directions below for OAuth 2.0
authentication apps:

1. Navigate to the **Integrations** tab for the application in the [Developer Console][devconsole].
2. Click **Submit My App**. Do not worry, you will not be completing the submission process!
3. At the bottom of the page, click **Preview**.
4. Click **Add**

<Warning>
  For all other authentication types, you will need to contact support to
  obtain this URL.
</Warning>

Webhooks will now trigger for any configured events that are occur in the user's
account.

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[support]: https://support.box.com

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v1/delete-v1



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

V1 webhooks cannot be fully deleted. Instead, the webhook can be set back to
Developer Mode by [support][support]. Developers can also remove the
application from their account by revisiting the enablement URL and
clicking **Remove**.

[support]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/requests/new


# V1 Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v1/index



Webhooks created using the [Developer Console][console] monitor changes to all
files and folders within a user's account. When creating one of these webhooks
it is not possible specify a specific object to bind the webhook to. To create
a webhook for a specific file or folder, you will need to leverage
<Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2">v2 webhooks</Link>.

<Warning>
  Webhooks created through this process will not show when listing all
  webhooks for a user via API call. All V1 webhooks are visible in the
  **Webhooks** tab in the [Developer Console][console].
</Warning>

[devconsole]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

[list_webhooks]: /guides/webhooks/v2/list-v2

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console


# Create Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/create-v2



V2 webhooks can monitor specific files or folders. They can be
created in the [Developer Console][console] and with API.

## Developer console

<Warning>
  V2 webhooks can be created only when the scope **Manage Webhooks**
  is selected and the application is authorized. See more about
  <Link href="/guides/applications">Required Access Scopes</Link> and <Link href="/guides/authorization">authorization</Link>.
</Warning>

To create a webhook follow the steps below.

1. Navigate to your application in the [Developer Console][console].
2. Select the **Webhooks** tab.
3. Click the **Create webhook** button.
4. Select **V2** from the drop-down list.
5. Fill in the form.
6. Click **Create webhook** button to save your changes.

### Required fields

| Field name   | Description                                                  | Required |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------ | -------- |
| URL Address  | URL address to be notified by the webhook.                   | Yes      |
| Content type | Type of content (file/folder) the webhook is configured for. | Yes      |
| Triggers     | Different triggers that activate the webhook.                | Yes      |

## API

<Warning>
  This API requires the application to have the **Manage Webhooks** scope enabled.
</Warning>

To attach a webhook to a folder, call the <Link href="/reference/post-webhooks">create webhook</Link> endpoint with the
type of `folder`, the ID of the folder, a URL to send webhook notifications to,
and a list of <Link href="/guides/webhooks/triggers">triggers</Link>.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/webhooks" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "target": {
           "id": "21322",
           "type": "file"
         },
         "address": "https://example.com/webhooks",
         "triggers": [
           "FILE.PREVIEWED"
         ]
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.webhooks.createWebhook({
    target: {
      id: folder.id,
      type: 'folder' as CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetTypeField,
    } satisfies CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetField,
    address: 'https://example.com/new-webhook',
    triggers: ['FILE.UPLOADED' as CreateWebhookRequestBodyTriggersField],
  } satisfies CreateWebhookRequestBody);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.create_webhook(
      CreateWebhookTarget(id=folder.id, type=CreateWebhookTargetTypeField.FOLDER),
      "https://example.com/new-webhook",
      [CreateWebhookTriggers.FILE_UPLOADED],
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Webhooks.CreateWebhookAsync(requestBody: new CreateWebhookRequestBody(target: new CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetField() { Id = folder.Id, Type = CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetTypeField.Folder }, address: "https://example.com/new-webhook", triggers: Array.AsReadOnly(new [] {new StringEnum<CreateWebhookRequestBodyTriggersField>(CreateWebhookRequestBodyTriggersField.FileUploaded)})));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.webhooks.createWebhook(requestBody: CreateWebhookRequestBody(target: CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetField(id: folder.id, type: CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetTypeField.folder), address: "https://example.com/new-webhook", triggers: [CreateWebhookRequestBodyTriggersField.fileUploaded]))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getWebhooks().createWebhook(new CreateWebhookRequestBody(new CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetField.Builder().id(folder.getId()).type(CreateWebhookRequestBodyTargetTypeField.FOLDER).build(), "https://example.com/new-webhook", Arrays.asList(CreateWebhookRequestBodyTriggersField.FILE_UPLOADED)))
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  // Listen for preview events for a file
  BoxFile file = new BoxFile(api, id);
  BoxWebHook.Info webhookInfo = BoxWebHook.create(file, url, BoxWebHook.Trigger.FILE.PREVIEWED);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  file = client.file(file_id='12345')
  webhook = client.create_webhook(file, ['FILE.PREVIEWED'], 'https://example.com')
  print(f'Webhook ID is {webhook.id} and the address is {webhook.address}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var webhookParams = new BoxWebhookRequest()
  {
      Target = new BoxRequestEntity()
      {
          Type = BoxType.file,
          Id = "22222"
      },
      Triggers = new List<string>()
      {
          "FILE.PREVIEWED"
      },
      Address = "https://example.com/webhook"
  };
  BoxWebhook webhook = await client.WebhooksManager.CreateWebhookAsync(webhookParams);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  // Attach a webhook that sends a notification to https://example.com/webhook when
  //   file 11111 is renamed or downloaded.
  client.webhooks.create(
   '11111',
   client.itemTypes.FILE,
   'https://example.com/webhook',
   [
    client.webhooks.triggerTypes.FILE.RENAMED,
    client.webhooks.triggerTypes.FILE.DOWNLOADED
   ])
   .then(webhook => {
    /* webhook -> {
     id: '12345',
     type: 'webhook',
     target: { id: '11111', type: 'file' },
     created_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' },
     created_at: '2016-05-09T17:41:27-07:00',
     address: 'https://example.com/webhook',
     triggers: [ 'FILE.RENAMED', 'FILE.UPLOADED' ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Note>
  Webhooks do cascade, so if a webhook is set on a parent folder,
  it will also monitor sub-folders for the selected triggers.
</Note>

## Ownership

It is best practice and strongly recommended to create webhooks with a
<Link href="/platform/user-types/#service-account">Service Account</Link>, or user that will not be deleted, to avoid potential
issues with webhook delivery due to loss of access to content.

Similar to files and folders, webhooks are owned by a user. If a user who owns a
webhook is deleted, they will lose access to all files and folders that they
previously had access to. Their webhooks will begin to fail validation, but the
webhook service will continue to send events and require retries.

## Webhook address

The notification URL specified in the `address` parameter must be a valid URL
that you specify when you create a webhook. Every time one of the triggers is
activated, this URL is called.

The notification URL must use standard port `443` and should return
an HTTP status in the range of `200` to `299` within 30 seconds of receiving
the webhook payload.

## Webhook triggers

The triggers are a list of strings that specify the events which cause the
webhook to fire. For example, if you want the webhook to be triggered
when a user uploads a file, use `FILE.UPLOADED`.

You can find a list of available triggers <Link href="/guides/webhooks/triggers">in this guide</Link>.

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/delete-v2



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

You can delete a webhook using the [Developer Console][console] or API.

## Developer Console

To delete a webhook follow the steps below.

1. Navigate to the **Webhooks** tab in the [Developer Console][console].
2. Select the webhook you want to delete by clicking on its ID.
3. Click the **Delete** button.
4. Confirm the action by clicking **Delete** under the warning message.

## API

To remove a webhook from a file or folder, you need to use the
<Link href="/reference/delete-webhooks-id">remove webhook endpoint</Link> with the ID of the webhook. You can
get this value using the <Link href="/reference/get-webhooks">list all webhooks endpoint</Link>.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE "https://api.box.com/2.0/webhooks/3321123" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.webhooks.deleteWebhookById(webhook.id!);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.delete_webhook_by_id(webhook.id)
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Webhooks.DeleteWebhookByIdAsync(webhookId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(webhook.Id));
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.webhooks.deleteWebhookById(webhookId: webhook.id!)
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getWebhooks().deleteWebhookById(webhook.getId())
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  client.webhook(webhook_id='12345').delete()
  print('The webhook was successfully deleted!')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  await client.WebhooksManager.DeleteWebhookAsync("11111");
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.delete('1234')
   .then(() => {
    // deletion succeeded — no value returned
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

## Automatic webhook deletion

Using <Link href="/reference/delete-webhooks-id">this</Link> endpoint is not the only way a webhook can be deleted.

The following reasons can cause webhooks to be deleted.

* Deleting a Box application automatically deletes all webhooks associated with it.
* Deleting all active Access Tokens associated with a webhook automatically deletes the webhook. This includes Developer Tokens and password.
* The last successful notification was delivered 30 days ago to the set URL and the period between the last successful notification delivery and the last user trigger event date exceeds 14 days.

  Let's go through a scenario
  in which the user downloads a file. This action
  triggers the webhook to use the set URL to
  delete a shared link.
  The diagram illustrates this scenario, showing
  when the webhook will be deleted.

  <Frame>
    <img alt="Delete webhooks" />
  </Frame>

  * **User event trigger**: when the user initiated the event, for example downloaded a file.
  * **Notification trigger**: when the notification was sent to the webhook, saying that the file was downloaded.
  * **Last notification delivery**: when the webhook sent a message to a specific URL, for example to delete a shared link.

In all of these cases Box sends a webhook payload with the
`WEBHOOK.DELETED` event name to the notification URL. The body of
the payload
includes the following additional information.

```json theme={null}
"additional_info": {
  "reason": "auto_cleanup"
}
```

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# V2 Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/index



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

## Flow

<Frame>
  <div>
    <img alt="Webhook flow" />
  </div>
</Frame>

When an event triggers a webhook for a file or a folder, it makes a HTTP
call to the `address` specified when the webhook was created.
The payload of this call contains some request headers, and a JSON body.

## Payload headers

The payload sent by a webhook has the following Box-specific headers.

| Header                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                   |
| ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `BOX-DELIVERY-ID`         | A unique ID assigned by Box that identifies the delivered webhook payload. When Box retries a webhook this ID will change, while the ID in the payload body remains the same. |
| `BOX-DELIVERY-TIMESTAMP`  | An RFC-3339 timestamp that identifies when the payload was sent.                                                                                                              |
| `BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY`   | A <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/signatures-v2">signature</Link> created using the primary signature key configured for this webhook.                                        |
| `BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY` | A <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/signatures-v2">signature</Link> created using the secondary signature key configured for this webhook.                                      |
| `BOX-SIGNATURE-VERSION`   | Value is always `1`.                                                                                                                                                          |
| `BOX-SIGNATURE-ALGORITHM` | Value is always `HmacSHA256` .                                                                                                                                                |

For example:

```shell theme={null}
BOX-DELIVERY-ID:          673a081b-bb4b-4d45-b4f1-4131a29c1d07
BOX-DELIVERY-TIMESTAMP:   2016-07-11T10:10:33-07:00
BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY:    isCeDp7mLR41/MjcSEFLag9bWmpJkgmN80Je4VIESdo=
BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY:  1UbiiKS7/2o5vNIlyMh7e5QGCHq8lflWFgEF+YWBugI=
BOX-SIGNATURE-VERSION:    1
BOX-SIGNATURE-ALGORITHM:  HmacSHA256
USER-AGENT:               Box-WH-Client/0.1
```

<Note>
  We recommend <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/signatures-v2">setting up</Link> and <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/signatures-v2">verifying signatures</Link>
  of the webhook payloads.
</Note>

<Warning>
  HTTP header names are case insensitive. Your client should convert
  all header names to a standardized lowercase or uppercase format before trying
  to determine the value of a header.
</Warning>

## Payload body

The body of a webhook payload is a JSON object that describes the file or folder
(target) that triggered the webhook, as well as the event that has been
triggered.

| Field        | Description                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `type`       | Value is always `webhook_event`.                                                                                                                            |
| `id`         | A unique ID assigned by Box that identifies an event. When Box retries a webhook this ID will not change, while the ID in the header changes between calls. |
| `created_at` | The time/date when an event was triggered at.                                                                                                               |
| `trigger`    | The name of the action that triggered an event, for example `FILE.UPLOADED`.                                                                                |
| `webhook`    | The webhook ID for which an event triggered.                                                                                                                |
| `created_by` | The user that triggered an event.                                                                                                                           |
| `source`     | The item that triggered an event, for example the file that was uploaded to the target folder.                                                              |

Example:

```json theme={null}
{
  "type": "webhook_event",
  "id": "eb0c4e06-751f-442c-86f8-fd5bb404dbec",
  "created_at": "2016-07-11T10:10:32-07:00",
  "trigger": "FILE.UPLOADED",
  "webhook": {
    "id": "53",
    "type": "webhook"
  },
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "226067247",
    "name": "John Q. Developer",
    "login": "johnq@dev.name"
  },
  "source": {
    "id": "73835521473",
    "type": "file",
    "file_version": {
      "type": "file_version",
      "id": "78096737033",
      "sha1": "2c61623e86bee78e6ab444af456bccc7a1164095"
    },
    "sequence_id": "0",
    "etag": "0",
    "sha1": "2c61623e86bee78e6ab444af456bccc7a1164095",
    "name": "Test-Image-3.png",
    "description": "",
    "size": 26458,
    "path_collection": {
      "total_count": 4,
      "entries": [
        {
          "type": "folder",
          "id": "0",
          "sequence_id": null,
          "etag": null,
          "name": "All Files"
        },
        {
          "type": "folder",
          "id": "2614853901",
          "sequence_id": "4",
          "etag": "4",
          "name": "Testing"
        },
        {
          "type": "folder",
          "id": "8290186265",
          "sequence_id": "0",
          "etag": "0",
          "name": "Webhooks Base"
        },
        {
          "type": "folder",
          "id": "8290188973",
          "sequence_id": "0",
          "etag": "0",
          "name": "Webhooks"
        }
      ]
    },
    "created_at": "2016-07-11T10:10:32-07:00",
    "modified_at": "2016-07-11T10:10:32-07:00",
    "trashed_at": null,
    "purged_at": null,
    "content_created_at": "2016-06-08T11:14:04-07:00",
    "content_modified_at": "2016-06-08T11:14:04-07:00",
    "created_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "226067247",
      "name": "John Q. Developer",
      "login": "johnq@dev.name"
    },
    "modified_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "226067247",
      "name": "John Q. Developer",
      "login": "johnq@dev.name"
    },
    "owned_by": {
      "type": "user",
      "id": "226067247",
      "name": "John Q. Developer",
      "login": "johnq@dev.name"
    },
    "shared_link": null,
    "parent": {
      "type": "folder",
      "id": "8290188973",
      "sequence_id": "0",
      "etag": "0",
      "name": "Webhooks"
    },
    "item_status": "active"
  },
  "additional_info": []
}
```

## Retries

Delivery of a webhook payload fails when Box does not receive a response with a
HTTP status code in the `200` to `299` range within 30 seconds of sending the
payload.

<Note>
  Box will retry webhook deliveries up to 12 times over a period of 2 hours.
  These numbers could be subject to change.
</Note>

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Limitations
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/limitations-v2



## One webhook per item

There's a limit of one webhook for each item (file or folder), each application
and each authenticated user.

Once a webhook is attached to an item, no second webhook can be attached,
even if the second webhook would respond to a different trigger event.

Example: a webhook is set up by `John Doe` to watch
`FILE.UPLOADED` events in a folder with the name `Junk`, for an application
named `CleanupApp`. At that point, no second webhook can
be added to the `Junk` folder by the `CleanupApp` by `John Doe`, even if it
is to trigger for an `FILE.DOWNLOADED` event.

To listen to another event, <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/update-v2">update</Link> the existing webhook or create a
new application.

## 1000 webhooks limit

There is a limit of 1000 webhooks for each application and each user.

To create more webhooks for a user, create another application or
<Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/update-v2">update existing webhooks</Link> to apply to higher levels in the folder tree.

## Notification URL restrictions

The notification URL or `address` for a webhook must be a valid HTTPS URL that
resolves to a valid IP address. It needs to have a certificate signed
by a reputable certificate authority. Box does not support self-signed SSL
certificates.

The IP address of the server must be publicly accessible from the internet and
cannot be a `(*.)box.com` address. The port used in the URL must be the
standard HTTPS port (`443`). Notifications will not be delivered to other ports.

The supported TLS protocol versions are `TLS 1.2` and `TLS 1.3` with FIPS-compliant cipher suites.

## No webhooks on root folder

V2 webhooks cannot be created on the root folder, which is the folder with ID
`0`. Instead, you will need to use a <Link href="/guides/webhooks/v1">v1 webhook</Link>.

<Note>
  When the permissions on an item prevent an action from occurring,
  no notification is sent for the attempted action.
</Note>

## `NO_ACTIVE_SESSION` is set in the webhook payload

If the auth session (access token) for the app you used to create a webhook
expires, that webhook no longer sends events with a full payload. In that
case, the event trigger is `NO_ACTIVE_SESSION`.

### JWT Auth

For webhooks created with the JWT Auth app, the session expires when
you delete the app authorization for this app in the Admin Console.
For more information, see [application authorization guide][app authorization].

### OAuth 2.0

For webhooks created with OAuth 2.0 Auth app, the session expires
when both the access token and the refresh token for the user and app
used for creating that webhook expire.

### Developer token

As the developer token cannot be refreshed and expires after 1 hour,
the event trigger `NO_ACTIVE_SESSION` is set in the webhook payload
after 1 hour.

## Reasons for webhook deletion

The following reasons can cause webhooks to be deleted.

1. Deleting a Box application automatically deletes all webhooks associated with it.
2. Deleting all active Access Tokens associated with a webhook automatically deletes the webhook. This includes Developer Tokens and password.
3. A webhook is automatically deleted if the last successful delivery was 30 days ago and the period between the last successful delivery and the last trigger date is more than 14 days.

In all of these cases Box sends a webhook payload with the
`WEBHOOK.DELETED` event name to the notification URL. The body of the payload
includes the following additional information.

```json theme={null}
"additional_info": {
  "reason": "auto_cleanup"
}
```

[app authorization]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360043697014-Authorizing-Apps-in-the-Box-App-Approval-Process

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# List Webhooks for a User
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/list-v2



To fetch all webhooks for the authenticated user, use the <Link href="/reference/get-webhooks">list all webhooks</Link>
endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/webhooks" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.webhooks.getWebhooks();
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.get_webhooks()
  ```

  ```cs .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Webhooks.GetWebhooksAsync();
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.webhooks.getWebhooks()
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getWebhooks().getWebhooks()
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  Iterable<BoxWebHook.Info> webhooks = BoxWebHook.all(api);
  for (BoxWebHook.Info webhookInfo: webhooks) {
      // Do something with the webhook.
  }
  ```

  ```python Python v4 theme={null}
  webhooks = client.get_webhooks()
  for webhook in webhooks:
      print(f'The webhook ID is {webhook.id} and the address is {webhook.address}')
  ```

  ```cs .NET v6 theme={null}
  BoxCollectionMarkerBased<BoxWebhook> webhooks = await client.WebhooksManager.GetWebhooksAsync();
  ```

  ```javascript Node v4 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.getAll()
  	.then(webhooks => {
  		/* webhooks -> {
  			next_marker: 'ZmlQZS0xLTE%3D',
  			entries: 
  			[ { id: '1234',
  				type: 'webhook',
  				target: { id: '22222', type: 'folder' } },
  				{ id: '5678',
  				type: 'webhook',
  				target: { id: '11111', type: 'file' } } ],
  			limit: 2 }
  		*/
  	});
  ```
</CodeGroup>

<Warning>
  This endpoint requires the application to have the **Manage Webhooks** scope
  enabled.
</Warning>

This API call will only list the webhooks for the authenticated user, not
for any other users in the enterprise.

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Signature Verification
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/signatures-v2



Webhook signatures help ensure that a webhook payload was sent by Box and was
not tampered with. Signatures greatly reduce the likelihood of
a successful man-in-the-middle or replay attacks.

When signatures are configured, Box generates a cryptographic digest of the
notification's body and attaches it to the header of the webhook payload. When
your application receives the payload, verify the signatures by calculating the
same digest and comparing it to the one received. If the digests do not match,
the payload should not be trusted.

You can achieve an extra level of protection by frequently changing the
signature keys. To enable a smooth transition between the old and new keys,
Box supports two simultaneous signature keys.

## Signature configuration

In order to attach signatures to an application's notifications, you must first
generate signature keys for the application.

To configure your application's keys follow the steps below.

1. Navigate to the application in the developer console.
2. Click on the **Webhooks** tab.
3. Click the **Manage signature keys** button.
4. Click the **Generate Key** button to configure your keys.

Once generating the primary or secondary key, copy the value. You will need
it to verify the webhook payloads. Every webhook will now include a
`BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY` and `BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY` header payload.

## Signature verification with SDKs

Although it is possible to verify signatures manually, methods are provided for
your convenience in the <Link href="/guides/tooling/sdks">official Box SDKs</Link>.

## Manual signature verification

The following steps describe the basics of how to verify a signature.

### Timestamp validation

Check if the timestamp in the `BOX-DELIVERY-TIMESTAMP` header of the payload is
not older than ten minutes.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    var timestamp = headers['BOX-DELIVERY-TIMESTAMP'];
    var date = Date.parse(timestamp);
    var expired = Date.now() - date > 10*60*1000;
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Python">
    ```python theme={null}
    import dateutil.parser
    import pytz
    import datetime

    timestamp = headers["BOX-DELIVERY-TIMESTAMP"]
    date = dateutil.parser.parse(timestamp).astimezone(pytz.utc)

    now = datetime.datetime.now(pytz.utc)
    delta = datetime.timedelta(minutes=10)
    expiry_date = now - deltaMinutes

    expired = date >= expiry_date
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

### Calculate HMAC signature

Calculate the HMAC of the payload using either one of the two configured
signatures for the application in the [Developer Console][console].

Ensure you append the bytes of the payload body first, and then the bytes
of the timestamp found in the `BOX-DELIVERY-TIMESTAMP` header.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    var crypto = require('crypto');

    var primaryKey = '...';
    var secondaryKey = '...';

    var payload = '{"type":"webhook_event"...}';

    var hmac1 = crypto.createHmac('sha256', primaryKey);
    hmac1.update(payload);
    hmac1.update(timestamp);

    var hmac2 = crypto.createHmac('sha256', secondaryKey);
    hmac2.update(payload);
    hmac2.update(timestamp);
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Python">
    ```python theme={null}
    import hmac
    import hashlib

    primary_key = '...'
    secondary_key = '...'

    payload = "{\"type\":\"webhook_event\"...}"

    bytes = bytes(payload, 'utf-8') + bytes(timestamp, 'utf-8')

    hmac1 = hmac.new(primary_key, bytes, hashlib.sha256).digest()
    hmac2 = hmac.new(secondary_key, bytes, hashlib.sha256).digest()
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

### Base64 Conversion

Convert the HMAC to a `Base64` encoded digest.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    var digest1 = hmac1.digest('base64');
    var digest2 = hmac2.digest('base64');
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Python">
    ```python theme={null}
    import base64

    digest1 = base64.b64encode(hmac1)
    digest2 = base64.b64encode(hmac2)
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

### Signature comparison

Compare the encoded digest with the value of the
`BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY` or `BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY` headers.

Compare the value of the `BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY` header
to the digest created with the primary key, and the value of the
`BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY` header to the digest created with the secondary key.
Make sure to use a timing-safe comparison between signatures to prevent timing attacks.

<Tabs>
  <Tab title="Node">
    ```js theme={null}
    const crypto = require('crypto');

    function compareSignatures(expectedSignature, receivedSignature) {
        const expectedBuffer = Buffer.from(expectedSignature, 'base64');
        const receivedBuffer = Buffer.from(receivedSignature, 'base64');

        if (expectedBuffer.length !== receivedBuffer.length) {
            return false;
        }

        return crypto.timingSafeEqual(expectedBuffer, receivedBuffer);
    }

    const signature1 = headers['BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY'];
    const signature2 = headers['BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY'];

    const primarySignatureValid = compareSignatures(digest1, signature1)
    const secondarySignatureValid = compareSignatures(digest2, signature2)

    const valid = !expired && (primarySignatureValid || secondarySignatureValid)
    ```
  </Tab>

  <Tab title="Python">
    ```python theme={null}
    import hmac

    def compare_signatures(expected_signature: Optional[str], received_signature: Optional[str]) -> bool:
        if not expected_signature or not received_signature:
            return False
        if len(expected_signature) != len(received_signature):
            return False
        return hmac.compare_digest(expected_signature, received_signature)

    signature1 = headers["BOX-SIGNATURE-SECONDARY"]
    signature2 = headers["BOX-SIGNATURE-PRIMARY"]

    primary_sig_valid = compare_signatures(digest1, signature1)
    secondary_sig_valid = compare_signatures(digest2, signature2)

    valid = not expired and (primary_sig_valid or secondary_sig_valid)
    ```
  </Tab>
</Tabs>

<Warning>
  HTTP header names are case insensitive. Your client should convert
  all header names to a standardized lowercase or uppercase format before trying
  to determine the value of a header.
</Warning>

## Rotate signatures

When enabled, Box sends two signatures with every webhook payload.
Your application can trust a payload as long as at least one of its signatures
is valid. When updating one signature key at a time your application will always
receive a payload with at least one valid signature.

### Rotation steps

These instructions assume that you have already created a primary and secondary
key in the [Developer Console][console] and you are ready to replace either of
them.

By following these steps you can configure your application with two new keys
without any conflicts.

1. Go to the **Webhooks** tab in the [Developer Console][console].
2. Click the **Manage signatures keys**.
3. Click the **Reset** button to change the primary key.
4. Update your application with the new primary key. Your application can still receive notifications with the old primary key, but your webhooks should be processed correctly since the secondary key is still valid.
5. Once you are confident that no webhooks with the old primary key are in-flight, you can update the secondary key using the same process.

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />


# Update Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/webhooks/v2/update-v2



<RelatedLinks title="REQUIRED GUIDES" />

You can update a webhook using the [Developer Console][console] or API.

## Developer Console

To update a webhook in the [Developer Console][console], follow the steps below.

1. Go to the **Webhooks** tab in the [Developer Console][console] to display all webhooks.
2. Select the webhook you want to update by clicking on its ID.
3. Click the **Edit webhook** button.
4. Fill in the data you want to update.
5. Click the **Update** button to save your changes.

<Note>
  The list of webhooks contains the following fields:
  **ID**, **Address**, **Content**, **Created by**,
  and **Created date**.
</Note>

## API

To update a webhook, use the <Link href="/reference/put-webhooks-id">update webhook</Link> endpoint,
which requires the webhook ID. To find the ID of the webhook, use the
<Link href="/guides/webhooks/v2/list-v2">list all webhooks</Link> endpoint.

<CodeGroup>
  ```sh cURL theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/webhooks/3321123" \
       -H "authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "content-type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "triggers": [
           "FILE.DOWNLOADED"
         ]
       }'
  ```

  ```typescript Node/TypeScript v10 theme={null}
  await client.webhooks.updateWebhookById(webhook.id!, {
    requestBody: {
      address: 'https://example.com/updated-webhook',
    } satisfies UpdateWebhookByIdRequestBody,
  } satisfies UpdateWebhookByIdOptionalsInput);
  ```

  ```python Python v10 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.update_webhook_by_id(
      webhook.id, address="https://example.com/updated-webhook"
  )
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v10 theme={null}
  await client.Webhooks.UpdateWebhookByIdAsync(webhookId: NullableUtils.Unwrap(webhook.Id), requestBody: new UpdateWebhookByIdRequestBody() { Address = "https://example.com/updated-webhook" });
  ```

  ```swift Swift v10 theme={null}
  try await client.webhooks.updateWebhookById(webhookId: webhook.id!, requestBody: UpdateWebhookByIdRequestBody(address: "https://example.com/updated-webhook"))
  ```

  ```java Java v10 theme={null}
  client.getWebhooks().updateWebhookById(webhook.getId(), new UpdateWebhookByIdRequestBody.Builder().address("https://example.com/updated-webhook").build())
  ```

  ```java Java v5 theme={null}
  BoxWebHook webhook = new BoxWebHook(api, id);
  BoxWebHook.Info info = webhook.new Info();
  info.setAddress(url);
  webhook.update(info);
  ```

  ```py Python v4 theme={null}
  update_object = {
      'triggers': ['FILE.COPIED'],
      'address': 'https://newexample.com',
  }
  webhook = client.webhook(webhook_id='12345').update_info(data=update_object)
  print(f'Updated the webhook info for triggers: {webhook.triggers} and address: {webhook.address}')
  ```

  ```csharp .NET v6 theme={null}
  var updates = new BoxWebhookRequest()
  {
      Id = "12345",
      Address = "https://example.com/webhooks/fileActions
  };
  BoxWebhook updatedWebhook = await client.WebhooksManager.UpdateWebhookAsync(updates);
  ```

  ```js Node v4 theme={null}
  client.webhooks.update('678901', {address: "https://example.com/webhooks/fileActions"})
   .then(webhook => {
    /* webhook -> {
     id: '1234',
     type: 'webhook',
     target: { id: '22222', type: 'folder' },
     created_by: 
     { type: 'user',
      id: '33333',
      name: 'Example User',
      login: 'user@example.com' },
     created_at: '2016-05-09T17:41:27-07:00',
     address: 'https://example.com/webhooks/fileActions',
     triggers: [ 'FILE.DOWNLOADED', 'FILE.UPLOADED' ] }
    */
   });
  ```
</CodeGroup>

[console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED APIS" />

<RelatedLinks title="RELATED GUIDES" />


# Delete archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/delete-archives-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json delete /archives/{archive_id}
Permanently deletes an archive.

To learn more about the archive APIs, see the [Archive API Guide](https://developer.box.com/guides/archives).

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List archives
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-archives

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /archives
Retrieves archives for an enterprise.

To learn more about the archive APIs, see the [Archive API Guide](https://developer.box.com/guides/archives).

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Doc Gen jobs by batch ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-batch-jobs-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_batch_jobs/{batch_id}
Lists Box Doc Gen jobs in a batch.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all Box Doc Gen jobs
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-jobs

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_jobs
Lists all Box Doc Gen jobs for a user.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Doc Gen job by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-jobs-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_jobs/{job_id}
Get details of the Box Doc Gen job.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# API Reference
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/index



<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Archives" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/archive" icon="archive">
    Create and manage Box Archive resources
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Doc Gen" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-batch--base" icon="file-lines">
    Generate documents programmatically from templates
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Doc Gen templates" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-tag" icon="file-lines">
    Manage document generation templates
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Hub Collaborations" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-collaboration" icon="share-nodes">
    Manage collaborations for Box Hubs
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Hub Items" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-item" icon="share-nodes">
    Manage items within Box Hubs
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Hubs" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub" icon="share-nodes">
    Create and manage Box Hubs
  </Card>

  <Card title="Enterprise Configurations" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/enterprise-configuration-content-and-sharing" icon="building">
    Configure enterprise-wide settings
  </Card>

  <Card title="External Users" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/external-users-submit-delete-job-response" icon="person">
    Manage external user access
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shield lists" href="/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list-content--country" icon="shield">
    Manage access control lists
  </Card>
</CardGroup>


# Create archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-archives

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /archives
Creates an archive.

To learn more about the archive APIs, see the [Archive API Guide](https://developer.box.com/guides/archives).

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Generate document using Box Doc Gen template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-docgen-batches

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /docgen_batches
Generates a document using a Box Doc Gen template.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/put-archives-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json put /archives/{archive_id}
Updates an archive.

To learn more about the archive APIs, see the [Archive API Guide](https://developer.box.com/guides/archives).

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/archive





# Archives
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/archives





# Box Doc Gen batch (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-batch--base





# Box Doc Gen job
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-job





# Box Doc Gen job (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-job--base





# Box Doc Gen job (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-job--full





# Box Doc Gen jobs
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-jobs





# Box Doc Gen jobs (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-jobs--full





# Box Doc Gen template tag
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-tag





# Box Doc Gen tags
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-tags





# Box Doc Gen tags processing message
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-tags-processing-message





# Box Doc Gen template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-template





# Box Doc Gen templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/docgen-templates





# Delete AI agent
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-ai-agents-id

box-openapi.json delete /ai_agents/{agent_id}
Deletes an AI agent using the provided parameters.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get AI agent default configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-ai-agent-default

box-openapi.json get /ai_agent_default
Get the AI agent default config.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List AI agents
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-ai-agents

box-openapi.json get /ai_agents
Lists AI agents based on the provided parameters.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get AI agent by agent ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-ai-agents-id

box-openapi.json get /ai_agents/{agent_id}
Gets an AI Agent using the `agent_id` parameter.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Authorize user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-authorize

box-openapi.json get /authorize
Authorize a user by sending them through the [Box](https://box.com) website and request their permission to act on their behalf.

This is the first step when authenticating a user using OAuth 2.0. To request a user's authorization to use the Box APIs on their behalf you will need to send a user to the URL with this format.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List file app item associations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-app-item-associations

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/app_item_associations
**This is a beta feature, which means that its availability might be limited.** Returns all app items the file is associated with. This includes app items associated with ancestors of the file. Assuming the context user has access to the file, the type/ids are revealed even if the context user does not have **View** permission on the app item.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List folder app item associations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-app-item-associations

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/app_item_associations
**This is a beta feature, which means that its availability might be limited.** Returns all app items the folder is associated with. This includes app items associated with ancestors of the folder. Assuming the context user has access to the folder, the type/ids are revealed even if the context user does not have **View** permission on the app item.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List Box Sign requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-sign-requests

box-openapi.json get /sign_requests
Gets signature requests created by a user. If the `sign_files` and/or `parent_folder` are deleted, the signature request will not return in the list.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Sign request by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-sign-requests-id

box-openapi.json get /sign_requests/{sign_request_id}
Gets a sign request by ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List Box Sign templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-sign-templates

box-openapi.json get /sign_templates
Gets Box Sign templates created by a user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Sign template by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-sign-templates-id

box-openapi.json get /sign_templates/{template_id}
Fetches details of a specific Box Sign template.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# API Reference
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/index



<CardGroup>
  <Card title="AI" href="/reference/post-ai-ask" icon="sparkles">
    AI-powered features for asking questions and extracting data
  </Card>

  <Card title="AI Studio" href="/reference/post-ai-agents" icon="sparkles">
    Build and manage custom AI agents
  </Card>

  <Card title="App item associations" href="/reference/get-files-id-app-item-associations" icon="book">
    Associate app items with files and folders
  </Card>

  <Card title="Authorization" href="/reference/get-authorize" icon="fingerprint">
    OAuth 2.0 authorization and token management
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Sign requests" href="/reference/post-sign-requests-id-cancel" icon="pen-fancy">
    Create and manage e-signature requests
  </Card>

  <Card title="Box Sign templates" href="/reference/get-sign-templates-id" icon="pen-fancy">
    Manage reusable e-signature templates
  </Card>

  <Card title="Classifications" href="/reference/put-metadata-templates-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo-schema--add" icon="tag">
    Define and manage security classifications
  </Card>

  <Card title="Classifications on files" href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo" icon="tag">
    Apply classifications to files
  </Card>

  <Card title="Classifications on folders" href="/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo" icon="tag">
    Apply classifications to folders
  </Card>

  <Card title="Collaborations" href="/reference/post-collaborations" icon="handshake">
    Create and manage file/folder collaborations
  </Card>

  <Card title="Collaborations (List)" href="/reference/get-files-id-collaborations" icon="handshake">
    List collaborations for users, files, folders, and groups
  </Card>

  <Card title="Collections" href="/reference/get-collections-id" icon="folder-open">
    Organize content into collections
  </Card>

  <Card title="Comments" href="/reference/post-comments" icon="message">
    Add and manage comments on files
  </Card>

  <Card title="Device pinners" href="/reference/get-device-pinners-id" icon="mobile">
    Manage device pinning for offline access
  </Card>

  <Card title="Domain restrictions (User exemptions)" href="/reference/post-collaboration-whitelist-exempt-targets" icon="sparkles">
    Exempt users from domain restrictions
  </Card>

  <Card title="Domain restrictions for collaborations" href="/reference/post-collaboration-whitelist-entries" icon="sparkles">
    Restrict collaborations to specific domains
  </Card>

  <Card title="Downloads" href="/reference/get-files-id-content" icon="download">
    Download file content
  </Card>

  <Card title="Email aliases" href="/reference/post-users-id-email-aliases" icon="sparkles">
    Manage user email aliases
  </Card>

  <Card title="Events" href="/reference/options-events" icon="bell">
    Monitor Box events and activity
  </Card>

  <Card title="File requests" href="/reference/post-file-requests-id-copy" icon="file">
    Create and manage file upload requests
  </Card>

  <Card title="File version legal holds" href="/reference/get-file-version-legal-holds-id" icon="file">
    Apply legal holds to specific file versions
  </Card>

  <Card title="File version retentions" href="/reference/get-file-version-retentions-id" icon="file">
    Manage retention policies for file versions
  </Card>

  <Card title="File versions" href="/reference/get-files-id-versions-id" icon="file">
    Access and manage file version history
  </Card>

  <Card title="Files" href="/reference/post-files-id-copy" icon="file">
    Core file operations and management
  </Card>

  <Card title="Folder Locks" href="/reference/post-folder-locks" icon="folder">
    Lock folders to prevent modifications
  </Card>

  <Card title="Folders" href="/reference/post-folders-id-copy" icon="folder">
    Core folder operations and management
  </Card>

  <Card title="Group memberships" href="/reference/post-group-memberships" icon="users">
    Manage user membership in groups
  </Card>

  <Card title="Groups" href="/reference/post-groups" icon="users">
    Create and manage user groups
  </Card>

  <Card title="Integration mappings" href="/reference/post-integration-mappings-slack" icon="link">
    Map Box users to external integrations
  </Card>

  <Card title="Invites" href="/reference/post-invites" icon="user-plus">
    Invite users to join Box
  </Card>

  <Card title="Legal hold policies" href="/reference/post-legal-hold-policies" icon="scale-balanced">
    Define and manage legal hold policies
  </Card>

  <Card title="Legal hold policy assignments" href="/reference/post-legal-hold-policy-assignments" icon="scale-balanced">
    Apply legal hold policies to content
  </Card>

  <Card title="Metadata cascade policies" href="/reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies" icon="tag">
    Auto-apply metadata to folder contents
  </Card>

  <Card title="Metadata instances (Files)" href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-id-id" icon="file">
    Manage metadata on files
  </Card>

  <Card title="Metadata instances (Folders)" href="/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-id-id" icon="folder">
    Manage metadata on folders
  </Card>

  <Card title="Metadata templates" href="/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema" icon="tag">
    Define custom metadata schemas
  </Card>

  <Card title="Recent items" href="/reference/get-recent-items" icon="book">
    Access recently accessed items
  </Card>

  <Card title="Retention policies" href="/reference/post-retention-policies" icon="hourglass-end">
    Define content retention policies
  </Card>

  <Card title="Retention policy assignments" href="/reference/post-retention-policy-assignments" icon="hourglass-end">
    Apply retention policies to content
  </Card>

  <Card title="Search" href="/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read" icon="magnifying-glass">
    Search for files and folders
  </Card>

  <Card title="Session termination" href="/reference/post-groups-terminate-sessions" icon="clock">
    Terminate user or group sessions
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shared links (App Items)" href="/reference/get-shared-items--app-items" icon="share-nodes">
    Access app items via shared links
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shared links (Files)" href="/reference/put-files-id--add-shared-link" icon="file">
    Create and manage shared links for files
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shared links (Folders)" href="/reference/put-folders-id--add-shared-link" icon="folder">
    Create and manage shared links for folders
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shared links (Web Links)" href="/reference/put-web-links-id--add-shared-link" icon="share-nodes">
    Access web links via shared links
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shield information barrier reports" href="/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-reports" icon="shield">
    Generate reports on information barriers
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shield information barrier segment members" href="/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-segment-members" icon="shield">
    Manage users in barrier segments
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shield information barrier segment restrictions" href="/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-segment-restrictions" icon="shield">
    Define restrictions between segments
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shield information barrier segments" href="/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-segments" icon="shield">
    Create and manage barrier segments
  </Card>

  <Card title="Shield information barriers" href="/reference/post-shield-information-barriers-change-status" icon="shield">
    Implement information barriers for compliance
  </Card>

  <Card title="Skills" href="/reference/post-files-id-metadata-global-boxSkillsCards" icon="brain">
    Apply AI-powered skills to files
  </Card>

  <Card title="Standard and Zones Storage Policies" href="/reference/get-storage-policies-id" icon="hard-drive">
    Manage storage location policies
  </Card>

  <Card title="Standard and Zones Storage Policy Assignments" href="/reference/post-storage-policy-assignments" icon="hard-drive">
    Assign storage policies to users
  </Card>

  <Card title="Task assignments" href="/reference/post-task-assignments" icon="list-check">
    Assign tasks to users
  </Card>

  <Card title="Tasks" href="/reference/post-tasks" icon="list-check">
    Create and manage file-based tasks
  </Card>

  <Card title="Terms of service" href="/reference/post-terms-of-services" icon="file-contract">
    Define enterprise terms of service
  </Card>

  <Card title="Terms of service user statuses" href="/reference/post-terms-of-service-user-statuses" icon="file-contract">
    Track user acceptance of terms
  </Card>

  <Card title="Transfer folders" href="/reference/put-users-id-folders-0" icon="folder">
    Transfer folder ownership between users
  </Card>

  <Card title="Trashed files" href="/reference/get-files-id-trash" icon="file">
    Manage files in trash
  </Card>

  <Card title="Trashed folders" href="/reference/get-folders-id-trash" icon="folder">
    Manage folders in trash
  </Card>

  <Card title="Trashed items" href="/reference/get-folders-trash-items" icon="trash">
    List all items in trash
  </Card>

  <Card title="Trashed web links" href="/reference/get-web-links-id-trash" icon="trash">
    Manage web links in trash
  </Card>

  <Card title="Uploads" href="/reference/options-files-content" icon="cloud-arrow-up">
    Upload files to Box
  </Card>

  <Card title="Uploads (Chunked)" href="/reference/post-files-upload-sessions-id-commit" icon="cloud-arrow-up">
    Upload large files in chunks
  </Card>

  <Card title="User avatars" href="/reference/post-users-id-avatar" icon="person">
    Manage user profile images
  </Card>

  <Card title="Users" href="/reference/post-users" icon="person">
    Create and manage users
  </Card>

  <Card title="Watermarks (Files)" href="/reference/put-files-id-watermark" icon="file">
    Apply watermarks to files
  </Card>

  <Card title="Watermarks (Folders)" href="/reference/put-folders-id-watermark" icon="folder">
    Apply watermarks to folders
  </Card>

  <Card title="Web links" href="/reference/post-web-links" icon="globe">
    Create and manage bookmarks
  </Card>

  <Card title="Webhooks" href="/reference/post-webhooks" icon="webhook">
    Configure real-time event notifications
  </Card>

  <Card title="Workflows" href="/reference/get-workflows" icon="zap">
    Trigger and manage Box Relay workflows
  </Card>

  <Card title="Zip Downloads" href="/reference/post-zip-downloads" icon="download">
    Download multiple items as zip archives
  </Card>
</CardGroup>


# Create AI agent
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-agents

box-openapi.json post /ai_agents
Creates an AI agent. At least one of the following capabilities must be provided: `ask`, `text_gen`, `extract`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Ask question
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask

box-openapi.json post /ai/ask
Sends an AI request to supported LLMs and returns an answer specifically focused on the user's question given the provided context.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Extract metadata (freeform)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-extract

box-openapi.json post /ai/extract
Sends an AI request to supported Large Language Models (LLMs) and extracts metadata in form of key-value pairs. In this request, both the prompt and the output can be freeform. Metadata template setup before sending the request is not required.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Extract metadata (structured)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-extract-structured

box-openapi.json post /ai/extract_structured
Sends an AI request to supported Large Language Models (LLMs) and returns extracted metadata as a set of key-value pairs.

To define the extraction structure, provide either a metadata template or a list of fields. To learn more about creating templates, see [Creating metadata templates in the Admin Console](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates) or use the [metadata template API](https://developer.box.com/guides/metadata/templates/create).

This endpoint also supports [Enhanced Extract Agent](https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-metadata-structured#enhanced-extract-agent).

For information about supported file formats and languages, see the [Extract metadata from file (structured)](https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/extract-metadata-structured) API guide.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Generate text
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-text-gen

box-openapi.json post /ai/text_gen
Sends an AI request to supported Large Language Models (LLMs) and returns generated text based on the provided prompt.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Revoke access token
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-oauth2-revoke

box-openapi.json post /oauth2/revoke
Revoke an active Access Token, effectively logging a user out that has been previously authenticated.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Request access token
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-oauth2-token

box-openapi.json post /oauth2/token
Request an Access Token using either a client-side obtained OAuth 2.0 authorization code or a server-side JWT assertion.

An Access Token is a string that enables Box to verify that a request belongs to an authorized session. In the normal order of operations you will begin by requesting authentication from the [authorize](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-authorize) endpoint and Box will send you an authorization code.

You will then send this code to this endpoint to exchange it for an Access Token. The returned Access Token can then be used to to make Box API calls.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Refresh access token
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-oauth2-token--refresh

box-openapi.json post /oauth2/token#refresh
Refresh an Access Token using its client ID, secret, and refresh token.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Box Sign request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-sign-requests

box-openapi.json post /sign_requests
Creates a signature request. This involves preparing a document for signing and sending the signature request to signers.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Cancel Box Sign request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-sign-requests-id-cancel

box-openapi.json post /sign_requests/{sign_request_id}/cancel
Cancels a sign request.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Resend Box Sign request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-sign-requests-id-resend

box-openapi.json post /sign_requests/{sign_request_id}/resend
Resends a signature request email to all outstanding signers.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update AI agent
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-ai-agents-id

box-openapi.json put /ai_agents/{agent_id}
Updates an AI agent.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Access token
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/access-token





# AI agent for question requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-agent-ask





# AI agent for extract requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-agent-extract





# AI agent for structured extract request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-agent-extract-structured





# AI agent reference
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-agent-reference





# AI agent for text generation requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-agent-text-gen





# AI extract response
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-extract-response





# AI extract structured response
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-extract-structured-response





# AI agents list
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-multiple-agent-response





# AI response
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-response





# AI response (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-response--full





# AI agent
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-single-agent-response





# AI agent (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-single-agent-response--full





# AI agent capability ask request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-studio-agent-ask





# AI agent capability ask
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-studio-agent-ask-response





# AI agent capability extract request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-studio-agent-extract





# AI agent capability extract
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-studio-agent-extract-response





# AI agent capability text generation request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-studio-agent-text-gen





# AI agent capability text generation
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/ai-studio-agent-text-gen-response





# App item
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/app-item





# App item association
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/app-item-association





# App item associations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/app-item-associations





# OAuth 2.0 error
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/oauth2-error





# Box Sign request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/sign-request





# Box Sign requests
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/sign-requests





# Box Sign template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/sign-template





# Box Sign templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/sign-templates





# Delete Box Doc Gen template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/delete-docgen-templates-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json delete /docgen_templates/{template_id}
Unmarks file as Box Doc Gen template.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove Box Hub collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/delete-hub-collaborations-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json delete /hub_collaborations/{hub_collaboration_id}
Deletes a single Box Hub collaboration.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete Box Hub
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/delete-hubs-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json delete /hubs/{hub_id}
Deletes a single Box Hub.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete single shield list by shield list id
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/delete-shield-lists-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json delete /shield_lists/{shield_list_id}
Delete a single shield list by its ID.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get list of all Box Doc Gen jobs for template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-template-jobs-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_template_jobs/{template_id}
Lists the users jobs which use this template.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List Box Doc Gen templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-templates

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_templates
Lists Box Doc Gen templates on which the user is a collaborator.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Doc Gen template by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-templates-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_templates/{template_id}
Lists details of a specific Box Doc Gen template.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all Box Doc Gen template tags in template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-docgen-templates-id-tags

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /docgen_templates/{template_id}/tags
Lists all tags in a Box Doc Gen template.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get enterprise configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-enterprise-configurations-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /enterprise_configurations/{enterprise_id}
Retrieves the configuration for an enterprise.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all Box Hubs for requesting enterprise
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-enterprise-hubs

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /enterprise_hubs
Retrieves all Box Hubs for a given enterprise.

Admins or Hub Co-admins of an enterprise with GCM scope can make this call.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Hub collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-hub-collaborations

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /hub_collaborations
Retrieves all collaborations for a Box Hub.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Hub collaboration by collaboration ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-hub-collaborations-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /hub_collaborations/{hub_collaboration_id}
Retrieves details for a Box Hub collaboration by collaboration ID.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Hub items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-hub-items

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /hub_items
Retrieves all items associated with a Box Hub.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all Box Hubs
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-hubs

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /hubs
Retrieves all Box Hubs for requesting user.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get Box Hub information by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-hubs-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /hubs/{hub_id}
Retrieves details for a Box Hub by its ID.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get all shield lists in enterprise
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-shield-lists

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /shield_lists
Retrieves all shield lists in the enterprise.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get single shield list by shield list id
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/get-shield-lists-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json get /shield_lists/{shield_list_id}
Retrieves a single shield list by its ID.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Box Doc Gen template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-docgen-templates

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /docgen_templates
Marks a file as a Box Doc Gen template.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Submit job to delete external users
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-external-users-submit-delete-job

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /external_users/submit_delete_job
Delete external users from current user enterprise. This will remove each external user from all invited collaborations within the current enterprise.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Box Hub collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-hub-collaborations

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /hub_collaborations
Adds a collaboration for a single user or a single group to a Box Hub.

Collaborations can be created using email address, user IDs, or group IDs.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Box Hub
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-hubs

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /hubs
Creates a new Box Hub.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Copy Box Hub
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-hubs-id-copy

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /hubs/{hub_id}/copy
Creates a copy of a Box Hub.

The original Box Hub will not be modified.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Manage Box Hub items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-hubs-id-manage-items

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /hubs/{hub_id}/manage_items
Adds and/or removes Box Hub items from a Box Hub.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create shield list
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/post-shield-lists

box-openapi-v2025.0.json post /shield_lists
Creates a shield list.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update Box Hub collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/put-hub-collaborations-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json put /hub_collaborations/{hub_collaboration_id}
Updates a Box Hub collaboration. Can be used to change the Box Hub role.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update Box Hub information by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/put-hubs-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json put /hubs/{hub_id}
Updates a Box Hub. Can be used to change title, description, or Box Hub settings.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update shield list
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/put-shield-lists-id

box-openapi-v2025.0.json put /shield_lists/{shield_list_id}
Updates a shield list.

<Note>
  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Enterprise configuration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/enterprise-configuration





# Enterprise configuration content and sharing
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/enterprise-configuration-content-and-sharing





# Enterprise configuration security
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/enterprise-configuration-security





# Enterprise configuration shield
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/enterprise-configuration-shield





# Enterprise configuration user settings
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/enterprise-configuration-user-settings





# External Users Submit Delete Job Response
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/external-users-submit-delete-job-response





# Box Hub
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub





# Box Hub (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub--base





# Box Hub Collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-collaboration





# Box Hub Collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-collaborations





# Box Hub Item
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-item





# Box Hub Items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-items





# Box Hub Items Manage Response
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-items-manage-response





# Box Hubs
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hubs





# Shield List
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list





# Shield List (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list--mini





# Shield List Content (Country)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list-content--country





# Shield List Content (Domain)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list-content--domains





# Shield List Content (Email)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list-content--email





# Shield List Content (Integration)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list-content--integration





# Shield List Content (IP)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-list-content--ip





# List of Shield Lists
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/shield-lists





# Remove domain from list of allowed collaboration domains
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-collaboration-whitelist-entries-id

box-openapi.json delete /collaboration_whitelist_entries/{collaboration_whitelist_entry_id}
Removes a domain from the list of domains that have been deemed safe to create collaborations for within the current enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove user from list of users exempt from domain restrictions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-collaboration-whitelist-exempt-targets-id

box-openapi.json delete /collaboration_whitelist_exempt_targets/{collaboration_whitelist_exempt_target_id}
Removes a user's exemption from the restrictions set out by the allowed list of domains for collaborations.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-collaborations-id

box-openapi.json delete /collaborations/{collaboration_id}
Deletes a single collaboration.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove comment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-comments-id

box-openapi.json delete /comments/{comment_id}
Permanently deletes a comment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove device pin
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-device-pinners-id

box-openapi.json delete /device_pinners/{device_pinner_id}
Deletes an individual device pin.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete file request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-file-requests-id

box-openapi.json delete /file_requests/{file_request_id}
Deletes a file request permanently.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}
Deletes a file, either permanently or by moving it to the trash.

The enterprise settings determine whether the item will be permanently deleted from Box or moved to the trash.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove classification from file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Removes any classifications from a file.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/files/:id//enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove file version
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id-versions-id

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}/versions/{file_version_id}
Move a file version to the trash.

Versions are only tracked for Box users with premium accounts.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove classification from folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-folders-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json delete /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Removes any classifications from a folder.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/folders/:id/enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove email alias
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-users-id-email-aliases-id

box-openapi.json delete /users/{user_id}/email_aliases/{email_alias_id}
Removes an email alias from a user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List allowed collaboration domains
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collaboration-whitelist-entries

box-openapi.json get /collaboration_whitelist_entries
Returns the list domains that have been deemed safe to create collaborations for within the current enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get allowed collaboration domain
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collaboration-whitelist-entries-id

box-openapi.json get /collaboration_whitelist_entries/{collaboration_whitelist_entry_id}
Returns a domain that has been deemed safe to create collaborations for within the current enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List users exempt from collaboration domain restrictions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collaboration-whitelist-exempt-targets

box-openapi.json get /collaboration_whitelist_exempt_targets
Returns a list of users who have been exempt from the collaboration domain restrictions.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get user exempt from collaboration domain restrictions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collaboration-whitelist-exempt-targets-id

box-openapi.json get /collaboration_whitelist_exempt_targets/{collaboration_whitelist_exempt_target_id}
Returns a users who has been exempt from the collaboration domain restrictions.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List pending collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collaborations

box-openapi.json get /collaborations
Retrieves all pending collaboration invites for this user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collaborations-id

box-openapi.json get /collaborations/{collaboration_id}
Retrieves a single collaboration.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all collections
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collections

box-openapi.json get /collections
Retrieves all collections for a given user.

Currently, only the `favorites` collection is supported.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get collection by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collections-id

box-openapi.json get /collections/{collection_id}
Retrieves a collection by its ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List collection items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-collections-id-items

box-openapi.json get /collections/{collection_id}/items
Retrieves the files and/or folders contained within this collection.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get comment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-comments-id

box-openapi.json get /comments/{comment_id}
Retrieves the message and metadata for a specific comment, as well as information on the user who created the comment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get device pin
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-device-pinners-id

box-openapi.json get /device_pinners/{device_pinner_id}
Retrieves information about an individual device pin.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List enterprise device pins
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-enterprises-id-device-pinners

box-openapi.json get /enterprises/{enterprise_id}/device_pinners
Retrieves all the device pins within an enterprise.

The user must have admin privileges, and the application needs the "manage enterprise" scope to make this call.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List user and enterprise events
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-events

box-openapi.json get /events
Returns up to a year of past events for a given user or for the entire enterprise.

By default this returns events for the authenticated user. To retrieve events for the entire enterprise, set the `stream_type` to `admin_logs_streaming` for live monitoring of new events, or `admin_logs` for querying across historical events. The user making the API call will need to have admin privileges, and the application will need to have the scope `manage enterprise properties` checked.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get file request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-file-requests-id

box-openapi.json get /file_requests/{file_request_id}
Retrieves the information about a file request.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List file version legal holds
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-file-version-legal-holds

box-openapi.json get /file_version_legal_holds
Get a list of file versions on legal hold for a legal hold assignment.

Due to ongoing re-architecture efforts this API might not return all file versions for this policy ID.

Instead, this API will only return file versions held in the legacy architecture. Two new endpoints will available to request any file versions held in the new architecture.

For file versions held in the new architecture, the `GET /legal_hold_policy_assignments/:id/file_versions_on_hold` API can be used to return all past file versions available for this policy assignment, and the `GET /legal_hold_policy_assignments/:id/files_on_hold` API can be used to return any current (latest) versions of a file under legal hold.

The `GET /legal_hold_policy_assignments?policy_id={id}` API can be used to find a list of policy assignments for a given policy ID.

Once the re-architecture is completed this API will be deprecated.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get file version legal hold
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-file-version-legal-holds-id

box-openapi.json get /file_version_legal_holds/{file_version_legal_hold_id}
Retrieves information about the legal hold policies assigned to a file version.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List file version retentions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-file-version-retentions

box-openapi.json get /file_version_retentions
Retrieves all file version retentions for the given enterprise.

**Note**: File retention API is now **deprecated**. To get information about files and file versions under retention, see [files under retention](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-files-under-retention) or [file versions under retention](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-file-versions-under-retention) endpoints.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get retention on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-file-version-retentions-id

box-openapi.json get /file_version_retentions/{file_version_retention_id}
Returns information about a file version retention.

**Note**: File retention API is now **deprecated**. To get information about files and file versions under retention, see [files under retention](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-files-under-retention) or [file versions under retention](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-file-versions-under-retention) endpoints.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get file information
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}
Retrieves the details about a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List file collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-collaborations

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/collaborations
Retrieves a list of pending and active collaborations for a file. This returns all the users that have access to the file or have been invited to the file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List file comments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-comments

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/comments
Retrieves a list of comments for a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Download file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-content

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/content
Returns the contents of a file in binary format.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get classification on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Retrieves the classification metadata instance that has been applied to a file.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/files/:id//enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get file thumbnail
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-thumbnail-id

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/thumbnail.{extension}
Retrieves a thumbnail, or smaller image representation, of a file.

Sizes of `32x32`,`64x64`, `128x128`, and `256x256` can be returned in the `.png` format and sizes of `32x32`, `160x160`, and `320x320` can be returned in the `.jpg` format.

Thumbnails can be generated for the image and video file formats listed [found on our community site][1].

[1]: https://community.box.com/t5/Migrating-and-Previewing-Content/File-Types-and-Fonts-Supported-in-Box-Content-Preview/ta-p/327

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all file versions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-versions

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/versions
Retrieve a list of the past versions for a file.

Versions are only tracked by Box users with premium accounts. To fetch the ID of the current version of a file, use the `GET /file/:id` API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get file version
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-versions-id

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/versions/{file_version_id}
Retrieve a specific version of a file.

Versions are only tracked for Box users with premium accounts.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List folder locks
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folder-locks

box-openapi.json get /folder_locks
Retrieves folder lock details for a given folder.

You must be authenticated as the owner or co-owner of the folder to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List folder collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-collaborations

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/collaborations
Retrieves a list of pending and active collaborations for a folder. This returns all the users that have access to the folder or have been invited to the folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get classification on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Retrieves the classification metadata instance that has been applied to a folder.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/folders/:id/enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List group collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-groups-id-collaborations

box-openapi.json get /groups/{group_id}/collaborations
Retrieves all the collaborations for a group. The user must have admin permissions to inspect enterprise's groups.

Each collaboration object has details on which files or folders the group has access to and with what role.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all classifications
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo-schema

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo/schema
Retrieves the classification metadata template and lists all the classifications available to this enterprise.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/metadata_templates/enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo/schema`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List user's email aliases
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-users-id-email-aliases

box-openapi.json get /users/{user_id}/email_aliases
Retrieves all email aliases for a user. The collection does not include the primary login for the user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get events long poll endpoint
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/options-events

box-openapi.json options /events

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add domain to list of allowed collaboration domains
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-collaboration-whitelist-entries

box-openapi.json post /collaboration_whitelist_entries
Creates a new entry in the list of allowed domains to allow collaboration for.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create user exemption from collaboration domain restrictions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-collaboration-whitelist-exempt-targets

box-openapi.json post /collaboration_whitelist_exempt_targets
Exempts a user from the restrictions set out by the allowed list of domains for collaborations.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-collaborations

box-openapi.json post /collaborations
Adds a collaboration for a single user or a single group to a file or folder.

Collaborations can be created using email address, user IDs, or a group IDs.

If a collaboration is being created with a group, access to this endpoint is dependent on the group's ability to be invited.

If collaboration is in `pending` status, the following fields are redacted:

- `login` and `name` are hidden if a collaboration was created using `user_id`,
- `name` is hidden if a collaboration was created using `login`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create comment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-comments

box-openapi.json post /comments
Adds a comment by the user to a specific file, or as a reply to an other comment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Copy file request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-file-requests-id-copy

box-openapi.json post /file_requests/{file_request_id}/copy
Copies an existing file request that is already present on one folder, and applies it to another folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Copy file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-copy

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/copy
Creates a copy of a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add classification to file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Adds a classification to a file by specifying the label of the classification to add.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/files/:id//enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Promote file version
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-versions-current

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/versions/current
Promote a specific version of a file.

If previous versions exist, this method can be used to promote one of the older versions to the top of the version history.

This creates a new copy of the old version and puts it at the top of the versions history. The file will have the exact same contents as the older version, with the same hash digest, `etag`, and name as the original.

Other properties such as comments do not get updated to their former values.

Don't use this endpoint to restore Box Notes, as it works with file formats such as PDF, DOC, PPTX or similar.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create folder lock
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-folder-locks

box-openapi.json post /folder_locks
Creates a folder lock on a folder, preventing it from being moved and/or deleted.

You must be authenticated as the owner or co-owner of the folder to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add classification to folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json post /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Adds a classification to a folder by specifying the label of the classification to add.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/folders/:id/enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add initial classifications
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema--classifications

box-openapi.json post /metadata_templates/schema#classifications
When an enterprise does not yet have any classifications, this API call initializes the classification template with an initial set of classifications.

If an enterprise already has a classification, the template will already exist and instead an API call should be made to add additional classifications.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create email alias
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-users-id-email-aliases

box-openapi.json post /users/{user_id}/email_aliases
Adds a new email alias to a user account..

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-collaborations-id

box-openapi.json put /collaborations/{collaboration_id}
Updates a collaboration. Can be used to change the owner of an item, or to accept collaboration invites. In case of accepting collaboration invite, role is not required.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update comment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-comments-id

box-openapi.json put /comments/{comment_id}
Update the message of a comment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update file request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-file-requests-id

box-openapi.json put /file_requests/{file_request_id}
Updates a file request. This can be used to activate or deactivate a file request.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}
Updates a file. This can be used to rename or move a file, create a shared link, or lock a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update classification on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Updates a classification on a file.

The classification can only be updated if a classification has already been applied to the file before. When editing classifications, only values are defined for the enterprise will be accepted.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Restore file version
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id-versions-id

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}/versions/{file_version_id}
Restores a specific version of a file after it was deleted. Don't use this endpoint to restore Box Notes, as it works with file formats such as PDF, DOC, PPTX or similar.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update classification on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id-metadata-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo
Updates a classification on a folder.

The classification can only be updated if a classification has already been applied to the folder before. When editing classifications, only values are defined for the enterprise will be accepted.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add classification
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-metadata-templates-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo-schema--add

box-openapi.json put /metadata_templates/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo/schema#add
Adds one or more new classifications to the list of classifications available to the enterprise.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/metadata_templates/enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo/schema`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update classification
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-metadata-templates-enterprise-securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo-schema--update

box-openapi.json put /metadata_templates/enterprise/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo/schema#update
Updates the labels and descriptions of one or more classifications available to the enterprise.

This API can also be called by including the enterprise ID in the URL explicitly, for example `/metadata_templates/enterprise_12345/securityClassification-6VMVochwUWo/schema`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Classification
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/classification





# Classification Template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/classification-template





# Collaboration
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaboration





# Allowed collaboration domains
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaboration-allowlist-entries





# Allowed collaboration domain
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaboration-allowlist-entry





# Allowed collaboration domains user exemption
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaboration-allowlist-exempt-target





# Allowed collaboration domains user exemptions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaboration-allowlist-exempt-targets





# Collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaborations





# Collaborations
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaborations-offset-paginated





# Collection
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collection





# Collections
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collections





# Comment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/comment





# Comment (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/comment--base





# Comment (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/comment--full





# Comments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/comments





# Device pinner
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/device-pinner





# Device pinners
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/device-pinners





# Email alias
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/email-alias





# Email aliases
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/email-aliases





# Event
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/event





# Events
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/events





# File
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file





# File (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file--base





# File (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file--full





# File (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file--mini





# File Request
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-request





# File version legal hold
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-version-legal-hold





# File version legal holds
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-version-legal-holds





# File version retention
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-version-retention





# File version retentions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-version-retentions





# File versions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-versions





# Files
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/files





# Folder Lock
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder-lock





# Folder Locks
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder-locks





# Real-time servers
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/realtime-servers





# Remove metadata instance from file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Deletes a piece of file metadata.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete folder lock
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-folder-locks-id

box-openapi.json delete /folder_locks/{folder_lock_id}
Deletes a folder lock on a given folder.

You must be authenticated as the owner or co-owner of the folder to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-folders-id

box-openapi.json delete /folders/{folder_id}
Deletes a folder, either permanently or by moving it to the trash.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove metadata instance from folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-folders-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json delete /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Deletes a piece of folder metadata.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove user from group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-group-memberships-id

box-openapi.json delete /group_memberships/{group_membership_id}
Deletes a specific group membership. Only admins of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-groups-id

box-openapi.json delete /groups/{group_id}
Permanently deletes a group. Only users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete Slack integration mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-integration-mappings-slack-id

box-openapi.json delete /integration_mappings/slack/{integration_mapping_id}
Deletes a [Slack integration mapping](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack).

You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete Teams integration mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-integration-mappings-teams-id

box-openapi.json delete /integration_mappings/teams/{integration_mapping_id}
Deletes a [Teams integration mapping](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044681474-Using-Box-for-Teams). You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-legal-hold-policies-id

box-openapi.json delete /legal_hold_policies/{legal_hold_policy_id}
Delete an existing legal hold policy.

This is an asynchronous process. The policy will not be fully deleted yet when the response returns.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Unassign legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-legal-hold-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json delete /legal_hold_policy_assignments/{legal_hold_policy_assignment_id}
Remove a legal hold from an item.

This is an asynchronous process. The policy will not be fully removed yet when the response returns.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-metadata-cascade-policies-id

box-openapi.json delete /metadata_cascade_policies/{metadata_cascade_policy_id}
Deletes a metadata cascade policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List metadata instances on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-metadata

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/metadata
Retrieves all metadata for a given file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata instance on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Retrieves the instance of a metadata template that has been applied to a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get folder information
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}
Retrieves details for a folder, including the first 100 entries in the folder.

Passing `sort`, `direction`, `offset`, and `limit` parameters in query allows you to manage the list of returned [folder items](https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder--full#param-item-collection).

To fetch more items within the folder, use the [Get items in a folder](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-items) endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List items in folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-items

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/items
Retrieves a page of items in a folder. These items can be files, folders, and web links.

To request more information about the folder itself, like its size, use the [Get a folder](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id) endpoint instead.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List metadata instances on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-metadata

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/metadata
Retrieves all metadata for a given folder. This can not be used on the root folder with ID `0`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata instance on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Retrieves the instance of a metadata template that has been applied to a folder. This can not be used on the root folder with ID `0`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get group membership
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-group-memberships-id

box-openapi.json get /group_memberships/{group_membership_id}
Retrieves a specific group membership. Only admins of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List groups for enterprise
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-groups

box-openapi.json get /groups
Retrieves all of the groups for a given enterprise. The user must have admin permissions to inspect enterprise's groups.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-groups-id

box-openapi.json get /groups/{group_id}
Retrieves information about a group. Only members of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List members of group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-groups-id-memberships

box-openapi.json get /groups/{group_id}/memberships
Retrieves all the members for a group. Only members of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List Slack integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-integration-mappings-slack

box-openapi.json get /integration_mappings/slack
Lists [Slack integration mappings](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack) in a users' enterprise.

You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List Teams integration mappings
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-integration-mappings-teams

box-openapi.json get /integration_mappings/teams
Lists [Teams integration mappings](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044681474-Using-Box-for-Teams) in a users' enterprise. You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get user invite status
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-invites-id

box-openapi.json get /invites/{invite_id}
Returns the status of a user invite.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all legal hold policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-legal-hold-policies

box-openapi.json get /legal_hold_policies
Retrieves a list of legal hold policies that belong to an enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-legal-hold-policies-id

box-openapi.json get /legal_hold_policies/{legal_hold_policy_id}
Retrieve a legal hold policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List legal hold policy assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-legal-hold-policy-assignments

box-openapi.json get /legal_hold_policy_assignments
Retrieves a list of items a legal hold policy has been assigned to.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get legal hold policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-legal-hold-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json get /legal_hold_policy_assignments/{legal_hold_policy_assignment_id}
Retrieve a legal hold policy assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List previous file versions for legal hold policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-legal-hold-policy-assignments-id-file-versions-on-hold

box-openapi.json get /legal_hold_policy_assignments/{legal_hold_policy_assignment_id}/file_versions_on_hold
Get a list of previous file versions for a legal hold assignment.

In some cases you may only need the latest file versions instead. In these cases, use the `GET  /legal_hold_policy_assignments/:id/files_on_hold` API instead to return any current (latest) versions of a file for this legal hold policy assignment.

Due to ongoing re-architecture efforts this API might not return all files held for this policy ID. Instead, this API will only return past file versions held in the newly developed architecture. The `GET /file_version_legal_holds` API can be used to fetch current and past versions of files held within the legacy architecture.

This endpoint does not support returning any content that is on hold due to a Custodian collaborating on a Hub.

The `GET /legal_hold_policy_assignments?policy_id={id}` API can be used to find a list of policy assignments for a given policy ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List files with current file versions for legal hold policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-legal-hold-policy-assignments-id-files-on-hold

box-openapi.json get /legal_hold_policy_assignments/{legal_hold_policy_assignment_id}/files_on_hold
Get a list of files with current file versions for a legal hold assignment.

In some cases you may want to get previous file versions instead. In these cases, use the `GET  /legal_hold_policy_assignments/:id/file_versions_on_hold` API instead to return any previous versions of a file for this legal hold policy assignment.

Due to ongoing re-architecture efforts this API might not return all file versions held for this policy ID. Instead, this API will only return the latest file version held in the newly developed architecture. The `GET /file_version_legal_holds` API can be used to fetch current and past versions of files held within the legacy architecture.

This endpoint does not support returning any content that is on hold due to a Custodian collaborating on a Hub.

The `GET /legal_hold_policy_assignments?policy_id={id}` API can be used to find a list of policy assignments for a given policy ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List metadata cascade policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-cascade-policies

box-openapi.json get /metadata_cascade_policies
Retrieves a list of all the metadata cascade policies that are applied to a given folder. This can not be used on the root folder with ID `0`.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-cascade-policies-id

box-openapi.json get /metadata_cascade_policies/{metadata_cascade_policy_id}
Retrieve a specific metadata cascade policy assigned to a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata taxonomies for namespace
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-taxonomies-id

box-openapi.json get /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}
Used to retrieve all metadata taxonomies in a namespace.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata taxonomy by taxonomy key
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-taxonomies-id-id

box-openapi.json get /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}
Used to retrieve a metadata taxonomy by taxonomy key.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List metadata taxonomy nodes
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-nodes

box-openapi.json get /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/nodes
Used to retrieve metadata taxonomy nodes based on the parameters specified. Results are sorted in lexicographic order unless a `query` parameter is passed. With a `query` parameter specified, results are sorted in order of relevance.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata taxonomy node by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-nodes-id

box-openapi.json get /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/nodes/{node_id}
Retrieves a metadata taxonomy node by its identifier.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List metadata template's options for taxonomy field
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates-id-id-fields-id-options

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates/{namespace}/{template_key}/fields/{field_key}/options
Used to retrieve metadata taxonomy nodes which are available for the taxonomy field based on its configuration and the parameters specified. Results are sorted in lexicographic order unless a `query` parameter is passed. With a `query` parameter specified, results are sorted in order of relevance.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List user's groups
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-users-id-memberships

box-openapi.json get /users/{user_id}/memberships
Retrieves all the groups for a user. Only members of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata instance on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Applies an instance of a metadata template to a file.

In most cases only values that are present in the metadata template will be accepted, except for the `global.properties` template which accepts any key-value pair.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-folders

box-openapi.json post /folders
Creates a new empty folder within the specified parent folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Copy folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-folders-id-copy

box-openapi.json post /folders/{folder_id}/copy
Creates a copy of a folder within a destination folder.

The original folder will not be changed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata instance on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-folders-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json post /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Applies an instance of a metadata template to a folder.

In most cases only values that are present in the metadata template will be accepted, except for the `global.properties` template which accepts any key-value pair.

To display the metadata template in the Box web app the enterprise needs to be configured to enable **Cascading Folder Level Metadata** for the user in the admin console.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add user to group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-group-memberships

box-openapi.json post /group_memberships
Creates a group membership. Only users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-groups

box-openapi.json post /groups
Creates a new group of users in an enterprise. Only users with admin permissions can create new groups.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Slack integration mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-integration-mappings-slack

box-openapi.json post /integration_mappings/slack
Creates a [Slack integration mapping](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack) by mapping a Slack channel to a Box item.

You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Teams integration mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-integration-mappings-teams

box-openapi.json post /integration_mappings/teams
Creates a [Teams integration mapping](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044681474-Using-Box-for-Teams) by mapping a Teams channel to a Box item. You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create user invite
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-invites

box-openapi.json post /invites
Invites an existing external user to join an enterprise.

The existing user can not be part of another enterprise and must already have a Box account. Once invited, the user will receive an email and are prompted to accept the invitation within the Box web application.

This method requires the "Manage An Enterprise" scope enabled for the application, which can be enabled within the developer console.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-legal-hold-policies

box-openapi.json post /legal_hold_policies
Create a new legal hold policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Assign legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-legal-hold-policy-assignments

box-openapi.json post /legal_hold_policy_assignments
Assign a legal hold to a file, file version, folder, or user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies

box-openapi.json post /metadata_cascade_policies
Creates a new metadata cascade policy that applies a given metadata template to a given folder and automatically cascades it down to any files within that folder.

In order for the policy to be applied a metadata instance must first be applied to the folder the policy is to be applied to.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Force-apply metadata cascade policy to folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies-id-apply

box-openapi.json post /metadata_cascade_policies/{metadata_cascade_policy_id}/apply
Force the metadata on a folder with a metadata cascade policy to be applied to all of its children. This can be used after creating a new cascade policy to enforce the metadata to be cascaded down to all existing files within that folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata taxonomy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-taxonomies

box-openapi.json post /metadata_taxonomies
Creates a new metadata taxonomy that can be used in metadata templates.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata taxonomy levels
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-levels

box-openapi.json post /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/levels
Creates new metadata taxonomy levels.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add metadata taxonomy level
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-levels:append

box-openapi.json post /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/levels:append
Creates a new metadata taxonomy level and appends it to the existing levels. If there are no levels defined yet, this will create the first level.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update metadata instance on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Updates a piece of metadata on a file.

The metadata instance can only be updated if the template has already been applied to the file before. When editing metadata, only values that match the metadata template schema will be accepted.

The update is applied atomically. If any errors occur during the application of the operations, the metadata instance will not be changed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}
Updates a folder. This can be also be used to move the folder, create shared links, update collaborations, and more.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update metadata instance on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id-metadata-id-id

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}/metadata/{scope}/{template_key}
Updates a piece of metadata on a folder.

The metadata instance can only be updated if the template has already been applied to the folder before. When editing metadata, only values that match the metadata template schema will be accepted.

The update is applied atomically. If any errors occur during the application of the operations, the metadata instance will not be changed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update group membership
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-group-memberships-id

box-openapi.json put /group_memberships/{group_membership_id}
Updates a user's group membership. Only admins of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-groups-id

box-openapi.json put /groups/{group_id}
Updates a specific group. Only admins of this group or users with admin-level permissions will be able to use this API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update Slack integration mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-integration-mappings-slack-id

box-openapi.json put /integration_mappings/slack/{integration_mapping_id}
Updates a [Slack integration mapping](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack). Supports updating the Box folder ID and options.

You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update Teams integration mapping
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-integration-mappings-teams-id

box-openapi.json put /integration_mappings/teams/{integration_mapping_id}
Updates a [Teams integration mapping](https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044681474-Using-Box-for-Teams). Supports updating the Box folder ID and options. You need Admin or Co-Admin role to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-legal-hold-policies-id

box-openapi.json put /legal_hold_policies/{legal_hold_policy_id}
Update legal hold policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# File versions on hold
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/file-versions-on-hold





# Files on hold
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/files-on-hold





# Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder





# Folder (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder--base





# Folder (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder--full





# Folder (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/folder--mini





# Group
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/group





# Group (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/group--base





# Group (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/group--full





# Group (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/group--mini





# Group membership
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/group-membership





# Group memberships
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/group-memberships





# Groups
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/groups





# Integration mapping Slack
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/integration-mapping-slack





# Integration mapping Teams
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/integration-mapping-teams





# Integration mappings Slack
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/integration-mappings-slack





# Integration mappings Teams
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/integration-mappings-teams





# Invite
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/invite





# Items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/items





# Items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/items-offset-paginated





# Legal hold policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/legal-hold-policies





# Legal hold policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy





# Legal hold policy (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy--mini





# Legal hold policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy-assignment





# Legal hold policy assignment (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy-assignment--base





# Legal hold policy assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/legal-hold-policy-assignments





# Metadata instance
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata





# Metadata instance (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata--base





# Metadata instance (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata--full





# Metadata cascade policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-cascade-policies





# Metadata cascade policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-cascade-policy





# Metadata taxonomies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-taxonomies





# Metadata taxonomy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-taxonomy





# Metadata taxonomy level
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-taxonomy-level





# Metadata taxonomy levels
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-taxonomy-levels





# Metadata taxonomy node
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-taxonomy-node





# Metadata taxonomy nodes
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-taxonomy-nodes





# Metadata instances
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadatas





# Remove metadata taxonomy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-metadata-taxonomies-id-id

box-openapi.json delete /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}
Delete a metadata taxonomy. This deletion is permanent and cannot be reverted.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove metadata taxonomy node
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-nodes-id

box-openapi.json delete /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/nodes/{node_id}
Delete a metadata taxonomy node. This deletion is permanent and cannot be reverted. Only metadata taxonomy nodes without any children can be deleted.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-metadata-templates-id-id-schema

box-openapi.json delete /metadata_templates/{scope}/{template_key}/schema
Delete a metadata template and its instances. This deletion is permanent and can not be reversed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete retention policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-retention-policies-id

box-openapi.json delete /retention_policies/{retention_policy_id}
Permanently deletes a retention policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove retention policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-retention-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json delete /retention_policy_assignments/{retention_policy_assignment_id}
Removes a retention policy assignment applied to content.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete shield information barrier segment member by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-shield-information-barrier-segment-members-id

box-openapi.json delete /shield_information_barrier_segment_members/{shield_information_barrier_segment_member_id}
Deletes a shield information barrier segment member based on provided ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete shield information barrier segment restriction by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-shield-information-barrier-segment-restrictions-id

box-openapi.json delete /shield_information_barrier_segment_restrictions/{shield_information_barrier_segment_restriction_id}
Delete shield information barrier segment restriction based on provided ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete shield information barrier segment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-shield-information-barrier-segments-id

box-openapi.json delete /shield_information_barrier_segments/{shield_information_barrier_segment_id}
Deletes the shield information barrier segment based on provided ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shared link for file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id--get-shared-link

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}#get_shared_link
Gets the information for a shared link on a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shared link for folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id--get-shared-link

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}#get_shared_link
Gets the information for a shared link on a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Find metadata template by instance ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates
Finds a metadata template by searching for the ID of an instance of the template.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all metadata templates for enterprise
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates-enterprise

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates/enterprise
Used to retrieve all metadata templates created to be used specifically within the user's enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all global metadata templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates-global

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates/global
Used to retrieve all generic, global metadata templates available to all enterprises using Box.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata template by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates-id

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates/{template_id}
Retrieves a metadata template by its ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get metadata template by name
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-metadata-templates-id-id-schema

box-openapi.json get /metadata_templates/{scope}/{template_key}/schema
Retrieves a metadata template by its `scope` and `templateKey` values.

To find the `scope` and `templateKey` for a template, list all templates for an enterprise or globally, or list all templates applied to a file or folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List recently accessed items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-recent-items

box-openapi.json get /recent_items
Returns information about the recent items accessed by a user, either in the last 90 days or up to the last 1000 items accessed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List retention policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policies

box-openapi.json get /retention_policies
Retrieves all of the retention policies for an enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get retention policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policies-id

box-openapi.json get /retention_policies/{retention_policy_id}
Retrieves a retention policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List retention policy assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policies-id-assignments

box-openapi.json get /retention_policies/{retention_policy_id}/assignments
Returns a list of all retention policy assignments associated with a specified retention policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get retention policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json get /retention_policy_assignments/{retention_policy_assignment_id}
Retrieves a retention policy assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get file versions under retention
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-file-versions-under-retention

box-openapi.json get /retention_policy_assignments/{retention_policy_assignment_id}/file_versions_under_retention
Returns a list of file versions under retention for a retention policy assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get files under retention
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-files-under-retention

box-openapi.json get /retention_policy_assignments/{retention_policy_assignment_id}/files_under_retention
Returns a list of files under retention for a retention policy assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Search for content
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-search

box-openapi.json get /search
Searches for files, folders, web links, and shared files across the users content or across the entire enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Find file for shared link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shared-items

box-openapi.json get /shared_items
Returns the file represented by a shared link.

A shared file can be represented by a shared link, which can originate within the current enterprise or within another.

This endpoint allows an application to retrieve information about a shared file when only given a shared link.

The `shared_link_permission_options` array field can be returned by requesting it in the `fields` query parameter.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Find app item for shared link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shared-items--app-items

box-openapi.json get /shared_items#app_items
Returns the app item represented by a shared link.

The link can originate from the current enterprise or another.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Find folder for shared link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shared-items--folders

box-openapi.json get /shared_items#folders
Return the folder represented by a shared link.

A shared folder can be represented by a shared link, which can originate within the current enterprise or within another.

This endpoint allows an application to retrieve information about a shared folder when only given a shared link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Find web link for shared link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shared-items--web-links

box-openapi.json get /shared_items#web_links
Returns the web link represented by a shared link.

A shared web link can be represented by a shared link, which can originate within the current enterprise or within another.

This endpoint allows an application to retrieve information about a shared web link when only given a shared link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List shield information barrier reports
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-reports

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_reports
Lists shield information barrier reports.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shield information barrier report by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-reports-id

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_reports/{shield_information_barrier_report_id}
Retrieves a shield information barrier report by its ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List shield information barrier segment members
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-segment-members

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_segment_members
Lists shield information barrier segment members based on provided segment IDs.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shield information barrier segment member by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-segment-members-id

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_segment_members/{shield_information_barrier_segment_member_id}
Retrieves a shield information barrier segment member by its ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List shield information barrier segment restrictions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-segment-restrictions

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_segment_restrictions
Lists shield information barrier segment restrictions based on provided segment ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shield information barrier segment restriction by ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-segment-restrictions-id

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_segment_restrictions/{shield_information_barrier_segment_restriction_id}
Retrieves a shield information barrier segment restriction based on provided ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List shield information barrier segments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-segments

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_segments
Retrieves a list of shield information barrier segment objects for the specified Information Barrier ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shield information barrier segment with specified ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barrier-segments-id

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barrier_segments/{shield_information_barrier_segment_id}
Retrieves shield information barrier segment based on provided ID..

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List shield information barriers
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barriers

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barriers
Retrieves a list of shield information barrier objects for the enterprise of JWT.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shield information barrier with specified ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-shield-information-barriers-id

box-openapi.json get /shield_information_barriers/{shield_information_barrier_id}
Get shield information barrier based on provided ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get shared link for web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-web-links-id--get-shared-link

box-openapi.json get /web_links/{web_link_id}#get_shared_link
Gets the information for a shared link on a web link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update metadata taxonomy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/patch-metadata-taxonomies-id-id

box-openapi.json patch /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}
Updates an existing metadata taxonomy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update metadata taxonomy level
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/patch-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-levels-id

box-openapi.json patch /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/levels/{level_index}
Updates an existing metadata taxonomy level.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update metadata taxonomy node
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/patch-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-nodes-id

box-openapi.json patch /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/nodes/{node_id}
Updates an existing metadata taxonomy node.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create jobs to terminate user group session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-groups-terminate-sessions

box-openapi.json post /groups/terminate_sessions
Validates the roles and permissions of the group, and creates asynchronous jobs to terminate the group's sessions. Returns the status for the POST request.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Query files/folders by metadata
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read

box-openapi.json post /metadata_queries/execute_read
Create a search using SQL-like syntax to return items that match specific metadata.

By default, this endpoint returns only the most basic info about the items for which the query matches. To get additional fields for each item, including any of the metadata, use the `fields` attribute in the query.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete metadata taxonomy level
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-levels:trim

box-openapi.json post /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/levels:trim
Deletes the last level of the metadata taxonomy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata taxonomy node
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-taxonomies-id-id-nodes

box-openapi.json post /metadata_taxonomies/{namespace}/{taxonomy_key}/nodes
Creates a new metadata taxonomy node.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-metadata-templates-schema

box-openapi.json post /metadata_templates/schema
Creates a new metadata template that can be applied to files and folders.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create retention policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-retention-policies

box-openapi.json post /retention_policies
Creates a retention policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Assign retention policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-retention-policy-assignments

box-openapi.json post /retention_policy_assignments
Assigns a retention policy to an item.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create shield information barrier report
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-reports

box-openapi.json post /shield_information_barrier_reports
Creates a shield information barrier report for a given barrier.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create shield information barrier segment member
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-segment-members

box-openapi.json post /shield_information_barrier_segment_members
Creates a new shield information barrier segment member.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create shield information barrier segment restriction
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-segment-restrictions

box-openapi.json post /shield_information_barrier_segment_restrictions
Creates a shield information barrier segment restriction object.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create shield information barrier segment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-shield-information-barrier-segments

box-openapi.json post /shield_information_barrier_segments
Creates a shield information barrier segment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add changed status of shield information barrier with specified ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-shield-information-barriers-change-status

box-openapi.json post /shield_information_barriers/change_status
Change status of shield information barrier with the specified ID.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create jobs to terminate users session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-users-terminate-sessions

box-openapi.json post /users/terminate_sessions
Validates the roles and permissions of the user, and creates asynchronous jobs to terminate the user's sessions. Returns the status for the POST request.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add shared link to file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id--add-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}#add_shared_link
Adds a shared link to a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove shared link from file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id--remove-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}#remove_shared_link
Removes a shared link from a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update shared link on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id--update-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}#update_shared_link
Updates a shared link on a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add shared link to folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id--add-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}#add_shared_link
Adds a shared link to a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove shared link from folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id--remove-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}#remove_shared_link
Removes a shared link from a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update shared link on folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id--update-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}#update_shared_link
Updates a shared link on a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-metadata-templates-id-id-schema

box-openapi.json put /metadata_templates/{scope}/{template_key}/schema
Updates a metadata template.

The metadata template can only be updated if the template already exists.

The update is applied atomically. If any errors occur during the application of the operations, the metadata template will not be changed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update retention policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-retention-policies-id

box-openapi.json put /retention_policies/{retention_policy_id}
Updates a retention policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update shield information barrier segment with specified ID
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-shield-information-barrier-segments-id

box-openapi.json put /shield_information_barrier_segments/{shield_information_barrier_segment_id}
Updates the shield information barrier segment based on provided ID..

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add shared link to web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-web-links-id--add-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /web_links/{web_link_id}#add_shared_link
Adds a shared link to a web link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove shared link from web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-web-links-id--remove-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /web_links/{web_link_id}#remove_shared_link
Removes a shared link from a web link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update shared link on web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-web-links-id--update-shared-link

box-openapi.json put /web_links/{web_link_id}#update_shared_link
Updates a shared link on a web link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Files under retention
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/files-under-retention





# Metadata filter
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-filter





# Metadata query search results
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-query-results





# Metadata template
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-template





# Metadata templates
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-templates





# Recent item
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/recent-item





# Retention policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/retention-policies





# Retention policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/retention-policy





# Retention policy (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/retention-policy--base





# Retention policy (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/retention-policy--mini





# Retention policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/retention-policy-assignment





# Retention policy assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/retention-policy-assignments





# Search Result (including Shared Link)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/search-result-with-shared-link





# Search Results
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/search-results





# Search Results (including Shared Links)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/search-results-with-shared-links





# Session termination message
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/session-termination





# Shield information barrier
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier





# Shield information barrier (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier--base





# Shield information barrier reference
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-reference





# Shield information barrier report
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-report





# Shield information barrier report (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-report--base





# Shield information barrier report details
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-report-details





# List of Shield Information Barrier Reports
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-reports





# Shield information barrier segment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment





# Shield information barrier segment member
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-member





# Shield information barrier segment member (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-member--base





# Shield information barrier segment member (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-member--mini





# List of Shield Information Barrier Segment Members
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-members





# Shield information barrier segment restriction
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-restriction





# Shield information barrier segment restriction (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-restriction--base





# Shield information barrier segment restriction (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-restriction--mini





# List of Shield Information Barrier Segment Restrictions
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-restrictions





# List of Shield Information Barrier Segments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segments





# List of Shield Information Barriers
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/shield-information-barriers





# Remove Box Skill cards from file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id-metadata-global-boxSkillsCards

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}/metadata/global/boxSkillsCards
Removes any Box Skills cards metadata from a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Permanently remove file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id-trash

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}/trash
Permanently deletes a file that is in the trash. This action cannot be undone.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove upload session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-upload-sessions-id

box-openapi.json delete /files/upload_sessions/{upload_session_id}
Abort an upload session and discard all data uploaded.

This cannot be reversed.

The actual endpoint URL is returned by the [`Create upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions) and [`Get upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-upload-sessions-id) endpoints.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Permanently remove folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-folders-id-trash

box-openapi.json delete /folders/{folder_id}/trash
Permanently deletes a folder that is in the trash. This action cannot be undone.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Unassign storage policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-storage-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json delete /storage_policy_assignments/{storage_policy_assignment_id}
Delete a storage policy assignment.

Deleting a storage policy assignment on a user will have the user inherit the enterprise's default storage policy.

There is a rate limit for calling this endpoint of only twice per user in a 24 hour time frame.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Unassign task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-task-assignments-id

box-openapi.json delete /task_assignments/{task_assignment_id}
Deletes a specific task assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-tasks-id

box-openapi.json delete /tasks/{task_id}
Removes a task from a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-users-id

box-openapi.json delete /users/{user_id}
Deletes a user. By default, this operation fails if the user still owns any content, was recently active, or recently joined the enterprise from a free account. To proceed, move their owned content first, or use the `force` parameter to delete the user and their files.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Delete user avatar
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-users-id-avatar

box-openapi.json delete /users/{user_id}/avatar
Removes an existing user avatar. You cannot reverse this operation.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Permanently remove web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-web-links-id-trash

box-openapi.json delete /web_links/{web_link_id}/trash
Permanently deletes a web link that is in the trash. This action cannot be undone.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List Box Skill cards on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-metadata-global-boxSkillsCards

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/metadata/global/boxSkillsCards
List the Box Skills metadata cards that are attached to a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List tasks on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-tasks

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/tasks
Retrieves a list of all the tasks for a file. This endpoint does not support pagination.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get trashed file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-trash

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/trash
Retrieves a file that has been moved to the trash.

Please note that only if the file itself has been moved to the trash can it be retrieved with this API call. If instead one of its parent folders was moved to the trash, only that folder can be inspected using the [`GET /folders/:id/trash`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-trash) API.

To list all items that have been moved to the trash, please use the [`GET /folders/trash/items`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-trash-items/) API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get upload session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-upload-sessions-id

box-openapi.json get /files/upload_sessions/{upload_session_id}
Return information about an upload session.

The actual endpoint URL is returned by the [`Create upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions) endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List parts
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-upload-sessions-id-parts

box-openapi.json get /files/upload_sessions/{upload_session_id}/parts
Return a list of the chunks uploaded to the upload session so far.

The actual endpoint URL is returned by the [`Create upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions) and [`Get upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-upload-sessions-id) endpoints.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get trashed folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-trash

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/trash
Retrieves a folder that has been moved to the trash.

Please note that only if the folder itself has been moved to the trash can it be retrieved with this API call. If instead one of its parent folders was moved to the trash, only that folder can be inspected using the [`GET /folders/:id/trash`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-trash) API.

To list all items that have been moved to the trash, please use the [`GET /folders/trash/items`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-trash-items/) API.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List trashed items
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-trash-items

box-openapi.json get /folders/trash/items
Retrieves the files and folders that have been moved to the trash.

Any attribute in the full files or folders objects can be passed in with the `fields` parameter to retrieve those specific attributes that are not returned by default.

This endpoint defaults to use offset-based pagination, yet also supports marker-based pagination using the `marker` parameter.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List storage policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-storage-policies

box-openapi.json get /storage_policies
Fetches all the storage policies in the enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get storage policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-storage-policies-id

box-openapi.json get /storage_policies/{storage_policy_id}
Fetches a specific storage policy.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List storage policy assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-storage-policy-assignments

box-openapi.json get /storage_policy_assignments
Fetches all the storage policy assignment for an enterprise or user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get storage policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-storage-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json get /storage_policy_assignments/{storage_policy_assignment_id}
Fetches a specific storage policy assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get task assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-task-assignments-id

box-openapi.json get /task_assignments/{task_assignment_id}
Retrieves information about a task assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-tasks-id

box-openapi.json get /tasks/{task_id}
Retrieves information about a specific task.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List task assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-tasks-id-assignments

box-openapi.json get /tasks/{task_id}/assignments
Lists all of the assignments for a given task.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List terms of service user statuses
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-terms-of-service-user-statuses

box-openapi.json get /terms_of_service_user_statuses
Retrieves an overview of users and their status for a terms of service, including Whether they have accepted the terms and when.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List terms of services
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-terms-of-services

box-openapi.json get /terms_of_services
Returns the current terms of service text and settings for the enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get terms of service
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-terms-of-services-id

box-openapi.json get /terms_of_services/{terms_of_service_id}
Fetches a specific terms of service.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List enterprise users
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-users

box-openapi.json get /users
Returns a list of all users for the Enterprise along with their `user_id`, `public_name`, and `login`.

The application and the authenticated user need to have the permission to look up users in the entire enterprise.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-users-id

box-openapi.json get /users/{user_id}
Retrieves information about a user in the enterprise.

The application and the authenticated user need to have the permission to look up users in the entire enterprise.

This endpoint also returns a limited set of information for external users who are collaborated on content owned by the enterprise for authenticated users with the right scopes. In this case, disallowed fields will return null instead.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get user avatar
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-users-id-avatar

box-openapi.json get /users/{user_id}/avatar
Retrieves an image of a the user's avatar.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get current user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-users-me

box-openapi.json get /users/me
Retrieves information about the user who is currently authenticated.

In the case of a client-side authenticated OAuth 2.0 application this will be the user who authorized the app.

In the case of a JWT, server-side authenticated application this will be the service account that belongs to the application by default.

Use the `As-User` header to change who this API call is made on behalf of.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get trashed web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-web-links-id-trash

box-openapi.json get /web_links/{web_link_id}/trash
Retrieves a web link that has been moved to the trash.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Preflight check before upload
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/options-files-content

box-openapi.json options /files/content

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Upload file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-content

box-openapi.json post /files/content
Uploads a small file to Box. For file sizes over 50MB we recommend using the Chunk Upload APIs.

The `attributes` part of the body must come **before** the `file` part. Requests that do not follow this format when uploading the file will receive a HTTP `400` error with a `metadata_after_file_contents` error code.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Restore file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}
Restores a file that has been moved to the trash.

An optional new parent ID can be provided to restore the file to in case the original folder has been deleted.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Upload file version
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-content

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/content
Update a file's content. For file sizes over 50MB we recommend using the Chunk Upload APIs.

The `attributes` part of the body must come **before** the `file` part. Requests that do not follow this format when uploading the file will receive a HTTP `400` error with a `metadata_after_file_contents` error code.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create Box Skill cards on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-metadata-global-boxSkillsCards

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/metadata/global/boxSkillsCards
Applies one or more Box Skills metadata cards to a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create upload session for existing file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-id-upload-sessions

box-openapi.json post /files/{file_id}/upload_sessions
Creates an upload session for an existing file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create upload session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions

box-openapi.json post /files/upload_sessions
Creates an upload session for a new file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Commit upload session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions-id-commit

box-openapi.json post /files/upload_sessions/{upload_session_id}/commit
Close an upload session and create a file from the uploaded chunks.

The actual endpoint URL is returned by the [`Create upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions) and [`Get upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-upload-sessions-id) endpoints.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Restore folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-folders-id

box-openapi.json post /folders/{folder_id}
Restores a folder that has been moved to the trash.

An optional new parent ID can be provided to restore the folder to in case the original folder has been deleted.

During this operation, part of the file tree will be locked, mainly the source folder and all of its descendants, as well as the destination folder.

For the duration of the operation, no other move, copy, delete, or restore operation can performed on any of the locked folders.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create shield information barrier
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-shield-information-barriers

box-openapi.json post /shield_information_barriers
Creates a shield information barrier to separate individuals/groups within the same firm and prevents confidential information passing between them.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Assign storage policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-storage-policy-assignments

box-openapi.json post /storage_policy_assignments
Creates a storage policy assignment for an enterprise or user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Assign task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-task-assignments

box-openapi.json post /task_assignments
Assigns a task to a user.

A task can be assigned to more than one user by creating multiple assignments.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-tasks

box-openapi.json post /tasks
Creates a single task on a file. This task is not assigned to any user and will need to be assigned separately.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create terms of service status for new user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-terms-of-service-user-statuses

box-openapi.json post /terms_of_service_user_statuses
Sets the status for a terms of service for a user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create terms of service
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-terms-of-services

box-openapi.json post /terms_of_services
Creates a terms of service for a given enterprise and type of user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-users

box-openapi.json post /users
Creates a new managed user in an enterprise. This endpoint is only available to users and applications with the right admin permissions.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Add or update user avatar
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-users-id-avatar

box-openapi.json post /users/{user_id}/avatar
Adds or updates a user avatar.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Restore web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-web-links-id

box-openapi.json post /web_links/{web_link_id}
Restores a web link that has been moved to the trash.

An optional new parent ID can be provided to restore the web link to in case the original folder has been deleted.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update Box Skill cards on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id-metadata-global-boxSkillsCards

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}/metadata/global/boxSkillsCards
Updates one or more Box Skills metadata cards to a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Upload part of file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-upload-sessions-id

box-openapi.json put /files/upload_sessions/{upload_session_id}
Uploads a chunk of a file for an upload session.

The actual endpoint URL is returned by the [`Create upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-files-upload-sessions) and [`Get upload session`](https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-upload-sessions-id) endpoints.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update all Box Skill cards on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-skill-invocations-id

box-openapi.json put /skill_invocations/{skill_id}
An alternative method that can be used to overwrite and update all Box Skill metadata cards on a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update storage policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-storage-policy-assignments-id

box-openapi.json put /storage_policy_assignments/{storage_policy_assignment_id}
Updates a specific storage policy assignment.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update task assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-task-assignments-id

box-openapi.json put /task_assignments/{task_assignment_id}
Updates a task assignment. This endpoint can be used to update the state of a task assigned to a user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-tasks-id

box-openapi.json put /tasks/{task_id}
Updates a task. This can be used to update a task's configuration, or to update its completion state.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update terms of service status for existing user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-terms-of-service-user-statuses-id

box-openapi.json put /terms_of_service_user_statuses/{terms_of_service_user_status_id}
Updates the status for a terms of service for a user.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update terms of service
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-terms-of-services-id

box-openapi.json put /terms_of_services/{terms_of_service_id}
Updates a specific terms of service.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update user
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-users-id

box-openapi.json put /users/{user_id}
Updates a managed or app user in an enterprise. This endpoint is only available to users and applications with the right admin permissions.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Transfer owned folders
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-users-id-folders-0

box-openapi.json put /users/{user_id}/folders/0
Move all of the items (files, folders and workflows) owned by a user into another user's account.

Only the root folder (`0`) can be transferred.

Folders can only be moved across users by users with administrative permissions.

All existing shared links and folder-level collaborations are transferred during the operation. Please note that while collaborations at the individual file-level are transferred during the operation, the collaborations are deleted when the original user is deleted.

If the user has a large number of items across all folders, the call will be run asynchronously. If the operation is not completed within 10 minutes, the user will receive a 200 OK response, and the operation will continue running.

If the destination path has a metadata cascade policy attached to any of the parent folders, a metadata cascade operation will be kicked off asynchronously.

There is currently no way to check for when this operation is finished.

The destination folder's name will be in the format `{User}'s Files and Folders`, where `{User}` is the display name of the user.

To make this API call your application will need to have the "Read and write all files and folders stored in Box" scope enabled.

Please make sure the destination user has access to `Relay` or `Relay Lite`, and has access to the files and folders involved in the workflows being transferred.

Admins will receive an email when the operation is completed.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Conflict error
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/conflict-error





# Keyword Skill Card
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/keyword-skill-card





# Skills metadata instance
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/skill-cards-metadata





# Status Skill Card
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/status-skill-card





# Storage policies
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/storage-policies





# Storage policy
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/storage-policy





# Storage policy (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/storage-policy--mini





# Storage policy assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/storage-policy-assignment





# Storage policy assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/storage-policy-assignments





# Task
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/task





# Task assignment
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/task-assignment





# Task assignments
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/task-assignments





# Tasks
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/tasks





# Terms of service
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/terms-of-service





# Terms of service (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/terms-of-service--base





# Terms of service user status
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/terms-of-service-user-status





# Terms of services
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/terms-of-services





# Terms of service user statuses
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/terms-of-services-user-statuses





# Timeline Skill Card
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/timeline-skill-card





# Transcript Skill Card.
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/transcript-skill-card





# Trashed File
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/trash-file





# Trashed File (Restored)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/trash-file-restored





# Trashed Folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/trash-folder





# Trashed Folder (Restored)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/trash-folder-restored





# Trashed Web Link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/trash-web-link





# Trashed Web Link (Restored)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/trash-web-link-restored





# Upload part
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/upload-part





# Upload part (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/upload-part--mini





# Upload parts
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/upload-parts





# Upload session
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/upload-session





# Upload URL
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/upload-url





# Uploaded part
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/uploaded-part





# User
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user





# User (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user--base





# User (Full)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user--full





# User (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user--mini





# User avatar
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user-avatar





# User (Collaborations)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user-collaborations





# User (Integration Mappings)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/user-integration-mappings-reference





# Users
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/users





# Box AI
Source: https://developer.box.com/ai-dev-zone



<p>
  This page features quick start guides, sample code, and tools for building AI agents and intelligent workflows. Explore use cases, get hands-on experience with Box AI API, and build agents with Box AI Studio.
</p>

## Follow quick starts

Box AI API is available to all customers Business and above.

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Summarize a document" href="/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-summarize" icon="sparkles" />

  <Card title="Use natural language, or pass a stringified data structure to extract metadata from documents" href="/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract-freeform" icon="sparkles" />

  <Card title="Extract document metadata suggestions with Box metadata templates" href="/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract" icon="sparkles" />

  <Card title="Use Box AI Enhanced Extract Agent" href="/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract-enhanced" icon="sparkles" />
</CardGroup>

## Documentation

These resources will get you up and running with Box AI API.

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Box AI API reference" href="/reference/resources/ai-response/" icon="book" />

  <Card title="Get started with Box AI API" href="/guides/box-ai/" icon="book" />

  <Card title="Supported AI models" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-models/" icon="book" />

  <Card title="Override AI model configuration" href="/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides/" icon="book" />
</CardGroup>

## MCP Servers

These resources will get you up and running with Box MCP server.

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Remote Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/remote/" icon="server" />

  <Card title="Self-hosted Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/self-hosted/" icon="server" />

  <Card title="Online course: Build AI Apps with MCP Servers" href="https://www.deeplearning.ai/short-courses/build-ai-apps-with-mcp-server-working-with-box-files/" icon="server" />

  <Card title="Box MCP server and Pydantic AI" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/building-ai-powered-document-generation-with-box-mcp-and-pydantic-ai-48775b18ae32" icon="server" />

  <Card title="Box MCP server and LangChain MCP Adapters" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/using-an-existing-mcp-server-with-langchain-mcp-adapters-94cdd4af6d1b" icon="server" />
</CardGroup>

## AI agents

Learn how to create advanced AI agents with Box.

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Manage agents with Box AI Studio API" href="/guides/ai-studio/getting-started-ai-studio/" icon="robot" />

  <Card title="Box for Agentforce Extension package" href="/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/box-agentforce-package/" icon="robot" />

  <Card title="Multi-agent workflows with Box and OpenAI" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/building-multi-agent-workflows-with-openais-new-sdk-and-box-3e3c81cf4715" icon="robot" />

  <Card title="Box AI Agents Toolkit" href="https://pypi.org/project/box-ai-agents-toolkit/" icon="robot" />
</CardGroup>

## Box for AI Integrations

Use Box for AI Integrations to extend LLM models' existing knowledge bases.

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Box loader for LangChain.js" href="https://www.npmjs.com/package/langchainjs-box" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Snowflake Openflow Connector for Box" href="https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide/data-integration/openflow/connectors/box/setup" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Box source connector for Airbyte" href="https://github.com/box-community/airbyte/blob/barduinor/source-box-devrel/docs/integrations/sources/box-data-extract.md" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Connect Box and Weaviate" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/weaviate-box-rag-recipe-with-weaviate-query-agent-1cb41cf9e68b" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Connect Box and Pinecone" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/demo-box-pinecone-f03783c412bb" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Build RAG workflows Box andLlamaIndex" href="https://github.com/run-llama/llama_index/tree/main/llama-index-integrations/readers/llama-index-readers-box#readme" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Build RAG workflows with Box and LangChain" href="https://python.langchain.com/docs/integrations/providers/box/" icon="link" />

  <Card title="Pydantic AI and Box MCP" href="https://github.com/box-community/box-mcp-pydantic-ai" icon="link" />
</CardGroup>


# Changelog
Source: https://developer.box.com/changelog/index



<Update label="2025-12-29">
  ## ChatGPT for remote Box MCP server released

  We’ve added the ability to [integrate ChatGPT with the Remote Box MCP Server][gpt-remote-box-mcp]. This allows ChatGPT to securely access Box content through a custom Model Context Protocol (MCP) connector using OAuth and the MCP.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://forum.box.com/

  [gpt-remote-box-mcp]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-mcp/remote#chatgpt
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-19">
  ## Box iOS SDK `6.3.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **boxsdkgen:** Add taxonomy to Metadata Field (read) definition (box/box-openapi[#572][1]) ([#1334][2]) ([`373240a`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no `Retry-After` header (box/box-codegen[#903][4]) ([#1312][5]) ([`783ef91`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Add Metadata Taxonomies API (box/box-openapi[#569][7]) ([#1320][8]) ([`2b52332`][9])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Text input validation for Box Sign (box/box-openapi[#568][10]) ([#1314][11]) ([`bebd148`][12])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Treat `nullable` fields as Optional (box/box-codegen[#906][13]) ([#1324][14]) ([`c17e23a`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/572

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1334

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/373240ae0884f94c64a0caa2951f29212becd0fd

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/903

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1312

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/783ef91c6744caeddb4fda3d83c070095733f6c1

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/569

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1320

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/2b52332460bb03412bd96df77e8cf45bb8abf35f

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/568

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1314

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/bebd148378927efc4d015f88914d2b0a5915c41d

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/906

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1324

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/c17e23af55829f182e3d302682d0444520693217
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-19">
  ## Box Java SDK `v5.3.0` released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Add Metadata Taxonomies API (box/box-openapi[#569][1]) ([#1629][2]) ([`7236f16`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Text input validation for Box Sign (box/box-openapi[#568][4]) ([#1623][5]) ([`a5d74ee`][6])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Treat `nullable` fields as Optional (box/box-codegen[#906][7]) ([#1633][8]) ([`e14e97b`][9])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **boxsdkgen:** Add taxonomy to Metadata Field (read) definition (box/box-openapi[#572][10]) ([#1643][11]) ([`492684e`][12])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no `Retry-After` header (box/box-codegen[#903][13]) ([#1621][14]) ([`af4861f`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/569

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1629

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/7236f16bf39a3376eaad4ba6e143633cc5c2f4b2

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/568

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1623

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/a5d74eeb4b9b053ab00ebf33cf4f9b862ea4b586

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/906

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1633

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e14e97bb7a53c967851f7b92bc43400bdfc8da8b

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/572

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1643

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/492684e45730b7f56bc1539c4086be45b30127ae

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/903

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1621

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/af4861f832e03d68614d6bd3c9852ca48a49ae0f
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-19">
  ## Box iOS SDK `10.3.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add taxonomy to Metadata Field (read) definition (box/box-openapi[#572][1]) ([#1335][2]) ([`3dae5b0`][3])
  * Fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no `Retry-After` header (box/box-codegen[#903][4]) ([#1313][5]) ([`52a72ad`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add Metadata Taxonomies API (box/box-openapi[#569][7]) ([#1321][8]) ([`20497cc`][9])
  * Text input validation for Box Sign (box/box-openapi[#568][10]) ([#1315][11]) ([`7ffe641`][12])
  * Treat `nullable` fields as Optional (box/box-codegen[#906][13]) ([#1325][14]) ([`af828ea`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/572

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1335

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/3dae5b0335474a8b2a01f41d5ca71e21d0d77366

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/903

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1313

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/52a72ad706de7b9079df55d5be5dd9e1fab247c3

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/569

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1321

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/20497cce040703560a686b5640b943fb3f363f0d

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/568

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1315

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/7ffe641fda1a0a3ffe5a3eded0c8cafc840bb76f

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/906

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1325

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/af828ea1d2585b3d117035722028f28a2ad3dcbc
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-19">
  ## Box Java SDK `v10.4.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add taxonomy to Metadata Field (read) definition (box/box-openapi[#572][1]) ([#1644][2]) ([`61235da`][3])
  * Fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no `Retry-After` header (box/box-codegen[#903][4]) ([#1622][5]) ([`f135e2b`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add Metadata Taxonomies API (box/box-openapi[#569][7]) ([#1630][8]) ([`d1e8924`][9])
  * Text input validation for Box Sign (box/box-openapi[#568][10]) ([#1624][11]) ([`8c5b5c1`][12])
  * Treat `nullable` fields as Optional (box/box-codegen[#906][13]) ([#1634][14]) ([`cacc729`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/572

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1644

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/61235da7d51a64845d344a8286821e59b217a848

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/903

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1622

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f135e2b62d4b2d2d266ab40b3b366c8c7968d2db

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/569

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1630

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/d1e8924ad123e5fcbf014be50fbbf52ea45d546b

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/568

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1624

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/8c5b5c17285c1c0d4a644eb8187dac92f1f96f28

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/906

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1634

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/cacc729dc246c914eb1a6d8281f4261c96711dc1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-19">
  ## Box Python SDK `v10.3.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add taxonomy to Metadata Field (read) definition (box/box-openapi[#572][1]) ([#1269][2]) ([`7bb9bdc`][3])
  * Fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no `Retry-After` header (box/box-codegen[#903][4]) ([#1244][5]) ([`d7cc019`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add Metadata Taxonomies API (box/box-openapi[#569][7]) ([#1252][8]) ([`7850463`][9])
  * Text input validation for Box Sign (box/box-openapi[#568][10]) ([#1246][11]) ([`f99512f`][12])
  * Treat `nullable` fields as Optional (box/box-codegen[#906][13]) ([#1256][14]) ([`12c05dc`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/572

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1269

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/7bb9bdc894cb6d765a09ecbedda58b6edb9181d0

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/903

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1244

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/d7cc019dd186ef3cdb6214a6cf1625ec49c1fd37

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/569

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1252

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/7850463204ef9f7802a759ef69a3b7f4b6dd328b

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/568

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1246

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/f99512fcfca75edae48bb5a1b6a1897d330f5dd3

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/906

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1256

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/12c05dcebae13a696956288f41ec55fed8a4011e
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-16">
  ## New developer documentation site (beta)

  We are excited to announce the beta launch of the new Box developer documentation site. This release provides access to the redesigned, AI-first, purpose-built developer experience platform.

  ## What’s included in this launch

  New design aligned with developer workflows:

  * Refreshed homepage
  * Intuitive landing pages
  * Interactive API testing experience
  * Improved readability and accessibility:
    * Enhanced navigation
    * Clear, responsive book structure with global and single-page tables of contents
    * Light and dark modes

  AI-first functionality:

  * AI-powered search with generative answers and aggregated results from across Box sites
  * Contextual menu options to integrate with leading AI tools and copy pages as Markdown
  * Box Dev Docs MCP server

  ## Developer impact

  The new site delivers our up-to-date developer documentation in an entirely new experience. Some UX features are still in their beta shape and will continue to be refined in the next few weeks, so you may encounter occasional changes or improvements as we gather feedback and iterate. We encourage you to engage with the new functionality and share your comments.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum](https://community.box.com/box-platform-5) for any help needed.
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-12">
  ## Box Windows SDK `v6.3.0` released

  ### **New Features and Enhancements:**

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][1]) ([#1314][2]) ([`1733727`][3])

  ### **Bug Fixes:**

  * **boxsdkgen:** fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no Retry-After header (box/box-codegen[#903][4]) ([#1319][5]) ([`1647641`][6])
  * **boxsdkgen:** remove duplicate optional tag (box/box-codegen[#898][7]) ([#1313][8]) ([`5c3cca9`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/567

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1314

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/1733727b25c9e7b5a8995daa0e5aa5c63860e77f

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/903

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1319

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/164764159a2f041253ebf0b665286a06526fb3b2

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/898

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1313

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/5c3cca937949a52502848d92080aa3d69f891208
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-12">
  ## Box Windows SDK `v10.4.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * fix `RetryAfter` function when there's no Retry-After header (box/box-codegen[#903][1]) ([#1320][2]) ([`5030d1c`][3])
  * remove duplicate optional tag (box/box-codegen[#898][4]) ([#1312][5]) ([`17b2851`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][7]) ([#1315][8]) ([`b4af239`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/903

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1320

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/5030d1c5747afd8f85a54fcccf5695ca5f3ea836

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/898

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1312

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/17b285197cf276870ec2f3f881e4e03b28d915cc

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/567

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1315

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/b4af2395e45a9a94083e689ff8c30c2c22bda669
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-11">
  ## Box Sign Text Input Validations for Public API and Template Tags

  We've extended Box Sign's text input validation capabilities to support both Public API and template tags. This enables developers and users to apply validation rules programmatically and through templates, closing a critical feature gap for enterprise workflows.

  ## What's new

  Text input validation is now supported through:

  * **Public API**: Create signature requests with validation rules using the Sign API endpoints.
  * **Template tags**: Apply validation rules directly in document templates for use with Public API, Doc Gen, and Salesforce integrations.
  * **Custom regex patterns**: Define custom validation patterns beyond the predefined validation types.

  ## Why it matters

  This update addresses key integration needs:

  * **Public API developers** can programmatically create signature requests with validation rules, including custom regex, ensuring data quality at scale.
  * **Salesforce integration** users can now leverage text input validation rules for fields that sync back to Salesforce.
  * **Doc Gen users** can apply validation to fields in automated document workflows.
    Template Tags with validation support particularly benefits workflows where templates are used programmatically through integrations, eliminating the previous gap where validation was only available through the web interface.

  ## API updates

  The following endpoints now support text input validation:

  * [`POST /sign_requests`][1] — Create sign request with validation.
  * [`GET /:sign_request_id`][2] — Get sign request details including validation.
  * [`GET /sign_requests`][3] — List sign requests with validation info.
  * [`GET /:template_id`][4] — Get template with validation rules.
  * [`GET /sign_templates`][5] — List templates with validation info.

  ## Getting started

  To use text input validation:

  1. Review the [Create sign request endpoint][1] for adding validation to signature requests.
  2. Check out the Box Sign documentation for [applying validation in Template Tags][6].
  3. Explore [custom regex patterns][7] for advanced validation scenarios.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][8] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/post-sign-requests

  [2]: /reference/get-sign-requests-id

  [3]: /reference/get-sign-requests

  [4]: /reference/get-sign-templates-id

  [5]: /reference/get-sign-templates

  [6]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404085855251-Creating-templates-using-tags

  [7]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/42924560611603-Using-Input-Text-Validation

  [8]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box Python SDK `v4.2.0` released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][1]) ([#1237][2]) ([`2ac9408`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][4]) ([#1221][5]) ([`56a93ac`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/567

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1237

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/2ac9408be69a86b7f57e7efdb433c8c049568fad

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/565

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1221

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/56a93ac02fd746799ec8a831b61e06b2b7464479
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box Python SDK `v10.2.0` released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][1]) ([#1238][2]) ([`66267ba`][3])
  * Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][4]) ([#1222][5]) ([`6c3d332`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/567

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1238

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/66267bae7395ce2886cc4cd7504a51d22394b738

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/565

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1222

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/6c3d3325a19b3217225a80c2cd5d15c7bb068494
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box Node SDK `v4.2.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove duplicated  in union type (box/box-codegen[#898][1]) ([#1241][2]) ([`c56f808`][3])
  * bump `jsonwebtoken` dependency ([#1244][4]) ([`49692e3`][5])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][6]) ([#1245][7]) ([`3a74388`][8])
  * **boxsdkgen:** support `includeConfidenceScore` and `includeConfidenceScore` fields in AI extract structured (box/box-openapi[#566][9]) ([#1227][10]) ([`8e2b109`][11])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][12]) ([#1225][13]) ([`955b6ba`][14])
  * **boxsdkgen:** update error message on exception (box/box-codegen[#896][15]) ([#1232][16]) ([`b140428`][17])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/898

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1241

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/c56f808315fab6da134de17517bbb33067523859

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1244

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/49692e3724c9aa40a855f85a7b0771db1c984b6f

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/567

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1245

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3a74388b46e4842708c11ada8f931b810c0b3230

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/566

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1227

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/8e2b109ebacd48ed268a9310cb01d8f6ae5ebca4

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/565

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1225

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/955b6ba5df942c5c1c0340c307cefad70549db53

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/896

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1232

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/b140428c303de789bc1cee49c1e8c03139602c65
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box Node SDK `v10.2.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove duplicated  in union type (box/box-codegen[#898][1]) ([#1240][2]) ([`0b03b60`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][4]) ([#1243][5]) ([`55d6cd0`][6])
  * support `includeConfidenceScore` and `includeConfidenceScore` fields in AI extract structured (box/box-openapi[#566][7]) ([#1228][8]) ([`4bf9f46`][9])
  * Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][10]) ([#1226][11]) ([`8dfc1cc`][12])
  * update error message on exception (box/box-codegen[#896][13]) ([#1233][14]) ([`b298afa`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/898

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1240

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/0b03b607789ccf6a94253101760aa530a9737e78

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/567

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1243

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/55d6cd00790a81fa5c54379c045b4e652173dcb8

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/566

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1228

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/4bf9f46baaeaa213878c9102c0628e3c351c7b3c

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/565

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1226

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/8dfc1ccc9c600c24d4d5e7879eaebfd6bf1f9a0e

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/896

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1233

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/b298afa69fce884f7def10a8022aa67dc58ac949
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box Java SDK `v5.2.0` released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][1]) ([#1614][2]) ([`e5e9545`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][4]) ([#1598][5]) ([`87d1182`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/567

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1614

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e5e9545cc539c6c8f3ce4e99926840529437039b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/565

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1598

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/87d1182ec362bfbf800edda79360a2446ba7eaab
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box Java SDK `v10.3.0` released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][1]) ([#1615][2]) ([`0a069cd`][3])
  * Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][4]) ([#1599][5]) ([`b3c46bb`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/567

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1615

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0a069cdecc4837d8bdb6f1e91401d88c58af5a92

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/565

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1599

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b3c46bbf2f2f7b9b25befcd6442a4e5c9a92e790
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box iOS SDK `6.2.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove duplicate optional wrapping (box/box-codegen[#898][1]) ([#1302][2]) ([`4fae34a`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][4]) ([#1304][5]) ([`143ef03`][6])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][7]) ([#1286][8]) ([`e6c0826`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/898

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1302

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/4fae34add0569ac907d2f50e1ab2a7da7a223f6b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/567

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1304

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/143ef03119c6ac6f7f4bff198ce8578a78abd353

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/565

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1286

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/e6c082659f65bfcc8eb17de1552d23d07eeb7d56
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-10">
  ## Box iOS SDK `10.2.0` released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove duplicate optional wrapping (box/box-codegen[#898][1]) ([#1301][2]) ([`0fff45e`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove `confidence_score` and `include_confidence_score` from AI extract (box/box-openapi[#567][4]) ([#1305][5]) ([`702de7b`][6])
  * Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][7]) ([#1285][8]) ([`d541f12`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/898

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1301

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/0fff45ed3139ffebaafc9af4113bbb61d7fd3945

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/567

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1305

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/702de7b8bba3e423b749b9cf11a5bbb77fc1ad41

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/565

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1285

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/d541f128badac0929d586fe2de2f8e2a2c5a786b
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-09">
  ## Box UI Elements `v25.4.0` released

  ### [25.4.0][1] (2025-12-09)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * bump node-forge version ([#4386][2]) ([`5f46b8b`][3])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4369][4]) ([`abc11ee`][5])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4372][6]) ([`8dd5f9f`][7])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4374][8]) ([`7f37b4b`][9])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4375][10]) ([`df948b4`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4377][12]) ([`7e61a9c`][13])
  * improve accessibility in sidebar content and tags components ([#4363][14]) ([`35080aa`][15])
  * **metadata-editor:** Preserve field order when fetching taxonomy levels for fields ([#4378][16]) ([`fbd155e`][17])
  * **video-annotations:** Add version links for video annotations ([#4379][18]) ([`8bf7c63`][19])

  ### Features

  * **deps:** No-op to trigger release for blueprint-web upgrades ([#4368][20]) ([`58b9697`][21])
  * **form-elements:** Remove Form legacy context ([#4383][22]) ([`62c77b4`][23])
  * **hotkeys:** Remove legacy context from Hotkeys ([#4382][24]) ([`5db66df`][25])
  * **presence-avatar-list:** add BP tooltip to `presenceAvatarList` (`WEBAPP-41740`) ([#4384][26]) ([`5653500`][27])
  * **preview-modernization:** BP `AddTaskButton` ([#4366][28]) ([`f76ed73`][29])
  * **preview-modernization:** Update Sidebar Nav icons and tooltips ([#4373][30]) ([`60eda40`][31])
  * **preview-modernization:** Update Sidebar Nav overflow separator ([#4370][32]) ([`671a067`][33])
  * **preview-optimizations:** modernize Versions sidebar ([#4381][34]) ([`2b136e4`][35])
  * **`SecurityControls`:** Add Shared Link Auto-Expiration restriction ([#4365][36]) ([`40ff462`][37])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v25.3.0...v25.4.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4386

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5f46b8bb57c879f1fb5ca0a0dfc00138b90e8273

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4369

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/abc11eeb509583c80e3d76d8fb6341eeb3cbcf24

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4372

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8dd5f9feab11b5214a9f1038717916f80d89f697

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4374

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7f37b4bdf0059f40eea2182f85a5579b06884740

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4375

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/df948b4042fa706b944e2a1c2532c8e2827f8f24

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4377

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7e61a9c45b2da90af47723b14b7d5f04cce6322f

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4363

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/35080aababcf3457f9d9d898709b9ef8a4acf743

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4378

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fbd155e170cf5f5ea3e77d78e9614a3055cb7fe0

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4379

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8bf7c631acbebf37674d556c5c1480c7fa626ce4

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4368

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/58b9697331a5d913a83acd1d78ed71ebab8d2835

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4383

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/62c77b4ce9f1995e1194319343fd39fb6371bf80

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4382

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5db66df5d4335531ce829e51a1e83e4ab3abb35a

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4384

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/565350009c5f8b94c4ad01bad5232931997cc0c0

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4366

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f76ed73eb99176c80393a42d4d80ba75025e6f1f

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4373

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/60eda4000ba9884c70696d829f42c1b3fd6f7423

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4370

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/671a0676fbfa9a86c07a381691c9938880934aee

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4381

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2b136e46398ddaeb8b773e8a23323a986220dfd7

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4365

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/40ff462fb4630911d7ab7e2f0d36d415ead010af
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-08">
  ## Box Windows SDK `v6.2.0` released

  ### **New Features and Enhancements:**

  * **boxsdkgen:** Support long polling event for dotnet (box/box-codegen[#893][1]) ([#1297][2]) ([`d064e76`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][4]) ([#1293][5]) ([`3efe490`][6])

  ### **Bug Fixes:**

  * **boxsdkgen:** fix string extension in dotnet (box/box-codegen[#899][7]) ([#1306][8]) ([`b97f971`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/893

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1297

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/d064e76e5d047a4f28cad5c4aa597365e46aba26

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/565

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1293

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/3efe4903bfe94984db2b29f8ec80eb7c32cb1038

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/899

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1306

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/b97f971dc50ffcabc3376c73ca83290ff70f0899
</Update>

<Update label="">
  <Update label="2025-12-08">
    ## Box Windows SDK `v10.3.0` released

    ### Bug Fixes

    * fix string extension in dotnet (box/box-codegen[#899][1]) ([#1307][2]) ([`8c46af4`][3])

    ### New Features and Enhancements

    * Support long polling event for dotnet (box/box-codegen[#893][4]) ([#1298][5]) ([`e35cd67`][6])
    * Support new sign request metadata (box/box-openapi[#565][7]) ([#1294][8]) ([`da19f7c`][9])

    [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/899

    [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1307

    [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/8c46af45398c2002b5de8475672923bac524e4d1

    [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/893

    [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1298

    [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/e35cd67fe29d9af969ac88dee30896303d4fdc79

    [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/565

    [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1294

    [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/da19f7cdd4df6537acec50463330944e9d6d4632
  </Update>
</Update>

<Update label="2025-12-03">
  ## Ransomware Activity detection rule

  The Ransomware Activity detection rule, available in Box Shield Pro, monitors user activity and leverages Box machine learning to identify suspicious file extensions that may indicate a ransomware attack.

  ### Fighting ransomware

  With the Ransomware Activity detection rule, you can better protect yourself by:

  * [Creating and editing the detection rule][1]
  * [Viewing alerts][2]
  * [Taking action to remediate threats][3]

  To learn more about using the Ransomware Activity detection rule, visit our [support documentation][4].

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/46976660378643-Create-Edit-and-Delete-a-Threat-Detection-Rule

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/44263782754323-Ransomware-Activity-Detection-Rule#h_01KBCKYECWTA6RCBSZYMD2CNTX

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/44263782754323-Ransomware-Activity-Detection-Rule#h_01KBCKYPP2R903PZMB1VBA5XEM

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/44263782754323-Ransomware-Activity-Detection-Rule
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-27">
  ## Box AI API — new AI models available and default models update

  The list of [available AI models][supported-models] has been recently updated with the following models:

  * [OpenAI GPT-5.1][gpt-5-1]
  * [OpenAI GPT-5 mini][gpt-5-mini]
  * [Gemini 3 Pro][gemini-3-pro]
  * [Llama 4 Maverick][llama-4-maverick]

  Additionally, default AI models have been updated for Box AI features:

  * [Gemini 2.5 Pro][gemini-2-5-pro] is now the default model for Box AI Enhanced Extract.
  * [Gemini 2.5 Flash][gemini-2-5-flash] is now the default model for Box AI Standard Extract.
  * [OpenAI GPT-5][gpt-5] is now the default model for Box AI Advanced Agent for Hubs, Documents, and Notes Q\&A.
  * [OpenAI GPT-5 mini][gpt-5-mini] is now the default model for Box AI for Hubs, Documents, and Notes Q\&A.

  **Note:** Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are provided on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][override] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][ai-guides] and [API reference][api].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [supported-models]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [override]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides/

  [ai-guides]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [api]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [forum]: https://forum.box.com/

  [gpt-5]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-model-card/

  [gpt-5-1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-1-model-card/

  [gpt-5-mini]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-mini-model-card/

  [gemini-3-pro]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-3-pro-model-card/

  [llama-4-maverick]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-llama-4-maverick-model-card/

  [gemini-2-5-pro]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-5-pro-model-card/

  [gemini-2-5-flash]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/google-gemini-2-5-flash-model-card/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-20">
  ## Box iOS SDK 6.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Support GET enterprise configuration API (box/box-openapi[#559][1]) ([#1190][2]) ([`c91bb4f`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support Archive API (box/box-openapi[#563][4]) ([#1237][5]) ([`07aaf3a`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/559

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1190

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/c91bb4fa1b5907698fd6d0fd38560501c4d0274b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/563

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1237

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/07aaf3adde1ec46ed6f2423093b451b975005368
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-20">
  ## Box iOS SDK 10.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support GET enterprise configuration API (box/box-openapi[#559][1]) ([#1179][2]) ([`936edf7`][3])
  * Support Archive API (box/box-openapi[#563][4]) ([#1238][5]) ([`a2662e3`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/559

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1179

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/936edf7532765dfe3c0ccb7175966ee4ec265cf3

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/563

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1238

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/a2662e3bd088956769ed95d588e71623d0537c40
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-20">
  ## Box CLI v4.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * support auto update using Github releases ([#603][1]) ([`2460e1b`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * update dependencies to fix `tmp` vulnerability ([#600][3]) ([`7e270eb`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/603

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/2460e1b51002e94c3a16356099c4511faa96b87c

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/600

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/7e270eb8daf254a64eb3ce373444e9ad96e5e5be
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-19">
  ## Box Windows SDK v6.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * **boxsdkgen:** Support Archive API (box/box-codegen[#865][1]) ([#1270][2]) ([`307a5d4`][3])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Support GET enterprise configuration API (box/box-openapi[#559][4]) ([#1212][5]) ([`0d97d4d`][6])
  * **boxsdkgen:** Use generated `RetryStrategy` for retrying requests (box/box-codegen[#872][7]) ([#1227][8]) ([`5b42a3e`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/865

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1270

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/307a5d43f8ba2b93ce35b3607026b4232cc92042

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/559

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1212

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/0d97d4d858c4bba8b3df0d01234691294a7c8998

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/872

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1227

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/5b42a3e666751f1a1e529b875eafa8e7b0fbe930
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-19">
  ## Box Windows SDK v10.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support Archive API (box/box-codegen[#865][1]) ([#1266][2]) ([`bca0473`][3])
  * Support GET enterprise configuration API (box/box-openapi[#559][4]) ([#1198][5]) ([`426aaed`][6])
  * Include `pdb` files when packing .net root project (box/box-codegen[#859][7]) ([#1169][8]) ([`8b7e7c8`][9])
  * Use generated `RetryStrategy` for retrying requests (box/box-codegen[#872][10]) ([#1232][11]) ([`5567fef`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/865

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1266

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/bca0473d9ff02f286f3face267a30c2ab17d5b7b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/559

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1198

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/426aaed8418baf6cbd31dbe884aa91ce9bb7ef52

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/859

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1169

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/8b7e7c89f9f533ee09a8c096afd141abbbc72080

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/872

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1232

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/5567feff459b91e7b018bda5def60ad45548599f
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-19">
  ## Box Python SDK v10.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support GET enterprise configuration API (box/box-openapi[#559][1]) ([#1134][2]) ([`1106d32`][3])
  * Support Archive API (box/box-openapi[#563][4]) ([#1174][5]) ([`d21ec4d`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/559

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1134

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/1106d325973df9704f5102538ac0130bda6e9c38

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/563

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1174

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/d21ec4df82ab43539ff07d306cf304f86bbb0593
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-12">
  ## Box Node SDK v4.1.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **boxsdkgen:** Fix error propagation and empty fetch response handling in node SDK (box/box-codegen[#883][1]) ([#1196][2]) ([`9615a34`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/883

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1196

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/9615a3480686eb8af9374691a2ec1de82688eaa1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-10">
  ## Box Node SDK v10.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix error handling in TS (box/box-codegen[#882][1]) ([#1180][2]) ([`2b68145`][3])
  * Fix error propagation and empty fetch response handling in node SDK (box/box-codegen[#883][4]) ([#1192][5]) ([`5664231`][6])
  * Remove enum types from GET enterprise configurations endpoint (box/box-openapi[#560][7]) ([#1155][8]) ([`3ba01aa`][9]), closes [`box/box-openapi#558`][10] [`box/box-openapi#558`][10] [`box/box-openapi#559`][11] [`box/box-codegen#869`][12] [`box/box-codegen#871`][13] [`box/box-codegen#872`][14]

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add GET enterprise configuration endpoint (box/box-openapi[#559][15]) ([#1143][16]) ([`5eeeb4f`][17])
  * support delete Archive endpoint (box/box-openapi[#563][18]) ([#1173][19]) ([`7dc774d`][20])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/882

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1180

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/2b68145d9d8e46e26d08b8bc774ba757ef3b444f

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/883

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1192

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/56642319c5b77ab0113ed4e1af5df30100449fcd

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/560

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1155

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3ba01aaac7861ce3f0578af65d838f61b78b7dcb

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-openapi/issues/558

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-openapi/issues/559

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/869

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/871

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/872

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/559

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1143

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/5eeeb4fe7d0fff376cb31b820597e63d71dd0b69

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/563

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1173

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/7dc774d8764a3a0b3f60525e416ed5345d4a71b1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-07">
  ## Box UI Elements v25.3.0 released

  ### [25.3.0][1] (2025-11-07)

  ### Features

  * **deps:** Upgrade blueprint-web to 12.93.5 ([#4362][2]) ([`84aaf2f`][3])
  * **metadata:** enable multilevel taxonomy field filter in preview ([#4354][4]) ([`4851c37`][5])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v25.2.0...v25.3.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4362

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/84aaf2ffc0234b5728188df6944a48679eca4976

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4354

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4851c3776fbbef1220029234d01bc0ab6354b17c
</Update>

<Update label="2025-11-04">
  ## Box UI Elements v25.2.0 released

  ### [25.2.0][1] (2025-11-04)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **classification:** Fix flaky ai-icon check ([#4323][2]) ([`0061f34`][3])
  * **content-picker:** folder nav ([#4329][4]) ([`8053fa7`][5])
  * **content-picker:** Upgrade blueprint to fix scrolling issue ([#4349][6]) ([`d0ce8a6`][7])
  * **content-sharing:** Collaborator current user ([#4328][8]) ([`2e9dd6a`][9])
  * **content-sharing:** null sharingServiceProps ([#4352][10]) ([`4ea0f83`][11])
  * **content-sharing:** Shared link modal and collaborators ([#4360][12]) ([`76e94f1`][13])
  * Fix modernization hook for ContentSharing v2 ([#4339][14]) ([`e0a67e0`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4321][16]) ([`4d89663`][17])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4325][18]) ([`3e8eeea`][19])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4330][20]) ([`bd0dd5f`][21])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4333][22]) ([`b2a4e01`][23])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4343][24]) ([`847557b`][25])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4348][26]) ([`d4eae4b`][27])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4353][28]) ([`e3f4cf9`][29])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4355][30]) ([`094e633`][31])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4357][32]) ([`a817d9c`][33])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4358][34]) ([`33a5861`][35])
  * **storybook:** update brand url ([#4337][36]) ([`c73965b`][37])
  * **video-annotations:** fixing mentions not being properly parsed ([#4351][38]) ([`6bb2b15`][39])

  ### Features

  * **api:** respect hidden collaborators ([#4346][40]) ([`955e6cb`][41])
  * **content-explorer:** Disable selection while editing ([#4317][42]) ([`c08d9b5`][43])
  * **content-sharing:** convert api response for collabs ([#4322][44]) ([`6937b60`][45])
  * **content-sharing:** Create contact service getContactByEmail ([#4342][46]) ([`05b50cd`][47])
  * **content-sharing:** Create contact service getContacts ([#4338][48]) ([`8ae6ccc`][49])
  * **content-sharing:** Create contact service getContactsAvatarUrls ([#4345][50]) ([`6f9260b`][51])
  * **content-sharing:** Create sharing service changeSharedLinkPermission ([#4332][52]) ([`e64a61b`][53])
  * **content-sharing:** Create sharing service sendInvitations ([#4344][54]) ([`d497350`][55])
  * **content-sharing:** Define sharing service for shared link and access ([#4340][56]) ([`2f7185d`][57])
  * **content-sharing:** Handle error when fetch init data failed ([#4350][58]) ([`f0c9efd`][59])
  * **content-sharing:** Render notification for sendInvitations ([#4347][60]) ([`051bd7c`][61])
  * **content-sharing:** Sharing service updateSharedLink ([#4336][62]) ([`b39a482`][63])
  * **deps:** upgrade package dependencies ([#4359][64]) ([`2f025e3`][65])

  ### Reverts

  * "feat(content-sidebar): implement for custom sidebar panels (#… ([#4320][66]) ([`230f417`][67]), closes [#4239][68]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v25.1.0...v25.2.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4323

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0061f34e9e7f4613f5b15f83eeccde3b518940cb

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4329

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8053fa70127203f5d70818228b70272d869965ff

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4349

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d0ce8a60056cc2272c96828219897189449fb6ad

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4328

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2e9dd6ab3ce63b974241566f3d1c24e401005e96

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4352

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4ea0f8376ff34a650b4ad16af91a39e1becbe4d7

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4360

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/76e94f12fcc6a57809165bebb145fa57560afe56

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4339

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e0a67e0618fdbfa6f13cdb58fdba6a6c18a89c47

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4321

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4d89663b5481463353cb39f0828304ca1744a07c

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4325

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3e8eeea3d203d316b9e3f099f6de06759a56810b

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4330

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bd0dd5fa8778e77eb53785fb91b4ab0bdfcb2adf

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4333

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b2a4e01003f4b66faea00633e2bc2b3f4c7e13f7

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4343

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/847557b53bf89ad591e4cb2116d3b0f267b8e757

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4348

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d4eae4bed33a7ae4e01565eb7809b2f579bd6066

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4353

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e3f4cf90382c2ef531df909c4d7202dfab1126d8

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4355

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/094e633f76df79bb14d0f193f1a126d93e371324

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4357

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a817d9c616f9100f9f6fbe21dadb1cd578a45f39

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4358

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/33a5861d34e914e037e3a35597b28956f69db6ab

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4337

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c73965b87c172bbe59adc456fe64a9d92dd7316d

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4351

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6bb2b15c5e0886861c73c1478a05fd30b3bf1832

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4346

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/955e6cb06cd2d903c7c85e47f005f83c2818c890

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4317

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c08d9b5fdd8b20d95f747198c5bbac8204e97bf2

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4322

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6937b60ba181e2300eab98934a930d1456ce50e0

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4342

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/05b50cdd62e7e7d4a59073cf152305fa7ff969fb

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4338

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8ae6cccf0c11b1ebc750934c5d23c42a99dae41d

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4345

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6f9260b8256aee8c710f24e3e10d5711c5abc19a

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4332

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e64a61bcb92f2de6b75e218ae99a55dde82835c4

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4344

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d49735065dd73c4a6e3a85ffa99f3b24537c4b48

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4340

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2f7185de2d10fe62dba8e8a4f2bc8235009e0b5e

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4350

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f0c9efd404abfe29b69bb28e7d3caeba367a9b92

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4347

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/051bd7c5cccdaebd1d7bcda55de014c6db75f75f

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4336

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b39a4824486062c34378ce9a8fbbe34cd6042d3c

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4359

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2f025e3765c26bc206440458aaa632dddd36d83b

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4320

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/230f417c9407c4bbe4705ec8f200c53f572a798a

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4239
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box AI API — new AI models available and default model update

  The list of [available AI models][supported-models] has been recently updated with the following models:

  * [Mistral Medium 3][mistral-medium]
  * [Mistral Small 3.1][mistral-small]
  * [Claude Haiku 4.5][claude-haiku]

  Additionally, [OpenAI GPT 5][gpt-5] is now the default model for Box AI (Box AI for Hubs, Box AI for Documents, and Box AI for Notes Q\&A).

  **Note:** Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are provided on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][override] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][ai-guides] and [API reference][api].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [supported-models]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [override]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides/

  [ai-guides]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [api]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [forum]: https://forum.box.com/

  [mistral-medium]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-mistral-medium-3-model-card/

  [mistral-small]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/ibm-mistral-small-3-1-model-card/

  [claude-haiku]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/aws-claude-4-5-haiku-model-card/

  [gpt-5]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-models/openai-gpt-5-model-card/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box Windows SDK v6.0.0 released

  Introducing a new major version of Box Windows SDK V2 `v6` that includes two `namespaces` - the manually maintained `namespace` and the generated `namespace`. The coexisting `namespaces` provide easier access to the latest Box API features and support gradual migration to the standalone generated `namespace`.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * With `v6` of Box Windows SDK V2, support for .NET 6 has been dropped. We follow the official [.NET Release Lifecycle][1]. Since November 12, 2024, .NET 6 is no longer officially supported. While it may still be possible to compile and use this SDK under .NET 6, we do not provide support for issues encountered on that version.

  For more information about migrating to `v6` visit [`v5` to `v6` migration guide][2]

  ### What's New in `v6`

  With this SDK version, alongside the existing `Box.V2` `namespace`, we're introducing a new `Box.Sdk.Gen` `namespace`, which gives you access to:

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version allows you to gradually migrate your code base to the `Box.Sdk.Gen` `namespace`. The key differences between the `namespaces` are documented in the [`namespace` migration guide][3].

  Ultimately, we recommend to migrate to `v10` which includes only the generated `namespace` `Box.Sdk.Gen`. To migrate from `v6` to `v10` follow this [migration guide][4].

  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][5]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  [1]: https://dotnet.microsoft.com/en-us/platform/support/policy/dotnet-core

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v6.md

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-v2-to-box-sdk-gen-namespace.md

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v6-to-v10.md

  [5]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box SDKs major version

  Introducing a new major release of Box SDKs that includes two packages — the manually maintained package and the generated package. The coexisting packages provide easier access to the latest Box API features and support gradual migration to the standalone generated package.

  ## Overview

  To facilitate this migration process, there are two actively maintained major Box core SDK versions:

  * **The latest major version that follows sequential versioning and includes** the manually maintained package and the generated one. This SDK version enables leveraging coexisting packages at the same time, and serves as a transition phase. Support for the consolidated version of each Box core SDK will continue in 2027.
  * `v10` that includes **only the generated package**, a consistent version number across all Box SDK artifacts.

  ## Additional information and migration guides

  For additional information on recommended actions and migration guides, visit [Box SDK versioning strategy page][1].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] or report issues directly in the individual Box SDK repositories on GitHub.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box Python SDK v4.0.0 released

  Introducing a new major version of Box Python SDK `v4` that includes two packages — the manually maintained `boxsdk` package and the generated `box_sdk_gen` package. The coexisting packages provide easier access to the latest Box API features and support gradual migration to the standalone generated package.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * `v4` of Box Python SDK  supports Python versions: 3.8+. Compared to `v3`, Python 3.6 and 3.7 are no longer supported.

  For more information about migrating to `v4` visit [`v3` to `v4` migration guide][1]

  ### What's New in `v4`

  With this SDK version, alongside the existing `boxsdk` package, we’re introducing a new `box_sdk_gen` package, which gives you access to:

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version allows you to gradually migrate your code base to the `box_sdk_gen` package. The key differences between the packages are documented in the [package migration guide][2].

  Ultimately, we recommend to migrate to `v10` which includes only the generated `box_sdk_gen` package. To migrate from `v4` to `v10` follow this [migration guide][3].

  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][4]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v3-to-v4.md

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-boxsdk-to-box_sdk_gen.md

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v4-to-v10.md

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box Node SDK v4.0.0 released

  Introducing a new major version of Box Node SDK `v4` that includes two modules — the manually maintained module and the generated module. The coexisting modules provide easier access to the latest Box API features and support gradual migration to the standalone generated module.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * With `v4` of Box Node SDK, support for Node version below 18 has been dropped. While it may still be possible to download and use this SDK under Node below 18, we do not provide support for issues encountered on that version.

  * We have updated the module export style in the manually maintained `box-node-sdk` module to support the ES module and be more consistent with the generated `sdk-gen` module. Classes in the manual SDK are now exported as default exports from their respective files. When importing with `CommonJS` (`require`), use `.default` to access the class (e.g., `const BoxSDK = require('box-node-sdk').default;`).

  For more information about migrating to `v4` visit [`v3` to `v4` migration guide][1]

  ### What's New in `v4`

  With this SDK version, alongside the existing manually maintained module, we’re introducing a new generated `sdk-gen` module under `box-node-sdk/sdk-gen` import path, which gives you access to:

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version allows you to gradually migrate your code base to the `sdk-gen` module. The key differences between the modules are documented in the [module migration guide][2].

  Ultimately, we recommend to migrate to `v10` which includes only the generated `sdk-gen` module. To migrate from `v4` to `v10` follow this [migration guide][3].

  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][4]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v3-to-v4.md

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-box-node-sdk-to-sdk-gen.md

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v4-to-v10.md

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box Java SDK v5.0.0 released

  Introducing a new major version of Box Java SDK `v5` that includes two packages — the manually maintained `com.box.sdk` package and the generated `com.box.sdkgen` package. The coexisting packages provide easier access to the latest Box API features and support gradual migration to the standalone generated package.

  There are no breaking changes between `v4` and `v5` of Box Java SDK. For more information about migrating to `v5` visit [`v4` to `v5` migration guide][1]

  ### What's New in `v5`

  With this SDK version, alongside the existing `com.box.sdk` package, we’re introducing a new `com.box.sdkgen` package, which gives you access to:

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version allows you to gradually migrate your code base to the `com.box.sdkgen` package. The key differences between the packages are documented in the [package migration guide][2].

  Ultimately, we recommend to migrate to `v10` which includes only the generated `com.box.sdkgen` package. To migrate from `v5` to `v10` follow this [migration guide][3].

  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][4]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v4-to-v5.md

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-com-box-sdk-to-com-box-sdkgen.md

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v10.md

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-23">
  ## Box iOS SDK 6.0.0 released

  Introducing a new major version of Box iOS SDK `v6` that includes two modules — the manually maintained module and the generated module. The coexisting modules provide easier access to the latest Box API features and support gradual migration to the standalone generated module.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * With `v6` of Box iOS SDK, support for `iOS 11.0`, `macOS 10.13`, `tvOS 11.0` and `watchOS 4.0` has been dropped.

  Starting with `v6`, the minimum supported versions are `iOS 13.0`, `macOS 10.15`, `tvOS 13.0`, and `watchOS 6.0`.

  This update aligns the SDK with current Apple development standards and is required to adopt the new features available in the BoxSdkGen module.

  For the latest submission and SDK `toolchain` requirements, see Apple’s SDK minimum requirements [Apple Developer][1].

  For more information about migrating to `v6` visit [`v5` to `v6` migration guide][2].

  ### What's New in `v6`

  With this SDK version, alongside the existing `BoxSDK` module, we’re introducing a new `BoxSdkGen` module, which gives you access to:

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version allows you to gradually migrate your code base to the `BoxSdkGen` module. The key differences between the modules are documented in the [module migration guide][3].

  Ultimately, we recommend to migrate to `v10` which includes only the generated module `BoxSdkGen`. To migrate from `v6` to `v10` follow this [migration guide][4].

  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][5]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  [1]: https://developer.apple.com/news/upcoming-requirements/?id=02212025a

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v6.md

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-BoxSDK-to-BoxSdkGen.md

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/combined-sdk/migration-guides/from-v6-to-v10.md

  [5]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-21">
  ## Box CLI v4.4.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix the `--exempt-from-2fa` flag in `create` and `update` users commands ([#598][1]) ([`8f897fe`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/598

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/8f897feb677a0089e7854aaf8ef6b2babb70ab16
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-14">
  ## Box CLI v4.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support update users notification email ([#596][1]) ([`49356f4`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/596

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/49356f4ad954caf0c0d60646debc2bc047bddf7a
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-06">
  ## Box Windows SDK v10.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow flexible key-value data in `AiExtractResponse.answer` and `Event.additionalDetails` (box/box-openapi[#556][1]) ([#1147][2]) ([`c41a444`][3])
  * Make `role` parameter of update collaboration optional (box/box-openapi[#557][4]) ([#1156][5]) ([`8247918`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Handle Dictionary with object values deserialization (box/box-codegen[#850][7]) ([#1144][8]) ([`611b474`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/556

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1147

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/c41a4449a27be4484f986c3260950ae863c1285c

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/557

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1156

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/824791817bd4c65770f2ef65bb7b0eb3b48b892b

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/850

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1144

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/611b47424ff8773b9aabfb772a65f0ebca754e9e
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-06">
  ## Box Python SDK v10.0.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow flexible key-value data in `AiExtractResponse.answer` and `Event.additionalDetails` (box/box-openapi[#556][1]) ([#1084][2]) ([`f63cffe`][3])
  * Make `role` parameter of update collaboration optional (box/box-openapi[#557][4]) ([#1093][5]) ([`5c21907`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/556

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1084

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/f63cffec92ccf98af21d6227328aab00fa159187

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/557

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/1093

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/5c21907869d359fdb8fe4c83317a9eca5aeffdc3
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-06">
  ## Box Node SDK v10.0.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow flexible key-value data in `AiExtractResponse.answer` and `Event.additionalDetails` (box/box-openapi[#556][1]) ([#1051][2]) ([`70a2275`][3])
  * Make `role` parameter of update collaboration optional (box/box-openapi[#557][4]) ([#1068][5]) ([`3992171`][6])
  * Relax JSON deserialization guard by removing strict `content-type` check (box/box-codegen[#844][7]) ([#1033][8]) ([`1eb2c32`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/556

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1051

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/70a2275ada40f079178166d60c7f5d0a48bd5e40

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/557

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1068

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3992171af8587d9f43888ecd2fcbcd70a9f1b2b6

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/844

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/1033

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/1eb2c32a923be1762bf9dfbb2dfdb9e5b3e78af5
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-06">
  ## Box Java SDK v10.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow flexible key-value data in `AiExtractResponse.answer` and `Event.additionalDetails` (box/box-openapi[#556][1]) ([#1470][2]) ([`e215a5f`][3])
  * Make `role` parameter of update collaboration optional (box/box-openapi[#557][4]) ([#1479][5]) ([`6896386`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `Javadoc` comments (box/box-codegen[#839][7]) ([#1465][8]) ([`c72407d`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/556

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1470

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e215a5f2502e694421a05d8da550d2b305c09460

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/557

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1479

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/6896386c6086996399066b09b5afc998a5a95ca4

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/839

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1465

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/c72407dc77cc67f3a178d607a2b1bd4e90e832a8
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-06">
  ## Box iOS SDK 10.0.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow flexible key-value data in `AiExtractResponse.answer` and `Event.additionalDetails` (box/box-openapi[#556][1]) ([#1128][2]) ([`3e9a78c`][3])
  * Make `role` parameter of update collaboration optional (box/box-openapi[#557][4]) ([#1138][5]) ([`3fc5dc9`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/556

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1128

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/3e9a78ce710b0161e0912d1ee6af0b7758875fbc

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/557

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1138

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/3fc5dc9a62bd0cabc8987d56c0d63b94fa7ef14d
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-03">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.16.4 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bump Bouncy Castle to fix `CVE-2025-8916` ([#1454][1]) ([`a3605f4`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1454

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/a3605f47b4c5ee6b053f0940f9a06cba0a5c2584
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-01">
  ## Salesforce Developer Toolkit updates

  The developer guides for the [Salesforce Developer Toolkit][7] have been updated to include:

  * Methods and operations for [Box Sign][1] and [Box Hubs][2]
  * Code samples for [Box Sign][3] and [Box Hubs][4]
  * All methods that can be invoked in [Salesforce Flows][5]
  * Methods in Agentforce Flows for [Box Hubs][6]

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/methods/#box-sign

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/methods/#box-hubs

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/samples/#create-a-sign-request

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/samples/#get-box-hubs

  [5]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/flow-actions/#methods-in-salesforce-flows

  [6]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/box-agentforce-package/#box-hubs

  [7]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-10-01">
  ## Box UI Elements v25.1.0 released

  ### [25.1.0][1] (2025-10-01)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4298][2]) ([`86df699`][3])
  * **security-cloud-game:** Use nodeRef in DragCloud for React 19 ([#4286][4]) ([`ee8cba8`][5])

  ### Features

  * **content-sharing:** Convert Content Sharing V2 API Response ([#4285][6]) ([`6730ffe`][7])
  * **content-sidebar:** handle success event for creating metadata instance ([#4284][8]) ([`371c1a9`][9])
  * **content-sidebar:** implement for custom sidebar panels ([#4239][10]) ([`750737c`][11])
  * **item-properties:** Add files count for folder in item properties ([#4283][12]) ([`f12340a`][13])
  * **video-annotations:** sidebar support for video annotations ([#4318][14]) ([`aa5fc16`][15])

  ### Reverts

  * "chore(mergify): update circleci and mergify configuration ([#4][16]… ([#4296][17]) ([`b915e45`][18]), closes [#4295][19]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v25.0.0...v25.1.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4298

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/86df69972d8e2ea1c176daf4ba9b2b8484fd8504

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4286

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ee8cba848001708bd98ec889523527185a12c1ff

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4285

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6730ffe42cbdddae325f196875b8765405ca3186

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4284

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/371c1a9843f31af78b667b3f80dd6319b1c5d6ff

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4239

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/750737cb6c0b3fb10e7794183fde8c63373ee673

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4283

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f12340a30286781d5a35ed57dcf59ccca2499c99

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4318

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/aa5fc1667f8693ba11b072aa35075e1f073a0241

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4296

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b915e45fd8abc702fbdd99eb0bb4b411e00e7ef2

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4295
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-30">
  ## Box AI API - AWS Claude 4.5 Sonnet now available

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with AWS Claude 4.5 Sonnet.

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][1] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][2] and [API reference][3].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-29">
  ## Box CLI v4.3.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix multi item mode in `ai:ask` command ([#593][1]) ([`5081d43`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/593

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/5081d432d8ded16c8bf759352d28be0214fbe4ec
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-26">
  ## Box UI Elements v25.0.0 released

  ### [25.0.0][1] (2025-09-26)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **classification:** use `AsyncLoad` for `AppliedByAiClassificationReason` ([#4274][2]) ([`b80df38`][3])
  * **common:** Remove `findDOMNode` from `makeDroppable` (BREAKING CHANGE) ([#4276][4]) ([`c3bcad3`][5])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4269][6]) ([`d27c054`][7])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4272][8]) ([`9f3520b`][9])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4277][10]) ([`23b27f6`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4280][12]) ([`7c633b8`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4289][14]) ([`8453128`][15])
  * **metadata-view:** show error state when exception is thrown ([#4270][16]) ([`246f2df`][17])
  * **metadataeditor:** portal dropdown to preview container ([#4273][18]) ([`540a957`][19])

  ### Features

  * **classification:** `AppliedByAiClassificationReason` card to support empty reason ([#4279][20]) ([`cb04234`][21])
  * **classification:** support AI reasoning and new applied by labels ([#4271][22]) ([`681bace`][23])
  * **content-sharing:** Create `ContentSharingV2` component ([#4282][24]) ([`ef49c77`][25])
  * **metadata-view:** bump metadata view version ([#4287][26]) ([`f5887d7`][27])
  * **metadata-view:** update blueprint web version ([#4288][28]) ([`6d599a3`][29])
  * **timestamped-comments:** enable timestamp handling in sidebar ([#4275][30]) ([`7f9defa`][31]), closes [#4226][32] [#4230][33] [#4274][2]
  * **timestamped-comments:** timestamped comments editor updates ([#4244][34]) ([`6e1bd80`][35]), closes [#4226][32] [#4230][33]

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * **common:** Wrapped component of `makeDroppable` must have ref prop,
    for example with `React.forwardRef`

  * fix: Clean up tests

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v24.0.0...v25.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4274

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b80df3853c94a93fecac1d242bea11fce51cef00

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4276

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c3bcad39d81692c1d831e090ff3664c07e0ae987

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4269

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d27c054e985386fcce723c8929a33eb5c0f1500f

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4272

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9f3520b8f63aa7445a83ece2cf0e12610484c506

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4277

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/23b27f6ef48d4928a7f685ec084174f4b0e7e322

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4280

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7c633b85f7c75e0948e7d38db0417f40e7c79f7c

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4289

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8453128761a7d239f24654d59992ab38ac9ca501

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4270

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/246f2dfb3d12f1805ffac279eeceb1f9d59daef8

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4273

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/540a9575b3e16b23a8affb7ec12dad0ad7406735

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4279

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cb04234576cfc65c61402035c03d4a026a5eb08b

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4271

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/681bace22e3b2c7cc381c73855c1d1dd6b4f1548

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4282

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ef49c773b63fb240c115308c48030f46d46971a5

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4287

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f5887d74f689dd79e41ca2979d3a2430fc8b8bda

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4288

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6d599a3f7a3cc7f8f9f7a724e1d5a7b29522351a

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4275

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7f9defa1dae1faff823b414b708f164913aa701e

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4226

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4230

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4244

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6e1bd8060212d35529fcb0dcc4b7abd77470941d
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-05">
  ## Metadata view v2 in Content Explorer

  We introduced `v2` of the [metadata view in the Box Content Explorer][1] UI element.
  It's a ground-up redesign of the original version, introducing a streamlined interface tailored for metadata-driven workflows.

  ## Key features

  * filtering and editing interfaces with dedicated UI for each metadata field type,
  * flexible display options with list and grid views,
  * pagination support.

  ## Migration from `v1` to `v2`

  The `v1` of the metadata view Content Explorer has reached end of support and it will no longer receive bug fixes or new features.
  We recommend to migrate to the new `v2` metadata view. See the [migration guide][3] for a detailed instruction.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer-metadata-v2

  [2]: https://community.box.com/

  [3]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer-metadata-v2/#migrating-from-v1-to-v2
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-17">
  ## Box Windows SDK v10.0.0 released

  Introducing **`Box SDK v10`**, a major release designed to elevate your developer experience and streamline integration with Box Content Cloud. Currently available as a separate [`sdk-gen`][1] branch, `v10` will ultimately become the main branch.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * This SDK version is auto-generated and introduces a new interface for all methods. Extensive documentation is available [here][2].

  ### What's New in `v10`

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version includes the Box Next Generation SDK artifact, previously developed in parallel to core Box SDKs. To facilitate migration and provide access to the newest features, we'll soon release an additional major version combining both artifacts. Migration to `v10` includes breaking changes, please review the [migration guide][3] for details.  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][4]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  ***

  ### What’s New Compared to [Dotnet SDK Gen][5] `v1.12.0`

  #### ⚠ BREAKING CHANGES

  * Change names of unions (box/box-openapi[#549][6]) ([#1007][7]) ([`fcef4ec`][8])
  * Remove unused models from schemas (box/box-openapi[#547][9]) ([#999][10]) ([`ffcb488`][11])

  #### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `net462` debug build ([#1020][12]) ([`04f8343`][13])
  * Rename external user deletion method (box/box-codegen[#796][14]) ([#1024][15]) ([`13928c5`][16])

  #### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add External User Deletion API (box/box-openapi[#550][17]) ([#1009][18]) ([`2178bc8`][19])
  * Add missing webhook events (box/box-openapi[#554][20]) ([#1068][21]) ([`7fe3b99`][22])
  * Add Net Framework 462 support for `v10` (box/box-codegen[#773][23]) ([#986][24]) ([`67366c7`][25])
  * Allow injecting custom decryption mechanism for `jwt` ([#974][26]) ([`b877355`][27])

  For more details check [migration guide][28] from `box-dotnet-sdk-gen` `v1` to `box-windows-sdk-v2` `v10`.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/tree/sdk-gen

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/tree/sdk-gen/docs

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/sdk-gen/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v10.md

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/549

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1007

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/fcef4ecab38435fb4a79e2db8fcf2c5ad931986b

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/547

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/999

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/ffcb4888e6ad52f10028f92c49b5d919cb1ac620

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1020

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/04f8343c200e45ebe65bd29f03f55a44e76bcbde

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/796

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1024

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/13928c559bd3e97d060c48997b05ca384333d03d

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/550

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1009

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/2178bc87c8b724598616e99f0a528c7b21ff12c6

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/554

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/1068

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/7fe3b99cae1cf5be9ad3ec7bec54c97f198fd8c7

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/773

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/986

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/67366c7274faa5c758490d393605c76220aa6a79

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/974

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/b877355493b60dc6f9c1a576927d6e0c62ec27f3

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/sdk-gen/migration-guides/from-dotnet-sdk-gen-v1-to-box-windows-sdk-v10.md
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-17">
  ## Box SDKs v10

  Introducing Box SDKs `v10`, a major release designed to elevate your developer experience and streamline integration with Box Content Cloud. Currently available as a separate branch for each SDK, `v10` will ultimately become the main branch.

  What's new in `v10`:

  * Full API support — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.
  * Rapid API updates — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring that you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.
  * Embedded documentation — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.
  * Enhanced convenience methods — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  This version includes the Box Next Generation SDK artifact, previously developed in parallel to Box core SDKs. To facilitate migration and provide access to the newest features, we'll soon release an additional major version containing both artifacts.
  No immediate action required — If you're using the current SDK version, your existing code will continue to work without changes. However, migrating to `v10` includes breaking changes. For more information and migration guides, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][versioning]. Follow the developer changelog for future updates.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [versioning]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning

  [2]: https://community.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-17">
  ## Box Next Generation SDK deprecation

  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts. Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  In keeping with industry best practices, we are consolidating the Box Next Generation SDKs and Box core SDKs into a single package for each programming language. This makes migration efforts much easier and allows seamless addition of new capabilities to existing applications still powered by Box core SDKs, which were maintained manually.

  All future development, including new features and updates for the Next Generation SDKs, will be delivered through Box core SDKs starting with version `v10`. Currently, `v10` is available as a separate branch.

  For more information and migration guides, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][versioning]. Follow the developer changelog for future updates.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [versioning]: https://developer.box.com/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning

  [2]: https://community.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-17">
  ## Box Java SDK v10.0.0 released

  Introducing **`Box SDK v10`**, a major release designed to elevate your developer experience and streamline integration with Box Content Cloud. Currently available as a separate [`sdk-gen`][1] branch, `v10` will ultimately become the main branch.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * This SDK version is auto-generated and introduces a new interface for all methods. Extensive documentation is available [here][2].

  ### What's New in `v10`

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version includes the Box Next Generation SDK artifact, previously developed in parallel to core Box SDKs. To facilitate migration and provide access to the newest features, we'll soon release an additional major version combining both artifacts. Migration to `v10` includes breaking changes, please review the [migration guide][3] for details.  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][4]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  ***

  ### What’s New Compared to [Java SDK Gen][5] `v0.8.1`

  #### ⚠ BREAKING CHANGES

  * Change names of unions (box/box-codegen[#787][6]) ([#1359][7]) ([`114e778`][8])
  * Remove unused models from schemas (box/box-openapi[#547][9]) ([#1354][10]) ([`e031308`][11]), closes [box/`box-openapi#542`][12] [box/`box-openapi#544`][13] [box/`box-codegen#781`][14] [box/`box-openapi#545`][15] [`box/box-codegen#782`][16]
  * Replace `Date` with `OffsetDateTime` (box/box-codegen[#826][17]) ([#1419][18]) ([`ed04407`][19])

  #### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add proxy support (box/box-codegen[#830][20]) ([#1424][21]) ([`cc53247`][22])

  For more details check [migration guide][23] from `box-java-sdk-gen` `v0` to `box-java-sdk` `v10`.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/tree/sdk-gen

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/tree/sdk-gen/docs

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/sdk-gen/migration-guides/from-v4-to-v10.md

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk-gen

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/787

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1359

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/114e7785031e19fb58933f231e656a991b5effb7

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/547

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1354

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e031308f102137351238bf3823372150d3927442

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-openapi/issues/542

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-openapi/issues/544

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/781

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-openapi/issues/545

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/782

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/826

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1419

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/ed04407e8effa8811bc85023783097f8a95e5223

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/830

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1424

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/cc532475cdaf5ec3fd710149b41a6e7b04dcd32f

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/sdk-gen/migration-guides/from-box-java-sdk-gen-v0-to-box-java-sdk-v10.md
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-17">
  ## Box iOS SDK 10.0.0 released

  Introducing **`Box iOS SDK v10`**, a major release designed to elevate your developer experience and streamline integration with Box Content Cloud. Currently available as a separate [`sdk-gen`][1] branch, `v10` will ultimately become the main branch.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * This SDK version is auto-generated and introduces a new interface for all methods. Extensive documentation is available [here][2].

  ### What's New in `v10`

  * **Full API Support** — Complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem, giving you access to all the latest features and functionalities to build feature-rich applications.

  * **Rapid API Updates** — Our new auto-generation approach enables Box API additions within days, ensuring you can leverage the most up-to-date features without delay.

  * **Embedded Documentation** — All objects and parameters are documented directly in the SDK source code, keeping essential information in one place.

  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods** — New methods for authentication, chunk uploads, automatic retries, retry strategy, and more.

  ### Important Notes

  This version includes the Box Next Generation SDK artifact, previously developed in parallel to core Box SDKs. To facilitate migration and provide access to the newest features, we'll soon release an additional major version combining both artifacts. Migration to `v10` includes breaking changes, please review the [migration guide][3] for details.  For more information, see the [SDK versioning strategy document][4]. Follow developer changelog for future updates.

  ***

  ### What’s New Compared to [Box Swift SDK Gen][5] `v0.6.3`

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add External User Deletion API (box/box-codegen[#550][6]) ([`74571fb`][7])
  * Add missing webhook events (box/box-openapi[#554][8]) ([#1048][9]) ([`b8bf1ad`][10])
  * Retry requests for network errors in Swift (box/box-codegen[#820][11]) ([#1051][12]) ([`ba21450`][13])

  For more details check [migration guide][14] from `box-swift-sdk-gen` `v0` to `box-ios-sdk` `v10`.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/sdk-gen

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/tree/sdk-gen/docs

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/sdk-gen/migration-guides/from-v5-to-v10.md

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/969

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/74571fb6675d0ff90d0ec4ef2baf7113816093f8

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/554

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1048

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/b8bf1add360119f70a626f663cd810f9598ec794

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/820

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/1051

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/ba214507b37d2a842bcf044b5b4392b442486d6f

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/blob/sdk-gen/migration-guides/from-box-swift-sdk-gen-v0-to-box-ios-sdk-v10.md
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-16">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.19.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix ESM build and add test set (box/box-codegen[#828][1]) ([#768][2]) ([`c198527`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/828

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/768

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/c19852701d4e14eb6f6a9c7f24b4621d57a08b60
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-05">
  ## Box UI Elements v24.0.0 released

  ### [24.0.0][1] (2025-09-05)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **blueprint-web:** Upgrade blueprint-web packages ([#4261][2]) ([`ac48f93`][3])
  * **blueprint:** Blueprint Modernization ([#4204][4]) ([`29030a9`][5])
  * **box-ai:** Fix suggested questions not appearing ([#4249][6]) ([`0c63595`][7])
  * **box-ai:** Update box-ai-content-answers peer dependency version ([#4238][8]) ([`8967acf`][9])
  * **content-explorer:** Fix flaky SubheaderV2 folder title ([#4229][10]) ([`330ae33`][11])
  * **content-explorer:** Fix grid selection ([#4267][12]) ([`4beb05d`][13])
  * **content-explorer:** Validate selected item ids after item changes ([#4268][14]) ([`baaaa83`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4241][16]) ([`5e7030a`][17])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4247][18]) ([`29f266c`][19])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4253][20]) ([`f9e4e79`][21])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4254][22]) ([`59e30e3`][23])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4258][24]) ([`2522af9`][25])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4259][26]) ([`d3c5a78`][27])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4264][28]) ([`8118ab6`][29])
  * **metadata-view:** default iconcolumnvariant ([#4262][30]) ([`141cf6e`][31])
  * **metadata-view:** Enable sorting dropdown ([#4265][32]) ([`fac795f`][33])
  * **metadata-view:** fix filtering file extensions and filters visibility ([#4257][34]) ([`504aed7`][35])
  * **metadata-view:** fix filtering folders and files ([#4255][36]) ([`bdd6d1d`][37])
  * **metadata-view:** Hide keyword and location filters ([#4260][38]) ([`1ca5029`][39])
  * **metadata-view:** Use internal pagination ([#4263][40]) ([`b274e73`][41])
  * set version in release assets ([#4266][42]) ([`1ba15df`][43])

  ### Features

  * add client version to element api calls ([#4198][44]) ([`468d6c1`][45])
  * **box-ai:** Bump box-ai-content-answers version ([#4233][46]) ([`47cea9f`][47])
  * **classification:** implement AppliedByAiClassificationReason ([#4250][48]) ([`e23fbf3`][49])
  * **content-explorer:** Add initial filter values to Metadata View ([#4225][50]) ([`b68cd70`][51])
  * **metadata-instance-editor:** remove ai agent selector split and fi… ([#4226][52]) ([`1f953c0`][53])
  * **metadata-view:** Add Filtering ([#4235][54]) ([`2f5e42b`][55])
  * **metadata-view:** bulk custom actions ([#4227][56]) ([`371ad5e`][57])
  * **metadata-view:** default sortBy ([#4232][58]) ([`1a86aa5`][59])
  * **metadata-view:** Implement metadata sidepanel ([#4230][60]) ([`4f89946`][61])
  * **metadata-view:** Multi value display and onSave in metadata sidepanel ([#4245][62]) ([`7ddea1e`][63])
  * **metadata-view:** pass-thru onSortChange ([#4248][64]) ([`1a8a59f`][65])
  * **router:** withRouterIfEnabled ([#4221][66]) ([`f969170`][67])
  * **timestamped-comments:** enabling time stamped video comments ([#4228][68]) ([`31b580d`][69]), closes [#4226][52] [#4230][60]

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * **box-ai:** isResetChatEnabled prop removed

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v23.4.0...v24.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4261

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ac48f9313b4603cbae3ac7daf8be36cf84d0bdb1

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4204

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/29030a9a8c50eaa3b94c463993bc44dd2cc439ff

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4249

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0c63595299ea25408cabe6a4d846e7a34df74ee9

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4238

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8967acf340eb96c4a50e11934c022cd10af1c42b

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4229

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/330ae3398998c7e05778a52f15f2e5d0f815a0b3

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4267

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4beb05d307a142331d55030fe35154c26dd4b1a5

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4268

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/baaaa83462ef6b307992a9f6d800e62c8c668d16

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4241

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5e7030adc2e0ad683c11329dc00ab8dbd911aea7

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4247

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/29f266cbaa554d528766207ca22d9ab544686e36

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4253

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f9e4e7922d4efda3addbea621f71aaee38475385

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4254

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/59e30e3ac5eb1798456f228558f30f42d1b4ac2d

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4258

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2522af9d1ee562ec8f838263422c5ce30edc6be0

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4259

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d3c5a78fb8962acb92cdd91dccc497f05abdf164

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4264

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8118ab6ae814daad43848e626b711fe3e92b00e8

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4262

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/141cf6e1cc7c61a989c7bffbc5215d02c6d4f4c5

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4265

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fac795f44248bb444c489d0512344a9f72b188d7

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4257

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/504aed76ea4fab168ec9ad8b5190f1dfc15c781c

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4255

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bdd6d1d6c521cf147a6fa89428560e1b9f65b9b7

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4260

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1ca5029a5287f7aad3aefe5d2e4cfed26c301e5e

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4263

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b274e73216a5f8195f1f15cd82414ae19d1273e8

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4266

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1ba15dfbb119b82515d263a5610a0725d6819949

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4198

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/468d6c13d5e1b5c574f99442a22cdbb362d24485

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4233

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/47cea9f604fafd686c03aeb42b9b14893d7dae0e

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4250

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e23fbf303609bf6ee03ac35135dda57060346660

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4225

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b68cd705b2720125c9b132a81ff6dd2f4abe3efc

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4226

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1f953c08decd3113f855aceada1a8513e74582f9

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4235

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2f5e42b9e36618dc6d9880812ee425eb5c799b29

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4227

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/371ad5eeb38cabe162d1b8bb0ab9eb6f8378deab

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4232

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1a86aa587b47e149d4e9430a3720492d4bffb2a4

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4230

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4f8994652f45b34abd22d5347ecfd7642ce47fa2

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4245

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7ddea1e9ae6c0f5686fb8efa501619da61f41818

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4248

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1a8a59f66740eeb0313e4a64d2793f1bd5ea22c8

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4221

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f96917063feedb5ee681935b1551d8fa7555e74e

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4228

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/31b580d3dd7411f25b0f6841ab56eb91fb425fc1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-05">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.19.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove private access modifiers (box/box-codegen[#815][1]) ([#747][2]) ([`1693ddc`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add missing webhook events (box/box-openapi[#554][4]) ([#753][5]) ([`2b77c98`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/815

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/747

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/1693ddc114b1c0452b2eddd6b4837a308155678a

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/554

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/753

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/2b77c982d549ef8ad84d8c6b69f9afb37e53197e
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-05">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.6.3 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add missing webhook events (box/box-openapi[#554][1]) ([#581][2]) ([`966d171`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/554

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/581

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/966d171baa3f6fa1139732b05081000e44b0e08a
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-05">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.17.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add missing webhook events (box/box-openapi[#554][1]) ([#708][2]) ([`3d25542`][3])
  * Support event with long polling (box/box-codegen[#757][4]) ([#673][5]) ([`481fbeb`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/554

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/708

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/3d2554239b0bede7a3158cf88913592643c3e22b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/757

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/673

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/481fbeb1412ecc137c0090dd4b37fe9ad75db6b0
</Update>

<Update label="2025-09-05">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.12.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add missing webhook events (box/box-openapi[#554][1]) ([#600][2]) ([`46c6d33`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/554

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/600

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/46c6d33238b7a97352a434333e18054d8adccd03
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-26">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.18.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * correct import and export handling (box/box-codegen[#801][1]) ([#738][2]) ([`cea513f`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/801

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/738

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/cea513fcf3ed79b930e7067f06282c5bb08d8bd6
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-26">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.18.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * bump form-data to 4.0.4 and types/node-fetch to 2.6.13 (box/box-codegen[#808][1]) ([#735][2]) ([`7330b95`][3])
  * Fix serialization for `MetadataFilterValue` (box/box-codegen[#800][4]) ([#727][5]) ([`d046405`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support event with long polling in Python and TS (box/box-codegen[#757][7]) ([#712][8]) ([`6f25fda`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/808

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/735

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/7330b95dc18baa56a24a06657f2cb3cc3f4c7c46

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/800

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/727

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/d046405e644d5533e07ac42411c176527efdd1fb

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/757

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/712

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/6f25fdaf48b3538b3a7ba370d677454f6f0d2631
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-11">
  ## Bulk delete external users

  You can now [bulk delete][1] up to 100 external user accounts through the public API.

  This job runs in the background, and sends a completion report when it's finished.

  The report contains details identifying which user deletions succeeded and which failed.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/users/bulk-delete-external-users

  [2]: https://community.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-13">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.6.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix downscope token to use `retrieveToken` method for token retrieval (box/box-codegen[#731][1]) ([#459][2]) ([`8992b32`][3])
  * Fix parsing `Date` into query parameters (box/box-codegen[#729][4]) ([#449][5]) ([`1a95d0c`][6])
  * Specify events `next_stream_position` property type as `int64` (box/box-openapi[#535][7]) ([#502][8]) ([`795fe1c`][9])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `downloadZip` method (box/box-codegen[#765][10]) ([#505][11]) ([`c03589d`][12])
  * Add `rawData` property (box/box-codegen[#724][13]) ([#445][14]) ([`77405ad`][15])
  * add AI agents warnings; allow for more types of metadata value (box/box-openapi[#520][16]) ([#435][17]) ([`af1dc12`][18])
  * add AI spreadsheet processor (box/box-openapi[#533][19]) ([#484][20]) ([`14726d1`][21])
  * Add Archive Public API (box/box-openapi[#540][22]) ([#509][23]) ([`8266386`][24])
  * Add CI for swift (box/box-codegen[#755][25]) ([#494][26]) ([`76a3337`][27])
  * add hubs API beta endpoints (box/box-openapi[#531][28]) ([#476][29]) ([`a05aa5f`][30])
  * Add new Hubs APIs and Hubs items API (box/box-openapi[#538][31]) ([#503][32]) ([`9058c45`][33])
  * Add new schema for `Metadata Error` (box/box-openapi[#539][34]) ([#504][35]) ([`2e9ecf9`][36])
  * Add security settings properties on sign template schema (box/box-openapi[#518][37]) ([#426][38]) ([`a741a73`][39])
  * add Shield Lists APIs (box/box-openapi[#528][40]) ([#462][41]) ([`b5993b0`][42])
  * Add support for `additionalProperties` with Any value (box/box-codegen[#711][43]) ([#427][44]) ([`7fbf706`][45])
  * Add support for `nullable` fields (box/box-codegen[#700][46]) ([#420][47]) ([`5d0ff41`][48])
  * add support of IBM models to AI API (box/box-openapi[#522][49]) ([#436][50]) ([`0717222`][51])
  * Expose `makeRequest` method in `BoxClient` (box/box-codegen[#687][52]) ([#408][53]) ([`7ba7d09`][54])
  * Improve AI integration test (box/box-codegen[#758][55]) ([#499][56]) ([`3c7e717`][57])
  * Sanitize response body when throwing `BoxAPIError` (box/box-codegen[#760][58]) ([#498][59]) ([`2afc793`][60])
  * Support `getDownloadUrl` in Swift (box/box-codegen[#751][61]) ([#491][62]) ([`5916ede`][63])
  * Support new tools in AI Studio (box/box-openapi[#534][64]) ([#485][65]) ([`e793d7b`][66])
  * Support sensitive data sanitization in errors (box/box-codegen[#695][67]) ([#415][68]) ([`330ca9a`][69])
  * Update legal holds and AI models (box/box-openapi[#526][70]) ([#460][71]) ([`caa848a`][72])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/731

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/459

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/8992b32e9dd058fc77b4d68418da81b162aea315

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/729

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/449

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/1a95d0c80e0bd29dc1b467e7e98e6f5e6196ddfb

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/535

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/502

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/795fe1c7f0aa6074145b675fce4dd8e1432b0a64

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/765

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/505

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/c03589d6add3ee6d548f10b5380031cd38284e42

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/724

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/445

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/77405adc986adb8a1ce3bcff051ea8c481dbfd9d

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/435

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/af1dc12763f9a84691573fd3ba8307925fc017d6

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/533

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/484

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/14726d1952f5ddb2414f723a0b18fa5226269a64

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/540

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/509

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/82663868c61a31f43b229c6f24e29737913662a0

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/755

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/494

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/76a3337bed9bfc4629ec7dcb9af86bec4aa710f3

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/531

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/476

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/a05aa5fe2aaade1d7bdd7acb90c82fcb3a3bf262

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/538

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/503

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/9058c45c0bcd3e7f294a1bedac151637001aec63

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/539

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/504

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/2e9ecf9477854656958b715674b8aa0413508d31

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/518

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/426

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/a741a7305e2b2d174bc325e35ea9b77548a38095

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/528

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/462

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/b5993b096b4fceb77301f76eba1c17225b2844d6

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/711

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/427

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/7fbf7069eff66afddc328066f8aeb7321b249eea

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/700

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/420

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/5d0ff414b325db92db44c580cebb5636ab33553f

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/522

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/436

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/071722246402e0ec2439ae1e5e3d26bca45a049f

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/687

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/408

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/7ba7d091b0c832276daa571fad2a7db75469676d

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/758

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/499

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/3c7e717c6ca076caf1a963b3f60d3bd88f8c4bff

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/760

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/498

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/2afc7936dac87dee22adff3e22def92913f5854c

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/751

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/491

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/5916ede7454a1926de195e77b9a158c2af0fae2b

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/534

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/485

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/e793d7b3a03e8d58ce6adb63a894a0330ae154d1

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/695

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/415

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/330ca9ad17cbc79c93ffb114fd56c09a41f92694

  [70]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/526

  [71]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/460

  [72]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/caa848ac977c7fedeacbe018339d27b9d948bb1e
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-12">
  ## Box UI Elements v23.4.0 released

  ### [23.4.0][1] (2025-08-12)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **`ai-sidebar`:** Add callback for selected agent ([#4115][2]) ([`8bdbf3e`][3])
  * **`blueprint`:** Bump blueprint ([#4205][4]) ([`5e7f4b2`][5])
  * **`breadcrumb`:** Add missing key property ([#4170][6]) ([`c10b059`][7])
  * **`content-preview`:** prevent item icon shrinking on small screens ([#4111][8]) ([`e5004f7`][9])
  * **`gh-pages`:** deploy storybook from docs folder ([#4100][10]) ([`dd34522`][11])
  * **`header-flyout`:** remove animation on \< medium screen size ([#4163][12]) ([`cf3123e`][13])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4105][14]) ([`df61d95`][15])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4108][16]) ([`e702f97`][17])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4113][18]) ([`196beee`][19])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4119][20]) ([`113915b`][21])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4121][22]) ([`02cb22e`][23])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4130][24]) ([`ff8f322`][25])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4139][26]) ([`47b7690`][27])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4185][28]) ([`fef4134`][29])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4196][30]) ([`dd19958`][31])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4203][32]) ([`bd31196`][33])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4208][34]) ([`95b3cc6`][35])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4211][36]) ([`bee412f`][37])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4216][38]) ([`da932f1`][39])
  * **`i18n`:** update translations ([#4219][40]) ([`d8a8fcb`][41])
  * **`metadata-editor`:** package bump for bug fixes ([#4171][42]) ([`51dd7ca`][43])
  * **`metadata-instance-fields`:** add minimal taxonomy support in `metada-instance-field`s ([#4133][44]) ([`0dff276`][45])
  * resolve CVE-2025-7783 `form-data` vulnerability ([#4213][46]) ([`96252db`][47])
  * resolve incorrect type import ([#4132][48]) ([`8b5eec6`][49])
  * Throttle create folder to avoid rapid clicks ([#4193][50]) ([`67ec941`][51])
  * **`uploads`:** handle rate limit errors with retries ([#4134][52]) ([`eb3e3da`][53])

  ### Features

  * **`boxai-sidebar`:** Add logic to render remote sidebar from prop  ([#4106][54]) ([`7f8802a`][55])
  * **`cascadepolicy`:** disable inputs if cascade policy exists ([#4175][56]) ([`b6d778c`][57])
  * **`header-flyout`:** add opening animation ([#4159][58]) ([`3b417ba`][59])
  * **`header-flyout`:** optionally allow header actions ([#4164][60]) ([`8f3ad6e`][61])
  * **`mergify`:** update rule to require conversation resolution ([#4142][62]) ([`ef3291e`][63])
  * `metadata-edito`r and `blueprint-web-assets` package bump ([#4137][64]) ([`070ff74`][65])
  * **`metadata-editor`:** expose advanced metadata extract agent props ([#4128][66]) ([`f59b0aa`][67])
  * **`metadata-editor`:** expose custom agent in `extractStructured` payload ([#4135][68]) ([`076e719`][69]), closes [#4102][70]
  * **`metadata-editor`:** Metadata API adjustments ([#4192][71]) ([`6112967`][72])
  * **`metadata-editor`:** package bump for new icons ([#4195][73]) ([`1506020`][74])
  * **`metadata-instance-editor`:** add enhanced ai extract support ([#4197][75]) ([`540026a`][76])
  * **`metadata-instance-editor`:** allow hydration of enhanced ai extract ([#4217][77]) ([`5a93a16`][78])
  * **`metadata-view`:** Add `MetadataView` V2 ([#4191][79]) ([`c0ab1e7`][80])
  * **`metadata-view`:** Add Subheader for Metadata View v2 ([#4202][81]) ([`ab12626`][82])
  * **`metadata-view`:** Added Metadata V2 button ([#4174][83]) ([`d8ec9c7`][84])
  * **`metadata-view`:** custom actions ([#4215][85]) ([`88a5187`][86])
  * **`metadataeditor`:** enable ai folder extraction through API ([#4102][70]) ([`6ebec78`][87])
  * **`metadataeditor`:** remove ai pricing notice ([#4107][88]) ([`4bd24bc`][89])
  * **`notification-redesign`:** Add logic for use of BP icons ([#4103][90]) ([`7907136`][91])
  * **`router`:** added router-less logic to `VersionsSidebarContainer` ([#4209][92]) ([`0f46866`][93])
  * **`router`:** Merging `NavButton` functionality into `SidebarNavButton` ([#4150][94]) ([`814035d`][95])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `ActivitySidebar` ([#4199][96]) ([`435c75a`][97])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `AddTaskButton` ([#4176][98]) ([`90537b4`][99])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `NavRouter` and `withNavRouter` ([#4161][100]) ([`7f9cad4`][101])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `SidebarNav`, `SidebarNavTablist` ([#4177][102]) ([`d14e06e`][103])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `SidebarNavButton` ([#4156][104]) ([`dc8af3b`][105])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `SidebarNavigation` ([#4194][106]) ([`e25e0e1`][107])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `SidebarToggle` ([#4160][108]) ([`12c9a3a`][109])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `StaticVersionSidebar` and `VersionsSid…` ([#4152][110]) ([`a456f3d`][111])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `VersionsList` ([#4144][112]) ([`15c5d8d`][113])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `withAnnotatorContext` and `withAnnotations` ([#4136][114]) ([`d08545e`][115])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `withRouterAndRef` hoc ([#4162][116]) ([`32b08b9`][117])
  * **`router`:** optional router in `withSidebarAnnotations` ([#4206][118]) ([`782877d`][119])
  * **`router`:** Removed router functionality from `BackButton` component ([#4141][120]) ([`f01364c`][121])
  * upgrade blueprint packages ([#4123][122]) ([`c166d7d`][123])
  * upgrade react-virtualized for react 19 support ([#4157][124]) ([`269f585`][125])
  * **`uploads`:** add option to error on name conflicts ([#4117][126]) ([`463839e`][127])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v23.3.0...v23.4.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4115

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8bdbf3eee149e3a6dbc3431792509f3005371561

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4205

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5e7f4b21f47d6be7416e06a1554bc58c0b150395

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4170

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c10b05951c6efa185b0a04517d4cf91349f8a545

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4111

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e5004f785d38fe6681dcd70b11842e413fef55bb

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4100

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dd345227b8cb864cb42eabdbefd4208cfdd690c2

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4163

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cf3123e802fdd64d794087d7dd7551a3b5b28c32

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4105

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/df61d95591f74c44351e083fd139aed0bcf5e92a

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4108

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e702f9773ae876c9355ebb9a02221e7f935f729e

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4113

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/196beee85ebdcea2cfbc92ef70c1332d9b8ea25c

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4119

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/113915b34d9f4895bae0b3085544bcd34dd7794c

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4121

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/02cb22e1727821da51e366bdd8e70ab56e6c8a45

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4130

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ff8f3223c72e7f6aaea5d571fd5cf3bcd71b5857

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4139

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/47b76902799c69d1d5cd54965fb37d5781451423

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4185

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fef4134a26b59ee7bbb3e9da13ae488a98e6fa52

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4196

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dd19958289d113f4272559edbd1307e4d81e3137

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4203

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bd31196e11bcae1b2efa732255697751c25644a4

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4208

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/95b3cc6b48ea7850e348936d040e4fda4f64e4df

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4211

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bee412f1bad7e647b814d7601ddd04fe2d2421d1

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4216

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/da932f18801e936cffe7951a95639af2e52e05d8

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4219

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d8a8fcbc6ad3cbf11fec25949374bb73dce01d56

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4171

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/51dd7caf8b273e0c0adba948f58e4b69be3a708e

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4133

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0dff276da6b497220f762fd917c421db4d5cf343

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4213

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/96252db2ca2cad6b9b07787621e027e0a8ac7c84

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4132

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8b5eec6b4eda2a8291a8fda142b33ba6ba4498c0

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4193

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/67ec94170a855e6ec62064f51e0b2e5d6d5aa729

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4134

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/eb3e3da1c5b145f07994c5bb1eec38567de78187

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4106

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7f8802a4997322503e5f31bb86aaeb252b99ef70

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4175

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b6d778c6d3b0778a3e2f786b4b53d6d7ce045076

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4159

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3b417ba0a71d10026ba1c1857a974487eaf27f86

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4164

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8f3ad6e9f39d5fd8a5dcc54691bca6360af74dc6

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4142

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ef3291ed0f65122bfdaf9dd0fb51cfb6fc8acd64

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4137

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/070ff749e085283ad97487a8a7daf6b44807fa94

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4128

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f59b0aa998fea1d54e2bc14a841dbfd3adc8be65

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4135

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/076e719857d17bd52de52f904bf5ee2763bc0ef7

  [70]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4102

  [71]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4192

  [72]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6112967007196e2c91ca54ed7a7ce3afc5ab994b

  [73]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4195

  [74]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/150602092e957693b7fbd227e92adac8110ac327

  [75]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4197

  [76]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/540026a28bb805dd06d4b3f22c868ed0edd3f56e

  [77]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4217

  [78]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5a93a16c29187618429b8f0e4a53b8140a11b5f1

  [79]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4191

  [80]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c0ab1e7670e5f7c7ae8ff7572709ac19c9788a46

  [81]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4202

  [82]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ab1262690196a3ebb220250b1ad0243cd18932ce

  [83]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4174

  [84]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d8ec9c75d6c7d2fa502d7d44aad2e7cd0ad1721e

  [85]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4215

  [86]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/88a518723c44bcf6a6d0762c1ff8e16ebcdb5fd6

  [87]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6ebec78fff6ece2f1ea3c4bc20ef7409e33f27fd

  [88]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4107

  [89]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4bd24bcf59489f7aaac381d9c66b7e1b9d2a64df

  [90]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4103

  [91]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/79071362aea99c02993ed89cd9bee34bbe196b25

  [92]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4209

  [93]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0f46866a9490bd8c9872f9e76147ed72d9d7a287

  [94]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4150

  [95]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/814035d73280b7d1e0e9a068876ca3c0cf471b94

  [96]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4199

  [97]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/435c75a9bce168c8206597da804b7ce55c97467d

  [98]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4176

  [99]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/90537b471fce6643dd5eaecf1e5b0a1e3f196012

  [100]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4161

  [101]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7f9cad4b85f96d8d65f11c30ae3a45f2a3c96e40

  [102]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4177

  [103]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d14e06eb47083160dcf04055d3f418c4457d1255

  [104]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4156

  [105]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dc8af3b1dda45b1617aeac5a2d04af07af7e1e21

  [106]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4194

  [107]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e25e0e1174efd262f93e70619ff5f9a79d168fd8

  [108]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4160

  [109]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/12c9a3a840545048f53ebae7b278208981ed1a55

  [110]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4152

  [111]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a456f3d677c3ad15e5ec2e052dcedf93d0d612f3

  [112]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4144

  [113]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/15c5d8dfed2b2cc777344d0e0ef10da8c3525434

  [114]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4136

  [115]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d08545ef0650ad7082040d74acddb365bc8122f4

  [116]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4162

  [117]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/32b08b929acbd906b2a348b8939234c980f1b642

  [118]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4206

  [119]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/782877d2dcfa6d928da884055f1cc4bb17745d18

  [120]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4141

  [121]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f01364c73117a4d0638b28d4e3c6e832b1c27a62

  [122]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4123

  [123]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c166d7d49373168daed0eab315f2e90d4b0532a9

  [124]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4157

  [125]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/269f5854c5c15a48c971207cf00bc2f1a98ccb97

  [126]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4117

  [127]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/463839ee00c901cd9752106ca1a44e7a3906dc0b
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-07">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.17.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix exports syntax when importing from `lib` ([#700][1]) ([`782a287`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/700

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/782a287efd3481fc056effcf83886f05bc9adbf9
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-07">
  ## Box CLI v4.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add agent support to `ai:ask` command ([#589][1]) ([`095f411`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix support metadata query array ([#583][3]) ([`112db16`][4])
  * Remove `description` flag from folders:create command ([#587][5]) ([`adca76b`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/589

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/095f4110274f67c5b1024de49a256b5bbe35cf18

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/583

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/112db160230e5bb75f84e44cb86a8372341dd8ad

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/587

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/adca76b5fb03f62daf2104500b87f8a962382a35
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-05">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.17.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bump `cypress` to resolve `CVE-2025-7783` in `form-data` (box/box-codegen[#769][1]) ([#677][2]) ([`077413e`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add AI spreadsheet processor (box/box-openapi[#533][4]) ([#649][5]) ([`254fb54`][6])
  * Add Archive Public API (box/box-openapi[#540][7]) ([#674][8]) ([`1cbb124`][9])
  * Add new Hubs APIs and Hubs items API (box/box-openapi[#538][10]) ([#666][11]) ([`25c9596`][12])
  * Add new schema for `Metadata Error` (box/box-openapi[#539][13]) ([#667][14]) ([`9af46ab`][15])
  * Allow injecting private key decryption mechanism for JWT (box/box-codegen[#754][16]) ([#656][17]) ([`cb0c35d`][18])
  * Improve webhook validation checks (box/box-codegen[#745][19]) ([#647][20]) ([`98b3b92`][21])
  * Retry request on network exception (box/box-codegen[#776][22]) ([#684][23]) ([`c0c4dba`][24])
  * Support ESM build and tree-shaking (box/box-codegen[#762][25]) ([#663][26]) ([`8ca3302`][27])
  * Support Hubs beta endpoints (box/box-openapi[#531][28]) ([#641][29]) ([`d8c7bb6`][30])
  * Support new tools in AI Studio (box/box-openapi[#534][31])  ([#652][32]) ([`db2501b`][33])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/769

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/677

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/077413ec525fad4d8ebc4c7209fce20046731295

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/533

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/649

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/254fb54d928ec3a76304674f341be1c67d78a143

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/540

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/674

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/1cbb12485a417b813df8b6918cf3721ae781a286

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/538

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/666

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/25c9596bc71fe88e0a2b6d5e01c65fa682c2fd38

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/539

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/667

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/9af46abe837ee0d812bcc15f1edf0d5a6530bfe0

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/754

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/656

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/cb0c35df4a5b3f9b8c611006dd33d480949a0d36

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/745

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/647

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/98b3b9293ff3f0e5922d0772d87504770bb9303c

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/776

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/684

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/c0c4dbac40970d34da4c9e52fc43f029ae2f91a6

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/762

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/663

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/8ca33023d904edd596819c7c6df42022006274ed

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/531

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/641

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/d8c7bb66736a3c4679b116916c61e2ead824a305

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/534

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/652

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/db2501bb13fc6ecebbb4c535b4a19c9be2cf64c2
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-05">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.16.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Specify events `next_stream_position` property type as `int` (box/box-openapi[#535][1]) ([#644][2]) ([`64069db`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add AI spreadsheet processor (box/box-openapi[#533][4]) ([#630][5]) ([`6635757`][6])
  * Add Archive Public API (box/box-openapi[#540][7]) ([#651][8]) ([`c36d1db`][9])
  * Add new Hubs APIs and Hubs items API (box/box-openapi[#538][10]) ([#645][11]) ([`1daa3e8`][12])
  * Add new property for network exception retry strategy (box/box-codegen[#763][13]) ([#650][14]) ([`13f9593`][15])
  * Add new schema for `Metadata Error` (box/box-openapi[#539][16]) ([#646][17]) ([`49d7f34`][18])
  * Allow injecting private key decryption mechanism for JWT (box/box-codegen[#754][19]) ([#636][20]) ([`4ea0af5`][21])
  * Improve webhook validation checks (box/box-codegen[#745][22]) ([#628][23]) ([`f0ece63`][24])
  * Support Hubs beta endpoints (box/box-openapi[#531][25]) ([#622][26]) ([`b5e95fe`][27])
  * Support new tools in AI Studio (box/box-openapi[#534][28])  ([#633][29]) ([`ac76eb2`][30])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/535

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/644

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/64069db8da33988c173380defd6be065daa02496

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/533

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/630

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/66357578218913240bc923cb0dc771157ec95f54

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/540

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/651

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/c36d1dbff42c89876c037983c792c5c7282459cc

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/538

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/645

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/1daa3e8814403c78ed2a1d64187b8e4c379028fe

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/763

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/650

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/13f9593dbc4a45d094ee5709d602188ef341a1a5

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/539

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/646

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/49d7f349e1be4e23939ef10db1edfc6042b98175

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/754

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/636

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/4ea0af5f8f5b5516a7c23d7912c34690c017db29

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/745

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/628

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/f0ece639d761c765b3bc59fbe3ba8582af755178

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/531

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/622

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/b5e95fe5b219d067028aa395170718eca0d62189

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/534

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/633

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/ac76eb2d7c5560b30c4cec171dd90b0a0ece4ab5
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-05">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.11.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix downscope token to use `retrieveToken` method for token retrieval (box/box-codegen[#731][1]) ([#492][2]) ([`292360e`][3])
  * Specify events `next_stream_position` property type as `long` (box/box-openapi[#535][4]) ([#536][5]) ([`da265bd`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `ReadOnlyCollection` implicit operator for Unions (box/box-codegen[#633][7]) ([#483][8]) ([`a1fc2c5`][9])
  * Add AI spreadsheet processor (box/box-openapi[#533][10]) ([#519][11]) ([`c344023`][12])
  * Add Archive Public API (box/box-openapi[#540][13]) ([#543][14]) ([`be0bb9d`][15])
  * Add new Hubs APIs and Hubs items API (box/box-openapi[#538][16]) ([#537][17]) ([`f2584cd`][18])
  * Add new schema for `Metadata Error` (box/box-openapi[#539][19]) ([#538][16]) ([`425b4ad`][20])
  * add Shield Lists APIs (box/box-openapi[#528][21]) ([#496][22]) ([`8b81c87`][23])
  * Allow injecting private key decryption mechanism for JWT (box/box-codegen[#754][24]) ([#528][21]) ([`865c729`][25])
  * Make `OneOf` classes public (box/box-codegen[#773][26]) ([#551][27]) ([`f7dcc32`][28])
  * Support Hubs beta endpoints (box/box-openapi[#531][29]) ([#511][30]) ([`59c43b8`][31])
  * Support new tools in AI Studio (box/box-openapi[#534][32]) ([#520][33]) ([`0b47597`][34])
  * Update legal holds and AI models (box/box-openapi[#526][35]) ([#494][36]) ([`6310e56`][37])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/731

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/492

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/292360efe86797e42dbfb388a5bd2f5b41efa0c1

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/535

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/536

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/da265bd5c40defc4b2036811aefad59447faca09

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/633

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/483

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/a1fc2c584021c151fc9d1815877ffe73c972f711

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/533

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/519

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/c34402355243145a1cab7da78c6c2facde39fb36

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/540

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/543

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/be0bb9d3e58f97bc87f749d08d828c990c71789b

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/538

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/537

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/f2584cd9be40b67eaa3a500411b367543a26f830

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/539

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/425b4add7975d49584c8ed18a791caf72559203c

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/528

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/496

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/8b81c879c8b8bb5c020ecb573e527e2a5d9f1701

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/754

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/865c729395556a3c4a8bb1f1418c3932d268bdc4

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/773

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/551

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/f7dcc3262b289da55ebc6210c5656cc98e3b14b4

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/531

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/511

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/59c43b868e46edd26be0be13a5e1772a4d731128

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/534

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/0b47597f259884a2a5f567608e9e07997e3c6dc9

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/526

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/494

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/6310e560df6d9520598295139f55ec8a0a4d69d9
</Update>

<Update label="2025-08-01">
  ## Box Hubs APIs

  Box Hubs APIs enable you to programmatically create, manage, and collaborate on content hubs within your applications. Hubs provide a centralized space for organizing and sharing content across teams and projects.

  ## What you can do with the Hubs APIs

  The Hubs APIs consist of three main resource types that allow you to build comprehensive hub management functionality:

  1. [Hubs][1]
     * Create hub
     * Copy hub
     * Update hub information by ID
     * Delete hub
     * List all hubs
     * List all hubs for requesting enterprise
     * Get hub information by ID

  2. [Hub Collaborations][2]
     * Create hub collaboration
     * Update hub collaboration
     * Remove hub collaboration
     * Get hub collaborations
     * Get hub collaboration by collaboration ID

  3. [Hub Items][3]
     * Get hub items
     * Manage hub items

  To learn more about using Box Hubs, visit the [Box Hubs support documentation][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub/

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-collaboration/

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/reference/v2025.0/resources/hub-item/

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/26102544955027-Box-Hubs

  [5]: https://community.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-07-29">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.8.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bump `cypress/request` to resolve `CVE-2025-7783` in `form-data` ([#904][1]) ([`8e8d2da`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/904

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/8e8d2da58ab42bdfb9e5a49ca25e9b9fc50e0d61
</Update>

<Update label="2025-07-27">
  ## Box AI API - Google Gemini 2.5 Pro now available, Gemini 2.5 Flash Preview and Pro Preview deprecated

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with Google Gemini 2.5 Pro.

  The following models have been deprecated:

  * Google Gemini 2.5 Flash Preview
  * Google Gemini 2.5 Pro Preview

  For more information, see [retired models][deprecated].

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][2] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][3] and [API reference][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [5]: https://forum.box.com/

  [deprecated]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/model-versions#expandable-1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-07-23">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.16.3 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix compare message webhook message signature ([#1315][1]) ([`e2d407d`][2])
  * Fix File Request Copy method to return valid data ([#1320][3]) ([`8392a43`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1315

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e2d407ded3370ffee6eb074044fd562629a904be

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1320

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/8392a437c1a738bebb4e7d0f84d6bf833c76bdf3
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-24">
  ## Enhanced extract agent

  Today we introduced the new enhanced extract agent powered by Gemini 2.5 Pro. It employs chain-of-thought
  processing to provide the best answer, but also to tell the developer the reason it believes this answer is the correct one.

  The enhanced extract agent:

  * Offers an improved key-value pair extraction from complex documents with higher accuracy.
  * Effortless access with Box UI: activate the feature with a single click.
  * Transforms unstructured data into meaningful metadata attached to files.
  * Enables faster insights and discovery using the Box Metadata search tool.

  Go to the Autofilling Metadata in Templates section in our [product documentation][1] to learn more about its capabilities.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196173-Using-Metadata

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-24">
  ## AI Studio v2

  With the release of the newest version of the AI Studio functionality, we introduced the [enhancements][1] listed below.

  * **Users** receive a notification in case of any issues with an agent directly in the AI Studio UI.
  * Agents are validated in real time. The ones that don't pass validation are not visible for the users.

  **Admins** can:

  * Control the suggested questions displayed when the user starts interacting with a custom AI agent.
  * See the details of a request and response of a LLM, for example the system prompt, model, custom instructions.
  * Control the parameters of a Box AI image processor in a custom agent. The parameters are necessary to ask a LLM about a specific image.

  You can find more information in our [API][1] and [product documentation][2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/get-ai-agents/

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/37228357884179-Creating-and-Configuring-Agents

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-20">
  ## Box CLI v4.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Setup proxy for Box CLI with TS SDK ([#577][1]) ([`ec42077`][2])
  * Support `owned-by` flag when moving folder ([#580][3]) ([`2ec8e7f`][4])
  * Support integration mappings for Teams ([#579][5]) ([`163a367`][6])
  * Support metadata query with array ([#581][7]) ([`6750708`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/577

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/ec4207715360cc284574e1cbb573586218379517

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/580

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/2ec8e7fcf241dcd2c5841b8912e178e2384db426

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/579

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/163a36727c5f76b0e3b1c36049b3abae50148eb6

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/581

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/675070856eac6d06f2091203f4f19e41055dd97d
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-12">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.16.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Compute webhook signature with and without escaping the body (box/box-codegen[#737][1]) ([#627][2]) ([`6a21b8e`][3])
  * Fix circular dependency in `boxNetworkClient` (box/box-codegen[#708][4]) ([#591][5]) ([`b383889`][6])
  * Fix downscope token to use `retrieveToken` method for token retrieval (box/box-codegen[#731][7]) ([#618][8]) ([`90edb0c`][9])
  * Fix slash escaping when calculating webhook signature (box/box-codegen[#736][10]) ([#624][11]) ([`a0307d0`][12])
  * Handle list of strings in metadata filter (box/box-codegen[#716][13]) ([#597][14]) ([`979ff2c`][15])
  * Improve file download to avoid storing content in memory (box/box-codegen[#701][16]) ([#589][17]) ([`513a15e`][18])
  * Modify utility functions for browser (box/box-codegen[#686][19]) ([#585][20]) ([`7232170`][21])
  * Use constant-time comparison for HMAC signatures (box/box-codegen[#739][22]) ([#630][23]) ([`efdcaaf`][24])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add AI agents warnings; allow for more types of metadata value (box/box-openapi[#520][25]) ([#600][26]) ([`a5a555f`][27])
  * Add security settings properties on sign template schema (box/box-openapi[#518][28]) ([#588][29]) ([`dfd3e5f`][30])
  * Add Shield Lists APIs (box/box-openapi[#528][31]) ([#622][32]) ([`be3af44`][33])
  * Add support of IBM models to AI API (box/box-openapi[#522][34]) ([#601][35]) ([`b060b8c`][36])
  * Increase max items for ai extract endpoints (box/box-openapi[#525][37]) ([#602][38]) ([`86c5d14`][39])
  * Update legal holds and AI models (box/box-openapi[#526][40]) ([#620][41]) ([`de3df57`][42])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/737

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/627

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/6a21b8ed54ef26041feccaa5481951355965e514

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/708

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/591

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/b383889b9fdc91c6cfed7169e4d36a22a8c8a0fa

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/731

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/618

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/90edb0cc9bddc474c20b8b83770a4d314843edab

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/736

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/624

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/a0307d0c4c5dfed1a66e395a1dfb4c8ff387561d

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/716

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/597

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/979ff2c82edce9a969444febf1896d866ca154bf

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/701

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/589

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/513a15eb28736d28d665324949d145dd3387d27d

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/686

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/585

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/7232170fe7901cb7ba9ebf79ffc6a7c0b376a1c8

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/739

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/630

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/efdcaaf605fc6f14bbbf171e2797d73e97302bfe

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/600

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/a5a555f835df5b550b9839e3e1fcff5d9f2b9f96

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/518

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/588

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/dfd3e5f7ecf8a8e49d79ed7df4d7e1f88f3e8537

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/528

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/622

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/be3af441a66da02254d38576bb9ec258142f6d2d

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/522

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/601

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/b060b8c21a13abdfb12988f9c6e6beb014fa104f

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/525

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/602

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/86c5d14bafe8789c306a1688bcf010207c302ca9

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/526

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/620

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/de3df57cc90577a49ea40de278bde423d17c4f06
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-12">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.15.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Compute webhook signature with and without escaping the body (box/box-codegen[#737][1]) ([#607][2]) ([`e5118b8`][3])
  * Fix downscope token to use `retrieveToken` method for token retrieval (box/box-codegen[#731][4]) ([#598][5]) ([`e492685`][6])
  * Fix slash escaping when calculating webhook signature (box/box-codegen[#736][7]) ([#603][8]) ([`430b175`][9])
  * Use constant-time comparison for HMAC signatures (box/box-codegen[#739][10]) ([#610][11]) ([`6f6660c`][12])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add AI agents warnings; allow for more types of metadata value (box/box-openapi[#520][13]) ([#567][14]) ([`86aa1cc`][15])
  * Add Shield Lists APIs (box/box-openapi[#528][16]) ([#601][17]) ([`f980f65`][18])
  * Add support of IBM models to AI API (box/box-openapi[#522][19]) ([#568][20]) ([`767547a`][21])
  * Update legal holds and AI models (box/box-openapi[#526][22]) ([#599][23]) ([`d56228d`][24])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/737

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/607

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/e5118b8a257a042510374d91bd62a1f98c662fef

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/731

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/598

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/e4926851edccd4ee7e66157050cedd0d01cec5ea

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/736

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/603

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/430b1754ec840582e28a277c6c8d369cbe7ebdf5

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/739

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/610

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/6f6660c8f3aa2b7b75b0fcd4ed015d8d761cd77f

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/567

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/86aa1ccadac9acead7bceeafb50e45f38eb2d9cc

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/528

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/601

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/f980f6544a58a5c64ab0b3ec13b2771b81ea25ed

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/522

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/568

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/767547ae070909852800c447e65cbcc95b97c5a3

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/526

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/599

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/d56228d81bd9777af5431ccc9d05233e13a0c2ed
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-11">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.8.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Use constant-time comparison for HMAC signatures ([#893][1]) ([`d819efe`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/893

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/d819efe663a59fce53412fbe153a76dd346d4536
</Update>

<Update label="2025-06-02">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.16.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix parsing `downloadFileCount` property for `BoxZipDownloadStatus` ([`50c2249`][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/50c2249ff5e0f0d1fdc99c9ff8786e9c134e58eb
</Update>

<Update label="2025-05-24">
  ## Box AI API - new AI models now available, Gemini 1.5 models deprecated

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with the following models:

  * AWS Claude 4 Sonnet
  * AWS Claude 4 Opus

  The following models have been deprecated:

  * Google Gemini 1.5 Flash 001
  * Google Gemini 1.5 Pro 001

  For more information, see [retired models][deprecated].

  Azure OpenAI GPT o4 Mini model was removed.

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][2] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][3] and [API reference][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [5]: https://forum.box.com/

  [deprecated]: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/learn/model-versions#expandable-1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-05-15">
  ## Box CLI v4.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI Extract endpoints ([#574][1]) ([`0b4ff6b`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove incorrect `process.stderr.setEncoding` call ([`486779e`][3]), closes [#571][4]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/574

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/0b4ff6b63c8707c6842f3812d2a69071d195b799

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/486779ee3b8403805286b7ae6d3ab5c802c6f948

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/571
</Update>

<Update label="2025-05-13">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.10.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `UploadWithPreflightCheck` convenient method (box/box-codegen[#705][1]) ([#469][2]) ([`8dff7bb`][3])
  * Add AI agents warnings; allow for more types of metadata value (box/box-openapi[#520][4]) ([#474][5]) ([`a53cff5`][6])
  * Add security settings properties on sign template schema (box/box-openapi[#518][7]) ([#462][8]) ([`7fddaea`][9])
  * Add support of IBM models to AI API (box/box-openapi[#522][10]) ([#475][11]) ([`a187301`][12])
  * Support sensitive data sanitization in errors (box/box-codegen[#695][13]) ([#453][14]) ([`5ee0c93`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/705

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/469

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/8dff7bb859cd034d4e43b81c7c11b9a3fdb396e8

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/474

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/a53cff54395db91bad179d3c5bbae9800c1b79dd

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/518

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/462

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/7fddaeab425a859dc1aa5dc3420891047d27efdf

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/522

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/475

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/a187301543d6741c77799b66fde0f12d4fca710d

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/695

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/453

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/5ee0c932254a0cd1cc7bc814c29fe5f9e2151462
</Update>

<Update label="2025-05-12">
  ## Box UI Elements v23.3.0 released

  ### [23.3.0][1] (2025-05-12)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **`commitlint`:** Bump to 19.8.0 ([#4083][2]) ([`7e9e6e5`][3])
  * **flow-typed:** Bumped to 4.1.0 ([#4081][4]) ([`15b8108`][5])
  * **flyout:** change logic for `onKeyPress` in `Flyout.js` ([#4096][6]) ([`f48c2a9`][7])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4077][8]) ([`fe7752d`][9])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4079][10]) ([`0f587f5`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4089][12]) ([`f48076d`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4091][14]) ([`9869175`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4097][16]) ([`e265cfe`][17])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Show all metadata fields fix ([#4090][18]) ([`e4dcdcb`][19])
  * **`opensource`:** copy storybook files to root ([#4099][20]) ([`37c9cf0`][21])
  * **sass-lint:** Remove sass-lint ([#4082][22]) ([`05d1e8b`][23])

  ### Features

  * **`bp-assets`:** Bump BP assets to 4.39.0 ([#4095][24]) ([`15c403c`][25])
  * **content-sidebar:** additional prop for feedback tooltip in Box AI ([#4075][26]) ([`bcd2b86`][27])
  * **content-sidebar:** update content-answers for box ai sidebar ([#4094][28]) ([`8d4c456`][29])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Is delete confirmation modal checkbox enabled ([#4076][30]) ([`7e8c8ac`][31])
  * **`metadataeditor`:** add agent selector ([#4098][32]) ([`f3af868`][33])
  * **`metadataeditor`:** add ai extraction for folders ([#4080][34]) ([`82d6b29`][35])
  * **notification-redesign:** Add Notification classname prop ([#4092][36]) ([`2dc371f`][37])
  * **`opensource`:** update default route to use storybook ([#4087][38]) ([`174f335`][39])
  * **unified-share-modal:** add custom permission descriptions ([#4071][40]) ([`19a7978`][41])
  * upgrade blueprint packages ([#4101][42]) ([`f8606cf`][43])

  ### Reverts

  * "chore(storybook): Bump to v8.6.12 ([#4069][44])" ([#4078][45]) ([`cbe4c0a`][46])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v23.2.0...v23.3.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4083

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7e9e6e5ef30eb080313276f8549337710ecd875f

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4081

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/15b81086caf692986717f34e259d745fb6c34b04

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4096

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f48c2a92d8df6d731965dfa0d60d93c05f0c8e80

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4077

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fe7752d809f4946040bf18dec4a8a980b22c908e

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4079

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0f587f522e1904b37fccf25bdfff98d1c3252aea

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4089

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f48076d2cf967283dd5c9af95540ac1743a6ab71

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4091

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/986917536c15345378b64bfc9e66d47ade83b930

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4097

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e265cfef405c9644863c612a72158dac0bc2c439

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4090

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e4dcdcb1ef5b9247b69b4b0666ac68c9ad82f6b2

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4099

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/37c9cf06da4d17006f053cedbef6d4fedec09ed5

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4082

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/05d1e8b9f094b35dc0494c09f30777be6cd4ce2c

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4095

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/15c403c402e135ff9f5f73da011633d6ac923e3d

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4075

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bcd2b8698106ab5c03dcd44be7a948ab4a5cf203

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4094

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8d4c456dae84978341c3af572c81299ead047b9b

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4076

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7e8c8ac824f53c9264e939ba396369412150e5d0

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4098

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f3af86837955e4ff7ebb0d3a938538139d9eeabf

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4080

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/82d6b29c40b1c70eae027d084396600aae36fdeb

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4092

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2dc371fa6ea1a6a70dfd4f0fec05925fd581b7b3

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4087

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/174f335b7bd80f1b75a03441a3e14afb50f3e82d

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4071

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/19a7978121ac005cecd8643584076d4f2f1864ee

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4101

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f8606cf689b1468ebec5948e018bfa86b237705f

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4069

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4078

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cbe4c0a22d3526f6090d8c67bce38dcb9d5a4772
</Update>

<Update label="2025-05-02">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.14.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * set default timeouts for requests (box/box-codegen[#707][1]) ([#552][2]) ([`66b87c8`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add security settings properties on sign template schema (box/box-openapi[#518][4]) ([#543][5]) ([`0a45d21`][6])
  * Support sensitive data sanitization in errors (box/box-codegen[#695][7]) ([#533][8]) ([`abb7b1d`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/707

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/552

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/66b87c8986ce2f5fdb3a9eac995ef8a9643bcd76

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/518

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/543

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/0a45d218d1aa3fa62da7b5c8c01506fb657c0b36

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/695

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/533

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/abb7b1d16a192edd99ff1fc4fb7c4caf79ee5f10
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-30">
  ## Box AI API - new AI models now available

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with the following models:

  * Azure OpenAI o3 (beta)
  * Azure OpenAI o4 mini (beta)
  * xAI Grok 3 (beta)
  * xAI Grok 3 mini (beta)

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][2] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][3] and [API reference][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [5]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-29">
  ## Box AI API - new AI models now available

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with the following models:

  * Azure OpenAI GPT-4.1
  * Azure OpenAI GPT-4.1 Mini
  * Gemini 2.5 Pro Preview
  * Gemini 2.5 Flash Preview
  * IBM Llama 4 Scout
  * IBM Llama 3.2 Instruct

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][2] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][3] and [API reference][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://box-ai/ai-agents/ai-agent-overrides

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [5]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-29">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.16.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * use `Locale.ROOT` to prevent issues with non-US locales ([#1306][1]) ([`f083092`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1306

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f083092d5fdac37c93493945ab0c05ecdcdbc838
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-25">
  ## Box UI Elements v23.2.0 released

  ### [23.2.0][1] (2025-04-25)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **content-answers:** fix CSS variable ([#4074][2]) ([`393d83b`][3])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4072][4]) ([`dc1cf01`][5])

  ### Features

  * **message-center:** Pass `badgeCount` to `ButtonComponent` ([#4068][6]) ([`e316267`][7])
  * **unified-share-modal:** add remove collaborators ([#4070][8]) ([`4645733`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v23.1.0...v23.2.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4074

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/393d83ba8c8882f6b136b38f933bfc17f5be0720

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4072

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dc1cf014f1bb84384244cf68d684d07bd6420d11

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4068

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e3162676d06dc330c42204b0871cc61140665c57

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4070

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4645733c1d5aad0a42cbabd130741bdd6923243e
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-17">
  ## Box UI Elements v23.1.0 released

  ### [23.1.0][1] (2025-04-17)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **axios:** Bump Axios to 0.30.0 ([#4039][2]) ([`e212834`][3])
  * **content-explorer:** Add default dimension to `ItemListIcon` ([#4052][4]) ([`900757c`][5])
  * **content-explorer:** improve theming feature ([#4045][6]) ([`5ad4a94`][7])
  * **content-explorer:** remove base styles ([#4063][8]) ([`071f5b9`][9])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4038][10]) ([`2977e50`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4040][12]) ([`6c89353`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4050][14]) ([`a6b5074`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4051][16]) ([`4f74362`][17])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#4056][18]) ([`5d2e63b`][19])
  * **ip:** remove resolution ([#4057][20]) ([`8ad6f71`][21])
  * **item-options:** render correctly when item actions are filtered ([#4042][22]) ([`ab56916`][23])
  * **metadata-editor:** Handle new taxonomy API ([#4049][24]) ([`ed622af`][25])
  * **stylelint:** Bump to v16 ([#4058][26]) ([`db6c93e`][27])
  * **uaa-parity:** Display error message for UAA errors ([#4035][28]) ([`f9e9f35`][29])
  * **uaa-parity:** Not showing fallback `promoted_by user` for empty `promoted_by user` ([#4043][30]) ([`a586a0a`][31])

  ### Features

  * **content-explorer:** Add feature flag for `MetadataViewList` redesign ([#4061][32]) ([`5d0c716`][33])
  * **content-explorer:** enable independent theming ([#4062][34]) ([`a67be72`][35])
  * **content-picker:** Add `MoreOptions` button to rows ([#4036][36]) ([`f3667dc`][37])
  * **content-sidebar:** added support for feedback tooltip in Box AI ([#4059][38]) ([`b09cbf3`][39])
  * **doc-first-pages:** Add webp xrep header ([#4054][40]) ([`ca41b1a`][41])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Control Multilevel Taxonomy ([#4037][42]) ([`f705927`][43])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Multilevel taxonomy integration ([#4044][44]) ([`8a794ad`][45])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v23.0.0...v23.1.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4039

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e212834b2c5ec6e64d6c5378e7b114c3526d21f4

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4052

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/900757c6bdd760b31ad0ba7c717f3fe71a799ed3

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4045

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5ad4a94d9e3a8792ad32518272bb1aecf8cf47fc

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4063

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/071f5b9cdcadd0cfa15589dc47b1c3361299c0a7

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4038

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2977e5014e079a776f4316cc348512d182780f3a

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4040

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6c89353911c1be3fa10ae411242e8fcd51aaa8d0

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4050

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a6b50746500ef6d6d8316c78a1703b5f943ddf89

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4051

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4f7436230d6450a60ea6444bcbb6faf5c17612b9

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4056

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5d2e63bff00cd5fe3cafb58ba9c5e2807d849fbc

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4057

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8ad6f718ae32cba1104ceab2de08cabcc8da5ce2

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4042

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ab56916d4048acfecc03b0d1036791504a52caed

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4049

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ed622af35a2a016a2e6df14b25b79f5488bb9e1d

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4058

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/db6c93ef9f7b6ff13fe9198b697ec45c3f303335

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4035

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f9e9f35ec07fd720d6148d4b324d5a342ac3e558

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4043

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a586a0a3da711ce1803a4e8999af839a668598fb

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4061

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5d0c716f449bed05f3c638a00f292e6fe00a4b40

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4062

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a67be72dc9886094444627d97619d79195d67427

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4036

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f3667dc104c283287049e2c8ca43a46aa9bb1068

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4059

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b09cbf3cf18a36274410df5f0859675445e23cb1

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4054

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ca41b1ad22f89667b30e552040224abab3182c27

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4037

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f705927f9071950a59d4f3d5da1e141dad21d4b0

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4044

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8a794adb431d3dd7efd0518d0de4c3b361975c7d
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-15">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.16.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Bump version of `zstd-jni` ([#1302][1]) ([`9ebf8b5`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1302

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9ebf8b5d16c0ab8f4aa19849fdaa86935d38b294
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-11">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.15.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix data sanitizer for TypeScript (box/box-codegen[#702][1]) ([#582][2]) ([`eb79c0f`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/702

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/582

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/eb79c0faa11f40667289155e71b8893a96eb558a
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-10">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.15.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support sensitive data sanitization in errors (box/box-codegen[#695][1]) ([#573][2]) ([`488e76a`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/695

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/573

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/488e76a1e1f66d5d4ac56b16e6a7dae9e7f497a1
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-09">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.14.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `stream_file_content` parameter to upload methods ([#890][1]) ([`0e63c00`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/890

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/0e63c002ee17618c08200c12caae4bb3890b1e90
</Update>

<Update label="2025-04-09">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI agent ([#887][1]) ([`5b109ad`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/887

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/5b109adbd506510fc83b1c90af13b063ddefab37
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-26">
  ## Box UI Elements v23.0.0 released

  ### [23.0.0][1] (2025-03-26)

  ### Features

  * BREAKING CHANGE noop to trigger major version release ([#4034][2]) ([`4e1751f`][3])

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * update peer dependencies for `@box/` packages

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v22.1.0...v23.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/4034

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4e1751f4054f53bc62880dd3371893a853f93aa2
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-18">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.14.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add `verification_phone_number` property to create sign request (box/box-openapi[#515][1]) ([#546][2]) ([`916502c`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add find app item for shared link endpoint (box/box-openapi[#514][4]) ([#545][5]) ([`7c32eaf`][6])
  * Add Integration Mappings Teams API (box/box-openapi[#517][7]) ([#548][8]) ([`6ce1c7c`][9])
  * Support upload with preflight check (box/box-codegen[#676][10]) ([#554][11]) ([`e3aa784`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/515

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/546

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/916502c47cb4936ab93a40b3f1552c1860173a8e

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/514

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/545

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/7c32eaf2af3ef08299d9dd69e744304b20f4309f

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/517

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/548

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/6ce1c7c78c9bc5d70383065e95f01bc8133fdd52

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/676

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/554

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/e3aa784b73c7b473fdf06c05c7f657a54fc08e4c
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-18">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.6.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add `verification_phone_number` property to create sign request (box/box-openapi[#515][1]) ([#391][2]) ([`717b3a8`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add find app item for shared link endpoint (box/box-openapi[#514][4]) ([#390][5]) ([`07b9be5`][6])
  * Add hubs support to `/ai/ask` (box/box-codegen[#656][7]) ([#364][8]) ([`9a49864`][9])
  * Add Integration Mappings Teams API (box/box-openapi[#517][10]) ([#393][11]) ([`b9ed4e3`][12])
  * Expose token storage for authentication classes (box/box-codegen[#682][13]) ([#400][14]) ([`08221e5`][15])
  * Support AI Studio API (box/box-codegen[#626][16]) ([#375][17]) ([`802571d`][18])
  * Support unknown enum values (box/box-codegen[#670][19]) ([#382][20]) ([`8fe7ff4`][21])
  * Support upload with preflight check (box/box-codegen[#676][22]) ([#399][23]) ([`1befb4c`][24])
  * Update `/ai/extract_structured` response schema (box/box-codegen[#641][25]) ([#358][26]) ([`430611a`][27])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/515

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/391

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/717b3a8b285dfab92a9446cbd84443caa8dde148

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/514

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/390

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/07b9be5d523f3d3fb89bdbb240e4ca9628a3736d

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/656

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/364

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/9a4986499eaefffdb4f2593968d59eaf030f516f

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/517

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/393

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/b9ed4e35d17f85c1d2bc2a4e9e148ae009551348

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/682

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/400

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/08221e59cabc4042ea1d43bf578c2069ad66b444

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/626

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/375

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/802571dd34977ae2ebf674dbdddd3e140829b819

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/670

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/382

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/8fe7ff45fa4e45f743acd4450270d945b0afd393

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/676

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/399

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/1befb4c1b4898375ea3ab353c7149fd10adc1f17

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/641

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/issues/358

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen/commit/430611a0036258d5f3ff8e1c6de0b833255ce0ed
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-18">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.13.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add `verification_phone_number` property to create sign request (box/box-openapi[#515][1]) ([#503][2]) ([`6d19d19`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add find app item for shared link endpoint (box/box-openapi[#514][4]) ([#502][5]) ([`fd6c693`][6])
  * Add Integration Mappings Teams API (box/box-openapi[#517][7]) ([#505][8]) ([`d1aa250`][9])
  * Support upload with preflight check (box/box-codegen[#676][10]) ([#515][1]) ([`bb4597e`][11])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/515

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/503

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/6d19d197481a578d7d5ad8d632ac6f5c06bd3dce

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/514

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/502

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/fd6c6933f0fb518830e9ac810fd511a0cf60b429

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/517

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/505

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/d1aa250fb01fbf742daf266d4458ba2eab2c5669

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/676

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/bb4597e40d49e20eca44c4414e406b1352af1a2b
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-18">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.9.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add `verification_phone_number` property to create sign request (box/box-openapi[#515][1]) ([#427][2]) ([`d90faea`][3])
  * Use `targetFramework` when single .Net version is supported (box/box-codegen[#684][4]) ([#438][5]) ([`4e64174`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add find app item for shared link endpoint (box/box-openapi[#514][7]) ([#426][8]) ([`4dc5dc1`][9])
  * Add Integration Mappings Teams API (box/box-openapi[#517][10]) ([#429][11]) ([`92063c4`][12])
  * Expose token storage for authentication classes (box/box-codegen[#682][13]) ([#435][14]) ([`413058e`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/515

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/427

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/d90faea77650a37ce794a93c51bd9a8eb91f619c

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/684

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/438

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/4e64174c21c6f1dd2cef75f1f29ebe2ace92d852

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/514

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/426

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/4dc5dc14e3c204c537180df166d07735ae1c4e40

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/517

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/429

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/92063c435d7cb38a7eeca2e71f42e32b995a659a

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/682

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/435

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/413058e78cb69c89be6a819c0e63f9457bd7f2f5
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-12">
  ## Integration mappings for Teams

  Use the [integration mappings][1] feature for MS Teams to manage [where the content
  from Teams][2] channels and chats is stored in Box.

  * [List][3] all Teams integration mappings
  * [Create][4] a new Teams integration mapping
  * [Update][5] existing Teams integration mapping
  * [Delete][6] Teams integration mapping

  Check the integration mappings for Teams API developer [guide][7] to learn more about this feature.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][8] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/resources/integration-mapping-teams

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360050737154-Assigning-a-Default-Box-Folder-to-a-Teams-Channel-or-Chat

  [3]: /reference/resources/get-integration-mappings-teams

  [4]: /reference/resources/post-integration-mappings-teams

  [5]: /reference/resources/put-integration-mappings-teams-id

  [6]: /reference/resources/delete-integration-mappings-teams-id

  [7]: /guides/integration-mappings/teams-mappings/index

  [8]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-12">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.15.3 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * trim `content-length` header value ([#1297][1]) ([`fa11d14`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1297

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/fa11d141edf511eabc5f2398e55dc411d0cdcd31
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-11">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.13.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `rollup` plugin output directory in Typescript (box/box-codegen[#678][1]) ([#543][2]) ([`f828d5e`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/678

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/543

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/f828d5e7e3079c48590e9766f0dccd25ee1af9ca
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-07">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.13.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Split browser configuration in `package.json` for TypeScript (box/box-codegen[#672][1]) ([#538][2]) ([`ca7e291`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/672

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/538

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/ca7e29180e450cbb346a76aadfdade1062559b1e
</Update>

<Update label="2025-03-07">
  ## Box CLI v4.0.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `configure:environments:set-current` command ([#568][1]) ([`dc0905f`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/568

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/dc0905f7b85a32373e93ec7726afb261223e9fac
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-26">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.15.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Improve logging for API Request and API Response ([#1295][1]) ([`6eb1f57`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1295

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/6eb1f57a584571b46daa14d045a36bca382493fa
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-26">
  ## Box AI API - AWS Claude 3.7 Sonnet now available

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with AWS Claude 3.7 Sonnet.

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][1] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][2] and [API reference][3].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-24">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.15.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix parsing content length header ([#1292][1]) ([`3bcf788`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1292

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3bcf788dd9849305aa2cc85b8e5f88b35803ecb2
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-20">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.13.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI Studio API (box/box-codegen[#626][1]) ([#520][2]) ([`949b856`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/626

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/949b856ce1d77b1aa425b91b46440b46b383438a
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-20">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.8.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Do not retry HTTP request when `TaskCanceledException` is thrown (box/box-codegen[#665][1]) ([#406][2]) ([`1af0a6a`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI Studio API (box/box-codegen[#626][4]) ([#409][5]) ([`9661450`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/665

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/406

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/1af0a6aaf5f1e80f092ce506abe1cc01bf110bb8

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/626

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/409

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/966145021d4a1dd450cd199cc9ed3e9457f5a141
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-19">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.15.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `canNonOwnersViewCollaborators` flag to `BoxFolder` ([#1288][1]) ([`9119adc`][2])
  * Support `zstd` encoding for downloads ([#1287][3]) ([`0e3c4c0`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix AI dialogue history ([#1289][5]) ([`29b6519`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1288

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9119adceae35e892e73ed61ed30cf82ad912960d

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1287

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0e3c4c07e65ef1887cd5c393e3daf98aeb50ee47

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1289

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/29b651987a5cbeead4b129cab20970f983cb6889
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-18">
  ## Box AI Studio API

  We are excited to announce that Box AI Studio API is now available to all Enterprise Advanced customers.
  [Box AI Studio][ai-studio] allows you to build and manage custom AI agents to
  best suit your business needs. For example, you can create an AI agent
  that acts as a compliance consultant, answering questions regarding customer
  documentation with specific compliance rules in mind.

  Box AI Studio API allows you to:

  * List all AI agents
  * Get AI agent details
  * Create a new AI agent
  * Update existing AI agent
  * Delete an AI agent

  Check the Box AI Studio API developer [guide][guide] to learn more about this feature and check the [API Reference][reference] for details.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][community] for any help needed.

  [ai-studio]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/37228079461267-Enabling-Box-AI-Studio-and-Managing-Agents

  [community]: https://community.box.com/

  [guide]: https://developer.box.com/guides/ai-studio/getting-started-ai-studio

  [reference]: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-ai-agents/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-12">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.11.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix proxy usage (box/box-codegen[#662][1]) ([#476][2]) ([`e1d62ac`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/662

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/476

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/e1d62ac5a8063bf37244329329100752c3a069af
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-06">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.12.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add Box Sign shared requests (box/box-openapi[#504][1]) ([#491][2]) ([`e90255c`][3])
  * feat: Add hubs support to `/ai/ask`. Replace type of `items` property from `AiItemBase[]` to `AiItemAsk[]` in the `AiAsk` interface (box/box-codegen[#656][4]) ([#507][5]) ([`9f29d8c`][6])
  * Update `/ai/extract_structured` response schema (box/box-codegen[#641][7]) ([#498][8]) ([`502ac11`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/504

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/491

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/e90255c5d97a7a1a10dd529b58426142c5c6f0d4

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/656

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/507

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/9f29d8cb1f1d3b8c7625da1ddb9f2abd62d133f0

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/641

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/498

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/502ac11a2ad4e56fceece0deb6a15dbfc8b429ff
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-06">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.11.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Correct types of `paged` and `thumb` properties in File representation (box/box-openapi[#503][1]) ([#451][2]) ([`e818fa6`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add Box Sign shared requests (box/box-openapi[#504][4]) ([#453][5]) ([`3590918`][6])
  * feat: Add hubs support to `/ai/ask`. Replace type of `items` parameter from `List[AiItemBase]` to `List[AiItemAsk]` in `create_ai_ask` method (box/box-openapi[#506][7]) ([#466][8]) ([`29f0364`][9])
  * Update `/ai/extract_structured` response schema (box/box-codegen[#641][10]) ([#459][11]) ([`7c73cea`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/503

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/451

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/e818fa6c9c80e61a293fc24ed6f1a15978681662

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/504

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/453

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/359091873d26111b82f000e7837553cc799f2433

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/506

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/466

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/29f03649f3ec1471e859609d2b8bd77ad5d09106

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/641

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/459

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/7c73ceaa8888332b23bca4d6b64ef4999f942940
</Update>

<Update label="2025-02-06">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.7.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Correct types of `paged` and `thumb` properties in File representation (box/box-openapi[#503][1]) ([#383][2]) ([`d6995ad`][3])
  * Prevent `Authentication` header from being passed during cross-origin redirects (box/box-codegen[#648][4]) ([#382][5]) ([`a64d373`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add Box Sign shared requests (box/box-openapi[#504][7]) ([#384][8]) ([`d563886`][9])
  * feat: Add hubs support to /ai/ask. Replace type of `Items` property from `IReadOnlyList<AiItemBase>` to `IReadOnlyList<AiItemAsk>` in the `AiAsk` class (box/box-codegen[#656][10]) ([#397][11]) ([`32b6d03`][12])
  * Update `/ai/extract_structured` response schema (box/box-codegen[#641][13]) ([#391][14]) ([`5f79a03`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/503

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/383

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/d6995ad8ffa4f2cceb8195ffbfb6606f934a671f

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/648

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/382

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/a64d373a935cd2a8e6f72184b8dc129a973e9d45

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/504

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/384

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/d563886f2a2f48a20df13600f9c25ff95198a56f

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/656

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/397

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/32b6d03aba97c18a8901efe98fc60c74e10197ce

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/641

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/391

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/5f79a03453b9339a26eb130113d8f55748f0d912
</Update>

<Update label="2025-01-28">
  ## Box CLI v4.0.0 released

  ### ⚠ BREAKING CHANGES

  * Drop support old Node version and integrate typescript SDK ([#548][1])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Drop support old Node version and integrate typescript SDK ([#548][1]) ([`22179ec`][2])
  * Incognito browser option for box login ([#561][3]) ([`a666766`][4])
  * Replace `@oclif/command` to `@oclif/core` library ([#553][5]) ([`aed470b`][6])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Respect using environment `defaultAsUserId` for CCG Auth and OAuth ([#554][7]) ([`b3a691e`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/548

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/22179ecfc68b8dd315339ac204a7274d712d5a8e

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/561

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/a6667664d6b43fd80de9e57482b0f4138efcd6cf

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/553

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/aed470b22d28ed19040b4417e3143f3323b9a916

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/554

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/b3a691e8c886f7bb3a25ae8f7986f284a695f046
</Update>

<Update label="2025-01-22">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.14.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support downloading file from shared link ([#1282][1]) ([`9b7f28b`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove sensitive data when `BoxAPIException` logs request ([#1284][3]) ([`f1e226f`][4])
  * Support creating ongoing Legal Hold policy with start date ([#1281][5]) ([`d9564e2`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1282

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9b7f28b0288977513b0db3ed4f800647545e1f2c

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1284

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f1e226f710c301202acff067ef34687ddbb57b7b

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1281

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/d9564e2e86ea110af933ca3dd0f728111d7140ae
</Update>

<Update label="2024-01-13">
  ## Box Doc Gen

  We are excited to announce that [Box Doc Gen][2] is now available to all **Enterprise Advanced** customers.

  [Box Doc Gen][1] allows you to generate various business documents based on Box Doc Gen templates uploaded to Box, with data fields that can be dynamically filled using Box Doc Gen API.

  Box Doc Gen functionality allows you to:

  * [Mark files as Doc Gen templates][3].
  * [Generate documents][4].
  * Check status of the [Box Doc Gen jobs][5]

  Check the [Box Doc Gen developer guides][1] to learn more about Box Doc Gen and check the [API Reference][6] for Box Doc Gen API details.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][7] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/docgen

  [2]: /guides/docgen/docgen-getting-started/

  [3]: /guides/docgen/mark-template/

  [4]: /guides/docgen/generate-document/

  [5]: /guides/docgen/docgen-jobs/

  [6]: /reference/post-docgen-templates/

  [7]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2025-01-17">
  ## Google PaLM deprecation and removal

  `Google Pathways Language Models (PaLM)` are being deprecated by `Google`.

  As a result, the following models will be removed from Box AI on 2025-01-17

  * `text_bison`
  * `text_bison_32k`
  * `text_unicorn`
  * `google_text_embedding_gecko*`

  If you are using one of these models via agent override, check our [list of
  supported models](https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/) here.
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-30">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.10.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove unused parameter from `SignRequest` (box/box-openapi[#489][1]) ([#450][2]) ([`f5683b7`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for replacing the network client implementation (box/box-codegen[#629][4]) ([#454][5]) ([`1cb7ddb`][6])
  * Allow for customizing retry strategy (box/box-codegen[#635][7]) ([#457][8]) ([`530ca33`][9])
  * Support webhook message validation (box/box-codegen[#631][10]) ([#455][11]) ([`09765a4`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/489

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/450

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/f5683b703625dd8d504ca52100f692cb8440a474

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/629

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/454

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/1cb7ddb3ada79cebc27fbfce9df90cd8ebad353c

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/635

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/457

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/530ca33ff3635581bd8ee91a82bc9f000b18812b

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/631

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/455

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/09765a42fe25f15095bd1bd0d1377f2da222c9e4
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-30">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.9.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove unused parameter from `SignRequest` (box/box-openapi[#489][1]) ([#411][2]) ([`578d9b4`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `ai_agent` info to `AiResponse` (box/box-openapi[#485][4]) ([#402][5]) ([`351a5b8`][6])
  * Add support for replacing the network client implementation (box/box-codegen[#629][7]) ([#415][8]) ([`fb118dd`][9])
  * Allow for customizing retry strategy (box/box-codegen[#635][10]) ([#418][11]) ([`8dfb3ed`][12])
  * Support optional `userId` parameter for updating files, folders and web links (box/box-openapi[#488][13]) ([#406][14]) ([`d9cff4c`][15])
  * Support webhook message validation (box/box-codegen[#631][16]) ([#416][17]) ([`0fec20b`][18])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/489

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/411

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/578d9b48da7e55d2e3e4736c871400dc90d826b1

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/485

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/402

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/351a5b8dfbc8a0095bafbbf0245d8575217fc3c9

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/629

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/415

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/fb118ddb1cbfb1d6a72e657bed57088fdff1ec02

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/635

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/418

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/8dfb3ed13196de37a78a53325079e284c7e921d5

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/488

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/406

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/d9cff4c6adc9c5cc9ce1edf73dffe8ac5979ce71

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/631

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/416

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/0fec20b281fe195f0dd6aaf8f164bdd414587fc4
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-10">
  ## Upcoming breaking change: Box AI API - Extract Structured

  We would like to announce a planned breaking change in the Box AI API - Extract Structured endpoint. This change will bring improvements to the response by introducing additional fields and nesting the metadata key-value pairs within the answer object. **This change is planned to be released mid-January**. Be sure to follow our [changelog][1] and announcements on our [Box Developer Blog][2]. Expand to see code snippets examples:

  Current response example:

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "name": "Marie",
    "date": "10/2/23"
  }
  ```

  New response format example:

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "answer": {
      "name": "Marie",
      "date": "10/2/23"
    },
    "completion_reason": "done",
    "created_at": "2012-12-12T10:53:43-08:00"
  }
  ```

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/

  [2]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-09">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.9.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix signature of `beforeRequest` method in `Interceptor` interface (box/box-codegen[#625][1]) ([#446][2]) ([`ef2e765`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `aiAgent` info to `AiResponse` (box/box-codegen[#624][4]) ([#440][5]) ([`24c2013`][6])
  * Support optional `userId` parameter for updating files, folders and web links (box/box-openapi[#488][7]) ([#445][8]) ([`874f259`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/625

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/446

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/ef2e7658cab705906325e40d6c7c6e96e5703201

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/624

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/440

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/24c20131b8275d43ecb02f3c94ac8e6116de3ea9

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/488

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/445

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/874f259ce12e8440301ffb1b2b65a6765b87803f
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-05">
  ## CrowdStrike integration with Box

  CrowdStrike is an endpoint detection tool integrated with Box to monitor endpoint activity. This means, CrowdStrike monitors devices that connect to Box and your Box organization, analyzing data about the connection and the device to identify potential threat activity.

  The integration with CrowdStrike comes with additional [events in the event stream][1] that can be triggered for an enterprise.

  For example, the `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_DEVICE_DETECTED` event is triggered when a new device is detected by the the CrowdStrike Falcon platform.
  The full list includes the following events:

  * `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_DEVICE_DETECTED`
  * `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_NO_BOX_TOOLS`
  * `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_BOX_TOOLS_OUTDATED`
  * `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_DRIVE_OUTDATED`
  * `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_ACCESS_ALLOWED_NO_CROWDSTRIKE_DEVICE`
  * `EDR_CROWDSTRIKE_ACCESS_REVOKED`

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise#event-types

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-04">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.5.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Support status codes with no content (box/box-codegen[#604][1]) ([#314][2]) ([`57747d5`][3])
  * Update collaboration, metadata and collection resources (box/box-openapi[#483][4]) ([#316][5]) ([`d331f8a`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add optional URL parameter to `FetchResponse` (box/box-codegen[#617][7]) ([#331][8]) ([`61484ec`][9])
  * Allow using default credentials for proxy (box/box-codegen[#623][10]) ([#334][11]) ([`bc4636e`][12]), closes [#333][13]
  * Expose method for making custom HTTP requests (box/box-codegen[#622][14]) ([#329][15]) ([`e689140`][16])
  * Support get collection by ID endpoint (box/box-codegen[#595][17]) ([#304][18]) ([`9ebf59a`][19])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/604

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/314

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/57747d50c48dd4c433dad342a5e2a20ac0b15952

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/483

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/316

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/d331f8a1f7110e5e00df170cedef85af682d58b4

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/617

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/331

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/61484ec9fbf96c0ae62116ec1ee0cbb50aae7493

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/623

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/334

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/bc4636e64859fd7d0b1449ec34b6144d0eb1a768

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/333

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/622

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/329

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/e689140d6d3be772ff2370e7de5797707df7bdad

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/595

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/issues/304

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-dotnet-sdk-gen/commit/9ebf59ae388aa9aec5d8a0a3551f13e544c7571d
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-03">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.8.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `additionalProperties` in `ClientError` (box/box-openapi[#477][1]) ([#385][2]) ([`4547148`][3])
  * Fix chunked uploads in browser (box/box-codegen[#619][4]) ([#436][5]) ([`0af2484`][6])
  * Support status codes with no content (box/box-codegen[#604][7]) ([#415][8]) ([`c3f14c6`][9])
  * Update client error schema to support schema errors (box/box-openapi[#467][10]) ([#381][11]) ([`b845f12`][12])
  * Update integration mapping response description (box/box-openapi[#463][13]) ([#379][14]) ([`e3d71e1`][15])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add AI LLM endpoint AWS `params` (box/box-openapi[#478][16]) ([#388][17]) ([`d2fd1ec`][18])
  * Expose method for making custom HTTP requests, convert `FetchOptions` into a class (box/box-codegen[#610][19]) ([#431][20]) ([`9a9ea62`][21])
  * Support get collection by ID endpoint (box/box-codegen[#595][22]) ([#396][23]) ([`f1f47be`][24])
  * Support getting file download URL and file thumbnail URL (box/box-codegen[#617][25]) ([#435][26]) ([`1cb4d5d`][27])
  * Support `nullable` fields in TypeScript (box/box-codegen[#612][28]) ([#425][29]) ([`991dc29`][30])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/477

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/385

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/454714861019998b1fc6b7c44696b0178ffa022b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/619

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/436

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/0af2484dd8387cce1a8c235068ac3f834f8ecf42

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/604

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/415

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/c3f14c6af55ab78ed5dc981909c67397b0d7219e

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/467

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/381

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/b845f12d194d5f4e0cfd66db1db294e2f9a9bff8

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/463

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/379

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/e3d71e100500c5fa9e478b5228fd395f68242cf2

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/478

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/388

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/d2fd1ec4bddb19b353e286908c99477e08b90457

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/610

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/431

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/9a9ea628fd21001437d92b32f1760d5ba14cb46b

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/595

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/396

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/f1f47bebfc0981a5e67f301b6fc2e3a8568d5845

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/617

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/435

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/1cb4d5d93fbd94b952b876457008973a92d5aa23

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/612

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/425

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/991dc29bc805bf0c5198277142efb9a85de1dd42
</Update>

<Update label="2024-12-02">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.8.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix enums usage (box/box-codegen[#615][1]) ([#387][2]) ([`a9abccb`][3]), closes [#385][4]
  * Support status codes with no content (box/box-codegen[#604][5]) ([#378][6]) ([`051716c`][7])
  * Update collaboration, metadata and collection resources (box/box-openapi[#483][8]) ([#380][9]) ([`0d45fed`][10])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Expose method for making custom HTTP requests (box/box-codegen[#610][11]) ([#393][12]) ([`55a23d9`][13])
  * Support getting file download URL and file thumbnail URL (box/box-codegen[#617][14]) ([#397][15]) ([`fd609ab`][16])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/615

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/387

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/a9abccb8e552c971774ea1a9fa2096395a40317b

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/385

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/604

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/378

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/051716c84b4f0ab32b82608f94e3cf3ba09b390b

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/483

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/380

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/0d45fedc0b7b96234ef3901f412f259b1cae4c1a

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/610

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/393

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/55a23d9d6840642c248ab3b967ad5c2635484c8c

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/617

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/issues/397

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen/commit/fd609ab9fe94da43b1a71815597c49471e157bb8
</Update>

<Update label="2024-11-29">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.13.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Correctly calculate `Content-Length` when reading from a stream ([#1277][1]) ([`b1d5371`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1277

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b1d5371491abe1729a95eb9dc39d375135c8681d
</Update>

<Update label="2024-11-12">
  ## Apps & Integrations naming convention changes

  We are changing the naming convention for apps & integrations to improve the clarity and consistency of our platform.

  ## Developers

  | Current name | Target name          | Location                                                                          |
  | ------------ | -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
  | App Center   | Publishing           | A tab for submitting platform apps for publication in Box Integrations catalog    |
  | Integrations | Box Web Integrations | A tab where you define the third-party application buttons within the Box Web app |
  | Custom apps  | Platform apps        | Developer Console                                                                 |

  ## Admins

  | Current name        | Target name           | Location      |
  | ------------------- | --------------------- | ------------- |
  | Apps                | Integrations          | Admin Console |
  | Custom Apps Manager | Platform Apps Manager | Admin Console |
  | Custom apps         | Platform Apps         | Admin Console |

  ## Box Shield

  | Current name                   | Target name             | Location                 |
  | ------------------------------ | ----------------------- | ------------------------ |
  | Application restriction policy | Integration restriction | Restriction policies     |
  | Shield Application             | Shield Integration      | Shield integration lists |
  | Applications                   | Integrations            | Detection Rules          |

  ## Users

  | Current name | Target name  | Location                  |
  | ------------ | ------------ | ------------------------- |
  | Apps         | Integrations | A tab in the Box web-app. |

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-11-04">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support get collection by ID endpoint (box/box-codegen[#595][1]) ([#366][2]) ([`1db5722`][3]), closes [#355][4]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/595

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/366

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/1db5722f7d02694739f1a52a6b2ebe0c406960b0

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/355
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-31">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.4.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Change `QueryParams` type in `MetadataQuery` from `Dictionary<string, string>` to `Dictionary<string, object>` (box/box-openapi[#479][1]) ([#298][2]) ([`656b495`][3])
  * Fix conversion to `RSAKey` (box/box-codegen[#591][4]) ([#297][5]) ([`068b1f7`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add AI LLM endpoint AWS `params`. Change the type from `AiLlmEndpointParamsGoogleOrAiLlmEndpointParamsOpenAi` to `AiLlmEndpointParamsAwsOrAiLlmEndpointParamsGoogleOrAiLlmEndpointParamsOpenAi` (box/box-openapi[#478][7]) ([#291][8]) ([`dcb8a20`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/479

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/298

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/656b495bea779879bb82b2cda0cca5a30a8ad8ca

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/591

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/297

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/068b1f7b3ea3c62647e03e0e17176bde049949db

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/478

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/291

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/dcb8a201577be08b644266c157db45cd6797c71c
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-30">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.6.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Set stream position to 0 for multipart requests (box/box-codegen[#581][1]) ([#348][2]) ([`fa6942c`][3])
  * Update client error schema (box/box-openapi[#467][4]) ([#347][5]) ([`a42a253`][6])
  * Use original stream position when retrying requests (box/box-codegen[#583][7]) ([#358][8]) ([`060b4dc`][9])
  * use raw `docstrings` when comments contain backslash (box/box-codegen[#571][10]) ([#330][11]) ([`8dd8cb7`][12])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `download_file_to_output_stream` method to `DownloadsManager` (box/box-codegen[#575][13]) ([#334][14]) ([`6820d08`][15])
  * add AI LLM endpoint AWS `params` (box/box-openapi[#478][16]) ([#354][17]) ([`c8fa2c1`][18])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/581

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/348

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/fa6942c231024947250955ccc52f352744ab5f38

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/467

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/347

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/a42a2532337c79d20b6524fda0acf717d9ccbd5f

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/583

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/358

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/060b4dc2b8bbbc1e17cce0fc049394e0527952b7

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/571

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/330

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/8dd8cb71105c200bd03f5f894a4dbfb42baf0865

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/575

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/334

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/6820d08f37c5c0605a580391bef2dc4f2a384c00

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/478

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/354

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/c8fa2c1131154d07a500290db6a7b34b06005c2b
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-24">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.3.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * properly serialize `StringEnum` list when inside query `params` ([#288][1]) ([`dac8392`][2])
  * update client error schema to support schema errors (box/box-openapi[#467][3]) ([#281][4]) ([`bef2632`][5])
  * update integration mapping response description (box/box-openapi[#463][6]) ([#279][7]) ([`05e07b0`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/288

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/dac839280b43f4bd954d3966032ff4925150c061

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/467

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/281

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/bef2632af99f0477bd009bcb91248c678b4e1bab

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/463

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/279

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/05e07b025c234de4c4161e567c0919748d24f804
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-24">
  ## Box AI API - AWS AI models now available

  The list of [available AI models][1] has been recently updated with the following AWS models:

  * AWS Claude 3 Sonnet
  * AWS Claude 3.5 Sonnet
  * AWS Claude 3 Haiku
  * AWS Titan Text Lite

  Models offered in **Preview** mode have not been fully performance-tested at scale and are made available on an as-is basis. You may experience variability in model/output quality, availability, and accuracy.

  You can use the provided models to [override the default model][1] used in the AI agent configuration.
  For further details on Box AI API, see the [guides][2] and [API reference][3].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-ai-ask/

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-22">
  ## Box AI API — Document Q\&A and Box AI API — Text Generation generally available

  We are excited to announce that [Box AI API — Document Q\&A][2] and [Box AI API — Text Generation][3] features are now available to all **Enterprise Plus** customers.

  [Box AI API][1] allows you to use Box AI functionality in your custom applications. For example, you can implement Box AI question and answer functionality in your third party applications,or generate content right in your product’s content editor. You can also extract metadata from the provided documents.

  *Endpoints related to metadata extraction are currently a beta feature offered subject to Box’s Main Beta Agreement, and the available capabilities may change.*

  Currently, Box AI functionality allows you to:

  * Get responses to your questions.
  * Get a summary of a document.
  * Generate text you can use in your documents.
  * Extract metadata from the provided file in a flexible way, meaning you have more freedom when using the prompt.
  * Extract metadata from the provided file using a [metadata template][4] or the `fields` structure.
  * Fetch and override the default API model configuration.

  Check the [Box AI API developer guides][1] to learn more about Box AI and check the [API Reference][5] for Box AI API details.

  ## Box AI for UI Elements

  [Box AI for UI Elements][6] enhances [Content Preview][7] with Box AI - Document Q\&A and Text Generation functionality.
  The enhanced Box AI for UI Elements allows the users to embed AI functionality in their custom applications to facilitate answering questions, summarizing a document, adding citations and using dialogue history, and formatting support.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][8] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [2]: /guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/ask-questions/

  [3]: /guides/box-ai/ai-tutorials/generate-text/

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates

  [5]: /reference/ai-agent-ask/

  [6]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/preview#box-ai-ui-element

  [7]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/preview

  [8]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-21">
  ## Box UI Elements v22.0.0 released

  ### [22.0.0][1] (2024-10-21)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * resolve missing exports for `esbuild` ([#3719][2]) ([`495f19e`][3])
  * **content-answers:** Bump content-answers ([#3713][4]) ([`21c2de1`][5])
  * **content-uploader:** resolve `ItemAction` issues ([#3631][6]) ([`ba299b1`][7])
  * **docgen-sidebar:** add collapsible component to hide nested tags ([#3626][8]) ([`3480efb`][9])
  * **draft-js:** Upgraded to 0.11.7 ([#3580][10]) ([`179ff9f`][11])
  * **hubs:** fix shared link text ([#3657][12]) ([`a938524`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3603][14]) ([`a467823`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3607][16]) ([`8ad18b8`][17])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3612][18]) ([`4bfceaa`][19])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3615][20]) ([`945fa23`][21])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3619][22]) ([`bc011eb`][23])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3620][24]) ([`62a9ef7`][25])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3627][26]) ([`ae5cc3d`][27])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3633][28]) ([`13894ca`][29])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3636][30]) ([`0bee28b`][31])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3639][32]) ([`83b403c`][33])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3643][34]) ([`4cf5b3d`][35])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3648][36]) ([`297fabf`][37])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3653][38]) ([`7b0e0fb`][39])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3659][40]) ([`41a17fe`][41])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3667][42]) ([`1f77bce`][43])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3673][44]) ([`7e5f7c1`][45])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3674][46]) ([`ebe8348`][47])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3679][48]) ([`4bf65f8`][49])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3683][50]) ([`549188a`][51])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3686][52]) ([`9927e53`][53])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3689][54]) ([`47e7a6b`][55])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3692][56]) ([`d2e59c8`][57])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3694][58]) ([`1850977`][59])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3697][60]) ([`665aedf`][61])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3701][62]) ([`fe9f7cc`][63])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3705][64]) ([`fa89f87`][65])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3711][66]) ([`b6b61bf`][67])
  * **metadata-instance-editor:** Fix support link ([#3671][68]) ([`b82687e`][69])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** fix loading states ([#3684][70]) ([`5c54eb5`][71])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Fix metadata sidebar AI capabilities ([#3681][72]) ([`fd164ec`][73])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Fix storybook tests ([#3695][74]) ([`8326472`][75])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** handle `onCancel` action for editing templates ([#3669][76]) ([`6ad083b`][77])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** `UnsavedChangesModal` changes ([#3691][78]) ([`305d3af`][79])
  * **notification:** unblock UI beneath Notification ([#3661][80]) ([`33b34d9`][81])
  * **quick-search:** Quick Search buttons and footer navigation ([#3623][82]) ([`0427112`][83])
  * **quick-search:** Quick Search Navigation ([#3622][84]) ([`b814223`][85])
  * clean up eslint and configs ([#3584][86]) ([`c0ff8d7`][87]), closes [#3583][88]
  * resolve changes from `box/frontend` ([#3590][89]) ([`1d91171`][90])
  * **quick-search:** Quick filter navigation ([#3582][91]) ([`6880f67`][92])
  * upgrade react-popper ([#3583][88]) ([`13396e4`][93])

  ### Features

  * **taxonomy:** added view/create/updated taxonomy field support ([#3716][94]) ([`cccb0b0`][95])
  * `noop` for BREAKING CHANGE blueprint peer dependency ([#3721][96]) ([`5a117ae`][97])
  * **api:** add handling empty metadata suggestions ([#3608][98]) ([`ecd4c80`][99])
  * **api:** Extend `getMetadata` in Metadata API ([#3611][100]) ([`765f592`][101])
  * **blueprint:** Added blueprint ([#3585][102]) ([`0f2d876`][103])
  * **boxai-sidebar:** `BoxAISidebar` header added ([#3698][104]) ([`130b6b6`][105])
  * **boxai-sidebar:** Empty Sidebar for Box AI ([#3668][106]) ([`611377c`][107])
  * **content-answers:** Upgrade Content Answers ([#3658][108]) ([`002d496`][109]), closes [#3626][8]
  * **content-explorer-modal-container:** add optional info notice ([#3634][110]) ([`20d4c3f`][111])
  * **content-sidebar:** add archived date to content preview sidebar ([#3625][112]) ([`10e68f3`][113])
  * **content-sidebar:** Add data-target-id to menu items ([#3610][114]) ([`cf05167`][115])
  * **content-sidebar:** Add placeholder `metadatasidebar` redesigned ([#3570][116]) ([`6a0d7ee`][117])
  * **content-sidebar:** disable version modifications for archive file ([#3637][118]) ([`e735c4c`][119])
  * **content-sidebar:** pass `metadata.aiSuggestions` flag into redesigned sidebar ([#3665][120]) ([`b672f70`][121])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Add handler for `Autofill` button ([#3700][122]) ([`95735e0`][123])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Add metadata instance list ([#3664][124]) ([`b4e4b01`][125]), closes [#3605][126]
  * **metadata-sidebar:** disable delete button ([#3677][127]) ([`2941a97`][128])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Handle create metadata instance ([#3663][129]) ([`321ba7e`][130])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** handle delete metadata instance ([#3662][131]) ([`f6abd4e`][132])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** handle update metadata instance ([#3672][133]) ([`ef79e44`][134])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** Metadata sidebar redesign ([#3654][135]) ([`fe4fede`][136]), closes [#3606][137]
  * **metadata-sidebar:** pass `areAiSuggestionsAvailable` based on file ext ([#3675][138]) ([`dc074cf`][139])
  * **metadata-sidebar:** tab content styles change ([#3708][140]) ([`f7c06a4`][141])
  * **taxonomy:** added metadata options endpoint ([#3678][142]) ([`47ba331`][143])
  * **taxonomy:** added metadata taxonomy field support ([#3710][144]) ([`3a0c27e`][145])
  * **uaa-logging:** Log UAA Parity data ([#3629][146]) ([`6cb5d8f`][147])
  * **unified-share-modal:** add custom avatars click handler ([#3688][148]) ([`c034de4`][149])
  * **update\_app\_activity\_item:** Add permissions field ([#3680][150]) ([`c521c11`][151])
  * support `/2.0/ai/extract_structured` endpoint ([#3596][152]) ([`dee4eee`][153])
  * **unified-share-modal:** added targeting attribute ([#3592][154]) ([`e26f1f1`][155])
  * support metadata suggestions API ([#3571][156]) ([`c985402`][157]), closes [#3565][158]

  ### Performance Improvements

  * **content-answers:** lazy load content answers in preview ([#3720][159]) ([`ec115f7`][160])

  ### Reverts

  * **content-explorer:** Revert rename dialog ([#3704][161]) ([`13b8c99`][162]), closes [#3666][163]

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * blueprint-web and blueprint-web-assets peer dependencies

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v21.0.0...v22.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3719

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/495f19e20c8e3d6b7ab9fe8b6f5c3f833d1c5c46

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3713

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/21c2de1b3e64ff4766c36ed18a1e720ff79ae5b6

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3631

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ba299b1dcee18d3197e5f7df0f15823070a071cb

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3626

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3480efb5a03ee73f4d78a5b26f626f059aa31115

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3580

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/179ff9f718845500ddc76a56e06129e06b386886

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3657

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a9385240dc53a9efe5277956a2d81ec1c253716a

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3603

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a4678232af14c2220ce8c7125a55bb6714781b7a

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3607

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8ad18b8b7887c07189dee590ebc0a931fa5010e8

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3612

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4bfceaaf71ed4271ba62d6878ef714617a920c8c

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3615

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/945fa23a8ba08bebf3bb4415e2b1827377eecbbd

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3619

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bc011eb1369fc36762cfa3d7a206a538400d536d

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3620

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/62a9ef7489e42d3cafa8edfabcddf57928ae514d

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3627

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ae5cc3d0b0f0b2afacb37048f994b39867d9006a

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3633

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/13894caaf44775d80d54b4458a997160be359ed1

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3636

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0bee28b6208179a1f0d2ce2428a5200be199302f

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3639

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/83b403cecc8dcdc210b31cf84fb59461f3325c8e

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3643

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4cf5b3d55042274e8d73c8a9f1998ceed791179a

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3648

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/297fabfe2ab8207ccdcb6e97057a4fb2f3022284

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3653

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7b0e0fb44e3d205d28a10d8bc851ebaecaf5222f

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3659

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/41a17fe815b9ab7da9403836276de3fca379e86f

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3667

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1f77bce4f470988d818ce7128954e1cd964d4f7f

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3673

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7e5f7c1af0a05c35097827af5a55d5edd3470872

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3674

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ebe8348b9cf0a79298ea102f27217b6cd10b631f

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3679

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4bf65f8b1c8ed6080a340bb28097d6f04d08ecc0

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3683

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/549188a9f005b8dd0f63c0ed4906e8a64144c3a4

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3686

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9927e53f47e54380d0f2e44e857fbd6b0a6528fd

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3689

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/47e7a6be3036280bf89220f65ed978b3ef0bc2c7

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3692

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d2e59c846c3d72ab9efbe59f1123c72745945aa7

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3694

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1850977829e4888139462a6f65794b1cffc52a08

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3697

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/665aedff1834ffbc4bc1e903262b0d4e0bef2cc3

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3701

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fe9f7cca9b100afe1521df41c697ed6f0f621f66

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3705

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fa89f876d54680b95bdc2fd3eb0d07a3c729f03e

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3711

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b6b61bf47429541b1cbb1091fd94024c4ceeb6c8

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3671

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b82687e5cc0a55b6f82eb2c9aa1ea7b3482263b4

  [70]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3684

  [71]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5c54eb51287b1273ad84145952be132b84ef9e04

  [72]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3681

  [73]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fd164ec57c58ac912bdb4edbe4f9cdc30296b11a

  [74]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3695

  [75]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/83264724fa9de3e0935cc6f5762362dadcca884f

  [76]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3669

  [77]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6ad083b4d14a721973df5ef3959913772c481922

  [78]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3691

  [79]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/305d3af23a162db91e16ce13cc8c0bced865500d

  [80]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3661

  [81]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/33b34d9c532501824ed45c8965f82df690bb6e5c

  [82]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3623

  [83]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/04271125b0beedaae80f3ec48273ca5fdf266ac7

  [84]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3622

  [85]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b8142235903cd8ee5d36ee9121437b01552a5597

  [86]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3584

  [87]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c0ff8d7d7b24a919fc440a8f06f74b26fb0f5fa1

  [88]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3583

  [89]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3590

  [90]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1d9117162d658215fc9b62bbbfa0d351349901ff

  [91]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3582

  [92]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6880f67d6005f549ca7c2fbc5d9c395f25cf7128

  [93]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/13396e4f9f06c30b542fa5846659539f00edc392

  [94]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3716

  [95]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cccb0b084a52838eb9f7e16c084507ef30ba30e1

  [96]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3721

  [97]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5a117ae1f4e887365b65d07dd0b8a3f00ebf45db

  [98]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3608

  [99]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ecd4c80873ae0d447fd5dbfdcf622775eeeb206e

  [100]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3611

  [101]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/765f592647c41bb1e2bd48ea32dd7b7e1ba2f305

  [102]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3585

  [103]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0f2d87617838dc2af7c702c91dbc4321d7b31bf5

  [104]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3698

  [105]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/130b6b69c45a0b8e4a22009e3e9f44fb285e45e1

  [106]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3668

  [107]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/611377ce21b3ed7a804c82eb2c29189851861dc2

  [108]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3658

  [109]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/002d4966fa2158c33371d9a218a41206e1462f6b

  [110]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3634

  [111]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/20d4c3f3ca981820bf3684afe4ee68775b4b30bd

  [112]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3625

  [113]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/10e68f301183244062b6613006a5aa0cbdd33526

  [114]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3610

  [115]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cf05167884084a199512a1d18d41cc9fde7a4fc7

  [116]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3570

  [117]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6a0d7ee0857d9c91719654e2ac387a6e7dc135b9

  [118]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3637

  [119]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e735c4c3f5b755f3a773d2e7f185cd9a961de3cd

  [120]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3665

  [121]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b672f7059697e922d2ae193ef6a98217695c843d

  [122]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3700

  [123]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/95735e0291f233d173c17a19304119c83e51723d

  [124]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3664

  [125]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b4e4b01fefea753d21a4aa75dccde92fce05af21

  [126]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3605

  [127]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3677

  [128]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2941a9732b5081872bfcd0c2fe490ab14c6dc2ed

  [129]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3663

  [130]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/321ba7e715d51b269ad7bc566b197d0cab52b699

  [131]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3662

  [132]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f6abd4e07d8d23b0a0fe5224b4ba2f6b4c44f4e7

  [133]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3672

  [134]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ef79e44d81eb875eec04233e48485f1c6326606d

  [135]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3654

  [136]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fe4fededd993c4025b1b6f38cc8a6387af1a9acc

  [137]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3606

  [138]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3675

  [139]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dc074cf3f189a9ce06b7854d7245242732c1a294

  [140]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3708

  [141]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f7c06a4c411b453df9a1617d50fdddf77b032db7

  [142]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3678

  [143]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/47ba331ca562c152c49cccf2c090664177e1370d

  [144]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3710

  [145]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3a0c27ea1cfbb22c6fd9090f7bd237e62f8536b6

  [146]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3629

  [147]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6cb5d8f1d972b40ec06ce08f39cb25aa1452ad10

  [148]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3688

  [149]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c034de4daec6881c08b05caa1033db91382af6e0

  [150]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3680

  [151]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c521c113dafdc5787f7c4c163d3cbaa01a523c3b

  [152]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3596

  [153]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dee4eee4ff49d7e8e9bc69071ac23164ae180e4e

  [154]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3592

  [155]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e26f1f10731769ad7ed3cc94bdf6ab97117719d7

  [156]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3571

  [157]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c9854024dec37927cfabdef37c4f8fe82ffb8d34

  [158]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3565

  [159]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3720

  [160]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ec115f749fea1c545663888c8d2cfc0bd3cfa514

  [161]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3704

  [162]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/13b8c990bc5fb8528e3a79864f8f9579608febd1

  [163]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3666
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-18">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.12.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI Agent ([#1265][1]) ([`3cb2c7c`][2])
  * Support AI extract and AI extract structured ([#1266][3]) ([`7ba90b9`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1265

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3cb2c7c275761a24be9403a6a2b41d0725ba8d9b

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1266

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/7ba90b96070a32b3e2ac60e5c55bd04d0a5973c0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-17">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Include raw data in response object (box/box-codegen[#576][1]) ([#375][2]) ([`bdb9d0c`][3])
  * Support `ai/extract` and `ai/extract_structured` endpoints (box/box-codegen[#566][4]) ([#356][5]) ([`4a33562`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/576

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/375

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/bdb9d0caab1a54ca56aef5de4260215d1d3fbd35

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/566

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/356

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/4a335621c7eaa413162a5daa65d63d8353ba37f5
</Update>

<Update label="2024-10-17">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.3.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * bump `system.text.json` to 8.0.5 (box/box-codegen[#578][1]) ([#271][2]) ([`dad2f52`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * support proxy (box/box-codegen[#577][4]) ([#274][5]) ([`dea1937`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/578

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/271

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/dad2f521066e73c3dcdaec196cd6940401e31f3a

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/577

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/274

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/dea19373a7169365acb968a66c78c5937ef698e1
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-26">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.2.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * correctly send `datetime` when in `queryParams` (box/box-codegen[#560][1]) ([#243][2]) ([`9657526`][3])
  * Fix variants in metadata query results (box/box-openapi[#456][4]) ([#249][5]) ([`37625ea`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add Hubs Beta (box/box-openapi[#453][7]) ([#241][8]) ([`c28f660`][9])
  * include raw `json` in types (box/box-codegen[#567][10]) ([#258][11]) ([`a1e7bc5`][12])
  * Support `ai/extract` and `ai/extract_structured` endpoints (box/box-codegen[#564][13]) ([#253][14]) ([`a17d8f8`][15])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/560

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/243

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/9657526667753d77eacfd674cde60ab4030ae42d

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/456

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/249

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/37625eabe4f87d57a9f58920829c00cddd34bcb1

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/453

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/241

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/c28f6605c94e250bbab853ef610c46c1d3c9ef95

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/567

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/258

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/a1e7bc55da0dec8bfd1159a1c158154177581019

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/564

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/253

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/a17d8f8dbce8ac7f42b9e23c8c216e992a64d762
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-19">
  ## Box AI API default model update

  Box AI Platform API has been updated with a new default model for the `POST /2.0/ai/ask` endpoint. Both single and multiple document modes are now based on Azure's `gpt-4o-mini`.

  > **Note**: Box AI Platform API is currently a beta feature offered subject to Box’s Main Beta Agreement, and the available capabilities may change. Box AI Platform API is available to all Enterprise Plus customers.

  For more information on [default agent configuration][1] and [supported AI models][2] visit developer guides.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/ai-agents/get-agent-default-config/

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai/supported-models/

  [3]: https://community.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-19">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.5.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix proxy `url` without proxy credentials (box/box-codegen[#568][1]) ([#322][2]) ([`fb19160`][3]), closes [#318][4]
  * Stop sending last empty chunk for chunk upload (box/box-codegen[#569][5]) ([#324][6]) ([`1605f04`][7]), closes [#321][8]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/568

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/322

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/fb19160307b58d5f08bb12e0f846d71ff936ad6a

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/318

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/569

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/324

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/1605f0495994b333e735bc98f28fa714324b75f5

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/321
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-18" description="Box Python SDK Generated v1.5.0 released">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.5.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add the missing license to `setup.py` (box/box-codegen[#562][1]) ([#307][2]) ([`679d789`][3])
  * Fix variants in metadata query results (box/box-openapi[#456][4]) ([#313][5]) ([`8830303`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for proxy (box/box-codegen[#559][7]) ([#302][8]) ([`3d881ac`][9])
  * Introduce `raw_data` field for storing raw `json` response (box/box-codegen[#566][10]) ([#319][11]) ([`3776dc3`][12])
  * Support `ai/extract` and `ai/extract_structured` endpoints (box/box-codegen[#564][13]) ([#317][14]) ([`b3d8da4`][15])
  * Support App item associations (box/box-codegen[#561][16]) ([#299][17]) ([`8b6ea0b`][18])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/562

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/307

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/679d7891b2a20e7407b8c9f00bd95c3b294ab861

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/456

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/313

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/883030335e2a3c12a5e0b01d8a82df30ccce16a6

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/559

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/302

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/3d881acdebf2b18e2f0f82211f5abdcc32d1ddb0

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/566

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/319

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/3776dc3d44bc09eb68da99f45e36e058dca2607e

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/564

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/317

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b3d8da41007a9d47b73b699fd84da6f9540866d2

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/561

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/299

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/8b6ea0bbec719a36eb11b6d214c08801c4f1a40b
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-17">
  ## Metadata extraction with Box AI Platform API now available in Beta

  With its recent addition, Box AI Platform API allows you to extract metadata from the provided input.
  For example you can extract the financial information from an invoice, or patient data from a medical certificate.

  > **Note**: Box AI Platform API is currently a beta feature offered subject to Box’s Main Beta Agreement, and the available capabilities may change. Box AI Platform API is available to all Enterprise Plus customers.

  You have the following options:

  [`POST /2.0/ai_extract`][1] endpoint allows you to extract metadata from the provided file in a freeform way.
  This means you have more freedom in creating the prompt, and the metadata template is not required to run the request.
  [`POST /2.0/ai_extract_structured`][2] endpoint allows you to extract metadata from the provided file using a [metadata template][3] or `fields` structure.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/post-ai-extract

  [2]: /reference/post-ai-extract-structured

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044194033-Customizing-Metadata-Templates

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-16">
  ## App item associations

  The [app item associations API][1] allows you to check which app items are connected with a specific file or folder, including the app items associated with ancestors of the file or folder.

  An [app item][2] is a content object owned by an application. It can group files and folders together from different paths. That set can be shared through a collaboration.

  An [app item association][3] is a connection between a file or folder and an app item. Associations between a folder and an app item cascade down to all descendants of the folder.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/resources/app-item-association

  [2]: /reference/resources/app-item

  [3]: /reference/resources/app-item-associations

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-11" description="Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.6.0 released">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.6.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add the missing license to `package.json` (box/box-codegen[#562][1]) ([#343][2]) ([`cc9a8b8`][3])
  * Fix variants in metadata query results (box/box-openapi[#456][4]) ([#349][5]) ([`2131e98`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add Hubs Beta (box/box-openapi[#453][7]) ([#333][8]) ([`40359c7`][9])
  * Add support for proxy (box/box-codegen[#559][10]) ([#337][11]) ([`0ffd9c8`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/562

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/343

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/cc9a8b8ac628e348d32176f8ba69add649c555bd

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/456

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/349

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/2131e98ff5530c7440ff50ec0da46cc317d0a4ae

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/453

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/333

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/40359c71aa25ecfe7ec53bfa19de62b9d83d4ace

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/559

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/337

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/0ffd9c8095d1aa742144146383ae94f1f4526af0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-11">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.5.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix variants in metadata query results (box/box-openapi[#456][1]) ([#232][2]) ([`be2fa52`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add Hubs Beta (box/box-openapi[#453][4]) ([#220][5]) ([`546f487`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/456

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/232

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/be2fa52bb0d086f6c9b20fd5c3bdcad4b98f3f37

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/453

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/220

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/546f487bde9dae2407ff65620eb6e6a81e45b149
</Update>

<Update label="2024-09-05">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.4.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing fields to Sign Template Signer and fix AI schema (box/box-openapi[#451][1]) ([#206][2]) ([`31920e6`][3])
  * Fix `IntegrationMapping` schemas (box/box-codegen[#551][4]) ([#203][5]) ([`0074ee3`][6])
  * Fix chunk upload in Swift (box/box-codegen[#555][7]) ([#215][8]) ([`93ff568`][9])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Include URL into `FetchOptions` (box/box-codegen[#549][10]) ([#208][11]) ([`b65822d`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/451

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/206

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/31920e67692c16b0600c4c9f4c279e22d02e4598

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/551

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/203

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/0074ee326627d01057cf50cb257d2291b646ab08

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/555

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/215

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/93ff5686415d99aa807d57d9e062f5a96380d707

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/549

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/208

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b65822d379b1d5e9be7b179ed754e725f5a499fa
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-30">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.5.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix fetch options with interceptor (box/box-codegen[#556][1]) ([#326][2]) ([`3751eea`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/556

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/326

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/3751eea67047021fe298c841596ae362ed1e47da
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-30">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.4.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Do not store data in-memory during download process in Python (box/box-codegen[#557][1]) ([#294][2]) ([`7c645ae`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/557

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/294

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/7c645aea9fa8575531e0b40ffc997a0f65b6e409
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-23">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.5.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing fields to Sign Template Signer and fix AI schema (box/box-openapi[#451][1]) ([#317][2]) ([`340fbd8`][3])
  * Fix `IntegrationMapping` schemas (box/box-codegen[#551][4]) ([#315][5]) ([`a863b1e`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add new parameters to Box AI methods and introduce `AiResponseFull` variant (box/box-openapi[#446][7]) ([#313][8]) ([`d9664fd`][9])
  * Include URL into `FetchOptions` (box/box-codegen[#549][10]) ([#319][11]) ([`30eaa6b`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/451

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/317

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/340fbd84f6fa408155c6a2a4b9b7b03b88f76f24

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/551

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/315

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/a863b1eb8fcfccd78714e3f52ce96d89ef69ca72

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/446

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/313

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/d9664fd7d431685c8e115415085bbe69d17f272d

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/549

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/319

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/30eaa6ba7aa0fcd5e2f71026d7bf58729d387221
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-23">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.4.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing fields to Sign Template Signer and fix AI schema (box/box-openapi[#451][1]) ([#281][2]) ([`0708351`][3])
  * Fix `IntegrationMapping` schemas (box/box-codegen[#551][4]) ([#279][5]) ([`0337e06`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add new parameters to Box AI methods and introduce `AiResponseFull` variant (box/box-openapi[#446][7]) ([#277][8]) ([`1267a21`][9])
  * Include URL into `FetchOptions` (box/box-codegen[#549][10]) ([#283][11]) ([`dd05b1c`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/451

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/281

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/0708351171eca1fe4914b823a4257bbabd3cd075

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/551

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/279

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/0337e06c6bf6d35dd51409c429b7fef295f5a406

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/446

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/277

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/1267a215fbc8292059603665a53b0159d7a1242c

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/549

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/283

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/dd05b1c2b1687d8647f4116c022dbf1890984adc
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-23">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing `item_upload` scope ([#201][1]) ([`483b055`][2])
  * Add missing fields to Sign Template Signer and fix AI schema (box/box-openapi[#451][3]) ([#229][4]) ([`121f733`][5])
  * Fix `IntegrationMapping` schemas (box/box-codegen[#551][6]) ([#226][7]) ([`3eca154`][8])
  * Improve handling of network exceptions, handle big file upload (box/box-openapi[#444][9]) ([#222][10]) ([`75ccd07`][11])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add new parameters to Box AI methods and introduce `AiResponseFull` variant (box/box-openapi[#446][12]) ([#224][13]) ([`6d205c4`][14])
  * Include URL into `FetchOptions` (box/box-codegen[#549][15]) ([#231][16]) ([`41c45dc`][17])
  * Parametrize chunked uploads endpoint URLs (box/box-openapi[#444][9]) ([#208][18]) ([`feac37c`][19])
  * Support `nullable` fields (box/box-codegen[#550][20]) ([#230][21]) ([`b9da32b`][22])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/201

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/483b05586f8e45771e101d286fddebc564ff89bd

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/451

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/229

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/121f733f52e945927125f4941206b1553202914d

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/551

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/226

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/3eca15434b65bc0bb2421d36ec50691e7fe40e3b

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/444

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/222

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/75ccd078e29015b865462ea1aaf0420d5e63d9cd

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/446

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/224

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/6d205c4e28a657ad65ae704a7343a8670806f7f1

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/549

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/231

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/41c45dcf6476b6cae7941c0952c375aa76ce42a1

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/208

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/feac37c34f99b5951731b605ef895f7f3b5de6dd

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/550

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/230

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b9da32b27f506618faa0119f725528555be14f60
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-22">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.3.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Extract `IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack` to `IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlackUnion` (box/box-codegen[#530][1]) ([#165][2]) ([`d51df9a`][3])
  * Improve chunked upload reliability (box/box-codegen[#529][4]) ([#164][5]) ([`5d87629`][6])
  * Retry requests with 202 status code and `Retry-After` header (box/box-codegen[#538][7]) ([#177][8]) ([`64f27b3`][9])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `is_active` parameter to user collaboration (box/box-openapi[#437][10]) ([#163][11]) ([`5f726bb`][12])
  * Add new parameters to Box AI methods and introduce `AiResponseFull` variant (box/box-openapi[#446][13]) ([#201][14]) ([`7c09090`][15])
  * Add support for Swift 5.6 (box/box-codegen[#541][16]) ([#180][17]) ([`04b7020`][18])
  * parametrize chunked uploads endpoint URLs (box/box-openapi[#444][19]) ([#192][20]) ([`ea18f9e`][21])
  * Support AI Agent API (box/box-codegen[#531][22]) ([#170][23]) ([`fc9a00b`][24])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/530

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/165

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/d51df9a19d06db886358e94ce70551c283e5cc45

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/529

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/164

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/5d876299aa88b18accde22379950780bff100da0

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/538

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/177

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/64f27b3858725adaa53a10a6e8df8c0bcfe73fea

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/437

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/163

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/5f726bbffd682934ab5731e1620489b1ee54e5a1

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/446

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/201

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/7c0909032733742cb5a019c897910ced2e9d6788

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/541

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/180

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/04b7020f1220f73ad4637e6033d5539c56a64fcd

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/444

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/192

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/ea18f9e5eb6558edb29ff378bceb5528ccd4fcfb

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/531

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/170

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/fc9a00bdcaffeaccfd87caad73fe666fb46c36ab
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-22">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.13.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for get AI agent default ([#883][1]) ([`c1010e0`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/883

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/c1010e0349847586a9f00046570e975ec48eb0c5
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-12">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.4.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing token scope (box/box-openapi[#442][1]) ([#281][2]) ([`ca77f58`][3])
  * Fix fetch method for multipart request (box/box-codegen[#545][4]) ([#303][5]) ([`f8ceac0`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Parametrize chunked uploads endpoint URLs (box/box-openapi[#444][7]) ([#302][8]) ([`293a6e9`][9])
  * **ts:** Add comments to properties and methods (box/box-codegen[#537][10]) ([#284][11]) ([`db3a2b5`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/442

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/281

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/ca77f58b10d3a302748750584730f0fcdd8b4b55

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/545

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/303

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/f8ceac005f043017e7cde310490e79ab9195f8d7

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/444

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/302

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/293a6e9aeabbba37e4c12e2322a79717a10e1775

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/537

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/284

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/db3a2b57fbe0eec17373a2acf8089ff247c98225
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-12">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.3.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix fetch method for multipart request (box/box-codegen[#545][1]) ([#266][2]) ([`08a0818`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Parametrize chunked uploads endpoint URLs (box/box-openapi[#444][4]) ([#264][5]) ([`b5bce24`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/545

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/266

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/08a0818995d64995c3e2720a459f9221c9ca1dea

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/444

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/264

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b5bce24478c70ae6bb997adc773a0e2a76223568
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-06">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.12.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add create sign request function with different required parameters ([#878][1]) ([`d972f54`][2])
  * Support Box AI features ([#877][3]) ([`3026d2a`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/878

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/d972f54dcf9962c6b911422793a682d8f6289f9e

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/877

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/3026d2ab9932cd07aa9ff15a3ac3c3c14d3089b0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-06">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.7.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * add version to copy file options annotation ([#885][1]) ([`4f9312c`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/885

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/4f9312c63138f8cf8e0a9e46a9e1345172dbdc6b
</Update>

<Update label="2024-08-06">
  ## Box CLI v3.15.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI APIs using Box Node SDK ([#539][1]) ([`59551d2`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/539

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/59551d2153549b5a87b2c3fae01eb3089d640c89
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-26">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.2.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Improve chunked upload reliability ([#224][1]) ([`05f0353`][2])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `is_active` parameter to user collaboration (box/box-openapi[#437][3]) ([#222][4]) ([`2b7bbe4`][5])
  * Retry request with status code `202` (box/box-codegen[#511][6]) ([#204][7]) ([`f50ad6e`][8])
  * Support AI Agent API (box/box-codegen[#531][9]) ([#229][10]) ([`c565383`][11])
  * Support sending fields with `null` value (box/box-codegen[#528][12]) ([#230][13]) ([`f91076e`][14]), closes [#202][15]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/224

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/05f035354a76dac0d71849523e4a28641ac92aee

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/437

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/222

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/2b7bbe41ed23e50c6717148fa5e9e2c24a3f5897

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/511

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/204

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/f50ad6e236003901792eb333738020cbdd8c8ae3

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/531

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/229

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/c5653839e1a150377e7d5c4764d4c2a7b7d07c4a

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/528

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/230

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/f91076e1bfbccae4a0dff4b66d7bafb5357858c5

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/202
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-25">
  ## Introducing New Generation Swift SDK

  We are excited to introduce [Box Swift SDK][1], designed to elevate the developer experience and streamline your integration with the Box Content Cloud.

  With the [new generation of Swift SDK][1], you’ll have access to:

  * **Full API Support**: The new generation of Box SDKs empowers developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can now access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box, allowing you to build even more sophisticated and feature-rich applications.
  * **Rapid API Updates**: Say goodbye to waiting for new Box APIs to be incorporated into the SDK. With our new auto-generation development approach, we can now add new Box APIs to the SDK at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
  * **Embedded Documentation**: We understand that access to information is crucial for developers. With our new approach, we have included comprehensive documentation for all objects and parameters directly in the source code of the SDK. This means you no longer need to look up this information on the developer portal, saving you time and streamlining your development process.
  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods**: Our commitment to enhancing your development experience continues with the introduction of convenience methods. These methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers which help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

  Embrace the new generation of Box SDKs and unlock the full potential of the Box Content Cloud. Start building innovative solutions faster and more efficiently. Happy coding!

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-swift-sdk-gen
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-25">
  ## Fetch and override default AI configuration

  Thanks to the [`GET /2.0/ai_agent_default`][1] endpoint you can now fetch the default configuration for AI services.

  Once you get the configuration details, you can override them using the `ai_agent` parameter available in the [`POST /2.0/ai/ask`][2] and [`POST /2.0/ai/text_gen`][3] requests.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/get-ai-agent-default

  [2]: /reference/post-ai-ask#param-ai-agent

  [3]: /reference/post-ai-text-gen#param-ai-agent

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-24">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.3.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Extract `IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack` to union type (box/box-codegen[#530][1]) ([#255][2]) ([`fa8952a`][3])
  * Improve chunked upload reliability (box/box-codegen[#529][4]) ([#254][5]) ([`12d9288`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `is_active` parameter to user collaboration (box/box-openapi[#437][7]) ([#253][8]) ([`4d8d436`][9])
  * Support AI Agent API (box/box-codegen[#531][10]) ([#260][11]) ([`0ec40d4`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/530

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/255

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/fa8952a6582d9965bbb4ab66bbeff057f5c68851

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/529

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/254

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/12d928850e0a1cd60f336a9919474b9aaba33028

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/437

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/253

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/4d8d436977b3e487a47e7717626f1c0f2eb43227

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/531

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/260

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/0ec40d44c86a8a9cf4fe594966cfad1866be457c
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-24">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v1.0.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Extract `IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlack` to `IntegrationMappingPartnerItemSlackUnion` (box/box-codegen[#530][1]) ([#183][2]) ([`3b1b634`][3])
  * Improve chunked upload reliability (box/box-codegen[#529][4]) ([#182][5]) ([`e2a045f`][6])
  * remove `init` from some of the required fields, `nullability` fixes (box/box-codegen[#532][7]) ([#190][8]) ([`c58f8af`][9])
  * retry requests with status code of 202 and `retry-after` header (box/box-codegen[#533][10]) ([#191][11]) ([`abaafd7`][12])
  * Update chunked upload (box/box-codegen[#523][13]) ([#177][14]) ([`9bcaf51`][15])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `is_active` parameter to user collaboration (box/box-openapi[#437][16]) ([#181][17]) ([`ec5f2d1`][18])
  * simplify `namespaces` (box/box-codegen[#518][19]) ([#175][20]) ([`7831b09`][21])
  * Support AI Agent API (box/box-codegen[#531][22]) ([#188][23]) ([`0c29645`][24])
  * Support default interface properties, bump dependencies (box/box-codegen[#527][25]) ([#184][26]) ([`6b52792`][27])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/530

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/183

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/3b1b634904edc73af094aa8aa6e89d32b9e92aee

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/529

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/182

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/e2a045f5d2afbe15be0284099ee2236f9c19cd73

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/532

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/190

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/c58f8afa41fa4346eb3f2ced9e48695980e917e1

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/533

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/191

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/abaafd70b982ae560430ff083b4bee1d533d5275

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/523

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/177

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/9bcaf51e0bcd3134dea2b37277a24abaa483754a

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/437

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/181

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/ec5f2d1d2cdba330f26a7db40042b70d3ec5bca2

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/518

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/175

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/7831b098971616497cbc90a8c277fee9b2c42c39

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/531

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/188

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/0c296458ef966e57c5aba2a8068034d4de820ef9

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/527

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/184

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/6b52792057ab94f6bcc2f86b47e0ed5f25900adf
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-22">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add support for AI ([#965][1]) ([`a9e130a`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bump `System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt` dependency version to `v6.35.0` ([#962][3]) ([`6e47237`][4]), closes [#960][5] [#961][6]
  * remove `Microsoft.AspNetCore.StaticFiles` and `System.Web` dependencies ([#964][7]) ([`2c8eedc`][8])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.8.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.8.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.8.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.8.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/965

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/a9e130a99cf9862f9b50178a6188b2820f9f2c32

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/962

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/6e472378e2fccea2db67bf5ef0eb017a31491703

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/960

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/961

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/964

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/2c8eedc91c473aca52249aad443345471ca7eafc
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-17">
  ## React 18 support for Box UI Elements

  [Box UI Elements][1] now support React 18, bringing a whole new level of flexibility and functionality for content collaboration in third-party apps.
  With this update, you can leverage the power of React 18’s cutting-edge features, drive innovation with latest front-end stack, while seamlessly integrating with the intelligent content cloud.

  For details, read our [blog post][2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/embed/ui-elements

  [2]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/seamless-integration-box-ui-elements-and-react-18-compatibility-4db97a09ff01

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-16">
  ## Box UI Elements v21.0.0 released

  ### [21.0.0][1] (2024-07-16)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * upgrade hapi address package dependency ([#3579][2]) ([`b089619`][3])
  * upgrade react-virtualized peer dependency ([#3578][4]) ([`3ebae37`][5])
  * **avatars:** Add type to Fetch avatar ([#3560][6]) ([`14a194f`][7])
  * **content-sidebar:** update to sidebar icon styles ([#3561][8]) ([`381a3b6`][9])
  * **content-uploader:** fix multiple items droppable issue ([#3565][10]) ([`87815de`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3563][12]) ([`6d9c65f`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3564][14]) ([`7988af8`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3566][16]) ([`3103983`][17])
  * **preview:** Update preview error messages ([#3562][18]) ([`aff6217`][19])

  ### Features

  * **docgen:** add docgen icon ([#3573][20]) ([`f5d4955`][21])
  * **react:** BREAKING CHANGE Upgrade to React 18 ([#3556][22]) ([`91e0978`][23])
  * **webpack:** BREAKING CHANGE Upgrade to webpack 5 and `react-styleguidist` 12.0.1 ([#3568][24]) ([`a812294`][25])

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * upgrade hapi/address to resolve undefined buffer reference
  * upgrade peer dependency for react-virtualized to support react 18

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v20.0.0...v21.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3579

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b0896194b79263ab60b47363abfbb98258244a47

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3578

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3ebae376521ab8a4232005bae32e81c2b82da903

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3560

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/14a194f449018932134cc5df741ecd36c774a321

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3561

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/381a3b642b0148553c6f65cea159b0718271117a

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3565

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/87815de94e8fb607f24a0e17750ffbaa2e713125

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3563

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6d9c65f0054d329a20a65ef814b9c0e867c9baf7

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3564

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7988af8eb56a8e6e5abf8bb07d53f3250b148cf5

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3566

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/310398302abd67bb48dbf5317dc858f054b0cc16

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3562

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/aff6217671d25015d314813295b871facfb8a9cc

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3573

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f5d49554683c965335366ba0f7f34771cec4d4d4

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3556

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/91e09787c545194ef61cb057e74df7dfd111728b

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3568

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a81229420c1a133145c9899efe908a080f59bd9f
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-16">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI APIs ([#883][1]) ([`bb81e07`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/883

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/bb81e074eb1017bd742c90159e6cf4e6ce9d9776
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-16">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.11.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix order of file upload multipart request ([#1261][1]) ([`7200ac7`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1261

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/7200ac77888b3639f2c294486be278e316efcfb0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-15">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.11.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Allow overriding creation of OkHttp Call ([#1257][1]) ([`bd6fde6`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing fields when update classification template ([#1255][3]) ([`f17f817`][4])
  * Fix deserializing permissions for `BoxFile` and `BoxFolder` ([#1256][5]) ([`f088448`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1257

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/bd6fde6689bebe6cb5889c91214db68e08a4ec8b

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1255

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f17f817bde5a412358bf3de8e489ed080715ec4b

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1256

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f08844889800a01f7c78941036f6228502fca8b0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-08">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.2.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix upload in browser (box/box-codegen[#524][1]) ([#248][2]) ([`88d747e`][3])
  * Update chunked upload (box/box-codegen[#523][4]) ([#247][5]) ([`27ceb35`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Retry request with status code `202` (box/box-codegen[#511][7]) ([#235][8]) ([`03b8f43`][9])
  * Support extensible enum types in Typescript (box/box-codegen[#520][10]) ([#243][11]) ([`5237972`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/524

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/248

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/88d747e0f03dfa3c2d6089257c6e8b5b635775e0

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/523

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/247

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/27ceb35e6444843eea9b7ec6923fe958c9a74571

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/511

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/235

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/03b8f4314ada5ef5596706b7599cc76565fe96a5

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/520

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/243

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/523797273bc08e3b22609ef0019432ab3e43c3ba
</Update>

<Update label="2024-07-03">
  ## Box Dotnet SDK Generated v0.4.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Change base URLs (box/box-codegen[#491][1]) ([#126][2]) ([`b4c6025`][3])
  * Fix CI for auto update pull requests (box/box-codegen[#506][4]) ([#152][5]) ([`766f03c`][6])
  * Fix schema for updating classification on a file and folder (box/box-openapi[#423][7]) ([#117][8]) ([`40f5a97`][9])
  * Improve wording for box sign (box/box-openapi[#424][10]) ([#122][11]) ([`64b3bcd`][12])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add default implementation for interface methods (box/box-codegen[#502][13]) ([#148][14]) ([`0f39071`][15])
  * Add docs improvements and marker pagination (box/box-openapi[#431][16]) ([#153][17]) ([`780a58b`][18])
  * Add support for `ExtraData` of generic type (box/box-codegen[#521][19]) ([#170][20]) ([`2a2208d`][21])
  * Add support for unions of primitives (box/box-codegen[#501][22]) ([#150][23]) ([`e75ce82`][24])
  * Make models immutable, hide fields for authentication (box/box-codegen[#494][25]) ([#127][26]) ([`8adcc85`][27])
  * Add `SuppressNotifications` and `ExternalSystemName` fields for Box Sign (box/box-openapi[#425][28]) ([#124][29]) ([`c841881`][30])
  * Support `StringEnum` (box/box-codegen[#514][31]) ([#162][32]) ([`6ac2fe9`][33])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/491

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/126

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b4c6025dc7039e923b19282333f162bb9d3469a9

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/506

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/152

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/766f03c743b7a2ab363135ff282e468b6b71d377

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/423

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/117

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/40f5a97ea44118ff9425e8b0ebb767d9ed08cee7

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/424

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/122

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/64b3bcd2d99039d1c881a565de6e7bc40dfe7aa9

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/502

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/148

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/0f39071d2442b9d07f9c51de8a5a757b16cc4fe7

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/431

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/153

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/780a58b4d4b18c357381c76dd5e72dd791a20d89

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/521

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/170

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/2a2208d422f5beb1718576acdc10d9eb973ba95c

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/501

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/150

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/e75ce82b09641d4bec439d620facbbf25da97845

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/494

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/127

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/8adcc858ef0f924f168406b031d379c786fa90d0

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/425

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/124

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/c841881cea9b0636bb624fe45d77c2817327dd35

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/514

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/162

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/6ac2fe9811efde6b02cd3ca50834b0bdafea1ab3
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-28">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.7.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing enum values to `BoxSortBy` ([#953][1]) ([`1f89bb0`][2]), closes [#952][3]
  * Add missing fields of `EventSource` ([#956][4]) ([`138eda5`][5])
  * do not recreate Random each time ([#945][6]) ([`d03b1ce`][7]), closes [#944][8] [#944][8] [#944][8] [#944][8]

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.7.1>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.7.1>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.7.1>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.7.1>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/953

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/1f89bb047442dcdc9045aeff1c3d6aadf61e2856

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/952

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/956

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/138eda516ad59f08968d88b04e9bb06df3c397f2

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/945

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/d03b1ce65d4077e2895acfce3bc286ea501669aa

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/944
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-28">
  ## Box Swift SDK Generated 0.3.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Change base URLs (box/box-codegen[#491][1]) ([#115][2]) ([`d0a7adb`][3])
  * Fix Box AI endpoints (box/box-openapi[#418][4]) ([#88][5]) ([`022f83a`][6])
  * Fix CI for auto update pull requests (box/box-codegen[#506][7]) ([#135][8]) ([`a62e238`][9])
  * fix deserialisation of Union with array in Swift (box/box-codegen[#486][10]) ([#94][11]) ([`4f187be`][12])
  * Fix metadata filter resource (box/box-openapi[#419][13]) ([#90][14]) ([`b04f7ce`][15])
  * Fix schemas for updating classification on a file and folder (box/box-openapi[#423][16]) ([#104][17]) ([`caa9d2b`][18])
  * improve wording for box sign (box/box-openapi[#424][19]) ([#111][20]) ([`4fa69f0`][21])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add missing marker pagination fields and introduce new event type `(box/box-openapi[#431](https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/431))` ([#136][22]) ([`b186b11`][23])
  * Add support for `visionOS` and add privacy manifest file for swift `(box/box-codegen[#510](https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/510))` ([#139][24]) ([`7fc76fc`][25])
  * Add support for Date in Swift (box/box-codegen[#488][26]) ([#103][27]) ([`7e1ea1a`][28])
  * Improve chunk upload in Swift `(box/box-codegen[#515](https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/515))` ([#143][29]) ([`b8099ab`][30])
  * move notification suppression to public schema (box/box-openapi[#425][31]) ([#113][32]) ([`069be60`][33])
  * Move schemas to separate modules (box/box-codegen[#483][34]) ([#99][35]) ([`c7a8506`][36])
  * Start throwing common errors `(box/box-codegen[#516](https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/516))` ([#147][37]) ([`d12bbb7`][38])
  * Support Box AI endpoints (box/box-openapi[#416][39]) ([#86][40]) ([`175ab82`][41])
  * Support chunk upload in Swift `(box/box-codegen[#513](https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/513))` ([#142][42]) ([`9e0b4e2`][43])
  * support excluding endpoints and schemas in parser (box/box-codegen[#487][44]) ([#100][45]) ([`af9e171`][46])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/491

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/115

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/d0a7adb201c823313f0a5de25fa4fc5469590c97

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/418

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/88

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/022f83aaa7fbe3f4292a06527875123ecc7b99f0

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/506

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/135

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/a62e238534cb625dbc98cbe59c98939c78b74f4a

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/486

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/94

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/4f187bed1e88c93c1258be8723a39b45129ff21f

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/419

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/90

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b04f7ceee9bca4f1f19d66401f38636e7737b4b1

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/423

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/104

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/caa9d2b7d0a6c2728f543fa19acb7859f21fb5c9

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/424

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/111

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/4fa69f01ca3a2a7fc8dcdc71cbecb03c469a83e6

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/136

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b186b11a2c591cd4fdd3b50733750a7bb4ec94e9

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/139

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/7fc76fc1799db0a50ad22eb047d013c4597c5277

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/488

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/103

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/7e1ea1af553cc8458eb9026c777608f7929e686d

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/143

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/b8099ab41ea5b8706e14285a0f9db2fd3c0a7a6d

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/425

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/113

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/069be60613889b45b396bbe22262c5f8df32b158

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/483

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/99

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/c7a85069544c28e2be918eafd9e240f39660ead3

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/147

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/d12bbb7d06bd3fcf39c31e316f1047065b56baac

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/416

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/86

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/175ab82c18dc390bcd4c8e20aea8e405a2e31c4d

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/142

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/9e0b4e26a9283b5900ae0fe0fa858394b732f51b

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/487

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/100

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/af9e171c101703c98ff9a53093d7fc9c306137d9
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-12">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK Generated v1.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix CI for auto update pull requests (`box/box-codegen`[#506][1]) ([#221][2]) ([`bbc14f6`][3])
  * remove quotation mark when date or `datetime` is used in `queryParams` (box/`box-codegen`[#509][4]) ([#225][5]) ([`28d2220`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add missing marker pagination fields and introduce new event type `AppItemEventSource` `(box/box-openapi[#431](https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/431))` ([#224][7]) ([`6c18ca3`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/506

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/221

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/bbc14f66e14a9386c8d54a5d0bb36ec2cdc501c1

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/509

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/225

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/28d22200602cf02d73590189c304109f1c26db17

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/issues/224

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen/commit/6c18ca3b00da0b878d28e142a2361b6386ef0c15
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-12">
  ## Box Python SDK Generated v1.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix CI for auto update pull requests (`box/box-codegen`[#506][1]) ([#187][2]) ([`5e59f69`][3])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add missing marker pagination fields and introduce new event type `AppItemEventSource` `(box/box-openapi[#431](https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/431))` ([#189][4]) ([`8d22ce2`][5])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/506

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/187

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/5e59f69591e01cd2caf0033e0023061093989aa5

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/issues/189

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-codegen/commit/8d22ce20d57f4b5dcb5b344ff6bfc67bcaa3568d
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-07">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.11.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Use upload session `urls` for chunk upload ([#875][1]) ([`c67b03c`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/875

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/c67b03c7d88533773d62d72f0b626031805d61eb
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-06" description="Box Java SDK v4.9.1 released">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.9.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bumped `org.bouncycastle:bcprov-jdk18on:1.78.1` and `org.bouncycastle:bcpkix-jdk18on:1.78.1` ([#1246][1]) ([`0557bed`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1246

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0557bed2b65d1be717b64a612d74fca73ba21096
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-06">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.10.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Overload the `getRepresentationContent` method with a `maxRetries` parameter ([#1251][1]) ([`d26bd4f`][2])
  * Support `login_required`, `password`, `suppress_nofitications`, `verification_phone_number` and `additional_info` fields in sign request ([#1250][3]) ([`3ee55b3`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1251

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/d26bd4f5a141150a372159bc3867abbbbdda1406

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1250

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3ee55b3613c5f5fa92cdd4a17c0cb3e2cc86a9a4
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-06">
  ## Box CLI v3.14.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bulk action in `search` command ([#528][1]) ([`782b0e6`][2])
  * Fix bulk operation for `sign-requests:create` command ([#531][3]) ([`6d9cd6b`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/528

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/782b0e6b00905d9724289cb05cf03a708c32ebb3

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/531

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/6d9cd6b82088185c1b98e8c4ed9ac26af4ee3362
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-31">
  ## Box UI Elements v20.0.1-beta.1 released

  ## [`20.0.1-beta.1`][1] (2024-05-31)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **avatars:** Add type to Fetch avatar ([#3560][2]) ([`14a194f`][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v20.0.0...v20.0.1-beta.1

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3560

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/14a194f
</Update>

<Update label="2024-06-18">
  ## PDF.js vulnerability affecting Box Preview SDK

  A `CVE-2024-4367` vulnerability has been identified in the `PDF.js` library used by [Box Preview SDK][1].
  The vulnerability exposes a gap in the `PDF.js` type, checking code that allows for arbitrary JavaScript to run when opened in Preview.

  Since this vulnerability existed in all versions of `PDF.js` that were lower or equal to `4.1.392`, it affects all versions of Preview SDK lower than `2.106.0`.
  To mitigate this vulnerability, upgrade the Preview SDK used in your apps to `2.106.0` or higher.

  All customers and application owners who are potentially affected have been notified directly via email.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/blob/master/README.md

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-22">
  ## Box UI Elements v20.0.0 released

  ### [20.0.0][1] (2024-05-22)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **content-answers:** scope styles to content answers modal ([#3548][2]) ([`97d49ff`][3])
  * **fonts:** update common fonts version ([#3499][4]) ([`870de6d`][5])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3508][6]) ([`785be2a`][7])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3509][8]) ([`85ebf26`][9])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3516][10]) ([`cb470e9`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3525][12]) ([`ffb447c`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3528][14]) ([`1cf016f`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3534][16]) ([`36e95a9`][17])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3535][18]) ([`c8d03c3`][19])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3538][20]) ([`cde1b88`][21])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3540][22]) ([`a7043e6`][23])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3541][24]) ([`3ced4a5`][25])
  * **`multiput-upload`:** improve upload performance ([#3512][26]) ([`2583e94`][27])
  * **`npm`:** add chromatic config to `npmignore` ([#3546][28]) ([`e2e6731`][29])
  * **preview:** Update default preview version to `2.106.0` ([#3555][30]) ([`f07d616`][31])
  * **`react-intl`:** mock date in relative time unit tests ([#3518][32]) ([`3ce175b`][33])
  * **shared-link-settings-modal:** correct expiration date formatting ([#3545][34]) ([`e47892f`][35])
  * **upload:** improve `multiput` upload performance 2 ([#3517][36]) ([`2440746`][37])
  * **usm:** fix item type hubs ([#3532][38]) ([`0d1e9cf`][39])
  * **usm:** hide link description when upsell shows ([#3553][40]) ([`838a2e8`][41])

  ### Features

  * **content-explorer:** allow not using Portal when rendering modal ([#3501][42]) ([`b096d38`][43])
  * **content-uploader:** Added `allowPrepopulateFiles` prop to content uploader ([#3519][44]) ([`12427b1`][45])
  * **content-uploader:** Implemented partial upload for successful file transfers ([#3529][46]) ([`e70825c`][47])
  * **docgen:** docgen sidebar base ([#3484][48]) ([`4b18b21`][49])
  * **`react-intl`:** Bump `react-intl` package \[BREAKING CHANGE] ([#3466][50]) ([`307c6a4`][51])
  * **usm:** Add access level label for hubs ([#3526][52]) ([`6504480`][53])
  * **usm:** add inline notice as component ([#3549][54]) ([`d646c65`][55])

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * **`react-intl`:** upgrade the major version of the `react-intl` dependency

  * fix: fix `intl` type

  * fix: fix message syntax

  * fix: fix comments and i18n readme file

  * fix: fix `react-intl` version comments

  * fix: use `IntlShape` as a type in js files

  * Fix: correct type import for `IntlShape`

  * fix: add resolution

  * fix: use exact version to match other repositories

  * Fix: correct type import for `IntlShape`

  * fix: remove all support for legacy versions

  * fix: add `relativeTime` helper function

  * fix: fix `relativeTime` in `PresenceAvatarTooltipContent` component

  * fix: fix `relativeTime` in `PresenceCollaborator` component

  * fix: use inclusive inequalities in `relativeTime` helper

  * fix: remove unnecessary modulo operations

  * fix: fix `relativeTime` in `ReadableTime` + fix snapshots

  * fix: fix `relativeTime` in `lastModifiedByCellRenderer`

  * fix: fix tests

  * fix: use js

  * fix: fix import

  * fix: fix else statement

  * fix: revert import reorder

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v19.0.0...v20.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3548

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/97d49ff

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3499

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/870de6d

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3508

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/785be2a

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3509

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/85ebf26

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3516

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cb470e9

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3525

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ffb447c

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3528

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1cf016f

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3534

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/36e95a9

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3535

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c8d03c3

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3538

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cde1b88

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3540

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a7043e6

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3541

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3ced4a5

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3512

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2583e94

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3546

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e2e6731

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3555

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f07d616

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3518

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3ce175b

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3545

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e47892f

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3517

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2440746

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3532

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0d1e9cf

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3553

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/838a2e8

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3501

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b096d38

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3519

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/12427b1

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3529

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e70825c

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3484

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4b18b21

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3466

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/307c6a4

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3526

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6504480

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3549

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d646c65
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-22">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.10.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Transition to stable status ([#872][1]) ([`6203606`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Change exception type for missing location header ([#871][3]) ([`8c5e0ec`][4])
  * fix annotation of oauths `access_token` ([#855][5]) ([`804780e`][6])
  * Fix retention policy integration test ([#867][7]) ([`8e0d640`][8])
  * Remove delete classification ([#861][9]) ([`393cfef`][10])
  * Update exception file get download URL ([#866][11]) ([`94dcbcd`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/872

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/620360607a51ee302cde61401db1424c9bf48d81

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/871

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/8c5e0eca7e494baa8138dceededa2009abc1717b

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/855

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/804780e4c8d410590fa20cdb6dd35224d59d2ec0

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/867

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/8e0d6406f26be87799838b0aa57acd62c79d59a2

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/861

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/393cfefa57e729f34221a4e5923a4a50532f4013

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/866

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/94dcbcd490d98ff19afd38c9880de8022ad2ec89
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-20">
  ## Introducing New Generation Python SDK

  We are excited to introduce [Box Python SDK][1], designed to elevate the developer experience and streamline your integration with the Box Content Cloud.

  With the [new generation of Python SDK][1], you'll have access to:

  * **Full API Support**: The new generation of Box SDKs empowers developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can now access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box, allowing you to build even more sophisticated and feature-rich applications.
  * **Rapid API Updates** Say goodbye to waiting for new Box APIs to be incorporated into the SDK. With our new auto-generation development approach, we can now add new Box APIs to the SDK at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
  * **Embedded Documentation**: We understand that access to information is crucial for developers. With our new approach, we have included comprehensive documentation for all objects and parameters directly in the source code of the SDK. This means you no longer need to look up this information on the developer portal, saving you time and streamlining your development process.
  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods**: Our commitment to enhancing your development experience continues with the introduction of convenience methods. These methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers which help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

  Embrace the new generation of Box SDKs and unlock the full potential of the Box Content Cloud. Start building innovative solutions faster and more efficiently. Happy coding!

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-20">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Transition to stable status ([#880][1]) ([`ae996ea`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/880

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/ae996eafd9e34de99119a7780384b90758908313
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-20">
  ## Introducing New Generation TypeScript SDK

  We are excited to introduce [Box TypeScript SDK][1], designed to elevate the developer experience and streamline your integration with the Box Content Cloud.

  With the [new generation of Typescript SDK][1], you’ll have access to:

  * **Full API Support**: The new generation of Box SDKs empowers developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can now access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box, allowing you to build even more sophisticated and feature-rich applications.
  * **Rapid API Updates**: Say goodbye to waiting for new Box APIs to be incorporated into the SDK. With our new auto-generation development approach, we can now add new Box APIs to the SDK at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
  * **Embedded Documentation**: We understand that access to information is crucial for developers. With our new approach, we have included comprehensive documentation for all objects and parameters directly in the source code of the SDK. This means you no longer need to look up this information on the developer portal, saving you time and streamlining your development process.
  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods**: Our commitment to enhancing your development experience continues with the introduction of convenience methods. These methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers which help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

  Embrace the new generation of Box SDKs and unlock the full potential of the Box Content Cloud. Start building innovative solutions faster and more efficiently. Happy coding!

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-15">
  ## Notification suppression for Box Sign

  [Box Sign API][1] allows you to suppress the **default** Box email
  notifications sent during the Box Sign workflow.​​

  Thanks to this feature, you can turn the default notifications
  off to use your own, customized messages and decide on channels
  they will be sent through.

  ***Note**: When you choose to suppress email notifications for Box Sign, your organization assumes responsibility for ensuring the delivery to Signers of all notifications at the appropriate time in the signing process and with the appropriate content, in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including with respect to obtaining Signer consent to the delivery methods used, if applicable.*

  ## New Box Sign webhooks

  Along with the notification suppression feature, we introduce three new [webhooks][2] to enhance the customization options for e-signature workflows:

  * `SIGN.REQUEST.SIGNATURE_REQUESTED`
  * `SIGN.REQUEST.SIGNER_SIGNED`
  * `SIGN.REQUEST.ERROR_FINALIZING`

  You can use these webhooks to trigger actions in your own applications or notify your users about events happening in Box Sign.​​

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/post-sign-requests

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/sign/webhooks/

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-07">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.9.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support AI API ([#1243][1]) ([`4e64f27`][2])
  * Support pagination of file versions ([#1240][3]) ([`7e7af3f`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Support create empty shared link ([#1241][5]) ([`0c86487`][6])
  * Update exception message for get representation content ([#1239][7]) ([`a608f9a`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1243

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/4e64f27874fabf36f7fbf385ca4a60683f4a7670

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1240

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/7e7af3f6e40a44522a7649817547846e3f633fc8

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1241

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0c86487848e5004a713873baffa2d9dcc63b1502

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1239

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/a608f9a4350b723e9f07eaf00af45243737a17c9
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-03">
  ## Introducing Box AI API and Box AI Dev Zone

  Box AI API allows you to use Box AI functionality in your custom applications. For example, you can implement Box AI question and answer functionality in your third party applications or generate content right in your product’s content editor.

  *Box AI API and Box AI for UI Elements are beta features, which means the available capabilities may change. Box AI features are available to all **Enterprise Plus** customers.*

  Currently, you can ask Box AI to answer your questions, summarize the document content, or generate text you can use in your documents.
  Check the [Box AI API developer guides][1] to learn more about Box AI and check the API Reference for details.

  ## Box AI Developer Zone

  Alongside with the Box AI API, we have launched a new developer documentation demo page. [Box AI Dev Zone][2] allows you to explore the Box AI API through rich, interactive experiences. You can view use cases, example prompts and responses, and sample code.

  ## Box AI for UI Elements

  [Box AI for UI Elements][3] enhances the [Content Preview][4] header with AI Q\&A functionality.
  The new Box AI for UI Elements allows the users to embed AI functionality in their custom applications to facilitate answering questions and taking actions like summarizing a document.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-ai

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/ai-dev-zone

  [3]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/preview#box-ai-ui-element

  [4]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/preview

  [5]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-05-02">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.5.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `options` parameter in metadata query method ([#878][1]) ([`7943420`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/878

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/79434209c572cd77c329d6008cda9837a9dba411
</Update>

<Update label="2024-04-05">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add privacy manifest files ([#924][1]) ([`cbef168`][2])
  * Add support for `visionOS` ([#916][3]) ([`a05b243`][4])
  * Add support for additional fields in `SignRequest` ([#919][5]) ([`36f464c`][6])
  * Make fields from `TokenInfo` publicly available ([#920][7]) ([`eb26f47`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/924

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/cbef168bb872941899be26116c647ac29f5dd44b

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/916

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/a05b2433f1b2d0c1ec72f946e0706d03a4548703

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/919

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/36f464c23a161f5d0fcc6858c3615d884ce8ee07

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/920

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/eb26f47bbde6749f44f149e95b3610e41c16d2f2
</Update>

<Update label="2024-03-06">
  ## Box CLI v3.14.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for `vanity_name` when creating `shared-links` ([#524][1]) ([`38164bc`][2])
  * Support sign request signer group ID ([#521][3]) ([`f7b1b44`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/524

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/38164bc716879aef0a8a2b973a9c6fc7eb705978

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/521

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f7b1b4409e0f72c264cc23a0f1ca1849060bf121
</Update>

<Update label="2024-02-27">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add marker-based pagination version of `GetFolderItems` ([#936][1]) ([`f877a8f`][2])
  * Support sign request signer group ID ([#938][3]) ([`096a098`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove delete classification ([#932][5]) ([`fb59489`][6])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.7.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.7.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.7.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.7.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/936

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/f877a8f9105d65a3e3ca459fcbf4a1bb653ff0f3

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/938

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/096a09805b189c591289e77ae5f8a8e6f1b466f1

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/932

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/fb594897850ad9daacf75cab702f3765cc7168c0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-02-27">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * allow modifying `BoxAPIRequest` URL ([#1236][1]) ([`eaea019`][2])
  * Bumped `org.bouncycastle:bcprov-jdk18on:1.77` and `org.bouncycastle:bcpkix-jdk18on:1.77` ([#1237][3]) ([`6c7fe7b`][4]), closes [#1235][5]

  ### Bug Fixes

  * fix download for empty files ([#1231][6]) ([`0e2230b`][7])
  * stop using `SharedLinkAPIConnection` in `getSharedItem()` ([#1234][8]) ([`9f9af8e`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1236

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/eaea0193ab7e72b73746ea85806e62468825bbce

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1237

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/6c7fe7b74dbfb34e729fcecf8a29a1d3a1ba596f

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1235

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1231

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0e2230b0be36f6bfb35f1d6b9dd4ba58e4d125ec

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1234

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9f9af8e22b4a38dc9a31a611ff1b962966bbd6b5
</Update>

<Update label="2024-02-22">
  ## Box CLI v3.13.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add additional `UseDisplayName` flag to metadata extraction script ([#515][1]) ([`b900fdb`][2])
  * Add additional context info when throw exception ([#519][3]) ([`b99a58d`][4])
  * Support overwrite/skip folder download ([#516][5]) ([`300f914`][6])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix metadata extraction script ([#514][7]) ([`2fad540`][8])
  * Fix the functionality of the overwrite flag ([#513][9]) ([`f4bf7af`][10])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/515

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/b900fdb984345c0fdfeb09e531f6a358ad8c3b8e

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/519

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/b99a58d930eccf5363c82b84e4415336d7d69541

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/516

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/300f914ba8bb94d9c399699d126d81aba0b22142

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/514

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/2fad540badf60538fe1456f8071b74bf917f7464

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/513

  [10]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f4bf7af8e0bbdf7e73fab23d920259ef16672be0
</Update>

<Update label="2024-02-19">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Sign request group ([#870][1]) ([`11bf5d2`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bumped proxy-agent to 6.4.0 ([#874][3]) ([`55a8a0b`][4])
  * Remove delete classification ([#869][5]) ([`22384ab`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/870

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/11bf5d2db7e0cefc669aab99c8b65c632289ac46

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/874

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/55a8a0baebe151f4107fdbec0a1022e9534f88a4

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/869

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/22384abc3abbc35800cbcdea7c7eb9a452cc4859
</Update>

<Update label="2024-02-06">
  ## Working with Box Sign

  We are thrilled to announce the release of our new dedicated resource page [Working with the Box Sign API][1]. This comprehensive guide is designed to help you seamlessly integrate Box Sign into your applications, providing you with the tools and knowledge to make the most out of this powerful e-signature solution.

  ## Table of content

  * [Quick start][2]
  * [Technical use cases][3]
  * [Signature request options][4]
  * [Webhooks][5]
  * [Workshops][6]

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/sign/

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/sign/quick-start/

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/sign/technical-use-cases/

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/sign/request-options/

  [5]: https://developer.box.com/sign/webhooks/

  [6]: https://github.com/barduinor/box-python-gen-workshop/blob/main/workshops/sign/sign.md
</Update>

<Update label="2024-02-02">
  ## Metadata view in Content Explorer

  Content Explorer comes with a metadata view that uses metadata query to find files and folders. The data is then displayed in the embedded view.

  For details, read the [Content Explorer guide][1] and our [blog post][2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer

  [2]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/metadata-view-in-box-content-explorer-4978e47e97e9

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-01-25">
  ## Box UI Elements v19.0.0 released

  ### [19.0.0][1] (2024-01-25)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **activity-feed-zoom:** add a min-height prop to the items container ([#3411][2]) ([`a60a70d`][3])
  * **button:** add aria labels for accessibility ([#3377][4]) ([`9a9b5e3`][5])
  * **content-answers:** add `bdl` prefix into the styles ([#3421][6]) ([`fdbfc4d`][7])
  * **content-explorer:** allow `onDelete` callback to be success on 404 ([#3468][8]) ([`13ed6da`][9])
  * **content-explorer:** detect if device supports downloading ([#3480][10]) ([`fa68f9b`][11])
  * **content-explorer:** fix text ellipsis in breadcrumbs ([#3481][12]) ([`6099b1d`][13])
  * **content-explorer:** Remove lingering `contentPreviewProps` ([#3489][14]) ([`4181e0c`][15])
  * **content-explorer:** show pagination count for small devices ([#3498][16]) ([`98537b9`][17])
  * **content-picker:** use pagination component to import correct styles ([#3472][18]) ([`6aef87b`][19])
  * **content-sidebar:** increase z-index to stack above annotations ([#3478][20]) ([`762b82d`][21])
  * **content-uploader:** add text ellipsis and adjust spacing ([#3479][22]) ([`36df228`][23])
  * **flyout:** set default role for Flyout to 'dialog' ([#3388][24]) ([`942f6b7`][25])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3396][26]) ([`2175a82`][27])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3398][28]) ([`4d71c62`][29])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3401][30]) ([`0911005`][31])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3409][32]) ([`4c95746`][33])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3413][34]) ([`65eb428`][35])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3417][36]) ([`9aab003`][37])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3422][38]) ([`523492a`][39])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3430][40]) ([`7b705bc`][41])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3433][42]) ([`0e8decb`][43])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3434][44]) ([`15e2e2e`][45])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3437][46]) ([`0d06403`][47])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3438][48]) ([`a6f4868`][49])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3452][50]) ([`22bb031`][51])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3453][52]) ([`85d2521`][53])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3454][54]) ([`e83185e`][55])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3455][56]) ([`a10aa5c`][57])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3456][58]) ([`41ad809`][59])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3457][60]) ([`b3f57ff`][61])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3458][62]) ([`a1c42d7`][63])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3459][64]) ([`1b6f4c2`][65])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3462][66]) ([`13fc9b0`][67])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3464][68]) ([`d1a888d`][69])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3465][70]) ([`5413089`][71])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3469][72]) ([`2ffe17f`][73])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3470][74]) ([`1139bb0`][75])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3471][76]) ([`41e02db`][77])
  * **modal-dialog:** add aria-modal to `ModalDialog` ([#3380][78]) ([`c8f8509`][79])
  * **modify-reply:** Map object to parameters ([#3387][80]) ([`3989675`][81])
  * **preview:** Add accessibility to annotation badge type icon ([#3404][82]) ([`d4b7852`][83])
  * **preview:** Change focus indicator for actions in version panel ([#3397][84]) ([`f111c64`][85])
  * **preview:** Ensure promoted-by field shows correct user ([#3414][86]) ([`458fdbf`][87])
  * **preview:** extending HOC to not override `onDismiss` callback ([#3431][88]) ([`4cc57a3`][89])
  * **search-form:** extract search actions component ([#3475][90]) ([`8d77320`][91])
  * deactivate copy in `textInputWithCopyButton` when button is deactivated ([#3419][92]) ([`68b2def`][93])
  * hide uploads manager progress bar for screen-readers if not visible ([#3383][94]) ([`5592a48`][95])
  * remove `core-js` from examples wrapper ([#3392][96]) ([`48ccdf7`][97])
  * remove internal boxer names ([#3390][98]) ([`65cc5cb`][99])
  * **preview-sidebar:** fix preview versions behavior ([#3203][100]) ([`d940782`][101])
  * update source paths for test pages ([#3378][102]) ([`ff6b349`][103])

  ### Features

  * **aci:** add `ACI` config to features prop ([#3410][104]) ([`e95a35e`][105])
  * **activityitems:** new layout ([#3405][106]) ([`665d30a`][107])
  * **annotations:** editing an annotation reply ([#3412][108]) ([`025ad7e`][109])
  * **assets:** add Box AI assets ([#3393][110]) ([`bc6b04d`][111])
  * **content-answers:** add `contentAnswers` Modal header and footer ([#3403][112]) ([`a7d0a3e`][113])
  * **content-answers:** add inline error ([#3444][114]) ([`405cdb4`][115])
  * **content-answers:** add modal body with initial welcome message ([#3415][116]) ([`6748e73`][117])
  * **content-answers:** add prop to control displaying `contentAnswers` ([#3399][118]) ([`f0b0922`][119])
  * **content-answers:** add scrolling to bottom ([#3442][120]) ([`59c8c45`][121])
  * **content-answers:** Avatar ([#3418][122]) ([`45166f4`][123])
  * **content-answers:** button focusing ([#3448][124]) ([`2358321`][125])
  * **content-answers:** Content Answers Modal Error ([#3425][126]) ([`a5084a5`][127])
  * **content-answers:** create initial content-answers modal button component ([#3395][128]) ([`217a393`][129])
  * **content-answers:** Deactivate button when not allowed file type ([#3406][130]) ([`f950772`][131])
  * **content-answers:** intelligence API ([#3420][132]) ([`76fd991`][133])
  * **content-answers:** Questions Answers Intelligence endpoint ([#3435][134]) ([`4c7c0c0`][135])
  * **content-answers:** retry button ([#3451][136]) ([`e0976b8`][137])
  * **content-explorer:** Add auto selected items to content explorer ([#3474][138]) ([`215cfdd`][139])
  * **content-sidebar:** enable responsiveness for Preview and Sidebar ([#3497][140]) ([`1652982`][141])
  * **label-primitive:** pass properties to label ([#3473][142]) ([`7e88772`][143])
  * **modal:** enable responsive behavior ([#3492][144]) ([`7fe59b8`][145])
  * **pill-selector:** added more options for text input ([#3440][146]) ([`d782e4a`][147])
  * **preview:** Focus on comment form for replies and modifying ([#3407][148]) ([`69293d8`][149])
  * **threaded-replies:** added resolve/unresolve for annotations ([#3423][150]) ([`c489ad3`][151])
  * **threaded-replies:** delete threaded reply comments ([#3402][152]) ([`37437c5`][153])
  * **uaa-integration:** Handle no comment permission ([#3394][154]) ([`5a28b49`][155])
  * **uaa-integration:** Parse App Activity item ([#3386][156]) ([`44fd12b`][157])
  * **uaa-integration:** Parse Versions Response from UAA ([#3385][158]) ([`0fa730f`][159])
  * **usm:** enable responsive behavior ([#3494][160]) ([`76db2a5`][161])
  * remove browser support for IE11 ([#3382][162]) ([`e151c87`][163])

  ### Reverts

  * "chore(codeowners): updated codeowners temporarily ([#3446][164])" ([#3476][165]) ([`3e38fa5`][166])

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * Internet Explorer 11 is no longer supported

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v18.1.0...v19.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3411

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a60a70d

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3377

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9a9b5e3

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3421

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fdbfc4d

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3468

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/13ed6da

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3480

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fa68f9b

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3481

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6099b1d

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3489

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4181e0c

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3498

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/98537b9

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3472

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6aef87b

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3478

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/762b82d

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3479

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/36df228

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3388

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/942f6b7

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3396

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2175a82

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3398

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4d71c62

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3401

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0911005

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3409

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4c95746

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3413

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/65eb428

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3417

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9aab003

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3422

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/523492a

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3430

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7b705bc

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3433

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0e8decb

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3434

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/15e2e2e

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3437

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0d06403

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3438

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a6f4868

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3452

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/22bb031

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3453

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/85d2521

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3454

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e83185e

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3455

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a10aa5c

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3456

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/41ad809

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3457

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b3f57ff

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3458

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a1c42d7

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3459

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1b6f4c2

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3462

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/13fc9b0

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3464

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d1a888d

  [70]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3465

  [71]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5413089

  [72]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3469

  [73]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2ffe17f

  [74]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3470

  [75]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1139bb0

  [76]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3471

  [77]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/41e02db

  [78]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3380

  [79]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c8f8509

  [80]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3387

  [81]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3989675

  [82]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3404

  [83]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d4b7852

  [84]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3397

  [85]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f111c64

  [86]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3414

  [87]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/458fdbf

  [88]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3431

  [89]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4cc57a3

  [90]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3475

  [91]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8d77320

  [92]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3419

  [93]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/68b2def

  [94]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3383

  [95]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5592a48

  [96]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3392

  [97]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/48ccdf7

  [98]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3390

  [99]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/65cc5cb

  [100]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3203

  [101]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d940782

  [102]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3378

  [103]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ff6b349

  [104]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3410

  [105]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e95a35e

  [106]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3405

  [107]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/665d30a

  [108]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3412

  [109]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/025ad7e

  [110]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3393

  [111]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bc6b04d

  [112]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3403

  [113]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a7d0a3e

  [114]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3444

  [115]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/405cdb4

  [116]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3415

  [117]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6748e73

  [118]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3399

  [119]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f0b0922

  [120]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3442

  [121]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/59c8c45

  [122]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3418

  [123]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/45166f4

  [124]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3448

  [125]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2358321

  [126]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3425

  [127]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a5084a5

  [128]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3395

  [129]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/217a393

  [130]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3406

  [131]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f950772

  [132]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3420

  [133]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/76fd991

  [134]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3435

  [135]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4c7c0c0

  [136]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3451

  [137]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e0976b8

  [138]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3474

  [139]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/215cfdd

  [140]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3497

  [141]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1652982

  [142]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3473

  [143]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7e88772

  [144]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3492

  [145]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7fe59b8

  [146]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3440

  [147]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d782e4a

  [148]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3407

  [149]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/69293d8

  [150]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3423

  [151]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c489ad3

  [152]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3402

  [153]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/37437c5

  [154]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3394

  [155]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5a28b49

  [156]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3386

  [157]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/44fd12b

  [158]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3385

  [159]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0fa730f

  [160]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3494

  [161]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/76db2a5

  [162]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3382

  [163]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e151c87

  [164]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3446

  [165]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3476

  [166]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3e38fa5
</Update>

<Update label="2024-01-19">
  ## New event parameter for Shield Suspicious Location alert

  Along with the release of Shield Suspicious Location: Automated Response we added `rule_response_action` parameter in the [Shield Alert Event][1] response.
  This parameter is returned in the payload of each Shield Alert Event, but applicable only to **Suspicious Locations** alert event.

  The value of the parameter depends on the **Restrict Target User Access** rule settings in the Admin Console.

  * If active, the value of the parameter will be `true` when the alert is triggered.
  * If inactive, the value of the parameter will be `false` when the alert is triggered.

  For all other Shield Alerts (**Anomalous Download**, **Malicious Content**, **Suspicious Session**), the `rule_response_action` parameter is always `null`.

  For additional information, see [Suspicious Location rule settings][2]

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events/#suspicious-locations-alert

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/9090542213395-Shield-Threat-Detection-Rule-Settings#h_01GE85EWQ1TS5APY7RGN801QSC

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2024-01-16">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `signer_group_id` for signer in sign request ([#1220][1]) ([`f560db8`][2])
  * Upgrade `BouncyCastle` to v.`1.70`.
    > **NOTE**: A new `BouncyCastle` version is not compliant with FIPS.
  * Introduce `IPrivateKeyDecryptor` to allow using custom cryptography provider ([#1226][3]) ([`727e6d7`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove delete classification ([#1222][5]) ([`9814038`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1220

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f560db8d5587406099066803789d16374ec7dbb9

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1226

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/727e6d71ee375a48b4241a26a093becfe0965898

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1222

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/981403896b4cd16a42c9feeecf30e75e1e8fa072
</Update>

<Update label="2023-12-11">
  ## Introducing enhanced My Apps view in Developer Console

  To improve application management experience even further, we introduce
  the [My Apps][1] list view in the Developer Console.
  This view includes key information about your applications, giving you the possibility to:

  * view and copy the application client ID,
  * view the application description,
  * sort custom applications,
  * check the authorization and enablement status of the application,
  * access the configuration and generate developer tokens.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/applications

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-30">
  ## Introducing the NEW Learn Box Platform section

  To improve the getting started experience, we have reorganized and added resource materials
  for you to use when coming on to the platform. Checkout the learn section [here][1].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/platform/

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-29">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.6.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * support object value in `BoxConflictErrorContextInfo` ([#930][1]) ([`496f758`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.6.1>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.6.1>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.6.1>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.6.1>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/930

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/496f758c3436b1834188078027b7305ca6a98fce
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-08">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.4.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `proxy-agent` ([#867][1]) ([`3de7586`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/867

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3de7586e44dbb7c8e1bff8f34471964805c810f5
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-08">
  ## Box CLI v3.12.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Bump `box-node-sdk` ([#510][1]) ([`2621f41`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/510

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/2621f4121999ff6e9d0cc0c391dfd3aa93aefe49
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-06">
  ## Box CLI v3.12.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * force offset based pagination in get users ([#504][1]) ([`9bed083`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/504

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/9bed083d59b2386d045619fdf2f3ea915e44d231
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-03">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.4.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Update `proxy-agent` usage, drop support Node 12 ([#865][1]) ([`e229d3f`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/865

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/e229d3f93de350c00768528a1c0d3a6ecfc697a9
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-03">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add request option to skip `PassThrough` ([#863][1]) ([`726db45`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/863

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/726db45cfbb992e545fe2865283df63c898656ac
</Update>

<Update label="2023-11-02">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.6.1 released

  ### Dependency Upgrades

  * Bumped `org.bitbucket.b_c:jose4j:0.9.3` ([#1212][1]) ([`f522a56`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1212

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f522a5660f3522b11a0516774ba0cca69db3ec31
</Update>

<Update label="2023-10-26">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Replace `request` library with `@cypress/request` ([#860][1]) ([`d365ae8`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * mark auth functions callbacks as optional ([#858][3]) ([`55f22fe`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/860

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/d365ae8368c549ecdceb7dd5b928904fd3c58978

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/858

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/55f22fec7d7d35e487f3fb51bc9bbd3e848842ab
</Update>

<Update label="2023-10-18">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.9.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Remove restriction to version \<2 of `urllib3` library ([#851][1]) ([`1dcd82e`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/851

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/1dcd82e93267bfc68e3a7f8068b3c45ab7e86daf
</Update>

<Update label="2023-10-06">
  ## Introducing Box Platform Glossary

  To improve your experience with Box Platform and Box documentation, we created the [Box Platform Glossary][1].
  You can find there terms and concepts that are most important to start working with Box content- and cloud-based solutions.

  As we want this list of terms to be comprehensive and detailed, it will be regularly updated. Let us know if you have any suggestions!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: page/platform/box-glossary/

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-10-06">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.2.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Overrides tough-cookie dependency ([#852][1]) ([`99df873`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/852

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/99df873e1a1dad4a0073d53b4ed57c0eeb859401
</Update>

<Update label="2023-10-03">
  ## Platform Insights for applications

  Admins and co-admins can now use the Platform Insights dashboard to get comprehensive view of the organization’s platform usage,
  including application-related information.
  With Platform Insights you can check the API call volume or the number of applications that are not enabled or approved yet.
  Additionally, you can see which apps are the most popular ones in you enterprise.

  For details, see [applications][1] and [Platform Insights][2] documentation.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/applications

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/20738406915219-Platform-Insights

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-10-02">
  ## Salesforce Toolkit - Integration Mappings

  You can now use [integration mappings][1] in Salesforce Toolkit with new [methods][2] and [flow actions][3].
  With [integration mappings][4] you can map a Slack channel to any folder within your enterprise instead of the default one.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings

  [2]: /guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/methods/#salesforce_and_slack

  [3]: /guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/flow-actions

  [4]: /reference/resources/integration-mappings

  [5]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-29">
  ## Introducing Beta Release: New Generation Python SDc

  We are excited to introduce [the latest generation (currently in Beta) of Box Python SDK][1], designed to elevate the developer experience and streamline your integration with the Box Content Cloud.

  With the [new generation of Python SDK][1], you'll have access to:

  * **Full API Support**: The new generation of Box SDKs empowers developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can now access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box, allowing you to build even more sophisticated and feature-rich applications.
  * **Rapid API Updates** Say goodbye to waiting for new Box APIs to be incorporated into the SDK. With our new auto-generation development approach, we can now add new Box APIs to the SDK at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
  * **Embedded Documentation**: We understand that access to information is crucial for developers. With our new approach, we have included comprehensive documentation for all objects and parameters directly in the source code of the SDK. This means you no longer need to look up this information on the developer portal, saving you time and streamlining your development process.
  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods**: Our commitment to enhancing your development experience continues with the introduction of convenience methods. These methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers which help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

  Embrace the new generation of Box SDKs and unlock the full potential of the Box Content Cloud. Start building innovative solutions faster and more efficiently. Happy coding!

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk-gen
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-29" description="">
  ## Box TypeScript SDK v10 released

  We are excited to introduce [the latest generation (currently in Beta) of Box TypeScript SDK][1], designed to elevate the developer experience and streamline your integration with the Box Content Cloud.

  With the [new generation of Typescript SDK][1], you’ll have access to:

  * **Full API Support**: The new generation of Box SDKs empowers developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can now access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box, allowing you to build even more sophisticated and feature-rich applications.
  * **Rapid API Updates**: Say goodbye to waiting for new Box APIs to be incorporated into the SDK. With our new auto-generation development approach, we can now add new Box APIs to the SDK at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
  * **Embedded Documentation**: We understand that access to information is crucial for developers. With our new approach, we have included comprehensive documentation for all objects and parameters directly in the source code of the SDK. This means you no longer need to look up this information on the developer portal, saving you time and streamlining your development process.
  * **Enhanced Convenience Methods**: Our commitment to enhancing your development experience continues with the introduction of convenience methods. These methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers which help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

  Embrace the new generation of Box SDKs and unlock the full potential of the Box Content Cloud. Start building innovative solutions faster and more efficiently. Happy coding!

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-typescript-sdk-gen
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-29">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support search deleted filters ([#1207][1]) ([`5e0e9ed`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Added protected accessors for trust manager and hostname verifier. ([#1206][3]) ([`0c79d17`][4])
  * fix not closing response body ([#1208][5]) ([`ab5e170`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1207

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/5e0e9ed9aea2818da6fba0d562b56987c4948aaa

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1206

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0c79d1754bffeb3f0487e10d55d716ba1cbed1aa

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1208

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/ab5e1702934607b258802b33f3663af3e9c56027
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-25" description="Box Windows SDK v5.6.0 released">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support `iframeable_embed_url` for sign request ([#925][1]) ([`e9de994`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.6.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.6.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.6.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.6.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/925

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/e9de994cea97afcc1c3bc52ddf1cc023b9ee731c
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-18">
  ## Box CLI v3.12.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support sign templates ([#496][1]) ([`955106f`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/496

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/955106ffa5d7938c567e5440868f2ec3c87045ce
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-14">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.9.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * do not retry creating a ZIP when response code is 202 ([#845][1]) ([`3f6ed4e`][2]), closes [#844][3]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/845

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/3f6ed4e1053a494ed9f2b79828850e059d0a1617

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/844
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-14">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `iframeable_embed_url` field to `BoxSignRequestSigner` class ([#1202][1]) ([`2e931d8`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `SharedLinkAPIConnection` uses request interceptor ([#1203][3]) ([`b2b6a1d`][4]), closes [#1200][5]
  * Update sign template missing enum ([#1201][6]) ([`fcb6657`][7])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1202

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/2e931d8c36694a665d1c6315d3bf2d226929b713

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1203

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b2b6a1dba316ba50a1e011250c320fca156c6708

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1200

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1201

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/fcb6657bb2375e32c3fb0f861e7ecaeb84503f2c
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-07">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support Sign Templates and new Sign Request statuses ([#920][1]) ([`78580fb`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.4.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.4.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.4.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.4.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/920

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/78580fbd3de553273970376b96bc28c7c5614a97
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-07">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support sign template ([#848][1]) ([`18d3413`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/848

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/18d3413afeddf43c62dfd0caf1279e61c99b6b83
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-06">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.9.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support Sign Templates APIs ([#835][1]) ([`fbc783d`][2])
  * Support create sign request with template ID ([#834][3]) ([`4f11d75`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `ChunkedUploader` Resume Not Closing `ThreadPoolExecutor` Instances ([#840][5]) ([`f210f00`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/835

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/fbc783d5af2e75f883f1a0051613c513139f68fb

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/834

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/4f11d7596488194fc740936fe987f42864003d41

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/840

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/f210f00ad823d7755309f2e8804641e0debf8197
</Update>

<Update label="2023-09-04" description="Box Windows SDK v5.3.0 released">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `attachment` content type to `SignRequestSigner` ([#913][1]) ([`ad612ff`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * replace deprecated `BouncyCastle` library ([#909][3]) ([`f00f2af`][4])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.3.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.3.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.3.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.3.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/913

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/ad612ffc7821a9ecbc180e3dbeefe16d3e397820

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/909

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/f00f2af9c5277b42e6a62060c1b0229ecff0203e
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-29">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support sign template and new sign status ([#1197][1]) ([`e37c0dc`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1197

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e37c0dce86a422de5e8e6ed26fd93f1324f4b3e3
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-16">
  ## Introducing Embedded Box Sign Client

  You can now use [Box Embed][1] to [embed Box Sign
  features][2] in your own website. This way, users
  don't have to leave the website, go to Box Sign
  to sign the document, and then come back to finish
  the process. Instead, Box Embed allows them
  to complete the signing process
  within the external website.

  To integrate Box Sign experience within your
  own website, you need the [`iframeable_embed_url`][3]
  parameter that is specifically designed to allow
  signing documents within the HTML `iframe` tag.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/embed/box-embed

  [2]: /guides/box-sign/create-sign-request#embedded-sign-client

  [3]: /reference/resources/sign-request#param-signers-iframeable_embed_url

  [4]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-16">
  ## Box CLI v3.10.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support update user tracking codes ([#489][1]) ([`159e6d0`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/489

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/159e6d07fa91f2b199ca85207a4cad5cf4274f0e
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-11">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support access only collaboration ([#1193][1]) ([`664c01f`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1193

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/664c01f80ca0647645c60920eb0ef1f9353a619f
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-08">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add missing values in `SignRequestSignerInputContentType` and `SignRequestStatus` along with the tests ([#907][1]) ([`56a8250`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Identify iPhone Simulator on Apple Silicon ([#902][3]) ([`7731a7f`][4])
  * Make code compatible with macOS. ([#900][5]) ([`3b0016e`][6])
  * Remove use of deprecated string scanner API. ([#901][7]) ([`af5f0e5`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/907

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/56a82500c0abe648825d8300979601a25f792c84

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/902

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/7731a7f434add74e163a76511fe1e2a3f26517f7

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/900

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/3b0016e44e674db0ea429273c03e5a29177372bf

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/901

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/af5f0e52d184fbd27f56d972fb93b3e543547773
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-08">
  ## Box CLI v3.9.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix escaped slashes when passing an input to command ([#486][1]) ([`7670210`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/486

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/7670210ffb5c38cef8dd153e823029d5237080b6
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-03">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.2.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fixed upload when data are coming from a dynamic source ([#1189][1]) ([`77b39f2`][2]), closes [#1183][3] [#1190][4]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1189

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/77b39f2645d53bdab0ade23b637c211ea070fcf5

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1183

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1190
</Update>

<Update label="2023-08-01">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.8.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix JSON response validation retry strategy ([#831][1]) ([`69834eb`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/831

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/69834eb4c91a5aa4bc294a9fa49ecf753979d029
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-25">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Support updating all fields of `collaboration` ([#829][1]) ([`6dc7ecc`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/829

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/6dc7ecc6f9c94e7531c4147a3645927b85928b2c
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-26">
  ## Improvements in App Access Level for JWT authentication

  You can now ensure access to enterprise Managed Users **and groups** that were not created by [apps authenticated with JWT][1]. To do so, set **App Access Level** to **App + Enterprise Access** in the **Configuration** tab of the Developer console.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-19">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.1.1 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Bump proxy-agent to version 6.3.0 ([845][1]) ([`3f89f83`][2])

  [1]: \(https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/845\)

  [2]: \(https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3f89f83e939de5c1e6e48abbfb56212b56e70526\)
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-19">
  ## Box CLI v3.9.1 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Bump version of `box-node-sdk` and `csv` libraries ([483][1]) ([`fecb04b`][2])

  [1]: \(https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/483\)

  [2]: \(https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/483/commits/fecb04b635980baf37a7fefc8860b5e07b0bc4e6\)
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-12">
  ## Sign Request API improvements

  [Sign Request status][1] parameter now has two additional values:

  * `finalizing` to reflect the state when all signers have signed the request, but the final document with signatures and the signing log has not been generated yet.
  * `error_finalizing` to reflect the state when the `finalizing` phase did not complete successfully.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/resources/sign-request#param-status

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-12">
  ## Box UI Elements v18.1.0 released

  ### [18.1.0][1] (2023-07-12)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **content-picker:** check share permission for default shared links ([#3371][2]) ([`2bb1ddb`][3])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3372][4]) ([`f01fd6d`][5])
  * **readme:** fix `langauge` typo ([#3373][6]) ([`50e7fe0`][7])

  ### Features

  * **uaa-integration:** Filter activity types for UAA ([#3369][8]) ([`b9d196f`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v18.0.0...v18.1.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3371

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2bb1ddb

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3372

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f01fd6d

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3373

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/50e7fe0

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3369

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b9d196f
</Update>

<Update label="2023-07-07">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.7.3 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Stop processing data for logging when logging is deactivated and cache response `json` ([#824][1]) ([`3079171`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/824

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/3079171f8dfc1a4c85f8587e8ce90e8fbd826ee4
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-30">
  ## Updated sorting of folder items for shared folders

  Box Folder API allows you to [retrieve the items in the folder][1] and [sort][2] this list based on the sort parameter.
  We have improved the way items are sorted for shared folders that have the path to the associated folder visible to the collaborators.

  Earlier, the items for such folders were sorted by `id` regardless of the sort parameter value.
  Currently, they are sorted based on the `sort` parameter.

  ## New place to get support

  From now on you can ask questions and seek for guidance in our new [Box Developer Community forum][3]. Use this new space to directly speak to the Box Developer Relations team, as well as your peers and other subject matter experts from Box.

  [1]: /reference/get-folders-id-items

  [2]: /reference/get-folders-id-items#param-sort

  [3]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-27">
  ## Box UI Elements v18.0.0 released

  ### [18.0.0][1] (2023-06-27)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **ci:** remove blank space from release script var  ([#3355][2]) ([`2553ec1`][3])
  * **content-explorer:** increase grid button style specificity ([#3328][4]) ([`b2c878a`][5])
  * **content-explorer:** map called on undefined object ([#3341][6]) ([`da6ada0`][7])
  * **content-picker:** trim name input when creating folder ([#3364][8]) ([`4629726`][9])
  * **css:** remove IE7 CSS hack to fix Parcel support ([#3368][10]) ([`cbff7f1`][11])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3323][12]) ([`c810383`][13])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3344][14]) ([`755d64b`][15])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3349][16]) ([`6ba9f27`][17])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3351][18]) ([`4ff75e8`][19])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3352][20]) ([`80c795a`][21])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3359][22]) ([`c94305c`][23])
  * **preview:** update thumbnail sidebar width ([#3363][24]) ([`33c8236`][25])
  * **sharing:** remove message for shared links for Canvas files ([#3337][26]) ([`9558474`][27])
  * align viewer permissions for shared links ([#3335][28]) ([`5d78c11`][29])
  * update dist path and react version for elements test pages ([#3350][30]) ([`38ff124`][31])
  * **pill-selector-dropdown:** pass `showAvatars` prop to `RoundPill` ([#3329][32]) ([`5632743`][33])
  * **share-form:** map called on undefined object ([#3340][34]) ([`a24abb2`][35])
  * **usm:** fix message for upgrade notice in share modal ([#3334][36]) ([`4a945ce`][37])

  ### chore

  * **deps:** Bump `react-beautiful-dnd` to version 11.0.5 ([#3345][38]) ([`610c9d2`][39])
  * **node:** Upgrade to node 18 ([#3347][40]) ([`cbb3840`][41])

  ### Features

  * **cloud-game:** Adjust cloud game visual ([#3361][42]) ([`fe7fb51`][43])
  * **pill-selector-dropdown:** allow setting error tooltip position ([#3330][44]) ([`8df1551`][45])
  * **preview:** update default Preview SDK version ([#3366][46]) ([`aa7a875`][47])
  * **security-controls:** Remove watermark learn more link ([#3353][48]) ([`379d055`][49])
  * **threaded-replies:** reply to annotations ([#3331][50]) ([`4f65525`][51])
  * **uaa-integration:** Integrate UAA into `ActivitySidebar` ([#3316][52]) ([`b81e976`][53])

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * **deps:** You need to upgrade `react-beautiful-dnd` in the consuming project to version 11.0.5

  * **node:** Upgrade to node 18

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v17.1.0...v18.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3355

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2553ec1

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3328

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b2c878a

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3341

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/da6ada0

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3364

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4629726

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3368

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cbff7f1

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3323

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c810383

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3344

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/755d64b

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3349

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6ba9f27

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3351

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4ff75e8

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3352

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/80c795a

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3359

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c94305c

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3363

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/33c8236

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3337

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9558474

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3335

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5d78c11

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3350

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/38ff124

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3329

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5632743

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3340

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a24abb2

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3334

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4a945ce

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3345

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/610c9d2

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3347

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cbb3840

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3361

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fe7fb51

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3330

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8df1551

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3366

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/aa7a875

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3353

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/379d055

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3331

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4f65525

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3316

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b81e976

  [54]: https://github.com/users
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-26">
  ## Integration mappings for Slack

  Learn how the Box Enterprise Admin (EA) can customize the upload folder of the Slack channel to any folder
  within the enterprise instead of relying on the default one with the [Integration Mappings for Slack][1] guide.

  Use Box API to [create][2], [list][3], [update][4], and [delete][5] the Slack Integration Mappings.

  Using the [automation script][9], an admin can create or update multiple mappings at once!

  Check the [Troubleshooting][6] section to find out solutions to most common issues you can encounter.

  ## New place to get support

  From now on you can ask questions and seek for guidance in our new [Box Developer Community forum][8]. Use this new space to directly speak to the Box Developer Relations team, as well as your peers and other subject matter experts from Box.

  [1]: /guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings

  [2]: /reference/post-integration-mappings-slack

  [3]: /reference/get-integration-mappings-slack

  [4]: /reference/update-integration-mappings-slack

  [5]: /reference/delete-integration-mappings-slack

  [6]: /guides/integration-mappings/slack-mappings/troubleshooting

  [7]: /reference/resources/integration-mapping/

  [8]: https://forum.box.com/

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples/Integration%20Mappings
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-21">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Getting collaborators allows to specify fields ([#1178][1]) ([`1694d75`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1178

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/1694d75fff0fbddb938426ef03ba24f360a344aa
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-15">
  ## Enhanced passwords for Shared Links

  We have enhanced our password policy for creating shared links with Box API, for example when [adding a shared link to a file][1].
  Passwords must now be at least eight characters long and include:

  * a number,
  * upper case letter, or
  * non-alphabetic or non-numeric character

  ## New place to get support

  From now on you can ask questions and seek for guidance in our new [Box Developer Community forum][2]. Use this new space to  directly speak to the Box Developer Relations team, as well as your peers and other subject matter experts from Box.

  [1]: /reference/put-files-id--add-shared-link#param-shared_link-password

  [2]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-14">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.1.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Class cast exception when uploading large file ([#1174][1]) ([`e7d28bd`][2]), closes [#1173][3]
  * Make `SharedLinkAPIConnection` constructors public ([#1172][4]) ([`4d1616d`][5])
  * Remove not valid Group membership role ([#1171][6]) ([`a5915f9`][7])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1174

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e7d28bddb706c8b4fd1328f0eebc50db19a8c656

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1173

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1172

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/4d1616ddd2c39d1cb0d03af998d2c47efe607853

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1171

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/a5915f94114a8269287831280a57949ed203e4e8
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-13">
  ## Join Box Developer Community

  Exciting news for developers and admins! Box has launched the Box Developer Community site, where you can connect with peers and experts to build innovative applications on top of the Box cloud content management and collaboration platform. Join us today at [https://forum.box.com](https://forum.box.com)!

  # Join, connect and learn

  * Get support and provide feedback
  * Share knowledge and become a community leader
  * Connect and chat with other Box developers and admins
  * Learn from other community members and Box subject matter experts
  * Stay up to date with the newest features, updates, developer-focused events, blog posts, and more!

  ## New place to get support

  From now on you can ask questions and seek for guidance in our new [Box Developer Community forum][1]. Use this new space to  directly speak to the Box Developer Relations team, as well as your peers and other subject matter experts from Box.

  [1]: https://forum.box.com/
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-02">
  ## Box CLI v3.9.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `max-items`, improve list endpoints performance ([#470][1]) ([`8f386f3`][2])
  * Add support for Integration Mappings API ([#472][3]) ([`bbf2548`][4])
  * New fields in `retention-policy` and `retention-policy-assignment` ([#466][5]) ([`f960e59`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/470

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/8f386f3b7c4ff4efbaa941321fd672694ce3c7a1

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/472

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/bbf2548223e0d07ce2412c04991e7d8f00022fa7

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/466

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f960e59aaf55fe0a0507e9f4c9d867e7c3dd039a
</Update>

<Update label="2023-06-01">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support for integration mappings API ([#831][1]) ([`a525327`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Correct types of `userId` and `groupId` for creating collaboration ([#833][3]) ([`f803ff8`][4]), closes [#832][5]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/831

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/a525327c1362628a0ffdb36cb4bf3346ca0e0153

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/833

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/f803ff82330fd78a8dc4875452a21aab54686b2e

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/832
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-26">
  ## UI Elements in Box for Salesforce managed package

  With the [Box for Salesforce][1] managed package you can use the following [UI Elements][2] as Lightning Components: [content picker][3], [explorer][4], [preview][5], and [uploader][6]. You can use them on Lightning Pages, or in Flows.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][7] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/

  [2]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/

  [3]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/picker/

  [4]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/explorer

  [5]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/preview

  [6]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/uploader

  [7]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-26">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.7.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Use the older version of `urllib3` ([#815][1]) ([`ee29aa3`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/815

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/ee29aa3fcf9ac71e9866913a87414cf625c0b805
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-24">
  ## Integration mappings API

  With [integration mappings][1], you can manage where content from partner apps is stored in Box.

  This feature currently only supports [Box as Content layer for Slack][2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/resources/integration-mappings

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4415585987859-Box-as-the-Content-Layer-for-Slack

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-23">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.2.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * catch exception when .net core version cannot be determined ([#906][1]) ([`e3be209`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.2.2>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.2.2>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.2.2>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.2.2>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/906

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/e3be209b20a5c323f547d7634663883613959180
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-23" description="Box Node SDK v3.0.0 released">
  ## Box Node SDK v3.0.0 released

  ### Breaking Changes

  The most important change in this release is **dropping support for Node versions below 12** and changing the **support environments from Node 12 to Node 16**.

  * Removed `use_index` usage. ([#812](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/812)) ([`d56799a`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/d56799a61f42265d7785f99e92a449c58d125aef))
  * Removed deprecated `BoxClient.batch()` and `BoxClient.batchExec()` method.
  * Removed deprecated `CollaborationWhitelist` class, use `CollaborationAllowlist` instead.
  * Removed deprecated `CollaborationAllowlist.getWhitelistedDomain()` method, use `CollaborationAllowlist.getAllowlistedDomain()` instead.
  * Removed deprecated `CollaborationAllowlist.getAllWhitelistedDomains()` method, use `CollaborationAllowlist.getAllAllowlistedDomains()` instead.
  * Remove deprecated `Files.getThumbnail(fileID: string, options?: Record<string, any>, callback?: Function)` method, use `Files.getRepresentationContent( fileID, representationType, options, callback)` instead.

  Migration details can be found [here](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/blob/v3.0.0/docs/upgrade/2.x.x%20to%203.x.x.md)

  ### Dependency Upgrades

  * Bumped `jsonwebtoken` from 8.5.1 to 9.0.0. ([#802](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/802)) ([`5b1d4e9`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/828/commits/5b1d4e9ec557c14c1d27695733cc0bcae49061cb))
  * Bumped `vm2` from 3.9.11 to 3.9.19 ([#826](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/826)) ([`220df76`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/220df765080bc27c91daed51ac46620f6bc8b9ed))
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-16">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.1.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow users to disable adding authentication header. ([#1167][1]) ([`3433e5a`][2])
  * Logging headers when retrying request ([#1164][3]) ([`e0c3d8e`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1167

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3433e5a405ceb9bc32791642518b1fd65c4b4032

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1164

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e0c3d8e730962ba5c97105ce506ee931a3bba362
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-11">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.10.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support for ethical wall API ([#822][1]) ([`4814af3`][2])
  * Added `name` and `signature_color` fields to `SignRequest` and `SignRequestCreateRequest` types and `login_required` field to `SignRequestCreateSigner` type ([#822][1]) ([`4814af3`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/822

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/4814af35c1741fbfe3fa03f8f0412ade8b38dfcc
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-10">
  ## Box UI Elements v17.1.0 released

  ### [17.1.0][1] (2023-05-10)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **content-explorer:** select all checkbox in empty folder ([#3324][2]) ([`a193adb`][3])
  * **content-explorer:** select all checkbox state matches `selectedItems` ([#3319][4]) ([`7473dfd`][5])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3313][6]) ([`dd9a1fd`][7])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3317][8]) ([`95618cf`][9])
  * **pill-selector-dropdown:** remove default value for `isPositionDynamic` ([#3320][10]) ([`e74f824`][11])
  * **preview:** videos not loading on edge ([#3326][12]) ([`e5aa7e5`][13])
  * **usm:** make item prop optional ([#3322][14]) ([`fe7c4bb`][15])

  ### Features

  * **sharing:** Change message for shared links for Canvas files ([#3315][16]) ([`fa17afd`][17])
  * **sharing:** Change message for shared links for Canvas files ([#3318][18]) ([`60a3a6e`][19])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v17.0.0...v17.1.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3324

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a193adb

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3319

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7473dfd

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3313

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dd9a1fd

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3317

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/95618cf

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3320

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e74f824

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3326

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e5aa7e5

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3322

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fe7c4bb

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3315

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fa17afd

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3318

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/60a3a6e
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-10">
  ## Box Sign template APIs

  The new Box Sign template APIs allow you to [get a list of Box Sign templates][1] or details of a
  [specific Box Sign template][2].
  You can then use this information to initiate template-based sign requests.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, post a request to
  our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/get-sign-templates

  [2]: /reference/get-sign-templates-id

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-05-26">
  ## Updates to File Upload API

  In response to a potential security vulnerability while uploading a file using [Upload File API][1] and downscoped token,
  we’re updating the Upload File API to return a 404 error in scenarios where the parent Folder ID is found, but the requester does not have permissions to access it.

  # Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/uploads/direct

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-24">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add missing `fields` parameter to create and update `BoxUser` methods ([#1155][1]) ([`be3820d`][2]), closes [#1154][3]

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow registering custom logger handlers ([#1156][4]) ([`7373d5c`][5])
  * Fallback to default value of `maxRetryAttempts` when restoring `BoxAPIConnection` ([#1161][6]) ([`2a10e5d`][7]), closes [#1160][8]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1155

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/be3820dc4df15e99dfc13602d4f7269841bd15b3

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1154

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1156

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/7373d5cc2bf49bc198cbca70d056e43f0dffdb3a

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1161

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/2a10e5d07497611e077a9207fe98c1d8146cfd22

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1160
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-20">
  ## Box UI Elements v17.0.0 released

  ### [17.0.0][1] (2023-04-20)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **aci-toggle:** info badge vertical alignment ([#3290][2]) ([`f73b9f9`][3])
  * **avatar:** Add `aria-label` to external user icon ([#3263][4]) ([`18cdf3f`][5])
  * **collaborator-list-item:** remove redundant titles ([#3255][6]) ([`d805249`][7])
  * **content-explorer:** add arrow navigation ([#3219][8]) ([`35bf8de`][9])
  * **content-explorer:** Add `svg` titles to icons ([#3227][10]) ([`506ca45`][11])
  * **content-explorer:** change color of folder tree breadcrumbs text ([#3268][12]) ([`fc95d4d`][13])
  * **content-explorer:** enable create folder with trailing space in name ([#3246][14]) ([`e0b03c7`][15])
  * **content-explorer:** Fix color contrast issue for item details ([#3273][16]) ([`4db0231`][17])
  * **content-explorer:** Fix color contrast issues ([#3221][18]) ([`b7ecaab`][19])
  * **content-explorer:** fix item list column header role ([#3232][20]) ([`718a71a`][21])
  * **content-explorer:** focus border on selected item row buttons ([#3314][22]) ([`a596557`][23])
  * **content-explorer:** hide instead of deactivate breadcrumbs ([#3260][24]) ([`5b5fec1`][25])
  * **content-explorer:** Include subfolders sub-header fix ([#3259][26]) ([`6ec1512`][27])
  * **content-explorer:** status message for include subfolders ([#3261][28]) ([`3ce688d`][29])
  * **content-explorer:** Update Share button border on selected row ([#3278][30]) ([`28c79dd`][31])
  * **content-picker:** add `disabled` attribute ([#3243][32]) ([`a88a96c`][33])
  * **content-sharing:** removed API condition when constructing API ([#3251][34]) ([`24dcba2`][35])
  * **content-uploader:** make deactivated buttons unfocusable ([#3248][36]) ([`2302712`][37])
  * **flyout:** increase flyout overlay CSS specificity ([#3257][38]) ([`0933062`][39])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3250][40]) ([`d84d1ca`][41])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3276][42]) ([`018a99c`][43])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3285][44]) ([`bfbcf55`][45])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3300][46]) ([`88116cb`][47])
  * **itemlist:** Remove header section when list is empty ([#3224][48]) ([`0274618`][49])
  * **makeselectable:** Prevent arrow hotkeys on slider ([#3299][50]) ([`a893e5a`][51])
  * **metadata:** fix template drop-down truncation issue ([#3265][52]) ([`c3ae099`][53])
  * **select-field:** Add bottom margin when drop-down has top placement ([#3302][54]) ([`11e6979`][55])
  * **select-field:** add tether class for select drop-downs ([#3303][56]) ([`ce27f70`][57])
  * **selector-dropdown:** add dynamic positioning to the drop-down overlay ([#3262][58]) ([`7f05653`][59])
  * **usm:** Order person before icon in collaborator list DOM ([#3306][60]) ([`32c656d`][61])
  * add props to omit to avoid console warnings ([#3286][62]) ([`11328fb`][63])
  * Align menu options in BE sort button ([#3231][64]) ([`dcc06e2`][65])
  * Fix `aria-label` for BE header search ([#3244][66]) ([`ca01965`][67])
  * Replace `bdl-gray-62` for USM and Shared Link components ([#3289][68]) ([`1f25b98`][69])
  * **makeselectable:** shift and arrow selects first row ([#3223][70]) ([`9b209e5`][71])
  * **scss:** Replace all division for dart-sass ([#3253][72]) ([`ac92e21`][73])
  * **shared-link-section:** accessibility tooltip ([#3216][74]) ([`4ecdd81`][75])
  * **sub-header:** sort menu item accessibility ([#3230][76]) ([`20f4454`][77])
  * **sub-header:** update sort to use select component and update tests ([#3239][78]) ([`528a157`][79])
  * **toggle:** add switch role ([#3254][80]) ([`cf0c894`][81])
  * **tooltip:** Deactivate `aria-describedby` when `ariaHidden` is `true` ([#3233][82]) ([`d9108c4`][83])
  * **tooltip:** tooltip should be dialog ([#3226][84])" ([#3264][85]) ([`fa68dd6`][86])
  * **usm:** Remove `aria-label` and add `aria-haspopup` ([#3281][87]) ([`fd1a82d`][88])
  * **usm:** Removing redundant button element ([#3282][89]) ([`a7005ff`][90])
  * change type of buttons in Content Sharing from 'submit' to 'button' ([#3277][91]) ([`26b7e5f`][92])
  * Improve color contrast for input borders ([#3234][93]) ([`3917bee`][94])
  * Improve color contrast for placeholder text ([#3228][95]) ([`1f7b9f9`][96])
  * Update `box-shadow` for inputs ([#3236][97]) ([`07cc347`][98])
  * **assets:** Use correct icons after icons were renamed ([#3138][99]) ([`2c80164`][100])
  * **content-explorer:** add `aria-label` for `MoreOptions` button ([#3197][101]) ([`f4b69f0`][102])
  * **content-explorer:** add `aria-label` to grid slider ([#3189][103]) ([`e3900b3`][104])
  * **content-explorer:** create default shared link when none exists ([#3209][105]) ([`5d05a2b`][106])
  * **content-explorer:** Pass all props from `modalContainer` to `Modal` ([#3104][107]) ([`5d5b314`][108])
  * **content-explorer:** Remove props from `styleguidist` examples ([#3146][109]) ([`1f0809b`][110])
  * **content-picker:** add accessible names to Footer ([#3177][111]) ([`bd8e1e6`][112])
  * **content-sidebar:** reply operations interactions ([#3103][113]) ([`9400f5a`][114])
  * **content-sidebar:** reply operations interactions ([#3123][115]) ([`8d2c3f1`][116])
  * **content-sidebar:** select and hover state for threaded feed items ([#3173][117]) ([`a7dc6a9`][118])
  * **content-uploader:** fix `UploadInput` keyboard accessibility ([#3205][119]) ([`e918b5f`][120])
  * **dropdown-menu:** fix positioning for responsive drop-down menu ([#3149][121]) ([`729f6f1`][122])
  * **grid-view:** unhide focus outline for grid view slider ([#3212][123]) ([`b35e977`][124])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3105][125]) ([`b8521e4`][126])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3111][127]) ([`29fc19c`][128])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3121][129]) ([`16bc077`][130])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3130][131]) ([`8ca714b`][132])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3135][133]) ([`53c0370`][134])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3137][135]) ([`7fe32a6`][136])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3139][137]) ([`82f414d`][138])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3150][139]) ([`d428a43`][140])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3158][141]) ([`02eb624`][142])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3159][143]) ([`6df6f0d`][144])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3174][145]) ([`0e9ea9d`][146])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3183][147]) ([`c32bbae`][148])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3199][149]) ([`eb1acee`][150])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3207][151]) ([`d9d571d`][152])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3213][153]) ([`64364c3`][154])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3220][155]) ([`39739ab`][156])
  * **i18n:** update translations ([#3222][157]) ([`429c856`][158])
  * **item-action:** add `aria-label` to `PlainButton` ([#3180][159]) ([`2553713`][160])
  * **item-remove:** add `aria-label` ([#3181][161]) ([`0fce635`][162])
  * **menu:** fix long title in menu header ([#3125][163]) ([`79420f2`][164])
  * **modal:** Modal header for long file names was displaying incorrectly ([#3108][165]) ([`d8321aa`][166])
  * **react-virtualized:** Bumped `react-virtualized` ([#3160][167]) ([`b256b07`][168])
  * **react-virtualized:** remove duplicate `a11y` label ([#3204][169]) ([`c67a4dd`][170])
  * **react-virtualized:** Remove role for `Table_Grid_innerScrollContainer` ([#3218][171]) ([`cabb4a8`][172])
  * **replies:** fix `total_replies_count` value update after delete reply ([#3147][173]) ([`8f75827`][174])
  * **sharedlinksettings:** fix expiration timestamp ([#3179][175]) ([`1a698c5`][176])
  * **sub-header:** add accessibility label to `SortButton` ([#3178][177]) ([`ba66a34`][178])
  * **threaded-replies:** deactivate reply button for pending status ([#3186][179]) ([`efbc532`][180])
  * **threaded-replies:** fix styling for replies ([#3110][181]) ([`f78e36b`][182])
  * **tooltips:** Error tooltips were being truncated on smaller screens ([#3107][183]) ([`7e12d88`][184])
  * **usm:** add `aria label` ([#3191][185]) ([`f1f5c81`][186])
  * **usm:** add `aria-label` to expiration icon ([#3193][187]) ([`af3c567`][188])
  * **usm:** add `aria-label` to tooltip close button ([#3211][189]) ([`529bf10`][190])
  * **usm:** add role `img` to shared link expiration tooltip icon ([#3195][191]) ([`a79e193`][192])
  * **usm:** tooltip should be dialog ([#3226][84]) ([`f52ad0e`][193])
  * remove warning when passing `initialSelectedItems` to `ContentExplorer` ([#3151][194]) ([`bf3256a`][195])

  ### Code Refactoring

  * deprecate `bdl-gray-62` color ([#3312][196]) ([`93720ce`][197])

  ### Features

  * **aci-toggle:** add separate prop for description ([#3307][198]) ([`cadab1d`][199])
  * **aci-toggle:** UI adjustments ([#3297][200]) ([`84f9abb`][201])
  * **annotation:** Add icon indicator for `AnnotationActivity` ([#3176][202]) ([`f773aa3`][203])
  * **annotation-activity:** hide `AnnotationActivityLink` ([#3089][204]) ([`dc3642e`][205])
  * **annotation-thread:** added reply form, UI and other minor fixes ([#3157][206]) ([`55ca058`][207])
  * **annotation-thread:** Annotation thread comments visual fixes ([#3128][208]) ([`fac5133`][209])
  * **annotation-thread:** annotation thread events handling ([#3196][210]) ([`1c07b41`][211])
  * **annotation-thread:** annotation thread related hooks refactoring ([#3192][212]) ([`0168f1a`][213])
  * **annotation-thread:** annotation thread replies events handling ([#3201][214]) ([`3df222a`][215])
  * **annotation-thread:** introduce `useAnnotationThread` and handle `useAnnotatorEvents` ([#3097][216]) ([`a8d1985`][217])
  * **annotation-thread:** use of event emitter and hooks refactoring ([#3184][218]) ([`cfed356`][219])
  * **annotations:** hide `AnnotationActivityLink` based on `hasVersions` prop ([#3132][220]) ([`3469413`][221])
  * **assets:** update cancellation flow assets ([#3117][222]) ([`42e1122`][223])
  * **checkbox:** allow `stopPropagation` on `onClick` events ([#3122][224]) ([`9c25858`][225])
  * **checkbox:** make focus behavior configurable ([#3214][226]) ([`18b8ea6`][227])
  * **checkbox:** prop to add class to input ([#3194][228]) ([`e0cc12d`][229])
  * **checkbox:** revert allow `stopPropagation` on `onClick` events ([#3127][230]) ([`e37de34`][231]), closes [#3122][224]
  * **cloud-game:** Add accessibility to security cloud game ([#3086][232]) ([`684e9f6`][233])
  * **collapsible-sidebar:** add prop to hide Box logo ([#3256][234]) ([`43279c0`][235])
  * **collapsible-sidebar:** add `wrapperClassName` prop ([#3295][236]) ([`2cde065`][237])
  * **content-explorer:** adding folder tree ([#3240][238]) ([`03b0dea`][239])
  * **content-explorer:** Allow selecting empty selection in `ContentExplorer` ([#3175][240]) ([`fead6e4`][241])
  * **content-explorer:** clickable status message for include subfolders ([#3266][242]) ([`3d8eaf8`][243])
  * **content-explorer:** include subfolders toggle ([#3242][244]) ([`b75c7ee`][245])
  * **content-sidebar:** add on fetch file callback function ([#3118][246]) ([`5373031`][247])
  * **content-sidebar:** added support for active comment reply ([#3134][248]) ([`3ef81e1`][249])
  * **content-sidebar:** hide "edited" for resolved comment/annotation ([#3152][250]) ([`07f5fc7`][251])
  * **content-sidebar:** select and hover state for threaded feed items ([#3162][252]) ([`a6c125d`][253])
  * **input-with-copy:** add node for settings button ([#3267][254]) ([`719b31f`][255])
  * **insights:** Added support for Advanced Content Insights ([#3116][256]) ([`a66ec89`][257])
  * **left-nav:** Update medium width in `\_sizes.media.scss` ([#3131][258]) ([`aaf112d`][259])
  * **list-view:** List View item hover state changes ([#3115][260]) ([`103a5d1`][261])
  * **make-selectable:** Add select click functionality to on checkbox click ([#3112][262]) ([`ffc2e33`][263])
  * **make-selectable:** expose `selectToggle` function ([#3109][264]) ([`8d9fb90`][265])
  * **mediaquery:** add `isTouchScreen` logic ([#3269][266]) ([`3e80a06`][267])
  * **modal:** add callback to check permission on shared link load ([#3188][268]) ([`2b316db`][269])
  * **preview:** add new sign drop-down under ff ([#3190][270]) ([`37e8a19`][271])
  * **threaded-replies:** Create `Replies` component ([#3288][272]) ([`006e33c`][273])
  * **threaded-replies:** Create `RepliesToggle` component ([#3294][274]) ([`92d0ddb`][275])
  * **threaded-replies:** Create `Reply` button component ([#3298][276]) ([`f9d4130`][277])
  * **threaded-replies:** Decouple `ActivityCard` from Comment ([#3279][278]) ([`7d1d3bf`][279])
  * **threaded-replies:** Implement Create Replies and Replies Toggle ([#3304][280]) ([`044a336`][281])
  * **threaded-replies:** Refactor Comment component to functional ([#3270][282]) ([`3900d1c`][283])
  * **threaded-replies:** Update activity filter to support more options ([#3280][284]) ([`76e4010`][285])
  * add `additionalColumns` prop to `ContentExplorerModalContainer` ([#3143][286]) ([`d4eea59`][287])
  * Add option to display header in `ContentExplorerModalContainer` ([#3144][288]) ([`5685142`][289])
  * Add optional tether props to `DropdownMenu` ([#3245][290]) ([`9db75e7`][291])
  * **threaded-replies:** fix styling for resolve ([#3129][292]) ([`b291c50`][293])
  * **threaded-replies:** keep replies visible when loading more replies ([#3133][294]) ([`295533c`][295])
  * **tooltip:** support error tooltip position ([#3187][296]) ([`941e990`][297])
  * add `rowHeight` prop to `ContentExplorerModal` ([#3140][298]) ([`476d739`][299])

  ### Reverts

  * "chore(answers): added foundation for content-answers element … ([#3249][300]) ([`56f58a5`][301]), closes [#3247][302]
  * **annotation-activity:** hide `AnnotationActivityLink` ([#3120][303]) ([`ba22807`][304]), closes [#3089][204]

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * `bdl-gray-62` is replaced with `bdl-gray-65`

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v16.0.0...v17.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3290

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f73b9f9

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3263

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/18cdf3f

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3255

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d805249

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3219

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/35bf8de

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3227

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/506ca45

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3268

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fc95d4d

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3246

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e0b03c7

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3273

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4db0231

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3221

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b7ecaab

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3232

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/718a71a

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3314

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a596557

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3260

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5b5fec1

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3259

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6ec1512

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3261

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3ce688d

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3278

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/28c79dd

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3243

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a88a96c

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3251

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/24dcba2

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3248

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2302712

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3257

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0933062

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3250

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d84d1ca

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3276

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/018a99c

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3285

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bfbcf55

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3300

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/88116cb

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3224

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0274618

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3299

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a893e5a

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3265

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c3ae099

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3302

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/11e6979

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3303

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ce27f70

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3262

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7f05653

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3306

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/32c656d

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3286

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/11328fb

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3231

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dcc06e2

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3244

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ca01965

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3289

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1f25b98

  [70]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3223

  [71]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9b209e5

  [72]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3253

  [73]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ac92e21

  [74]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3216

  [75]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4ecdd81

  [76]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3230

  [77]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/20f4454

  [78]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3239

  [79]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/528a157

  [80]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3254

  [81]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cf0c894

  [82]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3233

  [83]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d9108c4

  [84]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3226

  [85]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3264

  [86]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fa68dd6

  [87]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3281

  [88]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fd1a82d

  [89]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3282

  [90]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a7005ff

  [91]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3277

  [92]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/26b7e5f

  [93]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3234

  [94]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3917bee

  [95]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3228

  [96]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1f7b9f9

  [97]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3236

  [98]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/07cc347

  [99]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3138

  [100]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2c80164

  [101]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3197

  [102]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f4b69f0

  [103]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3189

  [104]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e3900b3

  [105]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3209

  [106]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5d05a2b

  [107]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3104

  [108]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5d5b314

  [109]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3146

  [110]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1f0809b

  [111]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3177

  [112]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bd8e1e6

  [113]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3103

  [114]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9400f5a

  [115]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3123

  [116]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8d2c3f1

  [117]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3173

  [118]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a7dc6a9

  [119]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3205

  [120]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e918b5f

  [121]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3149

  [122]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/729f6f1

  [123]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3212

  [124]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b35e977

  [125]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3105

  [126]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b8521e4

  [127]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3111

  [128]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/29fc19c

  [129]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3121

  [130]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/16bc077

  [131]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3130

  [132]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8ca714b

  [133]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3135

  [134]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/53c0370

  [135]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3137

  [136]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7fe32a6

  [137]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3139

  [138]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/82f414d

  [139]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3150

  [140]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d428a43

  [141]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3158

  [142]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/02eb624

  [143]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3159

  [144]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6df6f0d

  [145]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3174

  [146]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0e9ea9d

  [147]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3183

  [148]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c32bbae

  [149]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3199

  [150]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/eb1acee

  [151]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3207

  [152]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d9d571d

  [153]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3213

  [154]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/64364c3

  [155]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3220

  [156]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/39739ab

  [157]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3222

  [158]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/429c856

  [159]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3180

  [160]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2553713

  [161]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3181

  [162]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0fce635

  [163]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3125

  [164]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/79420f2

  [165]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3108

  [166]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d8321aa

  [167]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3160

  [168]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b256b07

  [169]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3204

  [170]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c67a4dd

  [171]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3218

  [172]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cabb4a8

  [173]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3147

  [174]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8f75827

  [175]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3179

  [176]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1a698c5

  [177]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3178

  [178]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ba66a34

  [179]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3186

  [180]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/efbc532

  [181]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3110

  [182]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f78e36b

  [183]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3107

  [184]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7e12d88

  [185]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3191

  [186]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f1f5c81

  [187]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3193

  [188]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/af3c567

  [189]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3211

  [190]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/529bf10

  [191]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3195

  [192]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a79e193

  [193]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f52ad0e

  [194]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3151

  [195]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bf3256a

  [196]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3312

  [197]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/93720ce

  [198]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3307

  [199]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cadab1d

  [200]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3297

  [201]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/84f9abb

  [202]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3176

  [203]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f773aa3

  [204]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3089

  [205]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dc3642e

  [206]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3157

  [207]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/55ca058

  [208]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3128

  [209]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fac5133

  [210]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3196

  [211]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1c07b41

  [212]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3192

  [213]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0168f1a

  [214]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3201

  [215]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3df222a

  [216]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3097

  [217]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a8d1985

  [218]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3184

  [219]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cfed356

  [220]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3132

  [221]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3469413

  [222]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3117

  [223]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/42e1122

  [224]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3122

  [225]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9c25858

  [226]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3214

  [227]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/18b8ea6

  [228]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3194

  [229]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e0cc12d

  [230]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3127

  [231]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e37de34

  [232]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3086

  [233]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/684e9f6

  [234]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3256

  [235]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/43279c0

  [236]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3295

  [237]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2cde065

  [238]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3240

  [239]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/03b0dea

  [240]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3175

  [241]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fead6e4

  [242]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3266

  [243]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3d8eaf8

  [244]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3242

  [245]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b75c7ee

  [246]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3118

  [247]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5373031

  [248]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3134

  [249]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3ef81e1

  [250]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3152

  [251]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/07f5fc7

  [252]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3162

  [253]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a6c125d

  [254]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3267

  [255]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/719b31f

  [256]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3116

  [257]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a66ec89

  [258]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3131

  [259]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/aaf112d

  [260]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3115

  [261]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/103a5d1

  [262]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3112

  [263]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ffc2e33

  [264]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3109

  [265]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8d9fb90

  [266]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3269

  [267]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3e80a06

  [268]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3188

  [269]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2b316db

  [270]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3190

  [271]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/37e8a19

  [272]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3288

  [273]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/006e33c

  [274]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3294

  [275]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/92d0ddb

  [276]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3298

  [277]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f9d4130

  [278]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3279

  [279]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7d1d3bf

  [280]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3304

  [281]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/044a336

  [282]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3270

  [283]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3900d1c

  [284]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3280

  [285]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/76e4010

  [286]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3143

  [287]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d4eea59

  [288]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3144

  [289]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5685142

  [290]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3245

  [291]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9db75e7

  [292]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3129

  [293]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b291c50

  [294]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3133

  [295]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/295533c

  [296]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3187

  [297]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/941e990

  [298]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3140

  [299]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/476d739

  [300]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3249

  [301]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/56f58a5

  [302]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3247

  [303]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/3120

  [304]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ba22807
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-20">
  ## Updates to Box Embed guide

  With [Box Embed][1] you can embed a Box webapp anywhere in your application. The updated webapp is responsive to any changes. For example, if an integration makes the embedded Box webapp smaller, all the UI components such as buttons and lists will also be resized to still be usable.

  The update also includes a description of the cloud game, a widget which increases security by preventing clickjacking.

  # Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/embed/box-embed/

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-19">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.9.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * New fields in `retention-policy` and `retention-policy-assignment` ([#803][1]) ([`f14ba84`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * return empty object when `tos` status is not present ([#797][3]) ([`12fd9b0`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/803

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/f14ba84013985513854ad396581d085d1d4f0255

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/797

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/12fd9b053707471722f53cd1760c8cf59451fe8d
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-19">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.4.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * An empty string `nextMarker` should be treated as end-of-paging. ([#893][1]) ([`49c17de`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/893

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/49c17de588fcffcd2d151ce9047ebc09965f80ce
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-18">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.2.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Catch all exceptions when getting User Agent header ([#901][1]) ([`75d8874`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.2.1>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.2.1>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.2.1>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.2.1>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/901

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/75d887470698a5f312610cebd58be58aee7eaa9b
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-18">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.7.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Rename filter date parameters in legal hold creation according to the documentation ([#810][1]) ([`f52c66a`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/810

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/f52c66a8a8399a776493537f692460ace2995e40
</Update>

<Update label="2023-04-17">
  ## Add more details to Custom Apps

  To clarify [Custom Apps][1]' purpose and add the value for the enterprise, we now offer a possibility of describing the Custom App in a more granular way.

  When setting up a Custom App with [OAuth][2], [JWT][3] or [Client Credentials][4], you can now specify the purpose of the app and the app's creator.
  Additionally, if you intend to integrate your app with an external system, you can define the integration category and provide details of the external system.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/applications/app-types/platform-apps

  [2]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup

  [3]: /guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup

  [4]: /guides/authentication/client-credentials/client-credentials-setup

  [5]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-03-28">
  ## Collaborations API - pending status

  We added more information about the `pending` status in our [collaborations API][1].

  If the collaboration is in [`pending` status][2]:

  * login and name return an empty string,
  * the following fields are redacted:
    * `login` and `name` are hidden if a collaboration was created using `user_id`,
    * `name` is hidden if a collaboration was created using `login`.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/resources/collaboration

  [2]: /reference/post-collaborations

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-03-14">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `Id` to `MetadataTemplateField` ([#890][1]) ([`b7fe214`][2])
  * add `start_date_field` and `description` to retention policies ([#888][3]) ([`100b722`][4])
  * add configurable `JWTAudience` claim ([#897][5]) ([`50219fd`][6])
  * add shared link support to `GetFolderItemsAsync` ([#892][7]) ([`0eba85c`][8])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Use fixed value of `aud` field in `JWT` claim ([#896][9]) ([`8c9982d`][10])

  * add `Id` to `MetadataTemplateField` ([#890][1]) ([`b7fe214`][2])

  * add `start_date_field` and `description` to retention policies ([#888][3]) ([`100b722`][4])

  * add configurable `JWTAudience` claim ([#897][5]) ([`50219fd`][6])

  * add shared link support to `GetFolderItemsAsync` ([#892][7]) ([`0eba85c`][8])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.2.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.2.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.2.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.2.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/890

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/b7fe2149e1a0ade8573b497b7bb36e9f3c4f4a82

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/888

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/100b722ce4909395c00b527677564f37a61ec2cb

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/897

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/50219fdfd553d6335b6f0b4341719b09680c4ba0

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/892

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/0eba85c693763472c51fe81cbc43222305e9eefb

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/896

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/8c9982d160ec4806c796ee2621b1811232ea59c1
</Update>

<Update label="2023-03-08">
  ## Downloading ZIP Archives with Box API

  A recently released [guide][1] helps you to download large amount of data.
  Use Box API to [create][2] and [download][3] ZIP archives containing files, folders, or both.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/downloads/zip-archive

  [2]: /reference/post-zip-downloads

  [3]: /reference/get-zip-downloads-id-content

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-03-08">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add new optional fields for `retention_policies` and `retention_policy_assignments` ([#803][1]) ([`8b72f7e`][2])
  * Use multiple threading for chunked upload ([#800][3]) ([`506ce0d`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/803

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/8b72f7e992bce676723a40ac12bde06c8cca3bfb

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/800

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/506ce0d1e72ab4eeb6c5933a32c753e232a2f624
</Update>

<Update label="2023-03-06">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.0.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `OAUTH_SUFFIX` gets appended twice to `baseAuthorizationURL` ([#1148][1]) ([`3164770`][2]), closes [#1147][3]
  * Wrong progress reported to `ProgressListener` by `AbstractBoxMultipartRequest` ([#1151][4]) ([`947ded3`][5]), closes [#1149][6]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1148

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3164770498e5115a43318640735317a896950f54

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1147

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1151

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/947ded394490fc840b8191bc7ad69ae0ea5f5c7d

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1149
</Update>

<Update label="2023-03-03">
  ## Box CLI v3.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add alias for metadata cascade policy create ([#460][1]) ([`8d2f683`][2])
  * Add support for `--reauthorize` flag in login command ([#457][3]) ([`f653a0d`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `keychain` access by bumping `keychain` library to `1.4.0` ([#459][5]) ([`56919ce`][6])
  * Fix unit tests ([#456][7]) ([`f89d9ef`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/460

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/8d2f683e092c036efe352e6fd70904083ad7c208

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/457

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f653a0d526c7194f0a5e80dc837f0f16a9d4f27b

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/459

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/56919cefabef6de4d96a1f69f7c80740a680876c

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/456

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f89d9ef5c3c4e7bf00c0be40f128428b1e7e6983
</Update>

<Update label="2023-02-24">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.4.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `listAssignments` and `assign` methods in `RetentionPolicyModule` ([#886][1]) ([`b668888`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/886

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/b668888f35136dd1239526b70cc31a10bdd04744
</Update>

<Update label="2023-02-24">
  ## Announcing End of Support for Android SDK on May 31st

  As of May 31, 2023 [Android SDK][1] will no longer be supported. You can still use your existing Android SDK applications with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.
  If you would like to continue getting the latest and greatest Android features, we recommend using Java SDK to build apps on Android. Refer to [this][2] documentation for more details.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-android-sdk

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/main/doc/android.md

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-02-23">
  ## Box Sign updates

  ## Multiple documents in one request

  The Box Sign [multiple documents][1] in one request is now
  supported in our [public API][2].

  ## Signer attachments

  The [signer attachments][3] feature allows users to request
  additional files from signers in a file attachment field.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/10302887198227-Multiple-documents-in-a-signature-request

  [2]: /reference/post-sign-requests

  [3]: /reference/resources/sign-request#param-signers-inputs-content_type

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-02-08">
  ## The Sample Code Catalog released

  We are happy to announce that [the Sample Code Catalog](https://developer.box.com/sample-code/) `v1.0.0`
  is now available on our Box Developer site. From now on you can browse
  code samples in various programming languages and filter them by category.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-02-07">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.6.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Retry `Connection broken` and `Connection reset` requests errors ([#794][1]) ([`f1a0aa4`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/794

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/f1a0aa434369f06e80654a9f5c4b796100881aa6
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-19">
  ## Box CLI v3.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add more flags for folder update collaborators ([#438][1]) ([`83ac6d7`][2])
  * Add support session termination ([#446][3]) ([`aef15a8`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix delete token cache from disk ([#445][5]) ([`aafb68a`][6])
  * Fix metadata template update when adding multiple options to enum ([#442][7]) ([`8779eec`][8])
  * single file upload on Node 16 ([#441][9]) ([`d94ab35`][10])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/438

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/83ac6d7c8eeb7f3dc8562c8132cade4f5af80ee1

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/446

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/aef15a8d2c7ee904db320d879deb6ebf0f934d22

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/445

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/aafb68ae38a8280bd97cf978042a8df5b71b2f52

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/442

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/8779eecf24bda5b093bc891f5097879e1876b601

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/441

  [10]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/d94ab35a38938daf4edbbd134774a3809facecbd
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-18">
  ## Box Java SDK v4.0.0 released

  The most important change this release includes is the replacement of the HTTP library from a native one to
  [OkHttp][1] which allows SDK to

  * Support the HTTP2 version of the HTTP protocol.
  * Support proxies that do not use only basic authentication method. For details on creating custom proxy authenticators and an example of
    [NTLM proxy authentication][2].

  ### Breaking Changes

  * `BatchAPIRequest` is no longer supported by the SDK
  * `BoxAPIConnection#DEFAULT_MAX_ATTEMPTS` is replaced with `BoxAPIConnection#DEFAULT_MAX_RETRIES`
  * `BoxRedirectResponse` was removed and will not be replaced
  * `BoxEvent.Type` is replaced with `EventType`
  * Removed deprecated methods from `BoxFile`, `BoxFileVersionRetention`, `BoxFolder`, `BoxGroup`, `BoxGroupMembership`,`BoxItem`, `BoxRetentionPolicy`, `BoxTask`, `BoxUser`, `BoxWebLink`, `EventLog`, `Metadata` and `MetadataTemplate`.

  Migration details can be found [here][3].

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Using `OkHttp` in Java SDK ([#1083][4]) ([`2656698`][5])

  [1]: https://square.github.io/okhttp/

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/main/doc/configuration.md#example-ntlm-authenticator

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/main/doc/upgrades/3.x.x%20to%204.x.x.md

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1083

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/265669897100dd8f1757fc2c5f25665da42c2889
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-17">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * `BoxCCGAuth` add User and Admin clients factory methods without initial token ([#883][1]) ([`c1337fc`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.1.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.1.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.1.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.1.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/883

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/c1337fc9d765bf7d4bc1757ea832bec92a602f76
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-12">
  ## Box Windows SDK v5.0.0 released

  ### Breaking changes

  * upgrade .net framework to 4.6.2 ([#881][1])
  * remove deprecated methods ([#881][1])
  * remove `use_index` references ([#881][1])
  * return proper object from `GetFileVersionsUnderRetentionForAssignmentAsync`([#881][1])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * upgrade .net framework to 4.6.2 ([#881][1]) ([`f1989aa`][2]), closes [#863][3]
  * remove deprecated methods ([#881][1]) ([`f1989aa`][2]), closes [#874][4]
  * remove `use_index` references ([#881][1]) ([`f1989aa`][2]), closes [#870][5]

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Added pagination option to `IBoxFilesManager#ViewVersionsAsync` ([#869][6]) ([`2324495`][7]), closes [#866][8]
  * return proper object from `GetFileVersionsUnderRetentionForAssignmentAsync` ([#881][1]) ([`f1989aa`][2]), closes [#875][9]

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.0.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/5.0.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.0.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/5.0.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/881

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/f1989aa94cd085ad4bec04b4ebedb04f40455569

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/863

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/874

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/870

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/869

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/232449531440227a0c8b3489ceda813fe4f4a73f

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/866

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/875
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-11">
  ## Salesforce Toolkit - Flow Actions

  Salesforce toolkit includes wrappers that allow admins to invoke
  the [following methods][1]. It allows Box for Salesforce users to
  build automated solutions, such as folder structure, using
  [Salesforce Flows][2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/tooling/salesforce-toolkit/flow-actions

  [2]: https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.flow.htm&type=5

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-09">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.6.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Retry CCG and JWT auth requests on connection reset error ([#790][1]) ([`205997d`][2]), closes [#789][3]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/790

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/205997db9870395b9dd042854c4201338dcf925f

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/789
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-05">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.8.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `getReadStream` delay reading ([#790][1]) ([`6bfc1ee`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/790

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/6bfc1eebeb9a31606ff96127eeb1ad03d2f13d9c
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-04">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.8.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fixed restoring state without refresh token. ([#1139][1]) ([`3544709`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1139

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3544709480eb03e5bd50f5dc99be7409569304c4
</Update>

<Update label="2023-01-03">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support marker in trash get items ([#781][1]) ([`e2d1846`][2])
  * Sanitize proxy credentials ([#782][3]) ([`97fb5aa`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix index error when getting an empty list of user term of service statuses ([#780][5]) ([`23d763a`][6])
  * Specify which exceptions should be retried ([#784][7]) ([`833cd46`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/781

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/e2d1846818aeccfcba2a2f09a5cd924c9f6cd534

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/782

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/97fb5aa2ed72008570abb327269ecec150632af9

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/780

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/23d763ac4ba592131c43eb0319929db25d041c30

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/784

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/833cd46bafe774f19925f78600df90477bf07055
</Update>

<Update label="2022-12-21">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Session termination ([#782][1]) ([`7fb56c6`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/782

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/7fb56c625f8eb03e6a5354b67a0debfd9e4ad7c8
</Update>

<Update label="2022-12-19" description="Announcing major releases of Box SDKs">
  ## Announcing major releases of Box SDKs

  In January 2023, we plan two major releases of Box Windows V2 SDK and Box Java SDK.

  For Box Windows V2 SDK, we are changing the minimum supported version of .NET Framework from 4.5 to 4.6.2+.
  For Box Java SDK, we are replacing networking library and introducing [OkHttp][2] which will give SDK support of HTTP2 protocol and
  allow users to use proxies beyond basic authentication.

  For both SDKs, we are removing deprecated APIs.

  * Read more about changes to [Box Windows V2 SDK][3].
  * Read more about changes to [Box Java SDK][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://square.github.io/okhttp/

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/releases/tag/v5.0.0-prerelease

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/releases/tag/v4.0.0-prerelease
</Update>

<Update label="2022-12-19">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.8.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Restoring state from previous `SDK` version works. ([#1134][1]) ([`b6d97dd`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1134

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b6d97dd5b0cc91eb2e4c922ff217e0878e0f63ec
</Update>

<Update label="2022-12-01">
  ## Server-side actions no longer supported in Web App Integrations

  On December 1st, the options to create a preliminary callback URL or a server-side integration will no longer be available for OAuth 2.0 web app integration.

  ## Next steps

  If you have the server-side integration already configured for your applications, it will still be working.
  If you wish to stop using the feature or perform adjustments in your settings, see [this document][2] for workaround options and support.

  For more information about web app integrations, see the [documentation][3].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://cloud.app.box.com/file/958463673555?s=uwk4jvanbofom2ckvk9q0wcnkc2vxqdy

  [3]: /guides/applications/web-app-integrations/
</Update>

<Update label="2022-11-30">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.5.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Renew connection when Connection reset error occurs ([#771][1]) ([`bcaab27`][2]), closes [#756][3] [#757][4] [#763][5] [#765][6] [#766][7] [#770][8]
  * Retry JWT auth when got error: required unique `jti` claim. ([#768][9]) ([`878e958`][10])
  * Update `pyjtw` dependency to work with Python 3.10 ([#772][11]) ([`b13c5cd`][12])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/771

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/bcaab277c3cabba498076d066366abbaa5507904

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/756

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/757

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/763

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/765

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/766

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/770

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/768

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/878e958abfb01740656aaff42492777753e4c8ea

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/772

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/b13c5cd34105d3f774d3f6d35db7aaf51dd3e247
</Update>

<Update label="2022-11-22">
  ## Box CLI v3.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `id` and `type` field  to shared-links:create response ([#427][1]) ([`5ea4cb8`][2])
  * Add fields `disposition_at` field for files under retention ([#429][3]) ([`db824ef`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `event:poll` polling-interval ([#430][5]) ([`9ada74b`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/427

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/5ea4cb82294188dd30563ef9cea2c8e0b76bbfae

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/429

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/db824ef0b4111810b7902896062c950ef9ac01b3

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/430

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/9ada74b09eb5aa0e09881946a4f7f30e2d68e037
</Update>

<Update label="2022-11-16">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.8.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added Box Sign webhooks ([#1109][1]) ([`99051a5`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `NullPointerException` when using `BoxSignRequestPrefillTag` ([#1121][3]) ([`73fd5b6`][4]), closes [#1120][5]
  * Regenerate JWT ID and retry auth request when JTI claim is rejected ([#1110][6]) ([`420da0f`][7])

  ### Dependency Upgrades

  * Bumped `org.bitbucket.b_c:jose4j:0.9.0` ([#1111][8]) ([`349694d`][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1109

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/99051a575f120a8c0939359c1f4875b16b98b7f0

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1121

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/73fd5b6e6e40f7e79b385edf46b8eee5ff612ace

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1120

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1110

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/420da0f2c80bfe8cfbaba4fa8dec4826c4cb6337

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1111

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/349694ddcfeb701a9ecdfd5ae555d49bea4d1030
</Update>

<Update label="2022-11-10">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.7.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add `fields` query parameter to file and folder update ([#776][1]) ([`a327deb`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/776

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/a327debc83d98a4190a5a16cf848417ea5714db9
</Update>

<Update label="2022-11-08">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `content_type` field to Sign Requests signer ([#871][1]) ([`1ec5b01`][2])
  * Add `redirect_url` and `declined_redirect_url` to Sign Request ([#870][3]) ([`f94d988`][4])
  * Add support for `sign` webhook triggers ([#875][5]) ([`994bfaf`][6])
  * Added method to remove retention policy assignment ([#873][7]) ([`c5f146c`][8])
  * Added support for Modifiable Retention Policies ([#872][9]) ([`e2b7a17`][10])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/871

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/1ec5b0149f01cd3a18f5cba39b77e01678655932

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/870

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/f94d98862d2fdb2603f4684b963d29d04e0fdb3d

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/875

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/994bfaf3ead983f5014808f6c9e5ffe167ab8e42

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/873

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/c5f146c960bb1f940418975078d83fb63ff3bdec

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/872

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/e2b7a178c6592c9f7d1e7ce691c215680b3f45d0
</Update>

<Update label="2022-11-02">
  ## Box CLI v3.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add option to change name of downloaded file in `save-as`parameter ([#415][1]) ([`81fe64e`][2])
  * Add support for modifiable retention policies & enable deleting retention policy assignment ([#420][3]) ([`26ab5b4`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/415

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/81fe64eb2891e7ab55564e2428f64f1129b468e8

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/420

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/26ab5b4d7ec49576fdac48abc025903622f8efe0
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-28">
  ## Introducing Shield Information Barrier

  Shield information barrier prevents communication that could lead to conflicts of interest or potential legal issues.
  For example, admins can use information barrier to separate teams working on
  different projects to prevent collaboration on content restricted to specific groups.

  ## Shield Information Barrier API

  Shield information barrier comes along with the new API that you can use to:

  * Create, manage, and list [Shield information barriers][2]
  * Create, update, delete, and list [Shield information barrier segments][3]
  * Create, delete, and list [Shield information barrier segment restrictions][4]
  * Create, delete, and list [Shield information barrier segment members][5]
  * Create and list [Shield information barrier reports][6]

  ## Shield Information Barrier Events

  Setting up the information barrier produces the following events:

  * Events triggered when the user configures the information barrier, for example activates or deactivates the barrier.
  * Events triggered when the user performs restricted actions, for example attempts to move an item to a restricted folder or add a user to a restricted group.

  For a list of all events, see the [Shield information barrier event triggers][7] reference.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /reference/resources/shield-information-barrier

  [3]: /reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment

  [4]: /reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-restriction

  [5]: /reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-segment-member

  [6]: /reference/resources/shield-information-barrier-report

  [7]: /guides/events/event-triggers/shield-information-barrier-events
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-28">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.7.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Export missing `RetentionType` ([#774][1]) ([`7e6b244`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/774

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/7e6b244ba63d363ecc921be570140c9e1ed1d032
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-27">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for modifiable retention policies & enable deleting retention policy assignment ([#769][1]) ([`5e8c776`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/769

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/5e8c776fc94e9dcf313cc15c96e42fbffaf36b74
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-20">
  ## Box UI Elements v16.0.0 released

  ## [16.0.0][1] (2022-10-20)

  ## Bug Fixes & Features

  This release fixes several bugs and adds new features.
  For a full list of changes, [see the release notes][1].

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases/tag/v16.0.0
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-19">
  ## Manage webhooks V2 in the developer console

  Managing webhooks in your applications is now easier and more streamlined.
  In one single-stop UI - the **Webhooks** tab in the
  [Developer Console][console] - you can review all webhooks in an
  application. You can now [create][1], [update][2], or [delete][3] V2 webhooks
  using the user interface in the [Developer Console][console].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/webhooks/v2/create-v2

  [2]: /guides/webhooks/v2/update-v2

  [3]: /guides/webhooks/v2/delete-v2

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [5]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [console]: https://app.box.com/developers/console
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-19">
  ## New annotations in the Content Preview UI Element

  To improve the content previewing experience, we have added support for new
  annotations types in the Preview UI Element.
  End users previewing content in custom applications can now utilize additional
  annotation types, such as text highlight, drawing, and more. All the annotations
  sync in real time.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-18">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `redirect_url` and `declined_redirect_url` to Sign Request ([#853][1]) ([`5ef2f18`][2])
  * Add support for modifiable retention policies & enable deleting retention policy assignment ([#856][3]) ([`564904f`][4])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.6.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.6.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.6.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.6.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/853

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/5ef2f18985d8c3b8e7c0cdba5709785bfb1d5f34

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/856

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/564904fa2ce0b1881a2f07b80cc3bb3e648310d0
</Update>

<Update label="2022-10-05">
  ## Extract metadata with the new Box CLI script

  [Box CLI][1] now features a new script that allows you to [extract metadata][2] details for all Box files and folders and save it in a CSV file.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, post a request to
  our [developer forum][3] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/cli

  [2]: /guides/cli/scripts/metadata-extraction

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-30">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.7.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Better logging when JSON cannot be parsed ([#1106][1]) ([`5e66ef8`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1106

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/5e66ef8cc983a6cff34995efc75e9effd3195d48
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-26">
  ## Box CLI v3.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `DryRun` mode in `User Deprovision` example script ([#392][1]) ([`584a30e`][2])
  * Add `redirect_url` and `declined_redirect_url` to Sign Request ([#395][3]) ([`261b7d2`][4])
  * Add progress bar for file download and bulk command ([#376][5]) ([`68359c7`][6])
  * create destination path during download ([#393][7]) ([`40881dd`][8])
  * native credentials storage for Windows with a new library ([#385][9]) ([`a6918aa`][10])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * correctly resolve home `dir` in folders download ([#398][11]) ([`86d3230`][12])
  * Fix logs in `Users Deprovisioning` script ([#381][13]) ([`c85f77b`][14])
  * Fix problem with `keytar` library ([#394][15]) ([`1979f01`][16])

  ### Note

  * To migrate storing Box CLI environments to the system credential storage, execute the following command in the terminal ([#295](https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/295))

    `box configure:environments:update`

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/392

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/584a30ef33446a6687ce558c810804202650299f

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/395

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/261b7d22a5e5adf3647276cbf59454cca9bf607f

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/376

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/68359c7e97ce2b606184426cbbaac73914ceb81a

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/393

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/40881ddbd2c86e80f19689f012736fb19f18d945

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/385

  [10]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/a6918aaa6e28bd29619bea31c97b845d8d429fec

  [11]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/398

  [12]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/86d3230456827a042be04f5ef372b15d83fd6a10

  [13]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/381

  [14]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/c85f77b3042dfc3ddfe54b2acd94b220f6ee0e9b

  [15]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/394

  [16]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/1979f01758a30cd1dbf9d32c19ce2f3a00c0d5ec
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-23">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `redirect_url` and `declined_redirect_url` fields to Sign Request ([#752][1]) ([`5d1f609`][2])
  * Add support for modifiable retention policies & enable deleting retention policy assignment ([#759][3]) ([`847301b`][4])
  * Support file request APIs ([#747][5]) ([`71895e3`][6])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Do not log the content of downloaded file ([#760][7]) ([`5d26431`][8])
  * Fix closing file after chunked upload ([#761][9]) ([`b433692`][10])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/752

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/5d1f609ed4c2ddb24bd88ffac256a2809a012698

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/759

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/847301b43be335365858a80420459dffaada4302

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/747

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/71895e33ff7cf339fd8e095a5393f04b86791d5a

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/760

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/5d264314f949c1f4d9136efd5cf8f13dd5897c05

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/761

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/b433692ecc07d62d011785a557128c1780ea1647
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-23">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `content_type`, `redirect_url` field to Sign Request ([#758][1]) ([`8abb9b6`][2])
  * Add sign request webhook ([#760][3]) ([`e92d1ab`][4])
  * Added support for Access Only Collaboration  ([#759][5]) ([`dd8261f`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/758

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/8abb9b602b13cd72c6c8de549d19756ae147b403

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/760

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/e92d1abee5faf58166f4892d7b2e6bc3c6480ac6

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/759

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/dd8261f970c207854058c3ed86ccabf9bec05ea8
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-21">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `is_accessible_via_shared_link` field to File and Folder ([#1103][1]) ([`45e9906`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `BoxCollaboration.getItem()` returns `BoxItem.Info` not `BoxFolder.Info` ([#1102][3]) ([`135850d`][4]), closes [#1101][5] [#1100][6]. `BoxCollaboration.getItem()` used to return `BoxFolder.Info`. However, if collaboration was added on a file it would still return `BoxFolder.Info` which will end with throwing `BoxAPIException` when doing any API call. If you are getting collaboration item it is best to store it as `BoxItem.Info` or check its type and store it as `BoxFile.Info` or `BoxFolder.Info`.
  * Add missing constructor to `BoxNotificationEmail` class ([#1098][7]) ([`2534f34`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1103

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/45e9906efca6a7f2d4d738914dc804de12d3646e

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1102

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/135850d97164ee5f6d74708d74c531f7fa8bee26

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1101

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1100

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1098

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/2534f34133f9554abd1e80fc1555659a2c52b23f
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-12">
  ## Improved Guides on Chunked Uploads

  To improve your experience with uploading large files in chunks,
  our guides now provide additional details on the process
  and support each step with examples.

  Check out the [Upload Part guide][2] a to get the details on how to
  effectively split files and upload them in several parts using [Box API][3].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /guides/uploads/chunked/upload-part

  [3]: /reference/put-files-upload-sessions-id
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-07">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.6.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for modifiable retention policies & enable deleting retention policy assignment ([#1093][1]) ([`30e2fcb`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Stop sending not specified optional fields when creating a user ([#1095][3]) ([`b7d894d`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1093

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/30e2fcb74c12867fd3859c3490539557b47ab006

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1095

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b7d894d3f134137f3a5925f09accfd4334837f81
</Update>

<Update label="2022-09-06">
  ## Box CLI Advanced Features YouTube Video Released

  Back in February, we [launched][3] the OAuth 2.0 version of the Box CLI, alongside
  new YouTube content. Today, we released [video 3][4] of the series. It shows
  using the as-user header and bulk command options.

  You can find the Box Platform and Developer Playlist on [YouTube][2]. We have one
  more video planned for this series: CLI Automation using PowerShell.

  Make sure to [subscribe][5] to the Box Channel to get all the latest content!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL0F3BD5B64D6A39F1

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/#2022-02-01-box-cli-v300-released

  [4]: https://youtu.be/WXkBctPosLE

  [5]: https://www.youtube.com/user/box/featured
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-29">
  ## Box Sign available for Starter plans

  [Box Sign][1] is now available for Free, Personal Pro, and Starter plans.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][2] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/box-sign

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-26">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `content-type` sign request and response ([#1087][1]) ([`49411aa`][2])
  * Add `notification_email` to `BoxUser` ([#1088][3]) ([`5477223`][4])
  * Add `redirect_url` and `declined_redirect_url` to sign request response ([#1089][5]) ([`3921fe1`][6])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fixed canceling sign request fails because of empty body ([#1085][7]) ([`32b8e79`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1087

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/49411aaeea6d3ff8de10e3fbc3c60bba1bc54748

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1088

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/547722347a920ba11e5fff7a8df5201720af815a

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1089

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/3921fe1a4a6249146a8dd2f22e15801846bc073b

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1085

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/32b8e79ebc8995ab933c32d28c3e2f17d9627a70
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-24">
  ## Updates to Box CLI

  The recent additions to [Box CLI script library][1] and [CLI guides][2]
  improve automation even further and simplify handling repetitive tasks.

  ## New CLI scripts

  The sample scripts library now includes the following scripts for you to use:

  * [Provision users and folders][3] builds an
    onboarding folder structure and adds users.
  * [Manage groups and collaborations][4] creates or updates groups, add users to them, and finally add groups to folders as collaborators.
  * [Report inactive users][5] generates a CSV file with a list of users who have been inactive for a specific number of days.
  * [Update user zones][6] provisions users to a specific
    data residency zone within a Multizone Box tenant.
  * [Deprovision users][7] removes users.

  ## Bulk commands guide

  The [bulk commands guide][8] explains how you can use a single command to perform actions involving multiple items.

  ## Developer Resources

  Are you interested in creating applications for the Box App Center or becoming a Box Partner? Check out the
  [Box Partner Resources][9] guides for more information!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][10] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/cli/scripts

  [2]: /guides/cli/cli-docs

  [3]: /guides/cli/scripts/provision-users-folders

  [4]: /guides/cli/scripts/manage-groups-collaborations

  [5]: /guides/cli/scripts/report-inactive-users

  [6]: /guides/cli/scripts/user-zones-mass-update

  [7]: /guides/cli/scripts/deprovision-users

  [8]: /guides/cli/cli-docs/bulk-commands

  [9]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [10]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-24">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `content-type` field to sign request ([#850][1]) ([`054d3e1`][2])
  * expose `effective_access` in `BoxSharedLink` [#843][3] ([`d84ddd4`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * fix null reference exception when it's not possible to get `runtime` version from the assembly ([#851][5]) ([`77046fb`][6])
  * replace infinite retries with exponential backoff strategy in file representations ([#835][7]) ([`f2a5713`][8])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.5.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.5.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.5.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.5.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/850

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/054d3e1a5f44b6a4a0292e8f9444266b2de0fff0

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/843

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/d84ddd48aac489ecdd1d9dc740a7672cb064b0ca

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/851

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/77046fb0c1ce80b6e7e2dc30058ed275e46e990c

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/835

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/f2a57136078de8b1fc59ec2c4a9e98c062d9d19b
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-19">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `version_number` to `FileVersion` ([#853][1]) ([`ac81667`][2])
  * Add support for async API in `FoldersModule` ([#851][3]) ([`58b9dde`][4])
  * Add support for file request API ([#867][5]) ([`ec7813e`][6])
  * Add support for upload and delete Avatar API ([#863][7]) ([`1e967f5`][8])
  * Add support of Editable Shared Link ([#861][9]) ([`bc6ea18`][10])
  * Expose `send()` method public in `BoxClient` ([#843][11]) ([`23caaca`][12])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Respect Content-Type coming from custom headers ([#841][13]) ([`a7c69a7`][14])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/853

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/ac81667ea409cbbe3de9be0c316c630ec6fbc2f5

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/851

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/58b9dde412eddc76915c99b960702f4af95b62a4

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/867

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/ec7813e31706c08aaaeac75debdba8d7802786cb

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/863

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/1e967f5a3eaafbeb894cf8289032ad8ce8664266

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/861

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/bc6ea18bf2e10bebeb62401a55001139f05c76df

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/843

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/23caaca5b6fe8ec1b23470193bc011a62c66d49f

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/841

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/a7c69a73c6142d4b82c718d2d311098dd2b70250
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-11">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added pagination for getting items in trash with new `BoxTrash#items` API ([#1072][1]) ([`9cd411d`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * buffered body write and fixed SDK logging ([#1079][3]) ([`bc35ef3`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1072

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9cd411d20af1bc76ae815905396d72008af62539

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1079

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/bc35ef3279e68a3d794de454f506ba41d14c3b16
</Update>

<Update label="2022-08-09">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.5.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support update and remove user avatar ([#744][1]) ([`aaf6175`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix error while generate token using OAuth ([#750][3]) ([`f826291`][4]), closes [#286][5]
  * Fix lint error in test file ([#747][6]) ([`3b1e10d`][7])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/744

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/aaf617528de5c61e19cfb25e28fe77c01532b9fa

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/750

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/f82629108a1af6c4d160de1976fd01fdf0d8dde3

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/286

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/747

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3b1e10d206aa88a8bf99989bb7ff85776a9864a4
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-29">
  ## Box CLI v3.3.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix request command when calling without body ([#369][1]) ([`9317888`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/369

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/9317888c3f1bff56ef784d7319f1b8ccf12239ef
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-25">
  ## Box CLI v3.3.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix OAuth login ([#364][1]) ([`579b44b`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/364

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/579b44b83c60f6568c98cb5f1417effbac26c58c
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-23">
  ## Retention policy API improvements

  Recent changes to the API for retention policies and retention policy assignments allow you to remove retention policy assignments and specify the retention length and type for your policies.

  ## Updates

  * Use the new [`DELETE`][1] endpoint to remove an existing retention policy assignment:

  ```bash theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE -L https://api.box.net/2.0/retention_policy_assignments/123456/
      -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' 
  ```

  * Specify the following parameters when [creating][2] or [updating][3] retention policies:

    * `retention_length`: Specifies the duration in days that the retention policy will be active for after being assigned to content.
    * `retention_type`: Specifies if the policy is `modifiable` or `non-modifiable`. This means you can either modify the retention policy in full or in a limited way depending on the need to comply with specific regulatory requirements.

  ## Developer Resources

  Are you interested in creating applications for the Box App Center or becoming a Box Partner? Check out the
  [Box Partner Resources][4] guides for more information!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][5] for any help needed.

  [1]: /reference/delete-retention-policy-assignments-id

  [2]: /reference/post-retention-policies

  [3]: /reference/put-retention-policies-id

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [5]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-19">
  ## Box CLI v3.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add editable shared link support ([#350][1]) ([`ab639e7`][2])
  * add file requests API support ([#355][3]) ([`73f0490`][4])
  * add possibility to set custom analytics header ([#348][5]) ([`5a3387f`][6])
  * support --copy-instance-on-item-copy flag for update metadata template ([#357][7]) ([`5d8272a`][8])
  * support Client Credentials Grant as authentication method ([#335][9]) ([`4649d8a`][10])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/350

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/ab639e7e9336e8745ef84dd6dfc646c987638ec3

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/355

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/73f0490ff3c3dfefb89e14dde933d3a3ffc4113f

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/348

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/5a3387fb687bcbd5d8441117c497312ac1d20f27

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/357

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/5d8272a0559ec97a345a2032456998383e7a6716

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/335

  [10]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/4649d8adf39f64c8292b70c35b7bffa96e462edc
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-13">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support for file requests ([#742][1]) ([`30b2e76`][2])
  * Added support of `admin_logs_streaming` stream type ([#740][3]) ([`406950a`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * properly handle client errors in streams ([#736][5]) ([`12378d6`][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/742

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/30b2e767c6c3af68e1463cc801914f9889dc593c

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/740

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/406950a03af54a022427e0532e889a61e0d25152

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/736

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/12378d6755c2e3cddcb79439cdcbbe8e1e61df13
</Update>

<Update label="2021-06-24">
  ## New Box Sign webhook triggers

  The [Webhook Event Triggers][1] now include the following Box Sign events you can use to trigger a version 2 webhook:

  * `SIGN_REQUEST.COMPLETED`
  * `SIGN_REQUEST.DECLINED`
  * `SIGN_REQUEST.EXPIRED`

  For details on creating webhooks read [this guide][2].

  ## Developer Resources

  Are you interested in creating applications for the Box App Center or becoming a Box Partner? Check out the
  [Box Partner Resources][3] guides for more information!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][4] for any help needed.

  [1]: /guides/webhooks/triggers

  [2]: /guides/webhooks/v2/create-v2

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [4]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-06">
  ## Updated Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) documentation

  We updated the documentation on [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing
  (CORS)][1].

  ## Updates

  Added information on what to do in case of the `Access-Control-Allow-Origin` header issues.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to our [developer forum][2].

  [1]: /guides/security/cors

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-06">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for editable shared links for files ([#737][1]) ([`1396200`][2])
  * Support uploading and deleting user avatar ([#743][3]) ([`fe00a9e`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/737

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/1396200c24bf62de63f9cb7949af5997593b9fac

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/743

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/fe00a9eb3434ee14bc4f01332d54c0272ed5f2d3
</Update>

<Update label="2022-07-04">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support of Editable Shared Links ([#1064][1]) ([`9b7d60c`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix closed stream exception in `canUpload` method ([#1067][3]) ([`543f91c`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1064

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9b7d60c41fbd481465bf3f2a5877746f10849712

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1067

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/543f91c46dfcc9de7e61ce11cd93d472916533ac
</Update>

<Update label="2021-06-30">
  ## Improvements in Web App Integrations documentation

  We updated documentation on creating [Web App Integrations][1] with Custom Apps to reflect all the information from the developer console.

  ## Updates

  * Added description of all elements in the **App Info** section.
  * Expanded the **Callback Parameters** section with information about parameter syntax.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][2].

  [1]: /guides/applications/web-app-integrations/configure

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-06-30">
  ## Box CLI v3.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support for stream type `admin_logs_streaming` ([#337][1]) ([`7596157`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix native storage errors ([#345][3]) ([`b73b841`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/337

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/7596157e3a72ef152be44a04198e38d6c57de250

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/345

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/b73b841224ad7f5bb543c92962adb7fc5960bb8c
</Update>

<Update label="2021-06-24">
  ## Box Sign API supports setting redirect URLs

  The [Box Sign API][3] now offers new parameters to set up custom redirect URLs
  for users who sign or decline a sign request. This way, when integrating your application
  with Box Sign, you can redirect the signers
  back to your application or display a custom landing page.

  ## Updates

  Box Sign API provides optional parameters to pass in the request body of the [Create Sign Request][4] call:

  * `redirect_url` that redirects the user to a specific page after signing a request
  * `declined_redirect_url` that redirects the user to a specific page after declining a request

  You can define redirect URLs globally for all signers and for specific signers only.
  For details, see the [Create Sign Request][4] guide.

  ## Developer Resources

  Are you interested in creating applications for the Box App Center or becoming a Box Partner? Check out the
  [Box Partner Resources][2] guides for more information!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-sign-requests/

  [4]: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-sign/create-sign-request/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-06-24">
  ## Automate tasks with Box CLI and scripts library

  The [Box CLI][3] now features a sample scripts library with templates you can use to automate your tasks.
  For starters, we wanted to provide you with a PowerShell script that allows you to:

  * set up a folder structure,
  * create managed users,
  * add the users to the folder structure as collaborators.

  ## Updates

  * The Box CLI [quick start guide][4] now provides instructions on using a PowerShell script to create a folder structure and collaborators.
  * The [scripts library][5] is where you can find all sample scripts. Currently, it includes the PowerShell script but more samples are on the way!

  ## Developer Resources

  Are you interested in creating applications for the Box App Center or becoming a Box Partner? Check out the
  [Box Partner Resources][2] guides for more information!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [3]: /guides/cli

  [4]: /guides/cli/quick-start/powershell-script-templates

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/tree/main/examples
</Update>

<Update label="2022-06-17">
  ## Box CLI v3.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add --all flag for search to return all results ([#336][1]) ([`23ea0a5`][2])
  * add unique state parameter to `OAuth2` login ([#292][3]) ([`5ce6a40`][4])
  * allow changing base URLs ([#303][5]) ([`e284059`][6])
  * obtain `oauth` authorization from command line ([#299][7]) ([`18c88bb`][8])
  * use native credential storage for MacOS and Windows ([#295][9]) ([`74c4922`][10])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `users:transfer-content` to respect quiet flag ([#288][11]) ([`1d0bbab`][12])
  * correctly pass `copy-instance-on-item-copy` flag ([#285][13]) ([`cd4fbf4`][14])
  * Fix updating webhook triggers ([#297][15]) ([`09e94c3`][16])
  * support large output when using `json` flag by replacing `json.stringify` ([#328][17]) ([`1204f2c`][18])
  * Support limit flag for Box Search ([#323][19]) ([`0009a77`][20]), closes [#322][21]
  * Support OAuth with multiple redirect URIs ([#302][22]) ([`9fe216e`][23])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/336

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/23ea0a5c5b065ea3b91b73b64bb7b267a6ff0a18

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/292

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/5ce6a40b4c6e2fc78b2b598a8b1529200c63902e

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/303

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/e28405971ebcf2c2284bb875b40ceb7eaebb41c4

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/299

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/18c88bb6835509394b92eb0685e3a9306ede8984

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/295

  [10]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/74c492271ebc54e15500abbaaa2c7aac32be5070

  [11]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/288

  [12]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/1d0bbab652bf74a59c8486fc4d5eac415161254c

  [13]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/285

  [14]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/cd4fbf4f746b83c2b066efb31b2e2952dba1312d

  [15]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/297

  [16]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/09e94c32ed8e4243e76dd19e67b6d1c17c2cdc04

  [17]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/328

  [18]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/1204f2c146c713124060730e0554ab2f2dde27fa

  [19]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/323

  [20]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/0009a77ee3fc4b72ef01bbbeff0ea588c10a6f89

  [21]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/322

  [22]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/302

  [23]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/9fe216e8d2f59e4375a4b7c766844366f7166a0a
</Update>

<Update label="2022-06-14">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.4.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `can_edit` field to `SharedLink` ([#831][1]) ([`e0d4197`][2])
  * add `version_number` to `BoxFileVersion` ([#820][3]) ([`f174358`][4])
  * add upload and delete support for Avatar API ([#829][5]) ([`4dcb84a`][6])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix initialization of `BoxAPIException` object ([#828][7]) ([`a298f01`][8])
  * properly dispose response on exception ([#819][9]) ([`8415bd3`][10])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.4.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.4.0>)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.4.0>](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.4.0>)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/831

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/e0d4197070db0dbd947f4a51a6bbb1e01c0b0cdf

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/820

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/f174358973caefc9262df480208341fd8233dc7f

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/829

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/4dcb84ade78d6bd0bc621ff2ed7f5f886486858a

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/828

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/a298f01187f84200825ec6ed4748fe8bbd717d11

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/819

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/8415bd3dbe42910b99f99535247a26f8d8e645c1
</Update>

<Update label="2022-06-11">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.2.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix getting proper URL to authenticate with OAuth ([#1059][1]) ([`42876b4`][2]), closes [#1057][3]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1059

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/42876b45ccdb7fa6f357186cecaba051abf1c269

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1057
</Update>

<Update label="2021-05-24">
  ## New Box App Center (formally App Gallery)

  You can now visit the completely updated [Box App Center][3] to find the over 1500+ integrations you already know and love.
  [Box App Center][3] provides a modernized catalog of apps and integrations and will be accessible from the Box Web app.

  For end-users, the Box App Center makes it smoother to work the way you want to, thanks to the comprehensive selection of ready-to-use integrations from partners such
  as Microsoft, Zoom, Salesforce, and Slack, to name a few.

  For IT leaders and admins, the Box App Center gives your users choice, without sacrificing security or user experience. And it eliminates shadow IT by providing a
  list of enterprise-approved options.

  Box App Center will be part of the Core Box package; The Box App Center is available to **all** customers today!

  ## Developer Resources

  Are you interested in creating applications for the Box App Center or becoming a Box Partner? Check out the
  [Box Partner Resources][2] guides for more information!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/sections/360009473734-Box-Partner-Resources

  [3]: https://app.box.com/app-center
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-24">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Revamped setting base URLs ([#1042][1]) ([`129baf7`][2])
  * support for Avatar V2 API ([#1044][3]) ([`18651d7`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1042

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/129baf704ced127788bb0f62ef9f4fb6a50fdc63

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1044

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/18651d7a5b419796e3733c7582ae471d7af7ed5c
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-18">
  ## OAuth 2.0 Redirect URL Strict Checking Enabled

  Today, we turned on strict checking for all OAuth 2.0 applications.

  On November 29, 2021, we [announced][oauth-cl] new applications using OAuth 2.0 will require the
  URIs set in the configuration tab of the Developer Console to strictly match the
  one used during redirect.

  This change has now been completed. If your enterprise had applications that were not following this standard,
  you should have received four emails over the past few months describing how to update your applications.

  ## How to solve redirect errors

  If you did not receive the email or missed the communication, below you will find the steps to mitigate any issues.

  1. You can change the redirect URL in the Box Developer Console configuration tab for your application. If the URLs are
     static, then you can update the Developer console to add multiple URLs. If the URLs are dynamic, then update your
     application to use a static URL or use the state parameter.
  2. You can change the redirect URL used in your application code to strictly match the URL in the developer console.

  For option #1, please use these steps:

  * Login to Box as the application owner and navigate to the Box Developer Console
  * Click on the application and navigate to the configuration tab
  * Scroll down to the "OAuth 2.0 Redirect URI" section
  * Update the current URL listed

  For option #2, please modify your application code to replace the impacted used URLs to strictly match the URL in the Developer Console.

  ## Updates

  * Redirect URIs now force strict checking to match the URI passed in and URIs configured in the OAuth 2.0 application configuration

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] or file a ticket
  with [Box Support][support].

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [oauth-cl]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/#2021-11-29-oauth-20-redirect-url-updates

  [url-redirect]: /reference/get-authorize/#param-redirect_uri

  [oauth-setup]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup/

  [oauth-sdk]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/with-sdk/

  [oauth-nosdk]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk/

  [support]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/requests/new
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-18">
  ## New Endpoints to Manage User Avatars

  Starting today, the User Avatar APIs supports adding, updating, and deleting user avatars.

  To create or update a user avatar, call the [`POST /users-id-avatar`][2] endpoint. Remember to include the path to the file you want to upload. If an avatar already exists, it will be replaced with the new photo uploaded.

  ```sh theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST -L https://api.box.net/2.0/users/userID/avatar 
      -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' 
      --form 'pic=@"path/to/file/file.jpeg"'
  ```

  The response includes the [user avatar][4] object with URLs to the file location.

  To delete a user avatar, call the [`DELETE /users-id-avatar`][3] endpoint:

  ```sh theme={null}
  curl -i -X DELETE -L https://api.box.net/2.0/users/userID/avatar 
      -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /reference/post-users-id-avatar

  [3]: /reference/delete-users-id-avatar

  [4]: /reference/resources/user-avatar
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-16">
  ## Box UI Elements v15.0.0 released

  ## [15.0.0][1] (2022-05-16)

  ## Bug Fixes & Features

  This release fixes several bugs and adds new features.
  For a full list of changes, [please see the release notes][1].

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases/tag/v15.0.0
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-12">
  ## New Field Added to Sign Requests

  Box Sign request response objects now include a new field - `content_type`. This field identifies the type of content expected for the `type` of `input` selected for the signer to complete.

  ## Updates

  * Added new field `content_type` to the [sign request response object][2]

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1].

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /reference/resources/sign-request/#param-signers-inputs-content_type
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-11">
  ## New Fields Added to Event Specification

  The Event resource specification now includes two new fields:

  * `created_at` specifying when an event was created
  * `recorded_at` specifying when an event was registered in the database

  ## Updates

  * Added new fields `created_at` and `recorded_at` to the \[Event] resource specification [2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /reference/resources/event
</Update>

<Update label="2022-05-06">
  ## New Field Added to Sign Events Payload

  The `additional_details` Sign Events payload now includes the `batch_send` field identifying a sign request sent to multiple recipients at once. If such a batch send request exists, the payload also provides its `id`.

  ## Updates

  * Added new field `batch_send` to `additional_details` payload for [Sign Events][2].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events
</Update>

<Update label="2021-05-06">
  ## New Editable Shared Links API

  Now, developers can make files editable via shared links using the API.

  ## Documentation Updates

  * Added a new `can_edit` value to the `permissions` object for the [file][3], [folder][2], and [web link][5] resources
  * Added a new `shared_link_permission_options` field to the [`file--full`][4] resource
  * Added a [shared link section for web links][6] in the reference documentation
  * Added a [permissions page][7] to the shared links guide documentation
  * Combined the [update and add shared link][8] guide page since they utilize the same PUT endpoint
  * Updated code snippets across several shared link pages

  ## Enhancement Details

  * Instead of having to collaborate a user into a file to give edit access, you can set the `shared_link.permissions.can_edit` field to `true`.
  * The `can_edit` field will be returned for all shared link objects on files, folders, and web links; however, you can only set it to true for a file.
  * Our SDK libraries will gain this feature in the coming quarters.
  * If an admin has turned off editable shared links in the admin console, you will not be able to use this feature.

  ### cURL Example

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT 'https://api.box.com/2.0/files/123456789?fields=shared_link' \
          -H 'Content-Type: application/json' \
          -H 'Authorization: Bearer [ACCESS TOKEN]' \
          -d '{
            "shared_link": {
              "permissions": {
                "can_preview": true,
                "can_download": true,
                "can_edit": true
              }
            }
          }'
  ```

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /reference/resources/folder--full#param-shared_link-permissions

  [3]: /reference/resources/file--full#param-shared_link-permissions

  [4]: /reference/resources/file--full/#param-shared_link_permission_options

  [5]: /reference/resources/web-link/#param-shared_link-permissions

  [6]: /reference/get-shared-items--web-links

  [7]: /guides/shared-links/permissions

  [8]: /guides/shared-links/create-or-update
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-28">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for multiple date time formats ([#722][1]) ([`92364de`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing fields to metadata template field ([#719][3]) ([`9e574a3`][4]), closes [#717][5]
  * Upload session commit return None on 202 ([#718][6]) ([`86a1856`][7]), closes [#715][8]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/722

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/92364de1e7c1eee1e85857546af65c307ca863a0

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/719

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/9e574a3e56f72c0e78a31ddda78bc11d36ff3516

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/717

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/718

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/86a185630e6cce8f742123c7340da08267621313

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/715
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-28">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `description` parameter to `uploadFile` methods ([#730][1]) ([`2596584`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * added missing `js-docs` on shared links ([#731][3]) ([`3554d41`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/730

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/2596584dffb44c1995c8b6b3faa67564f4d32499

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/731

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/3554d41d9050e7a81224c35e3e2e257604a0b41b
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-22">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.2.1 Released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Expose fields from `BoxResponse` for custom API calls ([#833][1]) ([`bae1536`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/833

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/bae1536236a22de198281012b0ee43c84b0e3485
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-21">
  ## Improvements In Platform Apps Approval Flow

  Today we added further improvements to the platform apps approval flow. As a result, you can now use a new **Enablement** tab in Developer Console to directly request a Box Admin to enable OAuth 2.0 platform apps.

  Additionally, Box Admins can use Platform Apps Manager to view and enable platform apps in Admin Console.

  ## Updates

  * **Enablement** tab was added for OAuth 2.0 platform apps.
  * Information on enabling OAuth 2.0 platform applications has been added to the [platform app approval][2] guide page.
  * Screenshots have been updated on the [platform app approval][2] and [setup with OAuth 2.0][3] guide pages.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /guides/authorization/platform-app-approval

  [3]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-20">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * editable shared links ([#722][1]) ([`f0c0135`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/722

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/f0c0135511fde46144e6c496432104321af443f6
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-19">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.3.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * simplify base `urls` usage ([#815][1]) ([`f8e7344`][2])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.3.1](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.3.1)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.3.1](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.3.1)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/815

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/f8e73447afa5c0a893c3c4ace922fc360a376f66
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-06">
  ## Notice of behavior change for collaboration events on the changes stream

  Starting today, we will begin rolling out changes to the behavior of
  collaboration events when an application consumes those events from our
  [event API endpoints][event-apis].

  This change will only affect `COLLAB_INVITE_COLLABORATOR`,
  `COLLAB_ADD_COLLABORATOR`, `COLLAB_ROLE_CHANGE`, and
  `COLLAB_REMOVE_COLLABORATOR` [user events][user-events]
  with the query parameter `stream_type` set to `changes`.
  This will not affect existing [enterprise events][enterprise-events].
  The new behavior will not cause downtime within existing applications
  or require any application changes to prevent uptime disruptions.

  ## Change overview

  Previously, events of type `COLLAB_INVITE_COLLABORATOR`,
  `COLLAB_ADD_COLLABORATOR`, `COLLAB_ROLE_CHANGE`, and
  `COLLAB_REMOVE_COLLABORATOR` created notifications
  for the acted upon users that were listening to the `changes` stream.
  Owners of the collaborated item would not receive these events unless
  they were listening to the `all` stream as well.

  We are cleaning up this discrepancy by establishing parity
  between the `all` and `changes` stream. With this new behavior,
  notifications of a collaboration will be created for the content owner
  on the `changes` stream as well. Collaboration owners will now see an
  additional event that matches what they see on the `all` stream.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [event-apis]: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-events/

  [user-events]: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/user-events/for-user/#event-types

  [enterprise-events]: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/

  [user-access-token]: /guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens/

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2022-04-01">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.3.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `SourceLink` support for Core project ([#795][1]) ([`a9cbede`][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * add missing enum to string parsing in several places ([#813][3]) ([`e370282`][4])
  * properly cast response when uploading a new file version using session ([#810][5]) ([`73d877f`][6])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.3.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.3.0)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.3.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.3.0)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/795

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/a9cbedece2ffb4f832be880bebf35b715c9cb28b

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/813

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/e3702826216132dfe1fb061af95a8d9700f114d4

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/810

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/73d877ff679b5999ea50cdfa68f14b0e2169ea65
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-28">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Client Credentials Grant authentication method ([#709][1]) ([`fbf4e80`][2])
  * Deprecating `index_name` when executing metadata query ([#686][3]) ([`e01cc65`][4])
  * **test:** add support for testing with Jest ([#676][5]) ([`1a11759`][6])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Client Credentials Grant authentication method supports token down-scoping ([#710][7]) ([`730368f`][8])
  * Fix JWT expiration field being float instead of integer ([#715][9]) ([`7e950f1`][10]), closes [#713][11]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/709

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/fbf4e80648821e38479b24bf489e7d222ae6c18f

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/686

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/e01cc650e4e793955be543e93928ad82a3254492

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/676

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/1a11759db999510c69d6a27f7becd565620bb000

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/710

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/730368f410ff56e9a8c90feea2192b29c08df198

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/715

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/7e950f1265a52ce251c42a186c8196089a9ed858

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/713
</Update>

<Update label="2021-03-24">
  ## New Search API Query Parameter

  Now, you can filter searching for content in the API using the new field `recent_updater_user_ids`.

  ## Updates

  * Added new query parameter `recent_updater_user_ids` to the [`GET /get-search`][2] API endpoint

  ## Features

  * Limits the search results to any items that have been updated by the given list of users, defined as a list of comma separated user IDs.
  * This feature only searches back to the last 10 versions of an item.

  ### cURL Example

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=sales&recent_updater_user_ids=1234567890,2314567890" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /reference/get-search/#param-recent_updater_user_ids
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-22">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.1.2 Released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Allow using `As-User` header with CCG Authentication ([#1031][1]) ([`b0c2389`][2])
  * Fix retry logic when `Retry-After` header is present ([#1033][3]) ([`05224c4`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1031

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b0c238913cc1dbcecfd546a5eae68277c3c76d42

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1033

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/05224c433d2a101a01959644674153df9542b711
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-18">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `disposition_at` field to the `File` object ([#814][1]) ([`3c90df0`][2])
  * Add support for Client Credentials Grant authentication method ([#821][3]) ([`f6d7542`][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/814

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/3c90df038b9f490a9d38af85404fa1d6ddcd5d0d

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/821

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/f6d75424e8c0d91517e3ffb8df67f77ad3f2374b
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-17">
  ## New Box CLI YouTube Video

  Back in February, we [launched][3] the OAuth 2.0 version of the Box CLI, alongside
  new YouTube content. Today, we released [video 2][4] of the series. It shows
  using the built in help functionality to create a folder with the CLI.

  You can find the Box Platform and Developer Playlist on [YouTube][2]. We have two
  more videos planned: Advanced Topics (including as-user) and CLI Automation
  using PowerShell.

  Make sure to [subscribe][5] to the Box Channel to get all the latest content!

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL0F3BD5B64D6A39F1

  [3]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/#2022-02-01-box-cli-v300-released

  [4]: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=66wlIyS07Aw&list=PL0F3BD5B64D6A39F1&index=2

  [5]: https://www.youtube.com/user/box/featured
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-16">
  ## Announcing SDK Supported Versions

  Starting July 30 2022, only the current **major** version of a SDK will be supported. New features,
  functionality, bug fixes, and security updates will only be added to the
  current **major** version.

  A current release is on the leading edge of our SDK development, and is intended for customers who are in active development and want the latest and greatest features.
  Instead of stating a release date for a new feature, we set a fixed minor or patch release cadence of maximum 2-3 months (while we may release more often). At the same
  time, there is no schedule for major or breaking release. Instead, we will communicate one quarter in advance the upcoming breaking change to allow customers to plan for
  the upgrade. We always recommend that all users run the latest available minor release for whatever major version is in use. We highly recommend upgrading to the latest
  SDK major release at the earliest convenient time and before the EOL date.

  We use a modified version of [Semantic Versioning][2] for all changes. See
  [version strategy][3] for details.

  ## Supported version for each SDK

  Below find links to the charts of supported versions for all SDKs.

  * [Python][4]
  * [.NET][5]
  * [Java][6]
  * [node][7]
  * [CLI][8]
  * [iOS][9]

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://semver.org/

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/main/VERSIONS.md

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk#version-schedule

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2#supported-version

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk#version-schedule

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk#supported-version

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#supported-version

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk#supported-version
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-11">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.2.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add setting `disposition_at` field for files under retention ([#710][1]) ([`91b1373`][2])
  * Add support for Client Credentials Grant authentication method ([#705][3]) ([`d33d16d`][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing `box_sign` object to `__all__` list ([#708][5]) ([`5d80481`][6])
  * Fix `jwt` import errors ([#711][7]) ([`ee7bb6f`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/710

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/91b13730a0beef2cf2a8a8c71087b11557fa5982

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/705

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/d33d16db656cb5578f057a7e24f5396d635b5361

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/708

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/5d8048116640fa672d6a1d700a6c1111faf87bb9

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/711

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/ee7bb6f1dc5aa65dbf6ffeb18ee130f765f7b49b
</Update>

<Update label="2022-03-03">
  ## Developer Documentation Updates

  Today, we released several updates and bug fixes to our developer documentation. Click below to find out more information!

  ## Updates

  * Added additional trailing backslashes for [metadata query][mq] examples
  * Removed extra quotes from [metadata query][mq] examples
  * Updated and added examples for [Shield Smart Access][shield] events
  * Added note to the `can_view_path` [field][collab]
  * Corrected [trash][trash] resources to represent the right responses returned by the API
  * Added an `iOS` filter to the changelog
  * Added note to folder lock [endpoint][folder-lock]
  * Added note to [developer token][dt] guide that says revoking token removes webhook
  * Removed the `94x94` option from the [thumbnail][tn] endpoint
  * Added note to the events [`limit` parameter][ge]
  * Added note to the [user `login` parameter][ue]
  * Added app users to the PUT [`user`][ue] endpoint
  * Added `external_app_user_id` field to the PUT [`user`][ue] endpoint
  * Changed all references throughout documentation of `X-REF-HINTS` to `x-rep-hints`
  * Added new fields to all 11 Box Sign [events][sign]

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [mq]: /guides/metadata/queries/create

  [shield]: /guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events/#smart-access

  [collab]: /reference/post-collaborations/#param-can_view_path

  [trash]: /reference/get-folders-id-trash

  [folder-lock]: /reference/resources/folder-lock

  [dt]: /guides/authentication/tokens/developer-tokens

  [tn]: /reference/get-files-id-thumbnail-id

  [ge]: /reference/get-events/#param-limit

  [ue]: /reference/put-users-id/#param-login

  [sign]: /guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events
</Update>

<Update label="2022-02-28">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.1.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * retry `jwt` auth when error code is in error field ([#1020][1]) ([`8c9d11d`][2]), closes [#1019][3]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1020

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/8c9d11d1b3556552751c9f4ac99a0f7180af97f3

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1019
</Update>

<Update label="2022-02-18">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Added support for Client Credentials Grant authentication method ([#1002][1]) ([`9cfcaff`][2])
  * API to extend disposition date on a file ([#1001][3]) ([`f3f6b60`][4])
  * Deprecating `indexName` when executing metadata query ([#1000][5]) ([`c20dbbf`][6])

  ### Dependency Upgrades

  * Upgrade Gradle to 7.3.3 ([#985][7]) ([`e4acbb1`][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1002

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/9cfcaff243dbf0541409f91f9f863a207345dc47

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1001

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/f3f6b6043eec362c5a8ad9a01d6588538ca34e71

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/1000

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/c20dbbf6a927e31cfdd7ffa71069c0897f7a0536

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/985

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/e4acbb1f0c10ccdeeee139e2566b344052680010
</Update>

<Update label="2022-02-10">
  ## Client Credentials support in the SDKs

  Our [`.NET`][3] and [`Java`][5] SDKs now support Client Credentials Grant
  authentication. We plan to release the support for the other SDKs in the
  coming weeks.

  Back in November 2020, we released a new authentication type for custom
  applications called Client Credentials. Today, we have started releasing SDK
  support for the new type.

  ## Updates

  * Added new sample tags and examples on our [Client Credentials guide page][4].

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/#2020-11-17-client-credentials-grant

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2

  [4]: /guides/authentication/client-credentials/

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk
</Update>

<Update label="2022-02-16">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.1.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for Python 3.10 ([#692][1]) ([`d4aed82`][2])
  * Add support for Python 3.8, Python 3.9, `pypy-3.7` and `pypy-3.8`. ([#689][3]) ([`0aa94cc`][4])
  * Deprecate `use_index` parameter from `MDQ` of files/folders ([#666][5]) ([`2595720`][6])
  * Replace external package `mock` with Python standard library `unittest.mock` ([#697][7]) ([`6fd6366`][8])
  * Upgrade cryptography library to the most recent version. ([#668][9]) ([`9c94d08`][10]), closes [#667][11]

  ### Bug Fixes

  * `UploadSession.commit` returns `None` when retry limit was reached ([#696][12]) ([`9456fe0`][13])
  * Add missing `api_call` decorator for `create_upload_session` ([#686][14]) ([`3510d3a`][15])
  * Fix chunked upload ([#673][16]) ([`2605fd7`][17]), closes [#671][18]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/692

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/d4aed82831af97305bace9a4588d27b23856c306

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/689

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/0aa94cc8a5c4db0fc204b27a60690b73c98a89cb

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/666

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/25957204b82c878e15dc3d118505a741171e9772

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/697

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/6fd63667aa7da4c794b4fb880d5c2949efe0073f

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/668

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/9c94d0878515dc75c1f267e2fb1f189a852772b6

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/667

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/696

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/9456fe0124f4ac4e9c8a7bcc49039f07f310c477

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/686

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/3510d3ac085767205854014ecef80fd078d71773

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/673

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/commit/2605fd782396ad6e42bd11c10f846e771634b7a0

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/issues/671
</Update>

<Update label="2022-01-25">
  ## New Box Shield Access Policy Monitoring Mode

  Recently, Box Shield added a [new feature][3] that allows admins to test out Access Policies with a new monitoring mode.

  ## Updates

  * Added the new `controlMode` field to all events in the [Smart Access events section][2]
  * Added application and FTP restriction information in the Smart Access events section

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: /guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events/#smart-access

  [3]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044196353#enforce_vs_monitor
</Update>

<Update label="2022-02-10">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.2.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * correctly pass null when rolling out user from the enterprise ([#792][1]) ([`c85c573`][2])
  * Creating `BoxAuthenticationFailedException` no longer throws an exception ([#790][3]) ([`55a706e`][4])
  * Null Argument Exception in `AutoPaginate` ([#666][5]) ([`c61f08c`][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add `admin_logs_streaming` support ([#797][7]) ([`a775e1e`][8])
  * add Client Credentials Grant `auth` support ([#799][9]) ([`b8a64ca`][10])
  * add `disposition_at` field to the File object ([#793][11]) ([`2766a91`][12])
  * add possibility to set `auth` token `uri` in `BoxConfig` ([#794][13]) ([`ae8cd8b`][14])
  * deprecate `index_name` in `ExecuteMetadataQuery` ([#800][15]) ([`6a6a0e4`][16])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.2.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.2.0)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.2.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.2.0)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/792

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/c85c5735865b7dd97ffa1428a8f57d2edff6811b

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/790

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/55a706e4091271aa55208a260b2f4f96e1527698

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/666

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/c61f08cc02d5c95ff71ef700e97393a0dc3dc890

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/797

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/a775e1e5c7696a1e5f82b5dc7edbed8eb09f640d

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/799

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/b8a64ca3887298feccef5185f6bfec4c3771b5a9

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/793

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/2766a914fad1eb40371cd4430b3450360088b331

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/794

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/ae8cd8b91dd91b8a786e53ff5b3501d2700686a4

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/800

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/6a6a0e4a0e41ec70ec33acacba00bee6c7ee881f
</Update>

<Update label="2021-12-31">
  ## EOL Notification For DICOM

  Box has retired (End of Life/EOL) our DICOM Uploader and turned off native previewing of `boxdicom` studies as of December 31, 2021.

  The developer documentation for DICOM has now been removed. For more information, please see the [product announcement][2] for alternatives.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/1500005724681-Box-DICOM-EOL-on-December-31-2021
</Update>

<Update label="2022-02-01">
  ## Box CLI v3.0.0 released

  Today, we released `v3.0.0` of the [Box CLI][17].  This release has several enhancements, most notably - addition of OAuth 2.0 support.

  In addition to CLI enhancements and documentation changes, we also released a brand new [YouTube video][18] that shows using our Box CLI Quick Start to get started with the CLI in less than
  five minutes!

  ## Developer Documentation Changes

  * Updated the [Box CLI Quick Start Guide][19] to use the OAuth 2.0 Authentication method
  * Moved the [JWT setup steps][20] to an appendix

  ## New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for login with OAuth ([#240][3])
  * feat: support as-user flag for bulk files and when token is present ([#270][4])
  * Add support for `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` field for metadata templates  ([#239][5])
  * Add support note to the `mdfilter` equality check in search ([#253][6])
  * Add support for Box Sign API ([#258][7])
  * Add support Metadata Query API ([#259][8])
  * fix: `folder:collaborations:add` make `role` a required flag (`SDK-1070`) ([#261][9])
  * Minor dependencies upgrade
  * Add new API for files and file versions under retention ([#250][10])
  * Adding support for sign request ([#258][11])
  * Support Metadata Query API ([#259][12])
  * chore: enforce conventional commits ([#268][13])
  * feat: support as-user flag for bulk files and when token is present ([#270][14])

  ## Breaking Changes

  * Drop support for Node 10
  * Insensitive language changes ([#247][1], [#252][2])

  ## Bug Fixes

  * fix: folder:collaborations:add make role a required flag ([#261][15])
  * fix: Fixed shared-links delete example. ([#262][16])

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][0] for any help needed. You can also connect with the SDK
  team on the respective GitHub repository.

  [0]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/247

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/252

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/240

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/270

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/239

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/253

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/258

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/259

  [9]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/261

  [10]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/250

  [11]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/258

  [12]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/259

  [13]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/268

  [14]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/270

  [15]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/261

  [16]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/262

  [17]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/releases

  [18]: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=whxT3Bdx3E0&list=PL0F3BD5B64D6A39F1

  [19]: /guides/cli/quick-start

  [20]: /guides/cli/cli-docs/jwt-cli
</Update>

<Update label="2022-01-26">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.0.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Move sphinx to test requirements ([#662][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/662
</Update>

<Update label="2022-01-17">
  ## Box Python SDK v3.0.0 released

  ### Breaking Changes

  * Drop support for python 2.7 ([#645][1])
  * Add missing parameter `stream_position to get_admin_events` method ([#648][2])
  * Drop support for python 3.5 ([#654][3])
  * Remove deprecated code using insensitive language ([#651][4])
  * Enforcing usage of keyword-only arguments in some functions ([#656][5])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove `six` library and `__future__` imports ([#646][6])
  * Add type hints to method parameters ([#650][7])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add missing `api_call` decorators on `multi-input` calls ([#653][8])
  * Added `py.typed` file for `mypy` to recognize type hints ([#657][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/645

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/648

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/654

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/651

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/656

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/646

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/650

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/653

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/657
</Update>

<Update label="2022-01-17">
  ## Box Java SDK v3.0.0 released

  ### Breaking changes

  * Changed `BoxFileVersion` class and removed `fileVersion` field ([#978][1])
  * Removed deprecated API `BoxCollaborationWhitelist` replaced with `BoxCollaborationAllowlist`, `BoxCollaborationWhitelistExemptTarget` replaced with `BoxCollaborationAllowlistExemptTarget` ([#969][2])
  * Dropping Java 7 support ([#962][3])
  * Downgrading `bouncycastle` libraries to 1.57 ([#942][4])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `typeName` to `BoxEvent` that contains name of the event, even if it is not mapped to `BoxEvent.EventType` ([#979][5]) ([`b30f61f`][6]), closes [#968][7]
  * Add new optional `description` parameter to the `retention_policies` endpoint and `start_date_field` to the `retention_policy_assignments endpoint`. ([#967][8]) ([`0aa4ff4`][9])
  * Adding `BoxFile#getVersions(String... fields)` to allow users to specify what information they want to extract. Fixes [#946][10]. ([#947][11]) ([`a2eb638`][12])
  * Missing `eventTypes` from `BoxAPI` Documents. Fixes [#974][13] ([#975][14]) ([`2c69360`][15])
  * Removed deprecated API `BoxCollaborationWhitelist` replaced with `BoxCollaborationAllowlist`, `BoxCollaborationWhitelistExemptTarget` replaced with `BoxCollaborationAllowlistExemptTarget` ([#969][2]) ([`2fd4d6f`][16])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Changed `BoxFileVersion` class and removed `fileVersion` field ([#978][1]) ([`8c39451`][17])
  * Changed SDK loggers name to `"com.box.sdk"`, fixes [#638][18] ([#950][19]) ([`443c230`][20])
  * Date parsing error when `BoxSignRequestPrefillTag` created with date value. ([#970][21]) ([`cc2c8da`][22])
  * Fix sending limit parameter in `EventLog` ([#977][23]) ([`96bdccc`][24])
  * Fixed `NullPointerException` when empty metadata used on `BoxFile` or `BoxFolder` ([#918][25]) ([#945][26]) ([`68bc3c5`][27])
  * Cannot deseralize sign request, fixes issue ([#951][28]). ([#952][29]) ([`070bdc5`][30])

  ### Dependency Upgrades

  * Dropping Java 7 support ([#962][3]) ([`953ad78`][31])
  * Downgrading `bouncycastle` libraries to 1.57 ([#942][4]) ([`26aaed5`][32])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/978

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/969

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/962

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/942

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/979

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/b30f61f8cc9c02a1fc4cd5eb35469749e1a16558

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/968

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/967

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/0aa4ff48a1e035efc9ac6aaa42f18f4c92955b7b

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/946

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/947

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/a2eb63896606a6c00ccee6bd9745f4c51f8d89a2

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/974

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/975

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/2c69360e80b1bdd6213933cf2f4da195d52c92d4

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/2fd4d6f884410c8884c4c038687bfc8f32837b55

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/8c3945167581400043a070c2f6906ef05d3d7b85

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/638

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/950

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/443c23085e55bbcaa1524c5b9e1bf852a1e2a1ce

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/970

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/cc2c8da9ea7d066ae2c247c2de5ac8b8bbba9b99

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/977

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/96bdccc9ca40ed43a6028a2b0d055d9d9a8de525

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/918

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/945

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/68bc3c578d760b7239f6d704fed9bb5a834bf52a

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/951

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/952

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/070bdc56074a1533c41f9085943d09502c79a7f4

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/953ad78ac84833082439d0def1dcc63dc11ac04a

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/commit/26aaed51fd914eaf2061da735f11830524e4cfe4
</Update>

<Update label="2022-01-17">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.1.0 Released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Allow to customize URL for the `OAuth2` authorization page ([#811][1]) ([`1901d29`][2])
  * **`Events`:** Add support for `admin_logs_streaming stream` type ([#800][3]) ([`0a3118e`][4])
  * **`RetentionPolicy`:** New API for get files and file versions under retention ([#807][5]) ([`38327f0`][6])
  * **`SharedLink`:** add support for `vanity_name` ([#799][7]) ([`3ea6eb2`][8])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **`SignRequest`:** Fix encoding `date_value` to `yyyy-mm-dd` format in `prefillTag` ([#806][9]) ([`4f902a4`][10])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/811

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/1901d296a2be4b0f2eef25eda06928aebc81de9a

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/800

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/0a3118ef95c2eb42b0080d0352784849e85eb422

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/807

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/38327f09a92dba7827e1866940a643d624757762

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/799

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/3ea6eb2a1c2b713fd0769e93a2dc4ee51da695fd

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/issues/806

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/commit/4f902a47482de55ec69b5522e6cf5affd653b4c8
</Update>

<Update label="2022-01-06">
  ## New Features For Platform App Management

  Today, we released changes to the Platform Apps Manager section of the Box Admin Console. Now, you can more easily view and manage enablement of platform OAuth 2.0
  Applications.

  In addition to adding new functionality, we also made updates to the UI of the Platform Apps Manager. For more information on the changes and authorizing apps that
  use the Box API, check out the [blog post][2].

  ## Updates

  * Screenshots have been updated on the [authorization][3], [platform app approval][4], [limited access approval][5], and [security][6] guide pages
  * Information on the OAuth 2.0 platform application approval process has been added to the [platform app approval][4] guide page

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/platform-apps-manager-updates-c79ccf8ebe97

  [3]: /guides/authorization

  [4]: /guides/authorization/platform-app-approval

  [5]: /guides/authorization/limited-access-approval

  [6]: /guides/security
</Update>

<Update label="2021-12-17">
  ## End of Support for Obsolete Language Versions

  As Box to prepares to release the next major versions of the Python and
  Java SDKs, this is an alert that support is ending for obsolete language
  versions.

  On January 17, 2022, major releases of the [Python][2] and [Java][3] SDK
  libraries are planned, ending support for obsolete language versions. The Python
  SDK will abandon Python 2.7 and Python 3.5 starting from version `v3.0.0` of the
  Python SDK. The Java SDK will abandon Java 7 starting from version `v3.0.0` of
  the Java SDK. Applications using the Python or Java SDK can still use the
  respective older versions of those libraries located in the [GitHub][4]
  release section, but any future new features will not be available for use.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][1] for any help needed. You can also connect with the SDK
  team on the respective GitHub repository.

  [1]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/releases

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/releases

  [4]: https://github.com/box/sdks
</Update>

<Update label="2021-12-14">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.1.0 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * add missing `configureAwait`(false) when awaiting to prevent deadlocks ([#775][1]) ([`b16267e`][2])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * add configurable `Timeout` for `BoxClient` ([#779][3]) ([`ac842ed`][4])
  * add file request API ([#777][5]) ([`1098f75`][6])
  * add `vanity_name` to `SharedLink` ([#782][7]) ([`00a1e26`][8])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.1.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.1.0)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.1.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.1.0)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/775

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/b16267e8f3dca5396e87be660e30a1e9405d8139

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/779

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/ac842ed4ba1a2dfe499706524441bc6ae3b3c192

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/777

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/1098f75983e2d784521f13b8d53df0e55d03203b

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/782

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/commit/00a1e265569d76c2c9593aa259202d7febef629c
</Update>

<Update label="2021-12-08">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.14.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add `admin_logs_streaming` support for events stream ([#623][1])
  * Add `vanity_name` parameter for creating shared link to a file or folder ([#637][2])
  * Add getting files and file versions under retention for a retention policy assignment ([#633][3])
  * Support base item operations for WebLink class ([#639][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Limit cryptography to version \<3.5.0 ([#636][5])
  * Avoid raising 404 when a thumbnail cannot be generated for a file ([#642][6])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/623

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/637

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/633

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/639

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/636

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/642
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-29">
  ## OAuth 2.0 Redirect URL Updates

  Today, we released a new feature to the Box Developer Console, allowing developers to add multiple redirect URIs for an OAuth 2.0 application.

  Starting November 29, 2021, new applications using OAuth 2.0 will require the
  URIs set in the configuration tab of the Developer Console to strictly match the
  one used during redirect. In addition, both new and existing applications, will
  gain the ability to add multiple redirect URIs.

  For existing applications, the deadline to make changes to this URL and avoid service
  disruption is May 13, 2022.

  ## Updates

  * The Box Developer Console OAuth 2.0 application configuration section has a new button to add multiple redirect URIs
  * Redirect URIs now force strict checking to match the URI passed in and URIs configured in the OAuth 2.0 application configuration
  * Updated the `redirect_uri` query parameter wording on the [`GET /authorize`][url-redirect] endpoint page
  * Updated the OAuth 2.0 [setup][oauth-setup], [with SDK][oauth-sdk], and [without SDK][oauth-nosdk] guide pages

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [url-redirect]: /reference/get-authorize/#param-redirect_uri

  [oauth-setup]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup/

  [oauth-sdk]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/with-sdk/

  [oauth-nosdk]: /guides/authentication/oauth2/without-sdk/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-23">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.58.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * SDK support for new GET /events `stream_type`: `admin_logs_streaming` ([#938][1])
  * Adding `BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection#getUserConnection` to indicate that we can use this connection for managed users or app users ([#940][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix for deprecated enums still being used ([#931][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/938

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/940

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/931
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-22">
  ## New Shield Download Event

  Today, we released a new `event_type` to the [Enterprise Event][events] stream
  for downloads that are restricted based on a Shield access policy.

  If an admin creates a shield access policy that restricts downloads and an
  end user is blocked from downloading a file, an event is produced
  within the [enterprise event][events] stream. Events will also be generated
  when a user is viewing a folder with a file restricted from download, viewing a
  file in preview that is restricted from download, and when a user requests to
  download a file through the API that is restricted from download. These events
  follow the standard event object schema and the `event_type` value set
  to `SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED`.

  ## Updates

  * Added a [new section][new-event] to the Smart Access event trigger documentation
  * Added `SHIELD_DOWNLOAD_BLOCKED` to the [enterprise event list][event-list]

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [events]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise

  [new-event]: /guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events/#download-restriction

  [event-list]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/#event-types
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-17">
  ## New Event Stream Live Monitoring stream\_type

  Today, we released a new `stream_type` for the [`GET /events`][event-api]
  API called `admin_logs_streaming`. This allows for near real time monitoring of
  events after they happen in Box.

  We recommend that applications subscribing to live events through `admin_logs`
  migrate to `admin_logs_streaming` for the lowest and most consistent latency.
  This `stream_type` requires the user to be an enterprise admin or co-admin with
  the permission to **Run new reports and access existing reports**.

  ## Updates

  We have made several documentation updates to help you learn about the new option

  * Completely reorganized the [events][event-guide] guide section for
    easier understanding, including adding additional information to all pages
    in the various sections
  * Updated the OpenAPI specification for the [`GET /events`][event-api] endpoint
    to include the new `stream_type` option of `admin_logs_streaming`
  * Added a new how to migrate [`stream_type` page][migration] with steps
    on switching

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [event-api]: /reference/get-events

  [event-guide]: /guides/events

  [migration]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/migrate-to-stream
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-16">
  ## Added Retention Policy Marker Based Pagination

  Our OpenAPI specification has been updated for retention policy and retention
  policy assignment endpoints to show use of `marker` based pagination and
  `fields` query parameters.

  ## Updates

  The following updates were made:

  * Added `fields`, `limit`, and `marker` query parameters to the
    [`GET /retention-policies`](/reference/get-retention-policies) and
    [`GET /retention-policies-id-assignments`](/reference/get-retention-policies-id-assignments)
    endpoints.
  * Added `limit` and `next_marker ` to the response object for
    [retention policies](/reference/resources/retention-policies) and
    [retention policy assignments](/reference/resources/retention-policy-assignments)

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please create a post on
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-03">
  ## Extend Retention Via Files API

  Now, you can extend the retention date for a file that is already under
  retention using the new `disposition_at` field. If the date is extended, it
  cannot be reverted or updated to a date prior to the new date.

  ## Updates

  * Added a `disposition_at` field to the [File(Full) resource][file-full]
  * Added a `disposition_at` parameter to the [PUT file endpoint][file-put]
  * Added a note in the [retention policy guide section][extend-retention]

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [extend-retention]: /guides/retention-policies/#extend-retention-for-a-file

  [file-put]: /reference/put-files-id/#param-disposition_at

  [file-full]: /reference/resources/file--full/#param-disposition_at
</Update>

<Update label="2021-11-02" description="Box Windows SDK v4.0.0 released">
  ## Box Windows SDK v4.0.0 released

  ### Breaking changes

  * Extract interfaces for BoxClient and Managers to improve testability ([#603][1])
  * Add BoxConfigBuilder and make BoxConfig immutable ([#737][2])
  * Expose tasks from async methods ([#742][3])
  * Use DateTimeOffset instead of DateTime ([#749][4])
  * Rework returned exceptions ([#753][5])
  * Upgrade .NET Standard to 2.0 ([#755][6])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add ability to get files under retention for assignment and file versions under retention for assignment ([#734][7])
  * Add `is_collaboration_restricted_to_enterprise` flag support for `Folder` update ([#732][8])
  * Replace insensitive language ([#738][9])
  * Add new, easier to use method for create terms of service user status ([#740][10])
  * Allow sort and direction parameter to be passed in when getting trashed items ([#754][11])
  * Add support for Task completion\_rule field ([#758][12])
  * Add BoxSign API support ([#765][13])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `Cannot access a closed Stream.Request` exception during upload ([#739][14]) ([#757][15])

  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.0.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/4.0.0)
  - [https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.0.0](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/4.0.0)

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/603

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/737

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/742

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/749

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/753

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/755

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/734

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/732

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/738

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/740

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/754

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/758

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/765

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/739

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/pull/757
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-28">
  ## Box iOS SDK v5.0.0 released

  ### Breaking changes

  * Update PagingIterator to return pages and simplify logic ([#737][1])
  * Remove insensitive language field `collaborationWhiteList` in BoxClient. Use `collaborationAllowList` instead. ([#790][2])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Replace insensitive event types ([#785][3])
  * Add SignAPI support ([#792][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/737

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/790

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/785

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/792
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-27">
  ## Box Sign Enterprise Events

  [Box Sign][sign] events are now available via the enterprise events stream.
  For full details, please see our [Box Sign events guide][seg].

  ## Updates

  * Add sign request [document events][d]: created, converted, completed,
    cancelled and expired

  * Add sign request [signer events][s]: assigned, viewed by signer, downloaded,
    forwarded, signed and declined

  * Add two new [statuses][stat]: `downloaded` and `downloaded and signed`

  [stat]: /reference/resources/sign-requests/#param-status

  [s]: /guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events/#signer-events

  [d]: /guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events/#document-events

  [seg]: /guides/events/event-triggers/sign-events

  [sign]: /guides/box-sign
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-20">
  ## Box UI Elements v14.0.0 released

  ## [14.0.0][1] (2021-10-20)

  ## Bug Fixes & Features

  This release fixes several bugs. For a full list, [please see the release notes][1]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases/tag/v14.0.0
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-20">
  ## App Diagnostics Report Feedback

  We recently [started releasing][changelog] the new
  [App Diagnostics Report][guide] to customers, and we would love to hear your
  thoughts! Visit the [forum post][forum] to provide any feedback.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/posts/4408877038483-App-Diagnostics-Report-Feedback

  [changelog]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/#2021-10-07-new-app-diagnostics-report

  [guide]: https://developer.box.com/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/app-diagnostics-report/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-18">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.57.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for marker-based paging in `BoxFolder.getChildren` ([#927][1])
  * Upgraded `minimal-json` to version 0.9.5
  * Upgraded `jose4j` to version 0.7.9
  * Adding Gradle wrapper in version 4.0.1 ([#928][2])

  ### Bug Fixes:\*\*

  * Fix for infinite recursion ([#924][3])
  * Fix unable to set Vanity URL on `BoxSharedLink` for `BoxFile` and `BoxFolder`
    ([#925][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/927

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/928

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/924

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/925
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-07">
  ## Update to Webhooks Response

  The [webhook response][webhooks] has been updated to show the correct
  Webhook (Mini) object in the entries array.

  ## Bug Fixes

  * Added a `mini` resource for [Webhook][mini]
  * Corrected the [get-webhooks][webhooks] response object

  [support]: https://developer.box.com/support

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [webhooks]: /reference/get-webhooks

  [mini]: /reference/resources/webhook--mini
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-07">
  ## New App Diagnostics Report

  A new report will be gradually deployed to customers starting Thursday, October
  7th, 2021. We plan to have the report released to all customers by October 25th.

  Developers can now review API activity for their applications by generating an
  App Diagnostics Report from the Developer Console. Checkout the
  [guide][report] to see the steps required to run a report!

  As always, if you have issues you may file a
  [support ticket][support] or post on our [developer forum][forum].

  [report]: /guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/app-diagnostics-report

  [support]: https://developer.box.com/support

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-10-06">
  ## Support for Adobe Creative Cloud Previews

  In conjunction with WebApp preview, Adobe Photoshop, Illustrator,
  and InDesign files are now supported via API.

  ## Updates

  Files with extensions `indt`, `idml`, `indd`, and `inx` are supported by:

  * [Thumbnails][thumb]
  * [Image Viewer UI Element][ui-el]
  * [Annotations][ann]
  * [Thumbnail Representation][thumb-rep]

  [thumb]: /guides/representations/thumbnail

  [ui-el]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/viewers-and-events/#image-viewer

  [ann]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/annotations

  [thumb-rep]: /guides/representations/thumbnail-representation
</Update>

<Update label="2021-09-30">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.13.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Sensitive language replacement ([#609][1])
  * Add BoxSign support ([#617][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Upgrade cryptography to version 3 ([#620][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/609

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/617

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/620
</Update>

<Update label="2021-09-29">
  ## Box Node SDK v2.0.0 released

  ### Breaking changes

  * Drop support for Node 6,7 ([#670][1])

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for `is_external_collab_restricted` User property ([#668][2])
  * Bump proxy-agent from 4.0.0 to 5.0.0 ([#664][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/670

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/668

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/664
</Update>

<Update label="2021-12-21">
  ## EOS for Open With UI Element and EOL for Adobe Sign

  Today, the [Open With UI element][owuie] can integrate with Box Tools, Google
  Workspace, and Adobe Sign. In an effort to continuously improve the Box
  experience, we are focusing our resources on new features and functionality that
  better align with our users' evolving needs.

  December 21, 2021 the following changes will occur:

  * We will discontinue support of the Box Open With UI Element for Box Tools and
    Google Workspace for any new customers. A new customer is any customer not using
    this element prior to December 21. Any customers leveraging the Open With UI
    Element with Box Tools and/or Google Workspace prior to December 21 are
    considered existing customers and will continue to receive support until further
    notice. The Box Tools and Google Workspace Web App functionality will not be
    impacted.

  * Adobe Sign will no longer be available for use by new or existing customers
    via the Open With UI element or Web Application.

  Should you have any further questions, please contact us by opening a
  [support][support] ticket or posting on the [developer forum][forum].

  [owuie]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/open-with

  [support]: https://developer.box.com/support

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-09-07">
  ## New enhancements to retention APIs

  Two new API endpoints have been introduced to get files and file versions that
  are under retention for a given retention policy assignment. These APIs are
  part of the [retention policy][retention-policies] suite of APIs. They are
  intended to replace the separate [file][file] and [file version][file-version]
  retention endpoints, which will soon be deprecated from the Box API. The date
  of the deprecation will be announced at a later date.

  When a retention policy is applied via a retention policy assignment, folders
  are selected for which the retention policy should be applied. The files and
  file versions within those folders will be the content that is returned from
  calling these new endpoints.

  ## Features

  This release has introduced the following new content and features.

  * [Get files under retention][files-retention]: Returns a list of files under
    retention that are associated with the specified retention policy assignment.
  * [Get file versions under retention][file-versions-retention]: Returns a list
    of file versions under retention that are associated with the specified
    retention policy assignment.
  * Added an editable `description` field to the
    [retention policy][retention-policy] resource.
  * Added a non-writable `start_field_date` to the
    [retention policy assignment][retention-policy-assignment]
    resource. This field is the metadata field's key id. The value can also be
    `upload_date` if the `assigned_to` type is not `metadata_template` or a date
    field has not been selected.

  [retention-policies]: /guides/retention-policies

  [files-retention]: /reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-files-under-retention

  [file-versions-retention]: /reference/get-retention-policy-assignments-id-file-versions-under-retention

  [file]: /reference/get-file-version-retentions-id

  [file-version]: /reference/get-file-version-retentions

  [retention-policy]: /reference/resources/retention-policy

  [retention-policy-assignment]: /reference/resources/retention-policy-assignment
</Update>

<Update label="2021-09-01">
  ## Classification Name Field now in Events API

  If a classification exists on content, the [events][events] API now
  returns the classification `name` field in the response object.

  * The updates to the event source response object can be
    seen [here][event-source].
  * A new [guide page][event-triggers] has been added to show examples for an
    event triggered by a user source and an event source.

  Below is an example of the response before and after the enhancement. Please
  note that if a classification doesn't exist, the before example will still
  be returned.

  Before:

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "source": {
      "item_type": "file",
      "item_id": "8903212345",
      "item_name": "example.docx",
      "parent": {
        "type": "folder",
        "name": "All Files",
        "id": "0"
      },
      "owned_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": "11446498",
        "name": "Aaron Levie",
        "login": "notifications@example.com"
      }
    }
  }
  ```

  After:

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "source": {
      "item_type": "file",
      "item_id": "8903212345",
      "item_name": "example.docx",
      "parent": {
        "type": "folder",
        "name": "All Files",
        "id": "0"
      },
      "owned_by": {
        "type": "user",
        "id": "11446498",
        "name": "Aaron Levie",
        "login": "notifications@example.com"
      },
      "classification": {
        "name": "Top Secret"
      }
    }
  }
  ```

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum

  [events]: /reference/get-events/

  [event-source]: /reference/resources/event-source/

  [event-triggers]: /guides/events/event-triggers/event-source
</Update>

<Update label="2021-08-31">
  ## Notice of behavior change for item preview events

  Starting today, we will begin rolling out changes to the behavior
  of item preview events when an application consumes those events from our
  [event API endpoints][event-apis].

  This change will only affect the
  `ITEM_PREVIEW` [user event][user-events] and will not affect existing
  [enterprise events][enterprise-events]. The new behavior will not cause
  downtime within existing applications or require any application changes to
  prevent uptime disruptions.

  ## Change overview

  Within the previous behavior when events were consumed, previewed item
  events were surfaced through the `ITEM_PREVIEW` event type for the owner of
  the content as well as any contributors assigned to the content. This meant
  that if a file with 2000 collaborators on it was previewed, the file owner
  plus all 2000 collaborators would have an event created stating that the file
  was previewed.

  With the new behavior, notification of an item being previewed will only be
  created for the owner of the content and will not be produced for
  collaborators. This will help to reduce the noise of the event stream while
  preserving the ability to see when items are previewed as a content owner.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [event-apis]: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-events/

  [user-events]: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-user/#event-types

  [enterprise-events]: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/user-events/for-enterprise/

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-08-31">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.56.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Replace `submaster` `GroupMembershipRole` with `coadmin`. Replace `MASTER_INVITE_ACCEPT` and `MASTER_INVITE_REJECT` with `ADMIN_INVITE_ACCEPT` and `ADMIN_INVITE_REJECT`. ([#907][1])
  * Add `tracking_codes` to create User API call ([#910][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `url` for `BoxFileRequest.Info` object ([#906][3])
  * Attempt to fix thread locking issue on refresh of access token ([#912][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/907

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/910

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/906

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/912
</Update>

<Update label="2021-08-30" description="Box Node SDK v1.39.0 released">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.39.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for Box Sign API ([#658][1])
  * Enhance TS Imports ([#656][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/658

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/656
</Update>

<Update label="2021-08-06">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.38.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add sensitive language event types for admin invites ([#648][1])
  * Use `BetterDocs` to adapt `JSDocs` to `TypeScript` ([#646][2])
  * Change `ProxyAgent` import to be dynamic ([#641][3])
  * New API for get files and file versions under retention ([#585][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Deeply freeze Config except Buffers and Readable streams ([#651][5])
  * Fix a typo in docs of `src/managers/search.ts` ([#649][6])
  * Update broken documentation link ([#647][7])
  * fix type annotations for `exchangeToken` functions ([#645][8])
  * Deprecate files `getThumbnail` API in favor of
    `getRepresentationContent` ([#627][9])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/648

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/646

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/641

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/585

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/651

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/649

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/647

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/645

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/627
</Update>

<Update label="2021-06-04">
  ## Upcoming change to JWT format

  On August 4th, 2021, as part of our continued infrastructure upgrades, we will
  begin deployment of a change that may affect custom applications leveraging
  Server Authentication with JSON Web Tokens (JWT).

  Potential impact will require additional verification from customers who do not
  use an official [Box SDK][box-sdks] and are storing tokens in a database.

  All customers and application owners who are potentially impacted have been
  notified directly via email.

  ## Change overview

  This change may only impact applications leveraging Server Authentication with
  JSON Web Tokens (JWT). Tokens will continue to return as a string as stated in
  our [documentation][tokendoc]. However, the format will be longer and contain

  special characters.

  An example of a token returned today: `NXWd9KDPVofXQKZJlQjICCWFHEmuOihs`.

  After this change, tokens will return in the following format:

  `1!yxxhRreQCKcEbC_ZfYvPudyLe7Ed36gIQcqqZo2pfaVZyxNBkQjoHk0fgA1iTY3_uwXgif-hg-gne
    aUdLRmGCb2He6tyQ_rA8aV-CllTyBbd9Tx-wU6Fnt4Df9XjzBAk8Dj7RYc1Ew_fcY2vfycpCvjwHLgql
    jzjEpVIrOpOlK_2AyP5FExzn0x7DtbkaGc6avJU8UMQd_huXoJ7CnXIL_JBzVrW4D32pBLQ2AZIuecOZ
    NMIy9T8PdUiZIG6xKEPqYmm21mQHEM0d7dT5foSBtjm65-Ah2tb2MdSGFb1G1O24vz2GmYFgmIe5UOol
    qYIGg-0u2xQPC3F76WiNCiU_TP1JDQYi3HKaos807WkRtnBY5Vd-VAbY9DH-Qo3u1EiB0RFr4cht2N7V
    B99y-379IEYzCojL2V58dE_pBxpRMv4KcOLVsUfDkbx3uo34H4UzOycI_IWGWrhVJD4M7GeLeD_5Vkmj
    fbwYl2CmHdXAKbZKtXTHjzB0CZixZriT_wRUpsN8GTrrxGbx9ukgzJWRJwelGZ_1Yx7vP4Zkx3OfR5Be
    -Tso7xdHd9rW0FXsu024U7dMNuQ6kpP1_kJI2Y`.

  Please note that this is not a new format to Box, as this format is currently
  returned when [downscoping tokens][downscope].

  ## Verifying application impact

  1. Navigate to **Admin Console** > **Apps** Tab > **Custom Apps**.
  2. Click **View** for each app row listed
  3. Scroll to the bottom of the app details page and verify the selected
     authentication method. Affected apps will say
     **Server Authentication with JSON Web Tokens**.

  For each application identified above, you will need to determine:

  1. Is it using an official [Box SDK][box-sdks]? If so, no further action is
     required to prepare for this change. While it is always best practice to be
     on the latest version, no minimum versions are required for compatibility.

  2) If an official SDK is not used, are tokens stored in a database? If so, you
     will need to preform additional verification that the database can handle both
     the new length and special characters.

  ## Testing before release

  If you have identified an application that leverages Server Authentication with
  JWT and stores tokens in a database, you will want to preform the test below
  before August 4th.

  As mentioned above, the new format for tokens is currently used when
  [downscoping tokens][downscope]. Therefore, preform the following steps to
  assess impact:

  1. Generate an Access Token for the application

  2) [Downscope][downscope] the token from step 1

  3. Attempt to store the downscoped token in your database

  If you are successfully able to store the token in the database no further
  action is necessary to prepare for this change.

  If you are unable to store the token, your database must be updated to support
  the additional length and special characters.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any questions or need further guidance, please email
  [jwt-set-rollout@box.com](mailto:jwt-set-rollout@box.com).

  [box-sdks]: https://developer.box.com/sdks-and-tools

  [tokendoc]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-oauth2-token/

  [downscope]: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/access-tokens/downscope
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-26">
  ## New Getting Started Guide

  Check out our [step by step guide][guide] to getting started with the Box API.
  Discover best use cases, user models, architecture patterns, and more.

  ## Features

  * Use case evaluation: [Guide][usecase]
  * Common user models: [Guide][usemodel]
  * Common architecture patterns: [Guide][arch]
  * Locating common values: [Guide][value]
  * Security overview: [Guide][security]
  * Authentication best practices: [Guide][bestprac]
  * Detailed authorization steps: [Guide][auth]

  [guide]: /guides/getting-started

  [usecase]: page/platform/use-cases/

  [usemodel]: page/platform/user-types/

  [arch]: page/platform/appendix/architecture-patterns/

  [value]: page/platform/appendix/locating-values/

  [auth]: /guides/authorization

  [security]: /guides/security

  [bestprac]: /guides/authentication/best-practices
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-30">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.55.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Restore methods for Execute Metadata Query, which were removed in [#890][1], and mark them as deprecated ([#905][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/890

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/905
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-26">
  ## Release of Box Sign API

  Today, July 26th, 2021, beings the roll out of Box Sign! Programmatically
  harness the full functionality of the [Box Sign web app experience][webapp] by
  leveraging our newest API endpoints to create, list, resend, and cancel Box Sign
  requests.

  While Box Sign does not need to be enabled by an Admin to use its API endpoints,
  it does need to be rolled out to your enterprise. We will notify Admins as it
  becomes available for their Box instance.

  At a minimum, creating a Box Sign request requires selecting a file for
  signature, a destination folder for the signed document/[signing log][log], and
  designating signers. At this time, only one file can be signed per request.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X PUT "https://api.box.com/2.0/sign_requests" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "signers": [
            {    
              "role": "signer",
              "email": "example_email@box.com"
            }
          ],
         "source_files": [
            {
              "type": "file",
              "id": "123456789"
            }
         ],
         "parent_folder": 
            {
              "type": "folder",
              "id": "0987654321"
            }
       }'
  ```

  ## Features

  * Add endpoint to **create** Box Sign requests: [Guide][c] |
    [API reference][c_ref]
  * Add endpoint to **list** Box Sign requests: [Guide][l] |
    [API reference][l_ref]
  * Add endpoint to **get** Box Sign requests by ID: [Guide][g] |
    [API reference][g_ref]
  * Add endpoint to **resend** Box Sign requests: [Guide][r] |
    [API reference][r_ref]
  * Add endpoint to **cancel** Box Sign requests: [Guide][ca] |
    [API reference][ca_ref]
  * Java SDK support: [GitHub][gh]

  [webapp]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404086827411-Introducing-Box-Sign

  [log]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/4404095202579-Viewing-the-signing-log

  [c]: /guides/box-sign/create-sign-request

  [c_ref]: /reference//post-sign-requests

  [l]: /guides/box-sign/list-sign-requests/#all

  [l_ref]: /reference/get-sign-requests

  [g]: /guides/box-sign/list-sign-requests/#by-id

  [g_ref]: /reference/get-sign-requests-id

  [r]: /guides/box-sign/resend-sign-request

  [r_ref]: /reference/post-sign-requests-id-resend

  [ca]: /guides/box-sign/cancel-sign-request

  [ca_ref]: /reference/post-sign-requests-id-cancel

  [gh]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/main/doc/sign_requests.md
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-26">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.55.0 released

  NOTE: Due to the benign nature of the "breaking change" below, we decided NOT to increment the major version for this release.  There should be no customer impact due to this change.

  ### Breaking Changes

  * Update execute metadata query to match API response ([#890][1])
    * NOTE: This change removes a method without deprecating it.  It was not possible to use the method correctly at all, because the underlying service no longer supported it.

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Remove or deprecate insensitive language (\[[#889][2]])([https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/889](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/889))
  * Add support for `is_external_collab_restricted` parameter for User ([#896][3])
  * Add configurable permissions support for `GroupMembership` ([#897][4])
  * Add `SHIELD_JUSTIFICATION_APPROVAL` event type ([#898][5])
  * Add ability to get files under retention for assignment and file versions under retention for assignment ([#899][6])
  * Add `TASK_UPDATE`, `FILE_VERSION_RESTORE` and `ADVANCED_FOLDER_SETTINGS_UPDATE` event types ([#902][7])
  * Add Box Sign API support ([#904][8])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Add setters for `BoxLegalHoldPolicy` ([#885][9])
  * Add setters for `BoxTaskAssignment` ([#886][10])
  * Add setters for Group Membership and Web Links ([#887][11])
  * Add setters for Webhooks ([#888][12])
  * Deprecate `BoxFile.getThumbnail` in favor of `BoxFile.getRepresentationContent` ([#891][13])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/890

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/889

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/896

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/897

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/898

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/899

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/902

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/904

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/885

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/886

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/887

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/888

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/891
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-16">
  ## Updated file size limits

  Today we released our newest business plan, Enterprise Plus, which supports
  uploads and downloads up to 150GB. In addition, we upgraded file size limits for
  some of our existing plans, as detailed below. For details on how to confirm
  the file size limit for your account, please visit our
  [upload guide][uploadguide].

  ## Updates

  * Enterprise: 50 GB
  * Digital Workplace Suite: 50 GB
  * Digital Workplace Global Suite: 50 GB
  * Digital Business Suite: 50 GB
  * Digital Business Global Suite: 50 GB
  * Enterprise Plus: 150 GB

  [uploadguide]: /guides/uploads/direct
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-16">
  ## New Manual Start Workflow Endpoints

  Two new API endpoints have been introduced for
  [Box Relay](https://www.box.com/collaboration/relay-workflow)

  * Get workflows configured on a folder
  * Start a manual start flow within a workflow for file(s)

  The new endpoints do not allow you to update any information within the
  workflows. Also, the post endpoint can only start flows with a `trigger_type`
  of `WORKFLOW_MANUAL_START`. There is an optional `outcome_parametes` object
  within the post request body. If your flow is configured to accept selections
  at start time, you will need to send in these as a parameter. A guide with all
  the options you can send in will be made available soon.

  ## Features

  This release has introduced the following new content and features.

  * New [workflow](/reference/resources/workflow) resource
  * New [GET](/reference/get-workflows) workflows endpoint
  * New [POST](/reference/post-workflows-id-start) start manual workflow endpoint
</Update>

<Update label="2021-07-01">
  ## Notice of behavior change for item open events

  Starting today, we will begin rolling out changes to the behavior
  of `ITEM_OPEN` events when an application consumes those events from our
  [event API endpoint][event-apis].

  This change will only affect the `ITEM_OPEN` [enterprise event][user-events].
  The new behavior will not cause downtime within existing applications or
  require any application changes to prevent uptime disruptions.

  ## Change overview

  Within the previous behavior when events were consumed, opened item events were
  surfaced through the `ITEM_OPEN` event type for the owner of the content as
  well as any contributors assigned to the content. This meant that if a file with
  2000 collaborators on it was opened, say on Drive, the file owner plus all
  2000 collaborators would have an event created stating that the file was opened.

  With the new behavior, notification of an item being opened will only be created
  for the owner of the content and will not be produced for collaborators. This
  will help to reduce the noise of the event stream while preserving the ability
  to see when items are opened as a content owner.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [event-apis]: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-events

  [user-events]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-06-16">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.12.1 Released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug when thumbnail representations are not found ([#597][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/597
</Update>

<Update label="2021-05-20">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.37.2 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix backwards compatibility issue by moving some TypeScript [`@types`][1] as direct dependencies ([#630][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/types

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/630
</Update>

<Update label="2021-05-19">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.37.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Insensitive language: replace `whitelist` with `allowlist` ([#625][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/625
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-22">
  ## Box UI Elements v13.0.0 released

  ## [13.0.0][1] (2021-04-22)

  ## Bug Fixes & Features

  This release fixes several bugs. For a full list, [please see the release notes][1]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases/tag/v13.0.0
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-20" description="Box iOS SDK v4.4.0 released">
  ## Box iOS SDK v4.4.0 released

  ## Breaking Changes

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for search parameter to get shared link items ([#756][1])
  * Add support for folder lock functionality ([#759][2])
  * Add support for `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` field for metadata templates ([#763][3])
  * Add support for stream upload of new file versions and add support for 'If-Match' header when uploading new file versions ([#766][4])
  * Add additional details field for `Event` model ([#770][5])

  ### Bug Fixes:\*\*

  * Pass only a scheme to iOS Authentication APIs ([#755][6])
  * Update `listEnterpriseGroups()` to use documented parameter for filtering by name ([#757][7])
  * Fix bug for OAuth where the callback is not called if token has been revoked ([#762][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/756

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/759

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/763

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/766

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/770

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/755

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/757

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/762
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-16">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.12.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add metadata query functionality ([#574][1])
  * Add folder lock functionality ([#581][2])
  * Add search query support for the `include_recent_shared_links` field  ([#582][3])
  * Update `get_groups()` to use documented parameter to filter by name ([#586][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/574

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/581

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/582

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/586
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-16">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.37.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` field for metadata templates ([#572][1])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix webhook signature validation ([#568][2])
  * Update dependencies to patch security vulnerabilities ([#578][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/572

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/568

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/578
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-15">
  ## Notice of behavior change for item download events

  Starting today, we will begin rolling out changes to the behavior
  of item download events when an application consumes those events from our
  [event API endpoints][event-apis].

  This change will only affect the
  `ITEM_DOWNLOAD` [user event][user-events] and will not affect existing
  [enterprise events][enterprise-events]. The new behavior will not cause
  downtime within existing applications or require any application changes to
  prevent uptime disruptions.

  ## Change overview

  Within the previous behavior when events were consumed, downloaded item
  events were surfaced through the `ITEM_DOWNLOAD` event type for the owner of
  the content as well as any contributors assigned to the content. This meant
  that if a file with 2000 collaborators on it was downloaded, the file owner
  plus all 2000 collaborators would have an event created stating that the file
  was downloaded.

  With the new behavior, notification of an item being downloaded will only be
  created for the owner of the content and will not be produced for
  collaborators. This will help to reduce the noise of the event stream while
  preserving the ability to see when items are downloaded as a content owner.

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please post a request to
  our [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [event-apis]: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-events/

  [user-events]: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/user-events/for-user/#event-types

  [enterprise-events]: https://developer.box.com/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/

  [user-access-token]: /guides/authentication/jwt/user-access-tokens/

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-13">
  ## New option for downscoping tokens using shared links

  When requesting an access token, you now have the ability to downscope that token to a file or folder using a shared link.

  This new parameter may be used instead of using the `resource` parameter, which allows you to supply a file or folder ID to perform the same action.

  ## Updates

  * Added new `box_shared_link` request parameter to [downscoping documentation][1]. A shared link may be supplied to downscope an access token in the below way.

  ```bash theme={null}
  {
    curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/oauth2/token" \
       -H "Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded" \
       -d "subject_token=[ACCESS_TOKEN]" \
       -d "subject_token_type=urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token" \
       -d "scope=item_upload item_preview base_explorer" \
       -d "box_shared_link=https://cloud.box.com/s/123456" \
       -d "grant_type=urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:token-exchange"
  }
  ```

  * Added `box_shared_link` request parameter to [request access token API reference][2].

  [1]: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/access-tokens/downscope/#downscoping-in-practice

  [2]: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-oauth2-token/#request
</Update>

<Update label="2021-04-01">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.54.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add file request support ([#869][1])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix `BoxWeblink` deserialization ([#881][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/869

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/881
</Update>

<Update label="2021-03-25">
  ## Service Account email added to Developer Console

  Upon Admin authorization of an application leveraging server authentication,
  the auto-generated email address of the Service Account is now surfaced in the
  General tab of the Developer Console. This email address can then be used to
  collaborate the user on Box content. The format will always be
  `AutomationUser_AppServiceID_RandomString@boxdevedition.com`. For example,
  `AutomationUser_123456_6jCo6Pqwo@boxdevedition.com`.

  To learn more, see our guide on [User Types][ut] and [Service Accounts][sa].

  ## Features

  * Added auto-generated email address of Service Account user to Developer
    Console

  [ut]: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/user-types/

  [sa]: https://developer.box.com/guides/authentication/user-types/service-account/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-03-25">
  ## New Metadata Query Indices Endpoint

  A new API endpoint has been introduced to get a list of metadata query indices
  for a given template and scope.

  Metadata queries provide a way to find files and folders by searching for the
  metadata attached to them.

  When performing metadata queries on 10,000 or more files or folders,
  non-performant queries may produce an `HTTP 403` error.
  Creating a search index delivers the ability to run
  these queries at scale to bypass this error state, and are automatically applied
  during the querying process.

  The new endpoint permits the lookup of these created search indices.

  ## Features

  This release has introduced the following new content and features.

  * New API endpoint to get a list of metadata query
    indices by scope and template.
  * New metadata query index [response object][mdq-index-response].
  * New metadata query indices [response object][mdq-indices-response].

  ## Updates

  This release includes the following updated content.

  * Updated metadata query indices guide to include details
    on how to get a list of metadata query indices.

  [mdq-indices-response]: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-query-index/

  [mdq-index-response]: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/metadata-query-indices/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-03-16">
  ## New Collection Events

  External collection events are now available via the
  [enterprise events][enterprise-events] stream.

  [Collections][collections] in Box are a way to group files, folders, and web
  links without putting them all into a folder together. These new events provide
  a method for monitoring when collection actions are taken within an enterprise.

  The events follow the standard event object schema, and include the
  following:

  * `COLLECTION_CREATE`: A collection was created
  * `COLLECTION_DELETE`: A collection was deleted
  * `COLLECTION_UPDATE`: A collection was updated
  * `COLLECTION_ITEM_CREATE`: An item was added to a collection
  * `COLLECTION_ITEM_DELETE`: An item was removed from a collection
  * `COLLECTION_ITEM_UPDATE`: An item in a collection was updated

  [enterprise-events]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/

  [collections]: /guides/collections/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-02-26">
  ## Box Shield Smart Access events

  External collaboration restriction and justification approval events are now
  available via the [enterprise events][events] stream.

  [Box Shield][box-shield] must be purchased and enabled on a Box enterprise in
  order to take advantage of these advanced security offerings.

  These events follow the standard [event object][eo] schema, with the
  `event_type` value set of:
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION`,
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_JUSTIFIED`,
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_INVITE_BLOCKED`
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED_MISSING_JUSTIFICATION`,
  `SHIELD_EXTERNAL_COLLAB_ACCESS_BLOCKED`, or
  `SHIELD_JUSTIFICATION_APPROVAL`.

  The `additional_details` payload of each event provides more information. Full
  details can be found in our \[Shield Events [guide][saguide].

  ## Features

  * Add support for Box Shield external collaboration and justification approval
    events to the enterprise events stream

  [box-shield]: https://www.box.com/shield

  [eo]: /reference/resources/event/

  [events]: /guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/

  [saguide]: /guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events/#smart-access
</Update>

<Update label="2021-02-26">
  ## Box CLI v2.9.0 released

  ## New Features and Enhancements

  * Add ability to add an option to a metadata template multi select field ([#230][1])
  * Add folder lock functionality ([#232][2])
  * Add support for search parameter to get shared link items ([#233][3])

  ## Bug Fixes

  * Fix events command bug when there is no stream position flag ([#234][4])
  * Fix bug with folders:upload command not uploading folder contents ([#231][5])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/230

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/232

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/233

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/234

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/231
</Update>

<Update label="2021-05-10">
  ## Box API response header changes that may impact your applications

  On May 10th, 2021, as part of our continued infrastructure upgrade, Box's API
  response headers will standardize to always return in a case-insensitive
  manner, in line with industry best practices and our API documentation.

  This change has the following potential impact:

  * [Salesforce SDK `v1`][salesforce-sdk-v1] users will be impacted and will need
    to upgrade to a recent SDK version. Not doing so will cause your Box
    Salesforce integration to cease functioning after May 10th, 2021.
  * Box API consumers who do not use one of the [Box SDKs][box-sdks] may be
    impacted and will need to verify header usage through their code. Depending on
    your header usage, not making adjustments may cause disruptions in your
    Box API integration.

  All customers and application admins who are potentially impacted have been
  notified directly via email.

  ## Change overview

  Applications that are using the return headers described above, such as
  `location` and `retry-after`, will need to verify that their applications are
  checking for these headers in a case-insensitive fashion. Over the past 12
  months Box has been upgrading its networking and observability infrastructure.
  These upgrades aim to improve reliability and availability of Box's products
  for our customers. This specific change allows Box to deploy an updated service
  proxy, enabling Box to better monitor service traffic, quickly find
  problem areas, and tune application performance.

  ## API Consumers: Verifying application impact

  Verifying whether your application(s) will be impacted will require a review of
  your code. If you are solely using one of the official Box SDKs to connect to
  Box APIs, you will not be impacted as the SDKs handle response headers in a
  case-insensitive manner.

  You may verify whether you are impacted with the following steps:

  * Locate the code in your application which handles the responses from Box API
    requests. If you are not extracting the response headers from these responses,
    you are not impacted.
  * If you are extracting those response headers, you may be impacted if you are
    expecting those headers in a case-sensitive fashion.

  For instance, if you are expecting the `Location` header to be returned with a
  starting capital `L`, a direct string comparison with a specific case, then
  your code will need to be altered to prevent it from breaking after the change
  is made.

  ## API Consumers: How to make the change

  To update the impacted application(s), ensure that you are checking these
  response headers in a case-insensitive manner. Specifically, your code should
  be built in a defensive way to ensure that if a header, such as `Location`, is
  sent with an initial capital `L` or a lowercase `l`, it'll be handled in the
  same way. For example, forcing all headers to lowercase before checking, or
  using a case-insensitive regex string check, are two viable methods for
  handling this process.

  ## Salesforce SDK `v1` users: Verifying application impact

  If you are unsure whether you are using `v1.0` of the Box Salesforce SDK, go to
  the application code location where you have stored the Box Salesforce SDK and
  do the following:

  Load the following Salesforce SDK file: `src/classes/BoxApiRequest.cls`

  Look for the following lines ([should be lines 6-7][salesforce-code]):

  ```apex theme={null}
  public final static String HEADER_LOCATION_LOWER_CASE = 'location';
  public final static String HEADER_LOCATION_CAPITALIZED = 'Location';
  ```

  If those lines are present then you are using `v1.1.0` or later of the
  Salesforce SDK, which is not impacted and no changes are needed. If those lines
  are not present then you are using `v1.0` of the Salesforce SDK, which will be
  impacted and will need to be updated.

  ## Salesforce SDK `v1` users: How to make the change

  To update the impacted application(s), you will need to update the version of
  the Salesforce SDK that you are using. It is recommended that you upgrade to
  the [most recent version][salesforce-sdk] of the SDK, but anything from
  [`v1.1.0` or later][salesforce-sdk-releases] will be adequate to ensure that
  there is no impact to your application(s).

  ## Where to get support

  Should you have any issues or need further guidance, please
  [file a ticket][support] with our support team or post a request to our
  [developer forum][forum] for any help needed.

  [salesforce-sdk-v1]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk/releases/tag/1.0.0

  [salesforce-sdk]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk

  [salesforce-sdk-releases]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk/releases

  [salesforce-code]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk/compare/1.0.0...v1.1.0#diff-1855f83ffd4977e5b9e4bfc167154f2e11b0161fd6c380502c48082b6837b0af

  [box-sdks]: https://developer.box.com/sdks-and-tools/

  [support]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/requests/new

  [forum]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/community/topics/360001932973-Platform-and-Developer-Forum
</Update>

<Update label="2021-02-01">
  ## Box iOS SDK v4.3.0 released

  ## Breaking Changes

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for OAuth 2 custom callback URL ([#746][1])
  * Add support for zip download ([#749][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Update gems to patch `kramdown` vulnerability ([#742][3])
  * Update gems to patch `activesupport` vulnerability ([#745][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/746

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/749

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/742

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/745
</Update>

<Update label="2021-01-28">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.36.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add folder lock functionality ([#560][1])
  * Add support for filtering groups by name ([#561][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Update proxy-agent to patch proxy support issue ([#563][3])
  * Update dependencies to patch security vulnerabilities ([#566][4])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/560

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/561

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/563

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/566
</Update>

<Update label="2021-01-25">
  ## Maximum upload file size limit increases

  The maximum file size that may be uploaded via the API has been increased for
  the following Box account plans.

  * Business Plus
  * Enterprise
  * Digital Workplace Suite
  * Digital Workplace Global Suite

  The prior maximum upload file size for these account types was **5 GB**. This
  update increases the maximum file size to **15 GB**, effective immediately.

  For more information on the maximum file sizes for all account plans, please
  refer to the [direct uploads][direct-uploads] documentation.

  [direct-uploads]: /guides/uploads/direct/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-01-15">
  ## Metadata Query index changes

  When making file / folder [metadata query][mdq] requests, a
  search index needs to be created for queries where more than
  10,000 files / folders are being searched.

  To improve the efficiency and simplicity of this process, we have changed the
  way in which indexes are used by removing the explicit requirement to supply an
  index through the `use_index` key in a metadata query API request.

  There is no impact to existing applications that are currently supplying an
  index through the `use_index` key. The supplied index will be ignored in
  the request and the most efficient index will be automatically applied.

  ## Previous Indexing Process

  The following was the previous process for creating and using an index for a
  metadata query request involving 10,000+ files / folders in the search. This is
  the process being replaced.

  * Contact the metadata query team to request an index.
  * The metadata query team would create the index and supply back the name of
    the newly created index.
  * When making metadata query requests this index name was
    supplied as the value for the `use_index` key in the API request.

  ## New Indexing Process

  The following is the new process for creating and using an index.

  * Contact the metadata query team to request an index.

  The `use_index` key within the metadata query API request has been removed.
  Instead, the most efficient query will be automatically applied during the
  search process.

  Indexes that are currently supplied in the `use_index` key will be ignored, and
  instead the most efficient index will be used.

  Application owners may safely remove the `use_index` key and value from their
  metadata query requests at their discretion.

  [mdq]: /guides/metadata/queries/
</Update>

<Update label="2021-01-15">
  ## Developer Console Updates

  A new **Authorization** tab is now available in the Developer Console. In
  addition, clarifying UI changes were made to the **Application Access** and
  **Scope** settings within the **Configuration** tab to ease these decisions.
  These changes do not impact the functionality of the settings.

  Now, developers will navigate to the  **Authorization** tab to submit the
  application directly to their Box Admin for authorization approval.

  As for the **Configuration** tab, helpful tips were added to the JWT
  **Application Access** settings to facilitate a clear decision
  between **App Only Access** or **App Access + Enterprise Access**.
  The **Scope** section is now grouped by action type: content, administrative,
  and developer.

  * **App Approval Process**: [Guide](/guides/authorization/platform-app-approval)
  * **Scopes**: [Guide](/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/scopes)
  * **Application Access**:
    [Guide](/guides/authentication/jwt/jwt-setup/#application-access)

  ## Updates

  * Added Authorization tab to the Developer Console
  * Updated the UI for JWT Application Access settings under the Configuration tab
  * Updated the UI grouping of Scopes under the Configuration tab
</Update>

<Update label="2021-01-11">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.11.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Deprecate and add method for getting a thumbnail ([#572][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/pull/572
</Update>

<Update label="2021-01-09">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.53.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add offset and limit parameters to `BoxFolder.getChildren` ([#861][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/861
</Update>

<Update label="2020-12-14">
  ## Blank OAuth 2 redirect URI change

  On September 28th, 2020 we announced upcoming changes to our
  [security requirements for OAuth 2 app redirect URIs][oauth2-changelog-notice].
  As of today, applications that use a blank redirect URI will no longer be
  permitted, and will begin to produce an error stating `redirect_uri missing`
  when attempting to redirect the user, stating that there is a mismatched URI.

  Impacted applications will have received multiple emails to the developer email
  address associated with the application and account, and are part of a small
  subset of applications that were grandfathered in to allow the functionality to
  persist.

  New applications, or any OAuth 2 applications that have a redirect URI
  specified are not impacted.

  ## How to update your OAuth 2 app redirect URI

  If your OAuth 2 application has started to produce an error during the redirect
  phase, you may be impacted by this change. To update your application(s),
  use the following steps:

  * Go to the
    [Box developer console][dev-console] as the
    user who owns the application(s).
  * From the top navigation, click on **Configuration**.
  * Scroll down to the **OAuth 2.0 Redirect URI** section. 
  * For any application where this URI is blank, add the URI that is being used
    in the application code when redirecting the user back to your application
    from the Box auth step,
    [as is described in this guide](/guides/authentication/oauth2/with-sdk/#2-redirect-user).

  [oauth2-changelog-notice]: https://developer.box.com/changelog/#2020-09-29-changes-to-oauth-2-app-redirect-url-requirements

  [dev-console]: https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console
</Update>

<Update label="2020-12-03">
  ## New type field in search API responses

  A new field, `type`, has been introduced in the
  [search result response object][search_result_shared_link] for returned shared
  link items.

  This response object format is only returned when making calls to the
  [content search][search_content] endpoint with the
  `include_recent_shared_links` query parameter set to `true`.

  There is no impact to existing applications that are currently consuming this
  response object.

  ## Updates

  Prior to this release, the return object for shared link search results
  included two objects:

  * `accessible_via_shared_link`: The shared link which the item is accessible
    from.
  * `item`: The file, folder, or web link that matched the search query.

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "accessible_via_shared_link": "https://www.box.com/s/vfejh7y01sb263wjtgfe",
    "item": {
      ...
    }
  }
  ```

  This update introduces the new `type` field, which is a string that will always
  be set to `search_result`.

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "type": "search_result",
    "accessible_via_shared_link": "https://www.box.com/s/vfejh7y01sb263wjtgfe",
    "item": {
      ...
    }
  }
  ```

  For complete format information see the
  [shared link search result][search_result_shared_link] response object.

  [search_content]: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-search/

  [search_result_shared_link]: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/search-result-with-shared-link/
</Update>

<Update label="2020-12-03">
  ## Box CLI v2.8.0 released

  ## Warning

  * Due to the changes in ([#217][1]), additional details about Box Items may now be returned for some commands.

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Output contents of array for bulk commands ([#217][1])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug with setting proxy settings ([#218][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/217

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/218
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-24">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.52.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add folder lock functionality ([#856][1])
  * Add support for search parameter to get shared link
    items ([#855][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug with updating tracking codes ([#857][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/856

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/855

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/857
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-17">
  ## Announcing Client Credentials Grant authentication

  A new method for authenticating your JWT applications is now released.
  This new method, Client Credentials Grant, does not impact existing applications
  but offers an easier way to authenticate for new apps. Prior to today, we
  required a public/private key pair and assertion to verify an application’s
  identity and retrieve an Access Token. Now, you can request a token using only
  your client ID and client secret.

  ```cURL theme={null}
  curl --location --request POST ‘https://api.box.com/oauth2/token’ \
  --header ‘Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded’ \
  --data-urlencode ‘client_id=<client_id>’ \
  --data-urlencode ‘client_secret=<client_secret>’ \
  --data-urlencode ‘grant_type=client_credentials’ \
  --data-urlencode ‘box_subject_type=enterprise’ \
  --data-urlencode ‘box_subject_id=<enterprise_id>’
  ```

  For further information, please visit our [guide][guide].

  ## Updates

  * Added client credentials grant as an auth option for new applications
  * Added 2FA requirement to copy/view client secret
  * Added selected authentication method in the Enterprise Authorization request
  * Removed the ability to change authentication type

  [guide]: /guides/authentication/jwt/without-sdk/#client-credentials-grant
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-17">
  ## Box iOS SDK v4.2.0 released

  ## Breaking Changes

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add error information for disconnected OAuth web sessions

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug with creating collaboration
  * Fix bug with getting enterprise events
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-13">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.51.1 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix for cross-enterprise collaborator calls to `updateMetadata`
    on files
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-13">
  ## Box Content Preview v2.57.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add react versions of core control components ([#1282][1282])
  * Add react versions of existing control icons ([#1280][1280])
  * Add react versions of fullscreen and zoom controls ([#1283][1283])
  * Add react versions of text viewer controls ([#1284][1284])
  * Add instrumentation for annotation creation ([#1275][1275])
  * Upgrade `react` and `react-dom` to `^16.9.0` ([#1278][1278])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Select newly created annotation ([#1276][1276])
  * Allow download of files via embedded links in Chrome ([#1277][1277])
  * Revert `pdf.js` to `v2.2.228` due to font rendering issue ([#1274][1274])

  [1282]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1282

  [1280]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1280

  [1283]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1283

  [1284]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1284

  [1275]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1275

  [1278]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1278

  [1276]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1276

  [1277]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1277

  [1274]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/pull/1274
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-09">
  ## Simplified App Creation Flow

  A new, simplified app creation flow is now available in the Box
  [Developer Console](https://app.box.com/developers/console). The three
  types of applications are Custom Apps, Limited Access Apps, and Box Custom
  Skills.

  We added plain language to describe exactly when to select each
  app type and links to relevant documentation if you require additional
  information to help with your selection. The application type you select impacts
  which authentication methods are available.

  Most notably, is our new app type, Limited Access Apps. Select this app type if
  you'd like to leverage [Box View](/guides/embed/box-view/) or Box's preview services
  within another application. This app type only provides access to
  [app token authentication](/guides/authentication/app-token/), which has
  [restricted API capabilities](/guides/authentication/app-token/endpoints/).
  For full details, please visit our [guide](/guides/applications/app-types/select/) on
  selecting an app type.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-04">
  ## Box CLI v2.7.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Make commands `collaborations:add`, `shared-links:update`, `shared-links:delete`, `users:search` that were previously hidden, now available ([#211][1])
  * Add `filter_term` parameter to `groups:list` ([#210][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug with setting proxy settings ([#213][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/211

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/210

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/213
</Update>

<Update label="2020-11-02">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.35.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for search parameter to get shared link items ([#547][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/547
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-29">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.51.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` field for metadata templates ([#850][1])
  * Add support for more fields in `BoxCollaborator.Info` ([#843][2])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Update `getAllGroupsByName()` to use documented parameter ([#851][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/850

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/843

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/851
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-26">
  ## New Folder Lock APIs now available

  A new collections of APIs have been released to allow developers to lock move
  and delete operations on folders. New [API reference][e_post] and
  [guides][g_post] have been made available to help create and manage you folder
  locks.

  To create a lock on a folder to prevent it from being moved or deleted, supply
  the ID of a folder to the `folder_locks` endpoint.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folder_locks" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "folder": {
           "type": "folder",
           "id": "33552487093"
         }
       }'
  ```

  Additional API endpoints are available to allow a developer to list all locks
  on a given folder, or to delete an existing folder lock with a folder lock ID.

  * **Create a folder lock**: [Guide][g_post] | [API Reference][e_post]
  * **List all locks on a folder**: [Guide][g_get] | [API Reference][e_get]
  * **Delete a folder lock**: [Guide][g_del] | [API Reference][e_del]

  [e_get]: /reference/get-folder-locks

  [e_post]: /reference/post-folder-locks

  [e_del]: /reference/delete-folder-locks-id

  [g_get]: /guides/folders/single/get-locks

  [g_post]: /guides/folders/single/create-lock

  [g_del]: /guides/folders/single/delete-lock
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-22">
  ## New Folder Lock APIs now available

  A new collections of APIs have been released to permit the restriction of move
  and delete actions on folders. New [API reference][e_post] and [guides][g_post]
  have been made available to help create and manage you folder locks.

  To create a lock on a folder to prevent it from being moved or deleted, supply
  the ID of a folder to the `POST /folder_locks/` endpoint.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/folder_locks" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
       -d '{
         "folder": {
           "type": "folder",
           "id": "33552487093"
         }
       }'
  ```

  Additional API endpoints are available to allow a developer to list all locks
  on a given folder, or to remove an existing folder lock from a folder.

  * **Create a folder lock**: [Guide][g_post] | [API Reference][e_post]
  * **List all locks on a folder**: [Guide][g_get] | [API Reference][e_get]
  * **Remove a folder lock**: [Guide][g_del] | [API Reference][e_del]

  [e_get]: /reference/get-folder-locks

  [e_post]: /reference/post-folder-locks

  [e_del]: /reference/delete-folder-locks-id

  [g_get]: /guides/folders/single/get-locks

  [g_post]: /guides/folders/single/create-lock

  [g_del]: /guides/folders/single/delete-lock
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-21">
  ## Metadata Cascade Policies API leaves Beta

  The [Metadata Cascade Policies API][mdc_api] is now generally available to all
  and no longer in Beta.

  Over the past years, we've made a lot of technical improvements to our metadata
  infrastructure and we're happy to announce that we've now gotten to the moment
  where the Metadata Cascade Policies API is leaving Beta. This release does not
  involve any breaking changes and any existing application should not see any
  impact from this release.

  Since we initially launched, Metadata Cascade Policies has become over 10 times
  faster when applying metadata to new instances. Additionally, we've also made
  significant strides in reliability and observability to ensure a top-notch API
  experience, in line with the rest of our API suite.

  For more details about metadata, and metadata cascade policies, please visit the
  [Metadata guides][guides] and our dedicated [Metadata Cascade Policies][mdc_api]
  reference documentation.

  [mdc_api]: /reference/post-metadata-cascade-policies

  [guides]: /guides/metadata
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-19" description="Box Windows SDK v3.25.0 released">
  ## Box Windows SDK v3.25.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for filtering when getting Groups ([#703][1])
  * Add zip functionality ([#700][2])
  * Deprecate one of the overloaded `ExecuteMetadataQueryAsync()` methods ([#699][3])
  * Add support for `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` field for metadata templates  ([#698][4])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug with JWT Authentication automatic retry ([#697][5])

  [`www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.25.0`][6]
  [`www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.25.0`][7]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/703

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/700

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/699

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/698

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/issues/697

  [6]: https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.25.0

  [7]: https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.25.0
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-08">
  ## Search API adds support for Shared Links

  The [Search API][endpoint] now supports returning files,
  folders and web links that the user has recently accessed
  through a shared link.

  Shared items can be requested by calling the
  [`GET /search`][endpoint] API with the new
  `include_recent_shared_links` query parameter set to `true`.

  ```sh theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=Contract&include_recent_shared_link=true
  ```

  By default, the API won't return any shared items if this
  query parameter is not provided or not set to true.

  ## Change in response format

  When `include_recent_shared_links` is set to `true`, the
  response has slightly changed to allow for the additional
  information to be returned. Rather than returning a direct list
  of files, folders, and web links the API now returns a list of
  objects containing an `item` and an `accessible_via_shared_link`
  property.

  <Tabs>
    <Tab title="With shared link results">
      ```json theme={null}
      {
        "entries": [
          {
            "item": {
              "id": 12345,
              "etag": 1,
              "type": "file",
              "sequence_id": 3,
              "name": "Contract.pdf",
              ...
            },
            "accessible_via_shared_link": "https://www.box.com/s/vspke7y05sb214wjokpk"
          }
          ...
        ],
        "limit": 1000,
        "offset": 2000,
        "total_count": 5000
      }
      ```
    </Tab>

    <Tab title="Without">
      ```json theme={null}
      {
        "entries": [
          {
            "id": 12345,
            "etag": 1,
            "type": "file",
            "sequence_id": 3,
            "name": "Contract.pdf",
            ...
          },
          ...
        ],
        "limit": 1000,
        "offset": 2000,
        "total_count": 5000
      }
      ```
    </Tab>
  </Tabs>

  This change in response format should not impact any existing applications
  as it only applies to any API call made with the new query parameter.

  [endpoint]: /reference/get-search
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-05">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.34.3 released

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Upgrade `ajv` dependency ([#545][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/545
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-02">
  ## New File Request APIs available

  A new collection of APIs are now available that allows
  developers to create and update File Requests. We've
  updated the [reference documentation][copy] and added
  [new guides][guides] to help you manage your file requests.

  To create a copy of an existing file request, all you need is
  the unique ID of an existing file request, and the ID of the
  folder to apply the new request to.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X POST "https://api.box.com/2.0/file_requests/42037322/copy" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" \
       -d '{
         "folder": {
           "id": "2233212"
         }
       }'
  ```

  Additional APIs are available that allow a developer to get more details
  about a file request, update a file request, and delete a file request.
  For more details, please check out the developer documentation.

  * **Create a template file request**: [Guide][g_template]
  * **Create a copy of a file request**: [Guide][g_copy] | [API Reference][copy]
  * **Get information about a file request**: [Guide][g_get] | [API Reference][get]
  * **Update a file request's configuration**: [Guide][g_put] | [API Reference][put]
  * **Delete a file request**: [Guide][g_del] | [API Reference][del]

  [copy]: /reference/post-file-requests-id-copy

  [get]: /reference/get-file-requests-id

  [del]: /reference/delete-file-requests-id

  [put]: /reference/put-file-requests-id

  [guides]: /guides/file-requests

  [g_template]: /guides/file-requests/template

  [g_copy]: /guides/file-requests/copy

  [g_get]: /guides/file-requests/get

  [g_del]: /guides/file-requests/delete

  [g_put]: /guides/file-requests/update
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-02">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.10.0 released

  ### New Features and Enhancements

  * Add support for `copyInstanceOnItemCopy` field for metadata templates ([#546][1])
  * Allow creating tasks with the `action` and `completion_rule` parameters ([#544][2])
  * Add Zip functionality ([#539][3])

  ### Bug Fixes

  * Fix bug with updating a collaboration role to owner ([#536][4])
  * Allow `ints` to be passed in as item IDs ([#530][5])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/546

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/544

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/539

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/536

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk/pull/530
</Update>

<Update label="2020-10-29">
  ## Change to OAuth 2 app redirect URI requirements

  On October 29th, 2020, Box will begin employing stricter requirements for
  redirect URIs used within new and existing
  [OAuth 2](/guides/authentication/oauth2/)-based Box integrations that may affect
  your application.

  Existing application owners that currently use a blank redirect URI in their
  application configuration, as
  [described here](/guides/authentication/oauth2/oauth2-setup/#redirect-uri), will
  need to update the redirect URI to match the redirect used within the code
  redirect step,
  [described here](/guides/authentication/oauth2/with-sdk/#2-redirect-user).

  On October 29th, 2020, applications that are still configured with a blank URI
  will begin returning an error when the user is redirected back to your
  application if URI adjustments aren't made.

  All impacted application owners and collaborators have been notified via
  the email address associated with their developer account.

  ## How to validate and make the change

  To validate your redirect URI and update your application(s) if they are
  affected, take the following steps:

  * Go to the
    [Box developer console](https://cloud.app.box.com/developers/console) as the
    user who owns the application(s).
  * For each **Custom App** using **OAuth 2** (client-side authentication) click
    on the application to open it.
  * From the left navigation, click on **Configuration**.
  * Scroll down to the **OAuth 2.0 Redirect URI** section. 
  * For any application where this URI is blank, add the URI that is being used
    in the application code when redirecting the user back to your application
    from the Box auth step,
    [as is described in this guide](/guides/authentication/oauth2/with-sdk/#2-redirect-user).
</Update>

<Update label="2020-09-25">
  ## Search API adds support for Shared Links

  The [Search API][endpoint] now supports returning files,
  folders and web links that the user has recently accessed
  through a shared link.

  Shared items can be requested by calling the
  [`GET /search`][endpoint] API with the new
  `include_recent_shared_links` query parameter set to `true`.

  ```sh theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET https://api.box.com/2.0/search?query=Contract&include_recent_shared_link=true
  ```

  By default, the API won't return any shared items if this
  query parameter is not provided or not set to true.

  ## Change in response format

  When `include_recent_shared_links` is set to `true`, the
  response has slightly changed to allow for the additional
  information to be returned. Rather than returning a direct list
  of files, folders, and web links the API now returns a list of
  objects containing an `item` and an `accessible_via_shared_link`
  property.

  <Tabs>
    <Tab title="With shared link results">
      ```json theme={null}
      {
        "entries": [
          {
            "item": {
              "id": 12345,
              "etag": 1,
              "type": "file",
              "sequence_id": 3,
              "name": "Contract.pdf",
              ...
            },
            "accessible_via_shared_link": "https://www.box.com/s/vspke7y05sb214wjokpk"
          }
          ...
        ],
        "limit": 1000,
        "offset": 2000,
        "total_count": 5000
      }
      ```
    </Tab>

    <Tab title="Without">
      ```json theme={null}
      {
        "entries": [
          {
            "id": 12345,
            "etag": 1,
            "type": "file",
            "sequence_id": 3,
            "name": "Contract.pdf",
            ...
          },
          ...
        ],
        "limit": 1000,
        "offset": 2000,
        "total_count": 5000
      }
      ```
    </Tab>
  </Tabs>

  This change in response format should not impact any existing applications
  as it only applies to any API call made with the new query parameter.

  [endpoint]: /reference/get-search
</Update>

<Update label="2020-09-10">
  ## Group API adds new filter and permissions

  The [`GET /groups`](/reference/get-groups) API now supports
  filtering groups by name using a new `filter_term` field.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/groups?filter_term=Engineering" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  Additionally, all the Group endpoints now allow a developer to request
  a new
  [`permissions`](/reference/resources/group--full/#param-permissions)
  field, which currently has one attribute defining
  if the authenticated user can invite the group to any item.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -i -X GET "https://api.box.com/2.0/groups?field=permissions" \
       -H "Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>"
  ```

  ```json theme={null}
  {
      "total_count": 1,
      "entries": [
          {
              "type": "group",
              "id": "223353242",
              "permissions": {
                  "can_invite_as_collaborator": true
              }
          }
      ],
      "limit": 100,
      "offset": 0
  }
  ```

  For more details about how to work with groups, please visit the
  [`Group API documentation`](/reference/get-groups).
</Update>

<Update label="2020-08-25">
  ## New multiSelect metadata support in search API

  Starting today, the [Search API][search] adds support for matching items
  by multiple values of a [`multiSelect` metadata field][multi_select]. Before this
  change, it was not possible to find items by the value of a `multiSelect` field.

  To perform a search for items where a metadata field matches
  multiple values, the `mdfilters` parameter now supports a list of values.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -G 'https://api.box.com/2.0/search' \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>' \
       -d 'mdfilters=[{"scope":"enterprise_12345","templateKey":"contractInfo","filters":{"products":["shield","platform"]}}]'
  ```

  In this example, the `mdfilters` query parameter contains one filter with a
  `scope`, a `templateKey`, and a set of `filters`. Here is the same filter
  in a more readable format.

  ```json theme={null}
  [
    {
      "scope": "enterprise_12345",
      "templateKey": "contractInfo",
      "filters": {
        "products": [
          "shield",
          "platform"
        ]
      }
    }
  ]
  ```

  What is new here is that the `products` filter now performs a match on multiple
  values, only returning files and folders for which the template has a `products`
  value of either `shield` or `platform`. The value of the field can contain
  multiple values and only match on one of the values specified in the filter.
  For example `["shield", "governance"]` will be a match for the filter
  `["shield", "platform"]` as `shield` is included in the filter.

  [search]: /reference/get-search

  [multi_select]: /guides/metadata/fields/multi-select
</Update>

<Update label="2020-08-21">
  ## Box CLI v2.6.0 released

  [CHANGELOG][1]

  * Add zip functionality ([#203][2]) [`1953639`][3]
  * Add proxy support for `http`, `https`, `socks` and `pac` protocols. Proxy settings can be found under `box configure:settings` ([#202][4]) [`21671c8`][5]
  * Fix filename issue when saving reports on Windows ([#195][6]) [`31853d3`][7]

  [https://github.com/box/boxcli/compare/v2.5.1...v2.6.0][8]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#260-2020-08-20

  [2]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/203

  [3]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/1953639fe78def22e9c9d392e784577fc089f842

  [4]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/202

  [5]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/21671c854a3fe835eb46df6e640fa2237d23a313

  [6]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/issues/195

  [7]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/31853d30e9e20a1dc6967a8277fa38165ca671f4

  [8]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/compare/v2.5.1...v2.6.0
</Update>

<Update label="2020-08-20">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.34.2 released

  * Make iterator bug fix for uploading files non breaking ([#534][1]) [`b0baa18`][2]

  [https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.34.1...v1.34.2][3]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/534

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/b0baa18ef6d9dab99fd1db5b898d2cce46e5521d

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.34.1...v1.34.2
</Update>

<Update label="2020-08-20">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.50.1 released

  Fix bug that occurred when downscoping a token for a Box folder ([#832][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/832
</Update>

<Update label="2020-08-17">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.34.1 released

  * Fix iterator bug for uploading new file versions ([#531][1]) [`69b1387`][2]

  [https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.34.0...v1.34.1][3]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/531

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/69b138746c64ac8ee68b421853ca9ff4cc28531e

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.34.0...v1.34.1
</Update>

<Update label="2020-08-07">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.34.0 released

  * Add zip functionality ([#525][1]) [`2f89357`][2]
  * Add proxy support for HTTP, HTTPS, SOCKS and PAC protocols ([#529][3]) [`b08cc24`][4]

  [https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.33.0...v1.34.0][5]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/525

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/2f893577fd06dcac449ac9bfeb72cd76e1e839ae

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/529

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/b08cc24f240075fb24d9e5827f50ec9e26eeebc8

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.33.0...v1.34.0
</Update>

<Update label="2020-01-31">
  ## Updates to Search Relevance & Performance

  In January, updates were released to Box's search [tokenizer][wiki-tokenizer],
  improving the relevancy of search results and performance. This change does not
  effect how metadata is tokenized.

  Notable changes to the API-initiated searches include:

  * The ability to use "[stop words][wiki-stop-words]", for example "the", "is"
    "at", "which", and "on".
  * Improved Japanese text tokenization and improved search results.

  See the [full-text search][search_guide] documentation for more
  information on how to search using Box's API.

  [wiki-stop-words]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_words

  [wiki-tokenizer]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lexical_analysis#Tokenization

  [search_guide]: /guides/search
</Update>

<Update label="2020-07-22">
  ## New Zip Download APIs available

  A new collection of APIs are now available that allows developers to create a
  Zip file containing a specified list of files and folders. We've updated the
  reference documentation for this [Zip Download API][zip_downloads_api]. SDK
  support for these new endpoints is currently in development and scheduled
  to be released in the next 3 months.

  [zip_downloads_api]: /reference/post-zip-downloads
</Update>

<Update label="2020-07-22">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.50.0 released

  1. Add retries on request creation errors ([#828][1])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/828
</Update>

<Update label="2020-07-21">
  ## Box Windows SDK v3.24.0 released

  See [Changelog][1] for details.

  Commits: [https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/v3.23.0...v3.24.0][2]

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.24.0`][3]
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.24.0`][4]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3240-2020-07-21

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/v3.23.0...v3.24.0

  [3]: https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.24.0

  [4]: https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.24.0
</Update>

<Update label="2020-07-17">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.49.0 released

  1. Add `fields` parameter for metadata query ([#826][1])
  2. Add zip functionality ([#825][2])
  3. Fix bug with setting the unshared at date for a shared link ([#819][3])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/826

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/825

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/819
</Update>

<Update label="2020-07-16">
  ## Change to enterprise events for content access

  Starting today, the [enterprise event stream](/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/) will
  begin producing new content access events.

  A new `CONTENT_ACCESS` event is triggered when a file was accessed by an
  authorized user or programmatically by a Box application.

  See the [enterprise events](/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/) documentation
  for more information on other event types.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-07-15">
  ## Changes to Metadata Query API syntax

  The [Metadata Query API][g_mdq_api] has been updated to **require explicitly
  defined response fields**.

  [g_mdq_api]: /guides/metadata/queries

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_queries/execute_read \
        -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" '
        -H 'Content-Type: application/json'
        -d '{
          "from": "enterprise_123456.customerInfo",
          "query": "tav >= :value",
          "query_params": {
            "value": 200000
          },
          "fields": [
            "name",
            "metadata.enterprise_123456.customerInfo.tav"
         ],
          "ancestor_folder_id": "0"
        }'
  ```

  Additionally, **the response format now returns a list of items** rather
  than a list of query results. Any metadata is now nested within the item,
  rather than listed side-by-side with the item. Only fields specified in the
  `field` array - as well as any base fields - are returned in the response.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "entries": [{
      "id": "394384323",
      "type": "file",
      "etag": 1,
      "name": "Contract.pdf",
      "metadata": {
        "enterprise_123456": {
          "customerInfo": {
            "$parent": "folder_12345,",
            "$scope": "enterprise_123456",
            "$template": "customerInfo",
            "$version": 1,
            "tav": 1000000
          }
        }
      }
    }]
  }
  ```

  ## Legacy syntax

  For reference, the API would previously return all standard fields for an item
  as well as the matched metadata.

  ```curl theme={null}
  curl -X POST https://api.box.com/2.0/metadata_queries/execute_read \
        -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>" '
        -H 'Content-Type: application/json'
        -d '{
          "from": "enterprise_123456.customerInfo",
          "query": "tav >= :value",
          "query_params": {
            "value": 200000
          },
          "ancestor_folder_id": "0"
        }'
  ```

  The response body previously returned the items as a list of entries, each
  containing an `item` and a `metadata` instance.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    "entries":[
      {
        "item":{
          "type":"file",
          "id":"394384323",
          "name": "Contract.pdf",
          "file_version":{
            "type":"file_version",
            "id":"33482348",
            "sha1":"69888bb1bff455d1b2f8afea75ed1ff0b4879bf6"
          },
          ...
        },
        "metadata":{
          "enterprise_123456":{
            "customerInfo":{
              "tav": 1000000,
              "$id": "01234500-12f1-1234-aa12-b1d234cb567e",
              "$parent": "folder_12345,",
              "$scope": "enterprise_123456",
              "$template": "customerInfo",
              "$type": "customerInfo-6bcba49f-ca6d-4d2a-a758-57fe6edf44d0",
              "$typeVersion": 2,
              "$version": 1,
              "$canEdit": true
            }
          }
        }
      },
      ...
    ],
    "limit": 20,
    "next_marker":"AAAAAmVYB1FWec8GH6yWu2nwmanfMh07IyYInaa7DZDYjgO1H4KoLW29vPlLY173OKsci6h6xGh61gG73gnaxoS+o0BbI1/h6le6cikjlupVhASwJ2Cj0tOD9wlnrUMHHw3/ISf+uuACzrOMhN6d5fYrbidPzS6MdhJOejuYlvsg4tcBYzjauP3+VU51p77HFAIuObnJT0ff"
  }
  ```

  This legacy syntax **will still be available for any existing Metadata Query API
  users only**. The legacy syntax will be turned off When all existing customers
  have been migrated over to the new syntax.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-06-25">
  ## Box Node SDK v1.33.0 released

  * Add path parameter sanitization ([#505][1]) [`46b780a`][2]
  * Add support for all streams for uploading files ([#519][3]) [`93a27ec`][4]

  [https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.32.0...v1.33.0][5]

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/505

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/46b780a577999262f09f167c577471275c066609

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/issues/519

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/93a27ec8a5cdf4cb23d16d322e1e884913472239

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/v1.32.0...v1.33.0
</Update>

<Update label="2020-06-24">
  ## Box Java SDK v2.48.0 released

  `v2.48.0`

  1. Add ability to get groups by name with fields option ([#789][1])
  2. Add shared link downscoping ([#785][2])
  3. Deprecate the use of float for Metadata values, in preference of the underlying value (double) ([#811][3])
  4. Add iterator support for group collaborations ([#813][4])
  5. Add ability to set the filename when uploading a new version of a file ([#810][5])
  6. Add support for the classification field for Files and Folders ([#809][6])
  7. Add support for setting Tracking Codes ([#766][7])
  8. Fix issue for `getIsExternallyOwned()` for Files and Folders ([#808][8])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/789

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/785

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/811

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/813

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/810

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/809

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/766

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/issues/808
</Update>

<Update label="2020-06-23">
  ## Box Python SDK v2.9.0 released

  * Fix exception handling for OAuth
  * Fix path parameter sanitization
</Update>

<Update label="2020-06-11">
  ## Change to enterprise events for tasks

  Starting today, the [enterprise event stream](/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/) will
  begin producing new task and task assignment events, and some existing task
  events will return additional fields.

  ## New events

  * A new `TASK_UPDATE` event is triggered when a task is updated
  * A new `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_DELETE` event is triggered when a task is unassigned
    from a user

  ## Updated events

  ### Changes to `TASK_CREATE`

  When a task is created, the event now includes the task's ID (`task.id`), the ID
  of the user who created the task (`task.created_by.id`), the task's description
  (`task.message`), and the optional due date of the task  (`task.due_date`)
  within the `additional_details` object.

  ```json theme={null}
  "additional_details": {
    "task": {
      "id": "1234567",
      "due_at": "2020-07-06T10:49:44-07:00",
      "message": "task description",
      "created_by": {
        "id": 123456,
        "login": "email@example.com"
      },
      ...
    }
  }
  ```

  ### Changes to `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_CREATE` and `TASK_ASSIGNMENT_UPDATE`

  When a task assignment is created or updated, the event now includes the task's
  ID (`task.id`), the ID of the assigned user (`task_assignment.assigned_to.id`)
  and their login (`task_assignment.assigned_to.login`), the task's description
  (`task.message`), and the optional due date of the task (`task.due_date`) within
  the `additional_details` object.

  ```json theme={null}
  "additional_details": {
    "task": {
      "id": "1234567",
      "created_by": {
        "id": 12345,
        "login": "email@example.com"
      }
    },
    "task_assignment": {
      "assigned_to": {
        "id": 12346,
        "login": "email+2@example.com"
      },
      "status": "NOT_STARTED",
      "message": "assignee message"
    },
    ...
  }
  ```

  See the [enterprise events](/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/) documentation
  for more information on other event types.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-05-15">
  ## Box iOS SDK v4.1.0 released

  **Breaking Changes:**

  **New Features and Enhancements:**

  * Add ability to cancel uploads and downloads
  * Add support for the uploader display name field for Files and File Versions
  * Add support for the classification field for Files and Folders
  * Add path parameter sanitization

  **Bug Fixes:**

  * Fix logging of API responses
</Update>

<Update label="2020-05-12">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.23.0 released

  See [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3230-2020-05-12) for details
  Commits: [`v3.22.0...v3.23.0`](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/`v3.22.0...v3.23.0`)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.23.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.23.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.23.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.23.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2020-05-12">
  ## New shield alert events

  As of today, [Box Shield][box-shield] will begin producing new security events
  within the [enterprise event stream](/guides/events/enterprise-events/for-enterprise/) for Shield
  customers who are configured to listen for the new events.

  The possible incident events produced by Shield are:

  * Suspicious locations
  * Suspicious sessions
  * Anomalous download
  * Malicious content

  See the [shield alert events](/guides/events/event-triggers/shield-alert-events/) documentation
  for more information on the payloads produced within these events.

  [box-shield]: https://www.box.com/shield
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-24">
  ## Python SDK v2.8.0 released

  * Added support for token exchange using shared links
  * Added the ability to pass in a SHA1 value for file uploads
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-23">
  ## New classification field for Files

  A new optional field has been made available within the `Field` object,
  `classification`. This field represents the classification that is currently
  applied to a file.

  The classification can be requested via any endpoint that returns a file, like
  the [Get file information](/reference/get-files-id) and supports [requesting
  additional `fields`](/guides/api-calls/request-extra-fields).

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "id": "123456789",
    "type": "file",
    "etag": "1",
    "classification": {     
      "name": "Top Secret",     
      "definition": "Content that should not be shared outside the company.",
      "color": "#FF0000"
    },
    ...
  }
  ```

  The classification can be set through the API, Box Shield, or by a user using
  the web application.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-23">
  ## Java SDK v2.47.0 released

  1. Fix path parameter sanitization ([#797](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/797))
  2. Add support for the uploader display name field for Files and File version ([#791](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/791))
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-23">
  ## Add new uploader\_display\_name field to file and file versions

  A new field, `uploader_display_name` has been added to both file and file
  version resources. This field provides the name of the user at the time of
  upload.

  ```json theme={null}
  {
    ...
    "uploader_display_name": "Ellis Wiggins"
  }
  ```

  This field can be requested on any of the file and file
  version endpoints by providing the `fields` query parameter, for example:

  ```bash theme={null}
  curl -X GET https://api.box.com/2.0/files/12345?fields=uploader_display_name \
       -H 'Authorization: Bearer <ACCESS_TOKEN>'
  ```

  When the file is uploaded by a logged out anonymous, the email of the
  user is returned instead. If no email is available then the field will default
  to the text `Someone`.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-21">
  ## New Metadata Query APIs available

  A new API is now available that allows developers to query files and folders
  by the metadata attached to them. We've updated the reference documentation for
  this [Metadata Query API][e_mdq_api], as well as released some brand new
  [guides][g_mdq_api] and an update to the [metadata quick start guide][qs_mdq_api].

  [e_mdq_api]: /reference/post-metadata-queries-execute-read

  [g_mdq_api]: /guides/metadata/queries

  [qs_mdq_api]: /guides/metadata/quick-start
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-21">
  ## Box CLI v2.5.1 released

  [CHANGELOG](https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#251-2020-04-14)

  * Added `--quiet` flag to suppress any non-error output to `stderr` ([#167](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/167)) [`27045c6`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/27045c6)
  * Fixed a bug for the `--restrict-collaboration` flag for `box folders:update` where previously the flag would not restrict the collaborations when passed as true and would restrict collaborations when passed as false ([#175](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/175)) [`e6e1120`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/e6e1120)
  * Added `box trash:restore` to restore a trashed item and `box trash:get` to get information on a trashed item ([#179](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/179)) [`74db947`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/74db947)
  * Fixed a bug where flags that can be specified multiple times in a single command could not be passed through the command line for bulk commands ([#183](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/183)) [`63db0ac`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/63db0ac)
  * **Note**: Skipped version 2.5.0 due to development of new release process

  [`v2.4.0...v2.5.1`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/compare/`v2.4.0...v2.5.1`)
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-09">
  ## Java SDK v2.46.0 released

  1. Fix retry logic ([#787](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/787))
  2. Add path parameter sanitization ([#790](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/790))
  3. Add ability to set expiration date for a collaboration ([#788](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/788))
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-02">
  ## Java SDK v2.45.0 released

  1. Add preflight check before chunked uploads ([#782](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/782))
  2. Check that part was successfully uploaded for large file uploads… ([#781](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/781))
  3. Fix bug with unexpected disconnect in File Rename ([#779](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/779))
  4. Return metadata for each item returned by a metadata query ([#778](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/778))
</Update>

<Update label="2020-04-01">
  ## Node SDK v1.32.0 released

  * Temporarily removed Node 4 and Node 5 builds from Travis, due to tests not passing.  Will investigate, going forward ([#495](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/495)). [`dc558e9`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/dc558e9)
  * Fixed an issue where an error is thrown during a retry when a response is not returned by the previous call  ([#477](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/477)). [`f1b3449`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/f1b3449)
  * Added the ability to [query](./docs/metadata.md#query) Box items based on their metadata ([#487](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/487)). [`6f08931`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/6f08931)

  [`v1.31.0...v1.32.0`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/`v1.31.0...v1.32.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2020-03-30">
  ## Potential impactful changes to format of Metadata date fields

  As part of ongoing improvements to our Metadata infrastructure we will be
  rolling out three potential impactful changes to the format of `date` fields in
  metadata templates. These changes make the format our API returns more
  consistent between API calls.

  The first change affects the usage of time zone offsets in dates. Previously,
  the API would inconsistently return dates with and without timezone offsets if a
  date was set to include one. From now on all dates are converted to UTC /
  Zulu-time, removing the timezone offset.

  For example:

  * Assume a date was set to `2020-02-20T12:00:00.000-01:00`
  * Previously the API would return `2020-02-20T12:00:00.000-01:00` (the original
    value) or `2020-02-20T13:00:00.000Z` (the UTC adjusted value)
  * From now on it will always return `2020-02-20T13:00:00.000Z` (the UTC adjusted
    value)

  The second change affects the sub-second precision of dates returned by the
  metadata API. Previously, the API would return values with 0 to 3 digits of
  sub-second precision. From now on Box will always return metadata date-time
  values with millisecond precision.

  For example:

  * Previously the API might return `2020-02-20T12:00:00Z`,
    `2020-02-20T12:00:00.0Z`, `2020-02-20T12:00:00.00Z`or
    `2020-02-20T12:00:00.000Z`
  * From now on it will always return `2020-02-20T12:00:00.000Z`

  The final change affects the usage of the
  [`test`](g/metadata/instances/update/#Test-a-value) operation when updating a
  metadata instance. Previously the test would compare the date-time values using
  the literal string value. After this update they are compared using their UNIX
  timestamp in milliseconds.

  For example:

  * Previously `2020-01-21T19:20:00.123-08:00` would not be equivalent to
    `2020-01-22T03:20:00.123Z`
  * From now on `2020-01-21T19:20:00.123-08:00` is equivalent to
    `2020-01-22T03:20:00.123Z`

  ## How this can affect an application

  Any application that implements `RFC3339`-compliant date-time parsing will not
  need to perform any action as these are all valid `RFC3339` values representing
  the same dates. Any application that does not implement `RFC3339` compliant
  date-time parsing should be updated to do so.

  All official Box SDKs support `RFC3339`-compliant date-time parsing, so any
  application using an up-to-date version of an official Box SDK would not require
  any update.

  ## What do if this affected your application

  Roll-out of this change will be performed gradually over the next few weeks.
  Although the metadata team will be monitoring potential impact, please reach out
  to your customer success manager or our support channels if you find yourself
  impacted.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-03-30">
  ## Change to metadata instance version

  As part of ongoing improvements to our Metadata infrastructure we will be
  rolling out a small change to the [`version`](r:/metadata/#param-\$version) value
  of a metadata Instance.

  Previously, the version number associated with a metadata instance would be
  incremented if a field on the associated metadata template was deleted, or if an
  `enum` field's option was deleted on the associated metadata template.

  Going forward, these changes will not increment the version number of a metadata
  instance.

  This behavior has always been implicit and we recognize that very little value
  can be derived form to the metadata instance version. Therefore we do not expect
  this change to have any impact on any of our customers. Regardless, please reach
  out to your customer success manager or our support channels if you find
  yourself impacted.
</Update>

<Update label="2020-02-25">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.22.0 Released

  See [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3220-2020-02-25) for details
  Commits: [`v3.21.0...v3.22.0`](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/`v3.21.0...v3.22.0`)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.22.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.22.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.22.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.22.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2020-02-14">
  ## Node SDK v1.31.0 released

  * Fix Authentication Request Retries ([#454](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/454)) [`dd3253e`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/dd3253e)
  * Added marker-based paging for users endpoints ([#461](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/461)) [`055cb5b`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/055cb5b)
  * Added `getNextMarker()` to `PagingIterator` to get the next marker ([#461](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/461)) [`055cb5b`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/055cb5b)

  [`v1.30.0...v1.31.0`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/`v1.30.0...v1.31.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2020-02-13">
  ## Java SDK v2.44.1 Released

  1. Fix formatting bug for Java Logger ([#775](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/775))
  2. Improve date / time parsing for responses ([#772](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/772))
</Update>

<Update label="2020-02-13">
  ## Box iOS SDK v4.0.0 released

  **Breaking Changes:**

  * Change `status` field for task assignments from a String to an Enum
  * Remove `macOS`, `tvOS`, and `watchOS` support

  **New Features and Enhancements:**

  * Make authentication session classes `OAuth2Session`, `SingleTokenSession`, and `DelegatedAuthSession` public
</Update>

<Update label="2020-02-03">
  ## Preview SDK v2.34.0 released

  Version `2.34.0` of the Preview SDK has been released. New JavaScript and CSS
  Preview files have been made available. To adopt new changes, please see the
  [UI Elements manual installation][ui-elements-manual-install] links for Content
  Preview.

  Please see the `v2.34.0` [release notes][preview-2.34-release-notes] for a list
  of all feature changes.

  [ui-elements-manual-install]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/installation/#manual-installation

  [preview-2.34-release-notes]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/releases/tag/v2.34.0
</Update>

<Update label="2020-01-22">
  ## Python SDK v2.7.1 released

  * Fixed bug in `_get_retry_request_callable` introduced in release 2.7.0 which caused chunked uploads to fail
</Update>

<Update label="2020-01-22">
  ## Preview SDK v2.33.1 released

  Version `2.33.1` of the Preview SDK has been released. New JavaScript and CSS
  Preview files have been made available. To adopt new changes, please see the
  [UI Elements manual installation][ui-elements-manual-install] links for Content
  Preview.

  Please see the `v2.33.1` [release notes][preview-2.33-release-notes] for a list
  of all feature changes.

  [ui-elements-manual-install]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/installation/#manual-installation

  [preview-2.33-release-notes]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/releases/tag/v2.33.1
</Update>

<Update label="2020-01-21">
  ## Java SDK v2.44.0 released

  1. Fix Authentication Request Retries ([#764](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/764))
</Update>

<Update label="2020-01-20">
  ## Refreshed Postman Collection & Quick Start

  The Box Postman collection has been updated with new features and an integrated
  quick-start guide. Key features include:

  * An end-to-end [Postman quick-start guide][postman-quick-start-guide] that
    helps users to install Postman, set up a Box App, and load their API
    credentials into Postman.
  * A [restructured Postman collection][postman-collection] for the Box APIs that
    automatically detects when API credentials have expired and offers integrated
    solutions for refreshing these credentials when needed.

  The [legacy Postman collection][legacy-postman-collection] will stay available
  for the foreseeable future.

  [postman-quick-start-guide]: /guides/tooling/postman/quick-start

  [postman-collection]: /guides/tooling/postman/install

  [legacy-postman-collection]: /guides/tooling/postman
</Update>

<Update label="2020-01-16">
  ## Python SDK v2.7.0 released

  * Fixed bug in `get_admin_events` function which caused errors when the optional `event_types` parameter was omitted.
  * Add marker based pagination for listing users.
  * Added support for more attribute parameters when uploading new files and new versions of existing files.
  * Combined preflight check and lookup of accelerator URL into a single request for uploads.
  * Fixed JWT retry logic so a new JTI claim is generated on each retry.
  * Fixed bug where JWT authentication requests returned incorrect error codes.
  * Fixed retry logic so when a Retry-After header is passed back from the API, the SDK waits for the amount of time specified in the header before retrying.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-12-30">
  ## EOL of Classic Relay API Endpoints

  As previously communicated on October 18 2019, Classic Relay API
  endpoints are officially at an end of life state as of today.

  The following endpoints are affected by this EOL and will now start responding
  with error responses in applications making requests to them:

  * Get list of published Relay Classic templates.
  * Get list of Relay Classic workflows.
  * Launch a Relay Classic workflow.

  For any application encountering these error responses, please remove all calls
  to the Relay Classic APIs listed above.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-12-20">
  ## Java SDK v2.43.0 released

  1. Throw exceptions for `setMetadata` on Files and Folders for non 409 errors ([#762](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/762))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-12-17" description="Java SDK v2.42.0 released">
  ## New Features and Enhancements

  1. `SDK-1168` Metadata Query ([#760](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/760))
  2. Add marker based pagination for get users methods ([#759](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/759))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-12-06" description="Windows .NET SDK v3.21.0 released">
  ## New Features, Enhancements, and Bug Fixes

  See [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3210) for details
  Commits: [`v3.20.0...v3.21.0`](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/`v3.20.0...v3.21.0`)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.21.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.21.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.21.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.21.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-12-05">
  ## Marker-based Pagination Support for Users API

  The [Users API](/reference/get-users) now supports [marker-based
  pagination](/guides/api-calls/pagination/marker-based). Marker-based pagination is
  an alternative to regular offset-based pagination and provides an alternative
  way to get users for enterprises with a large volume of users.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-12-03" description="Preview SDK v2.29.0 released">
  ## New Features and Enhancements

  Version `2.29.0` of the Preview SDK has been released. New JavaScript and CSS
  Preview files have been made available. To adopt new changes, please see the
  [UI Elements manual installation][ui-elements-manual-install] links for Content
  Preview.

  Please see the `v2.29.0` [release notes][preview-2.29-release-notes] for a list
  of all feature changes.

  [ui-elements-manual-install]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/installation/#manual-installation

  [preview-2.29-release-notes]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/releases/tag/v2.29.0
</Update>

<Update label="2019-11-26">
  ## Box UI elements v11.0.2 released

  ## [11.0.2][1] (2019-11-26)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **build:** outdated release package ([`991ee17`][2])

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v11.0.1...v11.0.2

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/991ee17
</Update>

<Update label="2019-11-25">
  ## Elements v11.0 Released

  Box UI Elements version 11.0 has been released. This update includes three
  major new feature enhancements:

  * Content Explorer Grid View.
  * New Tasks Experience within the Preview Sidebar.
  * Visual Versions for the Preview Sidebar.

  Updated JavaScript and CSS files links for this release are available within
  the [UI Elements manual installation instructions][ui-elements-manual-install].

  For full information on changes in this release please see the following
  resources:

  * [Release notes][elements-11-release-notes]
  * [Announcement blog post][elements-11-blog]

  [ui-elements-manual-install]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/installation/#manual-installation

  [elements-11-release-notes]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/releases/tag/v11.0.0

  [elements-11-blog]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/announcing-elements-11-88ee900125fd
</Update>

<Update label="2019-11-21" description="Node SDK v1.30.0 released">
  ## New Features and Enhancements

  * Deprecated Batch API methods ([#433](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/433)) [`b06f404`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/b06f404)
  * Added support for [token exchange](./lib/box-client.js#L495) using shared links ([#398](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/398)) [`76aa1cf`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/76aa1cf)

  [`v1.29.1...v1.30.0`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/`v1.29.1...v1.30.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-11-20" description="Preview SDK v2.26.0 released">
  ## New Features and Enhancements

  Version `2.26.0` of the Preview SDK has been released. New JavaScript and CSS
  Preview files have been made available. To adopt new changes, please see the
  [UI Elements manual installation][ui-elements-manual-install] links for Content
  Preview.

  Please see the `v2.26.0` [release notes][preview-2.26-release-notes] for a list
  of all feature changes.

  [ui-elements-manual-install]: /guides/embed/ui-elements/installation/#manual-installation

  [preview-2.26-release-notes]: https://github.com/box/box-content-preview/releases/tag/v2.26.0
</Update>

<Update label="2019-11-18">
  ## New iOS SDK now available

  A new major release of the iOS SDK has been released and is now generally
  available. The new SDK includes a number of major revisions:

  * Fully rebuilt using Swift.
  * Support for Cocoapods, Carthage, and the Swift Package Manager.
  * SDK now maintains full API feature parity.

  See the [release blog post][ios-sdk-release-blog] for more information.

  [ios-sdk-release-blog]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/the-new-box-ios-sdk-now-available-baf624b289b4
</Update>

<Update label="2019-11-09">
  ## Box UI elements v11.0.0 released

  ## [11.0.0][1] (2019-11-09)

  ### Bug Fixes

  * **`activity-feed`:** fix long user names in tasks/comments in Edge ([#1604][2]) ([`572e4d7`][3])
  * **`activity-feed`:** Fix version ordering in Activity Feed ([#1272][4]) ([`533c112`][5])
  * **`activity-feed`:** refactor inline error for feed items and empty state ([#1697][6]) ([`2702367`][7])
  * **`annotation`:** Fix header by adding selector used by box-annotations ([#1637][8]) ([`9302486`][9])
  * **`app-activity`:** Remove underscores from resin feature name ([#1456][10]) ([`b7c21e7`][11])
  * **`app-activity`:** Update app activity to match comment/task ([#1449][12]) ([`b58aa2f`][13])
  * **`arrow-stepper`:** Fix arrow stepper in KeyBinding component ([#1654][14]) ([`a05b015`][15])
  * **`avatar`:** fix avatar initials v-alignment ([#1311][16]) ([`23e6d5f`][17])
  * **`avatar`:** Fix avatar resolution in activity sidebar ([#1243][18]) ([`88a5f1c`][19])
  * **`avatar`:** use derived state instead of effect for URL change ([#1643][20]) ([`f89c138`][21])
  * **`bdl`:** Add SCSS check for color variable name ([#1514][22]) ([`a4f446f`][23])
  * **`bdl`:** adjust font weights to match normal and bold `lato` ([#1517][24]) ([`35a4070`][25])
  * **`beta-feedback`:** update `aria-labelledby` attribute name ([#1249][26]) ([`c164aec`][27])
  * **`breadcrumb`:** add missing import ([#1657][28]) ([`fec4735`][29])
  * **`button`:** remove horizontal margin from buttons ([#1362][30]) ([`a6989a0`][31])
  * **`button`:** revert remove horizontal margin from buttons ([#1362][30]) ([#1400][32]) ([`3ac424c`][33])
  * **`classification`:** badge should not have a `tabindex` ([#1622][34]) ([`4ab0c20`][35])
  * **`classification`:** Classification badge UX tweaks ([#1378][36]) ([`fa82a8d`][37])
  * **`classification`:** classification tooltip not showing in IE11 ([#1710][38]) ([`d08b53c`][39])
  * **`classification`:** flow definitions for `onclick` ([#1712][40]) ([`9e620ce`][41])
  * **`classification`:** Restoring classification badge icons ([#1390][42]) ([`5db4b3e`][43])
  * **`collaborator-avatars`:** add keyboard accessibility ([#1680][44]) ([`baefaed`][45])
  * **`collapsible`:** should be pure component ([#1407][46]) ([`5e32c80`][47])
  * **`comment`:** Add height to comment area to support multiple mentions ([#1474][48]) ([`e270131`][49])
  * **`comment`:** padding and `a11y` adjustments for comment UI ([#1358][50]) ([`927a34a`][51])
  * **`comment`:** remove redundant `aria-label` ([#1291][52]) ([`ef48f88`][53])
  * **`comment`:** use overlay z-index for confirmation dialog ([#1270][54]) ([`bcf2852`][55])
  * **`comments`:** format existing mentions in editor ([#1469][56]) ([`6b82510`][57])
  * **`constants`:** explicit type import ([#1584][58]) ([`7d38fb8`][59])
  * **`content-explorer`:** `ContentExplorer` and `ContentPicker` can handle
    sharing web links now ([#1515][60]) ([`55edef7`][61])
  * **`content-explorer`:** `MDVGridView` import fixes ([#1333][62]) ([`9740342`][63])
  * **`content-explorer`:** rows no longer stuck after closing modal ([#1245][64]) ([`d7f53ff`][65])
  * **`content-preview`:** remove deeplink path upon navigation ([#1665][66]) ([`84b4ea4`][67])
  * **`content-uploader`:** Disable cancel button when 100% is reached ([#1511][68]) ([`a6de1b0`][69])
  * **`content-uploader`:** Fix cancelling task triggers the others to start ([#1653][70]) ([`f35b2ea`][71])
  * **`content-uploader`:** Fix duplicate files upload at the same time ([#1652][72]) ([`6faed59`][73])
  * **`datetime`:** add missing support for times w/o ms ([#1191][74]) ([`19f3703`][75])
  * **`deps`:** downgrade `axios` peer dependency ([#1329][76]) ([`d1a1bd9`][77])
  * **`examples`:** change colors to the current box design language ([#1281][78]) ([`94869ad`][79])
  * **`explorer`:** fetch shared link on demand ([#1479][80]) ([`2d29628`][81])
  * **`feed`:** inline error for deeplinking feed items ([#1655][82]) ([`e2be3bd`][83])
  * **`feed`:** Task assignee names not truncating IE11 ([#1694][84]) ([`a20e610`][85])
  * **`floatfield`:** always allow trailing `.` for float field ([#1178][86]) ([`61d4e3d`][87])
  * **`footer-indicator`:** move tooltip to appear above footer indicator ([`bf7782c`][88])
  * **`header-flyout`:** Constraint to window to fix IE11 scroll bug ([#1310][89]) ([`f8bb323`][90])
  * **`i18n`:** change "accepted" copy to "approved" ([#1214][91]) ([`674bf45`][92])
  * **`i18n`:** Fix bug where messages starting with HTML cause an exception ([#1490][93]) ([`73d95b9`][94])
  * **`i18n`:** `Param` and `Plural` should not be in the `styleguide.conf` ([#1197][95]) ([`2d34ad4`][96])
  * **`i18n`:** use plural format for task assignee message ([#1345][97]) ([`10d6b76`][98])
  * **`icons`:** fill in background for globe icon ([#1226][99]) ([`c91d320`][100])
  * **`icons`:** fix collections icons for left navigation usability ([#1238][101]) ([`9e91115`][102])
  * **`icons`:** give collections Icons SUIT classNames ([#1242][103]) ([`3b62245`][104])
  * **`icons`:** update retry and public icon ([#1297][105]) ([`bfa075a`][106])
  * **`icons`:** update trash, move/copy, add, download, upload, collections ([#1702][107]) ([`b126ecb`][108])
  * **`icons`:** updating add icon style and adding hidden eye icon ([#1266][109]) ([`b47e22e`][110])
  * **`iconworkflow`:** make background rectangle same as `viewBox` ([#1241][111]) ([`9e07f2e`][112])
  * **`inlinenotice`:** update to box design standard ([#1576][113]) ([`a814657`][114])
  * **`item-properties`:** Add `aria-labelledby` to description textarea ([#1229][115]) ([`05d86b1`][116])
  * **`left-sidebar`:** add key to drop wrapper for links ([#1299][117]) ([`9c78135`][118])
  * **`left-sidebar`:** Adjust margins for loading indicator ([#1545][119]) ([`6ba65c6`][120])
  * **`left-sidebar`:** hide toggle icon on medium screen size ([#1344][121]) ([`716fe01`][122])
  * **`media`:** increase specificity of Media-button CSS to avoid `.btn-plain` ([#1463][123]) ([`943638d`][124])
  * **`mention-selector`:** Fix `hasReceivedFirstInteraction` logic ([#1434][125]) ([`afd94fa`][126])
  * **`menu`:** Fix padding for menu item buttons ([#1446][127]) ([`5baeb5b`][128])
  * **`menu`:** Menu should only autofocus on mount if visible ([#1175][129]) ([`2ba8a1d`][130])
  * **`metadata`:** Show autocomplete for metadata input fields ([#1629][131]) ([`85995cd`][132])
  * **`metadata`:** template dropdown scrollbar issue in safari ([#1192][133]) ([`1dc0d99`][134])
  * **`metadata-sidebar`:** bind `onApiError` properly ([#1713][135]) ([`50b72f2`][136])
  * **`modal`:** move close button after header for better screen reader `a11y` ([#1684][137]) ([`29a1220`][138])
  * **`nav-sidebar`:** reduce size of toggle button to fix focus outline ([#1305][139]) ([`9a14ae7`][140])
  * **`notifications`:** add accessibility attributes ([#1682][141]) ([`21af355`][142])
  * **`open-with`:** better error messaging ([#1489][143]) ([`d3d98a5`][144])
  * **`pill-selector`:** Allow copy pasting line separated values ([#1350][145]) ([`7933932`][146])
  * **`pill-selector`:** expose `onInput` to catch input ([#1450][147]) ([`48d22a4`][148])
  * **`pill-selector`:** UX tweaks ([#1315][149]) ([`e4fdf58`][150])
  * **`pill-selector-dropdown`:** disable pills when `PillSelector` is turned off ([#1357][151]) ([`2bf496e`][152])
  * **`pill-selector-dropdown`:** fix aria attributes ([#1681][153]) ([`1e0d1ab`][154])
  * **`pill-selector-dropdown`:** Fix for pills getting removed on click ([#1367][155]) ([`d67fcfe`][156])
  * **`pills`:** Fix vertical centering of pill selector input text ([#1364][157]) ([`d47c69c`][158])
  * **`pillselectordropdown`:** support paste from context menu ([#1597][159]) ([`d16b0da`][160])
  * **`preview`:** Clean up preview header styles and remove extra borders ([#1484][161]) ([`6c1a363`][162])
  * **`quick-search`:** update border radius to follow BDL ([#1439][163]) ([`936f5e0`][164])
  * **`radio-group`:** fix radio group by passing the value prop ([#1452][165]) ([`c0c05be`][166])
  * **`radio-group`:** pass rest of props to radio input ([#1448][167]) ([`85ca38a`][168])
  * **`scripts`:** Build and update all files prior to push ([#1415][169]) ([`e432c47`][170])
  * **`scroll-if-needed`:** fix scroll-if-needed on selector dropdown ([#1280][171]) ([`3776dc8`][172])
  * **`search`:** Remove rounded corners for `ContentExplorer` search ([#1478][173]) ([`7d9100b`][174])
  * **`security`:** Upgrade `axios` to address security vulnerability ([#1228][175]) ([`db26743`][176])
  * **`security-badge`:** Fixing `SecurityBadge` flow type ([#1664][177]) ([`ae23f01`][178])
  * **`select-field`:** Enable arrow scrolling in select fields ([#1671][179]) ([`9f040f2`][180])
  * **`sidebar`:** Add flex-shrink 0 to comment input ([#1359][181]) ([`cd840f4`][182])
  * **`sidebar`:** add markup and accessibility to tab list ([#1563][183]) ([`f90a0d7`][184])
  * **`sidebar`:** Fix deeplinking for version history sidebar ([#1649][185]) ([`e85e57a`][186])
  * **`sidebar`:** Fix sidebar not auto-opening for large viewports ([#1508][187]) ([`dac39ee`][188])
  * **`sidebar`:** Limit maximum height of additional tabs in sidebar navigation ([#1557][189]) ([`e7f953e`][190])
  * **`sidebar`:** More semantically accessible tabs ([#1236][191]) ([`eb398fc`][192])
  * **`sidebar`:** padding on item properties versions ([#1263][193]) ([`853e106`][194])
  * **`sidebar`:** removing unwanted parenthesis in empty state ([#1645][195]) ([`824f390`][196])
  * **`sidebar`:** Set contaminated state if the sidebar was forced open ([#1366][197]) ([`e71409c`][198])
  * **`sidebar`:** Update `flexbox` for Activity Feed Container ([#1341][199]) ([`c5e07b1`][200])
  * **`subheader`:** Add logic around grid view ([#1659][201]) ([`7a53050`][202])
  * **`task`:** string for task completed rule icon ([#1573][203]) ([`79c3f00`][204])
  * **`task-form`:** clear task assignee autocomplete on form submit ([#1605][205]) ([`63efa10`][206])
  * **`task-form`:** disallow text input in date picker ([#1540][207]) ([`af49827`][208])
  * **`task-form`:** don't disable task form submit button ([#1323][209]) ([`9a4137b`][210])
  * **`task-form`:** Update error message when leaving not valued but required field ([#1353][211]) ([`be10f37`][212])
  * **`task-new`:** alignment fixes, CSS refactor ([#1312][213]) ([`411c3e9`][214])
  * **`task-new`:** fix placement of task status checkmark ([#1321][215]) ([`9f554ff`][216])
  * **`task-new`:** Minor visual tweak to add tasks menu ([#1334][217]) ([`95a3c73`][218])
  * **`task-new`:** Minor visual tweaks to add tasks menu ([#1328][219]) ([`cf1acf1`][220])
  * **`tasks`:** add missing resin component ([#1513][221]) ([`00e9707`][222])
  * **`tasks`:** assignee input field interactions ([#1621][223]) ([`dc33967`][224])
  * **`tasks`:** comments menu does not appear on activity sidebar in preview ([#1250][225]) ([`be7bc2f`][226])
  * **`tasks`:** fix task issues ([#1189][227]) ([`630fd38`][228])
  * **`tasks`:** modal closing on resize ([#1603][229]) ([`2cbe014`][230])
  * **`tasks`:** prevent resize of assignee avatar ([#1332][231]) ([`4e760f7`][232])
  * **`tasks`:** Update copy for task type subtext ([#1627][233]) ([`c788770`][234])
  * **`tasks_new`:** add missing resin component ([#1295][235]) ([`dbbf598`][236])
  * **`tasks-new`:** Reset selector contacts on modal close ([#1301][237]) ([`f387a9b`][238])
  * **`tasks-new`:** show "a prior collaborator" for deleted users ([#1313][239]) ([`c61fa77`][240])
  * **`tasks-new`:** task actions are not updating ([#1302][241]) ([`2f88e96`][242])
  * **`tasks-new`:** update documents and strings ([#1317][243]) ([`6560b23`][244])
  * **`template-dropdown`:** add `onMenuToggle` handler to `TemplateDropdown` ([#1318][245]) ([`2cdfcc4`][246])
  * **`text-input`:** looses focus when tooltip toggles ([#1185][247]) ([`8a4c294`][248])
  * **`tooltip`:** color contrast and layout fixes ([#1692][249]) ([`1c11770`][250])
  * **`unfied-share-modal`:** shared link access levels ([#1647][251]) ([`732a1dd`][252])
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** add constraints to modal menus ([#1196][253]) ([`6501413`][254])
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** classification in title ([#1453][255]) ([`4ce5a06`][256])
  * **`uploader`:** `MultiputUploads` stop hanging in IE11 ([#1283][257]) ([`c49e52f`][258])
  * **`uploads`:** cancelling in-progress tasks does not start pending ones ([#1570][259]) ([`dbf115c`][260])
  * **`uploads`:** Fix hanging on resuming uploads ([#1695][261]) ([`3da93c8`][262])
  * **`uploads`:** Remove logic gate ([#1646][263]) ([`38d10e4`][264])
  * **`uploads`:** reset item error after retry ([#1600][265]) ([`0218f10`][266])
  * **`uploads`:** resin for canceling uploads ([#1397][267]) ([`16311dc`][268])
  * **`user-link`:** allow wrapping of long user names ([#1602][269]) ([`bff49bb`][270])
  * **`usm`:** "Link Settings" should not line wrap ([#1674][271]) ([`938c483`][272])
  * **`usm`:** Add `itemTypedId` to `onPillCreate` ([#1320][273]) ([`c4149ea`][274])
  * **`usm`:** Do not pass `itemTypedID` to `getContactsByEmail` ([#1354][275]) ([`e60b020`][276])
  * **`versions`:** Disable prior version preview for watermarked files ([#1405][277]) ([`9a527f2`][278])
  * **`versions`:** Display date and name for most relevant version action ([#1568][279]) ([`b68eccd`][280])
  * **`versions`:** Fix infinite load due to destroyed API factory ([#1347][281]) ([`95949e2`][282])
  * **`versions`:** Fix version groups collapsing prior months/years ([#1365][283]) ([`65d23b9`][284])
  * **`versions`:** Improve experience for restored vs promoted versions ([#1631][285]) ([`25d0741`][286])
  * **`versions`:** Relax restrictions for watermarked files ([#1342][287]) ([`2487b42`][288])
  * **`versions`:** Reload the page when a version is promoted (temporary) ([#1395][289]) ([`de7e74e`][290])
  * **`versions`:** Restrict actions and preview for watermarked files ([#1339][291]) ([`fcb390d`][292])
  * **`versions`:** Restrict preview for watermarked files ([#1351][293]) ([`93b95c4`][294])
  * **`versions`:** Retrieve and use file version permissions for actions ([#1193][295]) ([`9d7567e`][296])
  * **`versions`:** Scroll version button into view if selected ([#1276][297]) ([`e0cd7e3`][298])
  * **`versions`:** Show server errors without hiding version history ([#1275][299]) ([`ef3b2fd`][300])
  * **`versions`:** Update version actions to avoid unnecessary buttons ([#1556][301]) ([`bc9672e`][302])
  * **`versions`:** Update version sidebar to use latest retention schema ([#1662][303]) ([`fa66232`][304])
  * Adding `Accept-Language` header for `Xhr.js` ([#1368][305]) ([`361d73f`][306])
  * show tooltip on hover long text ([#1230][307]) ([`c41dd47`][308])
  * slight adjust in check mark alignment ([#1678][309]) ([`cfd055b`][310])
  * various form accessibility improvements ([#1688][311]) ([`150cbbe`][312])
  * **`versions`:** Update versions restore call to match latest contract ([#1198][313]) ([`2e590d3`][314])

  ### chore

  * **`deps`:** update `react` peer / development dependency ([#1606][315]) ([`1163db5`][316])
  * **`formik`:** upgrade to V2 ([#1698][317]) ([`6b9ded9`][318])

  ### Code Refactoring

  * Upgrade `react` and `react-dom` to `v16.8` and refactor Avatar ([#1171][319]) ([`7dd1bdf`][320]), closes [#761][321]
  * **`deps`:** Upgrade peer dependencies to latest working versions ([#1180][322]) ([`48d711e`][323])

  ### Features

  * **`activity-feed`:** add support for deeplinking tasks and comments ([#1623][324]) ([`52ecdcb`][325])
  * **`additional-tabs`:** gray out turned off apps ([#1503][326]) ([`132782d`][327])
  * **`avatarinitials`:** move `backgroundColor` into SCSS ([#1585][328]) ([`781a246`][329])
  * **`bdl`:** Add script for SCSS `bdl` scoping ([#1546][330]) ([`9bdc1e6`][331])
  * **`classification`:** change icon for classify/classification action ([#1520][332]) ([`8eb68b3`][333])
  * **`classification`:** new badge and layout ([#1231][334]) ([`2336262`][335])
  * **`classification`:** new section within the details sidebar ([#1237][336]) ([`90bf2f3`][337])
  * **`classification`:** remove classify from breadcrumbs ([#1549][338]) ([`adae46d`][339])
  * **`classification`:** updated UI for classification ([#1566][340]) ([`52e2b17`][341])
  * **`comments`:** implement comment edit ([#1468][342]) ([`33dd037`][343])
  * **`content-explorer`:** Add ability to sort contents by size column ([#1239][344]) ([`b29b6bf`][345])
  * **`content-explorer`:** Add toggle button for grid view ([#1349][346]) ([`97a1d44`][347])
  * **`content-explorer`:** Fetch thumbnails for search and recents ([#1475][348]) ([`1035afb`][349])
  * **`content-explorer`:** grid view slider ([#1482][350]) ([`ef4a7ee`][351])
  * **`content-explorer`:** grid view styling ([#1464][352]) ([`f32b8ca`][353]), closes [#1409][354]
  * **`content-explorer`:** import files from `MDVGridView` ([#1294][355]) ([`a2e5bd9`][356])
  * **`content-explorer`:** local storage for view mode preference ([#1476][357]) ([`803b0a0`][358])
  * **`content-explorer`:** Remove feature flip for gallery view ([#1571][359]) ([`3e948b8`][360])
  * **`content-explorer`:** show cards with thumbnails ([#1409][354]) ([`7bbc2e8`][361])
  * **`content-explorer`:** Show grid with icons ([#1372][362]) ([`64a099e`][363])
  * **`content-picker`:** use radios for single select ([#1685][364]) ([`acc3395`][365])
  * **`content-sidebar`:** add task modal mode for edit/create ([#1257][366]) ([`0bdfc96`][367])
  * **`content-sidebar`:** programmatic refresh for sidebar panels ([#1561][368]) ([`2adbaef`][369])
  * **`dropdown-menu`:** allow `esc` to propagate if dropdown is closed ([#1686][370]) ([`3d4d59e`][371])
  * **`features`:** Add background color on hover in metadata list view ([#1618][372]) ([`635808e`][373])
  * **`features`:** Add new feature metadata-based-view ([#1519][374]) ([`faef59e`][375])
  * **`features`:** Show preview upon clicking the item name ([#1620][376]) ([`74e46b2`][377])
  * **`ghost`:** create ghost state helper component ([#1498][378]) ([`73aadae`][379])
  * **`i18n`:** Implement the new `FormattedCompMessage` component ([#976][380]) ([`31fdf12`][381])
  * **`icon`:** create add users empty state icon ([#1638][382]) ([`33dfacb`][383])
  * **`icon`:** create login and storage icon ([#1708][384]) ([`0115fb6`][385])
  * **`icons`:** Add `CollectionItemLink` icon ([#1550][386]) ([`1558d36`][387])
  * **`icons`:** add collections icons for bolt and star ([#1338][388]) ([`8e9d503`][389])
  * **`icons`:** add collections star filled icon ([#1547][390]) ([`55a182e`][391])
  * **`icons`:** add `IconFolderTree` icon ([#1696][392]) ([`add261b`][393])
  * **`icons`:** add icons for collections ([#1224][394]) ([`a01ea82`][395])
  * **`icons`:** add new shield Icon ([#1216][396]) ([`753d0e2`][397])
  * **`icons`:** Add sandbox and puzzle piece icons ([#1370][398]) ([`67b6db4`][399])
  * **`icons`:** add workflow icon ([#1225][400]) ([`9d73144`][401])
  * **`icons`:** creating task empty state icon ([#1583][402]) ([`cac4023`][403])
  * **`icons`:** new lightning icon ([#1183][404]) ([`ebccf18`][405])
  * **`icons`:** update `IconShare` and `IconCollaboration` to new `32x32` icons ([#1232][406]) ([`4f4e31b`][407])
  * **`icons`:** update to new globe icon and add new globe `tinycon` ([#1217][408]) ([`3dded61`][409])
  * **`inline-edit`:** user should see instance field input ([#1172][410]) ([`1f90dde`][411])
  * **`left-nav`:** add Box Relay icon ([#1207][412]) ([`29f07a6`][413]), closes [#1206][414]
  * **`left-sidebar`:** `LeftSidebar` supports custom `navLinkRenderer` ([#1510][415]) ([`f9705a2`][416])
  * **`leftsidebar`:** Show drop zones only on hover ([#1548][417]) ([`a45c998`][418])
  * **`media`:** create media object component ([#1383][419]) ([`5140c13`][420])
  * **`metadata`:** Enable metadata template filtering ([#1598][421]) ([`7b341f7`][422])
  * **`metadata-views`:** Handle edit and cancel edit actions ([#1703][423]) ([`d55f84a`][424])
  * **`metadata-views`:** Show edit icon in metadata view ([#1667][425]) ([`1b8a29d`][426])
  * **`metadata-views`:** Update metadata columns prop type in metadata view ([#1666][427]) ([`cbf96ef`][428])
  * **`new-tasks`:** Fetch task collaborators ([#1286][429]) ([`fb84aee`][430])
  * **`office-online`:** adding excel spreadsheet icon for `xlsb` files ([`ee8569f`][431])
  * **`pill-selector`:** `formik` wrapper for pill selector ([#1194][432]) ([`c75a7bb`][433])
  * **`pill-selector`:** update flow type for downstream issue ([#1210][434]) ([`69f25e8`][435])
  * **`preview`:** Add support for custom logo URL in preview header ([#1714][436]) ([`d37b9ec`][437])
  * **`preview`:** better message when blocked by a policy ([#1346][438]) ([`a6cde28`][439])
  * **`preview`:** new icon for security blocking ([#1396][440]) ([`9355631`][441])
  * **`preview`:** Upgrade default version of box-content-preview to 2.16.0 ([#1562][442]) ([`7617fd2`][443])
  * **`radio`:** `formik` wrapper for `RadioButton` ([#1204][444]) ([`0b51080`][445])
  * **`react`:** Add text for max version history ([#1630][446]) ([`705e71f`][447])
  * **`scroll`:** upgrade scroll in to view if needed ([#1200][448]) ([`1532617`][449])
  * **`security`:** adding `SecurityBadge` component ([#1663][450]) ([`3d210bb`][451])
  * **`select`:** make caret rotate up/down on open/close respectively ([#1218][452]) ([`9627e2b`][453])
  * **`select-field`:** Allow rendering custom options ([#1516][454]) ([`53fe270`][455])
  * **`shared-link-settings-modal`:** Disable direct downloads if classified ([#1500][456]) ([`2ede02a`][457])
  * **`sidebar`:** Add support for toggling the sidebar externally ([#1293][458]) ([`04468fc`][459])
  * **`sidebar`:** programmatic refresh ([#1472][460]) ([`c7a19e7`][461])
  * **`sidebar`:** Show retention policy info in sidebar ([#1648][462]) ([`cb9e714`][463])
  * **`sidebar`:** Toggle button ([#1268][464]) ([`e2ad4ab`][465])
  * **`task-new`:** add ability to add/remove assignees ([#1284][466]) ([`8e87280`][467])
  * **`task-new`:** Add support for edit modal ([#1261][468]) ([`d13839c`][469])
  * **`tasks`:** add any task icon + tooltip ([#1491][470]) ([`cf1c5b7`][471])
  * **`tasks`:** add any/all checkbox ([#1487][472]) ([`21271e3`][473])
  * **`tasks`:** add in comment modification option for tasks ([#1247][474]) ([`b5775de`][475])
  * **`tasks`:** Add new task edit API methods ([#1260][476]) ([`e05d5a7`][477])
  * **`tasks`:** handle new error message with title and description ([#1564][478]) ([`7d691df`][479])
  * **`tasks`:** strings for any completion rule ([#1471][480]) ([`cdaf285`][481])
  * **`tasks`:** Update task status to not use an icon ([#1169][482]) ([`b4b8bf0`][483])
  * **`tasks-new`:** add assignee list ([#1287][484]) ([`04b7458`][485])
  * **`tasks-new`:** Edit task message and due date in `TaskForm` ([#1269][486]) ([`7f63d97`][487])
  * **`tasks-new`:** remove beta label functionality from modal header ([#1314][488]) ([`dca414b`][489])
  * **`tasks-new`:** tasks resin tracking for edit modal ([#1327][490]) ([`5b5b354`][491])
  * **`typography`:** update body typography ([#1442][492]) ([`375c336`][493]), closes [#1439][163] [#1441][494]
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** add external collaboration warning message ([#1220][495]) ([`064bd2f`][496])
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** add property to limit the number of contacts ([#1304][497]) ([`2af11b1`][498])
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** invite section tooltip changes ([#1499][499]) ([`d7730c7`][500]), closes [#1498][378]
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** invite section tooltips changes ([#1504][501]) ([`b9486bc`][502])
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** show classification for the file ([#1425][503]) ([`e3c7277`][504])
  * **`unified-share-modal`:** Show external collaborators indicator ([#1256][505]) ([`613a438`][506])
  * **`uploads`:** add resin targets for uploads manager ([#1384][507]) ([`29d2af5`][508])
  * **`uploads`:** resume a single file upload ([#1552][509]) ([`093f889`][510])
  * **`uploads`:** resume multiple unsuccessful uploads ([#1553][511]) ([`60406b9`][512])
  * **`uploads`:** uploads manager contents for resumable uploads ([#1555][513]) ([`8380bc7`][514])
  * **`usm`:** expand Invite Section based on `initiallySelectedContacts` ([#1470][515]) ([`b756a22`][516])
  * **`validators`:** `host`, `ipv4` and domain name validators ([#1212][517]) ([`f653dac`][518])
  * **`versions`:** Add client-side error messages for version actions ([#1404][519]) ([`8ead57c`][520])
  * **`versions`:** Add resin tracking for sidebar back button ([#1309][521]) ([`901c23d`][522])
  * **`versions`:** Add resin tracking to all version history actions ([#1285][523]) ([`a4942d3`][524])
  * **`versions`:** Add support for deep linking to `ContentSidebar` ([#1203][525]) ([`78ab636`][526])
  * **`versions`:** Add support for file version restore actions ([#1184][527]) ([`d5396bd`][528])
  * **`versions`:** Add support for version action callbacks ([#1417][529]) ([`099a09e`][530])
  * **`versions`:** Add support for version limits to sidebar ([#1316][531]) ([`bec5699`][532])
  * **`versions`:** Add version group headers based on relative date ([#1330][533]) ([`51d5633`][534])
  * add `metadata_queries` API layer ([#1481][535]) ([`2f6ef29`][536])
  * add prop for resumable uploads feature flip ([#1447][537]) ([`3f19a3b`][538])
  * Adding prop `initiallySelectedContacts` to `UnifiedShareModal` ([#1424][539]) ([`8966016`][540])
  * default task icons to `$bdl-box-blue` ([#1509][541]) ([`dbc7103`][542])
  * increase fetched file collaborators for tasks/comments ([#1483][543]) ([`05f65f4`][544])

  ### Performance Improvements

  * **`sidebar`:** Lazy load sidebar panels without 500 millisecond delay ([#1223][545]) ([`bb216b4`][546])
  * **`sidebar`:** merge response to avoid redundant API calls ([#1617][547]) ([`69ad154`][548])
  * **`version`:** Remove version history modal ([#1633][549]) ([`eb0aac6`][550])

  ### Reverts

  * **`avatar`:** Move Avatar back to non-hook implementation ([#1186][551]) ([`69f329b`][552])

  ### BREAKING CHANGES

  * **`formik`:** `inputProps` dropped from Toggle component. `formik` has been upgraded to V2. [Upgrade guide][553].

  * Peer dependency React requirement have been bumped higher

  * refactor(avatar): Refactor Avatar to use hooks

  * fix(test): Fixed various test issues, downgraded enzyme back to 3.8.0

  * fix(avatar): remove redundant check

  * **`classification`:** Also changes `advisoryMessage` prop to definition to keep terminology consistent

  * feat(classification): Increasing classification icon stroke width

  * **`typography`:** The color of the body will be default to [#222][554] which
    is the `bdl-gray`

  * feat(typography): update letter spacing for common typography

  * **`typography`:** The letter spacing for common typography will now
    be `px` instead of `em`. Please check scaling.

  * **`classification`:** The API for providing classification data to the sidebar has changed to `{ advisoryMessage, name }`

  * feat: design changes

  * feat: classification badge changes

  * fix: PR feedback

  * fix: snapshot

  * **`icons`:** Replacing `IconShield` with a new Icon that represent
    Shield. It follows the the 32 x 32 guideline. Please override any style if needed.

  * **`deps`:** update react-\* peer dependencies to 16.9.0

  Updating to React 16.9 includes deprecation warnings for lifecycle methods.
  This affects one of our dependencies, react-tether; we have no immediate
  plans to silence the warnings.

  * **`security`:** Upgrade `axios` peer dependency to address [https://nvd.nist.gov/vuln/detail/CVE-2019-10742][555]

  * **`icons`:** update to new globe icon which uses `20x20` by default instead of `16x16` and introduced new globe `tinycon`

  * **`validators`:** Adds peer dependency of [**`@hapi/address`**][556] used for email and domain validation

  * fix: added uncommon `tlds` for email checking

  * fix: adding some bad `tlds`

  * **`scroll`:** Major version upgrade for scroll-into-view-if-needed.

  * **`i18n`:** Added additional peer dependencies to support `i18n` `FormattedCompMessage` component

  Implement a new component called `FormattedCompMessage`. This translates strings which can contain HTML or other JSX components in a safe way by hiding the contents of those tags from the translators or hackers and substituting the contents from source strings into the translations. Example:

  ```javascript theme={null}
  <FormattedCompMessage id="mystring" description="translator's comment">
     You can <span class="foo">delete</span> <Link to={url}>these files</Link>, or just
    <span id="x" class="unshare">unshare them</span>.
  </FormattedCompMessage>
  ```

  `FormattedCompMessage` is built as a layer on top of `react-intl`, and uses it to do the actual translations. Its function is to transform a tree of React elements into a coded string, get that string translated with `react-intl`, transform the coded translated string back into a tree of React elements, and finally substitute the hidden React elements from the source tree back into the translation tree in the right locations.

  The component depends on the new babel plugin `babel-plugin-box-i18n` to extract the coded texts from the source code and place them into the same type of JSON files that the `react-intl` babel plugin produces. In this way, the translation process downstream from there works with no further changes. The translations appear in the properties files some time later and `react-intl` picks them up as normal. The `FormattedCompMessage` can retrieve these translations using `react-intl`. The `babel-pluging-box-i18n` plugin also enforces Box's policies, such as the requirement that all strings have a unique id and a description for the translators.

  The `FormattedCompMessage` component can support plurals in a React-idiomatic way by embedding `<Plural>` components in the body of the `FormattedCompMessage`:

  ```javascript theme={null}
  <FormattedCompMessage id="mystring" description="translator's comment" count={count}>
    <Plural category="one">This is the <strong>singular</strong> string.</Plural>
    <Plural category="other">This is the <strong>plural</strong> string.</Plural>
  </FormattedCompMessage>
  ```

  Note that HTML and subcomponents are allowed in the plural string as well.

  The `FormattedCompMessage` component supports replacement parameters in a React-idiomatic way by embedding `<Param>` components in the body of the `FormattedCompMessage`:

  ```javascript theme={null}
  <FormattedCompMessage id="mystring" description="translator's comment">
    User <Param value={user.name} description="The user's full name"/> has already deleted this file.
  </FormattedCompMessage>
  ```

  Note that the `Param` tags can be used inside of `Plural` tags as well, as they are normal components.

  * **`deps`:** Peer dependencies have been updated and will require downstream applications to update as well to avoid NPM warnings.
  * **`icons`:** Old `IconShare` defaulted to `26x26` and old `IconCollaboration` defaulted to `27x26` but new icons are defaulted to `32x32`.  Also, default SVG classnames are now changed to `bdl-IconShare` and `bdl-IconCollaboration`.

  [1]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/compare/v10.2.0...v11.0.0

  [2]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1604

  [3]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/572e4d7

  [4]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1272

  [5]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/533c112

  [6]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1697

  [7]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2702367

  [8]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1637

  [9]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9302486

  [10]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1456

  [11]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b7c21e7

  [12]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1449

  [13]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b58aa2f

  [14]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1654

  [15]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a05b015

  [16]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1311

  [17]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/23e6d5f

  [18]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1243

  [19]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/88a5f1c

  [20]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1643

  [21]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f89c138

  [22]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1514

  [23]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a4f446f

  [24]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1517

  [25]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/35a4070

  [26]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1249

  [27]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c164aec

  [28]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1657

  [29]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fec4735

  [30]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1362

  [31]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a6989a0

  [32]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1400

  [33]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3ac424c

  [34]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1622

  [35]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4ab0c20

  [36]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1378

  [37]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fa82a8d

  [38]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1710

  [39]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d08b53c

  [40]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1712

  [41]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9e620ce

  [42]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1390

  [43]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5db4b3e

  [44]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1680

  [45]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/baefaed

  [46]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1407

  [47]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5e32c80

  [48]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1474

  [49]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e270131

  [50]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1358

  [51]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/927a34a

  [52]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1291

  [53]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ef48f88

  [54]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1270

  [55]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bcf2852

  [56]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1469

  [57]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6b82510

  [58]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1584

  [59]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7d38fb8

  [60]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1515

  [61]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/55edef7

  [62]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1333

  [63]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9740342

  [64]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1245

  [65]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d7f53ff

  [66]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1665

  [67]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/84b4ea4

  [68]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1511

  [69]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a6de1b0

  [70]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1653

  [71]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f35b2ea

  [72]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1652

  [73]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6faed59

  [74]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1191

  [75]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/19f3703

  [76]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1329

  [77]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d1a1bd9

  [78]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1281

  [79]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/94869ad

  [80]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1479

  [81]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2d29628

  [82]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1655

  [83]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e2be3bd

  [84]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1694

  [85]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a20e610

  [86]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1178

  [87]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/61d4e3d

  [88]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bf7782c

  [89]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1310

  [90]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f8bb323

  [91]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1214

  [92]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/674bf45

  [93]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1490

  [94]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/73d95b9

  [95]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1197

  [96]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2d34ad4

  [97]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1345

  [98]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/10d6b76

  [99]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1226

  [100]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c91d320

  [101]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1238

  [102]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9e91115

  [103]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1242

  [104]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3b62245

  [105]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1297

  [106]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bfa075a

  [107]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1702

  [108]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b126ecb

  [109]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1266

  [110]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b47e22e

  [111]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1241

  [112]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9e07f2e

  [113]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1576

  [114]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a814657

  [115]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1229

  [116]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/05d86b1

  [117]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1299

  [118]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9c78135

  [119]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1545

  [120]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6ba65c6

  [121]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1344

  [122]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/716fe01

  [123]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1463

  [124]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/943638d

  [125]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1434

  [126]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/afd94fa

  [127]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1446

  [128]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5baeb5b

  [129]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1175

  [130]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2ba8a1d

  [131]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1629

  [132]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/85995cd

  [133]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1192

  [134]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1dc0d99

  [135]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1713

  [136]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/50b72f2

  [137]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1684

  [138]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/29a1220

  [139]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1305

  [140]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9a14ae7

  [141]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1682

  [142]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/21af355

  [143]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1489

  [144]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d3d98a5

  [145]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1350

  [146]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7933932

  [147]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1450

  [148]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/48d22a4

  [149]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1315

  [150]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e4fdf58

  [151]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1357

  [152]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2bf496e

  [153]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1681

  [154]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1e0d1ab

  [155]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1367

  [156]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d67fcfe

  [157]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1364

  [158]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d47c69c

  [159]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1597

  [160]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d16b0da

  [161]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1484

  [162]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6c1a363

  [163]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1439

  [164]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/936f5e0

  [165]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1452

  [166]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c0c05be

  [167]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1448

  [168]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/85ca38a

  [169]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1415

  [170]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e432c47

  [171]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1280

  [172]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3776dc8

  [173]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1478

  [174]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7d9100b

  [175]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1228

  [176]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/db26743

  [177]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1664

  [178]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ae23f01

  [179]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1671

  [180]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9f040f2

  [181]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1359

  [182]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cd840f4

  [183]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1563

  [184]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f90a0d7

  [185]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1649

  [186]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e85e57a

  [187]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1508

  [188]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dac39ee

  [189]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1557

  [190]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e7f953e

  [191]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1236

  [192]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/eb398fc

  [193]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1263

  [194]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/853e106

  [195]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1645

  [196]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/824f390

  [197]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1366

  [198]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e71409c

  [199]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1341

  [200]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c5e07b1

  [201]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1659

  [202]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7a53050

  [203]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1573

  [204]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/79c3f00

  [205]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1605

  [206]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/63efa10

  [207]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1540

  [208]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/af49827

  [209]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1323

  [210]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9a4137b

  [211]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1353

  [212]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/be10f37

  [213]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1312

  [214]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/411c3e9

  [215]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1321

  [216]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9f554ff

  [217]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1334

  [218]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/95a3c73

  [219]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1328

  [220]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cf1acf1

  [221]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1513

  [222]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/00e9707

  [223]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1621

  [224]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dc33967

  [225]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1250

  [226]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/be7bc2f

  [227]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1189

  [228]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/630fd38

  [229]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1603

  [230]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2cbe014

  [231]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1332

  [232]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4e760f7

  [233]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1627

  [234]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c788770

  [235]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1295

  [236]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dbbf598

  [237]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1301

  [238]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f387a9b

  [239]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1313

  [240]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c61fa77

  [241]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1302

  [242]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2f88e96

  [243]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1317

  [244]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6560b23

  [245]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1318

  [246]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2cdfcc4

  [247]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1185

  [248]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8a4c294

  [249]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1692

  [250]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1c11770

  [251]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1647

  [252]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/732a1dd

  [253]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1196

  [254]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6501413

  [255]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1453

  [256]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4ce5a06

  [257]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1283

  [258]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c49e52f

  [259]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1570

  [260]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dbf115c

  [261]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1695

  [262]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3da93c8

  [263]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1646

  [264]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/38d10e4

  [265]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1600

  [266]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0218f10

  [267]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1397

  [268]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/16311dc

  [269]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1602

  [270]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bff49bb

  [271]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1674

  [272]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/938c483

  [273]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1320

  [274]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c4149ea

  [275]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1354

  [276]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e60b020

  [277]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1405

  [278]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9a527f2

  [279]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1568

  [280]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b68eccd

  [281]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1347

  [282]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/95949e2

  [283]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1365

  [284]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/65d23b9

  [285]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1631

  [286]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/25d0741

  [287]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1342

  [288]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2487b42

  [289]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1395

  [290]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/de7e74e

  [291]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1339

  [292]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fcb390d

  [293]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1351

  [294]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/93b95c4

  [295]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1193

  [296]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9d7567e

  [297]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1276

  [298]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e0cd7e3

  [299]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1275

  [300]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ef3b2fd

  [301]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1556

  [302]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bc9672e

  [303]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1662

  [304]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fa66232

  [305]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1368

  [306]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/361d73f

  [307]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1230

  [308]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c41dd47

  [309]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1678

  [310]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cfd055b

  [311]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1688

  [312]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/150cbbe

  [313]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1198

  [314]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2e590d3

  [315]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1606

  [316]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1163db5

  [317]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1698

  [318]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/6b9ded9

  [319]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1171

  [320]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7dd1bdf

  [321]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/761

  [322]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1180

  [323]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/48d711e

  [324]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1623

  [325]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/52ecdcb

  [326]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1503

  [327]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/132782d

  [328]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1585

  [329]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/781a246

  [330]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1546

  [331]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9bdc1e6

  [332]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1520

  [333]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8eb68b3

  [334]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1231

  [335]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2336262

  [336]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1237

  [337]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/90bf2f3

  [338]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1549

  [339]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/adae46d

  [340]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1566

  [341]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/52e2b17

  [342]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1468

  [343]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/33dd037

  [344]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1239

  [345]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b29b6bf

  [346]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1349

  [347]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/97a1d44

  [348]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1475

  [349]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1035afb

  [350]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1482

  [351]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ef4a7ee

  [352]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1464

  [353]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f32b8ca

  [354]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1409

  [355]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1294

  [356]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a2e5bd9

  [357]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1476

  [358]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/803b0a0

  [359]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1571

  [360]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3e948b8

  [361]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7bbc2e8

  [362]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1372

  [363]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/64a099e

  [364]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1685

  [365]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/acc3395

  [366]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1257

  [367]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0bdfc96

  [368]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1561

  [369]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2adbaef

  [370]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1686

  [371]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3d4d59e

  [372]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1618

  [373]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/635808e

  [374]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1519

  [375]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/faef59e

  [376]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1620

  [377]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/74e46b2

  [378]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1498

  [379]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/73aadae

  [380]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/976

  [381]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/31fdf12

  [382]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1638

  [383]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/33dfacb

  [384]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1708

  [385]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0115fb6

  [386]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1550

  [387]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1558d36

  [388]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1338

  [389]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8e9d503

  [390]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1547

  [391]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/55a182e

  [392]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1696

  [393]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/add261b

  [394]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1224

  [395]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a01ea82

  [396]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1216

  [397]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/753d0e2

  [398]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1370

  [399]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/67b6db4

  [400]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1225

  [401]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9d73144

  [402]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1583

  [403]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cac4023

  [404]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1183

  [405]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ebccf18

  [406]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1232

  [407]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/4f4e31b

  [408]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1217

  [409]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3dded61

  [410]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1172

  [411]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1f90dde

  [412]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1207

  [413]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/29f07a6

  [414]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1206

  [415]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1510

  [416]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f9705a2

  [417]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1548

  [418]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a45c998

  [419]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1383

  [420]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5140c13

  [421]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1598

  [422]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7b341f7

  [423]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1703

  [424]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d55f84a

  [425]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1667

  [426]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1b8a29d

  [427]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1666

  [428]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cbf96ef

  [429]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1286

  [430]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/fb84aee

  [431]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/ee8569f

  [432]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1194

  [433]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c75a7bb

  [434]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1210

  [435]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/69f25e8

  [436]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1714

  [437]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d37b9ec

  [438]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1346

  [439]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a6cde28

  [440]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1396

  [441]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9355631

  [442]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1562

  [443]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7617fd2

  [444]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1204

  [445]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/0b51080

  [446]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1630

  [447]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/705e71f

  [448]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1200

  [449]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/1532617

  [450]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1663

  [451]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3d210bb

  [452]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1218

  [453]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/9627e2b

  [454]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1516

  [455]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/53fe270

  [456]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1500

  [457]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2ede02a

  [458]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1293

  [459]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/04468fc

  [460]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1472

  [461]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/c7a19e7

  [462]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1648

  [463]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cb9e714

  [464]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1268

  [465]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e2ad4ab

  [466]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1284

  [467]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8e87280

  [468]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1261

  [469]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d13839c

  [470]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1491

  [471]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cf1c5b7

  [472]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1487

  [473]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/21271e3

  [474]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1247

  [475]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b5775de

  [476]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1260

  [477]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e05d5a7

  [478]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1564

  [479]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7d691df

  [480]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1471

  [481]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/cdaf285

  [482]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1169

  [483]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b4b8bf0

  [484]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1287

  [485]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/04b7458

  [486]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1269

  [487]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/7f63d97

  [488]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1314

  [489]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dca414b

  [490]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1327

  [491]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/5b5b354

  [492]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1442

  [493]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/375c336

  [494]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1441

  [495]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1220

  [496]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/064bd2f

  [497]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1304

  [498]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2af11b1

  [499]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1499

  [500]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d7730c7

  [501]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1504

  [502]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b9486bc

  [503]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1425

  [504]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/e3c7277

  [505]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1256

  [506]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/613a438

  [507]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1384

  [508]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/29d2af5

  [509]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1552

  [510]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/093f889

  [511]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1553

  [512]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/60406b9

  [513]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1555

  [514]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8380bc7

  [515]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1470

  [516]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/b756a22

  [517]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1212

  [518]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/f653dac

  [519]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1404

  [520]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8ead57c

  [521]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1309

  [522]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/901c23d

  [523]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1285

  [524]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/a4942d3

  [525]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1203

  [526]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/78ab636

  [527]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1184

  [528]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/d5396bd

  [529]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1417

  [530]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/099a09e

  [531]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1316

  [532]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bec5699

  [533]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1330

  [534]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/51d5633

  [535]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1481

  [536]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/2f6ef29

  [537]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1447

  [538]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/3f19a3b

  [539]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1424

  [540]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/8966016

  [541]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1509

  [542]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/dbc7103

  [543]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1483

  [544]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/05f65f4

  [545]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1223

  [546]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/bb216b4

  [547]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1617

  [548]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/69ad154

  [549]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1633

  [550]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/eb0aac6

  [551]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/issues/1186

  [552]: https://github.com/box/box-ui-elements/commit/69f329b

  [553]: https://github.com/jaredpalmer/formik/blob/master/docs/migrating-v2.md

  [554]: https://github.com/box/box-developer-changelog/issues/222

  [555]: https://nvd.nist.gov/vuln/detail/CVE-2019-10742

  [556]: https://github.com/hapi/address
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-25">
  ## New parameters for Search API

  New optional query parameters have been made available for the
  [Search API](/reference/get-search), namely `sort` and `direction`.

  The purpose of these parameters is to allow applications to sort items by their
  `modified_at` date in ascending or descending order.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-25">
  ## New fields for File Versions

  New optional fields have been made available within the File Version object,
  namely `trashed_by`, `restored_by` and `restored_at`.

  The fields will be returned as part of the standard
  [File Version object](/reference/resources/file-version/).

  The purpose of these fields is to have a better understanding of when file
  versions have been moved in and out of the trash, and by whom.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-24" description="Python SDK v2.6.1 released">
  ## New Features and Enhancements

  * Added `api_` call decorator for copy method.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-24" description="Java SDK v2.41.0 released">
  ## New Features and Enhancements

  1. Added enum for complete field on `BoxTasks` Actions enum ([#745](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/745))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-24">
  ## Java SDK v2.40.0 released

  1. Update `comments.md` ([#749](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/749))
  2. Update `events.md` ([#750](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/750))
  3. Update `collections.md` ([#748](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/748))
  4. Update `files.md` ([#747](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/747))
  5. Update `files.md` ([#746](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/746))
  6. Update `files.md` to tag thumbnail code sample ([#733](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/733))
  7. Update `authentication.md` ([#739](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/739))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-23">
  ## New Shield Error Code

  A new error code for [Box Shield][box-shield] has been released. The new
  `403 - forbidden_by_policy` error code will be raised when the enterprise has
  applied Shield access policies that prevent the action, such as downloading
  items.

  The resolution path is to contact your Box admin to adjust the Shield access
  policies if the action is required.

  See the
  [error code documentation](/guides/api-calls/permissions-and-errors/common-errors)
  for more details and solution path.

  [box-shield]: https://www.box.com/shield
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-18">
  ## Relay API Endpoints will EOL on December 31st, 2019

  On December 31st, 2019, Box will end of life all Relay Classic API endpoints,
  which includes the following functions:

  * Get list of published Relay Classic templates.
  * Get list of Relay Classic workflows.
  * Launch a Relay Classic workflow.

  To ensure that your application continues to function after December 31st
  please remove all calls to the Relay Classic APIs listed above.

  For more information please see our
  [community thread](https://community.box.com/t5/Platform-and-Development-Forum/Relay-Classic-APIs-to-EOL-on-December-31st-2019/m-p/77729#M7276)
  on the topic.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-10-17">
  ## Java SDK v2.39.0 released

  1. Deprecating batch ([#741](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/741))
  2. Add support for Task `completion_rule` ([#738](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/738))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-09-19">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.20.0 released

  See [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3200) for details
  Commits: [`v3.19.0...v3.20.0`](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/`v3.19.0...v3.20.0`)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.20.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.20.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.20.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.20.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-09-19">
  ## Java SDK v2.38.0 released

  1. Added field `trashed_by`, `restored_at`, `restored_by`, `purged_at` to `FileVersion` ([#734](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/734))
  2. Set file attributes on chunked uploads ([#730](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/730))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-09-18">
  ## New security enhancements for token revocation

  We have enhanced the capabilities of the [token
  revocation](/reference/post-oauth2-revoke/) endpoint to permit
  [downscoped tokens][downscope] to be
  revoked prior to their expiration time. Previous to this update only fully
  scoped access tokens could be revoked through the /revoke endpoint. With this
  new enhancement downscoped tokens may now be revoked in addition to the fully
  scoped access tokens.

  More information is available [here][blog_token_revocation].

  [blog_token_revocation]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/new-security-enhancements-for-revoking-access-tokens-79b9960a7ce2

  [downscope]: /guides/authentication/tokens/downscope
</Update>

<Update label="2019-09-11">
  ## New completion\_rule field for Tasks

  A new optional field has been made available within the Task object,
  `completion_rule`. This field may be set through the use of the the
  [Create Task](/reference/post-tasks) and [Update Task](/reference/put-tasks-id)
  endpoints, and will be returned as part of the standard
  [Task object](/reference/resources/task/).

  The purpose of this field is to set the conditions under which a task is
  completed, based on user involvement. When a task is created with a completion
  rule of `all_assignees` (default), the task will only be considered completed
  when all assignees have completed the task. When a task is created with a
  completion rule of `any_assignee`, the task will be considered completed when
  one assignee has completed the task.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-08-29">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.19.0 released

  See [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3190) for details
  Commits: [`v3.18.0...v3.19.0`](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/`v3.18.0...v3.19.0`)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.19.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.19.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.19.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.19.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-08-29">
  ## Python SDK v2.6.0 released

  Adding a new get admin events function with `created_before`, `created_after`, and `event_type` parameters. Thank you `@capk1rk`!
</Update>

<Update label="2019-08-29">
  ## Box CLI v2.4.0 released

  [CHANGELOG](https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#240-2019-08-29)

  * Fix output when updating collaboration role to owner ([#165](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/165))  [`f8be639`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f8be639)
  * Print all columns in CSV output for heterogeneous collection ([#164](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/164))  [`a8dda02`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/a8dda02)
  * Update plugin-help to resolve warning about `lodash.template` ([#160](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/160))  [`3730bc5`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/3730bc5)
  * Bump `lodash` from 4.17.11 to 4.17.13 ([#156](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/156))  [`d035e74`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/d035e74)
  * Add support for setting external app user ID ([#153](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/153))  [`d68b61b`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/d68b61b)
  * Update `js-yaml` to 3.13.1 ([#151](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/151))  [`13745df`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/13745df)

  [`v2.3.0...v2.4.0`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/compare/`v2.3.0...v2.4.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-08-22">
  ## Node SDK v1.29.1 released

  * Regenerate JTI and retry auth request when JTI claim is rejected ([#405](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/405))  [`c0ccdb9`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/c0ccdb9)

  [`v1.29.0...v1.29.1`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/`v1.29.0...v1.29.1`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-08-22">
  ## Java SDK v2.37.0 released

  1. Improving authentication docs for `BoxConfig.readFrom()` ([#723](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/723))
  2. Add replace functionality for multi select metadata ([#726](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/726))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-08-01">
  ## Java SDK v2.36.0 released

  1. Added convenience function for shared link and fixed setting… ([#720](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/720))
  2. Add missing fields to files, folders, and web links ([#719](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/719))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-07-18">
  ## Java SDK v2.35.0 released

  1. Added support for `is_externally_owned` field ([#714](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/714))
  2. Added exception messaging for old `error` and `error_description` ([#710](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/710))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-06-26">
  ## New supported values in Tasks API

  On June 26th, Box released support for a new task type, general tasks. When
  creating or updating a task, the `action` field can either be `review` for
  approval tasks or `complete` for the new general tasks.

  This change also affects the accepted values when updating a task assignment.
  If you want to update an approval/review task, the `resolution_state` can be
  set to `incomplete`, `approved`, or `rejected`. A general/complete task can
  have a `resolution_state` of `incomplete` or `completed`.

  The Tasks API doesn't refer to tasks as "General" or "Approval" within the
  response body. This is reflected only within Box's UI.

  Docs can be found [here](/reference/resources/task/).
</Update>

<Update label="2019-06-20">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.18.0 released

  See [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#3180) for details
  Commits: [`v3.17.0...v3.18.0`](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/compare/`v3.17.0...v3.18.0`)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.18.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.18.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.18.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.18.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-06-20">
  ## Python SDK v2.5.0 released

  Allowed passing `None` to clear `configurable_permission` field in the `add_member()` method.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-06-06">
  ## Java SDK v2.34.0 released

  1. Added fields: action for task ([#707](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/707))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-31">
  ## Replaced Obsolete Field in Collaborations

  In 2018 a new field, `acceptance_requirements_status` was added to the GET
  collaborations/id API endpoint to support additional notification use cases.
  This field includes terms of service, 2-factor auth, and strong password
  requirements. The existing `acceptance_requirements` field, which only contains
  Terms of Service requirements, have been replaced with the new
  `acceptance_requirements_status`.

  Previously a call to `GET
    /collaboration/<collaboration_id>?fields=acceptance_requirements` would return
  an object like the following:

  ```js theme={null}
  "acceptance_requirements": {
      "terms_of_service": {
          "type": "terms_of_service",
          "id": <tos_id>
      }
  }
  ```

  With the new field, the request `GET
    /collaboration/<collaboration_id>?fields=acceptance_requirements_status` would
  return the following:

  ```js theme={null}
   "acceptance_requirements_status": {
      "terms_of_service_requirement": {
          "is_accepted": true,
          "terms_of_service": {
              "type": "terms_of_service",
              "id": <tos_id>
          }
      },
      "strong_password_requirement": {
          "enterprise_has_strong_password_required_for_external_users": true,
          "user_has_strong_password": false
      },
      "two_factor_authentication_requirement": {
          "enterprise_has_two_factor_auth_enabled": true,
          "user_has_two_factor_authentication_enabled" true
      }
  }
  ```
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-23">
  ## Java SDK v2.33.0 released

  1. Added test for making sure part buffer is correct size ([#703](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/703))
  2. Allow setting `can_non_owners_invite` field on Folder objects ([#700](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/700))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-23">
  ## Box CLI v2.3.0 released

  [CHANGELOG](https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#230-2019-05-23)

  [`v2.2.0...v2.3.0`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/compare/`v2.2.0...v2.3.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-16">
  ## Python SDK v2.4.1 released

  1. Added ability for users to use set metadata on [files](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/files.md#set-metadata) and [folders](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/folders.md#set-metadata)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-15">
  ## TLS 1.0 deprecated complete

  On May 13th, 2019, Box began the process of disabling TLS 1.0 requests to Box
  APIs. As of today, all TLS 1.0 API requests will be returning a response
  stating that a secure connection could not be established when making API calls.

  Impacted developers will have been notified through multiple channels over the
  last 6-12 months, but should your application be impacted you will need to
  update your systems to again be able to make API requests to Box.

  Please see our TLS 1.0 deprecation guide to
  upgrade your systems to TLS 1.2.

  For any questions or for addition support, please
  [file a support ticket][support_ticket].

  [support_ticket]: https://community.box.com/t5/custom/page/page-id/BoxSearchLithiumTKB
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-10">
  ## Box CLI v2.2.0 released

  * Update CHANGELOG for `v2.2.0` release ([#143](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/143))  [`96b49d5`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/96b49d5)
  * Remove unnecessary dependency ([#141](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/141))  [`7ac5563`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/7ac5563)
  * Record text of third party licenses ([#142](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/142))  [`47b78f1`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/47b78f1)
  * Build command docs on separate pages ([#139](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/139))  [`01534f1`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/01534f1)
  * Catch bulk input errors with converted delegate command ([#134](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/134))  [`5cd5eee`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/5cd5eee)
  * Add metadata set commands ([#136](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/136))  [`efa33ed`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/efa33ed)
  * Add issue template ([#138](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/138))  [`a5cbddf`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/a5cbddf)
  * Fix duplicate call during bulk input on delegated command ([#133](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/133))  [`ba3d65a`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/ba3d65a)
  * Fix adding `web_links` to a collection ([#132](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/132))  [`8fc2023`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/8fc2023)
  * Add search sort flags ([#131](https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/131))  [`57f8d3d`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/57f8d3d)

  [`v2.1.0...v2.2.0`](https://github.com/box/boxcli/compare/`v2.1.0...v2.2.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-05-09">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.17.0 released

  * Fixed the encoding of dates in the query parameters for Events and Search endpoints
  * Deprecated `FilesManager.DownloadStreamAsync()` and introduced a replacement method with correct parameter types for byte offsets: `FilesManager.DownloadAsync()`

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.17.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.17.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.17.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.17.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-29">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.16.0 released

  * Added `sort` and `direction` parameters to `client.SearchManager.SearchAsync()` to  control sort order
  * Added `extension` parameter to `client.FilesManager.GetThumbnailAsync()` to control which thumbnail format is returned (thanks `@guilmori`!)
  * Fixed a bug where query string parameters were not correctly encoded
  * Added `SetFileMetadataAsync()` and `SetFolderMetadataAsync()` methods to `client.MetadataManager` to set metadata
    keys and values, overwriting existing values for the provided keys.
  * Automatically retry most API calls when the API responds with a transient error status code

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.16.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.16.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.16.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.16.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-25">
  ## Node SDK v1.29.0 released

  * Prepare `v1.29.0` release ([#381](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/381))  [`4860e7c`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/4860e7c)
  * Add convenience methods for setting metadata ([#376](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/376))  [`1938e39`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/1938e39)
  * Use HTML comments in issue template  [`01f21df`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/01f21df)
  * Document search sort parameters ([#370](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/370))  [`257e748`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/257e748)

  [`v1.28.0...v1.29.0`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/`v1.28.0...v1.29.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-25">
  ## Java SDK v2.32.0 released

  1. Support for Set Metadata ([#697](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/697))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-15">
  ## Changes to Task (Assignment) API responses

  We have released an update to the API responses of the
  [Get Task](/reference/get-tasks-id) and
  [Get Task Assignment](/reference/get-task-assignments-id) endpoints.

  Prior to this change, if a call was made to get a task or task assignment with
  a valid task ID, and that file was deleted or your permissions changed to
  prevent viewing the file, you would receive a 404 error because the tasks would
  be deleted with the file.

  With this new change, the response returned will be the task object with a
  `null` response where the item would be, rather than a 404 error response.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-11">
  ## Java SDK v2.31.0 released

  1. Add support for sorting folder items ([#694](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/694))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-10">
  ## Box CLI v1.4.0 released

  * Added the option to update collaboration expiration date
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-08">
  ## Java SDK v2.30.1 released

  1. Fix date parsing to correctly handle RFC3339 timezone format ([#693](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/693))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-04">
  ## Java SDK v2.30.0 released

  1. Added `action_by` field to `BoxEvent` ([#692](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/692))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-04-01">
  ## Java SDK v2.29.0 released

  1. Support for uploading file with description ([#690](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/690))
  2. Add sort and direction fields to search ([#689](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/689))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-29">
  ## Python SDK v2.3.2 released

  * Fixing an issue in `v2.3.1` where package could not be installed.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-29">
  ## Box CLI 2.1.0 release

  A new version of the Box CLI has been released, taking the version from 2.0.0
  to 2.1.0. This release includes a number of feature enhancements and bug fixes:

  * Fixed paging for events commands ([link][github_cli_p126])
  * Updated `lodash` version ([link][github_cli_p129])
  * Send fields parameter to API when `--fields` flag is used ([link][github_cli_p113])
  * Fix event-types flag ([link][github_cli_p120])
  * Added build NPM script ([link][github_cli_commit])

  [github_cli_p126]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/126

  [github_cli_p129]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/129

  [github_cli_p113]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/113

  [github_cli_p120]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/120

  [github_cli_commit]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/commit/f0f88f66e3014afba616b5a2994157d435094b56
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-28">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.15.0 released

  * Added support for passing custom `IBoxService` to `BoxJWTAuth` constructor.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.15.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.15.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.15.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.15.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-28">
  ## Python SDK v2.3.0 released

  * Added the ability to set [file description upon upload](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/files.md#upload-a-file)
  * Added support for [basic authenticated proxy and unauthenticated proxy](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/configuration.md#proxy)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-28">
  ## Node SDK v1.28.0 released

  * Prepare for `v1.28.0` release ([#366](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/366))  [`8fa21de`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/8fa21de)
  * Add common item methods for Web Links ([#364](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/pull/364))  [`7549d4f`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/commit/7549d4f)

  [`v1.27.0...v1.28.0`](https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk/compare/`v1.27.0...v1.28.0`)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-18">
  ## Box Android SDK v4.2.3 released

  Contains various bug fixes and stability improvements
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-14">
  ## Python SDK v2.2.2 released

  * Updated `requests-toolbelt` dependency restriction
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-07">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.14.1 released

  * Removed unnecessary `package.config` from sample files.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.14.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.14.1)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.14.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.14.1)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-07">
  ## Java SDK v2.28.1 released

  1. Wrong casting for response in `BoxAPIResponse` for `BoxMetadataCascadePolicy.forceApply()` ([#685](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/685))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-03-01">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.14.0 released

  * Added trace ID to API response exception message.
  * Fix deserialization of translated task assignment status.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.14.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.14.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.14.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.14.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-21">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.13.1 released

  * Fixed an issue where some objects related to Events did not have their `.Id` property correctly deserialized from JSON

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.13.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.13.1)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.13.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.13.1)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-21">
  ## Java SDK v2.28.0 released

  1. Added Request ID to exception message with Trace ID ([#684](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/684))
  2. user avatar feature ([#683](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/683))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-15">
  ## Python SDK v2.2.1 released

  * Fixing an issue in `v2.2.0` where package could not be installed.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-15">
  ## Python SDK v2.2.0 released

  * Added ability for user to [retrieve an avatar](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/user.md#get-the-avatar-for-a-user) for a user.
  * Changed retry strategy to use exponential back-off with randomized jitter.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-14">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.13.0 released

  * Added the `.InviteEmail` property to `BoxCollaboration` objects, which displays the email address for the invited
    user in a pending collaboration
  * Added `.Timezone`, `.IsExternalCollabRestricted`, `.Tags`, and `.Hostname` properties to `BoxUser` objects

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.13.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.13.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.13.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.13.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-08">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.12.0 released

  * Added `client.FilesManager.GetCollaborationsCollectionAsync()` and deprecated
    `client.FilesManager.GetCollaborationsAsync()` to enable paging through the entire
    collection of collaborations on a file
  * Added `client.WebLinksManager.CopyAsync()`, `client.WebLinksManager.CreateSharedLinkAsync()`,
    and `client.WebLinksManager.DeleteSharedLinkAsync()`
  * Added `client.UsersManager.GetUserAvatarAsync()` for retrieving a user's avatar image

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.12.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.12.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.12.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.12.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-02-08">
  ## Python SDK v2.1.0 released

  * Added ability for user to [chunk upload files](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/files.md#chunked-upload) and resume uploads for interrupted uploads.
  * Added ability to [verify webhook message](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/webhook.md#validate-webhook-message)
  * Added ability for user to add metadata classification to [files](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/files.md#set-a-classification) and [folders](https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/blob/master/docs/usage/folders.md#set-a-classification).
  * Bug fix where calling  `.response_object()` method on an API object could throw.
</Update>

<Update label="2019-01-31">
  ## Java SDK v2.27.0 Released

  1. Metadata Classification ([#671](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/671))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-01-18">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.11.0 released

  * Added support for reading and writing more Group fields
  * Fixed an issue where the `UnsharedAt` field of a shared link could not be set to `null`
  * Fixed renaming a file on new version upload
  * Added the ability to set the content modification timestamp on file version upload
  * Fixed issues around reading the source of an event when the source item is a web link

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.11.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.11.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.11.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.11.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2019-01-18">
  ## New Sidebar UI Element & Open With Element GA

  Two major releases have been made to the Box UI Elements:

  1. New Sidebar Element: This new element provides capabilities for
     incorporating the metadata sidebar for a file directly into your own
     application or website. Documentation is available
     [here](/guides/embed/ui-elements).
  2. GA of Open With Element: The Open With element has been moved from beta to
     general availability. Open With delivers an individual button or an integration
     into the existing Content Explorer element to launch file content with Adobe
     Sign, G Suite, or Box Edit. Documentation is available
     [here](/guides/embed/ui-elements).

  Full release announcement is available [here][blog_new_element].

  [blog_new_element]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/new-sidebar-element-the-ga-of-open-with-935936a0628f
</Update>

<Update label="2019-01-17">
  ## Java SDK v2.26.0 released

  1. add missing fields to task and folder and add ability to get fields for tasks ([#677](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/677))
  2. Fixed typos in `README.md` ([#678](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/678))
  3. Add `invite_email` field to collaboration object ([#672](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/672))
</Update>

<Update label="2019-01-03">
  ## Java SDK v2.25.1 released

  1. dependency upgrade for `bouncycastle` and `jose4j` ([#669](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/669))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-12-21">
  ## Box CLI V2 release

  A major version release (V2) has been made to the [Box CLI][guide].

  See the following links for updated information:

  * [Release notes][cli_v2_release_notes]: Major revision details, breaking
    changes, and bug fixes.
  * [Command list][cli_v2_release_commands]: All commands available in the new
    CLI.
  * [Installation options][guide]: Standalone installers and
    source code options.

  [cli_v2_release_notes]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#200

  [cli_v2_release_commands]: https://github.com/box/boxcli#command-topics

  [guide]: [/guides/cli/quick-start/install-and-configure]
</Update>

<Update label="2018-12-14">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.10.0 released

  1. Added functionality for Metadata Cascade Policy

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-12-13">
  ## Java SDK v2.25.0 released

  1. Allow content streaming to box through `outputstream`. [#667](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/667)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-12-12">
  ## Collaborations now show unregistered users

  An additional field, `invite_email`, has been added to the collaboration return
  object in the instance where an unregistered user has been added as a
  collaborator on a file or folder. This change was put in place because the
  current `accessible_by` object returned would show `null` as the result for an
  unregistered user. The new field will now show the email address that was used
  to invite the user.

  This change affects the following endpoints:

  * [Get Collaboration](/reference/get-collaborations-id)
  * [Get File Collaborations](/reference/get-files-id-collaborations)
  * [Get Folder Collaborations](/reference/get-folders-id-collaborations)

  Previously a collaboration object with an unregistered user would look like the
  following:

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "type": "collaboration",
    "id": "376164239",
    .....
    "accessible_by":  null
    .....
  }
  ```

  With this new update the object returned would look like the following:

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "type": "collaboration",
    "id": "376164239",
    ......
    "accessible_by":  null
    "invite_email": "sadfasdf@box.com",
    },
    ......
  }
  ```
</Update>

<Update label="2018-12-05">
  ## Enterprise events API adds created\_by for supervisors

  A minor change has been made to the response object of the
  [enterprise events](/reference/get-events/#request) API endpoint in the
  event that an action is taken by a supervisor or internal admin user, such as a
  Box admin.

  Prior to this update the user information of the supervisor or internal admin
  user would be displayed in the `created_by` field of the response object. With
  this update the response will now show generic user information when that user
  is a supervisor or internal admin.

  Previously the `created_by` field in the response looked like this:

  ```js theme={null}
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "2030401181",
    "name": "sshah+iadev",
    "login": "admin_sshah"
  }
  ```

  With this update that same response would look similar to the following:

  ```js theme={null}
  "created_by": {
    "type": "user",
    "id": "box_support",
    "name": "Box Support",
    "login": "support@box.com"
  }
  ```
</Update>

<Update label="2018-11-16">
  ## Java SDK v2.24.0 released

  1. added tests and implementation for options object ([#661](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/661))
  2. Expose object type on `BoxItem` ([#662](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/662))
  3. Allow per-connection timeouts ([#660](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/660))
  4. Add global setting for max requests ([#657](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/657))
  5. added overload for `is_ongoing` field and added getter for `is_ongoing` ([#653](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/653))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-11-01" description="Python SDK v2.0.0 released">
  ## Breaking Changes

  * Python 2.6 is no longer supported.

  * Python 3.3 is no longer supported.

  * `client.search()` now returns a `Search` object that exposes a `query()` method to call the Search API.
    Use `client.search().query(**search_params)` instead of `client.search(**search_params)`.

  * `client.get_memberships(...)` has a change in signature. The limit and offset parameters have swapped positions to keep
    consistency with the rest of the SDK.

  * `client.groups(...)` has been changed to `client.get_groups`. The limit and offset parameters have swapped positions.

  * The `unshared_at` parameter for `item.create_shared_link(...)` and `file.get_shared_link_download_url(...)`
    now takes an `RFC3339-formatted <https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3339#section-5.8>` `unicode` string instead of a
    `datetime.date`.  Users migrating from `v1.x` can pass the value of `date.isoformat()` instead of the `date`
    object itself.

  * `Events.get_events(...)` now returns a list of `Event` instances rather than a list of `dict`
    representing events.  `Event` inherits from `Mapping` but will not have all the same capabilities as
    `dict`.

    * Your code is affected if you use `Events.get_events(...)` and expect a list of `dict` rather than a list of
      `Mapping`.  For example, if you use `__setitem__` (`event['key'] = value`), `update()`, `copy()`, or
      if your code depends on the `str` or `repr` of the `Event`.  Use of `__getitem__` (`event['key']`),
      `get()`, and other `Mapping` methods is unaffected.  See the [Python
      documentation](https://docs.python.org/2.7/library/collections.html#collections-abstract-base-classes) for methods supported on
      `Mapping` instances.

    * Migration: If you still need to treat an `Event` as a `dict`, you can get a deepcopy of the original `dict`
      using the new property on `BaseAPIJSONObject`, `response_object`.

  * `LoggingNetwork` has been removed. Logging calls are now made from the `DefaultNetwork` class. In addition,
    the logging format strings in this class have changed in a way that
    will break logging for any applications that have overridden any of these
    strings. They now use keyword format placeholders instead of positional
    placeholders. All custom format strings will now have to use the same keyword
    format placeholders. Though this is a breaking change, the good news is that
    using keyword format placeholders means that any future changes will be
    automatically backwards-compatible (as long as there aren't any changes to
    change/remove any of the keywords).

  * `File.update_contents()` and `File.update_contents_with_stream()` now
    correctly return a `File` object with the correct internal JSON structure.
    Previously it would return a `File` object where the file JSON is hidden
    inside `file['entries'][0]`. This is a bug fix, but will be a breaking
    change for any clients that have already written code to handle the bug.

  * Comparing two objects (e.g. a `File` and a `Folder`) that have the same Box ID but different types with `==`
    will now correctly return `False`.

  * The following methods now return iterators over the entire collection of returned objects, rather than
    a single page:

    * `client.users()`
    * `client.groups()`
    * `client.search().query()`
    * `folder.get_items()`

    Since `folder.get_items()` now returns an iterator, `folder.get_items_limit_offset()` and
    `folder.get_items_marker()` have been removed.  To use marker based paging with `folder.get_items()`,
    pass the `use_marker=True` parameter and optionally specify a `marker` parameter to begin paging from that
    point in the collection.

    Additionally, `group.membership()` has been renamed to `group.get_memberships()`, and returns an iterator of
    membership objects.  This method no longer provides the option to return tuples with paging information.

  * The `Translator` class has been reworked; `translator.get(...)` still returns the constructor for the object class
    corresponding to the passed in type, but `translator.translate(...)` now takes a `Session` and response object
    directly and produces the translated object.  This method will also translate any nested objects found.

    * This change obviates the need for `GroupMembership` to have a custom constructor; it now uses the default
      `BaseObject` constructor.

  ## Features

  * All publicly documented API endpoints and parameters should now be supported by the SDK

  * Added more flexibility to the object translation system:

    * Can create non-global `Translator` instances, which can extend or
      not-extend the global default `Translator`.
    * Can initialize `BoxSession` with a custom `Translator`.
    * Can register custom subclasses on the `Translator` which is associated
      with a `BoxSession` or a `Client`.
    * All translation of API responses now use the `Translator` that is
      referenced by the `BoxSession`, instead of directly using the global
      default `Translator`.
    * Nested objects are now translated by `translator.translate()`

  * When the `auto_session_renewal` is `True` when calling any of the request
    methods on `BoxSession`, if there is no access token, `BoxSession` will
    renew the token *before* making the request. This saves an API call.

  * Auth objects can now be closed, which prevents them from being used to
    request new tokens. This will also revoke any existing tokens (though that
    feature can be turned off by passing `revoke=False`). Also introduces a
    `closing()` context manager method, which will auto-close the auth object
    on exit.

  * Various enhancements to the `JWTAuth` baseclass:

    * The `authenticate_app_user()` method is renamed to
      `authenticate_user()`, to reflect that it may now be used to authenticate
      managed users as well. See the method `docstring` for details.
      `authenticate_app_user()` is now an alias of `authenticate_user()`, in
      order to not introduce an unnecessary backwards-incompatibility.
    * The `user` argument to `authenticate_user()` may now be either a user
      ID string or a `User` instance. Before it had to be a `User` instance.
    * The constructor now accepts an optional `user` keyword argument, which
      may be a user ID string or a `User` instance. When this is passed,
      `authenticate_user()` and can be called without passing a value for the
      `user` argument. More importantly, this means that `refresh()` can be
      called immediately after construction, with no need for a manual call to
      `authenticate_user()`. Combined with the aforementioned improvement to
      the `auto_session_renewal` functionality of `BoxSession`, this means
      that authentication for `JWTAuth` objects can be done completely
      automatically, at the time of first API call.
    * The constructor now supports passing the RSA private key in two different
      ways: by file system path (existing functionality), or by passing the key
      data directly (new functionality). The `rsa_private_key_file_sys_path`
      parameter is now optional, but it is required to pass exactly one of
      `rsa_private_key_file_sys_path` or `rsa_private_key_data`.
    * Document that the `enterprise_id` argument to `JWTAuth` is allowed to
      be `None`.
    * `authenticate_instance()` now accepts an `enterprise` argument, which
      can be used to set and authenticate as the enterprise service account user,
      if `None` was passed for `enterprise_id` at construction time.
    * Authentications that fail due to the expiration time not falling within the
      correct window of time are now automatically retried using the time given
      in the Date header of the Box API response. This can happen naturally when
      the system time of the machine running the Box SDK doesn't agree with the
      system time of the Box API servers.

  * Added an `Event` class.

  * Moved `metadata()` method to `Item` so it's now available for `Folder`
    as well as `File`.

  * The `BaseAPIJSONObject` baseclass (which is a superclass of all API
    response objects) now supports `__contains__` and `__iter__`. They behave
    the same as for `Mapping`. That is, `__contains__` checks for JSON keys
    in the object, and `__iter__` yields all of the object's keys.

  * Added a `RecentItem` class.

  * Added `client.get_recent_items()` to retrieve a user's recently accessed items on Box.

  * Added support for the `can_view_path` parameter when creating new collaborations.

  * Added `BoxObjectCollection` and subclasses `LimitOffsetBasedObjectCollection` and
    `MarkerBasedObjectCollection` to more directly manage paging of objects from an endpoint.
    These classes manage the logic of constructing requests to an endpoint and storing the results,
    then provide `__next__` to iterate over the results. The option to return results one
    by one or as a `Page` of results is also provided.

  * Added a `downscope_token()` method to the `Client` class. This generates a token that
    has its permissions reduced to the provided scopes and for the optionally provided
    `File` or `Folder`.

  * Added methods for configuring `JWTAuth` from config file: `JWTAuth.from_settings_file` and
    `JWTAuth.from_settings_dictionary`.

  * Added `network_response` property to `BoxOAuthException`.

  * API Configuration can now be done per `BoxSession` instance.

  ## Other

  * Added extra information to `BoxAPIException`.
  * Added `collaboration()` method to `Client`.
  * Reworked the class hierarchy.  Previously, `BaseEndpoint` was the parent of `BaseObject` which was the parent
    of all smart objects.  Now `BaseObject` is a child of both `BaseEndpoint` and `BaseAPIJSONObject`.
    `BaseObject` is the parent of all objects that are a part of the REST API.  Another subclass of
    `BaseAPIJSONObject`, `APIJSONObject`, was created to represent pseudo-smart objects such as `Event` that are not
    directly accessible through an API endpoint.
  * Added `network_response_constructor` as an optional property on the
    `Network` interface. Implementations are encouraged to override this
    property, and use it to construct `NetworkResponse` instances. That way,
    subclass implementations can extend the functionality of the
    `NetworkResponse`, by re-overriding this property. This property is defined
    and used in the `DefaultNetwork` implementation.
  * Move response logging to a new `LoggingNetworkResponse` class (which is
    made possible by the aforementioned `network_response_constructor`
    property). Now the SDK decides whether to log the response body, based on
    whether the caller reads or streams the content.
  * Add more information to the request/response logs from `LoggingNetwork`.
  * Add logging for request exceptions in `LoggingNetwork`.
  * Bugfix so that the return value of `JWTAuth.refresh()` correctly matches
    that of the auth interface (by returning a tuple of
    ((access token), (refresh token or None)), instead of only the access token).
    In particular, this fixes an exception in `BoxSession` that always occurred
    when it tried to refresh any `JWTAuth` object.
  * Fixed an exception that was being raised from `ExtendableEnumMeta.__dir__()`.
  * `CPython` 3.6 support.
  * Increased required minimum version of six to 1.9.0.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-10-19">
  ## Python SDK v2 Launched

  A major update (version 2.0) of the [Box Python SDK][python_sdk_v2] has been
  released with significant updates and API feature parity completion.
  [See here][python_sdk_v2_release_notes] for full API release notes. Along with
  the release, the following documentation changes have been made:

  * Updated Python [quick start guides](/guides/).
  * Updated Python [API references](/reference/) code samples.

  [python_sdk_v2]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk

  [python_sdk_v2_release_notes]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk/releases/tag/v2.0.0
</Update>

<Update label="2018-09-27">
  ## New Box Open With Sidebar UI Element

  We have released an open beta version of a new Box UI Element, the 'Open With'
  element. 'Open With' will allow developers to embed a menu to open content
  stored in box with a partner application. The partners available with this beta
  release are Adobe Sign and G Suite.

  Documentation and setup instructions for this new element are
  [available here](/guides/embed/ui-elements).
</Update>

<Update label="2018-09-27">
  ## Java SDK v2.23.2 released

  1. Batch headers patch ([#649](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/649))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-09-13">
  ## Java SDK v2.23.1 released

  1. Fix opening too many TCP connections when issuing a high number of requests ([#646](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/646))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-09-13">
  ## Annotations available for Excel files in preview

  Currently, annotations capabilities don't appear within Excel files in preview,
  either via the
  [Box UI Content Preview element](/guides/embed/ui-elements) or
  expiring embed, even if annotations are enabled (`showAnnotations=true`).

  Starting on **September 13th, 2018**, users will be able to annotate Excel
  files like they can other file types (PDFs, docs, PPT). All 3 annotation
  types (highlight, point, and drawing) will be supported. If `showAnnotations`
  is set to `true` annotations on Excel files will be displayed.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-09-04">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.9.3 released

  * Strong named the assembly

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.3`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.3)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.3`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.3)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-08-23">
  ## Java SDK v2.23.0 released

  1. Metadata cascade policy ([#603](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/603))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-08-21">
  ## Add new fields to folder update and get info endpoints

  Two major releases have been added to the [update folder API endpoint](/reference/put-folders-id),
  `is_collaboration_restricted_to_enterprise`. This is a boolean value made to
  set whether future collaborations should be restricted to within the enterprise
  only. This does not affect existing collaborations. The value of this field
  will also be displayed when calling the [get folder info endpoint](/reference/get-folders-id).
</Update>

<Update label="2018-08-21">
  ## Add new action\_by field to enterprise events

  To better document admin actions taken on user accounts, we have added an
  `action_by` mini-user object in the enterprise events response data. This field
  will display the admin account which performed the user action, if applicable.

  For enterprise admins this would include the ID, login, and name of their
  account. For actions taken by a Box internal admin this would be:

  * id: `box_support`
  * login: `support@box.com`
  * name: `Box Support`

  The additional object is documented within the enterprise
  [event object attributes](/reference/resources/event/).
</Update>

<Update label="2018-08-17">
  ## Box user\_id field size changed

  The `user_id` field, used to track all platform users (that is, managed,
  externally managed, and app users), will soon be updated to begin producing
  64-bit integer numeric values, rather than the 32-bit integers it creates
  currently.

  For customers who are translating the produced `user_id` strings from our APIs
  into 32-bit integer fields, your internal systems are affected by this update,
  and you must update them to support the new 64-bit `user_id` integer size. We
  recommend that all `user_id` fields be stored as strings, as per our
  [API documentation](/reference/resources/user/).
</Update>

<Update label="2018-08-16" description="Generic method added to the Salesforce SDK">
  ## Generic method added to the Salesforce SDK

  The Box for Salesforce Developer Toolkit now provides a global method,
  `sendRequest` that accepts an [`HttpRequest`][salesforce_sdk_httprequest]
  object as a parameter and returns an
  [`HttpResponse`][salesforce_sdk_httpresponse]
  object. This method will use the authentication details of the Service
  Account to make calls to Box's APIs, allowing you to focus on incorporating
  the business logic of your integration. For more details about the added
  method, please see the [method details](/guides/tooling/sdks/salesforce)
  and [sample code](/guides/tooling/sdks/salesforce)
  in the Box metadata sidebar for Salesforce Developer Toolkit documentation.

  [salesforce_sdk_httprequest]: https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_classes_restful_http_httprequest.htm

  [salesforce_sdk_httpresponse]: https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_classes_restful_http_httpresponse.htm#apex_classes_restful_http_httpresponse
</Update>

<Update label="2018-08-09">
  ## Java SDK v2.22.0 Released

  1. patch for transfer content to another user ([#632](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/632))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-07-31">
  ## Expanded Relay Workflow API

  We have expanded the capabilities of [Box Relay][box_relay], a workflow tool
  co-developed between Box and IBM, with a new Workflow API. The Relay Workflow
  API allows you to launch Box Relay workflows and retrieve the statuses of those
  workflows from within your application. It also allows you to view which
  workflow templates have been published in file directly into your instance of
  Box Relay. For more information about the API, please see our
  [announcement blog post][box_relay_announce].

  [box_relay]: https://www.box.com/collaboration/relay-workflow

  [box_relay_announce]: https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/introducing-the-box-relay-workflow-api-f6eed1457711
</Update>

<Update label="2018-07-11">
  ## Historical Platform Activity CSV report

  A new report has been made available via the website. Documentation is available
  in the Box Admin Console that displays an enterprise's historical utilization of
  platform resources. This report displays an enterprise's Monthly Active Users,
  API calls, and bandwidth consumption by application by month for
  January 1, 2017 to March 31, 2018. More information can be found
  [here][platform_activity_csv].

  [platform_activity_csv]: https://community.box.com/t5/How-to-Guides-for-Admins/Running-the-Platform-Activity-Report/ta-p/58620
</Update>

<Update label="2018-07-06">
  ## Java SDK v2.21.0 released

  1. `Sharedlink` password ([#623](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/623))
  2. Correct link ([#626](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/626))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-06-28">
  ## Java SDK v2.20.2 released

  1. Case Insensitivity for Response Headers ([#620](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/620))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-06-25">
  ## Update to the Box CLI

  We have released updates to the [Box CLI](/guides/cli/quick-start). This
  version includes the following updates:

  * **[New Multizones commands][cli_update_multizones]**: Adds support for
    [Box Multizones][cli_update_multizones_announce] for data residency.
  * **[Fix for user CSV operations][cli_update_csv_operations]**: Fixes a bug that
    prevented users using Open With Element: The Open With element has been moved
    from saving users data beta to CSV files.

  - **[Ability to set `can_non_owners_invite` flag on folder updates][cli_update_folder_update_flag]**:
    Allows setting whether non-owners can invite other users to collaborate on the
    folder.

  * **[New CLI configuration dump command][cli_update_config_dump]**: Adds the
    ability to dump the Box configuration file as a single string, optionally with
    escaped quotes, in order to copy the value to general availability. Open With
    delivers an environment variable or configuration property (for example, in AWS
    individual button or Azure).

  [cli_update_multizones]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/91

  [cli_update_multizones_announce]: https://blog.box.com/blog/multizones-storage-data-residency-compliance/

  [cli_update_csv_operations]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/82

  [cli_update_folder_update_flag]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/92

  [cli_update_config_dump]: https://github.com/box/boxcli/pull/83
</Update>

<Update label="2018-06-18">
  ## Box Android SDK v4.2.0 released

  This version is to provide support for 16+ devices once TLS 1.0 is deprecated.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-06-14">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.9.2 released

  * Added support for setting flag allowing non owners of a folder to invite collaborators.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.2)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.2)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-06-07">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.9.1 released

  Fixed bug where Xamarin applications would run out of connections.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.1)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.1)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-06-04">
  ## Java SDK v2.20.1 released

  1. Handle JSON parse error in response exception ([#615](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/615))
  2. Fix return object for `uploadNewVersion()` ([#614](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/614))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-05-24">
  ## Java SDK v2.20.0 released

  * multi select metadata field ([#610](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/610))
  * Fix check for duplicate As-User headers ([#612](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/612))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-05-10">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.9.0 released

  * Added support for Storage Policies

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.9.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.9.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-05-10">
  ## Java SDK v2.19.0 released

  1. Multizones ([#598](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/598))
  2. Add `getLogin()` method on `BoxCollaborator.Info` ([#602](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/602))
  3. Add support for `multiSelect` fields in metadata ([#597](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/597))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-30">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.8.0 released

  * Fixed an issue where users could not create `BoxClient` on `Xamarin`
  * Added File property to `BoxLock` objects in events
  * Added `MetadataManager.DeleteMetadataTemplate(string scope, string template)` for deleting a Metadata template
  * Made API URLs modifiable in `BoxConfig`
  * Improved API response error objects/messages

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.8.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.8.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.8.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.8.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-30">
  ## Java SDK v2.18.0 released

  1. Error object ([#588](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/588))
  2. Quick fix for NPE on `request.toString()` in interceptor ([#595](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/595))
  3. Add support for fetching representation content ([#583](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/583))
  4. fixed `BoxConfig` constructor method where `privateKeyPassword` was not being set ([#593](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/593))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-18">
  ## Platform Activity CSV report

  A report has been made available in the Box Admin Console that displays an
  enterprise's utilization of platform resources. The first version of this
  report displays integration into the total number of API calls to the Box
  existing Content API by day effective April 1st, 2018. Future iterations of
  this report will display additional resource consumption (Monthly Active Users,
  bandwidth, and storage) by service and will also include historical data. For
  more information, please see the \[Running Reports article in Box
  Community]\[community].
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-11">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.7.0 released

  1. Added support for assigning a retention policy to a metadata template
  2. Added `CONTENT_ACCESS` event type to enum

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.7.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.7.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.7.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.7.0)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-11">
  ## Metadata-driven retention policies

  We have introduced new functionality in the
  [Retention Policy Object](/reference/resources/retention-policy/)
  API Explorer element to support metadata-driven retention policies, where
  retention policies can be applied to individual files based on custom metadata.
  This also enables customers to configure retention policies at the launch file
  level in addition to at the global and folder levels. In addition to bringing
  these new, expanded Box Governance capabilities to Box Admins via the Box Admin
  Console, we’re also making these capabilities available via the
  [Retention Policy](/reference/resources/retention-policy/) and
  [Retention Assignment](/reference/resources/retention-policy-assignment/) APIs
  and in Box's Java, Node, and .NET [SDKs](/guides/tooling/sdks).
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-11">
  ## Box CLI v1.2.0 released

  * Created bulk actions for the following commands:
  * users
    * update
  * groups
    * create
    * update
    * delete
  * group memberships
    * create
    * update
    * delete
  * collaborations
    * add
    * update
    * delete
  * Added filtering by event type to `box events get` and `box events poll`
  * Added a command for deleting metadata templates from files and folders.
  * Bumped underlying `box-windows-sdk` to `v3.6.0`
  * Fixed a bug hindering creating float types for metadata on files and folders.
  * Fixed a bug that did not assign the `User-Agent` HTTP header correctly.
  * Fixed a bug that wasn't reporting all errors to `stderr`.
  * Fixed a bug with bulk creation of metadata templates.
  * Fixed a bug giving duplicate commands on group `membership` command.
  * Fixed a bug with creating the wrong object for `tracking_codes` on users.
  * Fixed a bug requiring an ID in CSV files on bulk creation of users.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-04-10">
  ## Java SDK v2.17.0 released

  1. Add Metadata-driven Retention Policies support ([#535](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/535))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-29">
  ## multiSelect field type added to metadata templates

  We have introduced a new attribute type to
  [Metadata Templates](/reference/resources/metadata-template/) called
  `multiSelect`, which translates to multiple selection. This new attribute type
  allows for a checkbox style multiple selection of values when composing
  template instances on files content with Adobe Sign, G Suite, or folders.

  The addition of this field introduces changes to the
  [Metadata Object](/reference/resources/metadata-template/) (template instance)
  since enabled `multiSelect` options are represented using an array of string
  values, where each string in the array corresponds to the key of a `multiSelect`
  option.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-29">
  ## Java SDK v2.16.1 released

  1. Add `CONTENT_ACCESS` event type.  ([#581](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/581))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-28">
  ## Update to Box Annotations

  The annotations update announced on March 5, 2018 has been re-enabled.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-27">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.6.0 released

  [Changelog](https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md#360)

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.6.0`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.6.0)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-22">
  ## Java SDK v2.16.0 released

  1. Adjust JWT expiration interval ([#572](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/572))
  2. Allow setting custom headers on API connection ([#562](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/562))
  3. Fix JWT retry timestamp parsing ([#575](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/575))
  4. Add support for User Tracking Codes ([#487](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/487))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-21">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.5.2 released

  Fix .NET Core package

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.5.2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.5.2)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.5.2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.5.2)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-15">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.5.1 released

  * Switched to exponential backoff when the SDK receives a rate limit or server error response.
  * Force support for TLS `v1.1` or higher when available to improve the security of connections to the Box API.
  * Perform modified retry on JWT auth for when the local clock and the Box Server clock are not aligned as well as if the JWT ID has already been consumed.
  * Made `name` parameter optional on `RestoreTrashedAsync()`.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.5.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.5.1)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.5.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.5.1)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-13">
  ## Update to Box Annotations

  Due to performance issues reported by some users, the update has been rolled
  back to prevent critical business applications from getting impacted. Drawing
  Annotations and Point Annotations mode features have now been turned off. We do
  not have an ETA for performance fixes or when these features will be
  re-enabled. We sincerely apologize for the inconvenience.

  Users who used the Drawing Annotations capability while it was available will
  still be able to access their annotations once the feature Edit. Documentation
  is re-enabled. Until then, the said annotations will be stored in our
  application data store but won’t be exposed via the viewers.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-12">
  ## Java SDK v2.15.0 released

  1. Allow retrieving Collaboration fields ([#570](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/570))
  2. Implement Get Metadata Template by ID ([#568](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/568))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-05">
  ## Update to Box Annotations

  We will be introducing two enhancements to the annotations features available
  via the Box API that your customer uses in their custom application. The
  updates are as follows:

  * **Point Annotations mode**: We are enhancing point annotations by introducing
    Point Annotations mode. This allows users to expediently add annotations on a
    document without having to re-select the point annotation icon after each
    annotation. [here](/guides/embed/ui-elements).
  * **Drawing Annotations via Expiring Embed**: We launched Drawing Annotations
    in November of 2017. This provided end users the ability to free-form draw on
    their touch-enabled devices using touch or a stylus. We are excited to share
    that we're making Drawing Annotations Full release announcement is available
    via the Expiring Embed. Users using annotations via the Get Embed Link API will
    now have a whole new way to express themselves via Box Preview.
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-01">
  ## Java SDK v2.14.1 released

  1. Add randomization to exponential backoff ([#565](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/565))
  2. Force TLS version 1.1 or greater when supported ([#548](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/548))
  3. Delay successive API calls by `EventStream` ([#564](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/564))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-03-29">
  ## Breaking change to Metadata APIs

  On March 29, 2018, we will introduce a new data type (array of strings) in the
  response body of the Metadata API endpoints. We are making this change because
  we are adding a new field type to metadata templates in Box called `multiSelect`.
  This new field type represents a checkbox type multiple selection of values
  when creating template instances on files or folders. The selected options for
  this field type are stored in an array of strings, where each string in the
  array corresponds to the key of the chosen `multiSelect` option.

  An example metadata template JSON response body is shown below. The value for
  the key `audience1` shows an example of the new data type (array of strings) that
  we are introducing in this change.

  ```js theme={null}
  {
    "audience1": ["internal", "internalEng"],
    "documentType": "Q1 plans",
    "competitiveDocument": "no",
    "status": "active",
    "author": "Jones",
    "currentState": "proposal",
    "$type": "marketingCollateral-d086c908-2498-4d3e-8a1f-01e82bfc2abe",
    "$parent": "file_5010739061",
    "$id": "2094c584-68e1-475c-a581-534a4609594e",
    "$version": 0,
    "$typeVersion": 0,
    "$template": "marketingCollateral",
    "$scope": "enterprise_12345"
  }
  ```
</Update>

<Update label="2018-02-15">
  ## Java SDK v2.14.0 released

  ## New Features, Enhancements, and Bug Fixes

  1. fixes missing `can_view_path` property on collaboration object ([#560](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/560))
  2. Add missing methods and documentation ([#559](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/559))
  3. Add support for setting tags on items ([#554](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/554))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-02-08">
  ## Java SDK v2.13.0 released

  * Handle metadata values better ([#553](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/553))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-02-01">
  ## Java SDK v2.12.0 released

  1. Fix collaboration notify parameter ([#545](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/545))
  2. Add OAuth 2.0 token creation event type ([#533](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/533))
  3. Implement invite user to enterprise ([#504](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/504))
  4. Switch to `X-Box-UA` header for analytics ([#536](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/536))
  5. Reduce Large File Upload memory usage ([#543](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/543))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-01-31">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.4.2 released

  * Updated Box SDK Version in `NuSpec` file to fix dependency issues for `Box V2` and `Box V2.Core`.

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.4.2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.4.2)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.4.2`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.4.2)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-01-25">
  ## Java SDK v2.11.0 released

  1. Fix chunked upload for files > 2GB ([#531](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/531))
  2. Add updated file version upload endpoint and deprecate old method ([#524](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/524))
  3. Perform modified retry on JWT auth to avoid common JWT errors
</Update>

<Update label="2018-01-12">
  ## Java SDK v2.10.0 released

  * Add optional `is_confirmed` parameter for adding user email alias ([#499](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/499))
  * Add support for token revocation ([#510](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/510))
  * Metadata template delete ([#512](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/512))
</Update>

<Update label="2018-01-10">
  ## Windows .NET SDK v3.4.1 released

  * Added support for [Allowed Collaboration Domains](https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/collaboration-allowlist-entry/)
  * Added Event Type enum
  * Fixed deserialization issue with `BoxRepresentationStatus`

  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.4.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2/3.4.1)
  [`nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.4.1`](https://www.nuget.org/packages/Box.V2.Core/3.4.1)
</Update>

<Update label="2018-01-04">
  ## Java SDK v2.9.0 released

  1. Search `readme` update ([#506](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/506))
  2. Add option to pass file `SHA-1` hash for upload integrity ([#502](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/502))
  3. Events log limit ([#507](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/507))
  4. Terms of Service ([#484](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/484))
  5. Change `wiremock` port ([#505](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/505))
  6. Delete redundant `response.disconnect()` from `moveFolderToUser()` ([#485](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/485))
  7. Events `readme` patch ([#503](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/503))
  8. Add missing webhook triggers to enum ([#497](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/497))
  9. Fix `MetadataTemplate.updateMetadataTemplate()` type error ([#498](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/498))
  10. Add missing event types to enum ([#500](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/500))
  11. Add `modified_at` timestamp to `BoxComment.Info`([#501](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/501))
  12. Collaboration whitelists ([#492](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/492))
  13. Trash empty body patch ([#495](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/495))
  14. Adding support for indefinite Box file locking by allowing null expiration ([#494](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/494))
  15. Additional test in response for Batch API ([#474](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/474))
  16. Fixing `BoxDeveloperEditionAPIConnection - decryptPrivateKey() - PEMParser returns PrivateKeyInfo already - Invalid cast` [#470](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/470) ([#471](https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/pull/471))
</Update>


# Quick starts
Source: https://developer.box.com/get-started

Find our quick start guides for Box CLI, Postman, SDKs, and more.

## Overview

Welcome to the Box quick starts! Here you'll find step-by-step guides to help you get started
with various Box tools and integrations, including Box AI, the Box CLI, and Postman.

## Files and folders

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Use three ways to upload content to Box" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/3-ways-to-upload-content-to-box-using-python-5c41d015faf9" icon="cloud-arrow-up" />

  <Card title="Recursively upload content to a folder in Box" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/how-to-recursively-upload-a-folder-to-box-using-python-446dd5ec6305" icon="folder-open" />

  <Card title="Create file requests with the Box Python SDK" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/box-python-next-gen-sdk-file-requests-fb4aaf17f1ef" icon="inbox" />

  <Card title="Download zip archives with the Box API" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/download-zip-archives-with-the-box-api-c3d5bb80df55" icon="download" />

  <Card title="Restructure the Box folder tree with Python" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/restructuring-the-box-folder-tree-with-python-31aeb7e051da" icon="network-wired" />

  <Card title="Share folders in bulk with the Box CLI" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/sharing-100k-folders-with-the-box-platform-a74f7daa255a" icon="share-nodes" />
</CardGroup>

## Metadata

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Learn how to work with Box Metadata" href="/guides/metadata/quick-start" icon="tag" />

  <Card title="Search content in Box using the search API" href="/guides/search/quick-start/" icon="magnifying-glass" />

  <Card title="Automate metadata management using Box Cascade Policies" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/automating-metadata-management-using-box-cascade-policies-5efcfc39e0d2" icon="list-check" />
</CardGroup>

## Box AI

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Extract structured metadata from files using Box AI and Python" href="/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract" icon="brain" />

  <Card title="Extract metadata from documents using natural language prompts with Box AI and Python" href="guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract-freeform" icon="message" />

  <Card title="Extract complex metadata using the Box AI Enhanced Extract Agent and Python" href="guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-extract-enhanced" icon="robot" />

  <Card title="Summarize content with Box AI" href="/guides/box-ai/quick-start/box-ai-summarize" icon="file-lines" />

  <Card title="Override AI model configuration with Box AI API" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/tutorial-box-ai-platform-api-ai-agent-override-options-6675ccfcfb35" icon="wrench" />

  <Card title="Create and manage AI agents with Box AI Studio API" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/box-ai-studio-api-create-and-manage-ai-agents-a43895610e19" icon="users" />
</CardGroup>

## Custom portals and integrations

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Discover common patterns for integrating Box" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/lets-talk-about-integrating-box-6258891d95c4" icon="puzzle" />

  <Card title="Build custom portals with Box UI Elements" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/build-a-content-portal-using-box-ui-elements-react-tailwind-css-vercel-part-1-f1c509621ceb" icon="globe" />

  <Card title="Embed Box Hubs in custom portals" href="https://medium.com/box-developer-blog/how-to-embed-box-hubs-in-custom-portals-293423f5ffb8" icon="link" />
</CardGroup>

## Tooling

<CardGroup>
  <Card title="Perform routine or bulk actions in Box with the Box CLI" href="/guides/cli/quick-start" icon="terminal" />

  <Card title="Make API calls to the Box API with Postman" href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start" icon="square-arrow-up-right" />
</CardGroup>


# Box MCP server
Source: https://developer.box.com/guides/box-mcp/index



Model Context Protocol ([MCP](https://modelcontextprotocol.io/introduction)) is an open protocol that standardizes how applications provide context to LLMs. MCP servers make building advanced integrations simpler and less time consuming.

Box MCP server allows third party AI agents from platforms like Anthropic's Claude, Microsoft Copilot Studio, and Mistral Le Chat to access Box content seamlessly. It extends the agent’s capabilities by allowing it to perform actions related to content stored in Box.

<Frame>
  <img alt="MCP" />
</Frame>

There are two types of Box MCP servers:

* remote Box MCP server which you can create or enable in the Box Admin Console. It is hosted directly in Box.

- self-hosted Box MCP server which you can clone and host on your local machine, as this version in an open source Box Developer community project.

Check the detailed guides on both types of Box MCP servers, as the level of the implemented tools differs. Learn how to enable Box MCP server:

<Columns>
  <CustomCard icon="/static/ai-dev-zone/mcp.svg" title="Remote Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/remote">
    Enable the remote Box MCP server in the Admin Console. It is hosted directly in Box.
  </CustomCard>

  <CustomCard icon="/static/ai-dev-zone/mcp.svg" title="Self-hosted Box MCP server" href="/guides/box-mcp/self-hosted">
    An open source Box Developer community project. You can clone this Box MCP Sever and host it on your local machine.
  </CustomCard>
</Columns>

Watch an interview with Box CTO, Ben Kus, and learn how MCP empowers AI agents to work dynamically across platforms, reducing the development effort.

<iframe title="MCP: The API standard that makes AI actionable for enterprises | Box AI Explainer Series EP4 with Ben Kus, Box CTO" />


# Remove watermark from file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-files-id-watermark

box-openapi.json delete /files/{file_id}/watermark
Removes the watermark from a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove watermark from folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-folders-id-watermark

box-openapi.json delete /folders/{folder_id}/watermark
Removes the watermark from a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-web-links-id

box-openapi.json delete /web_links/{web_link_id}
Deletes a web link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Remove webhook
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/delete-webhooks-id

box-openapi.json delete /webhooks/{webhook_id}
Deletes a webhook.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get watermark on file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-files-id-watermark

box-openapi.json get /files/{file_id}/watermark
Retrieve the watermark for a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get watermark for folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-folders-id-watermark

box-openapi.json get /folders/{folder_id}/watermark
Retrieve the watermark for a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-web-links-id

box-openapi.json get /web_links/{web_link_id}
Retrieve information about a web link.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List all webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-webhooks

box-openapi.json get /webhooks
Returns all defined webhooks for the requesting application.

This API only returns webhooks that are applied to files or folders that are owned by the authenticated user. This means that an admin can not see webhooks created by a service account unless the admin has access to those folders, and vice versa.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get webhook
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-webhooks-id

box-openapi.json get /webhooks/{webhook_id}
Retrieves a specific webhook.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# List workflows
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-workflows

box-openapi.json get /workflows
Returns list of workflows that act on a given `folder ID`, and have a flow with a trigger type of `WORKFLOW_MANUAL_START`.

You application must be authorized to use the `Manage Box Relay` application scope within the developer console in to use this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Download zip archive
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-zip-downloads-id-content

box-openapi.json get /zip_downloads/{zip_download_id}/content
Returns the contents of a `zip` archive in binary format. This URL does not require any form of authentication and could be used in a user's browser to download the archive to a user's device.

By default, this URL is only valid for a few seconds from the creation of the request for this archive. Once a download has started it can not be stopped and resumed, instead a new request for a zip archive would need to be created.

The URL of this endpoint should not be considered as fixed. Instead, use the [Create zip download](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-zip-downloads) API to request to create a `zip` archive, and then follow the `download_url` field in the response to this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Get zip download status
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/get-zip-downloads-id-status

box-openapi.json get /zip_downloads/{zip_download_id}/status
Returns the download status of a `zip` archive, allowing an application to inspect the progress of the download as well as the number of items that might have been skipped.

This endpoint can only be accessed once the download has started. Subsequently this endpoint is valid for 12 hours from the start of the download.

The URL of this endpoint should not be considered as fixed. Instead, use the [Create zip download](https://developer.box.com/reference/post-zip-downloads) API to request to create a `zip` archive, and then follow the `status_url` field in the response to this endpoint.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-web-links

box-openapi.json post /web_links
Creates a web link object within a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create webhook
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-webhooks

box-openapi.json post /webhooks
Creates a webhook.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Starts workflow based on request body
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-workflows-id-start

box-openapi.json post /workflows/{workflow_id}/start
Initiates a flow with a trigger type of `WORKFLOW_MANUAL_START`.

You application must be authorized to use the `Manage Box Relay` application scope within the developer console.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Create zip download
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/post-zip-downloads

box-openapi.json post /zip_downloads
Creates a request to download multiple files and folders as a single `zip` archive file. This API does not return the archive but instead performs all the checks to ensure that the user has access to all the items, and then returns a `download_url` and a `status_url` that can be used to download the archive.

The limit for an archive is either the Account's upload limit or 10,000 files, whichever is met first.

**Note**: Downloading a large file can be affected by various factors such as distance, network latency, bandwidth, and congestion, as well as packet loss ratio and current server load. For these reasons we recommend that a maximum ZIP archive total size does not exceed 25GB.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Apply watermark to file
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-files-id-watermark

box-openapi.json put /files/{file_id}/watermark
Applies or update a watermark on a file.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Apply watermark to folder
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-folders-id-watermark

box-openapi.json put /folders/{folder_id}/watermark
Applies or update a watermark on a folder.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-web-links-id

box-openapi.json put /web_links/{web_link_id}
Updates a web link object.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Update webhook
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/put-webhooks-id

box-openapi.json put /webhooks/{webhook_id}
Updates a webhook.

<Note>
  This endpoint is in the version **2024.0**. No changes are required to continue using it. For more details, see **[Box API versioning](/guides/api-calls/api-versioning-strategy)**.

  Learn more about [Box SDK versioning strategy](/guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning/).
</Note>


# Watermark
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/watermark





# Web link
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/web-link





# Web link (Base)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/web-link--base





# Web link (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/web-link--mini





# Webhook
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/webhook





# Webhook (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/webhook--mini





# Webhooks
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/webhooks





# Workflow
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/workflow





# Workflow (Mini)
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/workflow--mini





# Workflows
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/workflows





# Zip download
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/zip-download





# Zip download status
Source: https://developer.box.com/reference/resources/zip-download-status





# Box SDKs & tools
Source: https://developer.box.com/sdks-and-tools

The following SDKs and tools are developed and supported by Box

## SDKs

Here you will find a list of SDKs
you can use to build your application.

<Note>
  The tables below list SDKs along with additional information
  telling you if the project is maintained and has API
  parity.

  **Status:** Describes the current project status. To learn more about statuses visit [Box Open Source website][badges].
  Active projects are actively developed by Box. They receive the latest security updates and new features. For
  support with these projects please visit GitHub or [our Platform support forum][forum].

  **API Parity**: Projects with full API parity are actively updated with all
  platform functionality as this becomes available on the Box Platform. Projects
  with partial API parity lack some functionality while we work on bringing
  these projects to full parity.
</Note>

### SDKs

The table lists Box SDKs that you can use when building your
applications. For latest API support and features, use the next
generation SDKs.

| Platform                          | Status     | API Parity |
| --------------------------------- | ---------- | ---------- |
| [Java SDK][javasdk]               | Active     | Full       |
| [iOS Content SDK][iossdk]         | Active     | Full       |
| [.NET SDK][dotnetsdk]             | Active     | Full       |
| [Python SDK][pythonsdk]           | Active     | Full       |
| [Node SDK][nodesdk]               | Active     | Full       |
| [Android Content SDK][androidsdk] | Deprecated | Partial    |

<Warning>
  As of May 31, 2023 Android SDK is no
  longer supported. You can still
  use your existing Android SDK applications
  with no impact, but you won't receive new features,
  updates, or bug fixes.

  If you would like to continue getting the
  latest and greatest Android features, we
  recommend using Java SDK to build apps on Android.
  Refer to [this][android-docs] documentation for more details.
</Warning>

### Next Generation SDKs

<Warning>
  As of September 17, 2025 Box Next Generation SDKs are no longer supported as separate artifacts.

  Don’t worry, your existing code will continue to work without changes. You can still use your applications based on Box Next Generation SDKs with no impact, but you won't receive new features, updates, or bug fixes.

  **All future development, including new features and updates, will be delivered through the Box core SDKs. The standalone generated artifact was introduced in the version `v10` of the Box core SDKs.**

  For more details, see our [SDK versioning strategy document][versioning].
</Warning>

Here's what you can expect from `v10`:

* **Full API support**: New Box SDKs empower developers with complete coverage of the Box API ecosystem. You can access all the latest features and functionalities offered by Box and build feature-rich applications.
* **Rapid API updates**: The new auto-generation development approach allows you to add Box APIs to SDKs at a much faster pace (in a matter of days). This means you can leverage the most up-to-date features in your applications without delay.
* **Embedded documentation**: All objects and parameters are documented directly in the source code of the SDK so all the necessary information is stored in one place.
* **Enhanced convenience methods**: The newly introduced convenience methods cover various aspects such as authentication, chunk uploads, exponential back-offs, automatic retries, type checkers that help to ensure that you’re using variables correctly, and much more.

## Box CLI

Box CLI is a user-friendly command line tool that
allows both technical and non-technical users to
leverage Box API to perform routine or bulk actions.

| Platform   | Status | API Parity |
| ---------- | ------ | ---------- |
| [CLI][cli] | Active | Full       |

## Postman Collection

[Postman][postman] is a tool that lets you build and test HTTP requests in an
easy-to-use interface without configuring a full development environment. The
**Box Postman Collection** is a set of preconfigured requests that make it
possible to get started with the Box API without having to manually configure
the requests.

The simplest way to get started with Postman is with our Postman Quick Start guide.

<Card title="Get Started with the Box Postman Collection" href="/guides/tooling/postman/quick-start" />

## Salesforce Developer Toolkit

The Box for Salesforce Developer Toolkit allows customers to programmatically
customize the behavior of the Box for Salesforce integration. The Toolkit
consists of several global APEX methods that can be used to trigger and extend
the default behavior. The global methods can update the internal Salesforce
record to Box folder mapping and handle permission management.

<Note>
  This functionality is part of the latest Box for
  [Salesforce package][sf-package].
</Note>

<Warning>
  **What the Toolkit does NOT provide**

  The Toolkit is not a full-featured APEX wrapper for the BOX Content API. If
  this is what you are looking for, have a look at the
  [Box SDK for Salesforce][sf-sdk].
</Warning>

## Box CLI

Box CLI is a user-friendly command line tool that
allows both technical and non-technical users to
leverage Box API to perform routine or bulk actions.

| Platform   | Maintained? | API Parity |
| ---------- | ----------- | ---------- |
| [CLI][cli] | Yes         | Full       |

## Official UI Libraries

Extend your application with pre-built UI components to browse, share, and
preview files on Box.

|                                                                   |                                                                             |                                                                                      |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Browse                                                            | Share                                                                       | Preview                                                                              |
| ![Browse][browseimg]                                              | ![Share][shareimg]                                                          | ![Preview][previewimg]                                                               |
| Navigate and manipulate your files on Box using our pre-built UI. | Share files with our pre-built UI elements for file & folder collaboration. | Review over 120 files types, from PDFs to HD videos, with a rich preview experience. |

| Platform   |                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| iOS        | [Browse SDK][iosbrowsesdk], [Share SDK][iossharesdk], [Preview SDK][iospreviewsdk]                                                                                                    |
| Android    | [Browse SDK](https://github.com/box/box-android-browse-sdk), [Share SDK](https://github.com/box/box-android-share-sdk), [Preview SDK](https://github.com/box/box-android-preview-sdk) |
| Javascript | [Box UI Elements](/guides/embed/ui-elements)                                                                                                                                          |

## Unofficial & Community Tools

The following tools are developed by Box and maintained by Box and its community
members. These tools do not receive regular product updates or security updates.

| Platform                        | Maintained?                           | API Parity |
| ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | ---------- |
| [Salesforce SDK][salesforcesdk] | Limited, by Box and community members | Partial    |
| [Ruby SDK][rubysdk]             | Limited, by Box and community members | Partial    |
| [Client-side JS SDK][jssdk]     | Limited, by Box and community members | Partial    |

<Note>
  **Maintained:** Projects with limited maintenance are updated by Box in
  collaboration with the community. They receive irregular security updates. If
  you are a Box customer on a premium support plan, please contact customer
  services for any urgent feature requests for these tools. For other support
  queries with these projects please visit GitHub or [our Platform support forum][forum].

  **API Parity:**  Projects with limited API parity can lack some functionality
  as new features are not automatically rolled out to these projects as they
  become available for the Box Platform. If you are a Box customer on a premium
  support plan, please contact customer services for any urgent feature requests
  for these tools.
</Note>

[javasdk]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk

[dotnetsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-windows-sdk-v2

[pythonsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-python-sdk

[nodesdk]: https://github.com/box/box-node-sdk

[iossdk]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-sdk

[androidsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-android-sdk

[android-docs]: https://github.com/box/box-java-sdk/blob/legacy/doc/android.md

[cli]: https://github.com/box/boxcli

[forum]: https://community.box.com/

[browseimg]: /static/sdks/browse.webp

[shareimg]: /static/sdks/share.webp

[previewimg]: /static/sdks/preview.webp

[iosbrowsesdk]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-browse-sdk

[iossharesdk]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-share-sdk

[iospreviewsdk]: https://github.com/box/box-ios-preview-sdk

[salesforcesdk]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk

[rubysdk]: https://github.com/cburnette/boxr

[jssdk]: https://github.com/allenmichael/box-javascript-sdk

[postman]: https://postman.com

[badges]: https://opensource.box.com/badges/

[versioning]: /guides/tooling/sdks/sdk-versioning

[sf-package]: https://support.box.com/hc/en-us/articles/360044195713-Installing-and-Configuring-Box-For-Salesforce

[sf-sdk]: https://github.com/box/box-salesforce-sdk